SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual * 01/2012 SINAMICS s s Preface SINAMICS Parameters Function diagrams SINAMICS G130/G150 Faults and alarms Appendix List Manual List of abbreviations List of references Index Valid for Drive Firmware version SINAMICS 4.5 A5E03263479A 01/2012 1 2 3 A B C D Safety notices This manual contains information that you should observe to ensure your own personal safety and prevent material damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle; notices that relate to material damage only have no warning triangle. The notices shown below are graded according to the level of hazard (from most to least hazardous): Danger Indicates that death or serious injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning Indicates that death or serious injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution With a warning triangle, indicates that minor injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution Without a warning triangle, indicates that material damage may result if proper precautions are not taken. Notice Indicates that an undesirable result or state may occur if the corresponding instructions are not observed. If more than one level of danger is simultaneously applicable, the warning notice for the highest level is used. A warning notice with a warning triangle indicating possible personal injury may also include a warning relating to material damage. Qualified Personnel The associated device/system may only be installed and operated in conjunction with this documentation. The device/system may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose of the safety notices in this documentation, "qualified personnel" are those authorized to commission, ground, and label equipment, systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures. Proper Use of Siemens Products Please observe the following: Warning Siemens products are only permitted to be used for the applications specified in the catalog and in the associated technical documentation. If third-party products and components are to be used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens. To ensure proper and safe operation of these products, they must be correctly transported, stored, set up, mounted, installed, commissioned, operated, and maintained. The permissible ambient conditions must be met. Information in the associated documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified with (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any other names used in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Copyright Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved Liability Disclaimer The reproduction, transmission, or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written permission. Failure to observe this rule will lead to damage claims. All rights reserved, especially those relating to granting patents or GM registration. We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nevertheless, we cannot assume responsibility for any deviations that may arise. The data in this document is regularly checked and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 4848 90327 NURNBERG GERMANY Siemens Aktiengesellschaft (c) Siemens AG 2012 Subject to change without prior notice. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2) Preface SINAMICS documentation The SINAMICS documentation is organized in the following categories: * General documentation/catalogs * Manufacturer/service documentation More information Information on the following topics is available under the link: * Ordering documentation/overview of documentation * Additional links to download documents * Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information). http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu My Documentation Manager Information on how to produce individual contents for your own machine documentation based on Siemens contents is available under the link: http://www.siemens.com/mdm Training Information about SITRAIN (Siemens Training on products, systems and solutions for automation) is available under the following link: http://www.siemens.com/sitrain FAQs You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product Support: http://support.automation.siemens.com SINAMICS You can find information on SINAMICS at: http://www.siemens.com/sinamics (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Preface-5 Preface Usage phases and their tools/documents (as an example) Table Preface-1Usage phases and the available tools/documents Usage phase Orientation Planning/configuration Tools/documents SINAMICS G Sales Documentation SIZER configuration tool Configuration Manuals, Motors Decision making / ordering SINAMICS G Catalogs Installation/assembly * SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions * SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions Commissioning * STARTER commissioning tool * SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions * SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions Usage/operation * SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions * SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions Maintenance/servicing * SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions * SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions Target group This documentation is aimed at machine manufacturers, commissioning engineers, and service personnel who use SINAMICS. Benefits This documentation contains the comprehensive information about parameters, function diagrams and faults and alarms required to commission and service the system. This manual should be used in addition to the other manuals and tools provided for the product. Preface-6 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Preface Standard scope The scope of the functionality described in this document can differ from the scope of the functionality of the drive system that is actually supplied. * Other functions not described in this documentation might be able to be executed in the drive system. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply functions of this kind when new equipment is delivered or during servicing. * The documentation can also contain descriptions of functions that are not available in a particular product version of the drive system. The functionalities of the supplied drive system should only be taken from the ordering documentation. * Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer must be documented by the machine manufacturer. For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed information on all of the product types. This documentation cannot take into consideration every conceivable type of installation, operation and service/maintenance. Search tools The following guides are provided to help you locate information in this manual: 1. Table of contents - General table of contents for the complete manual (after the preface). - Table of contents for function diagrams (Section 2.1). 2. List of abbreviations 3. List of references 4. Index Technical Support Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Preface-7 Preface Preface-8 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Table of contents 1 2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 Overview of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of parameter list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number ranges of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 1-12 1-28 1.2 List of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 Parameters for data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for command data sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for drive data sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for encoder data sets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for motor data sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for power unit data sets (PDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-951 1-951 1-953 1-961 1-962 1-965 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 Parameters for write protection and know-how protection . . . . . . . . . . Parameters with "WRITE_NO_LOCK" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters with "KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters with "KHP_ACTIVE_READ" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-967 1-967 1-969 1-969 Function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-971 2.1 Table of contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-973 2.2 Explanations on the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-980 2.3 Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-985 2.4 CU320-2 input/output terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-999 2.5 CU_LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1006 2.6 PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1008 2.7 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1052 2.8 Sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1065 2.9 Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1068 2.10 Safety Integrated Basic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1073 2.11 Safety Integrated Extended Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1080 2.12 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1096 2.13 Encoder evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1105 2.14 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1108 2.15 Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1131 2.16 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1137 2.17 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1143 2.18 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1151 2.19 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1157 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Contents-9 Table of contents 2.20 Basic Infeed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1163 2.21 Terminal Board 30 (TB30). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1170 2.22 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1175 2.23 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1182 2.24 Terminal Module 150 (TM150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1192 2.25 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1196 2.26 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1199 Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1201 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 Overview of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information on faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of the list of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number ranges of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1202 3-1202 3-1207 3-1210 3.2 List of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1212 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1657 A.1 ASCII table (excerpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1658 B List of abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1659 C List of references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1669 D Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1675 3 A Contents-10 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1 Parameters Contents 1.1 Overview of parameters 1-12 1.2 List of parameters 1-31 1.3 Parameters for data sets 1-951 1.4 Parameters for write protection and know-how protection 1-967 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-11 Parameters Overview of parameters 1.1 Overview of parameters 1.1.1 Explanation of parameter list Basic structure of parameter descriptions The data in the following example has been chosen at random. The table below contains all the information that can be included in a parameter description. Some of the information is optional. The parameter list (See Section 1.2) is structured as follows: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pxxxx[0...n] BICO: Long parameter name / short parameter name Drive object (function module) Can be changed: C1(x), C2(x), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32/Integer16 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Function diagram: 2080 P group: Closed-loop control Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Max 10.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Description: Text Values: 0: 1: 2: etc. Recommendation: Text Index: [0] = Name and meaning of index 0 [1] = Name and meaning of index 1 [2] = Name and meaning of index 2 etc. Bit array: Bit 00 01 02 Dependency: Text See also: pxxxx, rxxxx See also: Fxxxxx, Axxxxx Danger: Warning: Name and meaning of value 0 Name and meaning of value 1 Name and meaning of value 2 Signal name Name and meaning of bit 0 Name and meaning of bit 1 Name and meaning of bit 2 etc. Caution: Caution: Notice: Note: Information which might be useful. 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP 8010 8012 Safety notices with a warning triangle Safety notices without a warning triangle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - End of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Overview of parameters pxxxx[0...n] Parameter number The parameter number is made up of a "p" or "r", followed by the parameter number and the index (optional). Examples of representation in the parameter list: * p... Adjustable parameter (read and write parameter) * r... Display parameter (read-only) * p0918 Adjustable parameter 918 * p0099[0...3] Adjustable parameter 99, indices 0 to 3 * p1001[0...n] Adjustable parameter 1001, indices 0 to n (n = configurable) * r0944 Display parameter 944 Other examples of the notation used in the documentation: * p1070[1] Adjustable parameter 1070, index 1 * p2098[1].3 Adjustable parameter 2098, index 1 bit 3 * r0945[2](3) Display parameter 945, index 2 of drive object 3 * p0795.4 Adjustable parameter 795, bit 4 * r2129.0...15 Display parameter 2129 with bit array (maximum 16 bits) The following applies to adjustable parameters: The parameter value as delivered is specified under "Factory setting" with the relevant unit in square brackets. The value can be adjusted within the range defined by "Min" and "Max". The term "linked parameterization" is used in cases where changes to adjustable parameters affect the settings of other parameters. Linked parameterization can occur, for example, as a result of the following actions or parameters: * Execute macros p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500 * Set PROFIBUS telegram (BICO interconnections) p0922 * Set component lists p0230, p0300, p0301, p0400 * Automatic calculation and pre-assignment p0112, p0340, p0578, p3900 * Restore factory settings p0970 The following applies to display parameters: The fields "Min", "Max" and "Factory setting" are specified with a dash "-" and the relevant unit in square brackets. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-13 Parameters Overview of parameters Note: The parameter list can contain parameters that are not visible in the expert lists of the respective commissioning software (e.g. parameters for trace functions). BICO: Long parameter name / short parameter name The following abbreviations can appear in front of the parameter name: * BI: Binector Input This parameter is used for selecting the source of a digital signal. * BO: Binector Output This parameter is available as a digital signal for interconnection with other parameters. * CI: Connector Input This parameter is used for selecting the source of an "analog" signal. * CO: Connector Output This parameter is available as an "analog" signal for interconnection with other parameters. * CO/BO: Connector/Binector Output This parameter is available as an "analog" and digital signal for interconnection with other parameters. Note: A connector input (CI) cannot be just interconnected with any connector output (CO, signal source). When interconnecting a connector input using the commissioning software, only the corresponding possible signal sources are listed. 1-14 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Overview of parameters Drive object (function module) A drive object (DO) is an independent, "self-contained" functional unit that has its own parameters and, in some cases, faults and alarms. When carrying out commissioning using the commissioning software, you can select/deselect additional functions and their parameters by activating/deactivating function modules accordingly. The parameter list specifies the associated drive object and function module for each individual parameter. Examples: * p1070 CI: Main setpoint VECTOR The parameter is only available with the VECTOR drive object, regardless of which function modules have been activated. * p1055 BI: Jog bit 0 VECTOR The parameter is available with the VECTOR drive object, regardless of which function modules have been activated (i.e. it is available with every activated function module belonging to the drive object). A parameter can belong to one, several or all drive objects. The following information relating to "Drive object" and "Function module" can be displayed under the parameter number: Table 1-1 Data in the "Drive object (function module)" field Drive object (function module) All objects B_INF Type 30 Meaning All drive objects have this parameter. Basic Infeed Control Unregulated line infeed unit (without feedback) for rectifying the line voltage of the DC link B_INF (parallel) - Basic Infeed with "Parallel connection" function module (r0108.15). B_INF (brk mod ext) - Basic Infeed with "Braking Module External" function module (r0108.26). B_INF (cooling unit) - Basic Infeed with "Cooling unit" function module (r0108.28) B_INF (PROFINET) - Basic Infeed with "PROFINET" function module (r0108.31). CU_G130_DP CU_G130_DP (CAN) Control Unit SINAMICS G130 with PROFIBUS interface. - CU_G130_DP (COMM BOARD) CU_G130_DP (PROFINET) CU_G130_PN Control Unit SINAMICS G130 with PROFIBUS interface and function module "CAN" (p0108.29). Control Unit SINAMICS G130 with PROFIBUS interface and "COMM board" function module (p0108.30 ). - Control Unit SINAMICS G130 with PROFIBUS interface and function module "PROFINET" (p0108.31). Control Unit SINAMICS G130 with PROFINET interface. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-15 Parameters Overview of parameters Table 1-1 Data in the "Drive object (function module)" field, continued Drive object (function module) CU_G130_PN (CAN) Type Meaning - Control Unit SINAMICS G130 with PROFINET interface and function module "CAN" (p0108.29). CU_G130_PN (COMM BOARD) Control Unit SINAMICS G130 with PROFINET interface and "COMM board" function module (p0108.30 ). CU_G130_PN (PROFINET) Control Unit SINAMICS G130 with PROFINET interface and function module "PROFINET" (p0108.31). CU_G150_DP Control Unit SINAMICS G150 with PROFIBUS interface. CU_G150_DP (CAN) - CU_G150_DP (COMM BOARD) CU_G150_DP (PROFINET) Control Unit SINAMICS G150 with PROFIBUS interface and "COMM board" function module (p0108.30 ). - CU_G150_PN CU_G150_PN (CAN) Control Unit SINAMICS G150 with PROFIBUS interface and function module "CAN" (p0108.29). Control Unit SINAMICS G150 with PROFIBUS interface and function module "PROFINET" (p0108.31). Control Unit SINAMICS G150 with PROFINET interface. - Control Unit SINAMICS G150 with PROFINET interface and function module "CAN" (p0108.29). CU_G150_PN (COMM BOARD) Control Unit SINAMICS G150 with PROFINET interface and "COMM board" function module (p0108.30 ). CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Control Unit SINAMICS G150 with PROFINET interface and function module "PROFINET" (p0108.31). ENC 300 Object for a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. HUB 150 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. TB30 100 Terminal Board 30. TM150 208 Terminal Module 150. TM31 200 Terminal Module 31. TM54F_MA 205 Terminal Module 54F Master. TM54F_SL 206 Terminal Module 54F Slave. VECTOR_G 12 Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150. VECTOR_G (n/M) - Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Speed/torque control" function module (r0108.2). VECTOR_G (Safety red) - Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Safety rotary axis" function module (r0108.13). VECTOR_G (ext. brake) - Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Extended brake control" function module (r0108.14). VECTOR_G (parallel) - Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Parallel connection" function module (r0108.15). VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) - Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Technology controller" function module (r0108.16). VECTOR (ext. mess.) - Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Extended messages/monitoring functions" function module (r0108.17). 1-16 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Overview of parameters Table 1-1 Data in the "Drive object (function module)" field, continued Drive object (function module) Type Meaning VECTOR_G (cooling unit) - Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Cooling unit" function module (r0108.28). VECTOR_G (CAN) - Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "CAN" function module (r0108.29). VECTOR_G (PROFINET) - Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "PROFINET" function module (r0108.31). Note: The drive object type is used to identify the drive objects in the drive system (e.g. r0107, r0975[1]). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-17 Parameters Overview of parameters Can be changed The "-" sign indicates that the parameter can be changed in any object state and that the change will be effective immediately. The information "C1(x), C2(x), T, U" ((x): optional) means that the parameter can be changed only in the specified drive object state and that the change will not take effect until the object switches to another state. One or more states are possible. The following states may be specified: * C1(x) Device commissioning C1: Commissioning 1 Device commissioning is in progress (p0009 >0). Pulses cannot be enabled. The parameter can only be changed when the device commissioning settings (p0009 > 0) are as follows: * C1: Can be changed for all settings p0009 > 0. * C1(x): Can only be changed when the settings are p0009 = x A modified parameter value does not take effect until device commissioning mode is exited with p0009 = 0. * C2(x) Drive object commissioning C2: Commissioning 2 Drive commissioning is in progress (p0009 = 0 and p0010 > 0). Pulses cannot be enabled. The parameter can only be changed when the drive commissioning settings (p0010 > 0) are as follows: * C2: Can be changed for all settings p0010 > 0 * C2(x): Can only be changed when the settings are p0010 = x A modified parameter value does not take effect until drive commissioning mode is exited with p0010 = 0. * U Operation U: Run Pulses are enabled. * T Ready for operation T: Ready to run The pulses are not enabled and the status "C1(x)" or "C2(x)" is not active. Note: Parameter p0009 is CU-specific (available on the Control Unit). Parameter p0010 is drive-specific (available for each drive object). The operating state of individual drive objects is displayed in r0002. 1-18 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Overview of parameters Calculated Specifies whether the parameter is influenced by automatic calculations. The calculation attribute defines which activities influence the parameter. The following attributes apply: * CALC_MOD_ALL - p0340 = 1 - Project download with commissioning software and send from p0340 = 3 * CALC_MOD_CON - p0340 = 1, 3, 4 * CALC_MOD_EQU - p0340 = 1, 2 * CALC_MOD_LIM_REF - p0340 = 1, 3, 5 - p0578 = 1 * CALC_MOD_REG - p0340 = 1, 3 Note: For p3900 > 0, p0340 = 1 is also called automatically. After p1910 = 1, p0340 = 3 is also called automatically. Access level Specifies the access level required to be able to display and change the relevant parameter. The required access level can be set using p0003. The system uses the following access levels: * 1: Standard * 2: Extended * 3: Expert * 4: Service Parameters with this access level are password protected. Note: Parameter p0003 is CU-specific (available on the Control Unit). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-19 Parameters Overview of parameters Data type The information on the data type can consist of the following two items (separated by a slash): * First item Data type of the parameter. * Second item (for binector or connector input only) Data type of the signal source to be interconnected (binector/connector output). Parameters can have the following data types: * I8 Integer8 8-bit integer * I16 Integer16 16-bit integer * I32 Integer32 32-bit integer * U8 Unsigned8 8 bits without sign * U16 Unsigned16 16 bits without sign * U32 Unsigned32 32 bits without sign * Float FloatingPoint32 32-bit floating-point number Depending on the data type of the BICO input parameter (signal sink) and BICO output parameter (signal source), the following combinations are possible when BICO interconnections are established: Table 1-2 Possible combinations of BICO interconnections BICO input parameter CI parameter BICO output parameter Unsigned32/Inte ger16 BI parameter Unsigned32/Inte Unsigned32/Floa Unsigned32/Bina ger32 tingPoint32 ry CO: Unsigned8 x x - - CO: Unsigned16 x x - - CO: Integer16 x x - - CO: Unsigned32 x x - - CO: Integer32 x x - - CO: FloatingPoint32 x x x1 - BO: Unsigned8 - - - x BO: Unsigned16 - - - x Legend: x: BICO interconnection permitted -: BICO interconnection not permitted 1 Exception: BICO input parameters with data type "Unsigned32/FloatingPoint32" can also be interconnected with the following BICO output parameters, although these are not of the "FloatingPoint32" data type: CO: r8850, CO: r8860, CO: r2050, CO: r2060 1-20 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Overview of parameters Table 1-2 Possible combinations of BICO interconnections, continued BICO input parameter CI parameter BICO output parameter Unsigned32/Inte ger16 BI parameter Unsigned32/Inte Unsigned32/Floa Unsigned32/Bina ger32 tingPoint32 ry BO: Integer16 - - - x BO: Unsigned32 - - - x BO: Integer32 - - - x BO: FloatingPoint32 - - - - Legend: x: BICO interconnection permitted -: BICO interconnection not permitted 1 Exception: BICO input parameters with data type "Unsigned32/FloatingPoint32" can also be interconnected with the following BICO output parameters, although these are not of the "FloatingPoint32" data type: CO: r8850, CO: r8860, CO: r2050, CO: r2060 Dynamic index For parameters with a dynamic index [0...n], the following information is specified here: * Data set (if available). * Parameter for the number of indices (n = number - 1). This field can contain the following information: * "CDS, p0170" (Command Data Set, CDS count) Example: p1070[0] main setpoint [command data set 0] p1070[1] main setpoint [command data set 1], etc. * "DDS, p0180" (Drive Data Set, DDS count) * "EDS, p0140" (Encoder Data Set, EDS count) * "MDS, p0130" (Motor Data Set, MDS count) * "PDS, p0120" (Power unit Data Set, PDS count) * "p2615" (traversing blocks count) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-21 Parameters Overview of parameters Function diagram The parameter is included in this function diagram. The structure of the parameter function and its relationship with other parameters is shown in the specified function diagram. Example: Function diagram: 3060.3 3060: Function diagram number 3: Signal path (optional) P group (refers only to access via BOP (Basic Operator Panel)) Specifies the functional group to which the parameter belongs. The required parameter group can be set via p0004. Note: Parameter p0004 is CU-specific (available on the Control Unit). Unit, unit group, and unit selection The standard unit of a parameter is specified in square brackets after the values for "Min", "Max", and "Factory setting". For parameters where the unit can be switched, the specifications for "Unit group" and "Unit selection" determine the group to which this parameter belongs and with which parameter the unit can be switched over. Example: Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505 The parameter belongs to unit group 7_1 and the unit can be switched over using p0505. All the potential unit groups and possible unit selections are listed below. Table 1-3 Unit groups (p0100) Unit group Unit selection for p0100 = 0 1-22 Reference variable at % 1 7_4 Nm lbf ft - 8_4 N lbf - 14_2 W HP - 14_6 kW HP - 2 ft2 25_1 kgm lb - 27_1 kg lb - 28_1 Nm/A lbf ft/A - 29_1 N/Arms lbf/Arms - 30_1 m ft - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Overview of parameters Table 1-4 Unit groups (p0349) Unit group Unit selection for p0349 = 1 Reference variable at % 2 15_1 mH % 1000 p0304 ----------------------------------------------------------------2 3 p0305 p0310 16_1 Ohm % p0304 --------------------------3 p0305 Table 1-5 Unit groups (p0505) Unit group Unit selection for p0505 = 1 2 3 Reference variable at % 4 2_1 Hz % Hz % p2000 2_2 kHz % kHz % p2000 3_1 rpm % rpm % p2000 4_1 m/min % ft/min % p2000 4_2 m/min m/min ft/min ft/min - 5_1 Vrms % Vrms % p2001 5_2 V % V % p2001 5_3 V % V % p2001 6_1 mArms % mArms % p2002 6_2 Arms % Arms % p2002 6_3 mA % mA % p2002 6_4 A % A % p2002 6_5 A % A % p2002 7_1 Nm % lbf ft % p2003 7_2 Nm Nm lbf ft lbf ft - 7_3 Nm % lbf ft % 1.0 8_1 N % lbf % p2003 8_2 N N lbf lbf - 8_3 N % lbf % 1.0 14_1 W % HP % r2004 (drive) 14_3 W % HP % r2004 (infeed) 14_4 W % HP % r2004 (drive) 14_5 kW % HP % r2004 (drive) 14_7 kW % HP % r2004 (infeed) 14_8 kW % HP % r2004 (drive) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-23 Parameters Overview of parameters Table 1-5 Unit groups (p0505), continued Unit group Unit selection for p0505 = 1 2 at % 4 14_9 W W HP HP - 14_10 kW kW HP HP - 14_11 var % var % r2004 14_12 kvar % kvar % r2004 17_1 Nms/rad % lbf ft s/rad % p2000/p2003 18_1 V/A % V/A % p2002/p2001 19_1 A/V % A/V % p2001/p2002 21_1 C C F F - 21_2 K K F F - m/s2 ft/s2 ft/s2 - % p2007 2 22_1 m/s 22_2 m/s2 % ft/s2 23_1 Vrms s/m Vrms s/m Vrms s/ft Vrms s/ft - 24_1 Ns/m Ns/m lbf s/ft lbf s/ft - 24_2 Ns/m % lbf s/ft % p2000/p2003 m/s3 ft/s3 ft/s3 - % 1/s2 % p2007 3 26_1 m/s 39_1 1/s2 Table 1-6 Unit group (p0595) Unit group Unit selection for p0595 = Value 9_1 1-24 3 Reference variable Unit Reference variable at % The values that can be set and the technological units are shown in p0595 (See Section 1.2). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Overview of parameters Parameter values Min Minimum value of the parameter [unit] Max Maximum value of the parameter [unit] Factory setting Value when shipped [unit] In the case of a binector/connector input, the signal source of the default BICO interconnection is specified. A non-indexed connector output is assigned the index [0]. A different value may be displayed for certain parameters (e.g. p1800) during first commissioning. Reason: The setting for these parameters is determined by the operating environment of the Control Unit (e.g. depending on the device type, macro, or power unit). Note: For SINAMICS G130/G150, the macros and their settings are provided in the following documentation: SINAMICS G130/G150 Operating Instructions Not for motor type Specifies for which motor type this parameter has no significance. ASM: Induction motor FEM: Separately excited synchronous motor PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor REL: Reluctance motor / SIEMOSYN motor Scaling Specification of the reference variable with which a signal value is automatically converted for a BICO interconnection. The following reference variables are available: * p2000 ... p2007: Reference speed, reference voltage, etc. * PERCENT: 1.0 = 100 % * 4000H: 4000 hex = 100% (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-25 Parameters Overview of parameters Expert list Specifies whether this parameter is available in the expert list of the specified drive objects in the commissioning software. 1: Parameter is available in the expert list. 0: Parameter is not available in the expert list. Notice: Users assume full responsibility for using parameters marked "Expert list: 0" (parameter does not exist in the expert list). These parameters and their functionalities have not been tested and no further user documentation is available for them (e.g. description of functions). Moreover, no support is provided for these parameters by "Technical Support" (hotline). Description Explanation of the function of a parameter. Values List of the possible values of a parameter. Recommendation Information about recommended settings. Index The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed parameters. The following applies to the values (Min, Max, Factory setting) for indexed adjustable parameters: * Min, Max: The adjustment range and unit apply to all indices. * Factory setting: When all indices have the same factory setting, index 0 is specified with the unit to represent all indices. When the indices have different factory settings, they are all listed individually with the unit. 1-26 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Overview of parameters Bit array For parameters with bit arrays, the following information is provided about each bit: * Bit number and signal name * Meaning with signal states 0 and 1 * Function diagram (optional) The signal is shown on this function diagram. Dependency Conditions that must be fulfilled in conjunction with this parameter. Also includes special effects that can occur between this parameter and others. See also: List of other relevant parameters to be considered. Safety notices Important information that must be observed to avoid the risk of physical injury or material damage. Information that must be observed to avoid any problems. Information that the user may find useful. Danger The description of this safety notice can be found at the beginning of this manual (see Safety notices). Warning The description of this safety notice can be found at the beginning of this manual (see Safety notices). Caution The description of this safety notice can be found at the beginning of this manual (see Safety notices). Caution The description of this safety notice can be found at the beginning of this manual (see Safety notices). Notice The description of this safety notice can be found at the beginning of this manual (see Safety notices). Note Information that the user may find useful. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-27 Parameters Overview of parameters 1.1.2 Number ranges of parameters Note: The following number ranges represent an overview for all of the parameters available for the SINAMICS drive family. The parameters for the product described in this List Manual are described in detail in Section 1.2. Parameters are grouped into the following number ranges: Table 1-7 Number ranges for SINAMICS Range 1-28 Description From To 0000 0099 Display and operation 0100 0199 Commissioning 0200 0299 Power unit 0300 0399 Motor 0400 0499 Encoder 0500 0599 Technology and units, motor-specific data, probes 0600 0699 Thermal monitoring, maximum current, operating hours, motor data, central probe 0700 0799 Control Unit terminals, measuring sockets 0800 0839 CDS, DDS data sets, motor changeover 0840 0879 Sequence control (e.g. signal source for ON/OFF1) 0880 0899 ESR, parking, control and status words 0900 0999 PROFIBUS/PROFIdrive 1000 1199 Setpoint channel (e.g. ramp-function generator) 1200 1299 Functions (e.g. motor holding brake) 1300 1399 V/f control 1400 1799 Control 1800 1899 Gating unit 1900 1999 Power unit and motor identification 2000 2009 Reference values 2010 2099 Communication (fieldbus) 2100 2139 Faults and alarms 2140 2199 Signals and monitoring 2200 2359 Technology controller 2360 2399 Staging, hibernation (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Overview of parameters Table 1-7 Number ranges for SINAMICS, continued Range Description From To 2500 2699 Position control (LR) and basic positioning (EPOS) 2700 2719 Reference values, display 2720 2729 Load gear 2800 2819 Logic operations 2900 2930 Fixed values (e.g. per cent, torque) 3000 3099 Motor identification results 3100 3109 Real time clock (RTC) 3110 3199 Faults and alarms 3200 3299 Signals and monitoring 3400 3659 Infeed control 3660 3699 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), Braking Module internal 3700 3779 Advanced Positioning Control (APC) 3780 3819 Synchronization 3820 3849 Friction characteristic 3850 3899 Functions (e.g. long stator) 3900 3999 Management 4000 4599 Terminal Board, Terminal Module (e.g. TB30, TM31) 4600 4699 Sensor Module 4700 4799 Trace 4800 4849 Function generator 4950 4999 OA application 5000 5169 Spindle diagnostics 5400 5499 Line droop control (e.g. shaft generator) 5500 5599 Dynamic grid support (solar) 5600 5613 PROFIenergy 5900 6999 SINAMICS GM/SM/GL/SL 7000 7499 Parallel connection of power units 7500 7599 SINAMICS SM120 7700 7729 External signals 7770 7789 NVRAM, system parameters 7800 7839 EEPROM read/write parameters 7840 8399 Internal system parameters 8400 8449 Real time clock (RTC) 8500 8599 Data and macro management (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-29 Parameters Overview of parameters Table 1-7 Number ranges for SINAMICS, continued Range 1-30 Description From To 8600 8799 CAN bus 8800 8899 Communication Board Ethernet (CBE), PROFIdrive 8900 8999 Industrial Ethernet, PROFINET, CBE20 9000 9299 Topology 9300 9399 Safety Integrated 9400 9499 Parameter consistency and storage 9500 9899 Safety Integrated 9900 9949 Topology 9950 9999 Diagnostics, internal 10000 10199 Safety Integrated 11000 11299 Free technology controller 0, 1, 2 20000 20999 Free function blocks (FBLOCKS) 21000 25999 Drive Control Chart (DCC) 50000 53999 SINAMICS DC MASTER (DC control) 61000 61001 PROFINET (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 1.2 List of parameters Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng Objects: B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G r0002 Infeed operating display / INF op_display B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 250 Factory setting - Description: Operating display for the infeed. Value: 0: 31: 32: 35: 41: 42: 44: 45: 46: 60: 70: 200: 250: Dependency: Refer to: r0046 Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. Note: OC: Operating condition Operation - everything enabled Rdy for sw on - pre-chrg running (p0857) Ready for switching on - set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1" (p0840) Switching on inhibited - carry out first commissioning (p0010) Switching on inhibited - set "ON/OFF1" = "0" (p0840) Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF2" = "1" (p0844, p0845) Switching on inhibited - connect 24 V to terminal EP (hardware) Switching on inhibited - remove fault cause, acknowledge fault Switching on inhibited - exit comm mode (p0009, p0010) Infeed de-activated/not operational Initialization Wait for booting/partial booting Device signals a topology error COMM: Commissioning r0002 Control Unit operating display / CU op_display CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 117 Factory setting - Description: Operating display for the Control Unit (CU). Value: 0: 10: 20: 25: 31: 33: 34: 35: 70: 80: 99: 101: 111: 112: 113: 114: 115: 117: Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. Operation Ready Wait for run-up Wait for automatic FW update of DRIVE-CLiQ components Commissioning software download active Remove/acknowledge topology error Exit commissioning mode Carry out first commissioning Initialization Reset active Internal software error Specify topology Insert drive object Delete drive object Change drive object number Change component number Run parameter download Delete component (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-31 Parameters List of parameters r0002 Encoder DO operating display / Enc DO op_display ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 250 Factory setting - Description: Operating display for encoder drive object Value: 0: 35: 45: 46: 60: 200: 250: Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. r0002 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module operating display / Hub op_display HUB Encoder in cyclic operation Carry out first commissioning (p0010) Remove fault cause, acknowledge fault Exit commissioning mode (p0009, p0010) Encoder de-activated Wait for booting/partial booting Device signals a topology error Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 250 Factory setting - Description: Operating display for the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. Value: 0: 40: 50: 60: 70: 120: 200: 250: Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. r0002 TB30 operating display / TB30 op_display TB30 Module in cyclic operation Module not in cyclic operation Alarm Fault Initialization Module de-activated Wait for booting/partial booting Device signals a topology error Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 250 Factory setting - Description: Operating display for Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Value: 0: 40: 60: 70: 80: 120: 200: 250: Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. 1-32 Module in cyclic operation Module not in cyclic operation Fault Initialization Reset active Module de-activated Wait for run-up Device signals a topology error (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0002 TM150 operating display / TM150 op_display TM150 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 250 Factory setting - Description: Operating display for Terminal Module 150 (TM150) Value: 0: 40: 50: 60: 70: 120: 200: 250: Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. r0002 TM31 operating display / TM31 op_display TM31 Module in cyclic operation Module not in cyclic operation Alarm Fault Initialization Module de-activated Wait for booting/partial booting Device signals a topology error Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 250 Factory setting - Description: Operating display for Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Value: 0: 40: 50: 60: 70: 120: 200: 250: Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. r0002 TM54F operating display / TM54F op_display TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 250 Factory setting - Module in cyclic operation Module not in cyclic operation Alarm Fault Initialization Module de-activated Wait for booting/partial booting Device signals a topology error Description: Operating display for Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Value: 0: 40: 50: 60: 70: 120: 200: 250: Module in cyclic operation Module not in cyclic operation Alarm Fault Initialization Module de-activated Wait for booting/partial booting Device signals a topology error (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-33 Parameters List of parameters r0002 Drive operating display / Drv op_display VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 250 Factory setting - Description: Operating display for the drive. Value: 0: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 21: 22: 23: 31: 35: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 60: 70: 200: 250: Dependency: Refer to: r0046 Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. Note: OC: Operating condition Operation - everything enabled Operation - set "enable setpoint" = "1" (p1142, p1152) Operation - set "enable speed controller" = "1" (p0856) Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" = "1" (p1141) Operation - set "enable RFG" = "1" (p1140) Oper. - MotID, excit. running and/or brake opens, SS2, SOS Operation - open brake (p1215) Operation - withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" = "1" Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2 Operation - brake on fault, remove fault, acknowledge Operation - armature short-circ./DC brake act. (p1230, p1231) Ready for operation - set "Operation enable" = "1" (p0852) Ready for operation - de-magnetizing running (p0347) Ready for operation - set "Infeed operation" = "1" (p0864) Ready for switching on - set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1" (p0840) Switching on inhibited - carry out first commissioning (p0010) Switching on inhibited - set "ON/OFF1" = "0" (p0840) Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF2" = "1" (p0844, p0845) Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF3" = "1" (p0848, p0849) Switching on inhibited - connect 24 V to terminal EP (hardware) Switching on inhibited - rectify fault, acknowledge fault, STO Switching on inhibited - exit comm mode (p0009, p0010) Drive object de-activated/not operational Initialization Wait for booting/partial booting Device signals a topology error EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable) RFG: Ramp-function generator COMM: Commissioning MotID: Motor data identification SS2: Safe Stop 2 SOS: Safe Operating Stop STO: Safe Torque Off p0003 BOP access level / BOP acc_level CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1, U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 4 Factory setting 1 Description: 1-34 Sets the access level for reading and writing parameters via the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Value: 1: 2: 3: 4: Standard Extended Expert Service Note: Access level 1 (standard): Parameters for simplest possible operations. Access level 2 (extended): Parameters to operate the basic functions of the drive unit. Access level 3 (experts): Expert know-how is required for these parameters (e.g. BICO parameterization). Access level 4 (service): For these parameters, it is necessary that authorized service personnel enter the appropriate password (p3950). p0004 BOP display filter / BOP disp_filter CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C2(1), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 99 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the display filter for parameters with the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 7: 8: 10: 12: 13: 14: 15: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 25: 28: 47: 50: 90: 95: 98: 99: Dependency: Refer to: p0003 Notice: The display filter via p0004 provides precise filtering and displays the corresponding parameters only when p0009 and p0010 = 0. Note: The set access level via p0003 is also relevant for the display filter via p0004. All parameters Displays, signals Power unit Motor Encoder/pos enc Technology/units Digital inputs/outputs commands sequence control Analog inputs/outputs Setpoint channel/ramp-fct generator Functions U/f control Control Data sets Basic positioner Gating unit Motor identification Communication Faults, alarms, monitoring functions Cl-loop pos ctrl Free function blocks Trace and function generator OA parameters Topology Safety Integrated Command Data Sets (CDS) Drive Data Sets (DDS) Examples (assumption: p0009 = p0010 = 0): p0003 = 1, p0004 = 3 --> Only the parameters for the motor with access level 1 are displayed. p0003 = 2, p0004 = 3 --> Only the parameters for the motor with access levels 1 and 2 are displayed. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-35 Parameters List of parameters p0005[0...1] BOP operating display selection / BOP op_disp sel All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting [0] 2 [1] 0 Description: Sets the parameter number and parameter index for display for p0006 = 2, 4 for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). Examples for the SERVO drive object: p0005[0] = 21, p0005[1] = 0: Actual speed smoothed (r0021) p0005[0] = 25, p0005[1] = 0: Output voltage smoothed (r0025) Index: [0] = Parameter number [1] = Parameter index Dependency: Refer to: p0006 Note: Procedure: 1. The parameter number to be displayed should be set in index 0. Only the monitoring parameters (read-only parameters) can be set that actually exist for the actual drive object. If the set parameter number is not indexed, or if there is an index in index 1 that lies outside the valid range of the set parameter, then index 1 is automatically set to 0. 2. The index that belongs to the parameter set in index 0 should be set in index 1. The permissible changes in index 1 always depend on the parameter number set in index 0. p0006 BOP operating display mode / BOP op_ disp mode B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 4 Description: Sets the mode of the operating display for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) in the operating states "ready for operation" and "operation". Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: Dependency: Refer to: p0005 Note: Mode 0 ... 3 can only be selected if also r0020, r0021 are available on the drive object. Operation --> r0021, otherwise r0020 <--> r0021 Operation --> r0021, otherwise r0020 Operation --> p0005, otherwise p0005 <--> r0020 Operation --> r0002, otherwise r0002 <--> r0020 p0005 Mode 4 is available for all drive objects. 1-36 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0006 BOP operating display mode / BOP op_ disp mode CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 4 Max 4 Factory setting 4 Description: Sets the mode of the operating display for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) in the operating states "ready for operation" and "operation". Value: 4: Dependency: Refer to: p0005 Note: Mode 0 ... 3 can only be selected if also r0020, r0021 are available on the drive object. p0005 Mode 4 is available for all drive objects. p0007 BOP background lighting / BOP lighting CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [s] Max 2000 [s] Factory setting 0 [s] Description: Sets the delay time until the background lighting of the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) is switched off. Note: p0007 = 0: Background lighting is always switched on (factory setting). p0008 BOP drive object after booting / BOP DO after boot CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - If no keys are actuated, then the background lighting automatically switches itself off after this time has expired. Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 65535 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the required drive object that is active at the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) after booting. Note: The value from p0008 initializes the display on the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) at the top left after booting. The drive object Control Unit is selected using the value 1. p0009 Device commissioning parameter filter / Dev comm par_filt CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10000 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the device and basic drive commissioning. By appropriately setting this parameter, those parameters are filtered that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: Ready Device configuration Defining the drive type/function module Drive base configuration Data set base configuration (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-37 Parameters List of parameters 29: 30: 50: 55: 101: 111: 112: 113: 114: 115: 117: 10000: Notice: Device download Parameter reset OA application configuration OA application installation Topology input Insert drive object Delete drive object Change drive object number Change component number Parameter download Delete component Ready (asynchron) For p0009 = 10000 the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: The drives can only be powered up outside the device commissioning (the inverter enabled). In this case, p0009 must be 0 (Ready) and the individual drive objects must have already gone into operation (p0010). p0009 = 1: Device configuration At the first commissioning of the device, after booting, the device is in the "device configuration" state. To start the internal automatic first commissioning of the drive unit, p0009 should be set to 0 (Ready) after the ID for the actual topology (r0098) was transferred into the ID for the target topology (p0099). To do this, it is sufficient to set a single index value of p0099[x] the same as r0098[x]. Before the device has been completely commissioned, no other parameter can be changed. After the first commissioning was carried out, in this state, when required, other basic device configuration parameters can be adapted (e.g. the basic sampling time in p0110). p0009 = 2: Defines the drive type / function module In this state, the drive object types and/or the function modules can be changed or selected for the individual drive objects. To do this, the drive object type can be set using p0107[0...15] and the function can be set using p0108[0...15] (refer to p0101[0...15]). p0009 = 3: Drive basic configuration In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, basic changes can be made for the individual drive objects (e.g. sampling times in p0111, p0112, p0115 and the number of data sets in p0120, p0130, p0140, p0170, p0180). p0009 = 4: Data set basic configuration In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, for the individual drive objects changes can be made regarding the assignment of the components (p0121, p0131, p0141, p0151, p0161) to the individual data sets and the assignment of the power unit, motor and encoder to the drive data sets (p0185, ...). p0009 = 29: Device download If a download is made using the commissioning software, the device is automatically brought into this state. After the download has been completed, p0009 is automatically set to 0 (ready). It is not possible to manually set p0009 to this value. p0009 = 30: Parameter reset In order to bring the complete unit into the "first commissioning" state or to load the parameters saved using p0977, to start, p0009 must be set to this value. p0976 can then be changed to the required value. p0009 = 50: OA application configuration In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, changes can be made for the individual drive objects regarding the activity (p4956) of the OA applications. p0009 = 55: OA application installation OA applications can be installed and/or uninstalled in this state. p0009 = 101: Topology input In this state, the DRIVE-CLiQ target topology can be entered using p9902 and p9903. p0009 = 111: Insert drive object This state allows a new drive object to be inserted using p9911. p0009 = 112: Delete drive object This state allows existing drive objects to be deleted using p9912 after the device has been commissioned for the first time. p0009 = 113: Change drive object number This state allows the drive object number of existing drive objects to be changed using p9913 after the device has been commissioned for the first time. 1-38 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0009 = 114: Change component number This state allows the component number of existing components to be changed using p9914 after the device has been commissioned for the first time. p0009 = 115: Parameter download This state allows the complete device and drive commissioning using the parameter services. p0009 = 117: Delete component This state allows components to be deleted using p9917 after the device has been commissioned for the first time. p0010 Infeed commissioning parameter filter / INF comm par_filt B_INF Description: Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 30 Factory setting 1 Sets the parameter filter to commission an infeed unit. Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. Value: 0: 1: 2: 5: 29: 30: Ready Quick commissioning Power unit commissioning Technological application/units Only Siemens int Parameter reset Note: The drive can only be powered up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter must be set to 0. For p3900 not equal to 0, at the end of the quick commissioning, this parameter is automatically reset to 0. Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. p0010 Encoder DO commissioning parameter filter / EncDO com par_filt ENC Description: Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 30 Factory setting 0 Sets the parameter filter to commission an encoder drive object. Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered. Value: 0: 4: 5: 29: 30: Note: Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. p0010 TB30 commissioning parameter filter / TB30 comm.par_filt TB30 Description: Ready Encoder commissioning Technological application/units Only Siemens int Parameter reset Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 30 Factory setting 0 Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-39 Parameters List of parameters For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered. Value: 0: 29: 30: Dependency: Refer to: p0970 Note: Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. p0010 TM150 commissioning parameter filter / TM150 com par_filt TM150 Description: Ready Only Siemens int Parameter reset Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 30 Factory setting 0 Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Module 150 (TM150). Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered. Value: 0: 29: 30: Ready Only Siemens int Parameter reset Dependency: Refer to: p0970 Note: Only the following values are possible: p0010 = 0, 30 Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. p0010 TM31 commissioning parameter filter / TM31 comm par_filt TM31 Description: Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 30 Factory setting 0 Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered. Value: 0: 29: 30: Ready Only Siemens int Parameter reset Dependency: Refer to: p0970 Note: Only the following values are possible: p0010 = 0, 30 Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. p0010 TM54F commissioning parameter filter / TM54F com par_filt TM54F_MA Description: Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2847 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 95 Factory setting 0 Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered. 1-40 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 29: 30: 95: Dependency: Refer to: p0970 Note: Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt VECTOR_G Description: Ready Only Siemens int Parameter reset Safety Integrated commissioning Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2800, 2846 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10000 Factory setting 1 Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive. Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 15: 17: 25: 29: 30: 95: 10000: Ready Quick commissioning Power unit commissioning Motor commissioning Encoder commissioning Technological application/units Data sets Basic positioner commissioning Position control commissioning Only Siemens int Parameter reset Safety Integrated commissioning Ready with immediate feedback signal Notice: For p0010 = 10000 the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: The drive can only be powered up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter must be set to 0. By setting p3900 to a value other than 0, the quick commissioning is completed, and this parameter is automatically reset to 0. Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. p0010 = 10000 corresponds to p0010 = 0. Unlike with p0010 = 0, the parameter modification is applied immediately and the calculations are made in the background. Further parameter modifications cannot be made while the calculations are being performed. p0011 BOP password entry (p0013) / BOP passw ent p13 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the password for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). Dependency: Refer to: p0012, p0013 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-41 Parameters List of parameters p0012 BOP password acknowledgement (p0013) / BOP passw ackn p13 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Acknowledges the password for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). Dependency: Refer to: p0011, p0013 p0013[0...49] BOP user-defined list / BOP list All objects Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Sets the required parameters to read and write via the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). Activation: 1. p0003 = 3 (expert). 2. p0013[0...49] = requested parameter number 3. If required, enter p0011 = password in order to prevent non-authorized de-activation. 4. p0016 = 1 --> activates the selected user-defined list. De-activation/change: 1. p0003 = 3 (expert). 2. If required, p0012 = p0011, in order to be authorized to change or de-activate the list. 3. If required p0013[0...49] = required parameter number. 4. p0016 = 1 --> activates the modified user-defined list. 5. p0003 = 0 --> de-activates the user-defined list. Dependency: Refer to: p0009, p0011, p0012, p0976 Note: The following parameters can be read and written on the Control Unit drive object: - p0003 (access stage) - p0009 (device commissioning, parameter filter) - p0012 (BOP password acknowledgement (p0013)) The following applies for the user-defined list: - password protection is only available on the drive object Control Unit and is valid for all of the drive objects. - p0013 cannot be included in the user-defined list for all drive objects. - p0003, p0009, p0011, p0012, p0976 cannot, for the drive object Control Unit, be included in the user-defined list. - the user-defined list can be cleared and de-activated "restore factory setting". A value of 0 means: Entry is empty. p0015 Macro drive object / Macro DO B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 999999 Factory setting 0 Description: Runs the corresponding macro files. The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory. Example: p0015 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run. 1-42 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570 Caution: When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN group! Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8570. r8570 is not in the expert list of the commissioning software. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1 Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 999999 Factory setting 1 Description: Runs the corresponding macro files. The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory. Example: p0015 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run. Dependency: Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570 Caution: When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8570. r8570 is not in the expert list of the commissioning software. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p0016 Activate BOP user-defined list / BOP user list act CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1, U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting for activating/de-activating the user-defined list for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p0011, p0012, p0013 Note: The user-defined list can only be de-activated with p0011 = p0012 r0018 Control Unit firmware version / CU FW version CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting - If p0016 = 1, then it is only possible to access parameters in the parameter list (p0013). BOP user-defined list de-activated BOP user-defined list activated Description: Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit. Dependency: Refer to: r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-43 Parameters List of parameters Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. r0019.0...14 CO/BO: Control word BOP / STW BOP CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9912 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 07 13 14 r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed / n_set smth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5020, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Signal name ON / OFF (OFF1) No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) Acknowledge fault (0 -> 1) Motorized potentiometer raise Motorized potentiometer lower 1 signal ON No coast down No Quick Stop Yes Yes Yes 0 signal OFF (OFF1) Coast down (OFF2) Quick Stop (OFF3) No No No FP - Description: Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the interpolator). Dependency: Refer to: r0060 Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060). r0021 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4710, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed. For U/f control and when slip compensation is deactivated (see p1335), the synchronous speed to the output frequency is shown in r0021. Dependency: Refer to: r0022, r0063 Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063). For U/f control, the mechanical speed calculated from the output frequency and the slip is shown in r0063[2] even if slip compensation is deactivated. 1-44 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0022 Speed actual value rpm smoothed / n_act rpm smooth VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed. r0022 is identical to r0021, however, it always has units of rpm and contrary to r0021 cannot be changed over. For U/f control and when slip compensation is deactivated (see p1335), the synchronous speed to the output frequency is shown in r0022. Dependency: Refer to: r0021, r0063 Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063). For U/f control, the mechanical speed calculated from the output frequency and the slip is shown in r0063[2] even if slip compensation is deactivated. r0024 Output frequency smoothed / f_outp smooth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1690, 5300, 5730, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the smoothed converter frequency. Dependency: Refer to: r0066 Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066). r0025 CO: Output voltage smoothed / U_outp smooth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1690, 5730, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the smoothed output voltage of the power unit. Dependency: Refer to: r0072 Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-45 Parameters List of parameters r0026 CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799, 8750, 8850, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage. Dependency: Refer to: r0070 Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the unsmoothed value should be used. Note: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF: smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070). r0026 CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6799, 8750, 8850, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage. Dependency: Refer to: r0070 Notice: For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) the following applies: When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM340) a valid measured value is not supplied. In this case, when an external 24 V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the display parameter. Note: SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070). r0027 CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8750 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_4 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value. Dependency: Refer to: r0068 Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the unsmoothed value should be used. For Basic Line Modules of chassis format, the displayed value is invalid as these units do not have any current sensing. Note: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068). 1-46 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0027 CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799, 8850, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value. Dependency: Refer to: r0068 Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the unsmoothed value should be used. Note: A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068). r0028 Modulation depth smoothed / Mod_depth smth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the modulation depth. Dependency: Refer to: r0074 Note: A_INF: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074). r0029 Current actual value field-generating smoothed / Id_act smooth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current. Dependency: Refer to: r0076 Note: SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-47 Parameters List of parameters r0030 Current actual value torque-generating smoothed / Iq_act smooth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current. Dependency: Refer to: r0078 Note: SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The following applies for SERVO: The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 100 ms, r0078[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0078[0]). The following applies for VECTOR: The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078). r0031 Actual torque smoothed / M_act smooth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the smoothed torque actual value. Dependency: Refer to: r0080 Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080). r0032 CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799, 8750, 8850, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 14_10 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: r2004 Expert list: 1 Min - [kW] Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power. Dependency: Refer to: r0082 Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the unsmoothed value should be used. For Basic Line Modules of chassis format, the displayed value is invalid as these units do not have any current sensing. Note: Significance for the drive: Power output at the motor shaft Significance for the infeed: Line power drawn For A_INF, B_INF and S_INF the following applies: The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082). The following applies for SERVO: The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]). 1-48 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters For VECTOR and VECTORMV, the following applies: The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082). r0032 CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6799, 8750, 8850, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 14_10 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: r2004 Expert list: 1 Min - [kW] Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power. Dependency: Refer to: r0082 Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the unsmoothed value should be used. Note: Significance for the drive: Power output at the motor shaft Significance for the infeed: Line power drawn For A_INF, B_INF and S_INF the following applies: The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082). The following applies for SERVO: The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]). For VECTOR and VECTORMV, the following applies: The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082). r0033 Torque utilization smoothed / M_util smooth VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the smoothed torque utilization as a percentage. The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque in reference to the torque limit, scaled using p2196. Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081). For M_set total (r0079) > 0, the following applies: - Required torque = M_set total - Actual torque limit = M_max upper effective (r1538) For M_set total (r0079) <= 0, the following applies: - Required torque = - M_set total - Actual torque limit = - M_max lower effective (r1539) For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 % For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 % (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-49 Parameters List of parameters r0034 CO: Motor utilization / Motor utilization VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8017 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the motor utilization from motor temperature model 1 (I2t) or 3. Dependency: The motor utilization is only determined for permanent-magnet synchronous motors when the motor temperature model 1 (I2t) or 3 is activated. For motor temperature model 1 (I2t) (p0612.0 = 1), the following applies: - r0034 = (motor model temperature - 40 K) / (p0605 - 40 K) * 100 % For motor temperature model 3 (p0612.2 = 1), the following applies: - r0034 = (motor model temperature - p0613) / (p5390 - p0613) * 100 % Refer to: p0611, p0612, p0615 Notice: After the drive is switched on, the system starts to determine the motor temperature with an assumed model value. This means that the value for the motor utilization is only valid after a stabilization time. Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. For r0034 = -200.0 %, the following applies: The value is invalid (e.g. the motor temperature model is not activated or has been incorrectly parameterized). r0035 CO: Temperature input / Temp_input B_INF Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8750 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Displays the temperature currently measured at X21 (booksize) or X41 (chassis). For a BLM with internal Braking Module, a bimetallic sensor must be connected up to monitor the temperature of the braking resistor. The temperature sensor type is indicated using p0601 and cannot be changed for the existing internal Braking Module. Temperature within permissible limit values: r0035 = -50C Temperature outside the permissible limit values: r0035 = 250C Dependency: Refer to: F06907, F06908 Notice: The function in r0192.11 must be available in order to obtain a correct display. Note: For r0035 equal to -200.0 C, the following applies: - "no sensor" selected in p0601! For r0035 equal to -300.0 C, the following applies: - a KTY84 is selected in p0601 but is not connected! - the temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error)! r0035 CO: Motor temperature / Mot temp VECTOR_G Description: 1-50 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7008, 8016, 8017 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Displays the actual temperature in the motor. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: For r0035 not equal to -200.0 C, the following applies: - this temperature display is valid. - a KTY sensor is connected. - the thermal model for the induction motor is activated (p0612 bit 1 = 1 and temperature sensor de-activated: p0600 = 0 or p0601 = 0). For r0035 equal to -200.0 C, the following applies: - this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error). - A PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected. - the temperature sensor of the synchronous motor is de-activated (p0600 = 0 or p0601 = 0). r0036 CO: Power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8014 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the power unit overload determined using the I2t calculation. A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit. It represents the current that can be conducted by the power unit without any influence of the switching losses (e.g. the continuously permissible current of the capacitors, inductances, busbars, etc.). If the I2t reference current of the power unit is not exceeded, then an overload (0 %) is not displayed. In the other case, the degree of thermal overload is calculated, whereby 100% results in a trip. Dependency: Refer to: p0290, p0294 Refer to: F30005 r0037[0...19] CO: Power unit temperatures / PU temperatures B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8014 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the temperatures in the power unit. Index: [0] = Inverter, maximum value [1] = Depletion layer maximum value [2] = Rectifier maximum value [3] = Air intake [4] = Interior of power unit [5] = Inverter 1 [6] = Inverter 2 [7] = Inverter 3 [8] = Inverter 4 [9] = Inverter 5 [10] = Inverter 6 [11] = Rectifier 1 [12] = Rectifier 2 [13] = Depletion layer 1 [14] = Depletion layer 2 [15] = Depletion layer 3 [16] = Depletion layer 4 [17] = Depletion layer 5 [18] = Depletion layer 6 [19] = Cooling unit liquid intake (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-51 Parameters List of parameters Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal. r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]). r0037[1]: Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]). r0037[2]: Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures (r0037[11...12]). The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter, depletion layer, or rectifier. r0037[0...1] Control Unit temperature / CU temp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the measured Control Unit temperature. An appropriate message is output when the permitted operating temperature is exceeded. Index: [0] = Actual measured value [1] = Maximum measured value Dependency: Refer to: A01009 Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal. r0038 Power factor smoothed / Cos phi smooth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6799, 8850, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the smoothed actual power factor. Notice: For infeed units, the following applies: For active powers < 25 % of the rated power, this does not provide any useful information. Note: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. Meaning for motor: - power factor of the basic fundamental signals at the converter output. Meaning for infeed: - Power factor at the connection point (r3470, r3471) r0039[0...2] Energy display / Energy displ VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kWh] Max - [kWh] Factory setting - [kWh] Description: Displays the energy values at the output terminals of the power unit. Index: [0] = Energy balance (sum) [1] = Energy drawn [2] = Energy fed back Dependency: Refer to: p0040 Note: Re index 0: Sum of the energy drawn and energy that is fed back. 1-52 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0040 Reset energy consumption display / Energy usage reset VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Setting to reset the display in r0039 and r0041. Procedure: Set p0040 = 0 --> 1 The displays are reset and the parameter is automatically set to zero. Dependency: Refer to: r0039 r0041 Energy consumption saved / Energy cons saved VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kWh] Max - [kWh] Factory setting - [kWh] Description: Displays the saved energy referred to 100 operating hours. Dependency: Refer to: p0040 Note: This display is used for a fluid-flow machine. The flow characteristic is entered into p3320 ... p3329. For an operating time of below 100 hours, the display is interpolated up to 100 hours. p0045 Display values smoothing time constant / Disp_val T_smooth VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4715, 5610, 5730, 6714, 8012 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 1.00 [ms] Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values: SERVO: r0078[1], r0079[1], r0081 (calculated from the quantities smoothed with p0045), r0082[1]. VECTOR: r0063[1], r0068[1], r0080[1], r0082[1]. r0046.0...29 B_INF CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8734 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop infeed control from being commissioned. Bit field: Bit 00 01 08 16 17 Signal name OFF1 enable missing OFF2 enable missing EP terminals enable missing OFF1 enable internal missing OFF2 enable internal missing 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No No No No FP - 1-53 Parameters List of parameters 26 29 Infeed inactive or not operational Cooling unit ready signal missing Yes Yes No No Dependency: Refer to: r0002 Note: The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for the infeed are present. - Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal. - there is a "switching on inhibited". Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal. Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the "switching on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0. Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the commissioning mode is selected (p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0) or there is an OFF2 fault response or the OFF1 signal source (p0840) is changed. Bit 26 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the infeed is inactive (p0105 = 0) or is not operational (r7850[DO-Index]=0). Bit 29 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the cooling unit ready signal via BI: p0266[1] missing. r0046.0...31 VECTOR_G CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2634 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop drive control from being commissioned. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 09 10 11 12 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Dependency: 1-54 Signal name OFF1 enable missing OFF2 enable missing OFF3 enable missing Operation enable missing Armature short-circuit / DC braking, enable missing STOP2 enable missing STOP1 enable missing Safety enable missing Infeed enable missing Ramp-function generator enable missing Ramp-function generator start missing Setpoint enable missing OFF1 enable internal missing OFF2 enable internal missing OFF3 enable internal missing Pulse enable internal missing Armature short-circuit/DC braking internal enable missing STOP2 enable internal missing STOP1 enable internal missing Function bypass active Drive inactive or not operational De-magnetizing not completed Brake open missing Cooling unit ready signal missing Speed controller inhibited Jog setpoint active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No FP 7014, 7016 7014, 7016 - Refer to: r0002 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present. Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal. - there is a "switching on inhibited". Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal. Bit 02 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0848 or p0849 is a 0 signal. Bit 03 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0852 is a 0 signal. Bit 04 =1 (armature short-circuit active), if: - the signal source in p1230 has a 1 signal Bit 05, Bit 06: Being prepared Bit 08 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - safety functions have been enabled and STO is active. STO selected via terminals: - the pulse enable via terminal EP is missing (booksize: X21, chassis: X41), or the signal source in p9620 is for a 0 signal. STO selected via PROFIsafe or TM54F: - A safety-relevant signal is present with a STOP A response. Bit 09 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0864 is a 0 signal. Bit 10 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p1140 is a 0 signal. Bit 11 = 1 (enable signal missing) if the speed setpoint is frozen, because: - the signal source in p1141 is a 0 signal. - the speed setpoint is entered from jogging and the two signal sources for jogging, bit 0 (p1055) and bit 1 (p1056) have a 1 signal. Bit 12 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p1142 is a 0 signal. - When activating the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1), the signal source in p1142 is set to a 0 signal. Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the "switching on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0. Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - commissioning mode is selected (p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0). - there is an OFF2 fault response. - the drive is inactive (p0105 = 0) or is not operational (r7850[DO-Index]=0). Bit 18 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present. Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if: - synchronization is running between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle. Bit 20 =1 (internal armature short-circuit active), if: - the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or "S5x" (refer to function diagram 2610). - the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0). Bit 21 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: The pulses have been enabled and the speed setpoint has still not been enabled, because: - the holding brake opening time (p1216) has still not expired. - the motor has still not been magnetized (induction motor). - the encoder has not been calibrated (U/f vector and synchronous motor) Bit 22: Being prepared Bit 26 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the drive is inactive (p0105 = 0) or is not operational (r7850[DO-Index]=0). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-55 Parameters List of parameters - All power units of a parallel connection are deactivated (p0125, p0895). Bit 27 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - de-magnetizing has still not been completed (only for vector). Bit 28 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the holding brake is closed or has still not been opened. Bit 29 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the cooling unit ready signal via BI: p0266[1] missing. Bit 30 = 1 (speed controller inhibited), if one of the following reasons is present: - A 0 signal is available via BI: p0856. - the function generator with current input is active. - the measuring function "current controller reference frequency characteristic" is active. - the pole position identification is active. - motor data identification is active (only certain steps). Bit 31 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the speed setpoint from jog 1 or 2 is entered. r0047 Motor data identification and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 300 Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (stationary measurement) and the speed/velocity controller optimization (rotating measurement). Value: 0: 115: 120: 140: 150: 170: 190: 195: 200: 210: 220: 230: 240: 250: 270: 290: 300: Note: Re r0047 = 300: No measurement Measurement q leakage inductance (part 2) Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Calculate speed controller setting Measurement, moment of inertia Measurement, magnetizing current and saturation characteristic Speed encoder test Measurement q leakage inductance (part 1) Rotating measurement selected Pole position identification selected identification, leakage inductance Identification, rotor time constant Identification, stator inductance Identification, stator inductance LQLD Identification, stator resistance Identification, valve lockout time Stationary measurement selected This value is also displayed if encoder calibration p1990 is selected. r0049[0...3] Motor data set/encoder data set effective / MDS/EDS effective VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8565 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the effective Motor Data Set (MDS) and the effective Encoder Data Sets (EDS). Index: [0] = Motor Data Set MDS effective [1] = Encoder 1 Encoder Data Set EDS effective 1-56 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [2] = Encoder 2 Encoder Data Set EDS effective [3] = Encoder 3 Encoder Data Set EDS effective Dependency: Refer to: p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189, r0838 Note: Value 99 means the following: No encoder assigned (not configured). r0050.0...3 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8560 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the effective Command Data Set (CDS). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Dependency: Refer to: p0810, p0811, r0836 Note: The Command Data Set selected using a binector input (e.g. p0810) is displayed using r0836. r0051.0...4 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective ENC, VECTOR_G Signal name CDS eff., bit 0 CDS eff., bit 1 CDS eff., bit 2 CDS eff., bit 3 1 signal ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - FP - Description: Displays the effective Drive Data Set (DDS). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 Dependency: Refer to: p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837 Note: The drive data set changeover is suppressed when selecting the motor identification, during the rotating measurement, the encoder calibration and the friction characteristic record. r0056.0...15 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl VECTOR_G Signal name DDS eff., bit 0 DDS eff., bit 1 DDS eff., bit 2 DDS eff., bit 3 DDS eff., bit 4 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2526 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word of the closed-loop control. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 Signal name Initialization completed De-magnetizing completed Pulse enable present Soft starting present Magnetizing completed Voltage boost when starting Acceleration voltage 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Active Active (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No No No No Inactive Inactive FP 6300 6300 1-57 Parameters List of parameters 07 08 09 10 11 12 r0060 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No 6719 6714 6310 6719 - 13 14 Frequency negative Field weakening active Voltage limit active Slip limit active Frequency limit active Current limiting controller voltage output active Current/torque limiting Vdc_max controller active Active Yes Inactive No 15 Vdc_min controller active Yes No 6060 6220, 6320 6220, 6320 CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt. VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2701, 2704, 5020, 6030, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the actual speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the interpolator). Dependency: Refer to: r0020 Note: The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060). r0061 CO: Actual speed unsmoothed / n_act unsmoothed ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 4710, 4715 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the unsmoothed actual speed values sensed by the encoders. Note: The speed actual value within a PROFIBUS cycle (r2064[1]) is averaged and displayed. r0061 CO: Actual velocity unsmoothed / v_act unsmoothed ENC (Lin_enc) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 4710, 4715 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 4_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [m/min] Max - [m/min] Factory setting - [m/min] Description: Displays the unsmoothed actual velocity values sensed by the encoders. Note: The velocity actual value within a PROFIBUS cycle (r2064[1]) is averaged and displayed. 1-58 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0061[0...2] CO: Actual speed unsmoothed / n_act unsmoothed VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 4710, 4715 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the actual speed values sensed by the encoders. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Note: With a parameterized filter time constant p1441, the speed signal from encoder 1 is displayed corrected by the following error. The speeds from encoder 2 and 3 are only displayed in U/f operating modes if the function module (speed/torque control) (r0108.2) has been activated. r0062 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1590, 1750, 5020, 5030, 5210, 6030 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the actual speed setpoint after the setpoint filters. r0063[0...2] CO: Speed actual value / n_act VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1680, 4715 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the actual speed of the closed-loop speed control and the U/f control. For U/f control and when slip compensation is deactivated (see p1335), the synchronous speed to the output frequency is shown in r0063[0]. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 [2] = Calculated from f_set - f_slip Dependency: Refer to: r0021, r0022 Note: The speed actual value is calculated in encoderless operation and for U/f control. For operation with encoder, r0063[0] is smoothed with p1441. The speed actual value (r0063[0]) is additionally displayed - smoothed with p0045 - in r0063[1]. The speed (r0063[2]) calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual value (r0063[0]) in the steady-state. The actual speed (r0063[0]) is available as a display quantity with additional smoothing in r0021. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-59 Parameters List of parameters r0064 CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl system dev VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5040, 6040 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the actual system deviation of the speed controller. Note: In servo control mode with active reference model, the system deviation to the P component of the speed controller is displayed. r0065 Slip frequency / f_Slip VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1710, 6310, 6727, 6730, 6732 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 2_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Displays the slip frequency for induction motors (ASM). r0066 CO: Output frequency / f_outp VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1690, 5300, 5730, 6310, 6730, 6731, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 2_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the Motor Module output frequency. Dependency: Refer to: r0024 Note: The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066). r0067 CO: Output current, maximum / I_outp max VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5722, 6300, 6640, 6724 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the maximum output current of the Motor Module. Dependency: The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal protection. Refer to: p0290, p0640 1-60 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0068 CO: DC current in the DC link / Idc DC link B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8014, 8750 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_4 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the DC current in the DC link. Dependency: Refer to: r0027 Notice: For Basic Line Modules of chassis format, the displayed value is invalid as these units do not have any current sensing. Note: The DC current in the DC link is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068). r0068[0...1] CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs val VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1690, 6714, 6799, 7017, 8014, 8017, 8018 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays actual absolute current. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 Dependency: Refer to: r0027 Notice: The value is updated with the current controller sampling time. Note: Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2) The absolute value of the current actual value is available smoothed (r0027 with 300 ms, r0068[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0068[0]). r0069[0...6] CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act value VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1630, 5730, 6714, 6730, 6731, 8850, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the measured actual phase currents as peak value. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W [3] = Phase U offset [4] = Phase V offset [5] = Phase W offset [6] = Total U, V, W Note: In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed. The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-61 Parameters List of parameters r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1774, 8750, 8850, 8864, 8940, 8950, 8964 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage. Dependency: Refer to: r0026 Note: The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070). r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6723, 6724, 6730, 6731, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage. Dependency: Refer to: r0026 Notice: For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) the following applies: When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM340) a valid measured value is not supplied. In this case, when an external 24V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed. Note: The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070). r0071 Maximum output voltage / U_output max VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1710, 6300, 6640, 6722, 6723, 6724, 6725, 6727 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the maximum output voltage. Dependency: The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage (r0070) and the maximum modulation depth (p1803). Note: As the (driven) motor load increases, the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC link voltage. r0072 CO: Output voltage / U_output VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1630, 5730, 6730, 6731, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the actual power unit output voltage (Motor Module). Dependency: Refer to: r0025 Note: The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072). 1-62 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0073 Maximum modulation depth / Modulat_depth max VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6723, 6724, 6725 P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the maximum modulation depth. Dependency: Refer to: p1803 r0074 CO: Modulat_depth / Modulat_depth VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5730, 6730, 6731, 6799, 8940, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the actual modulation depth. Dependency: Refer to: r0028 Note: For space vector modulation, 100% corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol. Values above 100 % indicate an overcontrol condition - values below 100% have no overcontrol. The phase voltage (phase-to-phase, rms) is calculated as follows:(r0074 x r0070) / (sqrt(2) x 100 %). The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074). r0075 CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1630, 5714, 5722, 6714 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the field-generating current setpoint (Id_set). Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode. r0076 CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1630, 1710, 5714, 5730, 6714, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the field-generating current actual value (Id_act). Dependency: Refer to: r0029 Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode. The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-63 Parameters List of parameters r0077 CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1630, 1774, 5714, 6710, 6714, 6719 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the torque/force generating current setpoint. Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode. r0078 CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1710, 6310, 6714, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the torque-generating current actual value (Iq_act). Dependency: Refer to: r0030 Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode. The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078). r0079 CO: Torque setpoint / M_set total VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1700, 1710, 6030, 6060, 6710, 8012 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller. r0080[0...1] CO: Torque actual value / M_act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the actual torque value. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 Dependency: Refer to: r0031 Note: The torque actual value is available smoothed (r0031 with 100 ms, r0080[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0080[0]). 1-64 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0081 CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the torque utilization as a percentage. The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque referred to the torque limit. Dependency: Refer to: r0033 Note: The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081). The torque utilization is obtained from the required torque referred to the torque limit as follows: - Positive torque: r0081 = (r0079 / r1538) * 100 % - Negative torque: r0081 = (-r0079 / -r1539) * 100 % r0082 CO: Active power actual value / P_act B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8750, 8850, 8950 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 14_7 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: r2004 Expert list: 1 Min - [kW] Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Description: Displays the instantaneous active power. Dependency: Refer to: r0032 Notice: For Basic Line Modules of chassis format, the displayed value is invalid as these units do not have any current sensing. Note: The active power is available smoothed (r0032) and unsmoothed (r0082). r0082[0...2] CO: Active power actual value / P_act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: r2004 Expert list: 1 Min - [kW] Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Description: Displays the instantaneous active power. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 [2] = Electric power Dependency: Refer to: r0032 Note: The mechanical active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]). r0083 CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the flux setpoint. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-65 Parameters List of parameters r0084[0...1] CO: Flux actual value / Flux act val VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6726, 6730, 6732 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the flux actual value. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed Note: The flux actual value (index 1) smoothed with p1585 is only displayed for separately-excited synchronous motors. In the following cases, the unsmoothed flux actual value is also displayed: - in the range of the current model. - during the pole position identification. - for I/f control. - for a stalled drive. r0087 CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714, 6730, 6732, 6799 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual active power factor. r0088 CO: DC link voltage setpoint / Vdc setpoint VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the setpoint for the DC link voltage. r0089[0...2] Actual phase voltage / U_phase act val VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6719 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the actual phase voltage. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W Note: The values are determined from the transistor power-on duration. 1-66 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0092 Clock synchronous operation pre-assignment/check / Clock sync op CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to pre-assign/check the sampling times for the internal controller clock cycles for clock-synchronous PROFIdrive operation. Re p0092 = 1: The controller clock cycles are set so that clock synchronous PROFIdrive operation is possible. If it is not possible to change the controller clock cycles of the clock-cycle synchronous PROFIdrive operation, then an appropriate message is output. The pre-setting of the controller clock cycles can result in a derating of the Motor Module (e.g. p0115[0] = 400 s -> 375 s). When calculating the drive unit utilization (r9976), when using the fixed DCC runtime groups "Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD", "Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD", "Receive AFTER IF2 PZD" (from V4.4) and "Send BEFORE IF2 PZD" (from V4.4), then its maximum computing time load has already been calculated during rampup for isochronous operation and taken into account in r9976 (from V4.3). Re p0092 = 0: The controller clock cycles are set without any restrictions by the clock-cycle PROFIdrive operation (same as for up to V2.3). When calculating the drive unit utilization (r9976), when using the fixed DCC runtime groups "Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD", "Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD", "Receive AFTER IF2 PZD" (from V4.4) and "Send BEFORE IF2 PZD" (from V4.4), then its maximum computing time load has already been calculated during rampup for isochronous operation and taken into account in r9976 (from V4.3). Value: 0: 1: No isochronous PROFIBUS Isochronous PROFIBUS Dependency: Refer to: r0110, p0115 Caution: Refer to: A01223, A01224 Only current controller clock cycles (p0115[0]) which are integers of 125 s are permitted for isochronous mode. In addition, current controller clock cycles 31.25 s and 62.5 s are possible. Notice: p0092 only affects the automatic default for the clock cycles (p0115) in the drive. If the clock cycles are modified subsequently in expert mode (p0112 = 0), p0092 = 0 should be set so that the new values are not overwritten again by the automatic default when the parameters are downloaded. The conditions for current controller clock cycle for isosynchronous operation must still be carefully ensured (refer under Caution!). r0094 CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 1680, 1690, 4710, 6714, 6730, 6731, 6732 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1 Min - [] Max - [] Factory setting - [] Description: Displays the transformation angle. Dependency: Refer to: p0431, r1778 Note: The transformation angle corresponds to the electrical commutation angle. If no pole position identification is carried out (p1982), and the encoder is adjusted, the following applies: The encoder supplies the value and indicates the electrical angle of the flux position (d axis). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-67 Parameters List of parameters p0097 Select drive object type / Select DO type CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 24 Factory setting 0 Description: Executes an automatic device configuration. In so doing, p0099, p0107 and p0108 are appropriately set. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 24: No selection Drive object type SERVO Drive object type VECTOR SINAMICS GM (DFEMV & VECTORMV) SINAMICS SM (AFEMV & VECTORMV) SINAMICS GL (VECTORGL) SINAMICS SL (VECTORSL) Drive object type VECTOR parallel circuit Drive object type VECTORMV - GM parallel circuit Drive object type VECTORMV - SM parallel circuit Drive object type DC_CTRL Drive object type SERVO HMI Drive object type VECTOR HMI Drive object type VECTORMV - SM parallel circuit Dependency: Refer to: r0098, p0099 Refer to: A01330 Note: For p0097 = 0, p0099 is automatically set to the factory setting. The possible settings are dependent upon the device type. r0098[0...5] Actual device topology / Device_act topo CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the automatically detected actual device topology in coded form. Index: [0] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 [1] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101 [2] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102 [3] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103 [4] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104 [5] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105 Dependency: Refer to: p0097, p0099 Note: Topology coding: abcd efgh hex a = number of Active Line Modules b = number of Motor Modules c = number of motors d = number of encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules) e = number of additional encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules) f = number of Terminal Modules g = number of Terminal Boards h = reserved if the value 0 is displayed in all indices, then components are not detected via DRIVE-CLiQ. If a value F hex occurs at a position of the coding (abcd efgh hex), then an overflow has occurred. 1-68 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0099[0...5] Device target topology / Device_target topo CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the device target topology in coded form (refer to r0098). The setting is made during commissioning. De-activated or non-available components are also counted Index: [0] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 [1] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101 [2] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102 [3] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103 [4] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104 [5] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105 Dependency: The parameter can only be written into for p0097 = 0. To perform an automatic device configuration run, an index of the device target topology must be set to the value of the device actual topology in r0098 for acknowledgement. An index of the device actual topology with a value other than 0 must be selected. Refer to: p0097, r0098 Refer to: A01330 Note: The parameter can only be set to the values 0, the value of the actual device topology, the value of the actual device target topology and FFFFFFFF hex. If the value 0 is displayed in all of the indices, then the system has still not been commissioned. The value FFFFFFFF hex indicates that the topology was not generated by the automatic device configuration but was commissioned using the commissioning software (e.g. using parameter download). p0100 IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(1) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings (e.g. rated motor power, p0307) are expressed in [kW] or [hp]. Depending on the selection, the rated motor frequency (p0310) is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz. For p0100 = 0, the following applies: The power factor (p0308) should be parameterized. For p0100 = 1, the following applies: The efficiency (p0309) should be parameterized. Value: 0: 1: IEC-Motor (50 Hz, SI units) NEMA motor (60 Hz, US units) Dependency: If p0100 is changed, all of the rated motor parameters are reset. Only then are possible unit changeovers made. The units of all motor parameters are changed that are involved in the selection of IEC or NEMA (e.g. r0206, p0307, p0316, r0333, r0334, p0341, p0344, r1493, r1969). Refer to: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0320, p0322, p0323, p0335, r0336, r0337, p1800 Note: The parameter can only be changed for vector control (p0107). The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-69 Parameters List of parameters p0101[0...23] Drive object numbers / DO numbers CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 62 Factory setting 0 Description: The parameter contains the object number via which every drive object can be addressed. The number of an existing drive object is entered into each index. Value = 0: No drive object is defined. Index: [0] = Drive object number Control Unit [1] = Drive object number object 1 [2] = Drive object number object 2 [3] = Drive object number object 3 [4] = Drive object number object 4 [5] = Drive object number object 5 [6] = Drive object number object 6 [7] = Drive object number object 7 [8] = Drive object number object 8 [9] = Drive object number object 9 [10] = Drive object number object 10 [11] = Drive object number object 11 [12] = Drive object number object 12 [13] = Drive object number object 13 [14] = Drive object number object 14 [15] = Drive object number object 15 [16] = Drive object number object 16 [17] = Drive object number object 17 [18] = Drive object number object 18 [19] = Drive object number object 19 [20] = Drive object number object 20 [21] = Drive object number object 21 [22] = Drive object number object 22 [23] = Drive object number object 23 Note: The numbers are automatically assigned once and can no longer be changed as long as the object has not been deleted. In the commissioning software, this object number cannot be entered using the expert list, but is automatically assigned when inserting an object. r0102[0...1] Number of drive objects / DO count CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of existing or existing and prepared drive objects. Index: [0] = Existing drive objects [1] = Existing and prepared drive objects Dependency: Refer to: p0101 Note: The numbers of the drive objects are in p0101. Index 0: Displays the number of drive objects that have already been set up. Index 1: Displays the number of drive objects that have already been set up and, in addition, the drive objects that still have to be set up. 1-70 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0103 Application-specific view / Appl_spec view B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting - Description: Displays the application-specific view of the individual drive object. Dependency: Refer to: p0107, r0107 p0103[0...23] Application-specific view / Appl_spec view CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(2) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 999 Factory setting 0 Description: The application-specific view of an existing drive object is entered into each index. The parameter cannot be changed. Dependency: Refer to: p0107, r0107 Note: In the non-volatile memory, the application-specific views are defined in files with the following structure: PDxxxyyy.ACX xxx: Application-specific view (p0103) yyy: Type of drive object (p0107) Example: PD052011.ACX --> "011" stands for the drive object, type SERVO --> "052" is the number of the view for this drive object p0105 Activate/de-activate drive object / DO act/deact B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Setting to activate/de-activate a drive object. Value: 0: 1: 2: Recommend.: After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316. Dependency: Refer to: r0106 De-activate drive object Activate drive object Drive object, de-activate and not present Refer to: A01314, A01316 Caution: When activating drive objects with the safety functions enabled, the following applies: After reactivating, a warm restart (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2, 3) or POWER ON should be carried out. Notice: The following applies when activating: If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed. Note: Re value = 0, 2: When a drive object is deactivated it no longer outputs any errors. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-71 Parameters List of parameters If value = 0: All components of the drive object were completely commissioned and are deactivated using this value. They can be removed from the DRIVE-CLiQ without any error. If value = 1: All components of the drive object must be available for error-free operation. If value = 2: Components of a drive object in a project generated offline and set to this value must never be inserted in the actual topology from the very start. This means that the components are marked to be bypassed in the DRIVE-CLiQ line. For components that comprise several individual components (e.g. Double Motor Modules), it is not permissible to set just one subset to this value. p0105 Activate/de-activate drive object / DO act/deact CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: Setting to activate/de-activate a drive object. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: r0106 Notice: The following applies when activating: De-activate drive object Activate drive object If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed. p0105 Activate/de-activate drive object / DO act/deact TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Setting to activate/de-activate a drive object. Value: 0: 1: 2: Recommend.: After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316. Dependency: Refer to: r0106 Warning: Refer to: A01314, A01316 A drive that is moved by simulating the inputs of a Terminal Module is brought to a standstill while this parameter is being changed over. Notice: The following applies when activating: De-activate drive object Activate drive object Drive object, de-activate and not present If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed. Note: Re value = 0, 2: When a drive object is deactivated it no longer outputs any errors. If value = 0: All components of the drive object were completely commissioned and are deactivated using this value. They can be removed from the DRIVE-CLiQ without any error. If value = 1: All components of the drive object must be available for error-free operation. 1-72 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters If value = 2: Components of a drive object in a project generated offline and set to this value must never be inserted in the actual topology from the very start. This means that the components are marked to be bypassed in the DRIVE-CLiQ line. For components that comprise several individual components (e.g. Double Motor Modules), it is not permissible to set just one subset to this value. p0105 Activate/de-activate drive object / DO act/deact TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Setting to activate/de-activate a drive object. Value: 0: 1: 2: Recommend.: After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316. Dependency: Refer to: r0106 De-activate drive object Activate drive object Drive object, de-activate and not present Refer to: A01314, A01316 Caution: TM54F can only be de-activated if all of the drives assigned to it via P10010 have been de-activated or safety on the assigned drives has not be enabled. When activating drive objects with the safety functions enabled, the following applies: After reactivating, a warm restart (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2, 3) or POWER ON should be carried out. Notice: The following applies when activating: If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed. Note: Re value = 0, 2: When a drive object is deactivated it no longer outputs any errors. If value = 0: All components of the drive object were completely commissioned and are deactivated using this value. They can be removed from the DRIVE-CLiQ without any error. If value = 1: All components of the drive object must be available for error-free operation. If value = 2: Components of a drive object in a project generated offline and set to this value must never be inserted in the actual topology from the very start. This means that the components are marked to be bypassed in the DRIVE-CLiQ line. For components that comprise several individual components (e.g. Double Motor Modules), it is not permissible to set just one subset to this value. r0106 Drive object active/inactive / DO act/inact B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting - Description: Displays the "active/inactive" state of a drive object. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p0105 Drive object inactive Drive object active (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-73 Parameters List of parameters r0107 Drive object type / DO type B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 600 Factory setting - Description: Displays the type of each drive object. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 30: 35: 40: 41: 42: 51: 52: 54: 70: 100: 101: 102: 150: 200: 201: 202: 203: 204: 205: 206: 207: 208: 254: 300: 600: Dependency: Refer to: p0103, r0103 1-74 SINAMICS S SINAMICS G SINAMICS I SINAMICS NX/CX32 SINAMICS GM SINAMICS DC SINAMICS GL SINAMICS S110 ACTIVE INFEED CONTROL SERVO VECTOR VECTORMV VECTORGL VECTOR3P VECTORSL DC_CTRL VECTORM2C VECTORDM SMART INFEED CONTROL BASIC INFEED CONTROL BRAKE MODULE M2C ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLMV BASIC INFEED CONTROLMV ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLM2C SINAMICS G120 230 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector) SINAMICSG120 240_2 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector) SINAMICSG120 G120D(SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector) HLA TB30 (Terminal Board) SINAMICS SL SINAMICS MV DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module TM31 (Terminal Module) TM41 (Terminal Module) TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module) TM15 (Terminal Module) TM15 (Terminal Module for SINAMICS) TM54F - Master (Terminal Module) TM54F - Slave (Terminal Module) TM120 (Terminal Module) TM150 (Terminal Module) CU-LINK ENCODER SINAMICS V60-G2 V80-G2 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0107[0...23] Drive object type / DO type CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(2) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 600 Factory setting 0 Description: The type of an existing drive object is entered into each index. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 30: 35: 40: 41: 42: 51: 52: 54: 70: 100: 101: 102: 150: 200: 201: 202: 203: 204: 205: 206: 207: 208: 254: 300: 600: Index: [0] = Drive object type, Control Unit [1] = Drive object type, object 1 [2] = Drive object type, object 2 [3] = Drive object type, object 3 [4] = Drive object type, object 4 [5] = Drive object type, object 5 [6] = Drive object type, object 6 SINAMICS S SINAMICS G SINAMICS I SINAMICS NX/CX32 SINAMICS GM SINAMICS DC SINAMICS GL SINAMICS S110 ACTIVE INFEED CONTROL SERVO VECTOR VECTORMV VECTORGL VECTOR3P VECTORSL DC_CTRL VECTORM2C VECTORDM SMART INFEED CONTROL BASIC INFEED CONTROL BRAKE MODULE M2C ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLMV BASIC INFEED CONTROLMV ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLM2C SINAMICS G120 230 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector) SINAMICSG120 240_2 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector) SINAMICSG120 G120D(SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector) HLA TB30 (Terminal Board) SINAMICS SL SINAMICS MV DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module TM31 (Terminal Module) TM41 (Terminal Module) TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module) TM15 (Terminal Module) TM15 (Terminal Module for SINAMICS) TM54F - Master (Terminal Module) TM54F - Slave (Terminal Module) TM120 (Terminal Module) TM150 (Terminal Module) CU-LINK ENCODER SINAMICS V60-G2 V80-G2 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-75 Parameters List of parameters [7] = Drive object type, object 7 [8] = Drive object type, object 8 [9] = Drive object type, object 9 [10] = Drive object type, object 10 [11] = Drive object type, object 11 [12] = Drive object type, object 12 [13] = Drive object type, object 13 [14] = Drive object type, object 14 [15] = Drive object type, object 15 [16] = Drive object type, object 16 [17] = Drive object type, object 17 [18] = Drive object type, object 18 [19] = Drive object type, object 19 [20] = Drive object type, object 20 [21] = Drive object type, object 21 [22] = Drive object type, object 22 [23] = Drive object type, object 23 Dependency: Refer to: p0103, r0103 Caution: If you change this parameter and exit the device commissioning mode, then the complete software will be set up again and all of the previous drive parameter settings are deleted. Note: The number (p0101) and the associated drive object type are in the same index. For SINAMICS S a drive object type can only be changed between SERVO and VECTOR. If you change the parameter and exit drive start-up (p0009 from 2 to 0) the drive parameters are set up again. r0108 Drive objects, function module / DO function module B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object. Bit field: Bit 15 18 26 28 31 Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning. Signal name Parallel connection / Parallel Free function blocks / FBLOCKS Braking Module external / Brk Mod ext Cooling unit / Cool_unit PROFINET / PROFINET 1 signal Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated 0 signal Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated FP - p0108[0...23] Drive objects, function module / DO function module CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(2) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: The function module of an existing drive object is entered into each index (see p0101, p0107). The following bits are available for the Control Unit (Index 0): Bit 18: Free function blocks Bit 29: CAN Bit 30: COMM BOARD Bit 31: PROFINET 1-76 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters For all other drive objects (Index > 0), the significance of the bits should be taken from the display parameters r0108 of the drive object. Index: [0] = Function module Control Unit [1] = Function module object 1 [2] = Function module object 2 [3] = Function module object 3 [4] = Function module object 4 [5] = Function module object 5 [6] = Function module object 6 [7] = Function module object 7 [8] = Function module object 8 [9] = Function module object 9 [10] = Function module object 10 [11] = Function module object 11 [12] = Function module object 12 [13] = Function module object 13 [14] = Function module object 14 [15] = Function module object 15 [16] = Function module object 16 [17] = Function module object 17 [18] = Function module object 18 [19] = Function module object 19 [20] = Function module object 20 [21] = Function module object 21 [22] = Function module object 22 [23] = Function module object 23 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning. Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 Bit 25 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 Bit 30 Bit 31 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - 1-77 Parameters List of parameters r0108 Drive objects, function module / DO function module ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object. Bit field: Bit 12 18 31 Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning. r0108 Drive objects, function module / DO function module Signal name Linear encoder / Lin_enc Free function blocks / FBLOCKS PROFINET / PROFINET TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - 1 signal Activated Activated Activated 0 signal Not activated Not activated Not activated Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object. Bit field: Bit 18 31 Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning. r0108 Drive objects, function module / DO function module VECTOR_G Signal name Free function blocks / FBLOCKS PROFINET / PROFINET 1 signal Activated Activated 0 signal Not activated Not activated Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object. Bit field: Bit 02 08 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 24 28 29 31 Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning. Signal name Closed-loop speed/torque control / n/M Extended setpoint channel / Extended set Safety rotary axis / Safety rot Extended brake control / Extended brk Parallel connection / Parallel Technology controller / Tech_ctrl Extended messages/monitoring / Ext msg Free function blocks / FBLOCKS Software gating unit / SW_gating unit PM330 / PM330 Cooling unit / Cool_unit CAN / CAN PROFINET / PROFINET 1 signal Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated 0 signal Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated FP - FP - FP - The following bits are only automatically set, if the power units are detected with the appropriate properties. Bit 16: Parallel connection of the same power units (only automatically set for G150/G130). Bit 20: Software gating unit (only automatically set when power units are connected in parallel). Bit 24: Type PM330 power units are presently not supported. 1-78 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit 26: Type PM250 power units with F3E energy recovery are only supported for S120 CRANES. Bit 28: Power units with liquid cooling. r0110[0...2] Basic sampling times / t_basis CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 10000.00 [s] Factory setting - [s] Description: Displays the basic sampling times. The sampling times are set using p0112 and p0115. The values for the basic sampling times are determined as a result of these settings. Index: [0] = Basic sampling time 0 [1] = Basic sampling time 1 [2] = Basic sampling time 2 r0111 Basic sampling time selection / t_basis sel B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, HUB, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting - Description: Displays the selected basic sampling time for this drive object. Dependency: Refer to: r0110 r0111 Basic sampling time selection / t_basis sel TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting - Description: Displays the selected basic sampling time for this drive object. Dependency: Refer to: r0110 Note: For TB30 and the Terminal Module, this parameter has no significance. For TB30 and certain Terminal Modules, the sampling times can be set using p4099 (see description of p4099 for the Module in question). p0112 Sampling times pre-setting p0115 / t_sample for p0115 B_INF Description: Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 5 Factory setting 3 Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115. The clock cycles for the current controller / speed controller / flux controller / setpoint channel / position controller / positioning / technology controller are pre-assigned as follows: (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-79 Parameters List of parameters SINAMICS S, servo drive: p0112 = 1: 250 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 s (for chassis units) p0112 = 2: 125 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 s p0112 = 3: 125 / 125 / 125 / 4000 / 1000 / 4000 / 4000 s p0112 = 4: 62.5 / 62.5 / 62.5 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s p0112 = 5: 31.25 / 31.25 / 31.25 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s SINAMICS S, Active Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1): p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 s (pre-setting for the rated pulse frequency = 2.5 kHz) p0112 = 2: 250 / - / - / 2000 s (pre-setting for the rated pulse frequency = 4.0 kHz) p0112 = 3: 125 / - / - / 2000 s p0112 = 4: 125 / - / - / 1000 s p0112 = 5: 125 / - / - / 500 s SINAMICS S, Smart Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1): p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 s (pre-setting for the rated pulse frequency = 2.5 kHz) p0112 = 2: 250 / - / - / 2000 s (pre-setting for the rated pulse frequency = 4.0 kHz) p0112 = 3: 250 / - / - / 2000 s p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 1000 s p0112 = 5: Not possible SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, booksize: p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 2000 s SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, chassis: p0112 = 1: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s p0112 = 2: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s (pre-setting) p0112 = 3: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s p0112 = 4: Not possible p0112 = 5: Not possible SINAMICS S/G, vector drive (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1 and not for PM340): p0112 = 1: 400 / 1600 / 1600 / 1600 / 3200 / 3200 / 3200 s (for rated pulse frequency = 1.25, 2.5 kHz) p0112 = 2: 250 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 s p0112 = 3: 250 / 1000 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 s (for rated pulse frequency = 2.0, 4.0 kHz) SINAMICS S, vector drive: p0112 = 4: 250 / 500 / 1000 / 500 / 1000 / 2000 / 2000 s p0112 = 5: 250 / 250 / 1000 / 500 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Expert xLow Low Standard High xHigh Recommend.: When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are re-calculated using p0340 = 4. Dependency: It is prohibited to select a parameter value from p0112 if the associated current controller clock cycle cannot set (e.g. p0112 = 1 is not possible for a vector drive and PM340 power unit). If, for a servo drive, p112 = 5 is set, then the pulse frequency p1800 is preassigned 8 kHz. For D410-2 and vector drive, the current controller sampling time can only be permanently changed for p0112 = 0. Refer to: p0092 Note: For p0112 = 0 (expert) the individual sampling times in p0115 can be adjusted. The setting p0112 = 1 cannot be set for a vector drive with power unit type PM340 (refer to r0203). 1-80 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0112 Sampling times pre-setting p0115 / t_sample for p0115 VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 3 Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115. The clock cycles for the current controller / speed controller / flux controller / setpoint channel / position controller / positioning / technology controller are pre-assigned as follows: SINAMICS S, servo drive: p0112 = 1: 250 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 s (for chassis units) p0112 = 2: 125 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 s p0112 = 3: 125 / 125 / 125 / 4000 / 1000 / 4000 / 4000 s p0112 = 4: 62.5 / 62.5 / 62.5 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s p0112 = 5: 31.25 / 31.25 / 31.25 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s SINAMICS S, Active Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1): p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 s (pre-setting for the rated pulse frequency = 2.5 kHz) p0112 = 2: 250 / - / - / 2000 s (pre-setting for the rated pulse frequency = 4.0 kHz) p0112 = 3: 125 / - / - / 2000 s p0112 = 4: 125 / - / - / 1000 s p0112 = 5: 125 / - / - / 500 s SINAMICS S, Smart Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1): p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 s (pre-setting for the rated pulse frequency = 2.5 kHz) p0112 = 2: 250 / - / - / 2000 s (pre-setting for the rated pulse frequency = 4.0 kHz) p0112 = 3: 250 / - / - / 2000 s p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 1000 s p0112 = 5: Not possible SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, booksize: p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 2000 s SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, chassis: p0112 = 1: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s p0112 = 2: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s (pre-setting) p0112 = 3: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s p0112 = 4: Not possible p0112 = 5: Not possible SINAMICS S/G, vector drive (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1 and not for PM340): p0112 = 1: 400 / 1600 / 1600 / 1600 / 3200 / 3200 / 3200 s (for rated pulse frequency = 1.25, 2.5 kHz) p0112 = 2: 250 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 s p0112 = 3: 250 / 1000 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 s (for rated pulse frequency = 2.0, 4.0 kHz) SINAMICS S, vector drive: p0112 = 4: 250 / 500 / 1000 / 500 / 1000 / 2000 / 2000 s p0112 = 5: 250 / 250 / 1000 / 500 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Expert xLow Low Standard Recommend.: When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are re-calculated using p0340 = 4. Dependency: It is prohibited to select a parameter value from p0112 if the associated current controller clock cycle cannot set (e.g. p0112 = 1 is not possible for a vector drive and PM340 power unit). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-81 Parameters List of parameters If, for a servo drive, p112 = 5 is set, then the pulse frequency p1800 is preassigned 8 kHz. For D410-2 and vector drive, the current controller sampling time can only be permanently changed for p0112 = 0. Refer to: p0092 Note: For p0112 = 0 (expert) the individual sampling times in p0115 can be adjusted. The setting p0112 = 1 cannot be set for a vector drive with power unit type PM340 (refer to r0203). p0113 Minimum pulse frequency, selection / f_puls min sel VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.000 [kHz] Max 2.000 [kHz] Factory setting 2.000 [kHz] Description: The current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is pre-assigned by selecting the minimum pulse frequency. Dependency: The parameter can only be changed with p0112 = 0 (expert). For isochronous operation (p0092 = 1) the parameter can only be set so that a current controller clock cycle of 125 s is obtained as an integer number. The required pulse frequency can be set in p1800 after commissioning (p0009 = p0010 = 0). Refer to: p0112, r0114, p0115, p1800 Note: The current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is set to the inverse value of twice the minimum pulse frequency. For p0113 = 1.0 kHz, p0115[0] = 500 s is set, for p0113 = 2.0 kHz, p0115[0] = 250 s is set. The current controller sampling time (p0115[0]), calculated from the pulse frequency, is set in a grid of 1.25 s. For a power unit type PM340 (refer to r0203), only the values 1.0 and 2.0 kHz can be set. 1.0 kHz can be set in order to achieve a current controller clock cycle of 500s. However, in this case, the minimum pulse frequency p1800 is limited to 2 kHz. r0114[0...9] VECTOR_G Description: Minimum pulse frequency, recommended / f_puls min recom Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kHz] Max - [kHz] Factory setting - [kHz] Displays the recommended values (indices 0 and 1) for the minimum pulse frequency (p0113). If the system rejects a change to p0113 because the value to be used lies outside the permitted value range, then instead the recommended value from r0114 can be used. Index: [0] = If only the actual drive is changed [1] = If all drives connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ line are changed [2] = 2. possible pulse frequency [3] = 3. possible pulse frequency [4] = 4. possible pulse frequency [5] = 5. possible pulse frequency [6] = 6. possible pulse frequency [7] = 7. possible pulse frequency [8] = 8. possible pulse frequency [9] = 9. possible pulse frequency Dependency: Refer to: p0113 Note: After exiting commissioning (p0009 = p0010 = 0), the pulse frequencies calculated from the sampling time p115[0] are displayed in indices 1 to 9. If additional restrictions do not apply (e.g. due to having selected an output filter), these can be entered into p1800. The maximum pulse frequency of the power units was already taken into account in r0114. A value of 0 kHz does not define a recommended pulse frequency. 1-82 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0115[0...6] Sampling times for internal control loops / t_sample int ctrl B_INF Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 16000.00 [s] Factory setting [0] 125.00 [s] [1] 125.00 [s] [2] 125.00 [s] [3] 4000.00 [s] [4] 1000.00 [s] [5] 4000.00 [s] [6] 4000.00 [s] Description: Sets the sampling times for the control loops. Recommend.: When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are re-calculated using p0340 = 4. Index: [0] = Current controller [1] = Speed controller [2] = Flux controller [3] = Setpoint channel [4] = Pos controller [5] = Positioning [6] = Technology controller Dependency: The sampling times can only be separately set if p0112 is 0 (expert). If a sampling time is modified in the expert mode, then all of the sampling times with higher indices are automatically changed in the same ratio as the sampling time itself was changed. Slower time slices are only taken if the calculated sampling time is also permitted. Upper limit is 8 ms. The default setting is made using p0112 and can only be individually changed for p0112 = 0 (expert). Higher-level controls must be calculated in integral ratios to lower-level controls (e.g. p0115[1] = N * p0115[0]; where N is an integer number). The sampling time of the speed controller (p0115[1]) can have as a maximum a value of 800% of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). For servo drives, the maximum sampling time of the current controller is 250 s and for vector drives, 500 s. The sampling times for setpoint channel (p0115[3]), position controller (p0115[4]), positioning (p0115[5]) and technology controller (p0115[6]) must have at least 2x the value of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). Refer to: r0110, r0111, p0112 Note: For function modules that can be activated (e.g. technology controller), the parameters values are pre-assigned. For the Active Line Module (ALM) and Smart Line Module (SLM), the current and DC link voltage controllers operate with the same sampling time. For ALM/SLM the maximum current controller clock cycle is 400 s. For the Basic Line Module (BLM), the DC link voltage measurement operates in the current controller sampling time. For BLM booksize, only the current controller sampling time of 250 s is permitted. For BLM chassis, only the current controller sampling time of 2000 s is permitted. For power unit type PM340 (r0203), only current controller sampling times of 62.5 s, 125 s, 250 s and 500 s can be set. The maximum current controller clock cycle for servo drives and the minimum current controller clock cycle for vector drives is 250 s. If sampling times in p0115 are individually changed for p0112 = 0 (expert) then it must always be observed that the selected sampling times of the setpoint channel (p0115[3]), position controller (p0115[4]), positioning (p0115[5]) and technology controller (p0115[6]) are always greater than or equal to twice the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-83 Parameters List of parameters p0115[0] Sampling time for supplementary functions / t_samp suppl_fct CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 16000.00 [s] Factory setting 4000.00 [s] Description: Sets the basic sampling time for supplementary functions (DCC, free function blocks) on this object. Only setting values that are an integer multiple of 125 s are permissible. Index: [0] = Basic sampl. time p0115[0] Sampling time for speed detection / t_sample n_det ENC Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 125.00 [s] Max 500.00 [s] Factory setting 125.00 [s] Description: Sets the sampling times for speed detection. Index: [0] = Basic sampl. time p0115[0] Sampling time for supplementary functions / t_samp suppl_fct TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: C1(3) Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 16000.00 [s] Factory setting 4000.00 [s] Sets the sampling times for supplementary functions (DCC, free function blocks) on this object. Only setting values that are an integer multiple of 125 s are permissible. Index: [0] = Basic sampl. time Note: This parameter only applies to set the sampling times of possible supplementary functions. The sampling times for inputs/outputs must be set in p4099. p0115[0...6] VECTOR_G Sampling times for internal control loops / t_sample int ctrl Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 16000.00 [s] Factory setting [0] 250.00 [s] [1] 1000.00 [s] [2] 1000.00 [s] [3] 1000.00 [s] [4] 2000.00 [s] [5] 4000.00 [s] [6] 4000.00 [s] Description: Sets the sampling times for the control loops. Recommend.: When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are re-calculated using p0340 = 4. The default setting is made using p0112 and can only be individually changed for p0112 = 0 (expert). 1-84 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters When adjusting the current controller sampling time, it is recommended to use values that are an integer multiple of 6.25 s. The sampling times of analog or digital inputs/outputs (see p0799, p4099) should be set to an integer multiple of the current controller sampling time. If the current controller sampling time is to be reduced with respect to the default setting (e.g. < 250 s), then it is recommended that the motor data identification (standstill measurement) is executed beforehand, in order to avoid a thermal overload of the power unit as a result of high pulse frequencies (p1800). Index: [0] = Current controller [1] = Speed controller [2] = Flux controller [3] = Setpoint channel [4] = Pos controller [5] = Positioning [6] = Technology controller Dependency: Depending on the number and type of vector drives, the sampling times are preset differently. The sampling times can only be separately set if p0112 is 0 (expert). If a sampling time is modified in the expert mode, then all of the sampling times with higher indices are automatically changed in the same ratio as the sampling time itself was changed. Slower time slices are only taken if the calculated sampling time is also permitted. Upper limit is 8 ms. Higher-level controls must be calculated in integral ratios to lower-level controls (e.g. p0115[1] = N * p0115[0]; where N is an integer number). The sampling time of the speed controller (p0115[1]) can have as a maximum a value of 800% of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). The sampling times for setpoint channel (p0115[3]), position controller (p0115[4]), positioning (p0115[5]) and technology controller (p0115[6]) must have at least 2x the value of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). The sampling time of the current controller p0115[0] and pulse frequency p1800 are checked at each parameter download, and when necessary changed, if, for p0092 = 1, the current controller clock cycle is not an integral multiple of 125 s or if p0112 is set > 1. For p0092 = 0, the check with p0112 = 0 (= expert) can be deactivated. Refer to: r0110, r0111, p0112 Note: For function modules that can be activated (e.g. technology controller), the parameters values are pre-assigned. For power unit type PM340 (r0203), only current controller sampling times of 250 s or 500 s can be set. The minimum current controller clock cycle is otherwise 125 s (SINAMICS G: 250 s), the maximum current controller clock cycle is 500 s. The minimum speed controller clock cycle for SINAMICS G is 1 ms. Current controller clock cycles less than 250 s are restricted by the number of drives or by the number of power units connected in parallel (also see F01340). For chassis power units connected in parallel, it is recommended to connect the DRIVE-CLiQ cables (partially) in parallel between the Control Unit and the individual Motor Modules. For D410-2, the current controller sampling times can only be permanently changed with p0112 = 0 (e.g. to 250 s). r0116[0...1] Drive object clock cycle recommended / DO_clock recom B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TB30, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [s] Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Description: Displays the recommended sampling time for the drive objects. r00116[0] = recommended sampling time: Recommended value which would then make the complete system operational. r00116[1] = recommended sampling time: Recommended value, which after changing other clock cycles on the DRIVE-CLiQ line, would result in an operational system. Index: [0] = Change only for the actual drive object [1] = Changing all objects on the DRIVE-CLiQ line Dependency: Refer to: p0115 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-85 Parameters List of parameters p0117 Current controller computing dead time mode / I_ctrl t_dead mode CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 6 Description: Sets the mode for the computing dead time of the current controller. 0: Offset (shifted) clocking, minimum computing dead time of each drive, automatic setting 1: Clocking at the same time, the dead time aligns itself to the dead time of the latest drive, automatic setting 2: Manual setting of the computing dead time, early transfer 3: Manual setting of the computing dead time, late transfer 4-6: As for 0-2, however, no early transfers are set for vectors Dependency: Refer to: p0118 Refer to: A02100 Note: The mode change is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again. Re p0117 = 0: The times when the setpoints become effective for the individual controls is automatically and individually determined. Another computing dead time is set for each control (closed-loop) (p0118). Current is impressed for the individual controls without any offset with respect to time (improved EMC compatibility). Re p0117 = 1: The latest closed-loop control determines when the setpoints for each of the individual controls become active. The same computing dead time is set for each control (p0118). Current is impressed (flows) for the individual controls without any offset with respect to time. Re p0117 = 2: The computing dead time is manually set. The user must optimize the value in p0118. Re p0117 = 3: The computing dead time is manually set. The user must optimize the value in p0118. Re p0117 = 4 ... 6: Behavior as for p0117 = 0 ... 2, however for vectors, the earliest times are not determined. p0118 Current controller computing dead time / I_ctrl t_dead B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 2000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: This parameter is pre-set as a function of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) and normally does not have to be changed. Dependency: Refer to: p0117 Refer to: A02100 Note: For p0118 <= 0.005 s, the current controller output is delayed by a complete current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]). After p0118 has been changed, we recommend that the current controller is adapted (p1715). 1-86 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0120 Number of Power unit Data Sets (PDS) / PDS count B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 8 Factory setting 1 Sets the number of Power unit Data Sets (PDS). The value corresponds to the number of power units connected together for a parallel circuit configuration. Dependency: Refer to: p0107, r0107 Note: This parameter is only significant for drive objects A_INFEED and VECTOR with a parallel circuit configuration. p0121[0...n] Power unit component number / PU comp_no B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 The power unit data set is assigned to a power unit using this parameter. This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a power unit. Dependency: Refer to: p0107, r0107 Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. p0124[0...n] Power unit detection via LED / PU detection LED B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Detects the power unit assigned to this drive and data set. Note: While p0124 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate power unit. For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. p0124[0...23] Main component detection using LED / M_comp detect LED CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Detection of the main components of the drive object selected via the index. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-87 Parameters List of parameters p0125[0...n] Activate/de-activate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(4), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Setting to activate/de-activate a power unit component. Value: 0: 1: 2: Recommend.: After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317. Dependency: Refer to: r0126 De-activate component Activate component Component, de-activate and not present Refer to: A01314, A01317 Caution: For a parallel connection, the following applies: When deactivating individual power units using p0125, it is not permissible that the power units of the parallel connection involved are connected. Infeed units should be disconnected from the line supply (for example, using a contactor). Motor feeder cables should be disconnected. In addition, defective power units should be disconnected from the DC link. Caution: It is not permissible to de-activate drive objects with safety functions enabled. Note: The activation of a component can be rejected if the component was inserted for the first time. In this case, it is only possible to activate the component when the pulses for all of the drive objects are inhibited. For units connected in parallel, when one of the power units is de-activated, then the enable in p7001 is withdrawn. Re value = 0, 2: When a component is deactivated it no longer outputs any errors. If value = 0: The component was completely commissioned and is deactivated using this value. It can be removed from the DRIVE-CLiQ without any error. If value = 1: The component must be available for error-free operation. If value = 2: A component in a project generated offline and set to this value must never be inserted in the actual topology from the very start. This means that the component is marked to be bypassed in the DRIVE-CLiQ line. For components that comprise several individual components (e.g. Double Motor Modules), it is not permissible to set just one subset to this value. r0126[0...n] B_INF, VECTOR_G Power unit components active/inactive / PU comp act/inact Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting - Description: Displays the "active/inactive" state of a power unit component. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p0105, p0125, p0897 1-88 Component inactive Component active (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0127[0...n] B_INF, VECTOR_G Power unit version EPROM data / PU EPROM version Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the power unit. Dependency: Refer to: r0147, r0157 Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. r0128[0...n] Power unit, firmware version / PU FW version B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the firmware version of the power unit. Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198 Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. p0130 Number of Motor Data Sets (MDS) / MDS count VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 16 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of Motor Data Sets (MDS). p0131[0...n] Motor component number / Mot comp_no VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 The motor data set is assigned to a motor using this parameter. This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a motor. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-89 Parameters List of parameters p0139[0...2] Copy Motor Data Set MDS / Copy MDS VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(15) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 31 Factory setting 0 Description: Copying a Motor Data Set (MDS) into another. Index: [0] = Source motor data set [1] = Target motor data set [2] = Start copying procedure Note: Procedure: 1. In Index 0, enter which motor data set should be copied. 2. In Index 1, enter the motor data set data that is to be copied into. 3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1. p0139[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed. When copying, p0131 is not taken into account. p0140 Number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS) / EDS count ENC Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS). Note: When parameterizing the drive with "no encoder" there must be at least one encoder data set (p0140 >= 1). p0140 Number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS) / EDS count VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 16 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS). Note: When parameterizing the drive with "no encoder" there must be at least one encoder data set (p0140 >= 1). p0141[0...n] Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number / Enc_interf comp_no ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704, 8570 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder evaluation (e.g. SMC). This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder evaluation. Note: If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are identical. For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142). 1-90 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0142[0...n] Encoder component number / Encoder comp_no ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 Description: This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder. This assignment is made using the unique component number that was assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder. Note: If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are identical. For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142). p0144[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Sensor Module detection via LED / SM detection LED Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Detects the Sensor Module assigned to this drive and data set. Note: While p0144 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Sensor Module. p0145[0...n] Activate/de-activate encoder interface / Enc_intf act/deact ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(4), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Setting to activate/de-activate an encoder interface (Sensor Module). Value: 0: 1: 2: Recommend.: After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317. Dependency: Refer to: r0146 De-activate component Activate component Component, de-activate and not present Refer to: A01314, A01317 Note: The de-activation of an encoder interface corresponds to the"parking encoder" function and has the same effect. The activation of a component can be rejected if the component was inserted for the first time. In this case, it is only possible to activate the component when the pulses for all of the drive objects are inhibited. With the encoder interface for encoder 1 (motor encoder), the relevant drive object for writing the parameter must be in the "Ready for operation" state. With the encoder interface for encoders 2 and 3, the parameter can also be written during operation. Re value = 0, 2: When a component is deactivated it no longer outputs any errors. If value = 0: The component was completely commissioned and is deactivated using this value. It can be removed from the DRIVE-CLiQ without any error. If value = 1: The component must be available for error-free operation. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-91 Parameters List of parameters If value = 2: A component in a project generated offline and set to this value must never be inserted in the actual topology from the very start. For components that comprise several individual components (e.g. Double Motor Modules), it is not permissible to set just one subset to this value. r0146[0...n] Encoder interface active/inactive / Enc_intf act/inact ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting - Description: Displays the "active" or "inactive" state of an encoder interface (Sensor Module). Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p0105, p0145, p0480, p0897 Component inactive Component active r0147[0...n] Sensor Module EEPROM data version / SM EEPROM version ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the version of the EEPROM data of the Sensor Module. Dependency: Refer to: r0127, r0157 Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. r0148[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Sensor Module firmware version / SM FW version Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the firmware version of the Sensor Module. Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0158, r0197, r0198 Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. p0150 Number of VSM data sets / VSM dat_sets qty. VECTOR_G Description: 1-92 Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Sets the number of VSM data sets. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0151[0...1] DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module component number / Hub comp_no HUB Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 Description: This parameter is used to assign the data set to a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only the numbers of components operated as hubs can be entered in these parameters. [0] = DRIVE-CLiQ node 1 [1] = DRIVE-CLiQ node 2 p0151 Terminal Module component number / TM comp_no TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the component number for the Terminal Module. This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a Terminal Module. p0151[0...n] Voltage Sensing Module component number / VSM comp_no VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 Description: The VSM data set is assigned to a VSM evaluation using this parameter. Note: If two VSM are connected at the Motor Module, then the first (p0151[0]) is assigned to the line voltage measurement (see p3801) and the second, to the motor voltage measurement (see p1200). p0154 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module detection via LED / Hub detection LED HUB Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Detects any DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that has been assigned. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-93 Parameters List of parameters p0154 Terminal Module detection via LED / TM detection LED TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Detects the Terminal Module assigned to this drive and data set. Note: While p0154 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Terminal Module. p0155[0...n] Voltage Sensing Module, activate/de-activate / VSM act/deact VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(4), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Setting to activate/de-activate a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Value: 0: 1: 2: Recommend.: After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317. Dependency: Refer to: r0156 De-activate component Activate component Component, de-activate and not present Refer to: A01314, A01317 r0156[0...n] VECTOR_G Voltage Sensing Module, active/inactive / VSM act/inact Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting - Description: Displays the "active" or "inactive" state of a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p0155 r0157 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module EPROM data version / Hub EPROM version HUB Component inactive Component active Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data for the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. 1-94 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0157 Terminal Module EPROM data version / TM EPROM version TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Terminal Module. Dependency: Refer to: r0127, r0147 Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. r0157[0...n] VECTOR_G Voltage Sensing Module, EPROM data version / VSM EPROM version Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. r0158 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module firmware version / Hub FW version HUB Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the firmware version of the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. r0158 Terminal Module firmware version / TM FW version TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the firmware version of the Terminal Module. Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0197, r0198 Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-95 Parameters List of parameters r0158[0...n] Voltage Sensing Module firmware version / VSM FW version VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the firmware version of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0197, r0198 Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. p0161 Option board, component number / Opt board comp_no TB30 Description: Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9100 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 Sets the component number for the option board (e.g. Terminal Board 30). This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an option board. p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count B_INF Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of Command Data Sets (CDS). Note: It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover. p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 2 Max 4 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the number of Command Data Sets (CDS). Note: It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover. p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count VECTOR_G Description: 1-96 Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8565 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 32 Factory setting 1 Sets the number of Drive Data Sets (DDS). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0186[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor Data Sets (MDS) number / MDS number Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 15 Factory setting 0 Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Motor Data Set (MDS). The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned motor data set. p0187[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Encoder 1 encoder data set number / Enc 1 EDS number Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1580, 8570 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 99 Factory setting 99 Assign a drive data set (= index) the corresponding encoder data set (EDS) for encoder 1. The value corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set. Example: Encoder 1 in drive data set 2 should be assigned to encoder data set 0. --> p0187[2] = 0 Note: A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured). p0188[0...n] Encoder 2 encoder data set number / Enc 2 EDS number VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1580, 8570 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 99 Factory setting 99 Description: Assign a drive data set (= index) the corresponding encoder data set (EDS) for encoder 2. The value corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set. Example: Encoder 2 in drive data set 2 should be assigned to encoder data set 1. --> p0188[2] = 1 Note: A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured). p0189[0...n] Encoder 3 encoder data set number / Enc 3 EDS number VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1580, 8570 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 99 Factory setting 99 Assign a drive data set (= index) the corresponding encoder data set (EDS) for encoder 3. The value corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set. Note: A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-97 Parameters List of parameters r0192 Power unit firmware properties / PU FW property B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the properties supported by the power unit firmware. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Signal name Edge modulation possible Free telegram can be selected Smart mode possible for Active Line Module Safety Integrated possible for VECTOR Liquid cooling SERVO pulse frequency changeover, DDSdependent Simulation mode possible Internal armature short-circuit possible Autonomous internal armature short-circuit possible Infeed temperature inputs X21.1/2 Integral scaled to half the gating unit clock cycle freq. Filtering thermal power unit current limit possible DC link compensation possible in power unit PT100 temperature evaluation possible Gating unit with pulse frequency wobbulation possible Compound braking possible Extended voltage range possible Gating unit available with current limitation control Component status possible Temperature evaluation via Motor Module / CU terminals possible Reduced device supply voltage possible Current measurement oversampling available Parking keeping the relevant data is available Internal fan operating hours counter available Software gating unit in the CU is supported Current controller dynamics higher 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes No No - Notice: This information represents the characteristics/features of the power unit firmware. It does not provide information/data about the characteristics/features of the hardware (e.g. bit 06 = 1 means that although the firmware supports "liquid cooling", a power unit with liquid cooling does not have to be used). Note: Re bit 09: The Motor Module supports the internal armature short-circuit. The function is internally required for voltage protection (p1231 = 3). Re bit 10: The Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection. If the "internal voltage protection" function is activated (p1231 = 3) the Motor Module decides autonomously - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the short-circuit is activated. Re bit 23: The component supports the detection of current actual values (and the detection of valve close durations) with double clocking and phase shift. 1-98 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0194[0...n] VECTOR_G VSM properties / VSM properties Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the properties supported by the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Bit field: Bit 00 r0196[0...255] DRIVE-CLiQ component status / DLQ comp status CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Signal name Reserved 1 signal Yes 0 signal No Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - FP - Displays the status of DRIVE-CLiQ components. r0196[0...1]: Not used r0196[2]: Status of DRIVE-CLiQ component with component number 2 ... r0196[255]: Status of DRIVE-CLiQ component with component number 255 Note: Structure of status value: Bits 31 ... 08, 07, 06 ... 04, 03 ... 00 Re Bit 31 ... 08: Reserved Re Bit 07: 1: Part of target topology, 0: Only in actual topology Re Bit 06 ... 04: 1: Active, 0: Inactive or parked Re bit 03 ... 00: 0: Component data not available. 1: Power-up, acyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication (LED = orange). 2: Ready for operation, cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication (LED = green). 3: Alarm (LED = green). 4: Fault (LED = red). 5: Detection via LED and ready for operation (LED = green/orange). 6: Detection via LED and alarm (LED = green/orange). 7: Detection via LED and fault (LED = red/orange). 8: Downloading firmware (LED = green/red at 0.5 Hz). 9: Firmware downloading completed, Waiting for POWER ON (LED = green/red at 2.0 Hz). r0197 Bootloader vers / Bootloader vers CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the bootloader version. Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0198 Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-99 Parameters List of parameters r0198[0...1] BIOS/EEPROM data version / BIOS/EEPROM vers CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the BIOS and EEPROM data version. r0198[0]: BIOS version r0198[1]: EEPROM data version Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197 Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. p0199[0...24] All objects Description: Drive object name / DO name Can be changed: C1 Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Freely assignable name for a drive object. In the commissioning software, this name cannot be entered using the expert list, but is specified in the configuration assistant. The object name can be subsequently modified in the Project Navigator using standard Windows resources. Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. r0200[0...n] Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the unique code number of the power unit. Note: r0200 = p0201: No power unit found For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. p0201[0...n] B_INF Power unit code number / PU code no Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used. Dependency: Refer to: F07815 Note: The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time. When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201. The power unit commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code numbers are identical (p0010 = 2). For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. 1-100 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0201[0...n] VECTOR_G Power unit code number / PU code no Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used. Dependency: Refer to: F07815 Notice: When p0201 = 10000, the rated power unit data is reloaded and dependent parameters are set (e.g. p0205, p0210, p0230, p0857, p1800). p0201 is then automatically assigned the value of r0200 if the code number of the power unit could be read. A warm start must be performed after this procedure (automatically if necessary). Note: The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time. When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201. The power unit commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code numbers are identical (p0010 = 2). However, if the comparator in p9906 or p9908 is at 2 (low) or 3 (minimum), the power unit commissioning is automatically set to p0201 = r0200 upon exiting. When the code number is changed, the connection voltage (p0210) is checked and, if necessary, adjusted. For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. r0203[0...n] B_INF, VECTOR_G Actual power unit type / PU actual type Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 2 Max 400 Factory setting - Description: Displays the type of power unit found. Value: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 100: 101: 102: 103: 112: 113: 114: 115: 116: 118: 120: 130: 133: 150: 151: 200: 250: 260: 300: 350: 400: Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. MICROMASTER 440 MICROMASTER 411 MICROMASTER 410 MICROMASTER 436 MICROMASTER 440 PX MICROMASTER 430 SINAMICS S SINAMICS S (value) SINAMICS S (combi) SINAMICS S120M (distributed) PM220 (SINAMICS G120) PM230 (SINAMICS G120) PM240 (SINAMICS G120) PM250 (SINAMICS G120 / S120) PM260 (SINAMICS G120) SINAMICS G120 Px PM340 (SINAMICS S120) PM250D (SINAMICS G120D) SINAMICS G120C SINAMICS G PM330 (SINAMICS G120) SINAMICS GM SINAMICS SM SINAMICS MC SINAMICS GL SINAMICS SL SINAMICS DCM (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-101 Parameters List of parameters r0203[0...15] Firmware package name / FW pkg name CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the name of the firmware package on the memory card/device memory. r0203[0]: Name character 1 ... r0203[15]: Name character 16 For the commissioning software, the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded. Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the properties supported by the power unit hardware. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 12 13 14 Signal name Device type RFI filter available Active Line Module available Smart Line Module available Basic Line Module available with thyristor bridge Basic Line Module available with diode bridge Liquid cooling with cooling unit (chassis PU) F3E regenerative feedback into the line supply Internal Braking Module Different cooling type supported Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported Safety Integrated supported Internal LC output filter 1 signal DC/AC device Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal AC/DC device No No No No FP - Yes No - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No - Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the properties supported by the power unit hardware. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 1-102 Signal name Device type RFI filter available Active Line Module available Smart Line Module available 1 signal DC/AC device Yes Yes Yes 0 signal AC/AC device No No No FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 04 05 06 07 08 09 12 13 14 Basic Line Module available with thyristor bridge Basic Line Module available with diode bridge Liquid cooling with cooling unit (chassis PU) F3E regenerative feedback into the line supply Internal Braking Module Different cooling type supported Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported Safety Integrated supported Internal LC output filter Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No - Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. p0205 Power unit application / PU application VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 7 Factory setting 6 Overloading the load duty cycles applies under the prerequisite that before and after the overload, the drive converter is operated with its base load current - in this case, a load duty cycle of 300 s is used as basis. For booksize drive units, the following applies: Only the setting p0205 = 0 can be selected. In this particular case, the base load current has a load duty cycle of 150 % for 60 s and 176 % for 30 s. For chassis units, the following applies: The base load current for a low overload condition is based on a load duty cycle 110 % for 60 s and 150 % for 10 s. The base load current for a high overload condition is based on a load duty cycle 150 % for 60 s and 160 % for 10 s. Value: 0: 1: 6: 7: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives S1 duty cycle for servo drives (feed drive) S6 duty cycle for servo drives (spindle drive) Note: When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters and the control mode are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has no influence when calculating the thermal overload. p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM. The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970). r0206[0...4] B_INF, VECTOR_G Rated power unit power / PU P_rated Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kW] Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles. Index: [0] = Rated value [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = S1 cont duty cyc [4] = S6 load duty cycle Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp Refer to: p0100, p0205 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-103 Parameters List of parameters r0207[0...4] B_INF, VECTOR_G Rated power unit current / PU PI_rated Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8014 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles. Index: [0] = Rated value [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = S1 cont duty cyc [4] = S6 load duty cycle Dependency: Refer to: p0205 r0208 Rated power unit line supply voltage / PU U_rated B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power unit. r0208 = 400 : 380 - 480 V +/-10 % r0208 = 500 : 500 - 600 V +/-10 % r0208 = 690 : 660 - 690 V +/-10 % For the Basic Line Module (BLM) the following applies: r0208 = 690 : 500 - 690 V +/-10 % r0209[0...4] B_INF, VECTOR_G Power unit, maximum current / PU I_max Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8750, 8850, 8950 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power unit. Index: [0] = Catalog [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = S1 load duty cycle [4] = S6 load duty cycle Dependency: Refer to: p0205 p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage / V_connect B_INF Description: 1-104 Can be changed: C2(1) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8760 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 70 [Vrms] Max 1000 [Vrms] Factory setting 400 [Vrms] Sets the drive unit supply voltage (3-ph. AC). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters The value corresponds to the rms value of the phase-to-phase rated line supply voltage. Dependency: The parameter can be reduced to p0210 = 70 V if p0212.0 is set. Caution: If the line supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may be automatically de-activated in some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating. In this case, an appropriate alarm is output. Notice: When connected to 3-ph. 230 V AC (only booksize units) the following must be observed: - the undervoltage and overvoltage limits change (r0296, r0297). - when using the internal braking chopper of Basic Line Modules (20 or 40 kW) the threshold when the braking chopper becomes active is reduced to 385 V. When using an external braking chopper, it must be ensured that a suitable activation threshold is used. - all of the components connected to this DC link must also be adapted to the low line supply voltage. It is especially important that the rated DC voltage of all of the drives connected to this DC link is set with p0210 (e.g. p0210(SERVO) = 1.35 x p0210(B_INF) = 310 V). - it is not possible to use a Control Supply Module (CSM) to generate a 24 V supply from the DC link, as the minimum continuous DC link voltage should not be below 430 V. Note: The supply voltage range depends on the voltage class of the power unit. 400 V chassis units: 380 V <= p0210 <= 480 V 690 V chassis units: 500 V <= p0210 <= 690 V 400 V booksize units can also be connected to 3-ph. 230 V AC: 400 V booksize units: 180 V <= p0210 <= 480 V A reduced supply voltage up to 70 V is possible if p0212.0 = 1 has been set. p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage / V_connect VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(2), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 [V] Max 63000 [V] Factory setting 600 [V] Sets the drive unit supply voltage. AC/AC unit: The rms value of the phase-to-phase line supply voltage should be entered. DC/AC unit: The rated DC voltage of the connection busbar should be entered. Dependency: Set p1254, p1294 (automatic detection of the Vdc switch-on levels) = 0. The switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller are then directly determined using p0210. The parameter can be reduced to p0210 = 100 V if p0212.0 = 1 has been set. Refer to: p0212 Caution: If the line supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may be automatically de-activated in some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating. In this case, an appropriate alarm is output. Note: Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage: U_rated = 400 V: - p0210 = 380 ... 480 V (AC/AC), 510 ... 720 V (DC/AC) U_rated = 500 V: - p0210 = 500 ... 600 V (AC/AC), 675 ... 900 V (DC/AC) U_rated = 660 ... 690 V: - p0210 = 660 ... 690 V (AC/AC), 890 ... 1035 V (DC/AC) U_rated = 500 ... 690 V: - p0210 = 500 ... 690 V (AC/AC), 675 ... 1035 V (DC/AC) The pre-charging switch-in threshold for the DC link voltage (Vdc) is calculated from p0210: Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 * 1.35 (AC/AC) Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 (DC/AC) The undervoltage thresholds for the DC link voltage (Vdc) are calculated from p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage: U_rated = 400 V: - U_min = p0210 * 0.78 (AC/AC) > 330 V, p0210 * 0.60 (DC/AC) > 380 V (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-105 Parameters List of parameters U_rated = 500 V: - U_min = p0210 * 0.76 (AC/AC) > 410 V U_rated = 660 ... 690 V: - U_min = p0210 * 0.82 (AC/AC) > 565 V, p0210 * 0.63 (DC/AC) > 650 V U_rated = 500 ... 690 V: - U_min = p0210 * 0.82 (AC/AC) > 420 V, p0210 * 0.63 (DC/AC) > 480 V p0212 Power unit configuration / PU config B_INF Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the power unit configuration. Bit field: Bit 00 02 Dependency: Re bit 00: Signal name Drive unit line supply voltage reduced Supply voltage tolerance range extended 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - Reduced supply voltages are only possible on booksize power units. Bit 0 = 1 can only be set if r0192.22 = 1. Refer to: r0192, p0210 Caution: Re bit 00: Working with reduced input voltages de-activates undervoltage detection. Re bit 03: If the automatic setting of the Vdc max limit is deactivated, then all of the components connected to the DC link must be suitable for the maximum DC link voltage of the power unit (e.g. 820 V for 400 V units). Note: Re bit 00 = 0: It is not possible to reduce the supply voltage in p0210. Re bit 00 = 1 (only for B_INF): With this setting the supply voltage in p0210 can be reduced to 70 V. Bit 0 = 1 can only be set for booksize power units with a rated power of up to 40 kW. p0212 Power unit configuration / PU config VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the power unit configuration. Bit field: Bit 00 01 03 Dependency: Re bit 00: Signal name Drive unit line supply voltage reduced External pre-charging present Automatically adapt Vdc_max limit 1 signal Yes Yes No 0 signal No No Yes FP - Reduced supply voltages are only possible for booksize and chassis power units (DC/AC). Bit 0 = 1 can only be set if r0192.22 = 1. Re bit 01 = 1: The external pre-charging setting only affects the DC/AC power units. Re bit 03 = 1: The automatic adaptation (reduction) of the Vdc max limit is deactivated (only for chassis power units). Bit 3 only has an effect, if bit 0 is simultaneously set. Refer to: r0192, p0210 1-106 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Caution: Re bit 00: Working with reduced input voltages de-activates undervoltage detection. Re bit 03: If the automatic setting of the Vdc max limit is deactivated, then all of the components connected to the DC link must be suitable for the maximum DC link voltage of the power unit (e.g. 820 V for 400 V units). Note: Re bit 00 = 0: It is not possible to reduce the supply voltage in p0210. Re bit 00 = 1: With this setting the supply voltage in p0210 can be reduced to 100 V. Booksize PU: only for operating mode p1300 = 19 Chassis PU: only for operating mode p1300 > 19 and closed-loop DC voltage control Re bit 01 = 0: There is no external pre-charging of the DC/AC Motor Modules. The pre-charging monitoring is bypassed. Re bit 01 = 1: There is external pre-charging of the DC/AC Motor Modules. The pre-charging monitoring is calculated. Re bit 03 = 0: The DC link voltage limit is calculated from p0210. Re bit 03 = 1: The DC link voltage limit is set to the maximum value of the power unit. p0230 Drive filter type, motor side / Drv filt type mot VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the type of the filter at the motor side. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: Dependency: The following parameters are influenced using p0230: No filter Motor reactor dv/dt filter Sine-wave filter, Siemens Sine-wave filter, third-party p0230 = 1: --> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance p0230 = 3: --> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance --> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance --> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction --> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number --> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter --> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol --> p1811 (modulator configuration) = wobbulation amplitude --> p1909 (motor data identification, control word) = only Rs measurement p0230 = 4: --> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction --> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol --> p1811 (modulator configuration) = wobbulation amplitude --> p1909 (motor data identification, control word) = only Rs measurement (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-107 Parameters List of parameters The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sine-wave filter and also the user must check whether they are permitted. --> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance --> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance --> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number --> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter Refer to: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802 Note: if a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the Motor Module. p0230 = 1: The output frequency of booksize power units with output reactors is restricted to 120 Hz, for blocksize and chassis power units, to 150Hz. The maximum pulse frequency for booksize and blocksize power units is 4 kHz, for chassis power units, twice the rated pulse frequency (2.5 kHz or 4 kHz). p0230 = 2: Chassis power units with dv/dt filter, depending on the rated pulse frequency, may be operated with a maximum pulse frequency of p1800 = 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz. The output frequency is limited to 150 Hz. p0230 = 3: Sine-wave filters with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 or 2.5 kHz should only be operated with a current controller sampling rate p0115[0] = 400 s, sine-wave filters with a rated pulse frequency of 2 or 4 kHz with p0115[0] = 250 s. The sine-wave filter cannot be selected if the current controller sampling rate has not been appropriately set. Chassis power units with sine-wave filter are limited to output frequencies of 115 Hz or 150 Hz. p0233 Power unit motor reactor / PU mot reactor VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(2), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [mH] Max 1000.000 [mH] Factory setting 0.000 [mH] Description: Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power unit output. Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power unit. Refer to: p0230 Note: When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the commissioning phase (p0010 = 0) and then the controller calculation (p0340 = 3) is carried out. p0234 Power unit sine-wave filter capacitance / PU sine filter C VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(2), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [F] Max 1000.000 [F] Factory setting 0.000 [F] Description: Enters the capacitance of a sine-wave filter connected at the power unit output. Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power unit. Refer to: p0230 Note: The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground). When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the commissioning phase (p0010 = 0). 1-108 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0235 Motor reactor in series number / L_mot in SeriesQty VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of reactors connected in series at the power unit output. Dependency: Refer to: p0230 Caution: If the number of motor reactors connected in series does not correspond to this parameter value, then this can result in an unfavorable control behavior. Note: The parameter cannot be changed for chassis units and for p0230 = 1. r0238 Internal power unit resistance / PU R internal VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the internal resistance of the power unit (IGBT and line resistance). Note: For a parallel circuit, the value corresponds to the resistance of a power unit. p0249 Power unit cooling type / PU cool type VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Sets the cooling type for booksize compact power units. This therefore defines whether for these power units, the internal air cooling is shut down and instead, the "ColdPlate" cooling type is used. Value: 0: 1: Air cooling int Cold-Plate Note: For booksize compact power units, there is a 4 at the 5th position in the Order No. The parameter is irrelevant for all other power unit types. p0251[0...n] B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Operating hours counter power unit fan / PU fan t_oper Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [h] Max 4294967295 [h] Factory setting 0 [h] Displays the power unit fan operating hours. The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter (e.g. after a fan has been replaced). Dependency: Refer to: p0252 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-109 Parameters List of parameters p0252 Maximum operating time power unit fan / PU fan t_oper max B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [h] Max 100000 [h] Factory setting 40000 [h] Sets the maximum operating time of the power unit fan. The pre-alarm (warning) is output 500 hours before this set value. The monitoring is de-activated with p0252 = 0. Dependency: Refer to: p0251 Note: For chassis units, the maximum operating time in the power unit parameter is set to 50000 via the factory setting. p0255[0...1] Power unit contactor monitoring time / PU cont t_monit B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 6500 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the monitoring time for internal monitoring of the contactor feedback contacts. Index: [0] = Pre-charge contactor [1] = Bypass contactor Dependency: Refer to: F30060, F30061 Note: This parameter is only effective for chassis power units with 3 AC line connection and line contactors. A value of 0 de-activates the associated line contactor monitoring. p0260 Cooling unit, starting time 1 / RKA start time 1 B_INF (Cool_unit), VECTOR_G (Cool_unit) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9795 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 60.0 [s] Factory setting 5.0 [s] Description: Sets starting time 1 to monitor the cooling unit after power-on command. After powering up, the following signals must be present within starting time 1: - "RKA powered up" - "RKA liquid flow OK" When a fault occurs, an appropriate message is output. Dependency: Refer to: F49152, F49153 Note: RKA: Cooling unit p0261 Cooling unit, starting time 2 / RKA start time 2 B_INF (Cool_unit), VECTOR_G (Cool_unit) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9795 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 1200.0 [s] Factory setting 180.0 [s] Description: 1-110 Sets starting time 2 to monitor the cooling unit after power-on command. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters After powering up, the following signals must be present within starting time 2: - "RKA conductivity, no fault" - "RKA conductivity, no alarm" When a fault occurs, an appropriate message is output. Dependency: Refer to: p0266 Refer to: F49151, A49171 p0262 Cooling unit, fault conductivity delay time / RKA cond t_del B_INF (Cool_unit), VECTOR_G (Cool_unit) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9795 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 30.0 [s] Factory setting 0.0 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the fault "RKA: Conductive limit value exceeded" during operation. The fault is only output if, during operation, the conductivity exceeds the permissible fault value and the value remains for a longer time than is set in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: F49151 p0263 Cooling unit fault liquid flow, delay time / RKA flow t_del B_INF (Cool_unit), VECTOR_G (Cool_unit) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9795 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 20.0 [s] Factory setting 3.0 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the fault "RKA: Liquid flow too low". The fault is only output if the cause is present for a time longer than is set in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: F49153 p0264 Cooling unit, run-on time / RKA run-on time B_INF (Cool_unit), VECTOR_G (Cool_unit) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9795 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 180.0 [s] Factory setting 30.0 [s] Description: Sets the run-up time of the cooling unit after a power-off command. r0265.0...3 BO: Cooling unit, control word / RKA CTW B_INF (Cool_unit), VECTOR_G (Cool_unit) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word for the cooling unit. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Signal name Power up cooling unit Message converter off Acknowledge faults Leakage sensing OK 1 signal Activating OFF Acknowledgement No leaked liquid (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal De-activating ON No acknowledgement Leaked liquid FP - 1-111 Parameters List of parameters p0266[0...7] BI: Cooling unit, feedback signals, signal source / RKA fdbk S_src B_INF (Cool_unit), VECTOR_G (Cool_unit) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal sources for the feedback signals from the cooling unit. Index: [0] = Cooling unit powered up [1] = Cooling unit ready to be powered up [2] = Cooling unit, no alarm present [3] = Cooling unit, no fault present [4] = Cooling unit, no leaked liquid [5] = Cooling unit, liquid flow OK [6] = Cooling unit, conductivity < fault threshold [7] = Cooling unit, conductivity < alarm threshold r0267.0...7 BO: Cooling unit status word / RKA ZSW B_INF (Cool_unit), VECTOR_G (Cool_unit) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word of the cooling unit. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Dependency: Refer to: p0266 p0278 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold reduction / Vdc U_under red VECTOR_G Signal name RKA powered up RKA ready to be powered up RKA no alarm present RKA no fault present RKA no leaked fluid RKA liquid flow OK RKA conductivity, no fault RKA conductivity, no alarm 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -80 [V] Max 0 [V] Factory setting 0 [V] Description: Sets the absolute value by which the threshold to initiate the undervoltage fault (F30003) is reduced. Dependency: Refer to: p0210, r0296 FP 9974 9974 Refer to: F30003 Notice: When using a Control Supply Module (CSM) for 24 V supply from the DC link, the minimum continuous DC link voltage may not lie below 430 V. DC link voltages in the range 300 ... 430 V are permissible up to a duration of 1 min. Note: The resulting shutdown threshold can be read in r0296 and is dependent on the selected rated voltage (p0210) and the power unit being used. For chassis power units, this parameter has no significance. 1-112 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0279 DC link voltage offset alarm threshold / Vdc offs A thresh B_INF Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8760, 8864, 8964 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [V] Max 500 [V] Factory setting 0 [V] Description: Sets the voltage threshold to initiate alarm A06810. Dependency: Refer to: p0210, r0296 The value represents an offset so that the alarm threshold is obtained from the total of r0296 and p0279. Refer to: A06810 Note: The absolute value of the undervoltage threshold r0296 depends on the selected unit supply voltage (p0210). p0287[0...1] Ground fault monitoring thresholds / Gnd flt threshold VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting [0] 6.0 [%] [1] 16.0 [%] Description: Sets the shutdown thresholds for the ground fault monitoring. The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum power unit current (r0209). Index: [0] = Threshold at which pre-charging starts [1] = Threshold at which pre-charging stops Dependency: Refer to: F30021 Note: The parameter only applies to booksize and chassis power units. De-activating the ground fault monitoring: - Sequence: --> p0287[1] = 0 --> p0287[0] = 0 - irrespective of the firmware version of the power unit. Sets the thresholds: - the prerequisite is at least firmware version 2.2 of the power unit. r0289 CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the actual maximum output current of the power unit taking into account derating factors. p0290 Power unit overload response / PU overld response VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8014 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-113 Parameters List of parameters The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload: - heat sink temperature (r0037 index 0) - chip temperature (r0037 index 1) - power unit overload I2T (r0036) Possible measures to avoid thermal overload: - reduce the output current limit r0289 and r0067 (for closed-loop speed/velocity or torque/force control) or the output frequency (for U/f control) indirectly via the output current limit and the intervention of the current limiting controller). - reduce the pulse frequency (only for vector control). A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Reduce output current or output frequency No reduction, shutdown when overload threshold is reached Reduce I_output or f_output and f_pulse (not using I2t) Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t) Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without pulse frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1). If a fault or alarm is present, then r2135.13 or r2135.15 is set. Refer to: r0036, r0037, p0108, r0108, p0230, r2135 Refer to: A05000, A05001, A07805 Caution: If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut down. This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of this parameter. Note: The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with variable torque such as for pumps and fans). Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked and forbidden speed ranges (e.g. minimum speed p1080 and suppression [skip] speeds p1091 ... p1094) can be passed through. For p0290 = 2, 3, the I2t overload detection of the power unit does not influence the responses. When the motor data identification routine is selected, p0290 cannot be changed. r0293 CO: Power unit alarm threshold model temperature / PU A_thr mod_temp VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8014 P-Group: Converter Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Temperature alarm threshold for the difference from the chip and heat sink temperature in the thermal model. Dependency: Refer to: r0037 Refer to: F30024 Note: The parameter is only relevant for chassis power units. p0294 Power unit alarm with I2t overload / PU I2t alrm thresh B_INF Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8014 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 95.0 [%] Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power unit overload. Dependency: Refer to: r0036 Refer to: A07805 Note: The parameter is only relevant for booksize units! 1-114 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0294 Power unit alarm with I2t overload / PU I2t alrm thresh VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8014 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 95.0 [%] Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power unit overload. Drive: If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290. Infeed: When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output. Dependency: Refer to: r0036, p0290 Refer to: A07805 Note: The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output. p0295 Fan run-on time / Fan run-on time B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [s] Max 600 [s] Factory setting 0 [s] Description: Sets the fan run-on time after the pulses for the power unit have been canceled. Note: - Under certain circumstances, the fan can continue to run for longer than was set (e.g. as a result of the excessively high heat sink temperature). - For values less than 1 s, a 1 s run on time for the fan is active. r0296 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc U_lower_thresh B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8750, 8760, 8850, 8864, 8950, 8964 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: If the DC link voltage falls below the threshold specified here, the infeed is tripped due to a DC link undervoltage condition. Dependency: Refer to: F30003 Note: The value depends on the device type and the selected rated voltage p0210. r0296 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc U_lower_thresh VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Sets the threshold for detecting a DC link undervoltage. If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the Motor Module is shut down due to a DC link undervoltage condition (F30003). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-115 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p0278 Refer to: F30003 Note: The value depends on the device type and the selected rated voltage p0210. For booksize drive units, the following applies: The undervoltage threshold can be reduced with p0278. r0297 DC link voltage overvoltage threshold / Vdc U_upper_thresh B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8750, 8760, 8850, 8864, 8950, 8964 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage. Dependency: Refer to: F30002 p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6310 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10001 Factory setting 0 Selects the motor type or starts to read in the motor parameters for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ (p0300 = 10000 or 10001, if there is a second data set). For p0300 < 10000 the following applies: The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor type and corresponds to the third-party motor belonging to a motor list: 1 = Rotating induction motor 2 = Rotating synchronous motor 3 = Linear induction motor (reserved) 4 = Linear synchronous motor 5 = Synchronous motor separately-excited 7 = SIEMOSYN motor 8 = Reluctance motor The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteristics and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the BOP/AOP). Value: 0: 1: 2: 7: 8: 10: 11: 12: 13: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 102: 104: 107: 1-116 No motor Induction motor (rotating) Synchronous motor (rotating, permanent-magnet) SIEMOSYN motor Reluctance motor 1LE1 standard induction motor 1LA1 standard induction motor 1LE2 standard induction motor (NEMA) 1LG6 standard induction motor 1LA5 standard induction motor 1LA6 standard induction motor 1LA7 standard induction motor 1LA8 / 1PQ8 standard induction motor 1LA9 standard induction motor 1PH2 induction motor 1PH4 induction motor 1PH7 induction motor (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 108: 111: 134: 136: 166: 222: 264: 283: 10000: 10001: Dependency: 1PH8 induction motor Induction motor (rotary) for OEMs 1PM4 induction motor 1PM6 induction motor 1PL6 induction motor Synchronous motor (rotary) for OEMs 1FW4 synchronous motor 1FW3 synchronous motor Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ 2nd data set Motors, selection 206, 236, 237 cannot be operated (also not as motor with DRIVE-CLiQ). p0300 = 5 cannot be selected with SINAMICS G. When the motor type is changed, the code number in p0301 may be reset to 0. p0300 = 12 can only be selected for p0100 = 1 (NEMA). When selecting a motor type from the 1LA5 and 1LA7 series, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627 and p0628 of the thermal motor model are pre-assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311. When selecting a 1FW4 motor, if the motor database permits this, when exiting commissioning then p1750 bit 5 is automatically set. This is the reason that after exiting commissioning, all parameters must be saved and a warm restart must be initiated (e.g. p0009=30, p0976=3). Caution: Refer to: p0301 A permanent-magnet synchronous motor cannot be operated with an SSI encoder without HTL/TTL track. A separately-excited synchronous motor can only be operated with an SSI encoder if this is used as the second encoder and an HTL/TTL encoder is used as the first encoder. Caution: If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parameters that are associated with this list cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the motor type p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 2 for p0301 = 2xxxx). Write protection is automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters. The motor type of a catalog motor corresponds to the upper three digits of the code number or the following assignment (if the particular motor type is listed): Type/code number ranges 102 / 102xx, 112xx, 122xx 104 / 104xx, 114xx, 124xx 107 / 107xx, 117xx, 127xx 108 / 108xx, 118xx, 128xx, 138xx, 148xx, 158xx 134 / 134xx, 144xx, 154xx 136 / 136xx, 146xx, 156xx 166 / 166xx, 176xx, 186xx 264 / 264xx, 274xx, 284xx, 294xx 283 / 283xx, 293xx Notice: For 1PQ8 motors (p0300 = 18) the fan type p0335 should be set to 5. Note: With p0300 = 10000, for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, the motor parameters are automatically downloaded, with p0300 = 10001, the motor parameters of a second data set (if available). If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited. A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists. Motor types with a value below p0300 < 100 correspond to the selection of a third-party motor. When appropriately selected, this means that the motor parameters are pre-assigned the settings for a third-party motor. This also applies for parameters for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. In this case p0300 can only be set to p0300 = 10000 or 10001 (read motor parameters) or to the corresponding non-Siemens motor (first digit of the motor code number) in order to be able to cancel the write protection. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-117 Parameters List of parameters p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: The parameter is used to select a motor from a motor parameter list. When changing the code number (with the exception to the value 0), all of the motor parameters are pre-assigned from the internally available parameter lists. Dependency: Code numbers can only be selected for motor types that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300. For 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7, 1PM4, 1PM6, 1FT6 motors, code numbers are also possible, whose fourth decimal position is greater by a value of 1 or 2 than the matching motor type in p0300. For 1FE1 motors, the third decimal position can be higher by a value of 1. Refer to: p0300 Note: The motor code number can only be changed if the matching catalog motor was first selected in p0300. For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, p0301 cannot be changed. In this case, p0301 is automatically written to the code number of the motor parameter read in (r0302) if p0300 is set to 10000. When selecting a catalog motor (p0300 >= 100), drive commissioning can only be exited if a code number is selected. r0302[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Motor code Mot DLQ Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the motor code number from the saved motor data from a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. Note: Drive commissioning can only be exited if the code number that was downloaded (r0302) matches the stored code number (p0301). If the numbers differ, then the motor data set should be re-loaded using p0300 = 10000. The motor data are always expected from the first encoder that is assigned to the drive data sets (refer to p0187 = encoder 1) data set number. The value is not updated cyclically but only on specific events (e.g. update DRIVE-CLiQ device). r0302 = 0: No motor with DRIVE-CLiQ found r0303[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ status word / Motor w DLQ ZSW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the status word of the automatic motor parameter sensing of a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. Motor parameter sensing takes place in the following events if the SMI is connected to the Motor Module and the encoder is activated (p0145): - Warm restart - downloading projects. - POWER ON (off/on). - where p0300 = 10000, 10001. 1-118 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Signal name Motor data set selected Motor connection type Windings can be changed Windings can be changed number Dependency: Refer to: p0145, p0300 Note: SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated 1 signal MDS1 Delta Yes 2 0 signal MDS0 Star No 0 FP - p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6300, 6724 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [Vrms] Max 20000 [Vrms] Factory setting 0 [Vrms] Description: Sets the rated motor voltage (rating plate). Dependency: Refer to: p0349 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account. p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the rated motor current (rating plate). Dependency: Refer to: p0349 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Notice: If p0305 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). If the rated motor current exceeds twice the maximum drive converter current (r0209), then the maximum current is reduced due to the current harmonics that increase overproportionally (r0067). Note: When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account. p0306[0...n] Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 50 Factory setting 1 Description: Number of motors that can be operated in parallel using one motor data set. Depending on the motor number entered, internally an equivalent motor is calculated. The following should be carefully observed for motors connected in series: The following rating plate data should only be entered for one motor: - resistances and inductances: p0350 ... p0361 - currents: p0305, p0320, p0323, p0325, p0329, p0389, p0390, p0391, p0392 - power ratings: p0307 - masses/moments of inertia: p0341, p0344 All other parameters take into account the replacement/equivalent motor (e.g. r0331, r0333). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-119 Parameters List of parameters Recommend.: For motors connected in parallel, external thermal protection should be provided for each individual motor. Dependency: Refer to: r0331 Caution: The motors to be connected in parallel must be of the same type and size (same order no. (MLFB)). The mounting regulations when connecting motors in parallel must be carefully maintained! Especially for synchronous motors, the pole position of motors that are rigidly coupled with one another (mechanically) must be identical. The number of motors set must correspond to the number of motors that are actually connected in parallel. After changing p0306, it is imperative that the control parameters are adapted (e.g. using automatic calculation with p0340 = 1). For synchronous motors connected in parallel with p1300 >= 20, be following applies: - the individual motors must be mechanically coupled with one another and the EMF must be aligned to one another. For induction motors that are connected in parallel, but which are not mechanically coupled with one another, then the following applies: - an individual motor must not be loaded beyond its stall point. Notice: If p0306 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is appropriately preassigned. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). Note: Only operation with U/f characteristic makes sense if more than 10 identical motors are connected in parallel. Separately-excited synchronous motors must not be connected in parallel. Synchronous and reluctance motors that are not coupled with one another align themselves when the pulses are switched in. If the motors have different load levels, then equalization currents flow between the motors. p0307[0...n] VECTOR_G Rated motor power / Mot P_rated Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -100000.00 [kW] Max 100000.00 [kW] Factory setting 0.00 [kW] Description: Sets the rated motor power (rating plate). Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp Refer to: p0100 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: For generators, a negative rated power should be entered. p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 1.000 Factory setting 0.000 Description: Sets the rated motor power factor (cos phi, rating plate). Dependency: This parameter is only available for IEC motors (p0100 = 0). For a parameter value of 0.000, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332. Refer to: p0100, p0309, r0332 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). 1-120 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 99.9 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Description: Sets the rated motor efficiency (rating plate). Dependency: This parameter is only available for NEMA motors (p0100 = 1). For a parameter value of 0.0, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332. Refer to: p0100, p0308, r0332 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Description: Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate). Dependency: The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically re-calculated when the parameter is changed (together with p0311), if p0314 = 0. The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 650.00 Hz. Refer to: p0311, r0313, p0314 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Notice: If p0310 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [rpm] Max 210000.0 [rpm] Factory setting 0.0 [rpm] Sets the rated motor speed (rating plate). For VECTOR the following applies (p0107): For p0311 = 0, the rated motor slip of induction motors is internally calculated and displayed in r0330. It is especially important to correctly enter the rated motor speed for vector control and slip compensation for U/f control. Dependency: If p0311 is changed and for p0314 = 0, the pole pair (r0313) is re-calculated automatically. Refer to: p0310, r0313, p0314 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Notice: If p0311 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-121 Parameters List of parameters r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 5300 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of motor pole pairs. The value is used for internal calculations. r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc. Dependency: For p0314 > 0, the entered value is displayed in r0313. For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number (r0313) is automatically calculated from the rated power (p0307), rated frequency (p0310) and rated speed (p0311). Refer to: p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314 Note: For the automatic calculation, the pole pair number is set to the value of 2 if the rated speed or the rated frequency is zero. p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No. VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Sets the motor pole pair number. p0314 = 1: 2-pole motor r0314 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc. Dependency: For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated speed (p0311) and displayed in r0313. Notice: If p0314 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). For induction motors, the value need only be input if the rated data of a generator is entered therefore resulting in a negative rated slip. In this case, the number of pole pairs in r0313 is too low by 1 and must be manually corrected. p0316[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor torque constant / Mot kT Can be changed: C2(1, 3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 28_1 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Nm/A] Max 400.00 [Nm/A] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm/A] Sets the torque constant of the synchronous motor. p0316 = 0: The torque constant is calculated from the motor data. p0316 > 0: The selected value is used as torque constant. Dependency: Refer to: r0334 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx). 1-122 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0318[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8017 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the stall current for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter is used for the I2t monitoring of the motor (refer to p0611). This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx). p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 5722 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [Arms] Max 5000.000 [Arms] Factory setting 0.000 [Arms] Description: Induction motors: Sets the rated motor magnetizing current. For p0320 = 0.000 the magnetizing current is internally calculated and displayed in r0331. Synchronous motors: Sets the rated motor short-circuit current. Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The magnetization current p0320 for induction motors (not for catalog motors) is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0. VECTOR: If, for induction motors, the magnetizing current p0320 is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0), then the magnetizing inductance p0360 is changed so that the EMF r0337 remains constant. p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [rpm] Max 210000.0 [rpm] Factory setting 0.0 [rpm] Description: Sets the maximum motor speed. Dependency: Refer to: p1082 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Notice: If p0322 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-123 Parameters List of parameters p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 5722 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 20000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the maximum permissible motor current (e.g. de-magnetizing current for synchronous motors). Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Notice: If p0323 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). Note: The parameter has no effect for induction motors. The parameter has not effect for synchronous motors if a value of 0.0 is entered. The user-selectable current limit is entered into p0640. p0324[0...n] VECTOR_G Winding maximum speed / Winding n_max Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [rpm] Max 210000.0 [rpm] Factory setting 0.0 [rpm] Description: Sets the maximum speed for the winding. Dependency: Refer to: p1082 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Notice: If p0324 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). p0325[0...n] Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [Arms] Max 10000.000 [Arms] Factory setting 0.000 [Arms] Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two-stage technique for pole position identification routine. The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329. The two-stage technique is selected with p1980 = 4. Dependency: Refer to: p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990 Notice: When the motor code (p0301) is changed, it is possible that p0325 is not pre-assigned. p0325 can be pre-assigned using p0340 = 3. Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events: - For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3). - for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3). 1-124 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0327[0...n] Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 5722 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [] Max 135.0 [] Factory setting 90.0 [] Description: Sets the optimum load angle for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors). SERVO: The load angle is measured at 1.5 x rated motor current. VECTOR: The load angle is measured at the rated motor current. Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: This parameter has no significance for induction motors. For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, a angle of 90 degrees must be set. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0328[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000.00 [mH] Max 1000.00 [mH] Factory setting 0.00 [mH] Sets the reluctance torque constant for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors). This parameter has no significance for induction motors. Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, the value 0 must be set. p0329[0...n] Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Sets the current for the pole position identification routine (p1980 = 1). For a two-stage technique (p1980 = 4) , the current is set for the 2nd phase. The current for the 1st phase is set in p0325. Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Displays the rated motor slip. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-125 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: The rated slip is calculated from the rated frequency, rated speed and number of pole pairs. Refer to: p0310, p0311, r0313 Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). r0331[0...n] Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 5722, 6722, 6724 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Induction motor: Displays the rated magnetizing current from p0320. For p0320 = 0, the internally calculated magnetizing current is displayed. Synchronous motor: Displays the rated short-circuit current from p0320. Dependency: If p0320 was not entered, then the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters. Note: In the case of multi-motor operation r0331 is increased by the factor p0306 compared to p0320. r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the rated power factor for induction motors. For IEC motors, the following applies (p0100 = 0): For p0308 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed. For p0308 > 0, this value is displayed. For NEMA motors, the following applies (p0100 = 1): For p0309 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed. For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed. Dependency: If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 7_4 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the rated motor torque. Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft Note: For induction and reluctance motors, r0333 is calculated from p0307 and p0311. For synchronous motors, r0333 is calculated from p0305, p0316, p0327 and p0328. The result can deviate from the input in p0312. If p0316 = 0, then r0333 = p0312 is displayed. In the case of multi-motor operation r0333 is increased by the factor p0306 compared to the rated torque of an individual motor. 1-126 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0334[0...n] Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 28_1 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm/A] Max - [Nm/A] Factory setting - [Nm/A] Description: Displays the torque constant of the synchronous motor used. Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm / A NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft / A Refer to: p0316 Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx). For synchronous motors, parameter r0334 = p0316 is displayed. For p0316 = 0, r0334 is calculated from p0305 and p0312 or p0305, p0307, and p0311. p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 128 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the motor cooling system used. Value: 0: 1: 2: 4: 5: 6: 128: Dependency: For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311. Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter influences the thermal 3-mass motor model. Non-ventilated Forced cooling Liquid cooling Non-ventilated and internal fan Forced cooling and internal fan Liquid cooling and internal fan No fan 1LA1 and 1LA8 motors are characterized by the fact that they have an internal rotor fan. This "internal cooling" lies within the motor frame and is not visible. Air is not directly exchanged with the motor ambient air. For 1PQ8 motors, p0335 should be set to 5 as these motors are force-ventilated motors. p0335 = 128 applies for 1LA7 motors, frame size 56. These are operated without a fan. r0336[0...n] Actual rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the rated frequency of the motor. For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed. Dependency: Refer to: p0311, p0314 Note: For p0310 = 0 or for synchronous motors, the rated motor frequency r0336 is calculated from the rated speed and the pole pair number. For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed (not for synchronous motors). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-127 Parameters List of parameters r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the rated EMF of the motor. Note: EMF: Electromagnetic force r0339[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the rated motor voltage. Note: For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx) the parameter is set to p0304. For synchronous motors, parameter r0339 = p0304 is displayed. If p0304 = 0, then r0339 is calculated from p0305 and p0316. p0340[0...n] VECTOR_G Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 5 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and U/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the rating plate data. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. No calculation Complete calculation Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters Calculation of closed-loop control parameters Calculation of controller parameters Calculation of technological limits and threshold values The following parameters are influenced using p0340: The parameters designated with (*) are not overwritten for catalog motors (p0300 > 100). SERVO: p0340 = 1: --> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5 --> p0341 (*) --> p0342, p0344, p0600, p0640, p1082, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p2005, p2007 p0340 = 2: --> p0350 (*), p0354 (*), p0356 (*), p0358 (*), p0360 (*) --> p0625 (matching p0350), p0626 ... p0628 1-128 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0340 = 3: --> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5 --> p0325 (is only calculated for p0325 = 0) --> p0348 (*) (is only calculated for p0348 = 0) --> p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445 (only for 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors) --> p0492, p1082, p1980, p1319, p1326, p1327, p1612, p1752, p1755 p0340 = 4: --> p1441, p1460, p1462, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1596, p1656, p1657, p1658, p1659, p1715, p1717 --> p1461 (for p0348 > p0322, p1461 is set to 100 %) --> p1463 (for p0348 > p0322, p1463 is set to 400 %) p0340 = 5: --> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p2140 ... p2142, p2148, p2150, p2155, p2161, p2162, p2163, p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p3820 ... p3829 VECTOR: p0340 = 1: --> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5 --> p0341 (*) --> p0342, p0344, p0600, p0640, p1082, p1145, p1231, p1232, p1333, p1349, p1360, p1362, p1441, p1442, p1576, p1577, p1609, p1610, p1611, p1619, p1620, p1621, p1654, p1726, p1825, p1828 ... p1832, p1901, p1909, p1959, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p2005, p2007, p3806. p3927, p3928 p0340 = 2: --> p0350 (*), p0354 ... p0361 (*), p0652 ... p0660 --> p0625 (matching p0350) p0340 = 3: --> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5 --> p0346, p0347, p0492, p0622, p1262, p1320 ... p1327, p1582, p1584, p1612, p1616, p1744, p1748, p1749, p1755, p1756, p2178 p0340 = 4: --> p1290, p1292, p1293, p1299, p1338, p1339, p1340, p1341, p1345, p1346, p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1600, p1628, p1629, p1630, p1643, p1703, p1715, p1717, p1740, p1756, p1757, p1760, p1761, p1764, p1767, p1781, p1783, p1785, p1786, p1795, p7036, p7037, p7038 p0340 = 5: --> p260 ... p264, p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p1574, p1750, p1802, p1803, p2140, p2142, p2148, p2150, p2161, p2162, p2163, p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p3207, p3208, p3815, p3820 ... p3829 Note: p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5 without overwriting the motor parameters from the Siemens motor lists (p0301 > 0). p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360), but only if it does involve a Siemens catalog motor (p0301 = 0). p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5. p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters. p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits. When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1. At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0. If the STARTER commissioning software writes a 3 into p0340 when "downloading to target device", then this corresponds to a "complete calculation of the motor/control parameters without equivalent circuit diagram data". The same calculations are carried out as for p0340 = 1, however, without the equivalent circuit diagram parameters of the motor (p0340 = 2), the motor moment of inertia (p0341) and the motor weight (p0344). For third-party linear synchronous motors (p0300 = 4) equivalent circuit diagram data are not calculated (p0340 = 2). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-129 Parameters List of parameters p0341[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 1700, 5042, 5210, 6030, 6031 P-Group: Motor Units group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000000 [kgm] Max 100000.000000 [kgm] Factory setting 0.000000 [kgm] Description: Sets the motor moment of inertia (without load). Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2 NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2 The parameter value is included, together with p0342, in the rated starting time of the motor. Refer to: p0342, r0345 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: SERVO: p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in encoderless operation. VECTOR: The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically. p0342[0...n] VECTOR_G Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 1700, 5042, 5210, 6030, 6031 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.000 Max 10000.000 Factory setting 1.000 Description: Sets the ratio between the total moment of inertia/mass (load + motor) and the intrinsic motor moment of inertia/mass (no load). Dependency: This means that together with p0341, the rated starting (accelerating time) of the motor is calculated for a vector drive. Refer to: p0341, r0345 Note: SERVO: p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in encoderless operation. VECTOR: The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically. r0343[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: 1-130 Rated motor current identified / Mot I_rated ident Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Displays the identified rated motor current. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0344[0...n] Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 27_1 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [kg] Max 50000.0 [kg] Factory setting 0.0 [kg] Description: Sets the motor weight. Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor. The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [s] Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Description: Displays the rated motor starting time. This time corresponds to the time from standstill up to reaching the motor rated speed and the acceleration with motor rated torque (r0333). Dependency: Refer to: r0313, r0333, r0336, p0341, p0342 p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -20.000 [s] Max 20.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Sets the excitation build-up time of the motor. This involves the delay time between enabling the pulses and enabling the ramp-function generator. The induction motor is magnetized during this time. Caution: If there is insufficient magnetization under load or if the acceleration rate is too high, then an induction motor can stall (refer to the note). This is especially true for sensorless vector control or U/f control. Notice: If the parameter is set to 0 s for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5), then an excitation current setpoint is generated even if the drive is powered down. In the base speed range, this is the no-load excitation current (p0389). In the field-weakening range, the value is reduced with the inverse value of the actual speed. An excitation current setpoint is not generated during de-magnetizing (p0347) and if an encoder fault is detected. When starting an encoderless separately-excited synchronous motor with vector control from standstill, the rotor position is detected using the field current ramp. The length of the ramp is pre-assigned from the motor data for p0346 = 0 s. If it crystallizes out that this time is too short, then it can be extended by entering a negative value in p0346, whereby otherwise, the excitation behavior corresponds with that for p0346 = 0 s. For all other cases, p0346 is internally limited downwards to 0 s. Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3. For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). If this time is excessively reduced, this can result in an inadequate magnetizing of the induction motor. This is the case if the current limit is reached while building up magnetizing. For induction motors, the parameter cannot be set to 0 s (internal limit: 0.1 * r0384). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-131 Parameters List of parameters For permanent-magnet synchronous motors and vector control, the value depends on the stator time constant (r0386). Here, it defines the time to establish the current for encoderless operation immediately after the pulses have been enabled. p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat. VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 20.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the de-magnetizing time (for induction motors) after the inverter pulses have been canceled. The inverter pulses cannot be switched in (enabled) within this delay time. Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3. For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). if this time is shortened too much, then this can result in an inadequate de-magnetizing of the induction motor and in an overcurrent condition when the pulses are subsequently enabled (only when the flying restart function is activated and the motor is rotating). p0349 System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data / Unit_sys mot ESB VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the actual system of units for motor equivalent circuit diagram data. Value: 1: 2: Dependency: Refer to: p0304, p0305, p0310 Note: The reference parameter for resistances of the rated motor impedance Z = p0304 / (1.732 * p0305) is in the % units system. System of units, physical System of units, referred Inductances are converted into a resistance using the factor 2 * Pi * p0310. If a reference parameter (p0304, p305, p0310) is zero, then it is not possible to make a changeover to "referred" values (per unit values). p0350[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [ohm] Max 2000.00000 [ohm] Factory setting 0.00000 [ohm] Description: Sets the stator resistance of the motor at ambient temperature p0625 (phase value). Dependency: Refer to: p0625, r1912 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable resistance (p0352). 1-132 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [ohm] Max 120.00000 [ohm] Factory setting 0.00000 [ohm] Description: Resistance of the power cable between the Motor Module and motor. Dependency: Refer to: p7003 Caution: The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification. If it is used subsequently, the difference by which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must be repeated. Notice: Parallel circuits with one winding system (p7003 = 0): p0352 includes the feeder cable resistance of an individual Motor Module. The total feeder cable resistance is obtained from p0352 divided by the number of activated Motor Modules (refer to r0395). Parallel circuits with multi-winding system (p7003 = 1): p0352 includes the complete feeder cable resistance and is directly added to the stator resistance (refer to r0395). Note: The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance. The motor identification sets the cable resistance to 20% of the measured total resistance if p0352 is zero at the time that the measurement is made. If p0352 is not zero, then the value is subtracted from the measured total stator resistance to calculate stator resistance p0350. In this case, p0350 is a minimum of 10% of the measured value. Exception: For parallel circuit configurations with one winding system (p07003 = 0), the cable resistance is directly measured. It is important to note that only the component of an individual Motor Module is entered into p0352. The cable resistance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0. p0353[0...n] Motor series inductance / Mot L_series VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [mH] Max 1000000.000 [mH] Factory setting 0.000 [mH] Description: Sets the series inductance. Note: For the automatic calculation with p0340 = 1, 3 or 4, the calculation of p1715 is influenced by p0353. The series inductance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0. p0354[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold/R_D d Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [ohm] Max 300.00000 [ohm] Factory setting 0.00000 [ohm] Sets the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the ambient temperature p0625. For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the damping resistance in the rotor direction (d-axis). This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor data identification routine (p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors). Dependency: Refer to: p0625 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-133 Parameters List of parameters p0355[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [ohm] Max 300.00000 [ohm] Factory setting 0.00000 [ohm] Description: Sets the damping resistance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis). This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2). p0356[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak. Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [mH] Max 1000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Induction motor, separately-excited synchronous motor: Sets the rotor leakage inductance of the motor. Synchronous motor: Sets the stator quadrature axis inductance of the motor. This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910). Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: If the stator leakage inductance (p0356) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0), the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960). For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is, therefore, ideal for a low current. p0357[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [mH] Max 1000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Sets the stator direct-axis inductance of the synchronous motor. This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910). Note: The parameter is not used for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5). For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is ideal for a low current. p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_r leak / LDd VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [mH] Max 1000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section leakage inductance of the motor. For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the damping inductance in the rotor direction (d-axis). 1-134 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters This value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors). Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). VECTOR: If the rotor leakage inductance (p0358) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0), then the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960). p0359[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damp q Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [mH] Max 1000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Sets the damping inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis). This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2). p0360[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor magnetizing inductance/magn. inductance, d axis saturated / Mot Lh/Lh d sat Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [mH] Max 10000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Sets the magnetizing inductance of the motor. For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the saturated magnetizing inductance in the rotor direction (daxis). This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors). Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). p0361[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [mH] Max 10000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Sets the saturated magnetizing inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis). This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-135 Parameters List of parameters p0362[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6723, 6726 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 60.0 [%] Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux. The parameter sets the first motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux. Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature axis flux. The parameter sets the first stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current. Dependency: The following applies for the flux values: p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM): 20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 Refer to: p0366 Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20 %, the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes. Note: For induction motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux. For separately-excited synchronous motors p0362 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed). With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305). When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0363[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6723, 6726 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 85.0 [%] The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux. The parameter sets the second motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux. Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature axis flux. The parameter sets the second stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current. 1-136 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: The following applies for the flux values: p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM): 20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 Refer to: p0367 Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20 %, the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes. Note: For induction motors, p0363 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux. For separately-excited synchronous motors p0363 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed). With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305). When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0364[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6723, 6726 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 115.0 [%] Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic. Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux. The parameter sets the third motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux. Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature axis flux. The parameter sets the third stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current. Dependency: The following applies for the flux values: p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM): 20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 Refer to: p0368 Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20 %, the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes. Note: For induction motors, p0364 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux. For separately-excited synchronous motors p0364 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed). With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305). When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-137 Parameters List of parameters p0365[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6723, 6726 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 125.0 [%] Description: The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic. Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux. The parameter sets the fourth motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux. Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature axis flux. The parameter sets the fourth stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current. Dependency: The following applies for the flux values: p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM): 20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 Refer to: p0369 Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20 %, the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes. Note: For induction motors, p0365 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux. For separately-excited synchronous motors p0365 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed). With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305). When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0366[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6723, 6726 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 5.0 [%] Max 800.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux. The parameter sets the first magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM), which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM). Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature axis flux. The parameter sets the first stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305). 1-138 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents: p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM): 20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 Refer to: p0362 Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20 %, the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes. Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0367[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2 VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6723, 6726 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 5.0 [%] Max 800.0 [%] Factory setting 75.0 [%] The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux. The parameter sets the second magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM), which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM). Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature axis flux. The parameter sets the second stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305). Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents: p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM): 20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 Refer to: p0363 Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20 %, the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes. Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0368[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3 VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6723, 6726 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 5.0 [%] Max 800.0 [%] Factory setting 150.0 [%] The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic. Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux. The parameter sets the third magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM), which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-139 Parameters List of parameters Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature axis flux. The parameter sets the third stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305). Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents: p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM): 20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 Refer to: p0364 Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20 %, the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes. Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0369[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4 VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6723, 6726 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 5.0 [%] Max 800.0 [%] Factory setting 210.0 [%] The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 4th value pair of the characteristic. Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux. The parameter sets the fourth magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM), which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM). Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature axis flux. The parameter sets the fourth stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305). Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents: p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM): 20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 Refer to: p0365 Caution: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM): If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20 %, the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes. Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature (p0625). The value does not include the cable resistance. Dependency: 1-140 Refer to: p0625 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the total cable resistance between Motor Module and motor, as well as the internal converter resistance. Dependency: Refer to: r0238, p0352 r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the rated motor stator resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0627). Dependency: Refer to: p0627 Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold / RDd VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Displays the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor for the ambient temperature p0625. For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the damping resistance in the rotor direction (d-axis). Dependency: Refer to: p0625 Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). r0375[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the damping resistance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis). r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Displays the rated (nominal) rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0628). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-141 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p0628 Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6640 P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Induction motor, separately-excited synchronous motor: Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor, including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor (p0233). Synchronous motor: Displays the stator quadrature inductance, including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor (p0233). r0378[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the stator longitudinal inductance of the synchronous motor including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor (p0233). Note: The parameter is not used for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5). r0380[0...n] Motor damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_damping_d VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the damping inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor in the rotor direction (d-axis). r0381[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damping_q VECTOR_G Description: 1-142 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Displays the damping inductance of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0382[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Lh d axis saturated / Mot L_m tr/Lhd sat VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the magnetizing inductance of the motor. For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the saturated magnetizing inductance in the rotor direction (daxis). Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). r0383[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: 15_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the saturated magnetizing inductance of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis). r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6722 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the rotor time constant. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors. For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the damping time constant in the rotor direction (d-axis). The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the rotor side (p0358, p0360) divided by the rotor/damping resistance (p0354). The temperature adaptation of the rotor resistance for induction motors is not taken into account. r0385[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor damping time constant, q axis / Mot L_damping q Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the damping time constant of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis). Note: The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the damping side (p0359, p0361) divided by the damping resistance (p0355). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-143 Parameters List of parameters r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the stator leakage time constant. Note: The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233*, p0353, p0356, p0358) divided by the total of all motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0354). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account. * only applies for VECTOR (r0107). r0387[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor stator leakage time constant, q axis / Mot T_Sleak /T_Sq Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the stator leakage time constant quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis). Note: The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233, p0356, p0359) divided by the total of all motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0355). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account. p0389[0...n] VECTOR_G Excitation rated no-load current / Exc I_noload_rated Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [A] Max 10000.00 [A] Factory setting 0.00 [A] Description: Sets the rated no-load current (I_F0) for the excitation. p0390[0...n] Rated excitation current / Exc I_rated VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [A] Max 10000.00 [A] Factory setting 0.00 [A] Description: Setting the rated current (I_F) of the controlled excitation rectifier (DC master). p0391[0...n] Current controller adaptation, starting point KP / I_adapt pt KP VECTOR_G Description: 1-144 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 6000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Sets the starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation where the current controller gain p1715 is effective. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p0392, p0393, p1402, p1715 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0392[0...n] Current controller adaptation, starting point KP adapted / I_adapt pt KP adap VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 6000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation where the adapted current controller gain p1715 x p0393 is effective. Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0393, p1402, p1715 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0393[0...n] Current controller adaptation P gain scaling / I_adapt Kp scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the factor for the current controller P gain in the adaptation range (e.g. r0078 > p0392, if p0392 > p0391). The value is referred to p1715. Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0392, p1402, p1715 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: For p0393 = 100 % or p1402.2 = 0, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the entire range. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). r0395[0...n] Actual stator resistance / R_stator act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6300, 6730, 6731, 6732 P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the actual stator resistance (phase value). Dependency: In the case of induction motors the parameter is also affected by the motor temperature model. The parameter value also contains the temperature-independent cable resistance. Refer to: p0350, p0352, p0620 Note: In each case, only the stator resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the stator temperature of the thermal motor model. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-145 Parameters List of parameters r0396[0...n] Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6730 P-Group: Motor Units group: 16_1 Unit selection: p0349 Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the actual rotor/secondary section resistance (phase value). The parameter is affected by the motor temperature model. Dependency: Refer to: p0354, p0620 Note: In each case, only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the thermal motor model. This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). p0398[0...n] Angle magn decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 1 / Magn decoupl C1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -10.000000 Max 10.000000 Factory setting 0.000000 Description: The magnetic cross coupling of the motor's d and q axes caused by saturation (current-dependent) leads to an angle offset affecting the axis system d'q'; this decouples the magnetic quantities. The angle offset can be described as a 3rd order polynomial function of the load current consumed: phiOffset = f(C1*iq + C3*iq^3) This parameter is the coefficient C1; it describes the linear load impact effect. p0399[0...n] Angle magn decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 3 / Magn decoupl C3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -10.000000 Max 10.000000 Factory setting 0.000000 Description: The magnetic cross coupling of the motor's d and q axes caused by saturation (current-dependent) leads to an angle offset affecting the axis system d'q'; this decouples the magnetic quantities. The angle offset can be described as a 3rd order polynomial function of the load current consumed: phiOffset = f(C1*iq + C3*iq^3) This parameter is the coefficient C3; it describes the cubic load impact effect. p0400[0...n] Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel ENC Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 1580, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10100 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported. Value: 0: 202: 204: 242: 244: 1-146 No encoder DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AS20, singleturn DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AM20, multiturn 4096 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AS24, singleturn DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AM24, multiturn 4096 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 1001: 1002: 1003: 1004: 2001: 2002: 2003: 2004: 2005: 2006: 2007: 2008: 2010: 2051: 2052: 2053: 2054: 2055: 2081: 2082: 2083: 2084: 2110: 2111: 2112: 2151: 3001: 3002: 3003: 3005: 3006: 3007: 3008: 3009: 3011: 3020: 3081: 3082: 3090: 3109: 9999: 10000: 10050: 10051: 10058: 10059: 10100: Resolver 1 speed Resolver 2 speed Resolver 3 speed Resolver 4 speed 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B C/D R 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B R 256, 1 Vpp, A/B R 400, 1 Vpp, A/B R 512, 1 Vpp, A/B R 192, 1 Vpp, A/B R 480, 1 Vpp, A/B R 800, 1 Vpp, A/B R 18000, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096 32, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096 512, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096 16, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Singleturn 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, Singleturn 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, Multiturn 4096 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, singleturn, error bit 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, multiturn 4096, error bit 4000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded 20000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded 40000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded 16000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, resolution 100 nm 1024 HTL A/B R 1024 TTL A/B R 2048 HTL A/B R 1024 HTL A/B 1024 TTL A/B 2048 HTL A/B 2048 TTL A/B 1024 HTL A/B unipolar 2048 HTL A/B unipolar 2048 TTL A/B R, with sense SSI, Singleturn, 24 V SSI, Multiturn 4096, 24 V 4096, HTL, A/B, SSI, Singleturn 2000 nm, TTL, A/B R distance-coded User-defined Identify encoder Encoder with EnDat2.1 interface identified DRIVE-CLiQ encoder identified Digital encoder (absolute) identified Digital encoder (incremental) identified Identify encoder (waiting) Caution: An encoder type with p0400 < 9999 defines an encoder for which there is an encoder parameter list. When selecting a catalog encoder (p0400 < 9999) the parameters from the encoder parameter list cannot be changed (write protection). To remove write protection, the encoder type should be set to a third-party encoder (p0400 = 9999). Note: The connected encoder can be identified by setting p0400 to 10000 or 10100. This assumes that the encoder supports this method, which is possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface, DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999. When using an encoder with track A/B and zero pulse, as standard, fine synchronization is not set using a zero mark. If, for a synchronous motor, fine synchronization is to be realized using a zero mark, then the following must be executed: - set p0400 to 9999 - set p0404.15 to 1 Prerequisite: Coarse synchronization must be selected (e.g. pole position identification) and the zero pulse of the encoder must be either mechanically or electronically (p0431) adjusted to the pole position. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-147 Parameters List of parameters For p0400 = 10000 the following applies: If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0. For p0400 = 10100 the following applies: If an identification is not possible, p0400 remains set to 10100 until it becomes possible. p0400[0...n] Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 1580, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10000 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported. Value: 0: 3001: 3002: 3003: 3005: 3006: 3007: 3008: 3009: 3011: 3020: 9999: 10000: Caution: An encoder type with p0400 < 9999 defines an encoder for which there is an encoder parameter list. When selecting a catalog encoder (p0400 < 9999) the parameters from the encoder parameter list cannot be changed (write protection). To remove write protection, the encoder type should be set to a third-party encoder (p0400 = 9999). Note: The connected encoder can be identified by setting p0400 to 10000 or 10100. This assumes that the encoder supports this method, which is possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface, DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. No encoder 1024 HTL A/B R 1024 TTL A/B R 2048 HTL A/B R 1024 HTL A/B 1024 TTL A/B 2048 HTL A/B 2048 TTL A/B 1024 HTL A/B unipolar 2048 HTL A/B unipolar 2048 TTL A/B R, with sense User-defined Identify encoder The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999. When using an encoder with track A/B and zero pulse, as standard, fine synchronization is not set using a zero mark. If, for a synchronous motor, fine synchronization is to be realized using a zero mark, then the following must be executed: - set p0400 to 9999 - set p0404.15 to 1 Prerequisite: Coarse synchronization must be selected (e.g. pole position identification) and the zero pulse of the encoder must be either mechanically or electronically (p0431) adjusted to the pole position. For p0400 = 10000 the following applies: If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0. For p0400 = 10100 the following applies: If an identification is not possible, p0400 remains set to 10100 until it becomes possible. p0401[0...n] Encoder type, OEM selection / Enc type OEM sel ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 1580, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 32767 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types that the OEM supports. Note: The connected encoder can be identified by p0400 = 10000. This means that the encoder must support this and is possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface. 1-148 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0. The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999. Using p0400 = 20000, the encoder type can be selected from the list of OEM encoders using p0401. p0402[0...n] Gearbox type selection / Gearbox type sel ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 10100 Factory setting 9999 Description: Selects the gearbox type to pre-set the inversion and the gearbox factor. Measuring gear factor = motor or load revolutions / encoder revolutions. Value: 1: 2: 3: 4: 9999: 10000: 10100: Gearbox 1:1 not inverted Gearbox 2:7 inverted Gearbox 4:17 inverted Gearbox 2:10 inverted Gearbox, user-defined Identify gearbox Identify gearbox Dependency: Refer to: p0410, p0432, p0433 Note: Re p0402 = 1: Automatic setting of p0410 = 0000 bin, p0432 = 1, p0433 = 1. Re p0402 = 2: Automatic setting of p0410 = 0011 bin, p0432 = 7, p0433 = 2. Re p0402 = 3: Automatic setting of p0410 = 0011 bin, p0432 = 17, p0433 = 4. Re p0402 = 4: Automatic setting of p0410 = 0011 bin, p0432 = 10, p0433 = 2. Re p0402 = 9999: No automatic setting of p0410, p0432, p0433. The parameters should be manually set. Re p0402 = 10000: It is only possible to identify the gearbox type for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. Parameters p0410, p0432 and p0433 are set corresponding to the identified gearbox. If an identification is not possible, then p0402 is set to 9999. p0404[0...n] Encoder configuration effective / Enc_config eff ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4010, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Settings for the basic encoder properties. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 09 10 11 Signal name Linear encoder Absolute encoder Multiturn encoder Track A/B sq-wave Track A/B sine Track C/D Hall sensor EnDat encoder SSI encoder DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Digital encoder 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No FP - 1-149 Parameters List of parameters 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 Caution: Equidistant zero mark Irregular zero mark Distance-coded zero mark Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Acceleration Track A/B analog Voltage level 5 V Voltage level 24 V Remote sense (only SMC30) Resolver excit. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No - This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Notice: If an SSI encoder (bit 9 = 1) is used as motor encoder for permanent-magnet synchronous motors, then this is only permissible in conjunction with an additional A/B track (bit 3 = 1 or bit 4 = 1). Note: ZM: Zero mark SMC: Sensor Module Cabinet If a technique to determine the commutation information/data has not been selected (e.g. track C/D, Hall sensor), and the encoder pulse number is an integer multiple of the pole number, then the following applies: The track A/B is adjusted to match the magnetic position of the motor. Re bit 01, 02 (absolute encoder, multiturn encoder): These bits can only be selected for EnDat encoders, SSI encoders or DRIVE-CLiQ encoders. Re bit 10 (DRIVE-CLiQ encoder): This bit is only used for the large-scale integrated DRIVE-CLiQ encoders that provide their encoder data directly in DRIVE-CLiQ format without converting this data. This bit is not, therefore, set for first-generation DRIVE-CLiQ encoders. Re bit 12 (equidistant zero mark): The zero marks occur at regular intervals (e.g. rotary encoder with 1 zero mark per revolution or linear encoder with constant zero mark distance). The bit activates monitoring of the zero mark distance (p0424/p0425, linear/rotary) or in the case of the linear encoder with 1 zero mark and p0424 = 0 zero mark monitoring is activated. Re bit 13 (irregular zero mark): The zero marks occur at irregular intervals (e.g. a linear scale with only 1 zero mark in the traversing range). The zero mark distance is not monitored. Re bit 14 (distance-coded zero mark): The distance (clearance) between two or several consecutive zero marks allows the absolute position to be calculated. Re bit 15 (commutation with zero mark): Only applicable for synchronous motors. The function can be de-selected by priority via p0430.23. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies: The phase sequence of the C/D track (if available) must be the same as the phase sequence of the encoder (A/B track). The phase sequence of the Hall signal (if available) must be the same as the phase sequence of the motor. Further, the position of the Hall sensor must be mechanically adjusted to the motor EMF. The fine synchronization is only started after two zero marks have been passed. p0405[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Square-wave encoder track A/B / Sq-wave enc A/B Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 1111 bin Settings for the track A/B in a square-wave encoder. For square-wave encoders, p0404.3 must also be 1. 1-150 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 Signal name Signal Level Track monitoring Zero pulse Switching thresh Pulse/direction 1 signal Bipolar TTL A/B <> -A/B Same as A/B track High Active 0 signal Unipolar HTL None 24 V unipolar Low Inactive FP - Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: Re bit 02: When the function is activated, track monitoring can be de-activated by setting p0437.26. Re bit 05: When the function is activated, a frequency setpoint and a direction for traveling can be entered via an encoder interface. p0407[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Linear encoder grid division / Enc grid div Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4010, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [nm] Max 250000000 [nm] Factory setting 16000 [nm] Description: Sets the grid division for a linear encoder. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The lowest permissible value is 250 nm. p0408[0...n] Rotary encoder pulse No. / Rot enc pulse No. ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4010, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16777215 Factory setting 2048 Description: Sets the number of pulses for a rotary encoder. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The number of pole pairs for a resolver is entered here. The smallest permissible value is 1 pulse. p0410[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704, 4710, 4711, 4715 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Setting to invert actual values. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-151 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Note: Bit 00 Signal name Invert speed actual value 1 signal Yes 0 signal No 01 Invert position actual value Yes No FP 4710, 4711, 4715 4704 The inversion influences the following parameters: Bit 00: r0061, r0063 (exception: encoderless control), r0094 Bit 01: r0482, r0483 p0410[0...n] Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value ENC (Lin_enc) Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704, 4710, 4711, 4715 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Setting to invert actual values. Bit field: Bit 00 Signal name Invert velocity actual value 1 signal Yes 0 signal No 01 Invert position actual value Yes No Note: FP 4710, 4711, 4715 4704 The inversion influences the following parameters: Bit 00: r0061, r0063 (exception: encoderless control), r0094 Bit 01: r0482, r0483 p0411[0...n] Measuring gear, configuration / Meas gear config ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for position tracking of a measuring gear. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Notice: For p0411.3 = 1 the following applies: Signal name Measuring gear, activate position tracking Axis type Measuring gear, reset position Meas. gearbox, activate pos. tracking for incremental encoders 1 signal Yes Linear axis Yes Yes 0 signal No Rotary axis No No FP - If position tracking is activated for incremental encoders, only the position actual value is stored. Axis or encoder motion is not detected when de-activated! Any tolerance window entered in p0413 has no effect. Note: For the following events, the non-volatile, saved position values are automatically reset: - when an encoder replacement has been identified. - when changing the configuration of the Encoder Data Set (EDS). 1-152 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0412[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4194303 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary encoder with activated position tracking of the measuring gear. Dependency: This parameter is only of significance for an absolute encoder (p0404.1 = 1) with activated position tracking (p0411.0 = 1) and for an incremental encoder with activated position tracking (p0411.3 = 1). Note: The resolution that is set must be able to be represented using r0483. For rotary axes/modulo axes, the following applies: p0411.0 = 1: This parameter is pre-set with p0421 and can be changed. p0411.3 = 1: The parameter value is pre-set to the highest possible value. The highest possible value depends on the pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419). For linear axes, the following applies: p0411.0 = 1: This parameter is pre-assigned with p0421, expanded by 6 bits for multiturn information (maximum number of overflows) and cannot be changed. p0411.3 = 1: The parameter value is pre-set to the highest possible value. The highest possible value depends on the pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419). p0413[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track window Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 4294967300.00 Factory setting 0.00 Sets a tolerance window for position tracking. After the system is powered up, the difference between the saved position and the actual position is determined, and depending on this, the following is initiated: Difference within the tolerance window --> The position is reproduced as a result of the encoder actual value. Difference outside the tolerance window --> An appropriate message is output. Dependency: Caution: Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501 Rotation, e.g. through a complete encoder range is not detected. Note: The value is entered in integer (complete) encoder pulses. For p0411.0 = 1, the value is automatically pre-assigned quarter of the encoder range. Example: Quarter of the encoder range = (p0408 * p0421) / 4 It is possible that the tolerance window may not be able to be precisely set due to the data type (floating point number with 23 bit mantissa). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-153 Parameters List of parameters p0414[0...n] Redundant coarse position value relevant bits (identified) / Relevant bits ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 16 Description: Sets the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value. p0415[0...n] Gx_XIST1 Coarse position safe most significant bit (identified) / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 31 Factory setting 14 Description: Sets the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position. Note: MSB: Most Significant Bit p0416[0...n] Non safety-relevant meas. steps position value pos1 (detected) / nsrPos1 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 22000 Description: Sets the non safety-relevant measuring steps of POS1. Dependency: Refer to: r0473, p9513 p0417[0...n] Encoder safety comparison algorithm (detected) / Safety CompAlgo ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 255 Description: Sets the the comparison algorithm for the encoder position monitoring functions. Value: 0: 10: 11: 255: Dependency: Refer to: p9541 p0418[0...n] Fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST1 ENC, VECTOR_G Description: 1-154 SMx20 safety algorithm DQL binary safety algorithm DQL linear non-binary safety algorithm Safety algorithm unknown Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4010, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 2 Max 18 Factory setting 11 Sets the fine resolution in bits of the incremental position actual values. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The parameter applies for the following process data: - Gx_XIST1 - Gx_XIST2 for reference mark or flying measurement The fine resolution specifies the fraction between two encoder pulses. Depending on the physical measurement principle, an encoder pulse can be broken down into a different number of fractions (e.g. squarewave encoder: 2 bit = resolution 4, sin/cos encoder: Typical 11 bit = resolution 2048). For a squarewave encoder, with the factory setting, the least significant bits have the value zero, i.e. they do not supply any useful information. For especially high quality measuring systems, the fine resolution must be increased corresponding to the available accuracy. p0419[0...n] Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST2 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704, 4710 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 2 Max 18 Factory setting 9 Description: Sets the fine resolution in bits of the absolute position actual values. Dependency: Refer to: p0418 Note: This parameter applies to process data Gx_XIST2 when reading the absolute value. p0420[0...n] Encoder connection / Enc_connection ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Selecting the encoder connection. Bit field: Bit 00 01 p0421[0...n] Absolute encoder rotary multiturn resolution / Enc abs multiturn ENC, VECTOR_G Signal name SUB-D Terminal 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 4096 Description: Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary absolute encoder. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-155 Parameters List of parameters p0422[0...n] Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [nm] Max 4294967295 [nm] Factory setting 100 [nm] Description: Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The serial protocol of an absolute encoder provides the position with a certain resolution , e.g. 100 nm. This value must be entered here. p0423[0...n] Absolute encoder rotary singleturn resolution / Enc abs singleturn ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1073741823 Factory setting 8192 Description: Sets the number of measuring steps per revolution for a rotary absolute encoder. The resolution refers to the absolute position. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. p0424[0...n] Encoder, linear zero mark distance / Enc lin ZM_dist ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [mm] Max 65535 [mm] Factory setting 20 [mm] Description: Sets the distance between two zero marks for a linear encoder. This information is used for zero mark monitoring. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance. p0425[0...n] Encoder, rotary zero mark distance / Enc rot dist ZM ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 4704, 8570 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16777215 Factory setting 2048 Description: Sets the distance in pulses between two zero marks for a rotary encoder. This information is used for zero mark monitoring. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance. 1-156 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0426[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Encoder zero mark differential distance / Enc ZM Dif_dist Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 65535 Factory setting 1 Sets the differential distance with distance-coded zero marks [signal periods]. The value corresponds to jump displacement of "zero mark with interference". Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. p0427[0...n] Encoder SSI baud rate / Enc SSI baud rate ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [kHz] Max 65535 [kHz] Factory setting 100 [kHz] Description: Sets the baud rate for an SSI encoder. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: SSI: Synchronous Serial Interface p0428[0...n] Encoder SSI monoflop time / Enc SSI t_monoflop ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [s] Max 65535 [s] Factory setting 30 [s] Description: Sets the minimum delay time between two data transfers of the absolute value for an SSI encoder. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. p0429[0...n] Encoder SSI configuration / Enc SSI config ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for an SSI encoder. Bit field: Bit 00 02 06 Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Signal name Transfer code Transfer absolute value twice Data line during the monoflop time 1 signal Binary code Yes High level (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal Gray code No Low level FP - 1-157 Parameters List of parameters Note: Re bit 06: The quiescent signal level of the data line corresponds to the inverted, set level. p0430[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Sensor Module configuration / SM config Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1110 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration of the Sensor Module. Bit field: Bit 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 30 31 Signal name Burst oversampling Continuous oversampling (reserved) Safety position actual value sensing Speed calculation mode (only SMC30) Zero mark tolerance Rot pos adapt De-select commutation with zero mark Commutation with selected zero mark Switch off encoder voltage supply during parking Extrapolate position values Cubic correction Phase correction Amplitude correction Offset correction 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Incremental diff Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No Flank time meas No No No No No FP - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No - Notice: A bit-wise configuration is only possible if the corresponding property is also present in r0458. Note: Re bit 17 (burst oversampling): - if bit = 1, burst oversampling is switched on. Re bit 18 (continuous oversampling): - if bit = 1, continuous oversampling is switched on. Re bit 19 (Safety position actual value sensing): - if bit = 1, the Safety position actual value is transferred in the cyclic telegram. Re bit 20 (speed calculation mode): - if bit = 1, the speed is calculated via incremental difference without extrapolation. - if bit = 0, the speed is calculated via edge time measurement with extrapolation. p0453 is effective in this mode. Re bit 21 (zero mark tolerance): - if bit = 1, a one-off zero mark distance error is tolerated. In the event of a defect, the fault F3x100/F3x101 does not appear, but alarm A3x400/A3x401 does. Re bit 22 (rotor position adaptation): - if bit = 1, the rotor position is corrected automatically. The correction speed is +/-1/4 encoder pulse per zero mark distance. Re bit 23 (de-select commutation with zero mark): - The bit should only be set for encoders that have not been adjusted. Re bit 24 (commutation with selected zero mark): - if bit = 1, the commutation position is corrected via a selected zero mark. Re bit 25 (disconnect the encoder power supply on parking): - if bit = 1, the encoder power supply is switched off on parking (0 V). - if bit = 0, the encoder power supply is not switched off on parking, it is reduced from 24 V to 5 V. Re bit 27 (extrapolate position values): - if bit = 1, the extrapolation of the position values is activated. Re bit 28 (cubic correction); - if bit = 1, the cubic correction for track A/B sine is activated. 1-158 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Re bit 29 (phase correction): - if bit = 1, the phase correction for track A/B sine is activated. Re bit 30 (amplitude correction): - if bit = 1, the amplitude correction for track A/B sine is activated. Re bit 31 (offset correction): - if bit = 1, the offset correction for track A/B sine is activated. p0430[0...n] ENC (Lin_enc) Sensor Module configuration / SM config Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1110 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration of the Sensor Module. Bit field: Bit 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 30 31 Signal name Burst oversampling Continuous oversampling (reserved) Safety position actual value sensing Velocity calculation mode (only SMC30) Zero mark tolerance Rot pos adapt De-select commutation with zero mark Commutation with selected zero mark Switch off encoder voltage supply during parking Extrapolate position values Cubic correction Phase correction Amplitude correction Offset correction 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Incremental diff Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No Flank time meas No No No No No FP - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No - Notice: A bit-wise configuration is only possible if the corresponding property is also present in r0458. Note: Re bit 17 (burst oversampling): - if bit = 1, burst oversampling is switched on. Re bit 18 (continuous oversampling): - if bit = 1, continuous oversampling is switched on. Re bit 19 (Safety position actual value sensing): - if bit = 1, the Safety position actual value is transferred in the cyclic telegram. Re bit 20 (speed calculation mode): - if bit = 1, the speed is calculated via incremental difference without extrapolation. - if bit = 0, the speed is calculated via edge time measurement with extrapolation. p0453 is effective in this mode. Re bit 21 (zero mark tolerance): - if bit = 1, a one-off zero mark distance error is tolerated. In the event of a defect, the fault F3x100/F3x101 does not appear, but alarm A3x400/A3x401 does. Re bit 22 (rotor position adaptation): - if bit = 1, the rotor position is corrected automatically. The correction speed is +/-1/4 encoder pulse per zero mark distance. Re bit 23 (de-select commutation with zero mark): - The bit should only be set for encoders that have not been adjusted. Re bit 24 (commutation with selected zero mark): - if bit = 1, the commutation position is corrected via a selected zero mark. Re bit 25 (disconnect the encoder power supply on parking): - if bit = 1, the encoder power supply is switched off on parking (0 V). - if bit = 0, the encoder power supply is not switched off on parking, it is reduced from 24 V to 5 V. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-159 Parameters List of parameters Re bit 27 (extrapolate position values): - if bit = 1, the extrapolation of the position values is activated. Re bit 28 (cubic correction); - if bit = 1, the cubic correction for track A/B sine is activated. Re bit 29 (phase correction): - if bit = 1, the phase correction for track A/B sine is activated. Re bit 30 (amplitude correction): - if bit = 1, the amplitude correction for track A/B sine is activated. Re bit 31 (offset correction): - if bit = 1, the offset correction for track A/B sine is activated. p0431[0...n] Angular commutation offset / Ang_com offset VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -180.00 [] Max 180.00 [] Factory setting 0.00 [] Description: Sets the angular commutation offset. Dependency: The value is taken into account in r0094. Refer to: r0094, r1778 Caution: When the firmware is upgraded from V2.3 to V2.4 or higher, the value must be reduced by 60 if all the following conditions are fulfilled: - The motor is a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2, 2xx, 4, 4xx). - The encoder is a resolver (p0404.23 = 1). - The actual speed value is inverted (p0410.0 = 1). Notice: The angular commutation offset cannot be generally taken from other drive systems. As a minimum - the sign of the offset determined for SIMODRIVE 611 digital and SIMODRIVE 611 universal must be reversed for SINAMICS (p0431 (SINAMICS) = -p1016 (SIMODRIVE)). Note: Angular commutation offset, angular difference between electrical position of encoder and flux position. For p0404.5 = 1 (track C/D) the following applies: The angular offset in p0431 acts on track A/B, the zero mark on track C/D. For p0404.6 = 1 (Hall sensor) the following applies: The angular offset in p0431 acts on track A/B and the zero mark. p0432[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Gearbox factor, encoder revolutions / Grbx_fact enc_rev Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 10000 Factory setting 1 Sets the encoder revolutions for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation. The gearbox factor specifies the ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft (for motor encoders) or between the encoder shaft and the load. Dependency: This parameter can only be set for p0402 = 9999. Refer to: p0402, p0410, p0433 Note: Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410. 1-160 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0433[0...n] Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions / Grbx_fact mot_rev ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 10000 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the motor and load revolutions for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation. The gearbox factor specifies the ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft (for motor encoders) or between the encoder shaft and the load. Dependency: This parameter can only be set for p0402 = 9999. Refer to: p0402, p0410, p0432 Note: Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410. p0434[0...n] Encoder SSI error bit / Enc SSI error bit ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the position and level of the error bit in the SSI protocol. Notice: The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol. Note: Value = dcba ba: Position of the error bit in the protocol (0 ... 63). c: Level (0: Low level, 1: High level). d: Status of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On with 1 error bit, 2: On with 2 error bits ... 9: On with 9 error bits). For several error error bits, the following applies: - the position specified under ba and the additional bits are assigned increasing consecutively. - the level set under c applies to all error bits. Example: p0434 = 1013 --> The evaluation is switched in and the error bit is at position 13 with a low level. p0434 = 1113 --> The evaluation is switched in and the error bit is at position 13 with a high level. p0435[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Encoder SSI alarm bit / Enc SSI alarm bit Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Sets the position and level of the alarm bit in the SSI protocol. Notice: The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol. Note: Value = dcba ba: Position of the alarm bit in protocol (0 ... 63). c: Level (0: Low level, 1: High level). d: State of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-161 Parameters List of parameters Example: p0435 = 1014 --> The evaluation is switched in and the alarm bit is at position 14 with a low level. p0435 = 1114 --> The evaluation is switched in and the alarm bit is at position 14 with a high level. p0436[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Encoder SSI parity bit / Enc SSI parity bit Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Sets the position and parity of the parity bit in the SSI protocol. Notice: The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol. Note: Value = dcba ba: Position of the parity bit in the protocol (0 ... 63). c: Parity (0: even, 1: uneven). d: State of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On). Example: p0436 = 1015 --> The evaluation is switched in and the parity bit is at position 15 with even parity. p0436 = 1115 --> The evaluation is switched in and the parity bit is at position 15 with uneven parity. p0437[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Sensor Module configuration extended / SM config ext Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0011 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the extended configuration of the Sensor Module. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 11 12 13 25 26 28 29 31 Dependency: 1-162 Signal name Data logger Zero mark edge detection Correction position actual value XIST1 Edge evaluation bit 0 Edge evaluation bit 1 Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt errors Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Fault handling after PROFIdrive Activate additional messages Support absolute position for incremental encoder Deselect monitoring multiturn representation in Gx_XIST2 Deselect track monitoring EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy Analog unipolar track monitoring 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 4750 Yes No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Refer to: p0430, r0459 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 00: When the data logger (trace) is activated, in the case of a fault, data before and after the event are recorded (traced) and saved in files on the non-volatile memory medium. Experts can then evaluate this data. Re bit 01: If bit = 0, the zero mark is evaluated by ANDing tracks A and B and the zero mark. For bit = 1, the zero mark is evaluated depending on the direction of rotation detected. For a positive direction of rotation, the positive edge of the zero mark is considered and for a negative direction of rotation, the negative edge of the zero mark. Re bit 02: If the bit is set, in the event of a deviation less than the tolerance window for the zero mark (p4681, p4682), the pulses per revolution are corrected. If the bit is not set, encoder fault F3x131 is triggered. Re Bit 04 and Bit 05: The actual hardware only supports 1x or 4x signal evaluation. Bit 5/4 = 0/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x. Bit 5/4 = 1/0: Illegal setting. Bit 5/4 = 0/1: Signal evaluation per period, 1x. Bit 5/4 = 1/1: Illegal setting. Re bit 06: If the function is active, when dn/dt monitoring responds, the speed actual value is internally frozen for a time equivalent to two current controller clock cycles. The rotor position continues to be integrated. The actual value is then re-enabled after this time has expired. Re bit 07: If the bit is set, the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to p4688 at the zero mark. Re bit 11: If the bit is set, the Sensor Module checks within a certain time grid whether the fault cause is still present. This enables the Sensor Module to switch from the fault state to the operating state and provide valid actual values automatically. The faults are displayed until the user acknowledges them. Re bit 12: Additional fault messages can be activated for extended fault diagnostics. Re bit 13: When the bit is set, for an incremental encoder with zero mark, the absolute value in Gn_XIST2 can be requested via Gn_STW.13. Re bit 20: If the bit is set, the bandwidth of the analog filter for SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder) can be set via p4660. Re bit 26: Track monitoring is de-activated for the square-wave encoders when the bit is set, even if the monitoring function is selected in p0405.2. Re bit 28: Monitoring of the difference between incremental and absolute position in the case of linear encoders. Re bit 29: When the bit is set, the EnDat encoder is initialized under a certain speed and, therefore, with high accuracy. If initialization at a higher speed is requested, fault F31151, F32151, or F33151 is output. Re bit 31: When monitoring is active, the levels of the individual track signals and the corresponding inverted track signals are monitored separately. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-163 Parameters List of parameters p0437[0...n] ENC (Lin_enc) Sensor Module configuration extended / SM config ext Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0011 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the extended configuration of the Sensor Module. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 11 12 13 25 26 28 29 31 Signal name Data logger Zero mark edge detection Correction position actual value XIST1 Edge evaluation bit 0 Edge evaluation bit 1 Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt errors Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Fault handling after PROFIdrive Activate additional messages Support absolute position for incremental encoder Deselect monitoring multiturn representation in Gx_XIST2 Deselect track monitoring EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy Analog unipolar track monitoring 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 4750 Yes No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Dependency: Refer to: p0430, r0459 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 00: When the data logger (trace) is activated, in the case of a fault, data before and after the event are recorded (traced) and saved in files on the non-volatile memory medium. Experts can then evaluate this data. Re bit 01: If bit = 0, the zero mark is evaluated by ANDing tracks A and B and the zero mark. For bit = 1, the zero mark is evaluated depending on the direction detected. For a positive direction, the positive edge of the zero mark is considered and for a negative direction, the negative edge of the zero mark. Re bit 02: If the bit is set, in the event of a deviation less than the tolerance window for the zero mark (p4681, p4682), the pulses per revolution are corrected. If the bit is not set, encoder fault F3x131 is triggered. Re Bit 04 and Bit 05: Bit 5/4 = 0/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x. Bit 5/4 = 1/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x. Bit 5/4 = 0/1: Signal evaluation per period, 1x. Bit 5/4 = 1/1: Illegal setting. Re bit 06: If the function is active, when dn/dt monitoring responds, the velocity actual value is internally frozen for a time equivalent to two current controller clock cycles. The rotor position continues to be integrated. The actual value is then re-enabled after this time has expired. Re bit 07: If the bit is set, the encoder pulses detected as faulty between two zero marks are accumulated (p4688). Re bit 29: When the bit is set, the EnDat encoder is initialized under a certain velocity and, therefore, with high accuracy. If initialization at a higher velocity is requested, fault F31151, F32151, or F33151 is output. 1-164 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Re bit 31: When monitoring is active, the levels of the individual track signals and the corresponding inverted track signals are monitored separately. p0438[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Squarewave encoder filter time / Enc t_filt Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 100.00 [s] Factory setting 0.64 [s] Sets the filter time for a squarewave encoder. The hardware of the squarewave encoder only supports the following values: 0: No filtering 0.04 s 0.64 s 2.56 s 10.24 s 20.48 s Dependency: Refer to: r0452 Notice: If the filter time is too long, the track signals A/B/R may be suppressed and the appropriate messages output. Note: The most suitable filter time depends on the number of pulses and maximum speed of the square-wave encoder. The filter time is automatically corrected to the next value when entering a non-specified value. In this case, no message is output. The effective filter time is displayed in r0452. p0439[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Encoder ramp-up time / Enc ramp-up time Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 65535 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Sets the ramp-up time for the encoder. The encoder supplies stable track signals once this time has elapsed. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). p0440[0...n] Copy encoder serial number / Copy enc ser_no ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Copies the actual serial number of the encoder belonging to this Encoder Data Set (EDS) to p0441 ... p0445. Example: For p0440[0] = 1, the serial number of the encoder belonging EDS0 is copied to p0441[0] ... p0445[0]. Value: 0: 1: No action Transfer serial number Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464, p1990 Note: For encoders with serial number, encoder replacement is monitored in order to request angular commutation calibration (adjustment) for motor encoders and absolute calibration for direct measuring systems with absolute value data. The serial number, which from then onwards is used for monitoring purposes, can be transferred using p0440. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-165 Parameters List of parameters In the following cases, copying is automatically started in the following cases: 1.) When commissioning 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors. 2.) When writing into p0431. 3.) For p1990 = 1. p0440 is automatically set to 0 when the copying has been completed. In order to permanently accept the copied values, it is necessary to save in a non-volatile fashion (p0977). p0441[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 1 / Enc comm ser_no 1 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Serial number part 1 of the encoder for the commissioning. Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. p0442[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 2 / Enc comm ser_no 2 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Serial number part 2 of the encoder for the commissioning. Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. p0443[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 3 / Enc comm ser_no 3 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Serial number part 3 of the encoder for the commissioning. Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. p0444[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 4 / Enc comm ser_no 4 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Serial number part 4 of the encoder for the commissioning. Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. 1-166 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0445[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 5 / Enc comm ser_no 5 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Serial number part 5 of the encoder for the commissioning. Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. p0446[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits before the absolute value / Enc SSI bit before ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the number of bits before the absolute value in the SSI protocol. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: For example, error bit, alarm bit or parity bit can be positioned at these bits. p0447[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits absolute value / Enc SSI bit val ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 25 Description: Sets the number of bits for the absolute value in the SSI protocol. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. p0448[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits after the absolute value / Enc SSI bit after ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the number of bits after the absolute value in the SSI protocol. Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: For example, error bit, alarm bit or parity bit can be positioned at these bits. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-167 Parameters List of parameters p0449[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Encoder SSI number of bits, filler bits / Enc SSI fill bits Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of filler bits for double absolute value transfer in the SSI protocol. Dependency: Refer to: p0429 Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: This parameter is only of significance for p0429.2 = 1. r0451[0...2] Commutation angle factor / Enc commut_factor VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4710 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the relationship between the electrical and mechanical pole positions. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. r0452 Squarewave encoder filter time display / Enc t_filt displ ENC Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [s] Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Displays the effective filter time for a squarewave encoder. The filter time is set using p0438. Dependency: Refer to: p0438 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. r0452[0...2] Squarewave encoder filter time display / Enc t_filt displ VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [s] Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Displays the effective filter time for a squarewave encoder. The filter time is set using p0438. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0438 1-168 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. p0453[0...n] Pulse encoder evaluation zero speed measuring time / Enc_ev z 0 t_meas ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.10 [ms] Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 1000.00 [ms] Description: Sets the measuring time for evaluating zero speed. Dependency: Refer to: r0452 Note: This function is required for slow-running motors so that actual speeds close to zero can be output correctly. r0455 Encoder configuration recognized / Enc config act If no pulses are detected from track A/B during this time, a speed actual value of zero is output. ENC Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the detected encoder configuration. In this case, the encoder must automatically support the function (e.g. encoder with EnDat interface). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 Signal name Linear encoder Absolute encoder Multiturn encoder Track A/B sq-wave Track A/B sine Track C/D Hall sensor EnDat encoder SSI encoder DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Digital encoder Equidistant zero mark Irregular zero mark Distance-coded zero mark Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Acceleration Track A/B analog Voltage level 5 V Voltage level 24 V Remote sense (only SMC30) Resolver excit. Dependency: Refer to: p0404 Note: ZM: Zero mark 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - This parameter is only used for diagnostics. A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 20, 21 (voltage level 5 V, voltage level 24 V): The voltage level cannot be detected. Therefore, these bits are always set to 0. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-169 Parameters List of parameters r0455[0...2] VECTOR_G Encoder configuration recognized / Enc config act Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the detected encoder configuration. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 Dependency: Refer to: p0404 Note: ZM: Zero mark In this case, the encoder must automatically support the function (e.g. encoder with EnDat interface). Signal name Linear encoder Absolute encoder Multiturn encoder Track A/B sq-wave Track A/B sine Track C/D Hall sensor EnDat encoder SSI encoder DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Digital encoder Equidistant zero mark Irregular zero mark Distance-coded zero mark Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Acceleration Track A/B analog Voltage level 5 V Voltage level 24 V Remote sense (only SMC30) Resolver excit. 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - This parameter is only used for diagnostics. A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 20, 21 (voltage level 5 V, voltage level 24 V): The voltage level cannot be detected. Therefore, these bits are always set to 0. r0456 Encoder configuration supported / Enc_config supp ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder configuration supported by the Sensor Module. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 1-170 Signal name Linear encoder Absolute encoder Multiturn encoder Track A/B sq-wave Track A/B sine Track C/D 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 06 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 Hall sensor EnDat encoder SSI encoder DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Digital encoder Equidistant zero mark Irregular zero mark Distance-coded zero mark Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Acceleration Track A/B analog Voltage level 5 V Voltage level 24 V Remote sense (only SMC30) Resolver excit. Dependency: Refer to: p0404 Note: ZM: Zero mark Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No - This parameter is only used for diagnostics. A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. r0456[0...2] VECTOR_G Encoder configuration supported / Enc_config supp Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder configuration supported by the Sensor Module. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 Dependency: Refer to: p0404 Note: ZM: Zero mark Signal name Linear encoder Absolute encoder Multiturn encoder Track A/B sq-wave Track A/B sine Track C/D Hall sensor EnDat encoder SSI encoder DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Digital encoder Equidistant zero mark Irregular zero mark Distance-coded zero mark Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Acceleration Track A/B analog Voltage level 5 V Voltage level 24 V Remote sense (only SMC30) Resolver excit. 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - This parameter is only used for diagnostics. A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-171 Parameters List of parameters r0458 Sensor Module properties / SM properties ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the Sensor Module configuration. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Signal name Encoder data available Motor data available Temperature sensor connection available Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVECLiQ also available Module temperature available Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power of 2 Sensor Module permits parking/unparking Hall sensor can be combined with actual value inversion Evaluation through several temperature channels possible Encoder fault and its associated information available Speed diagnostics in the Sensor Module Configuring without park state possible Extended functions available Extended encoder fault handling Extended singleturn/multiturn information available Valuation figures available Pole position identification Burst oversampling Continuous oversampling Safety position actual value sensing Extended speed calculation being used (only SMC30) Zero mark tolerance Rot pos adapt Commutation with zero mark can be deselected Commutation with selected zero mark Disconnection of encoder power supply on parking supported Parking with temperature evaluation SSI position value extrapolation Cubic correction Phase correction Amplitude correction Offset correction 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No - Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 11: When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"): p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445 Re bit 12: The extended functions can be configured using p0437. 1-172 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Re bit 13: Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15. Re bit 14: Only for internal Siemens use. Re bit 23: When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be de-selected using p0430.23. Re bit 24: If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out. r0458 Sensor Module properties / SM properties ENC (Lin_enc) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the Sensor Module configuration. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Signal name Encoder data available Motor data available Temperature sensor connection available Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVECLiQ also available Module temperature available Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power of 2 Sensor Module permits parking/unparking Hall sensor can be combined with actual value inversion Evaluation through several temperature channels possible Encoder fault and its associated information available Velocity diagnostics in the Sensor Module Configuring without park state possible Extended functions available Extended encoder fault handling Extended singleturn/multiturn information available Valuation figures available Pole position identification Burst oversampling Continuous oversampling Safety position actual value sensing Extended velocity calculation available (only SMC30) Zero mark tolerance Rot pos adapt Commutation with zero mark can be deselected Commutation with selected zero mark Disconnection of encoder power supply on parking supported Parking with temperature evaluation SSI position value extrapolation Cubic correction Phase correction Amplitude correction Offset correction 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-173 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 11: When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"): p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445 Re bit 12: The extended functions can be configured using p0437. Re bit 13: Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15. Re bit 14: Only for internal Siemens use. Re bit 23: When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be de-selected using p0430.23. Re bit 24: If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out. r0458[0...2] VECTOR_G Sensor Module properties / SM properties Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the Sensor Module configuration. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1-174 Signal name Encoder data available Motor data available Temperature sensor connection available Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVECLiQ also available Module temperature available Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power of 2 Sensor Module permits parking/unparking Hall sensor can be combined with actual value inversion Evaluation through several temperature channels possible Encoder fault and its associated information available Speed diagnostics in the Sensor Module Configuring without park state possible Extended functions available Extended encoder fault handling Extended singleturn/multiturn information available Valuation figures available Pole position identification Burst oversampling Continuous oversampling Safety position actual value sensing Extended speed calculation being used (only SMC30) Zero mark tolerance 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No - Yes No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Rot pos adapt Commutation with zero mark can be deselected Commutation with selected zero mark Disconnection of encoder power supply on parking supported Parking with temperature evaluation SSI position value extrapolation Cubic correction Phase correction Amplitude correction Offset correction Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No - Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 11: When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"): p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445 Re bit 12: The extended functions can be configured using p0437. Re bit 13: Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15. Re bit 14: Only for internal Siemens use. Re bit 23: When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be de-selected using p0430.23. Re bit 24: If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out. r0459 Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 25 26 Signal name Data logger Zero mark edge detection Correction position actual value XIST1 Edge evaluation bit 0 Edge evaluation bit 1 Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt errors Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Function p0426, p0439 supported Pulse/direction interface Fault handling after PROFIdrive Activate additional messages Absolute position for incremental encoder supported Spindle functionality Additional temperature sensor available Internal encoder temperature available Deselect monitoring multiturn representation in Gx_XIST2 Track monitoring de-selection 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No - Yes No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-175 Parameters List of parameters 28 29 31 EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy Analog unipolar track monitoring Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Dependency: Refer to: p0437 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 09: Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Module. r0459 Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext ENC (Lin_enc) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 25 26 28 29 31 Signal name Data logger Zero mark edge detection Correction position actual value XIST1 Edge evaluation bit 0 Edge evaluation bit 1 Freeze actual velocity for dn/dt errors Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Function p0426, p0439 supported Pulse/direction interface Fault handling after PROFIdrive Activate additional messages Absolute position for incremental encoder supported Spindle functionality Additional temperature sensor available Internal encoder temperature available Deselect monitoring multiturn representation in Gx_XIST2 Track monitoring de-selection EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy Analog unipolar track monitoring 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Dependency: Refer to: p0437 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 09: Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Module. 1-176 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0459[0...2] Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 25 26 28 29 31 Signal name Data logger Zero mark edge detection Correction position actual value XIST1 Edge evaluation bit 0 Edge evaluation bit 1 Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt errors Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses Function p0426, p0439 supported Pulse/direction interface Fault handling after PROFIdrive Activate additional messages Absolute position for incremental encoder supported Spindle functionality Additional temperature sensor available Internal encoder temperature available Deselect monitoring multiturn representation in Gx_XIST2 Track monitoring de-selection EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy Analog unipolar track monitoring 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Dependency: Refer to: p0437 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. Re bit 09: Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Module. r0460 Encoder serial number part 1 / Enc ser_no 1 ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 1 of the appropriate encoder. Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-177 Parameters List of parameters r0460[0...2] Encoder serial number part 1 / Enc ser_no 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 1 of the appropriate encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 r0461 Encoder serial number part 2 / Enc ser_no 2 ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 2 of the appropriate encoder. Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0462, r0463, r0464 r0461[0...2] Encoder serial number part 2 / Enc ser_no 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 2 of the appropriate encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0462, r0463, r0464 r0462 Encoder serial number part 3 / Enc ser_no 3 ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 3 of the appropriate encoder. Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0463, r0464 1-178 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0462[0...2] Encoder serial number part 3 / Enc ser_no 3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 3 of the appropriate encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0463, r0464 r0463 Encoder serial number part 4 / Enc ser_no 4 ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 4 of the appropriate encoder. Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0464 r0463[0...2] Encoder serial number part 4 / Enc ser_no 4 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 4 of the appropriate encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0464 r0464 Encoder serial number part 5 / Enc ser_no 5 ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 5 of the appropriate encoder. Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-179 Parameters List of parameters r0464[0...2] Encoder serial number part 5 / Enc ser_no 5 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number part 5 of the appropriate encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463 r0465[0...27] Encoder 1 identification number/serial number / Enc1 ID_no/Ser_no ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the identification/serial number of encoder 1. Index 0 = first character of the identification number ... Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number ... Index y with contents = last character of the serial number Dependency: Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. Note: The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters. r0466[0...27] Encoder 2 identification number/serial number / Enc2 ID_no/Ser_no VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the identification/serial number of encoder 2. Index 0 = first character of the identification number ... Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number ... Index y with contents = last character of the serial number Dependency: Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. Note: The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters. 1-180 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0467[0...27] VECTOR_G Description: Encoder 3 identification number/serial number / Enc3 ID_no/Ser_no Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the identification/serial number of encoder 3. Index 0 = first character of the identification number ... Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number ... Index y with contents = last character of the serial number Dependency: Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. Note: The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters. r0469 Absolute encoder linear measuring step / Enc lin meas step ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [nm] Max - [nm] Factory setting - [nm] Description: Displays the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder. Dependency: Refer to: p0422, p9514 r0469[0...2] Absolute encoder linear measuring step / Enc lin meas step VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [nm] Max - [nm] Factory setting - [nm] Description: Displays the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0422, p9514 r0470 Redundant coarse value valid bits / Valid bits ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the valid bits of the redundant coarse position value. Dependency: Refer to: p9323, p9523 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-181 Parameters List of parameters r0470[0...2] Redundant coarse value valid bits / Valid bits VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the valid bits of the redundant coarse position value. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p9323, p9523 r0471 Redundant coarse value fine resolution bits / Fine bit ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value. Dependency: Refer to: p9324, p9524 r0471[0...2] Redundant coarse value fine resolution bits / Fine bit VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p9324, p9524 r0472 Redundant coarse position value relevant bits / Relevant bits ENC Description: 1-182 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0472[0...2] Redundant coarse position value relevant bits / Relevant bits VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 r0473 Non safety-relevant measuring steps position value pos1 / nsrPos1 ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the non safety-relevant measuring steps of POS1. Dependency: Refer to: p0416, p9513 r0473[0...2] Non safety-relevant measuring steps position value pos1 / nsrPos1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the non safety-relevant measuring steps of POS1. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0416, p9513 r0474 Redundant coarse position value configuration / Red pos config ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Dependency: Refer to: p9315, p9515 04 Signal name Incrementer Encoder CRC least significant byte first Redundant coarse position val. most significant bit left-aligned Binary comparison not possible 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Yes No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-183 Parameters List of parameters r0474[0...2] Redundant coarse position value configuration / Red pos config VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Dependency: Refer to: p9315, p9515 r0475 Gx_XIST1 coarse position safe most significant bit / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB 04 ENC Signal name Incrementer Encoder CRC least significant byte first Redundant coarse position val. most significant bit left-aligned Binary comparison not possible 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Yes No - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position. Note: MSB: Most Significant Bit r0475[0...2] Gx_XIST1 coarse position safe most significant bit / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Note: MSB: Most Significant Bit r0477 CO: Measuring gear, position difference / Meas gear pos diff ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the position difference before the measuring gear between powering down and powering up. Dependency: Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501 Note: The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483. The position difference should be read in encoder increments. 1-184 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0477[0...2] CO: Measuring gear, position difference / Meas gear pos diff VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the position difference before the measuring gear between powering down and powering up. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501 Note: The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483. The position difference should be read in encoder increments. r0479 CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1 ENC Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics. In contrast to r0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign. Caution: Following ramping-up or after a data set changeover, the new value is present at connector inputs which are interconnected to connector output r0479 and under certain circumstances take 100 ms to become available. Reason: These interconnections are updated in the background, unlike interconnections involving other connector outputs (e.g. CO: r0482). The value is immediately available when non-cyclically reading r0479 (e.g. via the expert list). r0479[0...2] VECTOR_G CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Caution: Following ramping-up or after a data set changeover, the new value is present at connector inputs which are interconnected to connector output r0479 and under certain circumstances take 100 ms to become available. In contrast to r0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign. Reason: These interconnections are updated in the background, unlike interconnections involving other connector outputs (e.g. CO: r0482). The value is immediately available when non-cyclically reading r0479 (e.g. via the expert list). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-185 Parameters List of parameters p0480 CI: Encoder control word Gn_STW signal source / Enc Gn_STW S_src ENC Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 4720, 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive. Note: When the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1) is activated, the following BICO interconnection is established: CI: p0480[0] = r2520[0], CI: p0480[1] = r2520[1] and CI: p0480[2] = r2520[2] p0480[0...2] VECTOR_G CI: Encoder control word Gn_STW signal source / Enc Gn_STW S_src Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 4720, 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Note: When the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1) is activated, the following BICO interconnection is established: CI: p0480[0] = r2520[0], CI: p0480[1] = r2520[1] and CI: p0480[2] = r2520[2] r0481 CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4704, 4730, 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 13 14 15 Notice: Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW can, e.g. be found in the following literature: Signal name Function 1 active Function 2 active Function 3 active Function 4 active Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Measuring probe 1 deflected Measuring probe 2 deflected Encoder fault acknowledge active Absolute value cyclically Parking encoder active Encoder fault 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Displayed in r0483 Displayed in r0483 Displayed in r0483 Displayed in r0483 Yes Yes Yes Displayed in r0483 Yes Displayed in r0483 0 signal No No No No Not present Not present Not present Not present No No No No No None FP 9676 - SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions 1-186 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Re bit 14: Displays the acknowledgement for "activate parking encoder" (Gn_STW.14 = 1) or encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) invalid. Re bit 14, 15: r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 0 can have one of the following causes: - the encoder is parked. - the encoder is de-activated. - the encoder is being commissioned. - no parameterized encoder available. - encoder data set is being changed over. r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 1 has the following significance: An encoder error has occurred and the encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) is invalid. r0481[0...2] VECTOR_G CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4010, 4704, 4730, 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 13 14 15 Notice: Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW can, e.g. be found in the following literature: Signal name Function 1 active Function 2 active Function 3 active Function 4 active Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Measuring probe 1 deflected Measuring probe 2 deflected Encoder fault acknowledge active Absolute value cyclically Parking encoder active Encoder fault 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Displayed in r0483 Displayed in r0483 Displayed in r0483 Displayed in r0483 Yes Yes Yes Displayed in r0483 Yes Displayed in r0483 0 signal No No No No Not present Not present Not present Not present No No No No No None FP 9676 - SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions Note: Re bit 14: Displays the acknowledgement for "activate parking encoder" (Gn_STW.14 = 1) or encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) invalid. Re bit 14, 15: r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 0 can have one of the following causes: - the encoder is parked. - the encoder is de-activated. - the encoder is being commissioned. - no parameterized encoder available. - encoder data set is being changed over. r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 1 has the following significance: An encoder error has occurred and the encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) is invalid. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-187 Parameters List of parameters r0482 CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 / Enc Gn_XIST1 ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4704, 4735, 4740, 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive. Note: - this value is reset if necessary when the "parking encoder" (r0481.14) function is de-selected. - in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated (p0411.0 = 1). - The update time for the position control (EPOS) corresponds to the position controller clock cycle p0115[4]. - The update time in isochronous operation corresponds to the bus cycle time r2064[1]. - The update time in isochronous operation and with position control (EPOS) corresponds to the position controller clock cycle p0115[4]. - The update time in non-isochronous operation or without position control (EPOS) comprises the following: Update time = 4 * least common multiple (LCM) of all current controller clock cycles (p0115[0]) in the drive group (infeed + drives). The minimum update time is 1 ms. Example 1: infeed, servo Update time = 4 * LCM(250 s, 125 s) = 4 * 250 s = 1 ms Example 2: infeed, servo, vector Update time = 4 * LCM(250 s, 125 s, 500 s) = 4 * 500 s = 2 ms r0482[0...2] VECTOR_G CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 / Enc Gn_XIST1 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 1680, 4704, 4735, 4740, 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Note: - this value is reset if necessary when the "parking encoder" (r0481.14) function is de-selected. - in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated (p0411.0 = 1). - The update time for the position control (EPOS) corresponds to the position controller clock cycle p0115[4]. - The update time in isochronous operation corresponds to the bus cycle time r2064[1]. - The update time in isochronous operation and with position control (EPOS) corresponds to the position controller clock cycle p0115[4]. - The update time in non-isochronous operation or without position control (EPOS) comprises the following: Update time = 4 * least common multiple (LCM) of all current controller clock cycles (p0115[0]) in the drive group (infeed + drives). The minimum update time is 1 ms. Example 1: infeed, servo Update time = 4 * LCM(250 s, 125 s) = 4 * 250 s = 1 ms Example 2: infeed, servo, vector Update time = 4 * LCM(250 s, 125 s, 500 s) = 4 * 500 s = 2 ms 1-188 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0483 CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 / Enc Gn_XIST2 ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4704, 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 according to PROFIdrive. Recommend.: Possible causes of the error codes: Error code 4097 and 4098: Defective Control Unit hardware. Error codes 4099 and 4100: Too many measuring pulses have occurred. Notice: The encoder position actual value must be requested using the encoder control word Gn_STW.13. Note: - in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated (p0411.0 = 1). - if GxZSW.15 = 1 (r0481), then an error code with the following significance is located in Gx_XIST2 (r0483): 1: Encoder fault. 2: Possible position shift in Gx_XIST1. 3: Encoder parking not possible. 4: Abort, reference mark search. 5: Abort, retrieve reference value. 6: Abort, flying measurement. 7: Abort, retrieve measured value. 8: Abort, absolute value transfer. 3841: Function not supported. 4097: Abort, reference mark search due to an initialization error. 4098: Abort, flying measurement due to an initialization error. 4099: Abort, reference mark search due to a measuring error. 4100: Abort, flying measurement due to a measuring error. r0483[0...2] CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 / Enc Gn_XIST2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 1680, 4704, 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 according to PROFIdrive. Recommend.: Possible causes of the error codes: Error code 4097 and 4098: Defective Control Unit hardware. Error codes 4099 and 4100: Too many measuring pulses have occurred. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Notice: The encoder position actual value must be requested using the encoder control word Gn_STW.13. Note: - in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated (p0411.0 = 1). - if GxZSW.15 = 1 (r0481), then an error code with the following significance is located in Gx_XIST2 (r0483): 1: Encoder fault. 2: Possible position shift in Gx_XIST1. 3: Encoder parking not possible. 4: Abort, reference mark search. 5: Abort, retrieve reference value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-189 Parameters List of parameters 6: Abort, flying measurement. 7: Abort, retrieve measured value. 8: Abort, absolute value transfer. 3841: Function not supported. 4097: Abort, reference mark search due to an initialization error. 4098: Abort, flying measurement due to an initialization error. 4099: Abort, reference mark search due to a measuring error. 4100: Abort, flying measurement due to a measuring error. r0484 CO: Redundant coarse encoder position + CRC / Enc red pos+CRC ENC Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the redundant coarse encoder position including CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). Upper 16 bits: CRC over the redundant coarse encoder position. Lower 16 bits: Redundant coarse encoder position. On an SMx Sensor Module, the encoder coarse position count direction is opposite to r0482 (encoder actual value Gn_XIST1). The value contains 2 bit fine resolution. With a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, the encoder coarse position count direction is the same as r0482. Dependency: The values are valid when the safety position actual value sensing is activated (p0430.19 = 1). Refer to: p0430 Note: This absolute value does not change, contrary to r0482, when de-selecting the function "parking axis". r0484[0...2] CO: Redundant coarse encoder position + CRC / Enc red pos+CRC VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the redundant coarse encoder position including CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). Upper 16 bits: CRC over the redundant coarse encoder position. Lower 16 bits: Redundant coarse encoder position. On an SMx Sensor Module, the encoder coarse position count direction is opposite to r0482 (encoder actual value Gn_XIST1). The value contains 2 bit fine resolution. With a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, the encoder coarse position count direction is the same as r0482. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: The values are valid when the safety position actual value sensing is activated (p0430.19 = 1). Refer to: p0430 Note: This absolute value does not change, contrary to r0482, when de-selecting the function "parking axis". 1-190 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0485 CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value incremental / Enc raw val incr ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the raw value of the incremental encoder actual value before the measuring gear. r0485[0...2] CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value incremental / Enc raw val incr VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the raw value of the incremental encoder actual value before the measuring gear. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 r0486 CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value absolute / Enc raw val abs ENC Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the raw value of the absolute encoder actual value before the measuring gear. r0486[0...2] CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value absolute / Enc raw val abs VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the raw value of the absolute encoder actual value before the measuring gear. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 r0487 Diagnostic encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc Gn_STW ENC Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 4704, 4720, 4740 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-191 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 13 14 15 Signal name Request function 1 Request function 2 Request function 3 Request function 4 Request command bit 0 Request command bit 1 Request command bit 2 Flying measurement mode/search for reference mark Request absolute value cyclic Request parking encoder Request acknowledge encoder fault 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Flying measurement 0 signal No No No No No No No Reference marks FP - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Notice: Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW should be taken from the corresponding product documentation. Note: The signal source for the encoder control word is set with p0480. r0487[0...2] Diagnostic encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc Gn_STW VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1580, 4704, 4720, 4740 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 13 14 15 Signal name Request function 1 Request function 2 Request function 3 Request function 4 Request command bit 0 Request command bit 1 Request command bit 2 Flying measurement mode/search for reference mark Request absolute value cyclic Request parking encoder Request acknowledge encoder fault 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Flying measurement 0 signal No No No No No No No Reference marks FP - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Notice: Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW should be taken from the corresponding product documentation. Note: The signal source for the encoder control word is set with p0480. p0488 Measuring probe 1 input terminal / Meas probe 1 inp ENC Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4740 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 1. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 1-192 No meas probe DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 6: 7: 8: DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Dependency: Refer to: p0489, p0728 Notice: To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. To select the values: For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output The terminal must be set as input (p0728). Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive. If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518. p0488[0...2] Measuring probe 1 input terminal / Meas probe 1 inp VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4740 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 1. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0489, p0728 Notice: To the terminal designation: No meas probe DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. To select the values: For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output The terminal must be set as input (p0728). Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive. If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518. p0489 Measuring probe 2 input terminal / Meas probe 2 inp ENC Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4740 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 2. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: No meas probe DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-193 Parameters List of parameters 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Dependency: Refer to: p0488, p0728 Notice: To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. To select the values: For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output The terminal must be set as input (p0728). Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive. If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518. p0489[0...2] Measuring probe 2 input terminal / Meas probe 2 inp VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4740 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 2. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0488, p0728 Notice: To the terminal designation: No meas probe DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. To select the values: For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output The terminal must be set as input (p0728). Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive. If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518. p0491 Motor encoder fault response ENCODER / Fault resp ENCODER VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 5 Factory setting 0 Sets the behavior for the ENCODER fault response (motor encoder). This means, for example, if an encoder fault occurs, encoderless operation can be automatically selected with a shutdown behavior that can be selected. 1-194 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Encoder fault results in OFF2 Enc fault results in encoderless oper. and oper. continues Encoder fault results in encoderless operation and OFF1 Encoder fault results in encoderless operation and OFF3 Encoder fault results in an armature short-cct int/DC braking Enc fault results in encoderless op, operation continues, alarm Dependency: The following parameters are relevant for encoderless operation. Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1470, p1472, p1517, p1612, p1755 Refer to: F07575 Caution: For a value = 1, 2, 3, the following applies: - encoderless operation must have been started. For a value = 1, the following applies: - in spite of the motor encoder fault that has occurred, the motor continues to operate. Note: For a value = 1, 2, 3, the following applies: - Refer to the status signal "encoderless operation due to a fault" (BO: r1407.13). - Not possible for separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5). p0492 Square-wave encoder, maximum speed difference per sampling cycle / n_dif max/samp_cyc ENC Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the maximum permissible speed difference within the current controller sampling time for squarewave encoders. Dependency: Refer to: F31118, A31418 Note: For a value of 0.0, the speed change monitoring is disabled. if the set maximum speed difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an appropriate alarm is output. However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times, then a corresponding fault is output. p0492 Square-wave encoder, max. velocity difference per sampling cycle / v_dif max/samp_cyc ENC (Lin_enc) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [m/min] Max 1000.00 [m/min] Factory setting 0.00 [m/min] Description: Sets the maximum permissible velocity difference within the current controller sampling time for square-wave encoders. Dependency: Refer to: F31118, A31418 Note: For a value of 0.0, velocity change monitoring is disabled. if the set maximum velocity difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an appropriate alarm is output. However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times, then a corresponding fault is output. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-195 Parameters List of parameters p0492 Maximum speed difference per sampling cycle / n_dif max/samp_cyc VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the maximum permissible speed difference within the current controller sampling time. Dependency: Refer to: r1408 Refer to: F07902, F31118, A31418, F32118, A32418, F33118, A33418 Note: For a value of 0.0, the speed change monitoring is disabled. The following applies for square-wave encoders: If the speed difference exceeds the threshold value p0492, depending on p0491, either encoderless closed-loop speed/torque control is selected or the drive is powered down with fault F3x118. The following applies for other speed encoders: If the speed difference exceeds threshold value p0492, in order to avoid subsequent faults, the old speed actual value is kept and after time p2178 shut down with fault F07902 (motor stalled). p0493 Zero mark selection, input terminal / ZM_sel inp_term ENC Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Sets the input terminal for selecting the reference mark via BERO/switching signal when performing referencing with several zero marks. The encoder interface supplies the position of the reference mark, which was detected immediately after the positive edge of the BERO signal. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: No selection via BERO DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Notice: For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive. The terminal must be set as input (p0728). For p0493 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies: - there is no logic operation between the reference mark search and an input signal. For p0493 > 0, the following applies: - the positive edge of the input signal is evaluated. If the negative edge is to be evaluated, signal inversion must be parameterized via p0490. - if a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517, or p2518. 1-196 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0493[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Zero mark selection, input terminal / ZM_sel inp_term Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Sets the input terminal for selecting the reference mark via BERO/switching signal when performing referencing with several zero marks. The encoder interface supplies the position of the reference mark, which was detected immediately after the positive edge of the BERO signal. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: No selection via BERO DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Notice: For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive. The terminal must be set as input (p0728). For p0493 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies: - there is no logic operation between the reference mark search and an input signal. For p0493 > 0, the following applies: - the positive edge of the input signal is evaluated. If the negative edge is to be evaluated, signal inversion must be parameterized via p0490. - if a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517, or p2518. p0494[0...n] VECTOR_G Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / ZM_equiv input Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: Notice: No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). For p0494 = 0 (factory setting), the setting in p0495 is effective. To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-197 Parameters List of parameters Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive. The terminal must be set as input. p0495 Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / ZM_equiv input ENC Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4735 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: Notice: For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) For p0494 > 0, the setting in p0494 and p0495 is invalid. To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive. The terminal must be set as input. For p0495 = 0 (factory setting), the encoder zero mark is evaluated as zero mark. For p0495 > 0, the following applies: Depending on the direction of motion, the positive or negative edge at the appropriate input is evaluated. - increasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 0/1 edge is evaluated. - decreasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 1/0 edge is evaluated. Only one zero mark is supported. If function 2, 3 or 4 is selected, this results in a fault message in Gn_ZSW. The inversion of the inputs via p0490 affects the function "referencing with equivalent zero mark". This is the reason that the edge evaluation is interchanged as a function of the direction of motion. An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot be simultaneously requested. p0495[0...2] Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / ZM_equiv input VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4735 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 1-198 No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0494 Notice: For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). For p0494 > 0, the setting in p0494 and p0495 is invalid. To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive. The terminal must be set as input. For p0495 = 0 (factory setting), the encoder zero mark is evaluated as zero mark. For p0495 > 0, the following applies: Depending on the direction of motion, the positive or negative edge at the appropriate input is evaluated. - increasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 0/1 edge is evaluated. - decreasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 1/0 edge is evaluated. Only one zero mark is supported. If function 2, 3 or 4 is selected, this results in a fault message in Gn_ZSW. The inversion of the inputs via p0490 affects the function "referencing with equivalent zero mark". This is the reason that the edge evaluation is interchanged as a function of the direction of motion. An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot be simultaneously requested. p0496 Encoder diagnostic signal selection / Enc diag select ENC Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 86 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the trace signal to be output in r0497, r0498 and r0499 for encoder diagnostics. Value: 0: 1: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 30: 31: 32: 33: 40: 41: 42: 51: 52: 60: 61: Inactive r0497: Mechanical revolution r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track B r0498: Fine position X (-A/2), r0499: Fine position Y (-B/2) r0498: Fine position Phi, r0499: r0498: Offset correction X, r0499: Offset correction Y r0498: Phase correction X, r0499: Amplitude correction Y r0498: Cubic correction X, r0499: Fine position X r0498: oversampling channel A, r0499: oversampling channel B r0498: fan-out, amount, r0499: fan-out, number r0498: Oversampling angle, r0499: Oversampling amount r0498: Raw value, track C, r0499: Raw value, track D r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2) r0498: CD position Phi, r0499: CD pos. Phi - mech. revolution r0497: Zero mark status r0498: Raw value, track R, r0499: Zero mark status r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track R r0497: Absolute position serial r0497: Absolute position, incremental r0497: Zero mark position r0497: Correction absolute position difference r0498: Raw temperature, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C r0498: Resistance in 0.1 Ohm, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C r0497: Resistance 2500 Ohm r0497: Absolute speed difference (dn/dt) r0497: Xact1 corrected quadrants Analog sensor: r0498: raw val chann. A, r0499: raw val chann. B Analog sensor: r0498: fine pos chann. A,r0499: fine pos chann. B (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-199 Parameters List of parameters 62: 70: 80: 81: 85: 86: Analog sensor: r0498: Fine pos before characteristic, r0499: Resolver: r0498: Transformation ratio, r0499: phase Spindle: r0498: Sensor S1 (raw), r0499: Sensor S4 (raw) Spindle: r0498: Sensor S5 (raw), r0499: Spindle: r0498: Sensor S1 (cal), r0499: Sensor S4 (cal) Spindle: r0498: Sensor S5 (cal), r0499: - Dependency: Refer to: r0497, r0498, r0499 Notice: The setting option depends on the following properties: Sensor Module type, hardware version, firmware version (Sensor Module and Control Units), order number (last digit). Not all combinations are supported. Note: Re p0496 = 1: 360 <--> 2^32 Re p0496 = 10 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec Re p0496 = 10, 20 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 21299 dec Re p0496 = 11 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected Re p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected Re p0496 = 12: 180 fine position <--> 32768 dec Re p0496 = 13 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec Re p0496 = 13 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec Re p0496 = 14: 1 <--> 286 dec, 100% <--> 16384 dec Re p0496 = 15: 100 % <--> 16384 dec Re p0496 = 16: (resolver): channel A: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec, channel B: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec Re p0496 = 16: (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat) channel A: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec, channel B: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec Re p0496 = 17 (resolver): absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, number: 1 ... 8 Re p0496 = 17 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): absolute value 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, number: 1 ... 8 Re p0496 = 18 (resolver): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec Re p0496 = 18 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 500 mV <--> 10650 dec Re p0496 = 22: 180 <--> 32768 dec Re p0496 = 23, 24: r0497.31 (r0499.15) set for at least 1 current controller cycle when encoder zero mark detected Re p0496 = 24, 25: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec Re p0496 = 30: Rotary: 1 singleturn measuring step <--> 1 dec, linear: 1 measuring step <--> 1 dec Re p0496 = 31: Absolute position, incremental in 1/4 encoder pulses Re p0496 = 32: Zero mark position in 1/4 encoder pulses Re p0496 = 33: counter offset absolute value in 1/4 encoder pulses Re p0496 = 40: r0498 <--> (R_KTY/1 kOhm - 0.9) * 32768 Re p0496 = 42: 2500 Ohm <--> 2^32 Re p0496 = 51: 1 rpm <--> 1000 dec Re p0496 = 52: In 1/4 encoder pulses Re p0496 = 60: voltage, channel A in mV, voltage, channel B in mV Re p0496 = 61: Channel A: encoder periods <--> 2^16, channel B: encoder periods <--> 2^16 Re p0496 = 62: encoder periods <--> 2^16 Re p0496 = 70: r: 100% <--> 10000 dec, phase: 180 <--> 18000 dec Re p0496 = 80, 81, 85, 86: 1V <--> 1000 inc p0496[0...2] Encoder diagnostic signal selection / Enc diag select VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 86 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the trace signal to be output in r0497, r0498 and r0499 for encoder diagnostics. Value: 0: 1: 1-200 Inactive r0497: Mechanical revolution (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 30: 31: 32: 33: 40: 41: 42: 51: 52: 60: 61: 62: 70: 80: 81: 85: 86: r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track B r0498: Fine position X (-A/2), r0499: Fine position Y (-B/2) r0498: Fine position Phi, r0499: r0498: Offset correction X, r0499: Offset correction Y r0498: Phase correction X, r0499: Amplitude correction Y r0498: Cubic correction X, r0499: Fine position X r0498: oversampling channel A, r0499: oversampling channel B r0498: fan-out, amount, r0499: fan-out, number r0498: Oversampling angle, r0499: Oversampling amount r0498: Raw value, track C, r0499: Raw value, track D r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2) r0498: CD position Phi, r0499: CD pos. Phi - mech. revolution r0497: Zero mark status r0498: Raw value, track R, r0499: Zero mark status r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track R r0497: Absolute position serial r0497: Absolute position, incremental r0497: Zero mark position r0497: Correction absolute position difference r0498: Raw temperature, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C r0498: Resistance in 0.1 Ohm, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C r0497: Resistance 2500 Ohm r0497: Absolute speed difference (dn/dt) r0497: Xact1 corrected quadrants Analog sensor: r0498: raw val chann. A, r0499: raw val chann. B Analog sensor: r0498: fine pos chann. A,r0499: fine pos chann. B Analog sensor: r0498: Fine pos before characteristic, r0499: Resolver: r0498: Transformation ratio, r0499: phase Spindle: r0498: Sensor S1 (raw), r0499: Sensor S4 (raw) Spindle: r0498: Sensor S5 (raw), r0499: Spindle: r0498: Sensor S1 (cal), r0499: Sensor S4 (cal) Spindle: r0498: Sensor S5 (cal), r0499: - Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: r0497, r0498, r0499 Notice: The setting option depends on the following properties: Sensor Module type, hardware version, firmware version (Sensor Module and Control Units), order number (last digit). Not all combinations are supported. Note: Re p0496 = 1: 360 <--> 2^32 Re p0496 = 10 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec Re p0496 = 10, 20 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 21299 dec Re p0496 = 11 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected Re p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected Re p0496 = 12: 180 fine position <--> 32768 dec Re p0496 = 13 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec Re p0496 = 13 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec Re p0496 = 14: 1 <--> 286 dec, 100% <--> 16384 dec Re p0496 = 15: 100 % <--> 16384 dec Re p0496 = 16: (resolver): channel A: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec, channel B: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec Re p0496 = 16: (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat) channel A: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec, channel B: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec Re p0496 = 17 (resolver): absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, number: 1 ... 8 Re p0496 = 17 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): absolute value 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, number: 1 ... 8 Re p0496 = 18 (resolver): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec Re p0496 = 18 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 500 mV <--> 10650 dec Re p0496 = 22: 180 <--> 32768 dec Re p0496 = 23, 24: r0497.31 (r0499.15) set for at least 1 current controller cycle when encoder zero mark detected Re p0496 = 24, 25: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-201 Parameters List of parameters Re p0496 = 30: Rotary: 1 singleturn measuring step <--> 1 dec, linear: 1 measuring step <--> 1 dec Re p0496 = 31: Absolute position, incremental in 1/4 encoder pulses Re p0496 = 32: Zero mark position in 1/4 encoder pulses Re p0496 = 33: counter offset absolute value in 1/4 encoder pulses Re p0496 = 40: r0498 <--> (R_KTY/1 kOhm - 0.9) * 32768 Re p0496 = 42: 2500 Ohm <--> 2^32 Re p0496 = 51: 1 rpm <--> 1000 dec Re p0496 = 52: In 1/4 encoder pulses Re p0496 = 60: voltage, channel A in mV, voltage, channel B in mV Re p0496 = 61: Channel A: encoder periods <--> 2^16, channel B: encoder periods <--> 2^16 Re p0496 = 62: encoder periods <--> 2^16 Re p0496 = 70: r: 100% <--> 10000 dec, phase: 180 <--> 18000 dec Re p0496 = 80, 81, 85, 86: 1V <--> 1000 inc r0497 Encoder diagnostic signal double word / Enc diag DW ENC Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (double word). The signal to be output is selected in p0496. Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0498, r0499 r0497[0...2] CO: Encoder diagnostic signal double word / Enc diag DW VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (double word). The signal to be output is selected in p0496. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0498, r0499 r0498 Encoder diagnostic signal low word / Enc diag low word ENC Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component). The signal to be output is selected in p0496. Dependency: 1-202 Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0499 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0498[0...2] CO: Encoder diagnostic signal low word / Enc diag low word VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component). The signal to be output is selected in p0496. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0499 r0499 Encoder diagnostic signal high word / Enc diag high word ENC Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (high component). The signal to be output is selected in p0496. Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0498 r0499[0...2] CO: Encoder diagnostic signal high word / Enc diag high word VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (high component). The signal to be output is selected in p0496. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0498 p0500 Technology application / Tec application VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(1, 5), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Sets the technology application. The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using p0578. Value: 0: 1: 2: Standard drive (VECTOR) Pumps and fans Sensorless closed-loop control down to f = 0 (passive loads) Dependency: Refer to: p2175, p2177 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-203 Parameters List of parameters Note: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows: - when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 - when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5 - when writing p0578 = 1 For p0500 = 0 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set: p1574 = 10 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 20 V) p1750.2 = 0 p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) p1803 = 106 % For p0500 = 1 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set: p1574 = 2 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 4 V) p1750.2 = 0 p1802 = 9 (edge modulation), if r0192.0 = 1 p1802 = 4, if r0192.0 = 0 p1803 = 106 % For p0500 = 2 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set: p1574 = 2 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 4 V) p1750.2 = 1: Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency. This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load does not generate regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill (zero speed) itself when the pulses are inhibited. p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) p1803 = 106 % The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors. p1802 and p1803 are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected. p0505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(5) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 4 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the actual system of units. Value: 1: 2: 3: 4: Dependency: Caution: The parameter cannot be changed when master control is active. If a per unit representation is selected and if the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are subsequently changed, then the physical significance of several control parameters is also adapted at the same time. As a consequence, the control behavior can change (see p1576, p1621, p1744, p1752, p1755 and p1609, p1612, p1619, p1620). Note: Reference parameter for the unit system % are, for example, p2000 ... p2004. Depending on what has been selected, these are displayed using either SI or US units. p0528 Controller gain, system of units / Ctrl_gain unit_sys ENC Can be changed: C2(5) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: 1-204 SI system of units System of units, referred/SI US system of units System of units, referred/US Sets the system of units for the controller gains. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 1: Representation, physical/% (p0505) Representation, no dimensions (referred) Note: For p0528 = 0 (physical/%), the following applies: Using p0505, the dependent parameters can be changed over between physical and % representation. For SERVO (r0107) the following applies: The parameter is pre-assigned a value of 0 and cannot be changed. p0528 Controller gain, system of units / Ctrl_gain unit_sys VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(5) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the system of units for the controller gains. Value: 0: 1: Note: For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies: Representation, physical/% (p0505) Representation, no dimensions (referred) The parameter is pre-assigned a value of 1 and cannot be changed. p0530[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Bearing version selection / Bearing vers sel Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 104 Factory setting 0 Sets the bearing version. Corresponding to the bearing version entered, its code number (p0531) is automatically set. 0 = No selection 1 = Manual entry 101 = STANDARD 102 = PERFORMANCE 103 = HIGH PERFORMANCE 104 = ADVANCED LIFETIME Dependency: Refer to: p0301, p0531, p0532, p1082 Caution: For p0530 = 101, 102, 103, 104, the maximum bearing speed (p0532) is write protected. Write protection is withdrawn with p0530 = 1. Notice: If p0530 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). The maximum speed of the bearing is factored into the limit for the maximum speed p1082. Note: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, p0530 can only be set to 1. p0531[0...n] Bearing code number selection / Bearing codeNo sel VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Display and setting the code number of the bearing. When setting p0301 and p0530 the code number is automatically preassigned and is write protected. The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection. Dependency: Refer to: p0301, p0530, p0532, p1082 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-205 Parameters List of parameters Notice: If p0531 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). The maximum speed of the bearing is factored into the limit for the maximum speed p1082. Note: p0531 cannot be changed on a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. p0532[0...n] Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [rpm] Max 210000.0 [rpm] Factory setting 0.0 [rpm] Description: Sets the maximum speed of the bearing. Dependency: Refer to: p0301, p0530, p1082 Caution: This parameter is pre-assigned in the case of motors from the motor list (p0301) if a bearing version (p0530) is selected. When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection. Notice: If p0532 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). The maximum speed of the bearing is factored into the limit for the maximum speed p1082. r0565[0...15] CO: Probe time stamp / Probe time stamp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display parameters for MT_ZS_1 to MT_ZS_16 Displays the measuring time for an edge at the digital input for the "central measuring probe evaluation stage3" function. The measuring time is specified as 16-bit value with a resolution of 0.25 s. Priority: MT1..MT8, oldest...newest time stamp r0566[0...3] CO: Probe time stamp reference / Prb timestamp ref CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display parameters for MT_ZSB1 to MT_ZSB4 r0567 CO: Probe diagnostics word / Probe diag word CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: 1-206 Display parameters for MT_DIAG (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0570 Inhibit list values effective number / Inhib list no VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 50 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the number of parameters in the inhibit list p0571 that should be withdrawn from the automatic motor and closed-loop control parameter calculation (refer to p0340, p0578), starting from index 0. Note: Defines the number of entries in p0571 that should be taken into account. This means that a value of 0 de-activates the complete list. p0571[0...49] Inhibit list, motor/closed-loop control parameter calculation / Inhib list calc VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2142 Factory setting 0 Description: The inhibit list contains parameters that should be withdrawn from the automatic motor and closed-loop control parameter calculation (p0340, p0578). Value: 0: 600: 640: 1082: 1460: 1462: 1470: 1472: 1520: 1521: 1530: 1531: 1590: 1592: 2141: 2142: Note: p0570 defines the number of entries (starting at index 0) for which the inhibit should apply. p0572 can be used to define for which drive data sets the inhibit list should apply. No parameter Motor temperature sensor Current limit Maximum speed Speed controller P gain Speed controller integral time Speed controller P gain, encoderless Speed controller integral time, encoderless Torque limit upper/motoring Torque limit lower/regenerative Power limit motoring Power limit regenerative Flux controller P gain Flux controller integral time Speed threshold 1 Hysteresis speed 1 If a motor data set is entered into a parameter number, then this is not overwritten as soon as only one drive data set refers to the motor data set (p0186). p0572[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Activate/de-activate inhibit list / Inh_list act/deact Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Setting for activating/de-activating the inhibit list. Depending on the setting, the parameters of the inhibit list (p0571) should be overwritten when calculating the motor and closed-loop control parameters for the particular drive data set (DDS). Value: 0: 1: No Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-207 Parameters List of parameters Note: If value = 0: The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) also overwrites the parameters of the inhibit list (p0571). If value = 1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) does not overwrite the parameters of the inhibit list (p0571). p0573 Inhibit automatic reference value calculation / Inhibit calc B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to inhibit the calculation of reference parameters (e.g. p2000) when automatically calculating the motor and closed-loop control parameters (p0340, p3900). Value: 0: 1: Notice: The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters (e.g. p0305) are entered and only one drive data set exists (p0180 = 1). This is the case during initial commissioning. No Yes Once the motor and control parameters have been calculated (p0340, p3900), the inhibit for the reference value calculation is automatically re-activated. Note: If value = 0: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) overwrites the reference parameters. If value = 1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) does not overwrite the reference parameters. p0578[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Calculate technology-dependent parameters / Calc tec par Can be changed: C2(5), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 This parameter is used to calculate all parameters that depend on the technology of the application (p0500). All of the parameters are calculated that can also be determined using p0340 = 5. Value: 0: 1: No calculation Complete calculation Note: At the end of the calculations, p0578 is automatically set to 0. p0595 Technological unit selection / Tech unit select VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: C2(5) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 32 Factory setting 1 Description: Selects the units for the parameters of the technology controller. Value: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 1-208 % 1 referred, no dimensions bar C Pa ltr/s m/s ltr/min m/min (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: 31: 32: Dependency: ltr/h m/h kg/s kg/min kg/h t/min t/h N kN Nm psi F gallon/s inch/s gallon/min inch/min gallon/h inch/h lb/s lb/min lb/h lbf lbf ft Only units of parameters with unit group 9_1 can be changed over using this parameter. Refer to: p0596 p0596 Technological unit reference quantity / Tech unit ref qty VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.01 Max 340.28235E36 Factory setting 1.00 Description: Sets the reference quantity for the technological units. When changing over using changeover parameter p0595 to absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the reference quantity. Dependency: Refer to: p0595 Notice: When changing over from one technological unit into another, or when changing the reference parameter, a changeover is not made. p0600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor for monitoring / Mot temp_sensor VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 21 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the sensor to monitor the motor temperature. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 10: 11: 20: 21: Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0601, p0603 No sensor Temperature sensor via encoder 1 Temperature sensor via encoder 2 Temperature sensor via encoder 3 Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection Temperature sensor via Motor Module / CU terminals Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p0608 Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p0609 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-209 Parameters List of parameters Caution: If, for a selected temperature sensor (p0600 > 0), the motor temperature sensor is not connected but another sensor, then the temperature adaptation of the motor resistances must be switched out. Otherwise, in controlled-loop operation, torque errors will occur that will mean that the drive will not be able to be stopped. Notice: The parameter is calculated in the drive using p0340 and is inhibited for p0340 > 0. Note: Re p0600 = 0: With induction motors, the motor temperature is calculated using the motor temperature model (see also p0612.1). Re p0600 = 1, 2, 3: Bimetallic switch (p0601 = 4) and PT100 temperature sensor (p0601 = 5) are not supported. Re p0600 = 10: The BICO interconnection should be executed via connector input p0603. Re p0600 = 11: For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) and using the Control Unit Adapter CUA31, the temperature sensor is connected at the adapter (X210). Re p0600 = 20, 21: The BICO interconnection should be executed via connector input p0608 or p0609. Associated parameters: p0601, p4600 ... p4603, p4610 ... p4613 p0601 Temperature sensor, sensor type / Temp_sens type B_INF Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the sensor type for the temperature measurement at input X21 (booksize) or X41 (chassis). The measured value is displayed in r0035. Value: 0: 1: 2: 4: No sensor PTC alarm & timer KTY84 Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer Dependency: Refer to: r0035 Note: The measured value display depends on the selected sensor type. Re p0601 = 0 (no sensor): --> r0035 = -200 C Re p0601 = 1 (PTC alarm & timer): Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm (lower resistance --> r0035 = -50 C, higher resistance --> r0035 = 250 C). Re p0601 = 2 (KTY84): Displays the temperature in C. Re p0601 = 4 (bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer): r0035 = -50 C --> The tripping resistance is less than 100 Ohm (bimetallic NC contact is closed or has a short-circuit). r0035 = 250 C --> The tripping resistance is greater than 100 Ohm (bimetallic NC contact is open, not connected or has a wire breakage). When using the following components, a value of 4 is set as the factory setting and can no longer be changed: - Basic Line Module (BLM) with internal Braking Module. - Active Line Module (ALM) with line filter Active Interface Module (AIM, p0220[0] = 41 ... 45). In these cases, in addition to the temperature display, the temperature is also monitored. 1-210 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 11 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the sensor type for the motor temperature monitoring. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 10: 11: Dependency: The thermal motor model is only calculated for p0612.1 = 1. No sensor PTC alarm & timer KTY84 KTY84 and PTC (only for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ): Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer (only for temp_eval via MM) PT100 Evaluation via several temperature channels SME12x Evaluation via several temperature channels BICO Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0612 Note: The temperature sensor for the temperature evaluation is set in p0600. For p0600 = 10 (temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection), the setting in p0601 has no significance. Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual Re p0601 = 1 (PTC alarm & timer): Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm. After the tripping resistance has been exceeded, an appropriate alarm is output and after the delay time set in p0606 has expired, an appropriate fault is output. Re p0601 = 3 (KTY84 and PTC (only for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ)): For motors with DRIVE-CLiQ and 2 temperature sensors, the value is automatically set. Re p0601 = 4 (bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer (only for temperature evaluation via the Motor Module)): Tripping resistance = 100 Ohm. After tripping, an appropriate alarm is output and after the delay time set in p0606 has expired, an appropriate fault is output. Re p0601 = 5 (PT100): It is only possible to evaluate a PT100 for p0600 = 11 and r0192 bit 15 = 1. Re p0601 = 10 (evaluation through several temperature channels (SME12x)): Not permitted for p0600 = 0, 10, 11. Associated parameters: p4600 ... p4603 (can be switched via EDS) For r0458.8 = 1, a temperature evaluation is supported through several temperature channels. Examples: When evaluating using SME120 or SME125, 4 temperature channels are available ( parameterized using p4600, p4601, p4602, p4603). When evaluating using CU310 and CUA32, 2 temperature channels are available (encoder interface, parameterization via p4600 / terminal block, parameterization via p4601). Re p0601 = 11 (evaluation via several temperature channels (BICO)): Not permitted for p0600 = 0, 10, 11. Associated parameters: p4610 ... p4613 (can be switched via MDS) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-211 Parameters List of parameters p0602 Par_circuit power unit number, temperature sensor / PU_No temp_sensor VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the power unit number to which the temperature sensor is connected. The value corresponds to the Power unit Data Set number (PDS) of the power unit. The number of power unit data sets is defined in p0120. p0603 CI: Motor temperature signal source / Mot temp S_src VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection. Dependency: Refer to: p0600 Note: Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 C ... 248 C. PTC temperature sensor: For a value = -50 C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC. For a value = 250 C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC. Note: When using a Terminal Module 31 (TM31), the following applies: - the sensor type used is set using p4100. - the temperature signal is interconnected using CO: r4105. p0604[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Mot_temp_mod 1/KTY alarm threshold / Mod 1/KTY A thresh Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [C] Max 200.0 [C] Factory setting 130.0 [C] Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1 or KTY. After the alarm threshold is exceeded, alarm A07910 is output and timer (p0606) is started. If the delay time has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then fault F07011 is output. Dependency: Refer to: p0606, p0612 Refer to: F07011, A07910 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The hysteresis is 2 K. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). 1-212 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0605[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/2 threshold / Threshold VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016, 8017 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [C] Max 200.0 [C] Factory setting 145.0 [C] Description: Sets the threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1/2. Motor temperature model 1 (p0612.0 = 1): alarm threshold - Alarm A07910 is output after the alarm threshold is exceeded. Motor temperature model 2 (p0612.1 = 1): fault threshold - Fault F07911 is output after the fault threshold is exceeded. Dependency: Refer to: p0606, p0611, p0612 Refer to: F07011, A07012 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The hysteresis is 2 K. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0606[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Mot_temp_mod 2/KTY timer / Mod 2/KTY t_timer Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 600.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Sets the timer for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 2 or KTY. This timer is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p0604) is exceeded. If the timer has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then fault F07011 is output. If the temperature fault threshold (p0605) is prematurely exceeded before the timer has expired, then fault F07011 is immediately output. Dependency: Refer to: p0604, p0605 Refer to: F07011, A07910 Note: With p0606 = 0 s, the timer is de-activated and only the fault threshold is effective. KTY sensor: When setting the minimum value, the timer is disabled and a fault is not output until p0605 is exceeded. PTC sensor, bimetallic NC contact: The timer minimum value has no special significance. p0607[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 600.000 [s] Factory setting 0.100 [s] Sets the timer between the output of alarm and fault for a temperature sensor fault. If there is a sensor fault, this timer is started. If the sensor fault is still present after the timer has expired, a corresponding fault is output. Notice: The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of 48 ms. Note: If the motor is an induction motor, the timer is switched off when setting the minimum value and no alarm is output. Temperature monitoring is then based on the thermal model. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-213 Parameters List of parameters p0608[0...3] CI: Motor temperature signal source 2 / Mot_temp S_src 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets signal source 2 to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection. Index: [0] = Motor temperature channel 1 [1] = Motor temperature channel 2 [2] = Motor temperature channel 3 [3] = Motor temperature channel 4 Dependency: Refer to: p0600 Note: Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 C ... 248 C. Temperature sensor PTC/bimetal: For a value of -50 C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal contact closed). For a value of 250 C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal contact open). Note: When using a Terminal Module 120 (TM120), the following applies: - the sensor type used is set using p4100. - the temperature signal is interconnected using connector output r4105. p0609[0...3] CI: Motor temperature signal source 3 / Mot_temp S_src 3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets signal source 3 to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection. Index: [0] = Motor temperature channel 1 [1] = Motor temperature channel 2 [2] = Motor temperature channel 3 [3] = Motor temperature channel 4 Dependency: Refer to: p0600 Note: Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 C ... 248 C. Temperature sensor PTC/bimetal: For a value of -50 C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal contact closed). For a value of 250 C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal contact open). Note: When using a Terminal Module 120 (TM120), the following applies: - the sensor type used is set using p4100. - the temperature signal is interconnected using connector output r4105. 1-214 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the system response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold. Value: 0: 1: 2: Dependency: Refer to: p0601, p0604, p0605 No response only alarm no reduction of I_max Alarm with reduction of I_max and fault Alarm and fault no reduction of I_max Refer to: F07011, A07910 Note: The I_max reduction is not executed for PTC (p0601 = 1) or bimetallic NC contact (p0601 = 4). The I_max reduction results in a lower output frequency. p0611[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8017 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [s] Max 20000 [s] Factory setting 0 [s] Sets the winding time constant. The time constant specifies the warm-up time of the cold stator winding when loaded with the motor standstill current up until a temperature rise of 63 % of the continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached. Dependency: This parameter is only used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). Refer to: r0034, p0612, p0615 Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910 Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set from the motor database for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: When parameter p0611 is reset to 0, then this switches out the thermal I2t motor model (also refer to p0612). If no temperature sensor is parameterized, then the ambient temperature for the thermal motor model is referred to p0625. p0612[0...n] VECTOR_G Mot_temp_mod activation / Mot_temp_mod act Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8017 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0010 bin Description: Setting to activate the motor temperature model. Bit field: Bit 00 01 Dependency: Refer to: r0034, p0604, p0605, p0606, p0611, p0615, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628 Signal name Activating motor temperature model 1 (I2t) Activate motor temperature model 2 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910 Note: Mot_temp_mod: motor temperature model Re bit 00: This bit is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). It is only possible to activate this motor temperature model (I2t) for a time constant greater than zero (p0611 > 0). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-215 Parameters List of parameters Re bit 01: This bit is used to activate/deactivate the motor temperature model for induction motors. p0615[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) fault threshold / I2t F thresh Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8017 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [C] Max 220.0 [C] Factory setting 180.0 [C] Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1 (I2t). - Fault F07911 is output after the fault threshold is exceeded. Dependency: The parameter is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0612 Refer to: F07011, A07012 Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The hysteresis is 2 K. p0616[0...n] Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 1 / Mot temp alarm 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [C] Max 200.0 [C] Factory setting 130.0 [C] Description: Sets the alarm threshold 1 for monitoring the motor temperature. Note: The alarm threshold is not, as for p0604, coupled to the timer p0606. The hysteresis for canceling the fault is 2 K. p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the thermal adaptation of the stator/primary section resistance and rotor/secondary section resistance according to r0395 and r0396. Value: 0: 1: 2: Note: For p0620 = 1, the following applies: No thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistances Resistances adapted to the temperatures of the thermal model Resistances adapted to the measured stator winding temperature The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035 and the rotor resistance together with the model temperature in r0633. For p0620 = 2, the following applies: The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035. If applicable, the rotor temperature for adapting the rotor resistance is calculated from the stator temperature (r0035) as follows: theta_R = (r0628 + r0625) / (r0627 + r0625) * r0035 For separately-excited synchronous motors and p0620 = 1, p0620 = 2 is internally and automatically used for calculating. There is no thermal model to adapt the damping resistances. 1-216 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the identification of the stator resistance after booting the Control Unit (only for vector control). The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data identification (p0350) to the matching ambient temperature (p0625) the actual mean temperature of the stator winding is calculated. The result is used to initialize the thermal motor model. p0621 = 1: Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is powered up for the first time (pulse enable) after booting the Control Unit. p0621 = 2: Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is powered up (pulse enable). Value: 0: 1: 2: No Rs identification Rs identification after switching-on again Rs identification after switching-on each time Dependency: - perform motor data identification (see p1910) with cold motor. - enter ambient temperature at time of motor data identification in p0625. Refer to: p0622, r0623 Notice: The calculated stator temperature can only be compared with the measured value of a temperature sensor (KTY) to a certain extent, as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding, whereas the measured value of identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding. Furthermore this is a short-time measurement with limited accuracy that is performed during the magnetizing phase of the induction motor. Note: The measurement is carried out: - For induction motors - When vector control is active (see p1300) - If a temperature sensor (KTY) has not been connected - When the motor is at a standstill when switched on When a flying restart is performed on a rotating motor, the temperatures of the thermal motor model are set to a third of the overtemperatures. This occurs only once, however, when the CU is booted (e.g. after a power failure). If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is determined via p0622 and not via p0346. Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) is de-energized internally and alarm A07416 is displayed. The speed is enabled after completion of the measurement. p0622[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 20.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the excitation time of the motor for the stator resistance identification after powering up again (restart). Dependency: Refer to: p0621, r0623 Note: For p0622 < p0346 the following applies: If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is influenced by p0622. The speed is enabled after measurement is complete, but not before the time in p0346 has elapsed (see r0056 bit 4). The time taken for measurement also depends on the settling time of the measured current. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-217 Parameters List of parameters For p0622 >= p0346 the following applies: Parameter p0622 is internally limited to the magnetizing time p0346, so that p0346 represents the maximum possible magnetizing time during identification. The entire measurement period (magnetizing plus measurement settling time plus measuring time) will always be greater than p0346. r0623 Stator resistance of Rs identification after powering up again / R_stator Rs-Id VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the identified stator resistance after the Rs identification after powering up again. Dependency: Refer to: p0621, p0622 p0624[0...n] Motor temperature offset PT100 / Mot T_offset PT100 VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -100.0 [K] Max 100.0 [K] Factory setting 0.0 [K] Sets the temperature offset for the PT100 measured value. If there is a difference between the motor temperature displayed in r0035 and the actual motor temperature, this offset can be entered in this parameter, thereby compensating for the difference. Dependency: Refer to: p0600, p0601, p0602 Note: The parameter only takes effect with the following settings: - Temperature sensor of the power unit detected (p0600 = 11). - Sensor type PT100 selected (p0601 = 5). If the resistance in series with the PT100 (e.g. the cable resistance of the feeder cable) is known, the following conversion formula must be used: Offset in p0624 = Measured resistance in ohms x 2.5 K/Ohm Example: Measured cable resistance = 2 Ohm --> 2 Ohm x 2.5 K / Ohm = 5.0 K p0625[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -40 [C] Max 80 [C] Factory setting 20 [C] Description: Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for calculating the motor temperature model. Note: The parameters for stator and rotor resistance (p0350, p0354) refer to this temperature. If the thermal I2t motor model is activated for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (refer to p0611), p0625 is included in the model calculation if a temperature sensor is not being used (see p0601). 1-218 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 20 [K] Max 200 [K] Factory setting 50 [K] Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator core referred to the ambient temperature. Dependency: For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311. Refer to: p0625 Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 20 [K] Max 200 [K] Factory setting 80 [K] Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature. Dependency: For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311. Refer to: p0625 Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). p0628[0...n] Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 20 [K] Max 200 [K] Factory setting 100 [K] Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the squirrel cage rotor referred to ambient temperature. Dependency: For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311. Refer to: p0625 Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300). r0630[0...n] Mot_temp_mod ambient temperature / Mod T_ambient VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the ambient temperature of the motor temperature model. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-219 Parameters List of parameters r0631[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator iron temperature / Mod T_stator VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the stator core temperature of the motor temperature model. r0632[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature / Mod T_winding VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model. r0633[0...n] Mot_temp_mod rotor temperature / Mod T_rotor VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model. Note: For motor temperature model 3 (p0612.2 = 1), this parameter is not valid: p0634[0...n] Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [Vsrms] Max 100.000 [Vsrms] Factory setting 0.000 [Vsrms] The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients. The parameter weights the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis flux function. p0635[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients. This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis current. Dependency: 1-220 Refer to: p0634 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0636[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients. This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the direct axis current. Dependency: Refer to: p0634 p0637[0...n] Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mH] Max 10000.00 [mH] Factory setting 0.00 [mH] Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients. Dependency: Refer to: p0634, p0635, p0636 p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit This parameter describes the gradients of the saturated component over the quadrature axis current. VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5722, 6640 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the current limit. Dependency: Refer to: r0209, p0323 Note: The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when changing p0305, p0323 and p0338. The current limit p0640 is limited to r0209 and p0323. The limit to p0323 is not realized if a value of zero is entered there. The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067 and if required, r0067 is reduced by the thermal model of the Motor Module. The torque and power limits (p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531) matching the current limit are automatically calculated when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 or using the automatic parameterization with p0340 = 3, 5. For VECTOR the following applies (p0107): p0640 is limited to 4.0 x p0305. p0640 is pre-assigned for the automatic self commissioning routine (e.g. to 1.5 x p0305, with p0305 = r0207[1]). p0640 must be entered when commissioning the system. This is the reason that p0640 is not calculated by the automatic parameterization when exiting the quick commissioning (p3900 > 0). For SERVO the following applies (p0107): p0640 is pre-assigned as follows using the automatic parameterization (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) taking into account the limits r0209 and r0323: - for induction motors: p0640 = 1.5 x p0305 - for synchronous motors: p0640 = p0338 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-221 Parameters List of parameters p0641[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6640 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the variable current limit. The value is referred to p0640. p0643[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Overvoltage protection for synchronous motors / Overvolt_protect Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the overvoltage protection for synchronous motors in the field-weakening range. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p0316, p1082, p1231, p9601, p9801 No measure Voltage Protection Module (VPM) Refer to: F07906, F07907 Notice: When the speed limiting is removed, the user is responsible for implementing a suitable overvoltage protection. Note: In the field-weakening range, synchronous motors can, when a fault condition exists, generate high DC link voltages. The following possibilities exist to protect the drive system from being destroyed due to overvoltage: - limit the maximum speed (p1082) without any additional protection. The maximum speed without protection is calculated as follows: Rotary motors: p1082 [rpm] <= 11.695 * r0297/p0316 [Nm/A] Linear motors: p1082 [m/min] <= 73.484 *r0297/0316 [N/A] - use a Voltage Protection Module (VPM) in conjunction with the function "Safe Torque Off" (p9601, p9801). When a fault condition exists, the VPM short-circuits the motors. During the short-circuit, the pulses must be suppressed - this means that the terminals for the function "Safe Torque Off" must be connected to the VPM. - activating the internal voltage protection (IVP) with p1231 = 3. p0650[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [h] Max 4294967295 [h] Factory setting 0 [h] Displays the operating hours for the corresponding motor. The motor operating time counter continues to run when the pulses are enabled. When the pulse enable is withdrawn, the counter is held and the value saved. Dependency: The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the operating hours counter in a non-volatile fashion: - firmware with V2.2 or higher. - Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM). Refer to: p0651 Refer to: A01590 Note: The operating hours counter in p0650 can only be reset to 0. The operating hours counter only runs with motor data set 0 and 1 (MDS). 1-222 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0651[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [h] Max 150000 [h] Factory setting 0 [h] Sets the service/maintenance intervals in hours for the appropriate motor. An appropriate fault is output when the operating hours set here are reached. Dependency: Refer to: p0650 Refer to: A01590 Note: For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled. When setting p0651 to 0, then p0650 is automatically set to 0. The operating hours counter only runs with motor data set 0 and 1 (MDS). p0652[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor stator resistance, scaling / Mot R_stator scal Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the factor to evaluate the stator resistance. Dependency: Refer to: p0350, r0370 p0653[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance, scaling / Mot L_S_leak scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the factor to evaluate the stator leakage induction. Dependency: Refer to: p0356, r0377 p0655[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance, d axis saturated scaling / Mot L_m d sat scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Factor to evaluate the magnetizing inductance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis). Dependency: Refer to: p0360, r0382 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-223 Parameters List of parameters p0656[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance, q axis, saturated scaling / Mot L_m q sat scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Factor to evaluate the magnetizing inductance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis). Dependency: Refer to: p0361, r0383 p0657[0...n] Motor damping inductance, d axis scaling / Mot L_damp d scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Factor to evaluate the damping inductance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis). Dependency: Refer to: p0358, r0380 p0658[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis scaling / Mot L_damp q scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Factor to evaluate the damping inductance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis). Dependency: Refer to: p0359, r0381 p0659[0...n] Motor damping resistance, d axis scaling / Mot R_damp d scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Factor to evaluate the damping resistance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis). Dependency: Refer to: p0354, r0374 p0660[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis scaling / Mot R_damp q scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Factor to evaluate the damping resistance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis). Dependency: Refer to: p0355, r0375 1-224 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0680[0...7] Central measuring probe, input terminal / Cen meas inp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the digital input used for the function "central measuring probe evaluation". p0680[0]: Digital input, measuring probe 1 p0680[1]: Digital input, measuring probe 2 ... p0680[7]: Digital input, measuring probe 8 Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: No meas probe DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Dependency: Refer to: p0728 Notice: To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. To select the values: For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as input (p0728.x = 0). If a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being used in p0488, p0489, p0493, p0494, p0495, p0580, p2517 or p2518. p0681 BI: Central measuring probe, synchronizing signal signal source / Cen meas sync_sig CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the synchronizing signal (SYN) of the function "central measuring probe evaluation". The signal is used to synchronize the common system time between the master and slave. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p0682 CI: Central measuring probe, control word signal source / Cen meas STW S_src CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the control word of the function "central measuring probe evaluation". (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-225 Parameters List of parameters p0684 Central measuring probe evaluation technique / Cen meas eval_tech CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the evaluation technique for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function. Value: 0: 1: 16: Notice: Re p0684 = 16: Note: During measurement without a handshake, the probe may have a higher evaluation frequency. Measurement with handshake Measurement without handshake, 2 edges Measurement without handshake, more than 2 edges This evaluation procedure is only activated after parameter save and POWER ON. The setting "Measurement without handshake" must be supported by the higher-level control. This setting cannot be used for SIMOTION D with integrated SINAMICS or with CX32. Re p0684 = 0: Changing this evaluation procedure to p0684 = 1 is possible in the RUN state. Changing this evaluation procedure to p0684 = 16 is only activated after parameter save and POWER ON. Permissible combinations in p0922 are: p0922 = 391, 392, 393 or 394 Re p0684 = 1: Changing this evaluation procedure to p0684 = 0 is possible in the RUN state. Changing this evaluation procedure to p0684 = 16 is only activated after parameter save and POWER ON. Permissible combinations in p0922 are: p0922 = 391, 392, 393 or 394 Re p0684 = 16: Changing this evaluation procedure to p0684 = 0 or to p0684 = 1 is only activated after parameter save and POWER ON. Permissible combinations in p0922 are: p0922 = 395 r0685 Central measuring probe, control word display / Cen meas STW disp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word for the function "central measuring probe evaluation". Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 1-226 Signal name Falling edge, measuring probe 1 Falling edge, measuring probe 2 Falling edge, measuring probe 3 Falling edge, measuring probe 4 Falling edge, measuring probe 5 Falling edge, measuring probe 6 Falling edge, measuring probe 7 Falling edge, measuring probe 8 Rising edge, measuring probe 1 Rising edge, measuring probe 2 Rising edge, measuring probe 3 Rising edge, measuring probe 4 Rising edge, measuring probe 5 Rising edge, measuring probe 6 Rising edge, measuring probe 7 Rising edge, measuring probe 8 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0686[0...7] CO: Central measuring probe, measuring time rising edge / CenMeas t_meas 0/1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the measuring time for a rising edge at the digital input for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function. The measuring time is specified as 16-bit value with a resolution of 0.25 s. r0686[0]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 1 r0686[1]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 2 r0686[2]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 3 r0686[3]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 4 r0686[4]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 5 r0686[5]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 6 r0686[6]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 7 r0686[7]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 8 Note: The parameter is only active for the evaluation procedure p0684 = 0, 1. For p0684 = 16, r0686[0...7] = 0 is displayed. r0687[0...7] CO: Central measuring probe, measuring time falling edge / CenMeas t_meas 1/0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the measuring time for a falling edge at the digital input for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function. The measuring time is specified as 16-bit value with a resolution of 0.25 s. r0687[0]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 1 r0687[1]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 2 r0687[2]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 3 r0687[3]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 4 r0687[4]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 5 r0687[5]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 6 r0687[6]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 7 r0687[7]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 8 Note: The parameter is only active for the evaluation procedure p0684 = 0, 1. For p0684 = 16, r0687[0...7] = 0 is displayed. r0688 CO: Central measuring probe, status word display / Cen meas ZSW disp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the function "central measuring probe evaluation". (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-227 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 p0700[0...n] Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 999999 Factory setting 0 Description: Signal name Digital input, measuring probe 1 Digital input, measuring probe 2 Digital input, measuring probe 3 Digital input, measuring probe 4 Digital input, measuring probe 5 Digital input, measuring probe 6 Digital input, measuring probe 7 Digital input, measuring probe 8 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 1 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 2 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 3 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 4 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 5 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 6 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 7 Sub-sampling, measuring probe 8 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - Runs the corresponding macro files. The binector inputs of the corresponding command data set are appropriately interconnected. The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory. Example: p0700 = 6 --> macro file PM000006.ACX is run. Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p1000, p1500, r8571 Caution: When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. Notice: No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN group! Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8571. r8571 is not in the expert list of the commissioning software. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. BI: Binector Input CDS: Command Data Set p0700 Macro Binector Input (BI) for TMs / Macro BI TM TB30, TM31 Description: Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 999999 Factory setting 0 Runs the corresponding macro files. The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory. Example: p0700 = 6 --> macro file PM000006.ACX is run. Dependency: Refer to: r8571 Caution: When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. Notice: No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN group! 1-228 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8571. r8571 is not in the expert list of the commissioning software. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. BI: Binector Input CDS: Command Data Set r0721 CU digital inputs, terminal actual value / CU DI actual value CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2020, 2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs. This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simulation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 Signal name DI 0 (X122.1/X121.1) DI 1 (X122.2/X121.2) DI 2 (X122.3/X121.3) DI 3 (X122.4/X121.4) DI 4 (X132.1 / -) DI 5 (X132.2 / -) DI 6 (X132.3 / -) DI 7 (X132.4 / -) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI 16 (X122.5/X120.3) DI 17 (X122.6/X120.4) DI 20 (X132.5/X120.9) DI 21 (X132.6/X120.10) Notice: To the terminal designation: 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p0728.x = 1), then r0721.x = 0 is displayed. DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output r0722.0...21 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status / CU DI status CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2020, 2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-229 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 Signal name DI 0 (X122.1/X121.1) DI 1 (X122.2/X121.2) DI 2 (X122.3/X121.3) DI 3 (X122.4/X121.4) DI 4 (X132.1 / -) DI 5 (X132.2 / -) DI 6 (X132.3 / -) DI 7 (X132.4 / -) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI 16 (X122.5/X120.3) DI 17 (X122.6/X120.4) DI 20 (X132.5/X120.9) DI 21 (X132.6/X120.10) Dependency: Refer to: r0723 Notice: To the terminal designation: 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output r0723.0...21 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted / CU DI status inv CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2020, 2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 Dependency: Refer to: r0722 1-230 Signal name DI 0 (X122.1/X121.1) DI 1 (X122.2/X121.2) DI 2 (X122.3/X121.3) DI 3 (X122.4/X121.4) DI 4 (X132.1 / -) DI 5 (X132.2 / -) DI 6 (X132.3 / -) DI 7 (X132.4 / -) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI 16 (X122.5/X120.3) DI 17 (X122.6/X120.4) DI 20 (X132.5/X120.9) DI 21 (X132.6/X120.10) 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Notice: To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0728 CU, set input or output / CU DI or DO CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2030, 2031, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs as an input or output. Bit field: Bit 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Notice: To the terminal designation: Signal name DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) 1 signal Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output 0 signal Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input FP - The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output r0729 CU digital outputs access authority / CU DO acc_auth CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2030, 2031, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the access authority at the digital outputs. Bit = 1: The control has access authority to the digital output via PROFIBUS or direct access. Bit = 0: The drive has access authority to the digital output or the digital input/output is not set as digital output or is not available. Bit field: Bit 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) 1 signal High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Dependency: Refer to: p0728, p0738, p0739, p0740, p0741, p0742, p0743, p0744, p0745, r0747, p0748 Notice: To the terminal designation: FP - The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: The DI/DO must be connected as output (p0728). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-231 Parameters List of parameters p0738 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 / CU S_src DI/DO 8 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2030, 2130 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 (X122.9 / X121.7). To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.8 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0739 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 / CU S_src DI/DO 9 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2030, 2130 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 (X122.10 / X121.8). To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.9 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0740 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 / CU S_src DI/DO 10 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2031, 2131 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 (X122.12 / X121.10). To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.10 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0741 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 / CU S_src DI/DO 11 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2031, 2131 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: 1-232 Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 (X122.13 / X121.11). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.11 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0742 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 12 / CU S_src DI/DO 12 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2132 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 12 (X132.9 / X131.1). To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.12 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0743 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 13 / CU S_src DI/DO 13 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2132 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 13 (X132.10 / X131.2). To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.13 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0744 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 14 / CU S_src DI/DO 14 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 14 (X132.12 / X131.4). To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.14 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-233 Parameters List of parameters p0745 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 15 / CU S_src DI/DO 15 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 15 (X132.13 / X131.5you). To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.15 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output r0747 CU, digital outputs status / CU DO status CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of digital outputs. Bit field: Bit 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Notice: To the terminal designation: Signal name DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) 1 signal High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account. DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0748 CU, invert digital outputs / CU DO inv CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2030, 2031, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs. Bit field: Bit 08 09 10 11 12 13 1-234 Signal name DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 14 15 Notice: DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) Inverted Inverted Not inverted Not inverted - If telegram 39x is set via p0922 in SINAMICS Integrated, the inversion of the output has no effect. To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0771[0...2] CI: Test sockets signal source / Test skt S_src CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the signal to be output at the test sockets. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99. Refer to: r0772, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786 r0772[0...2] Test sockets output signal / TestSktsSignalVal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the actual value of the signal to be output. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786 r0774[0...2] Test sockets output voltage / TestSkts U_output CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the actual output voltage for the test sockets. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-235 Parameters List of parameters p0776[0...2] Test socket mode / Test skt mode CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 96 Max 99 Factory setting 99 Description: Sets the mode for the test sockets. Value: 96: 97: 98: 99: Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786, p0788, p0789, r0790 p0777[0...2] Test socket characteristic value x1 / Test skt char x1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -100000.00 [%] Max 100000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Physical address (32-bit integer signal unsigned) Physical address (32-bit integer signal) Physical address (32-bit floating-point signal) BICO signal Description: The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the first point on the characteristic. Refer to: p0778, p0779, p0780, r0786 Note: The value 0.00 % corresponds to 2.49 V. p0778[0...2] Test socket characteristic value y1 / Test skt char y1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [V] Max 4.98 [V] Factory setting 2.49 [V] Description: The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage) of the first point on the characteristic. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99. Refer to: p0777, p0779, p0780, r0786 1-236 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0779[0...2] Test socket characteristic value x2 / Test skt char x2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -100000.00 [%] Max 427.9E9 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the second point on the characteristic. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99. Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0780, r0786 Note: The value 100.00 % corresponds to 4.98 V. p0780[0...2] Test socket characteristic value y2 / Test skt char y2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [V] Max 4.98 [V] Factory setting 4.98 [V] Description: The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage) of the second point on the characteristic. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99. Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0779, r0786 p0783[0...2] Test sockets offset / Test skt offset CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -4.98 [V] Max 4.98 [V] Factory setting 0.00 [V] Description: Sets an additional offset for the test sockets. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 p0784[0...2] Test socket limit on/off / TestSktLim on/off CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the limit for a signal to be output via test sockets. Value: 0: 1: Limiting off Limiting on (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-237 Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Note: Limiting on: If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, the signal is limited to 4.98 V or to 0 V. Limiting off: If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, this causes signal overflow. In the case of signal overflow, the signal jumps from 0 V to 4.98 V or from 4.98 V to 0 V. r0786[0...2] Test socket scaling per volt / TestSktScale/Volt CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8134 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the scaling of the signal to be output. A change in the output voltage by 1 volt corresponds to the value in this parameter. The units are determined by the interconnected test signal. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784 Note: Example: r0786[0] = 1500.0 and the measuring signal is r0063 (CO: Actual speed smoothed [rpm]). A change of 1 V at the output of test socket T0 corresponds to 1500.0 [rpm]. p0788[0...2] Test sockets physical address / Test skt PhyAddr CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 bin Max 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the physical address to output signals via the test sockets. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99. Refer to: p0789, r0790 p0789[0...2] Test sockets physical address gain / TestSktPhyAddrGain CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -340.28235E36 Max 340.28235E36 Factory setting 1.00000 Description: Sets the gain of a signal output of a physical address via test sockets. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 1-238 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99. Refer to: p0788 r0790[0...2] Test sockets physical address signal value / TestSktsPhyAddrVal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual value of a signal determined via a physical address. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Only effective when p0776 = 97 or p0776 = 96. Refer to: p0788 p0795 CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2020, 2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796. Signal name DI 0 (X122.1/X121.1) DI 1 (X122.2/X121.2) DI 2 (X122.3/X121.3) DI 3 (X122.4/X121.4) DI 4 (X132.1 / -) DI 5 (X132.2 / -) DI 6 (X132.3 / -) DI 7 (X132.4 / -) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI 16 (X122.5/X120.3) DI 17 (X122.6/X120.4) DI 20 (X132.5/X120.9) DI 21 (X132.6/X120.10) 1 signal Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation 0 signal Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval FP - Refer to: p0796, p9620 Notice: If a digital input is used as signal source for the function "STO" (BI: p9620) then it is not permissible to select the simulation mode and this is rejected. To the terminal designation: The first designation stands for CU320, the second for CU310. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-239 Parameters List of parameters Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0796 CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1510, 2020, 2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795. Signal name DI 0 (X122.1/X121.1) DI 1 (X122.2/X121.2) DI 2 (X122.3/X121.3) DI 3 (X122.4/X121.4) DI 4 (X132.1 / -) DI 5 (X132.2 / -) DI 6 (X132.3 / -) DI 7 (X132.4 / -) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI 16 (X122.5/X120.3) DI 17 (X122.6/X120.4) DI 20 (X132.5/X120.9) DI 21 (X132.6/X120.10) 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - Refer to: p0795 Notice: To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p0799[0...2] CU inputs/outputs, sampling time / CU I/O t_sampl CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2020, 2030, 2031 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 5000.00 [s] Factory setting 4000.00 [s] Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of the Control Unit. Index: [0] = Digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO) [1] = Not available - analog inputs (AI) [2] = Not available - analog outputs (AO) 1-240 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29. Refer to: p0009 Note: The changed sampling time is immediately effective after a completed sub-boot (p0009 -> 0). p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to block the master control. Dependency: Refer to: r0807 Note: The commissioning software (drive control panel) uses the master control, for example. r0807.0 BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays what has the master control. The drive can be controlled via the BICO interconnection or from external (e.g. the commissioning software). Bit field: Bit 00 Signal name Master control active 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP 5030, 6031 Dependency: Refer to: p0806 Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be transferred from another automation device. Note: Bit 0 = 0: BICO interconnection active Bit 0 = 1: Master control for PC/AOP The commissioning software (drive control panel) uses the master control, for example. p0809[0...2] Copy Command Data Set CDS / Copy CDS VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8560 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 15 Factory setting 0 Description: Copies one Command Data Set (CDS) into another. Index: [0] = Source Command Data Set [1] = Target Command Data Set [2] = Start copying procedure Note: Procedure: 1. In Index 0, enter which command data set should be copied. 2. In Index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into. 3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1. p0809[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-241 Parameters List of parameters p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8560 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0). Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0811, r0836 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836. The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050. A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809. p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 / CDS select., bit 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8560 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 1 (CDS bit 1). Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, r0836 Note: The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836. The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050. A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809. p0819[0...2] VECTOR_G Copy Drive Data Set DDS / Copy DDS Can be changed: C2(15) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8565 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 31 Factory setting 0 Description: Copies one Drive Data Set (DDS) into another. Index: [0] = Source Drive Data Set [1] = Target Drive Data Set [2] = Start copying procedure Note: Procedure: 1. In Index 0, enter which drive data set is to be copied. 2. In Index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into. 3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1. p0819[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed. p0820[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: 1-242 BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0 Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8565, 8575 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 0 (DDS, bit 0). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p0821[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8565 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 1 (DDS, bit 1). Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p0822[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 2 / DDS select., bit 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8565 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 2 (DDS, bit 2). Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p0823[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 3 / DDS select., bit 3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8565 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 3 (DDS, bit 3). Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p0824[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 4 / DDS select., bit 4 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(15), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8565, 8575 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 4 (DDS, bit 4). Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-243 Parameters List of parameters p0826[0...n] Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No. VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 15 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the freely-assignable motor number for the motor changeover. Dependency: Refer to: p0827 Caution: When changing over motor data sets with the same motor number (e.g. star-delta changeover) and for a motor with brake, the motor brake remains open during the changeover. Note: When the motor data sets are changed over, the following applies: The same motor number signifies the same thermal model. For the same motor number, the correction values of the Rs, Lh or kT adaptation are applied for the data set changeover (refer to r1782, r1787, r1797). p0827[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Motor changeover status word bit number / Mot_chg ZSW bitNo. Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 15 Factory setting 0 Sets the bit number for every motor data set. Example: p0827[0] = 0: For MDS0, r0830.0 is switched. p0827[1] = 5: For MDS1, r0830.5 is switched. Dependency: Refer to: p0826, r0830 Note: A motor is only changed over (a new motor selected) after the pulses have been suppressed. When the motor data sets are changed over, the following applies: Bit numbers that are not identical, signify that the motor must be changed over. p0828[0...n] BI: Motor changeover, feedback signal / Mot_chng fdbk sig VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal when changing over the motor. For p0833.0 = 1 the following applies: This feedback signal (0/1 edge) is required after a motor changeover to enable the pulses. Dependency: Refer to: p0833 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. 1-244 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0830.0...15 CO/BO: Motor changeover, status word / Mot_chngov ZSW VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word of the motor changeover. These signals can be connected to digital outputs to change over the motor. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Motor selection, bit 0 Motor selection, bit 1 Motor selection, bit 2 Motor selection, bit 3 Motor selection, bit 4 Motor selection, bit 5 Motor selection, bit 6 Motor selection, bit 7 Motor selection, bit 8 Motor selection, bit 9 Motor selection, bit 10 Motor selection, bit 11 Motor selection, bit 12 Motor selection, bit 13 Motor selection, bit 14 Motor selection, bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p0827 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - p0831[0...15] BI: Motor changeover, contactor feedback / Mot_chg cont fdbk VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal of the contactors when changing over motors. There is a fixed inter-relationship between energizing the contactor and the feedback signal. Example: A changeover is to be made between MDS0 (motor 0) and MDS1 (motor 1). The contactors should be switched using bit 4 (contactor 0) and 5 (contactor 1). The changeover should be made with an interconnection of the feedback signal. Implementation: MDS0: p0827[0] = 4, interconnect output to switch contactor 0 to r0830.4, p0831[4] = "input, feedback signal, contactor 0" MDS1: p0827[1] = 5, interconnect output to switch contactor 1 to r0830.5, p0831[5] = "input, feedback signal, contactor 1" The following sequence applies when changing over from MDS0 to MDS1: 1. The status bit r0830.4 is deleted. When the feedback signal (p0831[4]) is connected, the system waits until the feedback signal "contactor open" is displayed. If the feedback signal is not connected, then the system waits for the switch-off interlocking time of 320 ms. 2. The status bit r0830.5 is set. If the feedback signal (p0831[5]) is connected, the system waits until the feedback signal "contactor closed" is displayed. If the feedback signal is not connected, then the system waits for the switchon interlocking time of 160 ms. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-245 Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Feedback signal contactor 0 [1] = Feedback signal contactor 1 [2] = Feedback signal contactor 2 [3] = Feedback signal contactor 3 [4] = Feedback signal contactor 4 [5] = Feedback signal contactor 5 [6] = Feedback signal contactor 6 [7] = Feedback signal contactor 7 [8] = Feedback signal contactor 8 [9] = Feedback signal contactor 9 [10] = Feedback signal contactor 10 [11] = Feedback signal contactor 11 [12] = Feedback signal contactor 12 [13] = Feedback signal contactor 13 [14] = Feedback signal contactor 14 [15] = Feedback signal contactor 15 r0832.0...15 CO/BO: Mot. changeover, contactor feedback sig. status word / Mot_chng fdbk ZSW VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word of the contactor feedback signals when changing over a motor. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: p0831 p0833 Data set changeover configuration / DS_chng config VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(15) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0010 bin Signal name Feedback signal contactor 0 Feedback signal contactor 1 Feedback signal contactor 2 Feedback signal contactor 3 Feedback signal contactor 4 Feedback signal contactor 5 Feedback signal contactor 6 Feedback signal contactor 7 Feedback signal contactor 8 Feedback signal contactor 9 Feedback signal contactor 10 Feedback signal contactor 11 Feedback signal contactor 12 Feedback signal contactor 13 Feedback signal contactor 14 Feedback signal contactor 15 1 signal Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Description: Sets the configuration for the motor and encoder changeover. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 1-246 Signal name Contactor changeover from the application/drive Pulse suppression by application/drive Suppress drive parking for EDS changeover 0 signal Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened Opened FP - 1 signal application 0 signal Drive FP - application Yes Drive No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Re bit 00: When the bit is set and the motor has to be changed over, then p0827 must be set differently in the appropriate motor data sets. Re bit 02: The bit defines whether, for an EDS changeover, the status signal Gn_ZSW.14 is suppressed (parking encoder active). Re motor changeover to running motor: The "flying restart" function should also be activated (p1200) when changing over to a motor that is already running. r0835.2 ENC CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover. Bit field: Bit 02 Note: Re bit 02: Signal name Internal parameter calculation active 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation. r0835.0...11 VECTOR_G CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8575 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 08 10 11 Note: This parameter is only supplied with up-to-date values if data set changeover has been selected or is running. Signal name Motor changeover active Encoder changeover active Internal parameter calculation active Armature short circuit active Identification running Friction characteristic record running Rotating measurement running Motor data identification running Wait for pulse suppression Wait for motor changeover feedback signal 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No FP 8575 - Re bit 00: The signal is only influenced when a motor changeover is set via p0827 (unequal bit numbers). Re bit 01: The signal is only influenced when an encoder changeover is set via p0187, p0188, or p0189. Re bit 02: A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation. Re bit 04: A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated. Re bit 05: The following applies for SERVO: A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification, encoder adjustment, motor data identification, and rotating measurement are not running. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-247 Parameters List of parameters The following applies for VECTOR: A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification is not running. Re bit 06: A data set changeover is only carried out when the friction characteristic record is not running. Re bit 07 (VECTOR only): A data set changeover is only carried out when rotating measurement is not running. Re bit 08 (VECTOR only): A data set changeover is only carried out when motor data identification is not running. Re bit 10: A motor changeover is set with p0833.1 = 1. It can only be carried out when the application performs pulse suppression. Re bit 11: A motor changeover is set with p0833.0 = 1. The pulses are only enabled when the "Motor changeover feedback" signal is detected. r0836.0...3 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 8560 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the command data set (CDS) selected via the binector input. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811 Note: Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following. Signal name CDS select. bit 0 CDS select. bit 1 CDS select. bit 2 CDS select. bit 3 1 signal ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050. r0837.0...4 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8565 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the drive data set (DDS) selected via the binector input. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 Dependency: Refer to: r0051, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824 Note: Drive data sets are selected via binector input p0820 and following. Signal name DDS select. bit 0 DDS select. bit 1 DDS select. bit 2 DDS select. bit 3 DDS select. bit 4 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - The currently effective drive data set is displayed in r0051. If there is only one data set, then a value of 0 is displayed in this parameter and not the selection via binector inputs. 1-248 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0838[0...3] Motor/Encoder Data Set selected / MDS/EDS selected VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8565 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the selected Motor Data Set (MDS) and the selected Encoder Data Sets (EDS). Index: [0] = Motor Data Set MDS selected [1] = Encoder 1 Encoder Data Set EDS selected [2] = Encoder 2 Encoder Data Set EDS selected [3] = Encoder 3 Encoder Data Set EDS selected Dependency: Refer to: r0049, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189 Note: Value 99 means the following: No encoder assigned (not configured). p0839 Motor changeover contactor control delay time / Mot_chg ctrl t_del VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 500 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time for the contactor control for the motor changeover. Note: The delay time is taken into account in the following cases: - for feedback signal, previous contactor "Open". The new motor contactor is controlled (energized) after the delay time has expired. - for the feedback signal, new motor contactor "Closed". The pulses are enabled after the delay time has expired. p0840[0...n] BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1) B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 2610, 8720, 8820, 8920 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF (OFF1)". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 0 (STW1.0). Recommend.: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate signal change of the source. Dependency: Caution: Refer to: p1055, p1056 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective. Notice: For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using binector input p1055 or p1056. The command "ON/OFF (OFF1)" can be issued using binector input p0840 or p1055/p1056. For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the switch-on inhibit is acknowledged. Only the signal source that originally powered up can also power down again. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21), the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-249 Parameters List of parameters For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22, 23), the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: immediate pulse suppression For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: No dedicated braking response, but pulse cancelation when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227) For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pulses can be enabled) For active infeeds (Active Line Module and Smart Line Module) the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (reduce Vdc along the ramp, then pulse suppression and pre-charging contactor/line contactor open) - BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor close, pulses can be enabled) For passive infeeds (Basic Line Module) the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (pre-charging contactor/line contactor open) - BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor close) r0863.1 of a drive can also be selected as signal source. p0844[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_src 1 B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 8720, 8820, 8920 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1" - BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2" For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1). BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal - OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal Caution: - No OFF2 (enable is possible) When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: For Active Line Modules, Smart Line Modules and binector input p0844 = 0 signal or p0845 = 0 signal, the following applies: - pre-charging contactor/line contactor is additionally opened. p0845[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2 / OFF2 S_src 2 B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 8720, 8820, 8920 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the second signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1" - BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2" 1-250 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1). BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal - OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal - No OFF2 (enable is possible) Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective. Note: For Active Line Modules, Smart Line Modules and binector input p0844 = 0 signal or p0845 = 0 signal, the following applies: - pre-charging contactor/line contactor is additionally opened. p0848[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_src 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1" - BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2" For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2). BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal - OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal - No OFF3 (enable is possible) Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p0849[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 2 / OFF3 S_src 2 VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the second signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1" - BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2" For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2). BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal - OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal - No OFF3 (enable is possible) Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-251 Parameters List of parameters p0852[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Operation enable Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 8820, 8920 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the command "enable operation/inhibit operation". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 3 (STW1.3). BI: p0852 = 0 signal Inhibit operation (suppress pulses). BI: p0852 = 1 signal Enable operation (pulses can be enabled). Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p0854[0...n] BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 8720, 8820, 8920 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 10 (STW1.10). BI: p0854 = 0 signal No control by PLC BI: p0852 = 1 signal Master ctrl by PLC. Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available, then binector input p0854 should be set to 1. If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999). p0854 BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC ENC Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2501, 8720, 8820, 8920 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 10 (STW1.10). 1-252 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters BI: p0854 = 0 signal No control by PLC BI: p0852 = 1 signal Master ctrl by PLC. Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available, then binector input p0854 should be set to 1. If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999). p0855[0...n] VECTOR_G BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 2701, 2707 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally open holding brake". Dependency: Refer to: p0858 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally open holding brake). p0856[0...n] BI: Speed controller enable / n_ctrl enable VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 2701, 2707 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the command "enable speed controller" (r0898.12). 0 signal: Set the I component and speed controller output to zero. 1 signal: Enable speed controller. Dependency: Refer to: r0898 Note: If "enable speed controller" is withdrawn, then an existing brake will be closed. If "speed controller enable" is withdrawn, the pulses are not suppressed. p0857 Power unit monitoring time / PU t_monit B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8760, 8864, 8964 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 100.0 [ms] Max 60000.0 [ms] Factory setting 6000.0 [ms] Sets the monitoring time for the power unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-253 Parameters List of parameters The following applies for infeeds and drives: The monitoring time is started after an 0/1 edge of the ON/OFF1 command. If the power unit does not return a READY signal within the monitoring time, then fault F06000 (infeeds) or F07802 (drives) is output. For drives, the following also applies: After the pulse enable (operation enabled, p0852), the monitoring time is re-started. If the infeed does not signal ready to the drive within the monitoring time (using BI: p0864 of the drive), fault F07840 is initiated. Dependency: Refer to: F06000, F07802, F07840, F30027 Notice: The maximum time to pre-charge the DC link is monitored in the power unit and cannot be changed. The maximum duration of the pre-charging depends on the power class and the power unit design. The monitoring time for the pre-charging is started after the ON command (BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal). Fault F30027 is output when the maximum pre-charging duration is exceeded. Note: The factory setting for p0857 depends on the power class and the design of the power unit. The monitoring time for the ready signal of the power unit includes the time to pre-charge the DC link and, if relevant, the de-bounce time of the contactors. If an excessively low value is entered into p0857, then after enable, this results in the corresponding fault. p0858[0...n] VECTOR_G BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 2701, 2707 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally close holding brake". Dependency: Refer to: p0855 Note: The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally open holding brake). For a 1 signal via BI: p0858, the command "unconditionally close the holding brake" is executed and internally a zero setpoint is entered. p0860 BI: Line cont. fdbk sig / Line contact feedb B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2634, 8734, 8834, 8934 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 863.1 Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal from the line contactor. Recommend.: When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), then to control the line contactor, signal BO: r0863.1 of its own drive object should be used. Dependency: Refer to: p0861, r0863 Refer to: F07300 Notice: The line contactor monitoring is de-activated if the control signal of the particular drive object is set as the signal source for the feedback signal of the line contactor (BI: p0860 = r0863.1). Note: The state of the line contactor is monitored depending on signal BO: r0863.1. When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), fault F07300 is then also output if the contactor is closed before it is controlled using r0863.1. 1-254 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0861 Line contactor monitoring time / LineContact t_mon B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2634, 8734, 8834, 8934 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 5000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Sets the monitoring time of the line contactor. This time starts each time that the line contactor switches (r0863.1). If a feedback signal is not received from the line contactor within the time, a message is output. Dependency: Refer to: p0860, r0863 Refer to: F07300 Note: The monitoring function is disabled for the factory setting of p0860. p0862 Power unit ON delay / PU t_on B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2610, 8732, 8832, 8932 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 65000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time for the control command of the power unit and a line contactor, if used. Note: This means that it is possible to realize a shifted (delayed) pre-charging or power-on using a single ON command. When the infeed units are active, before the line contactor is closed, an offset adjustment of the current measurement is carried out for a duration of 120 ms (p3491). r0863.0...2 CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word / CoupleZSW/STW B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status and control words of the drive coupling. Bit field: Bit 00 Signal name Closed-loop control operation 1 signal Yes 0 signal No 01 Energize contactor Yes No 02 Infeed line supply failure Yes No Dependency: FP 2610, 6495, 8732, 8832, 8932, 9794 2610, 2634, 8732, 8734, 8832, 8834, 8932, 8934 - Refer to: p0864 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-255 Parameters List of parameters Note: Re bit 00: Bit 0 signals that the infeed is ready. When the operating signal is transferred via BO: r0863.0 this allows several drives to start (run-up) staggered over time when they are simultaneously powered up. To realize this, the following connections/interconnections are required: Drive 1: Interconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of the infeed Drive 2: Interconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of drive 1 Drive 3: Interconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of drive 2, etc. The first drive only transfers the operating signal to the next drive after it has reached its ready condition. Re bit 01: Bit 1 is used to control an external line contactor. Re bit 02: This bit only signals line supply failure for Active Infeed (A_INF) and Smart Infeed (S_INF). p0864 BI: Infeed operation / INF operation VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1773, 1774, 2610 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the operating signal of the infeed (e.g. BO: r0863.0). Dependency: Refer to: r0863 Note: The sequence control of a servo/vector drive requires this signal. The following applies for an infeed without DRIVE-CLiQ: For these infeeds, the "ready" message is available via an output terminal. This signal must be connected to a digital input. The drives supplied from this infeed must use this signal as ready signal (BI: p0864 = digital input). p0868 Power unit DC switch debounce time / PU DC sw t_deboun VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 65000 [ms] Factory setting 65000 [ms] Description: Sets the debounce time for the DC circuit breaker for Motor Modules in "chassis" format. Note: The following applies if p0868 = 65000 ms: The debounce time defined internally in the power unit's EEPROM is implemented. r0873 CO/BO: Infeed, total operation / INF total oper B_INF Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8732, 8832 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the operational readiness of the infeeds when using Smart Line Module (SLM) and Basic Line Module (BLM) together (mixed operation). In order that signal BO: r0873 is available at one of the infeeds, then BI: p0874 of the one infeed must be interconnected to BO: r0863.0 of the other infeed. Dependency: Refer to: r0863, p0874 Note: Mixed operation is not possible with the Active Line Module (ALM)! 1-256 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0874 BI: Smart/ Basic Line Module operation / SLM/BLM operation B_INF Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8732, 8832 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Setting to interconnect the ready signal for mixed operation of Smart Line Module (SLM) and Basic Line Module (BLM). In order that signal BO: r0873 is available at one of the infeeds, then BI: p0874 of the one infeed must be interconnected to BO: r0863.0 of the other infeed. Dependency: Refer to: r0863, r0873 Note: Mixed operation is not possible with the Active Line Module (ALM)! p0894 Parking pre-setting / Parking pre-set ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Pre-setting for the "Parking axis" and "Parking encoder" function. Bit field: Bit 00 Dependency: Refer to: p0480, p0897 Note: Re bit 00: Signal name Default with interconnection 1 signal Park 0 signal Do not park FP - If there is at least one BICO interconnection for "Parking axis" or "Parking encoder", this default setting is taken into consideration during power-up. p0895[0...n] B_INF, VECTOR_G BI: Activate/de-activate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source to activate/de-activate a power unit component. Dependency: BI: p0895 = 0 signal De-activating power unit components BI: p0895 = 1 signal Activating power unit components Refer to: p0125, r0126 Refer to: A05054 Caution: It is not permissible to de-activate drive objects with safety functions enabled. Notice: For Active Line Modules in the "Chassis" format, the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM, p0145) belonging to the power unit is automatically activated/deactivated. Note: The power unit is only de-activated when the pulses are suppressed. For units connected in parallel, when one of the power units is de-activated, then the enable in p7001 is withdrawn. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-257 Parameters List of parameters r0896.0 VECTOR_G BO: Parking axis, status word / Parking axis, ZSW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the "parking axis" function. Bit field: Bit 00 Dependency: Refer to: p0897 p0897 BI: Parking axis selection / Parking axis sel VECTOR_G Signal name Parking axis active 1 signal Yes 0 signal No Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the "parking axis" function. Dependency: BI: p0897 = 0 signal FP - The function "parking axis" is not selected. BI: p0897 = 1 signal The function "parking axis" is selected. Refer to: r0896 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: After it has been selected the "parking axis" function only becomes active when the pulses are suppressed. r0898.0...10 CO/BO: Control word sequence control infeed / STW seq_ctrl INF B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8720 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays control word 1 of the infeed. Bit field: Bit 00 01 10 Note: OC: Operating condition r0898.0...15 CO/BO: Control word drive object 1 / STW DO1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: 1-258 Signal name ON/OFF1 OC / OFF2 Master ctrl by PLC 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Displays the control word of drive object 1 (Control Unit). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 07 12 13 14 15 r0898.10 CO/BO: Control word sequence control encoder DO / STW seq_ctrl encDO ENC Signal name Synchronization signal SYN Real time synchronization PING Acknowledge fault Master sign-of-life bit 0 Master sign-of-life bit 1 Master sign-of-life bit 2 Master sign-of-life bit 3 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word for sequence control on the encoder drive object. Bit field: Bit 10 r0898.0...14 CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl VECTOR_G 0 signal No No No No No No No Signal name Master ctrl by PLC 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2501 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word of the sequence control. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 14 Note: OC: Operating condition Signal name ON/OFF1 OC / OFF2 OC / OFF3 Operation enable Ramp-function generator enable Continue ramp-function generator Speed setpoint enable Command open brake Jog 1 Jog 2 Master ctrl by PLC Speed controller enable Command close brake 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - r0899.0...12 CO/BO: Status word sequence control infeed / ZSW seq_ctrl INF B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8726 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word of the infeed sequence control. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Signal name Rdy for switch on Ready Operation enabled 1 signal Yes Yes Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No No FP - 1-259 Parameters List of parameters 04 06 09 11 12 Note: No OFF2 active Sw on inhibit Control request Pre-charging compl Line contactor closed OFF2 inactive Yes Yes Yes Yes OFF2 active No No No No - Re bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 06, 09: For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1. r0899.0...15 CO/BO: Status word drive object 1 / ZSW DO1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word from drive object 1 (Control Unit). Bit field: Bit 00 03 07 08 12 13 14 15 r0899.7...9 CO/BO: Status word sequence control encoder DO / ZSW seq_ctrl encDO ENC Signal name reserved Fault present Alarm present System time synchronized Slave sign-of-life bit 0 Slave sign-of-life bit 1 Slave sign-of-life bit 2 Slave sign-of-life bit 3 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for sequence control on the encoder drive object. Bit field: Bit 07 09 Note: For PROFIdrive, this signal is used for status word ZSW2_ENC. Signal name Drive ready Control request 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - FP - r0899.0...15 CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2503 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word of the sequence control. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 1-260 Signal name Rdy for switch on Ready Operation enabled Jog active No coasting active No Quick Stop active Switching on inhibited active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes OFF2 inactive OFF3 inactive Yes 0 signal No No No No OFF2 active OFF3 active No FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 07 08 09 11 12 13 14 15 Note: Drive ready Controller enable Control request Pulses enabled Open holding brake Command close holding brake Pulse enable from the brake control Setpoint enable from the brake control Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No - Re bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 09: For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1. Re bit 13: When the "Safe Brake Control" (SBC) is activated and selected, the brake is no longer controlled using this signal. Re bit 14, 15: These signals are only of significance when the "extended brake control" function module is activated (r0108.14 = 1). p0918 PROFIBUS address / PB address CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1520, 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 126 Factory setting 126 Description: Displays or sets the PROFIBUS address for PROFIBUS interface on the Control Unit. The address can be set as follows: 1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit. --> p0918 can then only be read and displays the selected address. --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. 2) Using p0918 --> Only if the address 00 hex, 7F hex, 80 hex, or FF hex has been set using the address switch. --> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM". --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. Note: Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126 (01 hex ... 7E hex) Address 126 is used for commissioning. Every PROFIBUS address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p0922 IF1 PROFIdrive telegram selection / IF1 PD Telegr_sel B_INF Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1520, 2420, 2423, 2447, 2457, 2481, 2483 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 370 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Description: Sets the send and receive telegram. Value: 370: 371: 999: Dependency: Refer to: F01505, F01506 Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited. SIEMENS telegram 370, PZD-1/1 SIEMENS telegram 371, PZD-5/8 Free telegram configuration with BICO The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-261 Parameters List of parameters p0922 IF1 PROFIdrive telegram selection / IF1 PD Telegr_sel CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1520, 2420, 2423, 2481, 2483 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 390 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Description: Sets the send and receive telegram. Value: 390: 391: 392: 393: 394: 395: 999: p0922 IF1 PROFIdrive telegram selection / IF1 PD Telegr_sel ENC SIEMENS telegram 390, PZD-2/2 SIEMENS telegram 391, PZD-3/7 SIEMENS telegram 392, PZD-3/15 SIEMENS telegram 393, PZD-4/21 SIEMENS telegram 394, PZD-3/3 SIEMENS telegram 395, PZD-4/25 Free telegram configuration with BICO Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1520, 2415, 2416, 2419, 2420, 2421, 2422, 2423 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 81 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Description: Sets the send and receive telegram. Value: 81: 82: 83: 999: Dependency: Refer to: p2038 SIEMENS telegram 81, PZD-2/6 SIEMENS telegram 82, PZD-2/7 SIEMENS telegram 83, PZD-2/8 Free telegram configuration with BICO Refer to: F01505, F01506 Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited. The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999. p0922 IF1 PROFIdrive telegram selection / IF1 PD Telegr_sel VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1520, 2415, 2416, 2419, 2420, 2421, 2422, 2423 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Description: Sets the send and receive telegram. Value: 1: 2: 20: 220: 352: 999: Dependency: Refer to: F01505, F01506 1-262 Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2 Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4 Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6 SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10 SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6 Free telegram configuration with BICO (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Caution: Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 are not suitable for sensorless vector control (p1300 = 20). For sensorless vector control, it is necessary that the setpoint speed is entered at the ramp-function generator input (e.g. p1070) and not after the ramp-function generator (p1155). Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited. The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999. p0922 IF1 PROFIdrive telegram selection / IF1 PD Telegr_sel VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1520, 2415, 2416, 2419, 2420, 2421, 2422, 2423 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Description: Sets the send and receive telegram. Value: 1: 2: 3: 4: 20: 220: 352: 999: Dependency: Refer to: F01505, F01506 Caution: Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 are not suitable for sensorless vector control (p1300 = 20). Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2 Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4 Standard telegram 3, PZD-5/9 Standard telegram 4, PZD-6/14 Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6 SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10 SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6 Free telegram configuration with BICO For sensorless vector control, it is necessary that the setpoint speed is entered at the ramp-function generator input (e.g. p1070) and not after the ramp-function generator (p1155). Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited. The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999. r0924[0...1] VECTOR_G ZSW bit pulses enabled / ZSW pulse enab Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2454, 2456 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the position of the "Pulses enabled" status signal in the PROFIdrive telegram. Index: [0] = Signal number [1] = Bit position p0925 PROFIdrive clock synchronous sign-of-life tolerance / PD SoL_tol ENC, VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of tolerated consecutive sign-of-life errors of the clock-cycle synchronous master. Dependency: Refer to: p2045, r2065 The sign-of-life signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the master. Refer to: F01912 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-263 Parameters List of parameters Note: The sign-of-life monitoring is disabled for p0925 = 65535. r0930 PROFIdrive operating mode / PD operating mode VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the operating mode. 1: Closed-loop speed controlled operation with ramp-function generator 2: Closed-loop position controlled operation 3: Closed-loop speed controlled operation without ramp-function generator r0944 CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change All objects Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays fault buffer changes. This counter is incremented every time the fault buffer changes. Recommend.: Used to check whether the fault buffer has been read out consistently. Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109 r0945[0...63] Fault code / Fault code All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122 Notice: The properties of the fault buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation. Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). Fault buffer structure (general principle): r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0], r3115[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1 ... r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7], r3115[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8 r0945[8], r0949[8], r0948[8], r2109[8], r3115[8] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1 ... r0945[15], r0949[15], r0948[15], r2109[15], r3115[15] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8 ... r0945[56], r0949[56], r0948[56], r2109[56], r3115[56] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1 ... r0945[63], r0949[63], r0948[63], r2109[63], r3115[63] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8 1-264 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r0946[0...65534] Fault code list / Fault code list All objects Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit. The indices can only be accessed with a valid fault code. Dependency: The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r0951 under the same index. r0947[0...63] Fault number / Fault number All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: This parameter is identical to r0945. r0948[0...63] Fault time received in milliseconds / t_fault recv ms All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122 Notice: The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds). Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945. When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies. r0949[0...63] All objects Fault value / Fault value Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number). Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122 Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-265 Parameters List of parameters p0952 Fault cases, counter / Fault cases qty All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1710, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset. Dependency: The fault buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p0952 to 0. Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136 r0963 PROFIBUS baud rate / PB baud rate CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting - Description: Displays the corresponding value for the PROFIBUS baud rate. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 255: 9.6 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 93.75 kbit/s 187.5 kbit/s 500 kbit/s 1.5 Mbit/s 3 Mbit/s 6 Mbit/s 12 Mbit/s 31.25 kbit/s 45.45 kbit/s unknown r0964[0...6] Device identification / Device ident. CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the device identification. Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42) [1] = Device type [2] = Firmware version [3] = Firmware date (year) [4] = Firmware date (day/month) [5] = Number of drive objects [6] = Firmware patch/hot fix Note: Example: r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS r0964[1] = device type, see below r0964[2] = 403 --> first part of the firmware version V04.03 (for second part, refer to index 6) r0964[3] = 2010 --> year 2010 r0964[4] = 1705 --> 17th of May r0964[5] = 2 --> 2 drive objects r0964[6] = 200 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V04.03.02.00) 1-266 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Device type: r0964[1] = 5200 --> SINAMICS G150 CU320(-2 DP) r0964[1] = 5201 --> SINAMICS G150 CU320-2 PN r0964[1] = 5210 --> SINAMICS G130 CU320(-2 DP) r0964[1] = 5211 --> SINAMICS G130 CU320-2 PN r0965 PROFIdrive profile number / PD profile number CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIdrive profile number and profile version. Constant value = 0329 hex. Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile Byte 2: Profile version = 29 hex = Version 4.1 Note: When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the Octet String 2 data type applies. p0969 System runtime relative / t_System relative CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8060 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 4294967295 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Displays the system runtime in ms since the last POWER ON. Note: The value in p0969 can only be reset to 0. The value overflows after approx. 49 days. When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies. p0970 Reset infeed parameter / INF par reset B_INF Description: Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 100 Factory setting 0 The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters of an individual infeed unit. The parameters of the basic commissioning (refer to p0009) are in this case not reset (p0107, p0108, p0121, p0170). These can only be reset using the factory setting of the complete drive unit (p0976). The sampling times (p0111, p0112, p0115) are only not reset if this results in a conflict with the basic clock cycle (p0110). Value: 0: 1: 100: Inactive Start a parameter reset Start a BICO interconnection reset Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset). At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and p0010 have been set to 0. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-267 Parameters List of parameters p0970 ENCODER reset parameters / ENC par reset ENC Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 100 Factory setting 0 Description: The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the parameters on the ENCODER drive object. Value: 0: 1: 100: Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset). Parameter p0141 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976). Inactive Start a parameter reset Start a BICO interconnection reset At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and p0010 have been set to 0. p0970 TB30 reset parameters / TB30 par reset TB30 Description: Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 100 Factory setting 0 The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle. Parameter p0161 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976). Value: 0: 1: 100: Inactive Start a parameter reset Start a BICO interconnection reset Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset). At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and p0010 have been set to 0. p0970 TM150 reset parameters / TM150 par reset TM150 Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 100 Factory setting 0 Description: The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Module 150 (TM150). Value: 0: 1: 100: Dependency: Refer to: p0010 Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset). Inactive Start a parameter reset Start a BICO interconnection reset At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. 1-268 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p0970 TM31 reset parameters / TM31 par reset TM31 Description: Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 100 Factory setting 0 The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Module 31 (TM31). The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle. Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976). Value: 0: 1: 100: Inactive Start a parameter reset Start a BICO interconnection reset Dependency: Refer to: p0010 Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset). At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. p0970 TM54F reset parameters / TM54F par reset TM54F_MA Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 100 Factory setting 0 Description: The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Value: 0: 1: 5: 100: Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset). Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976). Inactive Start a parameter reset Starts a safety parameter reset Start a BICO interconnection reset At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and p0010 have been set to 0. For p0970 = 5 the following applies: The password for Safety Integrated must be set. When Safety Integrated is enabled, this can result in error messages, which then require an acceptance test to be performed. Then save the parameters and carry out a POWER ON. p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(30) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 100 Factory setting 0 The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the parameters of an individual drive unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-269 Parameters List of parameters Parameters p0100, p0205 (only for VECTOR) and the parameters of the basic drive commissioning (p0009) are not reset (p0107, p0108, p0111, p0112, p0115, p0121, p0130, p0131, p0140, p0141, p0142, p0170, p0186 ... p0189). These can only be reset using the factory setting of the complete drive unit (p0976). Value: 0: 1: 5: 100: Inactive Start a parameter reset Starts a safety parameter reset Start a BICO interconnection reset Dependency: Refer to: F01659 Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset). At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and p0010 have been set to 0. For p0970 = 5 the following applies: The password for Safety Integrated must be set. When Safety Integrated is enabled, this can result in error messages, which then require an acceptance test to be performed. Then save the parameters and carry out a POWER ON. For p0970 = 1 the following applies: If a Safety Integrated function is parameterized (p9601), then the safety parameters are not reset. In this case, a fault F01659 is output with fault value 2. p0971 Save drive object parameters / Drv_obj par save All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to save the parameter of the particular drive object in the non-volatile memory. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p0977, p1960, p3845, r3996 Caution: The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0). Notice: Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving. Inactive Save drive object The progress while saving is displayed in r3996. Note: Starting from the particular drive object, the following parameters are saved: CU3xx: Device-specific parameters and PROFIBUS device parameters. Other objects: Parameters of the actual object and PROFIBUS device parameters. Prerequisite: In order that the parameter of a drive object, saved with p0971 = 1, is read the next time that the Control Unit is booted, then all parameters must, as a minimum, have first been saved once with p0977 = 1. p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit. Value: 0: 1: 1-270 Inactive Hardware-Reset immediate (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 2: 3: Danger: Hardware reset preparation Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed It must be absolutely ensured that the system is in a safe condition. The memory card/device memory of the Control Unit must not be accessed. Note: If value = 1: Reset is immediately executed and communications interrupted. After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below). If value = 2: Help to check the reset operation. Firstly, set p0972 = 2 and then read back. Secondly, set p0972 = 1 (it is possible that this request is possibly no longer acknowledged). The communication is then interrupted. After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below). If value = 3: The reset is executed after interrupting cyclic communication. This setting is used to implement a synchronized reset by a control for several drive units. If cyclic communication is not active, then the reset is immediately executed. If the cyclic communication is active for both PROFIdrive interfaces, then the reset is executed after completing both cycle communications. After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below). To check the reset operation: After the drive unit has been restarted and communications have been established, read p0972 and check the following: p0972 = 0? --> The reset was successfully executed. p0972 > 0? --> The reset was not executed. r0975[0...10] Drive object identification / DO identification All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the identification of the drive object. Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42) [1] = Drive object type [2] = Firmware version [3] = Firmware date (year) [4] = Firmware date (day/month) [5] = PROFIdrive drive object, type class [6] = PROFIdrive drive object, sub-type Class 1 [7] = Drive object number [8] = Reserved [9] = Reserved [10] = Firmware patch/hot fix Note: Example: r0975[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS r0975[1] = 11 --> SERVO drive object type r0975[2] = 102 --> first part, firmware version V01.02 (second part, refer to index 10) r0975[3] = 2003 --> year 2003 r0975[4] = 1401 --> 14th of January r0975[5] = 1 --> PROFIdrive drive object, type class r0975[6] = 9 --> PROFIdrive drive object sub-type class 1 r0975[7] = 2 --> drive object number = 2 r0975[8] = 0 (reserved) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-271 Parameters List of parameters r0975[9] = 0 (reserved) r0975[10] = 600 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V01.02.06.00) p0976 Reset and load all parameters / Reset load all par CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(30) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1013 Factory setting 0 Description: Resets or downloads all parameters of the drive system. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 10: 11: 12: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 100: 1011: 1012: 1013: Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: After all of the parameters have been reset to their factory setting, the system must be commissioned for the first time again. Inactive Start reset of all parameters to factory setting Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=1 Start dnload of volatile parameters from RAM Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=10 Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=11 Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=12 Start download Siemens internal setting 20 Start download Siemens internal setting 21 Start download Siemens internal setting 22 Start download Siemens internal setting 23 Start download Siemens internal setting 24 Start download Siemens internal setting 25 Start download Siemens internal setting 26 Start resetting of all BICO interconnections Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1011 Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1012 Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1013 Resetting or loading is realized in the non-volatile memory. Procedure: 1. Set p0009 = 30 (parameter reset). 2. Set p0976 to "required value". The system is rebooted. p0976 is automatically set to 0 and p0009 is automatically set to 1 after this has been carried out. p0977 Save all parameters / Save all par CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1013 Factory setting 0 Description: Saves all parameters of the drive system to the non-volatile memory. Value: 0: 1: 10: 11: 12: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 1-272 Inactive Save in non-volatile memory - downloaded at POWER ON Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=10 Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=11 Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=12 Save in non-volatile memory as setting 20 (reserved) Save in non-volatile memory as setting 21 (reserved) Save in non-volatile memory as setting 22 (reserved) Save in non-volatile memory as setting 23 (reserved) Save in non-volatile memory as setting 24 (reserved) Save in non-volatile memory as setting 25 (reserved) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 26: 80: 1011: 1012: 1013: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 26 (reserved) Save in non-volatile memory time-optimized (reserved) Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1011 Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1012 Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1013 Dependency: Refer to: p0976, p1960, p3845, r3996 Caution: The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0). Notice: Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving. The progress while saving is displayed in r3996. Note: Parameters saved with p0977 = 10, 11 or 12 can be downloaded again with p0976 = 10, 11 or 12. p0978[0...24] List of drive objects / List of the DO CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting [0] 1 [1...24] 0 Description: This parameter is an image of p0101 in conformance with PROFIdrive. Parameters p0101 and p0978 contain the following information: 1) The same number of drive objects 2) The same drive objects In this sense, they are consistent. Difference between p0101 and p0978: p0978 can be re-sorted and a zero inserted in order to identify those drive objects that participate in the process data exchange and to define their sequence in the process data exchange. Drive objects that are listed after the first zero, are excluded from the process data exchange. For p0978, in addition, the value 255 can be inserted a multiple number of times. p0978[n] = 255 means: The drive object is visible for the PROFIBUS master and is empty (without any actual process data exchange). This allows cyclic communications of a PROFIBUS master with unchanged configuring to the drive units with a lower number of drive objects. Dependency: Refer to: p0101, p0971, p0977 Note: p0978 cannot be changed when the drive system is first commissioned. The reason for this is that at this time the actual topology has still not been acknowledged (p0099 is still not equal to r0098 and p0009 is set to 0). r0979[0...10] PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4010, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive. Index: [0] = Header [1] = Type, encoder 1 [2] = Resolution enc 1 [3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1 [4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2 [5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1 [6...10] = Reserved Note: Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature: PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-273 Parameters List of parameters r0979[0...10] PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format ENC (Lin_enc) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4010, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive. Index: [0] = Header [1] = Type, encoder 1 [2] = Resolution enc 1 [3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1 [4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2 [5] = Distinguishable distance encoder 1 [6...10] = Reserved Note: Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature: PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology r0979[0...30] VECTOR_G PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4010, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive. Index: [0] = Header [1] = Type, encoder 1 [2] = Resolution enc 1 [3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1 [4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2 [5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1 [6...10] = Reserved [11] = Type, encoder 2 [12] = Resolution enc 2 [13] = Shift factor G2_XIST1 [14] = Shift factor G2_XIST2 [15] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 2 [16...20] = Reserved [21] = Type, encoder 3 [22] = Resolution enc 3 [23] = Shift factor G3_XIST1 [24] = Shift factor G3_XIST2 [25] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 3 [26...30] = Reserved Note: Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature: PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology r0980[0...299] All objects Description: 1-274 List of existing parameters 1 / List avail par 1 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the parameters that exist for this drive. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r0981, r0989 Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master). r0981[0...299] All objects List of existing parameters 2 / List avail par 2 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive. Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0989 Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master). r0989[0...299] All objects List of existing parameters 10 / List avail par 10 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive. Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0981 Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master). r0990[0...99] All objects List of modified parameters 1 / List chang. par 1 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive. Dependency: Refer to: r0991, r0999 Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-275 Parameters List of parameters r0991[0...99] All objects List of modified parameters 2 / List chang. par 2 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive. Dependency: Refer to: r0990, r0999 Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master). r0999[0...99] All objects List of modified parameters 10 / List chang. par 10 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive. Dependency: Refer to: r0990, r0991 Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master). p1000[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 999999 Factory setting 0 Runs the corresponding macro files. The Connector Inputs (CI) for the speed setpoints of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately interconnected. The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory. Example: p1000 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run. Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1500, r8572 Caution: When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. Notice: No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN group! Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8572. r8572 is not in the expert list of the commissioning software. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. CI: Connector Input 1-276 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1021, 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 1. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 2. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 3. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 4. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-277 Parameters List of parameters p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 5. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 6. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 7. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 8. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. 1-278 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 9. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 10. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 11. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 12. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-279 Parameters List of parameters p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 13. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 14. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1021, 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 15. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2505 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint. Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1021, p1022, p1023, r1197 Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0). 1-280 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2505 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint. Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1020, p1022, p1023, r1197 Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0). p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2505 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint. Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197 Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0). p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2505 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint. Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, r1197 Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0). r1024 CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1550, 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the selected and effective fixed speed setpoint. This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected (e.g. with the main setpoint). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-281 Parameters List of parameters Recommend.: Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070). Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1070, r1197 Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0). p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0110 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 Notice: Signal name Data save active Automatic mode, ramp-function generator active Initial rounding-off active Save in NVRAM active Ramp-function generator always active 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - Yes Yes Yes No No No - The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the setpoint (Bit 03 = 1) in a non-volatile fashion: - Firmware with V2.3 or higher. - Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM). Note: Re bit 00: 0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040. 1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON set to the saved value. In order to save in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1. Re bit 01: 0: Without ramp-function generator in the automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0). 1: With ramp-function generator in the automatic mode. For manual operation (0 signal via BI: p1041), the ramp-function generator is always active. Re bit 02: 0: Without initial rounding-off 1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for the initial rounding-off is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum speed (p1082). It is calculated as follows: r = 0.01 % * p1082 [1/s] / 0.13^2 [s^2] The jerk acts up until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p1082 [1/s] / p1047 [s]), and then the drive continues to run linearly with a constant rate of acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that p1047 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time. Re bit 03: 0: Non-volatile data save de-activated. 1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for bit 00 = 1). Re bit 04: When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r1050. 1-282 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1035[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2505, 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-up time (p1047) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p1035). Dependency: Refer to: p1036 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2505, 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-down time (p1048) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p1036). Dependency: Refer to: p1035 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / MotP n_max VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer. Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase. The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value. p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / MotP n_min VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer. Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase. The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-283 Parameters List of parameters p1039[0...n] VECTOR_G BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / MotP inv Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to invert the minimum speed/velocity or the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer. Dependency: Refer to: p1037, p1038 Note: The inversion is only active during "motorized potentiometer raise" or "motorized potentiometer lower". p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has been powered up. Dependency: Only effective if p1030.0 = 0. Refer to: p1030 p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic when using a motorized potentiometer. In the manual mode, the setpoint is changed using two signals - raise and lower. In the automatic mode, the setpoint must be interconnected via a connector input. Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1035, p1036, p1042 Note: The effectiveness of the internal ramp-function generator can be set in automatic mode. p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode. Dependency: Refer to: p1041 1-284 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setting value / MotP acc set val VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer. Dependency: Refer to: p1044 Note: The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043). p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer. Dependency: Refer to: p1043 Note: The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043). r1045 CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator. p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 1000.000 [s] Factory setting 10.000 [s] Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint is changed from zero up to the speed/velocity limit (p1082) within this time (if no initial rounding-off has been activated). Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1048, p1082 Note: When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-up time is correspondingly extended. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-285 Parameters List of parameters p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 1000.000 [s] Factory setting 10.000 [s] Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint is changed from the speed/velocity limit (p1082) to zero within this time (if no initial rounding-off has been activated). Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1047, p1082 Note: The deceleration time is extended corresponding to the activated initial rounding-off (p1030.2). r1050 CO: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator / Mop setp after RFG VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1550, 3020 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Sets the effective setpoint after the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator. This setpoint is the output value of the motorized potentiometer and must be appropriately interconnected onwards (e.g. with the main setpoint). Recommend.: Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070). Dependency: Refer to: p1070 Note: For "With ramp-function generator", after an OFF1, OFF2, OFF3 or for a 0 signal via BI: p0852 (inhibit operation, suppress pulses) the ramp-function generator output (r1050) is set to the starting value (configuration via p1030.0). p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1083[0] Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input. p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1086[0] Description: 1-286 Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for jog 1. Recommend.: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate signal change of the source. Dependency: Refer to: p0840, p1058 Notice: The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056. The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056. Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again. p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501, 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for jog 2. Recommend.: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate signal change of the source. Dependency: Refer to: p0840, p1059 Notice: The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056. The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056. Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again. p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1550, 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed/velocity for jog 1. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved. Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056 p1059[0...n] Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1550, 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed/velocity for jog 2. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved. Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-287 Parameters List of parameters p1063[0...n] Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3040 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 40000.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed limit/velocity limit effective in the setpoint channel. Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085, p1086, p1088 p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1550, 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1024[0] Sets the signal source for the main setpoint. Examples: r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator Dependency: Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1550, 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the main setpoint. r1073 CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the effective main setpoint. The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling. p1075[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint / Suppl setp VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1550, 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: 1-288 Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p1076, r1077, r1078 p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1550, 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary setpoint. r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling. r1078 CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the total effective setpoint. The value indicates the sum of the effective main setpoint and supplementary setpoint. p1080[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Minimum speed / n_min Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 19500.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Sets the lowest possible motor speed. This value is not undershot in operation. Dependency: Refer to: p1106 Notice: The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106. Note: The parameter value applies for both motor directions. In exceptional cases, the motor can operate below this value (e.g. when reversing). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-289 Parameters List of parameters p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3020, 3050, 3060, 3070, 3095, 5300 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 1500.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the highest possible speed. Dependency: For vector control (p1300 = 20 ... 23) the maximum speed is limited to 60.0 / (8.333 * p0115[0] * r0313). This can be identified by a reduction in r1084. p1082 is not changed in this process due to the fact that the operating mode p1300 can be changed over. If a sine-wave filter (p0230 = 3) is parameterized as output filter, then the maximum speed is limited corresponding to the maximum permissible filter output frequency (refer to the filter data sheet). When using sine-wave filters (p0230 = 3, 4), the maximum speed r1084 is limited to 70% of the resonant frequency of the filter capacitance and the motor leakage inductance. For reactors and dU/dt filters, it is limited to 150 Hz * 60 / r0313 (for chassis power units) or 120 Hz * 60 / r0313 (for booksize power units). Refer to: p0115, p0230, r0313, p0322, p0324, r0336, p0532 Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: The parameter applies for both motor directions. The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity for all ramp-up and ramp-down times (e.g. down ramps, ramp-function generator, motor potentiometer). Since the parameter is part of quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), it is defined appropriately when p0310, p0311, p0322, p0324, p0530, p0531, and p0532 are changed. The following limits are always effective for p1082: p1082 <= min(p0324, p0532) if p0324 > 0 and p0532 > 0 p1082 <= p0322 if p0324 = 0 or p0532 = 0 and p0322 > 0 p1082 <= 60 * Minimum (15 * r0336, 650 Hz) / r0313 p1082 <= 60 * Maximum power unit pulse frequency / (k * r0313) k = 12 for vector control (r0108.2 = 1), k = 6.5 for U/f control (r0108.2 = 0) For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1) the value of the parameter is pre-assigned the maximum motor speed (p0322). If p0322 = 0, the rated motor speed (p0311) is used as default (pre-assignment) value. For induction motors that are not catalog motors (p0301 = 0), the synchronous no-load speed is used as default (pre-assignment) value (p0310 * 60 / r0313). For synchronous motors, the following additionally applies: The maximum speed p1082 is restricted to speeds (r1084) where the EMF does not exceed the DC link voltage. The effective assignment of the motor data set parameter (e.g. p0311) to the drive data set parameter p1082 when pre-assigning should be taken from p0186. p1082 is also available in the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that when exiting via p3900 > 0, the value is not changed. p1083[0...n] VECTOR_G CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3050, 6732 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 40000.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction. Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. 1-290 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1084 CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3050, 3095 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the effective positive speed limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085 p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1083[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction. p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Max 0.000 [rpm] Factory setting -40000.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed limit for the negative direction. Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. r1087 CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3050, 3095 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the effective negative speed limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1086, p1088 p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1086[0] Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the negative direction. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-291 Parameters List of parameters p1091[0...n] VECTOR_G Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets skip speed 1. Dependency: Refer to: p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101 Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel. Note: The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance. p1092[0...n] Skip speed 2 / n_skip 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets skip speed 2. Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1093, p1094, p1101 Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel. p1093[0...n] Skip speed 3 / n_skip 3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets skip speed 3. Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1094, p1101 Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel. p1094[0...n] Skip speed 4 / n_skip 4 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets skip speed 4. Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1101 Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel. 1-292 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds/velocities 1 to 4. Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094 Note: The setpoint (reference) speeds are skipped (suppressed) in the range of the skip speed +/-p1101. Steady-state operation is not possible in the skipped (suppressed) speed range. The skip (suppression) range is skipped. Example: p1091 = 600 and p1101 = 20 --> setpoint speeds between 580 and 620 [rpm] are skipped. For the skip bandwidths, the following hysteresis behavior applies: For a setpoint speed coming from below, the following applies: r1170 < 580 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 580 [rpm] For a setpoint speed coming from above, the following applies: r1170 > 620 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 620 [rpm] p1106[0...n] CI: Minimum speed signal source / n_min s_src VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for lowest possible motor speed. Dependency: Refer to: p1080 Notice: The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106. p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2505, 3040 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to disable the negative direction. Dependency: Refer to: p1111 p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2505, 3040 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to disable the positive direction. Dependency: Refer to: p1110 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-293 Parameters List of parameters r1112 CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set aft min_lim VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the speed setpoint after the minimum limiting. Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101 p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2441, 2442, 2505, 3040 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to invert the setpoint. Dependency: Refer to: r1198 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. r1114 CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1550, 3040, 3050 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction. p1115 Ramp-function generator selection / RFG selection VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1550, 3080 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the ramp-function generator type. Value: 0: 1: Note: Another ramp-function generator type can only be selected when the motor is at a standstill. 1-294 Basic ramp-function generator Extended ramp-function generator (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1550, 1690, 3050, 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the setpoint at the input of the ramp-function generator. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: The setpoint is influenced by other functions, e.g. skip (suppressed) speeds, minimum and maximum limits. p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 999999.000 [s] Factory setting 10.000 [s] Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed (p1082) in this time. Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1138 Note: The ramp-up time can be scaled via connector input p1138. The parameter is adapted during the rotating measurement (p1960 > 0). This is the reason that during the rotating measurement, the motor can accelerate faster than was originally parameterized. For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), ramp-up times of 0 s are not expedient. The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor. p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 999999.000 [s] Factory setting 10.000 [s] Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill (setpoint = 0) in this time. Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1. Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1139 Note: For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), ramp-down times of 0 s are not recommended. The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor. p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2505 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for bypassing the ramp generator (ramp-up and ramp-down times = 0). Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: For VECTOR in encoderless operation, it is not permissible that the ramp-function generator is bypassed. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-295 Parameters List of parameters p1130[0...n] VECTOR_G Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down. Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system. p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down. Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system. p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the smoothed response to the OFF1 command or the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp-function generator. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: No effect up to initial rounding-off time (p1130) > 0 s. Note: p1134 = 0 (continuous smoothing) Cont. smoothing Discont smoothing If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, initially a final rounding-off is carried out and then the ramp-up completed. During the final rounding-off, the output of the ramp-function generator continues to go in the direction of the previous setpoint (overshoot). After the final rounding-off has been completed, the output goes toward the new setpoint. p1134 = 1 (discontinuous smoothing) If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, then the output goes immediately in the direction of the new setpoint. For the setpoint change there is no rounding-off. p1135[0...n] VECTOR_G OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD Can be changed: C2(1), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 600.000 [s] Factory setting 3.000 [s] Description: Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command. Note: This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value. 1-296 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1136[0...n] VECTOR_G OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator. p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Sets the final rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator. p1138[0...n] CI: Up ramp scaling / Up ramp scaling VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the up ramp. Dependency: Refer to: p1120 Note: The ramp-up time is set in p1120. p1139[0...n] CI: Down ramp scaling / Down ramp scaling VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the down ramp. Dependency: Refer to: p1121 Note: The ramp-down time is set in p1121. p1140[0...n] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / RFG enable VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 4 (STW1.4). BI: p1140 = 0 signal: Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-297 Parameters List of parameters BI: p1140 = 1 signal: Ramp-function generator enable. Dependency: Refer to: p1141, p1142 Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the command "continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 5 (STW1.5). BI: p1141 = 0 signal: Freezes the ramp-function generator. BI: p1141 = 1 signal: Continue ramp-function generator. Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1142 Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective. Notice: The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases: - OFF1/OFF3. - ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth. - ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed. p1142[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2501 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the command "enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 6 (STW1.6). BI: p1142 = 0 signal Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero). BI: p1142 = 1 signal Setpoint enable. Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1141 Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this binector input is interconnected as follows as standard: BI: p1142 = 0 signal 1-298 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / RFG accept set v VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for accepting the setting value of the ramp-function generator. Dependency: The signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value is set using parameters. Refer to: p1144 Note: 0/1 signal: The ramp-function generator output is immediately (without delay) set to the setting value of the ramp-function generator. 1 signal: The setting value of the ramp-function generator is effective. 1/0 signal: The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. The ramp-function generator output is adapted to the input value using the ramp-up time or the ramp-down time. 0 signal: The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. p1144[0...n] VECTOR_G CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value. Dependency: The signal source for accepting the setting value is set using parameters. Refer to: p1143 p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3080 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 Max 50.0 Factory setting 1.3 Description: Sets the ramp-function generator tracking. The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible drive acceleration. The reference value is the deviation at the speed/velocity controller input that is necessary to ensure that the motor accelerates at the torque/force limit. Recommend.: p1145 = 0.0: This value de-activates the ramp-function generator tracking. p1145 = 0.0 ... 1.0: Generally, these values are not practical. They cause the motor to accelerate below its torque limit. The lower the selected value, the greater the margin between the controller and torque limit when accelerating. p1145 > 1.0: The greater the value, the higher the permissible deviation between the speed setpoint and speed actual value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-299 Parameters List of parameters Notice: If ramp-function generator tracking is activated and the ramp time is set too short, this can cause unsteady acceleration. Remedy: - switch off ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0). - increase the ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1120, p1121). Note: In the U/f mode, ramp-function generator tracking is not active. For SERVO with U/f operation, the following applies: The complete ramp-function generator is not active, i.e. ramp-up and ramp-down time = 0. p1148[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Max 1000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 19.800 [rpm] Sets the tolerance value for the status of the ramp-function generator (ramp-up active, ramp-down active). If the input of the ramp-function generator does not change in comparison to the output by more than the entered tolerance time, then the status bits "ramp-up active" and "ramp-down active" are not influenced. Dependency: Refer to: r1199 r1149 CO: Ramp-function generator, acceleration / RFG acceleration VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3060, 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 39_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2007 Expert list: 1 Min - [rev/s] Max - [rev/s] Factory setting - [rev/s] Description: Displays the acceleration of the ramp-function generator. Dependency: Refer to: p1145 r1150 CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1550, 3080 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the setpoint at the output of the ramp-function generator. p1151[0...n] Ramp-function generator configuration / RFG config VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3070 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the extended ramp-function generator. Bit field: Bit 00 Caution: Re bit 00 = 1: Signal name Disable rounding-off at the zero cross-over 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP 3070 If the ramp-up time is longer than the ramp-down time (p1120 > p1121), then there is an acceleration step at the zero crossover. This can have a negative impact on the mechanical system. 1-300 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Re bit 00 = 1: When the direction change is changed there is no rounding-off before and after the zero crossover. p1152 BI: Setpoint 2 enable / Setp 2 enab VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2711, 4015 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 899.15 Description: Sets the signal source for "setpoint 2 enable". p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1550, 3080, 5030, 6031 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the speed controller. Dependency: The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on, e.g. STW1.4 and STW1.6. Refer to: r0002, p0840, p0844, p0848, p0852, p0854, r0898, p1140, p1142, p1160, r1170, p1189 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p1160[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1550, 3080 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2 of the speed controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1155, r1170 Note: For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is effective. The ramp-function generator is set (SERVO: to the actual value, VECTOR: To the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the drive corresponding to the ramp-downtime (p1121 or p1135). While stopping via the ramp-function generator, STW1.4 is effective (enable ramp-function generator). When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this connector input is interconnected as follows as standard: CI: p1160 = r2562 r1169 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3080 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the speed setpoint after the addition of the speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160). Dependency: Refer to: p1155, p1160 Note: The value is only correctly displayed at r0899.2 = 1 (operation enabled). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-301 Parameters List of parameters r1170 CO: Speed controller, setpoint sum / n_ctrl setp sum VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1550, 1590, 1690, 1700, 1750, 3080, 5020, 6030 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the speed setpoint after selecting the ramp-function generator and adding the speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160). Dependency: Refer to: r1150, p1155, p1160 p1189[0...n] Speed setpoint configuration / n_ctrl config VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 3080 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0011 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the speed setpoint. Bit field: Bit 00 01 Note: Signal name 1 signal Interpolation ramp-fct gen/speed controller Yes active Interpol. op-loop ctrl /speed controller active Yes 0 signal No FP 3080 No 3080 Re bit 01: The interpolator is only effective in following cases: - isochronous PROFIBUS operation with a sign-of-life received from the master (STW2.12 ... STW2.15). r1197 Fixed speed setpoint number actual / n_set_fixed No act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed speed/velocity setpoint. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023 Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0). r1198.0...15 CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2505 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word for the setpoint channel. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 1-302 Signal name Fixed setp bit 0 Fixed setp bit 1 Fixed setp bit 2 Fixed setp bit 3 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP 3010 3010 3010 3010 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 05 06 11 13 14 15 Inhibit negative direction Inhibit positive direction Setpoint inversion Motorized potentiometer raise Motorized potentiometer lower Bypass ramp-function generator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No 3040 3040 3040 3020 3020 3060, 3070 r1199.0...8 CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1550, 3080, 8010 P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the ramp-function generator (RFG). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Note: Signal name Ramp-up active Ramp-down active RFG active Ramp-function generator set Ramp-function generator held Ramp-function generator tracking active Maximum limit active Ramp-function generator, acceleration positive Ramp-function generator, acceleration negative 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No FP - Yes No - Re bit 02: The bit is an OR logic operation - bit 00 and bit 01. p1200[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Flying restart operating mode / FlyRest op_mode Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 0 Sets the operating mode for flying restart. The flying restart allows the drive converter to be powered up while the motor is still rotating. In so doing, the drive converter output frequency is changed until the actual motor speed/velocity is found. The motor then accelerates up to the setpoint at the ramp-function generator setting. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Flying restart inactive Flying restart always active (start in setpoint direction) FlyRestart active after on, fault, OFF2 (start in setp. dir.) FlyRestart active after fault, OFF2 (start in setp. direction) Flying restart always active (start only in setpoint direction) FlyRestart active after on, fault, OFF2 (start only in setp_dir) FlyRestart active after fault, OFF2 (start only in setp. dir.) Dependency: For induction motors, the following applies: A differentiation is made between flying restart for U/f control and for vector control (p1300). Flying restart, U/f control: p1202, p1203, r1204 Flying restart, vector control: p1202, p1203, r1205 For synchronous motors, the following applies: Flying restart is not possible with U/f control or if, in the case of sensorless vector control, a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has not been connected and parameterized. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-303 Parameters List of parameters If two VSMs are connected to the Motor Module, then the motor voltage for the flying restart is measured using the second VSM (see p0151[1]). If only one VSM is connected, then this can be used for the flying restart. Refer to: p1201 Refer to: F07330, F07331 Notice: The "flying restart" function must be used in cases where the motor may still be running (e.g. after a brief line supply interruption) or is being driven by the load. The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent. It does not make sense to use "flying restart" together with the "motor holding brake function" (p1215 > 0) because then the flying restart will always be realized with the motor stationary. Note: For p1200 = 1, 4, the following applies: Flying restart is active after faults, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3. For p1200 = 2, 5, the following applies: The "power-on" is the first power-on operation after the drive system has been booted. This is practical for motors with a high-inertia load. For p1200 = 1, 2, 3, the following applies: The search is made in both directions. For p1200 = 4, 5, 6, the following applies: The search is only made in the setpoint direction. For a setpoint of zero, a search is not made in the negative direction of rotation. For operation with encoder, the following applies: p1200 = 1, 4 as well as p1200 = 2, 5 and p1200 = 3, 6 have the same meaning. For U/f control (p1300 < 20), the following applies: The speed can only be sensed for values above approx. 5 % of the rated motor speed. For lower speeds, it is assumed that the motor is at a standstill. If p1200 is changed while commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1200 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300). p1201[0...n] BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source to enable the "flying restart" function. Dependency: Refer to: p1200 Note: Withdrawing the enable signal has the same effect as setting p1200 = 0. p1202[0...n] Flying restart search current / FlyRest I_srch VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10 [%] Max 400 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function. The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current. Dependency: Caution: Refer to: r0331 An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion. Note: In U/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the frequency on the basis of voltage inputs. 1-304 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very high, for example). p1203[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10 [%] Max 4000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Sets the factor for the search speed for flying restart. The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value results in a longer search time. Recommend.: For encoderless vector control and motor cables longer than 200 m, set the factor p1203 >= 300 %. Caution: An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion. For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable. Note: The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart). With this pre-setting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads or with U/f control and low speeds), we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203). r1204.0...13 CO/BO: Flying restart, U/f control status / FlyRest Uf st VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the U/f control mode. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 r1205.0...15 CO/BO: Flying restart, vector control status / FlyRest vector st VECTOR_G Description: Signal name Current impressed No current flow Voltage input Voltage reduced Start ramp-function generator Wait for execution Slope filter act Positive gradient Current < thresh Current minimum Search in the positive direction Stop after positive direction Stop after negative direction No result 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control mode. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-305 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Speed adaptation circuit record angle Speed adaptation circuit set gain to 0 Isd channel enable Speed control switched out Quadrature arm switched in Special transformation active Speed adaptation circuit set I comp to 0 Current control on Isd_set = 0 A Frequency held Search in the positive direction Search Started Current impressed Search interrupted Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0 Speed control activated Note: Re bit 00 ... 09: 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - Used to control internal sequences during the flying restart. Depending on the motor type (p0300), the number of active bits differs. Re bits 10 ... 15: Are used to monitor the flying restart sequence. For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PEM) only bits 10, 11 and 15 are supported. p1206[0...9] Faults without automatic restart / F w/out auto AR B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets faults for which automatic restart should not be effective. Dependency: The setting is only effective for p1210 = 6, 16. Refer to: p1210 p1207 BI: AR connection following drive object / AR connection DO B_INF Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Modifies the pre-charging monitoring of the infeed. The active automatic restart (AR) of the following drive object can be interconnected using this binector input (BI: p1207 = r1214.2). This means that when the automatic restart is operational, the pre-charging monitoring of the infeed is de-activated and is only re-activated under the following conditions: - the absolute current in the DC link is greater than 2 % of the maximum current (r0209) of the infeed to provide protection against short-circuit in the DC link. - if a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) is being used, the line supply voltage amplitude is greater than 3 % of the parameterized unit supply voltage (p0210) to protect the pre-charging resistors against continuous filter current when the line supply partially returns. Dependency: 1-306 Refer to: r0209, p0210, r1214 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1208[0...1] VECTOR_G Description: BI: AR modification infeed / AR modification Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to modify the automatic restart (AR). Interconnections between the automatic restart and infeed: With the following interconnection in the mode p1210 = 6, the automatic restart can respond to infeed faults: BI: p1208[0] = r2139.3 With the following interconnection, in the mode p1210 = 4, the automatic restart can respond to line supply failure of the infeed: BI: p1208[1] = r0863.2 Index: [0] = Infeed fault [1] = Infeed line supply failure Dependency: Refer to: r0863, r2139 p1210 Automatic restart, mode / AR mode B_INF Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the automatic restart mode (AR). Value: 0: 1: 4: 6: Dependency: The automatic restart requires an active ON command (e.g., via a digital input). If, for p1210 > 1, there is no active ON command, then the automatic restart is interrupted. Inhibit automatic restart Acknowledge all faults without restarting Restart after line supply failure w/o additional start attempts Restart after fault with additional start attempts When using an Advanced Operator Panel (AOP) in the LOCAL Mode, then there is no automatic restart. Refer to: p0840, p0857, p1267 Danger: Caution: Refer to: F30003 If the automatic restart is activated (p1210 > 1) if there is an ON command (refer to p0840), the drive is powered up as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged. This also occurs after the line supply returns or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is again present or the feedback of the line supply infeed (refer to p0864) is again available. This automatic power-up sequence can only be interrupted by withdrawing the ON command. A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). For p1210 > 1, the infeed is automatically started. Note: When automatic restart mode is activated, the supply voltage must remain connected (e.g. backed up by UPS). Re p1210 = 1: Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledgment, then these are also automatically acknowledged again. A minimum time of p1212 + 1 s must expire between a successful fault acknowledgement and a fault re-occurring if the signal ON/OFF1 (STW1.0) is at a HIGH signal level. If the signal ON/OFF1 is at a LOW signal level, then the time between a successful fault acknowledgement and a new fault must be at least 1 s. p1211 has no influence on the number of acknowledgment attempts. Re p1210 = 4: An automatic restart is only executed if fault F06200 has occurred. If additional faults are present, then these faults are also acknowledged and when successful, starting continues. If the 24 V Control Unit power supply fails, then this is interpreted as a line supply failure. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-307 Parameters List of parameters Re p1210 = 6: An automatic restart is carried out if any fault has occurred. p1210 Automatic restart, mode / AR mode VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the automatic restart mode (AR). Value: 0: 1: 4: 6: 14: 16: Recommend.: For brief line supply failures, the motor shaft may still be rotating when restarting. The "flying restart" function (p1200) might need to be activated to restart while the motor shaft is still rotating. Dependency: The automatic restart requires an active ON command (e.g., via a digital input). If, for p1210 > 1, there is no active ON command, then the automatic restart is interrupted. Inhibit automatic restart Acknowledge all faults without restarting Restart after line supply failure w/o additional start attempts Restart after fault with additional start attempts Restart after line supply failure following man. acknowledgment Restart after fault following manual acknowledgment When using an Operator Panel in the LOCAL mode, then there is no automatic start. For p1210 = 14, 16, a manual acknowledgement is required for an automatic restart. Refer to: p0840, p0857, p1267 Danger: Caution: Refer to: F30003 If the automatic restart is activated (p1210 > 1) if there is an ON command (refer to p0840), the drive is powered up as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged. This also occurs after the line supply returns or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is again present or the feedback of the line supply infeed (refer to p0864) is again available. This automatic power-up sequence can only be interrupted by withdrawing the ON command. A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). When faults are present, therefore, the parameter cannot be changed. For p1210 > 1, the motor is automatically started. Note: When automatic restart mode is activated, the supply voltage must remain connected (e.g. backed up by UPS). Re p1210 = 1: Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledgment, then these are also automatically acknowledged again. p1211 has no influence on the number of acknowledgment attempts. Re p1210 = 4: An automatic restart is only carried out if fault F30003 occurred at the Motor Module or a 1 signal is present at binector input p1208[1]. If additional faults are present, then these faults are also acknowledged and when successful, starting continues. If the 24 V Control Unit power supply fails, then this is interpreted as a line supply failure. Re p1210 = 6: An automatic restart is carried out if any fault has occurred or there is a 1 signal at binector input p1208[0]. Re p1210 = 14: As for p1210 = 4. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged. Re p1210 = 16: As for p1210 = 6. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged. 1-308 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1211 Automatic restart, start attempts / AR start attempts B_INF Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10 Factory setting 3 Description: Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6. Dependency: The setting of this parameter is always effective for p1210 = 6. For p1210 = 4, the parameter only has an influence if an additional line phase failure (F6200) occurs at the start attempt. Refer to: p1210, r1214 Refer to: F07320 Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). Notice: After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the automatic restart function is re-activated. After a complete power failure the start counter always starts with the counter value that applied before the power failure, and decrements this start attempt by 1. If a further attempt to acknowledge is started by the automatic restart function prior to power failure, e.g. when the CU remains active on power failure longer than the time p1212 / 2, the fault counter will already have been decremented once. In this case, the start counter is thus decreased by the value 2. Note: A start attempt starts immediately when a fault occurs. The restart attempt is considered to have been completed if the infeed is powered up and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired. As long as a fault is present, an acknowledge command is generated in the time intervals of p1212 / 2. When successfully acknowledged, the start counter is decremented. If, after this, a fault re-occurs before a restart has been completed, then acknowledgement starts again from the beginning. Fault F07320 is output if, after several faults occur, the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached. After a successful start attempt (i.e. a fault/error has no longer occurred up to the end of the power-up operation) the start counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s. If faults re-occur, the parameterized number of start attempts is again available. At least one start attempt is always carried out. After a line supply failure, acknowledgement is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is powered up. If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its acknowledgement also causes the start counter to be decremented. p1211 Automatic restart, start attempts / AR start attempts VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10 Factory setting 3 Description: Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6. Dependency: Refer to: p1210, r1214 Refer to: F07320 Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). Notice: After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the automatic restart function is re-activated. After a complete power failure the start counter always starts with the counter value that applied before the power failure, and decrements this start attempt by 1. If a further attempt to acknowledge is started by the automatic restart function prior to power failure, e.g. when the CU remains active on power failure longer than the time p1212 / 2, the fault counter will already have been decremented once. In this case, the start counter is thus decreased by the value 2. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-309 Parameters List of parameters Note: A start attempt starts immediately when a fault occurs. The start attempt is considered to been completed if the motor was magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired. As long as a fault is present, an acknowledge command is generated in the time intervals of p1212 / 2. When successfully acknowledged, the start counter is decremented. If, after this, a fault re-occurs before a restart has been completed, then acknowledgement starts again from the beginning. Fault F07320 is output if, after several faults occur, the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached. After a successful start attempt, i.e. a fault/error has no longer occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase, the start counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s. If a fault re-occurs - the parameterized number of start attempts is again available. At least one start attempt is always carried out. After a line supply failure, acknowledgement is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is powered up. If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its acknowledgement also causes the start counter to be decremented. p1212 Automatic restart, delay time start attempts / AR t_wait start B_INF Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [s] Max 1000.0 [s] Factory setting 1.0 [s] Description: Sets the delay time up to restart. Dependency: This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 4, 6. For p1210 = 1, the following applies: Only automatic acknowledgment of the faults, no restart. Refer to: p1210, r1214 Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). Note: The faults are automatically acknowledged and the system is powered up again after half of the delay time has expired and after the full delay time has expired. p1212 Automatic restart, delay time start attempts / AR t_wait start VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [s] Max 1000.0 [s] Factory setting 1.0 [s] Description: Sets the delay time up to restart. Dependency: This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 4, 6. For p1210 = 1, the following applies: Faults are only automatically acknowledged in half of the waiting time, no restart. Refer to: p1210, r1214 Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). Note: The faults are automatically acknowledged after half of the delay time has expired and the full delay time. If the cause of a fault is not removed in the first half of the delay time, then it is no longer possible to acknowledge in the delay time. 1-310 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1213[0...1] Automatic restart, monitoring time / AR t_monit B_INF Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 10000.0 [s] Factory setting 0.0 [s] Description: Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR). Index: [0] = Restart [1] = Reset start counter Dependency: Refer to: p1210, r1214 Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). Notice: After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the automatic restart function is re-activated. Note: Index 0: The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful, the monitoring time runs again. If the drive has not restarted at the end of the monitoring time, fault F07320 is signaled. The monitoring is de-activated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set to a value which is lower than in p1212, fault F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for p1210 = 1, the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart. The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged (e.g. for faults that are permanently present). Index 1: The start counter (refer to r1214) is only set back to the starting value p1211 if, after successful restart, the time in p1213[1] has expired. The delay time is not effective for fault acknowledgement without automatic restart (p1210 = 1). After a power failure (blackout) the delay time only starts after the line supply returns and the Control Unit boots. The start counter is set to p1211, if F07320 occurred, the power-on command is withdrawn and the fault is acknowledged. The start counter is immediately updated if the starting value p1211 or the mode p1210 is changed. p1213[0...1] VECTOR_G Automatic restart, monitoring time / AR t_monit Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 10000.0 [s] Factory setting 0.0 [s] Description: Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR). Index: [0] = Restart [1] = Reset start counter Dependency: Refer to: p1210, r1214 Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). Notice: After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the automatic restart function is re-activated. Note: Index 0: The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful, the monitoring time runs again. If, after the monitoring time has expired, the drive has still not successfully started again (flying restart and magnetizing of the motor must have been completed: r0056.4 = 1), then fault F07320 is output. The monitoring is de-activated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212, the magnetizing time p0346 and the additional delay time due to the flying restart, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for p1210 = 1, the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart. The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged (e.g. for faults that are permanently present). In the case of p1210 = 14, 16, the faults which are present must be acknowledged manually within the time in p1213[0]. Otherwise, fault F07320 is generated after the set time. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-311 Parameters List of parameters Index 1: The start counter (refer to r1214) is only set back to the starting value p1211 if, after successful restart, the time in p1213[1] has expired. The delay time is not effective for fault acknowledgement without automatic restart (p1210 = 1). After a power failure (blackout) the delay time only starts after the line supply returns and the Control Unit boots. The start counter is set to p1211, if F07320 occurred, the power-on command is withdrawn and the fault is acknowledged. The start counter is immediately updated if the starting value p1211 or the mode p1210 is changed. r1214.0...15 CO/BO: Automatic restart, status / AR status B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 10 12 13 14 15 Note: Signal name Initialization Wait for alarm Auto restart act Setting the acknowledgement command Acknowledge alarms Restart Delay time running after automatic powerup Fault Effective fault Start count. bit 0 Start count. bit 1 Start count. bit 2 Start count. bit 3 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No FP - Yes Yes ON ON ON ON No No OFF OFF OFF OFF - Re bit 00: State to display the single initialization after POWER ON. Re bit 01: State in which the automatic restart function waits for faults (initial state). Re bit 02: General display that a fault has been identified and that the restart or acknowledgement has been initiated. Re bit 03: Displays the acknowledge command within the "acknowledge alarms" state (bit 4 = 1). For bit 5 = 1 or bit 6 = 1, the acknowledge command is continually displayed. Re bit 04: State in which the faults that are present are acknowledged. The state is exited again after successful acknowledgement. A change is only made into the next state if it is signaled that a fault is no longer present after an acknowledgement command (bit 3 = 1). Re bit 05: State in which the drive is automatically powered up (only for p1210 = 4, 6). Re bit 06: State in which the system waits after having been powered up, to the end of the start attempt. For p1210 = 1, this signal is directly set after the faults have been successfully acknowledged. Re bit 07: State which is assumed after a fault occurs within the automatic restart function. Re bits 12 ... 15: Actual state of the start counter (binary coded). 1-312 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1214.0...15 CO/BO: Automatic restart, status / AR status VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 10 12 13 14 15 Note: Signal name Initialization Wait for alarm Auto restart act Setting the acknowledgement command Acknowledge alarms Restart Delay time running after automatic powerup Fault Effective fault Start count. bit 0 Start count. bit 1 Start count. bit 2 Start count. bit 3 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No FP - Yes Yes ON ON ON ON No No OFF OFF OFF OFF - Re bit 00: State to display the single initialization after POWER ON. Re bit 01: State in which the automatic restart function waits for faults (initial state). Re bit 02: General display that a fault has been identified and that the restart or acknowledgement has been initiated. Re bit 03: Displays the acknowledge command within the "acknowledge alarms" state (bit 4 = 1). For bit 5 = 1 or bit 6 = 1, the acknowledge command is continually displayed. Re bit 04: State in which the faults that are present are acknowledged. The state is exited again after successful acknowledgement. A change is only made into the next state if it is signaled that a fault is no longer present after an acknowledgement command (bit 3 = 1). Re bit 05: State in which the drive is automatically powered up (only for p1210 = 4, 6). Re bit 06: State in which the system waits after having been powered up, to the end of the start attempt (to the end of the magnetizing process). For p1210 = 1, this signal is directly set after the faults have been successfully acknowledged. Re bit 07: State which is assumed after a fault occurs within the automatic restart function. This is only reset after acknowledging the fault and withdrawing the power-on command. Re bit 10: When the automatic restart function is active, r1214 bit 7 is displayed, otherwise the effective fault r2139 bit 3. Re bits 12 ... 15: Actual state of the start counter (binary coded). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-313 Parameters List of parameters p1215 Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2701, 2707, 2711 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the holding brake configuration. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Dependency: Refer to: p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227, p1228, p1278 Caution: For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake. Notice: If p1215 was set to 1 or if p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the motor is still rotating. Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result of a fault with OFF2 response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using a 1 signal at p0855. Note: If the configuration is set to "no holding brake present" when booting, then the motor holding brake will be automatically identified. If a motor holding brake is detected, the configuration is set to "motor holding brake as for sequence control". No motor holding brake available Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control Motor holding brake always open Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO If a motor holding brake is used via the brake connection of the Motor Module integrated in the drive, then it is not permissible that p1215 is set to 3. if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as control signal. When the function module "extended brake control" is activated (r0108.14 = 1), r1229.1 should be interconnected as control signal. The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited. The parameterization "no motor holding brake available" and "Safe Brake Control" enabled (p1215 = 0, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical if there is no motor holding brake. The parameterization "motor holding brake the same as sequence control, connection via BICO" and "Safe Brake Control" enabled (p1215 = 3, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical. p1216 Motor holding brake, opening time / Brake t_open VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2701, 2711 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Sets the time to open the motor holding brake. After controlling the holding brake (opens), the speed/velocity setpoint remains at zero for this time. After this, the speed/velocity setpoint is enabled. Recommend.: This time should be set longer than the actual opening time of the brake. This ensures that the drive cannot accelerate when the brake is applied. Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1217 Note: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ and integrated brake, for p0300 = 10000, this time is pre-assigned the value saved in the motor. 1-314 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1217 Motor holding brake closing time / Brake t_close VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2701, 2711 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake. After OFF1 or OFF3 and the holding brake is controlled (the brake closes), then the drive remains closed-loop controlled for this time stationary with a speed setpoint/velocity setpoint of zero. The pulses are suppressed when the time expires. Recommend.: This time should be set longer than the actual closing time of the brake. This ensures that the pulses are only suppressed after the brake has closed. Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216 Notice: If the selected closing time is too short with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, then the load can sag. If the closing time is selected to be too long with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, the control works against the brake and therefore reduces its lifetime. Note: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ and integrated brake, for p0300 = 10000, this time is pre-assigned the value saved in the motor. p1218[0...1] BI: Open motor holding brake / Open brake VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2707 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for a conditional opening of the motor holding brake. Dependency: Refer to: p1215 Note: [0]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 1 [1]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 2 p1219[0...3] BI: Immediately close motor holding brake / Close brake VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2707 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting [0] 0 [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 1229.9 Description: Sets the signal source for an unconditional (immediate) closing of the motor holding brake. Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1275 Note: [0]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.0 [1]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.1 [2]: Signal, immediately close brake [3]: Signal, immediately close brake - refer to the factory setting These four signals form an OR logic operation. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-315 Parameters List of parameters p1220 CI: Open motor holding brake, signal source, threshold / Open brake thresh VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2707 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for the command "open brake". Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1221, r1229, p1277 p1221 Open motor holding brake, threshold / Open brake thresh VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2707 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the threshold value for the command "open brake". Dependency: Refer to: p1220, r1229, p1277 p1222 BI: Motor holding brake feedback signal brake closed / Brake feedb closed VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2711 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake closed". For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake closed" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1. Dependency: Refer to: p1223, p1275 Note: 1 signal: Brake closed. When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second feedback signal (p1223). For r1229.5 = 1, OFF1/OFF3 are suppressed to prevent the drive accelerating by a load that drives the motor whereby OFF2 remains effective. p1223 BI: Motor holding brake feedback signal brake open / Brake feedb open VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2711 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake open". For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake open" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1. Dependency: Refer to: p1222, p1275 Note: 1 signal: Brake open. When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second feedback signal (p1222). 1-316 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1224[0...3] BI: Close motor holding brake at standstill / Brk close standst VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2704 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for close brake at standstill. Dependency: Refer to: p1275 Note: [0]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.2 [1]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.3 [2]: Signal, close brake at standstill [3]: Signal, close brake at standstill These four signals form an OR logic operation. p1225 CI: Standstill detection, threshold value / Standstill thresh VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2704 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 63[0] Description: Sets the signal source "threshold value" for the standstill identification. Dependency: Refer to: p1226, p1228, r1229 p1226[0...n] Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 2701, 2704 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 20.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification. Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring. When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold is undershot, standstill is identified. The following applies when the brake control is activated: When the threshold is undershot, the brake control is started and the system waits for the brake closing time in p1217. The pulses are then suppressed. if the brake control is not activated, the following applies: When the threshold is undershot, the pulses are suppressed and the drive coasts down. Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1227 Notice: For reasons relating to the compatibility to earlier firmware versions, a parameter value of zero in indices 1 to 31 is overwritten with the parameter value in index 0 when the Control Unit boots. Note: Standstill is identified in the following cases: - the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired. - the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired. The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if the speed threshold is too low. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-317 Parameters List of parameters p1227 Zero speed detection monitoring time / n_standst t_monit VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2701, 2704 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 300.000 [s] Factory setting 4.000 [s] Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification. When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has fallen below p1226 (also refer to p1145). After this, the brake control is started, the system waits for the closing time in p1217 and then the pulses are suppressed. Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1226 Notice: For p1145 > 0.0 (RFG tracking) the setpoint is not equal to zero dependent on the selected value. This can therefore cause the monitoring time in p1227 to be exceeded. In this case, for a driven motor, the pulses are not suppressed. Note: Standstill is identified in the following cases: - the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired. - the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired. For p1227 = 300.000 s, the following applies: Monitoring is de-activated. For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies: With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts" down. p1228 Pulse suppression delay time / Pulse suppr t_del VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2701, 2704 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 299.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Sets the delay time for pulse suppression. After OFF1 or OFF3, the pulses are canceled, if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - the speed actual value falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired. - the speed setpoint falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired. Dependency: Refer to: p1226, p1227 Notice: When the motor holding brake is activated, pulse cancellation is additionally delayed by the brake closing time (p1217). r1229.1...11 CO/BO: Motor holding brake status word / Brake ZSW VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the motor holding brake. Bit field: Bit 01 03 04 1-318 Signal name Command open brake (continuous signal) Pulse enable, extended brake control Brake does not open 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP 2711 2711 2711 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 p1230[0...n] VECTOR_G Brake does not close Brake threshold exceeded Brake threshold undershot Brake monitoring time expired Pulse enable request missing/n_ctrl inhibited Brake OR logic operation result Brake AND logic operation result Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No 2711 2707 2704 2704 2707 Yes Yes No No 2707 2707 BI: Armature short-circuit / DC braking activation / ASC/DCBRK act Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7014, 7016, 7017 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to activate the armature short-circuit or DC braking. Dependency: Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1238, r1239, p1345, p1346 Note: 1 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC braking activated. 0 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC braking de-activated. p1231[0...n] VECTOR_G Armature short-circuit / DC braking configuration / ASC/DCBRK config Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 7014, 7016, 7017 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 14 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to activate the various types for armature short-circuit / DC braking. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 14: Dependency: Refer to: p0300, p1230, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1238, r1239, p1345, p1346 Danger: Re p1231 = 1, 2: No function External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal Ext. armature short circuit without contactor feedback signal Internal voltage protection Internal armature short-circuit / DC braking DC braking for OFF1/OFF3 DC braking below starting speed - only short-circuit-proof motors may be used, or suitable resistors must be used to short-circuit the motor Re p1231 = 3: - when the internal voltage protection is active, after pulse suppression, all of the motor terminals are at half of the DC link voltage (without an internal voltage protection, the motor terminals are at zero potential)! - it is only permissible to use motors that are short-circuit proof (p0320 < p0323). - The Motor Module must be able to conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0320) of the motor (r0209). - the internal voltage protection cannot be interrupted due to a fault response. If an overcurrent condition occurs during the active, internal voltage protection, then this can destroy the Motor Module and/or the motor. - if the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0), in order to ensure safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, an external 24 V power supply (UPS) must be used for the components. - if the Motor Module does support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), in order to ensure safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, the 24 V power supply for the components must be provided through a Control Supply Module. - if the internal voltage protection is active, it is not permissible that the motor is driven by the load for a longer period of time (e.g. as a result of loads that move the motor or another coupled motor). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-319 Parameters List of parameters Re p1231 = 4 and synchronous motor: - when armature short-circuit is active, all of the motor terminals are at half of the DC link potential. - it is only permissible to use motors that are short-circuit proof (p0320 < p0323). - The Motor Module must be able to conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0320) of the motor (r0209). Note: Re p1231 = 1, 2: The external armature short circuit can only be selected for synchronous motors (p0300). In this case, control bit BO: r1239.0 must be interconnected (e.g. to a digital input) to control the external contactor. The external armature short circuit cannot be set as a fault response. It can be triggered via binector input p1230. It is also always activated in the case of pulse suppression. Re p1231 = 3: Internal voltage protection (using an internal armature short circuit) can only be selected for synchronous motors (p0300) and Motor Modules in booksize or chassis format. Further, it is not permissible for Safety Integrated to be active on blocksize Motor Modules (i.e. p9501 = 0 and p9601 = 0). The internal voltage protection prevents the DC link capacitance from being charged if there is no possibility of regenerating the EMF of a motor operated in the field-weakening mode. The Motor Module must support this function (r0192.9 = 1). a) If the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal armature short-circuit (r0192.10 = 0), the armature short-circuit is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled (refer below): b) If the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), then the Motor Module itself decides - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the short-circuit should be activated. In this case, protection is also provided even if the DRIVE-CLiQ connection between the Control Unit and Motor Module was interrupted. The short circuit is activated if the DC link voltage exceeds 800 V. If the DC link voltage falls below 450 V, then the short-circuit is withdrawn. This therefore ensures that the required input voltage for the Control Supply Module is maintained. For chassis units, the following applies: The value for the voltage limits is calculated, depending on the voltage class, from EEPROM data of the particular power unit and a factor. Re p1231 = 4: The function is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled. - the function can be superseded by OFF2 a) For synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx), the internal armature short-circuit is initiated. - the Motor Module must support this function (r0192.9 = 1). b) For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx), the DC braking is initiated. Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled): - binector input p1230 = 1 signal (DC braking activation). - the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610). - the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0). Re p1231 = 5: DC braking can only be set for induction motors. DC braking is activated if the OFF1 or OFF3 command is present. Binector input p1230 is ineffective. If the drive speed still lies above the speed threshold p1234, then initially, the drive is ramped-down to this threshold, demagnetized (see p0347) and is then switched into DC braking for the time set in p1233. After this, the drive is switchedoff. If, at OFF1/OFF3, the drive speed is below p1234, then it is immediately demagnetized and switched into DC braking. A change is made into normal operation if the OFF1 command is withdrawn prematurely. DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible. Re p1231 = 14: DC braking can only be set for induction motors. DC braking is initiated if binector input p1230 = 1 during operation and the actual speed is below the starting speed p1234 (before this, the drive must have operated above p1234 plus the hysteresis). Then, following upstream demagnetization (see p0347), the braking current p1232 is injected for the time set in p1233. The drive then changes into normal operation. During braking the command for DC braking can be withdrawn. If the time p1233 is exceeded, then DC braking is inhibited and the drive changes into normal operation. For OFF1 and OFF3, DC braking is only executed, if binector input p1230 = 1 signal. DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible. Re p1231 = 3, 4, 5, 14: The value can only be changed to values not equal to 3, 4, 5 or 14 if p0491 is not equal to 4 and p2101 is not equal to 6 (armature short-circuit/DC braking not set). 1-320 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: ASC: Armature Short Circuit CSM: Control Supply Module DCBRK: DC Braking IVP: Internal Voltage Protection UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply p1232[0...n] DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 7017 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the braking current for DC braking. Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1233, p1234, r1239, p1345, p1346 Note: A change to the braking current becomes effective the next time that DC braking is switched on. The value for p1232 is specified as an rms value in the 3-phase system. The magnitude of the braking current is the same as that of an identical output current at frequency zero (see r0067, r0068, p0640). The braking current is internally limited to r0067. For the current controller, the settings of parameters p1345 and p1346 (I_max limiting controller) are used. p1233[0...n] VECTOR_G DC braking time / DCBRK time Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 7017 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 3600.0 [s] Factory setting 1.0 [s] Description: Sets the DC braking time (as fault response). Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1234, r1239 Note: The time set is also effective when parameterizing DC braking as fault response. If a speed encoder is being used, DC braking is ended as soon as the drive falls below the standstill threshold (p1226). p1234[0...n] VECTOR_G Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 7017 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 40000.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the starting speed for DC braking. Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, r1239 Caution: If an encoder fault occurs during closed-loop operation with an encoder, controlled deceleration of the drive down to the start speed p1234 is no longer possible. In this case, DC braking is activated immediately and injects the braking current p1232 for the braking time p1233 after de-magnetizing. The braking current and braking duration must, therefore, be dimensioned accordingly for this situation so that the drive can be decelerated to standstill. If the actual speed falls below this threshold, then DC braking is activated. In the case of operation with an encoder, this speed may not be set too low so as ensure that the oscillation movement induced by the residual flux/remanence of the motor does not cause DC braking to be de-activated again. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-321 Parameters List of parameters p1235[0...n] BI: External armature short-circuit, contactor feedback signal / ASC ext feedback VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the contactor feedback signal for external armature short-circuit. Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1236, p1237, r1239 Notice: In order that the pulses are not enabled when the contactor is closed, the contactor feedback signal must lag by a sufficiently long time when opening the contactor. Note: 1 signal: The contactor is closed. 0 signal: The contactor is open. p1236[0...n] Ext. armature short-cct., contactor feedback signal monit. time / ASC ext t_monit VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 200 [ms] Description: Sets the monitoring time of the contactor feedback signal for the external armature short-circuit configuration. If the contactor feedback signal (p1235) is parameterized, then the appropriate feedback signal (r1239.1) is expected within this monitoring time after either opening or closing the contactor. Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1237, r1239 Refer to: A07904, F07905 p1237[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: External armature short-circuit, delay time when opening / ASC ext t_wait Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 200 [ms] Sets the delay time when opening the contactor of the external armature short-circuit. If no contactor feedback signal has been selected (p1235), then the system waits for this time before the pulses are switched in. Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1236, r1239 Notice: This delay time must be at least long enough so that the contactor contacts reliably open before the pulses are switched in. The delay time must be greater than the contactor response time. The Motor Module can be damaged if the delay time is too short. r1238 CO: Armature short-circuit, external state / EASC state VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2610 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting - Description: Displays the state for the external armature short-circuit. Value: 0: 1: 2: 1-322 Switched off Ready Active (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 3: 4: 5: 6: Dependency: Active - feedback signal "Closed" OK Active - feedback signal "Closed" missing Prompt to remove the armature short-circuit Active - feedback signal "Open" missing Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1239 Refer to: A07904, F07905 Note: Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled): - the signal at BI: p1230 (armature short-circuit activation) is 0. - the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610). - the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0). Re state "switched out" (r1238 = 0): - the external armature short-circuit can be selected with p1231 = 1. Re state "ready" (r1238 = 1): - as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled, then a transition is made into the state "active" (r1238 = 2). Regarding the state "active" (r1238 = 2), "active - feedback signal "Closed" OK" (r1238 = 3)", "active - feedback signal "Closed" missing" (r1238 = 4)": - the control signal to close contactor r1239.0 is set to "1" (closed) and the pulses are suppressed. - if a contactor feedback signal is not connected (BI: p1235 = 0 signal), then a transition is immediately made into state 3. - if a contactor feedback signal is connected, then a transition is made into state 3 if the feedback signal at BI: p1235 goes to "1" (closed) within the monitoring time (p1236). - otherwise, a transition is made into state 4. Re state "prompt to remove the armature short-circuit" (r1238 = 5): - the activation criterion is no longer fulfilled. An attempt is made to again remove the armature short circuit. - the control signal to close the contactor r1239.0 is set to "0" (open) and the pulses remain suppressed. - if a contactor feedback signal is not connected (BI: p1235 = 0 signal), the system waits for the delay time (p1237) to expire until a transition is made into state 1. - if a contactor feedback signal is connected, the system waits until the feedback signal at BI:p1235 goes to "0" (open) until a transition is made into state 1. If this does not occur within the monitoring time (p1236), then a transition is made into state 6. Re state "active - feedback signal "Open" missing" (r1238 = 6): - this error state can be exited by de-selecting the external armature short-circuit (p1231 = 0). r1239.0...13 VECTOR_G CO/BO: Armature short-circuit / DC braking status word / ASC/DCBRK ZSW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for armature short-circuit. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 10 11 12 13 Signal name External armature short-circuit External armature short-circuit, contactor feedback signal External armature short-circuit ready External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal Internal armature short-circuit Internal armature short circuit, feedback signal from power unit Internal armature short-circuit ready DC braking active DC braking ready Armature short circuit/DC braking selected DC braking selection internally inhibited DC braking for OFF1/OFF3 1 signal Active Closed 0 signal Inactive Open FP - Yes Yes No No - Active Active Inactive Inactive - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No 7017 7017 - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-323 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237 Note: External armature short-circuit (bits 0 ... 3): Re bit 00: Using this signal, the motor is short-circuited through an external contactor circuit. This means that this BO: p1239.0 must be interconnected e.g. to a digital output. Re bit 01: This signal indicates the state of the contactor to establish the armature short-circuit. To do this, BI: p1235 must be interconnected to a digital input. Re bit 02: The external armature short-circuit configuration is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled. Re bit 03: 1: A feedback signal from an external contactor was parameterized in BI: p1235. Internal voltage protection / internal armature short-circuit (bits 4 ... 6): Re bit 04: a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module does not support the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0). The Control Unit issues the command to the Motor Module to short-circuit the motor through the power semiconductors. a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1). The Motor Module decides autonomously whether the armature short-circuit is activated. In this case, the following applies: r1239.4 = r1239.5. c) Internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) was selected. The Control Unit issues the command to the Motor Module to short-circuit the motor through the power semiconductors. Re bit 05: The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited in the Motor Module through the power semiconductors. Re bit 06: a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module does not support the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0). The internal voltage protection is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled. a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1). The internal voltage protection is ready and the Motor Module decides autonomously - using the DC link voltage whether the short-circuit is activated. In this case, protection is also provided even if the DRIVE-CLiQ connection between the Control Unit and Motor Module was interrupted. The short-circuit is activated if the DC link voltage exceeds 800 V. If the DC link voltage falls below 450 V, then the short-circuit is withdrawn. c) Internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) was selected. The internal armature short-circuit is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled. Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled): - the signal at BI: p1230 (armature short-circuit activation) is 1. - the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610). - the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0). Re bit 12, 13: Only effective for p1231 = 14. p1240[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: 1-324 Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration / Vdc_ctrl config Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6220 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 1 Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Inhib Vdc ctrl Vdc_max controller enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable Activates Vdc_max monitoring Activates Vdc_min monitoring Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring Dependency: Refer to: p1245 Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07403, F07404, F07405, F07406 Warning: When the Udc max controller is active, the motor can accelerate, e.g. for driving loads or for high DC link voltages caused by other drives that are connected to the common DC link busbar. Caution: If several drives are operated from the same DC link busbar, then it is recommended that the Udc control is only activated for the drives with high moments of inertia. If the Udc controls for various drives are simultaneously active, then they can mutually influence one another. In this case, the controller dynamic performance should be reduced or the Udc control of individual drives should be deactivated. Notice: An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive. Note: p1240 = 1, 3: Drives with Udc control must be able to brake and accelerate independently of one another. When the DC link voltage limit specified for the Motor Module is reached the following applies: - the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum DC link voltage when braking. - the ramp-down times are automatically increased. p1240 = 2, 3: When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies: - the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the minimum DC link voltage when accelerating. - the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link. p1240 = 4, 5, 6: When the threshold in r1242 or r1246 is reached, the DC link voltage monitoring initiates a fault (F07403 or F07404) with a response and therefore reduces additional negative effects on the DC link voltage. If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link, then the Vdc_max control should be disabled. See also p1531. r1242 Vdc_max controller switch-in level / Vdc_max on_level VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6220 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. If p1254 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies: AC/AC device: r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 DC/AC device: r1242 = 1.15 * p0210 If p1254 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies: r1242 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit) r1242 = Vdc_max - 25.0 V (for 230 V power units) Note: The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1242 and the controller output is zero. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-325 Parameters List of parameters p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6220 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 [%] Max 10000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller). 100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization. If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251, p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243. If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved. Note: The pre-setting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then the dynamic factor must be optimized manually. p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 65 [%] Max 150 [%] Factory setting 76 [%] Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). The value is obtained as follows: AC/AC device: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210 DC/AC device: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * p0210 Dependency: Refer to: p0210 Warning: An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation. The values up to 150 % are intended for operating modes p1240 = 5, 6. Note: For SINAMICS GM/SM, the following applies: Minimum value = 0.75, Maximum value = 0.90 r1246 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6220 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). Note: The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1246 and the controller output is zero. 1-326 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6220 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 [%] Max 10000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). 100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization. If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251, p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1247. If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved. p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 10.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator. Note: For fast braking where the ramp-function generator tracking was active, it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in the opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding-off time in the ramp-function generator (p1131). This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller. p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 1.00 Description: Sets the proportional gain for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller). Dependency: The effective proportional gain is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor). Note: The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is pre-set to a value that is optimally adapted to the capacitance of the individual Motor Module. The capacitances of the other power units, which are connected to the DC link, can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1247 or p1243). p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6220 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the integral time for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller). Dependency: The effective integral time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-327 Parameters List of parameters Note: An integral time is normally not required for single axis drives. For multi-axis drives on the other hand, it may be possible to compensate for interference from other axes using the integral time (integral component) . p1251 = 0: The integral component is de-activated. p1252[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6220 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the rate time constant for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller). Dependency: The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor). p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. Value: 0: 1: p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Automatic detection inhibited Automatic detection enabled Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 10000.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized. Prerequisite: p1256 = 1 Dependency: Refer to: F07406 Notice: If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1240 = 3) so that the drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135. p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: F07405, F07406 1-328 Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F07405 Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1257 -> F07405, t>p1255 -> F07406 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1257[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 50.00 [rpm] Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized . r1258 CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6220 P-Group: Functions Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller) Note: The regenerative power limit p1531 is used for vector control to pre-control the Vdc_max controller. The lower the power limit is set, the lower the correction signals of the controller when the voltage limit is reached. p1260 Bypass configuration / Bypass config VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the configuration for the bypass function. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Note: If the bypass function is selected ((p1260 > 0), then when the power unit restarts after POWER OFF, the state of the bypass switch is evaluated. This means that after the ramp-up, it is possible to directly change into the standby mode. This is only possible for p1267 = 1 (bypass using the control signal) and if the control command after the system has been booted is still available (p1266). This function has a higher priority than the automatic restart function (p1210). Bypass de-activated Bypass with synchronization and overlap Bypass with synchronization without overlap Bypass without synchronization The "bypass" function can only be switched off again (p1260 = 0) if the bypass is not active or the bypass function has a fault. The corresponding function should be activated in p3800 for bypass with synchronization. r1261.0...9 CO/BO: Bypass control/status word / Bypass STW / ZSW VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Control and feedback signals of the bypass switch. Bit field: Bit 00 01 Signal name Command switch motor - power unit Command switch motor - line supply 1 signal Close Close (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal Open Open FP - 1-329 Parameters List of parameters 02 03 05 06 07 08 09 Synchronization requested Staging status Feedback signal switch motor - power unit Feedback signal switch motor - line supply Bypass command (from p1266) Feedback signal synchronization completed (from p1268) Staging requested (from p2369) Yes Active Closed Closed Yes Yes No Not active Opened Opened No No - Yes No - Dependency: Refer to: p2369 Note: Control bits 0 and 1 should be interconnected to the signal outputs via which the switches in the motor feeder cables should be controlled. These should be selected/dimensioned for switching under load. p1262[0...n] Bypass dead time / Bypass t_dead VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 20.000 [s] Factory setting 1.000 [s] Description: Sets the dead time for non-synchronized bypass. Note: This parameter is used to define the changeover time of the contactors. It should not be shorter than the de-magnetizing time of the motor (p0347). The total changeover time for the bypass is based on the total of p1262 plus the OFF time for the relevant switch (p1274[x]). p1263 Debypass delay time / Debypass t_del VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 300.000 [s] Factory setting 1.000 [s] Description: Sets the delay time to switch back to converter operation for a non-synchronized bypass. p1264 Bypass delay time / Bypass t_del VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 300.000 [s] Factory setting 1.000 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for switching to line operation for a non-synchronized bypass. p1265 Bypass speed threshold / Bypass n_thresh VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 1480.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold to activate the bypass. Note: When selecting p1260 = 3 and p1267.1 = 1, the bypass is automatically activated when this speed is reached. 1-330 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1266 BI: Bypass, control command / Bypass command VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the control command to the bypass. p1267 Bypass changeover source configuration / Chngov_src config VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the cause that should initiate the bypass. Bit field: Bit 00 01 Note: The parameter only has an effect for a non-synchronized bypass. Signal name Bypass via signal (BI: p1266) Bypass via reaching the speed threshold 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - p1267.0 = 1: The bypass is initiated by setting a binary signal. When the command is reset, after the debypass delay time (p1263) has expired, operation at the power unit is re-selected. p1267.1 = 1: When the speed threshold entered in p1265 is reached, the bypass is switched in. The system only switches back when the speed setpoint again falls below the threshold value. p1268 BI: Bypass, feedback synchronization completed / FS sync compl VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 3819.2 Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "synchronization completed" for the bypass function. Dependency: Refer to: r3819 p1269[0...1] BI: Bypass switch feedback signal / Bypass FS VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal of the bypass switch. Index: [0] = Switch motor/drive [1] = Switch motor/line supply Note: In the case of switches without a feedback signal, interconnect the corresponding control bit as the signal source: BI: p1269[0] = r1261.0 BI: p1269[1] = r1261.1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-331 Parameters List of parameters p1272 Simulation mode / Simulation mode VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 In the simulation mode, the closed-loop control or U/f control can be operated without motor. The simulation mode is used to test the power unit. Even though the DC link voltage is missing, the pulses are enabled when powering up. The DC link pre-charging is bypassed and the undervoltage detection is disabled. Closed-loop speed control with an encoder is possible if the torque setpoint (r0079) is used in order to operate a second drive in the closed-loop torque controlled mode. Value: 0: 1: OFF ON Dependency: The following functions are de-activated in the simulation mode: - motor data identification routine - motor data identification routine, rotating without encoder - pole position identification For U/f control and sensorless vector control, flying restart is not carried out (refer to p1200). Refer to: r0192, p1900, p1910, p1960, p1990 Refer to: A07825, F07826 Notice: In simulation mode, binector output r0863.1 = 1 is set. This is why you need to check whether other devices are powered up via this signal before activating simulation mode. You might need to disconnect the corresponding BICO interconnection temporarily. Note: Simulation mode is only possible for DC link voltages below 40 V. In order that the closed-loop control can be calculated, the displayed DC link voltage (r0026, r0070) is set to the rated DC link voltage (refer to p0210). Closed-loop current control and motor model are switched out (disabled) - the same is true for the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control. When fault messages occur, the parameter is not automatically reset. This function is not implemented for SINAMICS GM. p1274[0...1] Bypass switch monitoring time / Switch t_monit VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 5000 [ms] Factory setting 1000 [ms] Description: Sets the monitoring time for the bypass switch. Index: [0] = Switch motor/drive [1] = Switch motor/line supply Note: The monitoring is de-activated with p1274 = 0 ms. The changeover time for the bypass (p1262) is extended by the value in this parameter. p1275 Motor holding brake control word / Brake STW VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 bin Description: 1-332 Sets the control word for the motor holding brake. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 05 p1276 Motor holding brake, standstill detection, bypass / Brk standst bypass VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2704 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Signal name Inverting BI: 1219[0] Inverting BI: 1219[1] Inverting BI: 1224[0] Inverting BI: 1224[1] Brake with feedback 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 300.000 [s] Factory setting 300.000 [s] FP 2707 2707 2704 2704 2711 Sets the delay time for closing the brake at standstill. After this time has expired, if the "close brake at standstill" or OFF1/OFF3 is present, the brake is closed and the pulses are suppressed. For p1276 = 300.000 s, the timer is de-activated - this means that the timer output is always zero. p1277 Motor holding brake, braking threshold delay exceeded / Del thresh exceed. VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2707 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 300.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the signal "braking threshold exceeded" (BO: r1229.6). Dependency: Refer to: p1220, p1221, r1229 p1278 Brake control, diagnostics evaluation / Brake diagnostics VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the brake control type (with or without diagnostics evaluation). Example for brake control with diagnostics evaluation. - brake control in the Motor Modules in booksize format - Safe Brake Relay for AC Drive Example for brake control without diagnostics evaluation. - Brake Relay for AC Drive Value: 0: 1: Brake control with diagnostics evaluation Brake control without diagnostics evaluation Note: If the configuration of the motor holding brake (p1215) is set to "no holding brake present" when booting, then an automatic identification of the motor holding brake will be carried out. If a brake control is detected without diagnostics evaluation (e.g. Brake Relay for AC Drive), then the parameter is set to "brake control without diagnostics evaluation". It is not permissible to parameterize "brake control without diagnostics evaluation" and also enable "safe brake control" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-333 Parameters List of parameters p1279[0...3] BI: Motor holding brake, OR/AND logic operation / Brake OR AND VECTOR_G (Extended brk) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2707 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the OR/AND logic operation. Dependency: Refer to: r1229 Note: [0]: OR logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.10. [1]: OR logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r1229.10. [2]: AND logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.11. [3]: AND logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r1229.11. p1280[0...n] VECTOR_G Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (U/f) / Vdc_ctr config U/f Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690, 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the U/f operating mode. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Warning: When the Udc max controller is active, the motor can accelerate, e.g. for driving loads or for high DC link voltages caused by other drives that are connected to the common DC link busbar. Caution: If several drives are operated from the same DC link busbar, then it is recommended that the Udc control is only activated for the drives with relatively high moments of inertia. If the Udc controls for various drives are simultaneously active, then they can mutually influence one another. In this case, the controller dynamic performance should be reduced or the Udc control of individual drives should be deactivated. Note: p1240 = 4, 5, 6: Inhib Vdc ctrl Vdc_max controller enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable Activates Vdc_max monitoring Activates Vdc_min monitoring Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring Drives with Udc control must be able to brake and accelerate independently of one another. When the threshold in r1282 or r1286 is reached, the DC link voltage monitoring initiates a fault (F07403 or F07404) with a response and therefore reduces additional negative effects on the DC link voltage. If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link, then the Vdc_max control should be disabled. r1282 Vdc_max controller switch-in level (U/f) / Vdc_max on_level VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. If p1294 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies: AC/AC device: r1282 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 DC/AC device: r1282 = 1.15 * p0210 1-334 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters If p1294 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies: r1282 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit) r1282 = Vdc_max - 25.0 V (for 230 V power units) Note: The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1282 and the controller output is zero. p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (U/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 [%] Max 10000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller). 100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used in accordance with their basic settings and on the basis of a theoretical controller optimization. If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291, and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1283. If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved. Note: The pre-setting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then the dynamic factor must be optimized manually. p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 65 [%] Max 150 [%] Factory setting 76 [%] Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). The value is obtained as follows: AC/AC unit: p1286[V] = p1285[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210 Warning: DC/AC unit: p1286[V] = p1285[%] * p0210 An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation. The values up to 150 % are intended for operating modes p1240 = 5, 6. r1286 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). Note: The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1286 and the controller output is zero. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-335 Parameters List of parameters p1287[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 [%] Max 10000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). 100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization. If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291, and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1287. If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved. Note: The pre-setting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then the dynamic factor must be optimized manually. p1288[0...n] Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (U/f) / Vdc_max factor RFG VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 100.000 Factory setting 0.500 Description: Sets the feedback factor for the ramp-function generator. Its ramp times are decelerated relative to the output signal of the Vdc_max controller. Note: For values p1288 = 0.0 to 0.5, the controller dynamics are automatically adapted internally. p1289[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_max n_thresh VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 10.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator. p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 1.00 Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller). Note: The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is pre-set to a value that is optimally adapted to the capacitance of the individual Motor Module. The capacitances of the other power units which are connected to the DC link can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1287 or p1283). 1-336 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 40 [ms] Description: Sets the integral time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller). p1292[0...n] Vdc controller rate time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 10 [ms] Description: Sets the rate time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller). p1293[0...n] Vdc min controller output limit (U/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 600.00 [Hz] Factory setting 10.00 [Hz] Description: Sets the output limit for the Vdc min controller (DC link undervoltage controller). p1294 Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level (U/f) / Vdc_max SenseOnLev VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. When the sensing function is de-activated, the activation threshold r1282 for the Vdc_max controller is determined from the parameterized connection voltage p0210. Value: 0: 1: p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh VECTOR_G Description: Automatic detection inhibited Automatic detection enabled Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 10000.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized. Prerequisite: p1296 = 1. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-337 Parameters List of parameters Notice: If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1280 = 3) so that the drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135. p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (U/f / Vdc_min response VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). Value: 0: 1: Note: Re p1296 = 1: Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1297 -> F07405 Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1297 -> F07405, t>p1295 -> F07406 The quick stop ramp entered in p1135 must not be equal to zero, to prevent overcurrent shutdown if F07406 is triggered. p1297[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 50.00 [rpm] Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized . r1298 CO: Vdc controller output (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl output VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6320 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller) p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690, 6300, 6310, 6320 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 19 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the U/f control mode of the drive. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 1-338 U/f control with linear characteristic U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC U/f control with parabolic characteristic U/f control with parameterizable characteristic U/f control with linear characteristic and ECO U/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles) U/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC U/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 15: 19: Operation with braking resistor U/f control with independent voltage setpoint Recommend.: The use of the vector control operating modes is recommended for synchronous motors. Dependency: If you are working with reduced supply voltages (p0212.0 = 1), only U/f control with independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19) can be set as the operating mode. p1300 = 15 (operation with braking resistor), can only be activated or deactivated in quick commissioning (p0010 = 1). This operating mode is only possible for chassis power units (DC/AC Motor Module). Notice: Active slip compensation is required in the U/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%). The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition. Note: For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6, the slip compensation p1335 and the resonance damping p1338 are internally switched out (disabled) in order to be able to precisely set the output frequency. For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 4 and 7 (Eco mode), the efficiency can be optimized by varying the voltage (when the operating point is constant). During operation (pulses enabled) the open-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing over drive data sets. p1300[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690, 1700, 6300, 8012 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 23 Factory setting 20 Description: Sets the open and closed-loop control mode of a drive. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 15: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: Recommend.: The use of the vector control operating modes is recommended for synchronous motors. Dependency: Closed-loop speed or torque control (with encoder) cannot be selected if the encoder type is not entered (p0400). U/f control with linear characteristic U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC U/f control with parabolic characteristic U/f control with parameterizable characteristic U/f control with linear characteristic and ECO U/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles) U/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC U/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO Operation with braking resistor I/f control with fixed current U/f control with independent voltage setpoint Speed control (encoderless) Speed control (with encoder) Torque control (encoderless) Torque control (with encoder) Closed-loop speed or torque control can be selected if the closed-loop speed/torque control was selected as operating mode (p0108.2). Only operation with U/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311). A reluctance motor can only be operated in a U/f control mode (p1300 < 20). Sensorless control on separately excited synchronous motors is only possible with a VSM module (see p0150, p0151). For chassis power units with reduced line voltage (see r0212 bit 0), the drive can only be operated in a control mode (p1300 = 20...23) and with the DC link voltage control activated. Refer to: p0108, r0108, p0212, p0300, p0311, p0400, p1501 Notice: Active slip compensation is required in the U/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-339 Parameters List of parameters The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition. Note: The closed-loop torque control can only be changed over in operation (p1300 = 20, 21) by selecting the closed-loop speed control (p1501). At the changeover, the setting of p1300 does not change. In this case, the actual state is displayed in r1407, bit 2 and bit 3. For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), slip compensation p1335, resonance damping p1338, and the Imax frequency controller are switched off internally so that the output frequency can be set precisely. The Imax voltage controller remains active. For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 4 and 7 (Eco mode), the efficiency can be optimized by varying the voltage (when the operating point is constant). Separately-excited synchronous motors can only be operated in modes p1300 = 20, 21 and 23 - or for diagnostic purposes in modes p1300 = 0, 3 and 18. For I/f control (p1300 = 18), the current amplitude can be set using p1609. Both for U/f as well as for I/f control only a small load may be applied to the separately-excited synchronous motor because the excitation current is not calculated as a function of the load. During operation (pulses enabled) the open-loop/closed-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing over drive data sets. p1300 is pre-assigned depending on r0108.2 and p0187. p1302[0...n] VECTOR_G U/f control configuration / U/f configuration Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the U/f control. Bit field: Bit 00 01 Note: Re bit 00: Signal name U_output starting angle zero Take into account the setpoint voltage sign 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - If the bit is set the device will always start up with setpoint angle zero on pulse enable. This also affects the setpoint angle for DC braking (p1231). Re bit 01: If the bit is set, in the case of U/f control with independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19) and negative setpoint voltages at the input of p1330, the setpoint angle is rotated through 180 degrees, thereby achieving a negative output voltage. The voltage boost is in this case not active (p1310, p1311). p1310[0...n] Voltage boost permanent / U_boost perm VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690, 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 250.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Description: Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305). The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor frequency, the rated motor voltage is present. The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows: Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 x p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1310 (permanent voltage boost [%]) / 100 % At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following: - magnetize the induction motor. - hold the load. - compensate for losses in the system. 1-340 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310. The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law U/f characteristics. Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost. For vector control, the permanent voltage boost (p1310) has no effect as the drive converter automatically sets the optimum operating conditions. Refer to: p1300, p1311, p1312, r1315 Notice: The voltage boost increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed). Note: The voltage boost is only effective for U/f control (p1300). The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311), voltage boost for starting (p1312)). However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311, p1312 p1311[0...n] Voltage boost at acceleration / U_boost accelerate VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690, 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 250.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Description: p1311 only results in a voltage boost when accelerating and generates a supplementary torque to accelerate the load. The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed. The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows: Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1311 (voltage boost when accelerating [%]) / 100 % Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost. Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1312, r1315 Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase. Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes. Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310 p1312[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Voltage boost when starting / U_boost starting Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690, 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 250.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Setting for an additional voltage boost when powering-up, however, only for the first acceleration phase. The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed. Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost. Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, r1315 Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase. Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes. Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-341 Parameters List of parameters r1315 Voltage boost total / U_boost total VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Displays the total resulting voltage boost in volt. r1315 = p1310 + p1311 + p1312 Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1312 p1320[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3. This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic. The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point. Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327 Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic. p1321[0...n] VECTOR_G U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Uf char U1 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [Vrms] Max 10000.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.0 [Vrms] Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3. This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327 Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic. p1322[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Uf char f2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic. 1-342 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327 p1323[0...n] VECTOR_G U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Uf char U2 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [Vrms] Max 10000.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.0 [Vrms] Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327 This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic. p1324[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Uf char f3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic. Dependency: The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1325, p1326, p1327 p1325[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Uf char U3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [Vrms] Max 10000.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.0 [Vrms] Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1326, p1327 p1326[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Uf char f4 This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic. VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 10000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the frequency of the fourth point along the characteristic. Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3. The following applies for the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326 Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1327 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-343 Parameters List of parameters Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. For output frequencies above p1326, the characteristic is extrapolated with the gradient between the characteristic points p1324/p1325 and p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic. p1327[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Uf char U4 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [Vrms] Max 10000.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.0 [Vrms] Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3. This parameter specifies the voltage of the fourth point along the characteristic. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326 Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic. p1330[0...n] VECTOR_G CI: U/f control independent voltage setpoint / Uf U_set independ. Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the voltage setpoint for U/f control with an independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19). Dependency: Selects the U/f control with independent voltage setpoint via p1300 = 19. Refer to: p1300 p1333[0...n] U/f control FCC starting frequency / U/f FCC f_start VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6310 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Description: Sets the starting frequency at which FCC (Flux Current Control) is activated. Dependency: The correct operating mode must be set (p1300 = 1, 6). Warning: An excessively low value can result in instability. Note: For p1333 = 0 Hz, the FCC starting frequency is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency. p1334[0...n] U/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6310 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Description: 1-344 Sets the starting frequency of the slip compensation. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: For p1334 = 0, the starting frequency of the slip compensation is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency. p1335[0...n] Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690, 6310 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 600.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Sets the setpoint for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip). p1335 = 0.0 %: Slip compensation de-activated. p1335 = 100.0 %: The slip is completely compensated. Dependency: Prerequisite for a precise slip compensation for p1335 = 100 % are the precise motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360). If the parameters are not precisely known, a precise compensation can be achieved by varying p1335. For U/f control types with Eco optimization (4 and 7), the slip compensation must be activated in order to guarantee correct operation. Note: The purpose of slip compensation is to maintain a constant motor speed regardless of the applied load. The fact that the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors. For synchronous motors, this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case. For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), the slip compensation is internally disabled in order to be able to precisely set the output frequency. If p1335 is changed during commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1335 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300). p1336[0...n] VECTOR_G Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6310 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 600.00 [%] Factory setting 250.00 [%] Description: Sets the limit value for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip). r1337 CO: Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act val VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6310 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the actual compensated slip [%] referred to r0330 (rated motor slip). Dependency: p1335 > 0 %: Slip compensation active. Refer to: p1335 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-345 Parameters List of parameters p1338[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690, 6310 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 0.00 Description: Sets the gain for resonance damping for U/f control. Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1339, p1349 Note: The resonance damping function dampens active current oscillations that frequency occur under no-load conditions. The resonance damping is active in a range from approximately 6 % of the rated motor frequency (p0310). The shutoff frequency is determined by p1349. For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sectors), the resonance damping is internally disabled in order that the output frequency can be precisely set. p1339[0...n] VECTOR_G U/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6310 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.00 [ms] Max 1000.00 [ms] Factory setting 20.00 [ms] Description: Sets the filter time constant for resonance damping for U/f control. Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1338, p1349 p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 0.500 Factory setting 0.000 Sets the proportional gain of the I_max frequency controller. The I_max controller reduces the drive converter output current if the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded. In the U/f operating modes (p1300) for the I_max control, one controller is used that acts on the output frequency and one controller that acts on the output voltage. The frequency controller reduces the current by decreasing the converter output frequency. The frequency is reduced down to a minimum value (equaling twice rated slip). If the overcurrent condition cannot be successfully resolved using this measure, then the drive converter output voltage is reduced using the I_max voltage controller. Once the overcurrent condition has been resolved, the drive is accelerated along the ramp set in p1120 (ramp-up time). Dependency: In the U/f modes (p1300) for textile applications and for external voltage setpoints, only the I_max voltage controller is used. Notice: When de-activating the I_max controller, the following must be carefully observed: When the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded, the output current is no longer reduced, however, overcurrent alarm messages are generated. The drive is shut down if the overcurrent limit (r0209) is exceeded. Note: The I_max limiting controller becomes ineffective if the ramp-function generator is de-activated with p1122 = 1. p1341 = 0: I_max frequency controller de-activated and I_max voltage controller activated over the complete speed range. 1-346 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 50.000 [s] Factory setting 0.300 [s] Description: Sets the integral time for the I_max frequency controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1340 Note: When p1341 = 0, the current limiting controller influencing the frequency is de-activated and only the current limiting controller influencing the output voltage remains active (p1345, p1346). r1343 CO: I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1690 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the effective frequency limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1340 r1344 I_max controller voltage output / I_max_ctrl U_outp VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1690 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the amount by which the converter output voltage is reduced. Dependency: Refer to: p1340 p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 100000.000 Factory setting 0.000 Description: Sets the proportional gain for the I_max voltage controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1340 Note: The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232). p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 50.000 [s] Factory setting 0.030 [s] Sets the integral time for the I_max voltage controller. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-347 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Note: Refer to: p1340 The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232). For p1346 = 0, the following applies: The integral time of the I_max voltage controller is de-activated. r1348 CO: U/f control Eco factor actual value / U/f Eco fac act v VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6300 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the economic factor determined for optimizing motor consumption. Dependency: Refer to: p1335 Note: The value is only determined for operating modes with Economic (p1300 = 4, 7). p1349[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Uf res_damp f_max VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6310 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Sets the maximum output frequency for resonance damping for U/f control. Resonance damping is inactive above this output frequency. Dependency: Refer to: p1338, p1339 Note: For p1349 = 0, the changeover limit is automatically set to 95 % of the rated motor frequency - however, to a max. of 45 Hz. p1350[0...n] Soft starting / Soft starting VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1690 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets whether the voltage is continuously increased during the magnetizing phase (p1350 = 1, On) or whether it jumps directly to the voltage boost (p1350 = 0, Off). Value: 0: 1: Note: The settings for this parameter have the following advantages and disadvantages: OFF ON 0 = off (jump directly to voltage boost) Advantage: Flux is established quickly -> torque is quickly available Disadvantage: The motor can move while it is being magnetized 1 = on (voltage is continually established) Advantage: The motor is unlikely to rotate Disadvantage: The flux is established slower -> torque is available later 1-348 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1351[0...n] CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6310 P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -300.00 [%] Max 300.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the frequency setting value at the slip compensation output for starting up with motor holding brake. Dependency: When setting p1351 > 0, then slip compensation is automatically activated (p1335 = 100 %). Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Note: A value of 100% corresponds to the motor rated slip (r0330). p1356[0...n] CI: U/f control, angular setpoint / Uf ang setpoint VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the differential angular generation for U/f control. p1358[0...n] Angular difference, symmetrizing, actual angle / Sym act angle VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the dead time for the symmetrizing of the actual angle value for the differential angular generation. The selected multiplier refers to the current controller clock cycle (dead time= p1358 * p0115[0]). r1359 CO: Angular difference / Angular difference VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1 Min - [] Max - [] Factory setting - [] Description: Displays the output of the differential angular generation. Note: The difference between the setpoint angle, read-in in p1356 and the actual value of the U/f control delayed with p1358 is displayed. p1360 Braking chopper braking resistor cold / Br_chop R cold VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [ohm] Max 10.000 [ohm] Factory setting 0.000 [ohm] Sets the braking resistor for the braking chopper. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-349 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Select operation with braking resistor: p1300 = 15 Refer to: p1362, r1363, p1364 Refer to: A06921, F06922 p1362[0...1] VECTOR_G Braking chopper activation threshold / Br_chop thresh Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [V] Max 1158 [V] Factory setting [0] 0 [V] [1] 60 [V] Description: Sets the activation threshold for the brake chopper. The hysteresis defines the range of the output voltage from zero up to the maximum voltage. Index: [0] = Braking chopper threshold value [1] = Braking chopper hysteresis Dependency: Select operation with braking resistor: p1300 = 15 Refer to: p1360, r1363, p1364 Refer to: A06921, F06922 r1363 CO: Braking chopper output voltage / Br_chop U_output VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the actual power unit output voltage (Motor Module) in braking chopper operation. Dependency: Select operation with braking resistor: p1300 = 15 Refer to: p1360, p1362, p1364 Refer to: A06921, F06922 p1364 Braking chopper resistor asymmetry / Br_chop R asym VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: U/f open-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 100.00 [%] Factory setting 25.00 [%] Description: Sets the percentage value for the asymmetry detection for the braking chopper. Dependency: Select operation with braking resistor: p1300 = 15 Refer to: p1360, p1362, r1363 Refer to: F06922 Note: Zero means no asymmetry detection. 1-350 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6490 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0010 0001 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 05 06 14 15 16 19 20 Note: Signal name Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active Sensorless vector control freeze I comp Acceleration pre-control source Reference model speed setpoint, I component Kp/Tn adaptation active Free Tn adaptation active Torque pre-control Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control I component for limiting Anti-windup for integral component Acceleration model 1 signal Yes Yes External (p1495) ON 0 signal No No Internal (n_set) OFF FP 6040 6040 6031 6031 Yes Yes Always active Yes Enable Yes ON No No For n_ctrl enab No Hold No OFF 6040 6050 6060 6030 6030 6030 6030 Re bit 01: When the bit is set, the I component of the speed controller is kept when changing into the open-loop controlled mode. Re bit 16: When the bit is set, the integral component of the speed controller is only held if it reaches the torque limit. Re bit 19: When this bit is set, speed overshoots when accelerating along the torque limit and for load surges are reduced. If the setpoint torque reaches the torque limit, then the integral component is set to the difference between the torque limit and P component. Re bit 20: The acceleration model for the speed setpoint is only active for encoderless vector control if p1496 is not zero. p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6491 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 1110 bin Description: Sets the configuration for flux setpoint control Bit field: Bit 00 Signal name Flux setpoint soft starting active 1 signal Yes 0 signal No 01 Flux setpoint differentiation active Yes No 02 Flux build-up control active Yes No 03 04 05 06 Flux characteristic, load-dependent Flux controller (ASM with encoder) Flux impression (ASM with encoder) Quick magnetizing Yes Yes with model chngov Yes No No From 30 % n_rated No (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A FP 6722, 6725 6723, 6726 6722, 6723, 6725, 6726 6725 6722 1-351 Parameters List of parameters 07 08 Note: Pre-control speed limitation Speed limiting controller Yes With M_limits No With I_limits 6640 6640 Re bit 00 (only for induction motors) Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346. Re bit 01 (only for induction motors) Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346. When quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is selected, soft starting is internally de-activated and alarm A07416 is displayed. The flux differentiation can be switched out if a significant ripple occurs in the field-generating current setpoint (r0075) when entering the field weakening range. However, this is not suitable for fast acceleration operations because then, the flux decays more slowly and the voltage limiting responds. Re bit 02 (only for induction motors) The flux build-up control operates during the magnetizing phase p0346 of the induction motor. If it is switched out, a constant current setpoint is injected and the flux is built up corresponding to the rotor time constant. When quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is selected and when flux build-up control is de-energized alarm A07416 is displayed. Re bit 03: The load-dependent calculation of the flux characteristic is only available for separately-excited synchronous motors. Re bit 04 (only for induction motors with encoder): The flux controller does not operate in the range of the current model and not in the range of the flux impression (refer to p1750.4). Re bit 05 (only for induction motors with encoder): Extremely rugged control operation is possible by directly toggling between the current model and flux impression. We therefore recommend that, in addition, the time-controlled model change is switched in (p1750.4 = 1) or the model changeover limits are significantly increased (p1752 > 0.35 * p0311; p1753 = 5 %). Re bit 06 (not for induction motors): Magnetizing is performed with maximum current (0.9 * r0067). With active identification of the stator resistance (see p0621) quick magnetizing is internally de-activated and alarm A07416 is displayed. During a flying restart of a rotating motor (see p1200) no quick magnetizing takes place. Re bit 07: if the speed of the drive exceeds the effective speed limit of the speed limiting controller, the torque limit is reduced linearly to zero as the deviation becomes greater. This reduces the integral component of the speed controller and, in turn, the overshoot during load shedding (see also F07901 and p2162). Re bit 08: The speed limiting controller sets the speed to maximum by opening the torque limits as far as the current limits (bit 8 = 0) or taking the torque limits into account (bit 8 = 1). p1402[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0001 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop control and the motor model. Bit field: Bit 00 02 08 Note: Re bit 00: Signal name Speed-following error correction active Current controller adaptation active Changeover current model/voltage model with speed setpoint 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - When the bit is set, the speed following error is compensated that is obtained as a result of the smoothing time constant in p1441. Re bit 02: The current controller adaptation (p0391 ... p0393) is only calculated when the bit is set. 1-352 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Re bit 08: Only with encoderless control of separately excited synchronous motors. r1406.4...15 VECTOR_G (n/M) CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word of the speed controller. Bit field: Bit 04 05 08 11 12 15 r1407.0...17 CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl VECTOR_G (n/M) Signal name Hold speed controller I component Set speed controller I component Travel to fixed stop Droop enable Torque control active Set speed adaptation controller I component 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2522 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word of the speed controller. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Signal name U/f control active Encoderless operation active Torque control active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No 03 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 Speed control active Speed controller I component frozen Speed controller I component set Torque limit reached Upper torque limit active Lower torque limit active Droop enabled Speed setpoint limited Ramp-function generator set Encoderless operation due to a fault I/f control active Torque limit reached (without pre-control) Speed limiting control active Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No r1408.0...15 VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: FP 6040 6040 8012 6030 6060 - FP 6030, 6060, 8010 6040 6040 6040 6060 6060 6060 6030 6030 6060 6640 CO/BO: Status word current controller / ZSW I_ctrl Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2530 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the current controller status word. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-353 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 03 10 11 12 Signal name Current ctrl act Id control, I component limiting Voltage limiting Speed adaptation, limiting Speed adaptation, speed deviation Motor stalled 1 signal Active Active Active Active Out tolerance Yes 0 signal Not active Not active Not active Not active In tolerance No 13 Separately excited synchronous motor is excited Current model FEM: magnetizing excitation current limited to 0 Excitation current differential exceeded Yes No FP 6714 6714 6719 6719, 8018 - Yes No - Yes No - 14 15 Note: Re bit 11: For operation with speed encoder, this bit is set as a result of steps/jumps in the speed signal (see p0492) or due to deviations at the adaptation controller output (see p1744). p1416[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1700, 6030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 5000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1). p1428[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing dead time / n_prectrBal t_dead VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 Max 3.0 Factory setting 0.0 Description: Sets the dead time to symmetrize the speed setpoint for active torque pre-control. The selected multiplier refers to the speed controller clock cycle (dead time= p1428 * p0115[1]). Dependency: In conjunction with p1429, this parameter can emulate the characteristics of how the torque is established (dynamic response of closed current control loop). The parameter is only effective if the acceleration model is supplied using external acceleration signals (p1400.2 = 1). For p1400.2 = 0, a fixed dead time is used. Refer to: p1429, p1511 p1429[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Speed pre-control balancing time constant / n_prectr bal T Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5030, 5042, 5210, 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the time constant (PT1) for symmetrizing the speed setpoint for active torque pre-control. Dependency: In conjunction with p1428, this parameter can emulate the characteristics of how torque is established (dynamic response of the closed current control loop). 1-354 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies: The parameter is only effective if the acceleration model is supplied using external acceleration signals (p1400.2 = 1). For p1400.2 = 0, time constant p1442 (or p1452 for sensorless vector control) is used. Refer to: p1428, p1511 r1431 CO: Speed pre-control to motor model / n_prectrl mot_mod VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the speed setpoint for pre-controlling the motor model with sensorless vector control. Note: With p1400 bit 15 = 0 or encoderless torque control, the pre-control signal is kept continuously in the range of the voltage model. p1433[0...n] Speed controller reference model natural frequency / n_ctrl RefMod fn VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5030, 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [Hz] Max 8000.0 [Hz] Factory setting 0.0 [Hz] Description: Sets the natural frequency of a PT2 element for the reference model of the speed controller. Recommend.: The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1439 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual speed value) are virtually identical when the I component of the speed controller is disabled. Dependency: Together with p1434 and p1435, the characteristics (in the time domain) of the closed-loop speed control (P) can be emulated. For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies: The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1. For sensorless vector control (p1300 = 20) the reference model is disabled in open-loop speed controlled operation (refer to p1755). Refer to: p1434, p1435 p1434[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Speed controller reference model damping / n_ctrl RefMod D Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5030, 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 5.000 Factory setting 1.000 Description: Sets the damping of a PT2 element for the reference model of the speed controller. Recommend.: The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1439 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual speed value) are virtually identical when the I component of the speed controller is disabled. Dependency: In conjunction with p1433 and p1435, the characteristics (in time) of the P-controlled speed control loop can be emulated. For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies: The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1. Refer to: p1433, p1435 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-355 Parameters List of parameters p1435[0...n] Speed controller reference model dead time / n_ctrRefMod t_dead VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5030, 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 3.00 Factory setting 0.00 Description: Sets the "fractional" dead time for the reference model of the speed controller. This parameter emulates the computing dead time of the proportionally controlled speed control loop. The selected multiplier refers to the speed controller clock cycle (dead time= p1435 * p0115[1]). Recommend.: The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1439 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual speed value) are virtually identical when the I component of the speed controller is disabled. Dependency: In conjunction with p1433 and p1434, the characteristics (in time) of the P-controlled speed control loop can be emulated. For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies: The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1. Refer to: p0115, p1433, p1434 r1436 CO: Speed controller reference model speed setpoint output / RefMod n_set outp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5030, 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the speed setpoint at the output of the reference model. Dependency: For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies: The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1. p1437[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) CI: Speed controller, reference model I component input / n_ctrRefMod I_comp Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1436[0] Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint for the integral component of the speed controller. Dependency: The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1. Refer to: p1400 Caution: In should be ensured that a speed setpoint is selected as signal source that corresponds to the setpoint for the P component of the speed controller. r1438 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: 1-356 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1550, 1590, 1700, 5030, 5040, 5042, 5210, 5300, 5620, 6031, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the speed setpoint after setpoint limiting for the P component of the speed controller. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters For U/f operation, the value that is displayed is of no relevance. Dependency: Refer to: r1439 Note: In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439. r1439 Speed setpoint, I component / n_set I_comp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5030, 5040, 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the speed setpoint for the I component of the speed controller (output of the reference model after the setpoint limiting). Dependency: Refer to: r1438 Note: In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439. p1440[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed actual value / n_ctrl n_act VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 63[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the speed actual value of the speed controller. Dependency: Refer to: r1443 Danger: When using external speed actual values for the speed controller, for a direction of rotation change via p1821 = 1, then its polarity must also be changed, e.g. for an encoder DO via p0410. Otherwise, a positive coupling can occur in the speed control loop and the drive would then be accelerated up to the speed limit. Caution: Speed control with encoder (p1300 = 21): For the speed or position signal of the motor model there must always be a motor encoder available (evaluation via SMC/SMI, see p0400). The actual speed of the motor (r0061) and the position data for synchronous motors continue to come from this motor encoder and are not affected by the setting of p1440. Interconnection of p1440: If connector input p1440 is interconnected with an external speed actual value, the identical scaling of the speed should be observed (p2000). Notice: Speed control without encoder (p1300 = 20): Dependent upon the transmission path of the external speed signal there will be dead times which have to be taken into account when setting the speed controller parameters (p1470, p1472) and can lead to dynamic losses accordingly. It is for this reason that signal transmission times have to be kept as low as possible. So that the speed controller can also work at standstill, set p1750.2 = 1 (closed-loop operation from zero speed for passive loads). If you do not make this setting, operation will switch to open-loop speed control in the low speed range, switching the closed-loop speed controller off and rendering the measured actual speed ineffective. Note: Speed control with encoder (p1300 = 21): An external speed signal should, on the average, correspond to the speed of the motor encoder (r0061). p1441[0...n] Actual speed smoothing time / n_act T_smooth VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 4710, 4715 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 1000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the speed actual value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-357 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r0063 Notice: Smoothing times above 20 ms are only possible if the drive is accelerated or braked with the appropriately long ramp-up/ramp-down times. Otherwise, significant torque errors can occur and there is the danger that the drive is powered down (tripped) with F07902 (motor stalled). Note: The speed actual value should be smoothed for encoders with a low pulse number or for resolvers. After this parameter has been changed, we recommend that the speed controller is adapted and/or the speed controller settings checked Kp (p1460) and Tn (p1462). p1442[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time / n_ctr n_act T_smth Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1700, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 32000.00 [ms] Factory setting 4.00 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed value of the speed controller for closed-loop control with encoder. Note: The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4). r1443 CO: Speed controller speed actual value at actual value input / n_ctrl n_act inp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the speed actual value at the speed controller's free-wiring actual value input p1440. Dependency: Refer to: p1440 Note: This speed signal is only used by the speed controller and not by the motor model. r1444 Speed controller, speed setpoint steady-state (static) / n_ctrl n_set stat VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the sum of all speed setpoints that are present. The following sources are available for the displayed setpoint: - setpoint at the ramp-function generator input (r1119). - speed setpoint 1 (p1155). - speed setpoint 2 (p1160). - speed setpoint for the speed pre-control (p1430). - setpoint from DSC (for DSC active). - setpoint via PC (for master control active). Dependency: 1-358 Refer to: r1119, p1155, p1160 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1445 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the actual smoothed actual speed for speed control. p1451[0...n] Motor model speed actual value smoothing time SLVC / Mot_mod n_act t_sm VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 100 [ms] Factory setting 4 [ms] Sets the smoothing time for the speed actual value calculated by the motor model in sensorless operation. p1452[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_C n_act T_s SLVC VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1700, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 32000.00 [ms] Factory setting 10.00 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed of the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control. Note: The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4). r1454 CO: Speed controller system deviation I component / n_ctrl sys dev Tn VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the system deviation of the I component of the speed controller. When the reference model is inactive (p1433 = 0 Hz), this parameter corresponds to the system deviation of the complete PI controller (r1454 = r0064). p1455[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctr adapt_sig Kp Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the source for the adaptation signal to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1456, p1457, p1458, p1459 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-359 Parameters List of parameters p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 400.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the lower starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed controller. The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal. Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1457, p1458, p1459 Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458. p1457[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 400.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Sets the upper starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed controller. The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal. Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1458, p1459 Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458. p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the adaptation factor before the adaptation range (0 % ... p1456) to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1459 Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458. p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the adaptation factor after the adaptation range (> p1457) to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1458 Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458. 1-360 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1460[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Kp n lower Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1700, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 999999.000 Factory setting 0.300 Sets the P gain of the speed controller before the adaptation speed range (0 ... p1464). This value corresponds to the basic setting of the P gain of the speed controller without adaptation (p1461 = 100 %). Dependency: For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions. Refer to: p1461, p1464, p1465 p1461[0...n] Speed controller Kp adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctr Kp n up scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the P gain of the speed controller for the upper adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred to the P gain for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1460). Dependency: Refer to: p1460, p1464, p1465 Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1464, then the controller gain below p1465 is adapted with p1461. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters. p1462[0...n] Speed controller integral time adaptation speed lower / n_ctrl Tn n lower VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1700, 5040, 5042, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 100000.00 [ms] Factory setting 20.00 [ms] Description: Sets the integration time of the speed controller before the adaptation speed range (0 ... p1464). This value corresponds to the basic setting of the integral time of the speed controller without adaptation (p1461 = 100 %). Dependency: Refer to: p1463, p1464, p1465 Note: The integral component is stopped if the complete controller output or the sum of controller output and torque precontrol reach the torque limit. p1463[0...n] Speed controller Tn adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctr Tn n up scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the integral time of the speed controller after the adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred to the integral time for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1462). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-361 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p1462, p1464, p1465 Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point p1464, then the controller integral time below p1465 is adapted with p1463. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters. p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the lower adaptation speed of the speed controller. No adaptation is effective below this speed. Dependency: Refer to: p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1465 Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters. p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 210000.00 [rpm] Sets the upper adaptation speed of the speed controller. No adaptation is effective above this speed. For P gain, p1460 x p1461 is effective. For the integral time, p1462 x p1463 is effective. Dependency: Refer to: p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1464 Note: If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters. p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the scaling of the P gain of the speed controller. This also makes the effective P gain (including adaptations) scalable. r1468 CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctr Kp eff VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the effective P gain of the speed controller. Dependency: For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions. In this case, connector output signal r1468 is increased by a factor of 100 in order to improve the resolution. 1-362 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1469 Speed controller integral time effective / n_ctr Tn eff VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5040, 5042, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Displays the effective integral time of the speed controller. p1470[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6040, 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 999999.000 Factory setting 0.300 Description: Sets the P gain for encoderless operation for the speed controller. Dependency: For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions. Note: The product p0341 x p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 1, 3, 4). p1472[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6040, 6050 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 100000.0 [ms] Factory setting 20.0 [ms] Description: Set the integral time for encoderless operation for the speed controller. Note: The integral component is stopped if the complete controller output or the sum of controller output and torque precontrol reach the torque limit. p1475[0...n] CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the torque setting value when starting up with motor holding brake. Recommend.: To hold the actual torque when stopping the motor, you are advised to set p1400 bit 1 = 1. As a result, the integral component of the speed controller is frozen when changing to the open-loop controlled operating range. Dependency: The switching in of the torque setting value for the motor holding brake has a higher priority than the setting of the integrator value using p1477 and p1478. Note: The setting of the integral output of the speed controller begins after magnetizing (see p0346, r0056 bit 4) and ends at the end of the brake control opening time p1216. A setting value of zero means that no setting procedure will take place. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-363 Parameters List of parameters p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2520, 5040, 5042, 5210, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the speed controller. p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2520, 5040, 5042, 5210, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to set the integrator setting value (p1478). Dependency: Refer to: p1478, p1479 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: For the interface mode "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" (p2038 = 1), p1477 and p1478 are used for the signal STW2.6 (integrator inhibit, speed controller). p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the integrator setting value for the velocity controller. The signal to set this integrator setting value is interconnected via p1477. Dependency: The setting value of the speed controller integrator is weighted with the scaling factor of the signal source in p1479. If p1478 is interconnected to the integral output of the speed controller (r1482), then after the magnetizing time (r0346) and if the speed controller is enabled, the integral component of the controller is set to the last value before the pulse inhibit. This value is set if no setting command (p1477) is interconnected or, at the instant that the pulses were inhibited, a setting command is available, which is not de-activated up to the next time that the pulses are inhibited. For sensorless vector control, in addition p1400.1 should be set to 1 so that when the drive is stopped, the integral component of the speed controller is not controlled down to zero. In order that when setting the integrator output, only the static torque is detected, we recommend that the accelerating torque is completely pre-controlled (e.g. p1496). If p1478 is interconnected to another output other than r1482, then after magnetizing and speed controller enable, the integral output is set once if the setting command is not interconnected (p1477 = 0). Refer to: p1477, p1479 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. 1-364 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the integrator setting value (p1478) of the speed controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1477, p1478 r1480 CO: Speed controller PI torque output / n_ctrl PI-M_output VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1590, 5040, 5042, 5060, 5210, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the PI speed controller. r1481 CO: Speed controller P torque output / n_ctrl P-M_output VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5040, 5042, 5210, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the P speed controller. r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I-M_output VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5040, 5042, 5210, 6030, 6040 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the I speed controller. p1486[0...n] CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the compensation torque to be output within the droop calculation. p1486 should be connected with the torque setpoint (corresponding to the selection p1488) of the drive, with which load equalization should take place. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-365 Parameters List of parameters p1487[0...n] Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -2000.0 [%] Max 2000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the compensation torque within the droop calculation. p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input source VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Sets the source for droop feedback. With increasing torque, the speed setpoint is reduced (enabled using p1492), so that for mechanically coupled drives a load equalization (load compensation) is obtained. A load difference compensation is also possible, if p1486 is connected with the torque setpoint of the other drive. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Droop feedback not connected Droop from torque setpoint Droop from speed controller output Droop from integral output, speed controller Dependency: Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1489, r1490, p1492 Caution: For active acceleration precontrol of the speed controller (refer to p1496), it is not recommended that p1488 is set to 1, as this could result in positive coupling effects. Instead of this, as source of the droop feedback, the output signal of the speed controller should be used, which generally sets the load torque. p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 0.500 Factory setting 0.050 Description: Sets the scaling for the droop feedback Dependency: Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, r1490, p1492 Note: Example: A value of 0.05 means that for a torque equal to the rated motor torque, the rated motor speed is reduced by 5 %. r1490 CO: Droop feedback speed reduction / Droop n_reduction VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the output signal of the droop calculation. The droop feedback result is subtracted from the speed setpoint when activated (p1492). Dependency: Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, p1489, p1492 1-366 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2520, 6030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Enables the droop to be applied to the speed/velocity setpoint. Dependency: Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, p1489, r1490 Note: Even when not enabled, the droop speed is calculated but not subtracted from the setpoint speed. This makes it possible to subtract the result of this calculation from the speed of another drive. r1493 CO: Moment of inertia, total / M_inertia total VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kgm] Max - [kgm] Factory setting - [kgm] Displays the parameterized total moment of inertia ((p0341 * p0342) + p1496) without evaluation by the scaling via p1497. p1495[0...n] CI: Acceleration pre-control / a_prectrl VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2007 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the acceleration pre-control. Dependency: The signal source for the acceleration is activated with p1400.2 = 1. For p1400.2 = 0, the acceleration pre-control is calculated from the speed setpoint change from r0062. For p1400.2 = 0 and activate reference model (p1400.3 = 1) the acceleration pre-control is switched out. Refer to: p1400, p1496 Note: If the acceleration is entered as external signal, then the accelerating torque is calculated as follows (r1518): r1518 = acceleration (% of p2007) / 100 % * (p2007 * 60 s) / p0311 * r0345 / 1 s * r0333 p1496[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_prectrl scal Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1700, 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 10000.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration pre-control of the speed/velocity controller. Dependency: When the reference model is activated (p1400.3 = 1) and for an internal acceleration pre-control (p1400.2 = 0), the acceleration pre-control is switched out (disabled). The reference model (p1400.3 = 1) and external acceleration pre-control (p1400.2 = 1) can be operated together. Refer to: p0341, p0342 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-367 Parameters List of parameters Warning: The acceleration precontrol r1518 is kept at the old value if the ramp-function generator tracking (r1199.5) is active or the ramp-function generator output is set (r1199.3). This is used to avoid torque peaks. Depending on the application, it may therefore be necessary to disable the ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0) or the acceleration precontrol (p1496 = 0). The acceleration precontrol is set to zero, if the Vdc control is active (r0056.14/15). Note: The parameter is set to 100% by the rotating measurement (refer to p1960). The acceleration pre-control may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint) and the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled. We also recommend that the pre-control mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash. p1497[0...n] CI: Moment of inertia, scaling / M_mom inert scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 5042, 5210, 6030, 6031 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the moment of inertia. p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6030 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 400.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration integrator at low speeds (only for encoderless torque control). Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342 p1500[0...n] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 999999 Factory setting 0 Runs the corresponding macro files. The Connector Inputs (CI) for the torque setpoints of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately interconnected. The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory. Example: p1500 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run. Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000, r8573 Caution: When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. Notice: No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN group! Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8573. r8573 is not in the expert list of the commissioning software. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. CI: Connector Input 1-368 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1700, 2520, 5060, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for toggling between speed and torque control. Dependency: The input connectors to enter the torque are provided using p1511, p1512 and p1513. Refer to: p1300 Caution: If the closed-loop torque control is not activated (p1300) and a change is made to closed-loop torque control (p1501), OFF1 (p0840) does not have its own braking response but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227). Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: 0 signal: Closed-loop speed control 1 signal: Closed-loop torque control p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1700, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the torque setpoint for torque control. Note: A change is made to closed-loop torque control if, in p1300, closed-loop torque control was selected or if the selection was made using the changeover source in p1501. it is also possible to change over in operation using p1501. r1508 CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6030, 6060, 6722 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Displays the torque setpoint before entering the supplementary torque. For closed-loop speed control, r1508 corresponds to the speed controller output; for closed-loop torque control, r1508 corresponds to the torque setpoint of the signal source assigned in p1503. p1511[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 5060, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 1. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-369 Parameters List of parameters p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 5060, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary torque 1. p1513[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2 VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 5060, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 2. p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1700, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -2000.0 [%] Max 2000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for supplementary torque 2. r1515 Supplementary torque total / M_suppl total VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5040, 5060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Displays the total supplementary torque. The displayed value is the total of supplementary torque values 1 and 2 (p1511, p1512, p1513, p1514). r1516 CO: Supplementary torque and acceleration torque / M_suppl + M_accel VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Displays the total supplementary torque and the accelerating torque. The displayed value is the total of the smoothed supplementary torque and the accelerating torque (p1516 = p1518[1] + r1515). 1-370 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5042, 5210, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 100.00 [ms] Factory setting 4.00 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the accelerating torque. Note: For servo drives, the following applies: - For p1402.4 = 1, the highest dynamic performance is achieved with p1517 = 0 ms. - In encoderless operation, p1517 should be set >= 0.5 ms; for an induction motor with current displacement rotor p1517 >= 20 ms is recommended. For vector drives, the following applies: - The acceleration pre-control is inhibited if the smoothing is set to the maximum value. r1518[0...1] VECTOR_G (n/M) CO: Accelerating torque / M_accel Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the accelerating torque for pre-control of the speed controller. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1496 p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1700, 6630 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: Sets the fixed, upper torque limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1521, p1522, p1523, r1538, r1539 Danger: Negative values when setting the upper torque limit (p1520 < 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrollable fashion. Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Note: The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-371 Parameters List of parameters p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5620, 5630 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min -20000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: Sets the fixed, lower torque limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1522, p1523 Danger: Positive values when setting the lower torque limit (p1521 > 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrollable fashion. Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Note: The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640). p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6630 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1520[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the upper torque limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1523 Danger: Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner. p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1700, 6630 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1521[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the lower torque limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522 Danger: Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner. p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: 1-372 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6630 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -2000.0 [%] Max 2000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Sets the scaling for the upper torque limit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected. The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528. p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6630 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -2000.0 [%] Max 2000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the lower torque limit. Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected. The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528. r1526 CO: Torque limit upper without offset / M_max up w/o offs VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6060, 6630, 6640 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the upper torque limit of all torque limits without offset. Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529 r1527 CO: Torque limit lower without offset / M_max low w/o offs VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6060, 6630, 6640 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the lower torque limit of all torque limits without offset. Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529 p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6630 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1524[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limit in p1522. Danger: For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies: Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-373 Parameters List of parameters p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6630 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1525[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limit in p1523. Danger: For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies: Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p1530[0...n] Power limit motoring / P_max mot VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6640 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [kW] Max 100000.00 [kW] Factory setting 0.00 [kW] Description: Sets the power limit when motoring. Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p1531 Note: The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power. p1531[0...n] Power limit regenerative / P_max gen VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6640 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -100000.00 [kW] Max -0.01 [kW] Factory setting -0.01 [kW] Description: Sets the regenerative power limit. Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p1530 Note: The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power. For power units without regenerative feedback into the line supply, the regenerative power limit is pre-set to 30% of the motoring power limit p1530 and in the ratio rated drive converter power to rated motor power. If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link, then the power limit can be correspondingly increased. r1533 Current limit torque-generating total / Iq_max total VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5640, 5722, 6640 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Description: 1-374 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Displays the maximum torque/force generating current as a result if all current limits. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1536[0...1] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Current limit maximum torque-generating current / Isq_max Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6640, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Displays the maximum limit for the torque-generating current component. Index 0 indicates the signal limited by the Vdc controller. Index: [0] = Limited [1] = Unlimited r1537[0...1] Current limit minimum torque-generating current / Isq_min VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6640, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Displays the minimum limit for the torque-generating current component. Index 0 indicates the signal limited by the Vdc controller. Index: [0] = Limited [1] = Unlimited r1538 CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1610, 1700, 5610, 5650, 6060, 6640 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the currently effective upper torque limit. Note: The effective upper torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected upper torque limit p1520, if the current limit p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased. The following applies in the case of VECTOR: This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960). The following applies in the case of VECTOR: Further variable torque limiting is possible (e.g. binector input p1540). The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5. r1539 CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1610, 1700, 5610, 5650, 6060, 6640 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the currently effective lower torque limit. Note: The effective lower torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected lower torque limit p1521, if the current limit p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased. The following applies in the case of VECTOR: This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-375 Parameters List of parameters The following applies in the case of VECTOR: Further variable torque limiting is possible (e.g. binector input p1541). The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5. p1540[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: CI: Torque limit speed controller upper scaling / M_max n-ctr upScal Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1700, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output. p1541[0...n] CI: Torque limit. speed controller lower scaling / M_max nctr lowScal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 1700, 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output. p1545[0...n] BI: Activates travel to a fixed stop / TfS activation VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2520, 3617, 8012 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to activate/de-activate the "travel to fixed stop" function 1: Travel to fixed stop is active 0: Travel to fixed stop is inactive Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: EPOS uses the parameter (refer to p2686). When traveling to fixed stop, the fault F07900 "motor blocked" is suppressed. r1547[0...1] VECTOR_G (n/M) CO: Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the torque limit to limit the speed controller output. Index: [0] = Upper limit [1] = Lower limit 1-376 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1548[0...1] VECTOR_G (n/M) CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum / Isq_max stall Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the limit for the torque-generating current component using the stall calculation, the current limit of the Motor Module as well as the parameterization in p0640. Index: [0] = Upper limit [1] = Lower limit p1551[0...n] BI: Torque limit variable/fixed signal source / M_lim var/fixS_src VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 5620, 5630, 6060, 6630 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source to change over the torque limits between variable and fixed torque limit. 1 signal from BI: p1551: The variable torque limit applies (fixed torque limit + scaling). 0 signal from BI: p1551: The fixed torque limit applies. Example: In order that for a Quick Stop (OFF3) the fixed torque limit is effective, BI: p1551 must be interconnected to r0899.5. p1552[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking into account the current and power limits. p1554[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6060 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking into account the current and power limits. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-377 Parameters List of parameters p1555[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) CI: Power limit / P_max Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6640 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: r2004 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for the motoring and negative regenerative power limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1530, p1531 Note: The resulting motoring power limit is the minimum from p1530 and the signal which is read in. The resulting regenerative power limit is the maximum from p1531 and the negative signal which is read in. p1556[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Power limit scaling / P_max scal Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6640 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 340.28235E36 Factory setting 0.00 Sets the scaling of the signal source for the motoring and negative regenerative power limit. 0 signifies no power limiting. p1569[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 3 / M_suppl 3 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 3841[0] Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 3. Dependency: Refer to: p3842 Notice: The signal input is after the torque limit (r1538, r1539). For vector drives, the signals that are entered are only limited by the current and power limits. Note: The signal input is preferably used to enter the friction characteristic. The friction compensation is also effective if the speed controller output reaches its torque limits, but the current limits have still not been reached (this only applies to vector drives). p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6722 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min 50.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the flux setpoint referred to rated motor flux. Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Note: For p1570 > 100%, the flux setpoint increases as a function of the load from 100% (no-load operation) to the setting in p1570 (above rated motor torque), if p1580 > 0% has been set. 1-378 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1571[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) CI: Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6725 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary flux setpoint. Notice: Low flux setpoints can cause the drive to stall at higher loads. This is the reason that the flux setpoint should only be adapted for slow load changes. Note: The supplementary flux setpoint is limited to +/- 50 %. p1572[0...n] Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6726 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Description: Sets the supplementary flux setpoint for the flux controller. The value is referred to the rated motor flux. Notice: The parameter should be set back to 0% again for normal closed-loop control operation. Note: The parameter is used to optimize the flux controller. The current model is not influenced by the setting. p1573[0...n] Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6722 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the flux threshold value for enabling the speed setpoint and the end of magnetizing (r0056.4). Note: The parameter only has an influence if the flux actual value reaches the threshold value p1573 more quickly during magnetizing than the time set in p0346. The parameter has no influence for flying restart (see p1200) and after DC braking (see p1231). p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6723, 6724 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [Vrms] Max 150.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 10.0 [Vrms] Description: Sets a dynamic voltage reserve. Note: In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due to the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve. Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-379 Parameters List of parameters p1576[0...n] Flux boost, adaptation speed, lower / Flux boost n lower VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6725 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the lower adaptation speed of the flux boost. Below this speed, p1570 is set as reference (setpoint) flux. p1577[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Flux boost adaptation speed, upper / Flux boost n upper Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6725 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.0 [%] Max 10000.0 [%] Factory setting 200.0 [%] Description: Sets the upper adaptation speed of the flux boost. Dependency: The parameter value refers to the lower adaptation speed of the flux boost. Above this speed, the rated motor flux (100 %) is set as reference (setpoint) flux. Refer to: p1576 p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt. VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6722 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [%] Max 100 [%] Factory setting 0 [%] Description: Sets the efficiency optimization. When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is adapted as a function of the load. For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux. Note: It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low. In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce Kp). Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased. p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6722, 6724, 6725 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 4 [ms] Max 5000 [ms] Factory setting 15 [ms] Description: 1-380 Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1583 Flux setpoint smoothed / Flux setp smooth VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6722, 6723, 6724 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the smoothed flux setpoint. The value is referred to the rated motor flux. p1584[0...n] Field weakening operation, flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6722 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 20000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint in the field-weakening range Recommend.: Smoothing should be especially used if there is no regenerative feedback into the line supply. This means that the DC link voltage can quickly increase in regenerative operation Note: Only the flux setpoint rise is smoothed p1585[0...n] Flux actual value, smoothing time / Flux actVal T_smth VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6726 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux actual value. p1586[0...n] Field weakening characteristic, scaling / Field weak scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 80.0 [%] Max 120.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling of the pre-control characteristic for the start of field weakening. Note: If the start of field weakening is shifted to lower speeds, then the voltage reserve is increased for partial load situations. For values above 100 % and for partial load situations, the field weakening starts at higher speeds. If the start of field weakening is shifted to higher speeds, the voltage reserve is appropriately reduced so that for fast load changes, it can be expected that this will have a negative impact on the dynamic performance. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-381 Parameters List of parameters r1589 Field-weakening current, pre-control value / I_FieldWeak prectr VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6724 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the pre-control value for the field weakening current. p1590[0...n] Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6723 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 Max 999999.0 Factory setting 10.0 Description: Sets the proportional gain for the flux controller. Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned. When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated. p1592[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Flux controller integral time / Flux controller Tn Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6723 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 30 [ms] Description: Sets the integral time for the flux controller. Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned. When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated. r1593[0...1] VECTOR_G (n/M) CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output / Field/Fl_ctrl outp Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6723, 6724, 6726 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the output of the field weakening controller (synchronous motor) or the output of the flux controller (separately-excited synchronous motor, induction motor). Index: [0] = PI output [1] = I output p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: 1-382 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6724 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 1000.00 Factory setting 0.00 Sets the P gain of the field-weakening controller. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1596[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6723, 6724 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 50 [ms] Description: Sets the integral-action time of the field-weakening controller. r1597 CO: Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl outp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6723 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the output of the field weakening controller. The value is referred to the rated motor flux. r1598 CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setp total VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714, 6723, 6724, 6725, 6726, 8018 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the effective flux setpoint. The value is referred to the rated motor flux. p1599[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Flux controller, excitation current difference / Flux ctr I_exc_dif Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 3.0 [%] Sets the permissible difference between the actual excitation current and the excitation current setpoint. The excitation current flux controller is active within this difference. If the difference lies outside the specified limit value, then the I component of the excitation current flux controller is kept. Instead of this, for the flux controller of the field-generating current, an additional I controller is switched in (integral time according to p1592). If the difference again lies within the bandwidth, the I component of the excitation current flux controller is re-activated and the I component of the flux controller of the field-generating current is reduced as an exponential function with respect to time. The reduction of the I component over time depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-383 Parameters List of parameters p1600[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) P flux controller, P gain / P flux ctrl Kp Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 Max 999999.0 Factory setting 10.0 Description: Sets the proportional gain of the P flux controller for separately-excited synchronous motors (FEM). Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned. When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated. r1602 CO: P flux controller output / P flux ctrl outp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6726, 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the output of the P flux controller for separately-excited synchronous motors (FEM). p1604[0...n] Pulse technique current limit / Pulse current lim VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Note: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Sets the effective current limit within the pulse technique. The saturation characteristic of the motor defines the available operating range for the pulse technique. This operating range can be adjusted using the current limit. When commissioning a catalog motor, the technique is automatically selected depending on the motor type being used. Otherwise, the rated motor current is used as pre-assigned value. p1605[0...n] Pulse technique pattern configuration / Puls pattrn config VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the applied pulse patterns for estimating the continuous rotor position. Remark: See p1750 for the activation of the pulse-pattern technique. Value: 1: 2: Dependency: Refer to: p1750 Note: When commissioning a catalog motor, the technique is automatically selected depending on the motor type being used. 1-384 pm ppmm (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1606 CO: Pulse technique pattern actual / Puls pattern act VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting - Description: Displays the currently applied pulse patterns for estimating the continuous rotor position. Value: 0: 1: 2: Dependency: Refer to: p1605, p1750 p1607[0...n] Pulse technique stimulus / Puls stimulus VECTOR_G (n/M) None pm ppmm Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [mVs] Max 20000.000 [mVs] Factory setting 32.000 [mVs] Description: Sets the excitation amplitude (voltage-time pulse) for the pulse technique for estimating the continuous rotor position. Dependency: Refer to: p1605, p1750 r1608[0...6] CO: Pulse technique response / Puls response VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the signal responses to the excitation of the pulse technique. Index: [0] = Phase R [1] = Phase S [2] = D estimated [3] = Q estimated [4] = D estimated AC [5] = Q estimated AC [6] = Pointer length AC Dependency: Refer to: p1605, p1607, p1750 p1609[0...n] I/f operation current setpoint / I/f op I_setp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Sets the stator current setpoint for operation of a separately-excited synchronous motor (FEM) in operating mode I/f (p1300 = 18). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-385 Parameters List of parameters p1610[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1710, 6721, 6722, 6726 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -200.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Sets the static torque setpoint for sensorless vector control (SLVC). This parameter is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333). For sensorless vector control, when the motor model is shut down, an absolute current is impressed. p1610 represents the maximum load that occurs at a constant setpoint speed. Notice: p1610 should always be set to at least 10 % higher than the maximum steady-state load that can occur. Note: For p1610 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case (ASM: rated magnetizing current). For p1610 = 100 %, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque. Negative values are converted into positive setpoints in the case of induction and permanent-magnet synchronous motors. p1611[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1710, 6721, 6722, 6726 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 30.0 [%] Description: Enters the dynamic torque setpoint for the low-speed range for sensorless vector control (SLVC). This parameter is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333). Note: When accelerating and braking p1611 is added to p1610 and the resulting total torque is converted into an appropriate current setpoint and controlled. For pure accelerating torques, it is always favorable to use the torque pre-control of the speed controller (p1496). p1612[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Current setpoint magnetizing open-loop controlled / Id_set ctrl Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Sets the magnetizing current setpoint in the open-loop controlled encoderless operation. The value is only valid during the current model orientation. Dependency: Refer to: p1610, p1611 Note: The value is effective at speeds less than p1755 and represents a reserve for a possibly existing load torque or torque error in the moment of inertia. 1-386 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1614 EMF maximum / EMF max VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6725 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the actual maximum possible electromotive force (EMF) of the separately-excited synchronous motor. Dependency: The value is the basis for the flux setpoint. The maximum possible EMF depends on the following factors: - Actual DC link voltage (r0070). - Maximum modulation depth (p1803). - Field-generating and torque-generating current setpoint. p1616[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6721, 6722, 6726 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 4 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 40 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time for the current/torque setpoint in the open-loop-controlled operating range in the case of sensorless vector control. Note: This parameter is only effective in the range where current is injected for sensorless vector control. For induction motors, the current setpoint is calculated from p1610 and p1611 and for separately excited synchronous motors the torque setpoint is calculated from p1610 and p1611. r1617 CO: Torque setpoint (controlled) / M_setp sv SLVC VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Torque setpoint for sensorless control of the separately excited synchronous motor in the open-loop-controlled operating range (under p1755 * p1756). r1618 Current model controller, pre-control / I_mod_ctrl prectrl VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Displays the pre-control value of the current model controller. It involves a magnetizing current in the d-direction. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-387 Parameters List of parameters p1619[0...n] Setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / SetAct track thrsh VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Description: Threshold for setpoint/actual value tracking of the stator current in the q axis of the current model. p1620[0...n] Stator current, minimum / I_stator min VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -10000.00 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Sets the minimum stator current for separately-excited synchronous motors (FEM). A negative value means that the field-generating stator current (d-axis) has a negative sign. The valid value is internally limited to 50% of the rated motor current (p0305). p1621[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Changeover speed, inner cos phi = 1 / n_chngov cos phi=1 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Sets the speed where a change is made from the inner to the outer cos phi = 1. If the value that is entered exceeds the rated speed, then a change is made to the inner cos phi = 1 over the complete speed range. p1622[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Field-generating current setpoint smoothing time constant / Id_setp T_smth Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [ms] Max 200.0 [ms] Factory setting 20.0 [ms] Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the field-generating current components. The current filtered in this way is included in the calculation of the cos phi. r1623[0...1] Field-generating current setpoint (steady-state) / Id_set stationary VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6723, 6726, 6727 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: 1-388 Displays the steady-state field generating current setpoint (Id_set). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Re index 1: Displays the stationary field-generating current on the stator side in the case of separately excited synchronous motors without the excitation current monitoring component (r1644). r1624 Field-generating current setpoint, total / Id_setp total VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6640, 6721, 6723, 6727 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Displays the limited field-generating current setpoint (Id_set). This value comprises the steady-state field-generating current setpoint r1623 and a dynamic component that is only set when changes are made to the flux setpoint. p1625[0...n] Excitation current setpoint calibration / I_exc_setp cal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Gain factor to weight the excitation current setpoint. r1626 CO: Excitation current setpoint / I_exc_setp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the calculated excitation current setpoint. Dependency: Refer to: p0390 r1627 CO: Current model load angle / I_mod load angle VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1 Min - [] Max - [] Factory setting - [] Description: Displays the load angle of the current model. p1628[0...n] Current model controller, dynamic factor / I_mod_ctr dyn_fact VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 [%] Max 400 [%] Factory setting 50 [%] Sets the dynamic response factor for the current model controller. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-389 Parameters List of parameters p1629[0...n] Current model controller P gain / I_mod_ctrl Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 100000.000 Factory setting 0.000 Description: Sets the proportional gain for the current model controller. This value is automatically pre-set using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed. p1630[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Current model controller integral time / I_mod_ctrl Tn Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Sets the integral time for the current model controller. This value is automatically pre-set using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed. r1631 Current model controller, P gain effective / I_mod ctrl Kp eff VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the effective P gain of the current model controller. r1632 Current model controller integral time effective / I_mod_ctrl Tn eff VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the effective integral time of the current model controller. r1633 Current model, flux setpoint / I_mod flux setp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the effective flux setpoint of the current model. The value is referred to the rated motor flux. 1-390 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1634 Current model, flux actual value / I_mod flux act val VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the effective flux actual value of the current model. The value is referred to the rated motor flux. r1635 Current model controller, I component / I_mod_ctrl I comp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the I component of the current model controller. r1636 Current model controller output / I_mod_ctrl outp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the output of the current model controller. r1637 Current model, magnetizing current, d axis / I_mod I_mag d-ax VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the magnetizing current of the current model in the d-axis. r1638 Current model, magnetizing current, q axis / I_mod I_mag q-ax VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Displays the magnetizing current of the current model in the q-axis. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-391 Parameters List of parameters r1639 CO: Current model Isq after actual value tracking / I_mod Isq track VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the stator current in the q axis after current actual value tracking. p1640[0...n] CI: Excitation current actual value signal source / I_exc_ActVal S_src VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the excitation current actual value r1641 Excitation current actual value / I_exc_act val VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727, 8018 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the excitation current actual value that is read in. Dependency: Refer to: p0390 p1642[0...n] Minimum excitation current / Min I_exc VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [%] Max 50.0 [%] Factory setting 5.0 [%] Sets the minimum excitation current. This means that negative excitation currents can be avoided. p1643[0...n] Gain factor, minimum excitation current closed-loop control / Min I_exc Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 5.00 Factory setting 0.40 Description: Sets the gain factor for the minimum excitation current, closed-loop control. This is active if the excitation current is below 75 % of p1642. Dependency: 1-392 Refer to: p1642 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1644 CO: Excitation current monitoring output / I_exc_monit outp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6727 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the output of the excitation current monitoring for separately excited synchronous motors. p1645[0...6] BI: Excitation feedback signals signal source / Exc FS S_src VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6495 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for the individual feedback signals from the excitation. Index: [0] = Excitation ready to be powered up [1] = Excitation ready [2] = Excitation operational [3] = Excitation group signal fault [4] = Excitation group signal alarm [5] = Not used [6] = Not used Dependency: Refer to: r1649 p1646 Excitation monitoring time / Excit t_monit VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6495 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 2.0 [s] Max 1300.0 [s] Factory setting 20.0 [s] Sets the monitoring time of the excitation. After an ON command, the feedback signal must be received within this monitoring time. Note: After the on command for the excitation (r1648.0 = 1), its feedback signal must be available at r1649.1 within this monitoring time (BI: p1645[1]). The same monitoring time is effective after the excitation is enabled for operation (r1648.3 = 1) up to the feedback signal "excitation operational" (r1649.2 = 1, BI: p1645[2]). p1647 Excitation switch-off delay time / Exc t_off VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6495 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 5.0 [s] Factory setting 0.8 [s] Description: Sets the switch-off delay time to shut down the excitation equipment. Note: The delay time starts if, when powering down, r0863.0 = 0. r1648.0 and r1648.3 are reset at the end of the delay time. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-393 Parameters List of parameters r1648.0...11 VECTOR_G (n/M) CO/BO: Excitation, control word / Excitation STW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6495 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word for the excitation equipment. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 07 10 11 r1649.0...7 CO/BO: Excitation status word / Excitation ZSW VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6495 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Signal name Power up excitation Excitation no OFF2 Excitation no OFF3 Excitation operation enable Excitation acknowledge fault Master control by excitation equipment ccw rotating field excitation invert excitation current setpoint 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Description: Displays the status word of the excitation equipment. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 07 Signal name Excitation ready to be powered up feedback signal Excitation ready feedback signal Excitation operational feedback signal Excitation group signal fault Excitation group signal alarm 0 signal No No No No No No No 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No - Dependency: Refer to: p1645 r1650 Current setpoint torque-generating before filter / Iq_set before filt VECTOR_G (n/M) FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 5710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the torque generating current setpoint Iqset after the torque limits and the clock cycle interpolation is ahead of the current setpoint filters. r1651 CO: Torque setpoint, function generator / M_set FG VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: 1-394 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Displays the torque setpoint of the function generator. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1653[0...n] Current setpoint torque-generating smoothing time minimum / Isq_s T_smth min VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [ms] Max 20.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.1 [ms] Description: Sets the minimum smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components. p1654[0...n] Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [ms] Max 50.0 [ms] Factory setting 4.8 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components. Note: The smoothing time does not become effective until the field-weakening range is reached. p1655[0...4] CI: Current setpoint/Speed actual value filter nat. frequency tuning / I/n_setp_filt f_n VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for tuning the natural frequency of the current setpoint filter 1, 2 and speed actual value filter 5. Index: [0] = Filter 1 [1] = Filter 2 [2] = Reserved [3] = Reserved [4] = Filter 5 p1656[0...n] Current setpoint/Speed actual value filter activation / I_setp_filt act VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 4715, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0001 bin Description: Setting for activating/de-activating the current setpoint filter 1, 2 and speed actual value filter 5. Bit field: Bit 00 01 04 Dependency: The individual current setpoint/speed actual value filters are parameterized starting at p1657. Note: If not all of the filters are required, then the filters should be used consecutively starting from filter 1. Signal name Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 5 1 signal Active Active Active (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal Inactive Inactive Inactive FP - 1-395 Parameters List of parameters p1657[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Current setpoint filter 1 type / I_set_filt 1 Typ Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the current setpoint filter 1 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter. Value: 1: 2: Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661. Note: For an extended general 2nd-order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the denominator, i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed. Low pass: PT2 General 2nd-order filter The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth: f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency p1658[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_n VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.5 [Hz] Max 16000.0 [Hz] Factory setting 1999.0 [Hz] Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter). Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661. p1659[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_n VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.001 Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.700 Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 1. Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661. p1660[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_z VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.5 [Hz] Max 16000.0 [Hz] Factory setting 1999.0 [Hz] Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (general filter). Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661. 1-396 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1661[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_z VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.700 Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 1. Dependency: Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661. p1662[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 type / I_set_filt 2 Typ VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the current setpoint filter 2 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter. Value: 1: 2: Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666. Note: For an extended general 2nd-order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the denominator, i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed. Low pass: PT2 General 2nd-order filter The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth: f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency p1663[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Current setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_n Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.5 [Hz] Max 16000.0 [Hz] Factory setting 1999.0 [Hz] Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter). Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666. p1664[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_n VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.001 Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.700 Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 2. Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-397 Parameters List of parameters p1665[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_z VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.5 [Hz] Max 16000.0 [Hz] Factory setting 1999.0 [Hz] Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (general filter). Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666. p1666[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_z VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 5710, 6710 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.700 Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 2. Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666. p1677[0...n] Speed actual value filter 5 type / n_act_filt 5 type VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 4715 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets speed actual value filter 5 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd order filter. Value: 1: 2: Dependency: The speed actual value filter is activated with p1656.4 and parameterized with p1677 ... p1681. Note: For an extended general 2nd-order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the denominator, i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed. Low pass: PT2 General 2nd-order filter The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth: f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency p1678[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Speed actual value filter 5 denominator natural frequency / n_act_filt 5 fn_d Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 4715 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.5 [Hz] Max 16000.0 [Hz] Factory setting 1999.0 [Hz] Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for speed actual value filter 5 (PT2, general filter). Dependency: The speed actual value filter is activated with p1656.4 and parameterized with p1677 ... p1681. 1-398 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1679[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Speed actual value filter 5 denominator damping / n_act_filt 5 D_d Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 4715 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.001 Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.700 Description: Sets the denominator damping for speed actual value filter 5. Dependency: The speed actual value filter is activated with p1656.4 and parameterized with p1677 ... p1681. p1680[0...n] Speed actual value filter 5 numerator natural frequency / n_act_filt 5 fn_n VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 4715 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.5 [Hz] Max 16000.0 [Hz] Factory setting 1999.0 [Hz] Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for speed actual value filter 5 (general filter). Dependency: The speed actual value filter is activated with p1656.4 and parameterized with p1677 ... p1681. p1681[0...n] Speed actual value filter 5 numerator damping / n_act_filt 5 D_n VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 4715 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.700 Description: Sets the numerator damping for speed actual value filter 5. Dependency: The speed actual value filter is activated with p1656.4 and parameterized with p1677 ... p1681. p1699 Filter data acceptance / Filt data accept VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Activates data acceptance for parameter changes for the filter. p1699 = 0: The new filter data are immediately accepted. p1699 = 1: The new filter data are only accepted when this parameter is reset. Dependency: Refer to: p1416, p1656, p1657, p1658, p1659, p1660, p1661, p1662, p1663, p1664, p1665, p1666 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-399 Parameters List of parameters p1702[0...n] Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 70.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the flux-generating current component Isd. Note: The parameter is effective for permanent and separately-excited synchronous motors. p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 70.0 [%] Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the torque/force-generating current component Isq. p1704[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control EMF scaling / Isq_ctrl EMF scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6714, 6726 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling of the EMF pre-control for the Isq current controller. p1705[0...n] Flux setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / Flux track thresh VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6714, 6726 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Threshold for the setpoint - actual value tracking of the EMF pre-control of the Isq current controller. p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1710, 6714, 7017 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 100000.000 Factory setting 0.000 Sets the proportional gain of the current controller for the lower adaptation current range. This value is automatically pre-set using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed. Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0392, p0393 Note: For p0393 = 100 %, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the entire range. 1-400 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1710, 5714, 6714, 7017 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 1000.00 [ms] Factory setting 2.00 [ms] Description: Sets the integral-action time of the current controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1715 r1718 CO: Isq controller output / Isq_ctrl outp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Displays the actual output of the Isq current controller (torque/force generating current, PI controller). The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller. r1719 Isq controller integral component / Isq_ctrl I_comp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the integral component of the Isq current controller (torque/force-generating current, PI controller). r1723 CO: Isd controller output / Isd_ctrl outp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Displays the actual output of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller). The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller. r1724 Isd controller integral component / Isd_ctrl I_comp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Displays the integral component of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-401 Parameters List of parameters r1725 Isd controller integral component limit / Isd_ctrl I_limit VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the limit value for the integral component of the Isd current controller. p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 75.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling of the quadrature arm decoupling Note: This parameter is ineffective for sensorless vector control. In this case, p1727 is always used. If p1726 is set to 0, then the quadrature de-coupling is de-activated. The integral component of the Isd current controller remains effective in the complete speed control range. For the closed-loop control of synchronous motors, this parameter is used to scale the current controller de-coupling. p1727[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling of quadrature arm decoupling when the voltage limit is reached. r1728 De-coupling voltage, in-line axis / U_dir-axis_decoupl VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the d axis. r1729 De-coupling voltage, quadrature axis / U_quad_decoupl VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: 1-402 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6714 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the q axis. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1730[0...n] Isd controller integral component shutdown threshold / Isd_ctr I_compDeac VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 30 [%] Max 150 [%] Factory setting 30 [%] Description: Sets the speed threshold for deactivating the integral component of the Isd controller. The d current controller is only effective as P controller for speeds greater than the threshold value. Instead of the integral component, the quadrature arm decoupling is effective. Warning: For settings above 80%, the d current controller is active up to the field weakening limit. When operated at the voltage limit, this can result in an unstable behavior. In order to avoid this, the dynamic voltage reserve p1574 should be increased. Note: The parameter value is referred to the synchronous rated motor speed. p1731[0...n] Isd controller combination current time component / Isd ctrl iCombi T1 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the time constant to calculate the d current DC component difference (combination current) to add to the d current controller actual value. The additional input is de-activated with p1731 = 0. r1732[0...1] CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint / Direct U set VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1630, 5714, 6714, 5718 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the direct-axis voltage setpoint Ud. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 r1733[0...1] CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / Quad U set VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1630, 5714, 5718, 6714, 6719 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the quadrature-axis component of voltage setpoint Uq. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-403 Parameters List of parameters p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed-loop control / Gain res_damp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.025 Description: Defines the gain of the controller for resonance damping for operation with sensorless vector control in the range that current is injected. p1744[0...n] Motor model speed threshold stall detection / MotMod n_thr stall VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 100.00 [rpm] Sets the speed threshold value to detect a stalled motor. If the adaptation controller output exceeds the parameterized speed difference, then bit 11 in status word p1408 is set. Dependency: If a stalled drive is detected (p1408.11 set), fault 7902 is output after the delay time in p2178. Refer to: p2178 Note: Speed monitoring is only effective in operation with a speed encoder (refer to p1300). Stalling is also identified if steps/jumps occur in the speed signal, which exceed the value in p0492. p1745[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 1000.0 [%] Factory setting 5.0 [%] Description: Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled. Dependency: If a stalled drive is detected (r1408.12 = 1), fault F07902 is output after the delay time set in p2178. If the error signal (r1746) exceeds the parameterized error threshold, then status signal r1408.12 is set to 1. Refer to: p2178 Note: Monitoring is only effective in the low-speed range (below p1755 * (100% - p1756)). r1746 Motor model error signal stall detection / MotMod sig stall VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Signal to initiate stall detection Note: The signal is not calculated while magnetizing and only in the low speed range (below p1755 * (100 % - p1756)). 1-404 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1748[0...n] Motor model lower changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Lower n_chngov VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 90.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Description: Sets the lower speed for the transition "n_set -> n_act" in encoderless operation. This value is entered as a percentage referred to p1749. Dependency: Refer to: p1749, p1752 p1749[0...n] Motor model upper changeover speed / increase changeover speed / Upper / n_chgov VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 99.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] For the separately-excited synchronous motor the following applies: Sets the upper speed for the transition "n_set -> n_act" in sensorless operation. This value is entered as a percentage of p1755. For the encoderless closed-loop control of the induction motor, the following applies: Depending on the machine data, the drive has calculated a minimum value of the operating frequency for rugged operation. If the minimum value is greater than the lower changeover limit parameterized with p1755 * (1 - 2 * p1756), then the difference is displayed using p1749 * p1755. Dependency: Refer to: p1748, p1752, p1755, p1756 p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the motor model. Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM). Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM). Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM). Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM). Bit 4 = 1: Time-controlled change between current and observer models (ASM). Bit 5 = 1: HF signal injection to estimate the continuous rotor position (PESM). Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, sensorless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM). Bit 7 = 1: Use rugged switchover limits to switchover the model between open-loop and closed-loop controlled operation (ASM). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Signal name Controlled start Controlled through 0 Hz Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for passive loads Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Yes No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-405 Parameters List of parameters 04 05 06 07 Model changeover Cl.-loop control mode PESM up to f=0Hz with HF signal injection Closed-loop control when motor is blocked Use rugged changeover limits Time controlled Yes Freq. controlled No - Yes Yes No No - Caution: Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be slowly reversed by the load at the torque limit. Long delay times due to blocking (p2177 > p1758) can cause the motor to stall. In this case you should de-activate the function or use closed-loop control throughout the speed range (note the information re bit 2 = 1). Note: Bit 0 ... 3 only have influence for sensorless vector control, bit 4 only for vector control with encoder. Bit 2 is preassigned depending on p0500. Re bit 2 = 1: The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed controlled mode. This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not generate any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor. If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate. When the bit is set, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored. Re bit 2 = 0: If the model feedback is deactivated (p1784 = 0), with bit 2 = 0, then bit 3 is also automatically set to 0. Re bit 5 = 1: The selection of HF signal injection is only relevant for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM). Therefore, activation of bit 5 is only possible outside of motor commissioning (p0010 = 0). In order to achieve user-friendly configuration of the power unit components in the oversampling mode, when activated for the first time, initially p1810 bit 3 is set, and then an automatic system boot is initiated. This is only possible if all of the axes connected to the CU are switched off (refer to the setting conditions for p0009); otherwise, it is not possible to set the bit. When deactivating p1750 bit 5, p1810 bit 3 remains unchanged and the system does not boot again. Therefore, to reverse configure the power unit components from the oversampling mode (after manually deselecting p1750 bit 5) then initially p1810 bit 3 must be manually deleted and then a manual warm restart initiated. As an alternative to a warm restart: save the parameters and carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on). When the function "safety without encoder" (p9306/p9506) is activated, this setting is not permissible and results in monitoring errors. Re bit 6 = 1: The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors: For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177) the time condition in p1758 is bypassed and a change is not made into open-loop controlled operation. Re bit 7 = 1: The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors: If the changeover limits are parameterized too low (p1755, p1756), then they are automatically increased to rugged values by the absolute amount p1749 * p1755. The effective time condition for changing over into open-controlled operation is obtained from the minimum of p1758 and 0.5 * r0384. Activation can make sense for applications that demand a high torque at low frequencies and therefore low speed gradients. It must be ensured that p1610, p1611 have been adequately parameterized. r1751 Motor model status / MotMod status VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: 1-406 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the status of the motor model. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Note: Signal name Controlled operation Set ramp-function generator Stop RsLh adaptation Feedback Encoder operation Holding angle Acceleration criterion Set angular integrator PEM Stop Kt adaptation PEM PolID active PEM SLVC I injection PEM Speed controller output cannot be set to zero Rs adapt waits mot oper Stator frequency sign Torque sign Pulse injection active PEM Operation with rugged model feedback Operation of the current model with current feedback Current feedback in the current model Rugged increase of the changeover limits 1 signal Active Active Yes Active Active Yes Active No No No No Yes 0 signal Inactive Inactive No Inactive Inactive No Inactive Yes Yes Yes Yes No FP 6721 - Yes Yes Positive Motor mode Yes Enabled Enabled No No Negative Regenerative mode No Inhibited Inhibited - Active Active Inactive Inactive - Re bit 17: Displays the status when enabling the rugged model feedback (p1784) for operation with and without encoder. The feedback is used to increase the parameter ruggedness of the motor model and is effective in the operating range of the two-component closed loop current control. Re bit 18: Displays the status when enabling the differential current feedback in the current model for operation with encoder. The function is automatically enabled with p1784 > 0 or p1731 > 0. The feedback is used for a rugged change between the current model and complete machine model with active rugged model feedback and combination current. Re bit 19: Displays the currently active stator circuit feedback in current model operation. Re bit 20: Displays the currently effective increase of the changeover limits by the value p1749 * p1755. p1752[0...n] Motor model changeover speed operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgov enc VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 210000.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed to change over the motor model for operation with encoder. Dependency: In U/f characteristic mode the parameter is of no significance. Using the friction characteristic for operation with encoder: When changing the motor model changeover speed p1752, the points along the friction characteristic should be recalculated (p0340 = 5) and the friction characteristic recorded again (p3845). For slight changes, only the associated friction characteristic points must be recorded (see p3844). Refer to: p1756 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-407 Parameters List of parameters p1753[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Motor model changeover speed hysteresis operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgovHysE Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 90.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Description: Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for operation with speed encoder. Dependency: Refer to: p1752 Note: The value refers to p1752. In the case of separately excited synchronous motors, the lower hysteresis value is calculated with p1752 * p1753; in the case of all other types of motor, p1752 * (1 - p1753) is used. p1754[0...n] Flux angle difference smoothing time / Angle diff T_smth VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6733 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [ms] Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 5.0 [ms] Sets the smoothing time constant to filter the main flux angle difference from the voltage and current models. The filtered value is included in the calculation of the total flux angle. PESM: Sets the smoothing time constant for the angular difference display between motor model and encoder. Note: In the case of a separately excited synchronous motor and sensorless vector control, the parameter must be set to the minimum value to improve motor model changeover. p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 210000.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed to change over the motor model to encoderless operation. Dependency: In U/f characteristic mode the parameter is of no significance. Refer to: p1749, p1756 Notice: The changeover speed represents the steady-state minimum speed up to which the motor model can be used in sensorless steady-state operation. If the stability is not adequate close to the changeover speed, it may make sense to increase the parameter value. Note: The changeover speed applies for the changeover between open-loop and closed-loop control mode. p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgov hys VECTOR_G Description: 1-408 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6730, 6731, 6732, 6733 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 95.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for encoderless operation. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: In U/f characteristic mode the parameter is of no significance. Refer to: p1755 Note: The parameter value refers to p1755. In the case of separately excited synchronous motors, the lower hysteresis value is calculated with p1755 * p1756; in the case of all other types of motor, p1755 * (1 - p1756) is used. p1757[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Motor model w/o enc. op./cl.-loop controlled stab. controller Kp / MotMod w/o enc Kp Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.01 Max 10.00 Factory setting 0.70 Description: Sets the gain of the transient response controller when the motor model changes over from open-loop controlled operation to closed-loop controlled operation. Note: Only for ASM and PSM in encoderless operation: The settling range starts at 0.5 * p1755 * p1756. For ASM it ends at p1755 * p1756 or at p1755, if p1759 is at the maximum value. For PSM it always ends at p1755 * p1756. p1758[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 100 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 1000 [ms] Description: Sets the minimum time for falling below the changeover speed when changing from closed-loop controlled operation to open-loop controlled operation. Dependency: Refer to: p1755, p1756 p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed-loop control / MotMod t op_cl VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 2000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the minimum time for exceeding the changeover speed when changing from open-loop controlled operation to closed-loop controlled operation. Dependency: Refer to: p1755, p1756 Note: When p1759 = 2000 ms, the delay time becomes ineffective and the model changeover is determined by the output frequency only. p1760[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod wE n_ada Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 100000.000 Factory setting 1000.000 Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation with encoder (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-409 Parameters List of parameters p1761[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod wE n_ada Tn VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 4 [ms] Description: Sets the integral-action time of the controller for speed adaptation with encoder r1762[0...1] Motor model deviation component 1 / MotMod dev comp 1 VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6721, 6730, 6731 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Induction motor (ASM): Displays the referred imaginary system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model. Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM): Displays the system deviation for speed adaptation. r1762.0: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the estimated EMF. r1762.1: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the low-level signal response for pulse technique. Index: [0] = Deviation Model1 [1] = Deviation Model2 r1763 Motor model deviation component 2 / MotMod dev comp 2 VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Induction motor (ASM): Displays the referred real system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model. Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM): Not used. p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6730 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 100000.000 Factory setting 1000.000 Description: 1-410 Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1765 Motor model, speed adaptation Kp effective / MotM n_ada Kp act VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the effective proportional gain of the controller for the speed adaptation. p1766[0...n] Motor model voltage model calculation enable / U_mod calc enab VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 90.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Sets the speed to enable the voltage model to calculate the speed actual value. This value is entered as a percentage referred to p1752. Dependency: Refer to: p1748, p1752 p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6730 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 [ms] Max 200 [ms] Factory setting 4 [ms] Description: Sets the integral time of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder r1768 Motor model, speed adaptation Vi effective / MotM n_ada Vi act VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the effective gain of the integral component of the controller for speed adaptation. r1770 CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6730 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the P component of the controller for speed adaptation. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-411 Parameters List of parameters r1771 CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 6730 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the I component of the controller for speed adaptation. r1773[0...1] Motor model slip speed / MotMod slip VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays estimated (speed) signals of the motor model. r1773[0]: Displays the estimated (mechanical) slip of the motor model. r1773[1]: Displays the estimated input speed of the motor model. Index: [0] = Slip speed estimated [1] = Speed estimated p1774[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -5.000 [V] Max 5.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Description: Sets the offset voltage in the alpha direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit. Note: The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement. p1775[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -5.000 [V] Max 5.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Description: Sets the offset voltage in the beta direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit. Note: The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement. r1776[0...6] Motor model status signals / MotMod status sig VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: 1-412 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the internal status signals of the motor model: (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Index 0: Changeover ramp between current and voltage models Index 1: Changeover ramp for model tracking (encoderless induction motors only) Index 2: Changeover ramp for zero frequency range (encoderless induction motors only) Index 3: Transition ramp actual speed from speed setpoint to model value (encoderless FEM) Index 4: Speed controller enable (encoderless FEM) Index 5: Transition ramp between current and voltage models (encoderless FEM) Index 6: Transition ramp for EMF deviation at PLL input (encoderless PESM) Index: [0] = Changeover ramp motor model [1] = Changeover ramp model tracking [2] = Changeover ramp zero frequency encoderless ASM [3] = Changeover ramp actual speed encoderless FEM [4] = Enable speed controller encoderless FEM [5] = Changeover ramp motor model encoderless FEM [6] = Changeover ramp motor model encoderless PESM Note: Indices 3 through 5 are only relevant in the case of encoderless control of separately excited synchronous motors. r1778 Motor model flux angle difference / MotMod ang. diff. VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1 Min - [] Max - [] Factory setting - [] Induction motor (ASM): Displays the difference between the motor model flux angle and the transformation angle. Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM): Displays the angular difference between motor model and encoder. Dependency: A setting for smoothing the display can be made using p1754. r1779 Motor model absolute flux / MotMod abs flux VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the absolute value of the flux of the motor model. p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0111 1100 bin Sets the configuration for the adaptation circuit of the motor model. Induction motor (ASM): Rs, Rr (only for operation with encoder), Lh and offset compensation. Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PEM): kT Bit field: Bit 01 02 03 04 Signal name Select motor model ASM Rs adaptation Select motor model ASM Lh adaptation Select motor model PEM kT adaptation Select motor model offset adaptation 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No No No FP - 1-413 Parameters List of parameters 05 06 07 10 Dependency: Select ASM Rr adaptation (only with encoder) Select pole position identification PEM encoderless Select T(valve) with Rs adaptation Filter time combination current like current ctrl integral time Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes No No - In U/f characteristic operating mode only bit 7 is relevant. For active motor model feedback (see p1784), the Lh adaptation is internally deactivated automatically. When the power units are connected in parallel with separate, offset motor winding systems (p7003 = 2), then the compensation of the valve interlocking times should be implemented as Rs adaptation (bit 7 = 1). Note: ASM: Induction motor PEM: Permanent magnet synchronous motor When selecting the compensation of the valve interlocking via Rs (bit 7), the compensation in the gating unit is deactivated and is instead taken into account in the motor model. In order that the correction values of the Rs, Lh and kT adaptation (selected using Bit 0 ... Bit 2) are correctly accepted when changing over the drive data set, a dedicated motor number must be entered into p0826 for each different motor. p1784[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Motor model feedback scaling / MotMod fdbk scal Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 1000.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for model fault feedback. Note: Feeding back the measured model fault to the model states increases the control stability and makes the motor model rugged against parameter errors. When feedback is selected (p1784 > 0), Lh adaptation is not effective. p1785[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.100 Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM). p1786[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: 1-414 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Sets the integral time for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1787[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the corrective value for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM). Dependency: Refer to: p0826, p1780 Note: The adaptation result is reset if the magnetizing inductance of the induction motor is changed (p0360, r0382). This also happens when changing over the data set if a different motor is not being used (p0826). The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set. r1791 Motor model Lh adaptation power-on frequency / MotMod Lh f_on VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the power-on stator frequency/ primary section frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor (ASM). r1792 Motor model Lh adaptation power-on slip / MotMod Lh fslip VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the power-on slip frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor (ASM). p1795[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6731 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10 [ms] Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Sets the integral time of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM). r1797[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6731 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm/A] Max - [Nm/A] Factory setting - [Nm/A] Description: Displays the corrective value of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM). Dependency: Refer to: p0826, p1780 Note: The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-415 Parameters List of parameters p1798[0...n] Motor model pulse technique speed adaptation Kp / MotMod pulses Kp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 1000.000 Factory setting 1.000 Description: Sets the proportional gain Kp for speed adaptation with active pulse technique for the estimation of the continuous rotor position. p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.000 [kHz] Max 16.000 [kHz] Factory setting 4.000 [kHz] Description: Sets the pulse frequency for the converter. Dependency: The pulse frequency can, depending on the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) assume the following values: This parameter is pre-set to the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned. p1800 = 1000 / (p0115[0] * 2) or p1800 = n*1000 / p0115[0] with n = 1, 2, 3, ... Example: p0115[0] = 250 s --> p1800 = 2, 4, 8, 12, 16 kHz Possible setting values can be taken from r0114 (if p0009 = p0010 = 0). If p0092 = 1 the sampling times p0115 and the pulse frequency p1800 are checked every time the parameters are downloaded, and reset to the initial values if necessary. This check can be de-activated by setting p0092 = 0 (making this setting does not affect isochronous PROFIBUS operation). If wobbulation is selected (p1810.2), the pulse frequency can only be changed as part of pulse enabling to values with the following ratio: a) p1800 <= 1000 / p0115[0] for p1811 > 0 % b) p1800 <= 1000 * 2 / p0115[0] for p 1811 = 0 % Under pulse inhibit p1800 > 1000 / p0115[0] -> p1811 = 0 p1800 > 1000 * 2 / p0115[0] -> 1810.2 = 0 and p1811 = 0 (applicable for all indices) Refer to: r0110, r0111, p0112, p0113, r0114, p0115, p0230, p1817 Notice: The pulse frequency p1800 can also be asynchronously set to the current controller clock cycle (0.05 kHz increment). To do this, p1810 bit 12 must be set to 1 (secondary condition, see p1810). Effects: - switchover of the gating unit (p1810 bit 2) - current actual value correction is activated (p1840 bit 0) - minimum pulse frequency 1000 * 0.5 / p0115[0] - maximum pulse frequency 1000 * 2 / p0115[0] - fluctuating deadtimes and dynamic performance in the current control loop - increased level of current ripple in the current display 1-416 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The maximum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used. When the pulse frequency is increased, depending on the particular power unit, the maximum output current can be reduced (derating, refer to r0067). The maximum pulse frequency for operation with output reactors (see p0230) is 4 kHz for booksize and blocksize power units, for chassis power units it is twice the rated pulse frequency (2.5 kHz or 4 kHz). If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be set below the minimum value required for the filter. If an external sine-wave filter is parameterized, (p0230 = 4), then the minimum pulse frequency is calculated as follows: f_puls_min = 1.6 / ( 2 * Pi * root(p0233 * p0234 * p0235) ), with p0233 in H and p0234 in F In this case, the pulse frequency must be a multiple of the inverse value of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be changed below the minimum value required for the filter. If p1800 is changed while commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1800 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p1082). r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [kHz] Max - [kHz] Factory setting - [kHz] Description: Display and connector output for the actual converter switching frequency. Index: [0] = Actual [1] = Modulator minimum value Note: The selected pulse frequency (p1800) may be reduced if the drive converter has an overload condition (p0290). The following applies for vector drives (p0107): The pulse frequency can also be reduced when changing over the modulator to an optimized pulse pattern. This is used to avoid overcontrol. In the case of chassis power units, two-thirds of the setpoint pulse frequency is displayed in the FLB modulation range. p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 9 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the modulator mode. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), or if the power unit firmware is not able to calculate edge modulation (r0192.0 = 0), then only space vector modulation without overcontrol can be set as modulation type (p1802 = 3). Automatic changeover SVM/FLB Flat top modulation (FLB) Space vector modulation (SVM) SVM without overcontrol SVM/FLB without overcontrol SVM with pulse frequency reduction SVM/FLB with pulse frequency reduction No edge modulation up to 100 Hz No edge modulation up to 60 Hz Edge modulation Refer to: r0192, p0230, p7003 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-417 Parameters List of parameters Notice: If the pulse patterns are enabled with overmodulation option (p1802 < 3) or edge modulation (p1802 > 6), then the current actual value correction is automatically activated (p1840.0 = 0). Note: When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 1, 2, 5, 6), the modulation depth must be limited using p1803 (default p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple and torque ripple. When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed. p1802 = 7, 8 should be used if the drive is operated below 100 Hz or 60 Hz, and it is necessary to avoid changing over to edge modulation. Above these output frequencies, the modulation depth remains limited so that there the full output voltage of the edge modulation is not reached. p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6723 P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 20.0 [%] Max 150.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Defines the maximum modulation depth. Note: p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching delay). If an optimized pulse pattern is enabled (edge modulation), then the modulation depth is limited to below the output frequency of 28 Hz as there is no optimized pulse pattern in this range. p1804[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Filter time constant smoothed modulation index / T_filt mod_idxSmth Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 10.0 [ms] Filter time constant for the smoothed modulation index to change over the modulator mode. p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Description: Sets the filter time constant of the DC link voltage used to calculate the modulation depth. r1807 Actual DC link voltage to calculate the modulation depth / VdcActValMod_depth VECTOR_G Description: 1-418 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] DC link voltage that is used to convert the setpoint voltage into an equivalent modulation depth. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1808 DC link voltage actual value for U_max calculation / Vdc act val U_max VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: DC link voltage used to determine the maximum possible output voltage. r1809 CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 9 Factory setting - Description: Displays the effective modulator mode. Value: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: p1810 Modulator configuration / Modulator config VECTOR_G Flat top modulation (FLB) Space vector modulation (SVM) Edge modulation from 28 Hz; 23:3 Edge modulation from 28 Hz; 19:1 Edge modulation from 60 Hz; 17:3 Edge modulation from 60 Hz; 17:1 Edge modulation from 100 Hz; 9:2 Edge modulation from 100 Hz; 9:1 Optimized pulse pattern Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0010 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the modulator. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 08 09 10 12 13 14 Dependency: Signal name Avg value filter for U_lim (only for Vdc_comp. in modulator) DC link voltage compensation in the current control Wobbulation activated Current measurement oversampling selected Pulse frequency reduction (speed dependent) stage 1 Pulse frequency reduction (speed dependent) stage 2 Activate pulse-locking/pulse-dropping function Pulse freq. can be asynchronously set to curr. ctrl clock cycle Pulse freq. reduction before optimized pulse patterns for 500 s Deactivate maximum angular difference adaptation 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Yes No - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Pulse-Dropping Pulse-Locking - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - If bit 2 is set from 1 to 0, p1811 = 0 is set. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-419 Parameters List of parameters Notice: Bit 1 = 0 can only be set under a pulse inhibit and for r0192.14 = 1. Bit 2 can only be set to 1 subject to the following prerequisites: - Pulse inhibit - r0192.16 = 1 - p1800 < 2 x 1000/p0115[0] Bit 12 can only be changed subject to the following prerequisites: - preconditions, the same as bit 2 = 1 - p1810.3 = 0 Note: Re bit 00 = 0: Voltage limitation from the minimum of the DC link voltage (lower ripple in the output current, reduced output voltage). Re bit 00 = 1: Voltage limitation from averaged DC link voltage (higher output voltage with increased ripple in the output current). The selection is only valid if the DC link compensation is not performed in the Control Unit (bit 1 = 0). Re bit 01 = 0: DC link voltage compensation in the modulator. Re bit 01 = 1: DC link voltage compensation in the current control. Re bit 02 = 0: A gating unit that does not permit wobbulation is used. Edge modulation is not possible for a parallel connection with a single-winding system (p7003 = 0). Bit 02 cannot be set to 0 if bit 12 = 1. Re bit 02 = 1: A gating unit that permits wobbulation is used. For a wobbulation amplitude p1811 = 0, the maximum possible pulse frequency in P1800 = 2 x 1000 / p0115[0]. For a wobbulation amplitude p1811 > 0, the maximum possible pulse frequency in P1800 = 1000 / p0115[0]. If optimized pulse patterns has been activated (p1802 > 6), then a parameter save is required and switch-off and switch-on again. This is displayed using a fault message (F01040). Re bit 03 = 1: The actual current value sensing and the determination of the valve ON times takes place with a double current controller clock cycle and phase offset. The activation is only possible with r0192.23 = 1 and p1810.12 = 0 - and takes effect the next time the system is powered up. Re bit 08 = 1: Above the frequency threshold r1836[0], the pulse frequency is switched to the value in p1800. Below r1836[0] (minus the hysteresis), the pulse frequency is reduced to the next possible pulse frequency (see r0114). Re bit 09 = 1: Above the frequency threshold r1836[1], the pulse frequency is increased to the next possible value. Below r1836[1] (minus the hysteresis), the pulse frequency is reduced to the next possible pulse frequency. If bit 8 is set to 0, bit 9 is automatically reset. Re bit 10 = 0: Pulse-locking function activated. Re bit 10 = 1: Pulse-dropping function activated. Re bit 12 = 0: The pulse frequency p1800 can also be synchronously set to the current controller clock cycle (see r0114). Bit 12 can only be set from 1 to 0 if the pulse frequency p1800 is set synchronously to the current controller clock cycle. In this case, the gating unit is not switched over. Re bit 12 = 1: The pulse frequency p1800 can also be asynchronously set to the current controller clock cycle. In this case, the effects should be observed (see p1800). If bit 12 is set to 1, then the gating unit is automatically switched over (p1810.2 = 1). If this is not possible (see above), then bit 12 cannot be set to 1. Bit 12 cannot be set to 1, if p1810.3 = 1 is set. 1-420 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1811[0...n] Pulse frequency wobbulation amplitude / Puls wobb ampl VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [%] Max 20 [%] Factory setting 0 [%] Description: Sets the amplitude of the statistical wobbulation signal. Note: p1811 > 0 is possible, if the following applies: This signal is used to vary the pulse frequency to create a more pleasant sound. - configuration: p1810.2 = 1 (wobbulation activated) - pulse frequency: p1800 <= 1000 / p115[0] - output filter, filter type: p0230 < 3 (no sine-wave filter) p1812 BI: Offset calibration output current measurement / Off_calibr I_outp VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source to activate/de-activate offset calibration for output current measurement. Caution: The absence of offset calibration can have a negative effect on control properties. Offset calibration must be performed before switching on the power unit for the first time after POWER ON. Note: Offset calibration is only performed with pulses suppressed and can take up to one second. p1815 Phase for PWM generation subgroup / Ph for PWM subgr VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0001 bin Description: Sets bit 0 for recording the power unit in the subgroup for the "offset clocking". Bit field: Bit 00 Dependency: Refer to: p1818, p1819 Note: A change only becomes effective after booting. Signal name Recording in subgroup for offset clocking 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - If one of the following secondary conditions is not fulfilled, then none of the power units from the subgroup are clocked with an offset. Secondary conditions for clocking with an offset: - the PWM frequency (p1800[D]) of all power units in the subgroup must be the same. - the PWM frequency (p1800[D]) must be the same in all drive data sets in the subgroup. - the following must apply for the ratio between the PWM cycle (1/p1800[D]) and the current controller cycle (p0115[0]): The ratio (1/p1800[D]) / (p0115[0]) must be an even integer number (2, 4, 6, ...) for all power units in the subgroup. or The ratio (p0115[0]) / (1/p1800[D]) must be an integer number (1, 2, 3, ...) for all power units in the subgroup. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-421 Parameters List of parameters p1816 Set phase for PWM generation manually / Set Ph for PWM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1 Max 16 Factory setting -1 Sets manual setting and overwriting of automatically determined phase shift for "offset clocking". For p1816 = -1, the following applies: Automatic mode. The phase shift value is automatically determined. For p1816 = 0 ... 16, the following applies: Manual mode. The user should define the phase shift value as follows: 1. PWM cycle (1/p1800) > current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]) The power unit executes a phase shift from Tshift = current controller cycle (p0115[0]) * p1816. 2. PWM cycle (1/p1800) <= current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]) For p1816 >= 1, the power unit executes a phase shift from Tshift = PWM cycle/2. Dependency: Refer to: r0116, p1800, p1819 p1817 Minimum ratio, pulse frequency to the output frequency / Min f_puls / f_max VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 8.3 Max 15.0 Factory setting 12.0 Description: Sets the minimum ratio between the pulse frequency and the output frequency. Notice: If the ratio between the pulse frequency and the output frequency is reduced, then oscillations can occur in the output current that can result in significant levels of current ripple with the appropriate negative effects. Note: When the maximum speed is changed, the pulse frequency p1800 is automatically limited to this minimum ratio. It is not permissible to reduce the pulse frequency if this would result in this ratio being undershot. p1818 Phase for PWM generation configuration / Ph for PWM config CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the phase shift for offset clocking. For the first active power unit, it is specified whether clocking is to start at 0 (value = 0) or 180 (value = 1). All other active power units are clocked alternately according to the setting made here. Dependency: Refer to: p1819 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. 1-422 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1819 Phase for PWM generation / Ph for PWM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1 Max 16 Factory setting -1 Display for "offset clocking". Depending on the particular case, the value is interpreted differently: Case 1: The PWM clock cycle (1/p1800[D]) is greater than the current controller clock cycle (p115[0]) and the ratio between the PWM clock cycle and the current controller clock cycle and is an integer and even multiple of it (e.g. p0115[0] = 125 s, p1800[D] = 4 kHz, 2 kHz, 1 kHz). The value displayed refers to: - the phase shift in the current-controller cycles to be applied by the power unit. Case 2: The PWM clock cycle (1/p1800[D]) is less than or equal to the current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]) and the ratio between the current controller clock cycle and the PWM clock cycle is an integer and even multiple of it (e.g. p0115[0] = 125 s, p1800[D] = 8 kHz, 16 kHz). The value 1 displayed means that: - the power unit is to apply a phase shift of 180 (from the PWM cycle). A value of 0 displayed on all power units of the drive line-up means the following: - the general conditions of the "offset clocking" (see p1815) are not fulfilled, i.e. no power unit is clocked with an offset. Dependency: Refer to: p0108, r0108, p0115, p1800, p1815, p1816, p1818 Note: For reasons of compatibility, the parameter is an adjustable parameter. However, it functions solely as a display parameter. This means that factory setting -1 no longer has any significance and is only available for reasons of compatibility. p1820[0...n] Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 6732 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the phase sequence reversal for the motor. If the motor does not rotate in the required direction, then the output phase sequence can be reversed using this parameter. This means that with the same setpoint, the motor direction is reversed without reversing the encoder actual value. When a speed encoder is being used, it may be necessary to also invert the encoder actual value (p0410). Value: 0: 1: OFF ON Dependency: Caution: Refer to: p1821 For 12-pulse converters with 30 offset angle for system 2, for a direction of rotation reversal, the phase offset changes by 60 as the sign of the angle offset changes. This can be adapted in p1810.15. Caution: Changing the direction using p1820 or p1821 is not recognized by the "Safe Direction without encoder". As a consequence, the limit provided by SDI (Safe Direction) from r9733 no longer functions. Note: This setting can only be changed when the pulses are inhibited. p1821 can be used to reverse the phase sequence and encoder actual value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-423 Parameters List of parameters p1821[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Dir of rot / Dir of rot Can be changed: C2(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 4704, 4710, 4711, 4715, 5730, 6730, 6731, 6732 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Setting to change the direction of rotation. If the parameter is changed, it reverses the direction of rotation of the motor and the encoder actual value without changing the setpoint. Value: 0: 1: CW CCW Dependency: Refer to: F07434 Danger: When using external speed actual values for the speed controller (see p1440), for a direction of rotation change (p1821 = 1), then its polarity must also be changed (e.g. for drive object ENCODER via p0410). Otherwise, a positive coupling can occur in the speed control loop and the drive would then be accelerated up to the speed limit. Caution: For 12-pulse converters with 30 offset angle for system 2, for a direction of rotation reversal, the phase offset changes by 60 as the sign of the angle offset changes. This can be adapted in p1810.15. Caution: Changing the direction using p1820 or p1821 is not recognized by the "Safe Direction without encoder". As a consequence, the limit provided by SDI (Safe Direction) from r9733 no longer functions. Notice: An appropriate fault is output for a drive data set changeover where the direction of rotation changes and the pulses are enabled. Note: For operation with the phase sequence U/V/W, the direction of rotation is defined when viewing the face side of the motor output shaft. When changing the direction of rotation, the rotating field direction of the current controller is reversed. The speed actual value (e.g. r0063) is also reversed so that the control sense is kept and internally causing the direction of rotation to be reversed with the same setpoint. Further, the position actual values of the actual encoder are reversed (e.g. r0482[0...2]). p1820 can be used to reverse the direction of the motor without reversing the encoder actual value. p1825 Converter valve threshold voltage / Threshold voltage VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [Vrms] Max 100.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.6 [Vrms] Description: Sets the threshold voltage drop of the valves (power semiconductor devices) to be compensated. Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine. p1828 Compensation valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lock ph U VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 1000000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U. Notice: The deadtime compensation is deactivated with p7003 = 2. 1-424 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine. For type PM340 power units, the value is limited to 3.98 s. p1829 Compensation valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lock ph V VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 1000000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase V. Notice: The deadtime compensation is deactivated with p7003 = 2. Note: For type PM340 power units, the value is limited to 3.98 s. p1830 Compensation valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lock ph W VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 1000000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase W. Notice: The deadtime compensation is deactivated with p7003 = 2. Note: For type PM340 power units, the value is limited to 3.98 s. p1832 Dead time compensation current level / t_dead_comp I_lev VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [Arms] Max 10000.0 [Arms] Factory setting 0.0 [Arms] Sets the current level for the dead time compensation. Above the current level, the dead time - resulting from the converter switching delays - is compensated by a previously calculated constant value. If the relevant phase current setpoint falls below the absolute value defined by p1832, the corrective value for this phase is continuously reduced. Dependency: The factory setting of p1832 is automatically set to 0.02 * rated drive converter current (r0207). p1835[0...1] Pulse frequency reduction switchover frequency shift / f_puls_red f_sw VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 800.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Description: Frequency to shift the switchover frequency r1836 for pulse frequency reduction. Index: [0] = Frequency limit 1 [1] = Frequency limit 2 Dependency: Refer to: r1836 The parameter value reduces the switchover frequency threshold with the same parameter index. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-425 Parameters List of parameters r1836[0...1] Pulse frequency reduction, switchover frequency / f_puls_red f_sw VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the frequency limits, under which the pulse frequency is automatically reduced. Starting from the parameterized pulse frequency p1800, the pulse frequency is reduced to the next possible one, if the frequency limits and an additional hysteresis are fallen below. Index 0: Frequency limit for the first pulse frequence reduction (active for p1810.8 = 1) Index 1: Frequency limit for the second pulse frequence reduction (active for p1810.9 = 1) Index: [0] = Frequency limit 1 [1] = Frequency limit 2 Dependency: Refer to: p1810, p1835 Note: The pulse frequency reduction is not active for U/f control. A minimum clearance of 10 Hz is kept between the frequency thresholds, which cannot be fallen below when changing p1835. r1837 Gating unit configuration / Gating unit config VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display for the configuration of the gating unit driver. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1-426 Signal name Modulation depth for a flying restart Modulation depth for Vdc closed-loop control Vdc_min controller Motor data identification routine Current offset calculation Simulation mode Reverse the output phase sequence CCW dir of rot Synchronization (bypass) F07801 monitor by application Chassis Drive active Short-circuit test active FL modulation prohibited F3E present PS-ASIC3 available (PS-ASIC3+ is not a PS-Asic3) Power unit with PS interface Current measurement oversampling active Actual value averaging temporarily suppressed Modulation depth limiting Reduced DC link capacitance (without F3E) 1 signal Limited Limited 0 signal Not limited Not limited FP - Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Yes No Yes Yes Yes Not active Not active Not active Not active Not active Not active Not active Not active No Yes No No No - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Yes Yes No No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1840[0...n] VECTOR_G Actual value correction configuration / ActVal_corr conf Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration of the actual value correction. Bit field: Bit 00 01 Dependency: Refer to: p1802 Note: During operation (pulses enabled) the configuration cannot be changed by changing over drive data sets. r1841 Actual value correction status word / ActVal_corr status VECTOR_G Signal name Actual value correction de-activated Compares the integrals from modulator and setpoint 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of actual value correction. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 14 15 Signal name Hardware for the actual value correction detected Automatic shutdown (too many switching instants) Integral scaled to half the gating unit clock cycle freq. Actual value correction temporarily suppressed Reserved Actual value correction active 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes No No - p1845[0...n] Actual value correction evaluation factor Lsig / ActVal_cor ev Lsig VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 10.00 Factory setting 1.00 Description: Sets the weighting factor for the leakage inductance of the L-R element of the actual value correction. Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0392, p0393 Note: The load-dependent adaptation of the leakage inductance of the current actual value correction is defined using p0391 ... p0393. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-427 Parameters List of parameters p1846[0...n] Actual value correction damping factor / ActV_corr D_factor VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 10.00 Factory setting 1.00 Description: Sets the damping factor for the actual value correction. The factor multiplies the T0/Tsig ratio in the feedback branch of the LR element. r1848[0...5] VECTOR_G Actual value correction phase currents / ActVal_corr I_ph Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays phase correction currents as well as the drive converter phase currents Index: [0] = Harmonics, phase U [1] = Harmonics, phase V [2] = Harmonics, phase W [3] = Meas val phase U [4] = Meas val phase V [5] = Meas val phase W r1849[0...5] Actual value correction phase voltages / ActVal_corr U_ph VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the phase correction voltages and and the drive converter phase voltages Index: [0] = Harmonics, phase U [1] = Harmonics, phase V [2] = Harmonics, phase W [3] = Meas val phase U [4] = Meas val phase V [5] = Meas val phase W p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 2 Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization. p1900 = 0: Function inhibited. p1900 = 2: Induction motors --> set p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0 Permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors --> set p1910 = 1, p1990 = 1 and p1960 = 0 1-428 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a revolution. For permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors, the encoder is adjusted with the next power-on command. The motor must be free to rotate and rotates through 1.5 revolutions of the motor encoder. Value: 0: 2: Inhibited Identify motor data at standstill Dependency: In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into. When selecting the motor data identification routine, the drive data set changeover is suppressed. Refer to: p1272, p1300, p1910 Refer to: F07990, A07991 Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2). To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977). It is not permissible to activate write protection during the motor identification (p7761). Note: The motor and control parameters are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out (initially at standstill, and then with the motor rotating). An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set. The power-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed, the drive automatically resets it. The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced by the motor size and the mechanical conditions. p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed. p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 2 Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization. The motor identification should first be performed with the motor stationary (p1900 = 1, 2; also refer to p1910). Based on this, additional motor and control parameters can be determined using the motor data identification with the motor rotating (p1900 = 1, 3; also refer to p1960). p1900 = 0: Function inhibited. p1900 = 1: Induction motors --> set p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1, 2 depending on p1300 Permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors --> set p1910 = 1, p1990 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1, 2 depending on p1300 When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a revolution. For permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors, the encoder is adjusted with the next power-on command. The motor must be free to rotate and rotates through 1.5 revolutions of the motor encoder. With the following power-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, a speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds. p1900 = 2: Induction motors --> set p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0 Permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors --> set p1910 = 1, p1990 = 1 and p1960 = 0 When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a revolution. For permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors, the encoder is adjusted with the next power-on command. The motor must be free to rotate and rotates through 1.5 revolutions of the motor encoder. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-429 Parameters List of parameters p1900 = 3: Sets p1960 = 0, 1, 2 depending on p1300 This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill. When the drive enable signals are present, with the next power-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, speed controller optimization by taking measurements at different motor speeds. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Inhibited Identify motor data at standstill and with motor rotating Identify motor data at standstill Identify motor data with motor rotating Dependency: In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into. When selecting the motor data identification routine, the drive data set changeover is suppressed. Refer to: p1272, p1300, p1910, p1960, p1990 Refer to: A07980, A07981, F07982, F07983, F07984, F07985, F07986, A07987, F07988, F07990, A07991 Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2). To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977). It is not permissible to activate write protection during the motor identification (p7761). p1900 = 3: This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill. Note: The motor and control parameters are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out (initially at standstill, and then with the motor rotating). An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set. The power-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed, the drive automatically resets it. The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced by the motor size and the mechanical conditions. p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed. p1901 Test pulse evaluation configuration / Test puls config VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Sets the configuration for the test pulse evaluation. Bit 00: Check for conductor-to-conductor short circuit once/always when the pulses are enabled. Bit 01: Check for ground fault once/always when the pulses are enabled. Bit 02: Activation of the tests selected using bit 00 and/or bit 01 each time the pulses are enabled Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Signal name Phase short-circuit test pulse active Ground fault detection test pulse active Test pulse at each pulse enable Dependency: Refer to: p0287 Note: Re bit 02=0: 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - If the test was successful once after POWER ON (see r1902.0), it is not repeated. Re bit 02=1: The test is not only performed after POWER ON, but also each time the pulses are enabled. If a conductor-to-conductor short-circuit is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.1. If a ground fault is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.2. 1-430 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1902 Test pulse evaluation status / Test puls ev stat VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the test pulse evaluation. Short-circuit test: Bit 0: The short-circuit test was executed without any fault. Bit 1: A phase short circuit has been detected. Bit 2: A ground fault test was successfully performed. Bit 3: A ground fault was detected. Bit 4: A test pulse longer than one sampling time has occurred Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 Note: If the ground fault test was selected, but not successfully performed, then sufficient current will not be able to be established during the test pulse. p1905 Parameter tuning selection / Par tune select VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Signal name Short-circuit test executed Phase short-circuit detected Ground fault test successfully performed Ground fault detected Identification pulse width greater than the minimum pulse width 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No FP - Can be changed: C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 90 Factory setting 0 The fine encoder calibration (TUNE_ENC_FINE) should be started during the first commissioning or after the encoder is replaced. The fine calibration starts when the pulses are enabled and performs a rotating measurement (approximately 1 minute). In this case, a setpoint speed of at least 40 % of the motor rated speed must be entered, and the torque must be less than half of the motor rated torque. The phases of the fine calibration of displayed using alarm A07976. The fine calibration ends with the calculation of p0431 for the following pulse inhibit. p1905 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the fine calibration. Value: 0: 90: Inactive Encoder fine tuning Dependency: If the motor encoder adjustment has not been performed (p3925, bit 4 = 0) or the encoder calibration is activated (p1990 != 0), then encoder fine calibration is prevented. Refer to: p1272, p1910, p1960, p1990 Refer to: A07976 Caution: During encoder fine calibration, the motor must be operated without a load - and if a motor holding brake is being used, this must be opened. Notice: For p1905 = 90 and with the pulses not enabled, the function is only executed the next time that the pulses are enabled. When selecting the encoder fine calibration, the changeover of the motor data sets is suppressed. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-431 Parameters List of parameters p1909[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor data identification control word / MotID STW Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the motor data identification. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 11 12 14 15 16 Note: Signal name Stator inductance estimate no measurement Cl.-loop current control w/ dead-beat controller Rotor time constant estimate no measurement Leakage inductance estimate no measurement Activates the identification dynamic leakage inductance Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time range Activate vibration damping De-activate vibration detection De-activate pulse measurement Lq Ld De-activate rotor resistance Rr measurement De-activate valve interlocking time measurement Determine only stator resistance, valve voltage fault, dead time Short motor identification (lower quality) 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - The following applies to permanent-magnet synchronous motors: Without de-selection in bit 11, in the closed-loop control mode, the direct inductance LD and the quadrature inductance Lq are measured at a low current. When de-selecting with bit 11 or in the U/f mode, the stator inductance is measured at half the rated motor current. If the stator is inductance is not measured but is to be estimated, then bit 0 should be set and bit 11 should be deselected. p1910 Motor data identification selection / MotID selection VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 26 Factory setting 1 Sets the motor data identification routine. The motor data identification routine is carried out after the next power-on command. p1910 = 1: All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parameters: p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p1825, p1828, p1829, p1830 After this, the control parameter p0340 = 3 is automatically calculated. Value: 0: 1: 2: 1-432 Inhibited Complete identification (ID) and acceptance of motor data Complete identification (ID) of motor data without acceptance (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: Dependency: ID of the saturation characteristic and acceptance ID of the saturation characteristic without acceptance ID of dynamic leakage inductance Lsig (r1920) without acceptance ID of lockout time (r1926) without acceptance ID of stator resistance Rs (r1912) without acceptance ID of stator inductance Ls (r1915) Rr (r1927) without acceptance ID of rotor time constant Tr (r1913) without acceptance ID of static leakage inductance Lsig (r1914) without acceptance Voltage vector input Voltage vector input without filter Rectangular voltage vector input without filter Triangular voltage vector input without filter Rectangular voltage vector input with filter Triangular voltage vector input with filter Enter voltage vector with DTC correction "Quick commissioning" must be carried out (p0010 = 1) before executing the motor data identification routine! In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into. When selecting the motor data identification routine, the drive data set changeover is suppressed. Refer to: p1272, p1900 Caution: After the motor data identification (p1910 > 0) has been selected, alarm A07991 is output and a motor data identification routine is carried out as follows at the next power-on command: - current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals. - during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution. - however, no torque torque is generated. Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2). To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977). Note: When setting p1910, the following should be observed: 1. "With acceptance" means: The parameters specified in the description are overwritten with the identified values and therefore have an influence on the controller setting. 2. "Without acceptance" means: The identified parameters are only displayed in the range r1912 ... r1926. The controller settings remain unchanged. 3. p1910 = 3, 4, 5 can only be selected for induction motors. p1911 Number of phases to be identified / Qty ph to ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of phases to be identified. Value: 1: 2: 3: Note: When identifying with several phases, the accuracy increases and also the time it takes to make the measurement. r1912[0...2] Identified stator resistance / R_stator ident VECTOR_G Description: 1 phase U 2 phases U, V 3 phases U, V, W Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Displays the identified stator resistance. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-433 Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1913[0...2] Identified rotor time constant / T_rotor ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the identified rotor time constant. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1914[0...2] Identified total leakage inductance / L_total_leak ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the identified total leakage inductance. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1915[0...2] Identified nominal stator inductance / L_stator ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1916[0...2] Identified stator inductance 1 / L_stator 1 ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 1st point of the saturation characteristic. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W 1-434 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1917[0...2] Identified stator inductance 2 / L_stator 2 ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 2nd point of the saturation characteristic. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1918[0...2] Identified stator inductance 3 / L_stator 3 ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 3rd point of the saturation characteristic. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1919[0...2] Identified stator inductance 4 / L_stator 4 ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 4th point of the saturation characteristic. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1920[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance / L_leak dyn ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the identified dynamic total leakage inductance. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-435 Parameters List of parameters r1921[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 1 / L_leak 1 dyn id VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the identified dynamic leakage inductance 1. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1922[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 2 / L_leak 2 dyn id VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the identified dynamic leakage inductance 2. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1923[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 3 / L_leak 3 dyn id VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the identified dynamic leakage inductance 3. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1924[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 4 / L_leak 4 dyn id VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the identified dynamic leakage inductance 4. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W 1-436 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1925[0...2] Identified threshold voltage / U_threshold ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Description: Displays the identified IGBT threshold voltage. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1926[0...2] Identified effective valve lockout time / t_lock_valve id VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [s] Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Description: Displays the identified effective valve lockout time. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1927[0...2] Identified rotor resistance / R_rotor ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays identified rotor resistance (on separately excited synchronous motors: damping resistance). Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W r1929[0...2] Identified cable resistance / R_cable ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the identified cable resistance. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-437 Parameters List of parameters r1934[0...9] VECTOR_G (n/M) q inductance identified / Lq ident Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mH] Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Description: Displays the identified (differential) q-inductance. Dependency: Refer to: r1935, p1959, p1960 Note: The Lq characteristic consists of the value pairs from p1934 and p1935 with the same index. This value corresponds to the value of the total leakage inductance (r0377). r1935[0...9] VECTOR_G (n/M) q inductance identification current / Lq I_ident Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the identification current to identify the q inductance ([0...9]). Dependency: Refer to: r1934, p1959, p1960 Note: The Lq characteristic consists of the value pairs from r1934 and r1935 with the same index. p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0001 1111 bin Description: Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 12 Signal name Enc test active Saturation characteristic identification Moment of inertia identification Re-calculates the speed controller parameters Speed controller optimization (vibration test) q leakage inductance ident. (for current controller adaptation) Measurement shortened 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Dependency: Refer to: F07988 Note: The encoder is only tested if the rotating measurement with encoder is selected (p1960 = 2). The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps: Bit 00: None Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369 Bit 02: p0341, p0342 Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1460, p1462, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496 Bit 04: Dependent on p1960 Bit 05: p0391, p0392, p0393, p1402.2 only for induction motors p1960 = 1, 3: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496 1-438 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p1960 = 2, 4: p1458, p1459, p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1496 The identification of the q leakage inductance can only be carried out for unloaded motors or motors with a low load (load approx. 30% below the rated motor torque). Only then is a current controller adaptation (p0391 ... p0393) parameterized if the q-leakage inductance under no-load conditions is at least 30 % higher than the total leakage inductance (p0356, p0358). Re bit 12 = 1: The selection only has an effect on the measurement p1960 = 1, 2. For the shortened measurement, the magnetizing current and moment of inertia are determined with a somewhat lower accuracy. p1960 Rotating measurement selection / Rot meas sel VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 0 Sets the rotating measurement. The rotating measurement is carried out after the next power-on command. The setting possibilities of the parameter depend on the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300). p1300 < 20 (U/f open-loop control): It is not possible to select rotating measurement or speed controller optimization. p1300 = 20, 22 (encoderless operation): Only rotating measurement or speed controller optimization can be selected in the encoderless mode. p1300 = 21, 23 (operation with encoder): Both versions (encoderless and with encoder) of the rotating measurement and speed controller optimization can be selected. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: Inhibited Rotating measurement in encoderless operation Rotating measurement with encoder Speed controller optimization in encoderless operation Speed controller optimization with encoder Dependency: Before the rotating measurement is carried out, the motor data identification routine (p1900, p1910, r3925) should have already been done. In the simulation mode, a value of 1 cannot be written into the parameter. When selecting the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed. Refer to: p1272, p1300, p1900, p1959 Danger: Refer to: A07987 For drives with a mechanical system that limits the distance moved, it must be ensured that this is not reached during the rotating measurement. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried out. Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2). To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977). Note: When the rotating measurement is activated, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971, p0977). Parameter changes are automatically made for the rotating measurement (e.g. p1120); this is the reason that up to the end of the measurement, and if no faults are present, no manual changes should be made. The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120, p1121) are limited, for the rotating measurement, to 900 s. For speed controller optimization with encoder (p1960 = 2, 4), the speed controller for encoderless operation is also pre-assigned (p1470, p1472). Depending on whether the speed controller optimization is carried out with or without encoder, different Kp/Tn adaptations of the speed controller are set (p1464, p1465). If the drive should be controlled with as well as without speed encoder, then we recommend the use of two drive data sets (p0180). These can then be executed with different speed controller adaptations. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-439 Parameters List of parameters p1961 Saturation characteristic speed to determine / Sat_char n determ VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 26 [%] Max 75 [%] Factory setting 40 [%] Sets the speed to determine the saturation characteristic and the encoder test. The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency). Dependency: Refer to: p0310, p1959 Refer to: F07983 Note: The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load. r1962[0...4] Saturation characteristic magnetizing current / Sat_char I_mag VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the magnetizing currents of the identified saturation characteristic. The values are referred to r0331. After they have been determined, the values are transferred to p0366 ... p0369. Index: [0] = Value 1 [1] = Value 2 [2] = Value 3 [3] = Value 4 [4] = Value 5 Dependency: Refer to: r0331 r1963[0...4] Saturation characteristic magnetizing inductance / Sat_char L_main VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the magnetizing inductances of the identified saturation characteristic. The values are referred to r0382. Index: [0] = Value 1 [1] = Value 2 [2] = Value 3 [3] = Value 4 [4] = Value 5 Dependency: Refer to: r0382 1-440 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1964[0...4] Saturation characteristic rotor flux / Sat_char rot flux VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the rotor flux values of the identified saturation characteristic. After they have been determined, the values are transferred to p0362 ... p0365. Index: [0] = Value 1 [1] = Value 2 [2] = Value 3 [3] = Value 4 [4] = Value 5 p1965 Speed_ctrl_opt speed / n_opt speed VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10 [%] Max 75 [%] Factory setting 40 [%] Sets the speed for the identification of the moment of inertia and the vibration test. Induction motor: The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency). Synchronous motor: The percentage value is referred to the minimum from p0310 (rated motor frequency) and p1082 (maximum speed). Dependency: Refer to: p0310, p1959 Refer to: F07984, F07985 Note: In order to calculate the inertia, sudden speed changes are carried out - the specified value corresponds to the lower speed setpoint. This value is increased by 20 % for the upper speed value. The q leakage inductance (refer to p1959 bit 5) is determined at zero speed and at 50% of p1965 - however, with a maximum output frequency of 15 Hz and at a minimum of 10% of the rated motor speed. p1967 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor / n_opt dyn_factor VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 [%] Max 400 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Description: Sets the dynamic response factor for speed controller optimization. Dependency: Refer to: p1959 Refer to: F07985 Note: For a rotating measurement, this parameter can be used to optimize the speed controller. p1967 = 100 % --> speed controller optimization according to a symmetric optimum. p1967 > 100 % --> optimization with a higher dynamic response (Kp higher, Tn lower). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-441 Parameters List of parameters r1968 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual / n_opt dyn_fact act VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the dynamic factor which is actually achieved for the vibration test Dependency: Refer to: p1959, p1967 Refer to: F07985 Note: This dynamic factor only refers to the control mode of the speed controller set in p1960. r1969 Speed_ctrl_opt moment of inertia determined / n_opt M_inert det VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kgm] Max - [kgm] Factory setting - [kgm] Displays the determined moment of inertia of the drive. After it has been determined, the value is transferred to p0341, p0342. Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2 NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2 Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1959 Refer to: F07984 r1970[0...1] Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test vibration frequency determined / n_opt f_vibration VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test. Index: [0] = Frequency low [1] = Frequency high Dependency: Refer to: p1959 Refer to: F07985 r1971[0...1] Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test standard deviation determined / n_opt std. deviat. VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the standard deviations of the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test Index: [0] = Standard deviation of low frequency [1] = Standard deviation of high frequency Dependency: Refer to: p1959 Refer to: F07985 1-442 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1972[0...1] Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test number of periods determined / n_opt period qty VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the period number determined by the vibration test. Index: [0] = No. of periods of the low frequency [1] = No. of periods of the high frequency Dependency: Refer to: p1959 Refer to: F07985 r1973 Rotating measurement, encoder test pulse number determined / n_opt pulse No. VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of pulses determined during the vibration test. Note: A negative signal indicates an incorrect polarity of the encoder signal. r1979.0...11 BO: Speed_ctrl_opt status / n_opt status VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status to check and monitor the states of speed controller optimization. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 p1980[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Signal name Speed controller optimization activated Speed controller optimization completed Speed controller optimization interrupted Enc test active Saturation char. identification active Moment of inertia identification active Recalc. speed controller parameters active Speed controller vibration test active Magnetizing inductance adapt. active Operation with encoder after encoderless operation q-leakage inductance identification 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No FP - Yes No - PolID technique / PolID technique Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 10 Factory setting 4 Sets the pole position identification technique. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-443 Parameters List of parameters Value: 1: 4: 6: 10: Voltage pulsing 1st harmonics Voltage pulsing 2-stage Voltage pulsing 2-stage inverse DC current injection Dependency: In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into. Refer to: p1272, p1780 Note: Voltage pulse technique (p1980 = 1, 4, 6) cannot be applied to separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5) and for for operation with sine-wave output filters (p0230). p1982[0...n] PolID selection / PolID selection VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description: Activates the pole position identification routine to determine the commutation angle and to carry out a plausibility check. Value: 0: 1: 2: Recommend.: Re p1982 = 1: Pole position identification off Pole position identification for commutation Pole position identification for plausibility check This is used for synchronous motors with motor encoder without absolute data. The information/data regarding the absolute commutation angle is supplied via a track C/D, Hall sensors, an absolute encoder or from the pole position identification routine. Re p1982 = 2: This is used for synchronous motor with motor encoder with absolute data to check this data. For VECTOR, the following applies: With p1982 = 2, each time the pulses are enabled it is checked whether the absolute position supplied from the encoder does not exceed a deviation of 45 degrees to the identified pole wheel position. With separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5), pole position identification cannot be selected if an encoder with position data is used (e.g. SSI encoder). Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990 Note: For encoderless operation, the pole position identification routine is selected with p1780.6 r1984 PolID angular difference / PolID ang diff VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [] Max - [] Factory setting - [] Description: Displays the angular difference between the actual electrical commutation angle and the angle determined by the pole position identification. Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, r1985, r1987, p1990 Note: PolID: Pole position identification When the pole position identification routine is executed several times using p1983, the spread of the measured values can be determined using this value. At the same position, the spread should be less than 2 degrees electrical. 1-444 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r1985 PolID saturation curve / PolID sat_char VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Displays the saturation characteristic of the pole position identification routine (saturation technique). Displays the current characteristic of the pole position identification routine (elasticity technique). Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1987, p1990 Note: PolID: Pole position identification Regarding the saturation technique: The values for the characteristic of the last saturation-based pole position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to record signals (e.g. trace). r1987 PolID trigger characteristic / PolID trig_char VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the trigger characteristic of the pole position identification routine. The values for the characteristic of the last pole position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to record signals (e.g. trace). The values for trigger characteristic and saturation characteristic are always output in synchronism from a time perspective. Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, p1990 Note: PolID: Pole position identification The following information and data can be taken from the trigger characteristic. - the value -100% marks the angle at the start of the measurement. - the value +100 % marks the commutation angle determined from the pole position identification routine. p1990 Encoder adjustment, determine angular commutation offset / Enc_adj det ang VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 This function is only required for synchronous motors and can be started when commissioning for the first time or after replacing an encoder. The function acts on the active motor data set. Alarm A07971 is output while the angular commutation offset is being determined. p1990 is automatically set to 0 after the angular commutation offset has been determined. For p1990 = 1 (encoder adjustment with transfer), the following applies: The angular commutation offset is determined and transferred into p0431. For p1990 = 2 (encoder adjustment for checking), the following applies: The angular commutation offset is determined and is not transferred into p0431. For a deviation of more than 6 electrical, fault F07413 is output. For p1990 = 3 (encoder adjustment in operation), the following applies: PolID procedure runs before the zero mark detection. The angular commutation offset is determined and transferred into p0431. A fine adjustment (p1905) is then optionally possible. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-445 Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: De-activated Activated with transfer Activated for checking Activates encoder adjustment in operation Dependency: In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into. When selecting the encoder adjustment, the changeover of the drive data sets is suppressed. Encoder adjustment is only carried out if the function module for "speed/torque control" is activated (r0108.2 = 1). Refer to: p0325, p0329, p0431, p1272, p1900 Caution: When the encoder is being adjusted, the motor must be operated without a load - and if a motor holding brake is being used, this must be opened. p1991[0...n] Motor changeover, angular commutation correction / Ang_com corr VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -180 [] Max 180 [] Factory setting 0 [] Description: Sets the angle that is added to the commutating angle. Caution: If the angular correction is not correctly set, when changing over and with closed-loop torque control, the motor can accelerate to high speeds in spite of the fact that a setpoint of zero has been entered. p1999[0...n] Ang. commutation offset calibr. and PollD scaling / Com_ang_offs scal VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10 [%] Max 5000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Sets the scaling for the runtime of the automatic encoder calibration and of the pole position identification technique in which the current is injected. Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342 Caution: For p1999 > 100 % (setting large moments of inertia) the following applies: There is no locked rotor monitoring (F07970 fault value 2). The plausibility check of the encoder signal (F07970 fault value 4) only checks the sign. Note: For high moments of inertia, it is practical to scale the runtime of the calibration higher. p2000 Reference frequency / f_ref B_INF Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.10 [Hz] Max 1000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 50.00 [Hz] Description: Sets the reference quantity for the frequency. All frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) 1-446 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref ENC Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 6.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 3000.00 [rpm] Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency. All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. p2000 Reference velocity, reference frequency / v_ref f_ref ENC (Lin_enc) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.60 [m/min] Max 600.00 [m/min] Factory setting 120.00 [m/min] Sets the reference quantity for velocity and frequency. All velocities or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference velocity (in (m/min) / 60) Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 6.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 3000.00 [rpm] Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency. All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in ((rpm) / 60) x pole pair number) Dependency: Refer to: p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004 Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. Example 1: The signal of an analog input (e.g. r4055[0]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual percentage input value is cyclically converted into the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p2000). Example 2: The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2050[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual input value is cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified scaling 4000 hex. This percentage value is converted to the absolute speed setpoint via reference speed (p2000). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-447 Parameters List of parameters p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10 [Vrms] Max 100000 [Vrms] Factory setting 1000 [Vrms] Sets the reference quantity for voltages. All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. This also applies for direct voltage values (= rms value) like the DC-link voltage. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). Note: This reference quantity also applies to direct voltage values. It is not interpreted as rms value, but as DC voltage value. Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. For infeed units, the parameterized device supply voltage (p0210) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity. Example: The actual value of the DC link voltage (r0070) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual voltage value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference voltage (p2001) and output according to the parameterized scaling. p2002 Reference current / I_ref B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.10 [Arms] Max 100000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 100.00 [Arms] Sets the reference quantity for currents. All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). Notice: If various DDS are used with different motor data, then the reference quantities remain the same as these are not changed over with the DDS. The resulting conversion factor should be taken into account (e.g. for trace records). Example: p2002 = 100 A Reference quantity 100 A corresponds to 100 % p0305[0] = 100 A Rated motor current 100 A for MDS0 in DDS0 --> 100 % corresponds to 100 % of the rated motor current p0305[1] = 50 A Rated motor current 50 A for MDS1 in DDS1 --> 100 % corresponds to 200 % of the rated motor current Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. For infeed units, the rated line current, which is obtained from the rated power and parameterized rated line supply voltage (p2002 = r0206 / p0210 / 1.73) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity. Example: The actual value of a phase current (r0069[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual current value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference current (p2002) and output according to the parameterized scaling. 1-448 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2003 Reference torque / M_ref VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: 7_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.01 [Nm] Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 1.00 [Nm] Sets the reference quantity for torque. All torques specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. Example: The actual value of the total torque (r0079) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual torque is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference torque (p2003) and output according to the parameterized scaling. r2004 Reference power / P_ref B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: 14_10 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kW] Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Displays the reference quantity for power. All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). Dependency: This value is calculated as follows: Infeed: Calculated from voltage times current. Closed-loop control: Calculated from torque times speed. Refer to: p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003 Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. The reference power is calculated as follows: - 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor) - reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed) p2005 Reference angle / Reference angle VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 90.00 [] Max 180.00 [] Factory setting 90.00 [] Sets the reference quantity for angle. All angles specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-449 Parameters List of parameters p2006 Reference temp / Ref temp B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 50.00 [C] Max 300.00 [C] Factory setting 100.00 [C] Description: Sets the reference quantity for temperature. All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). p2007 Reference acceleration / a_ref VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.01 [rev/s] Max 500000.00 [rev/s] Factory setting 0.01 [rev/s] Sets the reference quantity for acceleration rates. All acceleration rates specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). Note: For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. The reference acceleration is calculated as follows: Reference speed (p2000) converted from 1/min to 1/s divided by 1 s --> p2007 = p2000 [rpm] / (60 [s/min] * 1 [s]) r2019[0...7] Comm int error statistics / Comm err CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the receive errors at the commissioning interface (RS232). Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams [1] = Number of rejected telegrams [2] = Number of framing errors [3] = Number of overrun errors [4] = Number of parity errors [5] = Number of starting character errors [6] = Number of checksum errors [7] = Number of length errors p2020 Field bus interface baud rate / Field bus baud CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 4 Max 13 Factory setting 8 Description: 1-450 Sets the baud rate for the fieldbus interface USS. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Value: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud 38400 baud 57600 baud 76800 baud 93750 baud 115200 baud 187500 baud Note: Fieldbus IF: Fieldbus interface Changes only become effective after POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected. p2021 Field bus interface address / Field bus address CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 31 Factory setting 0 Description: Displays or sets the address for the fieldbus interface USS. The address can be set as follows: 1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit. --> p2021 displays the address setting. --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. 2) Using p2021 --> Only if an address of 0 or an address which is invalid for the fieldbus selected in p2030 has been set using the address switch. --> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM". --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. Dependency: Refer to: p2030 Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected. p2022 Field bus int USS PZD no. / Field bus USS PZD CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface. Dependency: Refer to: p2030 Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-451 Parameters List of parameters p2023 Field bus int USS PKW no. / Field bus USS PKW CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 127 Factory setting 127 Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface. Value: 0: 3: 4: 127: Dependency: Refer to: p2030 Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. PKW 0 words PKW 3 words PKW 4 words PKW variable r2029[0...7] Field bus int error statistics / Field bus error CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the receive errors on the field bus interface (USS). Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams [1] = Number of rejected telegrams [2] = Number of framing errors [3] = Number of overrun errors [4] = Number of parity errors [5] = Number of starting character errors [6] = Number of checksum errors [7] = Number of length errors p2030 Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 3 Max 6 Factory setting 3 Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface. Value: 3: 6: Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON. PROFIBUS USS(RS232) The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. r2032 Master control, control word effective / PcCtrl STW eff B_INF Description: 1-452 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the effective control word 1 (STW1) of the drive for the master control. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 03 07 10 Signal name ON/OFF1 OC / OFF2 Operation enable Acknowledge fault Master ctrl by PLC 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No FP - Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be transferred from another automation device. Note: OC: Operating condition r2032 Master control, control word effective / PcCtrl STW eff VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the effective control word 1 (STW1) of the drive for the master control. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be transferred from another automation device. Note: OC: Operating condition p2035 Fieldbus interface USS PIV drive object number / Fieldbus USS DO_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 62 Factory setting 2 Signal name ON/OFF1 OC / OFF2 OC / OFF3 Operation enable Ramp-function generator enable Start ramp-function generator Speed setpoint enable Acknowledge fault Jog bit 0 Jog bit 1 Master ctrl by PLC 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No Description: Sets the drive object number for communication via the field bus interface (USS). Dependency: Refer to: p0978 Note: p2035 defines the destination for USS parameter requests (PIV). FP 3030 3030 - p0978[0] defines the destination for USS process data (PZD). The parameter is available globally on all drive objects. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-453 Parameters List of parameters p2037 IF1 PROFIdrive STW1.10 = 0 mode / IF1 PD STW1.10=0 B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the processing mode for PROFIdrive STW1.10 "master control by PLC". Generally, control world 1 is received with the first receive word (PZD1) (this is in conformance to the PROFIdrive profile). The behavior of STW1.10 = 0 corresponds to that of the PROFIdrive profile. For other applications that deviate from this, the behavior can be adapted using this particular parameter. Value: 0: 1: 2: Recommend.: Do not change the setting p2037 = 0. Note: If the STW1 is not transferred according to the PROFIdrive with PZD1 (with bit 10 "master control by PLC"), then p2037 should be set to 2. p2038 IF1 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode VECTOR_G Description: Freeze setpoints and continue to process sign-of-life Freeze setpoints and sign-of-life Do not freeze setpoints Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Sets the interface mode of the PROFIdrive control words and status words. When selecting a telegram via p0922 (p2079), this parameter influences the device-specific assignment of the bits in the control and status words. Value: 0: 1: 2: Dependency: Refer to: p0922, p2079 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: For p0922 (p2079) = 100 ... 199, p2038 is automatically set to 1 and p2038 can no longer be changed. This means that for these telegrams, the "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode is set and cannot be changed. p2039 Select debug monitor interface / Debug monit select CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: SINAMICS SIMODRIVE 611 universal VIK-NAMUR Sets the serial interface for the debug monitor. The serial interface for the debug monitor is COM1 (X140) or COM2 (internal). Value = 0: COM2 (internal) Value = 1: COM1 (X140), commissioning protocol is de-activated Value = 2: COM2 (internal) Value = 3: Reserved 1-454 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1999999 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Description: Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the fieldbus interface. If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output. Dependency: Refer to: F01910 Note: 0: The monitoring is de-activated. p2042 PROFIBUS Ident Number / PB Ident No. CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the PROFIBUS Ident Number (PNO-ID). SINAMICS can be operated with various identities on PROFIBUS. This allows the use of a PROFIBUS GSD that is independent of the device (e.g. PROFIdrive VIK-NAMUR with Ident Number 3AA0 hex). Value: 0: 1: SINAMICS VIK-NAMUR Note: Every change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. r2043.0...2 BO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD state / IF1 PD PZD state CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIdrive PZD state. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Dependency: Refer to: p2044 Note: When using the "setpoint failure" signal, the bus can be monitored and an application-specific response triggered when the setpoint fails. p2044 IF1 PROFIdrive fault delay / IF1 PD fault delay B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [s] Max 100 [s] Factory setting 0 [s] Description: Signal name Setpoint failure Clock cycle synchronous operation active Fieldbus oper 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Sets the delay time to initiate fault F01910 after a setpoint failure. The time until the fault is initiated can be used by the application. This means that is is possible to respond to the failure while the drive is still operational (e.g. emergency retraction). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-455 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r2043 Refer to: F01910 p2045 CI: PB/PN clock synchronous controller sign-of-life signal source / PB/PN ctrSoL S_src ENC, VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Connector input for the sign-of-life of the clock synchronous PROFIBUS/PROFINET controller. The sign-of-life is expected at bits 12 to 15. Bits 0 to 11 are not evaluated. The sign-of-life signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the controller. Dependency: Refer to: p0925, r2065 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p2047 PROFIBUS additional monitoring time / PB suppl t_monit CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 20000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the additional monitoring time to monitor the process data received via PROFIBUS. The additional monitoring time enables short bus faults to be compensated. If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output. Recommend.: Do not set the additional monitoring time for clock-synchronous operation. Dependency: Refer to: F01910 Note: For controller STOP, the additional monitoring time is not effective. p2048 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD sampling time / IF1 PZD t_sample CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.00 [ms] Max 16.00 [ms] Factory setting 4.00 [ms] Description: Sets the sampling time for the cyclic interface 1 (IF1). Note: The system only permits certain sampling times and after writing to this parameter, displays the value that has actually been set. For clock cycle synchronous operation, the specified bus cycle time applies (Tdp). r2050[0...9] B_INF CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive word / IF1 PZD recv word Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 1-456 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2050[0...19] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive word / IF1 PZD recv word CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2050[0...3] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive word / IF1 PZD recv word ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2440, 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 Dependency: Refer to: r2060 Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types. Note: IF1: Interface 1 A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-457 Parameters List of parameters r2050[0...4] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive word / IF1 PZD recv word TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2050[0...31] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive word / IF1 PZD recv word VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2440, 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Dependency: Refer to: r2060 1-458 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types. Note: IF1: Interface 1 p2051[0...9] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060. B_INF Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: IF1: Interface 1 p2051[0...24] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-459 Parameters List of parameters [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: IF1: Interface 1 p2051[0...11] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word ENC Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2470 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 Dependency: Refer to: p2061 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: IF1: Interface 1 p2051[0...4] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: IF1: Interface 1 p2051[0...31] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2470 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 1-460 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Dependency: Refer to: p2061 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2053[0...9] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - 1-461 Parameters List of parameters 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note: Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF - IF1: Interface 1 r2053[0...24] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 1-462 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2053[0...11] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2450, 2470 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2061 Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2053[0...4] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-463 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Note: IF1: Interface 1 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - r2053[0...31] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2450, 2470 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 1-464 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2061 Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2054 PROFIBUS status / PB status CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting - Description: Status display for the PROFIBUS interface. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: Note: Re r2054 = 3: 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - OFF No connection (search for baud rate) Connection OK (baud rate found) Cyclic connection with master (data exchange) Cyclic data OK In state 3 (the LED flashes green), a cyclic connection has been established to the PROFIBUS master; however, one of the following prerequisites is missing for cyclic operation: - No setpoints are being received as the PROFIBUS master is in the STOP condition. Only for clock-cycle synchronous operation, the following applies: - The drive is not in synchronism as the global control (GC) has an error. Re r2054 = 4: In the status 4 (LED green), the cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master has been established and setpoints are being received. The clock cycle synchronization is OK, the global control (GC) is error-free. This state does not provide any statement regarding the quality of the clock cycle synchronous sign-of-life characters on the drive objects. r2055[0...2] PROFIBUS diagnostics standard / PB diag standard CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Diagnostics display for the PROFIBUS interface. Index: [0] = Master bus address [1] = Master input total length bytes [2] = Master output total length bytes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-465 Parameters List of parameters r2057 PROFIBUS address switch diagnostics / PB addr_sw diag CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the setting of the PROFIBUS address switch "DP ADDRESS" on the Control Unit. Dependency: Refer to: p0918 r2060[0...2] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / IF1 PZD recv DW ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2440, 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 Dependency: Refer to: r2050 Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types. Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2060[0...30] CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / IF1 PZD recv DW A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060. VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2440, 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 [15] = PZD 16 + 17 [16] = PZD 17 + 18 [17] = PZD 18 + 19 [18] = PZD 19 + 20 [19] = PZD 20 + 21 1-466 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [20] = PZD 21 + 22 [21] = PZD 22 + 23 [22] = PZD 23 + 24 [23] = PZD 24 + 25 [24] = PZD 25 + 26 [25] = PZD 26 + 27 [26] = PZD 27 + 28 [27] = PZD 28 + 29 [28] = PZD 29 + 30 [29] = PZD 30 + 31 [30] = PZD 31 + 32 Dependency: Refer to: r2050 Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types. A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060. A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used. Note: IF1: Interface 1 p2061[0...10] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send double word / IF1 PZD send DW ENC Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2470 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 Dependency: Refer to: p2051 Notice: A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2051 or r2061. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: IF1: Interface 1 p2061[0...30] CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send double word / IF1 PZD send DW VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2470 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-467 Parameters List of parameters [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 [15] = PZD 16 + 17 [16] = PZD 17 + 18 [17] = PZD 18 + 19 [18] = PZD 19 + 20 [19] = PZD 20 + 21 [20] = PZD 21 + 22 [21] = PZD 22 + 23 [22] = PZD 23 + 24 [23] = PZD 24 + 25 [24] = PZD 25 + 26 [25] = PZD 26 + 27 [26] = PZD 27 + 28 [27] = PZD 28 + 29 [28] = PZD 29 + 30 [29] = PZD 30 + 31 [30] = PZD 31 + 32 Dependency: Refer to: p2051 Notice: A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2051 or r2061. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2063[0...10] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word / IF1 diag send DW ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2450, 2470 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1-468 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 Bit 25 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 Bit 30 Bit 31 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used. Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2063[0...30] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word / IF1 diag send DW VECTOR_G - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2450, 2470 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the PROFIdrive controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 [15] = PZD 16 + 17 [16] = PZD 17 + 18 [17] = PZD 18 + 19 [18] = PZD 19 + 20 [19] = PZD 20 + 21 [20] = PZD 21 + 22 [21] = PZD 22 + 23 [22] = PZD 23 + 24 [23] = PZD 24 + 25 [24] = PZD 25 + 26 [25] = PZD 26 + 27 [26] = PZD 27 + 28 [27] = PZD 28 + 29 [28] = PZD 29 + 30 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-469 Parameters List of parameters [29] = PZD 30 + 31 [30] = PZD 31 + 32 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 Bit 25 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 Bit 30 Bit 31 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used. Note: IF1: Interface 1 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF r2064[0...7] PB/PN diagnostics clock cycle synchronism / PB/PN diag clock CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: FP - Displays the last parameter received from the PROFIBUS/PROFINET controller for clock synchronism. The parameters for clock synchronism are created when configuring the bus and are transferred at the start of cyclic operation from the controller to the device. Index: [0] = Clock synchronous mode activated [1] = Bus cycle time (Tdp) [s] [2] = Master cycle time (Tmapc) [s] [3] = Instant of actual value acquisition (Ti) [s] [4] = Instant of setpoint acquisition (To) [s] [5] = Data exchange interval (Tdx) [s] [6] = PLL window (Tpll-w) [1/12 s] [7] = PLL delay time (Tpll-d) [1/12 s] 1-470 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r2065 PB/PN controller sign of life diagnostics / PB/PN ctr SoL diag ENC, VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays how often the sign-of-life from the clock synchronous PROFIBUS/PROFINET controller last failed. An appropriate fault is output when the tolerance, specified in p0925, is exceeded. Dependency: Refer to: F01912 r2067[0...1] IF1 PZD maximum interconnected / IF1 PZDmaxIntercon B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Display for the maximum interconnected PZD in the receive/send direction Index 0: receive (r2050, r2060) Index 1: send (p2051, p2061) r2074[0...9] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF1diag addr recv B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 125: Bus address of the sender 65535: not assigned (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-471 Parameters List of parameters r2074[0...19] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF1diag addr recv CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 125: Bus address of the sender 65535: not assigned r2074[0...3] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF1diag addr recv ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 125: Bus address of the sender 65535: not assigned 1-472 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r2074[0...4] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF1diag addr recv TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 125: Bus address of the sender 65535: not assigned r2074[0...31] VECTOR_G IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF1diag addr recv Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-473 Parameters List of parameters Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 125: Bus address of the sender 65535: not assigned r2075[0...9] B_INF IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF1 diag offs recv Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned r2075[0...19] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF1 diag offs recv CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 1-474 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned r2075[0...3] ENC IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF1 diag offs recv Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned r2075[0...4] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF1 diag offs recv TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned r2075[0...31] VECTOR_G IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF1 diag offs recv Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-475 Parameters List of parameters [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned r2076[0...9] B_INF IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned 1-476 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r2076[0...24] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned r2076[0...11] ENC IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-477 Parameters List of parameters Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned r2076[0...4] IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned r2076[0...31] VECTOR_G IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 1-478 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned r2077[0...15] PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses / PB diag peer addr CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the addresses of the slaves (peers) where peer-to-peer data transfer has been configured via PROFIBUS. p2079 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / IF1 PD PZD tel ext B_INF Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 370 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Sets the send and receive telegram. Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded. For p0922 < 999 the following applies: p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are inhibited. For p0922 = 999 the following applies: p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set. For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies: The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended. Value: 370: 371: 999: Dependency: Refer to: p0922 p2079 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / IF1 PD PZD tel ext CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 390 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Description: SIEMENS telegram 370, PZD-1/1 SIEMENS telegram 371, PZD-5/8 Free telegram configuration with BICO Sets the send and receive telegram. Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded. For p0922 < 999 the following applies: p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are inhibited. For p0922 = 999 the following applies: p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-479 Parameters List of parameters For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies: The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended. Value: 390: 391: 392: 393: 394: 395: 999: p2079 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / IF1 PD PZD tel ext ENC Description: SIEMENS telegram 390, PZD-2/2 SIEMENS telegram 391, PZD-3/7 SIEMENS telegram 392, PZD-3/15 SIEMENS telegram 393, PZD-4/21 SIEMENS telegram 394, PZD-3/3 SIEMENS telegram 395, PZD-4/25 Free telegram configuration with BICO Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 81 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Sets the send and receive telegram. Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded. For p0922 < 999 the following applies: p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are inhibited. For p0922 = 999 the following applies: p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set. For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies: The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended. Value: 81: 82: 83: 999: Dependency: Refer to: p0922 p2079 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / IF1 PD PZD tel ext VECTOR_G Description: SIEMENS telegram 81, PZD-2/6 SIEMENS telegram 82, PZD-2/7 SIEMENS telegram 83, PZD-2/8 Free telegram configuration with BICO Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Sets the send and receive telegram. Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded. For p0922 < 999 the following applies: p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are inhibited. For p0922 = 999 the following applies: p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set. For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies: The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended. Value: 1: 2: 20: 220: 352: 999: Dependency: Refer to: p0922 1-480 Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2 Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4 Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6 SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10 SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6 Free telegram configuration with BICO (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2079 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / IF1 PD PZD tel ext VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 999 Factory setting 999 Sets the send and receive telegram. Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded. For p0922 < 999 the following applies: p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are inhibited. For p0922 = 999 the following applies: p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set. For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies: The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended. Value: 1: 2: 3: 4: 20: 220: 352: 999: Dependency: Refer to: p0922 p2080[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1 B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2 Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4 Standard telegram 3, PZD-5/9 Standard telegram 4, PZD-6/14 Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6 SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10 SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6 Free telegram configuration with BICO Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2472 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form status word 1. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-481 Parameters List of parameters p2081[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 2 / Bin/con ZSW2 B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2472 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form status word 2. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: For clock synchronous operation, bit 12 to 15 to transfer the sign-of-life are reserved in status word 2 - and may not be freely interconnected. p2082[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 3 / Bin/con ZSW3 B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2472 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 1-482 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. p2083[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 4 / Bin/con ZSW4 B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2472 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 4. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089 p2084[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 5 / Bin/con ZSW5 B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2472 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 5. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-483 Parameters List of parameters [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089 p2088[0...4] Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2472 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter. Index: [0] = Status word 1 [1] = Status word 2 [2] = Free status word 3 [3] = Free status word 4 [4] = Free status word 5 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089 r2089[0...4] CO: Send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2472 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word. Index: [0] = Status word 1 [1] = Status word 2 [2] = Free status word 3 [3] = Free status word 4 [4] = Free status word 5 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 1-484 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 1 signal ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF FP - FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083 Note: r2089 together with p2080 to p2084 forms five binector-connector converters. r2090.0...15 BO: IF1 PROFIBUS PZD1 receive bit-serial / IF1 PZD1 recv bitw B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received from the PROFIdrive controller. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2091.0...15 BO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial / IF1 PZD2 recv bitw B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIdrive controller. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-485 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2092.0...15 BO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial / IF1 PZD3 recv bitw CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received from the PROFIdrive controller. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note: IF1: Interface 1 r2093.0...15 BO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial / IF1 PZD4 recv bitw CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - FP - FP - Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received from the PROFIdrive controller. Bit field: Bit 00 01 1-486 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 1 signal ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note: Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF - IF1: Interface 1 r2094.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller. The PZD is selected via p2099[0]. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2099 r2095.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller. The PZD is selected via p2099[1]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-487 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2099 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - p2098[0...1] Inverter connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter. Using p2098[0], the signals of CI: p2099[0] are influenced. Using p2098[1], the signals of CI: p2099[1] are influenced. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: r2094, r2095, p2099 1-488 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2099[0...1] CI: Connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2468 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter. A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on (interconnection). Dependency: Refer to: r2094, r2095 Note: From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted. p2099[0...1] together with r2094.0...15 and r2095.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters: Connector input p2099[0] to binector output in r2094.0...15 Connector input p2099[1] to binector output in r2095.0...15 p2100[0...19] Setting the fault number for fault response / F_no F response All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8075 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the faults for which the fault response should be changed Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index. Refer to: p2101 Notice: For the following cases, it is not possible to re-parameterize the fault response to a fault: - if there is no existing fault number. - the message type is not "fault" (F). Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved. p2101[0...19] Setting the fault response / Fault response B_INF Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8075 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the fault response for the selected fault. Value: 0: 1: 2: Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index. Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved. NONE OFF1 OFF2 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-489 Parameters List of parameters p2101[0...19] CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Setting the fault response / Fault response Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8075 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 0 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the fault response for the selected fault. Value: 0: Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index. Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved. p2101[0...19] Setting the fault response / Fault response VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8075 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 7 Factory setting 0 NONE Description: Sets the fault response for the selected fault. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index. NONE OFF1 OFF2 OFF3 STOP1 (being developed) STOP2 Internal armature short-circuit / DC braking ENCODER (p0491) Refer to: p2100 Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved. The fault response can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification (see the List Manual, chapter "Faults and alarms"). Example: F12345 and fault response = OFF3 (OFF1, OFF2, NONE) --> The default fault response OFF3 can be changed to OFF1, OFF2 or NONE. Re value = 1 (OFF1): Braking along the ramp-function generator down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit. Re value = 2 (OFF2): Internal/external pulse inhibit. Re value = 3 (OFF3): Braking along the OFF3 down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit. Re value = 5 (STOP2): n_set = 0 Re value = 6 (armature short-circuit, internal/DC braking): The value can only be set for all motor data sets when p1231 = 3, 4. a) For synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx), an internal armature short-circuit is executed. b) For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx), a DC braking is initiated. Re value = 7 (ENCODER (p0491)): The fault response set in p0491 is executed if applicable. 1-490 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: IASC: Internal Armature Short Circuit DCBRK: DC braking p2102 BI: Acknowledge all faults / Ackn all faults CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2546, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to acknowledge all faults at all drive objects of the drive system. Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal. p2103[0...n] BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2441, 2442, 2443, 2447, 2475, 2546, 9220, 9677, 9678 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal. p2103 BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal. p2104[0...n] BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2546, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults. Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-491 Parameters List of parameters p2104 BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults. Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal. p2105[0...n] BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2546, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults. Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal. p2105 BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults. Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal. p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1 B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2546 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 1. Dependency: Refer to: F07860 Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal. If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects. 1-492 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2106 BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 1. Dependency: Refer to: F07860 Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal. If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects. p2107[0...n] B_INF, VECTOR_G BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2546 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 2. Dependency: Refer to: F07861 Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal. If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects. p2107 BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 2. Dependency: Refer to: F07861 Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal. If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects. p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3 B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2546 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-493 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p3110, p3111, p3112 Refer to: F07862 Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal. If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects. p2108 BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated Dependency: Refer to: p3110, p3111, p3112 Refer to: F07862 Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal. If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects. r2109[0...63] All objects Fault time removed in milliseconds / t_flt resolved ms Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault was removed. Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2114, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122 Notice: The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds). Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945. r2110[0...63] Alarm number / Alarm number All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: 1-494 This parameter is identical to r2122. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset. Dependency: When p2111 is set to 0, the following is initiated: - all of the alarms of the alarm buffer that have gone [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63]. - the alarm buffer [0...7] is deleted. Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125 Note: The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON. p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1 B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2546 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 1. Dependency: Refer to: A07850 Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal. p2112 BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 1. Dependency: Refer to: A07850 Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal. r2114[0...1] System runtime total / Sys runtime tot CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit. The time comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days). After r2114[0] has reached a value of 86.400.000 ms (24 hours) this value is reset and r2114[1] is incremented. Index: [0] = Milliseconds [1] = Days Dependency: Refer to: r0948, r2109, r2123, r2125, r2130, r2136, r2145, r2146 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-495 Parameters List of parameters Note: The time in r2114 is used to display the times for faults and alarms. When the electronic power supply is switched out, the counter values are saved. After the drive unit is powered up, the counter continues to run with the last value that was saved. p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2 B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2546 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 2. Dependency: Refer to: A07851 Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal. p2116 BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 2. Dependency: Refer to: A07851 Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal. p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3 B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 2546 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 3. Dependency: Refer to: A07852 Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal. p2117 BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 3. Dependency: Refer to: A07852 Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal. 1-496 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2118[0...19] Sets the message number for message type. / Msg_no Msg_type All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8075 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed. Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index. Refer to: p2119 Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type in the following cases: - if there is no existing message number. Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective after the message has gone. p2119[0...19] Setting the message type / Message type All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8075 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the message type for the selected fault or alarm. Value: 1: 2: 3: Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index. Fault (F) Alarm (A) No message (N) Refer to: p2118 Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective after the message has gone. The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification. Example: F12345(A) --> Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345. In this case, the message number that may be possibly entered in p2100[0...19] and p2126[0...19] is automatically removed. r2120 CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the sum of all of the fault and alarm buffer changes in the drive unit. Dependency: Refer to: r0944, r2121 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-497 Parameters List of parameters r2121 CO: Counter, alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: This counter is incremented every time the alarm buffer changes. Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125 r2122[0...63] Alarm code / Alarm code All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of alarms that have occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123 Notice: The properties of the alarm buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation. Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). Alarm buffer structure (general principle): r2122[0], r2124[0], r2123[0], r2125[0] --> alarm 1 (the oldest) ... r2122[7], r2124[7], r2123[7], r2125[7] --> Alarm 8 (the latest) When the alarm buffer is full, the alarms that have gone are entered into the alarm history: r2122[8], r2124[8], r2123[8], r2125[8] --> Alarm 1 (the latest) ... r2122[63], r2124[63], r2123[63], r2125[63] --> alarm 56 (the oldest) r2123[0...63] All objects Alarm time received in milliseconds / t_alarm recv ms Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123 Notice: The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds). Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122. r2124[0...63] All objects Description: 1-498 Alarm value / Alarm value Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123 Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122. r2125[0...63] All objects Alarm time removed in milliseconds / t_alarm res ms Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm was cleared. Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123 Notice: The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds). Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122. p2126[0...19] All objects Setting fault number for acknowledge mode / Fault_no ackn_mode Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8075 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the faults for which the acknowledge mode is to be changed Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index Refer to: p2127 Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases: - Fault number does not exist. - Message type is not "fault" (F). Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved. p2127[0...19] Sets acknowledgement mode / Acknowledge mode All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8075 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the acknowledge mode for selected fault. Value: 1: 2: 3: Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index Acknowledgment only using POWER ON Ack IMMEDIATELY after the fault cause has been removed Acknowledgement only for PULSE INHIBIT Refer to: p2126 Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases: - if there is no existing fault number. - the message type is not "fault" (F). Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved. The acknowledge mode can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-499 Parameters List of parameters Example: F12345 and acknowledge mode = IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) --> The acknowledge mode can be changed from IMMEDIATELY to POWER ON. p2128[0...15] All objects Selecting fault/alarm code for trigger / Message trigger Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8070 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects faults or alarms which can be used as trigger. Dependency: Refer to: r2129 r2129.0...15 CO/BO: Trigger word for faults and alarms / Trigger word All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 8070 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Trigger signal for the selected faults and alarms Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: If one of the faults or alarms selected in p2128[n] occurs, then the particular bit of this binector output is set. Signal name Trigger signal p2128[0] Trigger signal p2128[1] Trigger signal p2128[2] Trigger signal p2128[3] Trigger signal p2128[4] Trigger signal p2128[5] Trigger signal p2128[6] Trigger signal p2128[7] Trigger signal p2128[8] Trigger signal p2128[9] Trigger signal p2128[10] Trigger signal p2128[11] Trigger signal p2128[12] Trigger signal p2128[13] Trigger signal p2128[14] Trigger signal p2128[15] 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - Refer to: p2128 Note: CO: r2129 = 0 --> None of the selected messages has occurred. CO: r2129 > 0 --> At least one of the selected messages has occurred. r2130[0...63] All objects Fault time received in days / t_fault recv days Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122 Notice: The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds). Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). 1-500 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r2131 CO: Actual fault code / Actual fault code All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the code of the oldest active fault. Dependency: Refer to: r3131, r3132 Note: 0: No fault present. r2132 CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the code of the last alarm that occurred. Note: 0: No alarm present. r2133[0...63] Fault value for float values / Fault val float All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values. Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2136, r3115 Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). r2134[0...63] Alarm value for float values / Alarm value float All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm for float values. Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123 Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). r2135.0...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2 All objects Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2548 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the second status word of faults and alarms. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-501 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 12 13 14 15 r2136[0...63] Fault time removed in days / t_flt resolv. days All objects Signal name Fault encoder 1 Fault encoder 2 Fault encoder 3 Fault motor overtemperature Fault power unit thermal overload Alarm motor overtemperature Alarm power unit thermal overload 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - FP - Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault was removed. Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2130, r2133, r3115, r3120, r3122 Notice: The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds). Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). r2138.7...15 CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2546 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word of the faults and alarms. Bit field: Bit 07 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2103, p2104, p2105, p2106, p2107, p2108, p2112, p2116, p2117, p3110, p3111, p3112 r2139.0...12 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 1 / ZSW fault/alarm 1 All objects Signal name Acknowledge fault External alarm 1 (A07850) effective External alarm 2 (A07851) effective External alarm 3 (A07852) effective External fault 1 (F07860) effective External fault 2 (F07861) effective External fault 3 (F07862) effective 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2548 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the first status word of faults and alarms. Bit field: Bit 00 01 03 05 06 07 08 1-502 0 signal No No No No No No No Signal name Being acknowledged Acknowledgment required Fault present Safety message present Internal message 1 present Alarm present Internal message 2 present 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 11 12 Note: Alarm class bit 0 Alarm class bit 1 High High Low Low - Re bit 03, 05, 07: These bits are set if at least one fault/alarm occurs. Data is entered into the fault/alarm buffer with delay. This is the reason that the fault/alarm buffer should only be read if, after "fault present"/"alarm present" has occurred, a change in the buffer was also detected (r0944, r9744, r2121). Re bit 06, 08: These status bits are used for internal diagnostic purposes only. Re bit 11, 12: These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes only on certain automation systems with integrated SINAMICS functionality. p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 300.00 [rpm] Factory setting 90.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals: "|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1) "|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2) Dependency: Refer to: p2155, r2197 p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 5.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "f or n comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1). Dependency: Refer to: p2142, r2199 p2142[0...n] Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 300.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "f or n / v comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1). Dependency: Refer to: p2141, r2199 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-503 Parameters List of parameters p2144[0...n] VECTOR_G BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable (0 = enable) of the motor stall monitoring. Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2164, p2166, r2197, r2198 Refer to: F07900 Note: When interconnecting the enable signal with r2197.7 then the stall signal is suppressed if there is no speed setpoint - actual value deviation. r2145[0...63] Alarm time received in days / t_alarm recv days All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2146, r3121, r3123 Notice: The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds). Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). r2146[0...63] Alarm time removed in days / t_alarm res days All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm was cleared. Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r3121, r3123 Notice: The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds). Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). p2147 Delete fault buffer of all drive objects / Del fault buffer CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to delete the fault buffer of all existing drive objects. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136 Note: p2147 is automatically set to 0 after execution. 1-504 Inactive Start to delete the fault buffer of all drive objects (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2148[0...n] BI: RFG active / RFG active VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8011 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the signal "ramp-function generator active" for the following signals/messages: "Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4) "Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5) Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: The binector input is automatically pre-assigned to r1199.2. The following applies for SERVO: The pre-assignment using the automatic calculation of the motor/control parameters in the drive (p0340 = 1, 3, 5) is only realized if, at the instant of the calculation, the "setpoint channel" function module is active (r0108.8 = 1). If the calculation in p0340 is not selected when downloading parameters, then the parameter is not preassigned. p2149[0...n] Monitoring configuration / Monit config VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010, 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0001 bin Description: Sets the configuration for messages and monitoring functions. Bit field: Bit 00 01 03 15 Dependency: Refer to: r2197 Signal name Enable alarm A07903 Load monitoring only in the 1st quadrant n_act > p2155 own hysteresis Automatic parameterization carried out (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP 8010 8013 8010 - Refer to: A07903 Note: Re bit 00: Alarm A07903 is output when the bit is set with r2197.7 = 0 (n_set <> n_act). Re bit 01: When the bit is set, load monitoring is only carried out in the 1st quadrant as a result of the positive characteristic parameters (p2182 ... p2190). Re bit 03: When the bit is set, r2197 bit 1 and bit 2 are determined via separate hystereses. Re bit 15: The bit indicates whether the automatic parameterization (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) for the parameters of the extended monitoring functions was carried out. If the bit is not set (e.g. when the configuration is activated (p0108.15)), the parameterization is automatically carried out during booting even if r3925.0 is already 1. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-505 Parameters List of parameters p2150[0...n] Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 300.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals: "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0) "n_set >= 0" (BO: r2198.5) "n_act >= 0" (BO: r2197.3) Dependency: Refer to: p2161, r2197, r2199 p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1170[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint for the following messages: "Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7) "Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5) "|n_set| < p2161" (BO: r2198.4) "n_set > 0" (BO: r2198.5) Dependency: Refer to: r2197, r2198, r2199 p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed / velocity actual value. The smoothed actual speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals. Dependency: Refer to: r2169 p2154[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint 2 / n_set 2 VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2. The sum of p2151 and p2154 is used for the following messages/signals: "Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (r2197.7) "Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (r2199.4) "Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (r2199.5) 1-506 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p2151, r2197, r2199 p2155[0...n] Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 900.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages: "|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1) "|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2) Dependency: Refer to: p2140, r2197 p2156[0...n] On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Description: Sets the switch-in delay time for the signal "comparison value reached" (BO: r2199.1). Dependency: Refer to: p2141, p2142, r2199 p2161[0...n] Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 5.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0). Dependency: Refer to: p2150, r2199 p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 60000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max" (BO: r2197.6). Dependency: Refer to: r1084, r1087, r2197 Notice: For p0322 = 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 0.1 * p0311 For p0322 > 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 1.02 * p0322 - p1082 If one of the conditions is violated, p2162 is appropriately and automatically reduced when exiting the commissioning mode. Note: For a negative speed limit (r1087) the hysteresis is effective below the limit value and for a positive speed limit (r1084) above the limit value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-507 Parameters List of parameters If significant overshoot occurs in the maximum speed range (e.g. due to load shedding), you are advised to increase the dynamic response of the speed controller (if possible). If this is insufficient, the hysteresis p2162 can only be increased by more than 10% of the rated speed when the maximum speed (p0322) of the motor is sufficiently greater than the speed limit p1082. p2163[0...n] Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 90.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO: r2197.7). Dependency: Refer to: p2164, p2166, r2197 p2164[0...n] Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 200.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO: r2197.7). Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2166, r2197 p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 200.0 [ms] Description: Sets the switch-off delay time for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO: r2197.7). Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2164, r2197 p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set VECTOR_G Description: 1-508 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 200.0 [ms] Sets the switch-on delay for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on" signal/message (BO: r2199.4). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r2169 CO: Actual speed smoothed signals / n_act smth message VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8010, 8012, 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the smoothed actual speed for messages/signals. Dependency: Refer to: p2153 p2174[0...n] Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 5.13 [Nm] Description: Sets the torque threshold value for the messages: "Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 and n_set reached" (BO: r2198.9) "Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.10) "Torque setpoint > torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.13) Dependency: Refer to: p2195, r2198 p2175[0...n] Motor blocked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 120.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold for the message "Motor blocked" (BO: r2198.6). Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p2177, r2198 Note: The following applies for sensorless vector control: At low speeds in open-loop speed controlled operation (see p1755, p1756), a blocked motor cannot be detected. p2177[0...n] Motor blocked delay time / Mot lock t_del VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 65.000 [s] Factory setting 1.000 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor blocked" (BO: r2198.6). Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p2175, r2198 Note: The following applies for sensorless vector control: At low speeds a locked motor can only be detected if no change is made to open-loop speed controlled operation. If this is the case, the value in p2177 must be reduced accordingly (p2177 < p1758) before time p2177 has elapsed in order to detect the locked state reliably. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-509 Parameters List of parameters As countermeasure, it is generally also possible to set p1750.6. This is only not permitted if the drive is slowly reversed by the load at the torque limit (speed below p1755 for longer than p1758). p2178[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 10.000 [s] Factory setting 0.010 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor stalled" (BO: r2198.7). Dependency: Refer to: r2198 p2181[0...n] Load monitoring response / Load monit resp VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the response when evaluating the load monitoring. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Dependency: Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, r2198 Load monitoring disabled A07920 for torque/speed too low A07921 for torque/speed too high A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance F07923 for torque/speed too low F07924 for torque/speed too high F07925 for torque/speed out of tolerance Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925 Note: The response to the faults F07923 ... F07925 can be set. F07926 is evaluated only if p2181 is not zero. p2182[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1 VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 150.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds: p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower) p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower) p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower) Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184 Refer to: p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186 1-510 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2183[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2 VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 900.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds: p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower) p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower) p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower) Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184 Refer to: p2182, p2184, p2187, p2188 p2184[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3 VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 1500.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds: p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower) p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower) p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower) Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184 Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2189, p2190 p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper / M_thresh 1 upper VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 10000000.00 [Nm] Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring. Dependency: The following applies: p2185 > p2186 Refer to: p2182, p2186 Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189. p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower / M_thresh 1 lower VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-511 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: The following applies: p2186 < p2185 Refer to: p2182, p2185 Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190. p2187[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, upper / M_thresh 2 upper VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 10000000.00 [Nm] Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring. Dependency: The following applies: p2187 > p2188 Refer to: p2183, p2188 Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189. p2188[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower / M_thresh 2 lower VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring. Dependency: The following applies: p2188 < p2187 Refer to: p2183, p2187 Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190. p2189[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, upper / M_thresh 3 upper VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 10000000.00 [Nm] Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring. Dependency: The following applies: p2189 > p2190 Refer to: p2184, p2190 Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189. p2190[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower / M_thresh 3 lower VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring. Dependency: The following applies: p2190 < p2189 Refer to: p2184, p2189 Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190. 1-512 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2192[0...n] Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 65.00 [s] Factory setting 10.00 [s] Description: Sets the delay time to evaluate the load monitoring. p2194[0...n] Torque threshold value 2 / M_thresh val 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 100.00 [%] Factory setting 90.00 [%] Description: Sets the torque threshold value for the message "Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2" (BO: r2199.11). The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired. Dependency: Refer to: r0033, p2195, r2199 p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 1000.0 [ms] Factory setting 800.0 [ms] Description: Sets the switch-off delay time for the negated signal "run-up completed". The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired. Dependency: Refer to: p2174, p2194 p2196[0...n] Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling factor for torque utilization (r0033). r2197.1...13 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 / ZSW monitor 1 VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2534 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the first status word for monitoring functions. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-513 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 01 02 03 06 07 13 Note: Signal name |n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 p2155 |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 p2155 n_act >= 0 |n_act| > n_max Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance t_off |n_act| > n_max (F07901) 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No FP 8010 8010 8011 8010 8011 Yes No - Re bit 01, 02: The threshold value is set in p2155 and the hysteresis in p2140. Re bit 03: The hysteresis is set in p2150. Re bit 06: The hysteresis is set in p2162. Re bit 07: The threshold value is set in p2163 and the hysteresis is set in p2164. Re bit 13: Only for internal Siemens use. r2198.4...12 VECTOR_G CO/BO: Status word monitoring 2 / ZSW monitor 2 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2536 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the second status word for monitoring functions. Bit field: Bit 04 05 06 07 10 11 12 Note: Re bit 10: Signal name |n_set| < p2161 n_set > 0 Motor blocked Motor stalled |M_set| < torque threshold value 1 Load monitoring signals an alarm Load monitoring signals a fault condition 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No FP 8011 8011 8012 8012 8012 8013 8013 The torque threshold value 1 is set in p2174. Re bit 12: This bit is reset after the fault cause disappears, even if the fault itself is still present. r2199.0...12 VECTOR_G CO/BO: Status word monitoring 3 / ZSW monitor 3 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1530, 2537, 8018 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the third status word for monitoring functions. Bit field: Bit 00 01 04 05 1-514 Signal name |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 f or n comparison value reached or exceeded Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance t_on Ramp-up/ramp-down completed 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP 8010 8010 Yes No 8010 Yes No 8010 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 06 07 11 12 Note: Current below the zero current threshold Speed deviation model/external in tolerance Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 Excitation current outside the tolerance range Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 8012 8012 8018 Re bit 00: The speed threshold value 3 is set in p2161. Re bit 01: The comparison value is set in p2141. We recommend setting the hysteresis (p2142) for canceling the bit to a value lower than that in p2141. Otherwise, the bit is not reset. Re bit 11: The torque threshold value 2 is set in p2194. p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the technology controller. The technology controller is switched in with a 1 signal. p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val1 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 10.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 1 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 2 / Tec_ctr fix val 2 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 20.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 2 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 3 / Tec_ctr fix val 3 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 30.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 3 of the technology controller. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-515 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 4 / Tec_ctr fix val 4 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 40.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 4 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 5 / Tec_ctr fix val 5 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 50.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 5 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 6 / Tec_ctr fix val 6 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 60.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 6 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 7 / Tec_ctr fix val 7 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 70.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 7 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. 1-516 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 8 / Tec_ctr fix val 8 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 80.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 8 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 9 / Tec_ctr fix val 9 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 90.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 9 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 10 / Tec_ctr fix val 10 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 10 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 11 / Tec_ctr fix val 11 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 110.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 11 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-517 Parameters List of parameters p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 12 / Tec_ctr fix val 12 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 120.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 12 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 13 / Tec_ctr fix val 13 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 130.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 13 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 14 / Tec_ctr fix val 14 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 140.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 14 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 15 / Tec_ctr fix val 15 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 150.00 [%] Description: Sets the value for fixed value 15 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. 1-518 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2216[0...n] Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the method to select the fixed setpoints. Value: 1: 2: p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Direct selection Binary selection Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2221, p2222, p2223 p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 1 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2222, p2223 p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 2 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2223 p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 3 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-519 Parameters List of parameters r2224 CO: Technology controller, fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the selected and effective fixed value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: r2229 r2225.0 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status word / Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the fixed value selection of the technology controller. Bit field: Bit 00 r2229 Technology controller number actual / Tec_ctrl No. act VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7950 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Signal name Technology controller fixed value selected 1 signal Yes 0 signal No Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed setpoint of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: r2224 FP 7950, 7951 p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0100 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Bit field: Bit 00 02 03 Dependency: Refer to: r2231, p2240 Notice: The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the setpoint in a non-volatile fashion: 04 Signal name Data save active Initial rounding-off active Non-volatile data save active for p2230.0 = 1 Ramp-function generator always active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Yes No - - Firmware with V2.3 or higher. - Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM). 1-520 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Re bit 00: 0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240. 1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved and after ON is entered using r2231. In order to save in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1. Re bit 02: 0: Without initial rounding-off 1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for initial rounding is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum value (p2237). It is calculated as follows: r = 0.0001 x max(p2237, |p2238| ) [%] / 0.13^2 [s^2] The jerk is effective until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p2237 [%] / p2247 [s] or a_max = p2238 [%] / p2248 [s]), after which the drive continues to run linearly with constant acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that p2247 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time. Re bit 03: 0: Non-volatile data save de-activated. 1. The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1). Re bit 04: When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r2250. r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory / Tec_ctrl mop mem VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the setpoint memory for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. For p2230.0 = 1, the last setpoint that was saved is entered after ON. Dependency: Refer to: p2230 p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. The setpoint change (CO: r2250) depends on the set ramp-up time (p2247) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p2235). Dependency: Refer to: p2236 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-521 Parameters List of parameters p2236[0...n] VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Description: BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to continually reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. The setpoint change (CO: r2250) depends on the set ramp-down time (p2248) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p2236). Dependency: Refer to: p2235 p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the maximum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2238 p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting -100.00 [%] Description: Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2237 p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON. Dependency: 1-522 Refer to: p2230 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r2245 CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer setpoint before RFG / Tec_ctr mop befRFG VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: r2250 p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 1000.0 [s] Factory setting 10.0 [s] Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2248 Note: The time is referred to 100 %. When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-up is correspondingly extended. p2248[0...n] VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop t_rdown Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 1000.0 [s] Factory setting 10.0 [s] Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2247 Note: The time is referred to 100 %. When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-down is correspondingly extended. r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG / Tec_ctr mop aftRFG VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7954 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the effective setpoint after the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: r2245 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-523 Parameters List of parameters p2252 Technology controller configuration / Tec_ctrl config VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0111 bin Description: Sets the configuration of the technology controller. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Signal name Ramp-up/down time independent of setpoint sign Integrator independent of Kp Output signal without ramp active Act val lim 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Dependency: Refer to: p2257, p2258, p2267, p2268, p2280, p2285 Note: Re bit 00 = 0: The ramp-down time (p2258) switches to the ramp-up time (p2257) when the sign for the output signal r2260 changes. When the sign changes, the output signal is kept at zero for one arithmetic cycle. Re bit 00 = 1: When r2260 exhibits a positive gradient, the ramp-up time (p2257) is active; when it exhibits a negative gradient, the ramp-down time (p2258) is active. The sign for r2260 does not have any effect on the ramp time. Re bit 01 = 0: The integration time of the PID controller is evaluated with the gain factor Kp (p2280) (p2285 = integral time). Re bit 01 = 1: The integration time of the PID controller is independent of the gain factor (p2285 = integration time) if p2280 > 0. Re bit 02 = 0: When the PID controller is de-activated via p2200, the output signal r2294 is reduced to zero via the ramp-down time p2293. Re bit 02 = 1: When the PID controller is de-activated via p2200, the output signal r2294 is set directly to zero. Re bit 03 = 0: The actual values are not limited by p2267 and p2268. Re bit 03 = 1: The actual values are limited by p2267 and p2268. p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2254, p2255 p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctrl setp 2 VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: 1-524 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p2253, p2256 p2255 Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling / Tec_ctrl set1 scal VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 100.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2253 p2256 Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling / Tec_ctrl set2 scal VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 100.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2254 p2257 Technology controller, ramp-up time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 650.00 [s] Factory setting 1.00 [s] Description: Sets the ramp-up time of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2252, p2258 Note: The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %. p2258 Technology controller ramp-down time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 650.00 [s] Factory setting 1.00 [s] Description: Sets the ramp-down time of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2252, p2257 Note: The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-525 Parameters List of parameters r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator / Tec_ctr set aftRFG VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Sets the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the technology controller. p2261 Technology controller setpoint filter time constant / Tec_ctrl set T VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 60.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the time constant for the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller. r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set aftFlt VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller. p2263 Technology controller type / Tec_ctrl type VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the technology controller type. Value: 0: 1: D component in the actual value signal D component in the fault signal p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: 1-526 Sets the signal source for the actual value of the technology controller. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2265 Technology controller actual value filter time constant / Tec_ctrl act T VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 60.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the time constant for the actual value filter (PT1) of the technology controller. r2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act aftFlt VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the smoothed actual value after the filter (PT1) of the technology controller p2267 Technology controller upper limit actual value / Tec_ctrl u_lim act VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -10000.00 [%] Max 10000.00 [%] Factory setting 200.00 [%] Description: Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2252, p2264, p2265, p2271 Refer to: F07426 Notice: If the actual value exceeds this upper limit, this results in fault F07426. Note: Limiting only active for p2252.3 = 1. p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value / Tec_ctrl l_lim act VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -10000.00 [%] Max 10000.00 [%] Factory setting -200.00 [%] Description: Sets the lower limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2252, p2264, p2265, p2271 Refer to: F07426 Notice: If the actual value falls below this lower limit, this results in fault F07426. Note: Limiting only active for p2252.3 = 1. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-527 Parameters List of parameters p2269 Technology controller gain actual value / Tech_ctrl gain act VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 500.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling factor for the actual value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2271 Note: For 100%, the actual value is not changed. p2270 Technology controller actual value function / Tec_ctr ActVal fct VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to use an arithmetic function for the actual value signal of the technology controller. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2271 p2271 Technology controller actual value inversion (sensor type) / Tech_ctrl act inv VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: No function Root function (root from x) Square function (x * x) Cube function (x * x * x) Setting to invert the actual value signal of the technology controller. The inversion depends on the sensor type for the actual value signal. Value: 0: 1: No inversion Inversion actual value signal Caution: If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can become unstable and can oscillate! Note: The correct setting can be determined as follows: - inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0). - increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal of the technology controller. --> If the actual value increases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 0 (no inversion). --> If the actual value decreases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 1 (the actual value signal is inverted). 1-528 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r2272 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled / Tech_ctrl act scal VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the scaled actual value signal of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, r2266, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2270, p2271 r2273 CO: Technology controller error / Tec_ctrl error VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the error (system deviation) between the setpoint and actual value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2263 p2274 Technology controller differentiation, time constant / Tec_ctrl D comp T VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 60.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the technology controller. Note: p2274 = 0: Differentiation is disabled. p2280 Technology controller proportional gain / Tec_ctrl Kp VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 Max 1000.000 Factory setting 1.000 Description: Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2252 Note: p2280 = 0: The proportional gain is disabled. p2285 Technology controller integral time / Tec_ctrl Tn VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 60.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2252 Note: p2285 = 0: The integral time is disabled. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-529 Parameters List of parameters p2286[0...n] BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ stop VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the technology controller. p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctrl prectrl VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the pre-control signal of the technology controller. p2291 CO: Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctrl max_lim VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the maximum limit of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2292 Caution: The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292). p2292 CO: Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctrl min_lim VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -200.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the minimum limit of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2291 Caution: The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292). 1-530 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2293 Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time / Tec_ctr ramp up/dn VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 100.00 [s] Factory setting 1.00 [s] Description: Sets the ramping time for the output signal of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2291, p2292 Note: The time refers to the set maximum and minimum limits (p2291, p2292). r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctrl outp_sig VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the output signal of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2295 p2295 CO: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -100.00 [%] Max 100.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller. p2296[0...n] CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 2295[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2295 p2297[0...n] CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrMaxLimS_src VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 2291[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the maximum limiting of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2291 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-531 Parameters List of parameters p2298[0...n] CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 2292[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the minimum limiting of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2292 p2299[0...n] CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the offset of the output limiting of the technology controller. p2306 Technology controller fault signal inversion / Tec_ctrl fault inv VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to invert the fault signal of the technology controller. The setting depends on the type of control loop. Value: 0: 1: No inversion Inversion Caution: If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can become unstable and can oscillate! Note: The correct setting can be determined as follows: - inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0). - increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the technology controller). - if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be switched out. - if the actual value decreases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be set. If value = 0: The drive reduces the output speed when the actual value rises (e.g. for heating fans, intake pump, compressor). If value = 1: The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases (e.g. for cooling fans, discharge pumps). r2349.0...11 CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctrl status VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7958 P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: 1-532 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the status word of the technology controller. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 08 09 10 11 Signal name Technology controller de-activated Technology controller limited Technology controller, motorized potentiometer limited max. Technology controller, motorized potentiometer limited min. Technology controller actual value at the minimum Technology controller actual value at the maximum Technology controller output at the minimum Technology controller output at the maximum 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - p2369 BI: Closed-loop cascade control, control word / Csc_ctrl STW VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the selection of the "Switch-in motor" function. When the function is selected, monitoring of the switches is de-activated with the "bypass" function. This means that the power unit can be connected to other motors via an external control without switch monitoring responding. r2700 CO: Reference frequency / f_ref B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and connector output of the actual reference quantity for the frequency (p2000). All frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). This parameter has the unit Hz. Dependency: Refer to: p2000 Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2000 as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. r2700 CO: Reference speed/reference frequency / n_ref/f_ref ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and connector output for the reference quantity for speed and frequency (p2000). All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in rpm) / 60 This parameter has the unit rpm. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-533 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p2000 Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2000 as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. r2700 CO: Reference velocity/reference frequency actual / v_ref/f_ref act ENC (Lin_enc) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Display and connector output for the actual reference quantity for velocity and frequency. All velocities or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference velocity (in m/min) / 60 Dependency: Refer to: p2000 Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2000 as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. r2701 CO: Reference voltage / Reference voltage B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Connector output of the reference quantity for voltages p2001. All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). This parameter has the unit Vrms. Dependency: Refer to: p2001 Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2001 as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. r2702 CO: Reference current / Reference current B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Connector output of the reference quantity for currents p2002. All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). This parameter has the unit Arms. Dependency: Refer to: p2002 Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2002 as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. 1-534 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r2703 CO: Reference torque / Reference torque VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Connector output of the reference quantity p2003 for torque (r0108.12 = 0) or force (r0108.12 = 1). All torques specified as relative values (r0108.12 = 0) or forces (r0108.12 = 1) are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The unit of this parameter is the same as the unit selected for p2003. Dependency: p0505, r0108.12 Refer to: p2003 Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2003 in the currently selected unit as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. r2704 CO: Reference power / Reference power B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Connector output of the reference quantity for powers p2004. All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The unit of this parameter is the same as the unit selected for p2004. Dependency: This value is calculated as voltage x current for the infeed and as torque x speed for closed-loop controls. Refer to: r2004 Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2004 in the currently selected unit as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. The reference power is calculated as follows: - 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor) - reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed) r2705 CO: Reference angle / Reference angle B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Connector output of the reference quantity for angles p2005. All angles specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). This parameter has the unit degree. Dependency: Refer to: p2005 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-535 Parameters List of parameters Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2005 as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. r2706 CO: Reference temp / Reference temp B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output of the reference quantity for temperatures. All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). This parameter has the unit degree Celsius. Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity for the temperature as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. r2707 CO: Reference acceleration / Ref accel VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Connector output of the reference quantity for accelerations p2007. All acceleration rates specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The unit of this parameter is the same as the unit selected for p2007. Dependency: r0108.12, p0505 Refer to: p2007 Note: This BICO parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2007 as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value in the currently selected unit can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC. This BICO parameter is not suitable for interconnecting for cyclic communication. p2720[0...n] Load gear configuration / Load gear config VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for position tracking of a load gear. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Note: For the following events, the non-volatile, saved position values are automatically reset: Signal name Load gear, activate position tracking Axis type Load gear, reset position 1 signal Yes Linear axis Yes 0 signal No Rotary axis No FP - - when an encoder replacement has been identified. - when changing the configuration of the Encoder Data Set (EDS). - when adjusting the absolute encoder again 1-536 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p2721[0...n] Load gear, rotary absolute encoder, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4194303 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary absolute encoder with activated position tracking of the load gear. Dependency: This parameter is only of significance for an absolute encoder (p0404.1 = 1) with activated position tracking of the load gear (p2720.0 = 1). Note: The resolution that is set must be able to be represented using r2723. For rotary axes/modulo axes, the following applies: This parameter is pre-set with p0421 and can be changed. For linear axes, the following applies: This parameter is pre-assigned with p0421, expanded by 6 bits for multiturn information (maximum number of overflows) and cannot be changed. p2722[0...n] Load gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track tol VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(1, 4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 4294967300.00 Factory setting 0.00 Description: Sets a tolerance window for position tracking. After the system is powered up, the difference between the saved position and the actual position is determined, and depending on this, the following is initiated: Difference within the tolerance window --> The position is reproduced as a result of the encoder actual value. Difference outside the tolerance window --> An appropriate message is output. Dependency: Refer to: F07449 Caution: Rotation, e.g. through a complete encoder range is not detected. Note: The value is entered in integer (complete) encoder pulses. For p2720.0 = 1, the value is automatically pre-assigned quarter of the encoder range. Example: Quarter of the encoder range = (p0408 * p0421) / 4 It is possible that the tolerance window may not be able to be precisely set due to the data type (floating point number with 23 bit mantissa). r2723[0...n] CO: Load gear absolute value / Load gear abs_val VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 4010, 4704 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the absolute value after the load gear. Notice: The encoder position actual value must be requested using the encoder control word Gn_STW.13. Note: The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-537 Parameters List of parameters r2724[0...n] CO: Load gear position difference / Load gear pos diff VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the position difference before the load gear between powering down and powering up. Note: The increments are displayed in the same format as for r0483/r2723. If the measuring gear of the motor encoder is not activated, the position difference should be read in encoder increments. If the measuring gear of the motor encoder is activated, the position difference is converted using the measuring gear factor. p2810[0...1] VECTOR_G BI: AND logic operation inputs / AND inputs Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2634 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal sources for the inputs of the AND logic operation. Dependency: Refer to: r2811 Note: [0]: AND logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r2811.0. [1]: AND logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r2811.0. r2811.0 VECTOR_G CO/BO: AND logic operation result / AND result Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2634 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the result of the AND logic operation Bit field: Bit 00 Dependency: Refer to: p2810 p2816[0...1] BI: OR logic operation inputs / OR inputs VECTOR_G Signal name AND logic operation result 1 signal Yes 0 signal No Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2634 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal sources for the inputs of the OR logic operation. Dependency: Refer to: r2817 Note: [0]: OR logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r2817.0. FP - [1]: OR logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r2817.0. 1-538 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r2817.0 VECTOR_G CO/BO: OR logic operation result / OR result Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2634 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the result of the OR logic operation. Bit field: Bit 00 Dependency: Refer to: p2816 p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%] VECTOR_G Signal name OR logic operation result 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1021 P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -10000.00 [%] Max 10000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets a fixed percentage. Dependency: Refer to: p2901, p2930 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the main setpoint) p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%] VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1021 P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -10000.00 [%] Max 10000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets a fixed percentage. Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2930 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the supplementary setpoint) r2902[0...14] CO: Fixed values [%] / Fixed values [%] VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1021 P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Signal sources for frequently used percentage values. Index: [0] = Fixed value +0 % [1] = Fixed value +5 % [2] = Fixed value +10 % [3] = Fixed value +20 % [4] = Fixed value +50 % [5] = Fixed value +100 % [6] = Fixed value +150 % [7] = Fixed value +200 % [8] = Fixed value -5 % (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-539 Parameters List of parameters [9] = Fixed value -10 % [10] = Fixed value -20 % [11] = Fixed value -50 % [12] = Fixed value -100 % [13] = Fixed value -150 % [14] = Fixed value -200 % Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2901, p2930 Note: The signal sources can, for example, be used to interconnect scalings. p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm] VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 1021 P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min -100000.00 [Nm] Max 100000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: Sets a fixed value for torque. Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2901 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Note: The value can, for example, be used to interconnect a supplementary torque. p3100 RTC time stamp mode / RTC t_stamp mode CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the mode for the time stamp p3100 = 0: Time stamp, operating hours p3100 = 1: Time stamp, UTC format Note: RTC: Real-time clock UTC: Universal Time Coordinates The UTC time started, according to the definition on 01.01.1970 at 00:00:00 and is output in days and milliseconds. p3101[0...1] RTC set UTC time / RTC set UTC CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting the UTC time. This means that the drive system is synchronized to the time specified by the time master. To start p3101[1] must be written to followed by p3101[0]. After writing to p3101[0], the UTC time is accepted. p3101[0]: Milliseconds p3101[1]: Days 1-540 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r3102[0...1] RTC read UTC time / RTC read UTC CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual UTC time in the drive system. p3102[0]: Milliseconds p3102[1]: Days p3103 RTC synchronization source / RTC sync_source CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the synchronization source/technique. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: p3104 BI: RTC real time synchronization PING / RTC PING CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 PROFIBUS PROFINET PPI PROFINET PTP Description: Sets the signal source for the PING event to set the UTC time. Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. r3107[0...3] RTC synchronizing time / RTC t_sync CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the last synchronizing event in the drive system. 3107[0, 1]: synchronizing event after synchronization r3107[0]: milliseconds r3107[1]: days 3107[2, 3]: synchronizing event before synchronization r3107[2]: milliseconds r3107[3]: days (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-541 Parameters List of parameters r3108[0...1] RTC last synchronization deviation / RTC sync_dev CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the absolute value of the last synchronization deviation that was determined. r3108[0]: Milliseconds r3108[1]: Days p3109 RTC real time synchronization, tolerance window / RTC sync tol CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Description: Sets the tolerance window for time synchronization. When this tolerance window is exceeded, an appropriate alarm is output. Dependency: Refer to: A01099 p3110 External fault 3, power-up delay / Ext fault 3 t_on All objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2546 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time for external fault 3. Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3111, p3112 Refer to: F07862 p3111[0...n] B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: BI: External fault 3, enable / Ext fault 3 enab Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3112 Refer to: F07862 1-542 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3111 BI: External fault 3, enable / Ext fault 3 enab CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2546 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3112 Refer to: F07862 p3112[0...n] B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3111 Refer to: F07862 p3112 BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2546 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3111 Refer to: F07862 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-543 Parameters List of parameters r3113.0...15 All objects Description: CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar / NAMUR bit bar Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the status of NAMUR signal bit bar. The faults or alarms are assigned to the appropriate signaling/message classes and influence a specific message bit. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 15 Signal name Fault drive converter data electronics / software error Network fault DC link overvoltage Fault drive converter power electronics Drive converter overtemperature Ground fault Motor overload Bus error External safety-relevant shutdown Mot encoder fault Error communication internal Fault infeed Other faults 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No - r3114.9...11 CO/BO: Messages status word global / Msg ZSW global CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the global status word for messages. The appropriate bit is set if at least one message is present at the drive objects. Bit field: Bit 09 10 11 Note: The status bits are displayed with delay. r3115[0...63] Fault drive object initiating / F DO initiating All objects Description: Signal name Group alarm present Group fault present Safety group message present 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP 8065 8060 - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1750, 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the drive object number of the initiating drive object for this fault as integer number. Value = 63: The fault was initiated by the drive object itself. Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122 Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945. 1-544 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3116 BI: Acknowledgement automatically suppressed / Ackn suppress CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the automatic acknowledgement on the device drive object. BI: p3116 = 0 signal Faults present are automatically acknowledged on the device drive object. Local device faults are forwarded to the first active drive object. BI: p3116 = 1 signal Faults present are not automatically acknowledged on the device drive object. Local device faults are not forwarded. Dependency: Refer to: p2102, p2103, p2104, p2105, p3981 Note: When selecting a standard telegram, the BICO interconnection for control signal STW1.10 (master control by PLC) is automatically established. p3117 Change safety message type / Ch. SI mess type CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the re-parameterization of all safety messages for faults and alarms. The relevant message type during changeover is selected by the firmware. 0: Safety messages are not re-parameterized 1: Safety messages are re-parameterized Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. r3120[0...63] Component number fault / Comp_num flt All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the component number of the fault which has occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3122 Note: Value = 0: Assignment to a component not possible. The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945. r3121[0...63] All objects Description: Component number alarm / Comp_num alarm Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the component number of the alarm which has occurred. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-545 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3123 Note: Value = 0: Assignment to a component not possible. The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122. r3122[0...63] Diagnostic attribute fault / Diag_attr fault All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the diagnostic attribute of the fault which has occurred. Bit field: Bit 00 Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120 Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). Signal name Hardware replacement recommended 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945. r3123[0...63] All objects Diagnostic attribute alarm / Diag_attr alarm Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8065 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the diagnostic attribute of the alarm which has occurred. Bit field: Bit 00 Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121 Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). Signal name Hardware replacement recommended 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122. r3131 CO: Actual flt value / Actual flt value All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the fault value of the oldest active fault. Dependency: Refer to: r2131, r3132 r3132 CO: Actual component number / Act comp_no. All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the component number of the oldest fault that is still active. Dependency: Refer to: r2131, r3131 1-546 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3135 Suppress active fault / Supp act flt B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the suppression of r2139.3 "Fault present" for certain fault responses. Bit field: Bit 08 10 Dependency: Refer to: p0491, r2139 Note: Depending on the suppression of a fault reaction in this parameter, r2139.1 "Acknowledgement required" is set when at least one fault occurs. Signal name Suppression of fault response ENCODER Suppression of fault response NONE 1 signal ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF FP - Re bit 08: The suppression is only effective if p0491 = 1. p3201[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Excitation current outside the tolerance threshold value / I_exc n Tol thresh Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 10.0 [%] Sets the threshold value for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring. If the absolute value of the difference between the excitation current setpoint and actual value (r1641 - r1626) exceeds the threshold value and the hysteresis is longer than the selected delay time, then fault F07913 is output. This fault is withdrawn when the threshold voltage is undershot. Dependency: Refer to: r1626, r1641, p3202, p3203 Refer to: F07913 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). p3202[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance hysteresis / I_exc n Tol hyst VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 10.0 [%] Description: Sets the hysteresis for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring. Dependency: Refer to: p3201, p3203 Refer to: F07913 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). p3203[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance delay time / I_exc n Tol t_del VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 10.0 [s] Factory setting 1.0 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-547 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p3201, p3202 Refer to: F07913 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). p3204[0...n] Flux outside the tolerance threshold value / Flux n tol thresh VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 10.0 [%] Description: Sets the threshold value for the "flux outside the tolerance" message for the flux monitoring. If the absolute value of the difference between the flux setpoint and actual value (r0083 - r0084) falls below the threshold value with hysteresis longer than the selected delay time, then fault F07914 is output. This fault is withdrawn when the threshold voltage is undershot. Dependency: Refer to: r0083, r0084, p3205, p3206 Refer to: F07914 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). The flux monitoring is only active after magnetizing (r0056.4 = 1). p3205[0...n] Flux outside the tolerance hysteresis / Flux n tol hyst VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1 [%] Max 50.0 [%] Factory setting 10.0 [%] Description: Sets the hysteresis for the "flux outside tolerance" message for the flux monitoring. Dependency: Refer to: p3204, p3206 Refer to: F07914 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). The flux monitoring is only active after magnetizing (r0056.4 = 1). p3206[0...n] VECTOR_G Flux outside tolerance delay time / Flux n tol t_del Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 10.0 [s] Factory setting 5.0 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the "flux outside tolerance" message for the flux monitoring. Dependency: Refer to: p3204, p3205 Refer to: F07914 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). The flux monitoring is only active after magnetizing (r0056.4 = 1). 1-548 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3207[0...n] Zero current signal threshold value / I_0_sig thresh VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.01 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 1.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the threshold value for the zero current signal for the zero current monitoring. If the absolute current falls below the threshold value then r2199.6 is set to 1 after the delay time has expired. The bit is reset if the threshold value and the hysteresis are exceeded again. Dependency: Refer to: r2199, p3208, p3209 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold value in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1). p3208[0...n] Zero current signal hysteresis / I_0_sig hyst VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.01 [Arms] Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 1.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the hysteresis for the zero current signal for the zero current monitoring. Dependency: Refer to: p3207, p3209 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold value in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1). p3209[0...n] VECTOR_G Zero current signal delay time / I_0_sig t_del Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 10.00 [s] Factory setting 0.02 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the zero current signal for the zero current monitoring. Dependency: Refer to: p3207, p3208 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1). p3233[0...n] Torque actual value filter, time constant / M_act_filt T VECTOR_G (Ext msg) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8013 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the time constant for the PT1 element to smooth the torque actual value. The smoothed torque actual value is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-549 Parameters List of parameters p3235 Phase failure signal motor monitoring time / Ph_fail t_monit VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 2000 [ms] Factory setting 320 [ms] Description: Sets the monitoring time for phase failure detection of the motor. Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: Monitoring is only effective for blocksize and booksize power units. For p3235 = 0 the function is deactivated. For VECTOR, the following applies: The monitoring is automatically de-activated during the flying restart operation for a motor that is still rotating. p3236[0...n] Speed threshold 7 / n_thresh val 7 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 3000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 100.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "speed deviation model/external" (BO: r2199.7). Dependency: Refer to: r1443, r2169, r2199, p3237 p3237[0...n] Hysteresis speed 7 / n_hysteresis 7 VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Messages Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 200.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the hysteresis speed for the signal "speed deviation model/external" (BO: r2199.7). Dependency: Refer to: r2199, p3236 p3238[0...n] OFF delay n_act_motor model = n_act external / t_del n_a = n_ext VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 8012 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 100.0 [s] Factory setting 3.0 [s] Sets the OFF delay for the signal "speed deviation model/external in tolerance" (BO: r2199.7). The smoothed actual speed of the motor model r2169 is compared with the speed measured externally r1443 (threshold value p3236). Dependency: 1-550 Refer to: p3236, p3237 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3320[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine power point 1 / Fluid_mach P1 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 25.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 1 as a [%]. The characteristic comprises the following value pairs: Power (P) / speed (n) p3320 / p3321 --> point 1 (P1 / n1) p3322 / p3323 --> point 2 (P2 / n2) p3324 / p3325 --> point 3 (P3 / n3) p3326 / p3327 --> point 4 (P4 / n4) p3328 / p3329 --> point 5 (P5 / n5) Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. p3321[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine speed point 1 / Fluid_mach n1 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 0.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 1 as a [%]. The characteristic comprises the following value pairs: Power (P) / speed (n) p3320 / p3321 --> point 1 (P1 / n1) p3322 / p3323 --> point 2 (P2 / n2) p3324 / p3325 --> point 3 (P3 / n3) p3326 / p3327 --> point 4 (P4 / n4) p3328 / p3329 --> point 5 (P5 / n5) Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. p3322[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine power point 2 / Fluid_mach P2 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 50.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 2 as a [%]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-551 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. p3323[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine speed point 2 / Fluid_mach n2 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 25.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 2 as a [%]. Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. p3324[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine power point 3 / Fluid_mach P3 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 77.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 3 as a [%]. Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. p3325[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine speed point 3 / Fluid_mach n3 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 50.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 3 as a [%]. Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. 1-552 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3326[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine power point 4 / Fluid_mach P4 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 92.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 4 as a [%]. Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3327, p3328, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. p3327[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine speed point 4 / Fluid_mach n4 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 75.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 4 as a [%]. Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3328, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. p3328[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine power point 5 / Fluid_mach P5 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 100.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 5 as a [%]. Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. p3329[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: Fluid flow machine speed point 5 / Fluid_mach n5 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 Max 100.00 Factory setting 100.00 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 5 as a [%]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-553 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. r3402 Infeed status internal BIC / INF state int B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8932 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting - Description: Displays the internal status of the infeed module. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: r3405.7 CO/BO: Infeed status word / Inf ZSW B_INF Initialization Fault No ON command Offset measurement running ON delay active Precharg. running Operation Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word of the infeed. Bit field: Bit 07 r3405.1...8 CO/BO: Status word DC-link control / UDC ZSW VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Signal name DC link undervoltage alarm threshold undershot 1 signal Yes Description: Displays the status word for DC-link voltage control. Bit field: Bit 01 08 Note: Re bit 01: Signal name Vdc-ctrl active Vdc controller selected 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No 0 signal No No FP - FP - DC-link voltage control is disabled and enabled with p3513. Re bit 08 = 1: DC-link voltage control is selected using p3513. 1-554 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3422 DC-link capacitance, total / C_DC tot VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.20 [mF] Max 2000.00 [mF] Factory setting 2.00 [mF] Description: Sets the total DC link capacitance for closed-loop voltage control. The capacitance of one power unit is pre-assigned to this value. The value should be adapted according to the number of power units. Note: The controller setting for the DC-link voltage controller is derived from this value. p3490 Infeed delay time OFF1 command / INF t_del OFF1 B_INF Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8732, 8832, 8932 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 1000000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Sets the delay time for the ON/OFF1 command of the infeed. After ON/OFF1 = 0 the infeed remains in operation for the specified time Dependency: Refer to: p0840 Notice: The ON/OFF1 command of the infeed can be interrupted. Note: This parameter is only relevant if a Motor Module and the infeed are controlled by the same OFF command. In this case, the delay time and the stop ramp time of the motor can be coordinated with one another. p3510 DC link voltage setpoint / Vdc setp VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min 100.00 [V] Max 1600.00 [V] Factory setting 600.00 [V] Description: Sets the setpoint for the DC-link voltage on the motor side. p3511 CI: DC-link voltage supplementary setpoint / Vdc Z_set VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint for the DC-link voltage on the motor side. Dependency: Refer to: p3510 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-555 Parameters List of parameters p3513 BI: Inhibit voltage-controlled operation / Inhib U_ctrl mode VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for disabling DC-link voltage control on the motor side. r3517 CO: DC-link controller active current setpoint / Vdc I_act set VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the unlimited setpoint of the active current controller for DC-link voltage control on the motor side. p3520[0...3] CI: DC link pre-control power / Vdc pre-ctrl P VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for power pre-control. Dependency: Refer to: p3521 Note: Closed-loop control of the DC link voltage is improved by pre-controlling the power required for the other modules. A non-scaled quantity is expected so that the various power reference values (r2004) of the drive objects do not have to be taken into account. The scaling factors are used to adapt the scaling (p3521). p3521[0...3] DC link pre-control power scaling / Vdc prectrl P scal VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min -100000.00000 [%] Max 100000.00000 [%] Factory setting 100.00000 [%] Description: Sets the scaling factor for the power pre-control. Dependency: Refer to: p3520 p3523[0...3] DC link pre-control power smoothing / Vdc pre-ctrl P sm VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Description: Sets the filter time for power pre-control. Dependency: Refer to: p3520 1-556 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r3554 Vdc controller integral component / Vdc_ctrl I_comp VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the integral action component of the DC link voltage controller (Vdc controller). p3560 Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.01 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaled proportional gain for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc controller). Note: A value of 100% corresponds to the basic setting derived from the loop control parameter (p3422). p3562 Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn VECTOR_G (Tech_ctrl) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.10 [%] Max 100000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaled integral time for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc). Note: A value of 100% corresponds to the basic setting derived from the loop control parameter (p3422). p3660[0...n] VSM input line supply voltage, voltage scaler / VSM inp U_scaler VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 100000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the voltage scaler for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Note: When the 690 V input is used (X522) without voltage scaler, 0 % should be entered. When the 100 V input (X521) is used with voltage scaler to measure medium voltages, the dividing (scaling) factor multiplied by 100% should be entered. Example: 1000 V line supply voltage, voltage scaling, 10:1 --> voltage at the VSM input is 100 V --> p3660 = 10 * 100 % = 1000 % (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-557 Parameters List of parameters r3661[0...n] CO: VSM input line supply voltage u1 - u2 / VSM inp u1-u2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the input voltage between phases L1 and L2 for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: p3660 Note: X521.1 or X522.1: Connection of L1 X521.2 or X522.2: Connection of L2 X521.3 or X522.3: Connection of L3 r3662[0...n] VECTOR_G CO: VSM input line supply voltage u2 - u3 / VSM inp u2-u3 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the input voltage between phases L2 and L3 for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: p3660 Note: X521.1 or X522.1: Connection of L1 X521.2 or X522.2: Connection of L2 X521.3 or X522.3: Connection of L3 r3664[0...n] CO: VSM temperature evaluation, status / VSM temp status VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the temperature evaluation of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). This displays whether the temperature actual value has exceeded the fault/alarm threshold. Bit field: Bit 00 01 Signal name Alarm is present Fault is present 1 signal Yes Yes Dependency: Refer to: p3665, r3666, p3667, p3668 p3665[0...n] VSM temperature evaluation, sensor type / VSM TempSensorType VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting of the temperature sensor for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Value: 0: 1: 2: 0 signal No No FP - The temperature sensor is connected to terminals X520.5 and X520.6 of the VSM. 1-558 No sensor PTC KTY84 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The pre-assignment of the parameter depends on the device type. For chassis power units, the temperature monitoring of the line filter is active (p3665 = 2). r3666[0...n] CO: VSM temperature KTY / VSM temp KTY VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Displays the temperature actual value of a KTY84 temperature sensor connected to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Prerequisite: A KTY84 sensor is connected and p3665 is set to 2. Dependency: Refer to: p3665 Note: For sensor type PTC (p3665 = 1), the following applies: - below the nominal response temperature, r3666 = -50C. - above the nominal response temperature, r3666 = 199.9 C. p3667[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: VSM line filter overtemperature alarm threshold / VSMfilt_T A_thresh Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886 P-Group: - Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [C] Max 301.00 [C] Factory setting 150.00 [C] Sets the alarm threshold for the KTY temperature sensor of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) to monitor the line filter temperature. Prerequisite: A KTY84 sensor is connected and p3665 is set to 2. Dependency: Refer to: p3665 Refer to: A34211 p3668[0...n] VECTOR_G VSM line filter overtemperature shutdown threshold / VSM filt_T F_thres Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886 P-Group: - Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [C] Max 301.00 [C] Factory setting 180.00 [C] Description: Sets the shutdown threshold for the KTY temperature sensor of the VSM to monitor the line filter temperature. Dependency: Refer to: p3667 Refer to: F34207 p3669[0...n] VECTOR_G VSM line filter overtemperature hysteresis / VSM filt_T hyst Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9886 P-Group: - Units group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min 1.00 [K] Max 50.00 [K] Factory setting 3.00 [K] Description: Sets the hysteresis for the alarm threshold of the VSM to monitor the line filter temperature. Dependency: Refer to: p3667 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-559 Parameters List of parameters p3670[0...n] VSM 10 V input CT gain / VSM CT_gain VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [A] Max 1000.000 [A] Factory setting 1.000 [A] Description: Sets CT gain of the CT connected at the 10 V input of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). The parameter specifies the current magnitude in [A] referred to the input voltage at the VSM in [V]. Example: CT with 1 V per 200 A. --> p3670 = 200 Dependency: Refer to: r3671, r3672 Note: The CT for phase 1 is connected at terminals X520.1 and X520.2 of the VSM. The CT for phase 2 is connected at terminals X520.3 and X520.4 of the VSM. r3671[0...n] VECTOR_G CO: VSM 10 V input CT 1 actual value / VSM CT 1 I_act Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 1 at the 10 V input of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: p3670 Note: The CT for phase 1 is connected at terminals X520.1 and X520.2 of the VSM. r3672[0...n] CO: VSM 10 V input CT 2 actual value / VSM CT 2 I_act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 2 at the 10 V input of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: p3670 Note: The CT for phase 2 is connected at terminals X520.3 and X520.4 of the VSM. r3673[0...n] CO: VSM 10 V input 1 actual value / VSM inp 1 U_act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 1 of the Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: p3670 Note: 10 V input 1: Terminals X520.1 and X520.2 1-560 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r3674[0...n] CO: VSM 10 V input 2 actual value / VSM inp 2 U_act VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: p0150 Func. diagram: 9880 P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 2 of the Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: p3670 Note: 10 V input 2: Terminals X520.3 and X520.4 p3680 BI: Braking Module internal inhibit / BM int inhib B_INF Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to inhibit the internal Braking Module. BI: p3680 = 1 signal: The Braking Module is inhibited. BI: p3680 = 0 signal: The Braking Module is enabled. Dependency: Refer to: A06904 Caution: When the Braking Module is inhibited, no energy can be dissipated in the braking resistor. p3681 BI: Activating Braking Module internal DC link fast discharge / BM intDCdischg act B_INF Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to activate the DC link fast discharge for an internal braking module. When the following conditions apply, the DC link fast discharge is started later with delay time (p3682): - BI: p3681 = 1 signal. - an external line contactor is opened via r0863.1 "energize contactor". The DC link fast discharge is interrupted when the following conditions apply: - BI: p3681 = 0 signal. - ON command for the infeed. Recommend.: The DC link fast discharge should be activated if there is an external line contactor and is correctly interconnected (r0863.1, p0860). If the DC link fast discharge is not activated together with an external line contactor, then faults could occur when pre-charging (e.g. F300027). Dependency: Refer to: p3682 Refer to: F30027 Notice: The parameter is only effective for Basic Line Modules with the internal Braking Module (this is valid for Basic Line Modules with a power rating of less than 100 kW). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-561 Parameters List of parameters p3682 Braking Module internal DC link fast discharge delay time / BM int DC dischg t B_INF Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 500 [ms] Max 4294967295 [ms] Factory setting 1000 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time for switching in the DC link fast discharge for an internal Braking Module. Dependency: Refer to: p3681 Notice: The parameter is only effective for Basic Line Modules with the internal Braking Module (this is valid for Basic Line Modules with a power rating of less than 100 kW). p3683 Braking Module internal activation threshold brake chopper / BM int act thresh B_INF Can be changed: C2(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 110.00 [V] Max 780.00 [V] Factory setting 760.00 [V] Description: Sets the activation threshold for the braking chopper. Note: The activation threshold is only effective if the "Device supply voltage reduced" function (p0212.0 = 1) has been activated! r3685 BO: Digital Braking Module: Pre-alarm I2t shutdown / Dig BM A I2t shutd B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: The binector output uses a 1 signal to indicate that 80 % of the highest permissible I2t value has been reached in the Braking Module. Dependency: Refer to: A06905 r3686 BO: Digital Braking Module Fault / Dig BM Fault B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: The binector output uses a 1 signal to indicate an overcurrent fault or an I2t shutdown in the Braking Module. Dependency: Refer to: F06906 r3687 BO: Digital Braking Module pre-alarm overtemperature / Dig BM A overtemp B_INF Description: 1-562 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays a fault due to the excessively high temperature. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 1 signal: The connected temperature sensor (X21.1, X21.2) signals an overtemperature. Recommend.: Measure the braking resistor temperature using the temperature sensor. r3688 BO: Braking Module internal overtemperature shutdown / BM int temp shutd B_INF Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the shutdown due to the excessively high temperature. 1 signal: The connected temperature sensor (X21.1, X21.2) signals an overtemperature. The highest permissible temperature at the connected temperature sensor has been exceeded and results in a shutdown. Dependency: Refer to: F06908 r3689 BO: Digital Braking Module Uce fault / Dig BM Uce fault B_INF Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays an Uce fault in the internal Braking Module. 1 signal: An Uce fault is present in the internal Braking Module. Dependency: Refer to: F06909 p3784[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive external increase voltage / Sync ext U incr VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to increase the voltage for external line-drive synchronization. BI: p3784 = 1 signal: The voltage is increased. Note: Only SINAMICS GM150. p3785[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive external decrease voltage / Sync ext U decr VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to decrease the voltage for external line-drive synchronization. BI: p3785 = 1 signal: The voltage is lowered. Note: Only SINAMICS GM150. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-563 Parameters List of parameters p3800[0...n] Sync-line-drive activation / Sync act VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the activation for the line-drive synchronization. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p3801, p3802 Note: When the ground fault monitoring initiates a fault for overlapping synchronizing the threshold value p0287[1] for the Motor Module and the associated infeed must be appropriately increased (e.g. p0287[1] = 100 %). Sync-line-drive de-activated Sync-line-drive activated VSM-INT For p3800 = 1, the following applies: The INTERNAL voltage actual values are used for synchronization. The effects that a (sine-wave) filter - that is connected between the Motor Module and motor - has on the voltage actual values are taken into account (theoretically) by appropriately selecting p0230. VSM: Voltage Sensing Module p3801[0...n] VECTOR_G Sync-line-drive, drive object number / Sync DO_No Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 62 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the drive object number of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) used for the line-drive synchronization. Dependency: Refer to: p3800, p3802 Notice: The current controller sampling time p0115[0] of the drive object with the VSM used for synchronization must be identical to the current controller sampling time of the drive of the drive used to perform line synchronization. Note: VSM: Voltage Sensing Module The setting p3801 = 1 is always possible (no VSM selected). If the VSM is assigned subsequently to a Motor Module, its drive object number must be entered in p3801. The line voltage is always measured using the first VSM (see p0151 index 0). p3802[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: BI: Sync-line-drive enable / Sync enable Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: CDS, p0170 Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out for the line-drive synchronization. BI: p3802 = 1 signal: The line-drive synchronization is switched in. Dependency: 1-564 Refer to: p3800, p3801 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r3803.0 CO/BO: Sync-line-drive control word / Sync STW VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the control word for the line-drive synchronization. Bit field: Bit 00 Note: Re bit 00: Signal name Sync-line-drive selected 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - For a 1 signal, p3800 > 0 is set. r3804 CO: Sync-line-drive target frequency / Sync f_target VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3030, 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the target frequency for the line-drive synchronization. Dependency: Refer to: A07941 r3805 CO: Sync-line-drive frequency difference / Sync f_diff VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the frequency difference between the measured target frequency and output frequency of the gating unit of the closed-loop control for line-drive synchronization. p3806[0...n] Sync-line-drive frequency difference threshold value / Sync f_diff thresh VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 1.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.10 [Hz] Sets the threshold value of the frequency difference to activate the closed-loop phase control for line-drive synchronization. The closed-loop phase control is activated (r3819.6 = 1), if the frequency difference is less that the threshold value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-565 Parameters List of parameters r3808 CO: Sync-line-drive phase difference / Sync phase diff VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1 Min - [] Max - [] Factory setting - [] Displays the phase difference between the measured target phase and phase of the gating unit of the closed-loop control for line-drive synchronization. p3809[0...n] Sync-line-drive phase setpoint / Sync phase setp VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -180.00 [] Max 179.90 [] Factory setting 0.00 [] Description: Sets the phase setpoint for the line-drive synchronization. p3811[0...n] Sync-line-drive frequency limiting / Sync f_lim VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [Hz] Max 1.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.20 [Hz] Description: Sets the frequency limiting of the phase controller output for the line-drive synchronization. r3812 CO: Sync-line-drive correction frequency / Sync f_corr VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 3080, 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [Hz] Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Description: Displays the correction frequency for the line-drive synchronization. p3813[0...n] Sync-line-drive phase synchronism threshold value / Sync Ph_sync thrsh VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.00 [] Max 20.00 [] Factory setting 2.00 [] Sets the threshold value of the phase synchronism for the line-drive synchronization. A prerequisite for synchronism is achieved if the phase difference is lower than the threshold value. Note: Synchronism is reached (r3819.2 = 1), if the AND logic operation of the results from the phase measurement (p3813) and voltage measurement (p3815) is fulfilled. 1-566 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r3814 CO: Sync-line-drive voltage difference / Sync U_diff VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [Vrms] Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Displays the voltage difference between the measured target voltage and output voltage of the gating unit of the closed-loop control for line-drive synchronization. p3815[0...n] Sync-line-drive voltage difference threshold value / Sync U_diff thresh VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 20.00 [%] Factory setting 10.00 [%] Description: Sets the threshold value of the voltage difference for the line-drive synchronization. A prerequisite for synchronism is reached if the voltage difference is less than the threshold value. Note: Synchronism is reached (r3819.2 = 1), if the AND logic operation of the results from the phase measurement (p3813) and voltage measurement (p3815) is fulfilled. For voltage manipulated quantity margin (reserve) of the drive converter, the amplitude difference (r3814) between the setpoint and actual value is controlled (corrected) to zero. r3819.0...7 VECTOR_G CO/BO: Sync-line-drive status word / Sync ZSW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7020 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the line-drive synchronization. Bit field: Bit 00 02 03 05 06 07 Signal name Sync-line-drive enabled Sync-line-drive synchronism reached Sync-line-drive synchronizing error Sync-line-drive frequency measurement active Sync-line-drive phase control active Sync-line-drive without drive 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP - Yes Yes No No - p3820[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n0 / Friction n0 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 15.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 1st value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3830, p3845 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-567 Parameters List of parameters p3821[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n1 / Friction n1 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 30.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 2nd value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3831, p3845 p3822[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n2 / Friction n2 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 60.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. Dependency: Refer to: p3832, p3845 This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 3rd value pair of the friction characteristic. p3823[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n3 / Friction n3 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 120.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. Dependency: Refer to: p3833, p3845 This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 4th value pair of the friction characteristic. p3824[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n4 / Friction n4 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 150.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 5th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: 1-568 Refer to: p3834, p3845 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3825[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n5 / Friction n5 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 300.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. Dependency: Refer to: p3835, p3845 This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 6th value pair of the friction characteristic. p3826[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n6 / Friction n6 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 600.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 7th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3836, p3845 p3827[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n7 / Friction n7 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 1200.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. Dependency: Refer to: p3837, p3845 This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 8th value pair of the friction characteristic. p3828[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n8 / Friction n8 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 1500.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 9th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3838, p3845 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-569 Parameters List of parameters p3829[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n9 / Friction n9 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 3000.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 10th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3839, p3845 p3830[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M0 / Friction M0 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. Dependency: Refer to: p3820, p3845 p3831[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M1 / Friction M1 This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 1st value pair of the friction characteristic. VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 2nd value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3821, p3845 p3832[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M2 / Friction M2 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. Dependency: Refer to: p3822, p3845 This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 3rd value pair of the friction characteristic. 1-570 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3833[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M3 / Friction M3 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. Dependency: Refer to: p3823, p3845 p3834[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M4 / Friction M4 This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 4th value pair of the friction characteristic. VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 5th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3824, p3845 p3835[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M5 / Friction M5 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. Dependency: Refer to: p3825, p3845 p3836[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M6 / Friction M6 This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 6th value pair of the friction characteristic. VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 7th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3826, p3845 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-571 Parameters List of parameters p3837[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M7 / Friction M7 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. Dependency: Refer to: p3827, p3845 p3838[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M8 / Friction M8 This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 8th value pair of the friction characteristic. VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 9th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3828, p3845 p3839[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M9 / Friction M9 VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 10th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3829, p3845 r3840.0...9 CO/BO: Friction characteristic, status word / Friction ZSW VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the state of the friction characteristic. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 08 09 Note: Re bit 9: Signal name Friction characteristic OK Friction characteristic record activated Friction characteristic record completed Friction characteristic record aborted Friction characteristic positive direction Status model-controlled frictional torque 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Upper 0 signal No No No No No Lower FP - For closed-control of an induction motors with encoder, the switchover between the current and observer model is displayed (see also r1751 bit 19), if p3844 is > 0. 1-572 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters For bit 9 = 0 (observer model active) the frictional torque is calculated from the characteristic values from the characteristic point entered into p3844. For bit 9 = 1 (current model active) the frictional torque is calculated from the characteristic values below the characteristic point entered into p3844. r3841 CO: Friction characteristic output / Frict outp VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2003 Expert list: 1 Min - [Nm] Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Description: Displays the torque of the friction characteristic dependent on the speed. Dependency: Refer to: p1569, p3842 p3842 Friction characteristic activation / Frict act VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to activate and de-activate the friction characteristic. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p1569, r3841, p3845 p3843[0...n] Friction characteristic smoothing time frictional torque diff. / Frict T_smooth dM VECTOR_G (n/M) Friction characteristic de-activated Friction characteristic activated Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the frictional torque difference, which is entered when changing over the status bit r3840 bit 9. Dependency: Refer to: p3844 p3844[0...n] Friction characteristic number changeover point upper / Frict chngov pt up VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Closed-loop control Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 0 Selects the upper changeover point of the friction characteristic for the frictional torque input controlled by the motor model of the induction motor. The speed of this changeover point is preassigned when automatically calculating with the changeover speed p1752. The changeover point located below is preassigned with the changeover speed p1752 * (1 - p1753). Example: p3844 = 3 means that the speed value for the change to the monitor model (p3823 = p1752) is entered into p3823 (friction characteristic value n3). Depending on the display of r3840 bit 9, the frictional torque is calculated from the friction characteristic values, which are associated with these changeover points. For the changeover of the motor model, with hysteresis, the frictional torque smoothed with p3843 changes between these two states. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-573 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: As part of the automatic calculation (p0340), p3844 is only activated for closed loop control (p1300 = 21, 23) of induction motors with encoder. Refer to: p3843 Notice: If the changeover point defined using p3844 does not match the changeover speed p1752, then internally, the model-controlled friction torque input is automatically deactivated (same as for p3844 = 0). Note: For p3844 = 0, the model-controlled frictional torque changeover is deactivated. The frictional torque is then calculated the same as for the encoderless control by interpolating between the points along the friction characteristic. p3845 Friction characteristic record activation / Frict rec act VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Setting for the friction characteristic record. After the next power-on command, the friction characteristic is automatically recorded. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Friction characteristic record de-activated Friction char record activated for all directions Friction char record activated for positive direction Friction char record activated for negative direction Dependency: When selecting the friction characteristic measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed. Danger: For linear drives (refer to r0108 bit 12) it is not permissible to carry out the friction characteristic measurement for mechanical systems that limit travel. For drives with a mechanical system that limit the distance moved, it must be ensured that during recording, the friction characteristic is not reached. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried out. Notice: To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977). Note: When the friction characteristic record is active, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971, p0977). When the friction characteristic record is active (p3845 > 0), it is not possible to change p3820 ... p3829, p3830 ... p3839 and p3842. When recording the friction characteristic, in addition to the friction, the motor losses are also determined (e.g. iron losses, eddy current losses and re-magnetizing losses). A differentiation is not made between these individual loss components. We recommend that a motor temperature sensor is used because torque deviations can also be emulated/mapped on the characteristic due to the thermal influence. p3846[0...n] VECTOR_G (n/M) Friction characteristic record ramp-up/ramp-down time / Frict rec t_RFG Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 999999.000 [s] Factory setting 10.000 [s] Description: Sets the ramp-up/ramp-down time of the ramp-up/ramp-down function generator to automatically record the friction characteristic. The drive is accelerated from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed/velocity (p1082) in this time. Dependency: Refer to: p3845 1-574 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p3847[0...n] Friction characteristic record warm-up time / Frict rec t_warm VECTOR_G (n/M) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: 7010 P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [s] Max 3600.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the warm-up time. For an automatic trace (record) to start, the highest selected speed (p3829) is approached and this time is held. After this, the measurement is started with the highest speed. Dependency: Refer to: p3829, p3845 p3860 Number of Braking Modules connected in parallel / BM qty par_cct B_INF (Brk Mod ext) Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9951 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 8 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of Braking Modules connected in parallel in a DC link. Note: The parameter can only be written to if the infeed is in the commissioning mode (p0010 = 2). r3861.0...7 BO: Braking Module inhibit/acknowledgement / BM inhib/ackn B_INF (Brk Mod ext) Can be changed: - Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9951 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Signal to energize terminal X21.1 "inhibit/acknowledgement" on the Braking Module. This binector output is used as signal source to interconnect to a digital output. For "booksize" formats the digital output must be connected to terminal X21.1 and for "chassis" formats the digital output must be connected to terminal X21.3 of the particular Braking Module. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Signal name Inhibit/acknowledge Braking Module 1 Inhibit/acknowledge Braking Module 2 Inhibit/acknowledge Braking Module 3 Inhibit/acknowledge Braking Module 4 Inhibit/acknowledge Braking Module 5 Inhibit/acknowledge Braking Module 6 Inhibit/acknowledge Braking Module 7 Inhibit/acknowledge Braking Module 8 1 signal High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - Warning: Check that binector outputs BO: r3861.n are connected correctly and that the appropriate digital outputs are wired correctly. If the interconnection/wiring is incorrect, the software could execute a different (incorrect) function via binector outputs BO: r3861.n if the Braking Module develops a fault. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-575 Parameters List of parameters p3862 Braking Module DC link fast discharge delay time / BM DC-dischg t_del B_INF (Brk Mod ext) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9951 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 500 [ms] Max 4294967295 [ms] Factory setting 1000 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time for switching in the DC link fast discharge. Dependency: Refer to: p3863, r3864 Note: The DC link fast discharge is only possible for "booksize" formats. This function is not supported for "chassis" formats. p3863 BI: Activating Braking Module DC link fast discharge / BM DC-dischg act B_INF (Brk Mod ext) Can be changed: T Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9951 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to activate the DC link fast discharge. The DC link fast discharge is started later with delay time (p3862) when the following conditions apply: - BI: p3863 = 1 signal. - an external line contactor is opened via r0863.1 "energize contactor". The DC link fast discharge is interrupted when the following conditions apply: - BI: p3863 = 0 signal. - ON command for the infeed. Recommend.: The DC link fast discharge should be activated if there is an external line contactor and is correctly interconnected (r0863.1, p0860). If the DC link fast discharge is not activated together with an external line contactor, then faults could occur when pre-charging (e.g. F30027). Dependency: Refer to: r3864 Refer to: F30027 Note: The DC link fast discharge is only possible for "booksize" formats. This function is not supported for "chassis" formats. r3864.0...7 BO: Braking Module DC link fast discharge / BM DC link dischg B_INF (Brk Mod ext) Can be changed: - Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9951 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Signal to control (energize) terminal X21.2 "DC link fast discharge" on the Braking Module. This binector output is used as signal source to interconnect to a digital output. The digital output must be connected to terminal X21.2 of the particular Braking Module. Bit field: 1-576 Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Signal name Fast discharge Braking Module 1 Fast discharge Braking Module 2 Fast discharge Braking Module 3 Fast discharge Braking Module 4 Fast discharge Braking Module 5 Fast discharge Braking Module 6 Fast discharge Braking Module 7 Fast discharge Braking Module 8 1 signal High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p3863 Refer to: F30027 Warning: It must be carefully ensured that the binector outputs BO: p3864.n are correctly interconnected and also that the appropriate digital outputs are correctly connected up. If the interconnection/connection is incorrect, in the case of an active DC link fast discharge, the software could execute another function (incorrect function) via binector outputs BO: p3864.n or could also permanently control the DC link fast discharge even if the line contactor is closed. Note: The DC link fast discharge is only possible for "booksize" formats. This function is not supported for "chassis" formats. p3865[0...7] BI: Braking Module pre-warning I*t shutdown / BM I*t shutdown B_INF (Brk Mod ext) Can be changed: T Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9951 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the message "pre-alarm I*t shutdown" of the Braking Module. BI: p3865[0...7] = 1 signal --> no pre-alarm, I*t shutdown BI: p3865[0...7] = 0 signal --> pre-alarm I*t shutdown (A06901) Dependency: Refer to: A06901 Note: For the Braking Module, this message is output via the following terminal: - X21.4 for the "Booksize" format This function is not supported for the "chassis" format. p3866[0...7] BI: Braking Module fault / BM fault B_INF (Brk Mod ext) Can be changed: T Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9951 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the "Fault" message of the Braking Module. BI: p3866[0...7] = 1 signal --> No fault BI: p3866[0...7] = 0 signal --> fault (A06900) For a 0 signal, an acknowledgement via BO: r3861 is automatically carried out at certain time intervals. Dependency: Refer to: A06900 Note: For the Braking Module, this message is output via the following terminal: - X21.4 for the "Booksize" format - X21.5 for the "Chassis" format p3900 Completion of quick commissioning / Compl quick_comm B_INF Description: Can be changed: C2(1) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Exits the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) with automatic calculation of all of the parameters that depend on the entries made during the quick commissioning. p3900 = 1 initially includes a parameter reset (factory setting, the same as p0970 = 1) for all parameters of the drive object; however, without overwriting the entries made during the quick commissioning. The interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p0700 are re-established and all of the dependent filter and closed-loop control parameters are calculated (corresponding to p0340 = 1). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-577 Parameters List of parameters p3900 = 2 includes the restoration of the interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p0700 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 = 1. p3900 = 3 only includes the end of quick commissioning. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of 0. p3900 Completion of quick commissioning / Compl quick_comm VECTOR_G Description: No quick parameterization Quick parameterization after parameter reset Quick param. (only) for controller par. and reset for BICO par Completion of quick commissioning Can be changed: C2(1) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Exits quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) with automatic calculation of all parameters of all existing drive data sets that depend on the entries made during quick commissioning. p3900 = 1 initially includes a parameter reset (factory setting, the same as p0970 = 1) for all parameters of the drive object; however, without overwriting the entries made during the quick commissioning. The interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p0700, p1000 and p1500 are re-established and all of the dependent motor, open-loop and control-loop control parameters are calculated (corresponding to p0340 = 1). p3900 = 2 includes the restoration of the interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p0700, p1000 and p1500 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 = 1. p3900 = 3 only includes the calculations associated with the motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters corresponding to p0340 = 1. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: No quick parameterization Quick parameterization after parameter reset Quick parameterization (only) for BICO and motor parameters Quick parameterization for motor parameters (only) Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Note: When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of 0. When calculating motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters (such as for p0340 = 1) parameters associated with a selected Siemens catalog motor are not overwritten. If a catalog motor has not been selected (see p0300), then the following parameters are reset with p3900 > 0 in order to restore the situation that applied when commissioning the drive for the first time: induction motors p0320, p0352, p0353, p0362 ... p0369, p0391 ... p0393, p0604, p0605, p0626 ... p0628 synchronous motor p0326, p0327, p0352, p0353, p0391 ... p0393, p0604, p0605. p3901[0...n] Power unit EEPROM Vdc offset calibration / PU EEPROM Vdc_offs B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1, C2(1), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -40.0 [V] Max 40.0 [V] Factory setting 0.0 [V] Description: Differential voltage for calibrating the offset for DC-link voltage measurement. Dependency: Caution: Refer to: r0192, p0212 Incorrect use of the calibration can have a negative impact on the closed-loop control. The parameter influences the upper and lower voltage detection. 1-578 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Parameter entries are directly saved in the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved. The parameter is only effective in the case of booksize power units if r0192 bit 22 and p0212 bit 0 are set. r3925[0...n] Identification final display / Ident final_disp VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the commissioning steps that have been carried out. Bit field: Bit 00 02 03 04 10 15 Note: Signal name Motor/control parameters calculated (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) Motor data identification carried out at standstill (p1910 = 1) Rotating measurement carried out (p1960 = 1, 2) Motor encoder adjustment carried out (p1960 = 1, p1990 = 1,3) Automatic parameterization only for U/f control (r0108.2 = 0) Motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters changed 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Changed Not changed - The individual bits are only set if the appropriate action has been initiated and successfully completed. When motor rating plate parameters are changed, the final display is reset. When setting the individual bits, all of the most significant bits are reset. r3927[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Successfully completed component of the last motor data identification carried out. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 11 12 14 Signal name Stator inductance estimate no measurement Cl.-loop current control w/ dead-beat controller Rotor time constant estimate no measurement Leakage inductance estimate no measurement Activates the identification dynamic leakage inductance Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time range Activate vibration damping De-activate vibration detection De-activate pulse measurement Lq Ld De-activate rotor resistance Rr measurement De-activate valve interlocking time measurement 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No - Yes No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-579 Parameters List of parameters 15 16 Determine only stator resistance, valve volt- Yes age fault, dead time Short motor identification (lower quality) Yes Dependency: Refer to: r3925 Note: The parameter is a copy of p1909. r3928[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config VECTOR_G (n/M) No - No - Can be changed: - Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Successfully completed component of the last rotating measurement carried out. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 12 Signal name Enc test active Saturation characteristic identification Moment of inertia identification Re-calculates the speed controller parameters Speed controller optimization (vibration test) q leakage inductance ident. (for current controller adaptation) Measurement shortened 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Dependency: Refer to: r3925 Note: The parameter is a copy of p1959. p3950 Service parameter / Serv. par. CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1, U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: For service personnel only. r3974 Drive unit status word / Drv_unit ZSW CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the drive unit. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 1-580 Signal name Software reset active Writing of parameters disabled as parameter save in progress Writing of parameters disabled as macro is running 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - Yes No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r3977 BICO counter, topology / BICO counter topo CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the BICO interconnections that have been parameterized in the complete (overall) topology. Dependency: Refer to: r3978, r3979 r3978 BICO CounterDevice / BICO CounterDevice CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection. Description: Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this device. The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection. r3979 BICO counter, drive object / BICO counter DO B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this drive object. The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection. p3981 Faults, acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO All objects Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8060 P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Setting to acknowledge all active faults of a drive object. Notice: Safety messages cannot be acknowledged using this parameter. Note: Parameter should be set from 0 to 1 to acknowledge. After acknowledgement, the parameter is automatically reset to 0. p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the mode to change over the master control / LOCAL mode. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-581 Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 1: Danger: When changing the master control in operation, the drive can manifest undesirable behavior - e.g. it can accelerate up to another setpoint. r3986 Parameter count / Parameter No. All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Change master control for STW1.0 = 0 Change master control in operation Displays the number of parameters for this drive unit. The number comprises the device-specific and the drive-specific parameters. Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0981, r0989 r3988[0...1] Boot state / Boot_state CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10800 Factory setting - Index 0: Displays the boot state. Index 1: Displays the partial boot state Value: 0: 1: 10: 20: 30: 40: 50: 90: 100: 101: 110: 111: 112: 113: 114: 115: 117: 150: 160: 170: 180: 200: 210: 250: 325: 350: 360: 370: 380: 1-582 Not active Fatal fault Fault Reset all parameters Drive object modified Download using commissioning software Parameter download using commissioning software Reset Control Unit and delete drive objects Start initialization Wait for topology input Instantiate Control Unit basis Insert drive object Remove drive object Change drive object number Change component number Parameter download using commissioning software Remove component Wait until actual topology determined Evaluate topology Instantiate Control Unit reset Initialization YDB configuration information First commissioning Create drive packages Wait for topology acknowledge Wait for input of drive type Determine drive type Write into topology-dependent parameters Wait until p0009 = 0 is set Check topology (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 550: 625: 650: 660: 670: 680: 690: 700: 725: 740: 745: 750: 800: 10050: 10100: 10150: 10200: 10250: 10300: 10350: 10400: 10450: 10500: 10550: 10600: 10800: Call conversion functions for parameter Wait non-cyclic starting DRIVE-CLiQ Start cyclic operation Evaluate drive commissioning status Autom. FW update DRIVE-CLiQ components Wait for CU LINK slaves Wait non-cyclic starting DRIVE-CLiQ Save parameters Wait until DRIVE-CLiQ cyclic Check the ability to operate Start of the time slices Interrupt enable Initialization finished Wait for synchronization Wait for CU LINK slaves Wait until actual topology determined Evaluation component status Call conversion functions for parameter Preparation cyclic operation Autom. FW update DRIVE-CLiQ components Wait for slave properties Check CX/NX status Wait until DRIVE-CLiQ cyclic Carry out warm start Evaluate, encoder status Partial boot completed Index: [0] = System [1] = Partial boot r3996[0...1] Parameter write inhibit status / Par_write inhib st All objects Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays whether writing to parameters is inhibited. r3996[0] = 0: Parameter write not inhibited. 0 < r3996[0] < 100: Parameter write inhibited. The value shows how the calculations are progressing. Index: [0] = Progress calculations [1] = Cause Note: Re index 1: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. r3998 First infeed commissioning / First inf_comm B_INF Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting - Displays whether the infeed must be commissioned for the first time. 0 = Yes 2 = No (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-583 Parameters List of parameters r3998[0...n] VECTOR_G Description: First drive commissioning / First drv_comm Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting - Displays whether the drive still has to be commissioned for the first time. 0 = Yes 2 = No r4021 TB30 digital inputs terminal actual value / TB30 DI act value TB30 Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9100 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the actual value at the digital inputs. This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x prior to switching from the simulation mode (p4095.x = 1) to the terminal mode (p4095.x = 0). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Note: DI: Digital Input r4021 TM31 digital inputs terminal actual value / TM31 DI act value TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9550, 9552, 9560, 9562 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Signal name DI 0 (X481.1) DI 1 (X481.2) DI 2 (X481.3) DI 3 (X481.4) 1 signal High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - FP - Displays the actual value at the digital inputs. This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simulation mode (p4095.x = 1) to terminal mode (p4095.x = 0). Bit field: 1-584 Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 Signal name DI 0 (X520.1) DI 1 (X520.2) DI 2 (X520.3) DI 3 (X520.4) DI 4 (X530.1) DI 5 (X530.2) DI 6 (X530.3) DI 7 (X530.4) DI/DO 8 (X541.2) DI/DO 9 (X541.3) DI/DO 10 (X541.4) DI/DO 11 (X541.5) 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p4028.x = 1), then r4021.x = 0 is displayed. DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output r4022.0...3 TB30 CO/BO: TB30 digital inputs, status / TB30 DI status Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1790, 9100 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Dependency: Refer to: r4023 Note: DI: Digital Input r4022.0...11 CO/BO: TM31 digital inputs, status / TM31 DI status TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9550, 9552, 9560, 9562 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Signal name DI 0 (X481.1) DI 1 (X481.2) DI 2 (X481.3) DI 3 (X481.4) 1 signal High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 Dependency: Refer to: r4023 Note: DI: Digital Input Signal name DI 0 (X520.1) DI 1 (X520.2) DI 2 (X520.3) DI 3 (X520.4) DI 4 (X530.1) DI 5 (X530.2) DI 6 (X530.3) DI 7 (X530.4) DI/DO 8 (X541.2) DI/DO 9 (X541.3) DI/DO 10 (X541.4) DI/DO 11 (X541.5) 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High FP - 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output r4023.0...3 TB30 Description: BO: TB30 digital inputs, status inverted / TB30 DI status inv Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1790, 9100 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-585 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Signal name DI 0 (X481.1) DI 1 (X481.2) DI 2 (X481.3) DI 3 (X481.4) 1 signal High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Dependency: Refer to: r4022 Note: DI: Digital Input r4023.0...11 CO/BO: TM31 digital inputs, status inverted / TM31 DI status inv TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9550, 9552, 9560, 9562 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 Dependency: Refer to: r4022 Note: DI: Digital Input Signal name DI 0 (X520.1) DI 1 (X520.2) DI 2 (X520.3) DI 3 (X520.4) DI 4 (X530.1) DI 5 (X530.2) DI 6 (X530.3) DI 7 (X530.4) DI/DO 8 (X541.2) DI/DO 9 (X541.3) DI/DO 10 (X541.4) DI/DO 11 (X541.5) 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - FP - DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p4028 TM31 set input or output / TM31 DI or DO TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9560, 9562 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs as input or output on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Bit field: Bit 08 09 10 11 Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output 1-586 Signal name DI/DO 8 (X541.2) DI/DO 9 (X541.3) DI/DO 10 (X541.4) DI/DO 11 (X541.5) 1 signal Output Output Output Output 0 signal Input Input Input Input FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4030 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 0 / TB30 S_src DO 0 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1790, 9102 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for digital output DO 0 (X481.5) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Note: DO: Digital Output p4030 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DO 0 / TM31 S_src DO 0 TM31 Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9556 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the digital output DO 0 (X542.1, X542.2, X542.3) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Digital output 0 of TM31 is a relay output. If the signal at the binector input p4030 is low, then terminal COM 0 (X542.2) is connected to NC 0 (X542.1). This connection also matches the mechanical quiescent setting of the relay. If the signal at the binector input p4030 is high, then terminal COM 0 (X542.2) is connected to NO 0 (X542.3). Note: DO: Digital Output NC: Normally Closed contact NO: Normally Open contact p4031 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 1 / TB30 S_src DO 1 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9102 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 1 (X481.6) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Note: DO: Digital Output p4031 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DO 1 / TM31 S_src DO 1 TM31 Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9556 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the digital output DO 1 (X542.4, X542.5, X542.6) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Digital output 1 of TM31 is a relay output. If the signal at the binector input p4031 is low, then terminal COM 1 (X542.5) is connected to NC 1 (X542.4). This connection also matches the mechanical quiescent setting of the relay. If the signal at the binector input p4031 is high, then terminal COM 1 (X542.5) is connected to NO 1 (X542.6). Note: DO: Digital Output NC: Normally Closed contact NO: Normally Open contact (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-587 Parameters List of parameters p4032 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 2 / TB30 S_src DO 2 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9102 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 2 (X481.7) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Note: DO: Digital Output p4033 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 3 / TB30 S_src DO 3 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1790, 9102 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 3 (X481.8) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Note: DO: Digital Output p4038 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 / TM31 S_src DI/DO8 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9560 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 (X541.2) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.8 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p4039 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 / TM31 S_src DI/DO9 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9560 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 (X541.3) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.9 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p4040 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 / TM31 S_srcDI/DO10 TM31 Description: 1-588 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9562 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 (X541.4) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.10 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p4041 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 / TM31 S_src DI/DO11 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9562 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 (X541.5) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.11 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p4046 TM31 digital outputs, limit current / TM31 DO limit curr TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9560 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the limit for the total output voltage of terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 (DI/DO 8 ... 11) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p4028 Warning: Since the sum of the output currents at terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 is limited, an overcurrent or short circuit at one output terminal can cause a dip in the signal at the other terminals. r4047 TB30 digital outputs status / TB30 DO status TB30 0.1 A total current limit DI/DO 8 ... 11 1.0 A total current limit DI/DO 8 ... 11 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9102 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the digital outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Note: Inversion using p4048 has been taken into account. Signal name DO 0 (X481.5) DO 1 (X481.6) DO 2 (X481.7) DO 3 (X481.8) 1 signal High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low FP - DO: Digital Output (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-589 Parameters List of parameters r4047 TM31 digital outputs status / TM31 DO status TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9556, 9560, 9562 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the digital outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Bit field: Bit 00 01 08 09 10 11 Note: Inversion using p4048 has been taken into account. Signal name DO 0 (X542.1 - 3) DO 1 (X542.4 - 6) DI/DO 8 (X541.2) DI/DO 9 (X541.3) DI/DO 10 (X541.4) DI/DO 11 (X541.5) 1 signal High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - The setting of the DI/DO as either input or output is of no significance (p4028). DO: Digital Output DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p4048 TB30 invert digital outputs / TB30 DO inv TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9102 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Note: DO: Digital Output p4048 TM31 invert digital outputs / TM31 DO inv TM31 Signal name DO 0 (X481.5) DO 1 (X481.6) DO 2 (X481.7) DO 3 (X481.8) 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted FP - Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9556, 9560, 9562 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Bit field: Bit 00 01 08 09 10 11 Note: DO: Digital Output Signal name DO 0 (X542.1 - 3) DO 1 (X542.4 - 6) DI/DO 8 (X541.2) DI/DO 9 (X541.3) DI/DO 10 (X541.4) DI/DO 11 (X541.5) 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted FP - DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output 1-590 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4052[0...1] TB30 Description: CO: TB30 analog inputs, actual input voltage / TB30 AI U_inp act Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Displays the actual input voltage at the analog inputs for Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Note: For p4056[x] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA)) the following applies: A current less than 4 mA is not displayed in r4052[x] - but instead r4052[x] = 4 mA is output. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Note: AI: Analog Input r4052[0...1] CO: TM31 analog inputs, current input voltage/current / TM31 AI U/I_inp TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual input voltage in V when set as voltage input. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Dependency: The type of analog input AI x (voltage or current input) is set using p4056. Displays the actual input current in mA when set as current input and with the load resistor switched in. Refer to: r4056, p4056 Note: AI: Analog Input p4053[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, smoothing time constant / TB30 AI T_smooth TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 1000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Note: AI: Analog Input p4053[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, smoothing time constant / TM31 AI T_smooth TM31 Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 1000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-591 Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Note: AI: Analog Input r4055[0...1] CO: TB30 analog inputs, actual value in percent / TB30 AI value in % TB30 Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1790, 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Note: AI: Analog Input r4055[0...1] CO: TM31 analog inputs, actual value in percent / TM31 AI value in % TM31 Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Note: AI: Analog Input r4056[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, type / TB30 AI type TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 4 Max 4 Factory setting - Description: Displays the type of analog inputs. Value: 4: Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) p4056[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, type / TM31 AI type TM31 Description: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 5 Factory setting 4 Sets the type of analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). p4056[x] = 0, 4 correspond to a voltage input (r4052, p4057, p4059 are displayed in V). p4056[x] = 2, 3, 5 correspond to a current input (r4052, p4057, p4059 are displayed in mA). 1-592 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters In addition, the associated switch S5 must be appropriately set. AI 0: S5.0 = V --> voltage input, S5.0 = I --> current input (burden resistor = 250 Ohm) AI 1: S5.1 = V --> voltage input, S5.1 = I --> current input (burden resistor = 250 Ohm) Value: 0: 2: 3: 4: 5: Unipolar voltage input (0 V ... +10 V) Unipolar current input (0 mA ... +20 mA) Unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA to +20 mA) Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V) Bipolar current input (-20 mA to +20 mA) Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Warning: The maximum voltage difference between the analog input terminals AI+, AI- and the ground of the TM31 (X520.6, X530.3) may not exceed 35 V. For operation with the load resistor switched in, the voltage between the differential inputs AI+ and AI- may not exceed 15 V or the impressed current of 60 mA; if this is not carefully observed, the input will be damaged. Notice: For operation as a voltage input/current input, switch S5.0 or S5.1 must be appropriately set. Note: When changing p4056, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p4057, p4058, p4059, p4060) are overwritten with the following default values: For p4056 = 0, 4, p4057 is set to 0.0 V, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 10.0 V and p4060 to 100.0 %. For p4056 = 2, 5, p4057 is set to 0.0 mA, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 20.0 mA and p4060 to 100.0 %. For p4056 = 3, p4057 is set to 4.0 mA, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 20.0 mA and p4060 to 100.0 %. p4057[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value x1 / TB30 AI char x1 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -11.000 [V] Max 11.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4057[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value x1 / TM31 AI char x1 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -20.000 Max 20.000 Factory setting 0.000 Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V or input current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type. Refer to: r4056, p4056 Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified. Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-593 Parameters List of parameters p4058[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value y1 / TB30 AI char y1 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4058[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value y1 / TM31 AI char y1 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified. Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4059[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value x2 / TB30 AI char x2 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -11.000 [V] Max 11.000 [V] Factory setting 10.000 [V] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4059[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value x2 / TM31 AI char x2 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -20.000 Max 20.000 Factory setting 10.000 Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. 1-594 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V or input current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type. Refer to: r4056, p4056 Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified. Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4060[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value y2 / TB30 AI char y2 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4060[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value y2 / TM31 AI char y2 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified. Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4061[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, wire breakage monitoring response threshold / TM31 WireBrkThresh TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mA] Max 20.00 [mA] Factory setting 2.00 [mA] Description: Sets the response threshold for wire-breakage monitoring of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Dependency: For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active: p4056[x] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA)) Refer to: r4056, p4056 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-595 Parameters List of parameters p4062[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, wire breakage monitoring delay time / TM31 wirebrk t_del TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time for wire-breakage monitoring of the analog inputs on Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) p4063[0...1] TB30 analog inputs offset / TB30 AI offset TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -20.000 [V] Max 20.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Description: Sets the offset for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) The offset is added to the input signal before the scaling characteristic. p4063[0...1] TM31 analog inputs offset / TM31 AI offset TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -20.000 Max 20.000 Factory setting 0.000 Description: Sets the offset for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) p4066[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, activate absolute value generation / TB30 AI absVal act The offset is added to the input signal before the scaling characteristic. TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog input signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Value: 0: 1: Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) 1-596 No absolute value generation Absolute value generation switched in (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4066[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, activate absolute value generation / TM31 AI absVal act TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog input signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Value: 0: 1: Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) p4067[0...1] BI: TB30 analog inputs invert signal source / TB30 AI inv S_src TB30 No absolute value generation Absolute value generation switched in Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog input signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) p4067[0...1] BI: TM31 analog inputs invert signal source / TM31 AI inv S_src TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog inputs signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) p4068[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, noise suppression window / TB30 AI window TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 20.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the noise suppression window of the analog inputs for Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Changes less than the window are suppressed. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Note: AI: Analog Input (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-597 Parameters List of parameters p4068[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, window to suppress noise / TM31 AI window TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 20.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the noise suppression window of the analog inputs for Terminal Module31 (TM31). Changes less than the window are suppressed. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Note: AI: Analog Input p4069[0...1] BI: TB30 analog inputs, signal source for enable / TB30 AI enable TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for enabling the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) p4069[0...1] BI: TM31 analog inputs, signal source for enable / TM31 AI enable TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source for the enable signal of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) p4071[0...1] CI: TB30 analog outputs, signal source / TB30 AO S_src TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1790, 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) Note: AO: Analog Output 1-598 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4071[0...1] TM31 CI: TM31 analog outputs, signal source / TM31 AO S_src Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) Note: AO: Analog Output r4072[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, output value currently referred / TB30 AO outp_val TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) r4072[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, output value currently referred / TM31 AO outp_val TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) p4073[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, smoothing time constant / TB30 AO T_smooth TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 1000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order low pass filter for the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-599 Parameters List of parameters p4073[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, smoothing time constant / TM31 AO T_smooth TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [ms] Max 1000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) r4074[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, actual output voltage / TB30 AO U_outp TB30 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the actual output voltage at the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) r4074[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, current output voltage/current / TM31 AO U/I_outp TM31 Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the actual output voltage in V when set as voltage output. Displays the actual output voltage in mA when set as current output. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) Dependency: The type of the analog output AO x (voltage or current output) is set using p4076. Refer to: r4076, p4076 Note: AO: Analog Output p4075[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, activate absolute value generation / TB30 AO absVal act TB30 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Value: 0: 1: Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) 1-600 No absolute value generation Absolute value generation switched in (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4075[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, activate absolute value generation / TM31 AO absVal act TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Value: 0: 1: Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) r4076[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, type / TB30 AO type TB30 No absolute value generation Absolute value generation switched in Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 4 Max 4 Factory setting - Description: Displays the type of analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Value: 4: Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) p4076[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, type / TM31 AO type TM31 Description: Voltage output (-10 V ... +10 V) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 4 Sets the type of analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). p4076[x] = 1, 4 correspond to a voltage output (p4074, p4078, p4080, p4083 are displayed in V). p4076[x] = 0, 2, 3 correspond to a current output (p4074, p4078, p4080, p4083 are displayed in mA). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: Current output (0 mA ... +20 mA) Voltage output (0 V ... +10 V) Current output (+4 mA ... +20 mA) Current output (-20 mA ... +20 mA) Voltage output (-10 V ... +10 V) Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) Dependency: Refer to: p4077, p4078, p4079, p4080 Note: When changing p4076, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p4077, p4078, p4079, p4080) are overwritten with the following default values: For p4076 = 0, 3, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 0.0 mA, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 20.0 mA. For p4076 = 1, 4, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 0.0 V, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 10.0 V. For p4076 = 2, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 4.0 mA, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 20.0 mA. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-601 Parameters List of parameters p4077[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value x1 / TB30 AO char x1 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4077[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value x1 / TM31 AO char x1 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) Dependency: Refer to: r4076, p4076 Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p4076 (type of analog outputs). Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4078[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value y1 / TB30 AO char y1 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -11.000 [V] Max 11.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4078[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value y1 / TM31 AO char y1 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -20.000 [V] Max 20.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Description: 1-602 Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog output type. Refer to: r4076, p4076 Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p4076 (type of analog outputs). Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4079[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value x2 / TB30 AO char x2 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4079[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value x2 / TM31 AO char x2 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) Dependency: Refer to: r4076, p4076 Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p4076 (type of analog outputs). Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4080[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value y2 / TB30 AO char y2 TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -11.000 [V] Max 11.000 [V] Factory setting 10.000 [V] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-603 Parameters List of parameters p4080[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value y2 / TM31 AO char y2 TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -20.000 [V] Max 20.000 [V] Factory setting 10.000 [V] Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog output type. Refer to: r4076, p4076 Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p4076 (type of analog outputs). Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. p4082[0...1] BI: TB30 analog outputs invert signal source / TB30 AO inv S_src TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for inverting the analog output signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) p4082[0...1] BI: TM31 analog outputs invert signal source / TM31 AO inv S_src TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog output signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) p4083[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, offset / TB30 AO offset TB30 Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9106 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -10.000 Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.000 Sets the offset for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). The offset is added to the output signal after the scaling characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) 1-604 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4083[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, offset / TM31 AO offset TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9572 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -20.000 Max 20.000 Factory setting 0.000 Description: Sets the offset for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type. The offset is added to the output signal after the scaling characteristic. Refer to: r4076, p4076 Note: This means, for example, the offset of a downstream isolating amplifier can be compensated. p4095 TB30 digital inputs, simulation mode / TB30 DI sim_mode TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1790, 9100 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the simulation mode for the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p4096. Signal name DI 0 (X481.1) DI 1 (X481.2) DI 2 (X481.3) DI 3 (X481.4) 1 signal Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation 0 signal Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval FP - Refer to: p4096 Warning: A drive that is moved by simulating the inputs of a Terminal Board is brought to a standstill while the Terminal Module is being activated or de-activated. Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). DI: Digital Input p4095 TM31 digital inputs, simulation mode / TM31 DI sim_mode TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9550, 9552, 9560, 9562 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the simulation mode for the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 Signal name DI 0 (X520.1) DI 1 (X520.2) DI 2 (X520.3) DI 3 (X520.4) DI 4 (X530.1) DI 5 (X530.2) DI 6 (X530.3) 1 signal Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval FP - 1-605 Parameters List of parameters 07 08 09 10 11 Dependency: DI 7 (X530.4) DI/DO 8 (X541.2) DI/DO 9 (X541.3) DI/DO 10 (X541.4) DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval - The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p4096. Refer to: p4096 Warning: A drive that is moved by simulating the inputs of a Terminal Module is brought to a standstill while the Terminal Module is being activated or de-activated. Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p4096 TB30 digital inputs, simulation mode setpoint / TB30 DI sim setpt TB30 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1790, 9100 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the simulation mode of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p4095. Signal name DI 0 (X481.1) DI 1 (X481.2) DI 2 (X481.3) DI 3 (X481.4) 1 signal High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low FP - Refer to: p4095 Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). DI: Digital Input p4096 TM31 digital inputs, simulation mode setpoint / TM31 DI sim setp TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9550, 9552, 9560, 9562 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the simulation mode of the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 1-606 Signal name DI 0 (X520.1) DI 1 (X520.2) DI 2 (X520.3) DI 3 (X520.4) DI 4 (X530.1) DI 5 (X530.2) DI 6 (X530.3) DI 7 (X530.4) DI/DO 8 (X541.2) DI/DO 9 (X541.3) DI/DO 10 (X541.4) DI/DO 11 (X541.5) 1 signal High High High High High High High High High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p4095. Refer to: p4095 Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output p4097[0...1] TB30 TB30 analog inputs simulation mode / TB30 AI sim_mode Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Value: 0: 1: Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p4098. Terminal evaluation for analog input x Simulation for analog input x Refer to: p4098 Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). AI: Analog Input p4097[0...1] TM31 TM31 analog inputs simulation mode / TM31 AI sim_mode Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Value: 0: 1: Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p4098. Terminal evaluation for analog input x Simulation for analog input x Refer to: p4098 Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). AI: Analog Input p4098[0...1] TB30 TB30 analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / TB30 AI sim setp Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9104 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -11.000 [V] Max 11.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Description: Sets the setpoint for the input voltage in the simulation mode of the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Dependency: The simulation of an analog input is selected using p4097. Refer to: p4097 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-607 Parameters List of parameters Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). AI: Analog Input p4098[0...1] TM31 analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / TM31 AI sim setp TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9566, 9568 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -20.000 Max 20.000 Factory setting 0.000 Description: Sets the setpoint for the input value in simulation mode of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Dependency: The simulation of an analog input is selected using p4097. If AI x is parameterized as voltage input (p4056), then the setpoint is a voltage in V. If AI x is parameterized as current input (p4056), then the setpoint is a current in mA. Refer to: r4056, p4056, p4097 Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). AI: Analog Input p4099[0...2] TB30 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TB30 I/O t_sample TB30 Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1790, 9100 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 5000.00 [s] Factory setting [0] 4000.00 [s] [1] 4000.00 [s] [2] 4000.00 [s] Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = Digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO) [1] = Analog inputs (AI) [2] = Analog outputs (AO) Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29. The sampling times can only be set as an integer multiple of the basic sampling time (r0110, r0111). Refer to: p0009, r0110, r0111 Note: The changed sampling time is immediately effective after a completed sub-boot (p0009 -> 0). For clock cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation, the TB30 hardware (e.g. A/D converter ) is operated with the PROFIBUS clock cycle (r2064[1]). This clock cycle is also kept after the PROFIBUS connection has been exited up to the next time that the Control Unit is powered down. In this case, a faster sampling time than the PROFIBUS clock cycle is not practical in p4099[0...2]. p4099[0...2] TM31 TM31 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TM31 I/O t_sample Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9550 P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 5000.00 [s] Factory setting 4000.00 [s] Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = Digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO) [1] = Analog inputs (AI) [2] = Analog outputs (AO) 1-608 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29. The sampling times can only be set as an integer multiple of the DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle. The minimum permissible sampling time is 125s. Refer to: p0009, r0110, r0111 Notice: The sampling times entered in index 0 (digital inputs/outputs) and index 2 (analog outputs) must always be greater than or equal to the sampling time in index 1 (analog inputs). Note: The changed sampling time is immediately effective after a completed sub-boot (p0009 -> 0). Parameter p4099[0] must never be equal to zero. p4100[0...11] TM150 Description: TM150 sensor type / TM150 sensor type Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 5 Sets the sensor type for Terminal Module 150 (TM150) This means that the temperature sensor type is selected and the evaluation is switched in. Value: 0: 1: 2: 4: 5: 6: Evaluation disabled PTC thermistor KTY84 Bimetallic NC contact PT100 PT1000 Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 [10] = Temperature channel 10 [11] = Temperature channel 11 Notice: For p4102[0...23] = 251 C, evaluation of the corresponding threshold is deactivated. For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[0...11] = 1, 4), the following applies: To activate the corresponding alarm or fault, p4102[0...23] must be set <= 250 C. Note: The temperature sensors are connected to the following terminals: X531 = channel 0 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 6) X532 = channel 1 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 7) X533 = channel 2 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 8) X534 = channel 3 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 9) X535 = channel 4 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 10) X536 = channel 5 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 11) Details on the wiring are included in the parameter description for p4108. p4100 TM31 sensor type / TM31 sensor type TM31 Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9576 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Sets the sensor type for Terminal Module 31 (TM31) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-609 Parameters List of parameters This means that the temperature sensor type is selected and the evaluation is switched in. Value: 0: 1: 2: Evaluation disabled PTC thermistor KTY84 Notice: For p4102[0...1] = 251 C, evaluation of the corresponding threshold is deactivated. For sensor type "PTC thermistor" (p4100 = 1), the following applies: To activate the corresponding alarm or fault, p4102[0...1] must be set <= 250 C. Note: The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-). r4101[0...11] TM150 sensor resistance / TM150 R_sensor TM150 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the actual resistance value of the temperature sensor connected at the Terminal Module. Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 [10] = Temperature channel 10 [11] = Temperature channel 11 Note: The maximum measurable resistance value is approx. 2500 Ohm. For 1x2 and 2x2 conductor evaluation: The actual sensor resistance is displayed in this parameter(i.e. the cable resistance (p4110) is taken into account). The temperature sensors are connected to the following terminals: X531 = channel 0 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 6) X532 = channel 1 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 7) X533 = channel 2 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 8) X534 = channel 3 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 9) X535 = channel 4 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 10) X536 = channel 5 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 11) Details on the wiring are included in the parameter description for p4108. r4101 TM31 sensor resistance / TM31 R_sensor TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9576 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [ohm] Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Description: Displays the actual resistance value of the temperature sensor connected at the Terminal Module. Note: The maximum measurable resistance value is approx. 2170 Ohm. The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-). 1-610 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4102[0...23] TM150 Description: TM150 fault threshold/alarm threshold / TM150 F/A_thresh Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -99 [C] Max 251 [C] Factory setting 251 [C] Sets the fault threshold/alarm threshold for Terminal Module 150 (TM150). For alarms (even indices [0, 2, 4 ... 22]), the following applies: - The corresponding alarm is initiated, if the temperature actual value associated with a temperature channel exceeds the associated alarm threshold (r4105[x] > p4102[2x]. In addition, the timer is started (p4103[x]). - The alarm remains until the temperature actual value (r4105[x]) reaches or falls below the threshold value (p4102[2x] - hysteresis (p4118[x]). For faults (uneven indices [1, 3, 5 ... 23]), the following applies: - The corresponding fault is initiated, if the temperature actual value associated with a temperature channel exceeds the associated fault threshold (r4105[x] > p4102[2x+1] or the associated timer (p4103[x] has expired. - The fault remains until the temperature actual value (r4105[x]) reaches or falls below the threshold value (p4102[2x+1]) - hysteresis (p4118[x]) and the fault has been acknowledged. Index: [0] = Channel 0 alarm threshold (A35211) [1] = Channel 0 fault threshold (F35207) [2] = Channel 1 alarm threshold (A35212) [3] = Channel 1 fault threshold (F35208) [4] = Channel 2 alarm threshold (A35213) [5] = Channel 2 fault threshold (F35209) [6] = Channel 3 alarm threshold (A35214) [7] = Channel 3 fault threshold (F35210) [8] = Channel 4 alarm threshold (A35410) [9] = Channel 4 fault threshold (F35400) [10] = Channel 5 alarm threshold (A35411) [11] = Channel 5 fault threshold (F35401) [12] = Channel 6 alarm threshold (A35412) [13] = Channel 6 fault threshold (F35402) [14] = Channel 7 alarm threshold (A35413) [15] = Channel 7 fault threshold (F35403) [16] = Channel 8 alarm threshold (A35414) [17] = Channel 8 fault threshold (F35404) [18] = Channel 9 alarm threshold (A35415) [19] = Channel 9 fault threshold (F35405) [20] = Channel 10 alarm threshold (A35416) [21] = Channel 10 fault threshold (F35406) [22] = Channel 11 alarm threshold (A35417) [23] = Channel 11 fault threshold (F35407) Dependency: Refer to: p4103, r4104, r4105, p4118 Caution: Faults F35207 ... F35210 and F35400 ... F35407 only result in the drive being shut down if at least one BICO interconnection exists between the drive and the TM150. For p4102[0...23] = 251 C, evaluation of the corresponding threshold is deactivated. For sensor type "PTC thermistor" (p4100[0...11] = 1), the following applies: To activate the corresponding alarm or fault, p4102[0...23] must be set <= 250 C. Note: The hysteresis can be set in p4118[0...11]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-611 Parameters List of parameters p4102[0...1] TM31 fault threshold/alarm threshold / TM31 F/A_thresh TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9576 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -48 [C] Max 251 [C] Factory setting [0] 100 [C] [1] 120 [C] Description: Sets the fault threshold/alarm threshold for Terminal Module 31 (TM31). A35211 is initiated, if the temperature actual value r4105[0] > p4102[0] F35207 is initiated if the temperature actual value r4105[0] > p4102[1] or timer p4103[0] has expired For alarm A35211 the following applies: - Remains until the temperature actual value (r4105) reaches or falls below the value (p4102[0] - hysteresis). For fault F35207 the following applies: - Remains until the temperature actual value (r4105) reaches or falls below the value (p4102[1] - hysteresis) and the fault has been acknowledged. - The hysteresis value is 5 K and cannot be changed by the user. Index: [0] = Alarm threshold [1] = Fault threshold Dependency: Refer to: r4104 Caution: Fault F35207 only causes the drive to be shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and TM31. For p4102[0...1] = 251 C, evaluation of the corresponding threshold is deactivated. For sensor type "PTC thermistor" (p4100 = 1), the following applies: To activate the alarm or fault, p4102[0...1] must be set <= 250 C. p4103[0...11] TM150 Description: TM150 delay time / TM150 t_delay Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [s] Max 600.0 [s] Factory setting 0.0 [s] Sets the delay time for the output of the fault for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). The timer is started when the alarm threshold (e.g. p4102[0]) is exceeded. If the delay time has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then the corresponding fault is output. The fault can be acknowledged, if, after the delay time has expired, the alarm threshold is again fallen below. For sensor type "KTY84", "PT100", "PT1000" (p4100[0...11] = 2, 5, 6) the following applies: - If the fault threshold (e.g. p4102[1]) is exceeded before the delay time has expired, then the corresponding fault is immediately output. For sensor type "PTC thermistor", "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[0...11] = 1, 4), the following applies: - Alarm and fault threshold simultaneously respond. The fault is only issued after the delay time has expired. Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 1-612 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [10] = Temperature channel 10 [11] = Temperature channel 11 Dependency: Refer to: p4102, r4104, r4105, p4118 Warning: The fault F35207 ... F35210 and F35400 ... 35407 only results in the drive being shut down if at least one BICO interconnection exists between the drive and the TM150. Note: For p4103 = 0 s and sensor type "KTY84", "PT100", "PT1000" (p4100[0...11] = 2, 5, 6) the following applies: - The corresponding fault can only be initiated via the fault threshold (output of the timer is always a logical 0). For p4103 = 0 s and sensor type "PTC thermistor", "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[0...11] = 1, 4), the following applies: - The corresponding alarm and fault are simultaneously output (delay time = 0 s). p4103 TM31 temperature evaluation delay time / TM31 temp t_delay TM31 Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9576 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [ms] Max 600000.000 [ms] Factory setting 0.000 [ms] Sets the delay time for the output of the fault for the Terminal Module 31 (TM31). The timer is started when the alarm threshold (p4102[0]) is exceeded. If the delay time has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then fault F35207 is output. The fault can be acknowledged, if, after the delay time has expired, the alarm threshold is again fallen below. For sensor type "KTY84" (p4100 = 2), the following applies: If the fault threshold (p4102[1]) is exceeded before the delay time has expired, then fault F35207 is immediately output. For sensor type "PTC thermistor" (p4100 = 1), the following applies: - Alarm and fault threshold simultaneously respond. The fault is only issued after the delay time has expired. Dependency: Refer to: r4104 Warning: Fault F35207 only causes the drive to be shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and TM31. Note: With p4103 = 0 ms, the timer is de-activated and only the fault threshold is effective. r4104.0...23 BO: TM150 temperature evaluation, status / TM150 temp status TM150 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and binector output for the status for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Signal name Channel 0 alarm present Channel 0 fault present Channel 1 alarm present Channel 1 fault present Channel 2 alarm present Channel 2 fault present Channel 3 alarm present Channel 3 fault present Channel 4 alarm present Channel 4 fault present 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No FP 9626 9626 9626 9626 9626 9626 9626 9626 9626 9626 1-613 Parameters List of parameters 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Dependency: Channel 5 alarm present Channel 5 fault present Channel 6 alarm present Channel 6 fault present Channel 7 alarm present Channel 7 fault present Channel 8 alarm present Channel 8 fault present Channel 9 alarm present Channel 9 fault present Channel 10 alarm present Channel 10 fault present Channel 11 alarm present Channel 11 fault present Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 9626 9626 9627 9627 9627 9627 9627 9627 9627 9627 9627 9627 9627 9627 Refer to: p4102, p4103, r4105, p4118 r4104.0...1 BO: TM31 temperature evaluation, status / TM31 temp status TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9576 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and binector output for the status for the Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Bit field: Bit 00 01 Dependency: Refer to: p4102 Signal name Alarm is present Fault is present 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - r4105[0...11] CO: TM150 temperature actual value / TM150 temp_act val TM150 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the temperature actual value for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 [10] = Temperature channel 10 [11] = Temperature channel 11 Dependency: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[0...11] = 1, 4), the following applies: - below the nominal response temperature, r4105[0...11] = -50 C. - above the nominal response temperature, r4105[0...11] = 250 C. For sensor type "KTY84", "PT100", "PT1000" (p4100[0...11] = 2, 5, 6) the following applies: - the displayed value corresponds to the temperature actual value. Refer to: p4100, p4111, r4112, r4113, r4114 1-614 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: r4105[0...11] = -300 C is displayed in the following cases: - temperature actual value invalid (F35920 ... F35931 output). - no sensor selected (p4100[0...11] = 0). The temperature actual values can be grouped using p4111[0...2] and the maximum value, minimum value as well as the average value for each group evaluated (r4112[0...2], r4113[0...2], r4114[0...2]). r4105 CO: TM31 temperature actual value / TM31 temp_act val TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 1840, 9576 P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the temperature actual value for the Terminal Module 31 (TM31) Dependency: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" (p4100 = 1), the following applies: - below the nominal response temperature, r4105 = -50C. - above the nominal response temperature, r4105 = 250 C. For sensor type "KTY84" (p4100 = 2), the following applies: - the displayed value corresponds to the temperature actual value. Refer to: p4100 Note: r4105 = -300 C is displayed in the following cases: - temperature actual value invalid (F35920 output). - no sensor selected (p4100 = 0). The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-). p4108[0...5] TM150 terminal block measuring method / TM150 meas method TM150 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9625, 9626, 9627 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the measuring method for the terminal block X531 ... X536 for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). Re p4108[0...5] = 0 (1x2 wire evaluation): - the temperature sensor is connected at terminals 1(+) and 2(-). Re p4108[0...5] = 1 (2x2 wire evaluation): - The first temperature sensor is connected at terminals 1(+) and 2(-). - The second temperature sensor is connected at terminals 3(+) and 4(-). Re p4108[0...5] = 2 (3 wire evaluation): - the temperature sensor is connected at terminals 3(+) and 4(-). - the measuring conductor is connected at terminal 1(+). - terminals 2(-) and 4(-) must be jumpered. Re p4108[0...5] = 3 (4 wire evaluation): - the temperature sensor is connected at terminals 3(+) and 4(-). - the measuring conductor is connected at terminals 1(+) and 2(-). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 1x2 conductor evaluation 2x2 conductor evaluation 3 conductor evaluation 4 conductor evaluation Index: [0] = X531 [1] = X532 [2] = X533 [3] = X534 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-615 Parameters List of parameters [4] = X535 [5] = X536 Note: The temperature sensors are connected to the following terminals: X531 = channel 0 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 6) X532 = channel 1 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 7) X533 = channel 2 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 8) X534 = channel 3 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 9) X535 = channel 4 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 10) X536 = channel 5 (for 2x2 conductor evaluation, additionally channel 11) Re p4108[0...5] = 0, 2, 3 (1x2, 3, 4 wire evaluation): The temperature channel belonging to the terminal block with the higher number is automatically deactivated (e.g. for X531 with 3-wire evaluation, channel 6 is deactivated). p4109[0...11] TM150 conductor resistance measurement / TM150 R_cond meas TM150 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to start the measurement of the conductor resistance for a channel for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). For a 2 conductor evaluation, the total conductor resistance is measured and saved. During the temperature evaluation, the temperature actual value is automatically calibrated using the measured cable resistance. Procedure: 1. Select the measuring method (1x2/2x2) for the corresponding terminal block (p4108[0...5] = 0, 1). 2. Set the required sensor type for the corresponding channel (p4100[x] = 1 ... 6, x = 0...5 or 0...11). 3. Jumper the sensor to be connected (short-circuit the sensor conductor close to the sensor). 4. Connect the sensor conductors to the appropriate terminals 1(+), 2(-) or 3(+), 4(-). 5. For the corresponding channel, start the measurement of the conductor resistance (p4109[x] = 1). 6. After p4109[x] = 0, check the measured resistance value in p4110[x]. 7. Remove the jumper across the temperature sensor. Value: 0: 1: Inactive Start Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 [10] = Temperature channel 10 [11] = Temperature channel 11 Dependency: Refer to: p4100, p4108, p4110 Notice: Conductor resistance measurement is only possible for 1x2 or 2x2 conductor evaluation (p4108[0...5] = 0, 1). Note: The conductor resistance value can be also directly entered into p4110[0...11]. The automatic conductor calibration for 1x2 and 2x2 conductor evaluation is always performed with the value in p4110[0...11]. 1-616 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4110[0...11] TM150 conductor resistance value / TM150 R_cond value TM150 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ohm] Max 3000.00 [ohm] Factory setting 0.00 [ohm] Description: Sets and displays the cable resistance for Terminal Module 150 (TM150). The value is used for the automatic cable calibration. The value is automatically set by starting the conductor resistance measurement (p4109[0...11]) of the corresponding channel. Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 [10] = Temperature channel 10 [11] = Temperature channel 11 Dependency: Refer to: p4109 Notice: Conductor resistance measurement is only possible for 1x2 or 2x2 conductor evaluation (p4108[0...5] = 0, 1). Note: Automatic conductor calibration is deactivated using p4110[0...11] = 0. p4111[0...2] TM150 group channel assignment / TM150 grp channel TM150 Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9625 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Assigns the temperature channels to groups for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) For each group, the following calculated values are provided from the temperature actual values (r4105[0...11]): - Maximum value (r4112[0...2]) - Minimum value (r4113[0...2]) - average value (r4114[0...2]) Index: [0] = Group 0 [1] = Group 1 [2] = Group 2 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 Dependency: Refer to: r4105, r4112, r4113, r4114 Signal name Temperature channel 0 Temperature channel 1 Temperature channel 2 Temperature channel 3 Temperature channel 4 Temperature channel 5 Temperature channel 6 Temperature channel 7 Temperature channel 8 Temperature channel 9 Temperature channel 10 Temperature channel 11 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - 1-617 Parameters List of parameters Caution: When forming groups, it must be ensured that in one particular group, only temperature channels with the following sensor types are included: - "KTY84", "PT100", "PT1000" (p4100[0...11] = 2, 5, 6), real temperature actual value or alternatively - "PTC thermistor", "bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[0...11] = 1, 4), fictitious temperature actual value (-50 C, 250 C) If these sensor types are combined within one group, then the calculated values for maximum, minimum and average value will be falsified. Note: Active and inactive temperature channels can be included in one group. However, when calculating the values (r4112, r4113, r4114) only the active temperature channels with valid actual value are taken into account (r4105[0...11] not equal to -300 C). r4112[0...2] CO: TM150 group temperature actual value maximum value / TM150 grp temp max TM150 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9625 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Display and connector output for the maximum value of each group for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). This value is calculated from the actual temperature values (r4105[0...11]) of each group. Recommend.: The following connector inputs can use these connector outputs for interconnection: - CI: p0603 - CI: p0608[0...3] - CI: p0609[0...3] - CI: p2051 Index: [0] = Group 0 [1] = Group 1 [2] = Group 2 Dependency: Refer to: r4105, p4111, r4113, r4114 r4113[0...2] CO: TM150 group temperature actual value minimum value / TM150 grp temp min TM150 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9625 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Display and connector output for the minimum value of each group for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). Recommend.: The following connector inputs can use these connector outputs for interconnection: This value is calculated from the actual temperature values (r4105[0...11]) of each group. - CI: p0603 - CI: p0608[0...3] - CI: p0609[0...3] - CI: p2051 Index: [0] = Group 0 [1] = Group 1 [2] = Group 2 Dependency: Refer to: r4105, p4111, r4112, r4114 1-618 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4114[0...2] TM150 Description: CO: TM150 group temperature average actual value / TM150 grp temp av Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9625 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Display and connector output for the average value of each group for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). This value is calculated from the actual temperature values (r4105[0...11]) of each group. Recommend.: The following connector inputs can use these connector outputs for interconnection: - CI: p0603 - CI: p0608[0...3] - CI: p0609[0...3] - CI: p2051 Index: [0] = Group 0 [1] = Group 1 [2] = Group 2 Dependency: Refer to: r4105, p4111, r4112, r4113 Note: If one group is assigned sensor type "PTC" or "bimetal NC contact", then the average value -300 C is output. p4117[0...2] TM150 group sensor error effect / TM150 error effect TM150 Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9625 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Sets the effect for an error of a sensor of a group for Terminal Module TM150 (TM150). For p4117 = 0, the following applies: The defective temperature sensor assigned to a group is not take into account when forming the group. For p4117 = 1, the following applies: For a sensor error, for the maximum value, minimum value and average value of the corresponding group, a value of -300 C is output. Value: 0: 1: Skip sensor Output value = -300 C Index: [0] = Group 0 [1] = Group 1 [2] = Group 2 Dependency: Refer to: r4105, p4111, r4112, r4113, r4114 p4118[0...11] TM150 fault threshold/alarm threshold hysteresis / TM150 thresh hyst TM150 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [K] Max 50 [K] Factory setting 5 [K] Description: Sets the hysteresis for the fault threshold/alarm threshold (p4102[0...23]) for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-619 Parameters List of parameters [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 [10] = Temperature channel 10 [11] = Temperature channel 11 Dependency: Refer to: p4102, p4103, r4104, r4105 Note: The following applies for a corresponding alarm: - Remains until the temperature actual value (r4105[x]) reaches or falls below the threshold value (p4102[2x] - hysteresis (p4118[x]). The following applies for a corresponding fault: - Remains until the temperature actual value (r4105[x]) reaches or falls below the threshold value (p4102[2x+1]) hysteresis (p4118[x]) and the fault has been acknowledged. p4119[0...11] TM150 activate/deactivate smoothing / TM150 smooth act TM150 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to activate/deactivate the filter to smooth the temperature signal for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). The smoothing is realized with a 1st order lowpass filter The effective smoothing time constant depends on the number of channels that are simultaneously active and is displayed in r4120. Value: 0: 1: Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 [10] = Temperature channel 10 [11] = Temperature channel 11 Dependency: Refer to: r4120 r4120 TM150 temperature filter time constant / TM150 temp_filt T TM150 Filter deactivated Filter activated Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the smoothing time constant for the temperature filter for Terminal Module 150 (TM150). Dependency: Refer to: r4105, p4111, r4112, r4113 Note: The time constant lies in the range from 80 to 1000 ms and depends on the number of channels that are simultaneously active. 1-620 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4121 TM150 filter rated line frequency / TM150 filt f_line TM150 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9626, 9627 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the rated line frequency for the filter to skip the line frequency for Terminal Module 150 (TM150). Value: 0: 1: p4600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type / Temp_sens 1 type VECTOR_G 50 Hz 60 Hz Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 32 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the sensor type of the first temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring. Value: 0: 10: 11: 12: 20: 30: 31: 32: Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601 Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10. No sensor PTC fault PTC alarm PTC alarm & timer KTY84, PT100, PT1000 Bimetallic NC contact fault Bimetallic NC contact alarm Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual p4601[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor temperature sensor 2 sensor type / Temp_sens 2 type Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 32 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the sensor type of the second temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring. Value: 0: 10: 11: 12: 20: 30: 31: 32: Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601 Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10. No sensor PTC fault PTC alarm PTC alarm & timer KTY84, PT100, PT1000 Bimetallic NC contact fault Bimetallic NC contact alarm Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer Terminals for KTY84: X200.1, X200.2 PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-621 Parameters List of parameters Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual p4602[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 3 sensor type / Temp_sens 3 type VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 32 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the sensor type of the third temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring. Value: 0: 10: 11: 12: 20: 30: 31: 32: Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601 Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10. No sensor PTC fault PTC alarm PTC alarm & timer KTY84, PT100, PT1000 Bimetallic NC contact fault Bimetallic NC contact alarm Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer Terminals for PTC triplet and bimetallic: X200.3, X200.4 PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual p4603[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 4 sensor type / Temp_sens 4 type VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 32 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the sensor type of the fourth temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring. Value: 0: 10: 11: 12: 20: 30: 31: 32: Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601 Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10. No sensor PTC fault PTC alarm PTC alarm & timer KTY84, PT100, PT1000 Bimetallic NC contact fault Bimetallic NC contact alarm Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer Terminals for PTC triplet: X200.5, X200.6 PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual 1-622 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4610[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type MDS / Temp sens1 typ MDS VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 32 Factory setting 10 Description: Sets the sensor type of the first temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring. Value: 0: 10: 11: 12: 20: 30: 31: 32: Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601 Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11. No sensor PTC fault PTC alarm PTC alarm & timer KTY84, PT100, PT1000 Bimetallic NC contact fault Bimetallic NC contact alarm Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual p4611[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 2 sensor type MDS / Temp sens2 typ MDS VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 32 Factory setting 10 Description: Sets the sensor type of the second temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring. Value: 0: 10: 11: 12: 20: 30: 31: 32: Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601 Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11. No sensor PTC fault PTC alarm PTC alarm & timer KTY84, PT100, PT1000 Bimetallic NC contact fault Bimetallic NC contact alarm Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual p4612[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 3 sensor type MDS / Temp sens3 typ MDS VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 32 Factory setting 10 Description: Sets the sensor type of the third temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-623 Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 10: 11: 12: 20: 30: 31: 32: No sensor PTC fault PTC alarm PTC alarm & timer KTY84, PT100, PT1000 Bimetallic NC contact fault Bimetallic NC contact alarm Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601 Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11. PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual p4613[0...n] VECTOR_G Motor temperature sensor 4 sensor type MDS / Temp sens4 typ MDS Can be changed: C2(3), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130 Func. diagram: 8016 P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 32 Factory setting 10 Description: Sets the sensor type of the fourth temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring. Value: 0: 10: 11: 12: 20: 30: 31: 32: Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601 Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11. No sensor PTC fault PTC alarm PTC alarm & timer KTY84, PT100, PT1000 Bimetallic NC contact fault Bimetallic NC contact alarm Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual r4620[0...3] VECTOR_G Motor temperature measured / Mot_temp meas Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the actual temperature in the motor measured through temperature channels 1 ... 4. Index: [0] = Temperature channel 1 [1] = Temperature channel 2 [2] = Temperature channel 3 [3] = Temperature channel 4 Note: For a value not equal to -200.0 C, the following applies: - this temperature display is valid. - a KTY sensor is connected. For a value equal to -200.0 C, the following applies: - this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error). - A PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected. 1-624 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters - the temperature sensor evaluation is de-activated (p0600 = 0 or p0601 = 0). - the sensor channel is de-activated (p460x = 0 or p461x = 0). r4640[0...95] Encoder diagnostics state machine / Enc diag stat_ma ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder diagnostics for the PROFIdrive interface. p4650 Encoder functional reserve component number / Enc fct_res num CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 399 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the component number (p0141) of the encoder whose functional reserve is to be displayed (r4651). Dependency: Refer to: r4651 r4651[0...3] Encoder functional reserve / Enc fct_reserve CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the functional reserve of the encoder selected via p4650. 0 ... 25 %: The function limit has been reached. A service is recommended. 26 ... 100 %: The encoder is working in the specified range. Index: [0] = Incremental [1] = Reserved [2] = Abs track [3] = Code conn Dependency: Refer to: p4650 Note: Value = 999 means: - the component specified in p4650 is not connected - the encoder does not support the display of the functional reserve p4652 XIST1_ERW reset mode / XIST1_ERW res mode ENC Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4750 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the mode to reset the actual value in XIST_ERW (CO: r4653). Value: 0: 1: Inactive Reset with zero mark (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-625 Parameters List of parameters 2: 3: Reset with BICO Reset with selected zero mark Dependency: Refer to: r4653, r4654, p4655 Note: If value = 1: The value in XIST1_ERW is reset when passing every zero mark. If value = 2: The value in XIST1_ERW is reset with a 0/1 edge via binector input p4655. If value = 3: The value in XIST1_ERW is reset after a 0/1 edge via binector input p4655 when passing the next zero mark. p4652[0...2] VECTOR_G XIST1_ERW reset mode / XIST1_ERW res mode Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4750 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the mode to reset the actual value in XIST_ERW (CO: r4653). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: r4653, r4654, p4655 Note: If value = 1: Inactive Reset with zero mark Reset with BICO Reset with selected zero mark The value in XIST1_ERW is reset when passing every zero mark. If value = 2: The value in XIST1_ERW is reset with a 0/1 edge via binector input p4655. If value = 3: The value in XIST1_ERW is reset after a 0/1 edge via binector input p4655 when passing the next zero mark. r4653 CO: XIST1_ERW actual value / XIST1_ERW actval ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and connector output for the actual value XIST1_ERW. Dependency: Refer to: p4652, r4654, p4655 r4653[0...2] CO: XIST1_ERW actual value / XIST1_ERW actval VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and connector output for the actual value XIST1_ERW. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 1-626 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p4652, r4654, p4655 r4654.0 CO/BO: XIST1_ERW status / XIST1_ERW stat ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and binector output to reset XIST1_ERW. Bit field: Bit 00 Dependency: Refer to: p4652, r4653, p4655 Note: The reset of XIST1_ERW is initiated via binector input p4655. Signal name XIST1_ERW reset 1 signal High 0 signal Low FP - Binector output r4654 is reset with a 0 signal from binector input p4655. r4654.0...16 VECTOR_G CO/BO: XIST1_ERW status / XIST1_ERW stat Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and binector output to reset XIST1_ERW. Bit field: Bit 00 08 16 Dependency: Refer to: p4652, r4653, p4655 Note: The reset of XIST1_ERW is initiated via binector input p4655. Signal name Encoder 1 XIST1_ERW reset Encoder 2 XIST1_ERW reset Encoder 3 XIST1_ERW reset 1 signal High High High 0 signal Low Low Low FP - Binector output r4654 is reset with a 0 signal from binector input p4655. p4655 BI: XIST1_ERW reset signal source / XIST1_ERW resS_src ENC Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to reset XIST1_ERW (CO: r4653). Dependency: Refer to: p4652, r4653, r4654 Note: The reset of XIST1_ERW depends on the selected mode (p4652). p4655[0...2] BI: XIST1_ERW reset signal source / XIST1_ERW resS_src VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 4750 P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source to reset XIST1_ERW (CO: r4653). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-627 Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p4652, r4653, r4654 Note: The reset of XIST1_ERW depends on the selected mode (p4652). p4660 Sensor Module filter bandwidth / SM Filt_bandw ENC Description: Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [kHz] Max 20000.00 [kHz] Factory setting 0.00 [kHz] Sets the filter bandwidth for Sensor Module SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos). The value set on the Sensor Module is displayed in r4661. The Sensor Module hardware only supports the following values: - 0: The Sensor Module's default is used. - 50 kHz - 170 kHz - 500 kHz - Unlimited: Only the bandwidth of the operational amplifier is effective. Dependency: Refer to: r4661 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. p4660[0...2] Sensor Module filter bandwidth / SM Filt_bandw VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [kHz] Max 20000.00 [kHz] Factory setting 0.00 [kHz] Sets the filter bandwidth for Sensor Module SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos). The value set on the Sensor Module is displayed in r4661. The Sensor Module hardware only supports the following values: - 0: The Sensor Module's default is used. - 50 kHz - 170 kHz - 500 kHz - Unlimited: Only the bandwidth of the operational amplifier is effective. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: r4661 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. r4661 Sensor Module filter bandwidth display / SM Filt_bandw disp ENC Description: 1-628 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kHz] Max - [kHz] Factory setting - [kHz] Display of the effective filter bandwidth for Sensor Module SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters The bandwidth of the filter is set using p4660. Dependency: Refer to: p4660 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. r4661[0...2] Sensor Module filter bandwidth display / SM Filt_bandw disp VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kHz] Max - [kHz] Factory setting - [kHz] Description: Display of the effective filter bandwidth for Sensor Module SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos). The bandwidth of the filter is set using p4660. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p4660 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. p4662[0...n] Encoder characteristic type / Enc char_type ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Sets the characteristic type. For non-linear sensors, the interrelationship between the signal voltage and the position can be defined using a third degree polynomial. Value: 0: 1: Characteristic inactive Characteristic polynomial third degree Dependency: Refer to: p4663, p4664, p4665, p4666 Note: If value = 1: A third degree polynomial is defined as follows: F(x) = K3 * x^3 + K2 * x^2 + K1 * x + K0 Coefficients K0 ... K3 should be defined and entered into p4663 ... p4666. The sensor range is emulated to x = -0.5 ... +0.5. p4663[0...n] Encoder characteristic K0 / Enc char K0 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Setting for coefficient K0 to calculate the characteristic (p4662). Dependency: Refer to: p4662, p4664, p4665, p4666 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-629 Parameters List of parameters p4664[0...n] Encoder characteristic K1 / Enc char K1 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Setting for coefficient K1 to calculate the characteristic (p4662). Dependency: Refer to: p4662, p4663, p4665, p4666 p4665[0...n] Encoder characteristic K2 / Enc char K2 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Setting for coefficient K2 to calculate the characteristic (p4662). Dependency: Refer to: p4662, p4663, p4664, p4666 p4666[0...n] Encoder characteristic K3 / Enc char K3 ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Setting for coefficient K3 to calculate the characteristic (p4662). Dependency: Refer to: p4662, p4663, p4664, p4665 p4670[0...n] Analog sensor configuration / Ana_sens config ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for evaluation on the analog sensor. Bit field: Bit 06 08 09 10 11 13 14 31 Notice: Re bit 06: Signal name Set velocity to 0 Pos val range Fault/alarm messages Chann B act Chann A act Commutation angle constant Suppress faults Extrapolation 1 signal Yes 0.0 / 1.0 pulse Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes ON 0 signal No -0.5 / +0.5 pulse Fault No No No No OFF FP - Setting the bit sets the velocity actual value (r0061) permanently to 0. Re bit 13: Setting the bit sets the commutation angle permanently to the commutation angle offset (p0431). 1-630 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Re bit 09: A setting of bit = 0 will trigger a fault for the relevant channel if the actual value is invalid. A setting of bit = 1 will trigger an alarm for the relevant channel if the actual value is invalid. Re bit 10, 11: If both channels are activated, the actual value is generated from the mean value of both channels. If a channel fails (actual value invalid), it is not included when the mean value is generated. Re bit 14: The bit is only evaluated for encoder 1. No effect for encoder 2 and encoder 3. p4671[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Analog sensor input / Ana_sens inp Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input circuit for the analog sensor. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Note: p4671 = 0: Differential Single-ended A, B Single-ended A*, B* Single-ended A, B sensitive The two signals on a track are evaluated differentially. p4671 = 1: Only the non-inverted signal on a track is evaluated. p4671 = 2: Only the inverted signal on a track is evaluated. p4671 = 3: Only the non-inverted signal on a track (high resolution) is evaluated. p4672[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Analog sensor channel A voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens A U at 0 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -10.0000 [V] Max 10.0000 [V] Factory setting 0.0000 [V] Sets the voltage when the connected sensor is at actual value zero. At this voltage channel A supplies an actual value of zero. p4673[0...n] Analog sensor channel A voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens A U/per ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -10.0000 [V] Max 10.0000 [V] Factory setting 6.0000 [V] Description: Sets the output voltage range to be mapped for the connected analog sensor. The voltage range is determined by the following parameters: - p4672 (voltage at actual value 0) - p4673 (voltage per encoder period) Note: The minimum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4672 - p4673/2. The maximum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4672 + p4673/2. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-631 Parameters List of parameters p4674[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Analog sensor channel B voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens B U at 0 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -10.0000 [V] Max 10.0000 [V] Factory setting 0.0000 [V] Sets the voltage when the connected sensor is at actual value zero. At this voltage channel B supplies an actual value of zero. p4675[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Analog sensor channel B voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens B U/per Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -10.0000 [V] Max 10.0000 [V] Factory setting 6.0000 [V] Sets the output voltage range to be mapped for the connected analog sensor. The voltage range is determined by the following parameters: - p4674 (voltage at actual value 0) - p4675 (voltage per encoder period) Note: The minimum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4674 - p4675/2. The maximum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4674 + p4675/2. p4676[0...n] Analog sensor range limit threshold / Ana_sens lim thr ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0 [%] Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the threshold for limit monitoring of the absolute actual value on the analog sensor. If this threshold is overshot by the actual value of a channel, a corresponding fault/alarm (p4670.9) is output. Dependency: Refer to: p4673, p4675 p4677[0...n] Analog sensor LVDT configuration / Ana_sens LVDT conf ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for LVDT mode on the analog sensor. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 1-632 Signal name LVDT ON Track B excitation Fixed value amplitude Fixed value amplitude and phase 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4678[0...n] Analog sensor LVDT ratio / An_sens LVDT ratio ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 50.00 [%] Description: Sets the ratio for the LVDT sensor. p4679[0...n] Analog sensor LVDT phase / An_sens LVDT ph ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4), T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -360.00 [] Max 360.00 [] Factory setting 0.00 [] Description: Sets the phase for the LVDT sensor. p4680[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance permissible / ZM_monit tol perm ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1000 Factory setting 4 Sets the permissible tolerance in encoder pulses for the zero mark distance in the context of zero mark monitoring. Causes fault F3x100 to appear less frequently. Dependency: Refer to: p0430 Refer to: F31100 Note: The parameter is activated using p0430.21 = 1 (zero mark tolerance). p4681[0...n] Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 positive / ZM tol lim 1 pos ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1000 Factory setting 2 Sets the positive tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 1 for the zero mark monitoring. If the deviation is less than this limit, then the pulse number is not corrected. If it is higher than this limit, fault F3x131 is triggered. If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to the accumulator (p4688). The accumulator can be de-activated using p0437.7. Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p4688 Refer to: F31131 Note: This monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction). The positive limit describes additional pulses due to EMC. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-633 Parameters List of parameters p4682[0...n] Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 negative / ZM tol lim 1 neg ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1001 Max 0 Factory setting -1001 Description: Sets the negative tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 1 for the zero mark monitoring. If the deviation is less than this limit, the PPR is not corrected. If it is higher than this limit, fault F3x131 is triggered. If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to the accumulator (p4688). The accumulator can be de-activated using p0437.7. Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p4681, p4688 Refer to: F31131 Note: This monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction). For a set value = -1001, the negated value of p4681 is effective. The negative limit describes the pulses lost due to a covered glass panel in the incremental encoder. p4683[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold positive / ZM tol A_thr pos Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 100000 Factory setting 0 Sets the positive tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 2 for the zero mark monitoring. If the zero mark deviation is higher than the tolerance set in p4681 and p4682 and fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the accumulator p4688 is compared with this parameter and, if applicable, alarm A3x422 is output for 5 seconds. Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p4681, p4682, p4688 Refer to: F31131, A31422 Note: Zero mark monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction). p4684[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold negative / ZM tol A_thr neg ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -100001 Max 0 Factory setting -100001 Sets the negative tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 2 for the zero mark monitoring. If the zero mark deviation is higher than the tolerance set in p4681 and p4682 and fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the accumulator p4688 is compared with this parameter and, if applicable, alarm A3x422 is output for 5 seconds. Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p4683, p4688 Refer to: F31131, A31422 Note: Zero mark monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction). For a set value = -100001, the negated value of p4683 is effective. 1-634 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4685[0...n] Speed actual value mean value generation / n_act mean val ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 20 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the number of current controller clock cycles for mean value generation of the speed actual value. Note: Value = 0, 1: No mean value generation. Higher values also mean higher dead times for the speed actual value. p4686[0...n] ENC, VECTOR_G Zero mark minimum length / ZM min length Can be changed: C2(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: EDS, p0140 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the minimum length for the zero mark. Dependency: Refer to: p0425, p0437 Note: The value for the minimum length of the zero mark must be set less than p0425. The parameter is activated using p0437.1 = 1 (zero mark edge detection). p4688 CO: Zero mark monitoring, differential pulse count / ZM diff_pulse qty ENC Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147483648 Max 2147483647 Factory setting 0 Displays the number of differential pulses for the zero mark monitoring that have accumulated. If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to the accumulator (p4688). Dependency: Refer to: p4681, p4682, p4683, p4684 Note: The display can only be reset to zero. p4688[0...2] CO: Zero mark monitoring, differential pulse count / ZM diff_pulse qty VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147483648 Max 2147483647 Factory setting 0 Description: Displays the number of differential pulses for the zero mark monitoring that have accumulated. If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to the accumulator (p4688). Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p4681, p4682, p4683, p4684 Note: The display can only be reset to zero. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-635 Parameters List of parameters r4689 CO: Squarewave encoder, diagnostics / Sq-wave enc diag ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder status according to PROFIdrive for a squarewave encoder. Dependency: Refer to: A31422 Note: After alarm A3x422 is output, this parameter is set for 100 ms. r4689[0...2] CO: Squarewave encoder, diagnostics / Sq-wave enc diag VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the encoder status according to PROFIdrive for a squarewave encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: A31422 Note: After alarm A3x422 is output, this parameter is set for 100 ms. p4690 SMI spare part component number / SMI comp_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 399 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the component number for the SMI/DQI for which motor and/or encoder data should be saved, deleted or downloaded. Dependency: Refer to: p4691, p4692, p4693 Note: DQI: DRIVE-CLiQ Sensor Integrated SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated p4691 SMI spare part save/download data / Save/DL SMI data CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 39 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting for the saving/downloading/deletion of motor and/or encoder data for the component specified in p4690 (SMI/DQI). A backup of this data can be saved to non-volatile memory. The backup procedure is performed automatically as part of the function for saving to non-volatile memory (p0977 = 1 or "Copy RAM to ROM"). If a part is replaced, the saved data can be reloaded. 1-636 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Procedure: p4690 = set component number p4691 = 1, 2, 30: Set the required procedure (save/download/delete). p4691 = 9, 10, 36: Feedback signal on successful completion of the procedure. p4691 = 11... 22, 37, 38: Error values if the procedure could not be executed successfully. Value: 0: 1: 2: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 30: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: Inactive Save SMI data Download SMI data SMI data downloaded and POWER ON required for component SMI data backup complete SMI data backup for selected component not found Selected component not available or not connected Insufficient memory space for backup Format of saved data is incompatible Transfer fault during data download Transfer fault during data backup Data backup does not match parameterized encoder/motor Data backup directory not permissible Component already contains data Component does not contain any data Component is not an SMI or a DQI SMI data cannot be downloaded for component Delete SMI data Confirmation of SMI data delete required SMI data deleted and POWER ON required for component Access level not sufficient for delete Delete SMI data not permitted for component SMI data for component cannot be deleted Dependency: Refer to: p4690, p4692, p4693 Notice: Once SMI/DQI data has been deleted or downloaded successfully, the component has to be powered up. Note: SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated DQI: DRIVE-CLiQ Sensor Integrated Help for error value = 11: - Save the data for the original SMI on the memory card. - Use an SMI with a suitable hardware version. Help for error value = 12: - Set the correct component number or connect the component. Help for error value = 13: - Use a memory card with more memory space. Help for error value = 14: - Create a data backup on the memory card corresponding to the SMI type. Help for error value = 15: - Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring for the component. Help for error value = 16: - Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring for the component. Help for error value = 17: - Save the data for the original SMI on the memory card. Help for error value = 18: - Set parameter p4693 to an appropriate value. Help for error value = 19: - Perform an SMI delete or use a blank SMI. Help for error value = 20: - Use an SMI that is not blank. Help for error value = 21: - Set the correct component number (p4690). Note for error value = 22: - Data cannot be downloaded for component. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-637 Parameters List of parameters Help for error value = 35: - Reset parameter p4691 to 30. Help for error value = 37: - Set the access level to Expert or higher. Help for error value = 38: - Insert the SMI/DQI into the actual topology as an additional component (component number >= 200). - Set the component number from the actual topology (p4690 >= 200). - Set the correct component number (p4690 >= 200). Note for error value = 39: - SMI already deleted or too old. Delete not possible. p4692 SMI spare part save data of all SMIs / Save SMI data CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 29 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to back up the data of all SMIs and DQIs featured in the target topology. Value: 0: 1: 10: 13: 16: 20: 29: Note: SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated Inactive Save data of all SMIs and DQIs Save all data successful Insufficient memory space for backup Transfer fault during data backup Component does not contain any data Not all components from target topology saved p4692 = 10: Automatic on successful completion of backup procedure. p4692 = 13, 16, 20, 29: Error values if the procedure could not be executed successfully. The procedure must be repeated if the data save operation was interrupted (e.g. if the power supply voltage failed). Help for error value = 13: - Use a memory card with more memory space. Help for error value = 16: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. Help for error value = 20: - Use an SMI that is not blank. Help for error value = 29: - Check and correct the target and actual topologies for the SMIs. - Repeat the save procedure. p4693[0...1] SMI spare part data backup directory / SMI dat_bkup dir CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 399 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the directory for downloading and saving data. Example: The SMI has the component number 5 and the SMI data (motor/encoder data) is to be stored in subdirectory C205. --> p4690 = 5, p4693[0] = 205, p4691 = 1 Index: [0] = Subdirectory selection [1] = Reserved Dependency: Refer to: p4691, r4694 1-638 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Notice: If p4693[0] is not equal to 0 and p4693[0] is not equal to p4690, the following applies: - Only a number >= 200 may be selected for the subdirectory when saving. - In the case of downloads, a selection for the subdirectory may only be made for an SMI/DQI with a component number >= 200 (preliminary component number) (p4690 >= 200). Note: DQI: DRIVE-CLiQ Sensor Integrated SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated Re index 0: This index is used to select the subdirectory for saving and downloading data. The motor order number (MLFB) of the corresponding data backup is displayed in r4694. For p4693[0] = 0, the following applies: The directory is determined by the setting of p4690. r4694[0...19] SMI spare part data backup motor order number / SMI dat_bkup MLFB CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the motor order number (MLFB) of the data backup selected with p4693. Dependency: Refer to: p4691, p4692 Caution: If the selected subdirectory contains a number of data sets, "More Datasets" is displayed in r4694[0...19]. If there is no SMI data (motor/encoder data) in the selected subdirectory or if the selected subdirectory does not exist, the following applies: - The number of the next subdirectory located is displayed. - This subdirectory is not checked for valid SMI data. - If another subdirectory cannot be located, nothing is displayed in r4694[0...19]. Note: SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated p4700[0...1] Trace control / Trace control CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to control the trace function. Value: 0: 1: Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4701 Measuring function, control / Meas fct ctrl CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Stop trace Start trace Description: Setting to control the measurement function. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Stop measuring function Start measuring function Measuring function, check parameterization Start measuring function without enable signals (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-639 Parameters List of parameters r4705[0...1] Trace status / Trace status CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual status of the trace. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 r4706 Measuring function, status / Meas fct status CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 5 Factory setting - Trace inactive Trace is recording presamples Trace is waiting for trigger event Trace is recording Recording (trace) ended Description: Displays the actual status of the measuring function. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: p4707 Measurement function configuration / Meas fct config CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Measurement function inactive Measuring function, parameterization checked Measuring function waits for stabilizing time Measuring function recording (tracing) Measuring function, trace ended with error Measuring function, trace successfully completed Description: Setting to configure the measurement function. Value: 0: 1: Note: The parameter cannot be changed when the measurement function has been started (r4706 = 2, 3). Standard Free meas fct For value = 0: The system injection point selected to inject the function generator signal is used. For value = 1: No system injection point is used. When using the measuring function in the STARTER commissioning software, the following applies: A change to a value only becomes effective after first closing and opening the measuring function screen form. For value = 0: The master control must be fetched. There are two fixed and two freely selectable signals for recording. For value = 1: Master control does not have to be fetched. There are four freely selectable signals for recording. 1-640 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4708[0...1] Trace memory space required / Trace mem required CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the required memory in bytes for the actual parameterization. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Dependency: Refer to: r4799 r4709[0...1] Trace memory space required for measuring functions / Trace mem required CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the memory space required for the actual parameter setting in bytes, if the trace is used for the measuring functions. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Dependency: Refer to: r4799 p4710[0...1] Trace trigger condition / Trace Trig_cond CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 1 Max 7 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the trigger condition for the trace. Value: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Immediate trace start Positive edge Negative edge Entry to hysteresis band Leaving hysteresis band Trigger at bit mask Start with function generator p4711[0...5] Trace trigger signal / Trace trig_signal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the trigger signal for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format [2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-641 Parameters List of parameters [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id Dependency: Only effective when p4710 does not equal 1. Note: It only makes sense to trace the PINs using the commissioning software. For index 2(4) and 3(5) equal to zero, index 0(1) can only be written and vice versa. Re index 0 ... 1: Here, the trigger signal for trace 0 or 1 is entered as parameter in the BICO format. For trace with a physical address (p4789), the data type of the trigger signal is set here. Re index 2 ...3: The triggering PIN for trace 0 is entered here. Index 2 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the Drive Object (DO), bit 15 ... 0: Number of the chart Index 3 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the block, bit 15 ... 0: Number of the PIN Re index 4 ... 5: The triggering PIN for trace 1 is entered here. Index 4 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the Drive Object (DO), bit 15 ... 0: Number of the chart Index 5 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the block, bit 15 ... 0: Number of the PIN p4712[0...1] Trace trigger threshold / Trace trig_thresh CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -340.28235E36 Max 340.28235E36 Factory setting 0.00 Description: Sets the trigger threshold for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 2, 3. p4713[0...1] Trace tolerance band trigger threshold 1 / Trace trig thr 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -340.28235E36 Max 340.28235E36 Factory setting 0.00 Description: Sets the first trigger threshold for trigger via tolerance band. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 4, 5. p4714[0...1] Trace tolerance band trigger threshold 2 / Trace trig thr 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -340.28235E36 Max 340.28235E36 Factory setting 0.00 Description: Sets the second trigger threshold for trigger via tolerance band Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 4, 5. 1-642 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4715[0...1] Trace bit mask trigger, bit mask / Trace trig mask CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the bit mask for the bit mask trigger. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 6. p4716[0...1] Trace, bit mask trigger, trigger condition / Trace Trig_cond CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the trigger condition for bit mask trigger. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 6. p4717 Measuring function, number of averaging operations / Meas fct avg qty CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the number of averaging operations for the measuring function. p4718 Measuring function, number of stabilizing periods / MeasFct StabPerQty CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the number of stabilizing periods for the measuring function. r4719[0...1] Trace trigger index / Trace Trig_index CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trigger index in the trace buffer. The trigger event occurred at this point. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-643 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Only valid when p4705 = 4. p4720[0...1] Trace recording cycle / Trace record_cyc CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.000 [ms] Max 60000.000 [ms] Factory setting 1.000 [ms] Description: Sets the recording cycle for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4721[0...1] Trace recording time / Trace record_time CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.000 [ms] Max 3600000.000 [ms] Factory setting 1000.000 [ms] Description: Sets the recording time for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4722[0...1] Trace trigger delay / Trace trig_delay CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -3600000.000 [ms] Max 3600000.000 [ms] Factory setting 0.000 [ms] Description: Sets the trigger delay for the trace. Trigger delay < 0: Pretrigger: Tracing (recording) starts the selected time before the trigger event actually occurs. Trigger delay > 0: Post trigger: Tracing does not start until the set time after the trigger event. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4723[0...1] Trace time slice cycle / Trace cycle CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.03125 [ms] Max 4.00000 [ms] Factory setting 0.12500 [ms] Description: Sets the time slice cycle in which the trace is called. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 1-644 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4724[0...1] Trace average in the time range / Trace average CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 bin Max 0001 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the averaging in the time range for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 r4725[0...1] Trace, data type 1 traced / Trace rec type 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the recorded data type 1 for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 r4726[0...1] Trace, data type 2 traced / Trace rec type 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the recorded data type 2 for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 r4727[0...1] Trace, data type 3 traced / Trace rec type 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the recorded data type 3 for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 r4728[0...1] Trace, data type 4 traced / Trace rec type 4 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the recorded data type 4 for the trace. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-645 Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 r4729[0...1] Trace number of recorded values / Trace rec values CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of traced values for each signal. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Dependency: Only valid when p4705 = 4. p4730[0...5] Trace record signal 0 / Trace record sig 0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the first signal to be traced. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format [2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id p4731[0...5] Trace record signal 1 / Trace record sig 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the second signal to be traced. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format [2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id p4732[0...5] Trace record signal 2 / Trace record sig 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the third signal to be traced. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format 1-646 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id p4733[0...5] Trace record signal 3 / Trace record sig 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the fourth signal to be traced. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format [2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id p4734[0...5] Trace record signal 4 / Trace record sig 4 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the fifth signal to be traced. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format [2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id p4735[0...5] Trace record signal 5 / Trace record sig 5 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the sixth signal to be traced. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format [2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-647 Parameters List of parameters p4736[0...5] Trace record signal 6 / Trace record sig 6 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the seventh signal to be traced. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format [2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id p4737[0...5] Trace record signal 7 / Trace record sig 7 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the eighth signal to be traced. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format [2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id r4740[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 0 floating point / Trace 0 tr sig 0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 0. The trace (record) buffer is sub-divided into memory banks, each containing 16384 values. Parameter p4795 can be used to toggle between the individual banks. Example A: The first 16384 values of signal 0, trace 0 are to be read out. In this case, memory bank 0 is set with p4795 = 0. The first 16384 values can now be read out using r4740[0] to r4740[16383]. Example B: The values 16385 to 32768 from signal 0, trace 0 are to be read out. In this case, memory bank 1 is set with p4795 = 1. The values can now be read out in r4740[0] to r4740[16383]. Dependency: 1-648 Refer to: p4795 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4741[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 1 floating point / Trace 0 tr sig 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 1. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4742[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 2 floating point / Trace 0 tr sig 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 2. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4743[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 3 floating point / Trace 0 tr sig 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 3. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4744[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 4 floating point / Trace 0 tr sig 4 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 4. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4745[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 5 floating point / Trace 0 tr sig 5 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 5. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-649 Parameters List of parameters r4746[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 6 floating point / Trace 0 tr sig 6 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 6. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4747[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 7 floating point / Trace 0 tr sig 7 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 7. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4750[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 0 floating point / Trace 1 trace sig0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 0. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4751[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 1 floating point / Trace 1 tr sig 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 1. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4752[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 2 floating point / Trace 1 tr sig 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 2. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 1-650 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4753[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 3 floating point / Trace 1 tr sig 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 3. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4754[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 4 floating point / Trace 1 tr sig 4 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 4. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4755[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 5 floating point / Trace 1 tr sig 5 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 5. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4756[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 6 floating point / Trace 1 tr sig 6 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 6. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 r4757[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 7 floating point / Trace 1 tr sig 7 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 7. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-651 Parameters List of parameters r4760[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 0 / Trace 0 tr sig 0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 0 as integer number. Note: For signals, data type I32 or U32, the trace buffer is assigned as follows: r4760[0] = value 0 r4760[1] = value 1 ... r4760[8191] = value 8191 For signals, data type I16 or U16, the trace buffer is assigned as follows: r4760[0] = value 0 (bit 31 ... 16) and value 1 (bit 15 ... 0) r4760[1] = value 2 (bit 31 ... 16) and value 3 (bit 15 ... 0) ... r4760[8191] = value 16382 (bit 31 ... 16) and value 16383 (bit 15 ... 0) For signals, data type I8 or U8, the trace buffer is assigned as follows: r4760[0] = value 0 (bit 31 ... 24) value 1 (bit 23 ... 16) value 2 (bit 15 ... 8) value 3 (bit 7 ... 0) r4760[1] = value 4 (bit 31 ... 24) value 5 (bit 23 ... 16) value 6 (bit 15 ... 8) value 7 (bit 7 ... 0) ... r4760[8191] = value 32764 (bit 31 ... 24) value 32765 (bit 23 ... 16) value 32766 (bit 15 ... 8) value 32767 (bit 7 ... 0) r4761[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 1 / Trace 0 tr sig 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 1. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4762[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 2 / Trace 0 tr sig 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 2. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 1-652 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4763[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 3 / Trace 0 tr sig 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 3. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4764[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 4 / Trace 0 tr sig 4 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 4. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4765[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 5 / Trace 0 tr sig 5 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 5. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4766[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 6 / Trace 0 tr sig 6 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 6. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4767[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 7 / Trace 0 tr sig 7 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 7. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-653 Parameters List of parameters r4770[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 0 / Trace 1 trace sig0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 0. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4771[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 1 / Trace 1 tr sig 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 1. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4772[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 2 / Trace 1 tr sig 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 2. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4773[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 3 / Trace 1 tr sig 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 3. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4774[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 4 / Trace 1 tr sig 4 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 4. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 1-654 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4775[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 5 / Trace 1 tr sig 5 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 5. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4776[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 6 / Trace 1 tr sig 6 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 6. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 r4777[0...16383] Trace 1 trace buffer signal 7 / Trace 1 tr sig 7 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 7. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 p4780[0...1] Trace physical address signal 0 / Trace PhyAddr Sig0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 bin Max 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the first signal to be traced. The data type is defined using p4730. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4781[0...1] Trace physical address signal 1 / Trace PhyAddr Sig1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 bin Max 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the second signal to be traced. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-655 Parameters List of parameters The data type is defined using p4731. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4782[0...1] Trace physical address signal 2 / Trace PhyAddr Sig2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 bin Max 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the third signal to be traced. The data type is defined using p4732. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4783[0...1] Trace physical address signal 3 / Trace PhyAddr Sig3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 bin Max 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the fourth signal to be traced. The data type is defined using p4733. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4784[0...1] Trace physical address signal 4 / Trace PhyAddr Sig4 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 bin Max 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the fifth signal to be traced. The data type is defined using p4734. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4785[0...1] Trace physical address signal 5 / Trace PhyAddr Sig5 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 bin Max 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the sixth signal to be traced. The data type is defined using p4735. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 1-656 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4786[0...1] Trace physical address signal 6 / Trace PhyAddr Sig6 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 bin Max 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the seventh signal to be traced. The data type is defined using p4736. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4787[0...1] Trace physical address signal 7 / Trace PhyAddr Sig7 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 bin Max 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the eighth signal to be traced. The data type is defined using p4737. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4789[0...1] Trace physical address trigger signal / Trace PhyAddr Trig CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the physical address for the trigger signal. The data type is defined by making the appropriate selection in p4711. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 r4790[0...1] Trace, data type 5 traced / Trace rec type 5 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the recorded data type 5 for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-657 Parameters List of parameters r4791[0...1] Trace, data type 6 traced / Trace rec type 6 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the recorded data type 6 for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 r4792[0...1] Trace, data type 7 traced / Trace rec type 7 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the recorded data type 7 for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 r4793[0...1] Trace, data type 8 traced / Trace rec type 8 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the recorded data type 8 for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 p4795 Trace memory bank changeover / Trace mem changeov CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 500 Factory setting 0 Description: Changes over the memory bank to read out the contents of the trace buffer. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, r4741, r4742, r4743, r4750, r4751, r4752, r4753 r4799 Trace memory location free / Trace mem free CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the free memory for the trace in bytes. Dependency: Refer to: r4708 1-658 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4800 Function generator control / FG control CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: The function generator is started with p4800 = 1. The signal is only generated for a 1 signal of binector input p4819. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Stop function generator Start function generator Check function generator parameterization Start function generator without enable signals Dependency: Refer to: p4819 r4805 Function generator status / FG status CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual status of the function generator. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Dependency: Refer to: p4800, p4819 r4806.0 BO: Function generator status signal / FG status signal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Inactive Generate accelerating ramp to offset Generate parameterized signal shape Generate braking ramp Function generator stopped due to missing enable signals Function generator waits for BI: p4819 Function generator parameterization has been checked Displays the status of the function generator. 0 signal: Function generator inactive 1 signal: Function generator running Bit field: Bit 00 p4810 Function generator mode / FG operating mode CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 99 Factory setting 0 Description: Signal name Bit 0 1 signal ON 0 signal OFF FP - Sets the operating mode of the function generator. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-659 Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 99: Connection at connector output r4818 Connection at current setpoint after filter and r4818 Connection as disturbing torque and r4818 Connection at speed setpoint after filter and r4818 Connection at current setpoint before filter and r4818 Connection at speed setpoint before filter and r4818 Connection for free measurement function r4818 and r4834 Connection at physical address and r4818 p4812 Function generator physical address / FG phys address CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the physical address where the function generator is to be connected. Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 99. p4813 Function generator physical address reference value / FG phys addr ref CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 1.00 Max 1000000.00 Factory setting 1.00 Description: Sets the reference value for 100 % for referred inputs. Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 99. p4815[0...2] Function generator drive number / FG drive number CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the required drive where the function generator is to be connected. Index: [0] = First drive for connection [1] = Second drive for connection [2] = Third drive for connection Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Note: For the function generator, only type SERVO, VECTOR or DC_CTRL type drives can be used. p4816 Function generator output signal integer number scaling / FG outp integ scal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147483648 Max 2147483647 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the scaling for the integer number of the output signal for the function generator. Dependency: Refer to: r4805, r4817 Note: The parameter can only be changed in the following operating states: r4805 = 0, 4, 6 1-660 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4817 CO: Function generator output signal integer number / FG outp integ no. CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and connector output for the integer number of the output signal for the function generator. Dependency: Refer to: p4816 Note: The value is output independent of the function generator operating mode. r4818 CO: Function generator output signal / FG outp_sig CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 0 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the output signal for the function generator. Dependency: Refer to: p4810 Note: The value is displayed independently of the function generator mode. p4819 BI: Function generator control / FG control CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal source to control the function generator. When the function generator is running, signal generation is stopped with a 0 signal from BI: p4819 and p4800 is set to 0. Dependency: Refer to: p4800 p4820 Function generator signal shape / FG signal shape CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 1 Max 5 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the signal to be generated for the function generator. Value: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Square-wave Staircase Delta Binary noise - PRBS (Pseudo Random Binary Signal) Sine-wave (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-661 Parameters List of parameters p4821 Function generator period / FG period duration CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 60000.00 [ms] Factory setting 1000.00 [ms] Description: Sets the period of the signal to be generated for the function generator. Dependency: Ineffective when p4820 = 4 (PRBS). p4822 Function generator pulse width / FG pulse width CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 60000.00 [ms] Factory setting 500.00 [ms] Description: Sets the pulse width for the signal to be generated for the function generator. Dependency: Only effective when p4820 = 1 (square-wave). p4823 Function generator bandwidth / FG bandwidth CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.0025 [Hz] Max 16000.0000 [Hz] Factory setting 4000.0000 [Hz] Description: Sets the bandwidth for the signal to be generated for the function generator. Dependency: Only effective when p4820 = 4 (PRBS). Refer to: p4830 Refer to: A02041 p4824 Function generator amplitude / FG amplitude CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -1600.00 [%] Max 1600.00 [%] Factory setting 5.00 [%] Description: Sets the amplitude for the signal to be generated for the function generator. Dependency: Units are dependent on p4810. If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: The amplitude is referred to p2002 (reference current). If p4810 = 3, 5: The amplitude is referred to p2000 (reference speed). 1-662 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p4825 Function generator 2nd amplitude / FG 2nd amplitude CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -1600.00 [%] Max 1600.00 [%] Factory setting 7.00 [%] Description: Sets the second amplitude for the signal to be generated for the function generator. Dependency: Only effective for p4820 = 2 (staircase). Units are dependent on p4810. If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: The amplitude is referred to p2002 (reference current). If p4810 = 3, 5: The amplitude is referred to p2000 (reference speed). p4826 Function generator offset / FG offset CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -1600.00 [%] Max 1600.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Description: Sets the offset (DC component) of the signal to be generated for the function generator. Dependency: Units are dependent on p4810. If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: The offset is referred to p2002 (reference current). If p4810 = 3, 5: The offset is referred to p2000 (reference speed). If p4810 = 2: In order to avoid the undesirable effects of play (backlash), the offset does not act on the current setpoint, but instead on the speed setpoint. p4827 Function generator ramp-up time to offset / FG ramp-up offset CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 100000.00 [ms] Factory setting 32.00 [ms] Description: Sets the ramp-up time to the offset for the function generator. p4828 Function generator lower limit / FG lower limit CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -10000.00 [%] Max 0.00 [%] Factory setting -100.00 [%] Description: Sets the lower limit for the function generator. Dependency: For p4810 = 2 the limit only applies to the current setpoint, but not the speed setpoint (offset). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-663 Parameters List of parameters p4829 Function generator upper limit / FG upper limit CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.00 [%] Max 10000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the upper limit for the function generator. Dependency: For p4810 = 2 the limit only applies to the current setpoint, but not the speed setpoint (offset). p4830 Function generator time slice cycle / FG time slice CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.03125 [ms] Max 2.00000 [ms] Factory setting 0.12500 [ms] Description: Sets the time slice cycle in which the function generator is called. p4831 Function generator amplitude scaling / FG amplitude scal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0.00000 [%] Max 200.00000 [%] Factory setting 100.00000 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the amplitude of the signal waveforms for all output channels. The value can be changed while the function generator is running. p4832[0...2] Function generator amplitude scaling / FG amplitude scal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -340.28235E36 [%] Max 340.28235E36 [%] Factory setting 100.00000 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the amplitude of the signal waveforms separately for each output channel. The value cannot be changed while the function generator is running. Index: [0] = First drive for connection [1] = Second drive for connection [2] = Third drive for connection p4833[0...2] Function generator offset scaling / FG offset scal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -340.28235E36 [%] Max 340.28235E36 [%] Factory setting 100.00000 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the offset of the signal waveforms separately for each output channel. The value cannot be changed while the function generator is running. 1-664 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = First drive for connection [1] = Second drive for connection [2] = Third drive for connection r4834[0...4] CO: Function generator free measurement output signal / FG fr MeasFct outp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 0 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the output signal for the free measurement function. Index: [0] = Signal 1 [1] = Signal 2 [2] = Signal 3 [3] = Signal 4 [4] = Signal 5 Dependency: Refer to: p4810 Note: The signals are only output in the "free measurement function" operating mode (p4810 = 6) p4835[0...4] Function generator free measurement function scaling / FG fr MeasFct scal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -200.00000 [%] Max 200.00000 [%] Factory setting 100.00000 [%] Description: Sets the scaling of the output signals for the free measurement function. Index: [0] = Signal 1 [1] = Signal 2 [2] = Signal 3 [3] = Signal 4 [4] = Signal 5 Note: The parameter cannot be changed when the measurement function has been started (r4706 = 2, 3). r4950 OA application count / OA no All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10 Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Note: OA: Open Architecture (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-665 Parameters List of parameters r4951 OA application identifier, total length / OA ID length B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 90 Factory setting - Description: Displays the total length of the IDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Note: The identifier of an OA application comprises a maximum of 8 characters plus separator. r4951 OA application identifier, total length / OA ID length ENC, HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 90 Factory setting - Description: Displays the total length of the IDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Note: The identifier of an OA application comprises a maximum of 8 characters plus separator. r4952 OA application GUID, total length / OA GUID length B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 180 Factory setting - Description: Displays the total length of the GUIDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Note: The GUID of an OA application comprises 16 characters plus 1 character major information plus 1 character, minor information. GUID: Globally Unique IDentifier r4952 OA application GUID, total length / OA GUID length ENC, HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 180 Factory setting - Description: Displays the total length of the GUIDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Note: The GUID of an OA application comprises 16 characters plus 1 character major information plus 1 character, minor information. GUID: Globally Unique IDentifier 1-666 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4955[0...n] OA application identifier / OA ID B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4951 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the IDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4955[0...8]: Identifier of OA application 1 r4955[9...17]: Identifier of OA applications 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. r4955[0...n] OA application identifier / OA ID ENC, HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4951 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the IDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4955[0...8]: Identifier of OA application 1 r4955[9...17]: Identifier of OA applications 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. p4956[0...n] OA application activation / OA act B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C1, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Setting to activate the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4956[0]: Activates OA application 1 r4956[1]: Activates OA application 2, ... Value: 0: 1: OA application inactive OA application active Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-667 Parameters List of parameters p4956[0...n] OA application activation / OA act ENC, HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: C1, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to activate the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4956[0]: Activates OA application 1 r4956[1]: Activates OA application 2, ... Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. r4957[0...n] OA application version / OA version B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: OA application inactive OA application active Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting - Displays the versions of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4957[0]: Version of OA application 1 r4957[1]: Version of OA application 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4958, r4959, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. r4957[0...n] OA application version / OA version ENC, HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting - Description: Displays the versions of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4957[0]: Version of OA application 1 r4957[1]: Version of OA application 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4958, r4959, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. 1-668 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r4958[0...n] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: OA application interface version / OA int_version Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the interface versions of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4958[0]: Interface version of OA application 1 r4958[1]: Interface version of OA applications 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4959, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. r4958[0...n] OA application interface version / OA int_version ENC, HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the interface versions of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4958[0]: Interface version of OA application 1 r4958[1]: Interface version of OA applications 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4959, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. r4959[0...n] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: OA application GUID / OA GUID Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4952 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the GUIDs of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4959[0...15]: GUID of OA application 1 r4960[16]: Major information of OA application 1 r4960[17]: Minor information of OA application 1 r4959[18...33]: GUID of OA application 2 r4960[34]: Major information of OA application 2 r4960[35]: Minor information of OA application 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-669 Parameters List of parameters r4959[0...n] OA application GUID / OA GUID ENC, HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4952 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the GUIDs of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4959[0...15]: GUID of OA application 1 r4960[16]: Major information of OA application 1 r4960[17]: Minor information of OA application 1 r4959[18...33]: GUID of OA application 2 r4960[34]: Major information of OA application 2 r4960[35]: Minor information of OA application 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4960 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. r4960[0...n] OA application GUID drive object / OA GUID DO B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4952 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the GUIDs of the drive object of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4960[0...15]: GUID of this drive object of OA application 1 r4960[16]: Major information of this drive object of OA application 1 r4960[17]: Minor information of this drive object of OA application 1 r4960[18...33]: GUID of this drive object of OA application 2 r4960[34]: Major information of this drive object of OA application 2 r4960[35]: Minor information of this drive object of OA application 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959 Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. r4960[0...n] OA application GUID drive object / OA GUID DO ENC, HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4952 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the GUIDs of the drive object of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4960[0...15]: GUID of this drive object of OA application 1 r4960[16]: Major information of this drive object of OA application 1 r4960[17]: Minor information of this drive object of OA application 1 r4960[18...33]: GUID of this drive object of OA application 2 r4960[34]: Major information of this drive object of OA application 2 r4960[35]: Minor information of this drive object of OA application 2, ... Dependency: 1-670 Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Notice: If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. p4961[0...n] OA application logbook module selection / OA logbook module B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Only for service purposes. p4961[0...n] OA application logbook module selection / OA logbook module ENC, HUB, TB30, TM31 Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4950 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Only for service purposes. r4975 OA application invalid number / OA inv no. CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: r4976, r4978, r4979 Note: OA: Open Architecture r4976 OA application invalid identifier, total length / OA inv ID length CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the total length of the IDs of all the invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: r4975, r4978, r4979 Note: The identifier of an invalid OA application comprises a maximum of 8 characters plus separator. r4978[0...n] OA application invalid identifier / OA inv ID CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: r4976 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the IDs of all the invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-671 Parameters List of parameters r4978[0...8]: Identifier of invalid OA application 1 r4978[9...17]: Identifier of invalid OA application 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4975, r4976, r4979 Notice: If there is no invalid OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. r4979[0...n] OA application invalid error code / OA inv error code CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r4975 Func. diagram: - P-Group: OEM range Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the error code of the invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory. r4979[0]: Fault value of OA application 1 r4979[1]: Fault value of OA application 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4975, r4976, r4978 Notice: If there is no invalid OA application, then it is not possible to access an index. Note: The value in the error code must be interpreted in binary form. The bits have the following meaning: Bit 0: Incompatible OA interface version. Bit 1: OA application could not be loaded. Bit 2: Incorrect description files. Bit 3: OA application does not define a CPU type. Bit 4: OA application for this device not supported (incorrect CPU type). Bit 5: OA application for this device not supported (incorrect type ID). Bit 6: Incorrect description files (Const/Startup incompatible). r5600 Pe energy saving mode ID / Pe mode ID CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIenergy mode ID of the effective energy saving mode. Value: 0: 2: 255: Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles p5602[0...1] Pe energy-saving mode pause time minimal / Pe mod t_pause min CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 300000 [ms] Max 4294967295 [ms] Factory setting [0] 300000 [ms] POWER OFF En-saving mode 2 Ready [1] 480000 [ms] Description: Sets the minimum possible pause time for the energy-saving mode. The value is the sum of the following times: - Energy-saving mode transition time - Operating state transition time - Energy-saving mode, dwell time minimal 1-672 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Reserved [1] = Mode 2 Note: It is not permissible that the value is less than the sum of the "energy-saving mode transition time" and the "operating state transition time" (system properties). Pe: PROFIenergy profiles p5606[0...1] Pe energy-saving mode dwell time maximum / Pe t_dwell max CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 4294967295 [ms] Factory setting 4294967295 [ms] Description: Sets the maximum dwell time for the energy-saving mode. Index: [0] = Reserved [1] = Mode 2 Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles p5611 Pe energy-saving properties general / Pe properties gen CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the general properties for energy-saving. Bit field: Bit 00 Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles p5612[0...1] Pe energy-saving properties mode-dependent / Pe properties mod CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Signal name Inhibit PROFIenergy 1 signal Yes 0 signal No Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting [0] 0110 bin FP - [1] 0000 bin Description: Sets the mode-dependent properties for energy-saving. Index: [0] = Reserved [1] = Mode 2 Bit field: Bit 00 Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles Signal name Reserved 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - r5613.0...1 CO/BO: Pe energy-saving active/inactive / Pe save act/inact CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and binector output for the state display PROFIenergy energy saving active or inactive. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-673 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 Signal name Pe active Pe inactive 1 signal Yes Yes Note: Bit 0 and bit 1 are inverse of one another. 0 signal No No FP - Pe: PROFIenergy profiles p6397 Motor module phase shift second system / MM ph_sh 2nd sys VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the phase shift of the second system with respect to the first system for the motor module for a 12-pulse gating unit. Value: 0: 1: 2: Dependency: Refer to: p7003 Notice: The parameter is only evaluated if p7003 = 2. Note: For p6397 = 0 the following applies: The second systems leads for a positive direction of rotation. Shift by +30 Shift by -30 Shift by 0 For p6397 = 1 the following applies: The second systems lags for a positive direction of rotation. r7000 Par_circuit No. of active power units / Qty active PU B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active power units for a parallel circuit configuration. Dependency: Refer to: p7001 p7001[0...n] Par_circuit power units enable / PU enable B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: Enables the power units in the parallel circuit configuration. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: r7000 Note: De-activated Activated For motors with separate winding systems (p7003 = 1) it is not possible to inhibit an individual power unit. p7001 is automatically reset if a power unit is de-activated via p0125 or p0895. 1-674 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7002[0...n] Par_circuit status power units / Status PU B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the power units in the parallel circuit configuration. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: r7000, p7001 p7003 Par_circuit winding system / Wind_sys VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: C2(2) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Pulses inhibited Pulses enabled Description: Specifies the motor winding system when power units are connected in parallel. Value: 0: 1: 2: Dependency: Re p7003 = 2: One-winding system Several separate winding systems or motors Two separate offset winding systems In order to permit separate, offset winding systems, wobbulation must first be deactivated (p1810.2 = 0). The magnitude and direction of the offset is parameterized in p6397. When exiting commissioning, the circulating current control is automatically deactivated (p7035 = 0), and the compensation of the valve interlocking times is replaced by the appropriate stator resistance adaptation (p1780.7 = 1). Refer to: p1802, p6397 Note: Re p7003 = 0: - the motor data identification routine (p1910) determines the stator resistance and the cable resistance. The cable resistance of an individual Motor Module is entered into p0352. - the current symmetrizing is activated as standard after the motor data identification routine (p7035 = 1). - individual Motor Modules can be activated and de-activated (p7001). Re p7003 = 1, 2: - the motor data identification routine (p1910) determines the total (overall) resistance. The cable resistance is not measured, but instead, entered as a component of the total resistance (refer to p0352). - all Motor Modules are activated. It is not possible to de-activate a motor model. p7010 Par_circuit current dissymmetry alarm threshold / i_dissym A thresh VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min 2 [%] Max 100 [%] Factory setting 20 [%] Description: Sets the alarm threshold to detect current dissymmetry in the parallel circuit configuration. The deviation between the measured values and average value is evaluated. The specified value is referred to the rated power unit current (p7251[0]). Dependency: Refer to: r7251 Refer to: A05052 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-675 Parameters List of parameters p7011 Par_circuit DC link voltage dissymmetry alarm threshold / Vdc_dissym A thrsh B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min 2 [%] Max 100 [%] Factory setting 10 [%] Description: Sets the alarm threshold to detect dissymmetry of the DC link voltages in the parallel circuit configuration. The deviation between the measured values and average value is evaluated. The specified value is referred to the rated link voltage. Dependency: Refer to: A05053 p7015 Par_circuit holding brake power unit data set / Brake PDS VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2701, 2814 P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 99 Factory setting 99 Description: Sets the power unit data set for a parallel connection via which the holding brake is controlled. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 99: Dependency: Refer to: p0120, p0121 Note: PDS: Power unit Data Set Power unit data set 0 Power unit data set 1 Power unit data set 2 Power unit data set 3 Power unit data set 4 Power unit data set 5 Power unit data set 6 Power unit data set 7 No holding brake connected Example: 3 power units are connected in parallel and the holding brake is connected to power unit 1. p0120 = 3 p0121[0] = component number of power unit 0 p0121[1] = component number of power unit 1 (with holding brake) p0121[2] = component number of power unit 2 --> p7015 = 1 r7020[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase U / Phase U curr dev VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase U and the average value as peak value. The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7025. Dependency: 1-676 Refer to: r7021, r7022, r7025 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7021[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase V / Phase V curr dev VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase V and the average value as peak value. The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7026. Dependency: Refer to: r7020, r7022, r7026 r7022[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase W / Phase W curr dev VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase W and the average value as peak value. The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7027. Dependency: Refer to: r7020, r7021, r7027 r7025 CO: Par_circuit max. deviation currents phase U / Phase U Max i_dev VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase U from the average value as peak value. Dependency: Refer to: r7020, r7026, r7027 The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7020. Refer to: A05052 r7026 CO: Par_circuit max. deviation currents phase V / Phase V Max i_dev VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase V from the average value as peak value. Dependency: Refer to: r7021, r7025, r7027 The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7021. Refer to: A05052 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-677 Parameters List of parameters r7027 CO: Par_circuit max. deviation currents phase W / Phase W Max i_dev VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase W from the average value as peak value. Dependency: Refer to: r7022, r7025, r7026 The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7022. Refer to: A05052 r7030[0...n] CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage deviation / Vdc deviation B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the deviation of the measured DC link voltage from the average value. The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7031. Dependency: Refer to: r7031 r7031 CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage maximum deviation / Vdc deviation max. B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured DC link voltage from the average value. The deviation of the individual voltages from the average value is displayed in r7030. Dependency: Refer to: r7030 Refer to: A05053 p7035[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control operating mode / Circ_I mode VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the operating mode of the circulating current control. The circulating current control ensures symmetrical distribution of the total currents to the individual converters. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Circulating current control is not possible for separate, offset motor winding systems (p7003 = 2). 1-678 Circulating current control de-activated Circulating current control activated (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p7036[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control proportional gain / Circ_I Kp VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00000 [ohm] Max 200.00000 [ohm] Factory setting 0.00000 [ohm] Description: Sets the proportional gain for the circulating current controller. The parameter is pre-set to the cable resistance. p7037[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control integral time / I_circ Tn VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 2.0 Max 1000.0 Factory setting 4.0 Description: Sets the integral time of the circulating current controller. The parameter is referred to the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). Dependency: Refer to: p0115 p7038[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control limit / I_circ limit VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 [%] Max 100 [%] Factory setting 50 [%] Description: Sets the limit of the circulating current controller output values. The parameter is, depending on the phase, referred to the valve lockout times (p1828, p1829, p1830). p7040[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lockout U VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [s] Max 1000000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: For the particular Motor Module, the correction time must be added to the valve lockout time to be compensated for phase U (p1828). The corrective value is used to compensate variations/spread in the valve lockout times of Motor Modules for a parallel circuit configuration. Dependency: Refer to: p1828 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-679 Parameters List of parameters p7042[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lockout V VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [s] Max 1000000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: For the particular Motor Module, the correction time must be added to the valve lockout time to be compensated for phase V (p1829). The corrective value is used to compensate variations/spread in the valve lockout times of Motor Modules for a parallel circuit configuration. Dependency: Refer to: p1829 p7044[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lockout W VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1000000.00 [s] Max 1000000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: For the particular Motor Module, the correction time must be added to the valve lockout time to be compensated for phase W (p1830). The corrective value is used to compensate variations/spread in the valve lockout times of Motor Modules for a parallel circuit configuration. Dependency: Refer to: p1830 r7050[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase U / Circ_I_phase U VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the circulating current of phase U as peak value. r7051[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase V / Circ_I_phase V VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the circulating current of phase V as peak value. r7052[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase W / Circ_I_phase W VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: 1-680 Displays the circulating current of phase W as peak value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7100[0...99] Par_circuit ring buffer fault/alarm code / Fault/alarm code B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power units connected in parallel (Motor Module, Active Line Infeed, Voltage Sensing Module). Displays the fault/alarm code. Dependency: Refer to: r7101, r7102, r7103 Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0. The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON. r7101[0...99] Par_circuit ring buffer data set number / Ring buffer Ds_No B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power units connected in parallel (Motor Module, Active Line Infeed, Voltage Sensing Module). p7101 < 100: Displays the Power unit Data Set number (PDS). p7101 >= 100: Displays the Voltage Sensing Module Data Set number (VSMDS) Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7102, r7103 Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0. The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON. r7102[0...99] Par_circuit ring buffer fault/alarm received / F/A received B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power units connected in parallel (Motor Module, Active Line Infeed, Voltage Sensing Module). Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7101, r7103 Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0. Displays the relative system runtime when the fault or alarm occurred. The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-681 Parameters List of parameters r7103[0...99] Par_circuit ring buffer fault/alarm gone / F/A gone B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power units connected in parallel (Motor Module, Active Line Infeed, Voltage Sensing Module). Displays the relative system runtime when the fault or alarm was withdrawn. Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7101, r7102 Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0. The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON. r7200[0...n] Par_circuit power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the overload of the particular power unit in a parallel circuit configuration calculated using the I2t function. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0036. r7201[0...n] CO: Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. inverter / PU temp max inv B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the maximum inverter temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[0]. r7202[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. depletion layer / PU TempMaxDepLayer B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the maximum depletion layer temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[1]. 1-682 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7203[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. rectifier / PU temp max rect B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the maximum rectifier temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[2]. r7204[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures air intake / PU temp air intake B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the air intake temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[3]. r7205[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures electronics / PU temp electr B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the temperature of the electronics module in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[4]. r7206[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp inv 1 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the inverter temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[5]. r7207[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 2 / PU temp inv 2 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the inverter temperature 2 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[6]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-683 Parameters List of parameters r7208[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 3 / PU temp inv 3 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the inverter temperature 3 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[7]. r7209[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 4 / PU temp inv 4 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the inverter temperature 4 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[8]. r7210[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 5 / PU temp inv 5 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the inverter temperature 5 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[9]. r7211[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 6 / PU temp inv 6 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays the inverter temperature 6 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[10]. r7212[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp rect 1 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays rectifier temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[11]. 1-684 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7213[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 2 / PU temp rect 2 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays rectifier temperature 2 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[12]. r7214[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 1 / PU temp DepLayer 1 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[13]. r7215[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 2 / PU temp DepLayer 2 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 2 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[14]. r7216[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 3 / PU temp DepLayer 3 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 3 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[15]. r7217[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 4 / PU temp DepLayer 4 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 4 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[16]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-685 Parameters List of parameters r7218[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 5 / PU temp DepLayer 5 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 5 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[17]. r7219[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 6 / PU temp DepLayer 6 B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Min - [C] Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 6 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[18]. r7220[0...n] CO: Par_circuit drive output current maximum / Drv I_outp max VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power unit. The minimum value of all power units multiplied by the number of Motor Modules is displayed in r0067. r7222[0...n] CO: Par_circuit absolute current actual value / I_act abs val VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays actual absolute current. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0068. r7223[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U / I_phase U act val VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase U as peak value. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[0]. 1-686 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7224[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V / I_phase V act val VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase V as peak value. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[1]. r7225[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W / I_phase W act val VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase W as peak value. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[2]. r7226[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U offset / I_phase U offset VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the measured offset of phase U as peak value. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[3]. r7227[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V offset / I_phase V offset VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the measured offset of phase V as peak value. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[4]. r7228[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W offset / I_phase W offset VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the measured offset of phase W as peak value. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[5]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-687 Parameters List of parameters r7229[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value sum U, V, W / I_phase sum UVW VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Min - [A] Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Description: Displays the measured sum of the currents in phases U, V and W as peak value. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[6]. r7230[0...n] CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage actual value / Vdc_act B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage. The average value of all power units is displayed in r0070. r7231[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase U / U_phase U act val VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase U. The average value of all power units is displayed in r0089[0]. r7232[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase V / U_phase V act val VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase V. The average value of all power units is displayed in r0089[1]. r7233[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase W / U_phase W act val VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Min - [V] Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase W. The average value of all power units is displayed in r0089[2]. 1-688 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7240[0...n] Par_circuit gating unit status word 1 / Gating unit ZSW1 VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: PDS, p0120 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays status word 1 of the power unit. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Fault time-critical Gating unit mode bit 0 Pulse enable 5 V upper circuit breaker 5 V lower circuit breaker Gating unit mode bit 1 Gating unit mode bit 2 Brake state Brake diagnostics Armature short-circuit braking Gating unit state bit 0 Gating unit state bit 1 Gating unit state bit 2 Alarm status bit 0 Alarm status bit 1 Diagnostics 24 V 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Active ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Not active OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - r7250[0...4] Par_circuit power unit rated power / PU P_rated B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [kW] Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Description: Displays the rated power of the individual power units connected in parallel for various load duty cycles. The sum of the rated powers of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0206. Index: [0] = Rated value [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = S1 cont duty cyc [4] = S6 load duty cycle Dependency: The value is displayed in [kW] or [hp]. Refer to: p0100, p0205 r7251[0...4] Par_circuit power unit rated current / PU PI_rated B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Displays the rated current of the individual power units connected in parallel for various load duty cycles. The sum of the rated currents of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0207. Index: [0] = Rated value [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-689 Parameters List of parameters [3] = S1 cont duty cyc [4] = S6 load duty cycle Dependency: Refer to: p0205 r7252[0...4] Par_circuit maximum power unit current / PU I_max B_INF (Parallel), VECTOR_G (Parallel) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [Arms] Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Description: Displays the maximum output current of the individual power units connected in parallel. The sum of the maximum currents of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0209. Index: [0] = Rated value [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = S1 cont duty cyc [4] = S6 load duty cycle Dependency: Refer to: p0205 r7758[0...19] KHP Control Unit serial number / KHP CU ser_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number of the Control Unit. The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices. For the commissioning software, the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded. Dependency: Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768 Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. Note: KHP: Know-How Protection p7759[0...19] KHP Control Unit reference serial number / KHP CU ref ser_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the reference serial number for the Control Unit. Using this parameter, if a Control Unit and/or a memory card is replaced at the end customer, the OEM can again adapt the project to the modified hardware. Dependency: Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768 Note: KHP: Know-How Protection - The OEM may only change this parameter for the use case "Sending encrypted SINAMICS data". - SINAMICS only evaluates this parameter when powering up from the encrypted "Load into file system..." output or when powering up from the encrypted PS files. The evaluation is only made when know-how protection and memory card copy protection have been activated. 1-690 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7760 Write protection/know-how protection status / Wr_prot/KHP stat All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status for the write protection and know-how protection. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 Dependency: Refer to: p7761, p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768 Notice: For bits 01 ... 04, the following applies: Note: KHP: Know-How Protection Signal name Write protection active Know-how protection active Know-how protection temporarily withdrawn Know-how protection cannot be deactivated Memory card copy protection active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No FP - For SIMOTION D410-2 these bits have no significance (they are always 0). Re bit 00: Write protection can be activated/deactivated via p7761 on the Control Unit. Re bit 01: The know-how protection can be activated by entering a password (p7766 ... p7768). Re bit 02: If it has already been activated, know-how protection can be temporarily deactivated by entering the valid password in p7766. In this case, bit 1 = 0 and bit 2 = 1 offset. Re bit 03: Know-how protection cannot be deactivated, as p7766 is not entered in the OEM exception list (only the factory setting is possible). This bit is only set if know-how protection is active (bit 1 = 1) and p7766 has not been entered in the OEM exception list. Re bit 04: When know-how protection has been activated, the contents of the memory card (parameter and DCC data) can be additionally protected against being used with other memory cards. This bit is only set if know-how protection is active and p7765 = 1. p7761 Write protection / Write protection CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting for activating/de-activating the write protection for adjustable parameters. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: r7760 Note: While write protection is active, a download is prevented; however, it is still possible to restore the factory settings. Deactivate write protection Activate write protection Examples of parameters, which for the SINAMICS drive family, are excluded from write protection: p0003, p0124, p0144, p0154, p0971, p0977, p2017, p3950, p3980, p3981, p3982, p3983, p7761, p8560, p8562, p8563, p8564, p8821, p8822, p8830, p8831, p8832, p8833, p8834, p9210, p9211, p9400 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-691 Parameters List of parameters p7762 Write protection multi-master fieldbus system access behavior / Fieldbus acc_behav CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the behavior for write protection when accessing via multi-master fieldbus systems (e.g. CAN, BACnet). Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: r7760, p7761 p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 / KHP OEM qty p7764 All objects Description: Write access independent of p7761 Write access dependent on p7761 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 500 Factory setting 1 Sets the number of parameters for the OEM exception list (p7764[0...n]). p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1 Dependency: Refer to: p7764 Notice: For SIMOTION D410-2, this parameter has no significance. Note: KHP: Know-How Protection Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to. p7764[0...n] B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: p7763 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 OEM exception list (p7764[0...n] for setting parameters that should be excluded from know-how protection. p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1 Dependency: The number of indices depends on p7763. Refer to: p7763 Notice: For SIMOTION D410-2, this parameter has no significance. Note: KHP: Know-How Protection Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to. p7764[0...n] KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: p7763 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting [0] 7766 [1...499] 0 Description: OEM exception list (p7764[0...n] for setting parameters that should be excluded from know-how protection. p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1 1-692 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: The number of indices depends on p7763. Refer to: p7763 Notice: For SIMOTION D410-2, this parameter has no significance. Note: KHP: Know-How Protection Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to. p7765 KHP memory card copy protection / KHP copy protect CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting for activating/de-activating copy protection for the memory card. This means that the OEM can define whether the parameters and DCC data encrypted on the memory card should be protected before using on other memory cards. Value: 0: 1: Deactivating protection Activating protection Dependency: Refer to: p7766, p7767, p7768 Note: KHP: Know-How Protection The memory card copy protection is only effective when the know-how protection has been activated. p7766[0...29] KHP password input / KHP passw input CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the password for know-how protection. Example of a password: 123aBc = 49 50 51 97 66 99 dec (ASCII characters) [0] = character 1 (e.g. 49 dec) [1] = character 2 (e.g. 50 dec) ... [5] = character 6 (e.g. 99 dec) [29] = 0 dec (completes the entry) Dependency: Refer to: p7767, p7768 Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. When using the STARTER commissioning software, the password should be entered using the associated dialogs. Note: KHP: Know-How Protection When reading, p7766[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed. When using the STARTER commissioning software, when reading via the expert list, p7766[0...29] is displayed with "********". The following rules apply when entering the password: - Password entry must start with p7766[0]. - No gaps are permissible in the password. - Entering a password is completed when writing to p7766[29] (p7766[29] = 0 for passwords less than 30 characters). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-693 Parameters List of parameters p7767[0...29] KHP password new / KHP passw new CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the new password for know-how protection. Dependency: Refer to: p7766, p7768 Note: KHP: Know-How Protection When reading, p7767[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed. p7768[0...29] KHP password confirmation / KHP passw confirm CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Confirms the new password for know-how protection. Dependency: Refer to: p7766, p7767 Note: KHP: Know-How Protection When reading, p7768[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed. p7769[0...20] KHP memory card reference serial number / KHP mem ref ser_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the reference serial number for the memory card. Using this parameter, if a Control Unit and/or a memory card is replaced at the end customer, the OEM can again adapt the project to the modified hardware. Dependency: Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768 Note: KHP: Know-How Protection - The OEM may only change this parameter for the use case "Sending encrypted SINAMICS data". - SINAMICS only evaluates this parameter when powering up from the encrypted "Load into file system..." output or when powering up from the encrypted PS files. The evaluation is only made when know-how protection and memory card copy protection have been activated. p7770 NVRAM action / NVRAM action B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Sets the action to be executed for NVRAM data. At the end of the action the value is automatically set to 0. 1-694 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Inactive Load NVRAM data to parameters Load parameters to NVRAM Reset Notice: After action p7770 = 1 no more pulses may be enabled. After action p7770 = 2, it is essential that parameters are backed up (p0977 = 1) and that a warm restart is then performed (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2, 3). This will apply the values written. Note: If value = 1: This action loads the NVRAM data to the parameters. If value = 2: This action loads the parameters to the NVRAM. If value = 3: This action sets parameters p7771 ... p7774 to the factory setting. It is recommended to avoid placing unnecessary load on the subsequent upload/download operation. p7775 NVRAM data backup/import/delete / NVRAM backup CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 17 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to backup/import/delete NVRAM data. NVRAM data are non-volatile data in the device (e.g. fault buffer). For NVRAM data actions, the following data are excluded: - Crash diagnostics - CU operating hours counter - CU temperature - Safety logbook Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: Inactive NVRAM data backup to memory card Import NVRAM data from the memory card Delete NVRAM data in the device Error when clearing Error when backing up, memory card not available Error when backing up, insufficient memory space Error when backing up Error when importing, memory card not available Error when importing, checksum error Error when importing, no NVRAM data available Error when importing Notice: Re value = 2, 3: These actions are only possible when pulses are inhibited. Note: After the action has been successfully completed, the parameter is automatically set to zero. The actions importing and deleting NVRAM data immediately initiate a warm restart. If the procedure was not successfully completed, then an appropriate fault value is displayed (p7775 >= 10). p7788 Power unit sign-of-life monitoring tolerance window / PU SoL monit tol B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 1000 Factory setting 10 Setting of the tolerance window for the sign of life monitoring for communication to the power unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-695 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: A30853 Note: An active window is generated by means of DRIVE-CLiQ telegrams. If more than one sign-of-life error appears in the window, then A30853 is output. The lower the value in p7788, the greater the monitoring tolerance. p7789 Power unit sign-of-life monitoring fault threshold / PU SoL monit F_thr B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Converter Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1000 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of consecutive sign-of-life errors that are tolerated for communication to the power unit. Dependency: Refer to: F30008 Note: F30008 is output in the case of a fault. The higher the value in the parameter, the higher the monitoring tolerance. p7820 DRIVE-CLiQ component component number / DLQ comp_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component whose parameters are to be accessed. Dependency: Refer to: p7821, p7822, r7823 p7821 DRIVE-CLiQ component parameter number / DLQ para_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the parameter number to access a parameter of a DRIVE-CLiQ component. Dependency: Refer to: p7820, p7822, r7823 p7822 DRIVE-CLiQ component parameter index / DLQ para_index CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the parameter index to access a parameter of a DRIVE-CLiQ component. Dependency: Refer to: p7820, p7821, r7823 1-696 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7823 DRIVE-CLiQ component read parameter value / Read DLQ value CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the parameter value read from the DRIVE-CLiQ component. Dependency: Refer to: p7820, p7821, p7822 r7825[0...6] DRIVE-CLiQ component versions / DLQ version CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the firmware and EPROM versions of the DRIVE-CLiQ component selected using p7828[1]. Index: [0] = Reference firmware version [1] = Actual firmware version [2] = EPROM0 version [3] = EPROM1 version [4] = EPROM2 version [5] = EPROM3 version [6] = EPROM4 version Dependency: Refer to: p7828 Note: Reference firmware version: Version on the memory card/device memory. Current firmware version: Actual version of the DRIVE-CLiQ component. EPROM version: Current EPROM version of the DRIVE-CLiQ component. p7826 Firmware update automatic / FW update auto CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the behavior for the automatic firmware update of the DRIVE-CLiQ components. Value: 0: 1: 2: Notice: If this parameter is changed, it only becomes effective the next time that the drive system boots. Note: The firmware is automatically updated when the system boots. The boot can take several minutes. De-activated Upgrade and downgrade Upgrade After the update has been completed, it is necessary to carry out a new POWER ON (power-down/power-up) for the components involved. The firmware update procedure is displayed as follows: Control Unit (LED RDY): Flashes yellow with 0.5 Hz --> firmware is being updated. Flashing yellow with 2 Hz --> POWER ON is required for the components involved. Components involved: Flashing red/green with 0.5 Hz --> firmware is being updated. Flashing red/green with 2 Hz --> POWER ON of the components is required. Only components from firmware version 2.5 support the red/green flashing at 2 Hz. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-697 Parameters List of parameters r7827 Firmware update progress display / FW update progress CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the progress when updating the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ components. p7828[0...1] Firmware download component number / FW downl comp_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 399 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the component number for the required DRIVE-CLiQ component. Index 0: Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component for which a firmware download is to be made. Index 1: Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component for which the reference firmware version, saved in r7825 on the memory card/device memory, is to be displayed. Index: [0] = Firmware download [1] = Reference firmware version Dependency: Refer to: p0121, p0141, p0151, p7829 Note: For p7828[0] = 399, the firmware for all of the existing components is downloaded. The firmware download is started with p7829 = 1. p7829 Activate firmware download / FW download act CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1 Max 999 Factory setting 0 Description: Activating the firmware download for the DRIVE-CLiQ components specified in p7828. 1: Activate download. -1: activate the download and carry out a reset. 0: Download successfully completed. > 1: Fault code 011: DRIVE-CLiQ component has detected a checksum error. 015: The selected DRIVE-CLiQ components did not accept the contents of the firmware file. 018: Firmware version is too old and is not accepted by the component. 019: Firmware version is not suitable for the hardware release of the component. 101: After several communication attempts, no response from the DRIVE-CLiQ component. 140: Firmware file for the DRIVE-CLiQ component not available on the memory card/device memory. 143: Component has not changed to the mode for firmware download. It was not possible to delete the existing firmware. 144: When checking the firmware that was downloaded (checksum), the component detected a fault. It is possible that the file on the memory card/device memory is defective. 145: Checking the loaded firmware (checksum) was not completed by the component in the appropriate time. 156: Component with the specified component number is not available. 1-698 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Dependency: Refer to: p7828 Note: p7829 is automatically set to 0 after the firmware has been successfully downloaded. The new firmware only becomes active at the next system run-up. p7830 Diagnostics telegram selection / Diag telegram ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects a telegram whose contents should be shown in p7831 ... p7836. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Dependency: Refer to: r7831, r7832, r7833, r7834, r7835, r7836 Reserved First cyclic receive telegram sensor 1 First cyclic receive telegram sensor 2 First cyclic receive telegram sensor 3 r7831[0...15] Telegram diagnostics signals / Tel diag signals ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 15157 Factory setting - Description: Displays the signals contained in the selected telegram (p7830). Value: 0: 1: 102: 110: 111: 112: 113: 114: 115: 10500: 10501: 10502: 10503: 10504: 10505: 10516: 10517: 10518: 10519: 10520: 10521: 10523: 10526: 10532: 10533: 10534: 10535: 10536: 10537: 10538: UNUSED UNKNOWN SAPAR_ID_DSA_ALARM SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_0 SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_1 SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_2 SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_3 SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_4 SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_5 ENC_ID_TIME_PRETRIGGER ENC_ID_TIME_SEND_TELEG_1 ENC_ID_TIME_CYCLE_FINISHED ENC_ID_TIME_DELTA_FUNMAN ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_CALCTIMES ENC_ID_SYNO_PERIOD ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_A ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_B ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_C ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_D ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_A_SAFETY ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_B_SAFETY ENC_ID_ADC_TEMP_1 ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_R ENC_ID_TRACK_AB_X ENC_ID_TRACK_AB_Y ENC_ID_OFFSET_CORR_AB_X ENC_ID_OFFSET_CORR_AB_Y ENC_ID_AB_ABS_VALUE ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_X ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_Y (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-699 Parameters List of parameters 10539: 10542: 10543: 10544: 10545: 10546: 10547: 10564: 10565: 10566: 10580: 10590: 10591: 10592: 10593: 10596: 10597: 10598: 10599: 10600: 10612: 10613: 10628: 10629: 10644: 10645: 10660: 10661: 10662: 10663: 10664: 10665: 10667: 10676: 10677: 10678: 10692: 10693: 10724: 10725: 10740: 10741: 10742: 10743: 10756: 10757: 10772: 10788: 10789: 10790: 11825: 11826: 15150: 15151: 15152: 15155: 15156: 15157: 1-700 ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_ABS ENC_ID_AB_RAND_X ENC_ID_AB_RAND_Y ENC_ID_AB_RAND_ABS_VALUE ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_ABS_ARRAY ENC_ID_PROC_OFFSET_0 ENC_ID_PROC_OFFSET_4 ENC_SELFTEMP_ACT ENC_ID_MOTOR_TEMP_TOP ENC_ID_MOTOR_TEMP_1 ENC_ID_RESISTANCE_1 ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_A ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_B ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_X ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_Y ENC_ID_AB_ANGLE ENC_ID_CD_ANGLE ENC_ID_MECH_ANGLE_HI ENC_ID_RM_POS_PHI_COMMU ENC_ID_PHI_COMMU ENC_ID_DIFF_CD_INC ENC_ID_RM_POS_PHI_COMMU_RFG ENC_ID_MECH_ANGLE ENC_ID_MECH_RM_POS ENC_ID_INIT_VECTOR FEAT_INIT_VECTOR ENC_ID_SENSOR_STATE ENC_ID_BASIC_SYSTEM ENC_ID_REFMARK_STATUS ENC_ID_DSA_STATUS1_SENSOR ENC_ID_DSA_RMSTAT_HANDSHAKE ENC_ID_DSA_CONTROL1_SENSOR ENC_ID_SAFETY ENC_ID_COUNTCORR_SAW_VALUE ENC_ID_COUNTCORR_ABS_VALUE ENC_ID_SAWTOOTH_CORR ENC_ID_RESISTANCE_CALIB_INSTANT ENC_ID_SERPROT_POS ENC_ID_ACT_FUNMAN_FUNCTION ENC_ID_SAFETY_COUNTER_CRC ENC_ID_POS_ABSOLUTE ENC_ID_POS_REFMARK ENC_ID_SAWTOOTH ENC_ID_SAFETY_PULSE_COUNTER ENC_ID_DSA_ACTUAL_SPEED ENC_ID_SPEED_DEV_ABS ENC_ID_DSA_POS_XIST1 ENC_ID_AB_CROSS_CORR ENC_ID_AB_GAIN_Y_CORR ENC_ID_AB_PEAK_CORR ENC_ID_RES_TRANSITION_RATIO ENC_ID_RES_PHASE_SHIFT ENC_ID_SPINDLE_S1_RAW ENC_ID_SPINDLE_S4_RAW ENC_ID_SPINDLE_S5_RAW ENC_ID_SPINDLE_S1_CAL ENC_ID_SPINDLE_S4_CAL ENC_ID_SPINDLE_S5_CAL (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7832[0...15] Telegram diagnostics numerical format / tel diag format ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1 Max 14 Factory setting - Description: Displays the original numerical format of the signals contained in the telegram. Value: -1: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: Dependency: Refer to: r7831 The associated signal number is represented in the appropriate index of r7831. Unknown Boolean Signed 1 byte Signed 2 byte Signed 4 byte Signed 8 byte Unsigned 1 byte Unsigned 2 byte Unsigned 4 byte Unsigned 8 byte Float 4 byte Double 8 byte mm dd yy HH MM SS MS DOW ASCII string SINUMERIK frame type SINUMERIK axis type r7833[0...15] Telegram diagnostics unsigned / Tel diag unsigned ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Parameter to display a DSA signal in the unsigned-integer format. The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831. r7834[0...15] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Telegram diagnostics signed / Tel diag signed Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Parameter to display a DSA signal in the signed-integer format. The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-701 Parameters List of parameters r7835[0...15] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Telegram diagnostics real / Tel diag real Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Parameter to display a DSA signal in the float format. The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831. r7836[0...15] ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Telegram diagnostics unit / Tel diag unit Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1 Max 147 Factory setting - Displays the units of a DSA signal. The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831. Value: -1: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 28: 29: 30: 31: 32: 33: 34: 35: 36: 38: 39: 40: 1-702 Unknown None Millimeter or degrees Millimeter Degrees mm/min or RPM Millimeter / min Revolutions / min m/sec^2 or U/sec^2 m/sec^2 U/sec^2 m/sec^3 or U/sec^3 m/sec^3 U/sec^3 sec 16.667 / sec mm/revolution ACX_UNIT_COMPENSATION_CORR Newton Kilogram Kilogram meter^2 Percent Hertz Volt peak-to-peak Amps peak-to-peak Degrees Celsius Degrees Millimeter or degrees Meters / minute Meters / second ohm Millihenry Newton meter Newton meter/Ampere Volt/Ampere Newton meter second / rad 31.25 microseconds Microseconds Milliseconds (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 53: 54: 55: 59: 61: 62: 63: 64: 65: 66: 67: 68: 69: 80: 81: 82: 83: 84: 85: 90: 91: 92: 93: 94: 95: 96: 97: 98: 99: 100: 101: 102: 103: 104: 105: 106: 107: 108: 109: 110: 111: 112: 113: 114: 115: 116: 117: 118: 119: 120: 121: 122: 123: 124: 125: 126: Kilowatt Micro amps peak-to-peak Volt seconds Microvolt seconds Micro newton meters Amps / volt seconds Per mille Hertz / second Micrometer or millidegrees Micrometer Millidegrees Nanometer Newton/Amps Volt seconds/meter Newton seconds/meter Micronewton Liters / minute Bar Cubic centimeters Millimeter / volt minute Newton/Volt Millivolts peak-to-peak Volt rms Millivolts rms Amps rms Micro amps rms Micrometers / revolution Tenths of a second Hundredths of a second 10 microseconds Pulses 256 pulses Tenths of a pulse Revolutions 100 revolutions / minute 10 revolutions / minute 0.1 revolutions / minute Thousandth revolution / minute Pulses / second 100 pulses / second 10 revolutions / (minute x seconds) 10000 pulses/second^2 0.1 Hertz 0.01 Hertz 0.1 / seconds Factor 0.1 Factor 0.01 Factor 0.001 Factor 0.0001 0.1 Volt peak-to-peak 0.1 Volt peak-to-peak 0.1 amps peak-to-peak Watt 100 Watt 10 Watt 0.01 percent 1/second^3 0.01 percent/millisecond Pulses / revolution Microfarads Milliohm 0.01 Newton meter Kilogram millimeter^2 Rad / (seconds newton meter) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-703 Parameters List of parameters 127: 128: 129: 130: 131: 132: 133: 135: 136: 137: 138: 139: 140: 141: 142: 143: 144: 145: 146: 147: Henry Kelvin Hours Kilohertz Milliamperes peak-to-peak Millifarads Meter Kilowatt hours Percent Amps / Volt Volt Millivolts Microvolts Amps Milliamperes Micro amps Milliamperes rms Millimeter Nanometer Joules r7843[0...20] Memory card serial number / Mem_card ser.no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual serial number of the memory card. Dependency: Refer to: p9920, p9921 The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices. Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. Note: Example: displaying the serial number for a memory card: r7843[0] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 1 r7843[1] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 2 r7843[2] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 3 r7843[3] = 57 dec --> ASCII characters = "9" --> serial number, character 4 r7843[4] = 50 dec --> ASCII characters = "2" --> serial number, character 5 r7843[5] = 51 dec --> ASCII characters = "3" --> serial number, character 6 r7843[6] = 69 dec --> ASCII characters = "E" --> serial number, character 7 r7843[7] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 8 ... r7843[19] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 20 r7843[20] = 0 dec Serial number = 111923E r7844[0...2] Memory card/device memory firmware version / Mem_crd/dev_mem FW CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: 1-704 Displays the version of the firmware stored on the memory card/device memory. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Internal [1] = External [2] = Parameter backup Note: Re index 0: Displays the internal firmware version (e.g. 04402315). This firmware version is the version of the memory card/device memory and not the CU firmware (r0018), however, normally they have the same versions. Re index 1: Displays the external firmware version (e.g. 04040000 -> 4.4). For automation systems with SINAMICS Integrated this is the runtime version of the automation system. Re index 2: Displays the internal CU firmware version (r0018) of the parameter backup. With this CU firmware version, the parameter backup was saved, which was used when powering up. r7850[0...23] Drive object operational/not operational / DO ready for oper CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -32786 Max 32767 Factory setting - Description: Displays whether, for an activated drive object, all activated topology components are available or not (or whether these can be addressed). 0: Drive object not ready for operation 1: Drive object ready for operation p7852 Number of indices for r7853 / Qty indices r7853 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 200 Factory setting 1 Description: Displays the number of indices for r7853[0...n]. This corresponds to the number of DRIVE-CLiQ components that are in the target topology. Dependency: Refer to: r7853 Note: The values are valid if all available Control Units adopt the "Initialization finished" state (r3988 = 800) following power-up. r7853[0...n] Component available/not available / Comp present CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: p7852 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF hex Factory setting - Description: Displays the component and whether this component is currently present. High byte: Component number Low byte: 0/1 (not available/available) Dependency: Refer to: p7852 Note: The values are valid if all available Control Units adopt the "Initialization finished" state (r3988 = 800) following power-up. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-705 Parameters List of parameters p7857 Sub-boot mode / Sub-boot mode B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the mode for the sub-boot. Value: 0: 1: Note: For p7857 = 0 (manual sub-boot) the following applies: Sub-boot manual Sub-boot automatic The parameter should be set to 1 to start the sub-boot. p7859[0...199] Component number global / Comp_nr global CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min -32786 Max 32767 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the global and unique component number in a drive system with several Control Units. Each index of the parameter corresponds to a possible local component number on the corresponding Control Unit. The indices are allocated to the global component numbers as follows: p7859[0]: Not used p7859[1]: Sets the global component number for the local component number 1 p7859[2]: Sets the global component number for the local component number 2 ... p7859[199]: Sets the global component number for the local component number 199 Notice: This parameter is preferably set via suitable commissioning software (e.g. UpdateAgent, STARTER, SCOUT). Changing the parameter via the AOP (Advanced Operator Panel) or BOP (Basic Operator Panel) can destroy a valid unique setting. Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. r7867 Status/configuration changes global / Changes global CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays status and configuration changes of all of the drive objects in the complete unit. When changing the status or the configuration of the Control Unit or a drive object, the value of this parameter is incremented. Dependency: 1-706 Refer to: r7868, r7869, r7870 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r7868[0...24] Configuration changes drive object reference / Config_chng DO ref CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Reference to the drive objects whose configuration has changed. Index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is increased. Index 1...n: The drive object with object number in p0101[n-1] has changed its configuration. Example: r7868[3] was incremented since the last time it was read. --> the configuration of the drive object with object number in p0101[2] was changed. Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = Object number in p0101[0] [2] = Object number in p0101[1] [3] = Object number in p0101[2] [4] = Object number in p0101[3] [5] = Object number in p0101[4] [6] = Object number in p0101[5] [7] = Object number in p0101[6] [8] = Object number in p0101[7] [9] = Object number in p0101[8] [10] = Object number in p0101[9] [11] = Object number in p0101[10] [12] = Object number in p0101[11] [13] = Object number in p0101[12] [14] = Object number in p0101[13] [15] = Object number in p0101[14] [16] = Object number in p0101[15] [17] = Object number in p0101[16] [18] = Object number in p0101[17] [19] = Object number in p0101[18] [20] = Object number in p0101[19] [21] = Object number in p0101[20] [22] = Object number in p0101[21] [23] = Object number in p0101[22] [24] = Object number in p0101[23] Dependency: Refer to: p0101, r7867, r7871 r7869[0...24] Status changes drive object reference / Status_chng DO ref CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Reference to the drive objects whose status has changed. Index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is increased. Index 1...n: The drive object with object number in p0101[n-1] has changed its status. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-707 Parameters List of parameters Example: r7868[3] was incremented since the last time it was read. --> the status of the drive object with object number in p0101[2] was changed. Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = Object number in p0101[0] [2] = Object number in p0101[1] [3] = Object number in p0101[2] [4] = Object number in p0101[3] [5] = Object number in p0101[4] [6] = Object number in p0101[5] [7] = Object number in p0101[6] [8] = Object number in p0101[7] [9] = Object number in p0101[8] [10] = Object number in p0101[9] [11] = Object number in p0101[10] [12] = Object number in p0101[11] [13] = Object number in p0101[12] [14] = Object number in p0101[13] [15] = Object number in p0101[14] [16] = Object number in p0101[15] [17] = Object number in p0101[16] [18] = Object number in p0101[17] [19] = Object number in p0101[18] [20] = Object number in p0101[19] [21] = Object number in p0101[20] [22] = Object number in p0101[21] [23] = Object number in p0101[22] [24] = Object number in p0101[23] Dependency: Refer to: p0101, r7867, r7872 r7870[0...7] Configuration changes global / Config_chng global CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the configuration changes of all of the drive objects in the complete unit. Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = r7871[0] of a drive object [2] = p0101 or r0102 [3] = PROFIBUS configuration (p0978) [4] = DRIVE-CLiQ actual topology (r9900 or r9901) [5] = DRIVE-CLiQ target topology (r9902 or r9903) [6] = DRIVE-CLiQ ports (p0109) [7] = OA applications Dependency: Refer to: r7867, r7871 Note: Index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented. Index 1: Drive object configuration. When changing r7871[0] on a drive object, the value in this index is incremented. Index 2: Drive object, configuration unit. When changing either p0101 or r0102, the value in this index is incremented. Index 3: PROFIBUS configuration unit. When changing p0978, the value in this index is incremented. Index 4: DRIVE-CLiQ actual topology. When changing either r9900 or r9901, the value in this index is incremented. 1-708 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Index 5: DRIVE-CLiQ target topology. When changing either p9902 or p9903, the value in this index is incremented. Index 6: DRIVE-CLiQ ports. When changing p0109, the value in this index is incremented. Index 7: OA applications. When changing OA applications, the value in this index is incremented. r7871[0...10] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object. Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108 [2] = Drive object name (p0199) [3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180) [4] = BICO interconnections [5] = Activate/de-activate drive object [6] = Data backup required [7] = Activate/de-activate component [8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000) [9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC) [10] = p0107 or p0108 Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870 Note: Re index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented. Re index 1: Drive object commissioning: When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 2: Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 3: Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 4: Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 5: Drive object activity: When changing p0105, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 6: Drive object, data save. 0: There are no parameter changes to save. 1: There are parameter changes to save. Re index 7: Drive object component activity: When changing either p0125 or p0145, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 8: Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 9: Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 10: Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-709 Parameters List of parameters r7871[0...10] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object. Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = p0107 or p0108 [2] = Drive object name (p0199) [3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180) [4] = BICO interconnections [5] = Activate/de-activate drive object [6] = Data backup required [7] = Reserved [8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000) [9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC) [10] = p0107 or p0108 Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870 Note: Re index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented. Re index 1: Drive object commissioning: When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 2: Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 3: Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 4: Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 5: Drive object activity: When changing p0105, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 6: Drive object, data save. 0: There are no parameter changes to save. 1: There are parameter changes to save. Re index 8: Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 9: Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 10: Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. r7871[0...15] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: 1-710 Displays the configuration changes on the drive object. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108 [2] = Drive object name (p0199) [3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180) [4] = BICO interconnections [5] = Activate/de-activate drive object [6] = Data backup required [7] = Activate/de-activate component [8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000) [9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC) [10] = p0107 or p0108 [11] = p0530 or p0531 [12] = Reserved [13] = Reserved [14] = Reserved [15] = Enc type (p0400) Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870 Note: Re index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented. Re index 1: Drive object configuration. When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 2: Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 3: Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 4: Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 6: Drive object, data save. 0: There are no parameter changes to save. 1: There are parameter changes to save. Re index 8: Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304 ...), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 9: Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 15: Encoder configuration. When changing p0400, the value in this index is incremented. r7871[0...10] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO HUB, TB30, TM150, Can be changed: TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Calculated: - Access level: 4 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object. Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108 [2] = Drive object name (p0199) [3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180) [4] = BICO interconnections [5] = Activate/de-activate drive object [6] = Data backup required [7] = Reserved (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-711 Parameters List of parameters [8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000) [9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC) [10] = p0107 or p0108 Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870 Note: Re index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented. Re index 1: Drive object commissioning: When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 2: Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 3: Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 4: Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 5: Drive object activity: When changing p0105, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 6: Drive object, data save. 0: There are no parameter changes to save. 1: There are parameter changes to save. Re index 8: Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 9: Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 10: Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. r7871[0...10] Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object. Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108 [2] = Drive object name (p0199) [3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180) [4] = BICO interconnections [5] = Reserved [6] = Data backup required [7] = Reserved [8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000) [9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC) [10] = p0107 or p0108 Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870 Note: Re index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented. Re index 1: Drive object commissioning: When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. 1-712 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Re index 2: Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 3: Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 4: Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 6: Drive object, data save. 0: There are no parameter changes to save. 1: There are parameter changes to save. Re index 8: Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 9: Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 10: Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. r7871[0...15] VECTOR_G Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the configuration changes on the drive object. Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108 [2] = Drive object name (p0199) [3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180) [4] = BICO interconnections [5] = Activate/de-activate drive object [6] = Data backup required [7] = Activate/de-activate component [8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000) [9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC) [10] = p0107 or p0108 [11] = p0530 or p0531 [12] = Reserved [13] = Reserved [14] = Reserved [15] = SERVO or VECTOR (e.g. p0300) Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7870 Note: Re index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented. Re index 1: Drive object commissioning: When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 2: Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 3: Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 4: Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-713 Parameters List of parameters Re index 5: Drive object activity: When changing p0105, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 6: Drive object, data save. 0: There are no parameter changes to save. 1: There are parameter changes to save. Re index 7: Drive object component activity: When changing either p0125 or p0145, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 8: Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 9: Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. Re index 10: Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 11: Drive object bearing. When changing p0530 or p0531, the value in this index is incremented. Re index 15: SERVO/VECTOR configuration. When changing p0300, p0301 or p0400, the value in this index is incremented. r7872[0...3] Status changes drive object / Status_chng DO All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status changes on the drive object. Index 0: When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented. Index 1: Drive object faults. When changing r0944, the value in this index is incremented. Index 2: Drive object alarms. When changing r2121, the value in this index is incremented. Index 3: Drive object safety messages. When changing r9744, the value in this index is incremented. Index: [0] = Sum of the following indices [1] = Faults (r0944) [2] = Alarms (r2121) [3] = Safety messages (r9744) Dependency: Refer to: r7869 p7900[0...23] Drive objects priority / DO priority CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the priority for processing the existing drive objects in the system. The parameter enables a free sequence to be set for processing the drive objects. For this purpose all the drive object numbers existing in the system have to be written in the desired sequence into the corresponding indices of the parameter. After re-booting this sequence will be effective without a plausibility check. 1-714 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters With the factory setting the following priorities regarding processing are applicable: - The drive objects are pre-sorted according to their type as follows: CONTROL UNIT, INFEED, SERVO, VECTOR, TM, HUB, CU_LINK - If they are of the same type, they are sorted in ascending order according to their drive object number, i.e. the lower the number, the higher the priority for processing. Index: [0] = Drive object number Control Unit [1] = Drive object number object 1 [2] = Drive object number object 2 [3] = Drive object number object 3 [4] = Drive object number object 4 [5] = Drive object number object 5 [6] = Drive object number object 6 [7] = Drive object number object 7 [8] = Drive object number object 8 [9] = Drive object number object 9 [10] = Drive object number object 10 [11] = Drive object number object 11 [12] = Drive object number object 12 [13] = Drive object number object 13 [14] = Drive object number object 14 [15] = Drive object number object 15 [16] = Drive object number object 16 [17] = Drive object number object 17 [18] = Drive object number object 18 [19] = Drive object number object 19 [20] = Drive object number object 20 [21] = Drive object number object 21 [22] = Drive object number object 22 [23] = Drive object number object 23 Notice: This parameter may only be used by qualified service personnel. Note: If the same drive object numbers are used and if the existing drive object numbers in the system are entered incompletely, the content of this parameter is ignored entirely. The behavior as with factory setting will then become effective. r7901[0...43] Sampling times / t_sample CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [s] Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Description: Displays the sampling times currently present on the drive unit. For r7901[x] = 0, the following applies: The time slice is not active. r7903 Hardware sampling times still assignable / HW t_samp free CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of hardware sampling times that can still be assigned. These free sampling times can be used by OA applications such as DCC (Drive Control Chart) or FBLOCKS (free function blocks). Note: OA: Open Architecture (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-715 Parameters List of parameters p8500[0...7] BI: Input signal bit-serially 0 / Input_sig bit 0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for bit-serial input signals. These signals are available in binector output r8510.0 ... 7 for further interconnection. Index: [0] = To BO: r8510.0 [1] = To BO: r8510.1 [2] = To BO: r8510.2 [3] = To BO: r8510.3 [4] = To BO: r8510.4 [5] = To BO: r8510.5 [6] = To BO: r8510.6 [7] = To BO: r8510.7 Dependency: Refer to: r8510 p8501[0...21] BI: Input signal bit-serially 1 / Input_sig bit 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for bit-serial input signals. Index: [0] = To BO: r8511.0 [1] = To BO: r8511.1 [2] = To BO: r8511.2 [3] = To BO: r8511.3 [4] = To BO: r8511.4 [5] = To BO: r8511.5 [6] = To BO: r8511.6 [7] = To BO: r8511.7 [8] = To BO: r8511.8 [9] = To BO: r8511.9 [10] = To BO: r8511.10 [11] = To BO: r8511.11 [12] = To BO: r8511.12 [13] = To BO: r8511.13 [14] = To BO: r8511.14 [15] = To BO: r8511.15 [16] = To BO: r8511.16 [17] = To BO: r8511.17 [18] = To BO: r8511.18 [19] = To BO: r8511.19 [20] = To BO: r8511.20 [21] = To BO: r8511.21 Dependency: Refer to: r8511 These signals are available in binector output r8511.0 ... 21 for further interconnection. 1-716 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8502 CI: Input signal word-serially 0 / Input_sig word 0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for wordwise input signals. This signal value is available in connector output r8512 for further interconnection. Dependency: Refer to: r8512 p8503 CI: Input signal word-serially 1 / Input_sig word 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for wordwise input signals. This signal value is available in connector output r8513 for further interconnection. Dependency: Refer to: r8513 p8504 CI: Input signal word-serially 2 / Input_sig word 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for wordwise input signals. This signal value is available in connector output r8514 for further interconnection. Dependency: Refer to: r8514 p8505 CI: Input signal word-serially 3 / Input_sig word 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for wordwise input signals. This signal value is available in connector output r8515 for further interconnection. Dependency: Refer to: r8515 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-717 Parameters List of parameters r8510.0...7 BO: Output signal bit-serially 0 / Outp_sig bit 0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and binector output for the signal interconnected via binector input p8500[0...7]. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Dependency: Refer to: p8500 Signal name From BI: p8500[0] From BI: p8500[1] From BI: p8500[2] From BI: p8500[3] From BI: p8500[4] From BI: p8500[5] From BI: p8500[6] From BI: p8500[7] 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF r8511.0...21 BO: Output signal bit-serially 1 / Outp_sig bit 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display and binector output for the signal interconnected via binector input p8501[0...21]. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Dependency: Refer to: p8501 1-718 Signal name From BI: p8501[0] From BI: p8501[1] From BI: p8501[2] From BI: p8501[3] From BI: p8501[4] From BI: p8501[5] From BI: p8501[6] From BI: p8501[7] From BI: p8501[8] From BI: p8501[9] From BI: p8501[10] From BI: p8501[11] From BI: p8501[12] From BI: p8501[13] From BI: p8501[14] From BI: p8501[15] From BI: p8501[16] From BI: p8501[17] From BI: p8501[18] From BI: p8501[19] From BI: p8501[20] From BI: p8501[21] 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r8512 CO: Output signal wordwise 0 / Outp_sig word 0 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Display and connector output for the signal interconnected via connector input p8502. Dependency: Refer to: p8502 r8513 CO: Output signal wordwise 1 / Outp_sig word 1 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Display and connector output for the signal interconnected via connector input p8503. Dependency: Refer to: p8503 r8514 CO: Output signal wordwise 2 / Outp_sig word 2 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Display and connector output for the signal interconnected via connector input p8504. Dependency: Refer to: p8504 r8515 CO: Output signal wordwise 3 / Outp_sig word 3 CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Display and connector output for the signal interconnected via connector input p8505. Dependency: Refer to: p8505 p8550 AOP LOCAL/REMOTE / AOP LOCAL/REMOTE CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 1001 bin Description: Setting for saving the actual configuration of the Advanced Operator Panel (AOP). Bit field: Bit 00 01 Signal name LOCAL save Start in LOCAL 1 signal Yes Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No FP - 1-719 Parameters List of parameters 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 14 15 r8570[0...39] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Change in oper. OFF acts like OFF1 OFF acts like OFF2 OFF acts like OFF3 Reserved CW/CCW active Jog active Save speed setpoint Inhibit operation Inhibit parameterization Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No - Macro drive object / Macro DO Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the macro file saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: p0015 Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running. r8571[0...39] Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory. Dependency: Refer to: p0700 Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running. r8572[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set B_INF, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory. Dependency: Refer to: p1000 Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running. r8573[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set B_INF, VECTOR_G Description: 1-720 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p1500 Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running. r8585 Macro execution actual / Macro executed B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the macro currently being executed on the drive object. Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570, r8571, r8572, r8573 r8600 CAN device type / Device type CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays all of the devices connected to the CAN bus after run-up. r8600 = 00000000 hex: No drive recognized. = FFFF0192 hex: Several drives - drive 1 is an Active Line Module, servo drive or vector drive = FFFF0191 hex: Several drives - 1st drive is a Terminal Module = 02010192 hex: 1 Vector drive = 00020192 hex: 1 Servo drive = 01000192 hex: 1 Active Line Module = 00080191 hex: 1 Terminal Module Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1000 hex. For each detected drive, the device type is displayed in object 67FF hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). r8601 CAN error register / Error register CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the error register for CANopen. Bit 0: Generic error 0 signal: No error present. 1 signal: Generic error present. Bit 1 ... 3: Not supported (always a 0 signal) Bit 4: Communications error 0 signal: There is no message in the range 8700 ... 8799. 1 signal: There is at least one message (fault or alarm) in the range 8700 ... 8799. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-721 Parameters List of parameters Bit 5 ... 6: Not supported (always a 0 signal) Bit 7:; Fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799 0 signal: There is no fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799. 1 signal: There is at least one fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1001 hex. p8602 CAN SYNC object / SYNC object CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0080 hex Sets the SYNC object parameter for the following CANopen objects: - 1005 hex: COB-ID Note: SINAMICS operates as SYNC load. COB-ID: CAN object identification p8603 CAN COB-ID Emergency Message / COB-ID EMCY Msg CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Sets the COB-ID for the emergency message (error telegram). It corresponds to the CANopen objects: - 1014 hex: COB-ID Note: If, when downloading, the pre-set value 0 is downloaded, then the CANopen pre-set value 80 hex + Node-ID is automatically set. Online, the value 0 is rejected as, according to the CANopen Standard, COB-ID 0 is not permitted here. The changeover of the node ID using the hardware switch at the Control Unit or per software has no effect on the COB-ID EMCY. The saved value remains effective. p8604[0...1] CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: CAN node guarding / Node guarding Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Sets the node guarding parameter for the following CANopen objects: - 100C hex: Guard Time - 100D hex: Life Time Factor The life time is derived by multiplying guard time by the life time factor. Index: [0] = Time interval [ms] for new node guarding telegram [1] = Factor for failure of the node guarding telegram 1-722 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Only adjustable if heartbeat time = 0 (heartbeat is disabled). Refer to: p8606 Note: For p8604[0] = 0 and/or p8604[1] = 0, the node guarding protocol is not used. Either node guarding or heartbeat can be used. p8606 CAN Producer Heartbeat Time / Prod Heartb Time CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 65535 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Sets the time [ms] to cyclically send heartbeat telegrams. The smallest cycle time is 100 ms. When a 0 is written, then heartbeat telegrams are not sent. Dependency: Only adjustable if guard time = 0 (node guarding disabled). Refer to: p8604 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1017 hex. Either node guarding or heartbeat can be used. r8607[0...3] CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) CAN Identity Object / Identity object Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: General device information display. Index: [0] = Vendor ID [1] = Product code [2] = Revision number [3] = Serial number Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1018 hex. Re index 3: The SINAMICS serial number comprises 60 bits. Of these bits, the following are displayed in this index: Bits 0 ... 19: Consecutive number Bits 20 ... 23: Production ID - 0 hex: Development - 1 hex: P1 unique number - 2 hex: P2 unique number - 3 hex: WA unique number - 9 hex: Pattern - F hex: All others Bits 24 ... 27: Month of manufacture (0 means January, B means December) Bits 28 ... 31: Year of manufacture (0 means 2002) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-723 Parameters List of parameters p8608[0...1] CAN Clear Bus Off Error / Clear bus off err CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: As a result of a Bus Off error, the CAN controller is set into the initialization state. Index 0: The CAN controller is manually started after resolving the cause of the error with p8608[0] = 1. Index 1: The automatic CAN bus start function is activated using p8608[1] = 1. At 2 second intervals, the CAN controller is automatically restarted until the cause of the error has been resolved and a CAN connection has been established. Value: 0: 1: Inactive Start CAN controller Index: [0] = Manual controller start function [1] = Activating the automatic controller start function Note: Re index 0: This parameter is automatically reset to 0 after start. p8609[0...1] CAN Error Behavior / Error behavior CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the behavior of the CAN node referred to the communications error or equipment fault. Value: 0: 1: 2: Index: [0] = Behavior for communication errors [1] = Behavior for device faults Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1029 hex. r8610[0...1] CAN First Server SDO / First server SDO CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Pre-operational No change Stopped Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the identifier (client/server and server/client) of the SDO channel. Index: [0] = Displays the COB ID from client to server [1] = Displays the COB ID from server to client 1-724 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1200 hex. SDO: Service Data Object p8611[0...82] CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: CAN Pre-defined Error Field / Pre_def err field Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF 1000 hex Factory setting 0000 hex Displays the Pre-defined Error Field of the CAN node. It includes the number of all errors that have occurred, the number of errors that have occurred for each drive and the errors according to their history. The first 16 bits represent the CANopen error code and the second 16 bits the SINAMICS error code. Index 1 has the same structure - however, the drive object ID is in the second 16 bits instead of the SINAMICS error code. CANopen error code: 0000 hex: No error present 8110 hex: Alarm A08751 present 8120 hex: Alarm A08752 present 8130 hex: Alarm A08700(F) with alarm value = 2 present 1000 hex: Generic error 1 present (there is at least one fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799) 1001 hex: Generic error 2 present (there is at least one alarm in the range 8700 ... 8799 with the exception of A08751, A08752, A08700) All drive objects are acknowledged by writing the value 0 to the index 0. As soon as a fault has been acknowledged or an alarm cleared, then it is also cleared from the fault list. Index: [0] = Number of all faults in the drive unit [1] = Most recent drive number / fault number [2] = Number of faults drive 1 [3] = Fault 1/ drive 1 [4] = Fault 2/ drive 1 [5] = Fault 3/ drive 1 [6] = Fault 4/ drive 1 [7] = Fault 5/ drive 1 [8] = Fault 6/ drive 1 [9] = Fault 7/ drive 1 [10] = Fault 8/ drive 1 [11] = Number of faults drive 2 [12] = Fault 1/ drive 2 [13] = Fault 2/ drive 2 [14] = Fault 3/ drive 2 [15] = Fault 4/ drive 2 [16] = Fault 5/ drive 2 [17] = Fault 6/ drive 2 [18] = Fault 7/ drive 2 [19] = Fault 8/ drive 2 [20] = Number of faults drive 3 [21] = Fault 1/ drive 3 [22] = Fault 2/ drive 3 [23] = Fault 3/ drive 3 [24] = Fault 4/ drive 3 [25] = Fault 5/ drive 3 [26] = Fault 6/ drive 3 [27] = Fault 7/ drive 3 [28] = Fault 8/ drive 3 [29] = Number of faults drive 4 [30] = Fault 1/ drive 4 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-725 Parameters List of parameters [31] = Fault 2/ drive 4 [32] = Fault 3/ drive 4 [33] = Fault 4/ drive 4 [34] = Fault 5/ drive 4 [35] = Fault 6/ drive 4 [36] = Fault 7/ drive 4 [37] = Fault 8/ drive 4 [38] = Number of faults drive 5 [39] = Fault 1/ drive 5 [40] = Fault 2/ drive 5 [41] = Fault 3/ drive 5 [42] = Fault 4/ drive 5 [43] = Fault 5/ drive 5 [44] = Fault 6/ drive 5 [45] = Fault 7/ drive 5 [46] = Fault 8/ drive 5 [47] = Number of faults drive 6 [48] = Fault 1/ drive 6 [49] = Fault 2/ drive 6 [50] = Fault 3/ drive 6 [51] = Fault 4/ drive 6 [52] = Fault 5/ drive 6 [53] = Fault 6/ drive 6 [54] = Fault 7/ drive 6 [55] = Fault 8/ drive 6 [56] = Number of faults drive 7 [57] = Fault 1/ drive 7 [58] = Fault 2/ drive 7 [59] = Fault 3/ drive 7 [60] = Fault 4/ drive 7 [61] = Fault 5/ drive 7 [62] = Fault 6/ drive 7 [63] = Fault 7/ drive 7 [64] = Fault 8/ drive 7 [65] = Number of faults drive 8 [66] = Fault 1/ drive 8 [67] = Fault 2/ drive 8 [68] = Fault 3/ drive 8 [69] = Fault 4/ drive 8 [70] = Fault 5/ drive 8 [71] = Fault 6/ drive 8 [72] = Fault 7/ drive 8 [73] = Fault 8/ drive 8 [74] = Number of faults Control Unit [75] = Fault 1/Control Unit [76] = Fault 2/Control Unit [77] = Fault 3/Control Unit [78] = Fault 4/Control Unit [79] = Fault 5/Control Unit [80] = Fault 6/Control Unit [81] = Fault 7/Control Unit [82] = Fault 8/Control Unit Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1003 hex. 1-726 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8620 CAN Node-ID / Node ID CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 127 Factory setting 126 Display or setting of the CANopen Node ID. The Node ID can be set as follows: 1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit. --> p8620 can then only be read and displays the selected Node ID. --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. --> CANopen Node ID and PROFIBUS address are identical. 2) Using p8620 --> Only if address 0 is set using the address switch. --> the Node ID is set as standard to 126. --> A change only becomes effective after save and POWER ON. Dependency: Refer to: r8621 Note: Every node ID change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The active node ID is displayed in r8621. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. It is only possible to independently set CANopen node ID and the PROFIBUS address using p0918 and p8620 (prerequisite: the address 0 is set for the address switch). r8621 CAN Node-ID active / Node ID active CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active CANopen Node ID. Dependency: Refer to: p8620 p8622 CAN bit rate / Bit rate CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 7 Factory setting 6 Setting the bit rate for the CAN bus. The appropriate bit timings are selected that are defined in p8623 in the associated sub-index. Example: Bit rate = 20 kbit/s --> p8622 = 6 --> associated bit timing is in p8623[6]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-727 Parameters List of parameters Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: Dependency: Refer to: p8623 Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8623[0...7] CAN Bit Timing selection / Bit timing select CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) 1 Mbit/s 800 kbit/s 500 kbit/s 250 kbit/s 125 kbit/s 50 kbit/s 20 kbit/s 10 kbit/s Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 000F 7FFF hex Factory setting [0] 1405 hex [1] 1605 hex [2] 1C05 hex [3] 1C0B hex [4] 1C17 hex [5] 1C3B hex [6] 0002 1C15 hex [7] 0004 1C2B hex Description: Sets the bit timing for the C_CAN controller to the associated and selected bit rate (p8622). Bits are distributed to the following parameters of the C_CAN controller in p8623[0...7]: Bit 0 ... 5: BRP (Baud Rate Prescaler) Bit 6 ... 7: SJW (Synchronization Jump Width) Bit 8 ... 11: TSEG1 (Time Segment 1, before the sampling point) Bit 12 ... 14: TSEG2 (Time Segment 2, after the sampling point) Bit 15: Reserved Bit 16 ... 19: BRPE (Baud Rate Prescaler Extension) Bit 20 ... 31: Reserved Example: Bit rate = 20 kbit/s --> p8622 = 6 --> associated bit timing is in p8623[6] --> 0001 2FB6 Recommend.: Use the factory setting when setting the bit timing. Index: [0] = 1 Mbit/s [1] = 800 kbit/s [2] = 500 kbit/s [3] = 250 kbit/s [4] = 125 kbit/s [5] = 50 kbit/s [6] = 20 kbit/s [7] = 10 kbit/s Dependency: Refer to: p8622 Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. 1-728 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8630[0...2] CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: CAN virtual objects / Virtual objects Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Sets the drive object selection (index 0), the sub-index area (index 1) and the parameter area (index 2) when using virtual objects. This means that it is possible to access all SINAMICS parameters via CAN. Index 0 (drive object number): 0: Not possible to access virtual CANopen objects 1: Device 2 ... 65535: drive object number of drive 1 ... 8 Index 1 (sub-index area): 0: 0 ... 255 1: 256 ... 511 2: 512 ... 767 3: 768 ... 1023 Index 2 (parameter area): 0: 1 ... 9999 1: 10000 ... 19999 2: 20000 ... 29999 3: 30000 ... 39999 Index: [0] = Drive object number [1] = Sub-index range [2] = Parameter range p8641 CAN Abort Connection Option Code / Abort con opt code VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 3 Description: Sets the drive behavior if a CAN communication error occurs. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Dependency: Refer to: F08700 No response OFF1 OFF2 OFF3 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-729 Parameters List of parameters r8680[0...36] CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) CAN Diagnosis Hardware / Diagnostics HW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the register of the CAN controller C_CAN: Index: [0] = Control register [1] = Status register [2] = Error counter [3] = Bit timing register [4] = Interrupt register [5] = Test register [6] = Baud rate prescaler extension register [7] = Interface 1 command request register [8] = Interface 1 command mask register [9] = Interface 1 mask 1 register [10] = Interface 1 mask 2 register [11] = Interface 1 arbitration 1 register [12] = Interface 1 arbitration 2 register [13] = Interface 1 message control register [14] = Interface 1 data A1 register [15] = Interface 1 data A2 register [16] = Interface 1 data B1 register [17] = Interface 1 data B2 register [18] = Interface 2 command request register [19] = Interface 2 command mask register [20] = Interface 2 mask 1 register [21] = Interface 2 mask 2 register [22] = Interface 2 arbitration 1 register [23] = Interface 2 arbitration 2 register [24] = Interface 2 message control register [25] = Interface 2 data A1 register [26] = Interface 2 data A2 register [27] = Interface 2 data B1 register [28] = Interface 2 data B2 register [29] = Transmission request 1 register [30] = Transmission request 2 register [31] = New data 1 register [32] = New data 2 register [33] = Interrupt pending 1 register [34] = Interrupt pending 2 register [35] = Message valid 1 register [36] = Message valid 2 register Note: A description of the individual registers of the C_CAN controller can be taken from "C_CAN User's Manual". Register, Message Interface Register and Message Handler Register - referred to the CAN protocol. 1-730 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8684 CAN NMT state after booting / NMT state aft boot CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 4 Max 127 Factory setting 127 Description: Sets the CANopen NMT state that is effective after booting. Value: 4: 5: 127: Dependency: Refer to: p8685 Note: Booting in the NMT state pre-operational corresponds to the CANopen standard p8685 CAN NMT states / NMT states CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Stopped Operational Pre-operational Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 129 Factory setting 127 Description: Sets and displays the CANopen NMT state. Value: 0: 4: 5: 127: 128: 129: Note: The value 0 (initialization) is only displayed and cannot be set. p8699 CAN: RPDO monitoring time / RPDO t_monit CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Description: Initializing Stopped Operational Pre-operational Reset node Reset Communication Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 65535000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the CAN bus. A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (p8848) is rounded-off. If no process data is received within this time, fault F08702 is output. Dependency: Refer to: p8848 Refer to: F08702 Note: 0: The monitoring is de-activated. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-731 Parameters List of parameters p8700[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 1 / Receive PDO 1 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 8000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] 8000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 1 (RPDO 1). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1400 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8701[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 2 / Receive PDO 2 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 8000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] 8000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 2 (RPDO 2). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1401 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8702[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 3 / Receive PDO 3 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 8000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] 8000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 3 (RPDO 3). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1402 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object 1-732 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8703[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 4 / Receive PDO 4 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 8000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] 8000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 4 (RPDO 4). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1403 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8704[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 5 / Receive PDO 5 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 8000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] 8000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 5 (RPDO 5). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1404 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8705[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 6 / Receive PDO 6 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 8000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] 8000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 6 (RPDO 6). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1405 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-733 Parameters List of parameters p8706[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 7 / Receive PDO 7 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 8000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] 8000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 7 (RPDO 7). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1406 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8707[0...1] CAN Receive PDO 8 / Receive PDO 8 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 8000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] 8000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 8 (RPDO 8). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1407 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8710[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Receive Mapping for RPDO 1 / Mapping RPDO 1 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 1 (RPDO 1). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1600 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. 1-734 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8711[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Receive Mapping for RPDO 2 / Mapping RPDO 2 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 2 (RPDO 2). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1601 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. p8712[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Receive Mapping for RPDO 3 / Mapping RPDO 3 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 3 (RPDO 3). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1602 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. p8713[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Receive Mapping for RPDO 4 / Mapping RPDO 4 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 4 (RPDO 4). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1603 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-735 Parameters List of parameters p8714[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Receive Mapping for RPDO 5 / Mapping RPDO 5 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 5 (RPDO 5). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1604 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. p8715[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Receive Mapping for RPDO 6 / Mapping RPDO 6 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 6 (RPDO 6). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1605 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. p8716[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Receive Mapping for RPDO 7 / Mapping RPDO 7 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 7 (RPDO 7). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1606 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. 1-736 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8717[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Receive Mapping for RPDO 8 / Mapping RPDO 8 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 8 (RPDO 8). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1607 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. p8720[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 1 / Transmit PDO 1 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max C000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] C000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex [2] 0000 hex [3] 0000 hex [4] 0000 hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 1 (TPDO 1). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type [2] = Inhibit time (in 100 s) [3] = Reserved [4] = Event timer (in ms) Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply: A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1800 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8721[0...4] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit PDO 2 / Transmit PDO 2 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max C000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] C000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex [2] 0000 hex [3] 0000 hex [4] 0000 hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 2 (TPDO 2). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-737 Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type [2] = Inhibit time (in 100 s) [3] = Reserved [4] = Event timer (in ms) Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply: A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1801 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8722[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 3 / Transmit PDO 3 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max C000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] C000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex [2] 0000 hex [3] 0000 hex [4] 0000 hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 3 (TPDO 3). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type [2] = Inhibit time (in 100 s) [3] = Reserved [4] = Event timer (in ms) Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply: A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1802 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8723[0...4] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit PDO 4 / Transmit PDO 4 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max C000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] C000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex [2] 0000 hex [3] 0000 hex [4] 0000 hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 4 (TPDO 4). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type [2] = Inhibit time (in 100 s) [3] = Reserved [4] = Event timer (in ms) 1-738 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply: A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1803 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8724[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 5 / Transmit PDO 5 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max C000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] C000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex [2] 0000 hex [3] 0000 hex [4] 0000 hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 5 (TPDO 5). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type [2] = Inhibit time (in 100 s) [3] = Reserved [4] = Event timer (in ms) Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply: A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1804 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8725[0...4] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit PDO 6 / Transmit PDO 6 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max C000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] C000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex [2] 0000 hex [3] 0000 hex [4] 0000 hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 6 (TPDO 6). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type [2] = Inhibit time (in 100 s) [3] = Reserved [4] = Event timer (in ms) Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply: A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-739 Parameters List of parameters Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1805 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8726[0...4] CAN Transmit PDO 7 / Transmit PDO 7 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max C000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] C000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex [2] 0000 hex [3] 0000 hex [4] 0000 hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 7 (TPDO 7). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type [2] = Inhibit time (in 100 s) [3] = Reserved [4] = Event timer (in ms) Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply: A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1806 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object p8727[0...4] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit PDO 8 / Transmit PDO 8 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max C000 06DF hex Factory setting [0] C000 06DF hex [1] 00FE hex [2] 0000 hex [3] 0000 hex [4] 0000 hex Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 8 (TPDO 8). Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID [1] = PDO transmission type [2] = Inhibit time (in 100 s) [3] = Reserved [4] = Event timer (in ms) Dependency: A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Refer to: p8740, p8741 Notice: For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply: A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1807 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object 1-740 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8730[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 1 / Mapping TPDO 1 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 1 (TPDO 1). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A00 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. p8731[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 2 / Mapping TPDO 2 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 2 (TPDO 2). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A01 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. p8732[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 3 / Mapping TPDO 3 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 3 (TPDO 3). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A02 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. p8733[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) Description: CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 4 / Mapping TPDO 4 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 4 (TPDO 4). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-741 Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A03 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. p8734[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 5 / Mapping TPDO 5 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 5 (TPDO 5). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A04 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. p8735[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 6 / Mapping TPDO 6 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 6 (TPDO 6). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A05 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. p8736[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 7 / Mapping TPDO 7 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 7 (TPDO 7). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A06 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. 1-742 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8737[0...3] VECTOR_G (CAN) CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 8 / Mapping TPDO 8 Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 8 (TPDO 8). Index: [0] = Mapped object 1 [1] = Mapped object 2 [2] = Mapped object 3 [3] = Mapped object 4 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A07 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. p8740[0...23] CAN channel distribution / Chann assign. CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the number of channels for receive PDOs and Transmit PDOs. To define the number of channels of a drive, there are 3 indices (3 * n indices, n = 8). Index 0: Number of channels for receive PDOs (1st drive) Index 1: Number of channels for transmit PDOs (1st drive) Index 2: Reserved Correspondingly, indices 3 to 5 are valid for the 2nd drive, etc. Index: [0] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 1) [1] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 1) [2] = Reserved [3] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 2) [4] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 2) [5] = Reserved [6] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 3) [7] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 3) [8] = Reserved [9] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 4) [10] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 4) [11] = Reserved [12] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 5) [13] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 5) [14] = Reserved [15] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 6) [16] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 6) [17] = Reserved [18] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 7) [19] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 7) [20] = Reserved [21] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 8) [22] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 8) [23] = Reserved Dependency: Refer to: p8741 Note: Channel assignment not yet in effect. To acknowledge set p8741 = 1. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-743 Parameters List of parameters p8741 CAN PDO configuration acknowledgement / PDO config ackn CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Acknowledges the channel distribution selection made (p8740) and the setting of the predefined connection sets (p8744). Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p8740, p8744 r8742 CAN number of free RPDO channels / Qty free RPDO CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) Inactive Acknowledge configuration Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the RPDO channels that are still available. Dependency: Refer to: p8741 Note: The display is updated after acknowledging the configuration (p8741 = 1). Only the RPDO channels in p8740 for which an axis is present in the topology are detected! RPDO: Receive Process Data Object r8743[0...7] CU_G130_DP (CAN), CU_G130_PN (CAN), CU_G150_DP (CAN), CU_G150_PN (CAN) CAN assignment drive/drive ID / Drive ID Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the drive ID associated with each drive. Index: [0] = Drive ID for 1st drive [1] = Drive ID for 2nd drive [2] = Drive ID for 3rd drive [3] = Drive ID for 4th drive [4] = Drive ID for 5th drive [5] = Drive ID for 6th drive [6] = Drive ID for 7th drive [7] = Drive ID for 8th drive 1-744 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8744 CAN PDO mapping configuration / PDO Mapping conf. VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C2, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 9204, 9206, 9208, 9210 P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 2 Description: Selector switch for the PDO mapping. Value: 1: 2: Sets the mapping for download or in the online mode after acknowledging with p8741. Predefined Connection Set Free PDO Mapping r8750[0...15] CAN mapped 16-bit receive objects / RPDO 16 mapped VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the mapped 16-bit receive CANopen objects in the process data buffer. Example: If, e.g. the control word is mapped in an RPDO, then r8750 indicates the position of the control word in the process data buffer. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 r8751[0...15] CAN mapped 16-bit transmit objects / TPDO 16 mapped VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays mapped 16-bit transmit CANopen objects in the process data buffer. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-745 Parameters List of parameters [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 Dependency: Refer to: r8750 r8760[0...14] CAN mapped 32-bit receive objects / RPDO 32 mapped VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the mapped 32-bit receive CANopen objects in the process data buffer. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 r8761[0...14] CAN mapped 32-bit transmit objects / TPDO 32 mapped VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays mapped 32-bit transmit CANopen objects in the process data buffer. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 1-746 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r8784 CO: CAN status word / Status word VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 8010 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the CANopen status word. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 15 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 6041 hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Signal name Rdy for switch on Ready Operation enabled Fault present No coasting active No Quick Stop active Switching on inhibited active Alarm present Can be freely interconnected (BI: p8785) Control request Target reached Torque limit reached Velocity equal to zero Can be freely interconnected (BI: p8786) Can be freely interconnected (BI: p8787) 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes High Yes Yes Yes Yes High High 0 signal No No No No No No No No Low No No No No Low Low FP - Re bit 10: When the ramp-function generator is activated, the interconnection from CI: p2151 = r1119 can be changed, so that to evaluate bit 10, the setpoint can be retrieved (taken) from in front of the ramp-function generator. Re bit 10, 12: When braking, the two bits must indicate the same state. This is the reason that the following parameters must be set the same: p2161 (speed threshold value 3, for r2199.0) = p2163 (speed threshold value 4, for r2197.7) p2150 (hysteresis speed 3, for r2199.0) = p2164 (hysteresis speed 4, for r2197.7) p8785 BI: CAN status word bit 8 / Status word bit 8 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Binector input for CANopen status word bit 8. Dependency: Refer to: r8784 p8786 BI: CAN status word bit 14 / Status word bit 14 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Binector input for CANopen status word bit 14. Dependency: Refer to: r8784 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-747 Parameters List of parameters p8787 BI: CAN status word bit 15 / Status word bit 15 VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Binector input for CANopen status word bit 15. Dependency: Refer to: r8784 p8790 CAN control word - auto interconnection / STW interc auto VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: C1(3), T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the automatic BICO interconnection of the CANopen control word. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: r2050, r2090, r2091, r2092, r2093, r8750, r8795, r8850, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893 Note: The following BICO interconnections are automatically established if the CANopen control word is mapped at one of the locations x = 0 ... 3 in the receive process data buffer. No interconn Interconnection For SINAMICS S120 with CBC10, the PZD interface IF2 is used: BI: p0840.0 = r889x.0 BI: p0844.0 = r889x.1 BI: p0848.0 = r889x.2 BI: p0852.0 = r889x.3 BI: p2103.0 = r889x.7 For SINAMICS S110, the PZD interface IF1 is used: BI: p0840.0 = r209x.0 BI: p0844.0 = r209x.1 BI: p0848.0 = r209x.2 BI: p0852.0 = r209x.3 BI: p2103.0 = r209x.7 The write access is rejected if a CANopen control word is not mapped at one of these locations. This also causes the project download of the commissioning software to be canceled. r8795 CAN control word / Control word VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Access to the CANopen control word using SDO transfer. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 07 11 1-748 Signal name ON/OFF1 Do not activate coast down Do not activate a Quick Stop Operation enable Acknowledge fault Freely interconn 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes High 0 signal No No No No No Low FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 12 13 14 15 Freely interconn Freely interconn Freely interconn Freely interconn High High High High Low Low Low Low Dependency: Refer to: p8790 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 6040 hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). r8796 CAN Target Velocity / Target velocity VECTOR_G (CAN) Description: - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Access to the CANopen object target velocity using the SDO transfer. The value is displayed in increments/second as standard. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 60FF hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The displayed value is calculated as follows: r8796 = n_set [RPM] / 60 s * p0408 * 2^p0418 * p8798[1] / p8798[0] r8797 CAN Target Torque / Target torque VECTOR_G (CAN) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Access to the CANopen object target torque using SDO transfer. The value is displayed as per mille (1/1000) as standard. Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 6071 hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The displayed value is calculated as follows: r8797 [per mille] = M_set [Nm] / p0333 [Nm] * 1000 p8798[0...1] CAN speed conversion factor / n_conv_factor VECTOR_G (CAN) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 1 Description: The factor converts the required velocity units into the internal velocity units (U/s). With the factory setting, for CANopen, the velocity units are increments/second. The parameter corresponds to the CANopen object 6094 hex. The internal velocity is calculated as follows: n_set_internal = object 6094.1 / object 6094.2 * 1/(p0408 * 2^p0418) * n_set_bus Index: [0] = Counter [1] = Denominator (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-749 Parameters List of parameters p8811 SINAMICS Link project selection / SINAMICS Link proj CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 16 Max 64 Factory setting 64 Description: Project selection for SINAMICS Link. Value: 16: 64: Note: SINAMICS Link requires that the appropriate CBE20 firmware version is selected (p8835 = 3). SINAMICS Link project 16 participants SINAMICS Link project 64 participants The parameter must be set the same for all participants. A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8812[0...1] CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) SINAMICS Link settings / SINAMICS Link cl c Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2000 Factory setting [0] 1 [1] 2000 Description: Sets the clock cycle for SINAMICS Link. Re index 0: 0 = clock synchronous mode not activated, 1 = clock synchronous mode activated Re index 1: Possible values: 500, 1000, 2000 s Index: [0] = Activate isochronous mode [1] = Bus CC [s] Dependency: Refer to: p8811 Note: SINAMICS Link requires that the appropriate CBE20 firmware version is selected (p8835 = 3). A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. Re index 0: Is applicable for the synchronization of the application. The SINAMICS Link itself is always synchronous. Re index 1: The value must be set the same for all participants. When newly selecting the project p8811, p8812[1] is set to the factory setting. For p8811 = 16, the following applies: Min/max/factory setting: 500/500/500 s For p8811 = 64, the following applies: Min/max/factory setting: 1000/2000/2000 s 1-750 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8815[0...1] IF1/IF2 PZD functionality selection / IF1/IF2 PZD fct CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Selects the PZD interface for the clock cycle synchronization functionality and PROFIsafe. Value: 1: 2: Index: [0] = Isochronous mode [1] = PROFIsafe Dependency: Refer to: p8839 Note: A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset or project download. Interface 1 (IF1) Interface 2 (IF2) Example: p8815[0] = 1: IF1 supports the isochronous mode. p8815[1] = 2: IF2 supports PROFIsafe. p8829 CBE20 remote controller number / CBE20 rem ctrl num CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Description: Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Sets the number of remote controllers expected for PROFINET CBE20. The "Shared Device" functionality is activated with a value = 2. The drive is being accessed by two PROFINET controllers simultaneously: - automation controller (SIMOTION or SIMATIC A-CPU). - safety controller (SIMATIC F-CPU). Value: 1: 2: Automation or Safety Automation and Safety Notice: The F CPU may only use PROFIsafe telegrams. The A CPU must be connected to enable the F CPU to gain access. Set the value = 1 to commission the F CPU individually. Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. p8835 CBE20 firmware selection / CBE20 FW sel CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 99 Factory setting 1 Description: Selects the firmware version for the CBE20. Value: 1: 2: PROFINET Device PN gate (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-751 Parameters List of parameters 3: 4: 99: Note: SINAMICS Link Ethernet/IP Customer-specific from the OEM directory A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. CBE20: Communication Board Ethernet 20 p8836 SINAMICS Link address / SINAMICS Link add CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Description: Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 64 Factory setting 0 Selects the node address for the SINAMICS Link on the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). p8836 = 0: SINAMICS Link de-activated p8836 = 1 ... 64: SINAMICS Link node address Dependency: Refer to: p8835 Note: SINAMICS Link requires that the appropriate CBE20 firmware version is selected (p8835 = 3). A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8837 IF2 STW1.10 = 0 mode / IF2 STW1.10=0 B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the processing mode for PROFIdrive STW1.10 "master control by PLC". Generally, control world 1 is received with the first receive word (PZD1) (this is in conformance to the PROFIdrive profile). The behavior of STW1.10 = 0 corresponds to that of the PROFIdrive profile. For other applications that deviate from this, the behavior can be adapted using this particular parameter. Value: 0: 1: 2: Freeze setpoints and continue to process sign-of-life Freeze setpoints and sign-of-life Do not freeze setpoints Recommend.: Do not change the setting p2037 = 0. Note: If the STW1 is not transferred according to the PROFIdrive with PZD1 (with bit 10 "master control by PLC"), then p2037 should be set to 2. p8839[0...1] PZD interface hardware assignment / PZD IF HW assign CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 99 Factory setting 99 Description: Assignment of the hardware for cyclic communications via PZD interface 1 (IF1) and interface 2 (IF2). Value: 0: 1: 2: 99: 1-752 Inactive Control Unit onboard COMM BOARD Automatic (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Interface 1 [1] = Interface 2 Dependency: Refer to: p2030, p8815 Note: For value = 99 (automatic) the following applies: - if a COMM BOARD is not inserted, then the onboard interface (PROFIBUS/PROFINET/USS) communicates via IF1. - if a CBE20 is inserted, then the following applies: -- CU320-2 DP: PROFINET CBE20 communicates via IF1 and PROFIBUS/USS via IF2. -- CU320-2 PN: PROFINET onboard communicates via IF1 and PROFINET CBE20 via IF2. - CAN CBC10 always communicates via IF2. For a value not equal to 99 (automatic) the following applies: - both indices must be set to a number not equal to 99 (automatic). A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset or download. p8840 COMM BOARD monitoring time / CB t_monit CU_G130_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [ms] Max 65535000 [ms] Factory setting 20 [ms] Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via COMM BOARD. If, during this time, the Control Unit does not receive any process data from the COMM BOARD, then an appropriate message is output. Dependency: Refer to: F08501 Note: This monitoring function only monitors the connection between the Control Unit and COMM BOARD and not the data traffic on the fieldbus. Value = 0: Monitoring is de-activated. p8841[0...239] COMM BOARD send configuration data / CB s config_dat CU_G130_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the send configuration data for the COMM BOARD. The setting is activated with p8842. Dependency: Refer to: p8842 Note: The configuration data are specific to the inserted COMM BOARD. For CBE20, the configuration data are not relevant. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-753 Parameters List of parameters p8842 Activate COMM BOARD send configuration / CB s config act CU_G130_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Activate a modified send configuration for COMM BOARD. With p8842 = 1, the values in p8841 are transferred to the COMM BOARD and activated. After this, p8842 is automatically set to zero. Dependency: Refer to: p8841 Note: For CBE20, certain SINAMICS parameters are newly evaluated and activated. An existing, cyclic bus connection is interrupted. r8843.0...2 BO: IF2 PZD state / IF2 PZD state CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIdrive PZD state. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Dependency: Refer to: p2044 Note: When using the "setpoint failure" signal, the bus can be monitored and an application-specific response triggered when the setpoint fails. p8844 IF2 fault delay / IF2 F delay B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2410 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [s] Max 100 [s] Factory setting 0 [s] Description: Signal name Setpoint failure Clock cycle synchronous operation active Fieldbus oper 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Sets the delay time to initiate fault F01910 after a setpoint failure. The time until the fault is initiated can be used by the application. This means that is is possible to respond to the failure while the drive is still operational (e.g. emergency retraction). Dependency: Refer to: r2043 Refer to: F01910 1-754 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8848 IF2 PZD sampling time / IF2 PZD t_sample CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.00 [ms] Max 16.00 [ms] Factory setting 4.00 [ms] Description: Sets the sampling time for the cyclic interface 2 (IF2). Note: The system only permits certain sampling times and after writing to this parameter, displays the value that has actually been set. For clock cycle synchronous operation, the specified bus cycle time applies (Tdp). r8849[0...139] CU_G130_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET) COMM BOARD receive configuration data / CB r config_dat Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the receive configuration data for the COMM BOARD. r8850[0...9] CO: IF2 PZD receive word / IF2 PZD recv word B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2491 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Note: IF2: Interface 2 PZD1 to PZD2 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8891. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-755 Parameters List of parameters r8850[0...19] CO: IF2 PZD receive word / IF2 PZD recv word CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2491 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 Note: IF2: Interface 2 PZD1 to PZD2 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8891. r8850[0...3] ENC CO: IF2 PZD receive word / IF2 PZD recv word Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 Dependency: Refer to: r8860, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893 Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types. Note: IF2: Interface 2 A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r8850 or r8860. PZD1 to PZD4 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8893. 1-756 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r8850[0...4] CO: IF2 PZD receive word / IF2 PZD recv word TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2491 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Note: IF2: Interface 2 PZD1 to PZD2 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8891. r8850[0...31] VECTOR_G CO: IF2 PZD receive word / IF2 PZD recv word Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Dependency: Refer to: r8860, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-757 Parameters List of parameters Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types. Note: IF2: Interface 2 A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r8850 or r8860. PZD1 to PZD4 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8893. p8851[0...9] B_INF CI: IF2 PZD send word / IF2 PZD send word Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2493, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Note: IF2: Interface 2 p8851[0...24] CI: IF2 PZD send word / IF2 PZD send word CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2493, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 1-758 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 Note: IF2: Interface 2 p8851[0...11] CI: IF2 PZD send word / IF2 PZD send word ENC Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2487, 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 Dependency: Refer to: p8861 Note: IF2: Interface 2 p8851[0...4] CI: IF2 PZD send word / IF2 PZD send word TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2493, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Note: IF2: Interface 2 p8851[0...31] CI: IF2 PZD send word / IF2 PZD send word VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2487, 9208 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-759 Parameters List of parameters [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Dependency: Refer to: p8861 Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8853[0...9] IF2 diagnostics PZD send / IF2 diag PZD send B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2493 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 1-760 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 12 13 14 15 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF - Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8853[0...24] IF2 diagnostics PZD send / IF2 diag PZD send CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2493 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note: IF2: Interface 2 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - 1-761 Parameters List of parameters r8853[0...11] ENC IF2 diagnostics PZD send / IF2 diag PZD send Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2487, 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: p8851, p8861 Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8853[0...4] IF2 diagnostics PZD send / IF2 diag PZD send Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2493 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 1-762 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8853[0...31] IF2 diagnostics PZD send / IF2 diag PZD send VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2487, 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A FP - 1-763 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Dependency: Refer to: p8851, p8861 Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8854 COMM BOARD state / CB state CU_G130_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting - Description: Status display for COMM BOARD. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 255: r8858[0...39] COMM BOARD read diagnostics channel / CB diag_chan read CU_G130_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET) Description: 1-764 FP - No initialization Fatal fault Initialization Send configuration Receive configuration Non-cyclic communication Cyclic communications but no setpoints (stop/no clock cycle) Cyclic communication Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the COMM BOARD diagnostics data. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The display depends on the COMM BOARD being used. Example for CBE20: r8858[0] = 4201 --> Siemens CBE20 r8858[1] = 1 --> firmware type = PROFINET device (see p8835) r8858[2] = x --> state of cyclic communication r8858[3] = y --> state of the IP configuration r8858[4] = 1281 --> device ID 0501 hex = SINAMICS S120/S150 r8858[5 ... 39] --> only for internal Siemens diagnostics. r8859[0...7] CU_G130_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (COMM BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (COMM BOARD, PROFINET) COMM BOARD identification Data / CB Ident_data Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the COMM BOARD identification data Index: [0] = Version interface structure [1] = Version interface driver [2] = Company (Siemens = 42) [3] = CB type [4] = Firmware version [5] = Firmware date (year) [6] = Firmware date (day/month) [7] = Firmware patch/hot fix Note: Example for CBE20: r8859[0] = 100 --> version of the interface structure V1.00 r8859[1] = 111 --> version of the interface driver V1.11 r8859[2] = 42 --> SIEMENS r8859[3] = 0 --> CBE20 r8859[4] = 1200 --> first part, firmware version V12.00 (second part, see index 7) r8859[5] = 2010 --> year 2010 r8859[6] = 2306 --> 23rd June r8859[7] = 1300 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V12.00.13.00) r8860[0...2] ENC CO: IF2 PZD receive double word / IF2 PZD recv DW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the double word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 Dependency: Refer to: r8850 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-765 Parameters List of parameters Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types. Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8860[0...30] CO: IF2 PZD receive double word / IF2 PZD recv DW A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r8850 or r8860. VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the double word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 [15] = PZD 16 + 17 [16] = PZD 17 + 18 [17] = PZD 18 + 19 [18] = PZD 19 + 20 [19] = PZD 20 + 21 [20] = PZD 21 + 22 [21] = PZD 22 + 23 [22] = PZD 23 + 24 [23] = PZD 24 + 25 [24] = PZD 25 + 26 [25] = PZD 26 + 27 [26] = PZD 27 + 28 [27] = PZD 28 + 29 [28] = PZD 29 + 30 [29] = PZD 30 + 31 [30] = PZD 31 + 32 Dependency: Refer to: r8850 Notice: Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types. A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r8850 or r8860. A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used. Note: IF2: Interface 2 1-766 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8861[0...10] ENC CI: IF2 PZD send double word / IF2 PZD send DW Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2487, 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the double word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 Dependency: Refer to: p8851 Notice: A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r8851 or r8861. Note: IF2: Interface 2 p8861[0...30] CI: IF2 PZD send double word / IF2 PZD send DW VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2487, 9208, 9210 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: 4000H Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the double word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 [15] = PZD 16 + 17 [16] = PZD 17 + 18 [17] = PZD 18 + 19 [18] = PZD 19 + 20 [19] = PZD 20 + 21 [20] = PZD 21 + 22 [21] = PZD 22 + 23 [22] = PZD 23 + 24 [23] = PZD 24 + 25 [24] = PZD 25 + 26 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-767 Parameters List of parameters [25] = PZD 26 + 27 [26] = PZD 27 + 28 [27] = PZD 28 + 29 [28] = PZD 29 + 30 [29] = PZD 30 + 31 [30] = PZD 31 + 32 Dependency: Refer to: p8851 Notice: A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r8851 or r8861. Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8863[0...10] IF2 diagnostics PZD send double word / IF2 diag send DW ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2487 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD sent via interface 2 (actual values) with double word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 1-768 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 Bit 25 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 30 31 Bit 30 Bit 31 ON ON Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used. Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8863[0...30] IF2 diagnostics PZD send double word / IF2 diag send DW VECTOR_G OFF OFF - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2487 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PZD sent via interface 2 (actual values) with double word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 [15] = PZD 16 + 17 [16] = PZD 17 + 18 [17] = PZD 18 + 19 [18] = PZD 19 + 20 [19] = PZD 20 + 21 [20] = PZD 21 + 22 [21] = PZD 22 + 23 [22] = PZD 23 + 24 [23] = PZD 24 + 25 [24] = PZD 25 + 26 [25] = PZD 26 + 27 [26] = PZD 27 + 28 [27] = PZD 28 + 29 [28] = PZD 29 + 30 [29] = PZD 30 + 31 [30] = PZD 31 + 32 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - 1-769 Parameters List of parameters 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 Bit 25 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 Bit 30 Bit 31 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used. Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8867[0...1] IF2 PZD maximum interconnected / IF2 PZDmaxIntercon B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - - Display for the maximum interconnected PZD in the receive/send direction Index 0: receive (r8850, r8860) Index 1: send (p8851, p8861) p8870[0...15] SINAMICS Link receive telegram word PZD / Recv link word B_INF (PROFINET), CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET), ENC (PROFINET), TB30 (PROFINET), TM150 (PROFINET), TM31 (PROFINET), VECTOR_G (PROFINET) Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 0 Description: Assignment of a PZD to a telegram word from a SINAMICS Link receive telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 PZD p2050[index] is assigned by means of p8870[index], p8872[index]. 1-770 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 Dependency: Refer to: p8872 Note: Value range: 0: Not used 1 ... 16: Telegram word A pair of values p8870[index], p8872[index] may only be used once in single a device. A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset, project download or p8842 = 1. p8871[0...15] B_INF (PROFINET), CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET), ENC (PROFINET), TB30 (PROFINET), TM150 (PROFINET), TM31 (PROFINET), VECTOR_G (PROFINET) Description: SINAMICS Link send telegram word PZD / Send link word Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 0 Assigns a PZD to a telegram word in the SINAMICS Link send telegram. p8871[index] assigns PZD p2051[index]. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p8851 Refer to: A50002 Note: Value range: 0: Not used 1 ... 16: Send telegram word (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-771 Parameters List of parameters A specific telegram word send may only be used once within a single device. A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset, project download or p8842 = 1. p8872[0...15] B_INF (PROFINET), CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET), ENC (PROFINET), TB30 (PROFINET), TM150 (PROFINET), TM31 (PROFINET), VECTOR_G (PROFINET) SINAMICS Link address receive PZD / Link addr recv Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 64 Factory setting 0 Description: Selects the address of the SINAMICS Link sender from which the process data (PZD) is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 Dependency: Refer to: p8870 Note: Value range: 0: Not used 1 ... 64: Address A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset, project download or p8842 = 1. r8874[0...9] IF2 diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF2 diag addr recv B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 1-772 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 r8874[0...19] IF2 diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF2 diag addr recv CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 r8874[0...3] IF2 diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF2 diag addr recv ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 Note: IF2: Interface 2 Value range: 0 - 125: Bus address of the sender 255: Not assigned (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-773 Parameters List of parameters r8874[0...4] IF2 diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF2 diag addr recv TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 r8874[0...31] IF2 diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF2 diag addr recv VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Note: IF2: Interface 2 Value range: 0 - 125: Bus address of the sender 255: Not assigned 1-774 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r8875[0...9] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF diag offs recv B_INF Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 r8875[0...19] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF diag offs recv CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 r8875[0...3] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF diag offs recv ENC Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-775 Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 Note: IF2: Interface 2 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 255: Not assigned r8875[0...4] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF diag offs recv TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 r8875[0...31] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF diag offs recv VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 1-776 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Note: IF2: Interface 2 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 255: Not assigned r8876[0...9] B_INF IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF2 diag offs send Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 r8876[0...24] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF2 diag offs send CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-777 Parameters List of parameters [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 r8876[0...11] ENC IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF2 diag offs send Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 Note: IF2: Interface 2 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 255: Not assigned r8876[0...4] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF2 diag offs send TB30, TM150, TM31 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 r8876[0...31] IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF2 diag offs send VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 1-778 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 [28] = PZD 29 [29] = PZD 30 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Note: IF2: Interface 2 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 255: Not assigned p8880[0...15] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Description: BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2489 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Selects bits to be sent via interface 2. The individual bits are combined to form status word 1. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-779 Parameters List of parameters p8881[0...15] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Description: BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 2 / Bin/con ZSW2 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2489 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Selects bits to be sent via interface 2. The individual bits are combined to form status word 2. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889 p8882[0...15] BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 3 / Bin/con ZSW3 B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2489 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Selects bits to be sent via interface 2. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889 1-780 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8883[0...15] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Description: BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 4 / Bin/con ZSW4 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2489 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Selects bits to be sent via interface 2. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 4. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889 p8884[0...15] BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 5 / Bin/con ZSW5 B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2489 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Selects bits to be sent via interface 2. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 5. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p8888, r8889 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-781 Parameters List of parameters p8888[0...4] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G IF2 invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2489 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter. Index: [0] = Status word 1 [1] = Status word 2 [2] = Free status word 3 [3] = Free status word 4 [4] = Free status word 5 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: p8880, p8881, p8882, p8883, p8884, r8889 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted r8889[0...4] CO: IF2 send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word. Index: [0] = Status word 1 [1] = Status word 2 [2] = Free status word 3 [3] = Free status word 4 [4] = Free status word 5 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 1-782 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Dependency: Refer to: p8851, p8880, p8881, p8882, p8883, p8884, p8888 Note: r8889 together with p8880 to p8884 forms five binector-connector converters. r8890.0...15 BO: IF2 PZD1 receive bit-serial / IF2 PZD1 recv bitw B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 2491, 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received via interface 2. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: r8850 Note: IF2: Interface 2 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - r8891.0...15 BO: IF2 PZD2 receive bit-serial / IF2 PZD2 recv bitw B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 2491, 9204, 9206 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received via interface 2. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - 1-783 Parameters List of parameters 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Dependency: Refer to: r8850 Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8892.0...15 BO: IF2 PZD3 receive bit-serial / IF2 PZD3 recv bitw CU_G130_DP, Can be changed: CU_G130_PN, Data type: Unsigned16 CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, P-Group: Communications VECTOR_G Not for motor type: Min - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Func. diagram: 2485, 9204, 9206 Units group: - Unit selection: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Max - Factory setting - Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received via interface 2. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: r8850 Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8893.0...15 BO: IF2 PZD4 receive bit-serial / IF2 PZD4 recv bitw Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Min - 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Calculated: - Access level: 3 Func. diagram: 2485, 9204, 9206 Units group: - Unit selection: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Max - Factory setting - Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received via interface 2. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 1-784 FP - Dynamic index: - Description: Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 - Dynamic index: - Description: CU_G130_DP, Can be changed: CU_G130_PN, Data type: Unsigned16 CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, P-Group: Communications VECTOR_G Not for motor type: - OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Dependency: Refer to: r8850 Note: IF2: Interface 2 r8894.0...15 BO: IF2 connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Description: - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 2491 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received via interface 2. The PZD is selected via p8899[0]. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Refer to: p8899 r8895.0...15 BO: IF2 connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Description: Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 2491 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received via interface 2. The PZD is selected via p8899[1]. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 1 signal ON ON ON ON (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF FP - 1-785 Parameters List of parameters 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF - Refer to: p8898, p8899 p8898[0...1] IF2 invert connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 2491 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter. Using p8898[0], the signals of CI: p8899[0] are influenced. Using p8898[1], the signals of CI: p8899[1] are influenced. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: r8894, r8895, p8899 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted FP - p8899[0...1] CI: IF2 connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2485, 2491 P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter. A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on (interconnection). Dependency: 1-786 Refer to: r8850, r8894, r8895, p8898 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted. p8899[0...1] together with r8894.0...15 and r8895.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters: Connector input p8899[0] to binector output in r8894.0...15 Connector input p8899[1] to binector output in r8895.0...15 p8900[0...239] IE Name of Station / IE Name Stat CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the station name for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. The active station name is displayed in r8910. Dependency: Refer to: p8905, r8910 Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. IE: Industrial Ethernet p8901[0...3] IE IP Address of Station / IE IP of Stat CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the IP address for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. The active IP address is displayed in r8911. Dependency: Refer to: p8905, r8911 Note: The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8902[0...3] IE Default Gateway of Station / IE Def Gateway CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the default gateway for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. The active default gateway is displayed in r8912. Dependency: Refer to: p8905, r8912 Note: The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-787 Parameters List of parameters p8903[0...3] IE Subnet Mask of Station / IE Subnet Mask CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the subnet mask for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. The active subnet mask is displayed in r8913. Dependency: Refer to: p8905, r8913 Note: The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8904 IE DHCP mode / IE DHCP mode CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the DHCP mode for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. Note: The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. If value = 0: DHCP deactivated. If value = 2: DHCP activated. Re value = 1, 3: Reserved. p8905 IE Interface configuration / IE IF config CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to activate the interface configuration for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. p8905 is automatically set to 0 at the end of an operation. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: No function Activate configuration Activate and save configuration Delete configuration Dependency: Refer to: p8900, p8901, p8902, p8903 Refer to: A08561 Note: Re p8905 = 1: The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated. Re p8905 = 2: The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated and saved to non-volatile memory. Re p8905 = 3: The interface configuration is reset to the factory setting at all points. The factory settings for the interface configuration are loaded on activation (p8905 = 1) or at the next POWER ON. 1-788 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8908 Activate FTP / Act FTP CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Activation of the FTP server. Permits the FTP access to the /INSTALL/SINAMICS directory of the memory card. Value: 0: 1: No Yes Note: Activation of the FTP server becomes effective immediately. Deactivation only becomes effective after POWER ON of the Control Unit. Before commissioning the system for the first time, the FTP server is activated independent of the parameter setting. r8909 PN device ID / PN device ID CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFINET Device ID. Every SINAMICS device type has its own PROFINET Device ID and its own PROFINET GSD. Note: List of the SINAMICS Device IDs: 0501 hex: S120/S150 0504 hex: G130/G150 0505 hex: GM150 0509 hex: GL150 050A hex: DC MASTER 050B hex: SL150 050C hex: SM120 050E hex: S110 050F hex: G120P 0510 hex: G120C 0511 hex: G120 0512 hex: G120D r8910[0...239] IE Name of Station active / IE Name Stat act CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active station name for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-789 Parameters List of parameters r8911[0...3] IE IP Address of Station active / IE IP of Stat act CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active IP address for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. r8912[0...3] IE Default Gateway of Station active / IE Def Gateway act CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active default gateway for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. r8913[0...3] IE Subnet Mask of Station active / IE Subnet Mask act CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active subnet mask for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. r8914 IE DHCP mode of station active / IE DHCP mode act CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active DHCP mode for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. r8915[0...5] IE MAC Address of Station / IE MAC of Station CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: 1-790 Displays the MAC address for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8920[0...239] PN Name of Station / PN Name Stat CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the station name for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. The active station name is displayed in r8930. Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. PN: PROFINET p8921[0...3] PN IP address of station / PN IP of stat CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the IP address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. The active IP address is displayed in r8931. Note: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8922[0...3] PN Default Gateway of Station / PN Def Gateway CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the default gateway for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. The active default gateway is displayed in r8932. Note: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8923[0...3] PN Subnet Mask of Station / PN Subnet Mask CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the subnet mask for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. The active subnet mask is displayed in r8933. Note: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-791 Parameters List of parameters p8925 PN interface configuration / PN IF config CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting to activate the interface configuration for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. p8925 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: No function Activate configuration Activate and save configuration Delete configuration Note: Re p8925 = 1: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated. Re p8925 = 2: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated and saved to non-volatile memory. Re p8925 = 3: Restores all memory locations for the interface configuration to the factory settings. The factory settings for the interface configuration are loaded on activation (p8925 = 1) or at the next POWER ON. p8929 PN remote controller number / PN rem ctrl num CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Communications Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of remote controllers expected for PROFINET onboard. The "Shared Device" functionality is activated with a value = 2. The drive is being accessed by two PROFINET controllers simultaneously: - automation controller (SIMOTION or SIMATIC A-CPU). - safety controller (SIMATIC F-CPU). Value: 1: 2: Notice: The F CPU may only use PROFIsafe telegrams. Note: A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset or download. r8930[0...239] PN Name of Station active / PN Name Stat act CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: 1-792 Automation or Safety Automation and Safety Displays the active station name for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r8931[0...3] PN IP Address of Station active / PN IP of Stat act CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active IP address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. r8932[0...3] PN Default Gateway of Station active / PN Def Gateway act CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active default gateway for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. r8933[0...3] PN Subnet Mask of Station active / PN Subnet Mask act CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active subnet mask for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. r8935[0...5] PN MAC Address of Station / PN MAC of Station CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the MAC address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. r8936[0...1] PN state cyclic connections / PN stat cyc conn CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 13 Factory setting - Description: Displays the state of the cyclic PROFINET connections. For two connections (Shared Device) the display in the index depends on the sequence in which the connections are established. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Interrupted Not connected Connection starts to be established Module information expected Module information received Module address expected (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-793 Parameters List of parameters 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: Module address received Parameterization data expected Parameterization data received Evaluate parameterization data Connection being established completion expected Configured controller RUN expected Configured controller STOP Configured controller RUN Dependency: Refer to: p8829 Note: If value = 10: If the connection remains in this state, then when using PROFINET IRT the following can apply: - topology error (incorrect port assignment). - synchronization missing. r8937[0...5] PN diagnostics / PN diag CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Display to diagnose the cyclic PROFINET connections. Index: [0] = Number of cyclic connections [1] = Number of send subslots of all connections [2] = Number of send net data (bytes) of all connections [3] = Number of receive subslots of all connections [4] = Number of receive net data (bytes) of all connections [5] = Connection type (RT, IRT) Dependency: Refer to: p8929 Note: Re index 5: Bit 0 = 1: there is at least one RT connection. Bit 1 = 1: there is an IRT connection. r8939 PN DAP ID / PN DAP ID CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFINET Device Access Point ID (DAP ID) for the onboard PROFINET interface. The combination of device ID (r8909) and DAP ID uniquely identifies a PROFINET access point. Note: List of the SINAMICS DAP IDs: 20005 hex: CBE20 V4.3 20006 hex: CBE20 V4.4 20007 hex: CBE20 V4.5 20106 hex: CU310-2 PN V4.4 20107 hex: CU310-2 PN V4.5 20206 hex: CU305 PN V4.4 20306 hex: CU320-2 PN V4.4 20307 hex: CU320-2 PN V4.5 20407 hex: CU230-2 PN /CU240-2PN 20507 hex: CU250-2 PN 1-794 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p8940[0...239] CBE20 Name of Station / CBE20 Name Stat CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Sets the station name for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. The parameter is only valid for firmware version "PROFINET Device" (p8835 = 1) or "Ethernet/IP" (p8835 = 4). The interface configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 2 (becomes effective after the next POWER ON). The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8941[0...3] CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) CBE20 IP Address of Station / CBE20 IP of Stat Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the IP address for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). Note: The parameter is only valid for firmware version "PROFINET Device" (p8835 = 1) or "Ethernet/IP" (p8835 = 4). The interface configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 2 (becomes effective after the next POWER ON). The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8942[0...3] CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) CBE20 Default Gateway of Station / CBE20 Def Gateway Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the default gateway for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). Note: The parameter is only valid for firmware version "PROFINET Device" (p8835 = 1) or "Ethernet/IP" (p8835 = 4). The interface configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 2 (becomes effective after the next POWER ON). The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-795 Parameters List of parameters p8943[0...3] CBE20 Subnet Mask of Station / CBE20 Subnet Mask CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the subnet mask for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). Note: The parameter is only valid for firmware version "PROFINET Device" (p8835 = 1) or "Ethernet/IP" (p8835 = 4). The interface configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 2 (becomes effective after the next POWER ON). The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8944 CBE20 DHCP Mode / CBE20 DHCP Mode CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the DHCP mode for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). Note: The parameter is only valid for firmware version "PROFINET Device" (p8835 = 1) or "Ethernet/IP" (p8835 = 4). The interface configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 2 (becomes effective after the next POWER ON). The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. p8945 CBE20 interface configuration / CBE20 IF config CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Sets the activation of the interface configuration for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). p8945 is automatically set to 0 at the end of an operation. Value: 0: 2: 3: No function Save and activate configuration Delete configuration Note: The parameter is only valid for firmware version "PROFINET Device" (p8835 = 1) or "Ethernet/IP" (p8835 = 4). Otherwise, it is locked. Re p8945 = 2: The interface configuration (p8940 and following) is saved and activated after the next POWER ON. Re p8945 = 3: The factory setting of the interface configuration is loaded after the next POWER ON. 1-796 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r8950[0...239] CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) CBE20 Name of Station active / CBE20 name act Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active station name for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). r8951[0...3] CBE20 IP Address of Station active / CBE20 IP act CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active IP address for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). r8952[0...3] CBE20 Default Gateway of Station active / CBE20 def GW act CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the active standard gateway for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). r8953[0...3] CBE20 Subnet Mask of Station active / CBE20 sub mask act CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the active subnet mask for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-797 Parameters List of parameters r8954 CBE20 DHCP Mode active / CBE20 DHCP act CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the active DHCP mode for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). r8955[0...5] CBE20 MAC Address of Station / CBE20 MAC addr CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the MAC address for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). r8959 CBE20 DAP ID / CBE20 DAP ID CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the PROFINET Device Access Point ID (DAP ID) for PROFINET CBE20. The combination of device ID (r8909) and DAP ID uniquely identifies a PROFINET access point. Note: List of the SINAMICS DAP IDs: 20005 hex: CBE20 V4.3 20006 hex: CBE20 V4.4 20106 hex: CU310-2 PN V4.4 20206 hex: CU305 PN V4.4 20306 hex: CU320-2 PN V4.4 r8960[0...2] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: 1-798 PN subslot controller assignment / PN subslot assign Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting - Displays the controller assignment of a PROFINET subslot on the actual drive object. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Index: [0] = Subslot 2 PROFIsafe [1] = Subslot 3 PZD telegram [2] = Subslot 4 PZD supplementary data Dependency: Refer to: r8961, r8962 Note: Example: If the parameter contains the value 2 in index [1], then this means that subslot 3 is assigned to controller 2. r8961[0...3] PN IP Address Remote Controller 1 / IP Addr Rem Ctrl1 CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting - Description: Displays the IP address of the first PROFINET controller connected with the device via PN onboard. r8962[0...3] PN IP Address Remote Controller 2 / IP Addr Rem Ctrl2 CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting - Description: Displays the IP address of the second PROFINET controller connected with the device via PN onboard. p8969 PROFIsafe wait for clock synchronization / PS wait sync CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting for the behavior of a PROFIsafe communication connection depending on another isochronous communication connection. Value: 0: 1: Recommend.: A value of 1 is recommended, if problems are encountered with the PROFIsafe connection when synchronizing. Note: If value = 1: No Yes A PROFIsafe connection is only accepted if an isochronous connection exists. Relevant, if PROFIsafe and isochronous operation are configured via various communication connections (e.g. PROFINET Shared Device). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-799 Parameters List of parameters r8970[0...2] CBE20 subslot controller assignment / CBE20 subslot B_INF (PROFINET), CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET), ENC (PROFINET), TB30 (PROFINET), TM150 (PROFINET), TM31 (PROFINET), VECTOR_G (PROFINET) Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 8 Factory setting - Description: Displays the controller assignment of a PROFINET subslot on the actual drive object. Index: [0] = Subslot 2 PROFIsafe [1] = Subslot 3 PZD telegram [2] = Subslot 4 PZD supplementary data Dependency: Refer to: r8971, r8972 Note: Example: If the parameter contains the value 2 in index [1], then this means that subslot 3 is assigned to controller 2. r8971[0...3] CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) CBE20 IP Address Remote Controller 1 / CBE20 IP Rem Ctrl1 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting - Description: Displays the IP address of the first PROFINET controller connected with the device via CBE20. r8972[0...3] CBE20 IP Address Remote Controller 2 / CBE20 IP Rem Ctrl2 CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN (PROFINET), CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN (PROFINET) Description: 1-800 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting - Displays the IP address of the second PROFINET controller connected with the device via CBE20. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9206[0...2] Topology direct access / Topo access CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description: Data setting to read topology properties. The result is displayed depending on the property in r9207 or r9208. Re index 0: 0: actual topology, 1: target topology Re index 1: Sets the component number of the component involved. Re index 2: 7: Name (r9208) 8: Component type (r9207) 9: Number of DRIVE-CLiQ connections (r9207) 11: Manufacturer (upper byte) and version (lower byte) (r9207) 12: Serial number (r9208) 13: Index (r9207) 15: Comparison level (r9207) 23: Order number (r9207) 24: Hardware serial number (r9208) 25: Collective order number (r9207) 28: Firmware version (r9207) 29: EPROM version (r9207) 30: Hardware version (r9207) Index: [0] = Actual topology/target topology [1] = Component number [2] = Identifier/property Dependency: Refer to: r9207, r9208 r9207 Topology direct access integer value / Topo access int CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the value for the property set in p9206. A value is only displayed for integer type properties. Dependency: Refer to: p9206, r9208 r9208[0...50] Topology direct access string / Topo access string CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the value for the property set in p9206. A value is only displayed for string type properties. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-801 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p9206, r9207 Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. p9210 Flashing component number / Flash comp_no. CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 499 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the component number for a component to get its status LED to flash. Dependency: Refer to: p9211 p9211 Flash function / Flash fct. CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1 Max 1 Factory setting -1 Description: Sets the function for the component selected in p9210. After initiating a function, the parameter is automatically reset again. Example: - Set the component number (p9210). - Select the "flashing on" function (set p9211 = 1). Value: -1: 0: 1: Select function Flashing off Flashing on Dependency: Refer to: p9210 Notice: If a task cannot be executed (e.g. the component number in p9210 does not exist), the following applies: - There is no negative feedback signal. - The value is reset anyway. p9300 SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module) / SI Mtn clock MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 500.00 [s] Max 25000.00 [s] Factory setting 12000.00 [s] Description: Sets the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring. Dependency: Refer to: p9500, p9511 Refer to: F01652 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The monitoring clock cycle must be a multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9311 or of the DP clock cycle. A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. 1-802 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9301 SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module) / SI Mtn enable MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 16 17 24 25 Dependency: Signal name Enable SOS/SLS Enable SLP Enable absolute position Enable actual value synchronization Enable SSM hysteresis and filtering Enable SDI Enable transfer SLS limit value via PROFIsafe Enable transfer safe position via PROFIsafe 1 signal Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 0 signal Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit FP 2860 2861 - Enable Inhibit - Refer to: p9501 Refer to: F01682, F01683 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SLP: Safely-Limited Position SLS: Safely-Limited Speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop SP: Safe Position SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) p9302 SI Motion axis type (Motor Module) / SI Mtn AxisType MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the axis type (linear axis or rotary axis/spindle). Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p9502 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For the commissioning software, after changing over the axis type, the units dependent on the axis type are only updated after a project upload. Linear axis Rot axis/spindle A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-803 Parameters List of parameters p9305 SI Motion SP modulo value (Motor Module) / SI mtn SP mod MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [] Max 737280 [] Factory setting 0 [] Sets the modulo value in degrees for rotary axes of the "Safe position" function. This modulo value is taken into account when safely referencing as well as when transferring the safe position via PROFIsafe when the absolute position is enabled. The modulo function is deactivated for a value = 0. Dependency: Refer to: F01681 Notice: When the "SLP" function is activated, the modulo function must be deactivated as otherwise fault F30681 will be output. If the absolute position is not enabled, then the parameterized modulo value is not taken into account. This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SLP: Safely-Limited Position SP: Safe Position p9306 SI Motion function specification (Motor Module) / SI Mtn fct_spc MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the function specification for the safe motion monitoring. Value: 0: 1: 3: Dependency: Refer to: C30711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9307 SI Motion function configuration MM / SI mtn config MM VECTOR_G Safety with encoder and accel_monitoring(SAM) / delay time Safety without encoder and braking ramp(SBR) Safety without encoder with accel_monitoring(SAM) / delay time Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the function configuration for the safe motion monitoring functions. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: Re bit 00: Signal name Extended message acknowledgement Setpoint velocity limit for STOP F Motor type sensorless actual value sensing SS1 drive-based braking response 1 signal Yes No Synchronous motor without OFF3 0 signal No Yes Induction motor with OFF3 FP - When the function is activated, a safety-relevant acknowledgement (internal event acknowledge) can be performed by selecting/deselecting STO. Re bit 01: When the function is activated, the active setpoint velocity limit (CO: r9733) is set to zero when STOP F is active. 1-804 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Re bit 02: This bit defines the type of motor, which the sensorless safety technology evaluates. For bit = 0, the sensorless motion monitoring function calculates the actual velocity for an induction motor. For bit = 1, an actual velocity is calculated for a synchronous motor. This value depends on the setting in p0300. Bit = 0 should be set if no motor is defined (p0300 = 0). Re bit 03: When the function is activated, the drive-based braking response (OFF3 ramp) after SS1/internal STOP B is deactivated. Braking monitoring (SBR, SAM) is also deactivated. p9309 SI Motion behavior during pulse suppression (Motor Module) / SI Mtn behav IL MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin Description: Sets the behavior of safety functions and their feedback during pulse suppression in encoderless operation. Bit field: Bit 00 08 Signal name SSM during pulse suppression and sensorless SDI during pulse suppression and sensorless 1 signal Becomes inactive 0 signal Remains active FP - Becomes inactive Remains active - Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Re bit 00: If the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time is too low, or there is an insufficient clearance between the SSM limit speed, and the shutdown speed, then it is possible that the "speed under limit value" signal does not change to 1, because no speed actual value below the SSM limit was able to be identified before pulse cancellation. In this case, the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time or the clearance between the SSM limit speed and shutdown speed must be increased. Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) Re bit 00: For bit = 1 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies: - During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the feedback signal has a 0 signal level. For bit = 0 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies: - Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The feedback signal last displayed before pulse suppression is kept and the system goes into the STO state. Re bit 08: For bit = 1 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies: - During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the status signal indicates inactive. For bit = 0 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies: - Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The status signal indicates active and the system goes into the STO state. p9311 SI Motion actual value sensing clock cycle (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act clk MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0000 [s] Max 25000.0000 [s] Factory setting 0.0000 [s] Sets the clock cycle time of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-805 Parameters List of parameters Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed with an encoder. - A slower clock cycle time reduces the maximum permissible velocity - however, it ensures a lower load of the Control Unit for safe actual value sensing. - The maximum permissible velocity which, when exceeded, can mean that errors occur during safe actual value sensing, is displayed in r9730. - The isochronous PROFIBUS clock cycle is used as a clock cycle time for actual value sensing with a setting of 0 ms; the setting is 1 ms if isochronous operation is not being used. Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed without an encoder: - The actual value sensing clock cycle must be set to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p0115). Dependency: Refer to: p0115, p9300, p9511 Refer to: F01652 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The parameter is only active for drive-based motion monitoring functions (p9801.2 = 1). The monitoring clock cycle from p9300 must be an integer multiple of this parameter. In the case of motion monitoring functions with encoder, the clock cycle time for actual value sensing must be an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle and at least 4 times slower than the current controller clock cycle. A factor of at least 8 is recommended. The clock cycle time of the actual value sensing should not be set to more than 8 ms. A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. p9312 Select SI Motion safety functions without selection (MM) / SI Mtn w/o sel MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0001 0000 bin Sets the safety functions without selection. The safety functions without selection are enabled with p9601.5/p9801.5. Using this parameter, the individual motion monitoring functions can then be selected (e.g. SLS, SDI positive, SDI negative), which should then be permanently selected. Bit field: Bit 04 12 13 Signal name SLS static (MM) SDI positive static (MM) SDI negative static (MM) Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9801 1 signal Statically active Statically active Statically active 0 signal Statically inact Statically inact Statically inact FP - Refer to: F01682, F30682 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: A change becomes immediately effective after exiting the safety commissioning mode. SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction). SLS: Safely-Limited Speed p9313 SI Motion non safety-relevant measuring steps POS1 (MM) / nsrPOS1 MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 22000 Sets the non safety-relevant measuring steps of position value POS1. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: 1-806 Refer to: p9513 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9314 SI Motion absolute encoder linear measuring steps (MM) / EncLinMeasStep MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [nm] Max 4294967295 [nm] Factory setting 100 [nm] Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p9514 p9315 SI Motion coarse position value configuration (Motor Module) / SI Mtn s config MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Sets the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 16 Signal name Incrementer Encoder CRC least significant byte first Redundant coarse position val. most significant bit left-aligned Binary comparison not possible DRIVE-CLiQ encoder 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Yes Yes No No - Dependency: Refer to: r0474, p9515 p9316 SI Motion encoder configuration, safety functions (Motor Module) / SI Mtn enc_cfg MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the encoder and position actual value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Bit field: Bit 00 01 Signal name Encoder rotating/linear Position actual value, sign change Dependency: Refer to: p0404, p0410, p9516 1 signal Linear Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal Rotating: No FP - 1-807 Parameters List of parameters p9317 SI Motion linear scale grid division (Motor Module) / SI Mtn grid MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [nm] Max 250000000.00 [nm] Factory setting 10000.00 [nm] Sets the grid division for a linear encoder. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0407, p9316 p9318 SI Motion encoder pulses per revolution (Motor Module) / SI Mtn p/rev MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16777215 Factory setting 2048 Sets the number of encoder pulses per revolution for rotary encoders. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0408, p9316 p9319 SI Motion fine resolution G1_XIST1 (Motor Module) / SI Mtn G1_XIST1 MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 2 Max 18 Factory setting 11 Sets the fine resolution for G1_XIST1 in bits. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0418 Refer to: F01670, F01671 Note: For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9301 = 0), the following applies: When booting, p9319 is automatically set the same as p0418. For safety functions that are enabled (p9301 > 0), the following applies: p9319 is checked for agreement with p0418. G1_XIST1: Encoder 1 position actual value 1 (PROFIdrive) p9320 SI Motion spindle pitch (Motor Module) / SI Mtn sp_pitch MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1000 [mm] Max 8388.0000 [mm] Factory setting 10.0000 [mm] Sets the gear ratio between the encoder and load in mm/revolution for a linear axis with rotary encoder. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. 1-808 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p9520 Notice: The fourth decimal point can be rounded-off depending on the size of the entered number (from 3 places before the decimal point). p9321[0...7] SI Motion gearbox encoder (motor)/load denom (Motor Module) / SI Mtn gearDenomMM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2147000000 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions) and the load. Index: [0] = Gearbox 1 [1] = Gearbox 2 [2] = Gearbox 3 [3] = Gearbox 4 [4] = Gearbox 5 [5] = Gearbox 6 [6] = Gearbox 7 [7] = Gearbox 8 Dependency: Refer to: p9322 Notice: It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active. p9322[0...7] SI Motion gearbox encoder (motor)/load numerator (Motor Module) / SI Mtn gear num MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2147000000 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions) and the load. Index: [0] = Gearbox 1 [1] = Gearbox 2 [2] = Gearbox 3 [3] = Gearbox 4 [4] = Gearbox 5 [5] = Gearbox 6 [6] = Gearbox 7 [7] = Gearbox 8 Dependency: Refer to: p9321 Notice: It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active. Note: In the case of encoderless monitoring functions, the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator of the gearbox ratio. Example: Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2 --> p9321 = 1, p9322 = 8 (4 x 2) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-809 Parameters List of parameters p9323 SI Motion red. coarse position value valid bits (Motor Module) / Valid bits MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 9 Sets the number of valid bits of the redundant coarse position value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: r0470, p9523 p9324 SI Motion redundant coarse pos. value fine resolution bits (MM) / SI Mtn fine bit MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -16 Max 16 Factory setting -2 Sets the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: r0471, p9524 p9325 SI Motion redundant coarse pos. value relevant bits (MM) / Relevant bits MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 16 Sets the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0414, r0472, p9525 p9326 SI Motion encoder assignment (Motor Module) / SI Mtn encoder MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of the encoder, which is used on the Motor Module for safe motion monitoring functions. Dependency: For the safe motion monitoring functions, the redundant safety position actual value sensing must be activated in the appropriate encoder data set (p0430.19 = 1). Refer to: p0187, p0188, p0189, p0430, p9526 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For p9326 = 1 the following applies: Motor Module uses an encoder for closed-loop speed control, it involves a 1encoder system. 1-810 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9328[0...11] VECTOR_G SI Motion Sensor Module Node Identifier (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SM Ident MM Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 00FF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the node identifier of the Sensor Module that is used by the Motor Module for the motion monitoring functions. Dependency: Refer to: r9881 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9329 SI Motion Gx_XIST1 coarse pos safe most significant bit (MM) / Gx_XIST1 MSB MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 31 Factory setting 14 Sets the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0415, r0475, p9529 Note: MSB: Most Significant Bit p9330 SI Motion standstill tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SOS Tol MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [mm] Max 100.000 [mm] Factory setting 1.000 [mm] Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Dependency: Refer to: p9530 Refer to: C01707 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop p9330 SI Motion standstill tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SOS Tol MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [] Max 100.000 [] Factory setting 1.000 [] Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Dependency: Refer to: p9530 Refer to: C01707 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-811 Parameters List of parameters p9331[0...3] SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS lim MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 1000000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 2000.00 [mm/min] Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1 [1] = Limit value SLS2 [2] = Limit value SLS3 [3] = Limit value SLP4 Dependency: Refer to: p9363, p9531 Refer to: C01714 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed p9331[0...3] SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS lim MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 1000000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2000.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1 [1] = Limit value SLS2 [2] = Limit value SLS3 [3] = Limit value SLP4 Dependency: Refer to: p9363, p9531 Refer to: C01714 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed p9334[0...1] SI Motion SLP upper limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLP uplimMM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [mm] Max 2147000.000 [mm] Factory setting 100000.000 [mm] Description: Sets the upper limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9535, p9562 Refer to: C01715 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For setting this limit value, the following applies: p9334[x] > p9335[x], x = 0, 1 A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches 1-812 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9334[0...1] SI Motion SLP upper limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLP uplimMM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [] Max 2147000.000 [] Factory setting 100000.000 [] Description: Sets the upper limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9535, p9562 Refer to: C01715 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For setting this limit value, the following applies: p9334[x] > p9335[x], x = 0, 1 A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches p9335[0...1] VECTOR_G SI Motion SLP lower limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLPlowLimMM Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [mm] Max 2147000.000 [mm] Factory setting -100000.000 [mm] Description: Sets the lower limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9534, p9562 Refer to: C01715 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For setting this limit value, the following applies: p9334[x] > p9335[x], x = 0, 1 A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches p9335[0...1] SI Motion SLP lower limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLPlowLimMM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [] Max 2147000.000 [] Factory setting -100000.000 [] Description: Sets the lower limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9534, p9562 Refer to: C01715 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For setting this limit value, the following applies: p9334[x] > p9335[x], x = 0, 1 A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-813 Parameters List of parameters p9341 SI Motion encoder comparison algorithm (Motor Module) / Enc comp algo MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 255 Sets the the comparison algorithm for the encoder position monitoring functions. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Value: 0: 10: 11: 255: Dependency: Refer to: p9541 p9342 SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Motor Module) / SI Mtn actV tol MM VECTOR_G Description: SMx20 safety algorithm DQL binary safety algorithm DQL linear non-binary safety algorithm Safety algorithm unknown Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [mm] Max 360.0000 [mm] Factory setting 0.1000 [mm] Sets the tolerance for the crosswise data comparison of the actual position between the two monitoring channels. For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary and 1 mm linear). Dependency: Refer to: p9542 Refer to: C01711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For a linear axis, the tolerance is internally limited to 10 mm. For a "linear axis with rotating motor" and standard setting of p9320, p9321 and p9322, the standard setting of p9342 corresponds to a position tolerance of 36 on the motor side. p9342 SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Motor Module) / SI Mtn actV tol MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [] Max 360.0000 [] Factory setting 0.1000 [] Sets the tolerance for the crosswise data comparison of the actual position between the two monitoring channels. For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary and 1 mm linear). Dependency: Refer to: p9542 Refer to: C01711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For a linear axis, the tolerance is internally limited to 10 mm. For a "linear axis with rotating motor" and standard setting of p9320, p9321 and p9322, the standard setting of p9342 corresponds to a position tolerance of 36 on the motor side. 1-814 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9344 SI Motion actual value comparison tolerance (referencing) (MM) / SI mtn ref tol MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0000 [mm] Max 36.0000 [mm] Factory setting 0.0100 [mm] Description: Sets the tolerance to check the actual values after referencing (incremental encoder) or when powering up (absolute encoder). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. For linear axes, the maximum value is limited to 1mm. p9344 SI Motion actual value comparison tolerance (referencing) (MM) / SI mtn ref tol MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0000 [] Max 36.0000 [] Factory setting 0.0100 [] Description: Sets the tolerance to check the actual values after referencing (incremental encoder) or when powering up (absolute encoder). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. For linear axes, the maximum value is limited to 1mm. p9345 SI Motion SSM filter time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM filt MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 100000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill. Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) p9346 SI Motion SSM velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM v_limMM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 1000000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 20.00 [mm/min] Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set. For p9368 = p9568 = 0 the value in p9346/p9546 is also applicable for the function "SAM". Dependency: Refer to: p9546 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-815 Parameters List of parameters Caution: The "SAM" function is switched out if the selected threshold value is undershot. Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) p9346 SI Motion SSM velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM v_limMM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 P-Group: Safety Integrated Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 1000000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 20.00 [rpm] Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set. For p9368 = p9568 = 0 the value in p9346/p9546 is also applicable for the function "SAM". Dependency: Refer to: p9546 Caution: The "SAM" function is switched out if the selected threshold value is undershot. Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) p9347 SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM Hyst MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [mm/min] Max 500.0000 [mm/min] Factory setting 10.0000 [mm/min] Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) p9347 SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM Hyst MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [rpm] Max 500.0000 [rpm] Factory setting 10.0000 [rpm] Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) 1-816 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9348 SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SAM tol MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 120000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 300.00 [mm/min] Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "SAM" function. Dependency: Refer to: p9548 Refer to: C01706 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) p9348 SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SAM tol MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 120000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 300.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "SAM" function. Dependency: Refer to: p9548 Refer to: C01706 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) p9349 SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn slip MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 6000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 6.00 [mm/min] Description: Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in crosswise comparison between the two monitoring channels. Dependency: Refer to: p9301, p9342, p9549 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9301.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9342 is used as tolerance in the crosswise data comparison. p9349 SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn slip MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 6000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 6.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in crosswise comparison between the two monitoring channels. Dependency: Refer to: p9301, p9342, p9549 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-817 Parameters List of parameters Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9301.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9342 is used as tolerance in the crosswise data comparison. p9351 SI Motion SLS changeover delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS t MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 100000.00 [s] Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover or for the changeover from SLS to SOS for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage or to the safe operating stop (SOS), within this delay time, the "old" velocity stage remains active. Even if SLS or SOS is activated from non safety-related operation, then this delay is still applied. Dependency: Refer to: p9551 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop p9352 SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t C->SOS MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 100000.00 [s] Description: Sets the transition time from STOP C to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Dependency: Refer to: p9552 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop p9353 SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t D->SOS MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 100000.00 [s] Description: Sets the transition time from STOP D to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Dependency: Refer to: p9553 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop p9354 SI Motion transition time STOP E to SOS (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t E->SOS MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 100000.00 [s] Description: Sets the transition time from STOP E to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Dependency: Refer to: p9554 1-818 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop p9355 SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t F->B MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the transition time from STOP F to STOP B. Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9356 SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL t_del MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 3600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 100000.00 [s] Sets the delay time for the safe pulse suppression after STOP B / SS1. In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions with safe brake ramp monitoring (p9306 = 1) and the OFF3 ramp enabled at the same time (p9507.3 = 0), the parameter has no effect. Dependency: Refer to: p9360, p9556 Refer to: C01701 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1 p9357 SI Motion pulse suppression test time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL t MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 10000000.00 [s] Factory setting 100000.00 [s] Description: Sets the time after which the pulses must have been suppressed when initiating the test stop. Dependency: Refer to: p9557 Refer to: C01798 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9358 SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn acc t MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 5000000.00 [s] Max 100000000.00 [s] Factory setting 40000000.00 [s] Description: Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode. Dependency: Refer to: p9558 If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated. Refer to: C01799 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-819 Parameters List of parameters p9360 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown velocity (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL v_sh MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 6000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 0.00 [mm/min] Sets the shutdown velocity for pulse suppression. Below this velocity "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP A). In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions, the parameter must be > 0 (recommended value: 10). Dependency: Refer to: p9356, p9560 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1 p9360 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL n_sh MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 6000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression. Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP A). Dependency: Refer to: p9356, p9560 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1 p9362[0...1] SI Motion SLP stop response (Motor Module) / SI mtn SLP stop MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 14 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9534, p9535 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SLP: Safely-Limited Position 1-820 STOP A STOP B STOP C STOP D STOP E STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9363[0...3] VECTOR_G Description: SI Motion SLS stop response (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS Stop MM Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 14 Factory setting 2 Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS. In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9306 = 1), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: STOP A STOP B STOP C STOP D STOP E STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1 [1] = Limit value SLS2 [2] = Limit value SLS3 [3] = Limit value SLP4 Dependency: Refer to: p9331, p9380, p9563 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: In the extended sense, a bus failure should be seen here as a communication error in the control signals of the safety functions (e.g. via PROFIsafe or TM54F). SLS: Safely-Limited Speed p9364 SI Motion SDI tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SDI tol MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2861 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.001 [mm] Max 360.000 [mm] Factory setting 12.000 [mm] Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible before safety message C30716 is initiated. Dependency: Refer to: p9365, p9366 Refer to: C30716 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) p9364 SI Motion SDI tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SDI tol MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2861 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.001 [] Max 360.000 [] Factory setting 12.000 [] Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible before safety message C30716 is initiated. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-821 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p9365, p9366 Refer to: C30716 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) p9365 SI Motion SDI delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SDI t MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2861 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 100000.00 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). When selecting the SDI function, motion in the monitored direction is permissible as a maximum for this time; this means that this time can be used for braking existing motion. Dependency: Refer to: p9364, p9366 Refer to: C30716 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) p9366 SI Motion SDI stop response (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SDI Stop MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2861 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 14 Factory setting 1 Sets the stop response for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This setting applies to both directions of motion. In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9306 = 1), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: STOP A STOP B STOP C STOP D STOP E STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails Dependency: Refer to: p9364, p9365 Refer to: C30716 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: In the extended sense, a bus failure should be seen here as a communication error in the control signals of the safety functions (e.g. via PROFIsafe or TM54F). SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) p9368 SI Motion SAM velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SAM v_limMM VECTOR_G Description: 1-822 Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 1000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 0.00 [mm/min] Sets the velocity tolerance limit for the "SAM" function. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters SAM is de-activated once the set velocity limit has been undershot. Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies: The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SAM. p9368 SI Motion SAM velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SAM v_limMM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 1000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Sets the velocity tolerance limit for the "SAM" function. SAM is de-activated once the set velocity limit has been undershot. Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies: The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SAM. p9370 SI Motion acceptance test mode (Motor Module) / SI Mtn acc_mod MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 00AC hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Setting to select and de-select the acceptance test mode. Value: 0: 172: Dependency: Refer to: p9358, r9371 [00 hex] De-select the acceptance test mode [AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode Refer to: C01799 Note: Acceptance test mode can only be selected if the motion monitoring functions, which are integrated in the drives, are enabled (p9601.2/p9801.2). r9371 SI Motion acceptance test status (Motor Module) / SI Mtn acc_stat MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 00AC hex Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the acceptance test mode. Value: 0: 12: 13: 15: 172: Dependency: Refer to: p9358, p9370 [00 hex] Acc_mode inactive [0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9370 [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer [AC hex] Acc_mode active Refer to: C01799 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-823 Parameters List of parameters p9374 SI Motion safe position scaling (Motor Module) / SI mtn SP scal MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 100000 Factory setting 1000 Description: Sets the scaling factor to transfer the safe position via PROFIsafe in the 16-bit notation. Dependency: Refer to: r9713 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The parameter is only effective when PROFIsafe telegram 901 is selected. By selecting a suitable scaling of the 32 bit position actual value (r9713[0]), it must be ensured that the scaled position actual value is not greater than 16 bit. The scaling is realized by dividing r9713[0] with this scaling factor. If, during operation, a position actual value is determined, which cannot be scaled to the 16 bits, then message C30711 with value 7001 is output and safety stop response STOP F. p9380 SI Motion pulse suppression delay bus failure (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t to IL MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 800000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the delay time after which the pulses are safely suppressed after a bus failure. Dependency: Refer to: p9363 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: In the extended sense, a bus failure should be seen here as a communication error in the control signals of the safety functions (e.g. via PROFIsafe or TM54F). The main use of the wait time is the ESR function (Extended Stop and Retract). p9381 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Motor Module) / SI Mtn ramp ref MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 600.0000 [mm/min] Max 240000.0000 [mm/min] Factory setting 1500.0000 [mm/min] Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp. The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9381 (reference value) and p9383 (monitoring time). Dependency: Refer to: p9382, p9383 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9381 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Motor Module) / SI Mtn ramp ref MM VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 600.0000 [rpm] Max 240000.0000 [rpm] Factory setting 1500.0000 [rpm] Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp. The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9381 (reference value) and p9383 (monitoring time). Dependency: 1-824 Refer to: p9382, p9383 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9382 SI Motion brake ramp delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn rp t_del MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10000.00 [s] Max 99000000.00 [s] Factory setting 250000.00 [s] Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp. Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed. Dependency: Refer to: p9381, p9383 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9383 SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn rp t_mon MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 500.00 [ms] Max 3600000.00 [ms] Factory setting 10000.00 [ms] Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp. The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9381 (reference value) and p9383 (monitoring time). Dependency: Refer to: p9381, p9382 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9385 SI Motion fault tolerance actual value sensing sensorless (MM) / SI mtn Sl to sl MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1 Max 4 Factory setting -1 Sets the tolerance of the plausibility monitoring of the current and voltage angle p9385 = 4 must be parameterized for synchronous motors. Dependency: Refer to: p9507 Refer to: C01711, F30681 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Reducing this value can adversely affect the actual value sensing and the plausibility check. When the value is increased, this results in a longer evaluation delay. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). For a value of -1, for synchronous motors, the value 4 is used automatically for the calculation - and for induction motors, the value 0. p9386 SI Motion delay time of the evaluation sensorless (MM) / SI Mtn t_del SL MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 5.00 [ms] Max 1000.00 [ms] Factory setting 100.00 [ms] Sets the evaluation delay for encoderless actual value sensing after pulse enable. The value should be greater than or equal to the motor magnetizing time. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-825 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: C30711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. If this value is reduced, this can have a negative impact on the actual value acquisition and plausibility check - and result in Safety message C30711 with the message value 1041 or 1042. When the value is increased, this results in a longer evaluation delay. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). p9387 SI Motion act val sensing encoderless filter time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SL filt MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 100000.00 [s] Factory setting 25000.00 [s] Description: Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with sensorless actual value sensing. Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). p9388 SI Motion act val sensing encoderless min current (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SL I_min MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 10.00 [%] Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing in reference to 10 mA (i.e. when 1 % = 10 mA). - The value must be increased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1042. - The value must be decreased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1041. Dependency: Refer to: C30711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). p9389 SI Motion voltage tolerance acceleration (Motor Module) / SI Mtn U tol MM Reducing this percentage value can adversely affect actual value sensing. VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.00 [%] Max 3300.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Sets the voltage tolerance for suppressing acceleration peaks. An increase in this percentage value means that voltage peaks will need to have a higher amplitude when accelerating if they are not to affect actual value sensing. - The value must be increased if C30711 with message value 1042 has occurred. - The value must be lowered if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive Safety actual velocity. Dependency: Refer to: C30711 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). 1-826 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9390[0...3] SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (Motor Module) / SI Mtn Version MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safe monitoring functions. Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release) [1] = Safety Version (minor release) [2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch) [3] = Safety Version (hotfix) Dependency: Refer to: r9590, r9770, r9870, r9890 Note: Example: r9390[0] = 2, r9390[1] = 60, r9390[2] = 1, r9390[3] = 0 --> SI Motion version V02.60.01.00 r9398[0...1] VECTOR_G SI Motion actual checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act CRC MM Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring function (actual checksum) on the Motor Module. Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring [1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference Dependency: Refer to: p9399 Note: SI: Safety Integrated p9399[0...1] SI Motion reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI Mtn setp CRC MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (reference checksum) on the Motor Module. Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring [1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference Dependency: Refer to: r9398 Note: SI: Safety Integrated r9406[0...19] PS file parameter number parameter not transferred / PS par_no n transf All objects Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the parameters that were not able to be transferred when reading the parameter back-up files (PS files) from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-827 Parameters List of parameters r9406[0] = 0 --> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free. r9406[0...x] > 0 --> indicates the parameter number in the following cases: - parameter, whose value was not able to be completely accepted. - indexed parameter, where at least 1 index was not able to be accepted. The first index that is not transferred is displayed in r9407. Dependency: Refer to: r9407, r9408 Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter. r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted r9407[0...19] All objects Description: PS file parameter index parameter not transferred / PS parameter index Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the first index of the parameters that could not be transferred when the parameter backup files (PS files) were read from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card). If, from an indexed parameter, at least one index was not able to be transferred, then the parameter number is displayed in r9406[n] and the first index that was not transferred is displayed in r9407[n]. r9406[0] = 0 --> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free. r9406[n] > 0 --> Displays r9407[n] the first index of the parameter number r9406[n] that was not transferred. Dependency: Refer to: r9406, r9408 Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter. r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted r9408[0...19] PS file fault code parameter not transferred / PS fault code All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes. Dependency: Refer to: r9406, r9407 Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter. r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted 1-828 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9409 Number of parameters to be saved / Qty par to save All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of modified parameters and those that have still not be saved for this drive object. Dependency: Refer to: p0971, p0977 Notice: Inherent to the system, the list of the parameters to be backed up is empty after the following actions: - Download - Warm restart - Factory setting In these cases, a new parameter backup must be initiated, which is then the starting point for the list of modified parameters. Note: The modified parameters that still need to be saved are internally listed in r9410 ... r9419. r9450[0...29] Reference value change parameter with unsuccessful calculation / Ref_chg par n poss B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the parameters for which the re-calculation was unsuccessful after an internal system reference value change. Dependency: Refer to: F07086 r9451[0...29] Units changeover adapted parameters / Unit_chngov par B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the parameters whose parameter would have to be changed during a units changeover. Dependency: Refer to: F07088 r9481 Number of BICO interconnections / BICO count B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of BICO interconnections (signal sinks). Dependency: Refer to: r9482, r9483 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-829 Parameters List of parameters Note: The selected BICO interconnections should be entered into r9482 and r9483. r9482[0...n] BICO interconnections BI/CI parameters / BICO BI/CI par B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r9481 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the signal sinks (binector/connector inputs, BI/CI parameters). The number of BICO interconnections is displayed in r9481. Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9483 Note: The list is sorted according to signal sources and is structured as follows: r9842[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal source, BICO coded) r9842[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal source, BICO coded) ... r9483[0...n] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: BICO interconnections BO/CO parameters / BICO BO/CO par Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: r9481 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the signal sources (binector/connector outputs, BO/CO parameters). The number of BICO interconnections is displayed in r9481. Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9482 Note: The list is sorted according to signal sources and is structured as follows: r9842[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal source, BICO coded) r9842[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal source, BICO coded) ... p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Description: 1-830 Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source (BO/CO parameter, BICO coded) to search in the signal sinks. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters The question is answered: How often is a connection made to a signal source in the drive object and from which index are these interconnections saved (r9482 and r9483)? Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9482, r9483, r9485, r9486 r9485 BICO interconnections signal source search count / BICO S_src srchQty B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of BICO interconnections to the signal sink being searched for. Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9482, r9483, p9484, r9486 Note: The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded). The search result is contained in r9482 and r9483 and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first index (r9486). r9486 BICO interconnections signal source search first index / BICO S_src srchIdx B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the first index of the signal source being searched for. Dependency: Refer to: r9481, r9482, r9483, p9484, r9485 Note: The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded). The search result is contained in r9482 and r9483 and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first index (r9486). r9490 Number of BICO interconnections to other drives / Qty BICO to drive All objects Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of signal sources from this drive to other drives/drive objects (Binector Output/Connector Output, BO/CO). Dependency: Refer to: r9491, r9492, p9493 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-831 Parameters List of parameters r9491[0...9] All objects BI/CI of BICO interconnections to other drives / BI/CI to drive Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the signal receiver list (Binector Input/Connector Input, BI/CI) for the first interconnections between this drive and other drives/drive objects. Dependency: Refer to: r9490, r9492, p9493 Notice: A drive cannot be deleted if this list is not empty! Otherwise, another drive would continue to attempt to read a signal from a drive that no longer existed. Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection. r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x] the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the interconnection. r9492[0...9] All objects BO/CO of BICO interconnections to other drives / BO/CO to drive Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the signal source list (Binector Output/Connector Output, BO/CO) for the first interconnections between this drive and other drives/drive objects. Dependency: Refer to: r9490, r9491, p9493 Notice: A drive cannot be deleted if this list is not empty! Otherwise, another drive would continue to attempt to read a signal from a drive that no longer existed. Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection. r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x] the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the interconnection. p9493[0...9] Reset BICO interconnections to other drives / Reset BICO to drv All objects Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 15 Factory setting 15 Description: Setting to reset the BICO interconnections to other drives. Each interconnection can be individually reset. Value: 0: 1: 2: 15: Dependency: Refer to: r9490, r9491, r9492 Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection. Set connection to 0 Set connection to 1 (100 %) Set connection to factory setting Finished r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x] the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the interconnection. 1-832 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9495 BICO behavior for de-activated drive objects / Behav for deact DO B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Sets the behavior for BICO interconnections to drive objects that are either not capable of operation or have been deactivated. BO/CO parameters are on the drive object that is either not capable of operation or has been deactivated (signal source). Value: 0: 1: 2: Inactive Save interconnections Save interconnections and establish the factory setting Dependency: Refer to: p9496, p9497, p9498, p9499 Refer to: A01318, A01507 Note: For p9495 = 0, the following applies: - the number of interconnections is zero (p9497 = 0). For p9495 not equal to 0, the following applies: - the BI/CI parameters involved are listed in p9498[0...29] (signal sink). - the associated BO/CO parameters are listed in p9499[0...29] (signal source). p9496 BICO behavior when activating drive objects / Behav when act DO B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the behavior when activating BICO interconnections to drive objects that are either not capable of operation or have been deactivated. Value: 0: 1: 2: Dependency: Refer to: p9495, p9497, p9498, p9499 Inactive Restore the interconnections from the list Delete the interconnections from the list Refer to: A01318, A01507 Note: The BI/CI parameters involved are listed in p9498[0...29] (signal sink). The associated BO/CO parameters are listed in p9499[0...29] (signal source). After p9496 = 1, 2 the following applies: - p9497 = 0 - p9496 = 0 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-833 Parameters List of parameters p9497 BICO interconnections to de-activated drive objects number / Interconn obj qty B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Displays the number of saved BICO interconnections to drive objects that are either not capable of operation or have been deactivated. BO/CO parameters are on the drive object that is either not capable of operation or has been deactivated (signal source). Dependency: Refer to: p9495, p9496, p9498, p9499 Refer to: A01318, A01507 p9498[0...29] B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G BICO BI/CI parameters to de-activated drive objects / BI/CI to deact obj Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Displays the saved BI/CI parameters (signal sink), whose source is located on drive objects that are either not capable of operation or have been deactivated. Dependency: Refer to: p9495, p9496, p9497, p9499 Refer to: A01318, A01507 Note: A BICO interconnection (signal sink, signal source) is displayed in the same index of p9498 and p9499. p9499[0...29] BICO BO/CO parameters to de-activated drive objects / BO/CO to deact obj B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, TB30, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Description: Displays the saved BO/CO parameters (signal source), which are located on drive objects that are either not capable of operation or have been deactivated. Dependency: Refer to: p9495, p9496, p9497, p9498 Refer to: A01318, A01507 Note: A BICO interconnection (signal sink, signal source) is displayed in the same index of p9498 and p9499. 1-834 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9500 SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit) / SI Mtn clock CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.50 [ms] Max 25.00 [ms] Factory setting 12.00 [ms] Description: Sets the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring. Dependency: Refer to: r2064, p9511 Refer to: F01652 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The monitoring clock cycle must be a multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 (dbSI) or of the DP clock cycle (ncSI). p9501 SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit) / SI Mtn enable CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 16 17 24 25 Signal name Enable SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) Enable SLP (SE) Enable absolute position Enable actual value synchronization Enable SSM (n < nx) hysteresis and filtering Enable SDI Enable transfer SLS (SG) limit value via PROFIsafe Enable transfer safe position via PROFIsafe 1 signal Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 0 signal Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit FP 2860 2861 - Enable Inhibit - Dependency: Refer to: F01682, F01683 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) p9502 SI Motion axis type (Control Unit) / SI Mtn ax type CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the axis type (linear axis or rotary axis/spindle). Value: 0: 1: Note: For the commissioning software, after changing over the axis type, the units dependent on the axis type are only updated after a project upload. Linear axis Rot axis/spindle A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-835 Parameters List of parameters p9503 SI Motion SCA (SN) enable (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA enab VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Setting to enable the function "Safe Cam" (SCA). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Dependency: Refer to: p9501 Signal name Enable SCA1 (SN1) Enable SCA2 (SN2) Enable SCA3 (SN3) Enable SCA4 (SN4) Enable SCA5 (SN5) Enable SCA6 (SN6) Enable SCA7 (SN7) Enable SCA8 (SN8) Enable SCA9 (SN9) Enable SCA10 (SN10) Enable SCA11 (SN11) Enable SCA12 (SN12) Enable SCA13 (SN13) Enable SCA14 (SN14) Enable SCA15 (SN15) Enable SCA16 (SN16) Enable ESCA17 (SN17) Enable SCA18 (SN18) Enable SCA19 (SN19) Enable SCA20 (SN20) Enable SCA21 (SN21) Enable SCA22 (SN22) Enable SCA23 (SN23) Enable SCA24 (SN24) Enable SCA25 (SN25) Enable SCA26 (SN26) Enable SCA27 (SN27) Enable SCA28 (SN28) Enable SCA29 (SN29) Enable SCA30 (SN30) 1 signal Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 0 signal Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit FP - Refer to: F01686 Note: The "Safe Cam" function (SCA) can either be enabled using p9501 or p9503. SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam p9505 SI Motion SP modulo value (Control Unit) / SI mtn SP mod CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [] Max 737280 [] Factory setting 0 [] Sets the modulo value in degrees for rotary axes of the "Safe position" function. This modulo value is taken into account when safely referencing as well as when transferring the safe position via PROFIsafe when the absolute position is enabled. The modulo function is deactivated for a value = 0. 1-836 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p9501 Refer to: F01681 Notice: When the "SLP" function is activated, the modulo function must be deactivated as otherwise fault F01681 will be output. If the absolute position is not enabled, then the parameterized modulo value is not taken into account. Note: SLP: Safely-Limited Position SP: Safe Position p9506 SI Motion function specification (Control Unit) / SI Mtn fct_spc CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the function specification for the safe motion monitoring. Value: 0: 1: 3: Dependency: Refer to: C01711 p9507 SI Motion function specification (Control Unit) / SI Mtn config CU VECTOR_G Safety with encoder and accel_monitoring(SAM) / delay time Safety without encoder with braking ramp (SBR) Safety without encoder with accel_monitoring(SAM) / delay time Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the function configuration for the safe motion monitoring functions. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: Re bit 00: Signal name Extended message acknowledgement Setpoint velocity limit for STOP F Motor type sensorless actual value sensing SS1 drive-based braking response 1 signal Yes No Synchronous motor without OFF3 0 signal No Yes Induction motor with OFF3 FP - When the function is activated, a safety-relevant acknowledgement (internal event acknowledge) can be performed by selecting/deselecting STO. Re bit 01: When the function is activated, the active setpoint velocity limit (CO: r9733) is set to zero when STOP F is active. Re bit 02: This bit defines the type of motor, which the sensorless safety technology evaluates. For bit = 0, the sensorless motion monitoring function calculates the actual velocity for an induction motor. For bit = 1, an actual velocity is calculated for a synchronous motor. This value depends on the setting in p0300. Bit = 0 should be set if no motor is defined (p0300 = 0). Re bit 03: When the function is activated, the drive-based braking response (OFF3 ramp) after SS1/internal STOP B is deactivated. Braking monitoring (SBR, SAM) is also deactivated. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-837 Parameters List of parameters p9509 SI Motion behavior during pulse suppression (Control Unit) / SI Mtn behav IL CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin Description: Sets the behavior of safety functions and their feedback during pulse suppression in encoderless operation. Bit field: Bit 00 08 Signal name SSM during pulse suppression and sensorless SDI during pulse suppression and sensorless Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Notice: Re bit 00: 1 signal Becomes inactive 0 signal Remains active FP - Becomes inactive Remains active - If the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time is too low, or there is an insufficient clearance between the SSM limit speed, and the shutdown speed, then it is possible that the "speed under limit value" signal does not change to 1, because no speed actual value below the SSM limit was able to be identified before pulse cancellation. In this case, the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time or the clearance between the SSM limit speed and shutdown speed must be increased. Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) Re bit 00: For bit = 1 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies: - During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the feedback signal has a 0 signal level. For bit = 0 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies: - Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The feedback signal last displayed before pulse suppression is kept and the system goes into the STO state. Re bit 08: For bit = 1 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies: - During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the status signal indicates inactive. For bit = 0 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies: - Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The status signal indicates active and the system goes into the STO state. p9510 SI Motion clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master / SI Mtn sync master VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Setting for clock cycle synchronous communication between PROFIdrive controller and Control Unit. The parameter is only relevant, if the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive have been enabled (p9601.2 =1 ). If a PROFIdrive controller exchanges process data in clock cycle synchronism with the Control Unit, then p9510 must be set to 1. This also applies if the drive itself does not exchange process data in clock cycle synchronism. Examples for clock cycle synchronous communication: - clock-cycle synchronous control for the motion control (e.g. SIMOTION). - clock-cycle synchronous PROFIsafe master (e.g. SIMATIC S7-400F). Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: C01711, A01796 Notice: As of firmware version 2.6, the parameter has no effect. 1-838 Communication not isochronous Communication isochronous (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9511 SI Motion actual value sensing cycle clock (Control Unit) / SI Mtn act clk CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0000 [ms] Max 25.0000 [ms] Factory setting 0.0000 [ms] Sets the clock cycle time of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring. Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed with an encoder. - A slower clock cycle time reduces the maximum permissible velocity - however, it ensures a lower load of the Control Unit for safe actual value sensing. - The maximum permissible velocity which, when exceeded, can mean that errors occur during safe actual value sensing, is displayed in r9730. - The isochronous PROFIBUS clock cycle is used as a clock cycle time for actual value sensing with a setting of 0 ms; the setting is 1 ms if isochronous operation is not being used. Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed without an encoder: - The actual value sensing clock cycle must be set to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p0115). Dependency: Refer to: p0115 Refer to: F01652 Note: The parameter is only active for drive-based motion monitoring functions (p9601.2 = 1). The monitoring clock cycle from p9500 must be an integer multiple of this parameter. In the case of motion monitoring functions with encoder, the clock cycle time for actual value sensing must be an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle and at least 4 times slower than the current controller clock cycle. A factor of at least 8 is recommended. The clock cycle time of the actual value sensing should not be set to more than 8 ms. A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. p9512 Select SI Motion safety functions without selection (CU) / SI Mtn w/o sel CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0001 0000 bin Sets the safety functions without selection. The safety functions without selection are enabled with p9601.5/p9801.5. Using this parameter, the individual motion monitoring functions can then be selected (e.g. SLS, SDI positive, SDI negative), which should then be permanently selected. Bit field: Bit 04 12 13 Signal name SLS static (CU) SDI positive static (CU) SDI negative static (CU) Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9801 1 signal Statically active Statically active Statically active 0 signal Statically inact Statically inact Statically inact FP - Refer to: F01682 Note: A change becomes immediately effective after exiting the safety commissioning mode. SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction). SLS: Safely-Limited Speed (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-839 Parameters List of parameters p9513 SI Motion non safety-relevant measuring steps POS1 (CU) / nsrPOS1 VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 22000 Sets the non safety-relevant measuring steps of position value POS1. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0416, r0473, p9313 Refer to: F01670 Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: - p9513 is automatically set the same as r0416 when the system boots. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: - p9513 is checked to see that it matches p0416. p9514 SI Motion absolute encoder linear measuring steps (CU) / Enc lin meas step VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 [nm] Max 4294967295 [nm] Factory setting 100 [nm] Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0422, r0469, p9314 Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: - p9514 is automatically set the same as r0422 when the system boots. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: - p9514 is checked to see that it matches r0422. p9515 SI Motion encoder coarse position value config (Control Unit) / SI Mtn s config CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Sets the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 16 Dependency: 1-840 Signal name Incrementer Encoder CRC least significant byte first Redundant coarse position val. most significant bit left-aligned Binary comparison not possible DRIVE-CLiQ encoder 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP - Yes Yes No No - Refer to: r0474, p9315 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: - p9515 is automatically set the same as p0474 when the system boots. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: - p9515 is checked to see that it matches p0474. p9516 SI Motion encoder configuration safety functions (Control Unit) / SI Mtn enc_cfg CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Sets the configuration for the motor encoder and position actual value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Bit field: Bit 00 01 Signal name Motor encoder, rotating/linear Position actual value, sign change Dependency: Refer to: p0404, p0410 1 signal Linear Yes 0 signal Rotating: No FP - Refer to: F01671 Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: - p9516.0 is automatically set the same as p0404.0 when the system boots. - p9516.1 is automatically set the same as p0410.1 when the system boots. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: - p9516.0 is checked to identify whether it coincides with p0404.0. p9517 SI Motion linear scale grid division (Control Unit) / SI Mtn grid CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [nm] Max 250000000.00 [nm] Factory setting 10000.00 [nm] Sets the grid division for a linear motor encoder. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0407, p9516 Refer to: F01671 Note: For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: When booting p9517 is automatically set the same as p0407. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: p9517 is checked whether it coincides with p0407. p9518 SI Motion encoder pulses per revolution (Control Unit) / SI Mtn puls/rev CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16777215 Factory setting 2048 Sets the number of encoder pulses per revolution for rotary motor encoders. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-841 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p0408, p9516 Refer to: F01671 Note: For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: When booting, p9518 is automatically set the same as p0408. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: p9518 is checked whether it coincides with p0408. p9519 SI Motion fine resolution G1_XIST1 (Control Unit) / SI Mtn G1_XIST1 CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 2 Max 18 Factory setting 11 Sets the fine resolution for G1_XIST1 in bits. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0418 Refer to: F01671 Note: For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: When booting, p9519 is automatically set the same as p0418. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: p9519 is checked whether it coincides with p0418. G1_XIST1: Encoder 1 position actual value 1 (PROFIdrive) p9520 SI Motion spindle pitch (Control Unit) / SI Mtn Sp_pitch CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.1000 [mm] Max 8388.0000 [mm] Factory setting 10.0000 [mm] Description: Sets the gear ratio between the encoder and load in mm/revolution for a linear axis with rotary encoder. Notice: The fourth decimal point can be rounded-off depending on the size of the entered number (from 3 places before the decimal point). p9521[0...7] SI Motion gearbox enc (motor)/load denominator (Control Unit) / SI Mtn gear den CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2147000000 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions) and the load. Index: [0] = Gearbox 1 [1] = Gearbox 2 [2] = Gearbox 3 [3] = Gearbox 4 [4] = Gearbox 5 [5] = Gearbox 6 [6] = Gearbox 7 [7] = Gearbox 8 Dependency: Refer to: p9522 Notice: It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active. 1-842 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9522[0...7] VECTOR_G SI Motion gearbox encoder (motor)/load numerator (Control Unit) / SI Mtn gear num CU Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 2147000000 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions) and the load. Index: [0] = Gearbox 1 [1] = Gearbox 2 [2] = Gearbox 3 [3] = Gearbox 4 [4] = Gearbox 5 [5] = Gearbox 6 [6] = Gearbox 7 [7] = Gearbox 8 Dependency: Refer to: p9521 Notice: It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active. Note: In the case of encoderless monitoring functions, the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator of the gearbox ratio. Example: Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2 --> p9521 = 1, p9522 = 8 (4 x 2) p9523 SI Motion redundant coarse pos. value valid bits (Control Unit) / Valid bits CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 9 Sets the number of valid bits of the redundant coarse position value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: r0470, p9323 Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: - p9523 is automatically set the same as r0470 when the system boots. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: - p9523 is checked to see that it matches r0470. p9524 SI Motion Redundant coarse pos. value fine resolution bits (CU) / SI Mtn fine bit CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -16 Max 16 Factory setting -2 Sets the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: r0471, p9324 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-843 Parameters List of parameters Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: - p9524 is automatically set the same as r0471 when the system boots. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: - p9524 is checked to see that it matches r0471. p9525 SI Motion Redundant coarse pos. value relevant bits (CU) / Relevant bits CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 16 Factory setting 16 Sets the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0414, r0472, p9325 Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: - p9525 is automatically set the same as r0472 when the system boots. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: - p9525 is checked to see that it matches r0472. p9526 SI Motion encoder assignment second channel / SI Mtn enc chan 2 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of the encoder that the second channel (control, Motor Module) uses for safe motion monitoring functions. Dependency: For the safe motion monitoring functions, the redundant safety position actual value sensing must be activated in the appropriate encoder data set (p0430.19 = 1). Refer to: p0187, p0188, p0189, p0430 Note: For p9526 = 1, the encoder for the closed-loop speed control is used for the second channel of the motion monitoring functions (1-encoder system). A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. p9529 SI Motion Gx_XIST1 coarse pos. safe most significant bit (CU) / Gx_XIST1 MSB CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 31 Factory setting 14 Sets the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0415, r0475, p9329 Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: - p9529 is automatically set the same as r0475 when the system boots. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: - p9529 is checked to see that it matches r0475. MSB: Most Significant Bit 1-844 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9530 SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn standst_tol VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [mm] Max 100.000 [mm] Factory setting 1.000 [mm] Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Dependency: Refer to: C01707 Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop p9530 SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn standst_tol VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [] Max 100.000 [] Factory setting 1.000 [] Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Dependency: Refer to: C01707 Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop p9531[0...3] SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS lim CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 1000000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 2000.00 [mm/min] Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1 [1] = Limit value SLS2 [2] = Limit value SLS3 [3] = Limit value SLP4 Dependency: Refer to: p9532, p9561, p9563 Refer to: C01714 Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed p9531[0...3] SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS lim CU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 1000000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2000.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1 [1] = Limit value SLS2 [2] = Limit value SLS3 [3] = Limit value SLP4 Dependency: Refer to: p9532, p9561, p9563 Refer to: C01714 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-845 Parameters List of parameters Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed p9532[0...15] SI Motion SLS (SG) override factor (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS over CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [%] Max 100.000 [%] Factory setting 100.000 [%] Description: Sets the override factor for the limit value for SLS2 and SLS4 for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). Index: [0] = SLS (SG) override factor 0 [1] = SLS (SG) override factor 1 [2] = SLS (SG) override factor 2 [3] = SLS (SG) override factor 3 [4] = SLS (SG) override factor 4 [5] = SLS (SG) override factor 5 [6] = SLS (SG) override factor 6 [7] = SLS (SG) override factor 7 [8] = SLS (SG) override factor 8 [9] = SLS (SG) override factor 9 [10] = SLS (SG) override factor 10 [11] = SLS (SG) override factor 11 [12] = SLS (SG) override factor 12 [13] = SLS (SG) override factor 13 [14] = SLS (SG) override factor 14 [15] = SLS (SG) override factor 15 Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9531 Note: The actual override factor for SLS2 and SLS4 is selected using the safety-relevant inputs (SGE). SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed p9533 SI Motion SLS setpoint velocity limiting (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS set_lim VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.000 [%] Max 100.000 [%] Factory setting 80.000 [%] Description: This is an evaluation factor to define the setpoint limit from the selected actual speed limit. Dependency: This parameter only has to be parameterized for the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 = 1) The active SLS limit value is evaluated with this factor and is made available as setpoint limit in r9733. r9733[0] = p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side) r9733[1] = - p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side) [x] = Selected SLS stage Conversion factor from the motor side to the load side: - motor type = rotary and axis type = linear: p9522 / (p9521 x p9520) - otherwise: p9522 / p9521 Refer to: p9501, p9531, p9601 Note: The active actual speed limit is selected via safety-relevant inputs (SGE). When selecting SOS or a STOP A ... D, setpoint 0 is specified in r9733. SLS: Safely-Limited Speed 1-846 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9534[0...1] VECTOR_G SI Motion SLP (SE) upper limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP up lim Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [mm] Max 2147000.000 [mm] Factory setting 100000.000 [mm] Description: Sets the upper limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9535, p9562 Refer to: C01715 Note: For setting this limit value, the following applies: p9534[x] > p9535[x], x = 0, 1 A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches p9534[0...1] SI Motion SLP (SE) upper limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP up lim VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [] Max 2147000.000 [] Factory setting 100000.000 [] Description: Sets the upper limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9535, p9562 Refer to: C01715 Note: For setting this limit value, the following applies: p9534[x] > p9535[x], x = 0, 1 A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches p9535[0...1] SI Motion SLP (SE) lower limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP low lim VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [mm] Max 2147000.000 [mm] Factory setting -100000.000 [mm] Description: Sets the lower limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9534, p9562 Refer to: C01715 Note: For setting this limit value, the following applies: p9534[x] > p9535[x], x = 0, 1 A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-847 Parameters List of parameters p9535[0...1] SI Motion SLP (SE) lower limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP low lim VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [] Max 2147000.000 [] Factory setting -100000.000 [] Description: Sets the lower limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9534, p9562 Refer to: C01715 Note: For setting this limit value, the following applies: p9534[x] > p9535[x], x = 0, 1 A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches p9536[0...29] SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA+ VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [mm] Max 2147000.000 [mm] Factory setting 10.000 [mm] Description: Sets the plus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA). Index: [0] = Cam position SCA1 (SN1) [1] = Cam position SCA2 (SN2) [2] = Cam position SCA3 (SN3) [3] = Cam position SCA4 (SN4) [4] = Cam position SCA5 (SN5) [5] = Cam position SCA6 (SN6) [6] = Cam position SCA7 (SN7) [7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8) [8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9) [9] = Cam position SCA10 (SN10) [10] = Cam position SCA11 (SN11) [11] = Cam position SCA12 (SN12) [12] = Cam position SCA13 (SN13) [13] = Cam position SCA14 (SN14) [14] = Cam position SCA15 (SN15) [15] = Cam position SCA16 (SN16) [16] = Cam position SCA17 (SN17) [17] = Cam position SCA18 (SN18) [18] = Cam position SCA19 (SN19) [19] = Cam position SCA20 (SN20) [20] = Cam position SCA21 (SN21) [21] = Cam position SCA22 (SN22) [22] = Cam position SCA23 (SN23) [23] = Cam position SCA24 (SN24) [24] = Cam position SCA25 (SN25) [25] = Cam position SCA26 (SN26) [26] = Cam position SCA27 (SN27) [27] = Cam position SCA28 (SN28) [28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29) [29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9537 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam 1-848 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9536[0...29] SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA+ VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: U, T rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 4 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [] Max 2147000.000 [] Factory setting 10.000 [] Description: Sets the plus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA). Index: [0] = Cam position SCA1 (SN1) [1] = Cam position SCA2 (SN2) [2] = Cam position SCA3 (SN3) [3] = Cam position SCA4 (SN4) [4] = Cam position SCA5 (SN5) [5] = Cam position SCA6 (SN6) [6] = Cam position SCA7 (SN7) [7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8) [8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9) [9] = Cam position SCA10 (SN10) [10] = Cam position SCA11 (SN11) [11] = Cam position SCA12 (SN12) [12] = Cam position SCA13 (SN13) [13] = Cam position SCA14 (SN14) [14] = Cam position SCA15 (SN15) [15] = Cam position SCA16 (SN16) [16] = Cam position SCA17 (SN17) [17] = Cam position SCA18 (SN18) [18] = Cam position SCA19 (SN19) [19] = Cam position SCA20 (SN20) [20] = Cam position SCA21 (SN21) [21] = Cam position SCA22 (SN22) [22] = Cam position SCA23 (SN23) [23] = Cam position SCA24 (SN24) [24] = Cam position SCA25 (SN25) [25] = Cam position SCA26 (SN26) [26] = Cam position SCA27 (SN27) [27] = Cam position SCA28 (SN28) [28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29) [29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9537 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam p9537[0...29] SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA- VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [mm] Max 2147000.000 [mm] Factory setting -10.000 [mm] Description: Sets the minus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA). Index: [0] = Cam position SCA1 (SN1) [1] = Cam position SCA2 (SN2) [2] = Cam position SCA3 (SN3) [3] = Cam position SCA4 (SN4) [4] = Cam position SCA5 (SN5) [5] = Cam position SCA6 (SN6) [6] = Cam position SCA7 (SN7) [7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-849 Parameters List of parameters [8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9) [9] = Cam position SCA10 (SN10) [10] = Cam position SCA11 (SN11) [11] = Cam position SCA12 (SN12) [12] = Cam position SCA13 (SN13) [13] = Cam position SCA14 (SN14) [14] = Cam position SCA15 (SN15) [15] = Cam position SCA16 (SN16) [16] = Cam position SCA17 (SN17) [17] = Cam position SCA18 (SN18) [18] = Cam position SCA19 (SN19) [19] = Cam position SCA20 (SN20) [20] = Cam position SCA21 (SN21) [21] = Cam position SCA22 (SN22) [22] = Cam position SCA23 (SN23) [23] = Cam position SCA24 (SN24) [24] = Cam position SCA25 (SN25) [25] = Cam position SCA26 (SN26) [26] = Cam position SCA27 (SN27) [27] = Cam position SCA28 (SN28) [28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29) [29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9536 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam p9537[0...29] SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA- VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: U, T rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 4 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -2147000.000 [] Max 2147000.000 [] Factory setting -10.000 [] Description: Sets the minus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA). Index: [0] = Cam position SCA1 (SN1) [1] = Cam position SCA2 (SN2) [2] = Cam position SCA3 (SN3) [3] = Cam position SCA4 (SN4) [4] = Cam position SCA5 (SN5) [5] = Cam position SCA6 (SN6) [6] = Cam position SCA7 (SN7) [7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8) [8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9) [9] = Cam position SCA10 (SN10) [10] = Cam position SCA11 (SN11) [11] = Cam position SCA12 (SN12) [12] = Cam position SCA13 (SN13) [13] = Cam position SCA14 (SN14) [14] = Cam position SCA15 (SN15) [15] = Cam position SCA16 (SN16) [16] = Cam position SCA17 (SN17) [17] = Cam position SCA18 (SN18) [18] = Cam position SCA19 (SN19) [19] = Cam position SCA20 (SN20) [20] = Cam position SCA21 (SN21) [21] = Cam position SCA22 (SN22) [22] = Cam position SCA23 (SN23) [23] = Cam position SCA24 (SN24) [24] = Cam position SCA25 (SN25) [25] = Cam position SCA26 (SN26) [26] = Cam position SCA27 (SN27) 1-850 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [27] = Cam position SCA28 (SN28) [28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29) [29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9536 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam p9538[0...29] VECTOR_G SI Motion SCA (SN) cam track assignment (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA assign. Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 100 Max 414 Factory setting [0] 100 [1] 101 [2] 102 [3] 103 [4] 104 [5] 105 [6] 106 [7] 107 [8] 108 [9] 109 [10] 110 [11] 111 [12] 112 [13] 113 [14] 114 [15] 200 [16] 201 [17] 202 [18] 203 [19] 204 [20] 205 [21] 206 [22] 207 [23] 208 [24] 209 [25] 210 [26] 211 [27] 212 [28] 213 [29] 214 Description: Assigns the individual cams to the maximum of 4 cam tracks and defines the numerical value for the SGA "cam range". p9538[0...29] = CBA dec C = Assignment of the cam to the cam track. Valid values are 1, 2, 3, 4. BA = Numerical value for the SGA "cam range". If the position lies in the range of this cam, the value BA is signaled to the safety-relevant logic via the SGA "cam range" of the cam track set using C. Valid values are 0 ... 14. Each numerical value may only be used once for each cam track. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-851 Parameters List of parameters Examples: p9538[0] = 207 Cam 1 (index 0) is assigned cam track 2. If the position lies within the range of this cam, a value of 7 is entered in the SGA "cam range" of the second cam track. p9538[5] = 100 Cam 6 (index 5) is assigned cam track 1. If the position lies within the range of this cam, a value of 0 is entered in the SGA "cam range" of the first cam track. Index: [0] = Track assignment SCA1 [1] = Track assignment SCA2 [2] = Track assignment SCA3 [3] = Track assignment SCA4 [4] = Track assignment SCA5 [5] = Track assignment SCA6 [6] = Track assignment SCA7 [7] = Track assignment SCA8 [8] = Track assignment SCA9 [9] = Track assignment SCA10 [10] = Track assignment SCA11 [11] = Track assignment SCA12 [12] = Track assignment SCA13 [13] = Track assignment SCA14 [14] = Track assignment SCA15 [15] = Track assignment SCA16 [16] = Track assignment SCA17 [17] = Track assignment SCA18 [18] = Track assignment SCA19 [19] = Track assignment SCA20 [20] = Track assignment SCA21 [21] = Track assignment SCA22 [22] = Track assignment SCA23 [23] = Track assignment SCA24 [24] = Track assignment SCA25 [25] = Track assignment SCA26 [26] = Track assignment SCA27 [27] = Track assignment SCA28 [28] = Track assignment SCA29 [29] = Track assignment SCA30 Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503 Refer to: F01681 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam p9540 SI Motion SCA (SN) tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA tol CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [mm] Max 10.0000 [mm] Factory setting 0.1000 [mm] Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA). Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. Within this tolerance, both monitoring channels may signal different signal states of the same safe cam. 1-852 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9540 SI Motion SCA (SN) tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA tol CU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: U, T rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 4 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [] Max 10.0000 [] Factory setting 0.1000 [] Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA). Within this tolerance, both monitoring channels may signal different signal states of the same safe cam. Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. p9541 SI Motion encoder comparison algorithm (CU) / Enc comp algo VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 255 Sets the the comparison algorithm for the encoder position monitoring functions. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Value: 0: 10: 11: 255: SMx20 safety algorithm DQL binary safety algorithm DQL linear non-binary safety algorithm Safety algorithm unknown Dependency: Refer to: p0417, p9341 Note: For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: - p9541 is automatically set the same as r0417 when the system boots. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: - p9541 is checked to see that it matches r0417. p9542 SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn act tol CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [mm] Max 360.0000 [mm] Factory setting 0.1000 [mm] Sets the tolerance for the crosswise data comparison of the actual position between the two monitoring channels. For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary and 1 mm linear). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: For a linear axis, the tolerance is internally limited to 10 mm. For a "linear axis with rotating motor" and standard setting of p9520, p9521 and p9522, the standard setting of p9542 corresponds to a position tolerance of 36 on the motor side. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-853 Parameters List of parameters p9542 SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn act tol CU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [] Max 360.0000 [] Factory setting 0.1000 [] Sets the tolerance for the crosswise data comparison of the actual position between the two monitoring channels. For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary and 1 mm linear). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: For a linear axis, the tolerance is internally limited to 10 mm. For a "linear axis with rotating motor" and standard setting of p9520, p9521 and p9522, the standard setting of p9542 corresponds to a position tolerance of 36 on the motor side. p9544 SI Motion actual value comparison tolerance (referencing) (CU) / SI Mtn ref tol VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0000 [mm] Max 36.0000 [mm] Factory setting 0.0100 [mm] Description: Sets the tolerance to check the actual values after referencing (incremental encoder) or when powering up (absolute encoder). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. For linear axes, the maximum value is limited to 1mm. p9544 SI Motion actual value comparison tolerance (referencing) (CU) / SI Mtn ref tol VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0000 [] Max 36.0000 [] Factory setting 0.0100 [] Description: Sets the tolerance to check the actual values after referencing (incremental encoder) or when powering up (absolute encoder). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. For linear axes, the maximum value is limited to 1mm. p9545 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) filter time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SSM filt CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 100.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill. Note: The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) 1-854 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9546 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity limit (CU) / SI Mtn SSM v_limCU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 1000000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 20.00 [mm/min] Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" (SGA n < n_x) is set. For p9568 = 0, the value in p9546 is also applicable for the function "SAM". Caution: The following applies for p9506 = 3: The "SAM" function is switched out if the selected threshold value is undershot. Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output / SGA: Safety-related output SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) / SGA n < nx: Safetyrelated output n < nx p9546 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity limit (CU) / SI Mtn SSM v_limCU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 P-Group: Safety Integrated Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 1000000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 20.00 [rpm] Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" (SGA n < n_x) is set. For p9568 = 0, the value in p9546 is also applicable for the function "SAM". Caution: The following applies for p9506 = 3: The "SAM" function is switched out if the selected threshold value is undershot. Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output / SGA: Safety-related output SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) / SGA n < nx: Safetyrelated output n < nx p9547 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity hysteresis (CU) / SI Mtn SSM hyst CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [mm/min] Max 500.0000 [mm/min] Factory setting 10.0000 [mm/min] Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-855 Parameters List of parameters p9547 SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity hysteresis (CU) / SI Mtn SSM hyst CU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2860 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.0010 [rpm] Max 500.0000 [rpm] Factory setting 10.0000 [rpm] Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) p9548 SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SAM tol CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 120000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 300.00 [mm/min] Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "SAM" function. Dependency: Refer to: C01706 Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) p9548 SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SAM tol CU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 120000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 300.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "SAM" function. Dependency: Refer to: C01706 Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) p9549 SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn slip tol VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 6000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 6.00 [mm/min] Description: Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in crosswise comparison between the two monitoring channels. Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9542 Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9501.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9542 is used as tolerance in the crosswise data comparison. 1-856 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9549 SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn slip tol VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 6000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 6.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in crosswise comparison between the two monitoring channels. Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9542 Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9501.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9542 is used as tolerance in the crosswise data comparison. p9550 SI Motion SGE changeover tolerance time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SGE_chg tol VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 500.00 [ms] Description: Sets the tolerance time for the changeover of the safety-related inputs (SGE). p9551 SI Motion SLS (SG) changeover delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS t CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 600000.00 [ms] Factory setting 100.00 [ms] Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover or for the changeover from SLS to SOS for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage or to the safe operating stop (SOS), within this delay time, the "old" velocity stage remains active. Even if SLS or SOS is activated from non safety-related operation, then this delay is still applied. Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop p9552 SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t C->SOS CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 600000.00 [ms] Factory setting 100.00 [ms] Description: Sets the transition time from STOP C to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-857 Parameters List of parameters p9553 SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t D->SOS CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 600000.00 [ms] Factory setting 100.00 [ms] Description: Sets the transition time from STOP D to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop p9554 SI Motion transition time STOP E to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t E->SOS CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 600000.00 [ms] Factory setting 100.00 [ms] Description: Sets the transition time from STOP E to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Dependency: Refer to: p9354 Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop p9555 SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t F->B CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 600000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the transition time from STOP F to STOP B. Dependency: Refer to: C01711 p9556 SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL t_del CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2825 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 3600000.00 [ms] Factory setting 100.00 [ms] Sets the delay time for the safe pulse suppression after STOP B. In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions with safe brake ramp monitoring (p9506 = 1) and the OFF3 ramp enabled at the same time (p9507.3 = 0), the parameter has no effect. Dependency: Refer to: p9560 Refer to: C01701 1-858 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9557 SI Motion pulse suppression test time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL t_test VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 100.00 [ms] Description: Sets the time after which the pulses must have been suppressed when initiating the test stop. Dependency: Refer to: C01798 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. p9558 SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (Control Unit) / SI Mtn acc t CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 5000.00 [ms] Max 100000.00 [ms] Factory setting 40000.00 [ms] Description: Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode. Dependency: Refer to: C01799 p9559 SI Motion forced checking procedure timer (Control Unit) / SI Mtn dyn timer If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated. VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [h] Max 9000.00 [h] Factory setting 8.00 [h] Sets the time interval for carrying out the forced checking procedure and testing the safety motion monitoring functions integrated in the drives. Within the parameterized time, the safety functions must have been tested at least once (including de-selection of the "STO" function). This monitoring time is reset each time the test is carried out. The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is set in p9705. Dependency: Refer to: p9705 Refer to: A01697, C01798 Note: STO: Safe Torque Off p9560 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown velocity (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL v_shutCU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 6000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 0.00 [mm/min] Sets the shutdown velocity for pulse suppression. Below this velocity "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP A). In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions, the parameter must be > 0 (recommended value: 10). Dependency: Refer to: p9556 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-859 Parameters List of parameters p9560 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL n_shutCU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 6000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression. Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B, the pulses are suppressed by changing to STOP A). Dependency: Refer to: p9556 p9561 SI Motion SLS (SG) stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS resp VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 14 Factory setting 5 Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). This setting applies for all SLS limit values. An input value of less than 5 signifies personnel protection, from 10 and upwards, machine protection. This parameter can only be used for SINUMERIK Safety Integrated. For motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive, only a value of 5 is permissible. Other settings result in the safety message C01711/C30711 with message value 44. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: Dependency: Refer to: p9531, p9563, p9580 Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed p9562[0...1] SI Motion SLP (SE) stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP Stop CU VECTOR_G STOP A STOP B STOP C STOP D STOP E Sets the stop response via p9563 (SLS-specific) STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 14 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 10: 11: 12: 1-860 STOP A STOP B STOP C STOP D STOP E STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 13: 14: STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails Index: [0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1) [1] = Limit value SLP2 (SE2) Dependency: Refer to: p9534, p9535 Note: SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches p9563[0...3] SI Motion SLS (SG)-specific stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS stop CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 14 Factory setting 2 Description: Sets the SLS-specific stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS. An input value of less than 5 signifies personnel protection, from 10 and upwards, machine protection. In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: STOP A STOP B STOP C STOP D STOP E STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1 [1] = Limit value SLS2 [2] = Limit value SLS3 [3] = Limit value SLP4 Dependency: Refer to: p9531, p9561, p9580 Note: In the extended sense, a bus failure should be seen here as a communication error in the control signals of the safety functions (e.g. via PROFIsafe or TM54F). SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed p9564 SI Motion SDI tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SDI tol CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2861 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.001 [mm] Max 360.000 [mm] Factory setting 12.000 [mm] Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible before safety message C01716 is initiated. Dependency: Refer to: p9565, p9566 Refer to: C01716 Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-861 Parameters List of parameters p9564 SI Motion SDI tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SDI tol CU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2861 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.001 [] Max 360.000 [] Factory setting 12.000 [] Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible before safety message C01716 is initiated. Dependency: Refer to: p9565, p9566 Refer to: C01716 Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) p9565 SI Motion SDI delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SDI t CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2861 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 600000.00 [ms] Factory setting 100.00 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). When selecting the SDI function, motion in the monitored direction is permissible as a maximum for this time; this means that this time can be used for braking existing motion. Dependency: Refer to: p9564, p9566 Refer to: C01716 Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) p9566 SI Motion SDI stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SDI Stop CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2861 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 14 Factory setting 1 Sets the stop response for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This setting applies to both directions of motion. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: STOP A STOP B STOP C STOP D STOP E STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails Dependency: Refer to: p9564, p9565 Refer to: C01716 Notice: In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9506 = 1), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted. Note: In the extended sense, a bus failure should be seen here as a communication error in the control signals of the safety functions (e.g. via PROFIsafe or TM54F). SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) 1-862 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9568 SI Motion SAM velocity limit (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SAM v_limCU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [mm/min] Max 1000.00 [mm/min] Factory setting 0.00 [mm/min] Sets the velocity tolerance limit for the "SAM" function. SAM is de-activated once the set velocity limit has been undershot. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies: The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SAM. p9568 SI Motion SAM velocity limit (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SAM v_limCU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Max 1000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Sets the velocity tolerance limit for the "SAM" function. SAM is de-activated once the set velocity limit has been undershot. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies: The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SAM. p9570 SI Motion acceptance test mode (Control Unit) / SI Mtn Acc_mode VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 00AC hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Setting to select and de-select the acceptance test mode. Value: 0: 172: Dependency: Refer to: p9558, r9571, p9601 [00 hex] De-select the acceptance test mode [AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode Refer to: C01799 Note: Acceptance test mode can only be selected if the safe motion monitoring functions are enabled. r9571 SI Motion acceptance test status (Control Unit) / SI Mtn acc_status VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 00AC hex Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the acceptance test mode. Value: 0: 12: [00 hex] Acc_mode inactive [0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-863 Parameters List of parameters 13: 15: 172: Dependency: [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9570 [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer [AC hex] Acc_mode active Refer to: p9558, p9570 Refer to: C01799 p9572 SI Motion reference position (Control Unit) / SI mtn rel_pos VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -737280.000 [mm] Max 737280.000 [mm] Factory setting 0.000 [mm] The reference position entered in this parameter, is used as safe absolute position when setting p9573. If errors are identified when performing the plausibility checks, then message C01711 is output with message value 1003 Note: The unit depends on the selected axis type, linear or rotary axis, in p9502 p9572 SI Motion reference position (Control Unit) / SI mtn rel_pos VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: U, T rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -737280.000 [] Max 737280.000 [] Factory setting 0.000 [] The reference position entered in this parameter, is used as safe absolute position when setting p9573. If errors are identified when performing the plausibility checks, then message C01711 is output with message value 1003 Note: The unit depends on the selected axis type, linear or rotary axis, in p9502 p9573 SI Motion accept reference position (Control Unit) / SI mtn set_ref_pos VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 122 Factory setting 0 The safe absolute position is rejected or newly set using this parameter. If errors are identified when performing the plausibility checks, then message C1711 is output with message value 1003 Value: 0: 89: 122: Dependency: Refer to: p9572 p9574 SI Motion safe position scaling (Control Unit) / SI mtn SP scal CU VECTOR_G No action Set reference position at standstill Declare reference position invalid Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 100000 Factory setting 1000 Description: Sets the scaling factor to transfer the safe position via PROFIsafe in the 16-bit notation. Dependency: Refer to: r9713 1-864 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The parameter is only effective when PROFIsafe telegram 901 is selected. By selecting a suitable scaling of the 32 bit position actual value (r9713[0]), it must be ensured that the scaled position actual value is not greater than 16 bit. The scaling is realized by dividing r9713[0] with this scaling factor. If, during operation, a position actual value is determined, which cannot be scaled to the 16 bits, then message C0711 with value 7001 is output and safety stop response STOP F. p9580 SI Motion pulse suppression delay bus failure (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t to IL CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 800.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time after which the pulses are safely suppressed after a bus failure. Dependency: Refer to: p9561, p9563 Note: In the extended sense, a bus failure should be seen here as a communication error in the control signals of the safety functions (e.g. via PROFIsafe or TM54F). The main use of the wait time is the ESR function (Extended Stop and Retract). p9581 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Control Unit) / SI Mtn ramp ref CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 600.0000 [mm/min] Max 240000.0000 [mm/min] Factory setting 1500.0000 [mm/min] Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp. The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time). Dependency: Refer to: p9582, p9583 p9581 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Control Unit) / SI Mtn ramp ref CU VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: C2(95) rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 600.0000 [rpm] Max 240000.0000 [rpm] Factory setting 1500.0000 [rpm] Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp. The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time). Dependency: Refer to: p9582, p9583 p9582 SI Motion brake ramp delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn rp t_del CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.00 [ms] Max 99000.00 [ms] Factory setting 250.00 [ms] Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp. Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed. Dependency: Refer to: p9581, p9583 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-865 Parameters List of parameters p9583 SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn rp t_mon CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.50 [s] Max 3600.00 [s] Factory setting 10.00 [s] Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp. The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time). Dependency: Refer to: p9581, p9582 p9585 SI Motion fault tolerance actual value sensing sensorless (CU) / SI mtn Sl to SL CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -1 Max 4 Factory setting -1 Sets the tolerance of the plausibility monitoring of the current and voltage angle p9585 = 4 must be parameterized for synchronous motors. Dependency: Refer to: r9787 Refer to: F01681, C01711 Notice: Reducing this value can adversely affect the actual value sensing and the plausibility check. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). When the value is increased, this results in a longer evaluation delay. For a value of -1, for synchronous motors, the value 4 is used automatically for the calculation - and for induction motors, the value 0. p9586 SI Motion delay time of the evaluation sensorless (CU) / SI Mtn t_del SL CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 5.00 [ms] Max 1000.00 [ms] Factory setting 100.00 [ms] Sets the evaluation delay for encoderless actual value sensing after pulse enable. The value should be greater than or equal to the motor magnetizing time. Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Notice: If this value is reduced, this can have a negative impact on the actual value acquisition and plausibility check - and result in Safety message C01711 with the message value 1041 or 1042. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). p9587 SI Motion act val sensing sensorless filter time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SL filt CU When the value is increased, this results in a longer evaluation delay. VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 100.00 [ms] Factory setting 25.00 [ms] Description: Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with sensorless actual value sensing. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). 1-866 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9588 SI Motion act val sensing sensorless min current (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SL I_min CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [%] Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 10.00 [%] Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing in reference to 10 mA (i.e. when 1 % = 10 mA). - The value must be increased if C01711 has occurred with message value 1042. - The value must be decreased if C01711 has occurred with message value 1041. Dependency: Refer to: r9785 Refer to: C01711 Notice: Reducing this percentage value can adversely affect actual value sensing. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). p9589 SI Motion voltage tolerance acceleration (Control Unit) / SI Mtn U tol CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 10.00 [%] Max 3300.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Sets the voltage tolerance for suppressing acceleration peaks. An increase in this percentage value means that voltage peaks will need to have a higher amplitude when accelerating if they are not to affect actual value sensing. - The value must be increased if C01711 with message value 1043 has occurred. - The value must be lowered if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive Safety actual velocity. Dependency: Refer to: r9784 Refer to: C01711 Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). r9590[0...3] SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (Control Unit) / SI Mtn version CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safe monitoring functions. Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release) [1] = Safety Version (minor release) [2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch) [3] = Safety Version (hotfix) Dependency: Refer to: r9770, r9870, r9890 Note: Example: r9590[0] = 2, r9590[1] = 60, r9590[2] = 1, r9590[3] = 0 --> SI Motion version V02.60.01.00 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-867 Parameters List of parameters p9601 SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit) / SI enable fct CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 bin Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on the Control Unit. Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Motor Module or Power Module being used: 0000 hex: Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function). 0001 hex: Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.0 = 1). 0004 hex: Extended functions via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) have been enabled (permissible for r9771.5 = 1). 0005 hex: Extended functions via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) and the basic functions via onboard terminals have been enabled (permissible for r9771.5 = 1). 0008 hex: Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.6 = 1). 0009 hex: Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.6 = 1). 000C hex: Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9771.4 = 1). 000D hex: Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9771.4 = 1). 0024 hex: Extended functions without selection are enabled (permissible for r9771.16 = 1). 0025 hex: Extended functions without selection and basic functions via onboard terminals are enabled (permissible for r9771.16 = 1). Bit field: Bit 00 02 03 05 Signal name STO (SH) via terminals (Control Unit) enable Enable drive_integr motion_monitoring functions (Control Unit) PROFIsafe (Control Unit) enable Enable drv_integ motion_mon fct w/o selection (Control Unit) 1 signal Enable 0 signal Inhibit FP 2810 Enable Inhibit - Enable Enable Inhibit Inhibit - Dependency: Refer to: r9771, p9801 Note: A change always becomes effective only after a POWER ON. Exception: Changes to p9601.0 become effective immediately. CU: Control Unit STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) SI: Safety Integrated SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output 1-868 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9602 SI enable Safe Brake Control (Control Unit) / SI enable SBC CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2814 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the enable signal for the function "Safe Brake Control" (SBC) on the Control Unit. Value: 0: 1: Dependency: Refer to: p9802 Note: The "Safe Brake Control" function is not activated until at least one safety monitoring function has been enabled (i.e. p9501 not equal to 0 and/or p9601 not equal to 0). Inhibit SBC Enable SBC It does not make sense to parameterize "no motor holding brake available" and enable "Safe Brake Control" (p1215 = 0, p9602 = p9802 = 1) if there is no motor holding brake. The parameterization "motor holding brake the same as sequence control, connection via BICO" and "Safe Brake Control" enabled (p1215 = 3, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical. It is not permissible to parameterize "motor holding brake without feedback signals" and also enable "safe brake control" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1). CU: Control Unit SBC: Safe Brake Control SI: Safety Integrated p9610 SI PROFIsafe address (Control Unit) / SI PROFIsafe CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFE hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the PROFIsafe address for the Control Unit. Dependency: Refer to: p9810 p9611 SI PROFIsafe telegram selection (Control Unit) / SI Ps telegram CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 998 Factory setting 998 Description: Sets the PROFIsafe telegram number for the Control Unit. Value: 0: 30: 31: 901: 902: 998: Dependency: Refer to: p9811, p60022 No PROFIsafe telegram selected PROFIsafe standard telegram 30, PZD-1/1 PROFIsafe standard telegram 31, PZD-2/2 PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 901, PZD-3/5 PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 902, PZD-3/6 Compatibility mode (as for firmware version < 4.5) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-869 Parameters List of parameters p9620[0...7] VECTOR_G Description: BI: SI signal source for STO (SH)/SBC/SS1 (Control Unit) / SI S_srcSTO/SS1 CU Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2810 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the following functions on the Control Unit: STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill SBC: Safe Brake Control SS1: Safe Stop 1 (time monitored) Dependency: Refer to: p9601 Note: The following signal sources are permitted: - fixed zero (standard setting). - digital inputs DI 0 ... 7, 16, 17, 20, 21 on the Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2). - digital inputs DI 0 ... 3 on the Controller Extensions (CX32-2, NX10.3, NX15.3). - digital inputs DI 0 ... 3, 16 on the Control Unit 310-2 (CU310-2). It is not permitted to establish an interconnection to a digital input in the simulation mode. For a parallel circuit configuration of n power units, the following applies: p9620[0] = Signal source for power unit 1 ... p9620[n-1] = Signal source for power unit n p9621 BI: SI Safe Brake Adapter signal source (Control Unit) / SI SBA S_src CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2814 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for Safe Brake Adapter (SBA). This defines via which digital input the Safe Brake Adapter feedback signal is read-in (SBA_DIAG). p9621/p9821 = 0: There is no Safe Brake Control (SBC) with Safe Brake Adapter (SBA) available. p9621/p9821 = r0722.x (x = 0, 1 ... 7) Safe Brake Adapter and Booksize unit (no Communication Interface Module (CIM)). p9621/p9821 = r9872.3 Safe Brake Adapter and Chassis unit (CIM). Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9602, p9821 Note: No difference is tolerated for a crosswise data comparison between p9621 and p9821. To use the "Safe Brake Adapter" function the following must apply: p9601 = p9801 <> 0 and p9602 = p9802 = 1 p9622[0...1] VECTOR_G SI SBA relay delay times (Control Unit) / SI SBA relay t CU Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2814 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 1000.00 [ms] Factory setting [0] 100.00 [ms] [1] 65.00 [ms] Description: 1-870 Sets the delay times for activating and de-activating the Safe Brake Adapter relay. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters The relay-specific minimum delay times for evaluating the feedback signal contacts have to be set. They differ for the activation and de-activation of one and the same relay. Index: [0] = Wait time activation [1] = Wait time deactivation Dependency: Refer to: p9822 Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9622 and p9822, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated. The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. The relay-specific minimum delay times (ms) for evaluating the feedback signal contacts are entered. p9650 SI SGE changeover tolerance time (Control Unit) / SI SGE_chg tol CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2810 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 2000.00 [ms] Factory setting 500.00 [ms] Sets the tolerance time to change over the safety-related inputs (SGE) on the Control Unit. An SGE changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels. After an SGE changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a crosswise data comparison during this tolerance time. Dependency: Refer to: p9850 Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated. The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SGE: Safety-related input (e.g. STO terminals) p9651 SI STO/SBC/SS1 debounce time (Control Unit) / SI STO t_debou CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 100.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the debounce time for the failsafe digital inputs used to control STO/SBC/SS1. Note: The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds. It specifies the maximum duration of a fault pulse at the failsafe digital inputs with no reaction/influence on the selection or deselection of the Safety Basic Functions. Example: Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed. Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed. p9652 SI Safe Stop 1 delay time (Control Unit) / SI Stop 1 t_del CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 300.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the delay time of the pulse suppression for the function "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) on the Control Unit to brake along the OFF3 down ramp (p1135). Recommend.: In order that the drive can completely ramp-down along the OFF3 ramp and a motor holding brake that is possibly available can close, then the delay time should be set as follows: Motor holding brake parameterized: delay time >= p1135 + p1228 + p1217 Motor holding brake not parameterized: delay time >= p1135 + p1228 Dependency: Refer to: p1135, p9852 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-871 Parameters List of parameters Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9652 and p9852, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated. The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) p9653 SI Safe Stop 1 drive-based braking response / SI SS1 OFF3 VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the drive-based braking response for the "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) function. Value: 0: 1: Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1 (Safe Stop 1, corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) p9658 SI transition time STOP F to STOP A (Control Unit) / SI STOP F->A CU VECTOR_G SS1 with OFF3 SS1 without OFF3 Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 30000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the transition period from STOP F to STOP A on the Control Unit. Dependency: Refer to: r9795, p9858 Refer to: F01611 Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9658 and p9858, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated. The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. STOP F: Defect in a monitoring channel (error in the crosswise data comparison) STOP A: Pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path p9659 SI forced checking procedure timer / SI FCP Timer VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2810 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [h] Max 9000.00 [h] Factory setting 8.00 [h] Sets the time interval for carrying out the forced checking procedure and testing the Safety shutdown paths. Within the parameterized time, STO must have been de-selected at least once. The monitoring time is reset each time that STO is de-selected. Dependency: Refer to: A01699 Note: STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill 1-872 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9660 SI forced checking procedure remaining time / SI frc chk remain VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [h] Max - [h] Factory setting - [h] Description: Displays the time remaining before dynamization and testing of the safety shutdown paths (forced checking procedure). Dependency: Refer to: A01699 p9697 SI Motion pulse suppression failsafe delay time (CU) / SI Mtn IL t_del CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 800.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time for the pulse suppression after bus failure via failsafe values on the Control Unit (e.g. used for ESR). Note: ESR: Extended Stop and Retract p9700 SI Motion copy function / SI Mtn copy fct TM54F_MA Description: Can be changed: C2(95), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 0057 hex Factory setting 0000 hex Setting to start the required copy function. After starting, the appropriate parameters are copied from the Control Unit to the Motor Module. Once copying is complete, the parameter is automatically reset to zero. Value: 0: 29: 87: [00 hex] Copy function ended [1D hex] Start copy function node identifier [57 hex] Start copy function SI parameters Note: Re value = 57 hex: The value can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered. SI: Safety Integrated p9700 SI Motion copy function / SI Mtn copy fct VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 00D0 hex Factory setting 0000 hex Setting to start the required copy function. After starting, the appropriate parameters are copied from the Control Unit to the Motor Module. Once copying is complete, the parameter is automatically reset to zero. Value: 0: 29: 87: 208: [00 hex] Copy function ended [1D hex] Start copy function node identifier [57 hex] Start copy function SI parameters [D0 hex] Start copy function SI basic parameters (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-873 Parameters List of parameters Note: Re value = 57 hex and D0 hex: The value can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered. Re value = D0 hex: The following parameters are copied after starting the copy function: p9601/p9801, p9602/p9802, p9610/9810, p9650/p9850, p9652/p9852, p9658/p9858 p9701 Acknowledge SI motion data change / Ackn SI Mtn dat TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 00EC hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Setting to transfer the reference checksums from the associated actual checksums after changes (SI parameters, hardware). After transferring the reference checksums, parameters are automatically reset to zero. Value: 0: 172: 236: [00 hex] Data unchanged [AC hex] Acknowledge data change complete [EC hex] Acknowledge hardware CRC Dependency: Refer to: r9398, p9399, r9728, p9729, r9798, p9799, r9898, p9899 Note: Re value = AC hex: These values can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered. SI: Safety Integrated p9701 Acknowledge SI motion data change / Ackn SI Mtn dat VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95), U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 00EC hex Factory setting 0000 hex Setting to transfer the reference checksums from the associated actual checksums after changes (SI parameters, hardware). After transferring the reference checksums, parameters are automatically reset to zero. Value: 0: 172: 220: 236: [00 hex] Data unchanged [AC hex] Acknowledge data change complete [DC hex] Acknowledge SI basic parameter change [EC hex] Acknowledge hardware CRC Dependency: Refer to: r9398, p9399, r9728, p9729, r9798, p9799, r9898, p9899 Note: Re value = AC and DC hex: These values can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered. p9705 BI: SI Motion: Test stop signal source / SI Mtn test stop VECTOR_G Description: 1-874 Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for the test stop of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Caution: Before setting the signal source in p9705 it must be ensured that the signal source is at a logical 0. If, in the Safety commissioning mode, the signal source in p9705 is set - and it already has a logical 1 - then a test stop is immediately initiated and the messages C01711/C30711 are output with message value 1005. Notice: It is not permissible to use TM54F inputs to start the test stop. r9708[0...4] SI Motion diagnostics safe position / SI mtn safe pos VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mm] Max - [mm] Factory setting - [mm] Description: Displays the actual load-side actual values of both monitoring channels and their difference. Index: [0] = Load-side actual value on the CU [1] = Load-side actual value on the second channel [2] = Load-side actual value difference CU - second channel [3] = Load-side max. actual value difference CU - second channel [4] = Load-side actual value as safe position via PROFIsafe Dependency: Refer to: r9713 Note: Re index 0: The display of the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit is updated in the monitoring clock cycle. Re index 1: The display of the load-side position actual value on the second channel is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one CDC clock cycle. Re index 2: The difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and load-side position actual value in the second channel is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one CDC clock cycle. Re index 3: The maximum difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and the load-side position actual value on the second channel. Re index 4: Displays the load-side position actual value when enabling the function "Safe position via PROFIsafe". The value is an average value from the values in index 0 and 1. For a 16-bit notation, the value is influenced using the scaling factor (p9574/p9374). When the function is not enabled, the content corresponds to the value in index 0. CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison r9708[0...4] SI Motion diagnostics safe position / SI mtn safe pos VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [] Max - [] Factory setting - [] Description: Displays the actual load-side actual values of both monitoring channels and their difference. Index: [0] = Load-side actual value on the CU [1] = Load-side actual value on the second channel [2] = Load-side actual value difference CU - second channel [3] = Load-side max. actual value difference CU - second channel [4] = Load-side actual value as safe position via PROFIsafe Dependency: Refer to: r9713 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-875 Parameters List of parameters Note: Re index 0: The display of the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit is updated in the monitoring clock cycle. Re index 1: The display of the load-side position actual value on the second channel is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one CDC clock cycle. Re index 2: The difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and load-side position actual value in the second channel is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one CDC clock cycle. Re index 3: The maximum difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and the load-side position actual value on the second channel. Re index 4: Displays the load-side position actual value when enabling the function "Safe position via PROFIsafe". The value is an average value from the values in index 0 and 1. For a 16-bit notation, the value is influenced using the scaling factor (p9574/p9374). When the function is not enabled, the content corresponds to the value in index 0. CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison r9710[0...1] VECTOR_G SI Motion diagnostics result list 1 / SI Mtn res_list 1 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays result list 1 that, for the crosswise data comparison between the monitoring channels, led to the fault. Index: [0] = Result list, second channel [1] = Result list, drive Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 16 17 18 19 20 21 Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring) Signal name Actual value > upper limit SOS Actual value > lower limit SOS Actual value > upper limit, SLP1 Actual value > lower limit, SLP1 Actual value > upper limit, SLP2 Actual value > lower limit, SLP2 Actual value > upper limit, SLS1 Actual value > lower limit, SLS1 Actual value > upper limit, SLS2 Actual value > lower limit, SLS2 Actual value > upper limit, SLS3 Actual value > lower limit, SLS3 Actual value > upper limit, SLS4 Actual value > lower limit, SLS4 Actual value > upper limit, SAM/SBR Actual value > lower limit, SAM/SBR Actual value > upper limit SDI positive Actual value > lower limit SDI positive Actual value > upper limit SDI negative Actual value > lower limit SDI negative 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - SLP: Safely-Limited Position SLS: Safely-Limited Speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop 1-876 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9711[0...1] VECTOR_G SI Motion diagnostics result list 2 / SI Mtn res_list 2 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays result list 2 that, for the crosswise data comparison between the monitoring channels, led to the fault. Index: [0] = Result list, second channel [1] = Result list, drive Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: SCA: Safe Cam Signal name Actual value > upper limit SCA1+ Actual value > lower limit, SCA1+ Actual value > upper limit SCA1Actual value > lower limit, SCA1Actual value > upper limit SCA2+ Actual value > lower limit, SCA2+ Actual value > upper limit SCA2Actual value > lower limit, SCA2Actual value > upper limit SCA3+ Actual value > lower limit, SCA3+ Actual value > upper limit SCA3Actual value > lower limit, SCA3Actual value > upper limit SCA4+ Actual value > lower limit, SCA4+ Actual value > upper limit SCA4Actual value > lower limit, SCA4Actual value > upper limit, SSM+ Actual value > lower limit, SSM+ Actual value > upper limit, SSMActual value > lower limit, SSMActual value > upper limit, modulo Actual value > lower limit, modulo 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) r9712 CO: SI Motion diagnostics position actual value motor side / SI Mtn s_act mot VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the actual motor-side position actual value for the motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit. For rotary axes, the following unit applies: Millidegrees For linear axes, the following unit applies: micrometers Note: The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-877 Parameters List of parameters r9713[0...4] CO: SI Motion diagnostics position actual value load side / SI Mtn s_act load VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual load-side actual values of both monitoring channels and their difference. For rotary axes, the following unit applies: Millidegrees For linear axes, the following unit applies: micrometers Index: [0] = Load-side actual value on the CU [1] = Load-side actual value on the second channel [2] = Load-side actual value difference CU - second channel [3] = Load-side max. actual value difference CU - second channel [4] = Load-side actual value as safe position via PROFIsafe Dependency: Refer to: r9708, r9724 Note: The value of this parameter is displayed in r9708 with units (mm or degrees). The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle. Re index 0: The display of the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit is updated in the monitoring clock cycle. Re index 1: The display of the load-side position actual value on the second channel is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one CDC clock cycle. Re index 2: The difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and load-side position actual value in the second channel is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one CDC clock cycle. Re index 3: The maximum difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and the load-side position actual value on the second channel. Re index 4: Displays the load-side position actual value when enabling the function "Safe position via PROFIsafe". The value is an average value from the values in index 0 and 1. For a 16-bit notation, the value is influenced using the scaling factor (p9574/p9374). When the function is not enabled, the content corresponds to the value in index 0. CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison r9714[0...2] VECTOR_G CO: SI motion diagnostics velocity / SI Mtn diag v Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mm/min] Max - [mm/min] Factory setting - [mm/min] Description: Displays the velocity actual values for the motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit. Index: [0] = Load-side velocity actual value on the Control Unit [1] = Actual SAM/SBR velocity limit on the Control Unit [2] = Actual SLS velocity limit on the Control Unit Dependency: Refer to: r9732 Notice: Re index 2: This SLS velocity limit can, as a result of conversion into the internal monitoring format, deviate from the specified SLS velocity limit (see r9732). 1-878 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle. For linear axes, the following unit applies: millimeters per minute For rotary axes, the following unit applies: revolutions per minute r9714[0...2] CO: SI motion diagnostics velocity / SI Mtn diag v VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the velocity actual values for the motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit. Index: [0] = Load-side velocity actual value on the Control Unit [1] = Actual SAM/SBR velocity limit on the Control Unit [2] = Actual SLS velocity limit on the Control Unit Dependency: Refer to: r9732 Notice: Re index 2: This SLS velocity limit can, as a result of conversion into the internal monitoring format, deviate from the specified SLS velocity limit (see r9732). Note: The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle. For linear axes, the following unit applies: millimeters per minute For rotary axes, the following unit applies: revolutions per minute r9718.23 VECTOR_G CO/BO: SI Motion control signals 1 / SI Mtn ctrl_sig 1 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Control signal 1 for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions. Bit field: Bit 23 Note: TfS: Traverse to fixed stop r9719.0...31 CO/BO: SI Motion control signals 2 / SI Mtn ctrl_sig 2 VECTOR_G Signal name Set offset for TfS to the actual torque 1 signal Set 0 signal Reset FP - Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Control signal 2 for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions. Bit field: Bit 00 01 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 Signal name De-select SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) De-select SOS (SBH) Select SLS (SG) bit 0 Select SLS (SG) bit 1 Deselect SDI positive Deselect SDI negative Deselect SLP Gearbox selection, bit 0 Gearbox selection, bit 1 Gearbox selection, bit 2 Select SLP (SE) position range 1 signal Yes Yes Set Set Yes Yes Yes Set Set Set SLP2 (SE2) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No Not set Not set No No No Not set Not set Not set SLP1 (SE1) FP - 1-879 Parameters List of parameters 13 15 16 18 19 20 21 28 29 30 31 Note: Close brake from control Select test stop SGE valid De-select external STOP A De-select external STOP C De-select external STOP D De-select external STOP E SLS (SG) override bit 0 SLS (SG) override bit 1 SLS (SG) override bit 2 SLS (SG) override bit 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Set Set Set Set No No No No No No No Not set Not set Not set Not set - Re r9719.0 and r9719.1: These two bits must be considered together. - if SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) is de-selected using bit 0, then assignment of bit 1 is irrelevant. - if SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) is selected using bit 0, then a changeover is made between SOS (SBH) and SLS (SG) using bit 1. SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) r9720.0...19 VECTOR_G CO/BO: SI Motion control signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ STW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2840, 2855 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Control signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 06 07 09 10 12 13 19 Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. For Safety Integrated Basic Functions (SBC, SS1, STO), the value is equal to zero. r9721.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion status signals / SI Mtn stat_sig VECTOR_G Signal name De-select STO De-select SS1 De-select SS2 De-select SOS De-select SLS Deselect SLP Acknowledgement Select SLS bit 0 Select SLS bit 1 Deselect SDI positive Deselect SDI negative Select SLP position range 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Signal edge active Set Set Yes Yes SLP2 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 1-880 0 signal No No No No No No No Not set Not set No No SLP1 Signal name SOS or SLS active SOS active Pulse enable 1 signal Yes Yes Deleted 0 signal No No Enabled FP 2822 2861 2861 2822 FP - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 13 14 15 Active SLS stage bit 0 Active SLS stage bit 1 Velocity below limit value n_x SLP active Safely referenced SDI pos active SDI neg active SLP active position area STOP A or B active STOP C active STOP D active STOP E active Set Set Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes SLP2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Not set Not set No No No No No SLP1 No No No No - Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. For Safety Integrated Basic Functions (SBC, SS1, STO), the value is equal to zero. r9722.0...31 CO/BO: SI Motion status signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ stat VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2840, 2855 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 06 07 09 10 11 12 13 15 19 22 23 30 31 Notice: Re bit 07: Signal name STO or safe pulse cancellation active SS1 active SS2 active SOS active SLS active SLP active Internal event Active SLS stage bit 0 Active SLS stage bit 1 SOS selected SDI pos active SDI neg active SSM (speed below limit value) SLP active position area SP valid Safely referenced SLP limit upper maintained SLP limit lower maintained 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Set Set Yes Yes Yes Yes SLP2 Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No Yes Not set Not set No No No No SLP1 No No No No FP 2822 2861 2861 2860 2822 2822 2822 The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard. Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. For Safety Integrated Basic Functions (SBC, SS1, STO), the value is equal to zero. Re bit 07: An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active. r9723.0...17 CO/BO: SI Motion diagnostic signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ diag VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the diagnostic signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-881 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 09 16 17 Note: Signal name Forced checking procedure required For ESR, STOP F and subsequent stop B is active Communication failure Actual value sensing supplies valid value Encoderless act val sensing acc to technique for U/f control Safe pulse cancellation active SAM/SBR active Position referenced 1 signal Yes Yes 0 signal No No FP - Yes Yes Yes No No No - Yes Yes Yes No No No - ESR: Extended Stop and Retract SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring) r9724 SI Motion crosswise comparison clock cycle / SI Mtn CDC clk cyc VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the crosswise comparison clock cycle. The value indicates the clock cycle time with which each individual CDC value is compared between the two monitoring channels. Dependency: Refer to: p9500 Note: Crosswise comparison clock cycle = monitoring clock cycle (p9500) * number of data to be crosswise compared CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison r9725[0...2] SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F / SI Mtn Diag STOP F VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Re index 0: Displays the message value that resulted in the STOP F on the drive. Value = 0: The Control Unit signaled a STOP F. Value = 1 ... 999: Number of the incorrect date in the crosswise data comparison between the monitoring channels. Value >= 1000: Additional diagnostic values of the drive. Re index 1: Displays the value of the Control Unit that resulted in the STOP F. Re index 2: Displays the value from the second channel that resulted in the STOP F. Index: [0] = Message value for CDC [1] = Control Unit CDC actual value [2] = Components CDC actual value Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: The significance of the individual message values is described in message C01711. CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison 1-882 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9726 SI Motion, user agreement selection/de-selection / SI Mtn UserAgr sel VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 00AC hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Setting to select and de-select the user agreement. Value: 0: 172: Dependency: Refer to: r9727 r9727 SI Motion user agreement, inside the drive / SI Mtn UserAgr int VECTOR_G Description: [00 hex] De-select user agreement [AC hex] Select user agreement Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the internal state of the user agreement. Value = 0: User agreement is not set. Value = AC hex: User agreement is set. Dependency: Refer to: p9726 r9728[0...2] SI Motion actual checksum, SI parameters / SI Mtn act CRC VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (actual checksum). Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring [1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values [2] = Checksum over SI parameters for hardware Dependency: Refer to: p9729 Refer to: F01680 p9729[0...2] VECTOR_G SI Motion reference checksum, SI parameters / SI Mtn ref CRC Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the checksum using the checksum-tested Safety Integrated parameters for motion monitoring functions (reference checksum). Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring [1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values [2] = Checksum over SI parameters for hardware Dependency: Refer to: r9728 Refer to: F01680 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-883 Parameters List of parameters r9730 SI Motion Safe maximum velocity / SI mtn safe v_Max VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mm/min] Max - [mm/min] Factory setting - [mm/min] Displays the safe maximum velocity (on the load side) that is permissible for the safe motion monitoring functions as a result of the actual value sensing. This parameter indicates up to which load velocity the safe encoder actual values (redundant encoder coarse position) can still be correctly detected as a result of the particular encoder parameterization. This parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0"). Note: If the value displayed is exceeded, message C01711 is output indicating relevant subsequent faults. r9730 SI Motion Safe maximum velocity / SI mtn safe v_Max VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the safe maximum velocity (on the load side) that is permissible for the safe motion monitoring functions as a result of the actual value sensing. This parameter indicates up to which load velocity the safe encoder actual values (redundant encoder coarse position) can still be correctly detected as a result of the particular encoder parameterization. This parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0"). Note: If the value displayed is exceeded, message C01711 is output indicating relevant subsequent faults. r9731 SI Motion safe position accuracy / SI Mtn pos acc VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mm] Max - [mm] Factory setting - [mm] Displays the safe position accuracy (load side). As a result of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring functions, this accuracy can be achieved as the maximum. Note: The parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0"). r9731 SI Motion safe position accuracy / SI Mtn pos acc VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [] Max - [] Factory setting - [] Displays the safe position accuracy (load side). As a result of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring functions, this accuracy can be achieved as the maximum. Note: The parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0"). 1-884 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9732 SI Motion velocity resolution / SI Mtn v_res VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mm/min] Max - [mm/min] Factory setting - [mm/min] Displays the safe velocity resolution (load side). Setpoints for velocity limits or parameter changes for velocities below this threshold have no effect. Note: This parameter does not provide any information about the actual accuracy of the velocity sensing. This depends on the type of actual value sensing, the gear factors as well as the quality of the encoder being used. r9732 SI Motion velocity resolution / SI Mtn v_res VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the safe velocity resolution (load side). Setpoints for velocity limits or parameter changes for velocities below this threshold have no effect. Note: This parameter does not provide any information about the actual accuracy of the velocity sensing. This depends on the type of actual value sensing, the gear factors as well as the quality of the encoder being used. r9733[0...2] CO: SI Motion setpoint speed limit effective / SI Mtn setp_lim VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2820, 2861, 3630 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Displays the necessary setpoint speed limit as a result of the selected motion monitoring functions. Contrary to the parameterization of the SI limit values, this parameter specifies the motor-side limit value and not the load-side limit value. Recommend.: For the ramp-function generator, by appropriately interconnecting the speed limits p1051 and p1052 with r9733[0, 1], a drive-based setpoint velocity limiting can be realized. - CI: p1051 = r9733[0] - CI: p1052 = r9733[1] Additional limiting can also be activated using connector input p1085 and p1088. Index: [0] = Setpoint limiting positive [1] = Setpoint limiting negative [2] = Setpoint limit absolute Dependency: For SLS: r9733[0] = p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side) For SDI negative: r9733[0] = 0 For SLS: r9733[1] = - p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side) For SDI positive: r9733[1] = 0 [x] = Selected SLS stage Conversion factor from the motor side to the load side: - motor type = rotary and axis type = linear: p9522 / (p9521 x p9520) - otherwise: p9522 / p9521 Refer to: p9531, p9533 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-885 Parameters List of parameters Notice: If p1051 = r9733[0] is interconnected, p1052 = r9733[1] must also be interconnected and vice versa. If only the absolute value of the setpoint velocity limiting is required, r9733[2] must be interconnected. Note: The unit changeover between linear and rotary axis is not implemented via the safety changeover (p9502) but by the linear motor changeover. If the "SLS" or "SDI" function is not selected, r9733[0] shows p1082 and r9733[1] shows -p1082. The display in r9733 can be delayed by up to one Safety monitoring clock cycle as compared to the display in r9719/r9720 and r9721/r9722. r9734.0...15 VECTOR_G CO/BO: SI Motion Safety Info Channel status word / SI Mtn info ch ZSW Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status word for the Safety information channel. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 12 13 14 15 Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. For Safety Integrated Basic Functions (SBC, SS1, STO), the value is equal to zero. Signal name STO active SS1 active SS2 active SOS active SLS active SOS selected SLS selected Internal event SDI positive selected SDI neg selected ESR retract requested Safety message present 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No FP - Re bit 07: An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active. p9740 SI Motion, user agreement selection/de-selection MM / SI mtn UserAgr MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 bin Max 1010 1100 bin Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Setting to select and de-select the user agreement on the Motor Module. Value: 0: 172: Dependency: Refer to: r9741 r9741 SI Motion user agreement, inside the drive MM / SI Mtn UserAgr int VECTOR_G Description: 1-886 [00 hex] De-select user agreement [AC hex] Select user agreement Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2822 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the internal state of the user agreement. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Value = 0: User agreement is not set. Value = AC hex: User agreement is set. Dependency: Refer to: p9740 r9744 SI message buffer changes, counter / SI msg_buffer chng VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the changes of the safety message buffer. This counter is incremented every time that the safety message buffer changes. Recommend.: This is used to check whether the safety message buffer has been read out consistently. Dependency: Refer to: r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756 r9745[0...63] SI component number / SI comp_num VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the component number of the safety message that has occurred. Note: Value = 0: Assignment to a component not possible. r9747[0...63] SI message code / SI msg_code VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the numbers of safety messages that have occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756 Note: The messages type "safety message" (Cxxxxx) are entered in the message fault buffer. Message buffer structure (principle): r9747[0], r9748[0], r9749[0], r9753[0], r9754[0], r9755[0], r9756[0] --> Actual message case, safety message 1 ... r9747[7], r9748[7], r9749[7], r9753[7], r9754[7], r9755[7], r9756[7] --> Actual message case, safety message 8 r9747[8], r9748[8], r9749[8], r9753[8], r9754[8], r9755[8], r9756[8] --> 1st acknowledged message case, safety message 1 ... r9747[15], r9748[15], r9749[15], r9753[15], r9754[15], r9755[15], r9756[15] --> 1st acknowledged message case, safety message 8 ... r9747[56], r9748[56], r9749[56], r9753[56], r9754[56], r9755[56], r9756[56] --> 7th acknowledged message case, safety message 1 ... r9747[63], r9748[63], r9749[63], r9753[63], r9754[63], r9755[63], r9756[63] --> 7th acknowledged message case, safety message 8 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-887 Parameters List of parameters r9748[0...63] SI message time received in milliseconds / SI t_msg recv ms VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the relative system runtime in milliseconds when the safety message occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756 r9749[0...63] SI message value / SI msg_value VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the additional information about the safety message that occurred (as integer number). Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756 r9750[0...63] SI diagnostic attributes / SI diag_attr VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the diagnostic attributes of the safety messages that have occurred. Bit field: Bit 00 p9752 SI message cases, counter / SI msg_cases count VECTOR_G Signal name Hardware replacement recommended 1 signal Yes 0 signal No Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: Number of safety messages that have occurred since the last reset. Dependency: The safety message buffer is cleared by resetting the parameter to 0. FP - Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756 Note: The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON. r9753[0...63] SI message value for float values / SI msg_val float VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: 1-888 Displays additional information about the safety message that has occurred for float values. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9754, r9755, r9756 r9754[0...63] SI message time received in days / SI t_msg recv days VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the relative system runtime in days when the safety message occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9755, r9756 r9755[0...63] SI message time removed in milliseconds / SI t_msg rem ms VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the relative system runtime in milliseconds when the safety message was removed. Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9756 r9756[0...63] SI message time removed in days / SI t_msg rem days VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the relative system runtime in days when the safety message was removed. Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9755 p9761 SI password input / SI password inp VECTOR_G Can be changed: C1, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2800 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Enters the Safety Integrated password. Dependency: Refer to: F01659 Note: It is not possible to change Safety Integrated parameters until the Safety Integrated password has been entered. p9762 SI password new / SI password new VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2800 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Enters a new Safety Integrated password. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-889 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: A change made to the Safety Integrated password must be acknowledged in the following parameter: Refer to: p9763 p9763 SI password acknowledgement / SI ackn password VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2800 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Acknowledges the new Safety Integrated password. Dependency: Refer to: p9762 Note: The new password entered into p9762 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge. p9762 = p9763 = 0 is automatically set after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully acknowledged. r9765 SI Motion forced check procedure remaining time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn dyn remain VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [h] Max - [h] Factory setting - [h] Displays the time remaining until the next dynamization and testing of the safety motion monitoring functions integrated in the drives. The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is parameterized in p9705. Dependency: Refer to: p9705 Refer to: C01798 r9768[0...7] SI PROFIsafe receive control words (Control Unit) / SI Ps PZD recv CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the received PROFIsafe telegram on the Control Unit. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 Dependency: Refer to: r9769 Note: The PROFIsafe trailer at the end of the telegram is also displayed (2 words). 1-890 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9769[0...7] SI PROFIsafe send status words (Control Unit) / SI Ps PZD send CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the PROFIsafe telegram to be sent on the Control Unit. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 Dependency: Refer to: r9768 Note: The PROFIsafe trailer at the end of the telegram is also displayed (2 words). r9770[0...3] SI version drive-integrated safety function (Control Unit) / SI version Drv CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the drive-integrated safety functions on the Control Unit. Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release) [1] = Safety Version (minor release) [2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch) [3] = Safety Version (hotfix) Dependency: Refer to: r9870, r9890 Note: Example: r9770[0] = 2, r9770[1] = 60, r9770[2] = 1, r9770[3] = 0 --> Safety version V02.60.01.00 r9771 SI common functions (Control Unit) / SI common fct CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2804 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the Safety Integrated monitoring functions supported on the Control Unit and Motor Module. The Control Unit determines this display. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Signal name STO supported via terminals SBC supported Extended Functions supported (p9501 > 0) SS1 supported Extended Functions PROFIsafe supported Extended Functions integrated in drive supported (p9601.2 = 1) Basic Functions PROFIsafe supported Extended Functions encoderless supported Safe Brake Adapter supported 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP 2804 2804 2804 2804 - Yes Yes Yes No No No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-891 Parameters List of parameters 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Basic Functions PROFIsafe for parallel connection supported Extended Functions integrated in drive for parallel connection Extended Functions SDI supported Extended Functions SSM encoderless supported ESR delay of the pulse suppression SBC for parallel connection supported SLS limit, SP supported via PROFIsafe Safety functions w/out selection, SLP, SS1 supported w/out OFF3 Dependency: Refer to: r9871 Note: CU: Control Unit Yes No - Yes No - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No - SBC: Safe Brake Control SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SLP: Safely-Limited Position SI: Safety Integrated SP: Safe Position SS1: Safe Stop 1 STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) / SGA n < nx: Safetyrelated output n < nx ESR: Extended Stop and Retract r9772.0...23 VECTOR_G CO/BO: SI status (Control Unit) / SI status CU Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2804 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on the Control Unit. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 05 06 09 10 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 1-892 Signal name STO or safe pulse cancellation on CU selected STO or safe pulse cancellation on CU active SS1 delay time active on the Control Unit SBC requested SS1 selected on the Control Unit (Basic Functions) SS1 active on the Control Unit (Basic Functions) STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active STOP A active STOP F active STO cause: Safety comm. mode STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Functions) STO cause selection via Safe Motion Monitoring (SMM) STO cause actual value missing or safe pulse cancellation STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Functions) SS1 cause selection terminal (Basic Functions) SS1 cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Functions) 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP 2810 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 2810 2810 2814 - Yes No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No 2802 2802 2802 - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r9872 Note: Re bit 00: When STO or "Safe pulse cancellation" is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 20. Re bit 01: - For p9772.1 = 1 and p9772.19 = 0, an STO from the Safety Basic functions is active. - For p9772.1 = 1 and p9772.19 = 1, safe pulse cancellation is active, if safety functions without selection are activated via p9601.2/p9801.2 = 1 and p9601.5/p9801.5 = 1. Note: If p9601.0 = 1 and p9601.2 = 1 and p9801.5 = 1 then for bit 0 and 1, the STO function applies. Re bit 05: When SS1 is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 22 and 23. Re bit 18: When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe or Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Re bit 19: With SMM encoderless no actual value sensing is possible on account of OFF2. With SMM with encoder no actual value sensing is possible on account of parking. For Safety functions without selection, safe pulse cancellation to selected (p9772.19 = 1). SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring Re bit 22 and 23: These bits show via which path the SS1 has been triggered, i.e. what has started the SS1 delay time. If the SS1 delay time is not started (e.g. because an STO is triggered at the same time), neither of the two bits is set. r9773.0...31 VECTOR_G CO/BO: SI status (Control Unit + Motor Module) / SI status CU+MM Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2804 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on the drive (Control Unit + Motor Module). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 04 05 06 31 Note: This status is formed from the AND operation of the relevant status of the two monitoring channels. r9774.0...31 CO/BO: SI status (group STO) / SI stat group STO VECTOR_G Description: Signal name STO selected in drive STO active in drive SS1 delay time active in the drive SBC requested SS1 selected in the drive (Basic Functions) SS1 active in the drive (Basic Functions) Shutdown paths must be tested 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No FP 2804 2804 2804 2804 2810 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2804 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the status for Safety Integrated of the group to which this drive belongs. These signals are an AND logic operation of the individual status signals of the drives included in this group. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Signal name STO selected in group STO active in group SS1 delay time active in group 1 signal Yes Yes Yes (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No No No FP 2804 2804 - 1-893 Parameters List of parameters 04 05 06 31 SBC requested in group SS1 selected in group (Basic Functions) SS1 active in group (Basic Functions) Shutdown paths of the group must be tested Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 2804 2804 Dependency: Refer to: p9620, r9773 Notice: If a drive belonging to a group is de-activated via p0105, then the signals in r9774 can no longer be correctly displayed (Remedy: Before de-activating, remove this drive from the group). Note: A group is formed by appropriately grouping the terminals for the function "Safe Torque Off" (STO). The status of a group of n drives is, for drives 1 to n - 1 displayed with a delay of one monitoring clock cycle; this is a system-related effect. r9776 SI diagnostics / SI diagnostics VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: The parameter is used for diagnostics. Bit field: Bit 00 Note: Re bit 00 = 1: Signal name Safety parameter changed POWER ON required 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP - At least one Safety parameter has been changed that will only take effect after a POWER ON. r9780 SI monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit) / SI monitor_clck CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions on the Control Unit. Dependency: Refer to: r0110, p0115, r9880 r9781[0...1] SI checksum to check changes (Control Unit) / SI chg chksm CU CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the checksum for tracking changes for Safety Integrated. These are additional checksums that are created to track changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) to safety parameters (that are relevant for checksums). Index: [0] = SI checksum to track functional changes [1] = SI checksum to track hardware-specific changes Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9729, p9799 Refer to: F01690 1-894 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9782[0...1] SI time stamps to check changes (Control Unit) / SI chg t CU CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [h] Max - [h] Factory setting - [h] Description: Displays the time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes for Safety Integrated. The time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) made to safety parameters are saved in parameters p9781[0] and p9781[1]. Index: [0] = SI time stamp for checksum to track functional changes [1] = SI time stamp for checksum to track hardware-specific changes Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9729, p9799 Refer to: F01690 p9783 SI motion synchr. motor current injection sensorless / SI Mtn SM Id sl VECTOR_G (n/M) Description: Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min -50.00 [%] Max 0.00 [%] Factory setting -20.00 [%] Sets the field-generating current for sensorless actual value sensing of synchronous motors. For synchronous motors, this current is fed in using sensorless safety functions. The value must fulfill the following condition: |p0305 x p9783| >= p9588 x 1.2 Dependency: Refer to: p9588 Refer to: C01711 Notice: Reducing this percentage value can adversely affect actual value sensing with synchronous motors. If the value is increased, this results in an increased motor power loss. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). r9784[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics acceleration encoderless / SI Mtn diag a sl VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mm/s] Max - [mm/s] Factory setting - [mm/s] Description: Display to diagnose acceleration values of the encoderless actual values sensing. Re index 0: Shows the parameterized acceleration values of p9389/p9589. Re index 1: Shows the actually measured acceleration values of the encoderless actual value sensing Index: [0] = Setpoint acceleration value [1] = Actual acceleration value Dependency: Refer to: p9389, p9589 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-895 Parameters List of parameters r9784[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics acceleration encoderless / SI Mtn diag a sl VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Description: Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [rev/s] Max - [rev/s] Factory setting - [rev/s] Display to diagnose acceleration values of the encoderless actual values sensing. Re index 0: Shows the parameterized acceleration values of p9389/p9589. Re index 1: Shows the actually measured acceleration values of the encoderless actual value sensing Index: [0] = Setpoint acceleration value [1] = Actual acceleration value Dependency: Refer to: p9389, p9589 r9785[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics absolute current value encoderless / SI Mtn diag I sl VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: 6_3 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mA] Max - [mA] Factory setting - [mA] Display to diagnose currents of the encoderless actual value sensing. Re index 0: Shows the parameterized minimum current of p9388/p9588. Re index 1: Shows the actually measured current of the encoderless actual value sensing Index: [0] = Minimum current parameterized [1] = Minimum current measured Dependency: Refer to: p9388, p9588 r9786[0...2] SI Motion diagnostics plausibility angle value encoderless / SI mtn diag phi sl VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [] Max - [] Factory setting - [] Display to diagnose the plausibility angle of the encoderless actual value sensing. Re index 0: Shows the actual plausibility angle Re index 1: Shows the actual plausibility voltage angle Re index 2: Shows the actual current angle Index: [0] = Actual plausibility angle [1] = Actual voltage angle [2] = Actual current angle Dependency: Refer to: p9385, p9585 1-896 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9787 SI Motion possible error tolerance sensorless / SI Mtn poss tol sl VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [mm/min] Max - [mm/min] Factory setting - [mm/min] Description: Displays the actual velocity deviation of the encoderless actual value sensing that is obtained when setting p9585/p9385. Dependency: Refer to: p9385, p9585 Note: For linear axes, the following unit applies: millimeters per minute For rotary axes, the following unit applies: revolutions per minute r9787 SI Motion possible error tolerance sensorless / SI Mtn poss tol sl VECTOR_G (Safety Can be changed: rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [rpm] Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Description: Displays the actual velocity deviation of the encoderless actual value sensing that is obtained when setting p9585/p9385. Dependency: Refer to: p9385, p9585 Note: For linear axes, the following unit applies: millimeters per minute For rotary axes, the following unit applies: revolutions per minute r9794[0...19] SI crosswise comparison list (Control Unit) / SI CDC_list CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of the data that are being presently compared crosswise on the Control Unit. The content of the list of crosswise-compared data is dependent upon the particular application. Dependency: Refer to: r9894 Note: Example: r9794[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle) r9794[1] = 2 (enable safety functions) r9794[2] = 3 (F-DI changeover, tolerance time) ... A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611. r9795 SI diagnostics STOP F (Control Unit) / SI diag STOP F CU VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the number of the cross-compared data which has caused STOP F on the Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-897 Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r9895 Refer to: F01611 Note: A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611. r9798 SI actual checksum SI parameters (Control Unit) / SI act_checksum CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2800 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (actual checksum). Dependency: Refer to: p9799, r9898 p9799 SI reference checksum SI parameters (Control Unit) / SI set_checksum CU VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2800 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (reference checksum). Dependency: Refer to: r9798, p9899 p9801 SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module) / SI enable fct MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 bin Sets the enable signals for the safety functions integrated in the drive and the type of selection on the Motor Module. Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Motor Module or Power Module being used: 0000 hex: Safety functions integrated in the drive inhibited (no safety function). 0001 hex: Basic functions are enabled via onboard terminals (permissible for r9871.0 = 1). 0004 hex: Extended functions via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) have been enabled (permissible for r9871.5 = 1). 0005 hex: Extended functions via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) and the basic functions via onboard terminals have been enabled (permissible for r9871.5 = 1). 0008 hex: Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9871.6 = 1). 0009 hex: Basic functions are enabled via PROFIsafe onboard terminals (permissible for r9871.6 = 1). 000C hex: Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe (permissible for r9871.4 = 1). 000D hex: Extended functions are enabled via PROFIsafe and basic functions via onboard terminals (permissible for r9871.4 = 1). 1-898 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 0024 hex: Extended functions without selection are enabled (permissible for r9871.16 = 1). 0025 hex: Extended functions without selection and basic functions via onboard terminals are enabled (permissible for r9871.16 = 1). Bit field: Bit 00 02 03 05 Signal name STO (SH) via terminals (Motor Module) enable Enable drive_integr motion_monitoring functions (Motor Module) PROFIsafe (Motor Module) enable Enable drv_integ motion_mon fct w/o selection (Motor Module) 1 signal Enable 0 signal Inhibit FP 2810 Enable Inhibit - Enable Enable Inhibit Inhibit - Dependency: Refer to: p9601, r9871 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: MM: Motor Module. SI: Safety Integrated. SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring. STO: Safe Torque Off/SH: Safe standstill. SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204). F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input. F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output. A change always becomes effective only after a POWER ON. Exception: Changes to p9801.0 become effective immediately. p9802 SI enable Safe Brake Control (Motor Module) / SI enable SBC MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2814 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the enable signal for the "Safe Brake Control" function (SBC) on the Motor Module. 0: Inhibit SBC 1: Enable SBC Dependency: Refer to: p9602 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The "Safe Brake Control" function is not activated until at least one safety monitoring function has been enabled (i.e. p9501 not equal to 0 and/or p9801 not equal to 0). It does not make sense to parameterize "no motor holding brake available" and enable "Safe Brake Control" (p1215 = 0, p9602 = p9802 = 1) if there is no motor holding brake. The parameterization "motor holding brake the same as sequence control, connection via BICO" and "Safe Brake Control" enabled (p1215 = 3, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical. It is not permissible to parameterize "motor holding brake without feedback signals" and also enable "safe brake control" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1). MM: Motor Module SBC: Safe Brake Control SI: Safety Integrated (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-899 Parameters List of parameters p9810 SI PROFIsafe address (Motor Module) / SI PROFIsafe MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFE hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the PROFIsafe address of the Motor Module. Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9811 SI PROFIsafe telegram selection (Motor Module) / SI Ps telegram MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 998 Factory setting 998 Description: Sets the PROFIsafe telegram number for the Motor Module. Value: 0: 30: 31: 901: 902: 998: Dependency: Refer to: p9611, p60022 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9821 BI: SI Safe Brake Adapter signal source (Motor Module) / SI SBA S_src MM VECTOR_G Description: No PROFIsafe telegram selected PROFIsafe standard telegram 30, PZD-1/1 PROFIsafe standard telegram 31, PZD-2/2 PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 901, PZD-3/5 PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 902, PZD-3/6 Compatibility mode (as for firmware version < 4.5) Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2814 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source for Safe Brake Adapter (SBA). This defines via which digital input the Safe Brake Adapter feedback signal is read-in (SBA_DIAG). p9621/p9821 = 0: There is no Safe Brake Control (SBC) with Safe Brake Adapter (SBA) available. p9621/p9821 = r0722.x (x = 0, 1 ... 7) Safe Brake Adapter and Booksize unit (no Communication Interface Module (CIM)). p9621/p9821 = r9872.3 Safe Brake Adapter and Chassis unit (CIM). Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9602, p9621 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: No difference is tolerated for a crosswise data comparison between p9621 and p9821. To use the "Safe Brake Adapter" function the following must apply: p9601 = p9801 <> 0 and p9602 = p9802 = 1 1-900 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9822[0...1] VECTOR_G SI SBA relay delay times (Motor Module) / SI SBA relay t MM Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2814 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 1000000.00 [s] Factory setting [0] 100000.00 [s] [1] 65000.00 [s] Description: Sets the delay times for activating and de-activating the Safe Brake Adapter relay. The relay-specific minimum delay times for evaluating the feedback signal contacts have to be set. They differ for the activation and de-activation of one and the same relay. Index: [0] = Wait time activation [1] = Wait time deactivation Dependency: Refer to: p9622 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. p9850 SI SGE changeover tolerance time (Motor Module) / SI SGE_chg tol MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2810 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 2000000.00 [s] Factory setting 500000.00 [s] Sets the tolerance time to change over the safety-related inputs (SGE) on the Motor Module. An SGE changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels. After an SGE changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a crosswise data comparison during this tolerance time. Dependency: Refer to: p9650 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated. The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SGE: Safety-related input (e.g. STO terminals) p9851 SI STO/SBC/SS1 debounce time (Motor Module) / SI STO t_debou MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 100000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the debounce time for the EP terminal of the Motor Module. Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds. It specifies the maximum duration of a fault pulse at the failsafe digital inputs with no reaction/influence on the selection or deselection of the Safety Basic Functions. Example: Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed. Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-901 Parameters List of parameters p9852 SI Safe Stop 1 delay time (Motor Module) / SI Stop 1 t_del MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [ms] Max 300000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time of the pulse suppression for the function "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) on the Motor Module to brake along the OFF3 down ramp (p1135). Recommend.: In order that the drive can completely ramp-down along the OFF3 ramp and a motor holding brake that is possibly available can close, then the delay time should be set as follows: Motor holding brake parameterized: delay time >= p1135 + p1228 + p1217 Motor holding brake not parameterized: delay time >= p1135 + p1228 Dependency: Refer to: p1135, p9652 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9652 and p9852, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated. The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) p9858 SI transition time STOP F to STOP A (Control Unit) / SI STOP F->A MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 30000000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the transition period from STOP F to STOP A on the Motor Module. Dependency: Refer to: p9658, r9895 Refer to: F30611 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9658 and p9858, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated. The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. STOP F: Defect in a monitoring channel (error in the crosswise data comparison) STOP A: Pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path r9870[0...3] SI version drive-integrated safety function (Motor Module) / SI version MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the drive-integrated safety functions on the Motor Module. Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release) [1] = Safety Version (minor release) [2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch) [3] = Safety Version (hotfix) Dependency: Refer to: r9770, r9890 Note: Example: r9870[0] = 2, r9870[1] = 60, r9870[2] = 1, r9870[3] = 0 --> Safety version V02.60.01.00 1-902 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9871 SI common functions (Motor Module / SI general fct MM VECTOR_G Description: Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2804 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the Safety Integrated monitoring functions supported on the Control Unit and Motor Module. The Motor Module determines this display. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Signal name STO supported via terminals SBC supported Extended Functions supported (p9501 > 0) SS1 supported Extended Functions PROFIsafe supported Extended Functions integrated in drive supported (p9601.2 = 1) Basic Functions PROFIsafe supported Extended Functions encoderless supported Safe Brake Adapter supported Basic Functions PROFIsafe for parallel connection supported Extended Functions integrated in drive for parallel connection Extended Functions SDI supported Extended Functions SSM encoderless supported ESR delay of the pulse suppression SBC for parallel connection supported SLS limit, SP supported via PROFIsafe Safety functions w/out selection, SLP, SS1 supported w/out OFF3 Dependency: Refer to: r9771 Note: MM: Motor Module 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP 2804 2804 2804 2804 - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No - Yes No - Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No - SBC: Safe Brake Control SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SLP: Safely-Limited Position SI: Safety Integrated SP: Safe Position SS1: Safe Stop 1 STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) / SGA n < nx: Safetyrelated output n < nx ESR: Extended Stop and Retract r9872.0...24 VECTOR_G Description: CO/BO: SI status list (Motor Module) / SI status MM Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2804 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the Safety Integrated status on the Motor Module. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-903 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 09 10 15 16 17 18 20 22 23 24 Signal name STO on Motor Module selected STO on Motor Module active SS1 delay time on Motor Module active Safe Brake Adapter feedback signal SBC requested SS1 selected on the Motor Module (Basic Functions) SS1 active on the Motor Module (Basic Functions) STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active STOP A active STOP F active STO cause: Safety comm. mode STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Functions) STO cause: selection via SMM STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Functions) SS1 cause selection terminal (Basic Functions) SS1 cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Functions) Slave Motor Module ready for communication 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP 2810 2810 2810 2814 2814 - Yes No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No 2802 2802 2802 - Yes Yes No No - Yes No - Yes No - Yes No - Dependency: Refer to: r9772 Notice: If communication between the Control Unit and the Motor Module is interrupted (e.g. by switching off the Motor Module), this display parameter is no longer updated. The last transferred status of the Motor Module is displayed. Note: Re bit 00: When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 18 and in bit 20. Re bit 05: When SS1 is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 22 and 23. Re bit 18: When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe or Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring Re bit 22, 23: These bits show via which path the SS1 was triggered, i.e. what has started the SS1 delay time. If the SS1 delay time is not started (e.g. because an STO is triggered at the same time), neither of the two bits is set. Re bit 24: Only for parallel connection and active motion monitoring functions: Slave Motor Module ready for communication r9880 SI monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module) / SI monitor_clck MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [ms] Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Description: Displays the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions on the Motor Module. Dependency: Refer to: r0110, p0115, r9780 1-904 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9881[0...11] SI Motion Sensor Module Node Identifier second channel / SI Mtn SM Ident VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the Node Identifier of the Sensor Module that the second channel uses for the motion monitoring functions. r9890[0...2] SI version (Sensor Module) / SI version SM VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version on the Sensor Module. Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release) [1] = Safety Version (minor release) [2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch) Dependency: Refer to: r9770, r9870 Note: Example: r9890[0] = 2, r9890[1] = 3, r9890[2] = 1 --> Safety-Version V02.03.01 r9894[0...19] VECTOR_G Description: SI crosswise comparison list (Motor Module) / SI CDC_list MM Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays the number of the data that are being presently compared crosswise on the Motor Module. The content of the list of crosswise-compared data is dependent upon the particular application. Dependency: Refer to: r9794 Note: Example: r9894[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle) r9894[1] = 2 (enable safety functions) r9894[2] = 3 (F-DI changeover, tolerance time) ... The complete list of numbers for crosswise data comparison is listed in Fault F30611. r9895 SI diagnostics STOP F (Motor Module) / SI diag STOP F MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2802 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of the cross-compared data which has caused STOP F on the Motor Module. Dependency: Refer to: r9795 Refer to: F30611 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-905 Parameters List of parameters Note: The complete list of numbers for crosswise data comparison is listed in Fault F30611. p9897 SI Motion pulse suppression failsafe delay time (MM) / SI Mtn IL t_del MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [s] Max 800000.00 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the pulse suppression after bus failure via failsafe values on the Motor Module (e.g. used for ESR). Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: ESR: Extended Stop and Retract r9898 SI actual checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI act_checksum MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2800 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Motor Module (actual checksum). Dependency: Refer to: r9798, p9899 p9899 SI reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI set_checksum MM VECTOR_G Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2800 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Motor Module (reference checksum). Dependency: Refer to: p9799, r9898 r9900 Actual topology number of indices / Act topo indices CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the number of indices of the actual topology. Dependency: Refer to: r9901 Note: Only for internal Siemens use. The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software. 1-906 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9901[0...n] Actual topology / Act topo CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: r9900 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual topology of the drive unit. The actual topology is sub-divided into several sections. Each of the following data is saved under an index. General data on the topology: - version - attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology - number of components Data on a component: - type component of the node ID of the component - number of DRIVE-CLiQ sockets in the Node Identifier - manufacturer and version of the Node Identifier - serial number of the Node Identifier (4 indices) - index of the component - order number (8 indices) - attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology of the component - communications address - number of port types - port type - number of ports of the port type - communications address of the associated/linked component - number of the associated/linked port - communications address of the associated/linked component - number of the associated port, etc. Data on the next component: - etc. Dependency: Refer to: r9900 Note: Only for internal Siemens use. The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software. p9902 Target topology number of indices / TargetTopo indices CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 1 Max 65535 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the number of target topology indices. Dependency: Refer to: p9903 Note: Only for internal Siemens use. The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-907 Parameters List of parameters p9903[0...n] Target topology / Target topo CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: p9902 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the target topology of the drive unit. The target topology is sub-divided into several sections. Each of the following data is saved under an index. General data on the topology: - version - attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology - number of components Data on a component: - type component of the Node Identifier of the component - number of DRIVE-CLiQ sockets in the Node Identifier - manufacturer and version of the Node Identifier - serial number of the Node Identifier (4 indices) - index of the component - order number (8 indices) - attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology of the component - component number - number of port types - port type - number of ports of the port type - component number of the associated/linked component - number of the associated/linked port - component number of the associated/linked component - number of the associated port, etc. Data on the next component: - etc. Dependency: Refer to: p9902 Note: The target topology can only be modified using the commissioning software. The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software. Changes only become effective when the state of p0009 = 101 changes to 0 or 111. p9904 Topology comparison, acknowledge differences / Topo_compare ackn CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: If, when comparing the actual topology and target topology, only error has occurred, that can be acknowledged, then using this parameter, a new comparison can be started - acknowledging the error in the target topology. Differences that can be acknowledged: - topology comparison, component shifted - topology comparison, serial number of a component has been detected to be different (byte 3 = 1) - topology comparison shows one component that is connected differently 1-908 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters The following parameter values are available: p9904 = 1 --> the procedure is started. p9904 = 0 after starting --> the procedure has been successfully completed. p9904 = 1 after starting --> the procedure has not been successfully completed. The possible causes for an unsuccessful procedure are located in bytes 4, 3, 2. Byte 2: Number of structural differences. Byte 3: Number of differences that can be acknowledged (p9904). Byte 4: Number of differences. These differences can be resolved as follows: - sets the topology comparison (p9906 or p9907/p9908). - change over the actual topology. The appropriate action should be selected corresponding to the message that is displayed/output. Note: In order to permanently accept the acknowledgement of the fault that can be resolved, then it must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0977). p9905 Device specialization / Specialization CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description: With p9905 = 1, the serial numbers and the hardware versions of all of the components are transferred from the actual topology into the target topology and a new comparison is started. For this device specialization, the components of the target topology may only differ from those of the actual topology by the serial numbers. With p9905 = 2, the serial numbers, the hardware versions and the order numbers of all of the components are transferred from the actual topology into the target topology and a new comparison is started. For this device specialization, the components of the target topology may only differ from those of the actual topology by the serial numbers and order numbers. Note: p9905 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation. In order to permanently accept the data, it is necessary to save in a non-volatile fashion (p0977). p9906 Topology comparison, comparison stage of all components / Topo_cmpr tot comp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 99 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the type of comparison between the actual topology and target topology. The comparison is started by setting the required value. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 99: High: Compares the complete electronic rating plate Average: Compares the component type and the Order number Low: Compares the component type Minimum: Compares the component class Topology has different comparison stages Note: The electronic rating plate comprises the following data: - component type (e.g. "SMC20") - Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0") - manufacturer (e.g. SIEMENS) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-909 Parameters List of parameters - hardware version (e.g. "A") - Serial No. (e.g. "T-P30050495") When comparing the topology, the following data is compared in the target and actual topologies: p9906 = 0: Component type, Order No., Hardware version, Manufacturer, Serial No. p9906 = 1: Component type, Order No. p9906 = 2: Component type p9906 = 3: Component class (e.g. Sensor Module or Motor Module) p9907 Topology comparison, comparison stage of the component number / Topo_cmpr comp_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 Description: Enters the number of the component where the setting of how the actual topology should be compared to the target topology should be changed. Dependency: Refer to: p9908 p9908 Topology comparison, comparison stage of a component / Topo_cmpr 1 comp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 99 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the type of comparison of a component in the target topology with the actual topology. The comparison is started by setting the required value. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 99: High: Compares the complete electronic rating plate Average: Compares the component type and the Order number Low: Compares the component type Minimum: Compares the component class Topology has different comparison stages Dependency: Refer to: p9907 Note: The electronic rating plate comprises the following data: - component type (e.g. "SMC20") - Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0") - manufacturer (e.g. SIEMENS) - hardware version (e.g. "A") - Serial No. (e.g. "T-P30050495") When comparing the topology, the following data is compared in the target and actual topologies: p9908 = 0: Component type, Order No., Hardware version, Manufacturer, Serial No. p9908 = 1: Component type, Order No. p9908 = 2: Component type p9908 = 3: Component class (e.g. Sensor Module or Motor Module) 1-910 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p9909 Topology comparison, component replacement / Topo_cmpr replace CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: For p9909 = 1, the serial number and the hardware version of the new replaced component is automatically transferred from the actual topology into the target topology and then saved in a non-volatile fashion. For the components that have been replaced, the electronic rating plate must match as far as the following data is concerned: - component type (e.g. "SMC20") - Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0") For p9909 = 0, serial numbers and hardware versions are not automatically transferred. In this case, the transfer must be made using p9904. Dependency: Refer to: p9904, p9905 Note: The modified target topology is automatically saved in a non-volatile fashion when the drive object runs-up (e.g. after a POWER ON). Special case for Control Unit and option slot modules: When replacing these components, independent of p9909, the serial number and hardware version are automatically transferred and saved in a non-volatile fashion. p9910 Transfer additional components into the target topology / Transfer comp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 1 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 0 Description: Transfer additional inserted DRIVE-CLiQ components into the target topology and add the appropriate drive objects to the project. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: p9911[0...3] Insert drive object / Drv_obj insert CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description: No selection Drive object type SERVO Drive object type VECTOR SINAMICS GM (DFEMV & VECTORMV) SINAMICS SM (AFEMV & VECTORMV) SINAMICS GL (VECTORGL) SINAMICS SL (VECTORSL) New drive objects can be created using this parameter. Index 0: The values 2 ... 62 are permissible. Index 1: Number of the drive object type (e.g. 11 for type SERVO). Index 2: Function modules defined for the drive object. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-911 Parameters List of parameters Index 3: = 0: Ready. = 1: Reset (only indices 0 ... 3). = 2: Reset all (indices 0 ... 3 and flagged entries). = 3: Check and flag for insertion. Index: [0] = Drive object number [1] = Drive object type [2] = Drive object function module [3] = Reset or check and flag for insertion Note: Only for internal Siemens use. The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software. p9912[0...1] Delete drive object / Drv_obj delete CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(3) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 62 Factory setting 0 Description: Drive objects can be deleted using this parameter. Index 0: The values 2 ... 62 are permissible. Index 1: = 0: Ready. = 1: Reset (only indices 0 and 1) = 2: Reset all (indices 0 and 1 and flagged entries). = 3: Check and flag for deletion. = 30: Check and flag for deletion. Keep target topology. Index: [0] = Drive object number [1] = Reset or check and flag for deletion Note: Only for internal Siemens use. The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software. p9913[0...2] Change drive object number / Change drv_obj_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(4) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 62 Factory setting 0 Description: Existing drive objects can be assigned new numbers using these parameters. Index 0: The values 2 ... 62 are permissible. Index 1: The values 2 ... 62 are permissible. Index 2: = 0: Ready. = 1: Reset (only indices 0 ... 2). = 2: Reset all (indices 0 ... 2 and flagged entries). = 3: Check and flag for modification. Index: [0] = Drive object number old [1] = Drive object number new [2] = Reset or check and flag for modification 1-912 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: Only for internal Siemens use. The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software. p9914[0...2] Change component number / Change comp_no CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1 Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 Description: You can change the number of topology components using this parameter. Index 0: The values 2 ... 199 are permissible. Index 1: The values 2 ... 199 are permissible. Index 2: = 0: Ready. = 1: Reset (only indices 0 ... 2). = 2: Reset all (indices 0 ... 2 and flagged entries). = 3: Check and flag for modification. Index: [0] = Component number old [1] = Component number new [2] = Reset or check and flag for modification Note: Only for internal Siemens use. The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software. p9915 DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master / DLQ fault master CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 0007 07FF hex Factory setting 0007 02FF hex Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes. p9916 DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave / DLQ fault slave CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max 0007 07FF hex Factory setting 0007 02FF hex Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes. p9917[0...1] Delete component / Delete comp CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(30) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 199 Factory setting 0 Description: Excessive components that have not been assigned can be removed from the component target topology using this parameter. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-913 Parameters List of parameters Index 0: The values 2 ... 199 are permissible. Index 1: = 0: Ready. = 1: Reset (only indices 0 and 1) = 2: Reset all (indices 0 and 1 and flagged entries). = 3: Check and flag for deletion. Index: [0] = Component number [1] = Reset or check and flag for deletion Note: Only for internal Siemens use. The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software. p9920[0...99] Licensing, enter license key / Enter license key CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Enters the license key for this drive unit. Example of the license key: EACZ-QBCA = 69 65 67 90 45 81 66 67 65 dec (ASCII characters) Index 0 = license key character 1 (e.g. 69 dec) Index 1 = license key character 2 (e.g. 65 dec) ... Index 8 = license key character 9 (e.g. 65 dec) Index 9 = license key character 10 (e.g. 0 dec) ... Dependency: Refer to: r7843, p9921 Refer to: A13000, A13001, F13010 Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. With the STARTER commissioning software, ASCII characters are not entered coded, i.e. the characters of the license key can be entered as printed in the Certificate of License. In this case, STARTER codes the characters. Note: For an invalid license key, all the indices have the value 0 dec. Only the ASCII characters contained in a license key can be entered ("1" to "9", "A" to "H", "K" to "N", "P" to "Z" as well as "-"). When manually changing p9920[x] to the value 0 dec, all the values of all the following indices are also set to 0 dec. After entering the license key, the license key must be activated (p9921). If the licensing is not adequate, then the following alarm is displayed together with LED: - A13000 --> licensing not sufficient - LED READY --> flashes green/red with 0.5 Hz p9921 Licensing, activate license key / Act license key CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description: Activates the entered license key. The following is executed when activating the license key. - the checksum of the entered license key is checked. 1-914 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters - the entered license key is saved in a non-volatile fashion on the memory card. - re-enter the license key. Value: 0: 1: Inactive Activate start license key Dependency: Refer to: p9920 Refer to: A13000, A13001, F13010 Note: Before activation, the license key entered using parameter p9920 is checked. If this check identifies an error, activation is rejected. In this case, writing a 1 to p9921 is rejected. When the license key has been activated, p9921 is automatically set to 0. r9925[0...99] Firmware file incorrect / FW file incorr CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the directory and name of the file whose status as shipped from the factory was identified as impermissible. Dependency: Refer to: r9926 Refer to: A01016 Note: The directory and name of the file is displayed in the ASCII code. r9926 Firmware check status / FW check status CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status when the firmware is checked when the system is booted. 0: Firmware not yet checked. 1: Check running. 2: Check successfully completed. 3: Check indicates an error. Dependency: Refer to: r9925 Refer to: A01016 p9930[0...8] System logbook activation / SYSLOG activation CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Only for service purposes. Index: [0] = System logbook stage (0: Not active) [1] = COM2/COM1 (0: COM2, 1: COM1) [2] = Activate file write (0: Not active) [3] = Display time stamp (0: Not displayed) [4...7] = Reserved [8] = System logbook file size (stages, each 10 kB) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-915 Parameters List of parameters Notice: Before powering down the Control Unit, ensure that the system logbook is switched out (p9930[0] = 0). If writing to the file is activated (p9930[2] = 1), writing to the file must be de-activated again before switching off the Control Unit (p9930[2] = 0) in order to ensure that the system logbook has been completely written to the file. p9931[0...129] System logbook module selection / SYSLOG mod select. CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Only for service purposes. p9932 Save system logbook EEPROM / SYSLOG EEPROM save CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Only for service purposes. r9935.0 BO: POWER ON delay signal / POWER ON t_delay CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: After power-on, binector output r9935.0 is set with the start of the first sampling time and is again reset after approx. 100 ms. Bit field: Bit 00 p9941 Target topology feature delete all components / Feature delete CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: C1(1) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: - Description: Signal name POWER ON delay signal 1 signal High 0 signal Low Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 FP - For p9941 =1, the serial numbers of all components in the target topology are deleted (zero is written). Through activation and de-activation this enables the actual topology components to be newly assigned to the target topology components. Note: p9941 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation. A warm restart is triggered automatically after p0009 = 0. 1-916 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9975[0...7] System utilization measured / Sys util meas CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the measured system utilization. Index: [0] = Computing time utilization (min) [1] = Computing time utilization (averaged) [2] = Computing time utilization (max) [3] = Largest total utilization (min) [4] = Largest total utilization (averaged) [5] = Largest total utilization (max) [6] = Reserved [7] = Reserved Dependency: Refer to: r9976, r9979, r9980, r9981 The higher the value displayed, the higher the system utilization. Refer to: F01054, F01205 Note: Re index 3 ... 5: The total utilizations are determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilizations are mapped here. The sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979. Total utilization: Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts). r9976[0...7] System utilization / Sys util CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the system utilization. If the utilization is greater than 100%, fault F01054 is output. Index: [0] = Reserved [1] = Computing time utilization [2] = Reserved [3] = Reserved [4] = Reserved [5] = Largest total utilization [6] = Reserved [7] = Reserved Dependency: Refer to: r9979, r9980 Refer to: F01054, F01205 Note: Re index 1: The value shows the total computing time load of the system. Re index 5: The total utilization is determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilization is mapped here. The sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979. Total utilization: Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-917 Parameters List of parameters r9979 Sampling time with largest total utilization / t_sampl lg total CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [s] Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Description: Displays the sampling time with the largest total utilization. Dependency: Refer to: r7901, r9976 Refer to: F01054 Note: The largest total utilization is displayed in r9976[5]. Total utilization: Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts). r9980[0...101] Sampling times utilization calculated / t_sampl util calc CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the calculated utilizations for the active sampling times based on the existing target topology. Index: [0] = Net utilization 0 [1] = Total utilization 0 [2] = Net utilization 1 [3] = Total utilization 1 [4] = Net utilization 2 [5] = Total utilization 2 [6] = Net utilization 3 [7] = Total utilization 3 [8] = Net utilization 4 [9] = Total utilization 4 [10] = Net utilization 5 [11] = Total utilization 5 [12] = Net utilization 6 [13] = Total utilization 6 [14] = Net utilization 7 [15] = Total utilization 7 [16] = Net utilization 8 [17] = Total utilization 8 [18] = Net utilization 9 [19] = Total utilization 9 [20] = Net utilization 10 [21] = Total utilization 10 [22] = Net utilization 11 [23] = Total utilization 11 [24] = Net utilization 12 [25] = Total utilization 12 [26] = Net utilization 13 [27] = Total utilization 13 [28] = Net utilization 14 [29] = Total utilization 14 [30] = Net utilization 15 [31] = Total utilization 15 [32] = Net utilization 16 [33] = Total utilization 16 [34] = Net utilization 17 [35] = Total utilization 17 1-918 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [36] = Net utilization 18 [37] = Total utilization 18 [38] = Net utilization 19 [39] = Total utilization 19 [40] = Net utilization 20 [41] = Total utilization 20 [42] = Net utilization 21 [43] = Total utilization 21 [44] = Net utilization 22 [45] = Total utilization 22 [46] = Net utilization 23 [47] = Total utilization 23 [48] = Net utilization 24 [49] = Total utilization 24 [50] = Net utilization 25 [51] = Total utilization 25 [52] = Net utilization 26 [53] = Total utilization 26 [54] = Net utilization 27 [55] = Total utilization 27 [56] = Net utilization 28 [57] = Total utilization 28 [58] = Net utilization 29 [59] = Total utilization 29 [60] = Net utilization 30 [61] = Total utilization 30 [62] = Net utilization 31 [63] = Total utilization 31 [64] = Net utilization 32 [65] = Total utilization 32 [66] = Net utilization 33 [67] = Total utilization 33 [68] = Net utilization 34 [69] = Total utilization 34 [70] = Net utilization 35 [71] = Total utilization 35 [72] = Net utilization 36 [73] = Total utilization 36 [74] = Net utilization 37 [75] = Total utilization 37 [76] = Net utilization 38 [77] = Total utilization 38 [78] = Net utilization 39 [79] = Total utilization 39 [80] = Net utilization 40 [81] = Total utilization 40 [82] = Net utilization 41 [83] = Total utilization 41 [84] = Net utilization 42 [85] = Total utilization 42 [86] = Net utilization 43 [87] = Total utilization 43 [88] = Net utilization 44 [89] = Total utilization 44 [90] = Net utilization 45 [91] = Total utilization 45 [92] = Net utilization 46 [93] = Total utilization 46 [94] = Net utilization 47 [95] = Total utilization 47 [96] = Net utilization 48 [97] = Total utilization 48 [98] = Net utilization 49 [99] = Total utilization 49 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-919 Parameters List of parameters [100] = Net utilization 50 [101] = Total utilization 50 Dependency: Refer to: r7901, r9976, r9979 Refer to: F01054 Note: The corresponding sampling times can be read out in parameter r7901. Net utilization: Computing time load that is only called by the sampling time involved. Total utilization: Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts). r9981[0...101] Sampling times utilization measured / t_sampl util meas CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the utilizations measured for the active sampling times. Index: [0] = Net utilization 0 [1] = Total utilization 0 [2] = Net utilization 1 [3] = Total utilization 1 [4] = Net utilization 2 [5] = Total utilization 2 [6] = Net utilization 3 [7] = Total utilization 3 [8] = Net utilization 4 [9] = Total utilization 4 [10] = Net utilization 5 [11] = Total utilization 5 [12] = Net utilization 6 [13] = Total utilization 6 [14] = Net utilization 7 [15] = Total utilization 7 [16] = Net utilization 8 [17] = Total utilization 8 [18] = Net utilization 9 [19] = Total utilization 9 [20] = Net utilization 10 [21] = Total utilization 10 [22] = Net utilization 11 [23] = Total utilization 11 [24] = Net utilization 12 [25] = Total utilization 12 [26] = Net utilization 13 [27] = Total utilization 13 [28] = Net utilization 14 [29] = Total utilization 14 [30] = Net utilization 15 [31] = Total utilization 15 [32] = Net utilization 16 [33] = Total utilization 16 [34] = Net utilization 17 [35] = Total utilization 17 [36] = Net utilization 18 [37] = Total utilization 18 [38] = Net utilization 19 [39] = Total utilization 19 [40] = Net utilization 20 [41] = Total utilization 20 1-920 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters [42] = Net utilization 21 [43] = Total utilization 21 [44] = Net utilization 22 [45] = Total utilization 22 [46] = Net utilization 23 [47] = Total utilization 23 [48] = Net utilization 24 [49] = Total utilization 24 [50] = Net utilization 25 [51] = Total utilization 25 [52] = Net utilization 26 [53] = Total utilization 26 [54] = Net utilization 27 [55] = Total utilization 27 [56] = Net utilization 28 [57] = Total utilization 28 [58] = Net utilization 29 [59] = Total utilization 29 [60] = Net utilization 30 [61] = Total utilization 30 [62] = Net utilization 31 [63] = Total utilization 31 [64] = Net utilization 32 [65] = Total utilization 32 [66] = Net utilization 33 [67] = Total utilization 33 [68] = Net utilization 34 [69] = Total utilization 34 [70] = Net utilization 35 [71] = Total utilization 35 [72] = Net utilization 36 [73] = Total utilization 36 [74] = Net utilization 37 [75] = Total utilization 37 [76] = Net utilization 38 [77] = Total utilization 38 [78] = Net utilization 39 [79] = Total utilization 39 [80] = Net utilization 40 [81] = Total utilization 40 [82] = Net utilization 41 [83] = Total utilization 41 [84] = Net utilization 42 [85] = Total utilization 42 [86] = Net utilization 43 [87] = Total utilization 43 [88] = Net utilization 44 [89] = Total utilization 44 [90] = Net utilization 45 [91] = Total utilization 45 [92] = Net utilization 46 [93] = Total utilization 46 [94] = Net utilization 47 [95] = Total utilization 47 [96] = Net utilization 48 [97] = Total utilization 48 [98] = Net utilization 49 [99] = Total utilization 49 [100] = Net utilization 50 [101] = Total utilization 50 Dependency: Refer to: r7901, r9975, r9980 Refer to: F01054 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-921 Parameters List of parameters Note: The corresponding sampling times can be read out in parameter r7901. Net utilization: Computing time load that is only called by the sampling time involved. Total utilization: Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts). r9982[0...4] Data memory utilization / Mem_util dat_mem CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the calculated data memory utilization rates based on the existing target topology. Index: [0] = Fast data memory 1 [1] = Fast data memory 2 [2] = Fast data memory 3 [3] = Fast data memory 4 [4] = Reserved Dependency: Refer to: F01068 r9983[0...4] Measured data memory utilization (actual load) / Mem_ut dat_mem ms CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the measured data memory utilization rates based on the existing target topology. Index: [0] = Fast Memory 1 [1] = Fast Memory 2 [2] = Fast Memory 3 [3] = Fast Memory 4 [4] = Heap Dependency: Refer to: F01068 r9984[0...4] Data memory utilization OA / Mem_ut dat_mem OA CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the utilization of the data memory by OA applications. Index: [0] = Fast Memory 1 [1] = Fast Memory 2 [2] = Fast Memory 3 [3] = Fast Memory 4 [4] = Reserved Dependency: Refer to: F01068 1-922 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r9986[0...7] DRIVE-CLiQ system load / DQ system load CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the calculated DRIVE-CLiQ system load based on the existing target topology. The values are not made available until the RUNUP READY (800) state is adopted (see p3988). Index 0 ... 7 corresponds to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 ... X107. Dependency: Refer to: F01340 r9987[0...7] DRIVE-CLiQ bandwidth load / DQ bandw load CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the calculated DRIVE-CLiQ bandwidth load based on the existing target topology. The values are not made available until the RUNUP READY (800) state is adopted (see p3988). Index 0 ... 7 corresponds to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 ... X107. Dependency: Refer to: F01340 r9988[0...7] DRIVE-CLiQ DPRAM load / DQ DPRAM load CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - [%] Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Description: Displays the calculated DRIVE-CLiQ DPRAM load based on the existing target topology. The values are not made available until the RUNUP READY (800) state is adopted (see p3988). Index 0 ... 7 corresponds to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 ... X107. Dependency: Refer to: F01340 p9990 DO memory usage actual value determination selection / Mem_use ActVal sel CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: U, T Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description: The meaning of the parameter differs for reading and writing. Read: - Returns the number of memory areas monitored. Write: - Memory usage of a drive object: Enter drive object number - Memory usage of the complete system: Enter value 65535 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-923 Parameters List of parameters r9991[0...4] Memory usage drive object actual value / Mem_use DO ActVal CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the memory usage for each drive object as actual value. Index: [0] = Fast Memory 1 [1] = Fast Memory 2 [2] = Fast Memory 3 [3] = Fast Memory 4 [4] = Heap r9992[0...4] Memory usage drive object reference value / Mem_use DO ref val CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the memory usage for each drive object as reference value. Index: [0] = Fast Memory 1 [1] = Fast Memory 2 [2] = Fast Memory 3 [3] = Fast Memory 4 [4] = Heap r9993[0...4] Memory usage OA application / Mem_use OA CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the memory usage of an OA application. Index: [0] = Fast Memory 1 [1] = Fast Memory 2 [2] = Fast Memory 3 [3] = Fast Memory 4 [4] = Heap r9999[0...99] Software error internal supplementary diagnostics / SW_err int diag CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Diagnostics parameter to display additional information for internal software errors. Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. 1-924 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p10000 SI sampling time / SI t_sample TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.00 [ms] Max 25.00 [ms] Factory setting 12.00 [ms] Description: Sets the sampling time for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Note: The sampling time in p10000 must be identical to the monitoring clock cycle in p9500/p9300 on the drives. p10001 SI delay time for test stop at DO 0 ... DO 3 / SI t_delay DO TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 2.00 [ms] Max 2000.00 [ms] Factory setting 500.00 [ms] Description: Sets the delay time for testing the digital outputs 0 ... 3 (DO 0 ... DO 3). Within this time, for a forced checking procedure of the digital outputs, the signal must have been detected via the corresponding readback input (p10047). Dependency: Refer to: p10003, p10007, p10041, p10046 Note: The delay time must be set to a value greater than the debounce time (p10017). p10002 SI discrepancy monitoring time / SI discrep t_monit TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2850, 2851 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.00 [ms] Max 2000.00 [ms] Factory setting 500.00 [ms] Description: Sets the monitoring time for the discrepancy for the digital inputs. The signal states at the two associated digital inputs (F-DI) must assume the same state within this monitoring time. Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input p10003 SI forced checking procedure timer / SI FCP Timer TM54F_MA Description: Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2848 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0.00 [h] Max 8760.00 [h] Factory setting 8.00 [h] Sets the time to carry out the forced checking procedure (test stop). Within the parameterized time, the digital inputs/outputs must must have been subject to a forced checking procedure at least once. The forced checking procedure is started with BI: p10007 = 0/1 signal. Dependency: Refer to: p10001, p10007, p10046 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-925 Parameters List of parameters r10004[0...1] SI actual checksum TM54F parameters / SI act CRC TM54F TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2847 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the actual checksum of the checksum-checked parameters for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Index: [0] = Checksum HW-independent TM54F parameters [1] = Checksum HW-dependent TM54F parameters (MM) p10005[0...1] SI reference checksum TM54F parameters / SI ref CRC TM54F TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2847 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Displays the reference checksum of the checksum-checked parameters for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Index: [0] = Checksum HW-independent TM54F parameters [1] = Checksum HW-dependent TM54F parameters (MM) p10006 SI acknowledgement internal event input terminal / SI ackn int event TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Select a fail-safe digital input for the signal "acknowledge internal event" (internal fault). The signal is transferred to the corresponding control signal of all drives. The falling edge at this input resets the status "internal event" in the drives. The rising edge at this input acknowledges any existing discrepancy errors. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact Dependency: Refer to: A35081 Note: The values "static active" and "static inactive" result in an inactive function of the safe acknowledgment. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input 1-926 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p10007 TM54F_MA Description: BI: SI forced checking procedure F-DI/F-DO signal source / FCP F-DI/DO s_src Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2848 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0 Sets the signal source to initiate the test stop. For example, a digital input of the Control Unit or one of the other Terminal Modules can be set as signal source. The test stop is triggered on a 0/1 signal edge. The TM54F must be in the "ready" state (p0010 = 0). Dependency: Refer to: p10001, p10003, p10041, p10046 Notice: Digital inputs of the TM54F must not be used to trigger the test stop. p10008 SI operating mode TM54F / SI op_mode TM54F TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the operating mode for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Value: 0: 1: Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported. p10009 SI SLP retract F-DI / SI SLP retr F-DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 10 Factory setting 0 Description: Function interface Control interface Selects a fail-safe digital input for the "Retract SLP" function. A rising edge at this FDI makes it possible to retract the axes, which at this instant in time indicate a violation of the SLP limit. After safe acknowledgment of the active safety faults, the axes can be traversed in the direction of the permitted position range. In the retract mode, SLP becomes inactive, and SDI, if enabled, is selected in the direction of the permitted position range. A 0 signal at the F-DI for retraction deactivates the active retract mode. (SLP becomes active again and SDI corresponds to the actual F-DIs that have been selected.) Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: Function inactive F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-927 Parameters List of parameters Note: - Retraction is only possible, if SDI in the opposite direction of the permitted position range is not already selected. - A discrepancy at this F-DI must be acknowledged using a safe acknowledgment. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SLP: Safely-Limited Position p10010[0...5] SI drive object assignment / SI drv_obj assign TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2847, 2848 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 62 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the drive object number for the drives that are available. Index: [0] = Drive 1 [1] = Drive 2 [2] = Drive 3 [3] = Drive 4 [4] = Drive 5 [5] = Drive 6 Notice: If, for a drive, Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is activated (p9601.2 = 1), its drive object number must be set in an index. Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. p10011[0...5] SI drive group assignment / SI drv_gr assign TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2848 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1 Max 4 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the drive group for the drives that are available. A drive group is a combination of several drives with the same types of behavior. Index: [0] = Drive 1 [1] = Drive 2 [2] = Drive 3 [3] = Drive 4 [4] = Drive 5 [5] = Drive 6 p10012[0...5] SI Motor Module Node Identifier Word 1 / SI MM Node ID 1 TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the actual Node Identifier (word 1, bit 0 ... 31) for the Motor Modules. Index: [0] = Drive 1 [1] = Drive 2 [2] = Drive 3 [3] = Drive 4 [4] = Drive 5 [5] = Drive 6 Dependency: Refer to: p10013, p10014 1-928 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Note: The Node Identifier (96 bit) is represented in the following 3 parameters. p10012[0] word 1 (bit 0 ... 31) for Motor Module 1 ... p10012[5] word 1 (bit 0 ... 31) for Motor Module 6 p10013[0] word 2 (bit 32 ... 63) for Motor Module 1 ... p10013[5] word 2 (bit 32 ... 63) for Motor Module 6 p10014[0] word 3 (bit 64 ... 95) for Motor Module 1 ... p10014[5] word 3 (bit 64 ... 95) for Motor Module 6 p10013[0...5] SI Motor Module Node Identifier Word 2 / SI MM Node ID 2 TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the actual Node Identifier (word 2, bit 32 ... 63) for the Motor Modules. Index: [0] = Drive 1 [1] = Drive 2 [2] = Drive 3 [3] = Drive 4 [4] = Drive 5 [5] = Drive 6 Dependency: Refer to: p10012, p10014 Note: The complete Node Identifier (96 bit) is represented in p10012, p10013 and p10014. p10014[0...5] SI Motor Module Node Identifier Word 3 / SI MM Node ID 3 TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Sets the actual Node Identifier (word 3, bit 64 ... 95) for the Motor Modules. Index: [0] = Drive 1 [1] = Drive 2 [2] = Drive 3 [3] = Drive 4 [4] = Drive 5 [5] = Drive 6 Dependency: Refer to: p10012, p10013 Note: The complete Node Identifier (96 bit) is represented in p10012, p10013 and p10014. p10017 SI digital inputs debounce time / SI DI t_debounce TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 1.00 [ms] Max 100.00 [ms] Factory setting 1.00 [ms] Description: Sets the debounce time for digital inputs. The debounce time is accepted rounded off to whole milliseconds. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-929 Parameters List of parameters The debounce time acts on the following digital inputs: - Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI). - Single-channel digital inputs (DI). Note: Example: Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed. Debounce time = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed. The debounce result can be read in r10051. p10020[0...3] SI special operating mode selection / SI spec op sel TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description: Sets the special operating mode for the operating mode "function interface". 0 = Inactive 1 = Safe Operating Stop with braking (SS2) 2 = Safe Operating Stop without braking (SOS) 3 = Safely reduced speed without standstill (SLS) 4 = Safely reduced speed with agreement (SS2 --> SLS) Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Dependency: Refer to: p10008 Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported. SLS: Safely-Limited Speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop SS2: Safe Stop 2 p10021[0...3] SI Emergency Stop stop response / SI Emergency Stop TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the stop response for the drive group for Emergency Stop. The input terminal for Emergency Stop is set in p10038. 0 = Stop reaction STO 1 = Stop reaction SS1 2 = Stop reaction SS2 Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Dependency: Refer to: p10008, p10038 Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported. 1-930 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p10022[0...3] SI STO input terminal / SI STO DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for the "STO" function (operating mode "control interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: If value = 0: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact No terminal assigned, safety function always active. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input STO: Safe Torque Off p10023[0...3] SI SS1 input terminal / SI SS1 DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for SS1 (operating mode "control interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-931 Parameters List of parameters Note: If value = 0: No terminal assigned, safety function always active. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SS1: Safe Stop 1 p10024[0...3] SI SS2 input terminal / SI SS2 DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for SS2 (operating mode "control interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: If value = 0: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact No terminal assigned, safety function always active. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SS2: Safe Stop 2 p10025[0...3] SI SOS input terminal / SI SOS DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SOS" function (operating mode = control interface). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 1-932 Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 10: 255: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: If value = 0: No terminal assigned, safety function always active. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SOS: Safe Operating Stop p10026[0...3] SI SLS input terminal / SI SLS DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for SLS (operating mode "control interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: If value = 0: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact No terminal assigned, safety function always active. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SLS: Safely-Limited Speed p10027[0...3] SI SLS limit bit 0 input terminal / SI SLS lim 0 DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for SLS limit bit 0 (operating mode "control interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-933 Parameters List of parameters 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: If value = 0: No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "0". If value = 255: No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "1". F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SLS: Safely-Limited Speed p10028[0...3] SI SLS limit bit 1 input terminal / SI SLS lim 1 DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for SLS limit bit 1 (operating mode "control interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: If value = 0: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "0". If value = 255: No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "1". F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SLS: Safely-Limited Speed 1-934 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p10030[0...3] SI SDI positive input terminal / SI SDI pos DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for SDI positive (operating mode "control interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: If value = 0: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact No terminal assigned, safety function always active. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) p10031[0...3] SI SDI negative input terminal / SI SDI neg DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for SDI negative (operating mode "control interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-935 Parameters List of parameters Note: If value = 0: No terminal assigned, safety function always active. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) p10032[0...3] SI SLP input terminal / SI SLP F-DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for the "SLP" function Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: If value = 0: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact No terminal assigned, safety function always active. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SLP: Safely-Limited Position p10033[0...3] SI SLP select input terminal / SI SLP sel F-DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for selecting the position area for "SLP". Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 1-936 Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 10: 255: F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: If value = 0: No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "0". If value = 255: No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "1". F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SLP: Safely-Limited Position p10036[0...3] SI special operating mode input terminal / SI spec op DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for "special operating mode" (operating mode "function interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported. Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact If value = 0: No terminal assigned, static special operation. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, static normal operation. p10037[0...3] SI agreement input terminal / SI agreement DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for "agreement" (operating mode "function interface"). Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-937 Parameters List of parameters 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported. If value = 0: No terminal assigned, no static agreement. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, static agreement. p10038[0...3] SI Emergency Stop input terminal / SI Emer Stop DI TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 4 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the input terminal for input "Emergency Stop" (operating mode "function interface"). The behavior of this input signal is set in p10021. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 255: Statically active F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6) F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7) F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7) F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8) F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9) F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6) F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7) F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7) F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8) F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9) Statically inact Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Dependency: Refer to: p10008, p10021 Note: Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported. If value = 0: No terminal assigned, "Emergency Stop" statically active. If value = 255: No terminal assigned, no "Emergency Stop" statically active. 1-938 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters p10039[0...3] SI Safe State signal selection / SI Safe State Sel TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2856 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0001 bin Index: [0] = Drive group 1 [1] = Drive group 2 [2] = Drive group 3 [3] = Drive group 4 Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 p10040 SI F-DI input mode / SI F-DI inp_mode TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Signal name Power_removed SS1_active SS2_active SOS_active SLS_active SDI_pos_active SDI_neg_active SLP_active 1 signal Selected Selected Selected Selected Selected Selected Selected Selected 0 signal Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected Not selected FP - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description: Sets the input mode for the safety digital inputs (F-DI). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Note: Only an NC contact can be connected for the safety digital inputs not listed. p10041 SI F-DI enable for test / SI F-DI enab test TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2848 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Signal name F-DI 0, DI 1+ (X521.3) F-DI 1, DI 3+ (X521.5) F-DI 2, DI 5+ (X522.2) F-DI 3, DI 7+ (X522.4) F-DI 4, DI 9+ (X522.6) F-DI 5, DI 11+ (X531.3) F-DI 6, DI 13+ (X531.5) F-DI 7, DI 15+ (X532.2) F-DI 8, DI 17+ (X532.4) F-DI 9, DI 19+ (X532.6) 1 signal NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact 0 signal NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact FP 2850 2850 2850 2850 2850 2851 2851 2851 2851 2851 Description: Enable signal for the integration of F-DI in the test (forced checking procedure) of the sensor power supply. Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Signal name F-DI 0, power supply L1+ F-DI 1, power supply L1+ F-DI 2, power supply L1+ F-DI 3, power supply L1+ 1 signal Test active Test active Test active Test active (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 signal No test No test No test No test FP - 1-939 Parameters List of parameters 04 05 06 07 08 09 F-DI 4, power supply L1+ F-DI 5, power supply L2+ F-DI 6, power supply L2+ F-DI 7, power supply L2+ F-DI 8, power supply L2+ F-DI 9, power supply L2+ Test active Test active Test active Test active Test active Test active No test No test No test No test No test No test Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input p10042[0...5] SI F-DO 0 signal sources / SI F-DO 0 S_src TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2857 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 783 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal sources for F-DO 0. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 257: 258: 259: 260: 261: 262: 263: 264: 265: 266: 267: 268: 269: 270: 271: 513: 514: 515: 516: 517: 518: 519: 520: 521: 522: 523: 524: 525: - The 6 signal sources in p10042[0...5] are AND'ed and the result is output at F-DO 0. 1-940 No function Drive group 1 STO active Drive group 1 SS1 active Drive group 1 SS2 active Drive group 1 SOS active Drive group 1 SLS active Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 1 safe state Drive group 1 SOS selected Drive group 1 internal event Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 1 SDI positive active Drive group 1 SDI negative active Drive group 1 SLP active Drive group 1 active SLP area Drive group 2 STO active Drive group 2 SS1 active Drive group 2 SS2 active Drive group 2 SOS active Drive group 2 SLS active Drive group 2 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 2 safe state Drive group 2 SOS selected Drive group 2 internal event Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 2 SDI positive active Drive group 2 SDI negative active Drive group 2 SLP active Drive group 2 active SLP area Drive group 3 STO active Drive group 3 SS1 active Drive group 3 SS2 active Drive group 3 SOS active Drive group 3 SLS active Drive group 3 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 3 safe state Drive group 3 SOS selected Drive group 3 internal event Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 3 SDI positive active Drive group 3 SDI negative active (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 526: 527: 769: 770: 771: 772: 773: 774: 775: 776: 777: 778: 779: 780: 781: 782: 783: Drive group 3 SLP active Drive group 3 active SLP area Drive group 4 STO active Drive group 4 SS1 active Drive group 4 SS2 active Drive group 4 SOS active Drive group 4 SLS active Drive group 4 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 4 safe state Drive group 4 SOS selected Drive group 4 internal event Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 4 SDI positive active Drive group 4 SDI negative active Drive group 4 SLP active Drive group 4 active SLP area Index: [0] = AND logic operation input 1 [1] = AND logic operation input 2 [2] = AND logic operation input 3 [3] = AND logic operation input 4 [4] = AND logic operation input 5 [5] = AND logic operation input 6 Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output p10043[0...5] SI F-DO 1 signal sources / SI F-DO 1 S_src TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2857 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 783 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal sources for F-DO 1. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 257: 258: 259: 260: 261: 262: 263: 264: 265: 266: 267: The 6 signal sources in p10043[0...5] are AND'ed and the result is output at F-DO 1. No function Drive group 1 STO active Drive group 1 SS1 active Drive group 1 SS2 active Drive group 1 SOS active Drive group 1 SLS active Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 1 safe state Drive group 1 SOS selected Drive group 1 internal event Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 1 SDI positive active Drive group 1 SDI negative active Drive group 1 SLP active Drive group 1 active SLP area Drive group 2 STO active Drive group 2 SS1 active Drive group 2 SS2 active Drive group 2 SOS active Drive group 2 SLS active Drive group 2 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 2 safe state Drive group 2 SOS selected Drive group 2 internal event Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-941 Parameters List of parameters 268: 269: 270: 271: 513: 514: 515: 516: 517: 518: 519: 520: 521: 522: 523: 524: 525: 526: 527: 769: 770: 771: 772: 773: 774: 775: 776: 777: 778: 779: 780: 781: 782: 783: Drive group 2 SDI positive active Drive group 2 SDI negative active Drive group 2 SLP active Drive group 2 active SLP area Drive group 3 STO active Drive group 3 SS1 active Drive group 3 SS2 active Drive group 3 SOS active Drive group 3 SLS active Drive group 3 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 3 safe state Drive group 3 SOS selected Drive group 3 internal event Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 3 SDI positive active Drive group 3 SDI negative active Drive group 3 SLP active Drive group 3 active SLP area Drive group 4 STO active Drive group 4 SS1 active Drive group 4 SS2 active Drive group 4 SOS active Drive group 4 SLS active Drive group 4 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 4 safe state Drive group 4 SOS selected Drive group 4 internal event Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 4 SDI positive active Drive group 4 SDI negative active Drive group 4 SLP active Drive group 4 active SLP area Index: [0] = AND logic operation input 1 [1] = AND logic operation input 2 [2] = AND logic operation input 3 [3] = AND logic operation input 4 [4] = AND logic operation input 5 [5] = AND logic operation input 6 Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output p10044[0...5] SI F-DO 2 signal sources / SI F-DO 2 S_src TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2857 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 783 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal sources for F-DO 2. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: The 6 signal sources in p10044[0...5] are AND'ed and the result is output at F-DO 2. 1-942 No function Drive group 1 STO active Drive group 1 SS1 active Drive group 1 SS2 active Drive group 1 SOS active Drive group 1 SLS active Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 1 safe state Drive group 1 SOS selected Drive group 1 internal event (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 257: 258: 259: 260: 261: 262: 263: 264: 265: 266: 267: 268: 269: 270: 271: 513: 514: 515: 516: 517: 518: 519: 520: 521: 522: 523: 524: 525: 526: 527: 769: 770: 771: 772: 773: 774: 775: 776: 777: 778: 779: 780: 781: 782: 783: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 1 SDI positive active Drive group 1 SDI negative active Drive group 1 SLP active Drive group 1 active SLP area Drive group 2 STO active Drive group 2 SS1 active Drive group 2 SS2 active Drive group 2 SOS active Drive group 2 SLS active Drive group 2 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 2 safe state Drive group 2 SOS selected Drive group 2 internal event Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 2 SDI positive active Drive group 2 SDI negative active Drive group 2 SLP active Drive group 2 active SLP area Drive group 3 STO active Drive group 3 SS1 active Drive group 3 SS2 active Drive group 3 SOS active Drive group 3 SLS active Drive group 3 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 3 safe state Drive group 3 SOS selected Drive group 3 internal event Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 3 SDI positive active Drive group 3 SDI negative active Drive group 3 SLP active Drive group 3 active SLP area Drive group 4 STO active Drive group 4 SS1 active Drive group 4 SS2 active Drive group 4 SOS active Drive group 4 SLS active Drive group 4 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 4 safe state Drive group 4 SOS selected Drive group 4 internal event Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 4 SDI positive active Drive group 4 SDI negative active Drive group 4 SLP active Drive group 4 active SLP area Index: [0] = AND logic operation input 1 [1] = AND logic operation input 2 [2] = AND logic operation input 3 [3] = AND logic operation input 4 [4] = AND logic operation input 5 [5] = AND logic operation input 6 Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-943 Parameters List of parameters p10045[0...5] SI F-DO 3 signal sources / SI F-DO 3 S_src TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2857 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 783 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the signal sources for F-DO 3. Value: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 257: 258: 259: 260: 261: 262: 263: 264: 265: 266: 267: 268: 269: 270: 271: 513: 514: 515: 516: 517: 518: 519: 520: 521: 522: 523: 524: 525: 526: 527: 769: 770: 771: 772: 773: The 6 signal sources in p10045[0...5] are AND'ed and the result is output at F-DO 3. 1-944 No function Drive group 1 STO active Drive group 1 SS1 active Drive group 1 SS2 active Drive group 1 SOS active Drive group 1 SLS active Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 1 safe state Drive group 1 SOS selected Drive group 1 internal event Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 1 SDI positive active Drive group 1 SDI negative active Drive group 1 SLP active Drive group 1 active SLP area Drive group 2 STO active Drive group 2 SS1 active Drive group 2 SS2 active Drive group 2 SOS active Drive group 2 SLS active Drive group 2 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 2 safe state Drive group 2 SOS selected Drive group 2 internal event Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 2 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 2 SDI positive active Drive group 2 SDI negative active Drive group 2 SLP active Drive group 2 active SLP area Drive group 3 STO active Drive group 3 SS1 active Drive group 3 SS2 active Drive group 3 SOS active Drive group 3 SLS active Drive group 3 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 3 safe state Drive group 3 SOS selected Drive group 3 internal event Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 3 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 3 SDI positive active Drive group 3 SDI negative active Drive group 3 SLP active Drive group 3 active SLP area Drive group 4 STO active Drive group 4 SS1 active Drive group 4 SS2 active Drive group 4 SOS active Drive group 4 SLS active (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters 774: 775: 776: 777: 778: 779: 780: 781: 782: 783: Drive group 4 SSM feedback signal active Drive group 4 safe state Drive group 4 SOS selected Drive group 4 internal event Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 0 Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 1 Drive group 4 SDI positive active Drive group 4 SDI negative active Drive group 4 SLP active Drive group 4 active SLP area Index: [0] = AND logic operation input 1 [1] = AND logic operation input 2 [2] = AND logic operation input 3 [3] = AND logic operation input 4 [4] = AND logic operation input 5 [5] = AND logic operation input 6 Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output p10046 SI F-DO feedback signal input activation / SI F-DO FS act TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2848 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Activates the readback input for the safety digital outputs (F-DO) Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Dependency: Refer to: p10047 Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output The test mode for the particular safety digital output is set in p10047. Signal name Read back F-DO 0 Read back F-DO 1 Read back F-DO 2 Read back F-DO 3 1 signal Test active Test active Test active Test active 0 signal No test No test No test No test FP - p10047[0...3] SI F-DO test stop mode / SI F-DO test mode TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0001 bin Max 0011 bin Factory setting 0010 bin Description: Sets the test stop mode for the particular safety digital output (F-DO) Index 0: F-DO 0 Index 1: F-DO 1 Index 2: F-DO 2 Index 3: F-DO 3 Value: 1: 2: 3: Test mode 1 evaluation of int. diagnostic signal (passive load) Test mode 2 read back F-DO in DI (relay circuit) Test mode 3 read back F-DO in DI (actuator with feedback signal) Note: If value = 1: When this test mode is being used, and excessive resistance of the load between DO+ and DO- can lead to problems during the test stop. It is therefore important to make sure that the load resistance at an individual F-DO does not exceed 10 kOhm. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-945 Parameters List of parameters r10051.0...9 CO/BO: SI digital inputs status / SI DI status TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2850, 2851 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the single-channel, logical, and debounced status of the safety digital inputs F-DI 0 ... 9 at Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Dependency: Refer to: p10017, p10040 Note: If a safety function is assigned to an input (e.g. via p10022), then the following applies: Signal name F-DI 0 F-DI 1 F-DI 2 F-DI 3 F-DI 4 F-DI 5 F-DI 6 F-DI 7 F-DI 8 F-DI 9 1 signal Logical 1 Logical 1 Logical 1 Logical 1 Logical 1 Logical 1 Logical 1 Logical 1 Logical 1 Logical 1 0 signal Logical 0 Logical 0 Logical 0 Logical 0 Logical 0 Logical 0 Logical 0 Logical 0 Logical 0 Logical 0 FP 2850 2850 2850 2850 2850 2851 2851 2851 2851 2851 - logical "0": Safety function is selected - logical "1": Safety function is de-selected The interrelationship between the logical level and the external voltage level at the input depends on the parameterization (refer to p10040) of the input as either NC or NO contact and is aligned to the use of a safety function: With 24 V at the input, NC contacts have a logical "1" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "0" level. This means that an NC/NC contact parameterization of 0 V at both inputs of the F-DI selects the safety function, for 24 V at both inputs, de-selects the safety function. With 24 V at the input, NO contacts have a logical "0" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "1" level. This means that for an NC/NO contact parameterization, the level 0 V/24 V selects the safety function, the level 24 V/0 V de-selects the safety function. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input r10052.0...3 CO/BO: SI digital outputs status / SI DO status TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the digital outputs at the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). TM54F_MA (master): display of DOTM54F_SL (slave): display of DO+ Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 Note: F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output 1-946 Signal name DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 1 signal High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low FP 2853 2853 2853 2853 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters r10053.0...3 CO/BO: SI digital inputs 20 ... 23 status / SI DI 20...23 stat TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2848 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs at the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 r10054 SI TM54F failsafe events active / SI failsafe act TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Signal name DI 20 DI 21 DI 22 DI 23 1 signal High High High High 0 signal Low Low Low Low FP 2853 2853 2853 2853 Displays the events that lead to the transfer of failsafe signals to all drives assigned to the TM54F. If the second channel of the TM54F transmits failsafe signals, then these are synchronized to the other channel. Possibilities of resolving the situation: - error during test stop: correctly perform the test stop. - internal software error: no possibility of resolving this problem, POWER ON. - internal synchronization problem: no possibility of resolving this problem, POWER ON. - all other causes: remove the cause of the error and carry out a safety-relevant acknowledgement (p10006). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 31 Signal name Commissioning mode active (p0010 = 95) Checksum error of the safety parameters Internal synchronization problem within TM54F Internal software error Overvoltage in the TM54F Undervoltage in the TM54F Error at test stop Error for crosswise data comparison within TM54F Overtemperature in the TM54F Failsafe events active on another channel 1 signal Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No FP 2847 - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No - Yes Yes No No - r10055 SI TM54F communication status drive-specific / SI comm_stat drv TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2846 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the communication status of the individual drives with the the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). For r10055 = 0, the following applies: All drives assigned in p10010 communicate with the TM54F. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-947 Parameters List of parameters Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 Signal name Communication between drive 1 and TM54F Communication between drive 2 and TM54F Communication between drive 3 and TM54F Communication between drive 4 and TM54F Communication between drive 5 and TM54F Communication between drive 6 and TM54F 1 signal Not configured 0 signal Configured FP - Not configured Configured - Not configured Configured - Not configured Configured - Not configured Configured - Not configured Configured - r10056.0 CO/BO: SI Status / SI stat TM54F_MA Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the status of the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Bit field: Bit 00 p10061 SI password input TM54F / SI password inp TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2847 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Signal name Test stop status 1 signal Active 0 signal Inactive FP - Enters the Safety Integrated password for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). This password is required to change the safety-relevant parameters. p10062 SI password new TM54F / SI password new TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2847 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: Enters the new Safety Integrated password for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Dependency: A change made to the Safety Integrated password must be acknowledged in the following parameter: Refer to: p10063 p10063 SI password acknowledgement TM54F / SI ackn password TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: C2(95) Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: 2847 P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description: 1-948 Acknowledgement of the new Safety Integrated password for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: p10062 Note: The new password entered into p10062 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge. p10062 = p10063 = 0 is automatically set after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully acknowledged. r10090[0...3] SI TM54F version / SI TM54F version TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release) [1] = Safety Version (minor release) [2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch) [3] = Safety Version (hotfix) Dependency: Refer to: r9390, r9590, r9770, r9870, r9890 Note: Example: r10090[0] = 2, r10090[1] = 60, r10090[2] = 1, r10090[3] = 0 --> SI TM54F version V02.60.01.00 p60022 VECTOR_G PROFIsafe telegram selection / Ps telegram_sel Can be changed: T Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min 0 Max 902 Factory setting 0 Description: Sets the PROFIsafe telegram number. Value: 0: 30: 31: 901: 902: Dependency: Refer to: p9611, p9811 r61000[0...239] PROFINET Name of Station / PN Name of Station CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN No PROFIsafe telegram selected PROFIsafe standard telegram 30, PZD-1/1 PROFIsafe standard telegram 31, PZD-2/2 PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 901, PZD-3/5 PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 902, PZD-3/6 Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Description: Displays PROFINET Name of Station. Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-949 Parameters List of parameters r61001[0...3] CU_G130_DP (PROFINET), CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP (PROFINET), CU_G150_PN Description: 1-950 PROFINET IP of Station / PN IP of Station Can be changed: - Calculated: - Access level: 3 Data type: Unsigned8 Dynamic index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Min - Max - Factory setting - Displays PROFINET IP of Station. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for data sets 1.3 Parameters for data sets 1.3.1 Parameters for command data sets (CDS) The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the command data sets. Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng, Type: CDS p0641[0...n] CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var p0700[0...n] Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI p0820[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0 p0821[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1 p0822[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 2 / DDS select., bit 2 p0823[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 3 / DDS select., bit 3 p0824[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 4 / DDS select., bit 4 p0828[0...n] BI: Motor changeover, feedback signal / Mot_chng fdbk sig p0840[0...n] BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1) p0844[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_src 1 p0845[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2 / OFF2 S_src 2 p0848[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_src 1 p0849[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 2 / OFF3 S_src 2 p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Operation enable p0854[0...n] BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC p0855[0...n] BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake p0856[0...n] BI: Speed controller enable / n_ctrl enable p0858[0...n] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake p1000[0...n] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0 p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1 p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2 p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3 p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / MotP inv p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setting value / MotP acc set val p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0 p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1 p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal p1075[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint / Suppl setp p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg p1106[0...n] CI: Minimum speed signal source / n_min s_src p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-951 Parameters Parameters for data sets p1122[0...n] 1-952 BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG p1138[0...n] CI: Up ramp scaling / Up ramp scaling p1139[0...n] CI: Down ramp scaling / Down ramp scaling p1140[0...n] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / RFG enable p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG p1142[0...n] BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / RFG accept set v p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1 p1160[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2 p1201[0...n] BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src p1230[0...n] BI: Armature short-circuit / DC braking activation / ASC/DCBRK act p1235[0...n] BI: External armature short-circuit, contactor feedback signal / ASC ext feedback p1330[0...n] CI: U/f control independent voltage setpoint / Uf U_set independ. p1356[0...n] CI: U/f control, angular setpoint / Uf ang setpoint p1437[0...n] CI: Speed controller, reference model I component input / n_ctrRefMod I_comp p1440[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed actual value / n_ctrl n_act p1455[0...n] CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctr adapt_sig Kp p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal p1475[0...n] CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal p1486[0...n] CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable p1495[0...n] CI: Acceleration pre-control / a_prectrl p1497[0...n] CI: Moment of inertia, scaling / M_mom inert scal p1500[0...n] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set p1511[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1 p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal p1513[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2 p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal p1540[0...n] CI: Torque limit speed controller upper scaling / M_max n-ctr upScal p1541[0...n] CI: Torque limit. speed controller lower scaling / M_max nctr lowScal p1545[0...n] BI: Activates travel to a fixed stop / TfS activation p1551[0...n] BI: Torque limit variable/fixed signal source / M_lim var/fixS_src p1552[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs p1554[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs p1555[0...n] CI: Power limit / P_max p1569[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 3 / M_suppl 3 p1571[0...n] CI: Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp p1640[0...n] CI: Excitation current actual value signal source / I_exc_ActVal S_src p2103[0...n] BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge p2104[0...n] BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge p2105[0...n] BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1 p2107[0...n] BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for data sets 1.3.2 p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3 p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1 p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2 p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3 p2144[0...n] BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg p2148[0...n] BI: RFG active / RFG active p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg p2154[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint 2 / n_set 2 p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0 p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 1 p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 2 p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 3 p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1 p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctrl setp 2 p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val p2286[0...n] BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ stop p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctrl prectrl p2296[0...n] CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal p2297[0...n] CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrMaxLimS_src p2298[0...n] CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s p2299[0...n] CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs p3111[0...n] BI: External fault 3, enable / Ext fault 3 enab p3112[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg p3784[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive external increase voltage / Sync ext U incr p3785[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive external decrease voltage / Sync ext U decr p3802[0...n] BI: Sync-line-drive enable / Sync enable Parameters for drive data sets (DDS) The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the drive data sets. Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng, Type: DDS p0186[0...n] Motor Data Sets (MDS) number / MDS number p0187[0...n] Encoder 1 encoder data set number / Enc 1 EDS number p0188[0...n] Encoder 2 encoder data set number / Enc 2 EDS number p0189[0...n] Encoder 3 encoder data set number / Enc 3 EDS number p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par p0572[0...n] Activate/de-activate inhibit list / Inh_list act/deact p0578[0...n] Calculate technology-dependent parameters / Calc tec par p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1 p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2 p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3 p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4 p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5 p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6 p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7 p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8 p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-953 Parameters Parameters for data sets 1-954 p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10 p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11 p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12 p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13 p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14 p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15 p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / MotP n_max p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / MotP n_min p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set p1059[0...n] Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set p1063[0...n] Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / n_min p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg p1091[0...n] Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1 p1092[0...n] Skip speed 2 / n_skip 2 p1093[0...n] Skip speed 3 / n_skip 3 p1094[0...n] Skip speed 4 / n_skip 4 p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens p1148[0...n] Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act p1151[0...n] Ramp-function generator configuration / RFG config p1189[0...n] Speed setpoint configuration / n_ctrl config p1200[0...n] Flying restart operating mode / FlyRest op_mode p1202[0...n] Flying restart search current / FlyRest I_srch p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact p1226[0...n] Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh p1240[0...n] Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration / Vdc_ctrl config p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn p1252[0...n] Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh p1262[0...n] Bypass dead time / Bypass t_dead p1280[0...n] Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (U/f) / Vdc_ctr config U/f (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for data sets p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (U/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor p1288[0...n] Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (U/f) / Vdc_max factor RFG p1289[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_max n_thresh p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn p1292[0...n] Vdc controller rate time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate p1293[0...n] Vdc min controller output limit (U/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (U/f / Vdc_min response p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode p1302[0...n] U/f control configuration / U/f configuration p1310[0...n] Voltage boost permanent / U_boost perm p1311[0...n] Voltage boost at acceleration / U_boost accelerate p1312[0...n] Voltage boost when starting / U_boost starting p1320[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1 p1321[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Uf char U1 p1322[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Uf char f2 p1323[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Uf char U2 p1324[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Uf char f3 p1325[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Uf char U3 p1326[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Uf char f4 p1327[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Uf char U4 p1333[0...n] U/f control FCC starting frequency / U/f FCC f_start p1334[0...n] U/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start p1335[0...n] Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val p1338[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain p1339[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn p1349[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Uf res_damp f_max p1350[0...n] Soft starting / Soft starting p1351[0...n] CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start p1358[0...n] Angular difference, symmetrizing, actual angle / Sym act angle p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config p1402[0...n] Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T p1428[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing dead time / n_prectrBal t_dead p1429[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing time constant / n_prectr bal T p1433[0...n] Speed controller reference model natural frequency / n_ctrl RefMod fn p1434[0...n] Speed controller reference model damping / n_ctrl RefMod D p1435[0...n] Speed controller reference model dead time / n_ctrRefMod t_dead p1441[0...n] Actual speed smoothing time / n_act T_smooth p1442[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time / n_ctr n_act T_smth p1451[0...n] Motor model speed actual value smoothing time SLVC / Mot_mod n_act t_sm p1452[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_C n_act T_s SLVC p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-955 Parameters Parameters for data sets p1457[0...n] 1-956 Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper p1460[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Kp n lower p1461[0...n] Speed controller Kp adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctr Kp n up scal p1462[0...n] Speed controller integral time adaptation speed lower / n_ctrl Tn n lower p1463[0...n] Speed controller Tn adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctr Tn n up scal p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper p1470[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp p1472[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn p1487[0...n] Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input source p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_prectrl scal p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal p1530[0...n] Power limit motoring / P_max mot p1531[0...n] Power limit regenerative / P_max gen p1556[0...n] Power limit scaling / P_max scal p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint p1572[0...n] Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp p1573[0...n] Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn p1576[0...n] Flux boost, adaptation speed, lower / Flux boost n lower p1577[0...n] Flux boost adaptation speed, upper / Flux boost n upper p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt. p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth p1584[0...n] Field weakening operation, flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth p1585[0...n] Flux actual value, smoothing time / Flux actVal T_smth p1586[0...n] Field weakening characteristic, scaling / Field weak scal p1590[0...n] Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp p1592[0...n] Flux controller integral time / Flux controller Tn p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn p1599[0...n] Flux controller, excitation current difference / Flux ctr I_exc_dif p1600[0...n] P flux controller, P gain / P flux ctrl Kp p1604[0...n] Pulse technique current limit / Pulse current lim p1605[0...n] Pulse technique pattern configuration / Puls pattrn config p1607[0...n] Pulse technique stimulus / Puls stimulus p1609[0...n] I/f operation current setpoint / I/f op I_setp p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static p1611[0...n] Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel p1612[0...n] Current setpoint magnetizing open-loop controlled / Id_set ctrl p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth p1619[0...n] Setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / SetAct track thrsh p1620[0...n] Stator current, minimum / I_stator min p1621[0...n] Changeover speed, inner cos phi = 1 / n_chngov cos phi=1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for data sets p1622[0...n] Field-generating current setpoint smoothing time constant / Id_setp T_smth p1625[0...n] Excitation current setpoint calibration / I_exc_setp cal p1628[0...n] Current model controller, dynamic factor / I_mod_ctr dyn_fact p1629[0...n] Current model controller P gain / I_mod_ctrl Kp p1630[0...n] Current model controller integral time / I_mod_ctrl Tn p1642[0...n] Minimum excitation current / Min I_exc p1643[0...n] Gain factor, minimum excitation current closed-loop control / Min I_exc Kp p1653[0...n] Current setpoint torque-generating smoothing time minimum / Isq_s T_smth min p1654[0...n] Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW p1656[0...n] Current setpoint/Speed actual value filter activation / I_setp_filt act p1657[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 type / I_set_filt 1 Typ p1658[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_n p1659[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_n p1660[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_z p1661[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_z p1662[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 type / I_set_filt 2 Typ p1663[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_n p1664[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_n p1665[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_z p1666[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_z p1677[0...n] Speed actual value filter 5 type / n_act_filt 5 type p1678[0...n] Speed actual value filter 5 denominator natural frequency / n_act_filt 5 fn_d p1679[0...n] Speed actual value filter 5 denominator damping / n_act_filt 5 D_d p1680[0...n] Speed actual value filter 5 numerator natural frequency / n_act_filt 5 fn_n p1681[0...n] Speed actual value filter 5 numerator damping / n_act_filt 5 D_n p1702[0...n] Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal p1704[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control EMF scaling / Isq_ctrl EMF scal p1705[0...n] Flux setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / Flux track thresh p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal p1727[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal p1730[0...n] Isd controller integral component shutdown threshold / Isd_ctr I_compDeac p1731[0...n] Isd controller combination current time component / Isd ctrl iCombi T1 p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed-loop control / Gain res_damp p1744[0...n] Motor model speed threshold stall detection / MotMod n_thr stall p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall p1748[0...n] Motor model lower changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Lower n_chngov p1749[0...n] Motor model upper changeover speed / increase changeover speed / Upper / n_chgov p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config p1752[0...n] Motor model changeover speed operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgov enc p1753[0...n] Motor model changeover speed hysteresis operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgovHysE p1754[0...n] Flux angle difference smoothing time / Angle diff T_smth p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl p1757[0...n] Motor model w/o enc. op./cl.-loop controlled stab. controller Kp / MotMod w/o enc Kp p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed-loop control / MotMod t op_cl p1760[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod wE n_ada Kp p1761[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod wE n_ada Tn p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp p1766[0...n] Motor model voltage model calculation enable / U_mod calc enab p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-957 Parameters Parameters for data sets p1774[0...n] 1-958 Motor model, offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A p1775[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf p1784[0...n] Motor model feedback scaling / MotMod fdbk scal p1785[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp p1786[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn r1787[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr p1795[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn r1797[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr p1798[0...n] Motor model pulse technique speed adaptation Kp / MotMod pulses Kp p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max p1804[0...n] Filter time constant smoothed modulation index / T_filt mod_idxSmth p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr p1811[0...n] Pulse frequency wobbulation amplitude / Puls wobb ampl p1820[0...n] Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev p1821[0...n] Dir of rot / Dir of rot p1840[0...n] Actual value correction configuration / ActVal_corr conf p1845[0...n] Actual value correction evaluation factor Lsig / ActVal_cor ev Lsig p1846[0...n] Actual value correction damping factor / ActV_corr D_factor p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2 p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1 p2142[0...n] Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1 p2149[0...n] Monitoring configuration / Monit config p2150[0...n] Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3 p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T p2155[0...n] Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2 p2156[0...n] On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd p2161[0...n] Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3 p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max p2163[0...n] Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4 p2164[0...n] Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4 p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set p2174[0...n] Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1 p2175[0...n] Motor blocked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh p2177[0...n] Motor blocked delay time / Mot lock t_del p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del p2181[0...n] Load monitoring response / Load monit resp p2182[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1 p2183[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2 p2184[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3 p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper / M_thresh 1 upper p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower / M_thresh 1 lower p2187[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, upper / M_thresh 2 upper p2188[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower / M_thresh 2 lower p2189[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, upper / M_thresh 3 upper p2190[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower / M_thresh 3 lower p2192[0...n] Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del p2194[0...n] Torque threshold value 2 / M_thresh val 2 p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for data sets p2196[0...n] Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val1 p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 2 / Tec_ctr fix val 2 p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 3 / Tec_ctr fix val 3 p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 4 / Tec_ctr fix val 4 p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 5 / Tec_ctr fix val 5 p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 6 / Tec_ctr fix val 6 p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 7 / Tec_ctr fix val 7 p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 8 / Tec_ctr fix val 8 p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 9 / Tec_ctr fix val 9 p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 10 / Tec_ctr fix val 10 p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 11 / Tec_ctr fix val 11 p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 12 / Tec_ctr fix val 12 p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 13 / Tec_ctr fix val 13 p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 14 / Tec_ctr fix val 14 p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 15 / Tec_ctr fix val 15 p2216[0...n] Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop t_rdown p2720[0...n] Load gear configuration / Load gear config p2721[0...n] Load gear, rotary absolute encoder, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev p2722[0...n] Load gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track tol r2723[0...n] CO: Load gear absolute value / Load gear abs_val r2724[0...n] CO: Load gear position difference / Load gear pos diff p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%] p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%] p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm] p3201[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance threshold value / I_exc n Tol thresh p3202[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance hysteresis / I_exc n Tol hyst p3203[0...n] Excitation current outside the tolerance delay time / I_exc n Tol t_del p3204[0...n] Flux outside the tolerance threshold value / Flux n tol thresh p3205[0...n] Flux outside the tolerance hysteresis / Flux n tol hyst p3206[0...n] Flux outside tolerance delay time / Flux n tol t_del p3207[0...n] Zero current signal threshold value / I_0_sig thresh p3208[0...n] Zero current signal hysteresis / I_0_sig hyst p3209[0...n] Zero current signal delay time / I_0_sig t_del p3233[0...n] Torque actual value filter, time constant / M_act_filt T p3236[0...n] Speed threshold 7 / n_thresh val 7 p3237[0...n] Hysteresis speed 7 / n_hysteresis 7 p3238[0...n] OFF delay n_act_motor model = n_act external / t_del n_a = n_ext p3320[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 1 / Fluid_mach P1 p3321[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 1 / Fluid_mach n1 p3322[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 2 / Fluid_mach P2 p3323[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 2 / Fluid_mach n2 p3324[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 3 / Fluid_mach P3 p3325[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 3 / Fluid_mach n3 p3326[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 4 / Fluid_mach P4 p3327[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 4 / Fluid_mach n4 p3328[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 5 / Fluid_mach P5 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-959 Parameters Parameters for data sets p3329[0...n] 1-960 Fluid flow machine speed point 5 / Fluid_mach n5 p3800[0...n] Sync-line-drive activation / Sync act p3801[0...n] Sync-line-drive, drive object number / Sync DO_No p3806[0...n] Sync-line-drive frequency difference threshold value / Sync f_diff thresh p3809[0...n] Sync-line-drive phase setpoint / Sync phase setp p3811[0...n] Sync-line-drive frequency limiting / Sync f_lim p3813[0...n] Sync-line-drive phase synchronism threshold value / Sync Ph_sync thrsh p3815[0...n] Sync-line-drive voltage difference threshold value / Sync U_diff thresh p3820[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n0 / Friction n0 p3821[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n1 / Friction n1 p3822[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n2 / Friction n2 p3823[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n3 / Friction n3 p3824[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n4 / Friction n4 p3825[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n5 / Friction n5 p3826[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n6 / Friction n6 p3827[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n7 / Friction n7 p3828[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n8 / Friction n8 p3829[0...n] Friction characteristic, value n9 / Friction n9 p3830[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M0 / Friction M0 p3831[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M1 / Friction M1 p3832[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M2 / Friction M2 p3833[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M3 / Friction M3 p3834[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M4 / Friction M4 p3835[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M5 / Friction M5 p3836[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M6 / Friction M6 p3837[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M7 / Friction M7 p3838[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M8 / Friction M8 p3839[0...n] Friction characteristic, value M9 / Friction M9 p3843[0...n] Friction characteristic smoothing time frictional torque diff. / Frict T_smooth dM p3844[0...n] Friction characteristic number changeover point upper / Frict chngov pt up p3846[0...n] Friction characteristic record ramp-up/ramp-down time / Frict rec t_RFG p3847[0...n] Friction characteristic record warm-up time / Frict rec t_warm r3925[0...n] Identification final display / Ident final_disp r3927[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW r3928[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config r3998[0...n] First drive commissioning / First drv_comm p7035[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control operating mode / Circ_I mode p7036[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control proportional gain / Circ_I Kp p7037[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control integral time / I_circ Tn p7038[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current control limit / I_circ limit (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for data sets 1.3.3 Parameters for encoder data sets (EDS) The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the encoder data sets. Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng, Type: EDS p0141[0...n] Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number / Enc_interf comp_no p0142[0...n] Encoder component number / Encoder comp_no p0144[0...n] Sensor Module detection via LED / SM detection LED p0145[0...n] Activate/de-activate encoder interface / Enc_intf act/deact r0146[0...n] Encoder interface active/inactive / Enc_intf act/inact r0147[0...n] Sensor Module EEPROM data version / SM EEPROM version r0148[0...n] Sensor Module firmware version / SM FW version p0400[0...n] Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel p0401[0...n] Encoder type, OEM selection / Enc type OEM sel p0402[0...n] Gearbox type selection / Gearbox type sel p0404[0...n] Encoder configuration effective / Enc_config eff p0405[0...n] Square-wave encoder track A/B / Sq-wave enc A/B p0407[0...n] Linear encoder grid division / Enc grid div p0408[0...n] Rotary encoder pulse No. / Rot enc pulse No. p0410[0...n] Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value p0411[0...n] Measuring gear, configuration / Meas gear config p0412[0...n] Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev p0413[0...n] Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track window p0414[0...n] Redundant coarse position value relevant bits (identified) / Relevant bits p0415[0...n] Gx_XIST1 Coarse position safe most significant bit (identified) / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB p0416[0...n] Non safety-relevant meas. steps position value pos1 (detected) / nsrPos1 p0417[0...n] Encoder safety comparison algorithm (detected) / Safety CompAlgo p0418[0...n] Fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST1 p0419[0...n] Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST2 p0420[0...n] Encoder connection / Enc_connection p0421[0...n] Absolute encoder rotary multiturn resolution / Enc abs multiturn p0422[0...n] Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step p0423[0...n] Absolute encoder rotary singleturn resolution / Enc abs singleturn p0424[0...n] Encoder, linear zero mark distance / Enc lin ZM_dist p0425[0...n] Encoder, rotary zero mark distance / Enc rot dist ZM p0426[0...n] Encoder zero mark differential distance / Enc ZM Dif_dist p0427[0...n] Encoder SSI baud rate / Enc SSI baud rate p0428[0...n] Encoder SSI monoflop time / Enc SSI t_monoflop p0429[0...n] Encoder SSI configuration / Enc SSI config p0430[0...n] Sensor Module configuration / SM config p0431[0...n] Angular commutation offset / Ang_com offset p0432[0...n] Gearbox factor, encoder revolutions / Grbx_fact enc_rev p0433[0...n] Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions / Grbx_fact mot_rev p0434[0...n] Encoder SSI error bit / Enc SSI error bit p0435[0...n] Encoder SSI alarm bit / Enc SSI alarm bit p0436[0...n] Encoder SSI parity bit / Enc SSI parity bit p0437[0...n] Sensor Module configuration extended / SM config ext p0438[0...n] Squarewave encoder filter time / Enc t_filt p0439[0...n] Encoder ramp-up time / Enc ramp-up time p0440[0...n] Copy encoder serial number / Copy enc ser_no p0441[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 1 / Enc comm ser_no 1 p0442[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 2 / Enc comm ser_no 2 p0443[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 3 / Enc comm ser_no 3 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-961 Parameters Parameters for data sets p0444[0...n] 1.3.4 Encoder commissioning serial number part 4 / Enc comm ser_no 4 p0445[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 5 / Enc comm ser_no 5 p0446[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits before the absolute value / Enc SSI bit before p0447[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits absolute value / Enc SSI bit val p0448[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits after the absolute value / Enc SSI bit after p0449[0...n] Encoder SSI number of bits, filler bits / Enc SSI fill bits p0453[0...n] Pulse encoder evaluation zero speed measuring time / Enc_ev z 0 t_meas p0493[0...n] Zero mark selection, input terminal / ZM_sel inp_term p0494[0...n] Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / ZM_equiv input p4600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type / Temp_sens 1 type p4601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 2 sensor type / Temp_sens 2 type p4602[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 3 sensor type / Temp_sens 3 type p4603[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 4 sensor type / Temp_sens 4 type p4662[0...n] Encoder characteristic type / Enc char_type p4663[0...n] Encoder characteristic K0 / Enc char K0 p4664[0...n] Encoder characteristic K1 / Enc char K1 p4665[0...n] Encoder characteristic K2 / Enc char K2 p4666[0...n] Encoder characteristic K3 / Enc char K3 p4670[0...n] Analog sensor configuration / Ana_sens config p4671[0...n] Analog sensor input / Ana_sens inp p4672[0...n] Analog sensor channel A voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens A U at 0 p4673[0...n] Analog sensor channel A voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens A U/per p4674[0...n] Analog sensor channel B voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens B U at 0 p4675[0...n] Analog sensor channel B voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens B U/per p4676[0...n] Analog sensor range limit threshold / Ana_sens lim thr p4677[0...n] Analog sensor LVDT configuration / Ana_sens LVDT conf p4678[0...n] Analog sensor LVDT ratio / An_sens LVDT ratio p4679[0...n] Analog sensor LVDT phase / An_sens LVDT ph p4680[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance permissible / ZM_monit tol perm p4681[0...n] Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 positive / ZM tol lim 1 pos p4682[0...n] Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 negative / ZM tol lim 1 neg p4683[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold positive / ZM tol A_thr pos p4684[0...n] Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold negative / ZM tol A_thr neg p4685[0...n] Speed actual value mean value generation / n_act mean val p4686[0...n] Zero mark minimum length / ZM min length Parameters for motor data sets (MDS) The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the motor data sets. Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng, Type: MDS 1-962 p0131[0...n] Motor component number / Mot comp_no p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel r0302[0...n] Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Motor code Mot DLQ r0303[0...n] Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ status word / Motor w DLQ ZSW p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated p0306[0...n] Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty p0307[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for data sets p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No. p0316[0...n] Motor torque constant / Mot kT p0318[0...n] Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max p0324[0...n] Winding maximum speed / Winding n_max p0325[0...n] Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph p0327[0...n] Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt p0328[0...n] Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance p0329[0...n] Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated r0331[0...n] Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated r0334[0...n] Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type r0336[0...n] Actual rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated act r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated r0339[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio r0343[0...n] Rated motor current identified / Mot I_rated ident p0344[0...n] Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat. p0350[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold p0353[0...n] Motor series inductance / Mot L_series p0354[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold/R_D d p0355[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q p0356[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak. p0357[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_r leak / LDd p0359[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damp q p0360[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance/magn. inductance, d axis saturated / Mot Lh/Lh d sat p0361[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat p0362[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1 p0363[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2 p0364[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3 p0365[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4 p0366[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1 p0367[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2 p0368[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3 p0369[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4 r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold / RDd (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-963 Parameters Parameters for data sets 1-964 r0375[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total r0378[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d r0380[0...n] Motor damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_damping_d r0381[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damping_q r0382[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Lh d axis saturated / Mot L_m tr/Lhd sat r0383[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd r0385[0...n] Motor damping time constant, q axis / Mot L_damping q r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak r0387[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant, q axis / Mot T_Sleak /T_Sq p0389[0...n] Excitation rated no-load current / Exc I_noload_rated p0390[0...n] Rated excitation current / Exc I_rated p0391[0...n] Current controller adaptation, starting point KP / I_adapt pt KP p0392[0...n] Current controller adaptation, starting point KP adapted / I_adapt pt KP adap p0393[0...n] Current controller adaptation P gain scaling / I_adapt Kp scal r0395[0...n] Actual stator resistance / R_stator act r0396[0...n] Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act p0398[0...n] Angle magn decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 1 / Magn decoupl C1 p0399[0...n] Angle magn decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 3 / Magn decoupl C3 p0530[0...n] Bearing version selection / Bearing vers sel p0531[0...n] Bearing code number selection / Bearing codeNo sel p0532[0...n] Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max p0600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor for monitoring / Mot temp_sensor p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type p0604[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/KTY alarm threshold / Mod 1/KTY A thresh p0605[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/2 threshold / Threshold p0606[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 2/KTY timer / Mod 2/KTY t_timer p0607[0...n] Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response p0611[0...n] I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T p0612[0...n] Mot_temp_mod activation / Mot_temp_mod act p0615[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) fault threshold / I2t F thresh p0616[0...n] Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 1 / Mot temp alarm 1 p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart p0622[0...n] Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id p0624[0...n] Motor temperature offset PT100 / Mot T_offset PT100 p0625[0...n] Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator p0628[0...n] Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor r0630[0...n] Mot_temp_mod ambient temperature / Mod T_ambient r0631[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator iron temperature / Mod T_stator r0632[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature / Mod T_winding r0633[0...n] Mot_temp_mod rotor temperature / Mod T_rotor p0634[0...n] Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT p0635[0...n] Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT p0636[0...n] Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT p0637[0...n] Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT p0643[0...n] Overvoltage protection for synchronous motors / Overvolt_protect p0650[0...n] Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for data sets p0651[0...n] 1.3.5 Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint p0652[0...n] Motor stator resistance, scaling / Mot R_stator scal p0653[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance, scaling / Mot L_S_leak scal p0655[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance, d axis saturated scaling / Mot L_m d sat scal p0656[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance, q axis, saturated scaling / Mot L_m q sat scal p0657[0...n] Motor damping inductance, d axis scaling / Mot L_damp d scal p0658[0...n] Motor damping inductance, q axis scaling / Mot L_damp q scal p0659[0...n] Motor damping resistance, d axis scaling / Mot R_damp d scal p0660[0...n] Motor damping resistance, q axis scaling / Mot R_damp q scal p0826[0...n] Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No. p0827[0...n] Motor changeover status word bit number / Mot_chg ZSW bitNo. p1231[0...n] Armature short-circuit / DC braking configuration / ASC/DCBRK config p1232[0...n] DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake p1233[0...n] DC braking time / DCBRK time p1234[0...n] Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start p1236[0...n] Ext. armature short-cct., contactor feedback signal monit. time / ASC ext t_monit p1237[0...n] External armature short-circuit, delay time when opening / ASC ext t_wait p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW p1980[0...n] PolID technique / PolID technique p1982[0...n] PolID selection / PolID selection p1991[0...n] Motor changeover, angular commutation correction / Ang_com corr p1999[0...n] Ang. commutation offset calibr. and PollD scaling / Com_ang_offs scal p4610[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type MDS / Temp sens1 typ MDS p4611[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 2 sensor type MDS / Temp sens2 typ MDS p4612[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 3 sensor type MDS / Temp sens3 typ MDS p4613[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 4 sensor type MDS / Temp sens4 typ MDS Parameters for power unit data sets (PDS) The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the power unit data sets. Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng, Type: PDS p0121[0...n] Power unit component number / PU comp_no p0124[0...n] Power unit detection via LED / PU detection LED p0125[0...n] Activate/de-activate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact r0126[0...n] Power unit components active/inactive / PU comp act/inact r0127[0...n] Power unit version EPROM data / PU EPROM version r0128[0...n] Power unit, firmware version / PU FW version r0200[0...n] Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act p0201[0...n] Power unit code number / PU code no r0203[0...n] Actual power unit type / PU actual type r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property p0251[0...n] Operating hours counter power unit fan / PU fan t_oper p0895[0...n] BI: Activate/de-activate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact p3901[0...n] Power unit EEPROM Vdc offset calibration / PU EEPROM Vdc_offs p7001[0...n] Par_circuit power units enable / PU enable r7002[0...n] Par_circuit status power units / Status PU r7020[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase U / Phase U curr dev r7021[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase V / Phase V curr dev r7022[0...n] CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase W / Phase W curr dev r7030[0...n] CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage deviation / Vdc deviation p7040[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lockout U (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-965 Parameters Parameters for data sets 1-966 p7042[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lockout V p7044[0...n] Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lockout W r7050[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase U / Circ_I_phase U r7051[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase V / Circ_I_phase V r7052[0...n] Par_circuit circulating current phase W / Circ_I_phase W r7200[0...n] Par_circuit power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t r7201[0...n] CO: Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. inverter / PU temp max inv r7202[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. depletion layer / PU TempMaxDepLayer r7203[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. rectifier / PU temp max rect r7204[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures air intake / PU temp air intake r7205[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures electronics / PU temp electr r7206[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp inv 1 r7207[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 2 / PU temp inv 2 r7208[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 3 / PU temp inv 3 r7209[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 4 / PU temp inv 4 r7210[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 5 / PU temp inv 5 r7211[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 6 / PU temp inv 6 r7212[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp rect 1 r7213[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 2 / PU temp rect 2 r7214[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 1 / PU temp DepLayer 1 r7215[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 2 / PU temp DepLayer 2 r7216[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 3 / PU temp DepLayer 3 r7217[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 4 / PU temp DepLayer 4 r7218[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 5 / PU temp DepLayer 5 r7219[0...n] Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 6 / PU temp DepLayer 6 r7220[0...n] CO: Par_circuit drive output current maximum / Drv I_outp max r7222[0...n] CO: Par_circuit absolute current actual value / I_act abs val r7223[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U / I_phase U act val r7224[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V / I_phase V act val r7225[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W / I_phase W act val r7226[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U offset / I_phase U offset r7227[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V offset / I_phase V offset r7228[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W offset / I_phase W offset r7229[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value sum U, V, W / I_phase sum UVW r7230[0...n] CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage actual value / Vdc_act r7231[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase U / U_phase U act val r7232[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase V / U_phase V act val r7233[0...n] CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase W / U_phase W act val r7240[0...n] Par_circuit gating unit status word 1 / Gating unit ZSW1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for write protection and know-how 1.4 Parameters for write protection and know-how protection Note: References: /FH1/ 1.4.1 SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions Section "Write protection and know-how protection" Parameters with "WRITE_NO_LOCK" The following list contains the parameters with the "WRITE_NO_LOCK" attribute. These parameters are not affected by the write protection. Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng, Type: WRITE_NO_LOCK p0003 BOP access level / BOP acc_level p0009 Device commissioning parameter filter / Dev comm par_filt p0124[0...n] Power unit detection via LED / PU detection LED p0124[0...23] Main component detection using LED / M_comp detect LED p0144[0...n] Sensor Module detection via LED / SM detection LED p0154 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module detection via LED / Hub detection LED p0154 Terminal Module detection via LED / TM detection LED p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset p0976 Reset and load all parameters / Reset load all par p0977 Save all parameters / Save all par p2035 Fieldbus interface USS PIV drive object number / Fieldbus USS DO_no p2102 BI: Acknowledge all faults / Ackn all faults p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter p3100 RTC time stamp mode / RTC t_stamp mode p3101[0...1] RTC set UTC time / RTC set UTC p3103 RTC synchronization source / RTC sync_source p3950 Service parameter / Serv. par. p3981 Faults, acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select p4700[0...1] Trace control / Trace control p4701 Measuring function, control / Meas fct ctrl p4707 Measurement function configuration / Meas fct config p4710[0...1] Trace trigger condition / Trace Trig_cond p4711[0...5] Trace trigger signal / Trace trig_signal p4712[0...1] Trace trigger threshold / Trace trig_thresh p4713[0...1] Trace tolerance band trigger threshold 1 / Trace trig thr 1 p4714[0...1] Trace tolerance band trigger threshold 2 / Trace trig thr 2 p4715[0...1] Trace bit mask trigger, bit mask / Trace trig mask p4716[0...1] Trace, bit mask trigger, trigger condition / Trace Trig_cond p4717 Measuring function, number of averaging operations / Meas fct avg qty p4718 Measuring function, number of stabilizing periods / MeasFct StabPerQty p4720[0...1] Trace recording cycle / Trace record_cyc p4721[0...1] Trace recording time / Trace record_time p4722[0...1] Trace trigger delay / Trace trig_delay p4723[0...1] Trace time slice cycle / Trace cycle p4724[0...1] Trace average in the time range / Trace average (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-967 Parameters Parameters for write protection and know-how protection 1-968 p4730[0...5] Trace record signal 0 / Trace record sig 0 p4731[0...5] Trace record signal 1 / Trace record sig 1 p4732[0...5] Trace record signal 2 / Trace record sig 2 p4733[0...5] Trace record signal 3 / Trace record sig 3 p4734[0...5] Trace record signal 4 / Trace record sig 4 p4735[0...5] Trace record signal 5 / Trace record sig 5 p4736[0...5] Trace record signal 6 / Trace record sig 6 p4737[0...5] Trace record signal 7 / Trace record sig 7 p4780[0...1] Trace physical address signal 0 / Trace PhyAddr Sig0 p4781[0...1] Trace physical address signal 1 / Trace PhyAddr Sig1 p4782[0...1] Trace physical address signal 2 / Trace PhyAddr Sig2 p4783[0...1] Trace physical address signal 3 / Trace PhyAddr Sig3 p4784[0...1] Trace physical address signal 4 / Trace PhyAddr Sig4 p4785[0...1] Trace physical address signal 5 / Trace PhyAddr Sig5 p4786[0...1] Trace physical address signal 6 / Trace PhyAddr Sig6 p4787[0...1] Trace physical address signal 7 / Trace PhyAddr Sig7 p4789[0...1] Trace physical address trigger signal / Trace PhyAddr Trig p4795 Trace memory bank changeover / Trace mem changeov p4800 Function generator control / FG control p4810 Function generator mode / FG operating mode p4812 Function generator physical address / FG phys address p4813 Function generator physical address reference value / FG phys addr ref p4815[0...2] Function generator drive number / FG drive number p4816 Function generator output signal integer number scaling / FG outp integ scal p4819 BI: Function generator control / FG control p4820 Function generator signal shape / FG signal shape p4821 Function generator period / FG period duration p4822 Function generator pulse width / FG pulse width p4823 Function generator bandwidth / FG bandwidth p4824 Function generator amplitude / FG amplitude p4825 Function generator 2nd amplitude / FG 2nd amplitude p4826 Function generator offset / FG offset p4827 Function generator ramp-up time to offset / FG ramp-up offset p4828 Function generator lower limit / FG lower limit p4829 Function generator upper limit / FG upper limit p4830 Function generator time slice cycle / FG time slice p4831 Function generator amplitude scaling / FG amplitude scal p4832[0...2] Function generator amplitude scaling / FG amplitude scal p4833[0...2] Function generator offset scaling / FG offset scal p4835[0...4] Function generator free measurement function scaling / FG fr MeasFct scal p7761 Write protection / Write protection p7770 NVRAM action / NVRAM action p8550 AOP LOCAL/REMOTE / AOP LOCAL/REMOTE p8829 CBE20 remote controller number / CBE20 rem ctrl num p9210 Flashing component number / Flash comp_no. p9211 Flash function / Flash fct. p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Parameters Parameters for write protection and know-how 1.4.2 Parameters with "KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK" The following list contains the parameters with the "KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK" attribute. These parameters are not affected by the know-how protection. Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng, Type: KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK 1.4.3 p0003 BOP access level / BOP acc_level p0009 Device commissioning parameter filter / Dev comm par_filt p0124[0...n] Power unit detection via LED / PU detection LED p0124[0...23] Main component detection using LED / M_comp detect LED p0144[0...n] Sensor Module detection via LED / SM detection LED p0154 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module detection via LED / Hub detection LED p0154 Terminal Module detection via LED / TM detection LED p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset p0976 Reset and load all parameters / Reset load all par p0977 Save all parameters / Save all par p2035 Fieldbus interface USS PIV drive object number / Fieldbus USS DO_no p2102 BI: Acknowledge all faults / Ackn all faults p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter p3100 RTC time stamp mode / RTC t_stamp mode p3101[0...1] RTC set UTC time / RTC set UTC p3103 RTC synchronization source / RTC sync_source p3950 Service parameter / Serv. par. p3981 Faults, acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select p7761 Write protection / Write protection p7770 NVRAM action / NVRAM action p8550 AOP LOCAL/REMOTE / AOP LOCAL/REMOTE p8829 CBE20 remote controller number / CBE20 rem ctrl num p9210 Flashing component number / Flash comp_no. p9211 Flash function / Flash fct. p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch Parameters with "KHP_ACTIVE_READ" The following list contains the parameters with the "KHP_ACTIVE_READ" attribute. These parameters can also be read with activated know-how protection. Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng, Type: KHP_ACTIVE_READ p0015 Macro drive object / Macro DO p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit p0100 IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds p0101[0...23] Drive object numbers / DO numbers p0103[0...23] Application-specific view / Appl_spec view p0105 Activate/de-activate drive object / DO act/deact p0107[0...23] Drive object type / DO type p0108[0...23] Drive objects, function module / DO function module p0120 Number of Power unit Data Sets (PDS) / PDS count p0121[0...n] Power unit component number / PU comp_no p0125[0...n] Activate/de-activate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact p0130 Number of Motor Data Sets (MDS) / MDS count (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1-969 Parameters Parameters for write protection and know-how protection 1-970 p0131[0...n] Motor component number / Mot comp_no p0140 Number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS) / EDS count p0141[0...n] Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number / Enc_interf comp_no p0142[0...n] Encoder component number / Encoder comp_no p0145[0...n] Activate/de-activate encoder interface / Enc_intf act/deact p0150 Number of VSM data sets / VSM dat_sets qty. p0151[0...1] DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module component number / Hub comp_no p0151 Terminal Module component number / TM comp_no p0151[0...n] Voltage Sensing Module component number / VSM comp_no p0161 Option board, component number / Opt board comp_no p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count p0199[0...24] Drive object name / DO name p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated p0349 System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data / Unit_sys mot ESB p0400[0...n] Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel p0505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select p0595 Technological unit selection / Tech unit select p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit p0864 BI: Infeed operation / INF operation p0922 IF1 PROFIdrive telegram selection / IF1 PD Telegr_sel p0978[0...24] List of drive objects / List of the DO p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / n_min p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper p2000 Reference frequency / f_ref p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref p2000 Reference velocity, reference frequency / v_ref f_ref p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage p2002 Reference current / I_ref p2003 Reference torque / M_ref p2005 Reference angle / Reference angle p2006 Reference temp / Ref temp p2007 Reference acceleration / a_ref p2030 Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol p2038 IF1 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode p2079 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / IF1 PD PZD tel ext p4956[0...n] OA application activation / OA act p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 / KHP OEM qty p7764 p7764[0...n] KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list p7852 Number of indices for r7853 / Qty indices r7853 p9500 SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit) / SI Mtn clock CU p9601 SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit) / SI enable fct CU p9810 SI PROFIsafe address (Motor Module) / SI PROFIsafe MM p9902 Target topology number of indices / TargetTopo indices (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Function diagrams 2 Contents 2.1 Table of contents 2-973 2.2 Explanations on the function diagrams 2-980 2.3 Overviews 2-985 2.4 CU320-2 input/output terminals 2-999 2.5 CU_LINK 2-1006 2.6 PROFIdrive 2-1008 2.7 Internal control/status words 2-1052 2.8 Sequence control 2-1065 2.9 Brake control 2-1068 2.10 Safety Integrated Basic Functions 2-1073 2.11 Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2-1080 2.12 Setpoint channel 2-1096 2.13 Encoder evaluation 2-1105 2.14 Vector control 2-1108 2.15 Technology functions 2-1131 2.16 Technology controller 2-1137 2.17 Signals and monitoring functions 2-1143 2.18 Diagnostics 2-1151 2.19 Data sets 2-1157 2.20 Basic Infeed 2-1163 2.21 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2-1170 2.22 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) 2-1175 2.23 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-1182 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-971 Function diagrams 2-972 2.24 Terminal Module 150 (TM150) 2-1192 2.25 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) 2-1196 2.26 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) 2-1199 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Function diagrams Table of contents 2.1 2.2 Table of contents Explanations on the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-980 1020 - Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-981 1021 - Explanation of the symbols (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-982 1022 - Explanation of the symbols (Part 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-983 1030 - Handling BICO technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-984 2.3 Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-985 1510 - CU320-2 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-986 1520 - PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-987 1530 - Internal control/status words, data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-988 1550 - Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-989 1680 - Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature) . . . . . . . . . 2-990 1690 - Vector control, V/f control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-991 1700 - Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . 2-992 1710 - Vector control, current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-993 1750 - Monitoring functions, faults, alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-994 1773 - Basic Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-995 1790 - Terminal Board 30 (TB30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-996 1840 - Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-997 1850 - Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-998 2.4 CU320-2 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-999 2120 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3, DI 16, DI 17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1000 2121 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7, DI 20, DI 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1001 2130 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1002 2131 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1003 2132 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1004 2133 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1005 2.5 CU_LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1006 2211 - Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1007 2.6 PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1008 2410 - PROFIBUS (PB) / PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1010 2415 - Standard telegrams and process data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1011 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-973 Function diagrams Table of contents 2416 - Standard telegrams and process data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1012 2419 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1013 2420 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1014 2421 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1015 2422 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1016 2423 - Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1017 2425 - STW1_BM control word metal industry interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1018 2426 - STW2_BM control word metal industry interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1019 2427 - E_STW1_BM control word infeed metal industry interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1020 2428 - ZSW1_BM status word metal industry interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1021 2429 - ZSW2_BM status word metal industry interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1022 2430 - E_ZSW1_BM control word infeed metal industry interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1023 2439 - PZD receive signals, interconnection, profile-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1024 2440 - PZD receive signals, interconnection, manufacturer-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1025 2441 - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1026 2442 - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1027 2444 - STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1028 2447 - E_STW1 control word infeed interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1029 2449 - PZD send signals, interconnection, profile-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1030 2450 - PZD send signals interconnection manufacturer-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1031 2451 - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1032 2452 - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1033 2454 - ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1034 2457 - E_ZSW1 status word infeed interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1035 2468 - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . 2-1036 2470 - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1037 2472 - IF1 status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1038 2481 - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . 2-1039 2483 - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1040 2485 - IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1041 2487 - IF2 send telegram, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1042 2489 - IF2 status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1043 2491 - IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1044 2493 - IF2 send telegram, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1045 2495 - CU_STW1 control word 1, Control Unit interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1046 2-974 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Function diagrams Table of contents 2496 - CU_ZSW1 status word 1, Control Unit interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1047 2497 - A_DIGITAL interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1048 2498 - E_DIGITAL interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1049 2499 - A_DIGITAL_1 interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1050 2500 - E_DIGITAL_1 interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1051 2.7 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1052 2501 - Control word, sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1053 2503 - Status word, sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1054 2505 - Control word, setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1055 2520 - Control word, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1056 2522 - Status word, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1057 2526 - Status word, closed-loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1058 2530 - Status word, current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1059 2534 - Status word, monitoring functions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1060 2536 - Status word, monitoring functions 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1061 2537 - Status word, monitoring functions 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1062 2546 - Control word, faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1063 2548 - Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1064 2.8 Sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1065 2610 - Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1066 2634 - Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1067 2.9 Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1068 2701 - Basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1069 2704 - Extended brake control, zero-speed detection (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1070 2707 - Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1071 2711 - Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1072 2.10 Safety Integrated Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1073 2800 - Parameter manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1074 2802 - Monitoring and faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1075 2804 - Status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1076 2810 - STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1077 2811 - STO (Safe Torque Off), safe pulse suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1078 2814 - SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1079 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-975 Function diagrams Table of contents 2.11 Safety Integrated Extended Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1080 2820 - SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1081 2822 - SLP (Safely-Limited Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1082 2825 - SS1, SS2, SOS, internal STOP B, C, D, F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1083 2840 - Control word and status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1084 2846 - Parameter manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1085 2847 - TM54F parameter manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1086 2848 - TM54F configuration, F-DI/F-DO test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1087 2850 - TM54F (F-DI 0 ... F-DI 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1088 2851 - TM54F (F-DI 5 ... F-DI 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1089 2853 - TM54F (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3, DI 20 ... DI 23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1090 2855 - TM54F control interface (p9601.2 = 1 & p9601.3 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1091 2856 - TM54F Safe State selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1092 2857 - TM54F assignment (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1093 2860 - SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1094 2861 - SDI (Safe Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1095 2.12 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1096 3010 - Fixed speed setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1097 3020 - Motorized potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1098 3030 - Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1099 3040 - Direction limitation and direction reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1100 3050 - Skip frequency bands and speed limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1101 3060 - Basic ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1102 3070 - Extended ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1103 3080 - Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1104 2.13 Encoder evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1105 4704 - Raw signal sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1106 4715 - Speed actual value and pole position sensing, motor encoder ASM/SM (encoder 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1107 2.14 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1108 6030 - Speed setpoint, droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1109 6031 - Pre-control balancing, reference/acceleration model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1110 6040 - Speed controller with/without encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1111 6050 - Speed controller adaptation (Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1112 2-976 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Function diagrams Table of contents 6060 - Torque setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1113 6220 - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1114 6300 - V/f characteristic and voltage boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1115 6310 - Resonance damping and slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1116 6320 - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1117 6490 - Speed control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1118 6491 - Flux control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1119 6630 - Upper/lower torque limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1120 6640 - Current/power/torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1121 6710 - Current setpoint filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1122 6714 - Iq and Id controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1123 6721 - Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1124 6722 - Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1125 6723 - Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1126 6724 - Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1127 6730 - Interface to the Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1128 6731 - Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1129 6799 - Display signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1130 2.15 Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1131 7010 - Friction characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1132 7014 - External Armature Short-Circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1133 7016 - Internal Armature Short-Circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1134 7017 - DC braking (p0300 = 1xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1135 7020 - Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1136 2.16 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1137 7950 - Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1138 7951 - Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1139 7954 - Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1140 7958 - Closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1141 7960 - DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1142 2.17 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1143 8010 - Speed signals 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1144 8011 - Speed signals 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1145 8012 - Torque signals, motor locked/stalled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1146 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-977 Function diagrams Table of contents 8013 - Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1147 8014 - Thermal monitoring, power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1148 8016 - Thermal monitoring, motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1149 8017 - Thermal motor models (p0300 = xxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1150 2.18 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1151 8060 - Fault buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1152 8065 - Alarm buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1153 8070 - Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1154 8075 - Fault/alarm configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1155 8134 - Measuring sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1156 2.19 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1157 8560 - Command Data Sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1158 8565 - Drive Data Sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1159 8570 - Encoder Data Sets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1160 8575 - Motor Data Sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1161 8580 - Power unit Data Sets (PDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1162 2.20 Basic Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1163 8720 - Control word, sequence control infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1164 8726 - Status word, sequence control infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1165 8732 - Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1166 8734 - Missing enable signals, line contactor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1167 8750 - Interface to the Basic Infeed power unit (control signals, actual values) . . . . . . 2-1168 8760 - Signals and monitoring functions (p3400.0 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1169 2.21 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1170 9100 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1171 9102 - Digital outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1172 9104 - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1173 9106 - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1174 2.22 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1175 9204 - Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1176 9206 - Receive telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1177 9208 - Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1178 9210 - Send telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1179 2-978 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Function diagrams Table of contents 9220 - Control word, CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1180 9226 - Status word, CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1181 2.23 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1182 9550 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1183 9552 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1184 9556 - Digital relay outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1185 9560 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1186 9562 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1187 9566 - Analog input 0 (AI 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1188 9568 - Analog input 1 (AI 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1189 9572 - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1190 9576 - Temperature evaluation (KTY/PTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1191 2.24 Terminal Module 150 (TM150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1192 9625 - Temperature evaluation structure (channel 0 ... 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1193 9626 - Temperature evaluation 1x2, 3, 4-wire (channel 0 ... 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1194 9627 - Temperature evaluation 2x2-wire (channel 0 ... 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1195 2.25 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1196 9880 - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1197 9886 - Temperature evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1198 2.26 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1199 9912 - Control word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1200 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-979 Function diagrams Explanations on the function diagrams 2.2 Explanations on the function diagrams Function diagrams 1020 - Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) 2-981 1021 - Explanation of the symbols (Part 2) 2-982 1022 - Explanation of the symbols (Part 3) 2-983 1030 - Handling BICO technology 2-984 2-980 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1020 - Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-1 Parameter Meaning Symbol Parameter name [Unit] Monitoring parameter rxxxx [x...y] (parameter may appear . Parameter name [Unit] Index name Monitoring parameter rxxxx[x] with index. [aaaa.b] Parameter name from ... to [Unit] pxxxx[y...z] (Def) [aaaa.b] Parameter name Index name from ... to [Unit] pxxxx[y] (Def) Setting parameter (if the parameter appears a multiple number of times, then diagram references are specified). Connectors Binectors Symbol Symbol Symbol Meaning Meaning Parameter name name name pxxxx pxxxx (xxxx) Connector input CI. name pxxxx[y] (xxxx [x]) pxxxx[y] Connector input CI with index [y] Symbol Binector input BI with index [y] and factory setting (Def). (Def) 8 Signal path 1 Signal path 8 Binector input BI with index range [y...z] and factory setting (Def). rxxxx [aaaa.b] Text [cccc.d] name Connector output CO with [dimension unit] and index range [y...z]. Meaning 1 Text pxxxx[y...z] (Def) Connector input CI with index range [y...z] Konnektor-/Binektorausgang CO/BO Cross references between diagrams name name pxxxx[y...z] (xxxx [y]) rxxxx rxxxx Binektor input BI with factory setting (Def). (Def) name name [unit] rxxxx[y...z] Setting parameter with index (if the parameter appears a multiple number of times, then diagram references are specified). Meaning Connectors/binectors Binector output BO. To "function diagram name" [aaaa.b] = for binectors. Cross references for control bits name name [unit] rxxxx[y] Connector output CO [dimension unit] and with index [y] Meaning Symbol Binector output BO with bit y. rxxxx.y pxxxx= Original parameter of signal aaaa = Signal comes from source diagram aaaa b = Signal comes from signal path b pxxxx [aaaa.b] Data sets Symbol pxxxx[C] pxxxx[E] pxxxx[M] 2-981 Symbol Meaning Sampling times Parameter name Parameter name (up to 18 characters) Symbol [Unit] [dimension unit] rotatry axis, for linear axis see list of parameters rxxxx[y] or rxxxx[y...z] or rxxxx[y].ww or rxxxx.ww "r" = monitoring parameter. These parameters are read-only "xxxx" stands for the parameter number "[y]" specifies the valid index, "[y...z]" specifies the applicable index range ".ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0...15). Parameter belongs to the Encoder Data Set (EDS). pxxxx[y] or pxxxx[y...z] or pxxxx[y].ww or pxxxx.ww "p" = setting parameter. These parameters can be changed. "xxxx" stands for the parameter number, "[y]" specifies the applicable index, "[y...z]" specifies the applicable index range ".ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0...15). Parameter belongs to the Motor Data Set (MDS). from ... to Value range. (xxxx[y].ww) Parameter number (xxxx) with Index number [y] and bit number .ww. (Def) Factory setting. (Def.w) Factory setting with bit number as prefix. [aaaa.b] Diagram references for setting parameters that occur a multiple number of times. [Function diagram number, signal path] Meaning Parameter belongs to the Command Data Set (CDS). Parameter belongs to the Drive Data Set (DDS). Parameter belongs to the Power unit Data Set (PDS). 1 2 3 4 DO: All objects Explanations for the function diagrams - Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) 5 Meaning pxxxx[Y] (ZZZ.ZZ s) Setting parameter with factory setting to select the time slice. p0115[y] (Drive Object) Time slice depending on the pre-setting p0112 of the drive object. "[y]" specifies the applicable index. p0115[y] (Motor Modules) Time slice depending on the rated pulse frequency of the motor module. "[y]" specifies the applicable index. PROFIdrive sampling time Presetting for IF1 in p2048. Presetting for IF2 in p8848. The bus clock applies to a clock synchronized operate to IF1 or IF2. CAN bus sampling time Presetting in p8848. Background There is no fixed sampling time for this function. The processing takes place in background. The cycle time depends on the computational load of the control unit. Not relevant A static state is displayed here. The sampling time data is not relevant. 6 fp_1020_51_eng.vsd 10.08.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1020 - Function diagrams pxxxx[P] Information on parameters, binectors, connectors Explanations on the function diagrams pxxxx[D] Text aaaa b Text cccc d The function diagrams are sub-divided into 8 signal paths in order to facilitate orientation. = Unique signal designation = Signal goes to target diagram aaaa = Signal goes to signal path b = Unique signal designation = Signal comes from source diagram cccc = Signal comes from signal path d 1 Logical inversion & AND element with logical inversion of an input signal p2900[D] Fixed value 2 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1021 - Explanation of the symbols (Part 2) -10 000.00...10 000.00 [%] p2901[D] (0.00) p2901[D] [8] = Fixed value -5 % [9] = Fixed value -10 % [10] = Fixed value -20 % [11] = Fixed value -50 % [12] = Fixed value -100 % [13] = Fixed value -150 % [14] = Fixed value -200 % p2902[0...14] (0.00) S Q R Q x1 x p1001[D] y = 1 when x1 Outputs at y a logical "1" if x > S. 0 S x2 is. 1 x p1015[D] Outputs a logical "1" at y if x < S. If x >= S + H then y returns to 0. H y = -x x Threshold value 1/0 with hysteresis y 0 Sign reversal y -1 Threshold value switch 0/1 1 y x Symbols for computational and closed-loop control functions n_set_fixed 15 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [1/min] p1015[D] (0.000) S Exclusiv-OR/XOR y x2 Pre-assigned binectors and connectors n_set_fixed 1 Outputs at y a logical "1" if x < S. 0 S = setting input R = reset input Q = non-inverted output Q = inverted output =1 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [1/min] p1001[D] (0.000) Threshold value switch 1/0 R/S flip-flop p2902[0...14] Fixed speed values 1 y x S Threshold value 0/1 with hysteresis Absolute value generator y y = |x| 1 x Outputs a logical "1" at y if x > S. y If x <= S - H then y returns to 0. x1 Pre-assigned binectors and connectors Divider y x2 y= Fixed torque values x Fixed value M [Nm] -100 000.00...100 000.00 [Nm] p2930[D] (0.00) >0 0 x1 x2 H Comparator y Output y = a logical "1", if the analog signal x > 0, i.e. is positive. p2930[D] LU MLU x dx dt x Switch symbol y dx dt LL MLL pxxxx Sample & Hold element Simple changeover switch 0 1 x is limited to the upper limit LU and the lower limit LL and output at y. The digital signals MLU and MLL have the value "1", if the upper or lower limit is active. y Differentiator y= Limiter The switch position is shown according to the factory setting (in this case, switch position 1 in the default state on delivery). Symbol for monitoring Monitoring Axxxxx or Fxxxxx SET x Monitoring S&H y Sample and hold element. y = x if SET = 1 (not retentively saved at POWER OFF) In the bottom right-hand corner of the diagram. 1 2 3 4 DO: All objects Explanations for the function diagrams - Explanation of the symbols (Part 2) 5 6 fp_1021_51_eng.vsd 01.07.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1021 - Function diagrams S Fixed value 1 -10 000.00...10 000.00 [%] p2900[D] (0.00) Symbols for computational and closed-loop control functions Symbols for logic functions Explanations on the function diagrams Fig. 2-2 2-982 Pre-assigned binectors and connectors Fixed percentage values PT1 element Switch-on delay y T 0 0 Natural frequency, denominator Damping, denominator fn_n D_n pxxxx pxxxx y y Delay element, first order. pxxxx 1022 - Explanation of the symbols (Part 3) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-3 x T x PT2 low pass pxxxx pxxxx T T T T |y| pxxxx = time constant The digital signal x must have the value "1" without any interruption during the time T before output y changes to "1". D x t fn 2nd-order filter (bandstop/general filter) Natural frequency, numerator fn_z pxxxx x Damping, numerator D_z pxxxx f 1 Transfer function H(s) = y |y| pxxxx x y 0 T fn_n 2 2 D_n + 2 fn_n .s+1 Linear Switch-off delay 0 . s 2 x y fs x U_output max r0071 Mot U_rated p0304 y T f_B f_set f y U_boost total r1315 2nd Order Filter pxxxx The digital signal x must have the value "0" without interruption during the time T before output y changes to "0". T T T p0310 Natural frequency, denominator fn_n pxxxx T x Damping, denominator D_n pxxxx Used as bandstop filter - center frequency fs: Parabolic y - bandwidth f_B: x s y T1 T2 y 2 H(s) = fn_z s 2 fn_n 2 2 + 2 2 2 + 2 . D_z . fn_z . D_n . fn_n s + 1 p0310 Flux current control (FCC) s + 1 U_output max r0071 Mot U_rated p0304 Analog adder can be activated f_set U_boost total r1315 x1 y The following applies to I = 1 signal: y = x1 + x2 x2 The following applies to I = 0 signal: y = x1 Dependent on the load current 2-983 Mot f_rated p0310 I 1 2 3 4 DO: All objects Explanations for the function diagrams - Explanation of the symbols (Part 3) 5 6 fp_1022_51_eng.vsd 22.11.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1022 - Function diagrams pxxxx pxxxx The digital signal x must have the value "1" without interruption during time T1 or must have the value "0" during time T2 before output y changes its signal state. T1 T1 T2 T2 y . fs Explanations on the function diagrams 2 Transfer function when used as general filter pxxxx pxxxx x U_boost total r1315 f_B D_n = x f_set D_z = 0 Delay (switch-on and switch-off) T1 T2 U_output max r0071 Mot U_rated p0304 fn_z = fs fn_n = fs r0723.15 Binectors are binary signals that can be freely interconnected (BO = Binector Output). They represent a bit of a "BO:" display parameter (e.g. bit 15 from r0723). Connector: r0723 Connectors are bit fields or numerical values that can be freely interconnected (e.g. "analog signals", like percentage variables, speeds or torques). Connectors are also "CO:" display parameters (CO = Connector Output). Parameterization: At the signal destination, the required binector or connector is selected using appropriate parameters: "BI:" parameter for binectors (BI = Binector Input) or "CI:" parameter for connectors (CI = Connector Input) Example: The main setpoint for the speed controller (CI: p1070) should be received from the output of the motorized potentiometer (CO: r1050) and the "jog" command (BI: p1055) from digital input DI 0 (BO: r0722.0, X122.1 terminal) on the CU320. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Digital input DI 0 X122.1 Control word bit 8 1 p1055 [C] 722.0 r0722.0 [2120] Setpoint channel r0898.8 [2501] Motorized potentiometer 2 Raise Lower Main setpoint Speed controller p1070[C] 1050 r1050 Jog setpoint 1 [3030] [3020] Parameterizing steps: 1 p1055[0] = 722.0 Terminal X122.1 acts as "Jog bit 0". 2 p1070[0] = 1050 The output of the motorized potentiometer acts as main setpoint for the speed controller. 1 2 3 4 DO: All objects Explanations for the function diagrams - Handling BICO technology 5 6 fp_1030_51_eng.vsd 10.05.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1030 - Function diagrams 1030 - Handling BICO technology Binector: Explanations on the function diagrams 2-984 Fig. 2-4 Handling BICO technology Function diagrams Overviews 2.3 Overviews Function diagrams 1510 - CU320-2 input/output terminals 2-986 1520 - PROFIdrive 2-987 1530 - Internal control/status words, data sets 2-988 1550 - Setpoint channel 2-989 1680 - Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature) 2-990 1690 - Vector control, V/f control 2-991 1700 - Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits 2-992 1710 - Vector control, current control 2-993 1750 - Monitoring functions, faults, alarms 2-994 1773 - Basic Infeed 2-995 1790 - Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2-996 1840 - Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-997 1850 - Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) 2-998 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-985 CU320-2 Simulation for DI 0...DI 21 1 = Simulation on X124 M 0 +24 V (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1510 - CU320-2 input/output terminals + + M M Simulation signals p0796.0...21 M M 1 r0722.0 1 r0723.0 r0722.3 1 r0723.3 r0722.16 1 r0723.16 r0722.17 1 r0723.17 r0723.0...21 6 digital inputs, electrically isolated X122 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 <2> r0722.0...21 1 DI 0 DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DI 16 DI 17 M1 M DI/DO 8 <1> DI/DO 9 <1> M DI/DO 10 <1> DI/DO 11 <1> M ... ... [2120] 4 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional p0728.8 0 r0722.8 p0738 1 p0728.11 ... 0 1 ... ... r0723.8 ... ... r0722.11 1 [2130] r0723.11 p0741 1 [2131] 6 digital inputs, electrically isolated X132 <2> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 7 DI 20 DI 21 M2 M DI/DO 12 <1> DI/DO 13 <1> M DI/DO 14 <1> DI/DO 15 <1> M 1 r0723.4 r0722.7 1 r0723.7 r0722.20 1 r0723.20 r0722.21 1 r0723.21 ... ... [2121] 4 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional p0728.12 0 r0722.12 r0723.12 ... ... ... ... ... 0 <1> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for G130/G150), the following applies: Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]). <2> Jumper open, electrical isolation for DI 0 DI 7, DI 16, DI 17, DI 20, DI 21. 1 p0742 1 p0728.15 1 2 3 DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_MV, CU_S, CU_SL Overviews - CU320-2 input/output terminals r0722.4 r0722.15 1 [2132] r0723.15 p0745 1 4 [2133] 5 6 fp_1510_51_eng.vsd 30.09.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1510 - Function diagrams r0721.0...21 = + p0799 (4000.00 s) p0795.0...21 ~ Overviews 2-986 Fig. 2-5 24 V DC to the next device Telegram 1 ... 19 Signal assignment PZD1 Signal x Interconnecting the permanently assigned receive telegrams LED PB adress p0918 Monitoring Diagnostics Axxxxx Fxxxxx rxxxx Signal [2410] PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN) address and diagnostics PZD32 [2415] Standard telegrams and process data 1 1520 - PROFIdrive (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-6 PD Telegr_sel p0922 PD Telegr_sel p0922 Telegram 20 ... 99 Signal assignment PZD1 Interconnection ... ... ... ... ... ... Signal x [2439] ... [2447] [2495] [2497] Permanently assigned telegrams PZD32 Interconnecting the permanently assigned send telegrams [2416] Standard telegrams and process data 2 PD Telegr_sel p0922 Description Signal Description Receive telegram Drive n Interconnection Telegram 100 ... 117 Signal assignment PZD1 Signal x PZD32 [2419] Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 1 PD Telegr_sel p0922 ... ... ... ... ... [2449] ... [2457] [2496] [2498] Interconnecting the free receive telegram Telegram 118 ... 219 Signal assignment PZD1 ... Signal x PZD32 PZD2 [2420] Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 2 PD Telegr_sel p0922 Send telegram PZD3 .. . Telegram 220 ... 389 Signal assignment PZD1 PROFIdrive PZD1 ... Signal x PZD32 [2421] Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 3 [2468] [2481] PD Telegr_sel p0922 Interconnecting the free send telegram Telegram 390 ... 396 Signal assignment PZD1 PZD1 Signal x Drive n PZD2 PZD32 PZD3 PD Telegr_sel p0922 ... Telegram 901 ... 999 Signal assignment PZD1 Free telegram [2470] [2472] [2483] 2-987 [2423] Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data 1 DO: All objects Overviews - PROFIdrive 2 3 4 5 6 fp_1520_54_eng.vsd 21.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 1520 - Overviews Signal x PZD32 Function diagrams [2422] Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 4 Current control 15 0 STW sequence control 15 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1530 - Internal control/status words, data sets r0899 15 0 31 [2530] [2501] 0 r0836 ZSW Current control ZSW sequence control [8560] Monitoring functions DDS - Drive Data Sets r2197 0 [2502] 15 ZSW Monitoring functions 1 r0837 0 [2534] Setpoint channel 31 r2198 STW3 0 15 r1198 STW setpoint channel 0 15 STW CDS selection STW DDS selection [8565] ZSW Monitoring functions 2 EDS - Encoder Data Sets [2536] r0838[1...3] [2505] r2199 0 Speed controller 15 STW n-controller 15 ZSW Monitoring functions 3 STW EDS selection 2 [8570] [2537] r1406 0 0 Faults/alarms MDS - Motor Data Sets r2138 0 [2520] r1407 0 15 ZSW n-controller 15 r0838[0] STW Faults/alarms 0 15 [2546] [8575] r2139 0 [2522] 15 Closed-loop control ZSW Faults/alarms 1 PDS - Power unit Data Sets [2548] 0 r0056 0 ZSW controller 15 r2135 0 15 [2526] 1 2 3 DO: All objects Overviews - Internal control/status words, data sets STW MDS selection 15 ZSW Faults/alarms 2 STW PDS selection [8580] [2548] 4 5 6 fp_1530_54_eng.vsd 06.03.07 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 1530 - Function diagrams 0 CDS - Command Data Sets r1408 r0898 Overviews 2-988 Fig. 2-7 Sequence control r0898.8 r1024 Jog 2 r0898.9 Main setp scal 1550 - Setpoint channel (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-8 p0115[3] Jog 1 p1070 [3010] Fixed speed setpoints Suppl setpoint p1075 raise Jog setpoint 1 p1058 r1050 0 0 + 0 1 +/- 1 0 r1114 pos neg 1 1 (-1) [3030] Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging [3020] Motorized potentiometer r1119 DSC_STW Balancing DSC T_SYMM [3050] Skip (suppression) bandwidth and speed limiting [3040] Direction limitation/-reversal RFG selection p1115 [5060.1] p1195 RFG setpoint at the input Setpt after limit n_set_1 Suppl setp scal p1076 Jog setpoint 2 p1059 lower p1194 + Main setp scal p1071 n_set_4 [5030.1] r1150 p1155 0 p1430 p1191 NSOLL_B DSC KPC x DSC_XERR + [5020.1] Kp y + + n_set from DSC [5020.1] [5030.1] t Interpolator [1590.1] [1700.1] r1438 + + + p1160 ZSW 2a x x r1170 + [3060] Basic ramp-function generator Dynamic setpoint limit x,y p1190 n_pre_control n_ctrl setp sum + 1 Spline-Interpolation p0115[1] RFG n_set at outp n_set_5 r1199 n_act Ramp-function generator tracking M_limit 2a x x [3070] Expanded ramp-function generator DSC position controller x_act Simulate ramp-function generator <1> 2-989 <1> Only for SERVO. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Overviews - Setpoint channel 5 6 fp_1550_51_eng.vsd 03.12.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1550 - Overviews [3090] Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) linear and DSC spline (r0108.6 = 1). Function diagrams [3080] Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking Deadtime element from PROFIdrive SMx ~ Sensorless operation Raw position signals (only from encoder 1) x2n n_act unsmoothed r0061[0] encoder 1 p0432 p0410.0 p1821 p1441 Fine resolution (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1680 - Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature) Temperature from sensor n [8016.1] x2n n_act unsmoothed Invertierung III r0063[0] Fine resolution n_act_measurement p0045 p0433 n_act smoothed n_act calculation [4704] r0063[1] [4715] Encoder Data Sets (EDS) p0187...p0189 3 encoder data sets EDS[0] EDS[1] EDS[2] 0 p0400...p0425 1 Parameters, encoder 1 2 Parameters, encoder 2 <1> Parameters, encoder 3 No encoder 99 [8570] <1> Only 1 encoder for G130/G150. 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR Overviews - Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature) 5 6 fp_1680_56_eng.vsd 19.01.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS G130/G150 8 - 1680 - Function diagrams Encoders 1 Speed actual value and rotor position sensing for motor encoder (encoder 1) Overviews Fig. 2-9 2-990 Faults/ alarms F31100...A33904 Raw signal sensing Refer to [1020.7] Flying restart mode 1690 - Vector control, V/f control (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-10 p0115[1] (Motor Modules) Vdc_ctrl config p1200 Speed actual value calculation p1280 [6320] [4715] U/f Res_damp gain Slip compensation p1338 p1335 [6310] [6310] n_ctrl setp sum r1170 RFG setpt at input Ramp-function generator [3050.8] r1119 Current limit p0640 + [3060] p0641[C] [6640.1] (1) [8016.8] + I_max_ctrl f_outp r1343 Current limit Var + + + [6030.1] [6310] 60 Transformat_angle Imax closed-loop frequency control MIN r0094 + I_max_ctrl V_outp r1344 + I_outp max I_act abs.val. - Imax closed-loop voltage control 180 + Sym act angle p1358 1 Angle difference r0067 r1359 p1345 ... p1346 0 [6714.5] r0068 0 <1> V_boost accelerate p1311 V_boost starting p1312 (0) + [6730.4] + [6300.8] V_output r0072 U/f Eco fac act v V_outp smooth 0 100 ms [6300] r0025 1 2 DO: VECTOR Overviews - Vector control, U/f control 3 4 5 6 fp_1690_54_eng.vsd 06.07.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 1690 - Overviews 2-991 <1> Only for p1300 = 19 and p1302.1 = 1. Function diagrams 1 r1348 Eco mode [2526] U/f angle setpt p1350 V_boost perm p1310 f_set + p1356 Soft starting Control mode p1300 r0056 . . . f_outp smooth r0024 100 ms Mot PolePairNo act r0313 I_max reduction I_max Motor Module r0066 + p1340 ... p1341 [6730.4] f_outp <1> Tn adaptation p1462 p1472 <1> p1511 p0115[1] (Motor Modules) p1512 For Kp p0115[2] (Motor Modules) adaptation Refer to [1020.7] p1514 p0341 p0342 p1496 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1700 - Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits p1513 r1515 r1518 p1540 p1300 (r1407.1) p1416 n_set after filter n_ctrl setp sum r0062 r1170 n_ctrl n_set Symmetrizing M_set total r1438 p1508 [1550.8] p1501 Kp Droop input p1488 [1710.1] Tn Reference model p1400.3 r0079 p1503 n_set I_comp r1439 p1541 [6060] Torque setpoint [6030] Speed setpoint filter [6031] Acceleration model I_outp max p0640 Integrator control r0067 M-max upper/mot p1442 p1452 p1520 <1> n_act encoder 1 p1521 r1538 Generating the torque limits M-max lower/gen r0061[0] M_max lower eff. p1523 r1539 [6040] Speed controller p1300 (r1407.1) p1300 (r1407.1) p1530 p1531 <1> n_act smooth n_pre-control [1710.1] r0063 [6630] Torque limit [6640] Current-power limit p1400 n_model [1710.1] M_max upper eff. p1522 p1401 r0056 r1408 <1> [6490] Closed-loop speed control configuration [6491] Closed-loop flux control configuration [2526] Status word closed-loop control [2530] Status word closed-loop current control [4715] Speed actual value and pole position sensing motor encoder ASM/SM (encoder 1) <1> Only for vector control without encoder. 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR Overviews - Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits 5 6 fp_1700_54_eng.vsd 08.02.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 1700 - Function diagrams Kp adaptation p1460 p1470 Overviews 2-992 Fig. 2-11 [6050] Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation p1715 Refer to [1020.7] r0072 p1717 Vdc_act r0070 |y| Iq_set |y| 1710 - Vector control, current control (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-12 p0115[0] (Motor Modules) U_output p1655 + f r0079 [1700.8] V_set K r0077 M_set total P iq controller f Modulation depth r0074 V_angle + + M Iq V_output max r0071 p1715 [6710] Current setpoint filter p1717 Id_set [6722.1] [6723.4] [6724.4] [6725.4] <2> r0075 + Field weakening controller V_set Iq_act p1570 r0078 + p1580 + r0076 Field weakening characteristic p1610 p1611 [6714] Current controller <1> Current calculation V_phase actual value [6722] Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint [6723] Field weakening control, flux controller for induction motors (p0300 = 1) [6724] Field weakening controller for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2) <2> [6725] Flux setpoit, field weakening controller (FEM, p0300 = 5) n_pre-control [1700.5] f_outp + r0066 p1764 + Motor model (Observer) r0065 M Iq + p1767 <1> n_model 1 2 DO: VECTOR Overviews - Vector control, current control [6730] Interface to the motor module for an induction motor (p0300 = 1) [6731] Interface to the motor module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2) 3 4 5 6 fp_1710_54_eng.vsd 30.01.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 1710 - Overviews 2-993 <1> Only for vector control without encoder. <2> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150. Function diagrams Current model [1700.1] I_phase actual value Transformation Id_act n_act smooth <1> <2> <1> <2> Fxxxxx r2169 [4715] <2> [8012] [8013] System runtime r2114 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1750 - Monitoring functions, faults, alarms Fzzzzz faults r0945 r0949 r0948 r2109 r3115 r3120 r3122 r0947 Code Value comin going Drive Co.nu. Diag III III Fault case count r0952 [8060] Fault buffer Axxxxx n_max n_ctrl setp sum r1170 Ayyyyy r2122 r2124 r2123 r2125 r3121 r3123 Azzzzz alarms Code Value comin going Co.nu. Diag III III [3080] <2> n_ctrl setp sum r1438 Alarms counter r2111 [8065] Alarm buffer [5210] <1> r2129 p2128 [0] [8011] Speed monitoring 2 [8010] Speed monitoring 1 <1> <2> M_set total [15] r0079 [5610] <1> [6060] <2> [8070] Fault/alarm trigger word M_max upper eff <1> <2> <3> Limit value monitor Changing the fault response r1538 [5650] <1> [6640] <2> M_max lower eff r0080 [5730] <1> [6714] <2> r1539 [5650] <1> [6640] <2> Motor locked r2169 [8012] torque monitoring Changing the message type [0] [1] p2118 p2119 [19] Changing the acknowledge mode [0] [1] r2169 [8010] p2101 p2100 [19] n_act smth message n_act smth message [8010] [0] [1] M_act p2126 p2127 [8013] load monitoring [19] <1> Only for SERVO. <2> Only for VECTOR. <3> Only for p0108.17 = 1. 1 2 3 DO: All objects Overviews - Monitoring functions, faults, alarms [8075] Fault/alarm configuration 4 5 6 fp_1750_51_eng.vsd 24.03.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1750 - Function diagrams r0063 III Fyyyyy n_act smth message Overviews 2-994 Fig. 2-13 r0063 [4710] <1> n_act unsmoothed Fig. 2-14 1773 - Basic Infeed (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A PROFIdrive receive/send telegram Telegram 370 E_STW1 Control words Status words PROFIdrive Slave address Diagnostics Interconnection of the free receive and send telegrams STW1 Control Unit Sequence control Basic Infeed <1> L1 L2 L3 PE ZSW1 Energize contactor r0863.1 STW2 ZSW2 E_ZSW1 [2447], [2457] [2410], [2468], [2470] [8720], [8726] [8732], [8734] Closed-loop control operation to SERVO/VECTOR r0863.0 p0864 [2610] U1 Line supply voltage monitoring Thermal power module monitoring V1 W1 Pre-charging Faults and alarms Fxxxxx Axxxxx max [8014] [8760] [8060] ... [8075] Gating signals, actual values Vdc_act r0070 Vdc measurement + DCN 2-995 [8750] 1 DO: B_INF Overviews - Basic Infeed 2 3 4 5 6 fp_1773_54_eng.vsd 22.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 1773 - Overviews To the Motor Modules <1> Only for S120 and G150. Function diagrams DCP X501 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1 = + p4099 (4000.00 s) 1 = Simulation on p4095.0...3 Simulation for DI 0...DI 3 M 1790 - Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 0 r4022.0...3 1 r4023.0...3 1 X424 + + M M +24 V Simulation signals p4096.0..3 M M 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A X481 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 r4022.0 1 r4023.0 1 r4023.3 ... ... DI 0 DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 r4022.3 [9100] 4 digital outputs, electrically isolated p4030 ... ... p4033 [9102] 2 analog inputs +/-11 V A 10 V V V X482 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 r4055[0] [%] r4055[1] [%] D AI 0+ AI 0AI 1+ AI 1AO 0+ AO 0AO 1+ AO 1- A D A [9104] p4071[0] 2 analog outputs +/-11 V Reference quantities for 10 V or 100 % p200x 10 V 100 % p205x 10 V 100 % D A p4071[1] D [9106] 1 2 DO: TB30 Overviews - Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 3 4 5 6 fp_1790_51_eng.vsd 24.03.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1790 - Function diagrams DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0 Overviews Fig. 2-15 2-996 +24 V DC to the next device ~ X500 1840 - Terminal Module 31 (TM31) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-16 +24 V DC to the next device ~ = M + Simulation for DI 0...DI 11 DRIVE-CLiQ-socket 0 X500 X501 X524 1 = Simulation on p4095.0...11 r4021.0...11 DRIVE-CLiQ-socket 1 0 1 r4022.0...11 +24 V + + M M p4099 (4000.00 s) Auxiliary voltage for the digital inputs r4023.0...11 1 M M Simulation signals p4096.0...11 X520 1 2 3 4 5 6 DI 0 DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 M1 M 1 r4022.0 ... 6 7 8 ... 1 r4022.3 0 p4030 r4023.3 1 X542 NC 0 COM NO 0 NC 1 COM NO 1 DO 0 1 X530 DO 1 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 7 M2 M X540 1 2 3 4 5 p4048.0 r4023.0 [9550] 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated 1 2 3 4 5 6 +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V 1 r4022.4 ... 0 p4031 r4023.4 ... 1 r4022.7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 r4023.7 p4048.1 [9552] 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated [9556] 2 digital outputs (relay) X522 X541 1 2 3 4 5 6 p4028.8 + DI/D0 8 DI/D0 9 DI/D0 10 DI/D0 11 M p4071[0] 0 1 r4022.8 p4038 1 ... p4028.11 0 ... 1 r4022.11 [9560], [9562] 4 digital inputs/outputs A35211 A r4055[0] [%] D Alarm: Overtemperature sensor TM31 Temp. KTY/PTC r4105 D r4104.1 A A r4055[1] [%] F35207 D 2-997 [9566], [9568] 2 analog inputs 1 2 DO: TM31 Overviews - Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 3 Fault: Overtemperature sensor TM31 [9576][9577] Input for temperature sensor 4 5 6 fp_1840_51_eng.vsd 24.03.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1840 - Overviews 7 8 r4023.11 6 7 8 Function diagrams 4 5 6 A r4104.0 X521 2 3 D 1 2 3 4 5 [9572] 2 analog outputs 1 AI 0+ AI 0AI 1+ AI 1P10 M N10 M A p4071[1] ... p4041 1 D r4023.8 ... ... AO 0V+ AO 0AO 0A+ AO 1V+ AO 1AO 1A+ +Temp -Temp = M + (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1850 - Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) ~ +24 V electronic + + M M M M X514 = M1 X501 X524 + + 24 V + + M M IC for current limiting M1 M1 X520 1 2 5 digital inputs error-free L3+ M1 T X521 F35151 Discrepancy error 0 =1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L1+ DI 0 DI 1+ DI 2 DI 3+ DI 1DI 3M1 1 DI 4 DI 5+ DI 6 DI 7+ DI 8 DI 9+ DI 5DI 7DI 9M1 X523 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 ... F-DI 0 & 0 T =1 [2855.1] F-DI 5 [2855.1] M1 & 0 ... ... M1 ... T F35151 Discrepancy error 0 F35151 Discrepancy error 0 T ... F-DI 9 F-DI 4 [2855.1] =1 M1 & 0 1 1 DI 20 [2848.2] F-DO 0 +24 V_1 DI 23 [2857.8] DI 14 1 DI 15+ 2 DI 16 3 DI 17+ 4 DI 18 5 DI 19+ 6 DI 157 DI 178 DI 199 M1 10 X533 [2851] DI 22 DO 2+ DO 2- 1 2 3 DI 23 DO 3+ DO 3- 1 2 3 M1 M [2857.8] ... ... ... ... 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ... ... ... [2848.2] M1 1 2 DO : TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Overviews - Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) [2855.1] L2 DI 10 DI 11+ DI 12 DI 13+ DI 11DI 13M1 X532 ... p10040.19 & 0 1 1 1 p10040.9 M1 X531 1 =1 [2850] DI 20 DO 0+ DO 0- DI 21 DO 1+ DO 1- 0 p10040.10 M X525 F35151 Discrepancy error p10040.0 M1 X522 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 digital inputs error-free F-DO 3 +24 V_1 M1 X535 [2853] 3 4 5 6 fp_1850_51_eng.vsd 06.04.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 1850 - Function diagrams ~ Overviews 2-998 Fig. 2-17 +24 V DC to the X500 next device Function diagrams CU320-2 input/output terminals 2.4 CU320-2 input/output terminals Function diagrams 2120 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3, DI 16, DI 17) 2-1000 2121 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7, DI 20, DI 21) 2-1001 2130 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) 2-1002 2131 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) 2-1003 2132 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13) 2-1004 2133 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15) 2-1005 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-999 24 V DC to the next device +24 V p0799[0] (4000.00 s) M X124.M M X122.1 DI 0 DI 0 r0723 r0722 DI 3, DI 16, DI 17 1 = Simulation on p0795.0 + <1> r0721.0 0 1 r0723.0 r0722.0 p0796.0 1 p0795.1 24 V X122.2 r0721.1 DI 1 0 1 r0723.1 r0722.1 p0796.1 1 p0795.2 r0721.2 X122.3 DI 2 0 1 r0723.2 r0722.2 p0796.2 1 p0795.3 r0721.3 X122.4 DI 3 0 1 r0723.3 r0722.3 p0796.3 1 p0795.16 r0721.16 X122.5 DI 16 0 1 r0723.16 r0722.16 5V p0796.16 1 p0795.17 r0721.17 <1> <1> When using the electrical isolation, omit the terminal jumper and connect the load power supply shown as a dashed line. + (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2120 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3, DI 16, DI 17) X124.M DI 0 DI 3, DI 16, DI 17 inverted 24 V <1> X122.6 DI 17 X122.7 M1 <1> X122.8 0 1 r0723.17 r0722.17 p0796.17 1 M 1 2 3 4 5 DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_MV, CU_S, CU_SL CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3, DI 16, DI 17) 6 fp_2120_51_eng.vsd 07.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2120 - Function diagrams X124.+ CU320-2 input/output terminals 2-1000 Fig. 2-18 X124.+ 24 V DC to the next device +24 V p0799[0] (4000.00 s) X124.+ X124.M M X124.M M X132.1 DI 4 DI 4 DI 7, DI 20, DI 21 inverted DI 4 r0723 r0722 DI 7, DI 20, DI 21 1 = Simulation on p0795.4 + <1> r0721.4 0 1 r0723.4 r0722.4 p0796.4 1 p0795.5 24 V X132.2 r0721.5 DI 5 0 1 r0723.5 r0722.5 p0796.5 1 p0795.6 r0721.6 X132.3 DI 6 0 1 r0723.6 r0722.6 p0796.6 1 p0795.7 r0721.7 X132.4 DI 7 0 1 r0723.7 r0722.7 p0796.7 1 p0795.20 r0721.20 X132.5 DI 20 0 1 r0723.20 r0722.20 5V p0796.20 1 p0795.21 <1> + 2-1001 <1> When using the electrical isolation, omit the terminal jumper and connect the load power supply shown as a dashed line. 24 V <1> X132.6 DI 21 X132.7 M2 <1> X132.8 0 1 r0723.21 r0722.21 p0796.21 1 M 1 2 3 4 5 DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_MV, CU_S, CU_SL CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7, DI 20, DI 21) 6 fp_2121_51_eng.vsd 07.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2121 - Function diagrams r0721.21 CU320-2 input/output terminals 2121 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7, DI 20, DI 21) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-19 X124.+ 24 V DC to the next device p0799[0] (4000.00 s) +24 V X124.M DI/DO 8 inverted r0723 M (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2130 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) + p0796.8 (0) X124.M M r0721.8 p0728.8 (0) DI X122.9 9 DI/DO 8 <3> 1 r0723.8 r0722.8 DI 0 p0748.8 (0) DO r0722 1 24 V 1 9 p0795.8 (0) DI 8_probe <2> 0 DI/DO 8 CU S_src DI/DO 8 0 DO <1> 1 p0738 (0) 1 1 r0747.8 0 0 p0796.9 (0) r0721.9 p0728.9 (0) DI X122.10 DI/DO 9 <3> p0795.9 (0) 1 DI 9_probe <2> r0723.9 1 r0722.9 DI 0 p0748.9 (0) 0 5V 1 DO CU S_src DI/DO 9 0 DO <1> 1 p0739 (0) 1 1 X122.11 M r0747.9 0 <1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies when used as digital output (p0728.x = 1). 0 <2> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for SINAMICS G130/G150), the following applies: Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]). <3> The digital output access authority is displayed in r0729. 1 2 3 4 5 DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_MV, CU_S, CU_SL CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) 6 fp_2130_51_eng.vsd 07.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2130 - Function diagrams X124.+ CU320-2 input/output terminals 2-1002 Fig. 2-20 X124.+ 24 V DC to the next device p0799[0] (4000.00 s) +24 V X124.+ X124.M DI/DO 10 inverted p0796.10 (0) X124.M M r0721.10 p0728.10 (0) DI X122.12 11 r0723 M + DI/DO 10 <3> 1 r0723.10 r0722.10 DI 0 p0748.10 (0) DO r0722 1 24 V 1 11 p0795.10 (0) DI 10_probe <2> 0 DI/DO 10 CU S_src DI/DO 10 0 DO <1> 1 p0740 (0) 1 1 r0747.10 0 0 p0796.11 (0) r0721.11 p0728.11 (0) DI X122.13 DI/DO 11 <3> p0795.11 (0) 1 DI 11_probe <2> r0723.11 1 r0722.11 DI 0 p0748.11 (0) 0 5V 1 DO CU S_src DI/DO 11 0 DO <1> 1 p0741 (0) 1 M r0747.11 0 2-1003 <1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies when used as digital output (p0728.x = 1). 0 <2> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for SINAMICS G130/G150), the following applies: Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]). <3> The digital output access authority is displayed in r0729. 1 2 3 4 5 DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_MV, CU_S, CU_SL CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) 6 fp_2131_51_eng.vsd 07.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2131 - Function diagrams 1 X122.14 CU320-2 input/output terminals 2131 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-21 X124.+ 24 V DC to the next device p0799[0] (4000.00 s) +24 V X124.M DI/DO 12 inverted r0723 M (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2132 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13) + p0796.12 (0) X124.M M r0721.12 p0728.12 (0) DI X132.9 13 DI/DO 12 <3> 1 r0723.12 r0722.12 DI 0 p0748.12 (0) DO r0722 1 24 V 1 13 p0795.12 (0) DI 12_probe <2> 0 DI/DO 12 CU S_src DI/DO 12 0 DO <1> 1 p0742 (0) 1 1 r0747.12 0 0 p0796.13 (0) r0721.13 p0728.13 (0) DI X132.10 DI/DO 13 <3> p0795.13 (0) 1 DI 13_probe <2> r0723.13 1 r0722.13 DI 0 p0748.13 (0) 0 5V 1 DO CU S_src DI/DO 13 0 DO <1> 1 p0743 (0) 1 1 X132.11 M r0747.13 0 <1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies when used as digital output (p0728.x = 1). 0 <2> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for SINAMICS G130/G150), the following applies: Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]). <3> The digital output access authority is displayed in r0729. 1 2 3 4 5 DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_MV, CU_S, CU_SL CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13) 6 fp_2132_51_eng.vsd 07.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2132 - Function diagrams X124.+ CU320-2 input/output terminals 2-1004 Fig. 2-22 X124.+ 24 V DC to the next device p0799[0] (4000.00 s) +24 V X124.+ X124.M DI/DO 14 inverted p0796.14 (0) X124.M M r0721.14 p0728.14 (0) DI X132.12 15 r0723 M + DI/DO 14 <3> 1 r0723.14 r0722.14 DI 0 p0748.14 (0) DO r0722 1 24 V 1 15 p0795.14 (0) DI 14_probe <2> 0 DI/DO 14 CU S_src DI/DO 14 0 DO <1> 1 p0744 (0) 1 1 r0747.14 0 0 p0796.15 (0) r0721.15 p0728.15 (0) DI X132.13 DI/DO 15 <3> p0795.15 (0) 1 DI 15_probe <2> r0723.15 1 r0722.15 DI 0 p0748.15 (0) 0 5V 1 DO CU S_src DI/DO 15 0 DO <1> 1 p0745 (0) 1 M r0747.15 0 2-1005 <1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies when used as digital output (p0728.x = 1). 0 <2> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for SINAMICS G130/G150), the following applies: Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]). <3> The digital output access authority is displayed in r0729. 1 2 3 4 5 DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_MV, CU_S, CU_SL CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15) 6 fp_2133_51_eng.vsd 07.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2133 - Function diagrams 1 X132.14 CU320-2 input/output terminals 2133 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-23 X124.+ Function diagrams CU_LINK 2.5 CU_LINK Function diagrams 2211 - Data transfer 2-1006 2-1007 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Data transfer bitwise 0 Fig. 2-24 p8500[0] (r0863.0) <1> <2> SINAMICS Integrated DO: CU_LINK (master) Controller Extension DO: CU_CX32 (slave) r8510.0 r8510.7 p8500[7] p8500[0] (0) (0) Data transfer bitwise 0 r8510.0 2211 - Data transfer (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Digital signals 0 7, e.g. BO: r0863.0 (signal "Ready" of the infeed unit). p8500[7] r8510.7 Data transfer bitwise 1 Digital inputs 0 20 17 21 p8501[0] (r0722.0) r8511.21 p8501[21] (r0722.21) p8501[0] (r0722.0) p8501[21] r8511.21 (0) (0) p8502 Data transfer wordwise 0 p8503 Data transfer wordwise 1 p8504 Data transfer wordwise 2 p8505 Data transfer wordwise 3 (0) 3 11 17 p8520[1] p8503 (0) r8513 p8520[1] r8513 (0) p8520[2] p8504 (0) r8514 p8520[2] r8514 Data transfer wordwise 3 Digital inputs 0 8 16 r8512 p8520[0] r8512 Data transfer wordwise 2 Data transfer bitwise 1 p8520[0] p8502 DRIVE-CLiQ Data transfer wordwise 1 7 r8511.0 r8511.0 Data transfer wordwise 0 Digital signals 0 (0) (0) p8520[3] p8505 (0) r8515 p8520[3] r8515 (0) 3 4 5 6 fp_2211_51_eng.vsd 21.04.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2211 - Function diagrams 1 2 DO: CU_LINK, CU_CX32 CU_LINK - Data transfer CU_LINK 2-1007 <1> The drive object CU_LINK only exists for automation systems with SINAMICS Integrated (e.g. SIMOTION D, SINUMERIK NCU) and the corresponding controller extension (e.g. CX32-2, NX10). On the SINAMICS Integrated, each controller extension is represented by a drive object CU_LINK. <2> p8800: CU_LINK address. Address of the controller extension, represented by the drive object CU_LINK. The address correlates with the DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the control unit connected to the controller extension configured. Value range: See p0918 (PROFIBUS address) The parameter p8800 is only readable through non-cyclic parameter access via DPV1 services. Function diagrams PROFIdrive 2.6 PROFIdrive Function diagrams 2410 - PROFIBUS (PB) / PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics 2-1010 2415 - Standard telegrams and process data 1 2-1011 2416 - Standard telegrams and process data 2 2-1012 2419 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 1 2-1013 2420 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 2 2-1014 2421 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 3 2-1015 2422 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 4 2-1016 2423 - Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data 2-1017 2425 - STW1_BM control word metal industry interconnection 2-1018 2426 - STW2_BM control word metal industry interconnection 2-1019 2427 - E_STW1_BM control word infeed metal industry interconnection 2-1020 2428 - ZSW1_BM status word metal industry interconnection 2-1021 2429 - ZSW2_BM status word metal industry interconnection 2-1022 2430 - E_ZSW1_BM control word infeed metal industry interconnection 2-1023 2439 - PZD receive signals, interconnection, profile-specific 2-1024 2440 - PZD receive signals, interconnection, manufacturer-specific 2-1025 2441 - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 2-1026 2442 - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-1027 2444 - STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-1028 2447 - E_STW1 control word infeed interconnection 2-1029 2449 - PZD send signals, interconnection, profile-specific 2-1030 2450 - PZD send signals interconnection manufacturer-specific 2-1031 2451 - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 2-1032 2452 - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-1033 2454 - ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-1034 2457 - E_ZSW1 status word infeed interconnection 2-1035 2468 - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-1036 2-1008 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Function diagrams PROFIdrive 2470 - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-1037 2472 - IF1 status words, free interconnection 2-1038 2481 - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-1039 2483 - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-1040 2485 - IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO 2-1041 2487 - IF2 send telegram, free interconnection 2-1042 2489 - IF2 status words, free interconnection 2-1043 2491 - IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection 2-1044 2493 - IF2 send telegram, free interconnection 2-1045 2495 - CU_STW1 control word 1, Control Unit interconnection 2-1046 2496 - CU_ZSW1 status word 1, Control Unit interconnection 2-1047 2497 - A_DIGITAL interconnection 2-1048 2498 - E_DIGITAL interconnection 2-1049 2499 - A_DIGITAL_1 interconnection 2-1050 2500 - E_DIGITAL_1 interconnection 2-1051 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1009 PROFIBUS sampling time Drive-specific functions (available once for each drive object) <9> PB state t_monit p2047 Setting the PROFIBUS address Cyclic telegrams from the master <8> T 0 S Q r2043.0 t PD PZD state Clock cycle synchronous operation active <9> <7> Address switches on the Control Unit p0918 CD AB E 78 9 CD AB E 4 56 4 56 78 9 DP H 23 F01 1...126 Setting the PROFIBUS address: - Via p0918: Set the address switches DP H and DP L to 00 hex (= 0 dez), 7F hex (= 127 dez), 80 hex or FF hex. - Via the address switches DP H and DP L: Set the desired address as hexadecimal value between 01 hex (= 1 dez) und 7E hex (= 126 dez). Any change only becomes PB addr switch dia effective after a POWER ON. r2057 PB diag standard r2055[0...2] PN Name of Station r61000[0...239] Diagnostic parameters <7> PB diag clock sync r2064[0...7] No telegrams from the master n F01912 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation sign-of-life failure" & > <2> <5> n > p0925 F01911 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation clock cycle failure" A01921 "PROFIBUS: Receive setpoints after To" A01930 "IF1: PB/PN current controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal" A01931 "IF1: PB/PN speed controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal" A01940 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronism not reached" A01941 "IF1: PB/PN clock signal missing when establishing bus" A01943 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle signal faulted when establishing the bus" A01944 "IF1: PB/PN sign-of-life synchronism not reached" A01950 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation synchronization unsuccessful" PB status r2054 PROFINET address PN IP of Station r61001[0...3] Detecting missing signs-of-life in a series <7> Sign-of-life from the clock cycle synchronous master POWER ON F01910 "PROFIBUS: Setpoint timeout" PD SoL_tol 0...65535 <5> p0925 (1) <3> = 65535 Actual PROFIBUS address SET DP L Example: 15 hex = 21 dez Memory 0 <1> A01920 "PROFIBUS: Interruption cyclic connection" t > t_response <4> No cyclic telegrams from the master DP ADDRESS F01 T R Q r2043.1 PB address 1...126 p0918 (126) 23 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2410 - PROFIBUS (PB) / PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics PB PZD state Setpoint failure Monitoring functions Faults A01900 "PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram error" A01901 "PROFIBUS: Parameterizing telegram error" A01902 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation parameterization not permissible" <1> The monitoring function is only executed after at least one "valid" cyclic <7> telegram has been received. "Valid" means: the master is in operation and PD mast-SoL diag net data are transmitted. r2065 <2> The monitoring function is only executed after the first sign-of- life has been received. <3> Sign-of-life monitoring not effective for p0925 = 65535. PD mast-SoL S_Src <4> The response monitoring time t_response is automatically defined when <6> p2045 configuring PROFIBUS/PROFINET r2050[3] (0) (e.g. HW Config made by SIEMENS). <5> Only for the clock-cycle synchronous operation of the SERVO and <5> VECTOR drive object. <6> p2045 is automatically interconnected when the telegram is selected. <7> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150. r2075 IF1 diag offs recv (no clock cycle synchronous operation with G130/G150). r2076 IF1 diag offs send <8> Only for cyclic operation. <9> Not when the master CPU stops. 1 2 3 4 DO: All objects PROFIdrive - PROFIBUS (PB) / PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics 5 6 fp_2410_54_eng.vsd 25.10.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2410 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] PD fault delay 0...100 [s] p2044 (0) Alarms PROFIdrive 2-1010 Fig. 2-25 CU-specific functions <1> <2> <3> Refer to [1020.7] Interconnec tion is made according to [2440] [2450] automatically Not suitable for sensorless vector control <4> <4> <4> Telegram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Appl.-Class 1 1 1, 4 1, 4 4 DSC 4 DSC 3 PZD1 PZD2 STW1 ZSW1 NSOLL_A NIST_A PZD3 PZD4 STW1 PZD5 ZSW1 STW1 NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B STW2 ZSW2 STW2 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10 PZD11 PZD12 PZD13 Send telegram to PROFIdrive PZD7 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 PZD14 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B ZSW2 STW2 ZSW2 STW2 ZSW2 STW2 ZSW2 G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW PZD6 Receive telegram from PROFIdrive 2415 - Standard telegrams and process data 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-26 PROFIdrive sampling time PD Telegram select p0922 (999) G1_XIST1 G2_STW G1_XIST1 XERR STW1 9 3 ZSW1 G2_STW G1_XIST1 XERR G1_XIST2 G1_XIST2 KPC G2_ZSW G1_XIST2 G1_XIST2 KPC G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2 G2_XIST2 ZSW1 SATZANW AKTSATZ SATZANW AKTSATZ G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 STW1 STW2 ZSW2 MDI_ TARPOS XIST_A MDI_ VELOCITY MDI_ACC MDI_DEC MDI_MOD PZD15 PZD16 PZD17 PZD18 PZD19 PZD20 PZD21 PZD22 PZD23 PZD24 PZD25 PZD26 PZD27 PZD28 PZD29 PZD30 PZD31 PZD32 1 2 3 DO: ENC, SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - Standard telegrams and process data 1 4 5 6 fp_2415_54_eng.vsd 22.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2415 - Function diagrams 2-1011 = Position encoder signal PROFIdrive <1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used. Not suitable for sensorless vector control. <2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2415] - [2424]. If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2415] - [2424]. <3> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type. <4> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150. PROFIdrive sampling time Interconnec tion is made according to [2440] [2450] automatically <5> <5> <5> (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2416 - Standard telegrams and process data 2 Telegram 20 30 31 81 82 83 Appl.-Class 1 1 1 1 1 1 PZD1 PZD2 STW1 ZSW1 S_STW1 NSOLL_A NIST_A_GLATT Profisafe trailer PZD3 IAIST_GLATT PZD4 MIST_GLATT PZD5 PIST_GLATT PZD6 user <3> S_ZSW1 S_STW1 S_ZSW1 Profisafe trailer Profisafe trailer Profisafe trailer STW2_ENC ZSW2_ENC STW2_ENC ZSW2_ENC STW2_ENC ZSW2_ENC G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST1 G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2 G1_XST2 G1_XIST2 PZD7 NIST_A NIST_B PZD8 PZD9 PZD10 PZD11 PZD12 PZD13 PZD14 PZD15 PZD16 PZD17 PZD18 PZD19 PZD20 PZD21 PZD22 PZD23 PZD24 PZD25 PZD26 PZD27 PZD28 PZD29 PZD30 PZD31 PZD32 <1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used. Not suitable for sensorless vector control. <2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2415] - [2423]. If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2415] - [2423]. <3> Freely interconnectable (pre-setting: MELD_NAMUR). <4> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type. <5> Only for ENCODER. = Position encoder signal 1 2 3 DO: ENC, SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - Standard telegrams and process data 2 4 5 6 fp_2416_54_eng.vsd 22.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2416 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] PROFIdrive Fig. 2-27 2-1012 <1> <2> <4> PD Telegram select p0922 (999) Fig. 2-28 2419 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A <1> <2> <4> PD Telegr_select p0922 (999) PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] Interconnection is made according to <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> Telegram 102 103 105 106 110 111 116 Appl.- Class 1, 4 1, 4 4 DSC 4 DSC 3 3 4 DSC PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10 PZD11 PZD12 PZD13 PZD14 PZD15 PZD16 PZD17 PZD18 PZD19 PZD20 PZD21 PZD22 PZD23 PZD24 PZD25 PZD26 PZD27 PZD28 PZD29 PZD30 PZD31 PZD32 [2440] [2450] automatically STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B STW2 ZSW2 STW2 ZSW2 STW2 MOMRED MELDW MOMRED MELDW MOMRED G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G2_STW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST1 XERR ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW STW2 MOMRED G1_STW G2_STW ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST1 XERR G1_XIST2 G1_XIST2 G2_ZSW KPC G1_XIST2 G1_XIST2 KPC G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2 G2_XIST2 STW1 SATZANW POS_STW STW2 OVERRIDE MDI_TAR POS MDI_VELO CITY MDI_ACC MDI_DEC MDI_MODE ZSW1 AKTSATZ POS_ZSW ZSW2 MELDW XIST_A STW1 POS_STW1 POS_STW2 STW2 OVERRIDE MDI_TAR POS MDI_VELO CITY MDI_ACC MDI_DEC user <3> <5> ZSW1 POS_ZSW1 POS_ZSW2 ZSW2 MELDW XIST_A NIST_B STW1 ZSW1 NSOLL_B NIST_B STW2 MOMRED G1_STW G2_STW ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 XERR FAULT_CODE WARN_CODE user <3> G1_XIST2 KPC G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2 AIST_GLATT MSOLL_GLATT PIST_GLATT ITIST_GLATT 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 1 5 6 fp_2419_54_eng.vsd 22.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2419 - Function diagrams 2-1013 = Position encoder signal PROFIdrive <1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used. <2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2415] - [2423]. If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2415] - [2423]! <3> Can be freely connected. <4> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type. <5> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150. PROFIdrive sampling time (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2420 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 2 Interconnection is made according to <3> <3> <3> Telegram 118 125 126 Appl.- Class PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10 PZD11 PZD12 PZD13 PZD14 PZD15 PZD16 PZD17 PZD18 PZD19 PZD20 PZD21 PZD22 PZD23 PZD24 PZD25 PZD26 PZD27 PZD28 PZD29 PZD30 PZD31 PZD32 4 DSC 4 DSC [2440] [2450] automatically <7> <6> 138 139 136 4 DSC 4 DSC 4 DSC 4 DSC STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B STW2 MOMRED G2_STW G3_STW ZSW2 MELDW G2_ZSW STW2 MOMRED G1_STW ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW STW2 MOMRED G1_STW res ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 STW2 MOMRED G2_STW G3_STW ZSW2 MELDW G2_ZSW XERR STW2 MOMRED G2_STW G3_STW ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW G2_XIST1 STW2 MOMRED G1_STW G2_STW XERR KPC G1_XIST1 XERR G2_XIST2 KPC G3_ZSW M_VST DSC_STW <5> res T_SYMM <5> G3_XIST1 G3_XIST2 G1_XIST2 G1_XIST2 KPC M_VST DSC_STW <5> res T_SYMM <5> G1_XIST1 XERR G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2 G1_XIST2 KPC M_VST DSC_STW <5> res T_SYMM <5> AIST_GLATT MSOLL_GLATT PIST_GLATT ITIST_GLATT G2_XIST1 XERR G2_ZSW G3_XIST1 G3_XIST2 G1_XIST1 XERR G2_XIST2 KPC M_VST DSC_STW <5> res T_SYMM <5> AIST_GLATT MSOLL_GLATT PIST_GLATT ITIST_GLATT G3_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2 G1_XIST2 KPC M_VST DSC_STW <5> res T_SYMM <5> AIST_GLATT MSOLL_GLATT PIST_GLATT ITIST_GLATT <1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used. <2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2415] - [2423]. If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2415] - [2423]. <3> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150. <4> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type. SP_ZSW SP_XIST_A SP_XIST_D SP_KONFIG res AIST_GLATT MSOLL_GLATT PIST_GLATT ITIST_GLATT <5> Only if the DSC with Spline function module is active (r0108.6 = 1). <6> Only if the Spindle function module is active (r0108.11 = 1). <7> Only for SINAMICS S120. = Position encoder signal 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 2 5 6 fp_2420_54_eng.vsd 22.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2420 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] PROFIdrive Fig. 2-29 2-1014 <1> <2> <4> PD Telegr_select p0922 (999) Fig. 2-30 2421 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 3 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A <1> <2> <4> PD Telegram select p0922 (999) PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] Interconnection is made according to [2440] [2450] automatically <8> Telegram 220 352 370 371 Appl.- Class 1 1 - - PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10 PZD11 PZD12 PZD13 PZD14 PZD15 PZD16 PZD17 PZD18 PZD19 PZD20 PZD21 PZD22 PZD23 PZD24 PZD25 PZD26 PZD27 PZD28 PZD29 PZD30 PZD31 PZD32 STW1_BM ZSW1_BM NIST_A /NIST_A_GLATT user <3> <9> NSOLL_B IAIST/IAIST_GLATT user <3> <9> STW2_BM MIST/MIST_GLATT user <3> <9> M_ADD <7><10> WARN_CODE M_LIM <6> <7> FAULT_CODE user <3> ZSW2_BM user <3> r1482 user <3> user <3> user <3> user <3> user <3> STW1 NSOLL_A <5> <5> <5> <5> ZSW1 NIST_A_GLATT IAIST_GLATT MIST_GLATT WARN_CODE FAULT_CODE E_STW1 E_ZSW1 E_STW1_BM user <3> user <3> user <3> user <3> E_ZSW1_BM IAIST WARN_CODE FAULT_CODE user <3> user <3> user <3> user <3> 5 6 fp_2421_54_eng.vsd 22.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2421 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 3 <6> Not for U/f control. <7> Preassignment, not disabled. <9> Only if the Spindle function module is active (r0108.11 = 1). <8> Only for S120/S150. <9> Values smoothed at Vector, Values unsmooted at Servo. <10> Not for SERVO. PROFIdrive 2-1015 <1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used. <2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2415] - [2423]. If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2415] - [2423]! <3> Freely interconn. <4> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type. <5> In order to comply with the PROFIdrive profile, PZD1 must be used as control word 1 (STW1) or status word 1 (ZSW1). p2037 = 2 should be set if STW1 is not transferred with PZD1 as specified in the PROFIdrive profile. PROFIdrive sampling time (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2422 - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 4 Interconnection is made according to [2440] [2450] automatically <4> Telegram 390 391 392 393 394 395 Appl.- Class - - - - - - - PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10 PZD11 PZD12 PZD13 PZD14 PZD15 PZD16 PZD17 PZD18 PZD19 PZD20 PZD21 PZD22 PZD23 PZD24 PZD25 PZD26 PZD27 PZD28 PZD29 PZD30 PZD31 PZD32 CU_STW1 CU_ZSW1 A_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL CU_STW1 CU_ZSW1 A_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL A_DIGITAL_1 E_DIGITAL_1 MT_STW MT_ZSW MT_DIAG MT_ZS_1 MT_ZS_2 MT_ZS_3 MT_ZS_4 MT_ZSB1 MT_ZS_5 MT_ZS_6 MT_ZS_7 MT_ZS_8 MT_ZSB2 MT_ZS_9 MT_ZS_10 MT_ZS_11 MT_ZS_12 MT_ZSB3 MT_ZS_13 MT_ZS_14 MT_ZS_15 MT_ZS_16 MT_ZSB4 CU_STW1 CU_ZSW1 A_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL A_DIGITAL_1 E_DIGITAL_1 MT_STW MT_ZSW NOCKEN1_ZS_F MT1_ZS_F NOCKEN1_ZS_S MT1_ZS_S NOCKEN2_ZS_F MT2_ZS_F NOCKEN2_ZS_S MT2_ZS_S NOCKEN3_ZS_F MT3_ZS_F NOCKEN3_ZS_S MT3_ZS_S NOCKEN4_ZS_F MT4_ZS_F NOCKEN4_ZS_S MT4_ZS_S NOCKEN5_ZS_F MT5_ZS_F NOCKEN5_ZS_S MT5_ZS_S NOCKEN6_ZS_F MT6_ZS_F NOCKEN6_ZS_S MT6_ZS_S NOCKEN7_ZS_F MT7_ZS_F NOCKEN7_ZS_S MT7_ZS_S NOCKEN8_ZS_S NOCKEN8_ZS_F MT8_ZS_F NOCKEN8_ZS_S MT8_ZS_S E_ANALOG CU_STW1 A_DIGITAL MT_STW CU_ZSW1 E_DIGITAL MT_ZSW MT1_ZS_F MT1_ZS_S MT2_ZS_F MT2_ZS_S CU_STW1 A_DIGITAL MT_STW CU_ZSW1 E_DIGITAL MT_ZSW MT1_ZS_F MT1_ZS_S MT2_ZS_F MT2_ZS_S MT3_ZS_F MT3_ZS_S MT4_ZS_F MT4_ZS_S MT5_ZS_F MT5_ZS_S MT6_ZS_F MT6_ZS_S CU_STW1 A_DIGITAL A_DIGITAL_1 MT_STW CU_ZSW1 E_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL_1 MT_ZSW MT1_ZS_F MT1_ZS_S MT2_ZS_F MT2_ZS_S MT3_ZS_F MT3_ZS_S MT4_ZS_F MT4_ZS_S MT5_ZS_F MT5_ZS_S MT6_ZS_F MT6_ZS_S MT7_ZS_F MT7_ZS_S MT8_ZS_F MT8_ZS_S E_ANALOG CU_STW1 A_DIGITAL A_DIGITAL_1 CU_ZSW1 E_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL_1 396 <1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used. <2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2415] - [2423]. If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2415] - [2423]. <3> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type. <4> Only for CU_I_D410. <5> Connected Only for CU_S_AC or CU_I_D410. 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 4 5 6 fp_2422_54_eng.vsd 01.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2422 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] PROFIdrive Fig. 2-31 2-1016 <1> <2> <3> PD Telegram select p0922 (999) PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] [2440] [2450] automatically [2481] [2483] Telegram 901 902 999 Appl.- Class - - <3> - <3> STW1 ZSW1 PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10 PZD11 PZD12 PZD13 PZD14 PZD15 PZD16 PZD17 PZD18 PZD19 PZD20 PZD21 PZD22 PZD23 PZD24 PZD25 PZD26 PZD27 PZD28 PZD29 PZD30 PZD31 PZD32 S_STW2 S_ZSW2 S_SLS_LIMIT_A S_SLS_LIMIT_ACTIVE S_CYCLE_COUNT S_XIST16 S_STW2 S_ZTW2 S_SLS_LIMIT_A S_SLS_LIMIT_A_ACTIVE S_CYCLE_COUNT S_XIST32 Transmit telegram length freely selectable via central PROFIdrive configuration in the master <4> 2423 - Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data Interconnection is made according to Receive telegram length freely selectable via central PROFIdrive configuration in the master <4> Fig. 2-32 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A <1> <2> <4> PD Telegram select p0922 (999) 5 6 fp_2423_54_eng.vsd 22.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2423 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data PROFIdrive 2-1017 <1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used. <2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2415] - [2423]. If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2415] - [2423]. <3> In order to comply with the PROFIdrive profile, PZD1 must be used as control word 1 (STW1) or status word 1 (ZSW1). p2037 = 2 should be set if STW1 is not transferred with PZD1 as specified in the PROFIdrive profile. <4> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type. <1> Meaning STW1.0 0 = OFF (OFF1) = ON p0840[0] = r2090.0 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.1 0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) 1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible) p0844[0] = r2090.1 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.2 0 = OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) 1 = No OFF3 (enable is possible) p0848[0] = r2090.2 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.3 0 = Inhibit operation 1 = Enable operation p2816[0] = r2090.3 [2501.3] [2634.3] - STW1.4 0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator 1 = Operating condition p1140[0] = r2090.4 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] - STW1.5 0 = Stop the ramp-function generator 1 = Enable the ramp-function generator p1141[0] = r2090.5 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] - STW1.6 0 = Inhibit setpoint = 0 1 = Enable setpoint p1142[0] = r2090.6 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] - p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.1] [8060] - = Acknowledge faults Inverted STW1.8 Reserved - - - - STW1.9 Reserved - - - - STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC p0854[0] = r2090.10 [2501.3] [2501] - STW1.11 Reserved - - - - STW1.12 Reserved <3> <3> - - - STW1.13 Reserved <3> <3> - - - STW1.14 Reserved <3> <3> - - - STW1.15 Reserved <3> <3> - - - <2> Refer to [1020.7] <1> Used in telegram 220. <2> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD). <3> Interconnection is not disabled. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - STW1_BM control word metal industry interconnection 5 6 fp_2425_54_eng.vsd 04.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2425 - Function diagrams 2425 - STW1_BM control word metal industry interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Signal STW1.7 [Function diagram] [Function diagram] internal control word signal target PROFIdrive sampling time Interconnection parameters PROFIdrive 2-1018 Fig. 2-33 Signal targets for STW1_BM 2426 - STW2_BM control word metal industry interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-34 Signal targets for STW2_BM <1> Interconnection parameters [Function diagram] [Function diagram] internal control word signal target Meaning STW2.0 Command data set selection CDS, bit 0 p0810 = r2093.0 - [8560] - STW2.1 Command data set selection CDS, bit 1 <3> p0811 = r2093.1 - [8560] - STW2.2 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0 p0820[0] = r2093.2 <2> - [8565] - STW2.3 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1 p0821[0] = r2093.3 <2> - [8565] - STW2.4 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 2 p0822[0] = r2093.4 <2> - [8565] - STW2.5 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator p1122[0] = r2093.5 - - - STW2.6 Reserved - - - - STW2.7 1 = Speed controller set integrator value p1477[0] = r2093.7 - - - STW2.8 1 = Droop enabled p1492[0] = r2093.8 - [6030] - STW2.9 1 = Speed controller enabled p0856[0] = r2093.9 <2> - - - STW2.10 Reserved <2> - - - STW2.11 1 = Torque controlled operation 0 = Speed controlled operation - - - STW2.12 Reserved <2> <2> - - - STW2.13 Reserved <2> <2> - - - STW2.14 Reserved <2> <2> - - - STW2.15 Controller slave sign-of-life Toggle bit - - - <3> <2> p1501[0] = r2093.11 p2081[15] = r2093.15 Refer to [1020.7] <3> Only for Vector. <4> Only for "extended setpoint channel". 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - STW2_BM-control word metal industry interconnection 5 6 fp_2426_54_eng.vsd 08.09.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2426 - PROFIdrive 2-1019 <1> Used in telegram 220. <2> Interconnection is not disabled. <4> Inverted Function diagrams Signal PROFIdrive sampling time Signal targets for E_STW1_BM <1> Interconnection parameters (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2427 - E_STW1_BM control word infeed metal industry interconnection Signal Meaning STW1.0 = ON (close pre-charging/line contactor, pulses can be enabled) 0 = OFF1 (reduce Vdc along a ramp, suppress pulse and open pre-charging/line contactor) STW1.1 1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible) 0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and power-on inhibit) STW1.2 Reserved STW1.3 1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled) 0 = Inhibit operation (suppress pulses) STW1.4 Reserved STW1.5 1 = Infeed, inhibit motoring STW1.6 1 = Infeed, inhibit regenerative operation STW1.7 [Function diagram] internal control word <7> [Function diagram] signal target Inverted A_INF B_INF <7> S_INF <5> A_INF B_INF <7> S_INF <5> p0840[0] = r2090.0 [8920.3] [8720.3] [8820.3] [8932] [8732] [8832] - p0844[0] = r2090.1 [8920.3] [8720.3] [8820.3] [8932] [8732] [8832] - - - - - - - - - p0852[0] = r2090.3 [8920.3] - [8820.3] [8932] - [8832] - - - - - - - - - <4> p3532= r2090.5 [8920.3] - - [8920] - - - <3> p3533= r2090.6 [8920.3] - [8820.3] [8920] - [8820] - <3> = Acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.3] [8060] - STW1.8 Reserved <6> <6> - - - - - - - STW1.9 Reserved <6> <6> - - - - - - - STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC <2> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [8920.3] [8720.3] [8820.3] [8920] [8720] [8820] - STW1.11 Reserved <6> <6> - - - - - - - STW1.12 Reserved <6> <6> - - - - - - - STW1.13 Reserved <6> <6> - - - - - - - STW1.14 Reserved <6> <6> - - - - - - - STW1.15 Controller-sign-of-life Toggle Bit p2080[15] = r2090.15 - - - - - - - <1> Used in telegram 371. <2> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD). <3> Only for A_INF, S_INF <4> Only for A_INF <5> B_INF and S_INF only for S120. <6> Interconnection is not disabled. <7> Only for S120 and G150. <8> Not for G130. 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF PROFIdrive - E_STW1-control word infeed metal industry interconnection 5 6 fp_2427_54_eng.vsd 22.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2427 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] PROFIdrive 2-1020 Fig. 2-35 PROFIdrive sampling time 2428 - ZSW1_BM status word metal industry interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-36 Signal sources for ZSW1_BM <1> Meaning ZSW1.0 1 = Ready for switching on p2080[0] = r0899.0 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.1 1 = Ready for operation p2080[1] = r0899.1 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled p2080[2] = r2811.0 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] - ZSW1.4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) p2080[4] = r0899.4 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.5 1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive) p2080[5] = r0899.5 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.6 1 = Switching on inhibited active p2080[6] = r0899.6 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] - ZSW1.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2080[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8010] - ZSW1.9 1 = Control requested <3> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [2503.7] [2503] - ZSW1.10 1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded p2080[10] = r2199.1 [2536.7] [8010] - ZSW1.11 1 = I, M, or P limit not reached p2080[11] = r1407.7 [2522.7] [5610] [6060] <5> ZSW1.12 1 = Open the holding brake p2080[12] = r0899.12 [2503.7] [2701] - ZSW1.13 Reserved <6> <6> - - - ZSW1.14 Reserved <6> <6> - - - ZSW1.15 Reserved <6> <6> - - - <4> 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - ZSW1_BM status word metal industry interconnection [Function diagram] signal source Inverted <2> PROFIdrive Abtastzeit Refer to [1020.7] <4> Not for VECTOR U/f. <5> Only for SINAMICS S120. <6> Interconnection is not disabled. 5 6 fp_2428_54_eng.vsd 06.12.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2428 - PROFIdrive 2-1021 <1> Used in telegram 220. <2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15) <3> The drive object is ready to accept data. [Function diagram] Internal status word Function diagrams Signal Interconnection parameters <1> [Function diagram] internal status word [Function diagram] signal source Inverted 2429 - ZSW2_BM status word metal industry interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Signal Meaning ZSW2.0 Reserved <3> <3> - - - ZSW2.1 Reserved <3> <3> - - - ZSW2.2 Reserved <3> <3> - - - ZSW2.3 Reserved <3> <3> - - - ZSW2.4 Reserved <3> <3> - - - ZSW2.5 1 = Alarm class bit 0 p2081[5] = r2139.11 - [2548] - - ZSW2.6 1 = Alarm class bit 1 p2081[6] = r2139.12 - [2548] - ZSW2.7 Reserved - - - - ZSW2.8 Reserved - - - - ZSW2.9 1 = Speed setpoint limited <2> p2081[9] = r1407.11 - - - ZSW2.10 1 = Upper torque limit <2> p2081[10] = r1407.8 - - - ZSW2.11 1 = Lower torque limit <2> p2081[11] = r1407.9 - - - ZSW2.12 1 = Encoderless operation due to fault p2081[12] = r1407.13 - - - ZSW2.13 1 = SS1 delay time active in the drive p2081[13] = r9773.2 - - - - -- - ZSW2.14 1 = STO active in drive p2081[14] = r9773.1 - - - ZSW2.15 Controller slave sign-of-life Toggle bit p2081[15] = r2093.15 - - - PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] <1> Used in telegram 220. <2> Not for VECTOR U/f. <3> Interconnection is not disabled. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - ZSW2_BM status word metal industry interconnection 5 6 fp_2429_54_eng.vsd 06.09.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2429 - Function diagrams Interconnection parameters PROFIdrive 2-1022 Fig. 2-37 Signal sources for ZSW2_BM 2430 - E_ZSW1_BM control word infeed metal industry interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-38 PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] Signal sources for E_ZSW1_BM Signal Meaning ZSW1.0 1 = Ready for switching on ZSW1.1 <1> <6> Interconnection parameters [Function diagram] signal source [Function diagram] internal status word Inverted A_INF B_INF <5> S_INF <3> A_INF B_INF <5> S_INF <3> p2080[0] = r0899.0 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - 1 = Ready for operation p2080[1] = r0899.1 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled p2080[2] = r0899.2 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 ZSW1.4 1 = No OFF2 effective p2080[4] = r0899.4 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.5 Reserved - - - - - - - - ZSW1.6 1 = Switching on inhibited p2080[6] = r0899.6 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 ZSW1.8 Reserved <4> <4> - - - - - - - ZSW1.9 1 = PLC requests control <2> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [8926] [8726] [8826] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.10 Reserved <4> <4> - - - - - - - ZSW1.11 1 = Pre-charging completed p2080[11] = r0899.11 [8950] [8750] [8850] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.12 1 = Line contactor closed p2080[12] = r0899.12 [8934] [8734] [8834] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.13 Reserved <4> <4> - - - - - - - ZSW1.14 Reserved <4> <4> - - - - - - - ZSW1.15 Controller sign-of-life Toggle bit r2080[15] = r2090.15 - - - - - - - [2548.7] [8065] - [2548.7] - 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF PROFIdrive - E_ZSW1_BM status word infeed metal industry interconnection 5 6 fp_2430_54_eng.vsd 22.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2430 - Function diagrams <5> Only for S120 and G150. <6> Not for G130. PROFIdrive 2-1023 <1> Used in telegram 371. <2> The drive object is ready to accept data. <3> Only for S120. <4> Interconnection is not disabled. [8060] Signal receivers for PZD receive signals PROFIBUS PROFINET (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2439 - PZD receive signals, interconnection, profile-specific PROFIdrive receive telegram <1> PROFIdrive Signal No. <2> Interconnection parameter Function diagram Data type Signal Meaning Scaling STW1 Control word 1 1 (bitwise) [2442][2443] <3> [2475] <3> U16 - STW2 Control word 2 3 (bitwise) [2444] [2445] U16 - [3030.2] [3080.4] <3> I16 4000 hex [3030.2] [3080.4] [3090.8] <3> I32 4000 0000 hex NSOLL_A Speed setpoint A (16-bit) 5 p1070 (Erw. Soll.) p1155 NSOLL_B Speed setpoint B (32-bit) 7 p1070 (Erw. Soll.) p1155 p1430 (DSC) <3> <3> G1_STW Encoder 1 control word 9 p0480[0] [4720] U16 - <3> [2468], [2481] r2090...r2095 bit <3> r2050[0...n] WORD r2060[0...30] DWORD G2_STW Encoder 2 control word 13 p0480[1] [4720] U16 - G3_STW Encoder 3 control word 17 p0480[2] [4720] U16 - A_DIGITAL Digital output (16-bit) 22 (bitwise) [2497] U16 - XERR Position deviation 25 p1190 [3090.5] I32 - KPC Position controller gain factor 26 p1191 [3090.5] I32 - SATZANW Pos block selection 32 (bitwise) [2476] U16 - MDI_TARPOS MDI position 34 p2642 [3618] I32 1 hex 1 LU MDI_VELOCITY MDI velocity 35 p2643 [3618] I32 1 hex 1000 LU/min Drive object m MDI_ACC MDI acceleration override 36 p2644 [3618] I16 4000 hex 100% Trailer MDI_DEC MDI deceleration override 37 p2645 [3618] I16 4000 hex 100% MDI_MOD MDI mode 38 (bitwise) [2480] U16 - STW2_ENC Control word 2 ENCODER 80 (bitwise) [2433] U16 - Header Drive object 1 Drive object 2 . . . ... <3> p2000 p2000 Drive object n . . . <3> Telegram assignment according to p0922 [2415] [2423] <4> <1> When selecting a standard telegram or a manufacturer-specific telegram via p0922, these interconnection parameters of the command data set CDS0 are automatically set. <2> Data type according to to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32. <3> Only for SINAMICS S120. <4> Only for ENCODER. 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_CX32, CU_G, CU_S, ENC, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals, interconnection, profile-specific 5 6 fp_2439_54_eng.vsd 23.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2439 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] PROFIdrive 2-1024 Fig. 2-39 PROFIdrive sampling time 2440 - PZD receive signals, interconnection, manufacturer-specific (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-40 PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] Signal receivers for PZD receive signals PROFIBUS PROFINET <2> <1> PROFIdrive Signal No. Interconnection parameter Function diagram Signal Meaning MOMRED Torque reduction 101 p1542 [5610.2] I16 4000 hex p2003 M_VST Torque pre-control value 112 p1513[0] [5060] I16 4000 hex p2003 DSC_STW DSC control word 114 p1194 [3090] U16 T_SYMM DSC Symmetrizing time constant 115 p1195 [3090] U16 MT_STW Measuring probe control word 130 p0682 - U16 Header NOCKEN1_ZS_F Nocken 1 Zeitstempel fallende Flanke 169 p0715[0] - U16 Drive object 1 NOCKEN1_ZS_S Nocken 1 Zeitstempel steigende Flanke 170 p0714[0] - U16 NOCKEN2_ZS_F Nocken 1 Zeitstempel fallende Flanke 171 p0715[1] - U16 NOCKEN2_ZS_S Nocken 1 Zeitstempel steigende Flanke 172 p0714[1] - U16 NOCKEN3_ZS_F Nocken 1 Zeitstempel fallende Flanke 173 p0715[2] - U16 NOCKEN3_ZS_S Nocken 1 Zeitstempel steigende Flanke 174 p0714[2] - U16 NOCKEN4_ZS_F Nocken 1 Zeitstempel fallende Flanke 175 p0715[3] - U16 NOCKEN4_ZS_S Nocken 1 Zeitstempel steigende Flanke 176 p0714[3] - U16 NOCKEN5_ZS_F Nocken 1 Zeitstempel fallende Flanke 177 p0715[4] - U16 NOCKEN5_ZS_S Nocken 1 Zeitstempel steigende Flanke 178 p0714[4] - U16 NOCKEN6_ZS_F Nocken 1 Zeitstempel fallende Flanke 179 p0715[5] - U16 NOCKEN6_ZS_S Nocken 1 Zeitstempel steigende Flanke 180 p0714[5] - U16 NOCKEN7_ZS_F Nocken 1 Zeitstempel fallende Flanke 181 p0715[6] - U16 NOCKEN7_ZS_S Nocken 1 Zeitstempel steigende Flanke 182 p0714[6] - U16 NOCKEN8_ZS_F Nocken 1 Zeitstempel fallende Flanke 183 p0715[7] - U16 NOCKEN8_ZS_S Nocken 1 Zeitstempel steigende Flanke 184 p0714[7] - U16 POS_STW Pos control word 203 (bitweise) [2462] U16 OVERRIDE Pos velocity override 205 p2646 [3630] I16 4000 hex 100% POS_STW1 Pos control word 1 220 (bitweise) [2463] U16 POS_STW2 Pos control word 2 222 (bitweise) [2464] U16 MDI_MODE Pos MDI mode 229 p2654 [3620] U16 A_DIGITAL_1 Digital output (16 bit) 307 (bitweise) [2499] U16 <4> M_LIM Torque limit 310 p1503/p1552/p1554 - U16 <4> M_ADD Additional torque 311 p1495 - U16 E_STW1 Control word 1 for Active Infeed (ALM, SMART) 320 (bitweise) [2447] U16 STW1_BM Control word 1, variant for BM 322 (bitweise) [2425] U16 STW2_BM Control word 2, variant for BM 324 (bitweise) [2426] U16 E_STW1_BM Control word 1 for Active Infeed 326 (bitweise) [2427] U16 CU_STW1 Control word 1 for Control Unit 500 (bitweise) [2495] U16 <3> PROFIdrive receive telegram Drive object 2 . . . [2468], [2481] r2090...r2095 bit r2050[0...n] WORD r2060[0...30] DWORD ... Drive object n <4> . . . Telegram assignment according to p0922 [2415] [2423] Drive object m Trailer 5 6 fp_2440_54_eng.vsd 23.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2440 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_CX32, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals, interconnection, manufacturer specific Scaling PROFIdrive 2-1025 <1> When selecting a standard telegram or a manufacturer-specific telegram via p0922, these interconnection parameters of the command data set CDS0 are automatically set. <2> Data type according to to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32. <3> Only for S120. <4> Only for S120/S150. Data type <1> [Function diagram] internal control word [Function diagram] signal target Inverted 2441 - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Signal Meaning STW1.0 = ON (pulses can be enabled) p0840[0] = r2090.0 0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression & ready for switching on) [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.1 1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible) <3> 0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited) p0844[0] = r2090.1 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.2 1 = No OFF3 (enable possible) <3> 0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited) p0848[0] = r2090.2 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.3 1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled) 0 = Inhibit operation (suppress pulses) p0852[0] = r2090.3 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.4 1 = Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled) 0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero) p1140[0] = r2090.4 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] - STW1.5 1 = Enable the ramp-function generator 0 = Stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output) p1141[0] = r2090.5 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] - STW1.6 1 = Enable setpoint 0 = Inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero) p1142[0] = r2090.6 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] - p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.1] [8060] - STW1.7 = Acknowledge faults STW1.8 Reserved - - - - STW1.9 Reserved - - - - STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC p0854[0] = r2090.10 [2501.3] [2501] - STW1.11 1 = Direction reversal p1113[0] = r2090.11 [2505.3] [3040] - STW1.12 1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake p0855[0] = r2090.12 [2501.3] [2701] - STW1.13 Reserved - - - - STW1.14 Reserved - - - - STW1.15 1 = Command Data Set selection CDS bit 0 <4> p0810[0] = 2090.15 - [8560] - <2> <1> Used in telegram 20. <2> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD). 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) Refer to [1020.7] <3> OC = Operating condition. <4> Interconnection is not disabled. 4 5 6 fp_2441_54_eng.vsd 07.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2441 - Function diagrams Interconnection parameters PROFIdrive 2-1026 Fig. 2-41 PROFIdrive sampling time Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2) 2442 - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-42 Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0) <1> Interconnection parameters [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted internal control word signal target Signal Meaning STW1.0 = ON (pulses can be enabled) p0840[0] = r2090.0 0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression & ready for switching on) [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.1 1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible) 0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited) p0844[0] = r2090.1 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.2 1 = No OFF3 (enable possible) 0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited) p0848[0] = r2090.2 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.3 1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled) 0 = Inhibit operation (suppress pulses) p0852[0] = r2090.3 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.4 1 = Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled) 0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero) p1140[0] = r2090.4 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] - STW1.5 1 = Continue ramp-function generator 0 = Freeze ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output) p1141[0] = r2090.5 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] - STW1.6 1 = Enable setpoint 0 = Inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero) p1142[0] = r2090.6 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] - p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.1] [8060] - STW1.7 = 1. Acknowledge faults Reserved - - - - STW1.9 Reserved - - - - STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC <2> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [2501.3] [2501] - STW1.11 1 = Setpoint inversion <3> p1113[0] = r2090.11 [2505.3] [3040] - STW1.12 1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake p0855[0] = r2090.12 [2501.3] [2701] - STW1.13 1 = Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise <3> p1035[0] = r2090.13 [2505.3] [3020] - STW1.14 1 = Motorized potentiometer setpoint lower <3> p1036[0] = r2090.14 [2505.3] [3020] - STW1.15 Reserved - - - - 2-1027 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) <3> Only for "expanded setpoint channel" and "extended ramp-function generator". <4> OC = Operating condition. <5> Only for SINAMICS S120. 4 5 6 fp_2442_54_eng.vsd 07.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2442 - PROFIdrive <5> <1> Used in telegrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 352. <2> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD). Refer to [1020.7] Function diagrams STW1.8 PROFIdrive sampling time <1> 2444 - STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Signal Meaning STW2.0 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0 p0820[0] = r2093.0 <4> r2092.0 - [8565] - STW2.1 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1 p0821[0] = r2093.1 <4> r2092.1 - [8565] - STW2.2 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 2 p0822[0] = r2093.2 <4> r2092.2 - [8565] - STW2.3 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 3 p0823[0] = r2093.3 <4> r2092.3 - [8565] - STW2.4 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 4 p0824[0] = r2093.4 <4> r2092.4 - [8565] - STW2.5 Reserved - - - - STW2.6 Reserved - - - - STW2.7 1 = Parking axis p0897 = r2093.7 <4> r2092.7 - - - STW2.8 1 = Traverse to fixed endstop <2> p1545[0] = r2093.8 [2520.2] [8012] - STW2.9 Reserved - - - - STW2.10 Reserved - - - - p0828[0] = r2093.11 <4> r2092.11 - - - p2045 = r2050[3] <4> r2050[2] - [2410] - STW2.11 <3> <5> 1 = Motor changeover, feedback Signal STW2.12 Master sign-of-life, bit 0 <5> STW2.13 Master sign-of-life, bit 1 <5> STW2.14 Master sign-of-life, bit 2 <5> STW2.15 Master sign-of-life, bit 3 <5> PROFIdrive sampling time [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted internal control word signal target Refer to [1020.7] <3> <1> Used in telegrams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 110 and 111. <2> Not for telegrams 9, 110 and 111. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 4 <3> Only for SINAMICS S120. 5 <4> Only for telegram 9. 6 fp_2444_54_eng.vsd 14.01.10 V04.05.00 <5> Not for Vector U/f. 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2444 - Function diagrams Interconnection parameters PROFIdrive 2-1028 Fig. 2-43 Signal targets for STW2 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0) 2447 - E_STW1 control word infeed interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-44 PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] Signal targets for E_STW1 <1> <7> Interconnection parameters [Function diagram] internal control word Signal Meaning STW1.0 = ON (close pre-charging/line contactor, pulses can be enabled) 0 = OFF1 (reduce Vdc along a ramp, suppress pulse and open pre-charging/line contactor) p0840[0] = r2090.0 [8920.3] STW1.1 1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible) 0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited) p0844[0] = r2090.1 [8920.3] STW1.2 Reserved STW1.3 1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled) 0 = Inhibit operation (suppress pulses) STW1.4 Reserved STW1.5 1 = Infeed, inhibit motoring operation STW1.6 1 = Infeed, inhibit regenerative operation STW1.7 A_INF B_INF <6> [Function diagram] signal target Inverted S_INF <5> A_INF B_INF <6> S_INF <5> [8720.3] [8820.3] [8932] [8732] [8832] - [8720.3] [8820.3] [8932] [8732] [8832] - - - - - - - - p0852[0] = r2090.3 [8920.3] - [8820.3] [8932] - [8832] - - - - - - - - - <4> p3532= r2090.5 [8920.3] - - [8920] - - - <3> p3533= r2090.6 [8920.3] - [8820.3] [8920] - [8820] - <3> = Acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.3] [8060] - Reserved - - - - - - - - STW1.9 Reserved - - - - - - - - STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC p0854[0] = r2090.10 [8920.3] [8820.3] [8920] [8820] - STW1.11 Reserved - - - - - - - - STW1.12 Reserved - - - - - - - - STW1.13 Reserved - - - - - - - - STW1.14 Reserved - - - - - - - - STW1.15 Reserved - - - - - - - - 1 2 3 DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF PROFIdrive - E_STW1 control word infeed interconnection [8720.3] [8720] <5> B_INF and S_INF only for S120. <6> Only for S120 and G150 <7> Not for G130. 4 5 6 fp_2447_54_eng.vsd 22.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2447 - PROFIdrive 2-1029 <1> Used in telegram 370. <2> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD). <3> Only for A_INF, S_INF <4> Only for A_INF <2> Function diagrams STW1.8 PROFIdrive Signal No. Interconnection parameter Function diagram Refer to [1020.7] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2449 - PZD send signals, interconnection, profile-specific Signal Description Data type Scaling ZSW1 Status word 1 2 r2089[0] [2452][2453][2479] <2> U16 - ZSW2 Status word 2 4 r2089[1] [2454][2455] <2> U16 - NIST_A Speed setpoint A (16 bit) 6 r0063 SERVO r0063[0] VECTOR r0061 ENCODER [4710] <2> [4715] [4710] I16 4000 hex [4710] <2> [4715] [4710] I32 PROFIdrive send telegram Drive object 1 NIST_B Speed setpoint B (32 bit) 8 r0063 SERVO r0063[0] VECTOR r0061 ENCODER G1_ZSW Encoder 1 status word 10 r0481[0] [4730] U16 - G1_XIST1 Encoder 1 actual position 1 11 r0482[0] [4704] U32 - G1_XIST2 Encoder 1 actual position 2 12 r0483[0] [4704] U32 - G2_ZSW Encoder 2 status word 14 r0481[1] [4730] U16 - G2_XIST1 Encoder 2 actual position 1 15 r0482[1] [4704] U32 - G2_XIST2 Encoder 2 actual position 2 16 r0483[1] [4704] U32 - G3_ZSW Encoder 3 status word 18 r0481[2] [4730] U16 - G3_XIST1 Encoder 3 actual position 1 19 r0482[2] [4704] U32 - G3_XIST2 Encoder 3 actual position 2 20 r0483[2] [4704] U32 - E_DIGITAL Digital inputs 21 r2089[2] [2459] U16 - E_ANALOG Analog inputs 23 p2051[20] - U16 - <2> XIST_A Position actual value A 28 r2521[0] [4010] I32 <2> AKTSATZ Pos selected block 33 r2670 [3650] U16 IAIST_GLATT Absolute actual current, smoothed 51 r0068[1] [6714] I16 4000 hex p2002 ITIST_GLATT Current actual value, torque-generating 52 r0078[1] [6714] I16 4000 hex p2002 MIST_GLATT Actual torque smoothed 53 r0080[1] [6714] I16 4000 hex p2003 PIST_GLATT Power factor, smoothed 54 r0082[1] [6714] I16 4000 hex p2004 NIST_A_GLATT Actual speed, smoothed 57 r0063[1] [4715] I16 4000 hex p2000 MELD_NAMUR VIK-NAMUR message bit bar 58 r3113 - U16 IAIST Absolute actual current 59 r0068[0] [6714] I16 4000 hex MIST Actual torque 60 r0080[0] [6714] I16 4000 hex ZSW2_ENC Status word 2 ENCODER 81 (bitwise) [2434] U16 <2> <3> Header p2000 4000 0000 hex 1 hex p2000 Send words 1...16 p2051[0...15] WORD r2053[0...15] WORD p2061[0...14] DWORD r2063[0...14] DWORD Drive object 2 . . . ... Drive object n Telegram assignment according to p0922 [2415] [2423] . . . Drive object m Trailer 1 LU - PROFIBUS PROFINET p2002 p2003 - <1> Data type according to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32. <2> Only for SINAMICS S120. <3> Only for ENCODER. 1 2 3 DO: A_INF, B_INF, ENC, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - PZD send signals interconnection, profile-specific 4 5 6 fp_2449_54_eng.vsd 23.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2449 - Function diagrams Signal sources for PZD send signals PROFIdrive 2-1030 Fig. 2-45 PROFIdrive sampling time <1> 2450 - PZD send signals interconnection manufacturer-specific (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-46 Signal sources for PZD send signals <2> Signal Description MELDW MSOLL_GLATT AIST_GLATT MT_ZSW MT1_ZS_F MT1_ZS_S MT2_ZS_F MT2_ZS_S MT3_ZS_F MT3_ZS_S MT4_ZS_F MT4_ZS_S MT5_ZS_F MT5_ZS_S MT6_ZS_F MT6_ZS_S MT7_ZS_F MT7_ZS_S MT8_ZS_F MT8_ZS_S MT_DIAG MT_ZS1 Message word Total speed setpoint smoothed Torque utilization smoothed Measuring probe status word Measuring probe 1 measuring time falling edge Measuring probe 1 measuring time rising edge Measuring probe 2 measuring time falling edge Measuring probe 2 measuring time rising edge Measuring probe 3 measuring time falling edge Measuring probe 3 measuring time rising edge Measuring probe 4 measuring time falling edge Measuring probe 4 measuring time rising edge Measuring probe 5 measuring time falling edge Measuring probe 5 measuring time rising edge Measuring probe 6 measuring time falling edge Measuring probe 6 measuring time rising edge Measuring probe 7 measuring time falling edge Measuring probe 7 measuring time rising edge Measuring probe 8 measuring time falling edge Measuring probe 8 measuring time rising edge Measuring probe (stage 3) diagnostics word Measuring probe (stage 3) measuring time 1 PROFIdrive sampling time <1> PROFIdrive Signal No. 102 120 121 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 Interconnection parameter r2089[2] r0079[1] r0081 r0688 r0687[0] r0686[0] r0687[1] r0686[1] r0687[2] r0686[2] r0687[3] r0686[3] r0687[4] r0686[4] r0687[5] r0686[5] r0687[6] r0686[6] r0687[7] r0686[7] r0567 r0565[0] Function diagram [2456] [5610] <2> [8012] - Data type U16 I16 I16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 Refer to [1020.7] Scaling 4000 hex 4000 hex p2003 100% - PROFIdrive send telegram Header Drive object 1 Send words 1...16 p2051[0...15] WORD r2053[0...15] WORD p2061[0...14] DWORD r2063[0...14] DWORD Drive object 2 . . . ... Drive object n Telegram assignment according to p0922 [2415] [2423] . . . Drive object m Trailer <2> Measuring probe (Stufe 3) measuring time 16 Measuring probe (Stufe 3) measuring timebezug 1 Measuring probe (Stufe 3) measuring timebezug 2 Measuring probe (Stufe 3) measuring timebezug 3 Measuring probe (Stufe 3) measuring timebezug 4 Pos status word Pos status word 1 Pos status word 2 Fault code Alarm code Digital input (16 Bit) Status word 1 for Active Infeed Status word 1, variant for BM Status word 2, variant for BM Status word 1 for Infeed, variant for BM (ALM, BLM, SLM) Status word 1 for Control Unit 164 165 166 167 168 204 221 223 301 303 307 321 323 325 327 501 r0565[15] r0566[0] r0566[1] r0566[2] r0566[3] r2683 r2089[3] r2089[4] r2131 r2132 r2089[3] r2089[1] r2089[0] r2089[1] r2080 r2089[1] [3645] [2466] [2467] [8060] [8065] [2500] [2457] [2428] [2429] [2430] [2496] U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 - PROFIBUS PROFINET 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR PROFIdrive - PZD send signals, interconnection, manufacture specific 5 6 fp_2450_54_eng.vsd 23.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2450 - PROFIdrive 2-1031 <1> Data type according to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32 <2> Only for SINAMICS S120. Function diagrams MT_ZS16 MT_ZSB1 MT_ZSB2 MT_ZSB3 MT_ZSB4 POS_ZSW POS_ZSW1 POS_ZSW2 FAULT_CODE WARN_CODE E_DIGITAL_1 E_ZSW1 ZSW1_BM ZSW2_BM E_ZSW1_BM CU_ZSW1 <1> [Function diagram] Internal status word [Function diagram] Signal source 2451 - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Signal Meaning ZSW1.0 1 = Ready for switching on p2080[0] = r0899.0 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.1 1 = Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses inhibited) p2080[1] = r0899.1 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) p2080[2] = r0899.2 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] - ZSW1.4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) p2080[4] = r0899.4 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.5 1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive) p2080[5] = r0899.5 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.6 1 = Power-on inhibit active p2080[6] = r0899.6 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] - ZSW1.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2080[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8010] - ZSW1.9 1 = Control requested <3> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [2503.7] [2503] - ZSW1.10 1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded p2080[10] = r2199.1 [2536.7] [8010] - ZSW1.11 1 = I, M, or P limit not reached p2080[11] = r0056.13 [2522.7] [6060] ZSW1.12 Reserved - - - ZSW1.13 1 = No motor overtemperature alarm p2080[13] = r2135.14 [2548.7] [8016] ZSW1.14 1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act 0) 0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0) p2080[14] = r2197.3 [2534.7] [8010] - ZSW1.15 1 = Command Data Set selection CDS bit 0 <4> p2080[15] = r0836.0 - - - <1> Used in telegram 20. <2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15) 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 4 Refer to [1020.7] Inverted <2> - <3> The drive object is ready to accept data. <4> Interconnection is not disabled. 5 6 fp_2451_54_eng.vsd 14.01.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2451 - Function diagrams Interconnection parameters PROFIdrive 2-1032 Fig. 2-47 PROFIdrive sampling time Signal sources for ZSW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2) 2452 - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-48 Signal sources for ZSW1 im Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0) Interconnection parameters [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Internal status word signal source <1> PROFIdrive Abtastzeit Inverted <2> siehe [1020.7] Signal Meaning ZSW1.0 1 = Ready for switching on p2080[0] = r0899.0 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.1 1 = Ready for operation p2080[1] = r0899.1 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled p2080[2] = r0899.2 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] - ZSW1.4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) p2080[4] = r0899.4 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.5 1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive) p2080[5] = r0899.5 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.6 1 = Switching on inhibited active p2080[6] = r0899.6 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] - ZSW1.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2080[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8010] - ZSW1.9 1 = Control requested <3> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [2503.7] [2503] - ZSW1.10 1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded p2080[10] = r2199.1 [2536.7] [8010] - ZSW1.11 1 = I, M, or P limit reached p2080[11] = r1407.7 [2522.7] [5610] [6060] <5> ZSW1.12 1 = Open the holding brake p2080[12] = r0899.12 [2503.7] [2701] ZSW1.13 1 = No motor overtemperature alarm p2080[13] = r2135.14 [2548.7] [8016] ZSW1.14 1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act 0) 0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0) p2080[14] = r2197.3 [2534.7] [8010] ZSW1.15 1 = No alarm, thermal overload, power unit p2080[15] = r2135.15 [2548.7] [8014] <4> 4 <3> The drive object is ready to accept data. <4> Not for VECTOR U/f. <5> Only for SINAMICS S120. 5 6 fp_2452_54_eng.vsd 26.07.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2452 - Function diagrams 2-1033 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) - PROFIdrive <5> <1> Used in telegrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 352. <2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15) - Interconnection parameters [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted internal status word signal source Signal Meaning ZSW2.0 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 0 p2081[0] = r0051.0 - [8565] - ZSW2.1 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 1 p2081[1] = r0051.1 - [8565] - ZSW2.2 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 2 p2081[2] = r0051.2 - [8565] - ZSW2.3 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 3 p2081[3] = r0051.3 - [8565] - ZSW2.4 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 4 p2081[4] = r0051.4 - [8565] - ZSW2.5 1 = Alarm class bit 0 p2081[5] = r2139.11 - [2548] - - ZSW2.6 1 = Alarm class bit 1 p2081[6] = r2139.12 - [2548] - ZSW2.7 1 = Parking axis active p2081[7] = r0896.0 - - - ZSW2.8 1 = Traverse to fixed endstop p2081[8] = r1406.8 - [2520] - ZSW2.9 Reserved - - - - ZSW2.10 1 = Pulses enabled p2082[13] = r0899.11 [2503.7] [2610] - ZSW2.11 1 = Motor data set changeover active p2081[11] = r0835.0 - - - ZSW2.12 Slave sign-of-life bit 0 ZSW2.13 Slave sign-of-life bit 1 Implicitly interconnected - - - ZSW2.14 Slave sign-of-life bit 2 ZSW2.15 Slave sign-of-life bit 3 <2> <4> PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] <3> <1> Used in telegrams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 110, 111. <2> These signals are automatically interconnected for clock-cycle synchronous operation. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) <3> Only for SINAMICS S120. 4 5 <4> Not for Vector U/f. 6 fp_2454_54_eng.vsd 15.01.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2454 - Function diagrams 2454 - ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A <3> <4> <1> PROFIdrive 2-1034 Fig. 2-49 Signal sources for ZSW2 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0) 2457 - E_ZSW1 status word infeed interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-50 PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] Signal sources for E_ZSW1 Signal Meaning ZSW1.0 1 = Ready for switching on ZSW1.1 <1> <5> Interconnection parameters [Function diagram] signal source [Function diagram] internal status word Inverted A_INF B_INF <4> S_INF <3> A_INF B_INF <4> S_INF <3> p2080[0] = r0899.0 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - 1 = Ready for operation p2080[1] = r0899.1 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled p2080[2] = r0899.2 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 ZSW1.4 1 = No OFF2 effective p2080[4] = r0899.4 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.5 Reserved - - - - - - - - ZSW1.6 1 = Switching on inhibited p2080[6] = r0899.6 [8932] [8732] [8832] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 ZSW1.8 Reserved ZSW1.9 1 = PLC requests control ZSW1.10 Reserved ZSW1.11 [8060] [2548.7] [8065] - [2548.7] - - - - - - - - p2080[9] -= r0899.9 [8926] [8726] [8826] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - - - - - - - - - 1 = Pre-charging completed p2080[11] = r0899.11 [8950] [8750] [8850] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.12 1 = Line contactor closed p2080[12] = r0899.12 [8934] [8734] [8834] [8926.7] [8726.7] [8826.7] - ZSW1.13 Reserved - - - - - - - - ZSW1.14 Reserved - - - - - - - - ZSW1.15 Reserved - - - - - - - - <2> 1 2 3 DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF PROFIdrive - E_ZSW1 status word infeed interconnection 4 5 6 fp_2457_54_eng.vsd 22.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2457 - PROFIdrive 2-1035 <1> Used in telegram 370. <2> The drive object is ready to accept data. <3> Only for S120. <4> Only for S120 and G150. <5> Not for G130. Function diagrams - <6> <1> <4> PZD receive word 1 r2050[0] r2050[1] r2060[1] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2468 - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) r2050[2] r2060[2] PZD receive word 4 PROFIdrive receive telegram r2050[3] r2060[3] DWORD r2060[4] DWORD r2060[5] DWORD PZD receive word 5 Header r2050[4] ... r2092.15 ... r2093.15 p2098[0].0 <5> Drive object 2 0 p2099[0] (0) . . . 1 r2094.0 1 p2098[0].15 Drive object n 0 . . . 1 PZD receive word 29 r2050[28] r2060[28] Drive object m p2048 2 connector-binector converter r2050[5] PZD receive word 6 Drive object 1 Refer to [1020.7] r2091.15 r2093.0 DWORD PROFIdrive sampling time ... r2092.0 DWORD PZD receive word 3 ... r2090.15 r2091.0 DWORD PZD receive word 2 r2090.0 r2050[29] r2060[29] Trailer p2098[1].0 DWORD PZD receive word 30 DWORD PZD receive word 31 <5> 0 p2099[1] r2050[30] r2060[30] (0) DWORD PZD receive word 32 r2094.15 1 1 r2095.0 1 r2050[31] <3> <3> p2098[1].15 Reference quantities for further interconnection p200x <1> The number of PZD receive words depends on the drive object type. <2> The connector-binector converter only converts the lower 16 bits irrespective of the input variable. <3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 % for double words 4000 0000 hex = 100 %. The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x). The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %. <4> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested"). <5> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 5 to 32 and used as binectors. <6> Every PZD word can be assigned a word or a double word. Only one of the 2 interconnection parameters r2050 or r2060 can have a value 0 for a PZD word. <7> When interconnecting a connector output multiple times all the connector inputs must have either Integer or FloatingPoint data type. 1 2 3 4 DO: ENC, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR PROFIdrive - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 5 6 fp_2468_54_eng.vsd 27.05.10 V04.05.00 0 1 r2095.15 1 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2468 - Function diagrams r2060[0] PROFIBUS PROFINET <7> <7> PROFIdrive 2-1036 Fig. 2-51 <6> r2063[0...30] Fig. 2-52 DWORD 2470 - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD <2> p2051[0] <4> <2> p2061[0] (0) IF1 Diag send word 1...32 r2053[0...31] ... (0) PROFIdrive sampling time PZD send word 1 p2051[1] <1> <4> Refer to [1020.7] (0) PZD send word 2 p2061[1] (0) p2051[2] (0) PZD send word 3 p2061[2] (0) p2051[3] (0) PZD send word 4 p2061[3] (0) p2051[4] (0) PZD send word 5 p2061[4] (0) p2051[5] (0) PZD send word 6 p2061[5] (0) p2051[6] (0) PZD send word 7 p2061[6] (0) p2051[7] (0) PZD send word 8 p2061[7] (0) p2051[8] PROFIdrive send telegram Header Drive object 1 Drive object 2 (0) . . . PZD send word 9 DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD Drive object n p2061[27] (0) . . . p2051[28] (0) PZD send word 29 p2061[28] (0) p2051[29] (0) Drive object m PZD send word 30 p2061[29] (0) p2051[30] Trailer (0) PZD send word 31 p2061[30] (0) p2051[31] (0) PZD send word 32 <3> PROFIBUS PROFINET 5 6 fp_2470_54_eng.vsd 09.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2470 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: ENC, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR PROFIdrive - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) PROFIdrive 2-1037 Reference quantities for further interconnection p200x <1> The number of PZD send words depends on the drive object type. <2> A PZD send word can either be supplied via connector input p2051[x] (WORD) or via p2061[x] (DWORD). The two corresponding connector inputs cannot be interconnected. <3> Physical word and double word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced variables. p200x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex in the case of double words, if the input variable has the value p200x). The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex; 0 C -> 0%. <4> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1 (ZSW1), not as DWORD. p2088[2].0 p2082[0...15] [0] (0.0) [1] (0.0) 0 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2472 - IF1 status words, free interconnection p2088[0].0 p2080[0...15] [0] (0.0) [1] (0.0) 0 1 Free status word 3 r2089[2] 1 p2088[2].15 Status word 1 r2089[0] (0.0) 1 0 [15] 1 1 p2088[0].15 p2088[3].0 (0.0) 0 [15] 1 p2083[0...15] [0] (0.0) (0.0) [1] 1 0 1 Free status word 4 r2089[3] 1 p2088[3].15 p2088[1].0 p2081[0...15] [0] (0.0) (0.0) [1] 0 1 (0.0) Status word 2 0 [15] 1 r2089[1] p2088[1].11 [11] (0.0) [12] (0.0) p2088[4].0 0 1 1 1 p2084[0...15] [0] (0.0) (0.0) [1] 1 0 1 Free status word 4 r2089[4] 1 <2> <1> (0.0) p2088[4].15 [15] <1> For clock-cycle synchronous all drive objects, these signals must not be interconnected (slave sign-of-life). <2> Only for SINAMICS S120. 1 2 3 DO: All objects PROFIdrive - IF1 status words, free interconnection 4 (0.0) 0 [15] 5 1 1 6 fp_2472_54_eng.vsd 15.01.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2472 - Function diagrams 5 binector-connector converter PROFIdrive 2-1038 Fig. 2-53 p2048 r2090.0 Refer to [1020.7] PROFIBUS PROFINET 2481 - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-54 PROFIdrive sampling time r2090.15 <1> <4> PZD receive word 1 r2050[0] PZD receive word 2 r2050[1] PROFIdrive receive telegram PZD receive word 3 r2050[2] Header PZD receive word 4 r2050[3] PZD receive word 5 r2050[4] r2091.0 r2091.15 2 connector-binector converter Drive object 1 p2048 0 p2099[0] (0) Drive object 2 . . . p2098[0].0 <2> 1 Reference quantities for further interconnection p200x r2094.0 1 p2098[0].15 <3> 0 Drive object n 1 r2094.15 1 . . . p2098[1].0 Drive object m <2> 0 p2099[1] Trailer (0) 1 r2095.0 1 p2098[1].15 0 r2095.15 1 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, CU_G, CU_S, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM120 PROFIdrive - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 5 6 fp_2481_54_eng.vsd 21.01.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2481 - PROFIdrive 2-1039 <1> When interconnecting a connector output multiple times all the connector inputs must have either Integer or FloatingPoint data type. <2> Using the two connector-binector converters, two of the PZD receive words 3 to 5 can be converted into binectors for continued interconnection. <3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %. The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x). The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %. <4> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 for A_INF, B_INF, S_INF and CU_S must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested"). Function diagrams 1 ... ... ... p2051[0] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2483 - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) (0) PZD send word 1 (0) PZD send word 2 <4> <1> PROFIdrive send telegram p2051[1] Header Drive object 1 p2051[2] (0) PZD send word 3 (0) PZD send word 4 . . . (0) PZD send word 5 Drive object n (0) PZD send word 6 (0) PZD send word 7 (0) PZD send word 8 (0) PZD send word 9 Drive object 2 p2051[3] p2051[4] . . . p2051[5] p2051[6] Drive object m Trailer p2051[7] p2051[8] PROFIBUS PROFINET p2051[19] (0) PZD send word 20 (0) PZD send word 21 p2051[20] <3> Reference quantities for further interconnection p200x <1> The number of PZD receive words depends on the drive object type. <2> TM15DI_DO, TM120 not for G130/G150. <3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %. The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x). The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %. <4> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1 (ZSW1) for A_INF, B_INF, S_INF and CU_S. <5> Using the binector/connector converters at [2472], bits of 4 send words can be interconnected with any binectors. <6> A_INF and S_INF not for G130/G150. 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM120 PROFIdrive - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 5 6 fp_2483_54_eng.vsd 21.01.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2483 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] <6> <2> <5> PROFIdrive 2-1040 Fig. 2-55 PROFIdrive Sampling time IF1 Diag send word <1> r2053[0...4], [0...7], [0...20] <5> <6> 2485 - IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-56 <1> PZD receive word 1 <5> <6> r8860[0] r8850[0] PROFIBUS PROFINET r8850[1] r8860[1] r8850[2] r8860[2] PZD receive word 4 receive telegram r8850[3] r8860[3] DWORD r8860[4] DWORD PZD receive word 5 Header ... r8892.15 ... r8893.15 r8850[4] r8860[5] <2> p8898[0].0 DWORD <4> Drive object 2 0 p8899[0] (0) . . . 1 r8894.0 1 p8898[0].15 Drive object n 0 . . . 1 PZD receive word 29 r8850[28] r8860[28] Drive object m p8848 2 connector-binector converter r8850[5] PZD receive word 6 Drive object 1 Refer to [1020.7] r8891.15 r8893.0 DWORD PROFIdrive sampling time ... r8892.0 DWORD PZD receive word 3 ... r8890.15 r8891.0 DWORD PZD receive word 2 r8890.0 r8850[29] r8860[29] Trailer p8898[1].0 DWORD PZD receive word 30 <4> DWORD PZD receive word 31 PZD receive word 32 0 p8899[1] r8850[30] r8860[30] (0) DWORD 1 r8895.0 1 r8850[31] <3> <3> p8898[1].15 Reference quantities for further interconnection p200x 5 1 r8895.15 1 0 for a PZD word. 6 fp_2485_54_eng.vsd 11.05.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2485 - Function diagrams 4 0 PROFIdrive 2-1041 <1> The number of PZD receive words depends on the drive object type. <2> The connector-binector converter only converts the lower 16 bits irrespective of the input variable. <3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 % for double words 40000 0000 hex = 100 %. The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x). The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex or 40000 0000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %. <4> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 5 to 16 and used as binectors. <5> Every PZD word can be assigned a word or a double word. Only one of the 2 interconnection parameters r8850 or r8860 can have a value <6> When interconnecting a connector output multiple times all the connector inputs must have either Integer or FloatingPoint data type. 1 2 3 DO: ENC, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR PROFIdrive - IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection r8894.15 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2487 - IF2 send telegram, free interconnection DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD <2> p8861[0] p8861[1] p8861[2] p8861[3] p8861[4] p8861[5] p8861[6] p8861[7] (0)0 IF2 Diag send Wort 1...16 r8853[0...15] PZD send word 1 <1> ... p8851[1] (0)0 PZD send word 2 (0)0 PZD send word 3 (0)0 PZD send word 4 (0)0 PZD send word 5 (0)0 PZD send word 6 (0)0 PZD send word 7 p8851[2] p8851[3] p8851[4] p8851[5] send telegram p8851[6] Header p8851[7] (0)0 PZD send word 8 (0)0 PZD send word 9 Drive object 1 Drive object 2 p8851[8] . . . Drive object n DWORD p8861[27] . . . p8851[28] (0) DWORD p8861[28] PZD send word 29 p8851[29] Drive object m (0) DWORD p8861[29] PZD send word 30 p8851[30] Trailer (0) DWORD p8861[30] PZD send word 31 p8851[31] (0) PZD send word 32 <1> The number of PZD send words depends on the drive object type. <2> A PZD send word can either be supplied via connector input p8851[x] (WORD) or via p8861[x] (DWORD). The two corresponding connector inputs cannot be interconnected. <3> Physical word and double word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced variables. p200x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex in the case of double words, if the input variable has the value p200x). The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 C -> 0% = 4000 0000 hex. 1 2 3 DO: ENC, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR PROFIdrive - IF2 send telegram, free interconnection PROFIBUS PROFINET <3> Reference quantities for further interconnection p200x 4 5 6 fp_2487_54_eng.vsd 11.05.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2487 - Function diagrams DWORD PROFIdrive sampling time <2> p8851[0] PROFIdrive Fig. 2-57 2-1042 r8863[0...14] p8888[2].0 2489 - IF2 status words, free interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-58 p8848 5 binector-connector converter p8882[0...15] [0] (0.0) [1] (0.0) 0 1 p8888[0].0 p8880[0...15] [0] (0.0) [1] (0.0) 0 1 Free status word 3 r8889[2] 1 p8888[2].15 Status word 1 r8889[0] (0.0) 1 0 [15] 1 1 p8888[0].15 p8888[3].0 (0.0) 0 [15] 1 p8883[0...15] [0] (0.0) (0.0) [1] 1 0 1 Free status word 4 r8889[3] 1 p8888[3].15 p8888[1].0 p8881[0...15] [0] (0.0) (0.0) [1] 0 1 (0.0) Status word 2 0 [15] 1 r8889[1] p8888[1].11 [11] (0.0) [12] (0.0) p8884[0...15] [0] (0.0) (0.0) [1] 1 0 1 r8889[4] 1 p8888[4].15 [15] 2-1043 4 0 [15] 5 1 1 6 fp_2489_54_eng.vsd 20.01.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2489 - PROFIdrive (0.0) 1 2 3 DO: A_INF, B_INF, ENC, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR PROFIdrive - IF2 status words, free interconnection Free status word 5 Function diagrams (0.0) p8888[4].0 0 1 1 1 r8890.0 PROFIBUS PROFINET (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2491 - IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection PZD receive word 1 r8850[0] PZD receive word 2 r8850[1] receive telegram PZD receive word 3 r8850[2] Header PZD receive word 4 r8850[3] PZD receive word 5 r8850[4] <1> <2> r8890.15 <5> r8891.0 r8891.15 2 connector-binector converter p8898[0].0 p8848 <4> Drive object 1 (0) Drive object 2 . . . 0 p8899[0] 1 Reference quantities for further interconnection p200x r8894.0 1 p8898[0].15 <3> 0 Drive object n 1 r8894.15 1 . . . p8898[1].0 Drive object m <4> 0 p8899[1] Trailer (0) 1 r8895.0 1 p8898[1].15 0 <1> B_INF and S_INF not for S150 and G130. <2> A_INF, S_INF, TM15DI_DO and TM120 not for G130/G150. <3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %. The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x). The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %. <4> Using the two connector-binector converters, two of the PZD receive words 3 to 5 can be converted into binectors for continued interconnection. <5> When interconnecting a connector output multiple times all the connector inputs must have either Integer or FloatingPoint data type. <6> Not for TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31 and TM120. 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM120 PROFIdrive - IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection 5 1 r8895.15 1 <6> 6 fp_2491_54_eng.vsd 11.05.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2491 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] PROFIdrive 2-1044 Fig. 2-59 PROFIdrive sampling time 2493 - IF2 send telegram, free interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-60 PROFIdrive Sampling time IF2 Diag send word r8853[0...4], [0...7], [0...20] <4> Refer to [1020.7] ... <6> ... <5> ... p8851[0] (0) PZD send word 1 send telegram (0) PZD send word 2 Header (0) PZD send word 3 (0) PZD send word 4 . . . (0) PZD send word 5 Drive object n (0) PZD send word 6 <6> (0) PZD send word 7 <6> (0) PZD send word 8 <6> (0) PZD send word 9 <6> <5> <1> <2> <7> p8851[1] Drive object 1 p8851[2] Drive object 2 p8851[3] p8851[4] . . . p8851[5] <6> p8851[6] <6> Drive object m Trailer p8851[7] <6> p8851[8] <5> <6> PROFIBUS PROFINET p8851[19] <5> <6> (0) PZD send word 20 <6> <5> (0) PZD send word 21 <6> <5> p8851[20] <5> <6> <3> 5 6 fp_2493_54_eng.vsd 11.05.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2493 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF,TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM120 PROFIdrive - IF2 send telegram, free interconnection PROFIdrive 2-1045 Reference quantities for further interconnection p200x <1> B_INF and S_INF not for S150 and G130. <2> A_INF and S_INF not for G130/G150. <3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %. The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x). The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %. <4> Using the binector/connector converters at [2472], bits of 4 send words can be interconnected with any binectors. <5> Only for CU_S and CU_G <6> Not for TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31 and TM120. <7> TM15DI_DO and TM120 not for G130/G150. <1> Meaning CU_STW1.0 Central measuring probe, synchronizing signal source p0681[0] = r2090.0 - - - CU_STW1.1 RTC real time synchronization PING p3104 = r2090.1 - - - CU_STW1.2 ESR-Trigger p0890.0 = r2090.2 - - - CU_STW1.3 Reserved - - - - CU_STW1.4 Reserved - - - - CU_STW1.5 Reserved - - - - CU_STW1.6 Reserved - - - - p2103[0] = r2090.7 - - - CU_STW1.7 <2> 1. Acknowledge faults [Function diagram] [Function diagram] internal control word signal target Refer to [1020.7] Inverted CU_STW1.8 Reserved - - - - CU_STW1.9 Reserved - - - - CU_STW1.10 Control via PLC p3116 = r2090.10 - - - CU_STW1.11 Reserved - - - - CU_STW1.12 Master sign-of-life bit 0 CU_STW1.13 Master sign-of-life bit 1 p2045 =r2050[0] - - - CU_STW1.14 Master sign-of-life bit 2 CU_STW1.15 Master sign-of-life bit 3 <1> Used in telegrams 390 to 394. <2> Only available when the function module "extended setpoint channel" is active (r0108.9 = 1). 1 2 3 4 DO: CU_G, CU_S PROFIdrive - CU_STW1 control word 1 Control Unit interconnection 5 6 fp_2495_54_eng.vsd 07.12.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2495 - Function diagrams 2495 - CU_STW1 control word 1, Control Unit interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Signal Interconnection parameters PROFIdrive 2-1046 Fig. 2-61 PROFIdrive sampling time Signal targets for CU_STW1 Fig. 2-62 2496 - CU_ZSW1 status word 1, Control Unit interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Signal sources for CU_ZSW1 <1> PROFIdrive sampling time Refer to [1020.7] Signal Meaning Interconnection parameters [Function diagram] Internal status word [Function diagram] signal source Inverted <2> Reserved - - - - CU_ZSW1.1 Reserved - - - - CU_ZSW1.2 Reserved - - - - CU_ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2081[3] = r2139.3 - - - CU_ZSW1.4 Reserved - - - - CU_ZSW1.5 Reserved - - - - CU_ZSW1.6 Reserved - - - - CU_ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2081[7] = r2139.7 - - - CU_ZSW1.8 1 = System time synchronized (SYNC) p2081[8] = r0899.8 - - - CU_ZSW1.9 1 = No alarm present p2081[9] = r3114.9 - - CU_ZSW1.10 1 = No fault present p2081[10] = r3114.10 - - CU_ZSW1.11 1 = No safety message present p2081[11] = r3114.11 - - CU_ZSW1.12 Slave sign-of-life bit 0 CU_ZSW1.13 Slave sign-of-life bit 1 Implicitly interconnected - - Slave sign-of-life bit 2 CU_ZSW1.15 Slave sign-of-life bit 3 2-1047 <1> Used in telegrams 390 to 394. - <2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15) 1 2 3 4 DO: CU_G, CU_S PROFIdrive - CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit interconnection 5 6 fp_2496_54_eng.vsd 07.12.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2496 - PROFIdrive CU_ZSW1.14 Function diagrams CU_ZSW1.0 <1> [Function diagram] signal target Inverted 2497 - A_DIGITAL interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Signal Meaning A_DIGITAL.0 Digital output 8 (DI/DO 8) <2> p0738 = r2091.0 - - - A_DIGITAL.1 Digital output 9 (DI/DO 9) <2> p0739 = r2091.1 - - - A_DIGITAL.2 Digital output 10 (DI/DO 10) <2> p0740 = r2091.2 - - - A_DIGITAL.3 Digital output 11 (DI/DO 11) <2> p0741 = r2091.3 - - - A_DIGITAL.4 Digital output 12 (DI/DO 12) <2> p0742 = r2091.4 - - - A_DIGITAL.5 Digital output 13 (DI/DO 13) <2> p0743 = r2091.5 - - - A_DIGITAL.6 Digital output 14 (DI/DO 14) <2> p0744 = r2091.6 - - - A_DIGITAL.7 Digital output 15 (DI/DO 15) <2> p0745 = r2091.7 - - - A_DIGITAL.8 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL.9 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL.10 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL.11 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL.12 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL.13 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL.14 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL.15 Reserved - - - - <1> Used in telegrams 390 to 396. 1 2 DO: CU_G, CU_S PROFIdrive - A_DIGITAL interconnection <2> Can be set via p0728 as input (DI) or output (DO). 3 4 Refer to [1020.7] <3> Pre-assignment, can be freely changed. 5 6 fp_2497_54_eng.vsd 20.09.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2497 - Function diagrams Interconnection [Function diagram] parameters <3> internal status word PROFIdrive 2-1048 Fig. 2-63 PROFIdrive sampling time Signal targets for A_DIGITAL 2498 - E_DIGITAL interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-64 PROFIdrive sampling time Signal targets for E_DIGITAL <1> Interconnection parameters<3> [Function diagram] Internal status word [Function diagram] signal target Inverted E_DIGITAL.0 Digital input 8 (DI/DO 8) <2> p2081[0] = r0722.8 - - - E_DIGITAL.1 Digital input 9 (DI/DO 9) <2> p2081[1] = r0722.9 - - - E_DIGITAL.2 Digital input 10 (DI/DO 10) <2> p2081[2] = r0722.10 - - - E_DIGITAL.3 Digital input 11 (DI/DO 11) <2> p2081[3] = r0722.11 - - - E_DIGITAL.4 Digital input 12 (DI/DO 12) <2> p2081[4] = r0722.12 - - - E_DIGITAL.5 Digital input 13 (DI/DO 13) <2> p2081[5] = r0722.13 - - - E_DIGITAL.6 Digital input 14 (DI/DO 14) <2> p2081[6] = r0722.14 - - - E_DIGITAL.7 Digital input 15 (DI/DO 15) <2> p2081[7] = r0722.15 - - - E_DIGITAL.8 Digital input 0 (DI 0) p2081[8] = r0722.0 - - - E_DIGITAL.9 Digital input 1 (DI 1) p2081[9] = r0722.1 - - - E_DIGITAL.10 Digital input 2 (DI 2) p2081[10] = r0722.2 - - - E_DIGITAL.11 Digital input 3 (DI 3) p2081[11] = r0722.3 - - - E_DIGITAL.12 Digital input 4 (DI 4) <4> p2081[12] = r0722.4 - - - E_DIGITAL.13 Digital input 5 (DI 5) <4> p2081[13] = r0722.5 - - - E_DIGITAL.14 Digital input 6 (DI 6) <4> p2081[14] = r0722.6 - - - E_DIGITAL.15 Digital input 7 (DI 7) <4> p2081[15] = r0722.7 - - - 2-1049 <1> Used in telegrams 390 to 396. <2> Can be set via p0728 as input (DI) or output (DO). 1 2 DO: CU_G, CU_S PROFIdrive - E_DIGITAL interconnection 3 4 <3> Pre-assignment, can be freely changed. 5 6 fp_2498_54_eng.vsd 20.09.11 V04.05.00 <4> Only for CU320-2. 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2498 - Function diagrams Meaning PROFIdrive Signal Refer to [1020.7] Interconnection [Function diagram] parameters <2> internal status word [Function diagram] signal target Inverted 2499 - A_DIGITAL_1 interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Signal Meaning A_DIGITAL_1.0 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.1 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.2 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.3 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.4 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.5 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.6 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.7 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.8 Digital output 16 (DI/DO 16) p0746 = r2092.8 - - - A_DIGITAL_1.9 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.10 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.11 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.12 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.13 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.14 Reserved - - - - A_DIGITAL_1.15 Reserved - - - - <1> Used in telegrams 393 to 396. <3> <2> Pre-assignment, can be freely changed. 1 2 DO: CU_G, CU_S PROFIdrive - A_DIGITAL_1 interconnection 3 4 Refer to [1020.7] <3> Only for CU_S_AC or CU_I_D410.. 5 6 fp_2499_54_eng.vsd 21.09.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2499 - Function diagrams <1> PROFIdrive 2-1050 Fig. 2-65 PROFIdrive sampling time Signal targets for A_DIGITAL_1 2500 - E_DIGITAL_1 interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-66 PROFIdrive sampling time Signal targets for E_DIGITAL_1 <1> Interconnection parameters<3> [Function diagram] Internal status word [Function diagram] signal target Inverted E_DIGITAL_1.0 Reserved - - - - E_DIGITAL_1.1 Reserved - - - - E_DIGITAL_1.2 Reserved - - - - E_DIGITAL_1.3 Reserved - - - - E_DIGITAL_1.4 Reserved - - - - E_DIGITAL_1.5 Reserved - - - - E_DIGITAL_1.6 Reserved - - - - E_DIGITAL_1.7 Reserved - - - - E_DIGITAL_1.8 Digital input 16 (DI 16) p2083[8] = r0722.16 - - - E_DIGITAL_1.9 Digital input 17 (DI 17) p2083[9] = r0722.17 - - - E_DIGITAL_1.10 Digital input 18 (DI 18) <2> p2083[10] = r0722.18 - - - E_DIGITAL_1.11 Digital input 19 (DI 19) <2> p2083[11] = r0722.19 - - - E_DIGITAL_1.12 Digital input 20 (DI 20) p2083[12] = r0722.20 - - - E_DIGITAL_1.13 Digital input 21 (DI 21) p2083[13] = r0722.21 - - - E_DIGITAL_1.14 Digital input 22 (DI 22) p2083[14] = r0722.22 - - - E_DIGITAL_1.15 Reserved - - - - 2-1051 <1> Used in telegrams 393 to 396. <2> <2> Not for CU320-2. 1 2 DO: CU_G, CU_S PROFIdrive - E_DIGITAL_1 interconnection 3 <3> Pre-assignment, can be freely changed. 4 5 6 fp_2500_54_eng.vsd 21.09.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2500 - Function diagrams Meaning PROFIdrive Signal Refer to [1020.7] Function diagrams Internal control/status words 2.7 Internal control/status words Function diagrams 2501 - Control word, sequence control 2-1053 2503 - Status word, sequence control 2-1054 2505 - Control word, setpoint channel 2-1055 2520 - Control word, speed controller 2-1056 2522 - Status word, speed controller 2-1057 2526 - Status word, closed-loop control 2-1058 2530 - Status word, current control 2-1059 2534 - Status word, monitoring functions 1 2-1060 2536 - Status word, monitoring functions 2 2-1061 2537 - Status word, monitoring functions 3 2-1062 2546 - Control word, faults/alarms 2-1063 2548 - Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 2-1064 2-1052 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1. OFF2 (electrical) 2501 - Control word, sequence control (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-67 PROFIdrive bit <6> p0844[C] <3> (1) 2000.00 s <5> STW sequence ctrl p0845[C] (1) Bit No. 2. OFF2 (electrical) 1. OFF3 (fast stop) <6> p0848[C] <3> (1) p0840[C] (0) 0 = ON 0 = OFF1 1 To the Control Unit [2610] 1 = Operating condition, no coast stop (no OFF2) 0 = OFF2 r0898.1 To the Control Unit [2610] 2 1 = Operating condition, no quick stop (no OFF3) 0 = OFF3 r0898.2 To the Control Unit [2610] (1) 3 1 = Enable operation <3> r0898.3 To the Control Unit [2610] (1) 4 1 = Enable ramp-function generator <3> r0898.4 To the setpoint channel [3060.6] [3070.7] [3080.5] (1) 5 1 = Unfreeze ramp-function generator <3> r0898.5 To the setpoint channel [3060.1] [3070.1] 6 1 = Enable speed setpoint r0898.6 To the setpoint channel [3060.1] [3070.1] [3080.4] (0) 7 1 = Command, open brake <3> r0898.7 To the brake control [2701.5] To the expanded brake control [2707.1] (0) 8 1 = Jog 1 <3> r0898.8 To jog [3030.6] To Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.3] (0) 9 1 = Jog 2 <3> r0898.9 To jog [3030.6] To Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.4] (1) 10 1 = Control via PLC <3> <5> r0898.10 11 Reserved 12 1 = Speed controller enable 13 Reserved 14 1 = Command, close brake 15 Reserved (1) 2. OFF3 (fast stop) <3> p0852[C] p2816[0] r2090.3 r2817.0<3> p1140[C] (0) [2425] r0898 r0898.0 p0849[C] p2816[1] Control word sequence control <2> p1141[C] Enable n_set <3> p1142[C] (1) <4> p1152 (r0899.15) Setpoint 2 enable [2711.8] p0855[C] p1055 [C] p1056 [C] p0854[C] <1> (1) <3> To the brake control [2701.4] To the expanded brake control [2707.1] To the torque setpoint [6060.4] r0898.14 To the brake control [2701.4] To the expanded brake control [2707.1] <6> PROFIdrive interconnection: For PROFIdrive standard telegrams, the upper inputs are connected with PROFIdrive-STW1 [2415] and [2416]. Only relevant for CDS0. 1 2 3 DO: ENC, SERVO, VECTOR Internal control/status words - Control word, sequence control 4 5 6 fp_2501_54_eng.vsd 24.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2501 - Function diagrams 2-1053 <1> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD). <2> Only for telegram 220. p0858[C] <3> When the master control is retrieved, (0) predefined by STARTER or AOP30. <4> Only applies if the function module "extended brake control (r0108.14 = 1)" is active. <5> For DO ENC only bit 10. r0898.12 Internal control/status words p0856[C] PROFIdrive bit Status word sequence control <6> r0899 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2503 - Status word, sequence control From the Control Unit [2610] 0 1 = Ready for switching on r0899.0 From the Control Unit [2610] 1 1 = Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses inhibited) r0899.1 From the Control Unit [2610] 2 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) r0899.2 p2810[0] [4015.1] 2. OFF2 p0845[C] From the Control Unit [2610] 3 1 = Jog active r0899.3 From the Control Unit [2610] 4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) r0899.4 (1) (0) r2811.0 p2810[1] (0) [2428] <5> 2. OFF3 p0849[C] <2> [2701.1][2711.1] (1) INF operation From the Control Unit [2610] 5 1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive) From the Control Unit [2610] 6 1 = Switching on inhibited active r0899.5 p0864 (0) r0899.6 [2701.1][2711.1] OFF1 & 7 1 = Drive ready r0899.7 From the Control Unit [2610] 8 1 = Controller enable r0899.8 Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data 9 1 = Control requested 10 Reserved From the Control Unit [2610.4] 11 1 = Pulses enabled r0899.11 From the basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) [2701.8] From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (r0108.14 = 1) [2711.8] 12 1 = Open the holding brake (only for booksize units when the brake is connected to the power unit) r0899.12 From the basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) [2701.8] From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (r0108.14 = 1) [2711.8] 13 1 = Command, close holding brake <4> r0899.13 From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (r0108.14 = 1) [2711.8] 14 1 = Pulse enable from the brake control <3> r0899.14 OFF2 1 OFF3 Enable internal missing or fault with this reaction From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (r0108.14 = 1) [2711.8] 15 1 = Setpoint enable from the brake control <1> The drive object is ready to accept data. <2> Only for Telegram 220. <3> These signals are only relevant if the "extended brake control" function module is active (r0108.14 = 1). <4> If "Safe Brake Control" (SBC) is activated and selected, the brake is no longer controlled via this signal. <5> Only with message frame 220 and activated function module "Extended brake control" (r0108.14 = 1), otherwise hard wiring set to 1. 1 2 3 DO: ENC, SERVO, VECTOR Internal control/status words - Status word, sequence control 4 r0899.9 <1> <6> 5 r0899.15 <3> [4015.1] <6> For DO ENC only bit 9. 6 fp_2503_54_eng.vsd 24.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2503 - Function diagrams Bit No. 2000.00 s Internal control/status words 2-1054 Fig. 2-68 ZSW sequence ctrl STW setpoint channel Bit No. Control word, setpoint channel r1198 Fixed setpoint selection, bit 0 p1020[C] 2505 - Control word, setpoint channel (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-69 p0115[3] (0) 0 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 0 r1198.0 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2] (0) 1 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 1 r1198.1 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2] (0) 2 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 2 r1198.2 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2] (0) 3 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 3 r1198.3 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2] 4 Reserved (0) 5 1 = Inhibit negative direction r1198.5 To direction limiting and direction reversal [3040.3] (0) 6 1 = Inhibit positive direction r1198.6 To direction limiting and direction reversal [3040.5] 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 1 = Setpoint inversion r1198.11 To direction limiting and direction reversal [3040.2] 12 Reserved (0) 13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, raise r1198.13 To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1] (0) 14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, lower r1198.14 To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1] (0) 15 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator r1198.15 To the setpoint channel [3060.1] [3070.3] Fixed setpoint selection, bit 1 p1021[C] Fixed setpoint selection, bit 2 p1022[C] Fixed setpoint selection, bit 3 p1023[C] Inhib neg dir p1110[C] Inhib pos dir p1111[C] Setpoint inversion p1113[C] (0) Bypass RFG p1122[C] 2-1055 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV Internal control/status words - Control word, setpoint channel 4 5 6 fp_2505_51_eng.vsd 20.06.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2505 - Function diagrams Motorized potentiometer, lower p1036[C] Internal control/status words Motorized potentiometer, raise p1035[C] Bit No. Control word, speed controller Servo Vector r1406 <1> <2> 2520 - Control word, speed controller (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 Reserved - - 1 Reserved - - 2 Reserved - - 3 Reserved - - (0) 4 1 = speed controller, hold I component - r1406.4 To the speed controller [6040.4] (0) 5 1 = speed controller, set I component - r1406.5 To the speed controller [6040.4] 6 Reserved - - 7 Reserved - - 8 1 = Travel to fixed stop <2> 9 Reserved - - 10 Reserved - - (0) 11 1 = Droop enable - (0) 12 1 = Closed-loop torque control active 13 Reserved - - 14 Reserved - - 15 Set speed adaptation controller I component - r1406.15 6 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 n_ctrl integ stop p1476[C] n_ctrl integ set p1477[C] TfS activation p1545[C] <2> Enables droop Changeov n/M_ctrl (0) r1406.8 To torque signals, <2> Motor locked/stalled [8012.5] p1492[C] r1406.11 p1501[C] r1406.12 To the speed setpoint, droop [6030.1] To the closed-loop speed control [5060.1 and 6060.1] <2> <1> Only for Servo. <2> Only for SINAMICS S120. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Internal control/status words - Control word, speed controller 4 5 fp_2520_54_eng.vsd 27.02.08 V04.05.00 8 - 2520 - Function diagrams 1000.00 s STW n_ctrl Internal control/status words 2-1056 Fig. 2-70 p0115[1] (Motor Modules) <1> <2> 2522 - Status word, speed controller (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-71 p0115[1] (Motor Modules) <2> <3> 1000.00 s ZSW n_ctrl Bit-No. <3> From the changeover, closed-loop control types [5060.5] [2520.7] <2> p1191 > 0 (interconnected) Mot-ID & ESR active Motion-based PolID OFF1 OFF3 STOP2 Sensorless operation & From the control unit [2610.4] PcCtrl active 1 <3> Servo Vector r1407 <3> <3><1> From the speed controller [5210.8] From the speed controller [5040.7][6040.7] <3><1> From the speed controller [5210.8] From the speed controller [5040.7][6040.7] <3> From torque limiting [5610.4] From the torque setpoint [6060.7] <3> From torque limiting [5610.4] From the torque setpoint [6060.7] <3> From torque limiting [5610.4] From the torque setpoint [6060.4][6060.7] From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.3] <3> From the setpoint, n-ctrl [5030.8] <3><1> From the speed controller [5210.3] From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.4][6030.5] 1 = U/f control active r1407.0 1 1 = Sensorless operation active r1407.1 To the speed actual value and pole position sensing, motor encoder (encoder 1) [4710.4]<3> [4715.4] 2 1 = Closed-loop torque control active r1407.2 To speed setpoint, droop [6030.5] To torque setpoint [6060.3] 3 1 = Closed-loop speed control active 4 1 = Speed setpoint from DSC 5 1 = Speed controller, I component held r1407.5 6 1 = Speed controller, I component set r1407.6 7 1 = Torque limit reached r1407.7 8 1 = Torque limiting, upper, active r1407.8 9 1 = Torque limiting, lower, active r1407.9 10 1 = Droop enabled 11 1 = Speed setpoint limited 12 1 = Ramp-function generator set 13 1 = Sensorless operation due to a fault 14 1 = I/f control active - 15 1 = Torque limit reached (without pre-control) - 16 Reserved - 17 1 = Speed limiting activ - 18 Reserved - 19 1 = DSC position controller limited - r1407.19 20 1 = DSC with spline on - r1407.20 21 1 = Speed pre-control for DSC with spline on - r1407.21 22 1 = Torque pre-control for DSC with spline on - r1407.22 r1407.3 - <3> - r1407.4 To Speed setpoint filter [5020.1] To Reference model [5030.3] <3> Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.1] Traveling blocks mode [3616.1]<3> Speed controller [5040.7]<3>[5042.5][6040.4] Motor locked/stalled [8012.5] r1407.10 r1407.11 - Reserved r1407.12 r1407.13 - r1407.14 r1407.15 r1407.17 - - 2-1057 <1> Only for servo control without encoder. <2> Only for SERVO. <3> Only for SINAMICS S120. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Internal control/status words - Status word, speed controller 4 5 6 fp_2522_54_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2522 - Function diagrams 23-32 - Internal control/status words From speed limiting [6640.8] <2> <3> 0 1 = Torque control r1406.12 p1190 > 0 (interconnected) Status word, speed controller Bit No. Meaning r0056 2526 - Status word, closed-loop control (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 1 = Initialization completed <2> r0056.0 1 1 = De-magnetization completed r0056.1 2 1 = Pulses enabled <2> r0056.2 3 1 = Soft starting available <1> <2> r0056.3 4 1 = Magnetization completed r0056.4 5 Reserved r0056.5 6 1 = Acceleration voltage active <3> <3> [6725.4][6730.5][6731.5][6732.4] 7 1 = Frequency, negative <2> r0056.7 <3> [6722.3][6725.4] 8 1 = Field weakening active r0056.8 [6714.8] 9 1 = Voltage limit active <2> r0056.9 [6310.8] 10 1 = Slip limiting active <1> <2> r0056.10 <3> [6730.5][6731.5][6732.4] 11 1 = Frequency limit active <2> 12 1 = Current limiting controller, voltage output active [6060.7] 13 1 = Current/torque limiting active [6220.8][6320.8] 14 1 = Vdc_max controller active r0056.14 [6031.6][6710.2] [6220.8][6320.8] 15 1 = Vdc_min controller active r0056.15 [6031.6][6710.2] <3> [6722.6][6725.6] Refer to [1020.7] [2701.1][2707.1] r0056.6 <1> <2> <1> <2> [6710.5] r0056.11 <3> [8018.1] r0056.12 [8012.5] r0056.13 <1> <2> <1> Only for U/f control. <2> Not for SERVO. <3> Only for SINAMICS S120. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Internal control/status words - Status word, closed-loop control 4 5 6 fp_2526_54_eng.vsd 04.08.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2526 - Function diagrams ZSW closed-loop control Internal control/status words 2-1058 Fig. 2-72 p0115[1] (Motor Modules) Status word closed-loop control Bit No. 2530 - Status word, current control (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-73 p0115[0] (Motor Modules) Status word closed-loop current control [6714.5] [6714.7] [6730.3] Meaning 0 1 = Closed-loop current control active 1 1 = Lim. I comp. Id-R active 2 Reserved 3 Refer to [1020.7] r1408.1 1 = Limiting U active <2> r1408.3 4 1 = Limiting Ud active <1> <3> r1408.4 5 1 = Limiting Uq active <1> <3> r1408.5 [5040.7][5042.5] 6 1 = Pos. limit. Iq active <1> <3> r1408.6 [5714.5] <3> 7 1 = Neg. limit. Iq active <1> <3> r1408.7 [5714.4] <3> 8 1 = Iq setpoint limit. active <1> <3> r1408.8 [5714.4] <3> 9 1 = Id setpoint limit. active <1> <3> r1408.9 [5722.7] <3> 10 1 = Lim. EMF/Obs-ctrl. active <2> r1408.10 11 1 = Error EMF/Obs-N active <2> r1408.11 12 1 = Motor stalled active <2> r1408.12 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved <2> Only for VECTOR. 2-1059 <3> Only for SINAMICS S120. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Internal control/status words - Status word, current control 4 5 6 fp_2530_54_eng.vsd 24.10.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2530 - Function diagrams <2> Internal control/status words <1> Only for SERVO. ZSW closed-loop current control r1408 ZSW monitoring functions 1 Bit No. Status word, monitoring functions 1 r2197 0 Reserved 1 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 (p2155) 2 |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 (p2155) 3 1 = n_act >= 0 4 Reserved 5 Reserved From speed signals 1 [8010.6] 6 n_act > n_max r2197.6 From speed signals 2 [8011.8] 7 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off r2197.7 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved From speed signals 1 [8010.8] 1 From speed signals 2 [8011.8] <1> <1> r2197.1 r2197.2 r2197.3 <1> nact = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2]. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Internal control/status words - Status word, monitoring functions 1 5 6 fp_2534_51_eng.vsd 08.07.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2534 - Function diagrams (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2534 - Status word, monitoring functions 1 Internal control/status words 2-1060 Fig. 2-74 p0115[3] 2536 - Status word, monitoring functions 2 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-75 p0115[3] (4000.00 s) ZSW monitoring functions 2 Bit No. Status word, monitoring functions 2 0 Reserved 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Reserved r2198 4 1 = |n_set| < p2161 r2198.4 <1> From speed signals 2 [8011.8] 5 1 = n_set >0 r2198.5 From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.8] 6 1 = Motor blocked r2198.6 From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.8] 7 1 = Motor stalled r2198.7 8 Reserved 9 Reserved From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.3] 10 1 = Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 (p2174) r2198.10 From load monitoring [8013.8] 11 1 = Load monitoring signals an alarm r2198.11 From load monitoring [8013.8] 12 1 = Load monitoring signals a fault r2198.12 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 2-1061 <1> Only relevant if the function module "extended signals/ monitoring functions" (r0108.17 = 1) is active. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Internal control/status words - Status word, monitoring functions 2 5 6 fp_2536_54_eng.vsd 04.11.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2536 - Function diagrams From speed signals 2 [8011.8] Internal control/status words <1> PROFIdrive bit 2537 - Status word, monitoring functions 3 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 1 = |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 (p2161) From speed signals 1 [8010.8] 1 1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded (p2141) 2 Reserved 3 Reserved From speed signals 2 [8011.8] 4 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on r2199.4 From speed signals 2 [8011.8] 5 1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down completed 0 = Ramp-function generator active r2199.5 6 1 = Current below residual current threshold r2199.6 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 1 = Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 (p2194) 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved <1> r2199.0 r2199.1 [8012.1] r2199.11 <1>n_act = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2]. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Internal control/status words - Status word, monitoring functions 3 5 6 fp_2537_51_eng.vsd 29.06.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2537 - Function diagrams ZSW monitoring functions 3 r2199 Status word, monitoring functions 3 From speed signals 1 [8010.8] From torque signals [8012.5] Internal control/status words Fig. 2-76 2-1062 Bit No. P0115[4] 2546 - Control word, faults/alarms (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-77 PROFIdrive bit 4000.00 s STW faults/alarms Bit No. Control word, faults/alarms 0 Reserved 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 Reserved Ackn all faults p2102 <1> 5 Reserved 1. Acknowledge p2103[C] <2> 6 Reserved 2. Acknowledge p2104[C] <2> 7 3. Acknowledge p2105[C] <2> 8 Reserved 9 Reserved Pulse generator r2138 = Acknowledge faults r2138.7 To fault buffer [8060.1] p2112[C] (1) <2> 1 10 = External alarm 1 (A07850) r2138.10 To alarm buffer [8065.1] 1 11 = External alarm 2 (A07851) r2138.11 To alarm buffer [8065.1] 1 12 = External alarm 3 (A07852) r2138.12 To alarm buffer [8065.1] 1 13 = External fault 1 (F07860) r2138.13 To fault buffer [8060.1] 1 14 = External fault 2 (F07861) r2138.14 To fault buffer [8060.1] 1 15 = External fault 3 (F07862) r2138.15 To fault buffer [8060.1] p2116[C] (1) <2> p3110 [ms] <2> p2117[C] (1) <2> p3111[C] (1) <2> T 0 p2106[C] (1) <2> <2> p2107[C] (1) <2> 2-1063 <1> This parameter refers to the Control Unit and is used as source to simultaneously acknowledge all faults on all drive objects. <2> These parameters refer to the Command Data Sets (CDS) depending on the individual drive object (DO). 1 2 3 DO: All objects Internal control/status words - Control word, faults/alarms 4 5 6 fp_2546_51_eng.vsd 08.05.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2546 - Function diagrams p3112[C] (0) Internal control/status words p2108[C] (1) ZSW faults/alarms 1 From the alarm buffer [8065.4] r2139 0 1 = Acknowledgement running r2139.0 1 1 = Acknowledgement required r2139.1 2 Reserved 3 1 = Fault present 4 Reserved 5 1 = Safety message present r2139.5 6 1 = Internal message 1 present r2139.6 7 1 = Alarm present r2139.7 8 1 = Internal message 2 present r2139.8 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 1 = Alarm class bit 0 r2139.11 12 1 = Alarm class bit 1 r2139.12 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved Source sampling time Refer to [1020.7] r2139.3 ZSW faults/alarms 2 Bit No. Status word, faults/alarms 2 r2135 0 1 = Fault encoder 1 r2135.0 1 1 = Fault encoder 2 r2135.1 2 1 = Fault encoder 3 r2135.2 3 ... Reserved 9 <1> From the thermal monitoring, infeed [8770.6] [8970.6] 10 1 = Fault transformer overtemperature <1> r2135.10 <1> 11 1 = Alarm transformer overtemperature <1> r2135.11 <1> From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8] 12 1 = Fault motor overtemperature r2135.12 From the thermal monitoring, power module [8014.8] 13 1 = Fault power unit thermal overload r2135.13 From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8] 14 1 = Alarm motor overtemperature r2135.14 From the thermal monitoring, power module [8014.8] 15 1 = Alarm power unit thermal overload r2135.15 <1> Only for A_INFMV, B_INFMV, VECTORMV, VECTORSL. 1 2 3 4 DO: All objects Internal control/status words - Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 5 6 fp_2548_51_eng.vsd 06.12.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2548 - Function diagrams (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2548 - Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 From the fault buffer [8060.6] Status word, faults/alarms 1 Internal control/status words 2-1064 Fig. 2-78 Bit No. Function diagrams Sequence control 2.8 Sequence control Function diagrams 2610 - Sequencer 2-1066 2634 - Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation 2-1067 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1065 p0857...p0862 POWER ON <1> Fault S1: Switching on inhibited 2000.00 s with OFF1 or OFF3 & ... response From all states ZSWA.06 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0 ZSWA.00/01/02 = 0 Drive at standstill "0 = OFF" (STWA.00) 2610 - Sequencer <4> <5> Pulses inhibited "0 = Coast down" (STWA.01) "0 = Fast stop" (STWA.02) r0046.8 EP terminals, enable missing <6> [2634] "Commissioning completed" (p0010 = 0 & p0009 = 0) <4> <5> "0 = Coast down" (STWA.01) & <4> <5> <6> [2634] "0 = Fast stop" (STWA.02) "0 = Coast down" (STWA.01) r0046.8 EP terminals, enable missing Pulse enable HW [2701.8] [2711.8] 1 1 r0046.8 EP terminals, <6> [2634] enable missing <5> <5> S5b: Fast stop "0 = Fast stop" (STWA.02) <4> <5> S2: Ready for switching on ZSWA.00 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0 Main contactor is OPEN Wait for power-up or jog "0 = OFF" Jog 1 Jog 2 0 = Coast down (STWA.01) <4> <5> 0 = Fast stop (STWA.02) <4> <5> (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A <6> [2634] 1 "0 = OFF" Jog 1 Jog 2 Infeed ready r0046.8 EP terminals, enable missing p0862 1 p0864 <3> 0 Closed-loop control operation & No LT_fault r0046.8 EP terminals, <6> [2634] enable missing 1 S5c: Jogging down ramp <5> & "Enable operation" (STWA.03) De-magnetization completed (r0046.27 = 0) OFF2 (has priority over jogging) ZSWA.00/01 = 1 ZSWA.11 = 1 ZSWA.02/06 = 0 & <7> Bring the drive to n <= 0 along the Ramp-funktion generator, then inhibit the pulses Controller enable <5> S4: Operation ZSWA.00/01/02 = 1 ZSWA.11 = 1 "0 = OFF" No jog operation Jog 1 & 1 Jog 2 <1> POWER ON = 24 V electronics supply OFF --> ON or RESET button. ZSWA.06 = 0 <2> The sequence control is implemented according to the PROFIdrive profile. <3> Only for SINAMICS S120 and G150: Pulses enabled If a DO Infeed (A_INF, B_INF and S_INF) is used, it closes the line contactor Controller enabled (refer to [8732][8832][8932]) and not the DO SERVO/VECTOR. No jog operation: Setpoints enabled OFF3 (has priority over jogging) <4> These control commands can also be triggered by a fault response. <5> STWA.xx = control word, sequence control, bit xx (r0898) [2501]; ZSWA.xx = status word, sequence control bit xx (r0899) [2503]. <6> Only if Safety Integrated is active. <7> The parameters p1226, p1227 and p1228 influence this status. 1 2 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Sequence control - Sequencer 3 4 <7> Bring the drive to n <= 0 along the Ramp-funktion generator, then inhibit the pulses S5a: Ramp stop <5> "Enable operation" (STWA.03) <7> Bring the drive to n <= 0 along the fast stopping ramp or torque limit, then inhibit the pulses ZSWA.00/01 = 1 ZSWA.11 = 1 ZSWA.02/06 = 0 Line contactor is CLOSED Wait for pre-charging r0863.0 Closed-loop control operation "0 = Coast down" <4> <5> (STWA.01) Drive at standstill ZSWA.00/01 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0 ZSWA.02/06 = 0 Energize contactor r0863.1 Drive at standstill & ZSWA.00/01 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 1 ZSWA.02/06 = 0 & & S3: Ready UDC uploaded T Pulse enable HW[ 2701.8][2711.8] <5> & & 5 6 fp_2610_54_eng.vsd 23.11.10 V04.05.00 Jog 1 Jog 2 Jog mode Faults F07300...F07802 F6000 1 & r0899.8 [2503.3] Missing enable signals 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 [2634] 8 - 2610 - Function diagrams Pulse enable HW[2701.8] Drive at standstill <5> Sequence control 2-1066 Fig. 2-79 <2> 2634 - Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-80 Missing enable signals p0115[3] (2000.00 s) Line contactor control Control Unit Missing enable signals that prevent the drive going into operation (this situation can be detected at the ZSW sequence control, infeed r0899.2 = 1 [8926] <5>). Missing enable sig Bit Nr. [2701.8] Bedeutung r0046 0 1 = OFF1, enable missing r0046.0 1 1 = OFF2, enable missing r0046.1 2 1 = OFF3, enable missing r0046.2 3 1 = Enable operation missing r0046.3 4 1 = Armature short-circuit/DC braking, enable missing r0046.4 5 1 = STOP2, enable missing r0046.5 6 1 = STOP1, enable missing r0046.6 8 1 = EP terminals, enable missing r0046.8 9 1 = Infeed, enable missing r0046.9 10 1 = Ramp-function generator enable missing r0046.10 11 1 = Ramp-function generator start missing r0046.11 12 1 = Setpoint, enable missing r0046.12 16 1 = OFF1, enable, internal missing r0046.16 17 1 = OFF2, enable, internal missing r0046.17 18 1 = OFF3, enable, internal missing r0046.18 19 1 = Pulse enable, internal missing r0046.19 20 1 = Internal armature short circuit/DC braking, enable missing r0046.20 21 1 = STOP2, enable internal missing r0046.21 22 1 = STOP1, enable internal missing r0046.22 25 1 = Function bypass active r0046.25 26 1 = Drive inactive or not operational 27 1 = De-magnetization not completed 28 1 = Open brake missing r0046.28 29 1 = Cooling system ready missing r0046.29 30 1 = Speed controller inhibited r0046.30 31 1 = Jog setpoint active r0046.31 [3020.5] Fault with OFF3 response From the line supply 1 = Internal RFG missing 1 [3060.2] [3070.2] Line contactor control from sequence control [2610.4]<2> Energize line contactor [8732.4]<3> r0863.1 [8832.4]<4> [2130]...[2133] [8932.4]<5> DO +24 V Line contactor feedback signal p0860 r0863.1 1 DI [2120]...[2133] ON/OFF monitoring p0861 r0046.26 <1> [3060.2] [3060.4] [3070.2] [3070.4] 0 = Internal fast stop 1 r0046.27 1 T 0 Time monitoring F07300 "Line contactor feedback signal missing" To the infeed <2> Operating monitoring Logic operation p2816[0] r2811.0 p2810[1] (0) 2-1067 <1> Only for VECTOR. <2> For AC/AC devices, diode infeed <3> Only for SINAMICS S120/G150. (0) AND operation OR operation & r2817.0 p2816[1] (0) <4> Only for SINAMICS S120. <5> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Sequence control - Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation & 5 6 fp_2634_54_eng.vsd 11.04.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2634 - Sequence control (0) Function diagrams p2810[0] Function diagrams Brake control 2.9 Brake control Function diagrams 2701 - Basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) 2-1069 2704 - Extended brake control, zero-speed detection (r0108.14 = 1) 2-1070 2707 - Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1) 2-1071 2711 - Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) 2-1072 2-1068 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A p0858 1 = Unconditionally close the holding brake 0.000...10.000 [s] p1228 (0.000) n_act smooth <10> [4710.7] r0063 2701 - Basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-81 Background [2501.3] r0898.14 1 0 T 0 p0856 RESET (Q=0) Q SET (Q=1) [2501.3] r0898.12 Close brake p1215 = 0 <1> Q Open brake & [4715.7] r0063[0] [2503.3] <6> 0.000...300.000 [s] p1227 (4.000) <3> 0...10 000 [ms] p1217 (100) 1 <10> n_ctrl n_set [5030.8] r1438 0 T 0 T 0 & for SERVO OFF 1 present 1 RESET (Q=0) Q 1 & SET (Q=1) 1 = No coast down active [2503.7] r0899.4 1 1 = Operation enabled RESET Q (Q=0) 1 = Power-on inhibit active [2503.7] r0899.6 1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake [2501.3] r0898.7 & SET (Q=1) T 1 Q r0046.21 & <2> [2634.1] <7> 0 <1> p1215 = 2 Magnetizing completed [2610.5] [2610.8] <10> [5042.8] <10> [5730.4] Stop 2 enable internal missing RESET Q (Q=0) p0855 [2501.3] r0898.3 Pulse enable HW Q <3> 0...10 000 [ms] p1216 (100) Pulse enable X21 <4> p0852 [2503.3] r0899.12 <5> for VECTOR OFF 3 present SET (Q=1) r0899.13 <10> Close "normal" brake [2814.2] 1 = Open the holding brake Q [2503.3] 1 = Open the holding brake [6030.2] r0060 <8> RESET (Q=0) Q <2> 1 n_act unsmoothed n_stop n_thresh 0.0...210 000.0 [RPM] p1226 (20.0) n_set before filter Refer to [1020.7] <9> 1 = Command, close holding brake 1 = Enable speed controller SET (Q=1) Q [2526.6] r0056.4 2-1069 Note: Braking signal diagnostic evaluation (p1278) only applies for SBC (Safe Brake Control) (controls the Safe Brake Relay). <10> Note: With VECTOR with activated "parallel circuit" Function Module (r0108.15 = 1), the holding brake may only be connected to a power unit (p7015). 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Brake control - Basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) 4 5 6 fp_2701_54_eng.vsd 30.03.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2701 - Function diagrams <5> For p1227 = 300 s, the monitoring function is deactivated. <6> If an external motor holding brake is used, p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as control signal. <7> r0046.21 = 0, as long as r0046.0 = 1 (OFF1 enable missing or power-on inhibit). r0046.21 = 1, if p0858 = 1 or p0856 = 0. The signal generation is shown simplified. <8> The internal signal includes signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3 (e. g. BICO or fault response). <9> If the brake is permanently applied or released (p0855, p0858 or p1215), the drive does not wait while the brake is released or applied. <10> Only for SINAMICS S120. Brake control <1> Motor holding brake configuration (p1215) 0 = No motor holding brake being used. 1 = Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control. 2 = Motor holding brake always released. 3 = Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO. <2> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p0858, p0855, p0856, sequence control. <3> If p1215 = 0, 2 -> t = 0 ms. <10> <4> Only if Safety Integrated is active (Double Motor Module: X22, Chassis: X41). n_act smooth <5> [4710.7] r0063 Refer to [1020.7] r1229.7 p1225 1 T (r0063) 0 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2704 - Extended brake control, zero-speed detection (r0108.14 = 1) 0 n_act unsmoothed p1225 (r0063[0]) [4715.7] r0063[0] n_set before filter [6030.2] r0060 <2> 0.000...300.000 [s] p1227 (4.000) n_stop n_thresh 0.0...210 000.0 [RPM] p1226 (20.0) r1229.8 for VECTOR 1 n_ctrl n_set <5> [5030.8] r1438 0 for SERVO p1275.02 (0) T p1224[1] <3> (0) p1224[2] 1 1 SET (Q=1) Close brake from standstill detection [2707.1] [2711.1] Q RESET (Q=0) Q <2> 0.000...300.000 [s] p1276 (300.000) 0 (0) & 0 p1275.03 (0) Brk close standstill p1224[0] Brake, monitoring time expired 0 T 0 -1 1 (0) 1 p1224[3] (0) OFF1 present <4> OFF3 present <1> Shutdown threshold of the standstill detection. In this case (e.g. when using a brake), another criterion than the speed actual value can be selected to clear the pulses. Otherwise, we recommend to keep the factory setting. <2> For p1276 = 300.000 s, the timer is de-activated, i.e. the timer output is always 0. Note: When operating a motor with a brake which must not be applied while the motor is rotating, the monitoring time of both timers must be set to 300 s. <3> For operation without brake, p1224[0...3] must be 0 (factory setting) in order to avoid undesirable interaction with the sequence control. <4> The internal signal comprises signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3, e.g. BICO or fault response. <5> Only for SINAMICS S120. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Brake control - Extended brake control, zero-speed detection (r0108.14 = 1) 5 6 fp_2704_54_eng.vsd 12.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2704 - Function diagrams <1> Standstill threshold Brake, threshold value fallen below Brake control 2-1070 Fig. 2-82 Background 0.000...10.000 [s] p1228 (0.000) p0858 Close brake from standstill detection Background 1 = Unconditionally close the holding brake <2> [2501.3] r0898.14 p1275.00(0) Refer to [1020.7] <4> p1275.01(0) Immediately close brake 2707 - Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-83 [2704.8] 0 p1219[0] (0) 1 p1219[1] Close brake (internal) 1 <1> p1215 = 0 0 (0) 1 p1219[2] [2711.1] 1 (0) [2711.8] p0856 Request pulse enable 1 = Enable speed controller Request, pulse enable missing/n_ctrl inhibited & 1 r1229.9 p1219[3] (r1229.9) [2501.3] r0898.12 Brake open threshold 0.00...200.00 [%] 0.000...300.000 [s] p1221(0.00) p1277(0.000) p1220 Brake threshold exceeded <2> r1229.6 Brake open threshold <1> p1215 = 2 1 (1) Open brake p1218[0] (1) 0 T 0 Open brake (internal) Magnetizing completed [2711.1] r0056.4 [2526.6] p1218[1] (1) p0855 1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake OR logic operation [2501.3] r0898.7 p1279[0] (0) 5 6 fp_2707_54_eng.vsd 13.10.10 V04.05.00 (0) AND logic operation p1279[2] (0) <3> Brake AND logic operation result 1229.11 p1279[3] (0) 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2707 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Brake control - Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1) 1229.10 p1279[1] Brake control 2-1071 <1> Motor holding brake configuration 0 = No brake or brake always applied (brake connected to the power unit) 1 = Brake control active (brake connected to the power unit) 2 = Brake always released (brake connected to the power unit) 3 = Brake control active (brake connection can be interconnected using BICO) Note: A motor brake cannot be connected to all power units. p1215 is set to 3 and the brake is controlled via a digital output (e.g. TM31). <2> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p0858, p0855, p0856/p1219, apply brake from standstill detection, p1218. <3> These blocks/modules are evaluated with the same sampling rate as the brake control and therefore may only be used to individually adapt the brake control. <4> If the brake is permanently applied or released (p0855, p0858 or p1215), the drive does not wait until the brake is released or applied. Brake OR logic operation result <3> [2503.7] [2704.8] Background Pulse enable X21<7>, X41<8> Refer to [1020.7] & Enable operation (r0898.3) Switching on inhibited (r0899.6) Request pulse enable [2707.1] Close brake from standstill detection 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2711 - Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) Brake feedb closed <2> r1229.5 1 p1222 & (0) & 0...10 000 [ms] p1217(100) & Brake does not close No OFF1 Brake with <5> No OFF3 feedback signal p1275.5 Brake is being used p1215 > 0 Brake is being used p1215 > 0 & 0 [2704.8] Close brake T 0 0 From the standstill detection 1 0 1 <1> 1 1 Pulse enable, HW [2610.5] [2610.8] <7> [5730.4] Pulse enable from the brake control & r0899.14 1 [2503.3] Pulse enable from the expanded brake control 1 Brake feedb open <2> p1223 (1) A07932 r1229.3 1 & A07931 Brake does not open 0...10 000 [ms] p1216(100) r1229.4 0 T 1 Setpoint enable from the brake control 0 & [2501.1] [2503.3] r0899.15 0 1 1 1 = Command, close holding brake r0899.13 [2707.8] [2707.8] Close brake (internal) RESET (Q=0) Q Open brake (internal) SET (Q=1) [2503.3] Close "normal" brake <7> [2814.2] 1 = Command, open brake Q r1229.1 <4> 1 = Open the holding brake <1> This pulse enable path only works for operation with brake (p1215 > 0). <2> For brakes with one single checkback signal, the inverted signal has to be interconnected to the BICO input for the second checkback. The switching times of the brake are set in p1216 and p1217. <3> Only if Safety Integrated is active (Double Motor Module: X22, Chassis: X41). <4> If an external motor holding brake is used, p1215 should be set to 3 and r1229.1 should be used as control signal. <5> The internal signal comprises signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3, e.g. BICO or fault response. <6> If the function module "extended brake control" is active (r0108.14 = 1), r1229.1 should be interconnected as control signal. <7> Only for SINAMICS S120 booksize. <8> Only for SINAMICS S120 Chassis/S150/G130/G150. Note: Braking signal diagnostic evaluation (p1278) is only relevant for SBC (Safe Brake Control) (controls the Safe Brake Relay). 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Brake control - Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) 5 6 fp_2711_54_eng.vsd 06.12.10 V04.05.00 r0899.12 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 [2503.3] <6> 8 - 2711 - Function diagrams [2501.7] Coast down not active (r0899.4) Brake control 2-1072 Fig. 2-84 [2503.7] Function diagrams Safety Integrated Basic Functions 2.10 Safety Integrated Basic Functions Function diagrams 2800 - Parameter manager 2-1074 2802 - Monitoring and faults/alarms 2-1075 2804 - Status words 2-1076 2810 - STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1) 2-1077 2811 - STO (Safe Torque Off), safe pulse suppression 2-1078 2814 - SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter) 2-1079 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1073 2800 - Parameter manager Safety commissioning mode [2802.1][2804.1][2804.3][2810.3] --> select STO SI act_checksum CU r9798 Enter password Safety parameters p9601 ... p9899 can be changed & = x SI password new p9762 <1> = Safety parameterizing enable Safety Integrated commissioning p0010 = 95 SI password input p9761 SI set_checksum CU p9799 & Checksum check for safety parameters y Safety parameters p9601 ... p9899 are valid <1> (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A SET y=x = SI ackn password p9763 Effective password <2> <1> = r9898 SI act_checksum MM Reset safety parameters Inhibit safety functions p9601 = 0 [2810.3] p9899 SI set_checksum MM <3> p0010 95 Exit safety commissioning mode Safety parameters p9601 ... p9899 can be reset to the factory settings via p0970, p3900 & p9801 = 0 [2810.3] <1> <1> Comparator, refer to [1021] <2> Analog signal memory, refer to [1021] <3> The target checksum must be equal to the actual checksum. 1 2 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Basic Functions - Parameter manager 3 4 5 6 fp_2800_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2800 - Function diagrams <3> Safety Integrated Basic Functions 2-1074 Fig. 2-85 r9780 CU/r9880 MM Change safety parameters 2802 - Monitoring and faults/alarms (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-86 r9780 CU/r9880 MM Safety Integrated version CU r9770 [2810.7] STO selected on Control Unit MM r9870 Monitoring clock cycle CU r9780 MM r9880 STOP F->A CU p9658 STOP F->A MM p9858 F01611 F30611 1 = Faults with response "NONE" Safety monitoring functions [2810.8] STO selected on Motor Module T 0 STOP F [2800.3] Safety commissioning mode Timer for emergency retraction [2811.3] DIAG_U r9772.15 (CU) [2804.2] Faults/alarms CU: F/A01600 ... 01699 MM: F/A30600 ... 30699 [2811.3] DIAG_L r9872.15 (MM) [2804.5] [2814.7] BR_DIAG 1 1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse cancelation" [2810.4] Status SS1 CU r9772.10 (CU) [2804.2] r9872.10 (MM) [2804.5] [2810.4] Status SS1 MM 1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse cancelation" that cannot be acknowledged Additional diagnostics Information CU r9794 MM r9894 1 = STOP A To Safe Torque Off [2810.5] MM r9895 To Safe Brake Control [2814.1] Diagnostics for STOP F 1 F01600/F30600 "STOP A initiated" [2804.4] r9772.9 (CU) [2804.2] 2-1075 r9872.9 (MM) [2804.5] <1> Only with a parallel Motor Module connection and enabled Extended Functions. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Basic Functions - Monitoring functions and faults/alarms 4 5 6 fp_2802_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2802 - Function diagrams Slave Motor Module ready for communication r9872.24 <1> Safety Integrated Basic Functions Cross checking list CU r9795 Status (Control Unit) r9772 Bit No. Status word Safety Integrated Control Unit and Motor Module r9780 CU/r9880 MM Status (Motor Module) r9872 Bit No. Status (Control Unit + Motor Module) 2804 - Status words [2810.7] 0 1 = STO selected on Control Unit [2810.7] 0 1 = STO on Motor Module selected & 0 1 = STO selected in drive [2811.6] 1 1 = STO active on Control Unit [2811.3] 1 1 = STO on Motor Module active & 1 1 = STO active in drive [2810.5] 2 1 = SS1 delay time active on the Control Unit [2810.5] 2 1 = SS1 delay time on Motor Module active & 2 1 = SS1 delay time active in the drive 3 1 = Safe Brake Adapter feedback signal Reserved Reserved [2814.3] 4 1 = SBC requested [2814.3] 4 1 = SBC requested & 4 [2814.4] 5 1 = SS1 selected on the Control Unit (Basic Functions) [2814.4] 5 1 = SS1 selected on the Motor Module (Basic Functions) & 5 [2814.5] 6 1 = SS1 active on the Control Unit (Basic Functions) [2814.5] 6 1 = SS1 active on the Motor Module (Basic Functions) & 6 Reserved 9 1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active [2802.7] 9 1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active [2802.8] 10 1 = STOP A active [2802.8] 10 1 = STOP A active [2810.5] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 15 1 = STOP F active [2802.5] 15 1 = STOP F active [2810.6] 16 1 = STO cause: Safety comm. mode [2810.6] 16 1 = STO cause: Safety comm. mode [2810.3] 17 1 = STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Functions) [2810.3] 17 1 = STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Functions) [2825.8] 18 1 = STO cause: selection via SMM [2825.8] 18 1 = STO cause: selection via SMM [2810.3] 19 1 = STO cause actual value missing [2810.6] 20 1 = STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Functions) 21 Reserved 22 1 = SS1 cause selection terminal (Basic Functions) 23 31 1 = Shutdown paths must be tested Reserved [2802.5] [2810.4] 1 = SS1 selected in the drive (Basic Functions) 1 = SS1 active in the drive (Basic Functions) Reserved [2802.7] [2810.3] 1 = SBC requested Reserved Reserviert r9773 [2810.6] [2810.3] Bit No. 19 Reserved 20 1 = STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Functions) 21 Reserved 22 1 = SS1 cause selection terminal (Basic Functions) 1 = SS1 cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Functions) [2810.4] 23 1 = SS1 cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Functions) Reserved [2802.3] 24 1 = Slave Motor Module ready for communication Reserved Status word Safety Integrated Safe Torque Off group r9773.0 Group n r9773.1 Group n r9773.2 Group n r9773.4 Group n r9773.5 Group n r9773.5 Group n Status (Safe Torque Off group) & 0 1 = STO selected in group & 1 1 = STO active in group & 2 1 = SS1 delay time active in group 3 Reserved & 4 1 = SBC requested in group & 5 & 6 r9774 1 = SS1 selected in group (Basic Functions) 1 = SS1 active in group (Basic Functions) Reserved r9773.31 Group n 1 2 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Basic functions - Status words 3 4 5 & 6 fp_2804_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 31 1 = Shutdown paths of the group must be tested 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2804 - Function diagrams Bit No. Status word Safety Integrated Motor Module Safety Integrated Basic Functions 2-1076 Fig. 2-87 Status word Safety Integrated Control Unit <6> p0120 0 = Safe Torque Off CU r0722.0 SS1 cause selection terminal r9772.22 = 1 p9601.2 = 0 p9601.3 = 1 1 & p9601.0 = 1 1 r0722.3 & 1 [2804.1] [2825.8] & STOP A = 1 [2802.8] & [2804.1] p9501.0 = 1 p9601 0 r0722.4 p9652 p9620[7] r0722.7 <1> CU terminals that can be used for STO. r9772.18 STO cause: selection via SMM 0 0 = SS1 selection via PROFIsafe p9601.2 = 0 p9601.3 = 1 T & & & [2804.1] r9772.20 STO cause selection PROFIsafe 1 = STO release [2800.3] 0 0 = Request pulse suppression CU [2811.1] Timer forced checking procedure p9659(8) & 1 T <2> 1 & T 0 A01699 "Shutdown paths must be tested" [2804.7] 1 = STO cse: Safety comm. mode 1 [2804.1] [2804.1] Timer for forced checking procedure r9772.16 r9772.17 [2802.2] [2804.1] STO cause selection via terminal r9772.2 r9780 CU / r9880 MM [2802.2] [2804.1] & r9772.23 <3> p9620[4] & 0 = STO selection via PROFIsafe [2804.1] p9620[3] 1 = STO on CU selected r9772.0 & DRIVE-CLiQ Control Unit p9620[0] 2810 - STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-88 +24 V M r9773.31 1 = Shutdown paths must be tested F-DI chg tol CU p9650 F-DI chg tol MM p9850 Redundant functions <4> r9772.2 SS1 delay time on CU active r9872.2 SS1 delay time on MM active =1 T 0 F01611 (CU) F30611 (MM) Monitoring for simultaneous occurrence Motor Module SS1 cause selection terminal r9872.22 = 1 p9801.2 = 0 0 = Request pulse suppression MM & p9801.3 = 1 1 1 EP + & r9872.20 1 = STO cause selection PROFIsafe [2804.1] [2825.8] 1 = STO release [2804.1] [2802.8] & STOP-A = 1 & [2802.2] EP M [2802.2] 0 = SS1 selection via PROFIsafe p9801.2 = 0 2-1077 p9801.3 = 1 & & & 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Basic Functions - STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1) T 0 [2800.3] 4 1 & 1 = STO cse: Safety comm. mode 1 r9872.2 0 [2804.1] [2804.1] r9872.16 [2802.2] r9872.17 [2804.1] 1 = STO cause selection via terminal 5 6 fp_2810_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 [2802.2] [2804.1] <1> One terminal can be used for several drives to form a group. <2> Switch-on delay according to [1022] starts when the "request pulse suppression CU" is withdrawn. <3> Value range see Parameter List. <4> Redundant functions in the Control Unit (CU) and Motor Modules (MM). <5> Only for Booksize. <6> Only for VECTOR. The number of active AND inputs corresponds to the number of Motor Modules connected in parallel (p0120). <7> Only for SINAMICS S120 Chassis/S150/G130/G150. EP: Enable Pulses SS1: Safe Stop 1 STO: Safe Torque Off 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2810 - Function diagrams +24 V r9872.18 STO cause: selection via SMM 0 1 p9801.0 = 1 p9801 p9852 1 Safety Integrated Basic Functions & [2804.1] & r9872.23 p9801.0 = 1 <7> X41 <5> X21/22 & 0 = STO selection via PROFIsafe [2804.1] [2811.1] 1 = STO on MM selected r9872.0 r9780 CU / r9880 MM 1 = STO active on Control Unit r9772.1 [2804.2] 1 +5 V DRIVE-CLiQ Request pulse suppression CU [2810.8] Upper IGBT bridge halve Shutdown path from CU <1> 0 = STO_CU to SBC [2814.2] Save Pulse suppression to SBC + Vdc U Gating unit V [2814.2] W +5 V 0 = Request Pulse suppression MM Lower IGBT bridge halve Shutdown path from MM <1> 0 = STO_MM [2810.8] ~ M r9872.1 [2804.5] 1 = STO on MM active 1 = STO active" for sequence control 1 - Vdc Gating unit & [2802.1] DIAG_L [2814.2] [2802.1] DIAG_U [2814.2] <1> Transistors inhibited for a "0" signal. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Basic Functions - STO (Safe Torque Off), Safe Pulse suppression STO: Safe Torque Off 5 6 fp_2811_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2811 - Function diagrams (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2811 - STO (Safe Torque Off), safe pulse suppression Safety Integrated Basic Functions 2-1078 Fig. 2-89 Motor Module Control Unit Safety enable p9601 Enable SBC p9602 0 =1 SI SBA WT CU p9622 & 0 = Pulses cancelled [2810.7] Safety fault [2802.8] F01630 "Incorrect safety brake control, CU" 1 1 = "Fault, brake control" 1 0 = STO_CU 0 = "SBC requested" <3> SBA_DIAG 1 0 = STO_MM DIAG_U F07930 "Incorrect brake control" <2> Causes for "close brake" From the STO shutdown paths [2810.6] r9780 CU 1 = "SBC enabled" >0 Safety Logic CU & 1 = STOP A p9621 SI S_q SBA CU (Implementation and monitoring of brake control) 1 = SBC requested r9772.4 2804.2] DIAG_L <1> Motor brake 24 V DC. <2> Not if: p9602 = p9802 = 0 and p1278 = 1 <3> Only for Booksize. <4> Only for Chassis (CIM). <5> Motor brake 230 V AC. <2> <4> SBA_DIAG BR1 BR2* SBA-DIAG BR_DIAG <3> BR1* 0 = "SBC selected" Close "normal" brake from the basic brake control [2701.8] Close "normal" brake from the expanded brake control [2711.8] DRIVE-CLiQ DRIVE-CLiQ-Controller BR2* Motor Module Causes for "safely close brake" From the STO Shutdown paths [2810.6] 0 = STO_CU Safety fault [2802.8] 0 = "SBC angewahlt" DIAG_U BR_DIAG <3> BR1 BR2 SBA_Diag BR1* 1 = SBC requested r9872.4 [2804.5] 0 = STO_MM 0 = Pulses canceled [2810.7] r9880 MM <4> SBA_DIAG & +24 V Safety Logic MM 1 (Implementation and monitoring of brake control) 1 = Transistor conductive 0 = "SBC requested" 1 = Fault, brake control SBA - BR- <2> & 1 = "SBC enabled" & p9822 SI SBA t_wait MM ~ M <5> <1> Rapid de-exitation Brake rectifier M >0 =1 S B A BR2 Lower gating control channel F30630 "Incorrect safety brake control, MM" 2-1079 SBA: Safe Brake Adapter SBC: Safe Brake Control Note: With VECTOR with activated "parallel circuit" Function Module (r0108.15 = 1), the holding brake may only be connected to a power unit (p7015). 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Basic Functions - SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter) 5 6 fp_2814_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2814 - Function diagrams Enable SBC p9802 <4> BR_DIAG [2802.1] Enable signals for SBC MM Safety enable p9801 <1> SBA - BR+ BR1 <2> 1 = STOP A Diagnostic signal <3> 1 DIAG_L Upper gating control channel Safe Brake Adapter Ruckmeldesignal r9872.3 Safety Integrated Basic Functions 2814 - SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-90 Enable signals for SBC CU Function diagrams Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2.11 Safety Integrated Extended Functions Function diagrams 2820 - SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) 2-1081 2822 - SLP (Safely-Limited Position) 2-1082 2825 - SS1, SS2, SOS, internal STOP B, C, D, F 2-1083 2840 - Control word and status word 2-1084 2846 - Parameter manager 2-1085 2847 - TM54F parameter manager 2-1086 2848 - TM54F configuration, F-DI/F-DO test 2-1087 2850 - TM54F (F-DI 0 ... F-DI 4) 2-1088 2851 - TM54F (F-DI 5 ... F-DI 9) 2-1089 2853 - TM54F (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3, DI 20 ... DI 23) 2-1090 2855 - TM54F control interface (p9601.2 = 1 & p9601.3 = 0) 2-1091 2856 - TM54F Safe State selection 2-1092 2857 - TM54F assignment (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3) 2-1093 2860 - SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) 2-1094 2861 - SDI (Safe Direction) 2-1095 2-1080 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A <3> SI Mtn rp t_del CU 10.00...99000.00 [ms] p9582 (250.00) SI Mtn integ STW 2820 - SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-91 <2> p9500 (12.00 ms) SI Mtn SLS t CU 0.00...600000.00 [ms] p9551 (100.00) r9720 Deselect SLS T 1 r9720.4 <!> <3> SI Mtn ramp ref CU 600.0000...24000.0000 [1/min] p9581 (1500.0000) <3> SI Mtn rp t_mon CU 0.50...1000.00 [s] p9583 (10.00) Status of the SBR function 0 Safe Brake Ramp r9723.16 [2855.3]<5> [2858.3]<4> SI Mtn SLS set_lim 0.000...100.000 [%] p9533 (80.000) Select SLS bit 0 r9720.9 SI Mtn rp t_del MM 10000.00...99000000.00 [s] p9382 (250000.00) <3> Pos_act sign_chng p9516.1 SI Mtn ramp ref MM SI Mtn rp t_mon MM 600.0000...24000.0000 [1/min] 500.00...1000000.00 [ms] p9381 (1500.0000) p9383 (10000.00) <3> <3> SI Mtn SLS lim CU 0.00...1000000.00 [1/min] p9531[0...3] (2000.00) n_Max 0.000...210000.000 [1/min] p1082[D] (1500.000) Motor encoder rotating/linear p9516.0 [2855.3]<5> [2858.3]<4> SLS active SI Mtn ax type CU p9502 (0) SI Mtn sp_pitch CU 0.1000...8388.0000 [mm] p9520 (10.0000) SI Mtn SLS Gr CU 0.00...1000000.00 [1/min] p9531[0..3] (2000.00) Safe speed monitor Safe acceleration monitor SI Mtn gear den CU p9521[0...7] (1) r9722.4 [2855.6]<5> [2858.6]<4> 0 SI Mtn SLS lim MM 0.00...1000000.00 [1/min] p9331[0...3] (2000.00) SI Mtn setp_lim Select SLS bit 1 r9733[0...1] Conversion load side --> motor side r9720.10 1 [2855.3]<5> [2858.3]<4> SI Mtn SLS lim MM 0.00...1000000.00 [mm/min] p9331[0..3] (2000.00) SI Mtn gear num MM SI Mtn sp_pitch MM p9322[0...7] (1) 0.1000...8388.0000 [mm] p9320 (10.0000) SI Mtn gear den MM p9321[0...7] (1) Encoder rotating/linear p9316.0 Pos_act sign_chng p9316.1 2-1081 <1> Only for p9601.2/p9801.2 = 1. <2> Only for p9306/p9506 = 0 or 3. <3> Only for p9306/p9506 = 1. <4> Only at drive via PROFIsafe <5> Only at drive via TM54F or onboard interface for CU310-2. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Extended Functions - SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) 4 5 6 fp_2820_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2820 - Function diagrams SI Mtn ax type MM p9302 (0) Safety Integrated Extended Functions SI Mtn SLS t MM 0.00...600000000.00 [s] p9351 (100000.00) <2> SI Mtn gear num CU p9522[0...7] (1) & & MM SLP 1 & CU 1 Safely position (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2822 - SLP (Safely-Limited Position) 1 r9708[0,1] Deselect SLP 0 r9720.6 0 MM [2858.3] p9500 (12.00 ms) 0 STOP A 1 STOP B 2 STOP C 3 STOP D 4 STOP E [2825] CU p9335[0] p9535[0] SLP upper limit maintained 1 1 r9722.30 [2858.6] SLP lower limit maintained 1 1 r9722.31 [2858.6] p9562[1]/p9362[1] p9334[1] p9534[1] Selected SLP r9720.19 MM SLP 2 & [2858.3] CU 1 0 1 0 MM 0 STOP A 1 STOP B 2 STOP C 3 STOP D 4 STOP E [2825] CU p9335[1] p9535[1] SLP active 1 r9722.6 [2858.6] SLP positioning range active r9722.19 [2858.6] 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Extended Functions - SLP (Safely-Limited Position) 4 5 6 fp_2822_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2822 - Function diagrams SI Mtn UserAgr int MM r9741=AC hex p9562[0]/p9362[0] p9334[0] p9534[0] Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2-1082 Fig. 2-92 User agreement ist set SI Mtn UserAgr int CU r9727=AC hex Fig. 2-93 p9500 (12000 s) Safe Acceleration Monitor / Safe Brake Ramp exceeded 1 <1> Actual value speed < p9360/p9560 2825 - SS1, SS2, SOS, internal STOP B, C, D, F (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A SS2 active [2855.6]<3> r9722.2 [2858.6]<2> SS1 active [2855.6]<3> r9722.1 [2858.6]<2> Deselect STO [2855.3]<3> r9720.0 [2858.3]<2> STO active [2804.1] [2804.4] [2810.4] STO initiate p9526 = 1 r9721.12 STOP F [2855.6]<3> [2858.6]<2> r9722.0 SI Mtn IL t_Ver CU 0.00...600000.00 [ms] p9556 (100.00) STOP B active Deselect SS1 [2855.3]<3> r9720.1 [2858.3]<2> & r0487[0].14 T 0 p9526 = 2 SI Mtn t F->B CU 0.00...600000.00 [ms] p9555 (0.00) T r0487[1].14 SI Mtn IL t_Ver MM 0.00...600000000.00 [s] p9356 (100000.00) 0 SI Mtn t D->SOS CU 0.00...600000.00 [ms] p9553 (100.00) SI Mtn t F->B MM 0.00...600000000.00 [s] STOP D active p9355 (0.00) r9721.14 & & p9526 = 3 r0487[2].14 STO cause actual value is missing r0487[0].14 SS1 active r9722.1 T [2804.1] & [2855.6]<3> [2858.6]<2> 0 SI Mtn SLS t CU 0.00...600000.00 [ms] p9551 (100.00) [2855.3]<3> r9720.3 [2858.3]<2> SI Mtn t D->SOS MM 0.00...600000000.00 [s] p9353 (100000.00) SI Mtn t C->SOS CU 0.00...600000.00 [ms] p9552 (100.00) STOP C active r9721.13 T 0 T SOS active 0 r9722.3 SI Mtn SLS t MM 0.00...600000000.00 [s] p9351 (100000.00) SI Mtn t C->SOS MM 0.00...600000000.00 [s] p9352 (100000.00) SS2 active 2-1083 <1> Only for p9601.2 = 1 and p9801.2 = 1. <2> Only at drive via PROFIsafe. <3> Only at drive via TM54F or onboard interface for CU310-2. r9722.2 5 6 fp_2825_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 [2855.6]<3> [2858.6]<2> 8 - 2825 - Function diagrams SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor SBR: Safe Brake Ramp SLS: Safely-Limited Speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop SS1: Safe Stop 1 SS2: Safe Stop 2 Deselect SS2 [2855.3]<3> r9720.2 [2858.3]<2> 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Extended Functions - SS1, SS2, SOS, Internal STOP B, C, D, F [2855.6]<3> [2858.6]<2> Safety Integrated Extended Functions Deselect SOS Bit No. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2840 - Control word and status word <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] 0 1 = STO deselection 1 1 = SS1 deselection 2 1 = SS2 deselection 3 1 = SOS deselection 4 1 = SLS deselection 5 Reserved 6 1 = SLP deselection 7 1/0 = Acknowledgement 8 Reserved 9 1 = SLS selection bit 0 active 10 1 = SLS selection bit 1 active 11 Reserved 12 1 = Deselect SDI positive 13 14-18 <1> [2855.3] <2> [2858.3] Motion PROFIsafe control word 19 20-31 Mtn integ STW r9720 Bit No. <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] 1 = Deselect SDI negative <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] Reserved 0 1 = STO active 1 1 = SS1 active 2 1 = SS2 active 3 1 = SOS active 4 1 = SLS active 5 Reserved 6 1 = SLP active 7 1 = Not an internal event 8 Reserved 9 SLS stage active bit 0 10 SLS stage active bit 1 11 1 = SOS selected 12 1 = SDI positive active 13 1 = SDI negative active 14 Reserved 15 1 = SSM (Speed below limit) 16-18 <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] 1 = Auswahl SLP 19 Reserviert 20-21 <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> Only at drive of the Extended Functions via TM54F or onboard interface for CU310-2 . <2> Only at drive of the Extended Functions via PROFIsafe <3> S_ZSW1.11 only at drive of the Extended Functions via TM54F or onboard interface for CU310-2 or S_ZSW2.29 only at drive of the Extended Functions via PROFIsafe 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Extended Functions - Control word and status word 4 5 r9722 0 = SLS1 1 = SLS2 2 = SLS3 3 = SLS4 <3> Reserved 0 = SLS1 1 = SLS2 SLP positioning range active Reserved 22 1 = SP is valid 23 1 = Safely referenced 24-29 <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] <1> [2855.6] <2> [2858.6] Mtn integ Stat Motion PROFIsafe status word Reserved 30 1 = SLP upper limit maintained 31 1 = SLP lower limit maintained 6 fp_2840_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2840 - Function diagrams Motion PROFIsafe control word Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2-1084 Fig. 2-94 p9500 (12.00 ms) Motion PROFIsafe status word SI act CRC r9728 2846 - Parameter manager (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-95 p10000 (12.00 ms) Changing Safety parameters SI ref CRC p9729 <3> = Safety parameterization enable Safety Integrated commissioning p0010 = 95 SI password input p9761 Password entry & = x SI password new p9762 Safety parameter p9300 ... p9399 p9500 ... p9599 can be changed <1> & Checksum check for Safety parameters y Safety parameters p9300 p9399 p9500 ... p9599 are valid after POWER ON <1> = SI ackn password p9763 SET y=x Effective password <2> <1> = <1> <3> Disabling Safety functions Resetting safety parameters SI Mtn enable MM p9301 = 0 SI enable fct MM p9801 = 0 2-1085 4 5 6 fp_2846_54_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2846 - Function diagrams SI enable fct CU p9601 = 0 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Extended Functions - Parameter manager p0010 95 Quit Safety commissioning mode Safety parameter p10000 p10099 can be reset to factory settings via p0970, p3900 SI Mtn enable fct p9501 = 0 <1> Comparator, see [1021]. <2> Analog signal memory, see [1021]. <3> The target checksum must be equal to the actual check sum. p9399 SI ref CRC MM Safety Integrated Extended Functions r9398 SI act CRC MM 2847 - TM54F parameter manager SI ref CRC TM54F_MA p10005 <3> = Safety parameterization enable Safety Integrated commissioning p0010 = 95 SI password input p10061 Password entry = x SI password new p10062 Safety parameter p10000 ... p10099 can be changed & <1> & Checksum check for Safety parameters y Safety parameters p10000 p10099 are valid after POWER ON <1> (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A = SI ackn password p10063 SET y=x Effective password <2> <1> = <1> <3> r10004 SI act CRC TM54F_SL Resetting safety parameters Disabling Safety functions SI drv_obj assign_MA p10010[0...5] = 0 & SI drv_obj assign_SL p10010[0..5] = 0 p10005 SI ref CRC TM54F_SL p0010 95 Quit Safety commissioning mode Safety parameter p10000 p10099 can be reset to factory settings via p0970 <1> Comparator, see [1021]. <2> Analog signal memory, see [1021]. <3> The target checksum must be equal to the actual check sum. 1 2 3 DO: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL SI Extended Functions - Parameter manager 4 5 6 fp_2847_51_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2847 - Function diagrams SI act CRC TM54F_MA r10004 Commissioning mode active (p0010 = 95) r10054.0 Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2-1086 Fig. 2-96 p10000 (12.00 ms) Changing Safety parameters 2848 - TM54F configuration, F-DI/F-DO test (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-97 Drive group assignment Drive 1 p10011[0] (1) Drive 2 p10011[1] (1) Drive 3 p10011[2] (1) Drive 4 p10011[3] (1) p10000 (12.00 ms) Drive 5 p10011[4] (1) Drive 6 p10011[5] (1) p10010[4] Drive 5 p10010[5] Drive 6 Drive group 1 Drive group 2 Drive group 3 Drive group 4 SI fcp F-DO S_q p10010[0] Drive 1 p10007 p10010[1] Drive 2 p10010[2] Drive 3 p10010[3] Drive 4 (0) Test stop SI F-DI enab test p10041 SI test sens FS p10046 [2853.8] [2853.8] [2853.8] T 0 A35014 Test stop required r10053.0 DI 20 r10053.1 DI 21 r10053.2 DI 22 A35012 Test stop activ F35013 Test stop error Test F-DO r10053.3 DI 23 2-1087 1 2 3 DO: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL SI Extended Functions - TM54F Configuration, F-DI/F-DO Test 4 5 6 fp_2848_51_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2848 - Function diagrams [2853.8] Restart timer (on successful test stop) Safety Integrated Extended Functions SI FrcdCkProcTimer 0.00...8760.00 [h] p10003 (8.00) Test F-DI X524.M M P24 M X524.M X514.+ M 2850 - TM54F (F-DI 0 ... F-DI 4) +24 V + X514.+ P24_1 M1 X514.M X514.M SI discrep t_monit 1.00...2000.00 [ms] p10002 (500.00) M1 M1 X521.1 L1+ (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A X521.2 DI 0 X521.3 DI 1+ X521.6 DI 1- X521.4 DI 2 X521.5 DI 3+ X521.7 DI 3- X521.8 DI 4 X522.2 DI 5+ X522.7 DI 5- X522.3 DI 6 X522.4 DI 7+ X522.8 DI 7- X522.5 DI 8 X522.6 DI 9+ X522.9 DI 9- r10051.0 (SL) =1 T 0 r10051.0 (MA) M1 1 1 p10040.1 r10051.1 (SL) =1 T 0 r10051.1 (MA) M1 =1 r10051.2 (SL) T 0 r10051.2 (MA) M1 1 p10040.3 r10051.3 (SL) =1 T 0 r10051.3 (MA) M1 1 p10040.4 r10051.4 (SL) =1 r10051.4 (MA) M1 T 0 & 0 F-DI 2 [2855.1] F-DI 3 [2855.1] F35151 Discrepancy error F-DI 4 [2855.1] 1 F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input M1 1 2 3 DO: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL SI Extended Functions - TM54F (F-DI 0 ... F-DI 4) [2855.1] F35151 Discrepancy error & 0 1 F-DI 1 F35151 Discrepancy error & 0 1 [2855.1] 1 p10040.2 1 F-DI 0 F35151 Discrepancy error & 0 1 F35151 Discrepancy error & 0 M1 X522.1 X522.10 p10040.0 4 5 6 fp_2850_51_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2850 - Function diagrams + 1000 s +24 V electronic X524.+ Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2-1088 Fig. 2-98 24 V DC To the next device X524.+ + 1000 s +24 V electronic X524.+ X524.M P24 M 2851 - TM54F (F-DI 5 ... F-DI 9) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-99 24 V DC To the next device X524.+ X524.M X514.+ M M +24 V + X514.+ P24_1 M1 X514.M X514.M SI discrep t_monit 1.00...2000.00 [ms] p10002 (500.0) M1 M1 X531.1 L2+ X531.2 DI 10 X531.3 DI 11+ X531.6 DI 11- X531.4 DI 12 X531.5 DI 13+ X531.7 DI 13- X531.8 DI 15+ X532.7 DI 15- X532.3 DI 16 X532.4 DI 17+ X532.8 DI 17- X532.5 DI 18 X532.6 DI 19+ X532.9 DI 19- T 0 r10051.5 (MA) & 0 1 1 p10040.6 r10051.6 (SL) =1 T 0 r10051.6 (MA) M1 =1 r10051.7 (SL) T 0 r10051.7 (MA) M1 1 p10040.8 r10051.8 (SL) =1 T 0 r10051.8 (MA) M1 1 p10040.9 r10051.9 (SL) =1 r10051.9 (MA) M1 T 0 & 0 F-DI 7 [2855.1] F-DI 8 [2855.1] F35151 Discrepancy error F-DI 9 [2855.1] 1 2-1089 M1 1 2 3 DO: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL SI Extended Functions - TM54F (F-DI 5 ... F-DI 9) [2855.1] F35151 Discrepancy error & 0 1 F-DI 6 F35151 Discrepancy error & 0 1 [2855.1] 1 p10040.7 1 F-DI 5 F35151 Discrepancy error & 0 1 F35151 Discrepancy error F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input 4 5 6 fp_2851_51_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2851 - Function diagrams X532.2 =1 Safety Integrated Extended Functions DI 14 r10051.5 (SL) M1 M1 X532.1 X532.10 p10040.5 24 V DC to the next device p1000 (12.00 ms) +24 V electronic X524.M M X524.M + M X514.+ +24 V X514.+ P24_1 X514.M M1 M1 X514.M Example of a circuit with contactors - only the feedback signal contacts are shown M1 X522.10 <1> r10053.0 M1 X523.1 Read-back of F-DO 0 DI 20 X523.2 DO 0+ M1 X523.3 DO 0- F-DO 0 +24V M1 X525.1 r10052.0 Read-back of F-DO 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A X525.3 DO 1+ M1 DO 1- M1 F-DO 1 M1 r10052.1 Read-back of F-DO 2 X533.1 X533.3 DO 2+ M1 F-DO 2 +24V M1 r10052.2 Read-back of F-DO 3 X535.3 DO 3+ M1 DO 3- DI: Digital Input F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output L3+ [2848.2] M1 F-DO 3 +24V X520.1 [2857.8] <1> r10053.3 DI 23 X535.2 [2848.2] M1 DO 2- X535.1 [2857.8] <1> r10053.2 DI 22 X533.2 [2848.2] M1 +24V X532.10 [2857.8] <1> r10053.1 DI 21 X525.2 [2848.2] M1 M1 [2857.8] r10052.3 <1> Only for drive objekt TM54F_SL (Slave). 1 2 3 4 DO: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL SI Extended Functions - TM54F (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3, DI 20 ... DI 23) 5 6 fp_2853_51_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2853 - Function diagrams + P24 M 2853 - TM54F (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3, DI 20 ... DI 23) Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2-1090 Fig. 2-100 X524.+ X524.+ MM/CU TM54F_XX [2850.8] [2850.8] [2850.8] [2850.8] [2851.8] [2851.8] [2851.8] [2851.8] Extended Functions Deselection STO r9720.0 [2825.8] [2825.8] F-DI 1 [2825.1] Deselection SS1 r9720.1 F-DI 2 [2825.1] [2825.8] F-DI 3 F-DI 4 Deselection SS2 r9720.2 [2825.8] F-DI 5 [2825.1] F-DI 6 F-DI 7 Deselection SOS r9720.3 F-DI 8 [2825.1] F-DI 9 Deselection SLS r9720.4 Statically active [2850.8] F-DI 0 [2851.8] Statically inactive SI ackn int event p10006(0) SI SLP Freif F-DI p10009(0) SI SS2 DI p10024[0...3] [2820.8] [2840.8] [2820.1] [2822.7] Deselection SLP r9720.6 [2840.8] Distribution of drive groups 1...4 to drives 1...6 SI SLS DI p10026[0...3] SI SLS-Limit(0) DI p10027[0...3] r9722.1 SS2 active r9722.2 Grouping drives 1...6 to drive groups 1...4 SLS active SLS active Internal event r9722.4 Drive group 1 Safely referenced r9722.23 & SLP active SDI pos active r9722.6 SDI neg active Internal event SLP active r9722.7 Pulses suppressed [2861.8] Drive group 2 Active SLP-Stufe [2856.1] [2857.1] Pulses suppressed Drive group 3 Active SLP-Stufe Pulses suppressed SS1_active SDI negative active SS2_active r9722.13 SOS_active SLS_active [2822.1] SI SLP DI p10032[0...3] [2822.7] Selection SLP [2822.7] Internal event SLP positioning range active r9722.19 Drive group 4 SP is valid SLS stage bit 0 SLS stage bit 0 r9722.22 SDI pos active SLP upper limit maintained SDI neg active r9722.30 SLP active SLP lower limit maintained 2-1091 [2822.1] Data encryption/decryption 1 2 3 4 DO: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL SI Extended Functions - TM54F control interface (p9601.2 = 1 & p9601.3 = 0) Active SLP stage r9722.31 Data encryption/decryption 5 Data encryption/decryption 6 fp_2855_51_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2855 - Function diagrams [2822.1] r9720.19 SLS stage bit 0 SLS stage bit 1 SLP safely active SLS stage active bit 0 SI SDI neg DI p10031[0...3] Put all outputs to 0 SS2 active SOS active [2861.1] Deselection SDI neg [2861.1] SS1 active r9722.3 r9720.12 SI SDI pos DI p10030[0...3] Pulses suppressed SOS active Safe motion [2840.8] r9722.9 Selection SLS bit 0 monitoring in r9720.9 SLS stage active bit 1 the drives [2840.8] r9722.10 [2820.1] Selection SLS bit 1 SOS selected [2840.8] r9720.10 r9722.11 [2820.1] SDI positive active [2861.8] r9722.12 r9720.13 p10000 (12.00 ms) Active SLP stage [2840.4] Deselection SDI pos SI SLS-Limit(1) DI p10028[0...3] r10054 SI Failsafe-event DRIVECLiQ SS1 active Assignment of drive groups Acknowledgement r9720.7 SI SOS DI p10025[0...3] SI SLP SEL DI p10033[0...3] r9722.0 [2822.1] SI STO DI p10022[0...3] SI SS1 DI p10023[0...3] DRIVECLiQ TM54F_XX p9500 (12.00 ms) STO active Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2855 - TM54F control interface (p9601.2 = 1 & p9601.3 = 0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-101 F-DI assignment of drive groups p10000 (12.00 ms) [2855.8] [2855.8] 2856 - TM54F Safe State selection [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] p10000 (12.00 ms) 1 Drive group 1 SS1_active Drive group 1 SS2_ active 0 0 SI Safe State selection p10039[0].6 Drive group 1 SOS_ active Drive group 1 SLS_active Drive group 1 Safe State SI Safe State selection p10039[0].0 Drive group 1 SDI_pos_active [2857.1] 0 0 Drive group 1 SDI_neg_active 1 Drive group 2 Power_removed 1 Drive group 2 SS1_active Drive group 2 SS2_active 0 0 SI Safe State selection p10039[1].6 Drive group 2 SOS_active Drive group 2 SLS_active Drive group 2 Safe State SI Safe State selection p10039[1].0 Drive group 2 SDI_pos_active 0 [2857.1] 0 Drive group 2 SDI_neg_active 1 Drive group 3 Power_removed 1 Drive group 3 SS1_active Drive group 3 SS2_active 0 0 SI Safe State selection p10039[2].6 Drive group 3 SOS_active Drive group 3 SLS_active Drive group 3 Safe State SI Safe State selection p10039[2].0 Drive group 3 SDI_pos_active 0 [2857.1] 0 Drive group 3 SDI_neg_active 1 Drive group 4 Power_removed 1 Drive group 4 SS1_active Drive group 4 SS2_active 0 0 SI Safe State selection p10039[3].6 Drive group 4 SOS_active Drive group 4 SLS_active Drive group 4 Safe State SI Safe State selection p10039[3].0 Drive group 4 SDI_pos_active 0 [2857.1] 0 Drive group 4 SDI_neg_active 1 2 3 DO: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL SI Extended Functions - TM54F Safe State selection 1 4 5 6 fp_2856_51_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2856 - Function diagrams [2855.8] Drive group 1 Power_removed Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2-1092 Fig. 2-102 [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] 2857 - TM54F assignment (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-103 [2855.8] [2855.8] [2856.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2856.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2856.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2856.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] [2855.8] 2-1093 [2855.8] [2855.8] Drive group 1 pulses suppressed 2: Drive group 1 SS1 active 3: Drive group 1 SS2 active 4: Drive group 1 SOS active 5: Drive group 1 SLS active 6: Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active 7: Drive group 1 safe state 8: Drive group 1 SOS selected 9: Drive group 1 internal event SI F-DO 0 S_src p10042[0] SI F-DO 0 S_src p10042[1] SI F-DO 0 S_src p10042[2] SI F-DO 0 S_src p10042[3] SI F-DO 0 S_src p10042[4] SI F-DO 0 S_src p10042[5] 1 2 3 4 SI F-DO 1 S_src SI F-DO 1 S_src p10043[0] 12: Drive group 1 SDI positive active 15: Drive group 1 active SLP stage 16: Drive group 1 safely referenced 257: Drive group 2 pulses suppressed p10043[1] 528: Antriebsgruppe 3 safely referenced 769: Drive group 4 pulses suppressed 770: Drive group 4 SS1 active 771: Drive group 4 SS2 active 2 3 4 780: Drive group 4 SDI positive aktive 781: Drive group 4 SDI negative active 2 3 4 F-DO 2 & [2853.8] 5 6 775: Drive group 4 Safe state 778: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 1 <1> 1 SI F-DO 3 S_src SI F-DO 3 S_src p10045[0] 774: Drive group 4 SSM feedback signal active 778: Drive group 4 active SLS stage bit 0 [2853.8] 6 SI F-DO 2 S_src p10044[0] SI F-DO 2 S_src p10044[1] SI F-DO 2 S_src p10044[2] SI F-DO 2 S_src p10044[3] SI F-DO 2 S_src p10044[4] SI F-DO 2 S_src p10044[5] 773: Drive group 4 SLS active 777: Drive group 4 internal event F-DO 1 & 5 772: Drive group 4 SOS active 776: Drive group 4 SOS selected <1> 1 SI F-DO 1 S_src p10043[2] SI F-DO 1 S_src p10043[3] SI F-DO 1 S_src p10043[4] SI F-DO 1 S_src p10043[5] 272: Drive groupe 2 safely referenced 513: Drive group 3 pulses suppressed [2853.8] 6 11: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 1 14: Drive group 1 SLP aktiv F-DO 0 & 5 10: Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0 13: Drive group 1 SDI negative active p10000.00 (12.00 ms) <1> p10045[1] <1> 1 SI F-DO 3 S_src p10045[2] SI F-DO 3 S_src p10045[3] SI F-DO 3 S_src p10045[4] SI F-DO 3 S_src p10045[5] 2 3 4 [2853.8] 5 782: Drive group 4 SLP active 783: Drive group 4 active SLP stage 6 784: Drive group 4 safely referenced 1 2 3 4 DO: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL SI Extended Functions - TM54F assignment (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3) F-DO 3 & <1> 5 6 fp_2857_51_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 If no signal F-DO = 0 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 2857 - Function diagrams [2855.8] No function 1: Safety Integrated Extended Functions [2855.8] 0: r9722.0 p9509.0 (1) 2860 - SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) Enable SSM hysteresis filter p9501.16 (0000 bin) Si Mtn SSM v_limCU SI Mtn SSM v_limMM 0.00...1000 000.00 [1/min] 0.00...1000 000.00 [1/min] p9546 (20.00) p9346 (20.00) Enable SSM hysteresis filter p9301.16 (0000 bin) 0.00...100.00 [ms] p9545 (0.00) SI Mtn integ stat Load-side v_act r9714[0] r9722 1 1 0 Safe speed recording SSM (speed below limit value) r9722.15 0 0 0 1 [2840.5] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0.00...100 000.00 [s] p9345 (0.00) SI Mtn SSM hyst MM SI Mtn SSM hyst CU 0.0010...500.0000 [1/min] 0.0010...500.0000 [1/min] p9347 (10.0000) p9547 (10.0000) 1 0 <1> Only for p9506 = 1 or 3 Safety without encoder. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Extended Functions - SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) 4 5 6 fp_2860_54_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2860 - Function diagrams STO active Safety Integrated Extended Functions 2-1094 Fig. 2-104 p9500 (12.00 ms) <1> p9500 (12.00 ms) Fig. 2-105 r9722.0 p9509.8 (1) 2861 - SDI (Safe Direction) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A <1> STO active SI Mtn setp_lim Enable SDI p9501.17 (0000 bin) r9733[0...2] <2> Enable SDI p9301.17 (0000 bin) SI Mtn SDI tol CU 0.001...360.000 [] p9564 (12.000) SI Mtn integ STW r9720 SDI positive select 1 1 r9720.12 [2840.1] 0 SI Mtn integ stat SI Mtn SDI t CU 0.00...600000.00 [ms] p9565 (100.00) r9722 0 Monitoring 1 1 0 SDI positive active 1 [2840.5] 0 SDI negative active 1 [2840.5] r9722.12 0 SDI negative select [2840.1] 0 0 T r9720.13 SI Mtn SDI Stop CU 0...14 p9566 <2> 0 r9722.13 SI Mtn SDI t MM 0.00...600000000.00 [s] p9365 (100000.00) 0 <1> Only for p9506 = 1 or 3 Safety without encoder. <2> r9733[0] Setpoint limiting positive r9733[1] Setpoint limiting negative r9733[2] Setpoint limit absolute |p1082| |p1082| 2-1095 SDI positive p1082 0 SDI negative 0 p1082 SDI positive + SLSx p9531[x] x p9533 0 SDI negativ + SLSx 0 p9531[x] x p9533 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR SI Extended Functions - SDI (Safe Direction) |p9531[x] x p9533| |p9531[x] x p9533| 4 5 6 fp_2861_54_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 2861 - Function diagrams Selected SI-Function SI Mtn SDI Stop MM 0...14 p9366 <2> Safety Integrated Extended Functions SI Mtn SDI tol MM 0.001...360.000 [] p9364 (12.000) Function diagrams Setpoint channel 2.12 Setpoint channel Function diagrams 3010 - Fixed speed setpoints 2-1097 3020 - Motorized potentiometer 2-1098 3030 - Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging 2-1099 3040 - Direction limitation and direction reversal 2-1100 3050 - Skip frequency bands and speed limitations 2-1101 3060 - Basic ramp-function generator 2-1102 3070 - Extended ramp-function generator 2-1103 3080 - Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking 2-1104 2-1096 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Refer to [1020.7] <100> <101> [2505.3] r1198.0 p1021 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1 3010 - Fixed speed setpoints (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-106 p0115[3] p1020 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0 From control word setpoint channel [2505.3] r1198.1 p1022 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 2 [2505.3] r1198.2 p1023 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 3 [2505.3] r1198.3 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Setpoint channel - Fixed speed setpoints 0 0 0 1 p1001[D] 0 0 1 0 p1002[D] 0 0 1 1 p1003[D] 0 1 0 0 p1004[D] 0 1 0 1 p1005[D] 0 1 1 0 p1006[D] 0 1 1 1 Fixed speed setpoint, actual p1007[D] r1024 1 0 0 0 Fixed speed setpoint number actual 0...15 r1197 p1008[D] 1 0 0 1 p1009[D] 1 0 1 0 p1010[D] 1 0 1 1 p1011[D] 1 1 0 0 p1012[D] 1 1 0 1 p1013[D] 1 1 1 0 p1014[D] 1 1 1 1 p1015[D] 5 6 fp_3010_51_eng.vsd 29.06.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 3010 - Function diagrams Fixed speed setpoint 1 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1001[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 2 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1002[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 3 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1003[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 4 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1004[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 5 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1005[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 6 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1006[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 7 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1007[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 8 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1008[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 9 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1009[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 10 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1010[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 11 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1011[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 12 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1012[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 13 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1013[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 14 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1014[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint 15 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1015[D] (0.000) 0 0 0 0 Setpoint channel 2-1097 <100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). <101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. 0.000 1 3020 - Motorized potentiometer Mop configuration 0000...0111 p1030[D] (00110) 0 = The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040. 1 = The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a ashion after OFF and after ON set to the saved value. 0 = Without ramp-function generator in automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0). 1 = With ramp-function generator in automatic mode. 0 = Without initial rounding. 1 = With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly. 0 = Not saved in the NVRAM. 1 = Save in NVRAM active. Automatic mode Ramp-function generator active Initial rounding-off active 2 Save in NVRAM active 3 The ramp-function generator is always active 4 0 = Ramp-up encoder inactive with pulse disable. 1 = The ramp-up encoder is calculated independently of the pulse enable. r1198.13 Mop raise [2505.7] p1035 0 Old value is kept 1 (0) r1198.14 Mop lower Mop manual/auto [2505.7] p1036 -1 p1030.1 p1041[C] (0) (0) & <2> Mop ramp-up time 0.0...1 000.0 [s] p1047[D] (10.0) 00 <2> Mop ramp-down time 0.0...1 000.0 [s] p1048[D] (10.0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Mop n_set bef RFG Mop n_max -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1037[D] (n_max_Mot) <1> Mop n_min -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1038[D] (-n_max_Mot) r1045 01 y p1082 0 -1 10 0 1 1 0 1 x y x Mop setp after RFG r1050 e.g. to [3030.1] <1> -p1082 11 y=0 n_max (reference value for ramp-function generator p1082) Mop inversion [3050.5] p1039[C] (0) Mop setting value Mop auto setpoint Mop start value -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1040[D] (0.000) p1044[C] p1042[C] (0) Mop accept set val <3> p1043[C] <1> For automatic commissioning, p1037 and p1038 are set to the maximum motor speed or to the rated motor speed, provided that n_max_mot has not been specified. <2> If initial rounding-off is active (p1030.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/down times are exceeded accordingly. <3> Only effective if p1030.0 = 0. [2634.3] <100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). <101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Setpoint channel - Motorized potentiometer p1030.4 OFF1 enable missing (r0046.0) 0 5 0 1 6 fp_3020_51_eng.vsd 29.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 3020 - Function diagrams 0 Refer to [1020.7] <100> <101> Setpoint channel 2-1098 Fig. 2-107 p0115[3] Data save active p0115[3] No OFF1 AOP30 Refer to [1020.7] <100> <101> & No OFF2 <1> No OFF3 LOCAL REMOTE 3030 - Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-108 Synchronization <2> I O [3040.1] <2> JOG <3> p1055 Jog 1 <5> [2501.3] r0898.8 [2501.1] PcCtrl active r0807.0 <3> p1056 Jog 2 <5> [2501.3] r0898.9 [2501.2] <4> <4> Main setpoint 1 1 p1070[C] (1024[0]) 0 0 + 0 + 0 r1078 Jog setpoint 1 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1058[D] (100.000) Main setp scal p1071[C] 0 1 r1073 0 (1) Jog setpoint 2 -210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1059[D] (100.000) Fixed value 1 [%] p2900 1 0 n_set_1 [3040.1] 1 Fixed value 2 [%] 1 1 p2901 Suppl setp scal p1076[C] (1) Keep old setpoint Supplement setpoint p1075[C] (0) r1077 Sync f_targ [7020.8] r3804 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Setpoint channel - Main setpoint/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging [6730.2] 5 + f _slip 6 fp_3030_51_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 3030 - Function diagrams 2-1099 AOP30 not at SINAMICS SM150. Only active in LOCAL mode (r0807.0 = 1) [2501.2]. Jogging can only be activated in the following operating states (sequencer see [2610]): - For SERVO and VECTOR: In the Ready to start (S2) operating state. - For VECTORGL and VECTORMV: In the Operation (S4) operating strate. <4> Only if control priority is with control panel with speed setpoint input. <5> With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator). <100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module extended setpoint channel is activated (r0108.8 = 1). <101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. Setpoint channel <1> <2> <3> (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3040 - Direction limitation and direction reversal LOCAL REMOTE I O JOG p1111 1 = Inhibit positive direction [2505.3] r1198.6 <2> p1110 1 = Inhibit negative direction [2505.3] r1198.5 p1113 1 = Setpoint inversion [2505.3] r1198.11 n_limit setp p1063[D] [3030.8] <1> <2> <100> <101> n_set_1 -1 1 Setp after lim 0 0 0 0 0 r1114 [3050.1] 1 1 AOP30 not at SINAMICS SM150. Only active in LOCAL mode (r0807.0 = 1) [2501.2] For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module extended setpoint channel is activated (r0108.8 = 1). To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Setpoint channel - Direction limitation and direction reversal 5 6 fp_3040_51_eng.vsd 29.06.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 3040 - Function diagrams <1> Setpoint channel 2-1100 Fig. 2-109 p0115[3] Refer to [1020.7] <100> <101> AOP30 n_skip 2 0.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1092[D] (0.000) <1> n_skip 3 0.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1093[D] (0.000) <1> n_skip 4 0.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1094[D] (0.000) n_limit pos 0.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1083[D] (210 000.000) p0115[3] 1000.00 s <1> <1> Refer to [1020.7] <100> <101> p1085[C] (1083) p1083 n_limit pos eff Min 3050 - Skip frequency bands and speed limitations (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-110 n_skip 1 0.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1091[D] (0.000) r1084 0 -1 -1 -1 -1 y Reference value for the rampfunction generator Maximum speed 0...210 000.000 [RPM] p1082[D] (n_max_Mot) n_min S_q p1106[C] (0) <4>[5030.5] <4>[5210.1] [6640.5] [7020.5] [8010.2] [3020.6] [3060.4] [3070.4] -1 <2> w n_min p1080[D] (0.000) p1051[C] (1083) p1083 w Max n_set n. min_lim w 0 Extended retraction p0888 = 2 r1112 Setpt after limit y r1114 w [3040.8] ESR speed p0893 x -1 0 RFG setpt at input 1 [3060.1] [3070.1] r1119 <5> w p1086 w 0 p1052[C] (1086) 1 Maximum limiting active [3080.4] w w <3> p1086 p1088[C] (1086) 0 Max n_limit neg eff r1087 <4> [5030.5] <4> [5210.1] [6640.5] [7020.5] [8010.2] A suppression speed of "0" de-activates the suppression speed bandwidth. The setting range of p1082 is limited to n_max_mot. 1000.00 s If the drive is not stopped via the input setpoint, but via controlled intervention, the lower hysteresis branch is relevant after a subsequent run-up. Not at S150/G130/G150. <101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "Extended Stop and Retract" is activated (r0108.9 = 1). For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "Extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). For r0108.8 = 0, [3095] applies for the generation of the speed limits. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Setpoint channel - Skip frequency bands and speed limitations 5 6 fp_3050_51_eng.vsd 22.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 3050 - Function diagrams 2-1101 <1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <100> n_limit neg -210 000.000...0.000 [RPM] p1086[D] (-210 000.000) Setpoint channel n_skip bandwidth 0.000...210 000.000 [RPM] p1101[D] (0.000) OFF3 ramp-down time 0.000...600.000 s p1135[D] (0.000) p0115[3] Refer to [1020.7] <100> <101> p1138[C] (1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3060 - Basic ramp-function generator Up ramp scaling 0 = Internal fast stop [2634.4] p1138[C] 0 1 (1) 0 p1122 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator 0 0 1 0 1 [2505.3] r1198.15 Ramp flattening-off [3080.8] Tup p1142 1 = Enable speed setpoint [2501.3] r0898.6 x 0 RFG setpt at input 1 r1119 [3050.8] 1 From the setpoint limiting x Tup Tdn 0 p1082 0 [3080.1] -p1082 0 p1140 1 = Enable ramp-function generator 1 p1141 0 = Freeze ramp-function generator n_set_4 1 t 0 0 y 1 0 <1> Tdn Freeze ramp-function generator [2501.3] r0898.5 <3> [2501.3] r0898.4 y p1082 1 = Internal RFG enable [2634.4] t -p1082 [2634.4] RFG acceleration 0 = Internal fast stop Tup Tdn r1149 <4> Accept RFG set val Other status bits p1143[C] (0) RFG setting value p1144[C] (0) 1 x y + 0 Ramp-up active Ramp-down active <1> <2> <3> <4> For SERVO and VECTOR, the following applies: Inhibited during jogging. p1082 Not at S150/G130/G150. After a 0/1 signal a ramp-up is started again. n_max [3050.5] With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint <2> [3095.7] Threshold for remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator). "Ramp-up/ramp-down active" <100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module 0.00...1000.00 RPM "Extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). p1148[D] (19.80) <101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Setpoint channel - Basic ramp-function generator 5 Ramp-function generator, status bits 6 fp_3060_51_eng.vsd 24.10.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS [3080.5] 8 - 3060 - Function diagrams Ramp-down time 0.000...999 999.000 s p1121[D] (10.000) Down ramp scaling Setpoint channel Fig. 2-111 2-1102 Ramp-up time 0.000...999 999.000 s p1120[D] (10.000) Fig. 2-112 p0115[3] Refer to [1020.7] <101> p1139[C] (1) 0 0 = Internal fast stop Up ramp scaling 3070 - Extended ramp-function generator (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A OFF3 OFF3 OFF3 Ramp-down time Initial rounding-off Initial rounding-off Final rounding-off Final rounding-off 0.000...600.000 [s] 0.000...30.000 [s] 0.000...30.000 [s] 0.000...30.000 [s] 0.000...30.000 [s] p1135[D] (0.000) p1130[D] (0.000) p1136[D] (0.000) p1131[D] (0.000) p1137[D] (0.000) Ramp-up time Ramp-down time 0.000...999 999.000 [s] 0.000...999 999.000 [s] p1120[D] (10.000) p1121[D] (10.000) Down ramp scaling 0 1 1 0 1 [2634.4] p1138[C] 0 (1) p1122 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator 0 0 1 0 1 [2505.3] r1198.15 Ramp flattening-off [3080.8] p1142 1 = Enable speed setpoint [2501.3] r0898.6 Freeze ramp-function generator y 0 RFG setpoint at the input 1 1 r1119 x 0 0 n_set_5 y 0 0 <5> p1141 0 = Freeze ramp generator [2501.3] r0898.5 [2634.4] FR Extended ramp-function generator Tdn 0 0 [2634.4] Tup p1082 1 [3050.8] IR x [3080.1] 1 1 y <3> 1 = Internal RFG enable 1 = Ramp-function p1140 generator enabled 0 = Internal fast stop Set ramp-function generator p1143[C] <4> <7> RFG rounding-off type 0...1 p1134[D] (0) [2501.3] r0898.4 <6> -p1082 dy/dt IR FR IR FR IR FR IR FR HLG acceleration (0) Ramp-function generator setting value t p1144[C] 5 x y + 0 Ramp-up active Ramp-down active Ramp-function generator, status bits Threshold for "Ramp-up/ramp-down active" 0.00...1000.00 [rpm] p1148[D] (19.80) 6 fp_3070_51_eng.vsd 24.10.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS [3080.5] 8 - 3070 - Function diagrams 2-1103 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Setpoint channel - Extended ramp-function generator Other status bits 1 Setpoint channel (0) Not at S150/G130/G150. Tup_eff <2> Tdn_eff <2> Effective ramp-up time: Tup_eff = Tup + (IR/2 + FR/2) Effective ramp-down time: Tdn_eff = Tdn + (IR/2 + FR/2) <3> p1151.00 = 0: Rounding-off at zero crossover enabled. p1151.00 = 1: Rounding-off at zero crossover disabled. p1082 <4> p1134 = 0: Rounding-off is always active. t Overshoots can occur. p1134 = 1: Final rounding-off is not effective [3050.5] n_max t when the setpoint is suddenly <1> [3095.7] n set reduced during ramp-up. t <5> For SERVO and VECTOR, the following applies: Inhibited during jogging. <6> After a 0/1 signal a ramp-up is started again. <7> With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator). <100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). <101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. <1> <2> r1149 from the STW sequence control [2501.7] r0898.8 p0115[1] (Drive Object) n_ctrl n_set 1/2 Jog 2 r0898.9 r1169 n_ctrl n_set 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3080 - Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking Ramp-function generator selection <5> p1155[C] <2> n_ctrl n_set 2 <2> x,y 0 <8> [9816.7] f_set Sync f_corr [Hz] <7> r3812 n_set_4 [3060.8] From the basic ramp-function generator n_set_5 [3070.8] From the extended ramp-function generator 0 1 1 + x 0 + 0 + Friction char. Record x y No OFF2 y & t 0 Interpolator 1 [7020.8] Not SERVO or p1189.0 r0108.8 = 1 (Extend setp) + 0 x,y & RFG n_set at outp r1150 0 T1 No OFF3 (0) Synchronization No OFF1 No OFF2 No OFF3 <3> p1189.1 1 (0) p1160[C] RFG selection p1115 Refer to [1020.7] <101> & 0 RFG track intens 0.0...50.0 p1145[D] (1.3) <4> 0 1 1 0 T1 x y n_ctrl setp sum r1170 [5020.1] <6> [6030.1] <5> [8011.2] + 1 From the ramp-function generator friction characteristic [7010.6] t Interpolator Ramp-function generator tracking Torque limit reached Ramp flattening-off r1199.5 <1> 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Setpoint channel - Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking [3060.1] <4> [3070.3] Ramp-function generator tracking active [2522.7] r1407.7 For p1145 > 0, ramp-function generator tracking is activated when the torque limiting responds. This means that the speed controller output only exceeds the torque limit by a deviation that can be set via p1145. <2> For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is active. The ramp-function generator is set (SERVO: to the actual value, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL: to the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the drive with the ramp-downtime (p1121 or p1135). STW1.4 (enable ramp-function generator) is effective while the drive is stopped via the ramp-function generator. Depending on the p1115, the basic ramp-function generator [3060] or the extended ramp-function generator [3070] is effective. For SERVO is valid: When the function module "extended setpoint channel" is not active (r0108.8 = 0), for OFF1/OFF3 the down ramp of the basic ramp-function generator is effective (refer to n_set_4 on [3060.8]). <3> The interpolator is only active with activated "basic positioner" Function Module or with isochronous PROFIdrive mode and sign of life received by the master (STW2.12 ... STW2.15). <4> Behavior of the response ramp of the torque limiting: p1145 = 0.0: No ramp-function generator tracking. The ramp-function generator ramp is no longer in the range of the speed actual value. p1145 = 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp remains as close as possible to the speed actual value. p1145 > 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp is steeper than for p1145 = 1.0 (higher "speed following error"). <5> The value is displayed correctly only with r0899.2 = 1 (Operation enabled). <6> For SERVO only. <7> For VECTOR, VECTORMV only. <8> For VECTORGL only. <101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. x y Ramp-function generator status word [3060.8] [3070.8] [3060.8] [3070.8] [3080.8] [3050.8] 5 1 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Ramp-function generator status word Ramp-up active Ramp-down active Ramp-function generator active Ramp-function generator set Ramp-function generator held <1> Ramp-function generator tracking active Maximum limiting active Ramp-function generator speedup positiv Ramp-function generator speedup negativ Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 6 fp_3080_51_eng.vsd 04.08.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS RFG ZSW r1199 r1199.0 [6300.1] r1199.2 r1199.3 [6726.4] [6031.1] r1199.5 [6031.1] 8 - 3080 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] Setpoint channel Fig. 2-113 2-1104 Enable ramp-function generator r0898.4 Enable speed setpoint r0898.6 Jog 1 p0115[3] (Drive Object) Function diagrams Encoder evaluation 2.13 Encoder evaluation Function diagrams 4704 - Raw signal sensing 2-1106 4715 - Speed actual value and pole position sensing, motor encoder ASM/SM (encoder 1) 2-1107 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1105 Control Unit p0115[0] Configuration, absolute value encoder 4704 - Raw signal sensing Encoder type selection Enc 0 = No encoder configuration p0400[E] p0404[E] Enc squarewave A/B p0405[E] <1> Encoder pulse number Enc rot clearance ZM p0408[E] p0425[E] <3> <3> <3> Abs enc. Abs enc. Abs enc. Multiturn Meas. Step Singleturn p0421[E] p0422[E] p0423[E] <3> <3> [E] The Encoder Data Set changeover is shown at [8570]. <2> <2> Enc_interface Comp_No. p0141[E] 1 Encoder Comp_No. p0142[E] 2 Incr A DRIVE-CLiQ B To speed sensing (only from encoder 1) 4715.1] Raw position signals SMC30 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A SM characteristics r0458 Raw position signals 1 signal period 232 -1 0 For SSI encoders: Absolute position information F31100...A33905 encoder faults/alarms p0492 p0979[0...25] encoder format acc. to PROFIdrive <1> For rotary encoders = pulse number setting. For resolvers = pole pair number setting. <2> p0142 = p0141 for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ. <3> These parameters are automatically set. 1 2 DO: VECTOR Encoder evaluation - Raw signal sensing 3 4 5 6 fp_4704_56_eng.vsd 24.10.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS G130/G150 8 - 4704 - Function diagrams See [1020.7] Encoder evaluation 2-1106 Fig. 2-114 Encoder Sensor Module Only for synchronous motor n_act measurement A,B Fine resolution for the speed actual value Raw position signals from encoder 1 1 encoder revolution [4710.8] <4> <5> up dn x r0094 -1 1 0 0 -1 1 -1 1 y III <3> n_act T_smooth 0.00...1000.00 [ms] p1441[D] (0.00) Gearbox enc Inv encoder actual value p0432[E] p0410.0[E] <2> dx dt Refer to [1020.7] Transformat_angle 0 Pole position sensing Incl. measuring gearbox p0432[E], p0433[E] <4> <5> C,D p0115[0] Inv encoder actual value p0410.0[E] <5> Enc commut_factor r0451 <2> n_act encoder 1 r0061[0] [6731.1] Smoothing Gearbox mot p0433[E] Dir of rot p1821[D] 0 C Encoder angel [6731.1] [6732.1] -1 1 D Zero mark fn_n p1678[D] 1 = Sensorless operation active D_n p1679[D] [2522.6] r1407.1 To basic braking control [2701.1] To extended braking control [2704.1] <7> To speed controller with/without encoder [6040.1] To Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation [6050.1] To current/power/torque limits [6640.1] n_act unsmoothed To Iq and Id controllers [6714.7] r0063[0] To field-weakening characteristic [6722.1] <7> [6724.1] To motor model select [6733.1] <6> To display signals [6799.1] To speed signals 1[8010.1] To interface to the Motor Module [6730.1] <7> p1656[D].4 p1677[D] Speed actual value filter 5 <11> I_soll_filt fn (1) y D fn p1655[4] <10> |y| x 0 1 0 1 f 2 1 <9> fn_z D_z p1680[D] p1681[D] [6730.1] <7> n_act calculation [6731.1] <5> [6733.8] <6> T_smth display 0.00...200.00 [ms] p0045 (1.00) <1> 1 2 3 4 5 DO: VECTOR Encoder evaluation - Speed act. value and pole pos. sensing, motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1) n_act smoothed with p0045 r0063[1] 6 fp_4715_54_eng.vsd 22.04.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 4715 - Function diagrams <1> = Only for vector control without encoder. <2> [E]: The encoder data set changeover is represented on [8570]. |y| <3> Only for operation with encoder and PEM.. y <4> Only for S120/S150. x <5> Only for S120/S150 and p0300 = 2, 5 <6> Only for FEM. f <7> Only with induction motor (ASM). 2nd Order Filter <8> General 2nd order filter (detailed representation on [1022]). <8> <9> PT2 low pass (detailed representation on [1022]). <10> The frequency is multiplied by this factor. fn_n D_n <11> p1699 = 1 allows to import the filter parameter settings on the controller. p1678[D] p1679[D] Encoder evaluation 2-1107 4715 - Speed actual value and pole position sensing, motor encoder ASM/SM (encoder 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-115 Induction motor and synchronous motor Function diagrams Vector control 2.14 Vector control Function diagrams 6030 - Speed setpoint, droop 2-1109 6031 - Pre-control balancing, reference/acceleration model 2-1110 6040 - Speed controller with/without encoder 2-1111 6050 - Speed controller adaptation (Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation) 2-1112 6060 - Torque setpoint 2-1113 6220 - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 2-1114 6300 - V/f characteristic and voltage boost 2-1115 6310 - Resonance damping and slip compensation 2-1116 6320 - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) 2-1117 6490 - Speed control configuration 2-1118 6491 - Flux control configuration 2-1119 6630 - Upper/lower torque limit 2-1120 6640 - Current/power/torque limits 2-1121 6710 - Current setpoint filter 2-1122 6714 - Iq and Id controller 2-1123 6721 - Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2) 2-1124 6722 - Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2-1125 6723 - Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2-1126 6724 - Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2) 2-1127 6730 - Interface to the Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2-1128 6731 - Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2) 2-1129 6799 - Display signals 2-1130 2-1108 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 6030 - Speed setpoint, droop (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-116 n-ctrl I_output [6040.8] r1482 Droop input source 0...3 p1488 (0) M_set before M_suppl [6060.6] r1508 Droop <3> Droop scaling 0.000...0.500 p1489[D] (0.050) 3 p0115[1] (Motor Modules) Droop n_reduction Refer to [1020.7] r1490 <1> 2 M_set total [6060.8] r0079 <5> Statik M_komp Skal -2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%] 0 p1487[D] (100.0) Statik M_komp p1486[C] (0) 1 150 ms + - 0 nN MN <2> 0 p1492 Enable droop 0 1 [2520.3] r1406.11 Droop enabled r1407.10 n_set_filter 1 T 0.00...5000.00 [ms] p1416[D] (0.00) [2522.3] - <4> n_ctr setp sum [3080.8] r1170 n_limit pos eff n_set after filter [6031.1] r0062 + n_set before filt. r0060 [2701.1] [2704.1] [6799.1] n_set limited r1407.11 [2522.3] [3050.8] r1084 n_limit neg eff [3050.8] r1087 <1> 0 Mot moment of inertia ratio Mot M_inertia 1.000...10000.000 0.00000...100000.00000 [kgm] p0342[M] (1.000) p0341[M] (0.00000) [6490.7] 1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active from speed control configuration p1400.15 a at M_ctrl scal 0.0...400.0 [%] p1499[D] (100.0) 1 0 0 M_set total r0079 M_ctrl active n_set limited r1407.2 r1407.11 [6060.3] [2522.3] [6732.1] 2-1109 <1> = Only for vector control without encoder. <3> Scaling: p1489 = 0.100 - for a rated motor torque of r0333 - results in a speed setpoint reduction of 0.1 x p0311. <4> The value is displayed correctly only with r0899.2 = 1 (Operation enabled). <5> p1488 = 1 Not recommended with active acceleration calculation [6031]. <2> Only for p1488 > 0. 1 2 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Speed setpoint, droop 3 4 5 6 fp_6030_54_eng.vsd 24.10.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6030 - Vector control Mom of inert scal p1497[C] (100) [6730.1] [6732.1] [6733.1] n_prectrl motormod r1431 Function diagrams 1 [6060.8] Pre-control speed a_before scaling 0.0...10 000.0 [%] p1496[D] (0.0) Mot M_inertia Mot moment of inertia ratio 0.00000...100000.00000 [kgm] 1.000...10000.000 p0341[M] (0.00000) p0342[M] (1.000) [6490.7] Acceleration pre-control, source p1400[D].2 Mom of inert total a_prectrl dn/1s (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 6031 - Pre-control balancing, reference/acceleration model p1497[C] (100) r1493 p1495 0 (0) p0115[1] (Motor Modules) ZSW cl-loop ctrl [2526.6] r0056 r0056.14 r0056.15 Mom of inert scal Acceleration calculation Refer to [1020.7] 1 Calculated accelerating torque [6060.1] 0 0 [6490.7] Reference model Speed setpoint I component p1400[D].3 1 Acceleration Model n_pre t_dead bal n n_pre T bal p1400[D].20 = 0 0.0...3.0 0.00...10.00 [ms] or p1428[D] (0.0) p1429[D] (0.00) r0056.14 or r0056.15 = 1 0 <1> 0 Acceleration Model p1400[D].2 = 1 or (p1400[D].3 = 0 and p1496[D] > 0) <2> 1 1 Pre-control balancing n_ctrl n_set r1438 0 n_set after filter [6040.1] 0 [6030.8] r0062 n_ctrl RefMod t_dead 0.0...3.0 p1435[D] (0.0) n_ctrl RefMod fn n_ctrl RefMod D 0.00...8000.00 [Hz] 0.00...5.00 Sampling time, closed-loop speed control (p0115[1]) p1433[D] (0.00) p1434[D] (1.00) [6490.7] Reference model, speed setpoint I component p1400[D].3 n_set I_comp r1439 n_set smooth 0 n_ctrRefMod I_comp x Reference model y RefMod n_set p1437 r1436 [6040.1] (r1436) 1 (y = x for the factory setting of p1433 ... p1435) n_limit pos eff RFG setpt at input r1119 r1084 Steady-state setpoint calculation PcCtrl active r0807.0 n_limit neg eff n_ctrl n_set 1 r1087 n_set via PC + p1155[C] p1160[C] r1084 n_ctrl n_set stat r1444 0 + n_ctrl n_set 2 n_limit pos eff 1 + n_limit neg eff r1087 <1> p1428 only effective for p1400[D].2 = 1 or p1428 > 2,0 <2> p1429 only effective for p1400[D].2 = 1. For p1400[D].2 = 0 the following applies: p1442[D] or p1452[D] for sensorless operation is effective [6040.2]. 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Vector control - Pre-control balancing, reference/acceleration model 5 6 fp_6031_51_eng.vsd 05.08.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 6031 - Function diagrams RFG tracking [3080.8] r1199.5 Vector control 2-1110 Fig. 2-117 RFG set [3080.8] r1199.3 n_ctrl Tn n lower 0.00...100000.00 [ms] <2> p1462 [D] (20.00) <1> p1470 [D] (0.300) p0115[1] (Motor Modules) Refer to [1020.7] <1> p1472 [D] (20.00) Kp_n_basic Tn_n_adapt 6040 - Speed controller with/without encoder (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-118 n_ctrl Kp n lower <3> 0.000...999999.000 p1460 [D] (0.300) From Kp/Tn adaptation [6050.7] Tn_n_basic Kp_n_adapt 1 [6490.7] 1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active p1400.5 [6490.7] 1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active p1400.0 To Kp/Tn adaptation [6050.2] 0 1 0 n_ctrl Tn effective r1469 <1> Dynamic reduction, field weakening n_ctrl Kp effective r1468 n_ctrl system deviation r0064 Kp n_ctrl n_set n_ctrl P-M_output Tn Kp r1481 Kp [6031.8] r1438 n_act T_smooth 0.00...32000.00 [ms] p1442 [D] (4.00) + M_set from the speed controller + - + M_max upper effective [6640.8] r1538 <1> p1452 [D] (10.00) Speed controller M_max lower effective n_ctrl n_act n_act smooth r1445 [4715.6] p1440[C] r0063[0] [6640.8] r1539 Kp n_ctrl I_sys dev Tn r1454 - n_ctrl I-M_output r1482 n_act n_ctrl Input + [2610.4] r1443 [8012.6] Set Hold Set Val Enable speed controller Speed control active r1407.3 [2522.2] from sequence control S4: Operation p1476 1 = Speed controller, hold I component [2520.3] r1406.4 [6031.8] 1 = Speed controller, I component held 1 = Speed controller, set I component r1406.5 n_ctrl I_value scal [2520.3] n_set I_comp [6030.1] r1407.5 p1477 r1439 n_ctrl integ_set val [2522.3] Integrator control p1479[C] r1407.6 4 5 [2522.3] 6 fp_6040_51_eng.vsd 31.03.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 6040 - Vector control 2-1111 p1478[C] n_ctrl M_sv MHB (0) <4> p1475[C] <1> = Only for vector control without encoder. (0) 1 = Torque limit reached <2> For p1462/p1472 = 0.0 s or 100.0 s, the I component is [2522.7] r1407.7 disabled (integral action time = ). <1> [6490.7] 1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component <3> Units Kp can be changed over via p0528. p1400.1 <4> Only for VECTOR. 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Vector control - Speed controller with/without encoder 1 = Speed controller, I component set Function diagrams (1) p0115[1] (Motor Modules) Free Kp_n adaptation Free Tn adaptation active (p1400.6) [6490.7] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 6050 - Speed controller adaptation (Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation) y n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp 1 0 x p1455[C] 1 (0) x Adapt_factor lower <1> <1> 0.0...200 000.0 % n_ctrl adapt Kp lower n_ctrl adapt Kp upper p1458[D] (100.0) 0.00...400.00 % 0.00...400.00 % p1456[D] (0.00) p1456[D] (0.00) n_ctrl Kp scal p1466[C] (1) Speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation n_act unsmoothed [6040.8] Kp_n_basic (p1460, p1470) Kp n r0063[0] Kp_n_adapt Kp To the speed controller [6040.4] n n_ctrl Kp n upper p1461[D] (100.000) 0.000...200 000.000 % n_ctrl n upper 0.00...210 000.00 RPM p1465[D] (0.00) <1> n_ctrl Tn n upper 0.000...200 000.000 % p1463[D] (100.000) n_ctrl n lower 0.00...210 000.00 RPM p1464[D] (0.00) <1> Tn n [6040.8] Tn_n_adapt Tn To the speed controller [6040.4] Tn_n_basic (p1462, p1472) n <1> If the lower transition point exceeds the upper transition point, the Kp-adaptation also changes over. 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Vector control - Speed controller adaptation (Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation) 5 6 fp_6050_51_eng.vsd 14.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 6050 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] Vector control Fig. 2-119 2-1112 Adapt_factor upper 0.0...200 000.0 % p1459[D] (100.0) M_suppl 1 (0) + + M_suppl 1 scal M_supply 2 scal -2000.0 %...2000.0 % p1514[D] (100.0 %) p1512[C] (0) 6060 - Torque setpoint (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-120 0 p1511[C] [6490.7] p0856 [2501.7] M_suppl 2 r0056.14 (0) 1 0 0 Calculated accelerating torque 0 M_max upper effective 0 0...100.00 [ms] <2> p1517[D] (4.00) <1> [2526.6] Refer to [1020.7] 1 1 = Speed controller enable <5> p0115[1] (Motor Modules) 1 p1400.14 1 = Torque pre-control Vdc_max controller active p1513[C] [6031.8] r0898.12 0 <1> M_accel unsmooth M_accel smooth r1518[0] r1518[1] M_suppl total r1515 + M_suppl+M_accel + 1 <1> r1516 [6640.8] r1538 M_max upper scal p1540[C] 0 (1) M_max output n_ctrl upper limit r1547[0] Min M_max up. w/o offs Example: 0 = Fast stop active (OFF3) [6630.8] r1526 M_max up w/o offs M_max lower eff p1552[C] (1) 1 r1539 r1407.8 p1551[C] r1407.2 1 Torque limiting, upper active M_lim var/fixed S_src [2522.3] (1) [6030.5] M_set from speet controller M_soll M_max u Skal oOffs p1503[C] 1 (0) p1554[C] r1407.8 [2522.3] r1508 [6030.1] [6722.1] [6726.7] r1480 0 Torque limiting upper active M_set before M_suppl Min n_ctrl PI-M_output [6040.8] r1407.15 r0899.5 Torque control active 0 = Speed control p1501 1 = Torque control [2520.3] r1406.12 p1300 = MCtr Torque limiting without Pre-control 1 + <3> M_set total r0079 + M_setp sv SLVC [6030.1] [6710.1] [8012.1] Torque limiting lower active Torque limiting r1617 (1) r1538 Torque limiting lower active Max [6726.8] <5> r1407.9 M_max low w/o offs r1407.9 [2522.3] [2522.3] Current/torque limit active [6630.8] r1527 M_max nctr lowScal 1 Max M_max output n_ctrl lower limit r0056.13 r1547[1] (1) [2526.2] Torque limit reached 0 2-1113 <1> The signal is only effective after magnetization has been completed (r0056.4 = 1). <2> Acceleration control is inhibited for p1517 = 100 ms. 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Vector control - Torque setpoint r1407.7 [2522.3] <3> M_set is also influenced by the speed limit controller. <4> Only for DO: VECTOR and sensorless FEM with speed controller inhibited r1776[4] = 0. 4 5 6 fp_6060_51_eng.vsd 31.03.10 V04.05.00 <5> Not for DO. VECTORGL. 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 6060 - Vector control 1 M_set [6640.8] r1539 Function diagrams p1541[C] Vdc_ctrl Kp p1250[D] Refer to [1020.7] Vdc_ctrl t_rate p1252[D] Vdc_ctrl config p1240[D] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 6220 - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller Vdc_act [6730.1] r0070 [6731.1] ZSW cl-loop ctrl 0 r0056 <1> <2> + 1,3 1 0,2,4,5,6 0 Vdc_max controller active r0056.14 0 Calculate on_level [2526.2] <4> Vdc_ctrl output Vdc_max dyn_factor p1243[D] Vdc_max on_level r1242 r1258 Vdc_max SenseOnLev p1254 Iq_max 0 0 Supply voltage p0210 Operating point selection Iq_min 1 Vdc_min (ctrl) Vdc_min on_level p1245[D] [6710.2] Vdc_I_act ctrl set Vdc_min on_level r1246 r3517 Vdc_ctrl Tn p1251[D] Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate p1250[D] p1252[D] Calculate on_level <3> Vdc-ctrl active r3405.1 [7960.8] 0 Vdc_act [6730.1] r0070 [6731.1] [6710.2] <1> <2> 2,3 1 0,1,4,5,6 0 + Vdc_min controller active r0056.15 0 [2526.2] <4> <1> p1240[0] 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl Vdc_min dyn_factor 1: Vdc_max controller enable p1247[D] 2: Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable 3: Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable 4: Vdc_Activates Vdc_max monitoring 5: Vdc_Activates Vdc_min monitoring 6: Vdc_Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring <2> The Vdc controller is switched on when reaching the threshold value. The switch-off hysteresis is 5% of the switch-on level. <3> Only for VECTOR and if the technology controller function module is active (r0108.16 = 1). <4> As standard, the controller is designed as a P controller. 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR, VECTORMV Vector control - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 4 5 6 fp_6220_51_eng.vsd 14.02.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 6220 - Function diagrams Vdc_max (ctrl) Vector control 2-1114 Fig. 2-121 p0115[0] (Motor Modules) Vdc_ctrl Tn p1251[D] Linear Refer to [1020.7] Dependent on the load current Control type p1300 U/f Eco fac act v 6300 - V/f characteristic and voltage boost (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-122 p0115[1] (Motor Modules) V_output max r0071 Mot V_rated p0304 Flux current control (FCC) Mot f_rated p0310 ECO-Mode r1348 V_output max r0071 0/5 Mot V_rated p0304 1/6 2 3 [1690.4] 4 U/f V_set independ. U/f FCC f_Start p1333 p1330[C] Mot f_rated p0310 (0) Parabolic 7 19 V_output max r0071 Mot V_rated p0304 f_set [1690.1] Freely programmable Mot f_rated p0310 V_output max r0071 U/f charact. V4 p1327 I_outp max r0067 V_boost perm p1310[D] Acceleration voltage active Ramp-up active + r0056.6 Mot I_rated p0305 r1199.0 V_boost accel p1311[D] U/f charact. V1 p1321 0 0 1 0 0 + <2> R_stator act r0395 3 <1> U/f charact. f1 U/f charact. f3 p1320 p1324 + Voltage boost when starting 1 U/f charact. f2 U/f charact. f4 p1322 p1326 2-1115 <1> For p1320 = 0, the voltage boost via p1310 is not effective. <2> p1312 is only effective when acceleration takes place for the first time after pulse enable. 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR Vector control - U/f characteristic and voltage boost 4 5 6 fp_6300_54_eng.vsd 13.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6300 - Vector control r0056.5 Function diagrams V_boost starting p1312[D] U/f charact. V2 p1323 + [3080.8] 0 U/f charact. V3 p1325 V_boost total r1315 Refer to [1020.7] Mot slip_rated r0330[D] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 6310 - Resonance damping and slip compensation Slip comp lim val p1336 Uf Res_damp gain p1338 Uf_res damp [1690.7] Uf Res_ damp T p1339 Brake f_start -300.00...300.00 [%] p1351[D] (0.00) + <2> p1351[D] -1 Iq_act r0078 [6714.4] f_slip r0065 Slip comp scal 100 % p1335 100 % Slip comp val [6730.2] 250 ms [1690.6] Slip comp act val 1 -1 r1337 0 6% 10 % 95 % x p1349 f/f Mot N p1349 f_outp ZSW cl-loop ctrl Slip limit active 1 <1> 1 r0066 0 r0056 r0056.10 [2526.2] [6730.4] [6731.4] 1 p1334 p1334 + 4 % f/f Mot N <1> If p1349 = 0: the limit is 0,95 x f Mot N <= 45 Hz. <2> Preset value for r1337: Activation with r0056.4 = 1 till r0066 >= p1334 and p1216 has expired. 100 % equal r0330 (Rated motor slip) 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Resonance damping and slip compensation 4 5 6 fp_6310_54_eng.vsd 17.03.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6310 - Function diagrams U/f slip compensation Vector control 2-1116 Fig. 2-123 p0115[1] (Motor Modules) U/f resonance damping 6320 - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-124 p0115[y] (Motor Modules) Vdc_ctrl Tn p1291[D] Vdc_max (U/f) Vdc_ctrl Kp p1290[D] ZSW Control Vdc_ctrl config. p1280[D] Vdc_act [6730.1] r0070 [6731.1] Vdc_ctrl output_limit p1293[D] <1> <2> + Refer to [1020.7] Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action p1292[D] r0056 0 1,3 1 Vdc_max controller active 0,2,4,5,6 0 [2526.2] [6031.6] r0056.14 0 0 Calculate on_level <3> Vdc_max dyn_factor p1283[D] Vdc_max on_level r1282 Vdc_max SenseOnLev p1294 Vdc_ctrl output 0 r1298 Supply voltage p0210 Vdc_min (U/f) Vdc_min on_level p1285[D] Vdc_ctrl Tn p1291[D] Vdc_min on_level r1286 Vdc_ctrl Kp p1290[D] Calculate on_level Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action p1292[D] 0 0 Vdc_act [6730.1] r0070 [6731.1] <2> <1> 2,3 + 1 Vdc_min controller active 0 [2526.2] [6031.6] r0056.15 0 0,1,4,5,6 - Vdc_ctrl output_limit p1293[D] 5 6 fp_6320_54_eng.vsd 03.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6320 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f) Vector control 2-1117 <3> <1> p1280[0] 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl Vdc_min dyn_factor 1: Enables Vdc_max controller p1287[D] 2: Enables Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) 3: Enables Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller 4: Activates Vdc_max monitoring 5: Activates Vdc_min monitoring 6: Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring <2> The Vdc controller is switched on when reaching the threshold value. The switch-off hysteresis is 5% of the switch-on level. <3> As standard, the controller is designed as a P controller. p0115[1] (Motor Modules) Speed control configuration Refer to [1020.7] Meaning 6490 - Speed control configuration (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 0 1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active 1 [6040.3] 1 1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component 0 [6040.3] 2 1 = Acceleration pre-control, external source (p1495) 0 = Acceleration pre-control, internal source (n_set) 0 [6031.2] 3 1 = Reference model, speed setpoint I component ON 0 [6031.1][6031.7] 4 Reserved 5 1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active 1 [6040.3] 6 1 = Free Tn adaptation active 0 [6050.6] 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 1 = Torque pre-control always active 0 = Torque pre-control for n_ctrl enabled 0 [6060.4] 15 1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active 1 [6030.5] 6 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Vector control - Speed control configuration 4 5 fp_6490_51_eng.vsd 29.06.09 V04.05.00 8 - 6490 - Function diagrams Bit No. Factory setting Vector control 2-1118 Fig. 2-125 n_ctrl config p1400[D] 6491 - Flux control configuration (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-126 p1401[D] p0115[2] (Motor Modules) Flux control, configuration Factory setting Refer to [1020.7] F_ctrl config Bit No. Meaning p1401[D] 0 1 = Flux setpoint, soft starting active 0 [6722.3] 1 1 = Flux setpoint, differentiation active 1 [6723.7] 2 1 = Flux build-up control active 1 [6723.6] 3 1 = Flux characteristic, load-dependent 1 [6725.2] 4 1 = Flux controller (ASM with encoder) 1 5 1 = Flux impression with model chngov (ASM with encoder) 0 = Flux impression from 30 % n_rated (ASM with encoder) 1 6 1 = Quick magnetizing 1 7 Reserved 3 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 4 5 6 fp_6491_54_eng.vsd 24.10.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6491 - Function diagrams 3 Vector control 2-1119 1 2 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Flux control configuration [6722.5] A <1> M_max upper 6630 - Upper/lower torque limit M_max upper -1 000 000.00...20 000 000.00 [Nm] p1520[D] (0.00) M 2 1 n p1520[D] 0 p1522[C] (1520) M_max up w/o offs [Nm] r1526 [6640.1] 1 M_max upper scal M_max up/mot scal -2 000.0...2 000.0 [%] p1524[D] (100.0) p1524[D] Example: 0 = Fast stop active (OFF3) r0899.5 p1528[C] (1524) M_lim var/fixS_src p1551[C] (1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Lower torque limit M_max lower M_max lower -20 000 000.00...1 000 000.00 [Nm] p1521[D] (0.00) M n 3 <1> 4 ! p1521[D] 1 M_max low w/o offs [Nm] r1527 M_max lower scal M_max lower scal -2 000.0...2 000.0 [%] p1525[D] (100.0) Danger: Negative values at p1523[C] (1521) p1525[D] A or positive values at B [6640.1] 0 p1529[C] (1525) B <1> represent a minimum torque for the other torque direction and can cause the motor to accelerate uncontrollably. 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Vector control - Upper/lower torque limit 4 5 6 fp_6630_51_eng.vsd 19.08.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 6630 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] Vector control 2-1120 Fig. 2-127 p0115[2] (Motor Modules) Upper torque limit 6640 - Current/power/torque limits (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-128 Mot L_leakage total r0377[M] Current limiting Refer to [1020.7] U_Ausgang max r0071 [6722.1] [6723.4] [6724.4] <4> [6725.4] Kp from speed controller [6040.5] Iq stall calculation Id_set total r1624 Iq_max total r1533 y I_max reduction x2 I_max Motor Module [6730.4] [6731.4] Current limit <4> [6732.4] p0640[D] Current limit var p0641[C] Pulsverf. I_Grenze p1604[D] Min Min [3050.8] r1084 + n_limit act r1407.17 [3050.8] r1087 y2 + - n_limit neg eff x -1 [2522.3] Speed limiting controller <2> Sign + or - I_outp max r0067 1 (1) Tn from speed controller [6040.6] n_limit pos eff [6723.8] Id_set total <4> [6727.8] [8016.8] p0115[2] (Motor Modules) Speed limiting Pre-control [6722.1][6724.1] [6726.6][6727.6] 0 Max Min p1401.7 <5> [6721.3] n_act unsmoothed r0063[0] Lower limit [4715.6] M_max up. w/o Offs r1548[1] Upper limit r1548[0] + r1526 Min [6721.8] M [6730.1] Iq <4> [6732.1] [6630.8] M_max low w/o Offs M_max upper effective r1538 + + r1527 P_max_scale <3> p1556[D] (0.00) [6630.8] Max Power limiting Isq_max unlimited r1536[1] P_max p1555[C] (1) P_max gen -100 000.00...-0.01 kW p1531 (-0.01) r1539 Isq_max limited r1536[0] <1> [6060.1] [6040.4] [8012.1] M_max lower effective + [6060.1] [6040.4] [8012.1] Iq Min -1 Max [6710.1] Isq_max unlimited r1537[1] Isq_min limited r1537[0] n Max [6710.1] 3 4 5 6 fp_6640_54_eng.vsd 11.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6640 - Function diagrams 1 2 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Current/power/torque limits <1> Vector control 2-1121 Min P_max mot 0.00...100 000.00 kW p1530[D] (0.00) <1> Intervention by the Vdc controller. <2> Intervention when the speed limit is exceeded + 2 % nrated. <3> p1556 = 0 switches the evaluation of the connector input p1555 off. <4> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150. <5> Ony for PEM. Vdc_max controller active Frequency negative p0115[0] (Motor Modules) Iq_max Refer to [1020.7] Isq_max r1536 <4> 1 1 [6640.8] 0 6710 - Current setpoint filter Vdc_min controller active 0 [2526.6] r0056.15 Iq_min [6220.8] Isq_min r1537 [6640.8] 0 1 1 p1656.0[D] 0 p1656.1[D] 0 0 Isq_s T_smooth p1654[D] 1 Iq_set before filter r1650 M_set total r0079 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A + [6060.8] + Interpolator and smoothing for voltage limits fn_n p1663[D] D_n p1659[D] D_n p1664[D] r0077 [6714.1] [6721.1] [6725.1] [6727.1] p1657[D] M_suppl 3 p1569[C] (3841) 1 fn_n p1658[D] Iq_set p1662[D] |y| Isq_s T_smooth_min p1653[D] y D x [7010.7] fn f |y| 1 y D x 2 fn f <2> M [6721.8] Iq [6730.1] <5> [6732.1] I_set_filt fn I_set_filt fn p1655[0] 1 2 <2> p1655[1] (1) (1) fn_z D_z p1660[D] p1661[D] <3> <3> fn_z D_z p1665[D] p1666[D] |y| |y| y x y x f <1> 2nd Order filter f <1> 2nd Order filter <1> <2> <3> <4> <5> General 2nd-order filter (detailed representation at [1022]). PT2 low pass (detailed representation at [1022]). The frequency is multiplied by this factor. With p1699 = 1, the parameter settings are transferred to the controller. Only for SINAMICS S120/S150. 1 2 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Current setpoint filter 3 fn_n D_n p1658[D] p1659[D] fn_n D_n p1663[D] p1664[D] Filter 1 4 Filter 2 5 6 fp_6710_54_eng.vsd 02.08.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6710 - Function diagrams [6220.8] [2526.6] r0056.7 Vector control 2-1122 Fig. 2-129 [2526.6] r0056.14 6714 - Iq and Id controller (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-130 <1> Mot L_leakage total Quad_de-couple scal p1726[D] r0377[M] <1> Quad_de-couple UmaxScal p1727[D] <2> <3> U_quad_de-couple r1729 p0115[0] (Motor Modules) Refer to [1020.7] Flux setpoint total <1> [6723.1] r1598 <2> [6724.1] <3> [6726.8] Flux setpoint pre-ctrl U_set 1 Pre-control, de-coupling and limiting U_dir axis_de-couple r1728 U_max 1 [6723.4] <1> [6724.4] <2> [6725.4] <3> Isd_ctrl I_limit r1725 Isd_ctrl_pre-ctrl scal EMF scal Isq_ctrl Flux track thresh p1702[D] p1704[D] p1705[D] <2> <3> <3> <3> Isq_ctrl_pre-ctrl scal p1703 Id current controller Id_set r0075 from r1624 <1> [6723.5] <2> [6721.8] <3> [6727.8] p0393[M] Voltage limit active + Isd_ctrl I_comp r1724 + + + Kp_I Kp_I adaption [2526.2] U_dir axis_set r1408.1 + 1 r0056.9 Id control, I component limiting [6725.1] <3> Symmetrizing [6723.1] <1> [6724.1] <2> [6725.1] <3> Isd_ctrl output Tn_I r1732 Voltage limiting [6731.5] r1408.3 + + + U_set [6730.1] <1> [6731.1] <2> [6732.1] <3> U_angle [6730.1] <1> [6731.1] <2> [6732.1] <3> K r1723 Kp_I 0 r0066 Iq p1717 + Symmetrizing + <1> [6730.1] Transformat_angle <2> [6731.5] r0094 <3> [6732.1] + Isq_reg Ausg Tn_I + + + + + + U_quad_set r1732 r1718 Iq current controller [6731.5] [6799.1] I_act abs. value [7017.6] Ia x2 3 y2 [8014.1] [8017.1] [8018.1] Iq_act [6310.1] [6727.1] <3> [6731.5] <2> [6799.5] VD 2 Ib r0078 Id_act 2-1123 <1> For induction motors. <2> For synchronous motors. <3> Only for SINAMIC S120/S150 and separately-excited synchronous motors. 1 2 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Iq and Id controllers 3 r0076 4 5 6 fp_6714_54_eng.vsd 10.03.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 [6731.5] <2> [6799.5] 8 - 6714 - Function diagrams r0068[0] Vector control <1> [6730.5] Phase W <2> [6731.5] <3> [6732.5] p1726 Transv_decpl scal + Kp_I p Isq_ctrl I_comp r1719 p0392[M] p0391[M] [6710.8] r0077 <1> [6730.5] Phase V <2> [6731.5] <3> [6732.5] Entkopplung p1726 <2> <3> f_output Kp_I p1402.2 Current controller I_ctrl Kp adaption p1715[D] active Iq_set <1> [6730.5] Phase U <2> [6731.5] <3> [6732.5] Coordinate converter p1717 From Id_field weakening r0063[0] 1 p1755 [6640.1] 2.0 * p1755 Mot load angle opt p0327[M] Refer to [1020.7] Id_setp total r1624 To current controller [6714] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 6721 - Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2) Id_inject 1 0 Iq_set [6710.8] r0077 p0115[2] (Motor Modules) 0 MIN 1 I_set T_smooth p1616 r1751.0 [6731] from the model control Optimal Current Id_set P1750.5 <1> Iabs 2 Iq 2 Mot kt p0316[M] (r1407.2) 0 = M-ctrl 1 = n-ctrl Mot kt_reluctance p0328[M] Mot L_leakage total r0377[M] Mot t_excitation p0346 kt M Iq [6640.5] [6710.1] [6714.6] kt rel Lq M_set steady-state p1610[D] 0.9 x r0067 Ld 1 M_suppl_accel p1611[D] r1538 Mot L_stator_d r0378[M] 0 Id r0067 M Iabs MAX [6731.3] Iq M r1797 MotMod kT corr from model control M adaptation [6060.6] [6060.4] [6731.2] Iabspre r1515 M_suppl total r1518 M_acceleration Torque setting value, speed controller MotMod w/o enc p1757[D] r1539 [6040] Open-loop controlled operation & select n-ctrl r1762 Mot mod dev comp 1 n-Ctrl = 1 PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor <1> G130/G150 only at PEM without encoder. 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2) 4 5 6 fp_6721_54_eng.vsd 11.06.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6721 - Function diagrams n_act unsmoothed Vector control 2-1124 Fig. 2-131 [6724] 6722 - Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-132 U_output max r0071 Flux setpoint T_smth Fs p1584[D] Field weakening scal 80.0 ...120.0 [%] [6640.1] p1586[D] (100.0) p0115[2] (Motor Modules) Mot t_excitation p0346[D] Refer to [1020.7] Flux thresh magnet p1573[D] [6723.3] Magnetization 1 = Flux setpoint soft starting active p1401.0 p1570[D] Field weakening Flux setpoint p1570[D] y r0056.8 [2526.2] [2526.2] Quick magnetizing active [6723.8] 1 = Quick magnetizing p1401.6 n_act unsmoothed [4715.7] r0063[0] r1405.4 r0056.4 1 = Flux build-up control active p1401.2 Magnetization control f Field-weakening characteristic [6730.3] MotMod status (r1751) Mot T_rotor r0384 0 MIN Efficiency opt 0...100 % p1580[D](0) r1583 < 0.3 s [6723.1] 1 Flux setpoint T_smooth p1582[D] 0,9 I_outp max Id current limit [6640.3] r0067 <1> Flux setpoint, smoothed [6723.1] M_set steady-state p1610[D] M_suppl_accel p1611[D] + M_set before M_suppl [6060.5] r1508 I_set T_smooth p1616 + Mot I_mag_rated act r0331[M] Id_set calculation Flux setpoint calculation 5 6 fp_6722_54_eng.vsd 24.10.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6722 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) Vector control 2-1125 ASM: Induction motor <1> Only for vector control without encoder (SLVC). p0115[2] (Motor Modules) Calculation, max. modulation depth U_max 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 6723 - Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) Modulat_depth max r0073 [6714.8] U_output max r0071 U_reserve dyn 0...150 [Vrms] p1574[D] (10) Field_ctrl Tn 10...10 000 [ms] p1596[D] (50) Field_ctrl output r1597 0 [6640.1] [6722.1] Vdc_act r0070 + [6730.1] + -200 % [6491] Flux build-in ctrl p1401.2 2 [6714.8] U_set 1 [6491] Flux differentiation p1401.1 0 0 [6722.8] Quick magnetizing active 1 Flux setpoint total r1598 I_set_steady-state r1623 [6714.1] Flux setpoint, smoothed [6722.8] r1583 + Id_set total r1624 + + 0 + [6714.1] 1 Saturation characteristic p0362 ... p0369 [6722.8] -1 Id current limit ASM: Induction motor 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) 5 6 fp_6723_54_eng.vsd 24.10.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6723 - Function diagrams Refer to [1020.7] Vector control 2-1126 Fig. 2-133 Drv filter type Pulse frequency Modulator mode Modulation depth max p0230 p1800 p1802 p1803 Pulse frequency p1800 Modulator modes Modulation depth max p1802 p1803 p0115[2] (Motor Modules) Refer to [1020.7] Calculation, max. modulation depth U_max 1 6724 - Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-134 Filter p0230 Modulat_depth max r0073 [6714.8] U_output max r0071 U_reserve dyn 0...150 [Vrms] p1574[D] (10) Field_ctrl Tn 10...10 000 [ms] Mot I_mag_rated act p1596[D] (50) r0331 [6640.1] [6722.1] Field_ctrl output r1593 0 Vdc_act [6731.1] r0070 + Mot U_rated 0...20 000 [Vrms] p0304(0) 2 [6714.8] + U_set 1 Field weakening scal 80.0 ...120.0 [%] p1586[D] (100.0) Mot I_mag_nenn akt r0331 + Field weakening current Vst r1589 n_act unsmoothed -nF + nF [4715.7] r0063[0] Id_field weaken. ctrl [6721.1] + Ld Nom + 0.9 I_outp max [6640.3] r0067 100 % -1 Min + Flux setpoint total r1598 [6714.1] 1 2 3 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2) 4 5 6 fp_6724_54_eng.vsd 03.03.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6724 - Vector control 2-1127 PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor Function diagrams Flux setpoint T_smooth r1582 Flux setpoint smooth r1583 Refer to [1020.7] U_angle DC link voltage Modulation depth [6799.1] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 6730 - Interface to the Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2 [1690.8] U_set [6714.8] U_angle [6714.8] U f_slip r0065 [2522.6] r1407.1 0 [4715.5] r0061[0] <1> Precontrol speed [6030.8] + 1 Current model + p1761 p1767 Kp Tn + + + DRIVE-CLiQ Sign + oder Frequency negative r1751 r0056.7 Model control I_max Motor Module [6722.7] [1690.1] I_max Motor Module [6640.1] r1771 r1762.0 I_Phase actual value r0069[0...2] r1770 r1762.1 Motor model (observer) r1762, r1763, r1778, r1779 M Iq Transformat_angle Dir of rot p1821[D] r0094 [6714.1] U_Phase actual value r0089[0...2] [4715.7] Cos phi act [6799.5] r0066 [6310.1] [6799.1] + p1750 p1755 p1756 p1758 p1759 p1760 p1764 ~ M W U_output Vibration damping + [4715.7] r0063[0] V r0056.11 [2526.2] n_act unsmoothed + p1740 [6310.5] + [6714.1] PWM Frequency limit active <1> 1 = Encoderless operation active [6640.5] [6710.1] + [6799.5] n_act calculation <1> Pulse enable HW r0074 R_stator act r0395 r0087 <3> P24 + BRP M - BRN Flux actual value r0084 From therm Motor model [8012.6] r1408.11 [8012.7] <1> r1408.12 = Only for vector ctrl. without encoder. Stall monitoring p1744 <2> p1745 Brake control <3> <2> = Only for vector ctrl. with encoder. 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Interface to the Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) 5 6 fp_6730_54_eng.vsd 30.08.11 V04.05.00 Additionally for Booksize 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6730 - Function diagrams r0070 r0072 <1> [4715.5] Motor Module p0115[0] (Motor Modules) Vector control 2-1128 Fig. 2-135 Control Unit Vdc_act [6220.1] [6723.1] [6799.1] [6220.1] [6724.1] [6799.1] Motor Module p0115[0] (Motor Modules) Refer to [1020.7] r0070 U_output DC link voltage r0072 [6799.1] 6731 - Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-136 Control Unit Vdc_act 2 [6714.8] [6714.8] [6799.5] U_set U U_angle PWM p1740 V Frequency limit active ~ M r0056.11 [2522.6] r1407.1 AC-Pulse generator Current model [2526.2] f_outp Vibration damping 0 [4715.5] r0061[0] W r0066 <1> Precontrol speed [6030.8] + p1605[D] p1607[D] 1 p1760[D] p1764[D] p1798[D] + + + n_act calculation p1761[D] p1767[D] p1750 [6310.1] [6799.1] + [4715.7] p1755 Frequency negative p1756 r1771 Kp Tn Motor model configuration r1762.0 r1770 r1762.1 Motor model p0350[M] p0356[M] p0357[M] r0334 AC correlator p1750.5 p0398[M] p0399[M] r1608 Transformat_angle r0094 Cos phi act r0087 DRIVE-CLiQ Sign + or - r0056.7 r1751 [6799.5] + r0074 1 = Encoderless operation active [6714.1] Pulse enable HW Modulation depth R_stator act r0395 I_max Motor Module I_Phase actual value r0069[0...2] From thermal motor model U_Phase actual value r0089[0...2] I_max Motor Module [6640.1] [6714.1] Model actual r1606 I_Resp_act r1608[0...1] Id_act p1795[D] r0076 [6714.8] Iq_act r1763 <2> r0078 [6714.8] Ud_set P24 + BRP M - BRN r1733 [6714.6] Brake control 2-1129 <1> = Only for vector ctrl. without encoder. r1797 MotMod kT corr 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2) PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor 5 <2> 6 fp_6731_54_eng.vsd 10.03.10 V04.05.00 Additionally for Booksize. 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6731 - Vector control r1732 [6714.6] Uq_set Function diagrams kT estimator p0328[M] p0316[M] p1780.3 n_set before filter 100 ms 6799 - Display signals Modulation depth, smooth r0028 300 ms Id_act smooth r0029 300 ms Iq_act smooth r0030 Id_act n_act smooth [4715.6] r0063[0] 100 ms r0021 [6714.8] r0076 T_smth display p0045 Iq_act [6714.8] r0078 <1> [6730.1] <2> [6721.8] <3> [6732.1] n_act Smoothed with p0045 r0063[1] M Iq M_act r0080[0] <1> [6730.5] f_outp <2> [6731.5] r0066 <3> [6732.5] f_outp smooth r0024 100 ms <1> [6730.1] Vdc_act <2> [6731.1] r0070 <3> [6732.1] 100 ms Vdc smooth M_act r0026 r0080[1] n_act unsmoothed (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A I_act abs value smooth I_act abs. value unsmoothed [6714.8] r0068[0] 300 ms [4715.7] r0063[0] P_act unsmoothed r0027 r0082[0] I_act abs. value smoothed with p0045 [7017.6] [8014.1] r0068[1] [8017.1] [8018.1] P_act Smoothed with p0045 r0082[1] M_act unsmoothed [6799.8] r0080[0] 3 100 ms Power drawn [6799.8] r0082[0] U_outp smooth 100 ms 100 ms <1> [6730.1] Cos phi actual value <2> [6731.1] r0087 <3> [6732.1] r0025 M_act smooth r0031 P_active_actual smooth P_act unsmoothed r0082[2] <1> [6730.4] U_output <2> [6731.4] r0072 <3> [6732.4] [6799.5] T_smth display p0045 T_smth display p0045 cos phi actual val <1> [6730.1] r0087 <3> [6732.1] [6799.5] T_smth display p0045 300 ms r0032 cos phi smooth r0038 <1> For induction motors. <2> For synchronous motors. <3> Only for SINAMIC S120/S150 and separately-excited synchronous motors. 1 2 DO: VECTOR Vector control - Display signals 3 4 5 6 fp_6799_54_eng.vsd 10.03.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 6799 - Function diagrams n_act unsmoothed <1> [6730.5] Modulation depth <2> [6731.5] r0074 <3> [6732.5] n_set smooth r0020 100 ms Vector control 2-1130 Fig. 2-137 [6030.1] r0060 Function diagrams Technology functions 2.15 Technology functions Function diagrams 7010 - Friction characteristic 2-1132 7014 - External Armature Short-Circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx) 2-1133 7016 - Internal Armature Short-Circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx) 2-1134 7017 - DC braking (p0300 = 1xx) 2-1135 7020 - Synchronization 2-1136 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1131 Frict rec t_RFG 0.000...999999.000 [s] p3846[D] (10.000) Friction rec t_warm 0.000...3600.000 [s] p3847[D] (0.000) Refer to [1020.7] r3840 Friction characteristic record activated r3840.1 7010 - Friction characteristic Friction characteristic record completed r3840.2 To setpoint channel [3080.7] Drive ON from the sequence control Friction rec act 0...3 p3845 (0) Friction characteristic record aborted r3840.3 Start ramp-function generator A07961 "Friction characteristic record activated" Friction characteristic record active (p3845 > 0) <1> F07963 "Friction characteristic record interrupted" M_max offset Play friction characteristic Friction M0 p3830[D] (0) <2> p1532 Friction M9 p3839[D] (0) + M_max lower eff <2> [5650.8] r1539 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Friction characteristic OK r3840.0 M [Nm] Frict act p3842 (0) A07960 "Friction characteristic incorrect" n_act smoot M_suppl 3 <2> [4710.7] r0063 1 Frict outp r3841 Sign + or - 0 n [RPM] 0 n_act unsmoothed p1569[C] To M_set total (3841) e. g. SERVO [5610.5][5650.7] <2> VECTOR, VECTORMV [6710.1] [4715.7] r0063[0] Friction n0 p3820[D] (15) Friction n9 p3829[D] (3000) M_max upper eff <2> [5650.8] r1538 Friction characteristic positive direction + M_max offset <2> p1532 r3840.8 <1> p3845 = 0: Friction characteristic record deactivated = 1: Friction char record activated for all directions = 2: Friction char record activated for positive direction = 3: Friction char record activated for negative direction <2> Only for SINAMICS S120 and SERVO. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR (n/M), VECTORMV Technology functions - Friction characteristic 4 5 6 fp_7010_51_eng.vsd 18.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 7010 - Function diagrams Friction ZSW Technology functions 2-1132 Fig. 2-138 p0115[3] (Drive Object) Record friction characteristic 2000 s <1> p1231 = 1 7014 - External Armature Short-Circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-139 Control Unit Contactor feedback signal Pulse enable via hardware ASC act 1 DI p1235 Drive converter r0046.4 p1230 Pulse inhibit (r0046.19 = 1) Contactor closed r0002 = 19 (0) 1 DO r1239.0 +24 V r0046.20 Drive status S1, S2, S3 [2610] M 3~ p1236 = 200 ms =1 T p1231 = 1 0 & F07905 "Contactor feedback signal "Open" missing" & A07904 "Contactor feedback signal "Closed" missing" p1237 = 200 ms 1 T Pulse enable via hardware 1 2 3 4 5 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Technology functions - External Armature Short-Circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx) 6 fp_7014_54_eng.vsd 11.05.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 7014 - Function diagrams EASC: External Armature Short-Circuit Technology functions 2-1133 <1> p0300 = 4xx only with S120/S150. 0 p1231 = 2 Motor Module 2000 s (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 7016 - Internal Armature Short-Circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx) F07907 "Motor terminals are not at zero potential after pulse cancellation" Armature short-circuit, enable missing r0046.4 ASC act p1230 (1) Drive converter Control of armature short-circuiting in the power unit Fault response, Internal Armature Short-Circuit DRIVE-CLiQ Armature short-circuit, internal enable missing r0046.20 <1> p0300 = 4xx only with S120/S150. M 3~ IASC: Internal Armature Short-Circuit 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Technology functions - Internal Armature Short-Circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx) 5 6 fp_7016_54_eng.vsd 28.02.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 7016 - Function diagrams p1231 = 4 <1> Technology functions 2-1134 Fig. 2-140 Control Unit Fig. 2-141 7017 - DC braking (p0300 = 1xx) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Mot t_de-excitat DCBRK I_brake 0.000...20.000 [s] 0.00...10000.00 [A] p0347[M] (0.000) p1232[M] (0.00) ASC/DCBRK act Pulse inhibit n_set Current actual values <5> [5730] <6> [6714] I_act abs val r0068[0] 4,14 (0) OFF1/OFF3 n_act p1234 <8> p1230[C] p0115 <1> <2> ASC/DCBRK config 0...14 p1231[M] (0) DCBRK time DCBRK n_start 0.0...3600.0 [s] 20.00...210000.00 [1/min] p1233[M] (0.0) p1234[M] (0.00) 1 5 0 To pulse disable To sequencer t |I_set| p0347 <3> The parameters of the I_max current controller are also used. <7> I_max_U_ctrl Kp 0.000...100000.000 p1345[D] (0.000) p1232 DC braking DC braking ready |I_act| r1239.10 not about BICO t <7> I_max_U_ctrl Tn 0.000...50.000 [s] p1346D] (0.030) U_output p1231 = 14 r0072 n_act n_set Kp Braking response Pulse inhibit DC braking fault response 2 From I t control 4,5,14 OFF [8014] To control [5730] <5> [6730] <6> To U/f-characteristic [6300] <6> MIN + t |I_set| <3> p0347 0 <4> DC braking active p1232 r1239.8 I_ctrl Kp 0.000...100000.000 [V/A] p1715[D] (0.000) <5> |I_act| t p1233 p1231 = 5 n_act |I_set| p1234 Tn BICO = 1 Pulse inhibit I_ctrl Tn 0.00...1000.00 [ms] p1717[D] (2.00) <5> BICO = 0 n_set t |I_set| p1232 p0347 2-1135 <1> The DC braking current is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1). <2> The de-magnetization time is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, 3). <3> As soon as the standstill threshold (p1226) has been reached, the DC current injection will be aborted prematurely. <4> Signal r1239.8 is only set while the DC braking is active. <5> Only for SINAMICS S120 and SERVO. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Technology functions - DC braking (p0300 = 1xx) 4 <6> Only for SINAMICS S120 and VECTOR. <7> Only for VECTOR. <8> DC braking upon falling below the starting speed for DC braking (p1234). 5 6 fp_7017_54_eng.vsd 01.04.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 7017 - Function diagrams t p1231 = 4 Technology functions |I_act| To setpoint channel n_limit neg eff r3804 r1087 fset 7020 - Synchronization Sync f_diff Synchronizing voltage sensing set (measurement via VSM10 with PLL) |U|set Sync f_diff thresh 0.00...1.00 [Hz] p3806[D] (0.10) n_limit pos eff 1 -1 r1084 r3805 A07941 f_target < f_min 0 1 + 0 0 A07941 f_target > f_max 1 Start closed-loop phase control Sync phase setp -180.00...179.90 [] p3809[D] (0.00) f Actual voltage sensing + + KP TN (closed-loop control gating unit) Sync f_lim 0.00...1.00 [Hz] p3811[D] (0.20) To setpoint channel + [3080.5] + (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A |U| -p3811 Sync phase diff r3808 Sync f_corr Sync Ph_sync thrsh 1.00...20.00 [] p3813[D] (2.00) Sync-line-drive enabled r3819.0 Sync enable p3802[C] (0) Sequence control 1 Phase measurement/ closed-loop control Sync act 0...1 p3800[D] (0) 0 Sync U_diff thresh 0.00...20.00 [%] p3815[D] (10.00) Sync U_diff r3814 r3812 & Sync-line-drive in synchronism r3819.2 Sync-line-drive frequency measurement active r3819.5 Sync-line-drive closed-loop phase control active r3819.6 1 Sync-line-drive synchronizing error r3819.3 0 1 2 DO: VECTOR, VECTORMV Technology functions - Synchronization 3 To motor control 4 5 6 fp_7020_51_eng.vsd 03.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 7020 - Function diagrams Frequency measurement Sync f_target Technology functions 2-1136 Fig. 2-142 [3030.8] Sync DO No 1...62 p3801[D] (1) Function diagrams Technology controller 2.16 Technology controller Function diagrams 7950 - Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 2) 2-1138 7951 - Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 1) 2-1139 7954 - Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) 2-1140 7958 - Closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1) 2-1141 7960 - DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1) 2-1142 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1137 Tec_ctrl sel bit 0 23 Tec_ctrl sel bit 1 0.00 % 0000 p2221[C] (0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 7950 - Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 2) Tec_ctrl sel bit 2 p2222[C] (0) Tec_ctrl sel bit 3 p2223[C] (0) Tec_ctrl fix val 1 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2201[D] (10.00) p2201[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 2 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2202[D] (20.00) p2202[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 3 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2203[D] (30.00) p2203[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 4 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2204[D] (40.00) p2204[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 5 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2205[D] (50.00) p2205[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 6 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2206[D] (60.00) p2206[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 7 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2207[D] (70.00) p2207[D] <1> Tec_ctrl No act r2229 0001 0010 Tec_ctr FixVal sel 0011 r2225.0 0100 0101 0110 0111 Tec_ctrl fix val 8 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2208[D] (80.00) p2208[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 9 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2209[D] (90.00) p2209[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 10 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2210[D] (100.00) p2210[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 11 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2211[D] (110.00) p2211[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 12 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2212[D] (120.00) p2212[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 13 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2213[D] (130.00) p2213[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 14 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2214[D] (140.00) p2214[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 15 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2215[D] (150.00) p2215[D] <1> p2216 in sight for SERVO and VECTOR only. <101> The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 s. Refer to [1020.7] <101> 20 0 ... 15 Tec_ctr FixVal eff r2224 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORMV Technology controller - Fixed value selection binary (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 2) 5 6 fp_7950_51_eng.vsd 09.04.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 7950 - Function diagrams (0) Technology controller 2-1138 Fig. 2-143 p0115[6] (Drive Object) p2220[C] Refer to [1020.7] <101> Tec_ctrl sel bit 0 7951 - Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-144 p0115[6] (Drive Object) p2220[C] (0) Tec_ctrl sel bit 1 p2221[C] (0) Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW Tec_ctrl sel bit 2 r2225.0 p2222[C] (0) Tec_ctrl sel bit 3 p2223[C] (0) Tec_ctrl fix val 1 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2201[D] (10.00) p2201[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 2 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2202[D] (20.00) p2202[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 3 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2203[D] (30.00) p2203[D] Tec_ctrl fix val 4 -200.00...200.00 [%] p2204[D] (40.00) 0001 0010 0100 + 1000 p2204[D] + + + + Tec_ctr FixVal eff r2224 + 5 6 fp_7951_54_eng.vsd 18.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 7951 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Technology controller - Fixed value selection direct (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 1) Technology controller 2-1139 <101> The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 s. p0115[6] (Drive Object) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 7954 - Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) Initial rounding-off active Non-volatile data save active The ramp-function generator is always active Tec_ctrl mop raise Refer to [1020.7] <101> 0 = The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240. 1 = The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON is entered using r2231. 0 = Without initial rounding. 1 = With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly. 0 = Non-volatile data save not activated. 1 = The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1). 0 = Ramp-up encoder inactive with pulse disable. 1 = The ramp-up encoder is calculated independently of the pulse enable. Old value is kept p2235[C] (0) Tec_ctrl Mop lower <2> p2236[C] <2> Tec_ctr mop t_r-up 0.0...1000.0 [s] p2247[D] (10.0) (0) Tec_ctr mop t_r-dn 0.0...1000.0 [s] p2248[D] (10.0) 0 0 Tec_ctrl mop max -200.00...200.00 [%] p2237[D] (100.00) 0 1 y p2237 Tec_ctr mop befRFG r2245 x Tec_ctrl mop min -200.00...200.00 [%] p2238[D] (-100.00) y t Tec_ctr mop aftRFG r2250 1 0 p2238 y=0 r0046.0 1 1 [2634.0] 1 = OFF1 enable missing Tec_ctrl mop start -200.00...200.00 [%] p2240[D] (0.00) <1> Tec_ctrl mop mem r2231 <1> For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON. <2> If initial rounding-off is active (p2230.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/down times are exceeded accordingly. <101> The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 s. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORMV Technology controller - Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) 4 5 6 fp_7954_51_eng.vsd 19.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 7954 - Function diagrams Data save active Technology controller 2-1140 Fig. 2-145 Tec_ctr mop config p2230[D] (00100) Fig. 2-146 Tec_ctrl output scal -100.00...100.00 % p2295 (100.00) Tec_reg Integ Stop p2286[C] <3> (r0056.13) Tec_ctrl setpoint 1 p2253[C] p2296[C] (2295) p2295 p0115[6] (Drive Object) Refer to [1020.7] <101> Tec_ctrl pre-control p2289[C] Tec_reg config p2252.0 (0) Tec_ctr set aft. flt (0) r2262 7958 - Closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Tec_ctrl Set1 scal 0.00...100.00 % p2255 (100.00) Tec_ctrl set 2 scal 0.00...100.00 % p2256 (100.00) Tec_ctrl setpoint 2 p2254[C] (0) Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up 0.00...650.00 s p2257 (1.00) Tec_ctrl set T 0.00...60.00 s p2261 (0.00) Tec_ctr error r2273 Tec_ctrl Tec_ctrl Kp 0.000...1000.000 Tn 0.000...60.000 s p2280 (1.000) p2285 (0.000) p2263 = 1 <2> <1> <2> <1> + + + + + Tec_ctr outp_sig r2294 + + + Technology controller limited Tec_ctr ActVal min -10000.00 ... 10000.00 [%] p2268 (-200.00) 0 0 Tec_ctr set a. RFG Tec_ctr error r2260 r2273 p2263 = 0 Tec_ctr ActVal max -10000.00 ... 10000.00 [%] p2267 (200.00) 0 <4> 1 0 p2252.3 <4> Tec_ctrl max_limit -200.00...200.00 % p2291 (100.00) <4> 1 Tec_ctr ActValGain Tec_ctr ActVal Fct 0.00 ... 500.00 0 ...3 p2269 (100.00) p2270 (0) Tec_ctrl act T 0.000...60.000 s p2265 (0.000) <4> r2349.1 p2252.1 Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn 0.00...650.00 s p2258 (1.00) <4> Tec_ctr ActVal inv <4> 0 ...1 p2271 (0) Tec_ctr act val Tec_ctrl type 0 = D component in actual value signal 1 = D component in fault signal p2263(0) Tec_ctrl T diff 0.000...60.000 s p2274 (0.000) <2> Tec_ctr max_limit p2297[C] p2291 (2291) + - <1> 1 <4> d dt p2264[C] -1 (0) p2252.2 0 Tec_ctrl min_limit -200.00...200.00 % p2292 (0.00) Tec_ctrl lim offs p2299[C] <2> r2272 Tec_ctr min_lim <4> p2292 p2298[C] (2292) - Tec_ctrl enable 2-1141 <1> <2> <3> <4> <101> P, I and D components can be disabled by entering a zero. Behavior can be changed via p2252. I component stop, only when r2273 and r2294 in same direction. Not for VECTORMV. The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 s. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORMV Technology controller - Closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1) Technology controller de-activated p2200[C] 1 (0) 4 5 6 fp_7958_51_eng.vsd 09.03.11 V04.05.00 r2349.0 7 Function diagram SINAMICS Tec_ctrl up/down 0.00...100.00 s p2293 (1.00) 8 - 7958 - Function diagrams + r2266 Technology controller Tec_ctr act a. flt F07426 Technology controller actual value limited p2252.2 (0) Tec_reg Istw. skal Vdc pre-ctrl P p3520[0] (0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 7960 - DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1) + INF pre-ctrl P sm p3523[3] I = P/U + Vdc pre-ctrl P p3520[3] (0) p3521[3] Prectrl P scal Vdc Z_set p3511 [7984.6] r5433 Vdc_ctrl Kp p3560 DC link voltage controller n_act unsmoothed r0074 r0063[0] Vdc-ctrl active C_DCL tot p3422 Vdc Z_set 300.00...1600.00 V p3510 (600.00) Modulat_depth Vdc_ctrl Tn p3562 Kp Tn r3405.1 + + + + Enabling and linearisation + r1536[0] [6320.8] I_act ctrl stp r3517 Vdc_act r0070 [8950.1] Vdc setpoint r3554 Vdc_ctr I_comp -1 r0088 [8964.6] r1537[0] Inhib V_ctrl mode p3513 1 1 2 3 4 DO: VECTOR Technology controller - DC link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1) 5 6 fp_7960_54_eng.vsd 09.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 7960 - Function diagrams Prectrl P scal p3521[0] INF pre-ctrl P sm p3523[0] Technology controller 2-1142 Fig. 2-147 p0115[0] (250.00 s) Power pre-control Function diagrams Signals and monitoring functions 2.17 Signals and monitoring functions Function diagrams 8010 - Speed signals 1 2-1144 8011 - Speed signals 2 2-1145 8012 - Torque signals, motor locked/stalled 2-1146 8013 - Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) 2-1147 8014 - Thermal monitoring, power unit 2-1148 8016 - Thermal monitoring, motor 2-1149 8017 - Thermal motor models (p0300 = xxx) 2-1150 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1143 n_limit pos eff r1084 r1087 n r0063 8010 - Speed signals 1 [4710.7] <5> 0...1 000 000 ms p2153 (0) r0063[0] [4715.7] <4> p0115[1] (<2>) p0115[3] (<3>) r2197 r2197.6 [2534.3] |n_act| > n_max r2169 [8011.1] [8012.5] [8013.1] n_act unsmoothed n n_act smooth signal p0115[3] (4000.00 s) ZSW Monitor 1 0 n_act smooth p0115[1] (125.00 s) F07901 "motor overspeed" 0.00...60 000.00 RPM p2162[D] (0.00) n_thresh val 3 0.00...210 000.00 RPM p2161[D] (5.00) Smoothing ZSW Monitor 3 1 n_thresh val 1 0.00...210 000.00 RPM p2141[D] (5.00) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 1 1 0 0 <1> 0.000...300.000 RPM p214hysterresis 2[D] (2.00) n_hysteresis 1 n_thresh val 2 0.00...210 000.00 RPM p2155[D] (900.00) 1 1 <1> VECTOR: Calculated. <2> VECTOR: Depending on the drive unit (250 or 400 s). <3> VECTOR: Depending on the drive unit (1000 or 1600 s). <4> Only for VECTOR. <5> Only for SINAMICS S120 and SERVO. 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Signals and monitoring functions - Speed signals 1 r2199 r2199.0 0 <1> 0.00...300.00 RPM p2150[D] (2.00) n_hysterresis 3 n_thresh val 2 0.00...210 000.00 RPM p2155[D] (900.00) [2537.3] |n_act| < p2161 t_on cmpr val rchd 0.0...10 000.0 ms p2156[D] (0.0) ZSW Monitor 3 T 0 r2199 r2199.1 t_on cmpr val rchd 0.0...10 000.0 ms p2156[D] (0.0) Monit config p2149 [2537.3] f or n-comparison value reached/exceeded ZSW Monitor 1 0 <1> 0.00...300.00 RPM p2140[D] (90.00) n_hysteresis 2 T 1 1 r2197 r2197,1 t_on cmpr val rchd 0.0...10 000.0 ms p2156[D] (0.0) 0 1 |n_act| [2534.3] p2155 ZSW Monitor 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 T 0 r2197 r2197.2 [2534.3] |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 <1> 0.00...300.00 RPM p2140[D] (90.00) n_hysteresis 2 4 5 6 fp_8010_54_eng.vsd 20.04.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8010 - Function diagrams n_limit neg eff Signals and monitoring functions Fig. 2-148 2-1144 From setpoint limiting [3050.8] <5> [3095.7] 0 n_act smooth signal p0115[3] (4000.00 s) n_act 1 r2169 0 r2197.3 [2534.3] 0 [8010.2] 8011 - Speed signals 2 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-149 p0115[3] (<3>) <1> n_set for msg <5> <7> 0 n_hysteresis 3 0.00...300.00 RPM p2150[D] (2.00) <2> p2151[C] r1170 r2198.5 n_hysteresis 3 0.00...300.00 RPM p2150[D] (2.00) <2> n_set for msg p2151[C] r1438 n_thresh val 3 0.00...210000.00 RPM p2161[D] (5.00) 1 |n_set| < p2161 r2198.4 [5210.4] [2536.3] 0 n_thresh val 4 0.00...210.000 RPM p2163[D] (90.00) + n_act 2 [2536.3] 0 [3080.8] <6> n_set > 0 1 t_del_off n_i=n_se 0.0...500.0 ms p2166[D] (200.0) n_hysteresis 3 0.00...300.00 RPM p2150[D] (2.00) 1 0 + 1 0 Speed setpoint actual value deviation in tolerance t_off T r1407.2 p2154[C] 0 r2197.7 <4> <5> 1 1 [6060.3] n_hysteresis 4 0.00...200.00 RPM p2164[D] (2.00) <2> 0 t_on n_act=n_set 0.0...10 000.0 ms p2167[D] (200.0) T [2534.3] A07903 "Motor speed deviation" A07903 is only signaled for p2149.0 = 1 and r2197.7 = 0. 0 Enable alarm A07903 p2149.0[D] Speed setpoint actual value deviation in tolerance t_on 0 r2199.4 [2537.3] RFG active SET (Q=1) Q Priority RESET 1 RESET (Q=0) Q 2 SET 1 = RESET p2148[C] (0) 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Signals and monitoring functions - Speed signals 2 4 5 6 fp_8011_54_eng.vsd 01.04.11 V04.05.00 r2199.5 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 [2537.3] 8 - 8011 - Function diagrams Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Signals and monitoring functions 2-1145 <1> Applies only if the function module "extended signals/monitoring functions" is active (r0108.17 = 1). <2> VECTOR: Calculated. <3> VECTOR: Depending on the drive unit (1000 or 1600 s). <4> Evaluation only for: Pulse enable and operating enable (r0899.2) or OFF1 or OFF3 or rotating measurements or friction characteristic plot. <5> Only for VECTOR. <6> Only for SINAMICS S120 and SERVO. <7> The value is displayed correctly only with r0899.2 = 1 (Operation enabled). Torque control active p0115[3] (4000.00 s) 0 1 r2199.5 T Ramp-function generator operating [2537.7] <2> 0.00...99 999.00 Nm p2174 (5.13) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 8012 - Torque signals, motor locked/stalled <2> Torque setpoint < p2174 M_set total [6060.8] p2177 (1.000) Control type p1300 [2522.7] Mot stall enab neg p2144[C] (0) 1 [5610.5] r0079 1 [2520.7] r1406.8 Torque limit reached r1407.7 M_set total r0079[0] Motor locked detection or motor locked monitoring function (not for closed-loop torque control) 0.000...65.000 s p1545 Travel to fixed stop 1 0 r2198.10 [2536.3] <4> Mot block n_thresh 0.00...210 000.00 RPM p2175 (120.00) M_set total, smooth r0079[1] x1 <2> r0079 x2 + <4> [6060.8] r1538 1 <4> Requested torque F07900 r0056.12 0 1 & r0056.13 [2526.6] y p0045 1 [%] 1 [Nm] 0 1 Stall detection or stall monitoring (not for U/f control and not for p0300 = 5) Torque utilization < p2194 Only VECTOR r2199.11 0.000...1.000 s p2178 (0.010) <3> Speed adaptation, speed deviation [2537.3] x2 + r2198.6 [2536.3] <20 I_limit/M_limit act 0.00...100.00 % p2194 (90.00) x1 <4> r1539 <2> [5650.8] M_max lower effective r2169 [Nm] [6640.8] M_max lower effective r1539 [6640.8] M_max upper effective r1538 <2> [5650.8] M_max upper effective Motor locked 0 [8010.2] I_limit U_output act + M_max Offset p1532 <2> [5620.7] <1> [5630.7] n_act smooth signal x1 > x2 = y = 1 (positive torque requested) y T n_act smooth signal < p2175 2 % of p2174 [5610.5] M_set total 20 & 1 0 x1* 100 % x2 r1408.11 [6730.2] Motor stalled r1408.12 2 % von p2194 M_utilization smooth p0045 100 ms 0 n_act n_cont. In [3080.4] r1443 <1> The torque setpoint and the torque limits are determined by p1532 (M_max offset). As a rule, M_max offset = 0. <2> Only for SINAMICS S120 with SERVO (r0107 = 11). <3> Only for vector control with encoder. <4> Only for VECTOR (r0107 = 12). <5> VECTOR: Depending on the drive unit (1000 or 1600 s). 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Signals and monitoring functions - Torque signals, motor locked/stalled r2198.7 [2536.3] F07902 r0081 Actual torque limit Motor stalled [6730.2] p3237[D] p3238[D](3.0) M_utilization + r0033 T 1 [6040.2] 1 + 0 T n_diff. Mod./Ext not in tolerance 1 r2199.7 0 F07937 p3236[D] 5 6 fp_8012_54_eng.vsd 25.08.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8012 - Function diagrams p0115[3] (<5>) Ramp-up completed Signals and monitoring functions 2-1146 Fig. 2-150 0.0...1 000.0 ms p2195[D] (800.0) p2149.1 A07926 "Envelop characteristic, parameter not value" M_act r0080 [5730.1] <3> [6714.8] <2> 8013 - Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-151 p0115[6] (4000.00 s) M [Nm] 1 M_thresh 3 lower 0.00...20 000 000.00 [Nm] p2190[D] (0.00) 0 M_thresh 3 upper 0.00...20 000 000.00 [Nm] p2189[D] (10 000 000.00) 0.00...65.00 [s] p2192[D] (10.00) Tolerance bandwidth A07920 ... A07922 r2198.11 0 M_thresh 2 lower 0.00...20 000 000.00 [Nm] p2188[D] (0.00) M_thresh 1 lower 0.00...20 000 000.00 [Nm] p2186[D] (0.00) Load monitoring response p2181[D](0) T M_thresh 2 upper 0.00...20 000 000.00 [Nm] p2187[D] (10 000 000.00) Evaluation [2536.3] F07923 ... F07925 r2198.12 [2536.3] M_thresh 1 upper 0.00...20 000 000.00 [Nm] p2185[D] (10 000 000.00) (0) Load monitoring disabled (1) A07920 "Torque/speed too low" (2) A07921 "Torque/speed too high" (3) A07922 "Torque/speed outside tolerance" n_act smooth signal r2169 0 n [RPM] [8010.2] 1 p2149.1 (4) <1> (5) <1> (6) <1> F07923 "Torque/speed too low" F07924 "Torque/speed too high" F07925 "Torque/speed outside tolerance" F07928 <2> "Internal voltage protection initiated" 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Signals and monitoring functions - Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) 5 6 fp_8013_54_eng.vsd 30.04.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8013 - Function diagrams 2-1147 <1> The response to these faults can be defined. <2> Only for VECTOR. <3> Only for SERVO. Signals and monitoring functions n_threshold 1 n_threshold 2 n_threshold 3 0.00...210 000.00 [RPM] 0.00...210 000.00 [RPM] 0.00...210 000.00 [RPM] p2182[D](150.00) p2183[D](900.00) p2184[D](1500.00) Control Unit Thermal monitoring for the power unit 1 1 = Fault thermal overload in power unit r2135.13 [2548.2] Temperature measurement 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 8014 - Thermal monitoring, power unit Max Faults "power unit overtemperature" F30004 inverter heatsink F30024 thermal model <3> F30025 chip F30035 air intake F30036 electronics module F30037 rectifier 0 Power unit temperatures [C] r0037 [0...19] <1> Pulse frequency p1800 5 C + 1 <2> I_act abs. value DRIVECLiQ r0068[0] [6714.5] <2> 100 % Power unit overload (0...100 %) <2> r0036 I_act abs. value r0068 [5730.4] [8850.4] [8950.4] <2> <5> Alarms "power unit overtemperature" A05000 inverter heatsink A05001 chip A05002 air intake A05003 electronics module A05004 rectifier A05006 chip to heatsink <4> 0 1 it model power unit F30005 "Power unit overload" <2> 0 PU Tmodel_A_thresh r0293 <1> <3> LT I_rated r0207 <2> A05007 Power unit overtemperature chip to heatsink <3> 1 1 1 = Alarm, thermal overload, power unit r2135.15 0 [2548.2] Overload response Alarm threshold it overload power unit 0...100 % p0294 (95 %) <1> Power unit overload response p0290 <2> 1 A07805 "Power unit overload" <2> <1> Not for A_INF, B_INF and S_INF. <2> Not for Basic Line Modules Chassis. <3> Only for Power Unit Chassis <4> Only for Power Unit Blocksize <5> Only for SINAMICS S120. 1 2 3 4 DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR Signals and monitoring functions - Thermal monitoring, power unit 0 5 6 fp_8014_54_eng.vsd 27.02.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8014 - Function diagrams Maximum power unit temperature Tmax heatsink p0115[3] (2000.00 s) Signals and monitoring functions 2-1148 Fig. 2-152 Power unit Mot_temp 8016 - Thermal monitoring, motor (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-153 1 r0035 MAX 48 ms Mot temp_sensortyp p0601[M] 0 = No sensor [4704.8] [4704.8] [4704.8] from mot temp module 1 from encoder 1 from encoder 2 von Geber 3 from Motor Modules or CUA31 Mot Temperatur [C] p0603 [9576.7] (0) e.g. r4105 from TM31 Mot temperatur [C] 0 1 2 3 11 10 20 e.g. r4105 from TM120 21 Temperature channel <6> 10 = Evaluation of several temperature channels SME12x) 11 = Evaluation of several temperature channels (BICO) Suppress fault p0610 = 0 (threshold not applicable for PTC) 1 2 3 4 p4600[E] p4601[E] p4602[E] p4603[E] channel MIN 11 =1 PTC alarm 2 3 4 p4610[M] 12 = PTC p4611[M] alarm andp4612[M] time stepp4613[M] 20 = KTY84 Configuration 30 = Bimetal NC contact fault 0 = No sensor 31 = Bimetal NC contact alarm p0606[M] 1650 <8> <1> <5> 32 =10 Bimetal contact = PTCNC fault alarm & time step 11 = PTC alarm KTY Sensor type <3> PTC T [8017.6] [8017.7] 20 = KTY, PT100, PT1000 30 = Bimetal NC contact fault F07011 "Motor overtemperature" & 1 1 31 = Bimetal NC contact alarm 32 = Bimetal NC contact alarm & time step r2135.12 [2548.2] A07910 "Motor overtemperature" 0 Mot temp_sens time p0607[M] only for KTY -140 C 250 C 1 r2135.14 [2548.2] <2> T 0 A07016 "Motor temperature sensor fault, fault" A07015 "Motor temperature sensor fault alarm" A07820 "Temperature sensor not connected" 5 6 fp_8016_54_eng.vsd 30.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8016 - Function diagrams 2-1149 [8017.1] <1> For KTY, PT100, PT1000 and PTC, the value p0606 = 0 has a different meaning: KTY, PT100, PT1000: 0 The output of the timer is always switched out (logical 0) PTC: 0 Delay time = 0 s <2> As for the switch-in delay, refer to [1022]. p0607 = 0 suppresses fault F07016. <3> For KTY, PT100, PT1000 and "No sensor", temperature as defined in the model. <4> Applies only for VECTOR. <5> P0606 does not work for alarms via p0616. <6> p0601 = 5 can only be evaluated if r0192.15 = 1 and p0600 = 11; PT100 is calibrated via p0624. <7> The assignment of temperature channels 1 4 depends on the hardware used. <8> The relevant rated response temperature (C) depends on the temperature sensor chosen by the motor manufacturer. 4 0 1 12 = PTC alarm and time step 1 2 3 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Signals and monitoring functions - Thermal monitoring, motor I_max reduction [1690.1][6640.2] & Mot_tempAlrmThresh p0604[M] Mot temp alarm 1 p0616[M] r4620[3] Configuration Mot temp_sensortyp 0 = No sensor 10 = PTC fault Temperature p0610 = 1 KTY sensor type Mot Temp_sensortyp r4620[0] r4620[1] r4620[2] 4 = Bimetal NC contact alarm with time step for MM only Fault response r4620[3] Signals and monitoring functions p0609[0...3] (0) 2 = KTY84 3 = KTY84 & PTC, for encoder only 5 = PT100 p0608[0...3] (0) e.g. r4105 from TM120 Mot temperatur [C] 1 = PTC alarm and time & 0 <7> Mot Temp_sensortyp r4620[0] r4620[1] r4620[2] Mot temp_sensortyp [8017.8] <4> 1 1 Mot temp_sensor p0600[M] p0610[M] p0610 = 0: No response, only alarm, no reduction of I_max p0610 = 1: Alarm and reduction of I_max and fault p0610 = 2: Alarm and fault, no reduction of I_max Mod 1/2/K thresh p0605[M] I_act abs val unsmoothed 1 Model [8016.6] 0 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 8017 - Thermal motor models (p0300 = xxx) Thermal motor model 1 (I2t) (only for synchronous motor) r0068[0] 192.00 ms Mod 1/2/K Thresh p0605[M] I2t mot mod T p0611[M] 1 A07012 "1/3 Thermal motor model overtemperature" 0 Mot temp [8016.5] r0035 Mot T_ambient p0625[M] <2> <1> Modell - 40C p0605 - 40C Motor utilization x 100 [%] r0034 Stat therm iron Stat therm copper Stat therm weight Activate thermal motor model 2 Mot weight th mod Mot T_rotor p0617[M] p0618[M] p0619[M] p0612.1[M] (1) p0344[M] r5395[M] Rated motor temperature rise Calculated motor temperatures Mot T_ambient p0625[M] Mot T_environ r0630[M] Mot T_over core p0626[M] Mot T_stator r0631[M] Thermal motor model 2 (for induction motors only) [8016.2] Mot T_over stator p0627[M] [8016.1] Mot T_copper r0632[M] Mot T_over rotor p0628[M] Mot T_rotor r0633[M] Activate thermal motor model 3 p0612.2[M](0) Fault threshold p5391[M] Mot T_copper r0632[M] 1 State of breaking <3> Mot T_stator r0631[M] Thermal motor model 3 (only for synchronous motor) Mot T_rotor r0633[M] I_act abs val unsmoothed r0068[0] n_act r0061[0] <3> Only for SERVO. 0 p3571 p3581 T 0 1 [8016.6] Alarm threshold p5390[M] 1 Power loss calcul r5395 <1> Only if there is a temperature sensor (p0600 > 0 and p0601 = 2, 3, or with p0601 = 10 and p4600 ... p4603 = 20). <2> Only if <1> are not met. T= A07012 "1/3 Thermal motor model overtemperature" 0 p5350[M] p5384[M] Encoder temp r5396[M] p0613[M](40) 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Signals and monitoring functions - Thermal motor models (p0300 = xxx) r0632 - p0613 p5390 - p0613 5 Motor utilization x 100 [%] r0034 6 fp_8017_54_eng.vsd 05.12.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8017 - Function diagrams Mot I_standstill p0318[M] I2t mot_mod thresh p0615[M] Signals and monitoring functions 2-1150 Fig. 2-154 Activate thermal motor model 1 (I2t ) p0612.0[M] (0) Function diagrams Diagnostics 2.18 Diagnostics Function diagrams 8060 - Fault buffer 2-1152 8065 - Alarm buffer 2-1153 8070 - Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) 2-1154 8075 - Fault/alarm configuration 2-1155 8134 - Measuring sockets 2-1156 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1151 System runtime r2114 [ms] Actual component number r2131 r3131 r3132 0 = "No fault present" <3> 8060 - Fault buffer Fault code Fault value Fault time "come" Fault time "removed" Fault Drive Component Object number triggernd fault Diagnostic attribute fault Fault times III 32 bit counter, free running Refer to [1020.7] [8065.1] Operating time Fault 1 r0945[0] r0947[0] r0949[0] [I32] r2133[0] [Float] r0948[0] [ms] r2130[0] [d] r2109[0] [ms] r2136[0] [d] r3115[0] r3120[0] r3122[0] Fault 2 0945[1] 0947[1] r0949[1] [I32] r2133[1] [Float] r0948[1] [ms] r2130[1] [d] r2109[1] [ms] r2136[1] [d] r3115[1] r3120[1] r3122[1] 16 bit counter Fault case Actual fault case Fault case count p0952 III RESET comes RESET p3981 Acknowledge faults POWER ON (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A p2102 ... p2105 r0945[7] r0947[7] r0949[7] [I32] r2133[7] [Float] r0948[7] [ms] r2130[7] [d] r2109[7] [ms] r2136[7] [d] Fault 1 r0945[8] r0947[8] r0949[8] [I32] r2133[8] [Float] r0948[8] [ms] r2130[8] [d] r2109[8] [ms] r2136[8] [d] r3115[8] r3120[8] r3122[8] Fault 2 r0945[9] r0947[9] r0949[9] [I32] r2133[9] [Float] r0948[9] [ms] r2130[9] [d] r2109[9] [ms] r2136[9] [d] r3115[9] r3120[9] r3122[9] Fault 8 r0945[15] r0949[15] [I32] r0948[15] [ms] r0947[15] r2133[15] [Float] r2130[15] [d] r2109[15] [ms] r3115[15] r2136[15] [d] r3120[15] r3122[15] Fault 8 <1> r3115[7] r3120[7] r3122[7] Faults Acknowledging Acknowledge faults r2138.7 1. Acknowledged fault case p2106 External fault 1 [2546.3] r2138.13 p2107 External fault 2 External fault 3 [2546.1] r2138.15 Fault 1 r0945[56] r0949[56] [I32] r0948[56] [ms] r0947[56] r2133[56] [Float] r2130[56] [d] r2109[56] [ms] r3115[56] r2136[56] [d] r3120[56] r3122[56] Fault 2 r0945[57] r0949[57] [I32] r0948[57] [ms] r0947[57] r2133[57] [Float] r2130[57] [d] r2109[57] [ms] r3115[57] r2136[57] [d] r3120[57] r3122[57] 7. Acknowledged fault case [oldest] p2147 (CU) = 1 1 III RESET Fault case Automatic <2> Fault buffer change r0944 acknowl. POWER ON Fault buffer change [8065.6] Fault 8 r0945[63] r0949[63] [I32] r0948[63] [ms] r0947[63] r2133[63] [Float] r2130[63] [d] r2109[63] [ms] r3115[63] r2136[63] [d] 3 4 Control Unit Fault Present r3120[63] r3122[63] r3114.10 Fault responses to the sequence control [2610] <1> This fault is overwritten when "more recent" faults occur (with the exception of "safety faults"). <2> Refer to the list manual, index entry "Fault buffer - save upon power OFF". <3> The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to the status signal in r2139). 1 2 DO: All objects Diagnostics - Fault buffer 1 16 bit counter, free running Fault comes Fault goes [2546.3] r2138.14 p2108, p3110 ... p3112 p0952 = 0: Fault buffer delated Delete fault buffer r0945 = 0 r0947 = 0 r0948 = 0 r0949 = 0 r2109 = 0 r2130 = 0 r2133 = 0 r2136 = 0 r3115 = 0 r3120 = 0 r3122 = 0 Fault active r2139.3 [2548.2] 5 6 fp_8060_51_eng.vsd 07.12.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 8060 - Function diagrams 1 ms Background Actual fault value Diagnostics 2-1152 Fig. 2-155 LED "RDY" [= red for fault] Actual fault code <1> Background 0 = "No alarm present" Alarm code Alarm value Refer to [1020.7] Alarm time "come" Alarm time "removed" Operating time [8060.1] 8065 - Alarm buffer (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-156 Actual alarm code r2132 p2112 External alarm 1 Component Diagnostic attribute number alarm alarm Alarm times Counter 16 bit r2122[0] r2124[0] [I32] r2134[0] [Float] r2123[0] [ms] r2145[0] [d] r2125[0] [ms] r2146[0] [d] r3121[0] r3123[0] Alarm 2 r2122[1] r2124[1] [I32] r2134[1] [Float] r2123[1] [ms] r2145[1] [d] r2125[1] [ms] r2146[1] [d] r3121[1] r3123[1] [2546.3] r2138.10 III RESET p2111 = 0: Alarm buffer is deleted Delete alarm buffer r2122 = 0 r2123 = 0 r2124 = 0 r2125 = 0 r2134 = 0 r2145 = 0 r2146 = 0 r3121 = 0 r3123 = 0 p2117 External alarm 3 r2122[7] r2124[7] [I32] r2134[7] [Float] r2123[7] [ms] r2145[7] [d] r2125[7] [ms] r2146[7] [d] r3121[7] r3123[7] Alarm 1 (most recent) r2122[8] r2124[8] [I32] r2134[8] [Float] r2123[8] [ms] r2145[8] [d] r2125[8] [ms] r2146[8] [d] r3121[8] r3123[8] Alarm 2 r2122[9] r2124[9] [I32] r2134[9] [Float] r2123[9] [ms] r2145[9] [d] r2125[9] [ms] r2146[9] [d] r3121[9] r3123[9] Alarm 56 (oldest) r2122[63] r2124[63] [I32] r2123[63] [ms] r2125[63] [ms] r2134[63] [Float] r2145[63] [d] r2146[63] [d] r3121[63] r3123[63] Alarm 8 (most recent) Alarm history POWER ON 1 RESET p2116 External alarm 2 [2546.3] r2138.11 [2546.3] r2138.12 Alarms counter p2111 Alarm comes Alarm 1 (oldest) Control Unit Warning Present r3114.9 16 bit counter, free running Alarm comes Alarm number r2110 Alarm goes Alarm present Alarm buffer change 1 III RESET r2121 Alarm buffer change r2139.7 POWER ON [2548.2] 1 2-1153 <1> The buffer parameters are updated cyclically in the background (see status signal in r2139). 1 2 DO: All objects Diagnostics - Alarm buffer 3 III RESET Alarm buffer change r2120 POWER ON 4 5 6 fp_8065_51_eng.vsd 08.04.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 8065 - Diagnostics Fault buffer change [8060.8] Fault/alarm buffer changes from other drive objects Function diagrams 16 bit counter, free running (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 8070 - Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) Select fault/alarm code for trigger p2128 [0] r2129 0. Message/signal present 0. Fault/alarm code [1] 1. Fault/alarm code [15] 15. Fault/alarm code r2129.0 1. Message/signal present r2129.1 15. Message/signal present r2129.15 Setting, fault/alarm trigger 1 2 3 DO: All objects Diagnostics - Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) 4 5 6 fp_8070_51_eng.vsd 18.08.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 8070 - Function diagrams Fault/alarm trigger word (e.g. as trigger condition to record traces) Diagnostics 2-1154 Fig. 2-157 Background Refer to [1020.7] Changing the fault response for maximum 20 faults <1> p2100 8075 - Fault/alarm configuration (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-158 Background Refer to [1020.7] Changing the message type - fault <==> alarm for maximum 20 faults/alarms <1> p2101 p2118 p2119 [0] 0. Fault code [0] Fault response 0 = NONE [0] 0. Fault/alarm code [0] Fault/alarm type 1 = Fault (F) [1] 1. Fault code [1] Fault response 1 = OFF1 [1] 1. Fault/alarm code [1] Fault/alarm type 2 = Alarm (A) 2 = OFF2 3 = No message(N) 3 = OFF3 4 = STOP1 5 = STOP2 6 = IASC/DCBRAKE [19] 19. Fault code [19] Fault response 7 = ENCODER (p0491) [19] 19. Fault/alarm code [19] Fault/alarm type Changing the acknowledge mode for maximum 20 faults <1> p2126 [0] [1] 0. Fault code 1. Fault code p2127 [0] Acknowledge mode 1 = Acknowledgment is only possible using POWER ON [1] Acknowledge mode 2 = Acknowledgment IMMEDIATELY after the cause has been removed. 3 = Acknowledge only when the PULSES ARE INHIBITED. 19. Fault code [19] Acknowledge mode 1 2 DO: All objects Diagnostics - Fault/alarm configuration 3 4 5 6 fp_8075_51_eng.vsd 07.09.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 8075 - Diagnostics 2-1155 <1> The fault response, acknowledge mode and message type for all faults and alarms are set to meaningful default values in the factory setting. Changes that may be required are only possible in specific value ranges specified by SIEMENS. When the message type is changed, the supplementary information is tranferred from fault value r0949 to alarm value r2124 and vice versa. Function diagrams [19] -100 000.00...427.9E9 % p0779[0] (100.00) p0110[0] (125.00 s) y [V] p0784[0] 0.00...4.98 V p0780[0] (4.98) y2 8134 - Measuring sockets y1 0.00...4.98 V p0778[0] (2.49) p0771[0] <3> x1 (4.98 V) y [V] -10 Offset -4.98...4.98 V p0783[0] (0.00) 5 x [V] 4.98 [V] -10 A 0 y [V] 4.98 [%] r0772[1] y x p0784[1] y2 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A y1 0.00...4.98 V p0778[1] (2.49) p0771[1] x2 P2 (2.49 V) -10 Offset -4.98...4.98 V p0783[1] (0.00) -5 5 x [V] 4.98 Scaling 1 [V] A 5 10 x 4.98 [V] -5 y [V] 4.98 [%] r0772[2] y x p0784[2] p0771[2] y2 y1 0.00...4.98 V p0778[2] (2.49) x2 P2 (2.49 V) Offset -4.98...4.98 V p0783[2] (0.00) (100 %) x [%] y -10 + -5 5 x [V] 4.98 r0774[2] 1 [V] Limit + P1 x <1> 0...4.98 V y x -100 000.00...100 000.00 % -100 000.00...427.9E9 % p0777[2] (0.00) p0779[2] (100.00) x1 (4.98 V) y [V] Measuring socket T1 D <2> -10 0.00...4.98 V p0780[2] (4.98) Dimension unit per volt <4> r0786[1] 0 y [V] 4.98 + (100 %) x [%] y r0774[1] Limit + P1 x <1> 0...4.98 V 5 10 x 4.98 [V] -5 -100 000.00...100 000.00 % -100 000.00...427.9E9 % p0777[1] (0.00) p0779[1] (100.00) x1 (4.98 V) y [V] Measuring socket T0 D <2> [%] 0.00...4.98 V p0780[1] (4.98) Dimension unit per volt <4> r0786[0] y x Scaling 1 y [V] 4.98 + (100 %) x [%] y r0774[0] Limit x2 x1* 100 % x2 -5 + P1 x1 y x2 P2 (2.49 V) x Reference quantities p200x y x 4.98 Measuring socket T1 D A 0 y [V] Dimension unit per volt <4> r0786[2] y x <1> Only for measuring equipment with Ri 1 M Scaling <2> <2> With the factory setting, input values -10 -5 5 10 x from -100...100 % result in output voltages from 0...4.98 V. 4.98 <3> The input signals are determined by the reference quantities p200x (100 % corresponds to [V] p200x). The calculated normalization is indicated via r0786. <4> Example: If a speed signal is entered via p0071 and r0786 indicates 100.0, a speed change of 100 RPM results in an output voltage change of 1.0 V. 1 2 3 4 DO: CU_CX32, CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_I, CU_MV, CU_S, CU_SL Diagnostics - Measuring sockets 5 <1> 0...4.98 V M 6 fp_8134_51_eng.vsd 07.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 8134 - Function diagrams 4.98 [%] r0772[0] Diagnostics 2-1156 Fig. 2-159 -100 000.00...100 000.00 % p0777[0] (0.00) Function diagrams Data sets 2.19 Data sets Function diagrams 8560 - Command Data Sets (CDS) 2-1158 8565 - Drive Data Sets (DDS) 2-1159 8570 - Encoder Data Sets (EDS) 2-1160 8575 - Motor Data Sets (MDS) 2-1161 8580 - Power unit Data Sets (PDS) 2-1162 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1157 BI: p0810 = "1" CDS1 selected r0836.0 = 1 t t CDS0 effective r0050.0 = 0 Copy CDS, source p0809[0] (0) Refer to [1020.7] Copy CDS, start p0809[2] (0) Drive n CDS1 effective r0050.0 = 1 Drive 2 Drive 1 CDS selected r0836 r0836.0 r0836.1 t CDS select., bit 0 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A p0810 <1> CDS count p0170 (1, 2) (0) CDS select., bit 1 p0811 CDS3 (0) CDS2 CDS effective CDS1 r0050 r0050.0 r0050.1 CDS0 <1> For SERVO, the following applies: Min / Max / Factory setting: 1 / 2 / 2. For VECTOR, the following applies: Min / Max / Factory setting: 2 / 4 / 2. 1 2 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Data sets - Command Data Sets (CDS) 3 4 5 6 fp_8560_54_eng.vsd 20.10.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8560 - Function diagrams 8560 - Command Data Sets (CDS) BI: p0810 = "0" CDS0 selected r0836.0 = 0 Not relevant Copy CDS, target p0809[1] (1) Data sets Fig. 2-160 2-1158 Example: Change over Command Data Set CDS0 --> CDS1 DDS (Drive Data Set) Copy DDS, source p0819[0] (0) p0186[0...n] (MDS number) p0187[0...n] (enc 1 EDS number) 8565 - Drive Data Sets (DDS) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-161 Not relevant Copy DDS, target p0819[1] (1) Refer to [1020.7] Copy DDS, start p0819[2] (0) p0188[0...n] (enc 2 EDS number) <2> p0189[0...n] (enc 3 EDS number) <2> Drive n EDS (Encoder Data Set) Drive 2 r0838 r0838[0] r0049[1] r0838[2] r0838[3] Drive 1 MDS (Motor Data Set) Motor data set MDS selected Encoder 1 encoder data set EDS selected Encoder 2 encoder data set EDS selected <2> Encoder 3 encoder data set EDS selected <2> DDS selected Select DDS bit 0 r0837 r0837.0 r0837.1 r0837.2 r0837.3 r0837.4 DDS number p0180 (1) p0820[C] (0) Select DDS bit 1 DDS31 p0821[C] (0) A07530 "Drive data set does not exist" Select DDS bit 2 DDS effective DDS1 p0822[C] r0051 r0051.0 r0051.1 r0051.2 r0051.3 r0051.4 (0) <1> DDS0 Select DDS bit 3 p0823[C] (0) p0824[C] (0) Motor data set MDS effective Encoder 1 encoder data set EDS effective Encoder 2 encoder data set EDS effective <2> Encoder 3 encoder data set EDS effective <2> 2-1159 <2> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150. 1 2 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, TM41 Data sets - Drive Data Sets (DDS) 3 4 5 6 fp_8565_54_eng.vsd 25.06.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8565 - Data sets <1> A BICO interconnection to a parameter which is part of a drive data set always influences the currently effective data set. Function diagrams r0049 r0049[0] r0049[1] r0049[2] r0049[3] Select DDS bit 4 <1> (0) p0186[D] (MDS number) 8570 - Encoder Data Sets (EDS) p0187[D] (Enc 1 EDS number) p0824[C] p0188[D] (Enc 2 EDS number) (0) EDS0 p0189[D] (Enc 3 EDS number) EDS1 EDS15 Not configured EDS count p0140 (1) EDS0 EDS1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A EDS15 EDS15 - Encoder Data Set 15 EDS1 - Encoder Data Set 1 Not configured ... p0141[0] = EDS1 p0400[0] EDS for encoder 1 1 p0400[E] E = p0187[D] 15 99 p0425[E] Assigned parameters for position sensing for encoder n [4704] for speed actual value sensing for encoder n: [4710] for SERVO [4715] for VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL 0 EDS for encoder 2 1 p0400[E] E = p0188[D] 15 99 p0425[E] EDS15 EDS0 - Encoder Data Set 0 Component number of the Sensor Module 0 EDS0 EDS0 EDS1 EDS15 Not configured 0 EDS for encoder 3 1 p0400[E] E = p0189[D] 15 99 p0425[E] p0425[0] r0838[1] Encoder 1 EDS selected r0838[2] Encoder 2 EDS selected r0838[3] Encoder 3 EDS selected r0049[1] Encoder 1 EDS effective r0049[2] Encoder 2 EDS effective r0049[3] Encoder 3 EDS effective F07502 "Encoder Data Set EDS not configured" F07510 "Identical encoder in the drive data set" <1> Encoder errors always refer to the currently active Encoder Data Set. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Data sets - Encoder Data Sets (EDS) 5 6 fp_8570_51_eng.vsd 27.10.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 8570 - Function diagrams DDS (Drive Data Set) p0820[C] Data sets 2-1160 Fig. 2-162 Not relevant Refer to [1020.7] Motor selection (0) 1 Application p0186[D] (MDS number) Drive p0187[D] (Enc 1 EDS number) 8575 - Motor Data Sets (MDS) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-163 4000.00 s p0833.0 (0) DDS (Drive Data Set) p0820[C] p0824[C] 0 p0188[D] (Enc 2 EDS number) (0) DO r0830 r0830.0 r0830.1 r0830.2 r0830.3 K1H p0189[D] (Enc 3 EDS number) Copy MDS, target p0139[1] (0) Copy MDS, source Copy MDS, start p0139[0] (0) MDS count p0139[2] (0) DO r0830.15 K2H 0V Motor Module Mot_chng fdbk sig p0130 (1) 1 Application p0828[C] 0 Motor changeover MDS15 K1 K2 K1H K2H Mot_chng fdbk ZSW MDS1 r0832 MDS0 <1> r0832.0 Request pulse enable p0826[0] Motor number p0827[0] Bit number r0832.1 r0832.2 r0832.3 p0833.1 (0) Drive 0 Application Pulse suppression p0831[0] DI M1 3~ K2 M2 3~ K1 Feedback signal, contactor 1 p0831[1] DI Feedback signal, contactor 2 p0831[2] DI K2 DI K1 Feedback signal, contactor 3 p0831[3] MDS effective r0049[0] MDS_chngov ZSW r0832.15 r0835 r0835.0 Feedback signal, contactor 15 p0831[15] DI 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Data sets - Motor Data Sets (MDS) 5 6 fp_8575_51_eng.vsd 27.10.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 8575 - Data sets 2-1161 <1> The following applies for the changeover of motor data sets: SERVO and VECTOR: The thermal motor model of motors with the same motor number is identical. VECTORGL and VECTORMV: The thermal monitoring of motors with the same motor number is identical. An unequal bit number means that the motor must be changed over. Function diagrams 1 MDS selected r0838[0] Feedback signal, contactor 0 8580 - Power unit Data Sets (PDS) pxxxx[0] (1) LT_comp act/inact r0126[0] De-activate power unit 8 (PDS7) pxxxx[7] (1) LT_compo act/de-act p0125 [P] 0 = De-activate component 1 = Activate component Word 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PDS0 PDS7 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A PDS1 PDS0 1 2 DO: SERVO, VECTOR Data sets - Power unit Data Sets (PDS) 3 4 PDS7 5 6 fp_8580_54_eng.vsd 28.07.09 V04.05.00 LT_comp act/inact r0126[7] 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8580 - Function diagrams De-activate power unit 1 (PDS0) Data sets 2-1162 Fig. 2-164 Not relevant Refer to [1020.7] Function diagrams Basic Infeed 2.20 Basic Infeed Function diagrams 8720 - Control word, sequence control infeed 2-1164 8726 - Status word, sequence control infeed 2-1165 8732 - Sequencer 2-1166 8734 - Missing enable signals, line contactor control 2-1167 8750 - Interface to the Basic Infeed power unit (control signals, actual values) 2-1168 8760 - Signals and monitoring functions (p3400.0 = 0) 2-1169 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1163 Bit No. <2> <3> (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 8720 - Control word, sequence control infeed 1. OFF2 (electrical) p0844[C] (1) p0840[C] (0) Control word sequence control infeed r0898 0 = CLOSE (close pre-charging/line contactor) 0 = OFF1 (open pre-charging/line contactor) r0898.0 To the control unit [8732] 1 1 = Operating condition no OFF2 (enable is possible) 0 = OFF2 (open pre-charging/line contactor and power-on inhibit) r0898.1 To the control unit [8732] 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 1 = Control via PLC 11 Reserved 12 Reserved <1> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD). 13 Reserved <2> PROFIBUS interconnection: For the manufacturer-specific PROFIBUS telegram, the upper input is connected to PROFIBUS signal A_STW1 [2447]. Only applies for CDS0. 14 Reserved 15 Reserved <3> p0845[C] (1) 2. OFF2 (electrical) p0854[C] (0) <3> <1> r0898.10 <3> Is pre-defined via the PC if the master control is retrieved. <4> Only for S120 and G150. 1 2 3 DO: B_INF Basic Infeed - Control word, sequence control infeed 4 5 6 fp_8720_54_eng.vsd 21.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8720 - Function diagrams <4> STW seq ctrl Basic Infeed 2-1164 Fig. 2-165 p0115[3] (2000.00 s) 8726 - Status word, sequence control infeed (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-166 p0115[3] (2000.00 s) <2> ZSW sequence ctrl Bit No. Status word sequence control infeed r0899 [8732] From sequence control 0 1 = Ready for switching on r0899.0 [8732] From sequence control 1 1 = Ready for operation r0899.1 [8732] From sequence control 2 1 = Operation enabled r0899.2 3 Reserved 4 1 = No OFF2 active 5 Reserved 6 1 = Switching on inhibited 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 1 = Control requested <1> 10 Reserved [8750] From power unit 11 1 = Pre-charging completed r0899.11 [8734.4] From line contactor control 12 1 = Line contactor closed r0899.12 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved [8732] From sequence control [8732] From sequence control Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data r0899.4 r0899.6 r0899.9 [8760.5] 4 5 6 fp_8726_54_eng.vsd 21.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8726 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 DO: B_INF Basic Infeed - Status word, sequence control infeed Basic Infeed 2-1165 <1> The drive object is ready to accept data. <2> Only for S120 and G150. p0857 ... p0862, p3490 POWER ON <1> r3402 ZSWAE.6 = 1 ZSWAE.0/1/2 = 0 Open the line contactor Missing enable signals 8732 - Sequencer <2> & <2> "0 = OFF2" (STWAE.1) "Commissioning" (p10 0 und p9 0) "0 = OFF2" (STWAE.1) "0 = OFF2" (STWAE.1) S2: Ready for switching on <2> [8734] Faults/alarms F06000 F07220 F07300 A06602 & S6: ZSWAE.0 = 1 ZSWAE.1/2/6 = 0 Open the line contactor Line contactor is open Wait for power-on "0 = OFF1" <2> (STWAE.0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A p0862 & "0 = OFF1" (STWAE.0) <2> T & 0 0 p3490 S3a: Close the line contactor T Energize contactor "0 = OFF1" (STWAE.0) <2> r0863.1 (refer to [8734] ) Pre-charging Time monitoring refer to [8760] [8760.6] [2634.4] & S3: Operation <2> ZSWAE.0/1/2 = 1 ZSWAE.6 = 0 Line contactor is closed Closed-loop control operation r0863.0 to SERVO/VECTOR [2610.1] INF total operation <1> POWER ON = 24 V electronics power supply OFF --> ON or RESET button. <2> STWAE.xx = Control word, sequence control infeed bit xx ZSWAE.xx = Status word, sequence control, infeed bit xx <3> Only for S120 and G150. 1 2 DO: B_INF Basic Infeed - Sequence control 3 SLM/BLM operation p0874 4 & r0873.0 5 to SERVO/VECTOR 6 fp_8732_54_eng.vsd 25.10.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8732 - Function diagrams S7: Basic Infeed Fig. 2-167 2-1166 <3> S1: Switching on inhibited <2> "Commissioning completed" (p10 = 0 and p9 = 0) "0 = OFF1" (STWAE.0) p0115[3] (2000.00 s) 8734 - Missing enable signals, line contactor control (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-168 Line contactor control Missing enable signals p0115[3] (2000.00 s) Missing enable signals that prevent the drive going into operation (this situation can be detected at the ZSW sequence control, infeed r0899.2 = 1 [8726]). <1> Control Unit Missing enable sig Bit No. Meaning r0046 From line supply 0 1 = OFF1, enable missing (p0840 = 0 or switching on inhibited is present) r0046.0 1 1 = OFF2, enable missing (p0844 = 0 or p0845 = 0) r0046.1 [3020.5] From sequence control [8732.4] S7 open line contactor 2 3 S6 open line contactor 1 = Operation enable missing (r0898.3 = 0 [8720]) S3a close line contactor Close line contactor r0863.1 5 [8760.5] DO +24 V [2130]...[2133] 6 Line contactor fdbk sig 8 1 = EP terminals, enable missing (pulse enable EP terminals missing) r0046.8 r0899.12 Line contactor closed [8726.3] p0860 1 DI [2120]...[2133] 9 16 1 = OFF1 internal enable missing (OFF1 fault response is present) r0046.16 17 1 = OFF2 enable internal missing (commissioning selected p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0 or OFF2 fault response present) r0046.17 ON/OFF monitoring p0861 26 1 = Infeed inactive or not operational r0046.26 29 1 = Cooling unit ready signal missing r0046.29 1 T F07300 "Line contactor feedback signal missing" 0 To Line Module Time monitoring Operating monitoring 2-1167 <1> Only for S120 and G150. 1 2 3 DO: B_INF Basic Infeed - Missing enable signals, line contactor control 4 5 6 fp_8734_54_eng.vsd 25.10.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8734 - Basic Infeed & Function diagrams & Control unit Vdc_act r0070 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 8750 - Interface to the Basic Infeed power unit (control signals, actual values) Vdc smooth r0026 300 ms I_act abs.val. <1> U1 V1 W1 r0068 Basic Line Module <1> I_act abs.val.smth r0027 300 ms P_act <1> r0082 DRIVE-CLiQ <1> P_actv_act smth r0032 300 ms LT I_max r0209 LT I_max r0209 Vdc U_lower_thresh r0296 Vdc U_lower_thresh r0296 Vdc U_upper_thresh r0297 Vdc U_upper_thresh r0297 Temp_input <1> <2> Temp_input r0035 + r0035 <2> - DCP DCN DC link voltage Vdc_act <1> Applies only for Booksize. <2> Choice temperature input about p0601. <3> Only for S120 and G150. 1 2 3 4 5 DO: B_INF Basic Infeed - Interface to the Basic Infeed power unit (control signals, actual values) DC link current Idc_act 6 fp_8750_54_eng.vsd 21.10.10 V04.05.00 <1> 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8750 - Function diagrams <3> Basic Infeed 2-1168 Fig. 2-169 p0115[3] 2000.00 s 8760 - Signals and monitoring functions (p3400.0 = 0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-170 p0115[3] (2000.00 s) DC link monitoring <2> Vdc Vdc V_upper_thresh r0297 Vdc_act Line voltage monitoring when powering-up F30002 "DC link overvoltage" r0070 [8750.1] Supply voltage p0210 Vdc_act F30003 "DC link undervoltage condition" r0070 85 % 110 % 1 Vdc V_lower_thresh r0296 2 A06310 "Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized" Vdc offs A thresh p0279 + + A06810 "DC link voltage too low" Temperature monitoring braking resistor Precharge monitoring for the DC link 4000.00 s <1> p0857 Energize line contactor 60 s r0863.1 X21.1 X21.2 T 0 T 0 [8734.5] F06908 "Braking Module internal shutdown due to overtemperature" F06000 "Precharging monitoring time expired" Pre-charging completed [8726.7] 1 2 3 DO: B_INF Basic Infeed - Signals and monitoring functions (p3400.0 = 0) 4 5 6 fp_8760_54_eng.vsd 21.10.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 8760 - Basic Infeed 2-1169 <1> For B_INF with Braking Module internal only. <2> Only fur S120 and G150. Function diagrams r0899.11 F06907 "Braking Module internal overtemperature" Function diagrams Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2.21 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) Function diagrams 9100 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) 2-1171 9102 - Digital outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 3) 2-1172 9104 - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1) 2-1173 9106 - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) 2-1174 2-1170 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 24 V DC to the next device p4099[0] (4000.00 s) +24 V DI 0 DI 3 inverted X424.+ r4023 X424.M M X424.M <1> M X481.1 DI 0 DI 0 DI 3 r4022 1 = Simulation on p4095.0 + 9100 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-171 X424.+ r4021.0 1 0 r4023.0 r4022.0 p4096.0 1 24 V p4095.1 r4021.1 X481.2 DI 1 1 0 r4023.1 r4022.1 p4096.1 1 p4095.2 r4021.2 X481.3 DI 2 1 0 r4023.2 r4022.2 p4096.2 1 r4021.3 DI 3 1 0 r4023.3 r4022.3 p4096.3 1 M 2-1171 <1> M electrically isolated to the internal CU reference potential M. <1> 1 2 3 4 DO: TB30 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) 5 6 fp_9100_51_eng.vsd 24.11.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9100 - Function diagrams X481.4 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) p4095.3 5V X424.+ X424.+ (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 9102 - Digital outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 3) M X424.M + <1> M p4048.0 TB30 S_src DO 0 0 p4030 (0) X424.M DO 0 (X481.5) r4047.0 1 DO 0 X481.5 DO 1 X481.6 DO 2 X481.7 DO 3 X481.8 1 24 V p4048.1 DO 1 (X481.6) r4047.1 TB30 S_src DO 1 0 p4031 (0) 1 1 p4048.2 DO 2 (X481.7) r4047.2 TB30 S_src DO 2 0 p4032 (0) 1 1 5V p4048.3 DO 3 (X481.8) r4047.3 TB30 S_src DO 3 0 p4033 (0) 1 1 M <1> <1> M electrically isolated to the internal CU reference potential M. 1 2 3 4 DO: TB30 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Digital outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 3) 5 6 fp_9102_51_eng.vsd 24.11.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9102 - Function diagrams +24 V 24 V DC to the next device Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2-1172 Fig. 2-172 p4099[0] (4000.00 s) p4099[1] (4000.00 s) Fig. 2-173 9104 - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Hardware smoothing 100 s X482.1 X482.2 AI 0 D <2> -11...+11 V A + -11.000...11.000 V -11.000...11.000 V p4057[0] (0.000) p4059[0] (10.000) <3> Offset [V] -20.000...20.000 V p4063[0] (0.000) r4052[0] + + - p4097.0 0 Simulation mode -11.000...11.000 V p4098[0] (0.000) y [%] -1000.00...1000.00 % p4060[0] (100.00) y2 x 1 [%] y x2 x [V] x1 -1000.00...1000.00 % p4058[0] (0.00) y1 Scaling Reference quantities p200x Enable p4067[0] Smoothing 0.0...1 000.0 ms p4053[0] (0.0) (0) p4066 [0] 0 <1> When interconnected further, the output signals are referred to the reference quantities p2000 ... r2004 (100 % p200x). -11...+11 V 1 (1) y AI 1 D + + - y x1 * x 2 100 % 0 0% r4055[0] 1 <1> -11.000...11.000 V -11.000...11.000 V p4057[1] (0.000) p4059[1] (10.000) <3> Offset [V] -20.000...20.000 V p4063[1] (0.000) r4052[1] A x x2 p4097.1 Simulation mode -11.000...11.000 V p4098[1] (0.000) y [%] -1000.00...1000.00 % p4060[1] (100.00) 0 y2 x y 1 -1000.00...1000.00 % p4058[1] (0.00) [%] x2 x [V] x1 y1 Scaling Reference quantities p2000...r2004 Enable p4067[1] (0) 0 1 Smoothing 0.0...1 000.0 ms p4053[1] (0.0) 0 -1 x 1 1 2 3 DO: TB30 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1) 4 y = x if |y - x| > p4068 otherwise y = y(old) 5 p4069[1] y x2 (1) 0% x 0 r4055[1] y 1 6 fp_9104_51_eng.vsd 21.06.05 V04.05.00 <1> 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9104 - Function diagrams p4066 [1] Window to suppress noise 0.00...20.00 % p4068[1] (0.00) x1 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2-1173 <3> Caution: The voltage between an input and the grounding point must not exceed 35V. The voltage between the inputs must not exceed 35V. y = x if |y - x| > p4068 otherwise y = y(old) p4069[0] 1 + <2> <2> Differential inputs! For input signals referred to ground, terminal 2 and/or terminal 4 must be connected to the reference potential M. x Hardware smoothing 100 s X482.3 X482.4 0 -1 Window to suppress noise 0.00...20.00 % p4068[0] (0.00) x1 -1000.00...1000.00 % p4079[0] (100.00 %) (0) -1000.00...1000.00 % p4077[0] (0.00 %) 0.0...1000.0 ms p4073[0] (0.0) p4075 [0] (0) 0 <1> p4071 [0] (0) y 0 -1 1 y [V] -11.000...11.000 V p4080[0] (10.000 V) [V] r4074 [0] y2 x 1 -11.000...11.000 V p4078[0] (0.000 V) Smoothing + + X482.5 A AO 0 y1 X482.6 -11...+11 V Scaling <1> D y x2 x [%] x1 Offset -10.000...10.000 V p4083[0] (0.000) x1 y (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A x2 [%] x1 * 100 % x2 [%] r4072 [1] Reference quantities p2000... r2004 -1000.00...1000.00 % p4079[1] (100.00 %) p4082 [1] (0) -1000.00...1000.00 % p4077[1] (0.00 %) 0.0...1000.0 ms p4073[1] (0.0) p4075 [1] (0) <1> y p4071 [1] (0) 0 1 0 -1 y [V] -11.000...11.000 V p4080[1] (10.000 V) [V] r4074 [1] y2 x 1 -11.000...11.000 V p4078[1] (0.000 V) Smoothing 1 2 3 DO: TB30 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) + + X482.7 A AO 1 y1 X482.8 -11...+11 V Scaling <1> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2004 ... r2004 (100 % D y x2 x [%] x1 Offset -10.000...10.000 V p4083[1] (0.000) p200x). 4 5 6 fp_9106_51_eng.vsd 25.10.05 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9106 - Function diagrams [%] r4072 [0] p4082 [0] 9106 - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2-1174 Fig. 2-174 p4099[2] (4000.00 s) Function diagrams Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) 2.22 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) Function diagrams 9204 - Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) 2-1176 9206 - Receive telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1) 2-1177 9208 - Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) 2-1178 9210 - Send telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1) 2-1179 9220 - Control word, CANopen 2-1180 9226 - Status word, CANopen 2-1181 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1175 CAN bus sampling time <2> RPDO 1 Automatic assignment of the RPDOs to the receive buffer Refer to [1020.7] <1> Receive buffer r8890.0 <3> <3> Object 1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 9204 - Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) X451 CAN bus PZD receive word 1 r8850[0] r8860[0] Object 2 DWORD PZD receive word 2 Object 3 r8850[1] r8860[1] DWORD PZD receive word 3 Object 4 r8860[2] The assignment is made from RPDO 1, RPDO 2 ... RPDO 8 and from receiver buffer word RPDO 2 DWORD r8860[5] DWORD r8860[6] DWORD r8860[7] DWORD r8860[8] DWORD r8860[9] DWORD r8860[10] DWORD r8860[11] DWORD r8860[12] DWORD r8860[13] DWORD r8860[14] DWORD PZD receive word 6 Object 2 Evaluation of the COBID Object 4 RPDO 8 Objects available a multiple number of times are marshalled to the same position in the receive buffer. r8850[8] r8850[9] PZD receive word 11 r8850[10] PZD receive word 12 r8850[11] PZD receive word 13 Object 1 r8850[12] PZD receive word 14 Object 2 Object 3 Object 4 r8850[13] PZD receive word 15 r8850[14] PZD receive word 16 r8850[15] <1> To use automatic BICO interconnection (p8790 = 1), one of the receive words 1-4 must be used as control word 1 (STW1). <2> Telegram: up to 4 words or 64 bits. The sum of the various objects must not exceed 16 words. <3> When interconnecting a connector output multiple times all the connector inputs must have either Integer or FloatingPoint data type. 1 2 3 4 5 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) Bit 0 ... Bit 15 r8850[7] PZD receive word 10 p8707[0] p8717[0...3] Bit 15 r8850[6] PZD receive word 9 Object 4 Bit 0 ... r8850[5] PZD receive word 8 Object 3 r8892.0 ... r8850[4] PZD receive word 7 CANopen receive telegram Object 1 r8860[4] PZD receive word 5 Object 1 COB-ID DWORD Bit 0 Bit 15 r8893.15 r8850[3] r8860[3] Bit 15 r8891.15 r8893.0 DWORD Bit 0 ... r8891.0 r8892.15 r8850[2] PZD receive word 4 p8701[0] p8711[0...3] X452 CAN bus r8890.15 RPDO: Receive Process Data Object COB-ID: CAN Communication Object Identifier 6 fp_9204_51_eng.vsd 27.05.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9204 - Function diagrams PDO mapping for RPDO 1 p8710[0...3] Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) Fig. 2-175 2-1176 COB-ID for RPDO 1 p8700[0] <1> RPDO 1 Automatic assignment of the RPDOs to the receive buffer Refer to [1020.7] Receive buffer <2> <2> 60400010 PZD receive word 1 r8850[0] r8860[0] DWORD PZD receive word 2 X451 CAN bus r8850[1] r8860[1] DWORD PZD receive word 3 p8701[0] p8711[0...3] r8850[2] r8860[2] X452 CAN bus CANopen receive telegram COB-ID Object 1 60FF0020 p8702[0] p8712[0...3] DWORD r8860[4] DWORD r8860[5] DWORD r8860[6] DWORD r8860[7] DWORD r8860[8] DWORD r8860[9] DWORD r8860[10] DWORD r8860[11] DWORD r8860[12] DWORD r8860[13] DWORD r8860[14] DWORD PZD receive word 5 60400010 Evaluation of the COB-ID r8850[3] r8860[3] PZD receive word 8 Object 4 p8703[0] p8713[0...3] RPDO 4 Objects available a multiple number of times are marshalled to the same position in the receive buffer. 60FF0020 r8893.15 Bit 15 Bit 0 ... Bit 15 r8850[10] r8850[11] PZD receive word 13 r8850[12] PZD receive word 14 r8850[13] PZD receive word 15 r8850[14] r8850[15] 2-1177 <1> Telegram: up to 4 words or 64 bits. The sum of the various objects must not exceed 16 words. <2> When interconnecting a connector output multiple times all the connector inputs must have either Integer or FloatingPoint data type. RPDO: Receive Process Data Object COB-ID: CAN Communication Object Identifier 6 fp_9206_51_eng.vsd 27.05.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9206 - Function diagrams PZD receive word 16 1 2 3 4 5 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Receive telegram, Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1) Bit 0 ... r8892.15 r8850[9] PZD receive word 12 60710010 r8892.0 ... r8850[8] PZD receive word 11 60400010 Bit 15 r8850[7] PZD receive word 10 60710010 Bit 0 r8891.15 r8850[6] PZD receive word 9 60400010 Bit 15 r8891.0 r8850[5] PZD receive word 7 RPDO 3 Bit 0 ... r8850[4] PZD receive word 6 The assignment is made from RPDO 1, RPDO 2 ... RPDO 4 and from receiver word 1. r8890.15 r8893.0 DWORD PZD receive word 4 RPDO 2 r8890.0 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) 9206 - Receive telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-176 CAN bus sampling time COB-ID for RPDO 1 PDO mapping for RPDO 1 p8700[0] p8710[0...3] CANopen send words 1 ... 16 (0) DWORD (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 9208 - Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD p8861[0] (0) p8861[1] (0) ... Automatic assignment of the send buffer to the TPDOs <1> (0) Refer to [1020.7] TPDO 1 PZD send word 1 Object 1 PZD send word 2 Object 2 p8851[1] (0) p8851[2] (0) Object 3 PZD send word 3 p8861[2] p8851[3] Object 4 (0) CANopen send telegram PZD send word 4 p8861[3] (0) p8851[4] (0) (0) p8851[5] (0) PZD send word 6 p8861[5] (0) p8851[6] COB-ID p8721[0] p8731[0...3] PZD send word 5 p8861[4] CAN bus sampling time Object 1 The assignment is made from send buffer 1 and from TPDO 1. . . . TPDO 2 Object 1 (0) PZD send word 7 p8861[6] (0) p8851[7] Object 2 (0) Object 4 Evaluation of the COB-ID and data transfer type PZD send word 8 p8861[7] (0) p8851[8] Object 3 (0) PZD send word 9 p8861[8] (0) Object 4 p8851[9] (0) PZD send word 10 p8861[9] (0) p8851[10] (0) PZD send word 11 p8861[10] (0) p8851[11] (0) Objects that occur a multiple number of times are updated from the same send buffer. p8727[0] p8737[0...3] X451 CAN bus PZD send word 12 p8861[11] (0) p8851[12] (0) TPDO 8 PZD send word 13 p8861[12] (0) p8851[13] Object 1 (0) PZD send word 14 p8861[13] (0) p8851[14] Object 2 (0) PZD send word 15 p8861[14] (0) X452 CAN bus Object 3 p8851[15] (0) PZD send word 16 Object 4 TPDO: Transmit Process Data Object COB-ID: CAN Communication Object Identifier <1> Telegram: up to 4 words or 64 bits. The sum of the various objects must not exceed 16 words. 1 2 3 4 5 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) 6 fp_9208_51_eng.vsd 23.10.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9208 - Function diagrams p8851[0] Send buffer PDO mapping for TPDO 1 p8730[0...3] Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) Fig. 2-177 2-1178 IF2 Diag PZD send r8853[0...15] COB-ID for TPDO 1 p8720[0] CANopen send words 1...16 Fig. 2-178 p8851[0] 8784 DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD Automatic assignment of send buffer to the TPDOs (0) CAN bus sampling time Refer to [1020.7] <1> TPDO 1 PZD send word 1 p8861[0] PDO mapping for TPDO 1 p8730[0...3] 60410010 p8851[1] (0) PZD send word 2 p8861[1] 63 p8851[2] (0) CANopen send telegram PZD send word 3 p8861[2] (0) p8851[3] 79 COB-ID PZD send word 4 p8861[3] (0) p8861[4] 492.0 p8721[0] p8731[0...3] p8851[4] Object 1 (0) PZD send word 5 TPDO 2 p8851[5] 60410010 (0) PZD send word 6 p8861[5] (0) 606C0020 p8851[6] (0) Object 4 PZD send word 7 p8861[6] (0) p8851[7] (0) PZD send word 8 p8861[7] (0) p8851[8] (0) PZD send word 9 p8861[8] (0) p8851[9] The assignment is made from the send buffer 1 and from TPDO 1. p8722[0] p8732[0...3] (0) TPDO 3 PZD send word 10 p8861[9] (0) p8851[10] 60410010 (0) 60740010 PZD send word 11 p8861[10] (0) (0) (0) p8851[12] (0) PZD send word 13 p8861[12] (0) p8851[13] (0) Objects that occur a multiple number of times are updated from the same send buffer. p8723[0] p8733[0...3] PZD send word 14 p8861[13] (0) (0) X452 CAN bus TPDO 4 p8851[14] (0) 60410010 PZD send word 15 p8861[14] X451 CAN bus p8851[11] PZD send word 12 p8861[11] Evaluation of the COB-ID and data transfer type. 60630020 p8851[15] (0) PZD send word 16 2-1179 TPDO: Transmit Process Data Object COB-ID: CAN Communication Object Identifier <1> Telegram: up to 4 words or 64 bits. The sum of the various objects must not exceed 16 words. 1 2 3 4 5 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV. VECTORSL Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Send telegram, Predef. Connection Set (p8744 = 1) 6 fp_9210_51_eng.vsd 23.10.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9210 - Function diagrams DWORD ... Send buffer COB-ID for TPDO 1 p8720[0] Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) 9210 - Send telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A IF2 Diag PZD send r8853[0...15] STW1.0 Meaning 9220 - Control word, CANopen = ON (pulses can be enabled) 0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancellation and ready-to-power-up) p0840[0] = r8890.0 [2501.3] [2610] - (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A STW1.1 1 = No coast-down activated (enable possible) 0 = Activate coast-down (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit) p0844[0] = r8890.1 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.2 1 = No fast stop activated (enable possible) 0 = Activate fast stop (braking along an OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit) p0848[0] = r8890.2 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.3 1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled) 0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses) p0852[0] = r8890.3 [2501.3] [2610] - STW1.4 Reserved - - - - STW1.5 Reserved - - - - STW1.6 Reserved - - - - p2103[0] = r8890.7 [2546.1] [8060] - STW1.7 = Acknowledge fault STW1.8 Reserved - - - - STW1.9 Reserved - - - - STW1.10 Reserved - - STW1.11 Can be freely connected pxxxx[y] = r8890.11 - STW1.12 Can be freely connected pxxxx[y] = r8890.12 - - - STW1.13 Can be freely connected pxxxx[y] = r8890.13 - - - STW1.14 Can be freely connected pxxxx[y] = r8890.14 - - - STW1.15 Can be freely connected pxxxx[y] = r8890.15 - - - <1> Depending on the position of the CANopen control word in p8750, the number of the binector to be connected changes. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV,VECTORSL Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Control word, CANopen 5 6 fp_9220_51_eng.vsd 04.11.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9220 - Function diagrams Signal Refer to [1020.7] Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted parameters <1> internal control word signal target Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) 2-1180 Fig. 2-179 CAN bus sampling time Signal targets for control word CANopen 9226 - Status word, CANopen (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-180 CAN bus sampling time Refer to [1020.7] Status word CANopen Bit No. Status word CANopen r8784 From sequence control [2610] 0 1 = Ready to power-up From sequence control [2610] 1 1 = Ready to operate (DC link loaded, pulses blocked) From sequence control [2610] 2 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) From fault buffer [8060] 3 1 = Fault present From sequence control [2610] 4 1 = No coast down active From sequence control [2610] 5 1 = No fast stop active From sequence control [2610] 6 1 = Power-on inhibit active From alarm buffer [8065] 7 1 = Alarm present 8 Freely interconnectable (BI: p8785) Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data 9 1 = Control requested From speed signals [8011.8] (r2197.7) 10 1 = Target reached <1> From status word speed controller [2522] 11 1 = Torque limit reached From status word monitoring 3 [8010.8] (r2199.0) 12 1 = Velocity equal to zero 13 Reserved (0) 14 Freely interconnectable (BI: p8786) (0) 15 Freely interconnectable (BI: p8787) p8785 (0) 2-1181 <1> With setpoint channel: connect p2151 with r1119 [8010.5]. 1 2 3 4 DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Status word, CANopen 5 6 fp_9226_51_eng.vsd 04.11.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9226 - Function diagrams p8787 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) p8786 Function diagrams Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2.23 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) Function diagrams 9550 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) 2-1183 9552 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7) 2-1184 9556 - Digital relay outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 1) 2-1185 9560 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) 2-1186 9562 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) 2-1187 9566 - Analog input 0 (AI 0) 2-1188 9568 - Analog input 1 (AI 1) 2-1189 9572 - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) 2-1190 9576 - Temperature evaluation (KTY/PTC) 2-1191 2-1182 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 24 V DC to the next device p4099[0] (4000.00 s) +24 V DI 0 DI 3 inverted X524.+ r4023 X524.M M X524.M M X520.1 DI 0 DI 0 DI 3 r4022 + 9550 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-181 X524.+ <1> 1 = Simulation on p4095.0 r4021.0 1 0 r4023.0 r4022.0 p4096.0 1 24 V p4095.1 r4021.1 X520.2 DI 1 1 0 r4023.1 r4022.1 p4096.1 1 p4095.2 r4021.2 X520.3 DI 2 1 0 r4023.2 r4022.2 p4096.2 1 r4021.3 X520.5 M1 <1> X520.6 M 1 0 r4023.3 + 2-1183 24 V <1> p4096.3 1 2 3 4 DO: TM31 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) 1 5 6 fp_9550_51_eng.vsd 25.03.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9550 - Function diagrams DI 3 r4022.3 <1> <1> When using the electrical isolation, omit the terminal jumper and connect the load power supply shown as a dashed line. X520.4 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) p4095.3 5V 24 V DC to the next device p4099[0] (4000.00 s) +24 V r4023 M X524.M M X530.1 DI 4 DI 7 r4022 + <1> 1 = Simulation on p4095.4 r4021.4 1 0 r4023.4 r4022.4 p4096.4 1 24 V p4095.5 r4021.5 X530.2 DI 5 1 0 r4023.5 r4022.5 p4096.5 1 p4095.6 r4021.6 X530.3 DI 6 1 0 r4023.6 r4022.6 p4096.6 1 p4095.7 5V r4021.7 X530.4 DI 7 X530.5 M2 <1> X530.6 M 1 0 r4023.7 r4022.7 <1> + (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 9552 - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7) X524.M DI 4 <1> When using the electrical isolation, omit the terminal jumper and connect the load power supply shown as a dashed line. 24 V <1> p4096.7 1 2 3 4 DO: TM31 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7) 1 5 6 fp_9552_51_eng.vsd 25.03.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9552 - Function diagrams DI 4 DI 7 inverted X524.+ Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-1184 Fig. 2-182 X524.+ 9556 - Digital relay outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-183 p4099[0] (4000.00 s) p4048.0 TM31 S_src DO 0 (0) <1> r4047.1 p4030 1 X542 0 NC 0 1 1 COM 2 NO 0 3 p4048.1 TM31 S_src DO 1 <1> r4047.1 0 p4031 (0) 1 1 NC 1 4 COM 5 NO 1 6 1 2 3 4 5 DO: TM31 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital relay outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 1) 6 fp_9556_51_eng.vsd 30.07.07 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9556 - Function diagrams 2-1185 <1> NO: Normally Open contact ("open" in the quiescent state = NO contact) NC: Normally Closed contact ("closed" in the quiescent state = NC contact) The relay contacts have the following ratings - up to 100 V DC 240 W or 250 V AC 2000 VA. Terminal Module 31 (TM31) WARNING Hazardous voltage! These terminal can have voltages up to 250 V AC! X540.1 +24 V [9562.2] X541.1 DI/DO 8 inverted r4023 + +24 V p4096.8 (0) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 9560 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) [9562.4] 1 DI X541.2 DI/DO 8 r4022 r4023.8 r4022.8 DI 0 p4048.8 (0) 24 V DO 9 1 0 1 DI/DO 8 p4095.8 (0) r4021.8 p4028.8 (0) 9 TM31 S_src DI/DO 8 0 DO <1> 1 p4038 (0) 1 1 r4047.8 0 0 p4096.9 (0) p4095.9 (0) 1 DI X541.3 DI/DO 9 r4023.9 1 r4021.9 p4028.9 (0) r4022.9 DI 0 p4048.9 (0) 0 5V 1 DO TM31 S_src DI/DO 9 0 DO <1> 1 p4039 (0) 1 1 X541.6 M r4047.9 0 <1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies when used as digital output (p4028.x = 1). 0 <2> Limits the total output current of the terminals X541.2, X541.3, X541.4 and X541.5 to 0.1 A (p4046 = 0) or 1 A (p4046 = 1). <3> The total (summed) output current of the 24 V auxiliary power supply on terminals X540.1 to X540.8 and X541.1 is limited to 150 mA. Incandescent lamps must not be connected to the 24 V auxiliary power supply! 1 2 3 4 5 DO: TM31 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) 6 fp_9560_51_eng.vsd 27.03.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9560 - Function diagrams X540.8 p4099[0] (4000.00 s) <2> Current limiting p4046 (0) Terminal Module 31 (TM31) Fig. 2-184 2-1186 <3> Current limiting 150 mA 24 V DC to next device p4099[0] (4000.00 s) +24 V X524.+ X524.M M X524.M M 0V X541.1 +24 V +24 V DI/DO 10 inverted r4023 <2> [9560.4] X541.4 DI/DO 10 1 r4022 r4023.10 r4022.10 DI 0 p4048.10 (0) 0 11 1 r4021.10 DI DI/DO 10 p4095.10 (0) [9560.6] p4028.10 (0) +24 V p4096.10 (0) 11 24 V TM31 S_src DI/DO 10 1 DO 0 DO <1> 1 p4040 (0) 1 1 r4047.10 0 0 p4096.11 (0) p4095.11 (0) 1 DI X541.5 DI/DO 11 r4022.11 DI 0 p4048.11 (0) 0 1 TM31 S_src DI/DO 11 5V DO r4023.11 1 r4021.11 p4028.11 (0) 0 DO <1> 1 p4041 (0) 1 M r4047.11 0 2-1187 <1> The connection shown in a dashed line applies when used as digital output (p4028.x = 1). 0 <2> Limits the total output current of the terminals X541.2, X541.3, X541.4 and X541.5 to 0.1 A (p4046 = 0) or 1 A (p4046 = 1). 1 2 3 4 5 DO: TM31 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) 6 fp_9562_51_eng.vsd 27.03.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9562 - Function diagrams 1 X541.6 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 9562 - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-185 X524.+ +24 V 9566 - Analog input 0 (AI 0) 20 mA 0 20 mA X521.1 S5.0 <1> Current I S5.0 I S5.1 [9568] Voltage V V A + AI 0 - + D <2> <3> 4 mA 3 3 y2 x 4, 5 y (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A TM31 AI sim setp -20.000...20.000 p4098[0] (0.000) [%] x2 x x1 1 -1000.00...1000.00 % p4058[0] (0.00) y1 Scaling TM31 AI sim_mode p4097[0] (0) TM31 AI enable TM31 AI inv S_src p4069 [0] p4067 [0] (0) 0 0 -1 (1) TM31 AI window 0.0...20.0 % p4068[0] (0.0) TM31 AI T_smooth 0.0...1000.0 ms p4053[0] (0.0) TM31 AI absVal act p4066[0] (0) 1 <2> -20.000...20.000 p4059[0] (10.000) y [%] -1000.00...1000.00 % p4060[0] (100.00) 0 X521.2 +/-20 mA +/-10 V F03505 "Analog input wire breakage" 0 1 TM31 AI inp_U/I r4052[0] 0, 2 0 + T <2> -20.000...20.000 p4057[0] (0.000) <2> TM31 AI offset -20.000...20.000 p4063[0] (0.000) Hardware smoothing 100 s 3 x 1 y=x if |y - x| > p4068 otherwise y = y(old) y 0% Reference quantities p2000...r2004 x1 0 r4055[0] 1 <1> Differential input! For an input signal referred to ground, terminal X521.2 must be connected to reference potential M. Caution: The voltage between an input (X521.1 or X521.2) and the ground point must not exceed 35 V. When the load resistor is switched in (S5.0 closed), the voltage between the input terminals must not exceed 15 V. <2> For p4056 = 2, 3, 5 the units are mA. For p4056 = 0, 4 the units are V. 1 2 3 DO: TM31 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Analog input 0 (AI 0) 4 5 x2 x y x1 * x 2 100 % <3> p4056 = 0: 0 V ... +10 V = 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA = 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring = 4: -10 V ... +10 V = 5: -20 mA ... +20 mA 6 fp_9566_51_eng.vsd 29.12.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9566 - Function diagrams p4099[1] (4000.00 s) TM31 WireBrkThresh 0.00...20.00 mA p4061[0] (2.00) 0...1000 ms p4062[0] (100) Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-1188 Fig. 2-186 <2> <3> TM31 AI type p4056[0] (4) 9568 - Analog input 1 (AI 1) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-187 <2> <3> TM31 AI type p4056[1] (4) p4099[1] (4000.00 s) TM31 WireBrkThresh 0.00...201 mA p4061[1] (2.00) 0...1000 ms p4062[1] (100) 20 mA X521.3 S5.1 <1> Current I S5.0 [9566] I S5.1 Voltage V V A + AI 1 - + D <2> <3> 4 mA 3 3 0 <2> -20.000...20.000 p4059[1] (10.000) y [%] -1000.00...1000.00 % p4060[1] (100.00) y2 y x 4, 5 1 TM31 AI sim setp -20.000...20.000 p4098[1] (0.000) [%] x2 x x1 -1000.00...1000.00 % p4058[1] (0.00) X521.4 +/-20 mA +/-10 V F03505 "Analog input wire break" 0 1 TM31 AI inp_U/I r4052[1] 0, 2 0 + T <2> -20.000...20.000 p4057[1] (0.000) <2> TM31 AI offset -20.000...20.000 p4063[1] (0.000) Hardware smoothing 100 s 3 20 mA 0 y1 TM31 AI sim_mode p4097[1] (0) Scaling TM31 AI enable TM31 AI Inv S_src p4069[1] p4067[1] (0) TM31 AI T_smooth 0.0..1000.0 ms p4053[1] (0.0) TM31 AI absVal act p4066[1] (0) (1) TM31 AI window 0.00...20.00 % p4068[1] (0.00) Reference quantities p2000...r2004 1 0 -1 x 1 0% y = x if |y - x| > p4068 otherwise y = y(alt) 0 y r4055[1] 1 1 2 3 DO: TM31 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Analog input 1 (AI 1) 4 5 x y x1 * x 2 100 % <3> p4056 = 0: 0 V ... +10 V = 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA = 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring = 4: -10 V ... +10 V = 5: -20 mA ... +20 mA 6 fp_9568_51_eng.vsd 29.12.10 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9568 - Function diagrams 2-1189 <1> Differential input! For an input signal referred to ground, terminal X521.4 must be connected to reference potential M. Caution: The voltage between an input (X521.3 or X521.4) and the ground point must not exceed 35 V. When the load resistor is switched in (S5.1 closed), the voltage between the input terminals must not exceed 15 V. <2> For p4056 = 2, 3, 5 the units are mA. For p4056 = 0, 4 the units are V. x2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) x1 0 (0) -1000.00...1000.00 % p4079[0] (100.00 %) -20.000...20.000 p4080[0] (10.000) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 9572 - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) -1000.00...1000.00 % p4077[0] (0.00) 0.0...1000.0 ms p4073[0] (0.0) p4075 [0] (0) 0 -1 1 x 0 -20.000...20.000 p4078[0] (0.000) 4 mA A AO 0 A+ X522.3 +/-20 mA AO 0 des X522.2 <2> Current output [%] x1* 100 % x2 Reference quantities p2000...r2004 <3> + <2> X522.1 +/-10 V <1> Offset -20.000...20.000 p4083[0] (0.000) scaling % y <1> p4082 [1] (0) -1000.00...1000.00 % p4079[1] (100.00 %) -20.000...20.000 p4080[1] (10.000) -1000.00...1000.00 % p4077[1] (0.00) 0.0...1000.0 ms p4073[1] (0.0) p4075 [1] (0) 0 y 1 <1> 0, 1 y2 x 0 x2 x [%] x1 1 Smoothing -20.000...20.000 p4078[1] (0.000) <1> <1> For p4076 = 0, 2, 3 the units are mA. For p4076 = 1, 4 the units are V. <2> For a voltage output, the output voltage can be taken between the following terminals: AO 0 between X522.2 (reference potential) and X522.1, AO 1 between X522.5 (reference potential) and X522.4. For a current output, the output current can be taken from between the following terminals: AO 0 between X522.2 and X522.3, AO 1 between X522.5 and X522.6. <3> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2004 ... r2004 (100 % = p200x). 1 2 3 DO: TM31 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) Voltage output <4> y 0 -1 Analog outputs type p4076[1] (4) [%] r4072 [1] p4071 [1] (0) + 3, 4 AO 0 V+ D y 2 y1 <1> x2 x2 x [%] x1 Smoothing x1 0, 1 y2 1 <1> r4074[0] y 0 y Voltage output <4> [%] r4072 [0] p4071 [0] (0) Analog outputs type p4076[0] (4) 4 4 mA r4074[1] D y 2 + 3, 4 + A <2> AO 1 V+ X522.4 AO 1 A+ +/-10 V X522.6 y1 +/-20 mA <1> Offset -20.000...20.000 p4083[1] (0.000) scaling AO 1 des <2> Current output <4> p4076 = 0: 0 mA ... +20 mA = 1: 0 V ... +10 V = 2: 4 mA ... +20 mA = 3: -20 mA ... +20 mA = 4: -10 V ... +10 V 5 X522.5 6 fp_9572_51_eng.vsd 17.03.09 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9572 - Function diagrams <1> p4082 [0] Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-1190 Fig. 2-188 p4099[2] (4000.00 s) Temperature sensor X522.7 + temp 2 mA + 9576 - Temperature evaluation (KTY/PTC) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-189 p4099[0] (4000.00 s) <1> Sensortyp p4100 X522.8 KTY/PTC - Software smoothing 0.5 s Hardware smoothing 1 s A D <3> 188.6 C <4> Resistance calculation KTY <1> Sensortype p4100 R - temp A35211 "Alarm is present" <4> KTY T Alarm threshold -48...251 C p4102[0] (100) p4103 2 PTC 1 -140 C -300 C 0 r4104.0 <5> 1 T 0 0 1 Fault threshold -48...251 C p4102[1] (120) 1650 Ohm (PTC) PTC r4104.1 <4> 1 1 0 R_Sensor r4101 F35207 "Fault is present" 1 0 0 250 C only for KTY84 A35920 Error temperature sensor <2> -50 C Measured temperature -300 C 0 TM31 temp act val r4105 Alarm is present 1 5 6 fp_9576_51_eng.vsd 28.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9576 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 DO: TM31 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Temperature evaluation (KTY/PTC) Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-1191 <1> p4100 = 0: Evaluation disabled = 1: PTC = 2: KTY <2> An alarm A35920 in the temperature evaluation of the TM31 is signaled to the next (downstream) vector control via the special temperature value -300 C (refer to [9577]). <3> As a result of the wire breakage monitoring [9577.3] the maximum temperature that can be measured is limited to approx. 188.6 C. <4> A value > 250 C de-activates the alarm or fault. <5> For KTY p4103 = 0 Output from TempTimer (0). For PTC p4103 = 0 delay time = 0s. Function diagrams Terminal Module 150 (TM150) 2.24 Terminal Module 150 (TM150) Function diagrams 9625 - Temperature evaluation structure (channel 0 ... 11) 2-1193 9626 - Temperature evaluation 1x2, 3, 4-wire (channel 0 ... 5) 2-1194 9627 - Temperature evaluation 2x2-wire (channel 0 ... 11) 2-1195 2-1192 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 11 Sensor error effect p4117[0...2] (0) <3> Channel 0 0: 1x2-conductor 1: 2x2-conductor p4108[0] 2: 3-conductor 3: 4-conductor X531 X532 X533 X534 X535 Calculation and Evaluation p4111[0].0 Maximum value r4112[0] ... Minimum value r4113[0] Group 0 0: 1x2-conductor 1: 2x2-conductor p4108[1] 2: 3-conductor 3: 4-conductor Channel 1 Channel 7 (only for 2x2-conductor) 0: 1x2-conductor 1: 2x2-conductor p4108[2] 2: 3-conductor 3: 4-conductor Channel 2 Channel 8 (only for 2x2-conductor) ... Sensor type p4100[0] p4111[0].11 Channel 0 Channel 0 alarm is present Channel 3 Channel 9 (only for 2x2-conductor) 0: 1x2-conductor 1: 2x2-conductor p4108[4] 2: 3-conductor 3: 4-conductor Channel 4 Channel 10 (only for 2x2-conductor) ... Minimum value r4113[1] Channel 0 fault is present ... r4104.1 p4111[1].11 Channel 11 Mean value r4114[1] Mot_temp S_src p0603 (0) Mot_temp S_src 2 p0608[0...3] (0) Mot_temp S_src 3 p0609[0...3] (0) IF1 PZD send word p2051[x] Temperature actual value p4111[2].0 Maximum value r4112[2] ... Minimum value r4113[2] r4105[0] [9627] Channel 5 Channel 11 (only for 2x2-conductor) Maximum value r4112[1] Group 1 F35207 Mean value r4114[0] p4111[1].0 r4104.0 A35211 0: 1x2-conductor 1: 2x2-conductor p4108[3] 2: 3-conductor 3: 4-conductor 0: 1x2-conductor 1: 2x2-conductor p4108[5] 2: 3-conductor 3: 4-conductor X536 Channel 0 Channel 6 (only for 2x2-conductor) Group 2 ... Sensor resistance r4101[0] p4111[2].11 (0) Mean value r4114[2] [9626] 0.83 mA <1> X53x.1 X53x.3 0.83 mA X53x.3 + X53x.4 X53x.4 - X53x.4 0.83 mA + - X53x.4 - X53x.3 X53x.2 0.83 mA - 2-1193 <1> x = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 <2> Connect measuring cables. <3> Carefully read the safety notes included in the parameter description for p4111! 1 2 3 4 DO: TM150 Terminal Module 150 (TM150) - Temperature evaluation structure (Channel 0 5 6 fp_9625_51_eng.vsd 11) 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9625 - Function diagrams X53x.3 <2> X53x.2 + <2> X53x.2 - + X53x.2 4-conductor <1> X53x.1 + 0.83 mA 3-conductor - <1> X53x.1 - 2x2-conductor Terminal Module 150 (TM150) <1> X53x.1 + 1x2-conductor + 9625 - Temperature evaluation structure (channel 0 ... 11) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-190 Channel 6 Channel 5 Save cable resistance <4> 250 C <4> Calculate resistance PT1000 <1> T (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 9626 - Temperature evaluation 1x2, 3, 4-wire (channel 0 ... 5) 0 p4108[0...5] = 0, 2, 3 X53x.1 X53x.2 X53x.3 X53x.4 x = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 [9625] Measuring method 0: 1x2-concutcor 1: 2x2-conductor 2: 3-conductor 3: 4-conductor PT100 T D p4121 (0) Filt f_line KTY84 R T PTC/ Bimetal NC contact -99 C PT1000 6 PT100 5 0 Bimetal 4 KTY84 2 PTC 1 -300 C p4118[0...5] (5) 1650 (PTC) 100 (Bimetal) 1 Fault threshold -99...251 [C] p4102[1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11] (251) <1> 0 1 1 0 Sensor R r4101[0...5] T 0 <2> -99 C 250 C Temp filt T r4120 A R 1 50/60 Hz Sensor type p4100[0...5] 1 0 0 250 C -50 C r4104.0 A35211 (Channel 0) r4104.2 A35212 (Channel 1) r4104.4 A35213 (Channel 2) r4104.6 A35214 (Channel 3) r4104.8 A35410 (Channel 4) r4104.10 A35411 (Channel 5) <3> 1 -99 C 250 C p4119[0...5] "Channel y alarm is present" 0.0...600.0 [s] p4103[0...5] (0.0) R + 26000.00 s Alarm threshold -99...251 [C] p4102[0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10] (251) Cable R value p4110[0...5] only for KTY84, PT100, PT1000 "Channel y fault is present" r4104.1 F35207 (Channel 0) r4104.3 F35208 (Channel 1) r4104.5 F35209 (Channel 2) r4104.7 F35210 (Channel 3) r4104.9 F35400 (Channel 4) r4104.11 F35401 (Channel 5) A35920 A35925 "Error temperature sensor channel y" (y = 0 5) Temperature actual value -300 C 0 Temp act value r4105[0...5] Alarm is present 1 Group formation [9625.6] <1> For p4102[0...23] = 251 C the evaluation of the appropriate threshold is deactivated. <2> p4100[0...11] = 0: Evaluation disabled = 1: PTC thermistor (with monitoring for short-circuit) = 2: KTY84 (with monitoring for wire break and short-circuit) = 4: Bimetal NC contact (no monitoring) = 5: PT100 (with monitoring for wire break and short-circuit) = 6: PT1000 (with monitoring for wire break and short-circuit) <3> For p4103 = 0 s and sensor type "KTY84", "PT100", "PT1000" (p4100[0...11] = 2, 5, 6) the following applies: - The relevant fault can only be triggered via the fault threshold (the timer output is always logical 0). For p4103 = 0 s and sensor type "PTC thermistor", "Bimetal NC contact" (p4100[0...11] = 1, 4) the following applies: - The corresponding alarm and fault are output simultaneously (delay time = 0 s). <4> Only for 1x2-/2x2-conductor evaluation (p4108[0...5] = 0, 1). 1 2 3 4 5 DO: TM150 Terminal Module 150 (TM150) - Temperature evaluation 1x2-, 3-, 4-conductor (Channel 0 6 fp_9626_51_eng.vsd 5) 15.11.11 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram SINAMICS 8 - 9626 - Function diagrams Determine cable resistance (with short-circuited sensor) Terminal Module 150 (TM150) Fig. 2-191 2-1194 Cable R meas p4109[0...5] p4108[0...5] = 1 Fig. 2-192 9627 - Temperature evaluation 2x2-wire (channel 0 ... 11) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A X53x.1 X53x.2 Measuring method 0: 1x2-conductor 1: 2x2-conductor 2: 3-conductor 3: 4-conductor 26000.00 s Temperature evaluation Channel 0 A D Channel 5 Determine cable resistance (with short-circuited sensor) Cable R meas p4109[6...11] [9626] Save cable resistance Alarm threshold -99...251 [C] p4102[12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22] (251) Cable R value p4110[6...11] 250 C Calculate resistance x = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 PT1000 <1> R + T p4119[6...11] PT100 0 X53x.3 X53x.4 [9625] Measuring method 0: 1x2-conductor 1: 2x2-conductor 2: 3-conductor 3: 4-conductor T -99 C 250 C Temp filt T r4120 A D Temperature evaluation Channel 6 p4121 (0) Filt f_line KTY84 R T PTC/ Bimetal NC contact -99 C Channel 11 Sensor R r4101[6...11] T 1650 (PTC) 100 (Bimetal) 0 A35414 (Channel 8) A35415 (Channel 9) r4104.20 A35416 (Channel 10) PT1000 6 r4104.22 A35417 (Channel 11) PT100 5 Bimetal 4 KTY84 2 PTC 1 -300 C p4118[6...11] (5) Fault threshold -99...251 [C] p4102[13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23] (251) <1> 0 1 1 A35413 (Channel 7) r4104.16 r4104.18 0 1 0 A35412 (Channel 6) r4104.14 <2> R 1 50/60 Hz Sensor type p4100[6...11] r4104.12 <3> 1 -99 C 250 C "Channel y alarm is present" 0.0...600.0 [s] p4103[6...11] (0.0) 0 0 250 C -50 C r4104.13 F35402 (Channel 6) r4104.15 F35403 (Channel 7) r4104.17 F35404 (Channel 8) r4104.19 F35405 (Channel 9) r4104.21 F35406 (Channel 10) r4104.23 F35407 (Channel 11) A35926 A35931 "Error temperature sensor channel y" (y = 6 11) Temperature actual value -300 C 0 1 6 fp_9627_51_eng.vsd 15.11.11 V04.05.00 Temp act value r4105[6...11] Alarm is present 7 Function diagram SINAMICS Group formation [9625.6] 8 - 9627 - Function diagrams 1 2 3 4 5 DO: TM150 Terminal Module 150 (TM150) - Temperature evaluation 2x2-conductor (Channel 0 11) "Channel y fault is present" Terminal Module 150 (TM150) 2-1195 <1> For p4102[0...23] = 251 C the evaluation of the appropriate threshold is deactivated. <2> p4100[0...11] = 0: Evaluation deactivated = 1: PTC thermistor (with monitoring for short-circuit) = 2: KTY84 (with monitoring for wire break and short-circuit) = 4: Bimetal NC contact (no monitoring) = 5: PT100 (with monitoring for wire break and short-circuit) = 6: PT1000 (with monitoring for wire break and short-circuit) <3> For p4103 = 0 s and sensor type "KTY84", "PT100", "PT1000" (p4100[0...11] = 2, 5, 6) the following applies: - The relevant fault can only be triggered via the fault threshold (the timer output is always logical 0). For p4103 = 0 s and sensor type "PTC thermistor", "Bimetal NC contact" (p4100[0...11] = 1, 4) the following applies: - The corresponding alarm and fault are output simultaneously (delay time = 0 s). only for KTY84, PT100, PT1000 1 Function diagrams Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) 2.25 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) Function diagrams 9880 - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3) 2-1197 9886 - Temperature evaluation 2-1198 2-1196 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 9880 - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Fig. 2-193 <1> VSM CT_gain p3670 x2 x1 p0115[1] (250.00 s) y r3671 r3673 Rated line freq p0211 X520.2 + +/-10 V A AI 0 X520.1 p0115[3] (2000.00 s) Rated line freq p0211 I1 0.5 s D - I2 <1> VSM CT_gain p3670 0.5 s X520.4 +/-10 V + A I3 AI 1 X520.3 D - 0.5 s PT1 smoothing x2 x1 PT1 smoothing y r3672 f C3 C2 C1 r3674 I3 3 2 f U3 INF C_filter p0221 I2 3 2 f U2 VSMfilt C A_thresh r3676 C3 C2 I1 3 2 f U1 C1 Limit value comparison A06250 Defective capacitor(s) in at least one phase of line filter X521.1 100 V r3677[2] X521.2 Rated line freq p0211 + <1> VSM input U_scaler p3660 A U1 AI 2 - x2 x1 + X522.2 X522.3 A U3 AI 3 - r3661 [8850.1] [8950.1] <1> VSM input U_scaler p3660 0.5 s D PT1 smoothing x2 PT1 smoothing x1 y r3662 2-1197 [8850.1] [8950.1] <1> The VECTOR drive object is assigned a dynamic index (p0150). 1 2 3 DO: A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3) 4 5 6 fp_9880_54_eng.vsd 26.06.08 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 9880 - Function diagrams 690 V y U2 0.5 s X522.1 r3677[0] 0.5 s D r3677[1] Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) X521.3 + 9886 - Temperature evaluation X520.6 KTY/PTC Hardware smoothing 1 s <6> <1> - <5> Sensor type p3665 (0) T Software smoothing 0.5 s -140 C A D 4000.00 s 248 C Resistance calculation <6> <1> 2 1 PTC - temp 1 0 -50 C 250 C PTC resistor threshold 1650 Ohm 0 1 Sensor resistance [9887.1] Overtemperature alarm threshold <4> 0...301 [C] <6> p3667[0] (150) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A A34211 "Temperature alarm threshold exceeded" 1 r3664.0 0 <6> Overtemperature hysteresis p3669 F34207 "Temperature fault threshold exceeded" 1 r3664.1 0 <2> Alarm A35920 temperature sensor evaluation Overtemperature fault threshold <4> 0...301 [C] <6> p3668[1] (180) Alarm is not present <1> p3665 = 0: No sensor Alarm is present -300 C = 1: PTC = 2: KTY <2> A fault or alarm in the temperature evaluation of the VSM is communicated to the downstream evaluation using special temperature values. <3> As a result of the wire breakage monitoring the maximum temperature that can be measured is limited to approx. 175 C. <4> A value > 250 C de-activates the alarm or fault. <5> Can only be used with chassis infeeds. <6> The VECTOR drive object is assigned a dynamic index (p0150). 1 2 3 DO: A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - Temperature evaluation 4 5 6 fp_9886_54_eng.vsd 08.06.07 V04.05.00 Temperature KTY r3666 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 9886 - Function diagrams + temp 2 mA <3> KTY Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) Fig. 2-194 2-1198 Temperature sensor X520.5 R Sensor type p3665 (0) Function diagrams Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) 2.26 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) Function diagrams 9912 - Control word interconnection (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 2-1200 2-1199 Refer to [1020.7] Interconnection parameters (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 9912 - Control word interconnection Signal Meaning STW BOP.0 1 = On 0 = OFF (OFF1) p0840[0] = r0019.0 STW BOP.1 1 = No coast down 0 = Coast down (OFF2) p0844[0] = r0019.1 STW BOP.2 1 = No fast stop 0 = Fast stop (OFF3) p0848[0] = r0019.2 STW BOP.3 Reserved - STW BOP.4 Reserved - STW BOP.5 Reserved - STW BOP.6 Reserved - STW BOP.7 = Acknowledge fault p2102[0] = r0019.7 STW BOP.8 Reserved - STW BOP.9 Reserved - STW BOP.10 Reserved - STW BOP.11 Reserved - STW BOP.12 Reserved - STW BOP.13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, raise p1035[0] = r0019.13 STW BOP.14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, lower p1036[0] = r0019.14 STW BOP.15 Reserved - <1> The BICO interconnection represents an example that can be be changed by the user. 1 2 3 4 DO: CU_G, CU_S Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) - Control word interconnection 5 6 fp_9912_54_eng.vsd 16.01.07 V04.05.00 7 Function diagram S120/S150/G130/G150 8 - 9912 - Function diagrams <1> Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) 2-1200 Fig. 2-195 PROFIdrive sampling time Interconnection STW BOP (r0019) Faults and alarms 3 Contents 3.1 Overview of faults and alarms 3-1202 3.2 List of faults and alarms 3-1212 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1201 Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms 3.1 Overview of faults and alarms 3.1.1 General information on faults and alarms Fault and alarm displays If a fault occurs, the drive indicates this by issuing corresponding fault(s) and/or alarm(s). The following methods for displaying faults and alarms are available: * Display via the fault and alarm buffer with PROFIBUS. * Display online via the commissioning software. Differences between faults and alarms The differences between faults and alarms are as follows: Table 3-1 Differences between faults and alarms Type Faults Description What happens when a fault occurs? * The appropriate fault reaction is triggered. * Status signal ZSW1.3 is set. * The fault is entered in the fault buffer. How are faults eliminated? * Remove the original cause of the fault. * Acknowledge the fault. Alarms What happens when an alarm occurs? * Status signal ZSW1.7 is set. * The alarm is entered in the alarm buffer. How are alarms eliminated? * Alarms acknowledge themselves. If the cause of the alarm is no longer present, they automatically reset themselves. 3-1202 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms Fault reactions The following fault reactions are defined: Table 3-2 Fault reactions List NONE PROFIdrive - Reaction None Description No reaction when a fault occurs. Note: When the "Basic positioner" function module is activated (r0108.4 = 1), the following applies: When a fault occurs with fault reaction "NONE", an active traversing task is interrupted and the system switches to tracking mode until the fault has been rectified and acknowledged. OFF1 ON/ OFF Brake along the ramp-function generator deceleration ramp followed by pulse disable Speed control (p1300 = 20, 21) * n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the ramp-function generator deceleration ramp (p1121). * When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if parameters have been assigned for it) is closed (p1215). The pulses are suppressed when the brake closing time (p1217) expires. Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below the threshold (p1226) or if the monitoring time (p1227) started when the speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226) has expired. Closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 23) * The following applies for torque control: Reaction as for OFF2 * When the system switches to torque control with p1501, the following applies: No separate braking reaction. If the actual speed value drops below the speed threshold (p1226) or the timer stage (p1227) has expired, the motor holding brake (if one is being used) is closed. The pulses are suppressed when the brake closing time (p1217) expires. OFF1_ DELAYED - As for OFF1, but delayed Faults with this fault reaction do not become effective until after the delay time set in p3136. The remaining time up to OFF1 is displayed in r3137. OFF2 COAST STOP Internal/external pulse disable Closed-loop speed and torque control * Instantaneous pulse suppression, the drive "coasts" to a standstill. * The motor holding brake (if one is being used) is closed immediately. * "Switching on inhibited" is activated. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1203 Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms Table 3-2 Fault reactions, continued List OFF3 PROFIdrive QUICK STOP Reaction Brake along the OFF3 deceleration ramp followed by pulse disable Description Speed control (p1300 = 20, 21) * n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3 deceleration ramp (p1135). * When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if parameters have been assigned for it) is closed. The pulses are suppressed when the closing time of the holding brake (p1217) expires. Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below the threshold (p1226) or if the monitoring time (p1227) started when the speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226) has expired. * "Switching on inhibited" is activated. Closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 23) * Changeover to speed-controlled operation and other reactions as described for speed-controlled operation. STOP1 - - Under development STOP2 - n_set = 0 * n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3 deceleration ramp (p1135). * The drive remains in speed control mode. IASC/ DCBRAKE - - * For synchronous motors, the following applies: If a fault occurs with this fault reaction, an internal armature short-circuit is triggered. The conditions for p1231 = 4 must be observed. * For induction motors, the following applies: If a fault occurs with this fault reaction, DC braking is triggered. DC braking must have been commissioned (p1232, p1233, p1234). ENCODER - Internal/external pulse disable (p0491) The fault reaction ENCODER is applied as a function of the setting in p0491. Factory setting: p0491 = 0 --> Encoder fault causes OFF2 Notice: When changing p0491, it is imperative that the information in the description of this parameter is carefully observed. 3-1204 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms Acknowledgement of faults The list of faults and alarms specifies how to acknowledge each fault after the cause has been remedied. Table 3-3 Acknowledgement of faults Acknowledgement POWER ON Description The fault is acknowledged by a POWER ON process (switch drive unit off and on again). Note: If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault is displayed again immediately after power up. IMMEDIATELY Faults can be acknowledged on one drive object (Points 1 to 3) or on all drive objects (point 4) as follows: 1 Acknowledge by setting parameter: p3981 = 0 --> 1 2 Acknowledge via binector inputs: p2103 BI: 1. Acknowledge faults p2104 BI: 2. Acknowledge faults p2105 BI: 3. Acknowledge faults 3 Acknowledge using PROFIBUS control signal: STW1.7 = 0 --> 1 (edge) 4 Acknowledge all faults p2102 BI: Acknowledge all faults All of the faults on all of the drive objects of the drive system can be acknowledged using this binector input. Note: * These faults can also be acknowledged by a POWER ON operation. * If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault will continue to be displayed after acknowledgement. * Safety Integrated faults The "Safe standstill" (SH) function must be deselected before these faults are acknowledged. PULSE DISABLE The fault can only be acknowledged with a pulse disable (r0899.11 = 0). The same options are available for acknowledging as described under acknowledgement with IMMEDIATELY. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1205 Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms Saving the fault buffer when switching off The contents of the fault buffer are saved to the non-volatile memory when the Control Unit is switched off, i.e. the fault buffer history is still available when the unit is switched on again. The fault buffer of a drive object comprises the following parameters: * r0945[0...63], r0947[0...63], r0948[0...63], r0949[0...63] * r2109[0...63], r2130[0...63], r2133[0...63], r2136[0...63] The fault buffer contents can be deleted manually as follows: * Delete fault buffer for all drive objects: p2147 = 1 --> p2147 = 0 is automatically set after execution. * Delete fault buffer for a specific drive object: p0952 = 0 --> The parameter belongs to the specified drive object. The fault buffer contents are automatically deleted when the following occurs: * Restore factory setting (p0009 = 30 and p0976 = 1). * Download with modified structure (e.g. number of drive objects changed). * Power-up after other parameter values have been loaded (e.g. p0976 = 10). * Upgrade firmware to later version. 3-1206 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms 3.1.2 Explanation of the list of faults and alarms The data in the following example has been chosen at random. The information listed below is the maximum amount of information that a description can contain. Some of the information is optional. The list of faults and alarms (See Section 3.2) is structured as follows: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Axxxxx (F, N) Fault location (optional): Name Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: List of objects. Reaction: NONE Acknowledgement: NONE Cause: Description of possible causes. Fault value (r0949, interpret format): or alarm value (r2124, interpret format): (optional) Information about fault or alarm values (optional). Remedy: Description of possible remedies. Reaction to F: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1, NONE) SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledgement for F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction to N: NONE Acknowledgement for N: NONE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - End of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Axxxxx Axxxxx (F, N) Fxxxxx Fxxxxx (A, N) Nxxxxx Nxxxxx (A) Cxxxxx Alarm xxxxx Alarm xxxxx (message type can be changed to F or N) Fault xxxxx Fault xxxxx (message type can be changed to F or N) No message No message (message type can be changed to A) Safety message (separate message buffer) A message comprises a letter followed by the relevant number. The meaning of the letters is as follows: * A means "Alarm". * F means "Fault". * N means "No message" or "Internal message" ("No report") * C means "Safety message" The optional brackets indicate whether the type specified for this message can be changed and which message types can be adjusted via parameters (p2118, p2119). Information on reaction and acknowledgement is specified independently for a message with an adjustable message type (e.g. reaction to F, acknowledgement for F). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1207 Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms Note: You can change the default properties of a fault or alarm by setting parameters. The list of faults and alarms (see Section 3.2) provides information in relation to the properties of a message that have been set as standard. If the properties of a specific message are changed, the corresponding information may have to be modified in this list. Fault location (optional): Name The fault location (optional), the name of the fault or alarm and the message number are all used to identify the message (e.g. with the commissioning software). Message value: The information provided under the message value tells you about the composition of the fault/alarm value. Example: Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 This message value contains information about the component number and fault cause. The entries %1 and %2 are placeholders, which are filled appropriately in online operation (e.g. with the commissioning software). Drive object: Each message (fault/alarm) specifies the drive object in which it can be found. A message can belong to either one, several, or all drive objects. Reaction: Default fault reaction (adjustable fault reaction) Specifies the default reaction in the event of a fault. The optional brackets indicate whether the default fault reaction can be changed and which fault reactions can be adjusted via parameters (p2100, p2101). Note: See Section 3.1.1 Acknowledgement: Default acknowledgement (adjustable acknowledgement) Specifies the default method of acknowledging faults after the cause has been eliminated. The optional brackets indicate whether the default acknowledgement can be changed and which acknowledgement can be adjusted via parameters (p2126, p2127). Note: See Section 3.1.1 3-1208 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms Cause: Describes the possible causes of the fault/alarm. A fault or alarm value can also be specified (optional). Fault value (r0949, format): The fault value is entered in the fault buffer in r0949[0...63] and specifies additional, more precise information about a fault. Alarm value (r2124, format): The alarm value specifies additional, more precise information about an alarm. The alarm value is entered in the alarm buffer in r2124[0...7] and specifies additional, more precise information about an alarm. Remedy: Describes the methods available for eliminating the cause of the active fault or alarm. Alarm In certain cases, service and maintenance personnel are responsible for choosing a suitable method to eliminate the cause of faults. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1209 Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms 3.1.3 Number ranges of faults and alarms Note: The following number ranges represent an overview of all faults and alarms used in the SINAMICS drive family. The faults and alarms for the product described in this List Manual are described in detail in Section 3.2. Faults and alarms are organized into the following number ranges: Table 3-4 Number ranges of faults and alarms From To Range 1000 3999 Control Unit 4000 4999 Reserved 5000 5999 Power unit 6000 6899 Infeed 6900 6999 Braking Module 7000 7999 Drive 8000 8999 Option Board 9000 12999 Reserved 13000 13010 Licensing 13002 19999 Reserved 20000 29999 OEM 30000 30999 DRIVE-CLiQ component power unit 31000 31999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 1 32000 32999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 2 Note: Faults that occur are automatically output as an alarm if the encoder is parameterized as a direct measuring system and does not intervene in the motor control. 33000 33999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 3 Note: Faults that occur are automatically output as an alarm if the encoder is parameterized as a direct measuring system and does not intervene in the motor control. 3-1210 34000 34999 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) 35000 35199 Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) 35200 35999 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 36000 36999 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms Overview of faults and alarms Table 3-4 Number ranges of faults and alarms, continued From To Range 40000 40999 Controller Extension 32 (CX32) 41000 48999 Reserved 49000 49999 SINAMICS GM/SM/GL 50000 50499 Communication Board (COMM BOARD) 50500 59999 OEM Siemens 60000 65535 SINAMICS DC MASTER (DC control) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1211 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 3.2 List of faults and alarms Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4502400, Language: eng Objects: B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G F01000 Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - evaluate fault buffer (r0945). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. - replace the Control Unit. F01001 FloatingPoint exception Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An exception occurred during an operation with the FloatingPoint data type. The error may be caused by the base system or an OA application (e.g., FBLOCKS, DCC). Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Note: Refer to r9999 for further information about this fault. r9999[0]: Fault number. r9999[1]: Program counter at the time when the exception occurred. r9999[2]: Cause of the FloatingPoint exception. Bit 0 = 1: Operation invalid Bit 1 = 1: Division by zero Bit 2 = 1: Overflow Bit 3 = 1: Underflow Bit 4 = 1: Imprecise result Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check configuration and signals of the blocks in FBLOCKS. - check configuration and signals of DCC charts. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. F01002 Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. 3-1212 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01003 Acknowledgement delay when accessing the memory Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A memory area was accessed that does not return a "READY". Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - contact the Hotline. N01004 (F, A) Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - read out diagnostics parameter (r9999). - contact the Hotline. See also: r9999 (Software error internal supplementary diagnostics) Reaction upon F: OFF2 Acknowl. upon F: POWER ON Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01005 Firmware download for DRIVE-CLiQ component unsuccessful Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: It was not possible to download the firmware to a DRIVE-CLiQ component. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyxxxx hex: yy = component number, xxxx = fault cause xxxx = 000B hex = 11 dec: DRIVE-CLiQ component has detected a checksum error. xxxx = 000F hex = 15 dec: The selected DRIVE-CLiQ component did not accept the contents of the firmware file. xxxx = 0012 hex = 18 dec: Firmware version is too old and is not accepted by the component. xxxx = 0013 hex = 19 dec: Firmware version is not suitable for the hardware release of the component. xxxx = 0065 hex = 101 dec: After several communication attempts, no response from the DRIVE-CLiQ component. xxxx = 008B hex = 139 dec: Initially, a new boot loader is loaded (must be repeated after POWER ON). xxxx = 008C hex = 140 dec: Firmware file for the DRIVE-CLiQ component not available on the memory card. xxxx = 008D hex = 141 dec: An inconsistent length of the firmware file was signaled. The firmware download may have been caused by a loss of connection to the firmware file. This can occur during a project download/reset in the case of a SINAMICS Integrated Control Unit, for example. xxxx = 008F hex = 143 dec: Component has not changed to the mode for firmware download. It was not possible to delete the existing firmware. xxxx = 0090 hex = 144 dec: When checking the firmware that was downloaded (checksum), the component detected a fault. It is possible that the file on the memory card is defective. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1213 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms xxxx = 0091 hex = 145 dec: Checking the loaded firmware (checksum) was not completed by the component in the appropriate time. xxxx = 009C hex = 156 dec: Component with the specified component number is not available (p7828). xxxx = Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check the selected component number (p7828). - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - save suitable firmware file for download in the directory "/siemens/sinamics/code/sac/". - use a component with a suitable hardware version - after POWER ON has been carried out again for the DRIVE-CLiQ component, download the firmware again. Depending on p7826, the firmware will be automatically downloaded. A01006 Firmware update for DRIVE-CLiQ component required Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The firmware of a DRIVE-CLiQ component must be updated as there is no suitable firmware or firmware version in the component for operation with the Control Unit. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component. Remedy: Firmware update using the commissioning software: The firmware version of all of the components on the "Version overview" page can be read in the Project Navigator under "Configuration" of the associated drive unit and an appropriate firmware update can be carried out. Firmware update via parameter: - take the component number from the alarm value and enter into p7828. - start the firmware download with p7829 = 1. A01007 POWER ON for DRIVE-CLiQ component required Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ component must be powered up again (POWER ON) (e.g. due to a firmware update). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component. Note: For a component number = 1, a POWER ON of the Control Unit is required. Remedy: - Switch off the power supply of the specified DRIVE-CLiQ component and switch it on again. - For SINUMERIK, auto commissioning is prevented. In this case, a POWER ON is required for all components and the auto commissioning must be restarted. A01009 (N) CU: Control module overtemperature Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r0037[0]) of the control module (Control Unit) has exceeded the specified limit value. Remedy: - check the air intake for the Control Unit. - check the Control Unit fan. Note: The alarm automatically disappears after the limit value has been undershot. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1214 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01010 Drive type unknown Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An unknown drive type was found. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Drive object number (refer to p0101, p0107). Remedy: - replace Power Module. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. F01011 (N) Download interrupted Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The project download was interrupted. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The user prematurely interrupted the project download. 2: The communication cable was interrupted (e.g. cable breakage, cable withdrawn). 3: The project download was prematurely ended by the commissioning software (e.g. STARTER, SCOUT). 100: Different versions between the firmware version and project files which were loaded by loading into the file system "Download from card". Note: The response to an interrupted download is the state "first commissioning". Remedy: - check the communication cable. - download the project again. - boot from previously saved files (power-down/power-up or p0976). - when loading into the file system (download from card), use the matching version. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F01012 (N) Project conversion error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When converting the project of an older firmware version, an error occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number of the parameter causing the error. For fault value = 600, the following applies: The temperature evaluation is no longer assigned to the power unit but to the encoder evaluation. Notice: Monitoring of the motor temperature is no longer ensured. Remedy: Check the parameter indicated in the fault value and correctly adjust it accordingly. For fault value = 600: Parameter p0600 must be set to the values 1, 2 or 3 in accordance with the assignment of the internal encoder evaluation to the encoder interface. Value 1 means: The internal encoder evaluation is assigned to the encoder interface 1 via p0187. Value 2 means: The internal encoder evaluation is assigned to the encoder interface 2 via p0188. Value 3 means: The internal encoder evaluation is assigned to the encoder interface 3 via p0189. - If necessary, the internal encoder evaluation must be assigned to an encoder interface via parameters p0187, p0188 or p0189 accordingly. - If necessary, upgrade the firmware to a later version. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1215 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01015 Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. A01016 (F) Firmware changed Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: At least one firmware file in the directory was illegally changed on the non-volatile memory (memory card/device memory) with respect to the version when shipped from the factory. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 0: Checksum of one file is incorrect. 1: File missing. 2: Too many files. 3: Incorrect firmware version. 4: Incorrect checksum of the back-up file. Remedy: For the non-volatile memory for the firmware (memory card/device memory), restore the delivery condition. Note: The file involved can be read out using parameter r9925. The status of the firmware check is displayed using r9926. See also: r9925 (Firmware file incorrect), r9926 (Firmware check status) Reaction upon F: OFF2 Acknowl. upon F: POWER ON A01017 Component lists changed Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: On the memory card, one file in the directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA or /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA has been illegally changed with respect to that supplied from the factory. No changes are permitted in this directory. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): zyx dec: x = Problem, y = Directory, z = File name x = 1: File does not exist. x = 2: Firmware version of the file does not match the software version. x = 3: File checksum is incorrect. y = 0: Directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/ y = 1: Directory /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA/ z = 0: File MOTARM.ACX z = 1: File MOTSRM.ACX z = 2: File MOTSLM.ACX z = 3: File ENCDATA.ACX z = 4: File FILTDATA.ACX z = 5: File BRKDATA.ACX z = 6: File DAT_BEAR.ACX z = 7: File CFG_BEAR.ACX z = 8: File ENC_GEAR.ACX Remedy: For the file on the memory card involved, restore the status originally supplied from the factory. 3-1216 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01020 Writing to RAM disk unsuccessful Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A write access to the internal RAM disk was unsuccessful. Remedy: Adapt the file size for the system logbook to the internal RAM disk (p9930). See also: p9930 (System logbook activation) F01023 Software timeout (internal) Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An internal software timeout has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. F01030 Sign-of-life failure for master control Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF3 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For active PC master control, no sign-of-life was received within the monitoring time. The master control was returned to the active BICO interconnection. Remedy: Set the monitoring time higher at the PC or, if required, completely disable the monitoring function. For the commissioning software, the monitoring time is set as follows: <Drive> -> Commissioning -> Control panel -> Button "Fetch master control" -> A window is displayed to set the monitoring time in milliseconds. Notice: The monitoring time should be set as short as possible. A long monitoring time means a late response when the communication fails! F01031 Sign-of-life failure for OFF in REMOTE Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF3 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: With the "OFF in REMOTE" mode active, no sign-of-life was received within 3 seconds. Remedy: - Check the data cable connection at the serial interface for the Control Unit (CU) and operator panel. - Check the data cable between the Control Unit and operator panel. A01032 (F) ACX: all parameters must be saved Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The parameters of an individual drive object were saved (p0971 = 1), although there is still no backup of all drive system parameters. The saved object-specific parameters are not loaded the next time that the system powers up. For the system to successfully power up, all of the parameters must have been completely backed up. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1217 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: p0971 (Save drive object parameters) Remedy: Save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM"). See also: p0977 (Save all parameters) Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F01033 Units changeover: Reference parameter value invalid Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When changing over the units to the referred representation type, it is not permissible for any of the required reference parameters to be equal to 0.0 Fault value (r0949, parameter): Reference parameter whose value is 0.0. See also: p0349 (System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data), p0505 (Selecting the system of units), p0595 (Technological unit selection) Remedy: Set the value of the reference parameter to a number different than 0.0. See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004 F01034 Units changeover: Calculation parameter values after reference value change unsuccessful Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The change of a reference parameter meant that for an involved parameter the selected value was not able to be recalculated in the per unit representation. The change was rejected and the original parameter value restored. Fault value (r0949, parameter): Parameter whose value was not able to be re-calculated. See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004 Remedy: Select the value of the reference parameter such that the parameter involved can be calculated in the per unit representation. See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004 A01035 (F) ACX: Parameter back-up file corrupted Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When the Control Unit is booted, no complete data set was found from the parameter back-up files. The last time that the parameterization was saved, it was not completely carried out. It is possible that the backup was interrupted by switching off or withdrawing the memory card. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: aa = 01 hex: Power up was realized without data backup. The drive is in the factory setting. aa = 02 hex: The last available backup data record was loaded. The parameterization must be checked. It is recommended that the parameterization is downloaded again. dd, cc, bb: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: p0971 (Save drive object parameters), p0977 (Save all parameters) Remedy: - Download the project again with the commissioning software. - save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM"). See also: p0977 (Save all parameters) 3-1218 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F01036 (A) ACX: Parameter back-up file missing Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When downloading the device parameterization, a parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.ACX associated with a drive object cannot be found. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file Byte 2, 3, 4: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: If you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, carry out a new download for your project. Save using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely written to the non-volatile memory. If you have not saved the project data, then first commissioning of the system has to be carried out again. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01038 (A) ACX: Loading the parameter back-up file unsuccessful Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An error has occurred when downloading PSxxxyyy.ACX or PTxxxyyy.ACX files from the non-volatile memory. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file Byte 2: 255: Incorrect drive object type. 254: Topology comparison unsuccessful -> drive object type was not able to be identified. Reasons could be: - Incorrect component type in the actual topology - Component does not exist in the actual topology. - Component not active. Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Byte 4, 3: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - If you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, download the project again. Save using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely written to the non-volatile memory. - replace the memory card or Control Unit. Re byte 2 = 255: - Correct the drive object type (see p0107). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1219 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01039 (A) ACX: Writing to the parameter back-up file was unsuccessful Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Writing to at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** in the non-volatile memory was unsuccessful. - In the directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/ at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** has the "read only" file attribute and cannot be overwritten. - There is not sufficient free memory space available. - The non-volatile memory is defective and cannot be written to. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): dcba hex a = yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.*** a = 000 --> consistency back-up file a = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number a = 070 --> FEPROM.BIN a = 080 --> DEL4BOOT.TXT a = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file b = xxx in the file names PSxxxyyy.*** b = 000 --> data save started with p0977 = 1 or p0971 = 1 b = 010 --> data save started with p0977 = 10 b = 011 --> data save started with p0977 = 11 b = 012 --> data save started with p0977 = 12 d, c: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check the file attribute of the files (PSxxxyyy.***, CAxxxyyy.***, CCxxxyyy.***) and, if required, change from "read only" to "writeable". - check the free memory space in the non-volatile memory. Approx. 80 kbyte of free memory space is required for every drive object in the system. - replace the memory card or Control Unit. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01040 Save parameter settings and carry out a POWER ON Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: A parameter was changed in the drive system which means that it is necessary to save the parameters and re-boot. Remedy: - save the parameters (p0971/p0977). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. Then: - upload the drive unit (commissioning software). F01040 Save parameter settings and carry out a POWER ON Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: A parameter was changed in the drive system which means that it is necessary to save the parameters and re-boot. Examples: - p1810.2 (wobulation of the pulse frequency) and p1802 (edge modulation) - p1750.5 (cl.-loop control mode PESM up to f=0Hz with HF signal injection) 3-1220 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - save the parameters (p0971/p0977). - carry out a POWER ON for all components (switch-on the Control Unit with or after the power units). When changing p1750.5 or p1810.2 for edge modulation, a warm restart is sufficient (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 3). Then: - upload the drive unit (commissioning software). F01041 Parameter save necessary Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Defective or missing files were detected on the memory card when booting. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Source file cannot be opened. 2: Source file cannot be read. 3: Target directory cannot be set up. 4. Target file cannot be set up/opened. 5. Target file cannot be written to. Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - save the parameters. - download the project again to the drive unit. - update the firmware - if required, replace the Control Unit and/or memory card card. F01042 Parameter error during project download Message value: Parameter: %1, Index: %2, fault cause: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software (e.g. incorrect parameter value). For the specified parameter, it was detected that dynamic limits were exceeded that may possibly depend on other parameters. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ccbbaaaa hex aaaa = Parameter bb = Index cc = fault cause 0: Parameter number illegal. 1: Parameter value cannot be changed. 2: Lower or upper value limit exceeded. 3: Sub-index incorrect. 4: No array, no sub-index. 5: Data type incorrect. 6: Setting not permitted (only resetting). 7: Descriptive element cannot be changed. 9: Descriptive data not available. 11: No master control. 15: No text array available. 17: Task cannot be executed due to operating state. 20: Illegal value. 21: Response too long. 22: Parameter address illegal. 23: Format illegal. 24: Number of values not consistent. 25: Drive object does not exist. 101: Presently de-activated. 104: Illegal value. 107: Write access not permitted when controller enabled. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1221 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 108: Unit unknown. 109: Write access only in the commissioning state, encoder (p0010 = 4). 110: Write access only in the commissioning state, motor (p0010 = 3). 111: Write access only in the commissioning state, power unit (p0010 = 2). 112: Write access only in the quick commissioning mode (p0010 = 1). 113: Write access only in the ready mode (p0010 = 0). 114: Write access only in the commissioning state, parameter reset (p0010 = 30). 115: Write access only in the Safety Integrated commissioning state (p0010 = 95). 116: Write access only in the commissioning state, technological application/units (p0010 = 5). 117: Write access only in the commissioning state (p0010 not equal to 0). 118: Write access only in the commissioning state, download (p0010 = 29). 119: Parameter may not be written in download. 120: Write access only in the commissioning state, drive basic configuration (device: p0009 = 3). 121: Write access only in the commissioning state, define drive type (device: p0009 = 2). 122: Write access only in the commissioning state, data set basic configuration (device: p0009 = 4). 123: Write access only in the commissioning state, device configuration (device: p0009 = 1). 124: Write access only in the commissioning state, device download (device: p0009 = 29). 125: Write access only in the commissioning state, device parameter reset (device: p0009 = 30). 126: Write access only in the commissioning state, device ready (device: p0009 = 0). 127: Write access only in the commissioning state, device (device: p0009 not equal to 0). 129: Parameter may not be written in download. 130: Transfer of the master control is inhibited via binector input p0806. 131: Required BICO interconnection not possible because BICO output does not supply floating value 132: Free BICO interconnection inhibited via p0922. 133: Access method not defined. 200: Below the valid values. 201: Above the valid values. 202: Cannot be accessed from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). 203: Cannot be read from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP). 204: Write access not permitted. Remedy: - enter the correct value in the specified parameter. - identify the parameter that restricts the limits of the specified parameter. F01043 Fatal error at project download Message value: Fault cause: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fatal error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Device status cannot be changed to Device Download (drive object ON?). 2: Incorrect drive object number. 3: A drive object that has already been deleted is deleted again. 4: Deleting of a drive object that has already been registered for generation. 5: Deleting a drive object that does not exist. 6: Generating an undeleted drive object that already existed. 7: Regenerating a drive object already registered for generation. 8: Maximum number of drive objects that can be generated exceeded. 9: Error while generating a device drive object. 10: Error while generating target topology parameters (p9902 and p9903). 11: Error while generating a drive object (global component). 12: Error while generating a drive object (drive component). 13: Unknown drive object type. 14: Drive status cannot be changed to "ready for operation" (p0947 and p0949). 15: Drive status cannot be changed to drive download. 16: Device status cannot be changed to "ready for operation". 17: It is not possible to download the topology. The component wiring should be checked, taking into account the various messages/signals. 18: A new download is only possible if the factory settings are restored for the drive unit. 19: The slot for the option module has been configured several times (e.g. CAN and COMM BOARD) 3-1222 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 20: The configuration is inconsistent (e.g. CAN for Control Unit, however no CAN configured for drive objects A_INF, SERVO or VECTOR ). 21: Error when accepting the download parameters. 22: Software-internal download error. Additional values: only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - use the current version of the commissioning software. - modify the offline project and carry out a new download (e.g. compare the number of drive objects, motor, encoder, power unit in the offline project and at the drive). - change the drive state (is a drive rotating or is there a message/signal?). - carefully note any other messages/signals and remove their cause. - boot from previously saved files (power-down/power-up or p0976). F01044 CU: Descriptive data error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An error was detected when loading the descriptive data saved in the non-volatile memory. Remedy: Replace the memory card or Control Unit. A01045 CU: Configuring data invalid Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the parameter files PSxxxyyy.ACX, PTxxxyyy.ACX, CAxxxyyy.ACX, or CCxxxyyy.ACX saved in the non-volatile memory. Because of this, under certain circumstances, several of the saved parameter values were not able to be accepted. Also see r9406 up to r9408. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - Check the parameters displayed in r9406 up to r9408, and correct these if required. - Restore the factory setting using (p0976 = 1) and re-load the project into the drive unit. Then save the parameterization in STARTER using the "Copy RAM to ROM" function or with p0977 = 1. This overwrites the incorrect parameter files in the non-volatile memory - and the alarm is withdrawn. A01049 CU: It is not possible to write to file Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: It is not possible to write into a write-protected file (PSxxxxxx.acx). The write request was interrupted. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Drive object number. Remedy: Check whether the "write protected" attribute has been set for the files in the non-volatile memory under .../USER/SINAMICS/DATA/... When required, remove write protection and save again (e.g. set p0977 to 1). F01050 Memory card and device incompatible Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The memory card and the device type do not match (e.g. a memory card for SINAMICS S is inserted in SINAMICS G). Remedy: - insert the matching memory card. - use the matching Control Unit or power unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1223 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01054 CU: System limit exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: At least one system overload has been identified. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Computing time load too high (r9976[1]). 5: Peak load too high (r9976[5]). See also: r9976 (System utilization) Remedy: Re fault value = 1, 5: - reduce the computing time load of the drive unit (r9976[1] and r9976[5]) to under 100 %. - check the sampling times and adjust if necessary (p0115, p0799, p4099). - de-activate function modules. - de-activate drive objects. - remove drive objects from the target topology. - note the DRIVE-CLiQ topology rules and if required, change the DRIVE-CLiQ topology. When using the Drive Control Chart (DCC) or free function blocks (FBLOCKS), the following applies - the computing time load of the individual run-time groups on a drive object can be read out in r21005 (DCC) or r20005 (FBLOCKS). - if necessary, the assignment of the run-time group (p21000, p20000) can be changed in order to increase the sampling time (r21001, r20001). - if necessary, reduce the number of cyclically calculated blocks (DCC) and/or function blocks (FBLOCKS). F01055 CU: Internal error (SYNO of port and application not identical) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: All applications that operate with slaves at one port must be derived from the same SYNO clock cycle. The first application whose registration (log-on) connects a slave to a port defines the SYNO clock cycle that will be used as basis for the port. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Method ID. Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Contact the Hotline. F01056 CU: Internal error (clock cycle of parameter group already assigned differently) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The requested parameter group (IREG, NREG, ...) is already being used in a different clock cycle. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Method ID. Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Contact the Hotline. F01057 CU: Internal error (different DRIVE-CLiQ type for the slave) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The requested DRIVE-CLiQ type (hps_ps, hps_enc, ...) has been specified differently for the same slave component. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Method ID. 3-1224 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Contact the Hotline. F01058 CU: Internal error (slave missing in topology) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The requested slave component does not exist in the topology. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Method ID. Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Contact the Hotline. F01059 CU: Internal error (port does not exist) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The port object assigned according to the topology of the requested slave component does not exist. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Method ID. Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Contact the Hotline. F01060 CU: Internal error (parameter group not available) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The requested parameter group (IREG, NREG, ...) is not offered by this slave type. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Method ID. Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Contact the Hotline. F01061 CU: Internal error (application not known) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An application that is not registered with TSM has attempted to register with registerSlaves(). The cause can be an unsuccessful TSM registration or an incorrect registration sequence. It is always necessary to log in to the TSM before registerSlaves() can be used. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Method ID. Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Contact the Hotline. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1225 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01063 CU: Internal error (PDM) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Method ID. Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Contact the Hotline. A01064 (F) CU: Internal error (CRC) Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: CRC error in the Control Unit program memory Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F01068 CU: Data memory, memory overflow Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The utilization for a data memory area is too large. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: High-speed data memory 1 overloaded Bit 1 = 1: High-speed data memory 2 overloaded Bit 2 = 1: High-speed data memory 3 overloaded Bit 3 = 1: High-speed data memory 4 overloaded Remedy: - de-activate the function module. - de-activate drive object. - remove the drive object from the target topology. A01069 Parameter backup and device incompatible Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The parameter backup on the memory card and the drive unit do not match. The module boots with the factory settings. Example: Devices A and B. are not compatible and a memory card with the parameter backup for device A is inserted in device B. Remedy: - insert a memory card with compatible parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON. - insert a memory card without parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON. - save the parameters (p0977 = 1). 3-1226 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01070 Project/firmware is being downloaded to the memory card Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An upgrade (project/firmware download) was initiated on the memory card. While this fault is present, the corresponding update takes place with plausibility and consistency checks. After this, depending on the command option, a new boot (reset) for the Control Unit is initiated. Caution: During the upgrade and while this fault is present, it is not permissible to switch off the Control Unit. If the operation is interrupted, this can destroy the file system on the memory card. The memory card will then no longer work properly and must be repaired. Remedy: Not necessary. The fault automatically disappears after the upgrade has been completed. A01099 Tolerance window of time synchronization exited Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The time master exited the selected tolerance window for time synchronization. See also: p3109 (RTC real time synchronization, tolerance window) Remedy: Select the re-synchronization interval so that the synchronization deviation between the time master and drive system lies within the tolerance window. See also: r3108 (RTC last synchronization deviation) A01100 CU: Memory card withdrawn Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The memory card (non-volatile memory) was withdrawn during operation. Notice: It is not permissible for the memory card to be withdrawn or inserted under voltage. Remedy: - power down the drive system. - re-insert the memory card that was withdrawn - this card must match the drive system. - power up the drive system again. F01105 (A) CU: Insufficient memory Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: Too many functions have been configured on this Control Unit (e.g. too many drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications, blocks, etc). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - change the configuration on this Control Unit (e.g. fewer drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications, blocks, etc). - use an additional Control Unit. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1227 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01106 CU: Insufficient memory Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: There is not sufficient free memory space available. Remedy: Not necessary. F01107 CU: Data save in the non-volatile memory unsuccessful Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A data save in the non-volatile memory was not able to be successfully carried out. - non-volatile memory is defective. - insufficient space in the non-volatile memory. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - try to save again. - replace the memory card or Control Unit. F01110 CU: More than one SINAMICS G on one Control Unit Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: More than one SINAMICS G type power unit is being operated from the Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of the second drive with a SINAMICS G type power unit. Remedy: Only one SINAMICS G drive type is permitted. F01111 CU: Mixed operation of drive units illegal Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Illegal operation of various drive units on one Control Unit: - SINAMICS S together with SINAMICS G - SINAMICS S together with SINAMICS S Value or Combi Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of the first drive object with a different power unit type. Remedy: Only power units of one particular drive type may be operated with one Control Unit. F01112 CU: Power unit not permissible Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The connected power unit cannot be used together with this Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Power unit is not supported (e.g. PM240). 2: DC/AC power unit connected to CU310 not permissible. 3: Power unit (S120M) not permitted for vector control. Remedy: Replace the power unit that is not permissible by a component that is permissible. 3-1228 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01120 (A) Terminal initialization has failed Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: An internal software error occurred while the terminal functions were being initialized. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. - replace the Control Unit. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01122 (A) Frequency at the measuring probe input too high Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input is too high. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: DI/DO 9 (X122.8) 2: DI/DO 10 (X122.10) 4: DI/DO 11 (X122.11) 8: DI/DO 13 (X132.8) 16: DI/DO 14 (X132.10) 32: DI/DO 15 (X132.11) 64: DI/DO 8 (X122.7) 128: DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Remedy: Reduce the frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01150 CU: Number of instances of a drive object type exceeded Message value: Drive object type: %1, number permitted: %2, actual number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The maximum permissible number of instances of a drive object type was exceeded. Drive object type: Drive object type (p0107), for which the maximum permissible number of instances was exceeded. Number permitted: Max. permissible number of instances for this drive object type. Actual number: Current number of instances for this drive object type. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): ddccbbaa hex: aa = drive object type, bb = number limited, cc = actual number, dd = no significance Remedy: - power down the unit. - suitably restrict the number of instances of a drive object type by reducing the number of inserted components. - re-commission the unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1229 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01151 CU: Number of drive objects of a category exceeded Message value: Drive object category: %1, number permitted: %2, actual number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The maximum permissible number of drive objects of a category was exceeded. Drive object category: Drive object category, for which the maximum permissible number of drive objects was exceeded. Number permitted: Max. permissible number for this drive object category. Actual number: Actual number for this drive object category. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): ddccbbaa hex: aa = drive object category, bb = number limited, cc = actual number, dd = no significance Remedy: - power down the unit. - suitably restrict the number of drive objects of the specified category by reducing the number of inserted components. - re-commission the unit. F01200 CU: Time slice management internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A time slice management error has occurred. It is possible that the sampling times have been inadmissibly set. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 998: Too many time slices occupied by OA (e.g. DCC). 999: Too many time slices occupied by the basic system. Too many different sampling times may have been set. Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check the sampling time setting (p0112, p0115, p4099, p9500, p9511). - contact the Hotline. F01205 CU: Time slice overflow Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: Insufficient processing time is available for the existing topology. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - reduce the number of drives. - increase the sampling times. F01221 CU: Bas clk cyc too low Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The closed-loop control / monitoring cannot maintain the envisaged clock cycle. The runtime of the closed-loop control/monitoring is too long for the particular clock cycle or the computing time remaining in the system is not sufficient for the closed-loop control/monitoring. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. 3-1230 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Increase the basic clock cycle of DRIVE-CLiQ communication. See also: p0112 (Sampling times pre-setting p0115) F01222 CU: Basic clock cycle too low (computing time for communication not available) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A time slice has not been defined that fulfills the requirements. The port cannot be correctly operated as the alternating cyclic clock cycle cannot be maintained. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Method ID. Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Contact the Hotline. A01223 CU: Sampling time inconsistent Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When changing a sampling time (p0115[0], p0799 or p4099), inconsistency between the clock cycles has been identified. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Value lower than minimum value. 2: Value higher than maximum value. 3: Value not a multiple of 1.25 s. 4: Value does not match clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation. 5: Value not a multiple of 125 s. 6: Value not a multiple of 250 s. 7: Value not a multiple of 375 s. 8: Value not a multiple of 400 s. 10: Special restriction of the drive object violated. 20: On a SERVO with a sampling time of 62.5 s, more than two drive objects or one drive object of a type other than SERVO have been detected on the same DRIVE-CLiQ line (a maximum of two SERVO type drive objects are permitted). 21: Value can be a multiple of the current controller sampling time of a servo or vector drive in the system (e.g. for TB30, the values of all of the indices should be taken into account). 30: Value less than 31.25 s. 31: Value less than 62.5 s (31.25 s is not supported for SMC10, SMC30, SMI10 and Double Motor Modules). 32: Value less than 125 s. 33: Value less than 250 s. 40: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times is less than 125 s. Further, none of the nodes has a sampling time of less than 125 s. 41: A chassis unit was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common denominator of the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is less than 250 s. 42: An Active Line Module was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common denominator of the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is less than 125 s. 43: A Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common denominator of the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is not equal to the current controller sampling time of the drive object of the VSM. 44: The highest common denominator of the sampling times of all of the components connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ line is not the same for all components of this drive object (e.g. there are components on different DRIVE-CLiQ lines on which different highest common denominators are generated). 45: A chassis parallel unit was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common denominator of the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is less than 162.5 s or 187.5 s (for a 2 or 3x parallel connection). 46: A node has been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose sampling time is not a multiple of the lowest sampling time on this line. 52: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times is less than 31.25 s. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1231 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 54: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times is less than 62.5 s. 56: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times is less than 125 s. 58: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times is less than 250 s. 99: Inconsistency of cross drive objects detected. 116: Recommended clock cycle in r0116[0...1]. General note: The topology rules should be noted when connecting up DRIVE-CLiQ (refer to the appropriate product documentation). The parameters of the sampling times can also be changed with automatic calculations. Example for highest common denominator: 125 s, 125 s, 62.5 s --> 62.5 s Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - set a valid sampling time. See also: p0115, p0799, p4099 A01224 CU: Pulse frequency inconsistent Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When changing the minimum pulse frequency (p0113) inconsistency between the pulse frequencies was identified. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Value lower than minimum value. 2: Value higher than maximum value. 3: Resulting sampling time is not a multiple of 1.25 s. 4: Value does not match clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation. 10: Special restriction of the drive object violated. 99: Inconsistency of cross drive objects detected. 116: Recommended clock cycle in r0116[0...1]. Remedy: Set a valid pulse frequency. See also: p0113 (Minimum pulse frequency, selection) F01250 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-only data Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE (OFF2) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the Control Unit. A01251 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-write data Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: For alarm value r2124 < 256, the following applies: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the Control Unit. For alarm value r2124 >= 256, the following applies: - for the drive object with this alarm, clear the fault memory (p0952 = 0). 3-1232 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - as an alternative, clear the fault memory of all drive objects (p2147 = 1). - replace the Control Unit. F01255 CU: Option Board EEPROM read-only data error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE (OFF2) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the Option Board. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the Control Unit. A01256 CU: Option Board EEPROM read-write data error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the Option Board. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the Control Unit. F01303 DRIVE-CLiQ component does not support the required function Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A function requested by the Control Unit is not supported by a DRIVE-CLiQ component. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The component does not support the de-activation. 101: The Motor Module does not support an internal armature short-circuit. 102: The Motor Module does not support the de-activation. 201: The Sensor Module does not support actual value inversion (p0410.0 = 1) when using a Hall sensor (p0404.6 = 1) for the commutation. 202: The Sensor Module does not support parking/unparking. 203: The Sensor Module does not support the de-activation. 204: The firmware of this Terminal Module 15 (TM15) does not support the application TM15DI/DO. 205: The Sensor Module does not support the selected temperature evaluation (r0458). 206: The firmware of this Terminal Modules TM41/TM31/TM15 refers to an old firmware version. It is urgently necessary to upgrade the firmware to ensure disturbance-free operation. 207: The power unit with this hardware version does not support operation with device supply voltages of less than 380 V. 208: The Sensor Module does not support de-selection of commutation with zero mark (via p0430.23). 211: The Sensor Module does not support single-track encoders (r0459.10). 212: The Sensor Module does not support LVDT sensors (p4677.0). 213: The Sensor Module does not support the characteristic type (p4662). Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved. For fault value = 205: Check parameter p0600 and p0601 and if required, adapt interpretation. For fault value = 207: Replace the power unit or if required set the device supply voltage higher (p0210). For fault value = 208: Check parameter p0430.23 and reset if necessary. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1233 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01304 (F) Firmware version of DRIVE-CLiQ component is not up-to-date Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The non-volatile memory has a more recent firmware version than the one in the connected DRIVE-CLiQ component. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved. Remedy: Update the firmware (p7828, p7829 and commissioning software). Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F01305 Topology: Component number missing Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The component number from the topology was not parameterized (p0121 (for power unit, refer to p0107), p0131 (for servo/vector drives, refer to p0107), p0141, p0151, p0161). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Data set number. Note: The fault also occurs if speed encoders have been configured (p0187 to p0189) but no component numbers exist for them. In this case, the fault value includes the drive data set number plus 100 * encoder number (e.g. 3xx, if a component number was not entered in p0141 for the third encoder (p0189)). See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189 Remedy: Enter the missing component number or remove the component and restart commissioning. See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189 A01306 Firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ component being updated Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Firmware update is active for at least one DRIVE-CLiQ component. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component. Remedy: Not necessary. This alarm automatically disappears after the firmware has been updated. A01314 Topology: Component must not be present Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For a component, "de-activate and not present" is set but this component is still in the topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: aa = component number bb = component class of the component cc = connection number Note: Component class and connection number are described in F01375. 3-1234 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - remove the corresponding component. - change the setting "de-activate and not present". Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). See also: p0105, p0125, p0145, p0155 A01315 Drive object not ready for operation Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the active drive object involved, at least one activated component is missing. Note: All other active and operational drive objects can be in the "RUN" state. Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears again with the following actions: - de-activate the drive object involved (p0105 = 0). - de-activate the components involved (p0125 = 0, p0145 = 0, p0155 = 0, p0165 = 0). - re-insert the components involved. See also: p0105, p0125, p0145, p0155 A01316 Drive object inactive and again ready for operation Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: If, when inserting a component of the target topology, an inactive, non-operational drive object becomes operational again. The associated parameter of the component is, in this case, set to "activate" (p0125, p0145, p0155, p0165). Note: This is the only message that is displayed for a de-activated drive object. Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears again with the following actions: - activate the drive object involved (p0105 = 1). - again withdraw the components involved. See also: p0105 (Activate/de-activate drive object) A01317 (N) De-activated component again present Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: If a component of the target topology for an active drive object is inserted and the associated parameter of the component is set to "de-activate" (p0125, p0145, p0155, p0165). Note: This is the only message that is displayed for a de-activated component. Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears again with the following actions: - activate the components involved (p0125 = 1, p0145 = 1, p0155 = 1, p0165 = 1). - again withdraw the components involved. See also: p0125 (Activate/de-activate power unit components), p0145 (Activate/de-activate encoder interface), p0155 (Voltage Sensing Module, activate/de-activate) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1235 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01318 BICO: De-activated interconnections present Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: This alarm is used in the following cases: - If an inactive/non-operational drive object is active again/ready for operation - If there are items in the list of BI/CI parameters (r9498[0...29], r9499[0...29]) - If the BICO interconnections saved in the list of BI/CI parameters (r9498[0...29], r9499[0...29]) have actually been changed Remedy: Reset alarm: - Set p9496 to 1 or 2 or - de-activate the drive object again. A01319 Inserted component not initialized Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Initialization is required for at least one inserted component. This is only possible if the pulses are inhibited for all the drive objects. Remedy: Activate pulse inhibit for all drive objects. A01320 Topology: Drive object number does not exist in configuration Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A drive object number is missing in p0978 Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Index of p0101 under which the missing drive object number can be determined. Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978: Rules: - p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101). - it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated. - by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD. - only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0. - dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list. A01321 Topology: Drive object number does not exist in configuration Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: p0978 contains a drive object number that does not exist. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Index of p0978 under which the drive object number can be determined. Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978: Rules: - p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101). - it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated. - by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD. - only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0. - dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list. 3-1236 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01322 Topology: Drive object number present twice in configuration Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A drive object number is present more than once in p0978. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Index of p0978 under which the involved drive object number is located. Remedy: Set parameter p0009 = 1 and change p0978: Rules: - p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101). - it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated. - by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD. - only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0. - dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list. A01323 Topology: More than two partial lists created Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Partial lists are available more than twice in p0978. After the second 0, all must be 0. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Index of p0978 under which the illegal value is located. Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978: Rules: - p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101). - it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated. - by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD. - only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0. - dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list. A01324 Topology: Dummy drive object number incorrectly created Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In p0978, dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Index of p0978 under which the illegal value is located. Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978: Rules: - p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101). - it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated. - by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD. - only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0. - dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list. F01325 Topology: Component number not present in target topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The component configured in a parameter (e.g. p0121, p0131, etc.) is not present in the target topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Configured component number that is not present in target topology. Remedy: Establish topology and DO configuration consistency. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1237 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01330 Topology: Quick commissioning not possible Message value: Fault cause: %1, supplementary information: %2, preliminary component number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Unable to carry out a quick commissioning. The existing actual topology does not fulfill the requirements. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ccccbbaa hex: cccc = preliminary component number, bb = supplementary information, aa = fault cause aa = 01 hex = 1 dec: On one component illegal connections were detected. - bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: For a Motor Module, more than one motor with DRIVE-CLiQ was detected. - bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, the DRIVE-CLiQ cable is not connected to a Motor Module. aa = 02 hex = 2 dec: The topology contains too many components of a particular type. - bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: There is more than one master Control Unit. - bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: There is more than 1 infeed (8 for a parallel circuit configuration). - bb = 03 hex = 3 dec: There are more than 10 Motor Modules (8 for a parallel circuit configuration). - bb = 04 hex = 4 dec: There are more than 9 encoders. - bb = 05 hex = 5 dec: There are more than 8 Terminal Modules. - bb = 07 hex = 7 dec: Unknown component type - bb = 08 hex = 8 dec: There are more than 6 drive slaves. - bb = 09 hex = 9 dec: Connection of a drive slave not permitted. - bb = 0a hex = 10 dec: There is no drive master. - bb = 0b hex = 11 dec: There is more than one motor with DRIVE-CLiQ for a parallel circuit. - bb = 0c hex = 12 dec: Different power units are being used in a parallel connection. - cccc: Not used. aa = 03 hex = 3 dec: More than 16 components are connected at a DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the Control Unit. - bb = 0, 1, 2, 3 means e.g. detected at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100, X101, X102, X103. - cccc: Not used. aa = 04 hex = 4 dec: The number of components connected one after the other is greater than 125. - bb: Not used. - cccc = preliminary component number of the first component and component that resulted in the fault. aa = 05 hex = 5 dec: The component is not permissible for SERVO. - bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: SINAMICS G available. - bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: Chassis available. - cccc = preliminary component number of the first component and component that resulted in the fault. aa = 06 hex = 6 dec: On one component illegal EEPROM data was detected. These must be corrected before the system continues to boot. - bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: The Order No. [MLFB] of the power unit that was replaced includes a space retainer. The space retainer (*) must be replaced by a correct character. - cccc = preliminary component number of the component with illegal EEPROM data. aa = 07 hex = 7 dec: The actual topology contains an illegal combination of components. - bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: Active Line Module (ALM) and Basic Line Module (BLM). - bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: Active Line Module (ALM) and Smart Line Module (SLM). - bb = 03 hex = 3 dec: SIMOTION control (e.g. SIMOTION D445) and SINUMERIK component (e.g. NX15). - bb = 04 hex = 4 dec: SINUMERIK control (e.g. SINUMERIK 730.net) and SIMOTION component (e.g. CX32). - cccc: Not used. Note: Connection type and connection number are described in F01375. See also: p0097 (Select drive object type), r0098 (Actual device topology), p0099 (Device target topology) Remedy: - adapt the output topology to the permissible requirements. - carry out commissioning using the commissioning software. - for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ, connect the power and DRIVE-CLiQ cable to the same Motor Module (Single Motor Module: DRIVE-CLiQ at X202, Double Motor Module: DRIVE-CLiQ from motor 1 (X1) to X202, from motor 2 (X2) to X203). 3-1238 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re aa = 06 hex = 6 dec and bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: Correct the order number when commissioning using the commissioning software. See also: p0097 (Select drive object type), r0098 (Actual device topology), p0099 (Device target topology) A01331 Topology: At least one component not assigned to a drive object Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: At least one component is not assigned to a drive object. - when commissioning, a component was not able to be automatically assigned to a drive object. - the parameters for the data sets are not correctly set. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the unassigned component. Remedy: This component is assigned to a drive object. Check the parameters for the data sets. Examples: - power unit (p0121). - motor (p0131, p0186). - encoder interface (p0140, p0141, p0187 ... p0189). - encoder (p0140, p0142, p0187 ... p0189). - Terminal Module (p0151). - option board (p0161). F01340 Topology: Too many components on one line Message value: Component number or connection number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For the selected communications clock cycle, too many DRIVE-CLiQ components are connected to one line of the Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): xyy hex: x = fault cause, yy = component number or connection number. 1yy: The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all read transfers. 2yy: The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all write transfers. 3yy: Cyclic communication is fully utilized. 4yy: The DRIVE-CLiQ cycle starts before the earliest end of the application. An additional dead time must be added to the control. Sign-of-life errors can be expected. The conditions of operation with a current controller sampling time of 31.25 s have not been maintained. 5yy: Internal buffer overflow for net data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection. 6yy: Internal buffer overflow for receive data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection. 7yy: Internal buffer overflow for send data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection. 8yy: The component clock cycles cannot be combined with one another 900: The lowest common multiple of the clock cycles in the system is too high to be determined. 901: The lowest common multiple of the clock cycles in the system cannot be generated with the hardware. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1239 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - Reduce the number of components on the DRIVE-CLiQ line involved and distribute these to other DRIVE-CLiQ sockets of the Control Unit. This means that communication is uniformly distributed over several lines. Re fault value = 1yy - 4yy in addition: - increase the sampling times (p0112, p0115, p4099). If necessary, for DCC or FBLOCKS, change the assignment of the run-time group (p21000, p20000) so that the sampling time (r21001, r20001) is increased. - if necessary, reduce the number of cyclically calculated blocks (DCC) and/or function blocks (FBLOCKS). - reduce the function modules (r0108). - establish the conditions for operation with a current controller sampling time of 31.25 s (at the DRIVE-CLiQ line, only operate Motor Modules and Sensor Modules with this sampling time and only use a permitted Sensor Module (e.g. SMC20, this means a 3 at the last position of the order number)). - For an NX, the corresponding Sensor Module for a possibly existing second measuring system should be connected to a free DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the NX. Re fault value = 8yy in addition: - check the clock cycles settings (p0112, p0115, p4099). Clock cycles on a DRIVE-CLiQ line must be perfect integer multiples of one another. As clock cycle on a line, all clock cycles of all drive objects in the previously mentioned parameters apply, which have components on the line involved. Re fault value = 9yy in addition: - check the clock cycles settings (p0112, p0115, p4099). The lower the numerical value difference between two clock cycles, the higher the lowest common multiple. This behavior has a significantly stronger influence, the higher the numerical values of the clock cycles. F01341 Topology: Maximum number of DRIVE-CLiQ components exceeded Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Too many DRIVE-CLiQ components were defined in the actual topology. Note: Pulse enable is withdrawn and prevented. Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - reduce the number components on the DRIVE-CLiQ line involved in order to maintain the maximum quantity structure. F01354 Topology: Actual topology indicates an illegal component Message value: Fault cause: %1, component number: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The actual topology indicates at least one illegal component. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = cause. xx = 1: Component at this Control Unit not permissible. xx = 2: Component in combination with another component not permissible. Note: Pulse enable is prevented. Remedy: Remove the illegal components and restart the system. F01355 Topology: Actual topology changed Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The device target topology (p0099) does not correspond to the device actual topology (r0098). The fault only occurs if the topology was commissioned using the automatic internal device mechanism and not using the commissioning software. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: r0098 (Actual device topology), p0099 (Device target topology) 3-1240 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: One of the following counter-measures can be selected if no faults have occurred in the topology detection itself: If commissioning is still not completed: - carry out a self-commissioning routine (starting from p0009 = 1). In general: Set p0099 = r0098, set p0009 = 0; for existing Motor Modules, this results in servo drives being automatically generated (p0107). Generating servo drives: Set p0097 to 1, set p0009 to 0. Generating vector drives: Set p0097 to 2, set p0009 to 0. Generating vector drives with parallel circuit: Set p0097 to 12, set p0009 to 0. In order to set configurations in p0108, before setting p0009 to 0, it is possible to first set p0009 to 2 and modify p0108. The index corresponds to the drive object (p0107). If commissioning has already been completed: - re-establish the original connections and re-connect power to the Control Unit. - restore the factory setting for the complete equipment (all of the drives) and allow automatic self-commissioning again. - change the device parameterization to match the connections (this is only possible using the commissioning software). Notice: Topology changes that result in this fault being generated cannot be accepted by the automatic function in the device, but must be transferred using the commissioning software and parameter download. The automatic function in the device only allows constant topology to be used. Otherwise, when the topology is changed, all of the previous parameter settings are lost and replaced by the factory setting. See also: r0098 (Actual device topology) F01356 Topology: There is a defective DRIVE-CLiQ component Message value: Fault cause: %1, Component number: %2, Connection number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The actual topology indicates at least one defective DRIVE-CLiQ component. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): zzyyxx hex: zz = connection number of the component at which the defective component is connected yy = component number of the component at which the defective component is connected xx = fault cause xx = 1: Component at this Control Unit not permissible. xx = 2: component with communication defect. Note: Pulse enable is withdrawn and prevented. Remedy: Replace the defective component and restart the system. F01357 Topology: Two Control Units identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line Message value: component number: %1, connection number: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: In the actual topology, 2 Control Units are connected with one another through DRIVE-CLiQ. This is not permitted. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyxx hex: yy = connection number of the Control Unit at which the second Control Unit is connected xx = component number of the Control Unit at which the second Control Unit is connected Note: Pulse enable is withdrawn and prevented. Remedy: - remove the second Control Unit and restart the system. - for the component DRIVE-CLiQ extension, interchange the hybrid cable (IN/OUT). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1241 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01358 Topology: Line termination not available Message value: CU connection number: %1, component number: %2, connection number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: At least one line with distributed drives is not terminated. The last participant on the line must be terminated with a line termination connector. This therefore ensures the degree of protection of the distributed drives. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): zzyyxx hex: zz = connection number of the distributed drive where there is no terminating connector yy = component number xx = CU connection number Remedy: Install the line terminating connector for the last distributed drive. F01360 Topology: Actual topology not permissible Message value: Fault cause: %1, preliminary component number: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The detected actual topology is not permissible. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ccccbbaa hex: cccc = preliminary component number, aa = fault cause aa = 01 hex = 1 dec: Too many components were detected at the Control Unit. A maximum of 199 components is permissible. aa = 02 hex = 2 dec: The component type of a component is not known. aa = 03 hex = 3 dec: It is illegal to combine ALM and BLM. aa = 04 hex = 4 dec: It is illegal to combine ALM and SLM. aa = 05 hex = 5 dec: It is illegal to combine BLM and SLM. aa = 06 hex = 6 dec: A CX32 was not directly connected to a permitted Control Unit. aa = 07 hex = 7 dec: An NX10 or NX15 was not directly connected to a permitted Control Unit. aa = 08 hex = 8 dec: A component was connected to a Control Unit that is not permitted for this purpose. aa = 09 hex = 9 dec: A component was connected to a Control Unit with out-of-date firmware. aa = 0A hex = 10 dec: Too many components of a particular type detected. aa = 0B hex = 11 dec: Too many components of a particular type detected on a single line. Note: The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Re fault cause = 1: Change the configuration. Connect less than 199 components to the Control Unit. Re fault cause = 2: Remove the component with unknown component type. Re fault cause = 3, 4, 5: Establish a valid combination. Re fault cause = 6, 7: Connect the expansion module directly to a permitted Control Unit. Re fault cause = 8: Remove component or use a permissible component. Re fault cause = 9: Upgrade the firmware of the Control Unit to a later version. 3-1242 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re fault cause = 10, 11: Reduce the number of components. A01361 Topology: Actual topology contains SINUMERIK and SIMOTION components Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The detected actual topology contains SINUMERIK and SIMOTION components. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: cc = fault cause, bb = component class of the actual topology, aa = component number of the component cc = 01 hex = 1 dec: An NX10 or NX15 was connected to a SIMOTION control. cc = 02 hex = 2 dec: A CX32 was connected to a SINUMERIK control. Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: Replace all NX10 or NX15 by a CX32. Re alarm value = 2: Replace all CX32 by an NX10 or NX15. A01362 Topology: Topology rule(s) broken Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: At least one topology rule for the SINAMICS S120 Combi has been broken. In the event of a fault, the ramping up of the drive system is aborted and closed-loop drive control is not enabled. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): The alarm value indicates which rule has been violated. 1: The S120 Combi may only be wired via DRIVE-CLiQ socket X200 to X100 on the NCU. 2: Only one Single Motor Module (SMM) or one Double Motor Module (DMM) may be connected via X200 to the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101 on the NCU. 3: Only one Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or one DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module (hub) may be connected via X500 to the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102 on the NCU. 4: Only Sensor Modules may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ sockets X201 up to X203 (3-axis) or X204 (4-axis) on the S120 Combi. 5: Only one Sensor Module, type SMC20 or SME20 may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X205 (X204 is not available for 3-axis). 6: If a Single Motor Module is being used as the first expansion axis, only one more Single Motor Module may be connected (via X200 to X201 on the first Single Motor Module). 7: Only Sensor Modules may be connected to the corresponding DRIVE-CLiQ socket X202 on any Single Motor Modules which may be present. 8: For a second Single Motor Module or for a Double Motor Module, it is not permissible to connect anything at X201. 9: If a Double Motor Module is used as an expansion axis, only Sensor Modules may be connected to X202 and X203. 10: If a Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is configured, only one DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module (DMC20, DME20) may be connected to X501 of the TM54F module via DRIVE-CLiQ socket X500. 11: On the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module, only Sensor Modules Cabinet (SMC) and Sensor Modules External (SME) may be connected to X501 through X505. 12: Only certain Motor Modules may be used for expansion axes. 13: For an S120 Combi with 3 axes, nothing must be connected at the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module at X503. Remedy: Evaluate the fault value and ensure compliance with the corresponding topology rule(s). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1243 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01375 Topology: Actual topology, duplicate connection between two components Message value: Preliminary component number: %1, component class: %2, connection number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When detecting the actual topology, a ring-type connection was detected. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ccbbaaaa hex: cc = connection number bb = component class aaaa = preliminary component number of a component included in the ring Component class: 1: Control Unit. 2: Motor Module. 3: Line Module. 4: Sensor Module (SM). 5: Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). 6: Terminal Module (TM). 7: DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. 8: Controller Extension 32 (CX32, NX10, NX15). 9: Filter Module 49: DRIVE-CLiQ components (non-listed components). 50: Option Slot (e.g. Terminal Board 30). 60: Encoder (e.g. EnDat). 70: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. Component type: Precise designation within a component class (e.g. "SMC20"). Connection number: Consecutive numbers, starting from zero, of the appropriate connection or slot (e.g. DRIVE-CLiQ connection X100 on the Control Unit has the connection number 0). Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the specified connection. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). F01380 Topology: Actual topology, defective EEPROM Message value: Preliminary component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: When detecting the actual topology, a component with a defective EEPROM was detected. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): bbbbaaaa hex: aaaa = preliminary component number of the defective components Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the defected component. A01381 Topology: Comparison power unit shifted Message value: Component number: %1, component class: %2, component number: %3, connection number: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a power unit in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the target topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number cc = component number bb = component class aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology 3-1244 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb. Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified project. - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01382 Topology: Comparison Sensor Module shifted Message value: Component number: %1, component class: %2, component number: %3, connection number: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a Sensor Module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the target topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number cc = component number bb = component class aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology Note: The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb. Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified project. - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01383 Topology: Comparison Terminal Module shifted Message value: Component number: %1, component class: %2, component number: %3, connection number: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a Terminal Module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the target topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number cc = component number bb = component class aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology Note: The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb. Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified project. - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1245 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01384 Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module shifted Message value: Component number: %1, component class: %2, component number: %3, connection number: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the target topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number cc = component number bb = component class aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology Note: The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb. Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified project. - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01385 Topology: Comparison CX32 shifted Message value: Component number: %1, component class: %2, component number: %3, connection number: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a controller extension 32 (CX32) in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the target topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number cc = component number bb = component class aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology Note: The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb. Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified project. - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). 3-1246 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01386 Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ component shifted Message value: Component number: %1, component class: %2, component number: %3, connection number: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ component in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the target topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number cc = component number bb = component class aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology Note: The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb. Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified project. - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01387 Topology: Comparison option slot component shifted Message value: Component number: %1, component class: %2, component number: %3, connection number: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a option slot component in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the target topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number cc = component number bb = component class aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology Note: The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb. Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified project. - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01388 Topology: Comparison EnDat encoder shifted Message value: Component number: %1, component class: %2, component number: %3, connection number: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected an EnDat encoder in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the target topology. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1247 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number cc = component number bb = component class aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology Note: The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb. Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified project. - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01389 Topology: Comparison motor with DRIVE-CLiQ shifted Message value: Component number: %1, component class: %2, component number: %3, connection number: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the target topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number cc = component number bb = component class aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology Note: The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb. Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. - commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified project. - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01416 Topology: Comparison additional component in actual topology Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has found a component in the actual topology which is not specified in the target topology. The alarm value includes the component number and connection number of the component with which the additional component is connected. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: cc = connection number bb = component class of the additional component aa = component number Note: - component class and connection number are described in F01375. - components that are connected to this additional component are not operational. 3-1248 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - remove the additional component in the actual topology. - download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01420 Topology: Comparison a component is different Message value: Component number: %1, component class target: %2, component class actual: %3, fault cause: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component. There are differences in the electronic rating plate. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: aa = component number of the component, bb = component class of the target topology, cc = component class of the actual topology, dd = fault cause dd = 01 hex = 1 dec: Different component type. dd = 02 hex = 2 dec: Different Order No. dd = 03 hex = 3 dec: Different manufacturer. dd = 04 hex = 4 dec: Connection changed over for a multi-component slave (e.g. Double Motor Module), defective EEPROM data in the electronic rating plate, or only part of a multi-component slave set to "de-activate and not present". dd = 05 hex = 5 dec: A CX32 was replaced by an NX10 or NX15. dd = 06 hex = 6 dec: An NX10 or NX15 was replaced by a CX32. Note: Component class and component type are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - check the component soft-wired connections against the hardware configuration of the drive unit in the commissioning software and correct differences. - parameterize the topology comparison of all components (p9906). - parameterize the topology comparison of one components (p9907, p9908). Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01421 Topology: Comparison different components Message value: Component number: %1, component class target: %2, component class actual: %3, fault cause: %4 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component. The component class, the component type or the number of connections differ. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: aa = component number of the component, bb = component class of the target topology, cc = component class of the actual topology, dd = fault cause dd = 01 hex = 1 dec: Different component class. dd = 02 hex = 2 dec: Different component type. dd = 03 hex = 3 dec: Different Order No. dd = 04 hex = 4 dec: Different number of connections. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1249 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: Component class, component type and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Check the component soft-wired connections against the hardware configuration of the drive unit in the commissioning software and correct differences. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01425 Topology: Comparison serial number of a component is different Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Differences: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component. The serial number is different. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: cc = number of differences bb = component class aa = component number of the component Note: The component class is described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - change over the actual topology to match the target topology. - download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software). Re byte cc: cc = 1 --> can be acknowledged using p9904 or p9905. cc > 1 --> can be acknowledged using p9905 and can be de-activated using p9906 or p9907/p9908. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). See also: p9904 (Topology comparison, acknowledge differences), p9905 (Device specialization), p9906 (Topology comparison, comparison stage of all components), p9907 (Topology comparison, comparison stage of the component number), p9908 (Topology comparison, comparison stage of a component) A01428 Topology: Comparison connection of a component is different Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number1: %3, Connection number2: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component. A component was connected to another connection. The different connections of a component are described in the alarm value: Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number of the target topology cc = connection number of the actual topology bb = component class aa = component number Note: Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - change over the actual topology to match the target topology. - download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software). - automatically remove the topology error (p9904). 3-1250 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). See also: p9904 (Topology comparison, acknowledge differences) A01429 Topology: Comparison connection is different for more than one component Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number1: %3, Connection number2: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A topology comparison has found differences between the actual and target topology for several components. A component was connected to another connection. The different connections of a component are described in the alarm value: Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number of the target topology cc = connection number of the actual topology bb = component class aa = component number Note: Component class and connection number are described in F01375. The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled. Remedy: Adapting the topologies: - change over the actual topology to match the target topology. - download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software). Note: In the software, a Double Motor Module behaves just like two separate DRIVE-CLiQ nodes. If a Double Motor Module is re-inserted, this can result in several differences in the actual topology. Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). F01451 Topology: Target topology is invalid Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An error was detected in the target topology. The target topology is invalid. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ccccbbaa hex: cccc = index error, bb = component number, aa = fault cause aa = 1B hex = 27 dec: Error not specified. aa = 1C hex = 28 dec: Value illegal. aa = 1D hex = 29 dec: Incorrect ID. aa = 1E hex = 30 dec: Incorrect ID length. aa = 1F hex = 31 dec: Too few indices left. aa = 20 hex = 32 dec: component not connected to Control Unit. Remedy: Reload the target topology using the commissioning software. F01470 Topology:Target topology ring-type connection detected Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A ring-type connection was detected when writing to the target topology. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: cc = connection number bb = component class aa = component number of a component included in the ring (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1251 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: Component class and connection number are described in F01375. Remedy: Read out the fault value and remove one of the specified connections. Then download the target topology again using the commissioning software. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). F01475 Topology: Target topology duplicate connection between two components Message value: Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number1: %3, Connection number2: %4 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When writing the target topology, a duplicate connection between two components was detected. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex: dd = connection number 2 of the duplicate connection cc = connection number 1 of the duplicate connection bb = component class aa = component number of one of the components connected twice Note: Component class and connection number are described in F01375. Remedy: Read out the fault value and remove one of the two specified connections. Then download the target topology again using the commissioning software. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01481 Topology: Comparison power unit missing in the actual topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a power unit in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the additional target components. Remedy: - delete the drive belonging to the power unit in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over. - check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems. - check the 24 V supply voltage. - check that the power unit is working properly. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01482 Topology: Comparison Sensor Module missing in the actual topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a Sensor Module in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the additional target components. Remedy: - re-configure the drive belonging to the Sensor Module in the commissioning software project (encoder configuration) and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - delete the drive belonging to the Sensor Module in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. 3-1252 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over. - check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems. - check the 24 V supply voltage. - check that the Sensor Module is working properly. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01483 Topology: Comparison Terminal Module missing in the actual topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a Terminal Module in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the additional target components. Remedy: - delete the Terminal Module in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over. - check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems. - check the 24 V supply voltage. - check that the Terminal Module is working properly. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01484 Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module missing in the actual topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in the target topology that does not exist in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the additional target components. Remedy: - delete the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over. - check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems. - check the 24 V supply voltage. - test the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module to ensure that it functions properly. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01485 Topology: Comparison CX32 missing in the actual topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a controller extension 32 (CX32) in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the additional target components. Remedy: - delete the CX32 / NX in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over. - check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems. - check the 24 V supply voltage. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1253 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - check that CX32/NX functions correctly. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01486 Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ components missing in the actual topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ component in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the additional target components. Remedy: - delete the drive belonging to this component in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - re-configure the drive belonging to this component in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over. - check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems. - check the 24 V supply voltage. - check that the component is working properly. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01487 Topology: Comparison option slot components missing in the actual topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected an option slot module in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the additional target components. Remedy: - delete the option board in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - re-configure the drive unit in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over. - check that the option board is functioning correctly Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01488 Topology: Comparison EnDat encoder missing in the actual topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected an EnDat encoder in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the additional target components. Remedy: - re-configure the drive belonging to the encoder in the commissioning software project (encoder configuration) and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - delete the drive belonging to the encoder in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over. 3-1254 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). A01489 Topology: Comparison motor with DRIVE-CLiQ missing in the actual topology Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The topology comparison has detected a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the additional target components. Remedy: - re-configure the drive belonging to this motor in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - re-configure the drive belonging to this motor in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit. - check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over. - check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems. - check that the motor is working properly. Note: Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison). F01505 (A) BICO: Interconnection cannot be established Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A PROFIdrive telegram has been set (p0922). An interconnection contained in the telegram was not able to be established. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter receiver that should be changed. Remedy: Establish another interconnection. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01506 (A) BICO: No standard telegram Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The standard telegram in p0922 is not maintained and therefore p0922 is set to 999. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): BICO parameter for which the write attempt was unsuccessful. Remedy: Again set the required standard telegram (p0922). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A01507 (F, N) BICO: Interconnections to inactive objects present Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: There are BICO interconnections to an inactive/inoperable drive object. The BI/CI parameters involved are listed in r9498. The associated BO/CO parameters are listed in r9499. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1255 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms The list of the BICO interconnections to other drive objects is displayed in r9491 and r9492 of the de-activated drive object. Note: r9498 and r9499 are only written to, if p9495 is not set to 0. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of BICO interconnections found to inactive drive objects. Remedy: - set all open BICO interconnections centrally to the factory setting with p9495 = 2. - make the non-operational drive object active/operational again (re-insert or activate components). Reaction upon F: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A01508 BICO: Interconnections to inactive objects exceeded Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The maximum number of BICO interconnections (signal sinks) when de-activating a drive object was exceeded. When de-activating a drive object, all BICO interconnections (signal sinks) are listed in the following parameters: - r9498[0...29]: List of the BI/CI parameters involved. - r9499[0...29]: List of the associated BO/CO parameters. Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears as soon as no BICO interconnection (value = 0) is entered in r9498[29] and r9499[29]. Notice: When re-activating the drive object, all BICO interconnections should be checked and if required, re-established. F01510 BICO: Signal source is not float type Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The requested connector output does not have the correct data type. This interconnection is not established. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number to which an interconnection should be made (connector output). Remedy: Interconnect this connector input with a connector output having a float data type. F01511 (A) BICO: Interconnection with different scalings Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The requested BICO interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO input using the reference values. - the BICO output has different normalized units than the BICO input. - message only for interconnections within a drive object. Example: The BICO output has, as normalized unit, voltage and the BICO input has current. This means that the factor p2002/p2001 is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input. p2002: contains the reference value for current p2001: contains the reference value for voltage Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink). Remedy: Not necessary. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1256 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01512 BICO: No scaling available Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (OFF1) Vector: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An attempt was made to determine a conversion factor for a scaling that does not exist. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Unit (e.g. corresponding to SPEED) for which an attempt was made to determine a factor. Remedy: Apply scaling or check the transfer value. F01513 (A) BICO: Interconnection cross DO with different scalings Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The requested BICO interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO input using the reference values. An interconnection is made between different drive objects and the BICO output has different normalized units than the BICO input or the normalized units are the same but the reference values are different. Example 1: BICO output with voltage normalized unit, BICO input with current normalized unit, BICO output and BICO input lie in different drive objects. This means that the factor p2002/p2001 is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input. p2002: contains the reference value for current p2001: contains the reference value for voltage Example 2: BICO output with voltage normalized unit in drive object 1 (DO1), BICO input with voltage normalized unit in drive object 2 (DO2). The reference values for voltage (p2001) of the two drive objects have different values. This means that the factor p2001(DO1)/p2001(DO2) is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input. p2001: contains the reference value for voltage, drive objects 1, 2 Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink). Remedy: Not necessary. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A01514 (F) BICO: Error when writing during a reconnect Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: During a reconnect operation (e.g. while booting or downloading - but can also occur in normal operation) a parameter was not able to be written to. Example: When writing to BICO input with double word format (DWORD), in the second index, the memory areas overlap (e.g. p8861). The parameter is then reset to the factory setting. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink). Remedy: Not necessary. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1257 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01515 (A) BICO: Writing to parameter not permitted as the master control is active Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When changing the number of CDS or when copying from CDS, the master control is active. Remedy: If required, return the master control and repeat the operation. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A01590 (F) Drive: Motor maintenance interval expired Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The selected service/maintenance interval for this motor was reached. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Motor data set number. See also: p0650 (Actual motor operating hours), p0651 (Motor operating hours maintenance interval) Remedy: carry out service/maintenance and reset the service/maintenance interval (p0651). Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F01600 SI CU: STOP A initiated Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on the Control Unit (CU) has detected a fault and initiated a STOP A (pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit). - forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit unsuccessful. - subsequent response to fault F01611 (defect in a monitoring channel). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Stop request from the Motor Module. 1005: Pulses suppressed although STO not selected and there is no internal STOP A present. 1010: Pulses enabled although STO is selected or an internal STOP A is present. 1015: Feedback of the safe pulse suppression for Motor Modules connected in parallel are different. 9999: Subsequent response to fault F01611. Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and de-select again. - replace the Motor Module involved. For fault value = 9999: - carry out diagnostics for fault F01611. Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill F01611 SI CU: Defect in a monitoring channel Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on the Control Unit (CU) has detected a fault in the crosswise data comparison between the CU and Motor Module (MM) and initiated a STOP F. As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9658), fault F01600 (SI CU: STOP A initiated) is output. 3-1258 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Stop request from the Motor Module. 1 ... 999: Number of the cross-compared data that resulted in this fault. This number is also displayed in r9795. 1: SI monitoring clock cycle (r9780, r9880). 2: SI enable safety functions (p9601, p9801). Crosswise data comparison is only carried out for the supported bits. 3: SI SGE changeover tolerance time (p9650, p9850). 4: SI transition period STOP F to STOP A (p9658, p9858). 5: SI enable Safe Brake Control (p9602, p9802). 6: SI Motion enable, safety-relevant functions (p9501, internal value). 7: SI pulse suppression delay time for Safe Stop 1 (p9652, p9852). 8: SI PROFIsafe address (p9610, p9810). 9: SI debounce time for STO/SBC/SS1 (MM) (p9651, p9851). 10: SI delay time for pulse suppression for ESR (p9697, p9897). 11: SI Safe Brake Adapter mode, BICO interconnection (p9621, p9821). 12: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay ON time (p9622[0], p9822[0]). 13: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay OFF time (p9622[1], p9822[1]). 14: SI PROFIsafe telegram selection (p9611, p9811). 1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Within the time of approx. 5 x p9650, alternatively, the following was defined: - Too many switching operations have occurred at the EP terminal of the Motor Module. - Via PROFIsafe/TM54F, STO was too frequently initiated (also as subsequent response). - Safe pulse cancellation (r9723.9) was too frequently initiated (also as subsequent response). 1001, 1002: Initialization error, change timer / check timer. 1900: CRC error in the SAFETY sector. 1901: CRC error in the ITCM sector. 1902: Overloading in the ITCM sector has occurred in operation. 1950: Module temperature outside the permissible temperature range. 1951: Module temperature not plausible. 2000: Status of the STO selection on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different. 2001: Feedback signal for safe pulse suppression on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different. 2002: Status of the delay timer SS1 on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different (status of the timer in p9650/p9850). 2004: Status of the STO selection for modules connected in parallel are different. 2005: Feedback signal of the safe pulse suppression on the Control Unit and Motor Modules connected in parallel are different. 6000 ... 6999: Error in the PROFIsafe control. For these fault values, the failsafe control signals (failsafe values) are transferred to the safety functions. The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711. Remedy: Re fault value = 1 ... 5 and 7 ... 999: - check the cross data comparison that resulted in a STOP F. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. For fault value = 6: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. For fault value = 1000: - check the EP terminal at the Motor Module (contact problems). - PROFIsafe: Remove contact problems/faults at the PROFIBUS master/PROFINET controller. - check the wiring of the failsafe inputs at the TM54F (contact problems). Re fault value = 1001, 1002: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. Re fault value = 1900, 1901, 1902: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Control Unit software. - replace Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1259 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re fault value = 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005: - check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650/p9850, p9652/p9852). - check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) (contact problems). - check the causes of the STO selection in r9772. When the SMM functions are active (p9501 = 1), STO can also be selected using these functions. - replace the Motor Module involved. Re fault value = 6000 ... 6999: Refer to the description of the message values in safety message C01711. Note: CU: Control Unit EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable) ESR: Extended Stop and Retract MM: Motor Module SGE: Safety-relevant input SI: Safety Integrated SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill F01612 SI CU: STO inputs for power units connected in parallel different Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on the Control Unit (CU) has identified different states of the AND'ed STO inputs for power units connected in parallel and has initiated a STOP F. As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9658), fault F01600 (SI CU: STOP A initiated) is output. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Binary image of the digital inputs of the Control Unit that are used as signal source for the function "Safe Torque Off". Remedy: - check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650). - check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) (contact problems). Note: CU: Control Unit SGE: Safety-relevant input SI: Safety Integrated STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill N01620 (F, A) SI CU: Safe Torque Off active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The "Safe Torque Off" (STO) function of the basic functions has been selected on the Control Unit (CU) using the input terminal and is active. Note: - This message does not result in a safety stop response. - This message is not output when STO is selected using the Extended Functions. Remedy: Not necessary. Note: CU: Control Unit SI: Safety Integrated STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill Reaction upon F: OFF2 Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1260 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms N01621 (F, A) SI CU: Safe Stop 1 active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) function has been selected on the Control Unit (CU) and is active. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. Remedy: Not necessary. Note: CU: Control Unit SI: Safety Integrated SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01625 SI CU: Sign-of-life error in safety data Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on the Control Unit (CU) has detected an error in the sign-of-life of the safety data between the CU and Motor Module (MM) and initiated a STOP A. - there is either a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error or communication has failed. - a time slice overflow of the safety software has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and de-select again. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. - de-select all drive functions that are not absolutely necessary. - reduce the number of drives. - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F01630 SI CU: Brake control error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on the Control Unit (CU) has detected a brake control fault and initiated a STOP A. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Re fault value = 10, 11: Fault in "open holding brake" operation. - Parameter p1278 incorrectly set. - No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1 and p9602/p9802 = 0 (SBC deactivated)). - Ground fault in brake cable. For fault value = 20: Fault in "brake open" state. - Short-circuit in brake winding. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1261 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re fault value = 30, 31: Fault in "close holding brake" operation. - No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1 and p9602/p9802 = 0 (SBC deactivated)). - Short-circuit in brake winding. For fault value = 40: Fault in "brake closed" state. For fault value = 50: Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between the Control Unit and Motor Module (brake control). For fault value = 80: Safe Brake Adapter. Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between the Control Unit and Motor Module (brake control). For fault value = 90: Brake released for service purposes (X4). Note: The following causes may apply to fault values: - motor cable is not shielded correctly. - defect in control circuit of the Motor Module. Remedy: - check parameter p1278 (for SBC, only p1278 = 0 is permissible). - for a parallel connection, check the setting of the power unit data set to control the holding brake (p7015). - select Safe Torque Off and de-select again. - check the motor holding brake connection. - check the function of the motor holding brake. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. - check that the electrical cabinet design and cable routing are in compliance with EMC regulations (e.g. shield of the motor cable and brake conductors are connected with the shield connecting plate and the motor connectors are tightly screwed to the housing). - replace the Motor Module involved. Operation with Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter: - check the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter connection. - Replace the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter. Note: CU: Control Unit SBC: Safe Brake Control SI: Safety Integrated F01649 SI CU: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: An internal error in the Safety Integrated software on the Control Unit has occurred. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - re-commission the "Safety Integrated" function and carry out a POWER ON. - Upgrade the firmware of the Control Unit to a later version. - contact the Hotline. - replace the Control Unit. Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated 3-1262 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01650 SI CU: Acceptance test required Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function on the Control Unit requires an acceptance test. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 130: Safety parameters for the Motor Module not available. Note: This fault value is always output when Safety Integrated is commissioned for the first time. 1000: Reference and actual checksum on the Control Unit are not identical (booting). - as a result of the changed current controller sampling time (p0115[0]), the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions (r9780) was adapted. - at least one checksum-checked piece of data is defective. - Safety parameters set offline and loaded into the Control Unit. 2000: Reference and actual checksum on the Control Unit are not identical (commissioning mode). - reference checksum incorrectly entered into the Control Unit (p9799 not equal to r9798). - when de-activating the safety functions, p9501 or p9503 were not deleted. 2001: Reference and actual checksum on the Motor Module are not identical (commissioning mode). - reference checksum incorrectly entered into the Motor Module (p9899 not equal to r9898). - when de-activating the safety functions, p9501 or p9503 are not deleted. 2002: Enable of safety-related functions between the Control Unit and Motor Module differ (p9601 not equal to p9801). 2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed. 2004: An acceptance test is required because a project with enabled safety-functions has been downloaded. 2005: The Safety logbook has identified that a functional safety checksum has changed. An acceptance test is required. 2010: Safe Brake Control is enabled differently between the Control Unit and Motor Module (p9602 not equal to p9802). 2020: Error when saving the safety parameters for the Motor Module. 3003: Acceptance test is required as a hardware-related safety parameter has been changed. 3005: The Safety logbook has identified that a hardware-related safety checksum has changed. An acceptance test is required. 9999: Subsequent response of another safety-related fault that occurred when booting that requires an acceptance test. Remedy: For fault value = 130: - carry out safety commissioning routine. For fault value = 1000: - check the Safety Integrated Basic Functions (r9780) and adapt the reference checksum (p9799). - again carry out safety commissioning routine. - replace the memory card or Control Unit. - Using STARTER, activate the safety parameters for the drive involved (change settings, copy parameters, activate settings). For fault value = 2000: - check the safety parameters in the Control Unit and adapt the reference checksum (p9799). For fault value = 2001: - check the safety parameters in the Motor Module and adapt the reference checksum (p9899). For fault value = 2002: - enable the safety-related functions in the Control Unit and check in the Motor Module (p9601 = p9801). Re fault value = 2003, 2004, 2005: - Carry out an acceptance test and generate an acceptance report. The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided in the following literature: SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Safety Integrated The fault with fault value 2005 can only be acknowledged when the "STO" function is de-selected. For fault value = 2010: - check enable of the safety-related brake control in the Control Unit and Motor Module (p9602 = p9802). For fault value = 2020: - again carry out safety commissioning routine. - replace the memory card or Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1263 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For fault value = 3003: - carry out the function checks for the modified hardware and generate an acceptance report. The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided in the following literature: SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Safety Integrated For fault value = 3005: - carry out the function checks for the modified hardware and generate an acceptance report. The fault with fault value 3005 can only be acknowledged when the "STO" function is de-selected. For fault value = 9999: - carry out diagnostics for the other safety-related fault that is present. Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated STO: Safe Torque Off See also: p9799 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Control Unit)), p9899 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module)) F01651 SI CU: Synchronization safety time slices unsuccessful Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function requires a synchronization of the safety time slices between the Control Unit (CU) and Motor Module (MM) and between the Control Unit and the higher-level control. This synchronization routine was unsuccessful. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 121: - with SINUMERIK Safety Integrated enabled, a drive-side warm restart was performed on the CU/NX. - with SINUMERIK Safety Integrated enabled, the function "restore factory setting" was selected on a drive object of the CU and a drive-side warm restart was initiated. 150: - fault in the synchronization to the PROFIBUS master. All other values: - only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: p9510 (SI Motion clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master) Remedy: For fault value = 121: - carry out a common POWER ON/warm restart for the higher-level control and SINAMICS. For fault value = 150: - check the setting of p9510 (SI Motion clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master) and if required, correct. General: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. - upgrade the software of the higher-level control. Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F01652 SI CU: Illegal monitoring clock cycle Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: One of the Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycles is not permissible. - the monitoring clock cycle integrated in the drive cannot be maintained due to the communication conditions required in the system. - the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring functions is not permissible (p9500). 3-1264 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - the actual value sensing clock cycle for safe motion monitoring functions is not permissible (p9511). - The sampling time for the current controller (p0112, p0115[0]) cannot be supported. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): For motion monitoring functions that are not enabled (p9601.2 = p9801.2 = 0, p9501 = 0), the following applies: - Minimum setting for the monitoring clock cycle (in s). For motion monitoring functions that are enabled (p9601.2 = p9801.2 = 1 and/or p9501 > 0), the following applies: 100: - No matching monitoring clock cycle was able to be found. 101: - The monitoring clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle. 102: - An error has occurred when transferring the actual value sensing clock cycle to the Motor Module (MM). 103: - An error has occurred when transferring the actual value sensing clock cycle to the Sensor Module. 104, 105: - four times the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is greater than 1 ms when operating with a non-isochronous PROFIBUS. - four times the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is greater than the DP clock cycle when operating with an isochronous PROFIBUS. - The DP clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller (p0115[0]). 106: - The monitoring clock cycle does not match the monitoring clock cycle of the TM54F. 107: - The actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) is less than four times the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). - The actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) is not an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller (p0115[0]). 108: - The parameterized actual value sensing clock cycle cannot be set on this component 109: - If the motion monitoring functions have been parameterized as encoderless (p9506), the actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) and the current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]) must be identical. The following applies to SINAMICS S110: - If the motion monitoring functions have been parameterized as encoderless (p9506), the actual value sensing clock cycle p9511 must be = 250 s. 110: - The actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) for safety with encoder (p9506 = 0) is less than 2 ms for this Control Unit (e.g. CU305). 111: - The monitoring clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller (p0115[0]). 200, 201: - For the S120M the monitoring clock cycle cannot be maintained as a result of the conditions required in the system. 202: - The current controller sampling time is set to zero (p0115[0]). Remedy: For enabled SI monitoring integrated in the drive (p9601/p9801 > 0): - Upgrade the firmware of the Control Unit to a later version. For enabled motion monitoring function (p9501 > 0): - correct the monitoring clock cycle (p9500) and carry out POWER ON. For fault value = 101: - actual value sensing clock cycle corresponds to position control clock cycle/DP clock cycle (factory setting). - for motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601/p9801bit 2 = 1) the actual value sensing clock cycle can be directly parameterized in P9511/p9311. Re fault value = 104, 105: - set a separate actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511. - restrict operation to a maximum of two vector drives. For the standard setting in p0112, p0115, the current controller sampling time is automatically reduced to 250 s. If the standard values were changed, then the current controller sampling time (p0112, p0115) should be appropriately set. - increase the DP clock cycle for operation with a clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS so that there is a multiple clock cycle ratio of at least 4:1 between the DP clock cycle and the current controller sampling time. A clock cycle ratio of at least 8:1 is recommended. - With firmware version 2.5, please ensure that parameter p9510 is set to 1 in the drive (clock cycle synchronous operation). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1265 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For fault value = 106: - set the parameters for the monitoring clock cycles the same (p10000 and p9500 / p9300). For fault value = 107: - Set an actual value sensing clock cycle that matches the current controller clock cycle (p9511 >= 4 * p0115[0], 8 * p0115[0]) is recommended. Note: An actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) that is set too low, can sporadically mean that safety messages C01711/C30711 are output with message value 1020 or 1021. For fault value = 108: - set a suitable actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511. - if the DP clock cycle is used as the actual value sensing clock cycle for operation with isochronous PROFIBUS (p9511 = 0), then a suitable DP clock cycle must be configured. This must be set to less than 8 ms. If this is not possible, then p9511 must be set to the required actual value sensing clock cycle (< 8 ms). - For SIMOTION D410-2, a suitable multiple of the DP clock cycle (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10) must be parameterized. Otherwise, the clock cycle must be set to less than 8 ms. For fault value = 109: - set the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]). The following applies to SINAMICS S110: - set the actual value sensing clock cycle to p9511 = 250 s. For fault value = 110: - set the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 to 2 ms or higher. For fault value = 111: - set the monitoring clock cycle in p9500 as an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller (p0115[0]). Re fault value = 200, 201: - Increase the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). - If required, reduce the number of components connected to the corresponding DRIVE-CLiQ line, or distribute the components across several DRIVE-CLiQ sockets. For fault value = 202: - Set the current controller sampling time to a sensible value (p0115[0]). Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F01653 SI CU: PROFIBUS/PROFINET configuration error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: There is a PROFIBUS/PROFINET configuration error for using Safety Integrated monitoring functions with a higherlevel control (SINUMERIK or F-PLC). Note: For safety functions that have been enabled, this fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 200: A safety slot for receive data from the control has not been configured. 210, 220: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the control has an unknown format. 230: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length. 231: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length. 240: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the SINUMERIK has the incorrect length. 250: A PROFIsafe slot is configured in the higher-level F control, however PROFIsafe is not enabled in the drive. 300: A safety slot for the send data to the control has not been configured. 310, 320: The configured safety slot for the send data to the control has an unknown format. 330: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length. 331: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length. 340: The configured safety slot for the send data to the SINUMERIK has the incorrect length. Remedy: The following generally applies: - check and, if necessary, correct the PROFIBUS/PROFINET configuration of the safety slot on the master side. - upgrade the Control Unit software. For fault value = 250: - remove the PROFIsafe configuring in the higher-level F control or enable PROFIsafe in the drive. 3-1266 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re fault value = 231, 331: - configure the PROFIsafe telegram matching the parameterization in the F-PLC. The following applies for p9501.30 = 1 (F-DI via PROFIsafe is enabled): - PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured. For p9501.30 = 0 (F-DI not enabled via PROFIsafe), the following applies: - PROFIsafe telegram 30 must be configured. A01654 (F) SI CU: Deviating PROFIsafe configuration Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The configuration of a PROFIsafe telegram in the higher-level control (F-PLC) does not match the parameterization in the drive. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: A PROFIsafe telegram is configured in the higher-level control, however PROFIsafe is not enabled in the drive (p9601.3). 2: PROFIsafe is parameterized in the drive; however, a PROFIsafe telegram has not been configured in the higherlevel control. Remedy: The following generally applies: - check and, if necessary, correct the PROFIsafe configuration in the higher-level control. Re alarm value = 1: - remove the PROFIsafe configuring in the higher-level F control or enable PROFIsafe in the drive. Re alarm value = 2: - configure the PROFIsafe telegram to match the parameterization in the higher-level F-control. Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F01655 SI CU: Align monitoring functions Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: An error has occurred when aligning the Safety Integrated monitoring functions on the Control Unit (CU) and Motor Module (MM). Control Unit and Motor Module were not able to determine a common set of supported SI monitoring functions. - there is either a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error or communication has failed. - Safety Integrated software releases on the Control Unit and Motor Module are not compatible with one another. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1267 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01656 SI CU: Motor Module parameter error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: When accessing the Safety Integrated parameters for the Motor Module (MM) in the non-volatile memory, an error has occurred. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 129: - safety parameters for the Motor Module corrupted. - drive with enabled safety functions was possibly copied offline using the commissioning software and the project downloaded. 131: Internal Motor Module software error. 132: Communication errors when uploading or downloading the safety parameters for the Motor Module. 255: Internal software error on the Control Unit. Remedy: - re-commission the safety functions. - upgrade the Control Unit software. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - replace the memory card or Control Unit. For fault value = 129: - activate the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 95). - adapt the PROFIsafe address (p9610). - start the copy function for SI parameters (p9700 = D0 hex). - acknowledge data change (p9701 = DC hex). - exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 0). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM"). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. For fault value = 132: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F01657 SI CU: PROFIsafe telegram number invalid Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The PROFIsafe telegram number set in p9611 is not valid. When PROFIsafe is enabled (p9601.3 = 1), then a telegram number greater than zero must be entered in p9611. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. See also: p9611 (SI PROFIsafe telegram selection (Control Unit)), p60022 (PROFIsafe telegram selection) Remedy: Check the telegram number setting (p9611). F01658 SI CU: PROFIsafe telegram number not equal Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The PROFIsafe telegram number is set differently in p9611 and p60022. For p9611 not equal to 998, the following applies: The telegram number must be identically set in both parameters. The following applies for p9611 = 998: As a result of the compatibility to firmware versions < 4.5, then only the values 0 and 30 are permitted in p60022. 3-1268 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. See also: p9611 (SI PROFIsafe telegram selection (Control Unit)), p60022 (PROFIsafe telegram selection) Remedy: Match the telegram number in both parameters so that they are the same (p9611, p60022). F01659 SI CU: Write request for parameter rejected Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The write request for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (CU) was rejected. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The Safety Integrated password is not set. 2: A reset of the drive parameters was selected. However, the Safety Integrated parameters were not reset, as Safety Integrated is presently enabled. 3: The interconnected STO input is in the simulation mode. 10: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported. 11: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported. 12: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported for a parallel circuit configuration (r9871.14). 13: An attempt was made to enable the SS1 function although this cannot be supported. 14: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe communication - although this cannot be supported or the version of the PROFIsafe driver used on the CU and MM is different. 15: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive although these cannot be supported. 16: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported when the internal voltage protection (p1231) is enabled. 17: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function although this cannot be supported for a parallel circuit configuration. 18: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function for Basic Functions although this cannot be supported. 19: An attempt was made to enable the SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), although this cannot be supported. 20: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive and the STO function, both controlled via F-DI. 21: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive for a parallel connection, although these cannot be supported. 22: An attempt was made to enable the Safety Integrated functions although these cannot be supported by the connected Power Module. 23: For ESR, an attempt was made to enable the delay for pulse suppression, although this cannot be supported. 24: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function, although no power unit data set is set for the brake control (p7015 = 99). 25: An attempt was made to parameterize a PROFIsafe telegram although this cannot be supported. 26: At a digital input of the Control Unit, an attempt was made to activate the simulation mode (p0795), which is used by Safety Integrated (p10049). 33: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions without selection integrated in the drive (p9601.5, p9801.5), although this cannot be supported. See also: p0970, p3900, r9771, r9871 Remedy: For fault value = 1: - set the Safety Integrated password (p9761). For fault value = 2: - Inhibit Safety Integrated (p9501, p9601) or reset safety parameters (p0970 = 5), then reset the drive parameters again. For fault value = 3: - end the simulation mode for the digital input (p0795). Re fault value = 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22 , 23: - check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out diagnostics for the faults involved. - use a Motor Module that supports the required function. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1269 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For fault value = 16: - inhibit the internal voltage protection (p1231). For fault value = 20: - correct setting in p9601. For fault value = 22: - use a Power Module that supports the Safety Integrated functions. For fault value = 24: - set the power unit data set for the holding brake (p7015). For fault value = 25: - use a Power Module that supports the PROFIsafe telegram selection. - Correct the telegram number setting (p9611). For fault value = 26: - check whether p10049 is set. Also check p10006 and p10009. Check whether in p10046, p10047 a test top of the FDO with a read back input is parameterized. - correct the setting in p9611. For fault value = 33: - Deselect motion monitoring functions without selection integrated in drive (p9601.5, p9801.5) and select safety functions that are supported (see p9771/p9871), or: - use a Motor Module that supports the required function. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. Note: CU: Control Unit ESR: Extended Stop and Retract MM: Motor Module SBA: Safe Brake Adapter SBC: Safe Brake Control SI: Safety Integrated SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit)), p9620 (SI signal source for STO (SH)/SBC/SS1 (Control Unit)), p9761 (SI password input), p9801 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module)) F01659 SI CU: Write request for parameter rejected Message value: %1 Drive object: TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The write request for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (CU) was rejected. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The Safety Integrated password is not set. 2: A reset of the drive parameters was selected. However, the Safety Integrated parameters were not reset, as Safety Integrated is presently enabled. 3: The interconnected STO input is in the simulation mode. 10: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported. 11: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported. 12: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported for a parallel circuit configuration (r9871.14). 13: An attempt was made to enable the SS1 function although this cannot be supported. 14: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe communication - although this cannot be supported or the version of the PROFIsafe driver used on the CU and MM is different. 15: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive although these cannot be supported. 16: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported when the internal voltage protection (p1231) is enabled. 17: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function although this cannot be supported for a parallel circuit configuration. 18: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function for Basic Functions although this cannot be supported. 3-1270 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 19: An attempt was made to enable the SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), although this cannot be supported. 20: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive and the STO function, both controlled via F-DI. 21: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive for a parallel connection, although these cannot be supported. 22: An attempt was made to enable the Safety Integrated functions although these cannot be supported by the connected Power Module. 23: For ESR, an attempt was made to enable the delay for pulse suppression, although this cannot be supported. 24: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function, although no power unit data set is set for the brake control (p7015 = 99). 25: An attempt was made to parameterize a PROFIsafe telegram although this cannot be supported. 26: At a digital input of the Control Unit, an attempt was made to activate the simulation mode (p0795), which is used by Safety Integrated (p10049). 33: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions without selection integrated in the drive (p9601.5, p9801.5), although this cannot be supported. See also: p0970, p3900, r9771, r9871 Remedy: For fault value = 1: - set the Safety Integrated password (p10061). For fault value = 2: - Inhibit Safety Integrated (p9501, p9601) or reset safety parameters (p0970 = 5), then reset the drive parameters again. For fault value = 3: - end the simulation mode for the digital input (p0795). Re fault value = 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22 , 23: - check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out diagnostics for the faults involved. - use a Motor Module that supports the required function. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. For fault value = 16: - inhibit the internal voltage protection (p1231). For fault value = 20: - correct setting in p9601. For fault value = 22: - use a Power Module that supports the Safety Integrated functions. Note: CU: Control Unit ESR: Extended Stop and Retract MM: Motor Module SBA: Safe Brake Adapter SBC: Safe Brake Control SI: Safety Integrated SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit)), p9620 (SI signal source for STO (SH)/SBC/SS1 (Control Unit)), p9761 (SI password input), p9801 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module)) F01660 SI CU: Safety-related functions not supported Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The Motor Module (MM) does not support the safety-related functions (e.g. the Motor Module version is not the correct one). Safety Integrated cannot be commissioned. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Remedy: - use a Motor Module that supports the safety-related functions. - upgrade the Motor Module software. Note: CU: Control Unit (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1271 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F01661 SI CU: Simulation of the safety inputs active Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The simulation of the digital inputs of the Control Unit (p0795) is active. It is not permissible that safety inputs (refer to p9620, p10022 ... p10032) are simulated. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): The display bits indicate which DIs may not be simulated. Remedy: Deactivate the simulation of the digital inputs of the Control Unit for the safety inputs (refer to p795) and acknowledge the fault. F01663 SI CU: Copying the SI parameters rejected Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: One of the following values is saved in p9700 or was entered offline: 87 or 208. This is the reason that when booting, an attempt is made to copy SI parameters from the Control Unit to the Motor Module. However, no safety-relevant function has been selected on the Control Unit (p9501 = 0, p9601 = 0). Copying was rejected for safety reasons. As a consequence, inconsistent parameterization can occur in both monitoring channels, which in turn results in additional error messages. Especially for inconsistent enabling of the safety functions on both monitoring channels (p9601 = 0, p9801 <> 0), fault F30625 is output. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. See also: p9700 (SI Motion copy function) Remedy: - Set p9700 to 0. - Check p9501 and p9601 and if required, correct. - Restart the copying function by entering the corresponding value into p9700. Alternatively, using the STARTER commissioning tool, perform the following steps in the online mode: - Call the "Safety Integrated" screen form (the field "Select safety functions" is at "No Safety Integrated"). - Click on "Change settings". - Click on "Activate settings" (as a consequence, Safety Integrated is inhibited on both monitoring channels). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM"). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. F01664 SI CU: No automatic firmware update Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: During booting, the system detected that the "Firmware update automatic" function (p7826 = 1) was not activated. This function must be activated for automatic firmware updates/downgrades to prevent impermissible version combinations when safety functions are enabled. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. See also: p7826 (Firmware update automatic) Remedy: When safety functions are enabled (p9501 <> 0 and/or p9601 <> 0): 1. Activate the "Firmware update automatic" function (p7826 = 1). 2. Save the parameters (p0977 = 1) and carry out a POWER ON. When de-activating the safety functions (p9501 = 0, p9601 = 0), the fault can be acknowledged after exiting the safety commissioning mode. 3-1272 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01665 SI CU: System is defective Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A system defect was detected before the last boot or in the actual one. The system might have been rebooted (reset). Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 200000 hex, 400000 hex, 8000yy hex (yy any): - Fault in the actual booting/operation. 800004 hex: - Parameters p9500/p9300 are, under certain circumstances, not the same. In addition, Safety message C01711/C30711 is displayed. Additional values: - defect before the last time that the system booted. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. Re fault value = 200000 hex, 400000 hex, 8000yy hex (yy any): - ensure that the Control Unit is connected to the Power Module. Re fault value = 800004 hex: - Check that parameters p9500/p9300 are the same. A01666 (F) SI Motion CU: Steady-state (static) 1 signal at the F-DI for safety-relevant acknowledgement Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A logical 1 signal is present at the F-DI configured in p10006 for more than 10 seconds. If, at the F-DI no acknowledgment was performed for safe acknowledgment, then a steady-state logical and 0 signal must be present. This avoids unintentional safety-relevant acknowledgement (or the "Internal Event Acknowledge" signal) if a wire breaks or one of the two digital inputs bounces. Remedy: Set the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) to a logical 0 signal (p10006). Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A01669 (F, N) SI Motion: Unfavorable combination of motor and power unit Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The combination of motor and power unit used is not suitable for using safe motion monitoring functions without an encoder. The ratio between the power unit rated current (r0207[0]) and rated motor current (p0305) is greater than 5. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the motor data set, which caused the fault. Notice: If this alarm is not observed, then message C01711 or C30711 - with the value 1041 ... 1044 - can sporadically occur. Remedy: Use a suitable power unit with a lower power rating or a motor with a higher power rating. Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1273 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01670 SI Motion: Invalid parameterization Sensor Module Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The parameterization of a Sensor Module used for Safety Integrated is not permissible. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: No encoder was parameterized for Safety Integrated. 2: An encoder was parameterized for Safety Integrated that does not have an A/B track (sine/cosine). 3: The encoder data set selected for Safety Integrated is still not valid. 4: A communication error with the encoder has occurred. 5: Number of relevant bits in the encoder coarse position invalid. 6: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder configuration invalid. 7: Non-safety relevant component of the encoder coarse position for the linear DRIVE-CLiQ encoder not valid. 8: Parameterized Safety comparison algorithm not supported. 9: Relationship between the grid division and measuring step for linear DRIVE-CLiQ encoder is not binary. 10: For an encoder used for Safety Integrated, not all of the Drive Data Sets (DDS) are assigned to the same Encoder Data Set (EDS) (p0187 ... p0189). Remedy: Re fault value = 1, 2: - use and parameterize an encoder that Safety Integrated supports (encoder with track A/B sine-wave, p0404.4 = 1). For fault value = 3: - check whether the drive or drive commissioning function is active and if required, exit this (p0009 = p00010 = 0), save the parameters (p0971 = 1) and carry out a POWER ON For fault value = 4: - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Sensor Module involved and if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. For fault value = 5: - p9525 = 0 (not permissible). Check the encoder parameterization on the Sensor Modules involved. For fault value = 6: - check p9515.0 (for DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the following applies: p9515.0 = 1). Check the encoder parameterization on the Sensor Modules involved. For fault value = 7: - p12033 for an encoder used for Safety Integrated is not equal to 1. Use a linear DRIVE-CLiQ and parameterize for p12033 = 1. For fault value = 8: - check p9541. Use and parameterize an encoder that implements an algorithm supported by Safety Integrated. For fault value = 9: - check p9514 and p9522. Use an encoder and parameterize, where the ratio between p9514 and p9522 is binary. For fault value = 10: - align the EDS assignment of all of the encoders used for Safety Integrated (p0187 ... p0189). For fault value = 11: - p12036 for an encoder used for Safety Integrated is not equal to 0. Use a linear DRIVE-CLiQ and parameterize for p12036 = 0. Note: SI: Safety Integrated F01671 SI Motion: Parameterization encoder error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The parameterization of the encoder used by Safety Integrated is different to the parameterization of the standard encoder. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number of the non-corresponding safety parameter. 3-1274 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Align the encoder parameterization between the safety encoder and the standard encoder. Note: SI: Safety Integrated F01672 SI CU: Motor Module software/hardware incompatible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The existing Motor Module software does not support safe motion monitoring or is not compatible to the software on the Control Unit or there is a communications error between the Control Unit and Motor Module. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The existing Motor Module software does not support the safe motion monitoring function. 2, 3, 6, 8: There is a communications error between the Control Unit and Motor Module. 4, 5, 7: The existing Motor Module software is not compatible to the software on the Control Unit. 9,10,11,12: The actual Motor Module software does not support safe encoderless motion monitoring. 13: At least one Motor Module in parallel operation does not support the safe motion monitoring function. Remedy: - check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out diagnostics for the faults involved. For fault value = 1: - use a Motor Module that supports safe motion monitoring. Re fault value = 2, 3, 6, 8: - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. Re fault value = 4, 5, 7, 9, 13: - upgrade the Motor Module software. Note: SI: Safety Integrated F01673 SI Motion: Sensor Module software/hardware incompatible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The existing Sensor Module software and/or hardware does not support the safe motion monitoring function with the higher-level control. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - upgrade the Sensor Module software. - use a Sensor Module that supports the safe motion monitoring function. Note: SI: Safety Integrated F01674 SI Motion CU: Safety function not supported by PROFIsafe telegram Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The monitoring function enabled in p9501 and p9601 is not supported by the currently set PROFIsafe telegram (p9611). Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary): Bit 24 = 1: Transfer SLS (SG) limit value via PROFIsafe not supported (p9501.24). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1275 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 25 = 1: Transfer safe position via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9501.25). Remedy: - Deselect the monitoring function involved (p9501, p9601). - set the matching PROFIsafe telegram (p9611). Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed SP: Safe Position F01680 SI Motion CU: Checksum error safety monitoring functions Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The actual checksum calculated by the drive and entered in r9728 via the safety-relevant parameters does not match the reference checksum saved in p9729 at the last machine acceptance. Safety-relevant parameters have been changed or a fault is present. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Checksum error for SI parameters for motion monitoring. 1: Checksum error for SI parameters for actual values. 2: Checksum error for SI parameters for component assignment. Remedy: - check the safety-relevant parameters and if required, correct. - execute the function "Copy RAM to ROM". - perform a POWER ON if safety parameters requiring a POWER ON have been modified. - carry out an acceptance test. F01681 SI Motion CU: Incorrect parameter value Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The parameter cannot be parameterized with this value. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter yyyy = 0: no additional information available. xxxx = 9500: p9500 is not equal to p9300 or not an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller (p0115[0]). xxxx = 9501: It is not permissible to enable the function "n<nx hysteresis and filtering" (p9501.16) in conjunction with the function "extended functions without selection" (p9601.5). xxxx = 9505: When SLP is active (p9501.1 = 1), the modulo function is activated and this is not permitted (p9505 not equal to 0). xxxx = 9511: yyyy = 1: p9511 is not equal to p9311. yyyy = 2: On a double axis motor module, between the drive objects, no different values in p9511 and p0115[0] is permitted. xxxx = 9522: The gear stage was set too high. xxxx = 9544: For linear axes, the maximum value is limited to 1 mm. xxxx = 9547: p9547 is too low. xxxx = 9585: For Safety without encoder and synchronous motor, a value of 4 must be entered into p9585. 3-1276 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms xxxx = 9601: yyyy = 1: If motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 = 1) and extended functions without selection (p9601.5 = 1) are enabled, then PROFIsafe (p9601.3 = 1) or onboard F-DI (p9601.4 = 1) is not possible. yyyy = 2: Extended functions without selection (p9601.5 =1) are enabled, without enabling motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2). yyyy = 3: Onboard F-DI are enabled, without enabling motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2). yyyy = 4: Onboard F-DI are enabled, then it is not permissible to simultaneously set PROFIsafe and F-DI via PROFIsafe (p9501.30). yyyy = 5: Transfer of the SLS limit value via PROFIsafe (p9501.24) has been enabled, without enabling PROFIsafe. yyyy = 6: Transfer of the safe position via PROFIsafe (p9501.25) has been enabled, without enabling PROFIsafe. Remedy: Correct parameter (if required, also on the second monitoring channel, p9801). xxxx: parameter, yyyy: supplementary information. xxxx = 9500: - Transfer of the safe position via PROFIsafe (p9501.25) has been enabled, without enabling PROFIsafe. Set p9500 "SI Motion monitoring clock cycle" as an integer multiple of p115[0] "Current controller sampling time". Align parameters 9300 and 9500, backup parameters (p0971 = 1) and carry out a POWER ON. With hysteresis/filtering enabled (p9501.16 = 1), the following applies: - Set parameters p9546/p9346 and p9547/p9347 acc. to the following rule: p9546 >= 2 x p9547; p9346 >= 2 x p9347. - The following rule must also be adhered to when actual value synchronization (p9501.3 = 1) is enabled: p9549 <= p9547; p9349 <= p9347. xxxx = 9501: - Correct parameters p9501.16 and p9301.16, or deselect the extended functions without selection (p9601.5). xxxx = 9505: Correct parameter p9501.1 or p9505. xxxx = 9507: Set synchronous or induction motor according to p0300. xxxx = 9511: Align parameters p9311 and p9511, backup parameters (p0971 = 1) and carry out a POWER ON. xxxx = 9517: Also check p9516.0. xxxx = 9522: Correct parameters. xxxx = 9544: Correct parameter (for linear axes, the maximum value is limited to 1 mm). xxxx = 9585: Correct parameter (if required, also on the second monitoring channel, p9385). xxxx = 9601: yyyy = 1: Only enable motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 = 1) and extended functions without selection (p9601.5 = 1), or only enable PROFIsafe (p9601.3 = 1) or only onboard F-DI (p9601.4 = 1). yyyy = 2, 3: Enable motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 = 1). yyyy = 4: If onboard F-DI are enabled, then it is not permissible to simultaneously set PROFIsafe and F-DI via PROFIsafe (p9501.30), deselect PROFIsafe functionality or onboard F-DI. yyyy = 5: To transfer the SLS limit values via PROFIsafe (p9501.24 = 1), also enable PROFIsafe (p9601.3 =1) and motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 = 1). yyyy = 6: For the safe position via PROFIsafe (p9501.25 = 1), also enable PROFIsafe (p9601.3 =1) and motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 = 1). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1277 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01682 SI Motion CU: Monitoring function not supported Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The monitoring function enabled in p9501, p9601, p9801, p9307 or p9507 is not supported in this firmware version. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Monitoring function SLP not supported (p9501.1). 2: Monitoring function SCA not supported (p9501.7 and p9501.8 ... 15 and p9503). 3: Monitoring function SLS override not supported (p9501.5). 4: Monitoring function external ESR activation not supported (p9501.4). 5: Monitoring function F-DI in PROFIsafe not supported (p9501.30). 6: Enable actual value synchronization not supported (p9501.3). 9: Monitoring function not supported by the firmware or enable bit not used. 10: Monitoring functions only supported for a SERVO drive object. 11: Encoderless monitoring functions (p9506.1) only supported for motion monitoring integrated in the drive (p9601.2). 12: Monitoring functions for ncSI are not supported for CU305. 20: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive are only supported in conjunction with PROFIsafe (p9501, p9601.1 ... 2 and p9801.1 ... 2). 21: Enable a safe motion monitoring function (in p9501), not supported for enabled basic functions via PROFIsafe (p9601.2 = 0, p9601.3 = 1). 22: Encoderless monitoring functions in "chassis" format not supported. 23: CU240 does not support monitoring functions requiring an encoder. 24: Monitoring function SDI not supported (p9501.17). 25: Drive-integrated motion monitoring functions not supported (p9501, p9601.2). 26: hysteresis and filtering for SSM monitoring function without an encoder not supported (p9501.16). 27: This hardware does not support onboard F-DI and F-DO. 29: SINAMICS S120M: SSM encoderless not supported. 31: This hardware does not support transfer SLS (SG) limit value via PROFIsafe (p9301/p9501.24). 33: Safety functions without selection not supported (p9601.5, p9801.5). 34: This module does not support safe position via PROFIsafe. 36: Function "SS1 without OFF3" not supported. 40: SIMOTION D410-2: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive or PROFIsafe control not supported. 41: SIMOTION D410-2: Safety functions not supported for the "Chassis" format. 42: Motion monitoring functions SLP and SP not supported for D4x5-2 and CX32-2 (p9501.1, 25). 43: Motion monitoring functions SLP and SP as well as PROFIsafe telegrams 31/901/902 not supported for D410 (p9501.1, 24, 25, 30 / 9611). 9586: Set value of p9586/p9386 is greater than the supported maximum value. 9588: Set value of p9588/p9388 is greater than the supported maximum value. 9589: Set value of p9589/p9389 is greater than the supported maximum value. Remedy: - De-select the monitoring function involved (p9501, p9503, p9506, p9601, p9801, p9307, p9507). - Reduce the set value (p9586 , p9588 , p9589). Note: ESR: Extended Stop and Retract SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SI: Safety Integrated SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed SP: Safe Position See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9503 (SI Motion SCA (SN) enable (Control Unit)), r9771 (SI common functions (Control Unit)) 3-1278 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01683 SI Motion CU: SOS/SLS enable missing Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The safety-relevant basic function "SOS/SLS" is not enabled in p9501 although other safety-relevant monitoring functions are enabled. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Remedy: Enable the function "SOS/SLS" (p9501.0) and carry out a POWER ON. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)) F01684 SI Motion: Safely limited position limit values interchanged Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SE), a lower value is in p9534 than in p9535. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Limit values SLP1 interchanged. 2: Limit values SLP2 interchanged. Remedy: Correct the limit values in p9534 and p9535 and carry out a POWER ON. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches F01685 SI Motion CU: Safely-limited speed limit value too high Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The limit value for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS) is greater than the speed that corresponds to an encoder limit frequency of 500 kHz. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Maximum permissible speed. Remedy: Correct the limit values for SLS and carry out a POWER ON. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed See also: p9531 (SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit)) F01686 SI Motion: Illegal parameterization cam position Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: At least one enabled "Safety Cam" (SCA) is parameterized in p9536 or p9537 too close to the tolerance range around the modulo position. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1279 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms The following conditions must be complied with to assign cams to a cam track: - the cam length of cam x = p9536[x]-p9537[x] must be greater or equal to the cam tolerance + the position tolerance (= p9540 + p9542). This also means that for cams on a cam track, the minus position value must be less than the plus position value. - the distance between 2 cams x and y (minus position value[y] - plus position value[x] = p9537[y] - p9536[x]) on a cam track must be greater than or equal to the cam tolerance + position tolerance (= p9540 + p9542). Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of the "Safe Cam" with an illegal position. See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)) Remedy: Correct the cam position and carry out a POWER ON. Note: SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9536 (SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit)), p9537 (SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit)) F01687 SI Motion: Illegal parameterization modulo value SCA (SN) Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The parameterized modulo value for the "Safe Cam" (SCA) function is not a multiple of 360 000 mDegrees. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Remedy: Correct the modulo value for SCA and carry out a POWER ON. Note: SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9505 (SI Motion SP modulo value (Control Unit)) F01688 SI Motion CU: Actual value synchronization not permissible Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: - It is not permissible to enable actual value synchronization for a 1-encoder system. - It is not permissible to simultaneously enable actual value synchronization and a monitoring function with absolute reference (SCA/SLP). - It is not permissible to simultaneously enable actual value synchronization and safe position via PROFIsafe. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Remedy: - Either select the "actual value synchronization" function or parameterize a 2-encoder system. - Either de-select the function "actual value synchronization" or the monitoring functions with absolute reference (SCA/SLP) and carry out a POWER ON. - Either deselect the "actual value synchronization" function or do not enable "Safe position via PROFIsafe". Note: SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam SI: Safety Integrated SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches SP: Safe Position See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9526 (SI Motion encoder assignment second channel) 3-1280 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms C01689 SI Motion: Axis re-configured Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The axis configuration was changed (e.g. changeover between linear axis and rotary axis). Parameter p0108.13 is internally set to the correct value. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number of parameter that initiated the change. See also: p9502 (SI Motion axis type (Control Unit)) Remedy: The following should be carried out after the changeover: - exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM"). - carry out a POWER ON. Once the Control Unit has been switched on, safety message F01680 or F30680 indicates that the checksums in r9398[0] and r9728[0] have changed in the drive. The following must, therefore, be carried out: - activate safety commissioning mode again. - complete safety commissioning of the drive. - exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM"). - carry out a POWER ON. Note: For the commissioning software, the units are only consistently displayed after a project upload. F01690 SI Motion: Data save problem for the NVRAM Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: There is not sufficient memory space in the NVRAM on the drive to save parameters r9781 and r9782 (safety logbook). Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: There is no physical NVRAM available in the drive. 1: There is no longer any free memory space in the NVRAM. Remedy: For fault value = 0: - use a Control Unit NVRAM. For fault value = 1: - de-select functions that are not required and that take up memory space in the NVRAM. - contact the Hotline. Note: NVRAM: Non-Volatile Random Access Memory (non-volatile read and write memory) A01691 (F) SI Motion: Ti and To unsuitable for DP cycle Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The configured times for PROFIBUS communication are not permitted and the DP cycle is used as the actual value acquisition cycle for the safe movement monitoring functions. Isochronous PROFIBUS: The sum of Ti and To is too high for the selected DP cycle. The DP cycle should be at least 1 current controller cycle greater than the sum of Ti and To. No isochronous PROFIBUS: The DP clock cycle must be at least 4x the current controller clock cycle. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1281 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Notice: If this alarm is not observed, then message C01711 or C30711 - with the value 1020 ... 1021 - can sporadically occur. Remedy: Configure Ti and To low so that they are suitable for the DP cycle or increase the DP cycle time. Alternative when SI monitoring integrated in the drive is enabled (p9601/p9801 > 0): Use the actual value acquisition cycle p9511/p9311 and, in turn, set independently from DP cycle. The actual values sensing clock cycle must be at least 4x the current controller clock cycle. A clock cycle ratio of at least 8:1 is recommended. See also: p9511 (SI Motion actual value sensing cycle clock (Control Unit)) Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F01692 SI Motion CU: Parameter value not permitted for encoderless Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The parameter cannot be set to this value if encoderless motion monitoring functions have been selected in p9506. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number with the incorrect value. See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)) Remedy: - Correct the parameter specified in the fault value. - If necessary, de-select encoderless motion monitoring functions (p9506). See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)) A01693 (F) SI CU: Safety parameter settings changed, warm restart/POWER ON required Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Safety parameters have been changed; these will only take effect following a warm restart or POWER ON. Notice: All changed parameters of the safety motion monitoring functions will only take effect following a warm restart or POWER ON. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Parameter number of the safety parameter which has changed, necessitating a warm restart or POWER ON. Remedy: - carry out a warm restart (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2, 3). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. Note: Before performing an acceptance test, a POWER ON must be carried out for all components. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: POWER ON F01694 (A) SI Motion CU: Firmware version Motor Module older Control Unit Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The firmware version of the Motor Module is older than the version of the Control Unit. It is possible that safety functions are not available (r9771/r9871). Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. This message can also occur, if after an automatic firmware update, a POWER ON was not carried out (Alarm A01007). 3-1282 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the Motor Module to a later version. See also: r9390 (SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (Motor Module)), r9590 (SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (Control Unit)) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A01695 (F) SI Motion: Sensor Module was replaced Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A Sensor Module, which is used for safe motion monitoring functions, was replaced. The hardware replacement must be acknowledged. An acceptance test must be subsequently performed. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. Remedy: Carry out the following steps using the STARTER commissioning software: - press the "Acknowledge hardware replacement" button in the safety screen form. - execute the function "Copy RAM to ROM". - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. As an alternative, carry out the following steps in the expert list of the commissioning software: - start the copy function for the node identifier on the drive (p9700 = 1D hex). - acknowledge the hardware CRC on the drive (p9701 = EC hex). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. Then carry out an acceptance test (refer to the Safety Integrated Function Manual). For SINUMERIK, the following applies: HMI supports the replacement of components with Safety functions (operating area "Diagnostics" --> Softkey "Alarm list" --> Softkey "Confirm SI HW" etc.). The precise procedure is given in the following document: SINUMERIK Function Manual Safety Integrated See also: p9700 (SI Motion copy function), p9701 (Acknowledge SI motion data change) Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A01696 (F) SI Motion: Testing of the motion monitoring functions selected when booting Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The test of the motion monitoring functions was already illegally active when booting. This is the reason that the test is only carried out again after selecting the forced checking procedure parameterized in p9705. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. See also: p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source) Remedy: De-select the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions and then select again. The signal source for initiation is parameterized in binector input p9705. Notice: It is not permissible to use TM54F inputs to start the test stop. Note: SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source) Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1283 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01697 (F) SI Motion: Motion monitoring functions must be tested Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The time set in p9559 for the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions has been exceeded. A new test is required. After next selecting the forced checking procedure parameterized in p9705, the message is withdrawn and the monitoring time is reset. Note: - This message does not result in a safety stop response. - As the shutdown paths are not automatically checked during booting, an alarm is always issued once booting is complete. - The test must be performed within a defined, maximum time interval (p9559, maximum of 9000 hours) in order to comply with the requirements as laid down in the standards for timely fault detection and the conditions to calculate the failure rates of safety functions (PFH value). Operation beyond this maximum time period is permissible if it can be ensured that the forced checking procedure is performed before persons enter the hazardous area and who are depending on the safety functions correctly functioning. See also: p9559 (SI Motion forced checking procedure timer (Control Unit)), p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source) Remedy: Carry out the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions. The signal source for initiation is parameterized in binector input p9705. Notice: It is not permissible to use TM54F inputs to start the test stop. Note: SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source) Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A01698 (F) SI CU: Commissioning mode active Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The commissioning of the "Safety Integrated" function is selected. This message is withdrawn after the safety functions have been commissioned. Note: - This message does not result in a safety stop response. - In the safety commissioning mode, the "STO" function is internally selected. See also: p0010 Remedy: Not necessary. Note: CU: Control Unit SI: Safety Integrated Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A01699 (F) SI CU: Shutdown path must be tested Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The time set in p9659 for the forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown paths has been exceeded. The safety shutdown paths must be re-tested. After the next time the "STO" function is de-selected, the message is withdrawn and the monitoring time is reset. 3-1284 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: - This message does not result in a safety stop response. - The test must be performed within a defined, maximum time interval (p9659, maximum of 9000 hours) in order to comply with the requirements as laid down in the standards for timely fault detection and the conditions to calculate the failure rates of safety functions (PFH value). Operation beyond this maximum time period is permissible if it can be ensured that the forced checking procedure is performed before persons enter the hazardous area and who are depending on the safety functions correctly functioning. See also: p9659 (SI forced checking procedure timer) Remedy: Select STO and then de-select again. Note: CU: Control Unit SI: Safety Integrated STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) C01700 SI Motion CU: STOP A initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP A (pulses are suppressed via the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit). Possible causes: - stop request from the second monitoring channel. - pulses not suppressed after a parameterized time (p9557) after test stop selection. - subsequent response to the message C01706 "SI Motion CU: SAM/SBR limit exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01701 "SI Motion CU: STOP B initiated". - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01716 "SI Motion CU: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault on the second monitoring channel. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01706. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01701. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01715. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01716. - check the value in p9557 (where available), increase the value if necessary, and carry out a POWER ON - check the shutdown path of the Control Unit (check DRIVE-CLiQ communication if it has been implemented) - replace the Motor Module/Power Module - replace Control Unit. This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: via the machine control panel in acceptance test mode only Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring) SI: Safety Integrated C01701 SI Motion CU: STOP B initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP B (braking along the OFF3 deceleration ramp). As a result of this fault, after the time parameterized in p9556 has expired, or the speed threshold parameterized in p9560 has been undershot, message C01700 "STOP A initiated" is output. Possible causes: - stop request from the second monitoring channel. - subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01711 "SI Motion CU: Defect in a monitoring channel". (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1285 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - subsequent response to the message C01707 "SI Motion CU: tolerance for safe operating stop exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01716 "SI Motion CU: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault on the second monitoring channel. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01711. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01707. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01715. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01716. This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: via the machine control panel in acceptance test mode only Note: SI: Safety Integrated C01706 SI Motion CU: SAM/SBR limit exceeded Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: Motion monitoring functions with encoder (p9506 = 0) or encoderless with set acceleration monitoring (p9506 = 3): SAM - safe acceleration monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or STOP C (SS2), the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance. Motion monitoring functions encoderless with set brake ramp monitoring (p9506 = 1): SBR - Safe brake ramp monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or SLS changeover to the lower speed stage, the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance. The drive is shut down by the message C01700 "SI Motion: STOP A initiated". Remedy: Check the braking behavior and, if necessary, adapt the tolerance for the "SAM" function or modify the parameter settings for the "SBR" function. This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: via the machine control panel in acceptance test mode only Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe ramp monitoring) SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9548 (SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit)), p9581 (SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Control Unit)), p9582 (SI Motion brake ramp delay time (Control Unit)), p9583 (SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (Control Unit)) C01707 SI Motion CU: Tolerance for safe operating stop exceeded Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The actual position has distanced itself further from the target position than the standstill tolerance. The drive is shut down by the message C01701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated". Remedy: - check whether safety faults are present and if required carry out the appropriate diagnostic routines for the particular faults. - check whether the standstill tolerance matches the accuracy and control dynamic performance of the axis. - carry out a POWER ON. This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: via the machine control panel in acceptance test mode only Note: SI: Safety Integrated SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop See also: p9530 (SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit)) 3-1286 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms C01708 SI Motion CU: STOP C initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: STOP2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP C (braking along the OFF3 deceleration ramp). "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized time has expired. Possible causes: - stop request from the higher-level control. - subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01716 "SI Motion CU: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". See also: p9552 (SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit)) Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714/C01715/C01716. This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel Note: SI: Safety Integrated SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop C01709 SI Motion CU: STOP D initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP D (braking along the path). "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized time has expired. Possible causes: - stop request from the higher-level control. - subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01716 "SI Motion CU: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". See also: p9553 (SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit)) Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714/C01715/C01716. This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel Note: SI: Safety Integrated SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop C01710 SI Motion CU: STOP E initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP E (retraction motion). "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized time has expired. Possible causes: - stop request from the higher-level control. - subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01716 "SI Motion CU: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". See also: p9554 (SI Motion transition time STOP E to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit)) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1287 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01714/C01715/C01716. This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel Note: SI: Safety Integrated SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop C01711 SI Motion CU: Defect in a monitoring channel Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: When cross-comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between the input data or results of the monitoring functions and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible. If at least one monitoring function is active, then after the parameterized timer has expired, the message C01701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output. The message value that resulted in a STOP F is displayed in r9725. The described message values involve the crosswise data comparison between the Control Unit and Motor Module. If the drive is operated together with a SINUMERIK, the message values are described in message 27001 of SINUMERIK. The following message values may also occur in the following cases if the cause that is explicitly mentioned does not apply: - cycle times not set uniformly (p9500/p9300 and p9511/p9311) - differently parameterized axis types (p9502/p9302). - excessively fast cycle times (p9500/p9300, p9511/p9311). - for message values 3, 44 ... 57, 232 and 1-encoder systems, differently parameterized encoder values (p9516/p9316, p9517/p9317, p9518/p9318, p9520/p9320, p9521/p9321, p9522/p9322, p9526/p9326). - incorrect synchronization. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): 0 to 999: Number of the cross-compared data that resulted in this fault. Message values that are not subsequently listed are only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. 0: Stop request from the other monitoring channel. 1: Status image of monitoring functions SOS, SLS or SLP (result list 1) (r9710[0], r9710[1]). 2: Status image of monitoring function SCA or n < nx (result list 2) (r9711[0], r9711[1]). 3: The position actual value differential (r9713) between the two monitoring channels is greater than the tolerance in p9542/p9342. When actual value synchronization is enabled (p9501.3/p9301.3), the velocity differential (based on the position actual value) is greater than the tolerance in p9549/p9349. 4: Error when synchronizing the crosswise data comparison between the two channels. 5: Function enable signals (p9501/p9301) 6: Limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0]) 7: Limit value for SLS2 (p9531[1]/p9331[1]) 8: Limit value for SLS3 (p9531[2]/p9331[2]) 9: Limit value for SLS4 (p9531[3]/p9331[3]) 10: Standstill tol. (p9530/p9330) 11: Upper limit value for SLP1 (p9534[0]/p9334[0]). 12: Lower limit value for SLP1 (p9535[0]/p9335[0]). 13: Upper limit value for SLP2 (p9534[1]/p9334[1]). 14: Lower limit value for SLP2 (p9535[1]/p9335[1]). 31: Position tolerance (p9542/p9342) or (p9549/p9349) when actual value synchronization is enabled (p9501.3/p9301.3) 32: Position tolerance for safe referencing (p9544/p9344). 33: Time, velocity changeover (p9551/p9351) 35: Delay time, pulse canc. (p9556/p9356) 36: Checking time, pulse canc. (p9557/p9357) 37: Trans. time, STOP C to SOS (p9552/p9352) 38: Trans. time STOP D to SOS (p9553/p9353) 39: Trans. time, STOP E to SOS (p9554/p9354) 40: Stop response for SLS (p9561/p9361) 41: Stop response for SLP1 (p9562[0]/p9362[0]) 42: Shutdown speed, pulse canc. (p9560/p9360) 3-1288 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 43: Memory test, stop response (STOP A). 44 ... 57: General Possible cause 1 (during commissioning or parameter modification) The tolerance value for the monitoring function is not the same on the two monitoring channels. Possible cause 2 (during active operation) The limit values are based on the actual value (r9713). If the safe actual values on the two monitoring channels do not match, the limit values, which have been set at a defined interval, will also be different (i.e. corresponding to fault value 3). This can be ascertained by checking the safe actual positions. 44: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0]) * Safety monitoring clock cycle 45: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0]) * Safety monitoring clock cycle 46: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value for SLS2 (p9531[1]/p9331[1]) * Safety monitoring clock cycle 47: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value for SLS2 (p9531[1]/p9331[1]) * Safety monitoring clock cycle 48: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value for SLS3 (p9531[2]/p9331[2]) * Safety monitoring clock cycle 49: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value for SLS3 (p9531[2]/p9331[2]) * Safety monitoring clock cycle 50: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value for SLS4 (p9531[3]/p9331[3]) * Safety monitoring clock cycle 51: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value for SLS4 (p9531[3]/p9331[3]) * Safety monitoring clock cycle 52: Standstill position + tolerance (p9530/9330) 53: Standstill position - tolerance (p9530/9330) 54: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value nx (p9546/p9346) + tolerance (p9542/p9342) 55: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value nx (p9546/p9346) 56: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value nx (p9546/p9346) 57: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value nx (p9546/p9346) - tolerance (p9542/p9342) 58: Actual stop request. 75: Velocity limit nx (p9546, p9346). When the function "n<nx: hysteresis and filtering" (p9501.16=1) is enabled, this fault value is also output for a different hysteresis tolerance ( p9547/p9347). 76: Stop response for SLS1 (p9563[0]/p9363[0]) 77: Stop response for SLS2 (p9563[1]/p9363[1]) 78: Stop response for SLS3 (p9563[2]/p9363[2]) 79: Stop response for SLS4 (p9563[3]/p9363[3]) 80: Modulo value for SP for rotary axes (p9505/p9305). 81: Velocity tolerance for SAM (p9548/p9348) 82: SGEs for SLS correction factor. 83: Acceptance test timer (p9558/p9358) 84: Trans. time STOP F (p9555/p9355) 85: Trans. time bus failure (p9580/p9380) 86: ID 1-encoder system (p9526/p9326). 87: Encoder assignment, second channel (p9526/p9326) 89: Encoder limit freq. 230: Filter time constant for n < nx. 231: Hysteresis tolerance for n < nx. 232: Smoothed velocity actual value. 233: Limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle + hysteresis tolerance. 234: Limit value nx / Safety monitoring clock cycle. 235: -Limit value nx / Safety monitoring clock cycle. 236: -Limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle - hysteresis tolerance. 237: SGA n < nx. 238: Speed limit value for SAM (p9568/p9368). 239: Acceleration for SBR (p9581/p9381 and p9583/p9383). 240: Inverse value of acceleration for SBR (p9581/p9381 and p9583/p9383). 241: Deceleration time for SBR (p9582/p9382). 242: Encoderless safety (p9506/p9306). 243: Extended alarm acknowledgment (p9507/p9307). 244: Encoderless actual value sensing filter time (p9587/p9387). 245: Encoderless actual value sensing minimum current (p9588/p9388). 246: Voltage tolerance acceleration (p9589/p9389). 247: SDI tolerance (p9564/p9364). 248: SDI positive upper limit (0x7fffffff). 249: Position actual value (r9713) - SDI tolerance. 250: Position actual value (r9713) + SDI tolerance. 251: SDI negative lower limit (0x80000001). 252: SDI stop response (p9566/p9366). 253: SDI delay time (p9565/p9365). 254: Setting the evaluation delay for actual value sensing after pulse enable (p9586/p9386). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1289 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 255: Setting, behavior during pulse suppression (p9509/p9309). 256: Status image of monitoring functions SOS, SLS, SLP, test stop, SBR, SDI (result list 1 ext) (r9710). 257: Safety functions for motion monitoring functions without selection (p9512/p9312) different. 258: Fault tolerance, actual value sensing encoderless (p9585/p9385). 259: Scaling factor for safe position via PROFIsafe (p9574/p9374) different. 260: Modulo value including scaling (p9505/p9305 and p9574/p9374) for SP with 16 bit. 261: Scaling factor for acceleration for SBR different. 262: Scaling factor for the inverse value of the acceleration for SBR different. 263: Stop response for SLP2 (p9562[1]/p9362[1]) 264: Position tolerance including scaling (p9542/p9342 and p9574/p9374) for SP with 16 bit. 1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Too many signal changes have occurred at safety-relevant inputs. 1001: Initialization error of watchdog timer. 1002: User agreement after the timer has expired different. The user agreement is not consistent. After a time of 2 s has expired, the status of the user agreement is different in both monitoring channels. 1003: Reference tolerance exceeded. When the user agreement is set, the difference between the new reference point that has been determined after power up (absolute encoder) or reference point approach (distance-coded or incremental measuring system) and the safe actual position (saved value + traversing distance) is greater than the reference tolerance (p9544). In this case, the user agreement is withdrawn. 1004: Plausibility error for user agreement. 1. If the user agreement has already been set, then setting is initiated again. In this case, the user agreement is withdrawn. 2. The user agreement was set, although the axis has still not been referenced. 1005: - For safe motion monitoring functions without encoder: pulses already suppressed for test stop selection. - For safe motion monitoring functions with encoder: STO already active for test stop selection. 1011: Acceptance test status between the monitoring channels differ. 1012: Plausibility violation of the actual value from the encoder. 1020: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. cycles. 1021: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. channel and Sensor Module. 1022: Sign-of-life error for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder CU 1023: Error in the effectiveness test in the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder 1032: Sign-of-life error for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder MM 1033: Error checking offset between POS1 and POS2 for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder CU 1034: Error checking offset between POS1 and POS2 for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder MM 1041: Current absolute value too low (encoderless) 1042: Current/voltage plausibility error 1043: Too many acceleration phases 1044: Actual current values plausibility error. 5000 ... 5140: PROFIsafe message values. For these fault values, the failsafe control signals (failsafe values) are transferred to the safety functions. 5000, 5014, 5023, 5024, 5030 ... 5032, 5042, 5043, 5052, 5053, 5068, 5072, 5073, 5082 ... 5087, 5090, 5091, 5122 ... 5125, 5132 ... 5135, 5140: An internal software error has occurred (only for internal Siemens troubleshooting). 5012: Error when initializing the PROFIsafe driver. 5013: The result of the initialization is different for the two controllers. 5022: Error when evaluating the F parameters. The values of the transferred F parameters do not match the expected values in the PROFIsafe driver. 5025: The result of the F parameterization is different for the two controllers. 5026: CRC error for the F parameters. The transferred CRC value of the F parameters does not match the value calculated in the PST. 5065: A communications error was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram. 5066: A time monitoring error (timeout) was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram. 6000 ... 6166: PROFIsafe message values (PROFIsafe driver for PROFIBUS DP V1/V2 and PROFINET). For these fault values, the failsafe control signals (failsafe values) are transferred to the safety functions. 6000: A fatal PROFIsafe communication error has occurred. 6064 ... 6071: Error when evaluating the F parameters. The values of the transferred F parameters do not match the expected values in the PROFIsafe driver. 6064: Destination address and PROFIsafe address are different (F_Dest_Add). 3-1290 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 6065: Destination address not valid (F_Dest_Add). 6066: Source address not valid (F_Source_Add). 6067: Watchdog time not valid (F_WD_Time). 6068: Incorrect SIL level (F_SIL). 6069: Incorrect F-CRC length (F_CRC_Length). 6070: Incorrect F parameter version (F_Par_Version). 6071: CRC error for the F parameters (CRC1). The transferred CRC value of the F parameters does not match the value calculated in the PROFIsafe driver. 6072: F parameterization is inconsistent. 6165: A communications error was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram. The fault may also occur if an inconsistent or out-of-date PROFIsafe telegram has been received after switching the Control Unit off and on or after plugging in the PROFIBUS/PROFINET cable. 6166: A time monitoring error (timeout) was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram. 7000: Difference of the safe position is greater than the parameterized tolerance (p9542/p9342). 7001: Scaling value for the safe position in the 16 bit notation, too low (p9574/p9374). 7002: Cycle counter for transferring the safe position is different in both monitoring channels. See also: p9555 (SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Control Unit)), r9725 (SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F) Remedy: The following generally applies: The monitoring clock cycles in both channels and the axis types should be checked for equality and the same setting applied if necessary. If the error continues to be identified, increasing the monitoring clock cycles may resolve it. Re message value = 0: - no error was identified in this monitoring channel. Note the error message of the other monitoring channel (for MM: C30711). Re message value = 3: Commissioning phase: Encoder evaluation for own or second channel has been set incorrectly --> Correct the encoder evaluation. In operation: Check the mechanical design and the encoder signals. Re message value = 4: The monitoring clock cycles in both channels should be checked for equality and if required, set the same. In combination with fault value 5 from the other monitoring channel (with MM: C30711), the monitoring clock cycle settings must be increased. Re message value = 232: -increase the hysteresis tolerance (p9547/p9347). Possibly set the filtering higher (p9545/p9345). Re message value = 1 ... 999: - if the message value is listed under cause: Check the crosswise-compared parameters to which the message value refers. - copy the safety parameters. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. - correction of the encoder evaluation. The actual values differ as a result of mechanical faults (V belts, travel to a mechanical endstop, wear and window setting that is too narrow, encoder fault, ...). Re message value = 1000: - investigate the signal associated with the safety-relevant input (contact problems). Re message value = 1001: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. Re message value = 1002: - Perform safe acknowledgment, set the user agreement in both monitoring channels simultaneously (within 2 s). Re message value = 1003: - check the mechanical system of the axis. It is possible that the axis was shifted when switched-off, and the last saved actual position no longer corresponds with the new actual position after the system has been powered up again. - Increase the tolerance for the actual value comparison when referencing (p9544). Then check the actual values, perform a POWER ON and set the user agreement again. Re message value = 1004: For 1., the following applies: Perform safe acknowledgment. Set the user agreement again. For 2., the following applies: Perform safe acknowledgment. Only set the user agreement again if the axis has been referenced. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1291 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re message value = 1005: - For safe motion monitoring functions without encoder: check the conditions for pulse enable. - For safe motion monitoring functions with encoder: check the conditions for STO deselection. Note: For a power module, the test stop should always be performed for pulse enable (independent of whether with encoder or without encoder). Re message value = 1011: - for diagnostics, refer to parameter (r9571). Re message value = 1012: - upgrade the Sensor Module software. - for 1-encoder systems, the following applies: check the encoder parameters for equality (p9515/p9315, p9519/p9319, p9523/p9323, p9524/p9324, p9525/p9325, p9529/p9329). - For DQI encoders the following applies: If required, upgrade the firmware version of the Control Unit to a more recent version, which is released for DQI encoders. - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance Re message value = 1020, 1021: - check the communication link. - increase the monitoring cycle clock settings (p9500, p9511). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - replace the hardware. Re message value = 1033: - If required, upgrade the firmware version of the Control Unit to a more recent version, which is released for DQI encoders. Re message value = 1041: - Check whether the motor has sufficient current (>r9785[0]). - reduce the minimum current (p9588). - for synchronous motors increase the absolute value of p9783. - Check whether the function "Closed-loop controlled operation with HF signal injection" is activated (p1750.5 = 1) and if required, deactivate. Re message value = 1042: - increase the ramp-function generator ramp-up/down time (p1120/p1121). - check that the current/speed control is set correctly (torque-generating/field-generating current and actual speed value may not fluctuate). - reduce the dynamic response of the setpoint value. - Check the absolute current and voltage values, and set the control behavior so that this is greater than 3% of the rated converter data in operation or in the case of a fault. Re message value = 1043: - increase the voltage tolerance (p9589). - increase the ramp-function generator ramp-up/down time (p1120/p1121). - check that the current/speed control is set correctly (torque-generating/field-generating current and actual speed value may not fluctuate). - reduce the dynamic response of the setpoint value. Re message value = 5000, 5014, 5023, 5024, 5030, 5031, 5032, 5042, 5043, 5052, 5053, 5068, 5072, 5073, 5082 ... 5087, 5090, 5091, 5122 ... 5125, 5132 ... 5135, 5140: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. - replace the Control Unit. Re message value = 5012: - check the setting of the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit (p9610) and that of the Motor Module (p9810). It is not permissible for the PROFIsafe address to be 0 or FFFF! Re message value = 5013, 5025: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check the setting of the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit (p9610) and that of the Motor Module (p9810). - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. Re message value = 5022: - check the setting of the values of the F parameters at the PROFIsafe slave (F_SIL, F_CRC_Length, F_Par_Version, F_Source_Add, F_Dest_add, F_WD_Time). Re message value = 5026: - check the settings of the values of the F parameters and the F parameter CRC (CRC1) calculated from these at the PROFIsafe slave and update. 3-1292 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re message value = 5065: - check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave (cons. No. / CRC). - check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. Re message value = 5066: - check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary. - evaluate diagnostic information in the F host. - check PROFIsafe connection. Re message value = 6000: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. - increase the monitoring cycle clock settings (p9500, p9511). - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. - replace the Control Unit. Re message value = 6064: - check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe slave. - check the setting of the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit (p9610) and that of the Motor Module (p9810). Re message value = 6065: - check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the destination address to be either 0 or FFFF! Re message value = 6066: - check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Source_Add at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the source address to be either 0 or FFFF! Re message value = 6067: - check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_WD_Time at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the watch time to be 0! Re message value = 6068: - check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_SIL at the PROFIsafe slave. The SIL level must correspond to SIL2! Re message value = 6069: - check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_CRC_Length at the PROFIsafe slave. The setting of the CRC2 length is 2-byte CRC in the V1 mode and 3-byte CRC in the V2 mode! Re message value = 6070: - check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Par_Version at the PROFIsafe slave. The value for the F parameter version is 0 in the V1 mode and 1 in the V2 mode! Re message value = 6071: - check the settings of the values of the F parameters and the F parameter CRC (CRC1) calculated from these at the PROFIsafe slave and, if required, update. Re message value = 6072: - check the settings of the values for the F parameters and, if required, correct. The following combinations are permissible for F parameters F_CRC_Length and F_Par_Version: F_CRC_Length = 2-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 0 F_CRC_Length = 3-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 1 Re message value = 6165: - if the fault occurs after powering up the Control Unit or after plugging in the PROFIBUS/PROFINET cable, acknowledge the fault. - check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave. - check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. Re message value = 6166: - check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave. - check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary. - evaluate diagnostic information in the F host. - check PROFIsafe connection. Re message value = 7000: - Increase the position tolerance (p9542/p9342). - Determine the actual position of CU (r9713[0] and the second channel r9713[1], and check the difference for plausibility. - Reduce the difference of the actual position from CU (r9713[0] and the second channel r9713[1] for a 2-encoder system. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1293 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re message value = 7001: - Increase the scaling value for the safe position in the 16 bit notation (p9574/p9374). - If required, reduce the traversing range. Re message value = 7002: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel See also: p9300 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module)), p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit)) C01712 SI Motion CU: Defect in F-IO processing Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: When cross checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between parameters or results of the F-IO processing and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible. The safety message C01711 with message value 0 is also displayed due to initiation of STOP F. If at least one monitoring function is active, the safety message C01701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output after the parameterized timer has expired. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): Number of the cross-compared data that resulted in this message. 1: SI discrepancy monitoring time inputs (p10002, p10102). 2: SI acknowledgement internal event input terminal (p10006, p10106). 3: SI STO input terminal (p10022, p10122). 4: SI SS1 input terminal (p10023, p10123). 5: SI SS2 input terminal (p10024, p10124). 6: SI SOS input terminal (p10025, p10125). 7: SI SLS input terminal (p10026, p10126). 8: SI SLS_Limit(1) input terminal (p10027, p10127). 9: SI SLS_Limit(2) input terminal (p10028, p10128). 10: SI Safe State signal selection (p10039, p10139). 11 SI F-DI input mode (p10040, p10140). 12: SI F-DO 0 signal sources (p10042, p10142). 13: Different states for static inactive signal sources (p10006, p10022 ... p10031). 14: SI discrepancy monitoring time outputs (p10002, p10102). 15: SI acknowledgment internal event (p10006, p10106). 16: SI test sensor feedback signal test mode selected for test stop (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). 17: SI delay time for test stop at DOs (p10001). 18 ... 25: SI test sensor feedback signal (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). Expected state of internal readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode. 26 ... 33: SI test sensor feedback signal (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). Expected state of external readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode. 34 ... 41: SI test sensor feedback signal (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). Expected state of second internal readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode. 42: Internal data for processing the second internal readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode (p10047, p10147). 43: Internal data for processing the internal readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode (p10047, p10147). 44: Internal data for processing the external readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode (p10047, p10147). 45: Internal data for initialization state of test stop mode, dependent upon test stop parameters. 46: SI digital inputs debounce time (p10017, p10117) 47: Selection F-DI for PROFIsafe (p10050, p10150) 48: Screen form of the F-DIs used (p10006, p10022 ... p10031). 49: SI SDI positive input terminal (p10030, p10130). 50: SI SDI negative input terminal (p10031, p10131). 51: SI SLP input terminal (p10032, p10132). 3-1294 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 52: SI SLP select input terminal (p10033, p10133). 53: Internal data for retraction logic (p10009, p100109). 54: SI F-DI for retraction SLP (p10009, p100109). Remedy: - check parameterization in the parameters involved and correct if required. - ensure equality by copying the SI data to the second channel and then carry out an acceptance test. - check monitoring clock cycle in p9500 and p9300 for equality. Note: This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe. See also: p9300 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module)), p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit)) C01714 SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive has moved faster than that specified by the velocity limit value (p9531). The drive is stopped as a result of the configured stop response (p9563). Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): 100: SLS1 exceeded. 200: SLS2 exceeded. 300: SLS3 exceeded. 400: SLS4 exceeded. 1000: Encoder limit frequency exceeded. Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control. - check the limits for "Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) and if required, adapt (p9531). This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed See also: p9531 (SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit)), p9563 (SI Motion SLS (SG)-specific stop response (Control Unit)) C01715 SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Position exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The axis has moved past a parameterized position that is monitored by the "SLP" function. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): 10: SLP1 violated. 20: SLP2 violated. Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control. - check the limits for "SLP" function and if required, adapt (p9534, p9535). This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches See also: p9534 (SI Motion SLP (SE) upper limit values (Control Unit)), p9535 (SI Motion SLP (SE) lower limit values (Control Unit)) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1295 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms C01716 SI Motion CU: Tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The tolerance for the "safe motion direction" function was exceeded. The drive is stopped as a result of the configured stop response (p9566). Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): 0: Tolerance for the "safe motion direction positive" function exceeded. 1: Tolerance for the "safe motion direction negative" function exceeded. Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control. - check the tolerance for "SDI" function and if required, adapt (p9564). This message can be acknowledged as follows: - Deselect the "SDI" function and select again. - Perform a safe acknowledgment via F-DI or PROFIsafe. Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9564 (SI Motion SDI tolerance (Control Unit)), p9565 (SI Motion SDI delay time (Control Unit)), p9566 (SI Motion SDI stop response (Control Unit)) C01730 SI Motion CU: Reference block for dynamic safely limited speed invalid Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The reference block transferred via PROFIsafe is negative. A reference block is used to generate a referred velocity limit value based on the reference quantity "Velocity limit value SLS1" (p9531[0]). The drive is stopped as a result of the configured stop response (p9563[0]). Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): requested, invalid reference block. Remedy: In the PROFIsafe telegram, input data S_SLS_LIMIT_IST must be corrected. This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed C01745 SI Motion CU: Checking braking torque for the brake test Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY) Cause: The scaling of the brake torque for the brake test can be changed using parameter p2003. An acceptance test must be carried out again for the braking test. This determines whether the braking test is still carried out with the correct braking torque. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - repeat the acceptance test for the safe brake test if the brake test is used. See also: p2003 (Reference torque) 3-1296 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms C01750 SI Motion CU: Hardware fault safety-relevant encoder Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The encoder that is used for the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions signals a hardware fault. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): Encoder status word 1, encoder status word 2 that resulted in the message. Remedy: - check the encoder connection. - replace encoder. This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel. Note regarding encoder replacement for a third-party motor: The serial number of the encoder must be copied in order to acknowledge this safety message. This can be realized using p0440 = 1 or p1990 = 1. C01751 SI Motion CU: Effectivity test error safety-relevant encoder Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder for safe motion monitoring signals an error for the effectivity tests. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check the encoder connection. - replace encoder. This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel C01770 SI Motion CU: Discrepancy error of the failsafe inputs or outputs Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The fail-safe digital inputs/digital outputs (F-DI/F-DO) show a different state longer than that parameterized in p10002 / p10102. Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary): yyyyxxxx bin xxxx: Discrepancy error for fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI). Bit 0: Discrepancy error for F-DI 0 Bit 1: Discrepancy error for F-DI 1 ... yyyy: Discrepancy error for fail-safe digital outputs (F-DO). Bit 0: Discrepancy error for F-DO 0 ... Note: If several discrepancy errors occur consecutively, then this fault is only signaled for the first error that occurs. Remedy: - check the wiring of the F-DI (contact problems). Note: This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe. Discrepancy errors of an F-DI can only be completely acknowledged if safe acknowledgement was carried out once the cause of the error was resolved (p10006 or acknowledgment via PROFIsafe). As long as safety acknowledgement was not carried out, the corresponding F-DI stays in the safe state internally. For cyclic switching operations at the F-DI, it may be necessary to adapt the discrepancy time to the switching frequency. If the period of a cyclic switching pulse has the order of magnitude of double the value of p10002, then the following formulas must be checked. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1297 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms p10002 < (tp / 2) - td (discrepancy time must be less than half the period minus the actual discrepancy time) p10002 >= p9500 (discrepancy time must be no less than P9500) p10002 > td (discrepancy time must be greater than the switch discrepancy time which may actually apply) td = possible actual discrepancy time (in ms) that can occur with a switching operation. This must correspond to at least 1 SI sampling cycle (see p9500). tp = period for a switching operation in ms. When debounce p10017 is active, the discrepancy time is directly specified by the debounce time. If the period of a cyclic switching pulse has the order of magnitude of twice the debounce time, then the following formulas should be checked. p10002 < p10017 + 1 ms - td p10002 > td p10002 >= p9500 Example: For a 12 ms SI sampling cycle and a switching frequency of 110 ms (p10017 = 0), the maximum discrepancy time which can be set is as follows: p10002 <= (110/2 ms) - 12 ms = 43 ms Rounded-off, p10002 <= 36 ms is obtained (since the discrepancy time can only be accepted as a whole SI sampling cycle, the value will need to be rounded up or down to a whole SI sampling time value if the result is not an exact multiple of an SI sampling cycle). Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output A01772 SI Motion CU: Test stop failsafe inputs/outputs active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The test stop for the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI) and/or fail-safe digital outputs (F-DO) is presently being performed. Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output Remedy: The alarm disappears automatically after successfully ending or canceling (when a fault condition occurs) the test stop. F01773 SI Motion CU: Test stop error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A fault has occurred on the CU side during the test stop for the fail-safe outputs. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): RRRVWXYZ hex: R: Reserved. V: Actual state of the DO channel concerned (see X) on the CU (corresponds to the states read back from the hardware, bit 0 = DO 0, bit 1 = DO 1, etc.). W: Required state of the DO channel concerned (see X, bit 0 = DO 0, bit 1 = DO 1, etc.). X: DO channels involved, which indicate an error (bit 0 = DO 0, bit 1 = DO 1, etc.). Y: Reason for the test stop fault. Z: State of the test stop in which the fault has occurred. Y: Reason for the test stop fault Y = 1: MM side in incorrect test stop state (internal fault). Y = 2: Expected states of the DOs were not fulfilled (CU305: readback via DI 22 / CU240 readback DI 2). Y = 3: Incorrect timer state on CU side (internal fault) Y = 4: Expected states of the diag DOs were not fulfilled (CU305: internal readback on MM channel). Y = 5: Expected states of the second diag DOs were not fulfilled (CU305: internal readback on CU channel). X and V indicate the DI or Diag-DO state dependent upon the reason for the fault (2, 4 or 5). In the event of multiple test stop faults, the first one that occurred is shown. Z: Test stop state and associated test actions Z = 0 ... 3: Synchronization phase of test stop between CU and Motor Module no switching operations Z = 4: DO + OFF and DO - OFF 3-1298 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Z = 5: Check to see if states are as expected Z = 6: DO + ON and DO - ON Z = 7: Check to see if states are as expected Z = 8: DO + OFF and DO - ON Z = 9: Check to see if states are as expected Z = 10: DO + ON and DO - OFF Z = 11: Check to see if states are as expected Z = 12: DO + OFF and DO - OFF Z = 13: Check to see if states are as expected Z = 14: End of test stop Diag expected states in table format: Test stop state: Expectation Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Mode 3 / Mode 4 5: 0/-/-/1 7: 0/-/-/0 9: 0/-/-/0 11: 1/-/-/1 13: 0/-/-/1 Second diag expected states in table format: Test stop state: Expectation Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Mode 3 / Mode 4 5: -/-/-/1 7: -/-/-/0 9: -/-/-/1 11: -/-/-/0 13: -/-/-/1 DI expected states in table format: Test stop state: Expectation Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Mode 3 / Mode 4 5: -/1/1/7: -/0/0/9: -/0/1/11: -/0/1/13: -/1/1/Example: Fault F01773 (CU) is signaled with fault value = 0001_0127 and fault F30773 (MM) is signaled with fault value 0000_0127. This means that in state 7 (Z = 7) the state of the external readback signal was not set correctly (Y = 2) after DO-0 (X = 1) was switched to ON/ON. Fault value 0001_0127 indicates that 0 was expected (W = 0) and 1 (V = 1) was read back from the hardware. Fault value 0000_0127 on the MM indicates that the states were as expected. In the case of fault F30773, W and V are always identical; a value of 0 always means that 0 was expected at the readback input but was not present on the other channel (CU). Remedy: Check the wiring of the F-DOs and restart the test stop. Note: The fault is withdrawn if the test stop is successfully completed. In the event of multiple test stop faults, the first one that occurred is shown. Once the test stop has been restarted the next queued test stop fault will be signaled (if there is one). A01774 SI Motion CU: Test stop necessary Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: - after powering up the drive, a test stop has still not been carried out. - a new test stop is required after commissioning. - the time to carry out the forced checking procedure (test stop) has expired (p10003). Note: - The test must be performed within a defined, maximum time interval (p10003, maximum of 8760 hours) in order to comply with the requirements as laid down in the standards for timely fault detection and the conditions to calculate the failure rates of safety functions (PFH value). Operation beyond this maximum time period is permissible if it can be ensured that the forced checking procedure is performed before persons enter the hazardous area and who are depending on the safety functions correctly functioning. Remedy: Initiate test stop (BI: p10007). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1299 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01795 SI Motion CU: Wait time after exiting the safe pulse cancellation expired Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: After exiting safe pulse cancellation, within the wait time of 5 seconds, encoderless actual value sensing was not able to be activated for the extended functions without selection. A change is again made into the "safe pulse cancellation" state. Remedy: - Check missing enable signals, which prevent the drive control from being commissioned (r0046). - Evaluate possible fault messages of the encoderless actual value sensing and remove. A01796 (F, N) SI CU: Wait for communication Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The drive waits for communication to be established to execute the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions. Note: In this state, the pulses are safely suppressed. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wait for communication to be established to SINUMERIK. 2: Wait for communication to be established to TM54F. 3: Wait for communication to be established to PROFIsafe F-Host. Remedy: If, after a longer period of time, the message is not automatically withdrawn, the following checks have to be made as appropriate: For communication with SINUMERIK, the following applies: - check any other PROFIBUS messages/signals present and remove their cause. - check that assignment of the axes on the higher-level control to the drives in the drive unit is correct. - check enable signal of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions for the corresponding axis on the higherlevel control and if required, set it. For communication with TM54F, the following applies: - check any other messages/signals present for DRIVE-CLiQ communication with the TM54F and remove their cause. - check the setting of p10010. All the drive objects controlled by the TM54F must be listed. For communication with PROFIsafe F-Host, the following applies: - Check any other PROFIsafe communication messages/signals present and evaluate them. - check the operating state of the F-Host. - Check the communication connection to the F Host. - Check the communication connection to the Motor Module. It must be ensured that when the Control Unit powers up, the Motor Module is connected and at the latest is also switched-on with the Control Unit. Otherwise, if the Motor Module is subsequently inserted or switched-on, a power on must be performed at the Control Unit. See also: p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit)), p9801 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module)), p10010 (SI drive object assignment) Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE C01797 SI Motion CU: Axis not safely referenced Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The standstill position saved before powering down does not match the actual position determined at power-up. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): 1: Axis not referenced. 2: User agreement missing. 3-1300 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: If safe automatic referencing is not possible the user must issue a user agreement for the new position using the softkey. This mean that this position is then designated as safety-relevant. Note: SI: Safety Integrated C01798 SI Motion CU: Test stop running Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The test stop is active. Remedy: Not necessary. The message is withdrawn when the test stop is finished. Note: SI: Safety Integrated C01799 SI Motion CU: Acceptance test mode active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The acceptance test mode is active. The POWER ON signals of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions can be acknowledged during the acceptance test using the RESET button of the higher-level control. Remedy: Not necessary. The message is withdrawn when exiting the acceptance test mode. Note: SI: Safety Integrated F01800 DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware/configuration error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ connection fault has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 100 ... 107: Communication via DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 ... X107 has not been switched to cyclic operation. The cause may be an incorrect structure or a configuration that results in an impossible bus timing. 10: Loss of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. The cause may be, for example, that the DRIVE-CLiQ cable was withdrawn from the Control Unit or as a result of a short-circuit for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication. 11: Repeated faults when detecting the connection. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication. 12: A connection was detected but the node ID exchange mechanism does not function. The reason is probably that the component is defective. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication. Remedy: Re fault value = 100 ... 107: - ensure that the DRIVE-CLiQ components have the same firmware versions. - avoid longer topologies for short current controller clock cycles. For fault value = 10: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ cables at the Control Unit. - remove any short-circuit for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ. - carry out a POWER ON. For fault value = 11: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance For fault value = 12: - replace the component involved. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1301 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01840 SMI: Component found without motor data Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An SMI/DQI without motor data has been found (e.g. SMI installed as replacement part). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number from target topology. Remedy: 1. Download the SMI/DQI data (motor/encoder data) from the data backup again (p4690, p4691). 2. Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for this component. Note: DQI: DRIVE-CLiQ Sensor Integrated SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated See also: p4690 (SMI spare part component number), p4691 (SMI spare part save/download data) A01900 (F) PB/PN: Configuration telegram error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A controller attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Connection established to more drive objects than configured in the device. The drive objects for process data exchange and their sequence are defined in p0978. 2: Too many PZD data words for output or input to a drive object. The number of possible PZD items in a drive object is determined by the number of indices in r2050/p2051. 3: Uneven number of bytes for input or output. 4: Setting data for synchronization not accepted. For more information, see A01902. 211: Unknown parameterizing block. 223: Clock synchronization for the PZD interface set in p8815[0] is not permissible. More than one PZD interface is operated in clock synchronism. 253: PN Shared Device: Illegal mixed configuration of PROFIsafe and PZD. 254: PN Shared Device: Illegal double assignment of a slot/subslot. 255: PN: Configured drive object and existing drive object do not match. 500: Illegal PROFIsafe configuration for the interface set in p8815[1]. More than one PZD interface is operated with PROFIsafe. 501: PROFIsafe parameter error (e.g. F_dest). 502: PROFIsafe telegram does not match. 503: PROFIsafe connection is rejected as long as there is no isochronous connection (p8969). Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Check the bus configuration on the master and the slave sides. Re alarm value = 1, 2: - Check the list of the drive objects with process data exchange (p0978). Note: With p0978[x] = 0, all of the following drive objects in the list are excluded from the process data exchange. 3-1302 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re alarm value = 2: - Check the number of data words for output and input to a drive object. Re alarm value = 211: - Ensure offline version <= online version. Re alarm value = 223, 500: - Check the setting in p8839 and p8815. - Check for inserted but not configured CBE20. - Ensure that only one PZD interface is operated in clock synchronism or with PROFIsafe. Re alarm value = 255: - Check configured drive objects. Re alarm value = 501: - Check the set PROFIsafe address (p9610). Re alarm value = 502: - Check the set PROFIsafe telegram (p60022, p9611). Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A01902 PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation parameterization not permissible Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Parameterization for isochronous operation is not permissible. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 0: Bus cycle time Tdp < 0.5 ms. 1: Bus cycle time Tdp > 32 ms. 2: Bus cycle time Tdp is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle. 3: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti > Bus cycle time Tdp or Ti = 0. 4: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle. 5: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To >= Bus cycle time Tdp or To = 0. 6: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle. 7: Master application cycle time Tmapc is not an integer multiple of the speed controller clock cycle. 8: Bus reserve bus cycle time Tdp - data exchange time Tdx less than two current controller clock cycles. 10: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To <= data exchange time Tdx + current controller clock cycle 11: Master application cycle time Tmapc > 14 x Tdp or Tmapc = 0. 12: PLL tolerance window Tpll_w > Tpll_w_max. 13: Bus cycle time Tdp is not a multiple of all basic clock cycles p0110[x]. 16: For COMM BOARD, the instant in time for the actual value sensing Ti is less than two current controller clock cycles. Remedy: - Adapt the bus parameterization Tdp, Ti, To. - adapt the current and speed controller clock cycle. Re alarm value = 10: - Reduce Tdx by using fewer bus participants or shorter telegrams. Note: PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET F01910 (N, A) Fieldbus: setpoint timeout Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The reception of setpoints from the fieldbus interface (onboard, PROFIBUS/PROFINET/USS) has been interrupted. - bus connection interrupted. - controller switched off. - controller set into the STOP state. See also: p2047 (PROFIBUS additional monitoring time) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1303 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Restore the bus connection and set the controller to RUN. PROFIBUS slave redundancy: For operation on a Y link, it must be ensured that "DP alarm mode = DPV1" is set in the slave parameterization. See also: p2047 (PROFIBUS additional monitoring time) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01911 (N, A) PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation clock cycle failure Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 Vector: OFF1 (OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The global control telegram to synchronize the clock cycles has failed - in cyclic operation - for several DP clock cycles or has violated the time grid specified in the parameterizing telegram over several consecutive DP clock cycles (refer to the bus cycle time, Tdp and Tpllw). Remedy: - check the physical bus configuration (cable, connector, terminating resistor, shielding, etc.). - check whether communication was briefly or permanently interrupted. - check the bus and controller for utilization level (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short). PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01912 (N, A) PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation sign-of-life failure Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 Vector: OFF1 (OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The maximum permissible number of errors in the controller sign-of-life (clock synchronous operation) has been exceeded in cyclic operation. Remedy: - physically check the bus (cables, connectors, terminating resistor, shielding, etc.). - correct the interconnection of the controller sign-of-life (p2045). - check whether the controller correctly sends the sign-of-life (e.g. create a trace with STW2.12 ... STW2.15 and trigger signal ZSW1.3). - check the permissible telegram failure rate (p0925). - check the bus and controller for utilization level (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short). Note: PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A01920 (F) PROFIBUS: Interruption cyclic connection Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master is interrupted. Remedy: Establish the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master in the cyclic mode. 3-1304 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A01921 (F) PROFIBUS: Receive setpoints after To Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Output data of PROFIBUS master (setpoints) received at the incorrect instant in time within the PROFIBUS clock cycle. Remedy: - check bus configuration. - check parameters for clock cycle synchronization (ensure To > Tdx). Note: To: Time of setpoint acceptance Tdx: Data exchange time Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A01930 PB/PN current controller clock cycle clock cycle synch. not equal Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The current controller clock cycle of all drives must be set the same for the clock cycle synchronous operation. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the drive object with different current controller clock cycle. Remedy: Set current controller clock cycles to identical values (p0115[0]). Note: PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET See also: p0115 A01931 PB/PN speed controller clock cycle clock cycle synch. not equal Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The speed controller clock cycle of all drives must be set the same for the clock cycle synchronous operation. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the drive object with the different speed controller clock cycle. Remedy: Set the speed controller clock cycles the same (p0115[1]). Note: PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET See also: p0115 A01932 PB/PN clock cycle synchronization missing for DSC Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: There is no clock synchronization or clock synchronous sign of life and DSC is selected. Note: DSC: Dynamic Servo Control See also: p0922 (IF1 PROFIdrive telegram selection) Remedy: Set clock synchronization across the bus configuration and transfer clock synchronous sign-of-life. See also: r2064 (PB/PN diagnostics clock cycle synchronism) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1305 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A01940 PB/PN clock cycle synchronism not reached Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing telegram. It was not possible to synchronize to the clock cycle specified by the master. - the master does not send a clock synchronous global control telegram although clock synchronous operation was selected when configuring the bus. - the master is using another clock synchronous DP clock cycle than was transferred to the slave in the parameterizing telegram. - at least one drive object has a pulse enable (not controlled from PROFIBUS/PROFINET either). Remedy: - check the master application and bus configuration. - check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the slave and clock cycle setting at the master. - check that no drive object has a pulse enable. Only enable the pulses after synchronizing the PROFIBUS/PROFINET drives. Note: PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET A01941 PB/PN clock cycle signal missing when establishing bus communication Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing telegram. The global control telegram for synchronization is not being received. Remedy: Check the master application and bus configuration. Note: PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET A01943 PB/PN clock cycle signal error when establishing bus communication Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing telegram. The global control telegram for synchronization is being irregularly received. -.the master is sending an irregular global control telegram. - the master is using another clock synchronous DP clock cycle than was transferred to the slave in the parameterizing telegram. Remedy: - check the master application and bus configuration. - check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the slave and clock cycle setting at the master. Note: PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET A01944 PB/PN sign-of-life synchronism not reached Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing telegram. 3-1306 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Synchronization with the master sign-of-life (STW2.12 ... STW2.15) could not be completed because the sign-of-life is changing differently to how it was configured in the Tmapc time grid. Remedy: - ensure that the master correctly increments the sign-of-life in the master application clock cycle Tmapc. - correct the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (p2045). Note: PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET A01945 PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher failed Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer, the connection to at least one Publisher has failed. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection failed. ... Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection failed. Remedy: - check the PROFIBUS cables. - carry out a first commissioning of the Publisher that has the failed connection. See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses) F01946 (A) PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher aborted Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: At this drive object, the connection to at least one Publisher for PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer in cyclic operation has been aborted. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection aborted. ... Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection aborted. Remedy: - check the PROFIBUS cables. - check the state of the Publisher that has the aborted connection. See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F01950 (N, A) PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation synchronization unsuccessful Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: Synchronization of the internal clock cycle to the global control telegram has failed. The internal clock cycle exhibits an unexpected shift. Remedy: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Note: PB: PROFIBUS PN: PROFINET Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1307 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F01951 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization application clock cycle missing Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: If DRIVE-CLiQ components with different application clock cycle are operated on a DRIVE-CLiQ port, this requires synchronization with the Control Unit. This synchronization routine was unsuccessful. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the software of the DRIVE-CLiQ components. - upgrade the Control Unit software. Note: If a Controller Extension is being used (e.g. CX32, NX10), then the following applies: Check whether the Controller Extension is issuing error messages, and if required, remove these. F01952 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization of component not supported Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The existing system configuration requires that the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components support the synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and the application clock cycle. However, not all DRIVE-CLiQ components have this functionality. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Component number of the first faulty DRIVE-CLiQ component. Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component specified in the fault value. Note: If required, also upgrade additional components in the DRIVE-CLiQ line. A01953 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization not completed Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: After the drive system is powered up, the synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle was started but was not completed within the selected time tolerance. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. If the error occurs after the drive sampling times were changed, and if a Terminal Module 31 (TM31) is being used, the sampling times (p0115, p4099) should be set as integer multiples to the drive clock cycles (p0115). F01954 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization unsuccessful Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: Synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle was started and was not able to be successfully completed (e.g. after switch-on). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: 1. Remove the cause of a possible DRIVE-CLiQ fault. 2. Initiate a new synchronization, e.g. as follows: - remove the PROFIBUS master and re-insert again. - restart the PROFIBUS master. - switch-off the Control Unit and switch-on again. 3-1308 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - carry out a Control Unit hardware reset (RESET button, p0972). - carry out a parameter reset and download the saved parameters (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2, 3). A01955 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization DO not completed Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: After the drive system is powered up, the synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle was started but was not completed within the selected time tolerance. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components of the DO. A01980 PN: Interruption cyclic connection Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The cyclic connection to a PROFINET controller is interrupted. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the interrupted connection. Remedy: Establish the PROFINET connection and activate the PROFINET controller in the cyclic mode. A01981 PN: Maximum number of controllers exceeded Message value: Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A controller attempts to establish a connection to the drive, and as a consequence exceeds the permitted number of PROFINET connections. The alarm disappears automatically after approx. 30 seconds. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = info. 1, xxxx = info. 2 Info 1 = 0: number of RT connections exceeded Info 1 > 0: number of IRT connections exceeded Info 2: permitted number of connections Remedy: Check the configuration of the PROFINET controllers as well as the p8929 setting. See also: p8929 (PN remote controller number) A01982 PROFINET: Second controller missing Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The PROFINET function "Shared Device" has been activated (p8929 = 2). However, only the connection to a PROFINET controller is present. Remedy: Check the configuration of the PROFINET controllers as well as the p8929 setting. See also: p8929 (PN remote controller number) A01989 PROFINET: Internal cyclic data transfer error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The cyclic actual values and/or setpoints were not transferred within the specified times. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1309 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Correctly set T_io_input or T_io_output. A01990 (F) USS: PZD configuration error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The configuration of the process data (PZD) for the USS protocol is incorrect. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 2: PZD amount (p2022) too great for the first drive object (p978[0]). The number of possible PZD items in a drive object is determined by the number of indices in r2050/p2051. Remedy: Re alarm value = 2: Check the amount of USS PZD (p2022) and the maximum PZD amount (r2050/p2051) for the first drive object (p0978[0]). Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A02000 Function generator: Start not possible Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The function generator has already been started. Remedy: Stop the function generator and restart again if necessary. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. See also: p4800 (Function generator control) A02005 Function generator: Drive does not exist Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The drive object specified for connection does not exist. See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number) Remedy: Use the existing drive object with the corresponding number. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number) A02006 Function generator: No drive specified for connection Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: No drive specified for connection in p4815. See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number) 3-1310 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: At least one drive to be connected must be specified in p4815. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number) A02007 Function generator: Drive not SERVO / VECTOR / DC_CTRL Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The drive object specified for connection is not a SERVO / VECTOR or DC_CTRL. See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number) Remedy: Use a SERVO / VECTOR / DC_CTRL drive object with the corresponding number. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. A02008 Function generator: Drive specified a multiple number of times Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The drive object specified for connection is already specified. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Drive object number of the drive object that is specified a multiple number of times. Remedy: Specify a different drive object. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. A02009 Function generator: Illegal mode Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The set operating mode (p1300) of the drive object is not permissible when using the function generator. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the drive object involved. Remedy: Change the operating mode for this drive object to p1300 = 20 (encoderless speed control) or p1300 = 21 (speed control with encoder). Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. A02010 Function generator: Speed setpoint from the drive is not zero Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The speed setpoint of a drive selected for connection is greater than the value for the standstill detection set using p1226. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1311 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: For all of the drives specified for connection, set the speed setpoints to zero. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. A02011 Function generator: The actual drive speed is not zero Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The speed actual value of a drive selected for connection is greater than the value for the standstill detection set using p1226. Remedy: Set the relevant drives to zero speed before starting the function generator. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. A02015 Function generator: Drive enable signals missing Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The master control and/or enable signals are missing to connect to the specified drive. See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number) Remedy: Fetch the master control to the specified drive object and set all enable signals. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. A02016 Function generator: Magnetizing running Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Magnetizing has not yet been completed on a drive object specified for connection. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the drive object involved. See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number) Remedy: Wait for magnetizing of the motor (r0056.4). Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - restart the function generator. See also: r0056 (Status word, closed-loop control) A02020 Function generator: Parameter cannot be changed Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: This parameter setting cannot be changed when the function generator is active (p4800 = 1). See also: p4810, p4812, p4813, p4815, p4820, p4821, p4822, p4823, p4824, p4825, p4826, p4827, p4828, p4829 3-1312 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - stop the function generator before parameterizing (p4800 = 0). - if required, start the function generator (p4800 = 1). Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. See also: p4800 (Function generator control) A02025 Function generator: Period too short Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The value for the period is too short. See also: p4821 (Function generator period) Remedy: Check and adapt the value for the period. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. See also: p4821 (Function generator period) A02026 Function generator: Pulse width too high Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The selected pulse width is too high. The pulse width must be less than the period duration. See also: p4822 (Function generator pulse width) Remedy: Reduce pulse width. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. See also: p4821 (Function generator period), p4822 (Function generator pulse width) A02030 Function generator: Physical address equals zero Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The specified physical address is zero. See also: p4812 (Function generator physical address) Remedy: Set a physical address with a value other than zero. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. See also: p4812 (Function generator physical address) A02040 Function generator: Illegal value for offset Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The value for the offset is higher than the value for the upper limit or lower than the value for the lower limit. See also: p4826 (Function generator offset) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1313 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Adjust the offset value accordingly. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. See also: p4826 (Function generator offset), p4828 (Function generator lower limit), p4829 (Function generator upper limit) A02041 Function generator: Illegal value for bandwidth Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The bandwidth referred to the time slice clock cycle of the function generator has either been set too low or too high. Depending on the time slice clock cycle, the bandwidth is defined as follows: Bandwidth_max = 1 / (2 x time slice clock cycle) Bandwidth_min = Bandwidth_max / 100000 Example: Assumption: p4830 = 125 s --> Bandwidth_max = 1 / (2 x 125 s) = 4000 Hz --> Bandwidth_min = 4000 Hz / 100000 = 0.04 Hz Note: p4823: Function generator bandwidth p4830: Function generator time slice clock cycle See also: p4823 (Function generator bandwidth), p4830 (Function generator time slice cycle) Remedy: Check the value for the bandwidth and adapt accordingly. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. A02047 Function generator: Time slice clock cycle invalid Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The time slice clock cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices. See also: p4830 (Function generator time slice cycle) Remedy: Enter an existing time slice clock cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901. Note: The alarm is reset as follows: - remove the cause of this alarm. - restart the function generator. See also: r7901 (Sampling times) A02050 Trace: Start not possible Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The trace has already been started. See also: p4700 (Trace control) Remedy: Stop the trace and, if necessary, start again. 3-1314 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A02055 Trace: Recording time too short Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The trace duration is too short. The minimum is twice the value of the trace clock cycle. See also: p4721 (Trace recording time) Remedy: Check the selected recording time and, if necessary, adjust. A02056 Trace: Recording cycle too short Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The selected recording cycle is shorter than the selected basic clock cycle 0 (p0110[0]). See also: p4720 (Trace recording cycle) Remedy: Increase the value for the trace cycle. A02057 Trace: Time slice clock cycle invalid Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The time slice clock cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices. See also: p4723 (Trace time slice cycle) Remedy: Enter an existing time slice clock cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901. See also: r7901 (Sampling times) A02058 Trace: Time slice clock cycle for endless trace not valid Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for the endless trace See also: p4723 (Trace time slice cycle) Remedy: Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 2 ms for up to 4 recording channels or >= 4 ms from 5 recording channels per trace. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901. See also: r7901 (Sampling times) A02059 Trace: Time slice clock cycle for 2 x 8 recording channels not valid Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for more than 4 recording channels. See also: p4723 (Trace time slice cycle) Remedy: Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 4 ms or reduce the number of recording channels to 4 per trace. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901. See also: r7901 (Sampling times) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1315 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A02060 Trace: Signal to be traced missing Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: - a signal to be traced was not specified. - the specified signals are not valid. See also: p4730 (Trace record signal 0), p4731 (Trace record signal 1), p4732 (Trace record signal 2), p4733 (Trace record signal 3) Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced. - check whether the relevant signal can be traced. A02061 Trace: Invalid signal Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: - the specified signal does not exist. - the specified signal can no longer be traced (recorded). See also: p4730 (Trace record signal 0), p4731 (Trace record signal 1), p4732 (Trace record signal 2), p4733 (Trace record signal 3) Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced. - check whether the relevant signal can be traced. A02062 Trace: Invalid trigger signal Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: - a trigger signal was not specified. - the specified signal does not exist. - the specified signal is not a fixed-point signal. - the specified signal cannot be used as a trigger signal for the trace. See also: p4711 (Trace trigger signal) Remedy: Specify a valid trigger signal. A02063 Trace: Invalid data type Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The specified data type to select a signal using a physical address is invalid. See also: p4711 (Trace trigger signal), p4730 (Trace record signal 0), p4731 (Trace record signal 1), p4732 (Trace record signal 2), p4733 (Trace record signal 3) Remedy: Use a valid data type. A02070 Trace: Parameter cannot be changed Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The trace parameter settings cannot be changed when the trace is active. See also: p4700, p4710, p4711, p4712, p4713, p4714, p4715, p4716, p4720, p4721, p4722, p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733, p4780, p4781, p4782, p4783, p4789, p4795 Remedy: - stop the trace before parameterization. - if required, start the trace. 3-1316 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A02075 Trace: Pretrigger time too long Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The selected pretrigger time must be shorter than the trace time. See also: p4721 (Trace recording time), p4722 (Trace trigger delay) Remedy: Check the pretrigger time setting and change if necessary. F02080 Trace: Parameterization deleted due to unit changeover Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The trace parameterization in the drive unit was deleted due to a unit changeover or a change in the reference parameters. Remedy: Restart trace. A02099 Trace: Insufficient Control Unit memory Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The memory space still available on the Control Unit is no longer sufficient for the trace function. Remedy: Reduce the memory required, e.g. as follows: - reduce the trace time. - increase the trace clock cycle. - reduce the number of signals to be traced. See also: r4708 (Trace memory space required), r4799 (Trace memory location free) A02100 Drive: Computing dead time current controller too short Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The value in p0118 produces a dead time of one clock cycle because it is prior to setpoint availability. Possible causes: - A parameter backup with a version higher than 4.3 was loaded to a version less than or equal to 4.3. - The system properties after replacing a component no longer match the parameter assignment. Alarm value (r2134, floating point): The minimum value for p0118 where a dead time no longer occurs. Remedy: - set p0118 to zero. - set p0118 to a value greater than or equal to the alarm value (for p1810.11 = 1) - set p0117 (from the device) to an automatic setting (p0117 = 1). - check the firmware versions of the components involved. See also: p0117 (Current controller computing dead time mode), p0118 (Current controller computing dead time) A02150 OA: Application cannot be loaded Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The system was not able to load an OA application. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1317 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. Note: OA: Open Architecture See also: r4950, r4955, p4956, r4957 F02151 (A) OA: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: An internal software error has occurred within an OA application. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. - replace the Control Unit. Note: OA: Open Architecture See also: r4950, r4955, p4956, r4957 Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F02152 (A) OA: Insufficient memory Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: Too many functions have been configured on this Control Unit (e.g. too many drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications, blocks, etc). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - change the configuration on this Control Unit (e.g. fewer drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications, blocks, etc). - use an additional Control Unit. Note: OA: Open Architecture Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F03000 NVRAM fault on action Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault occurred during execution of action p7770 = 1, 2 for the NVRAM data. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyxx hex: yy = fault cause, xx = application ID yy = 1: The action p7770 = 1 is not supported by this version if Drive Control Chart (DCC) is activated for the drive object concerned. yy = 2: The data length of the specified application is not the same in the NVRAM and the backup. yy = 3: The data checksum in p7774 is not correct. 3-1318 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms yy = 4: No data available to load. See also: p7770 (NVRAM action) Remedy: Perform the remedy according to the results of the troubleshooting. If necessary, start the action again. F03001 NVRAM checksum incorrect Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A checksum error occurred when evaluating the non-volatile data (NVRAM) on the Control Unit. The NVRAM data affected was deleted. Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. F03500 (A) TM: Initialization Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: When initializing the Terminal Modules, the terminals of the Control Unit or the Terminal Board 30, an internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): yxxx dex y = Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting xxx = component number (p0151) Remedy: - power down/power up the power supply for the Control Unit. - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - if required, replace the Terminal Module. The Terminal Module should be directly connected to a DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the Control Unit. If the fault occurs again, replace the Terminal Module. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A03501 TM: Sampling time change Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The sampling times of the inputs/outputs were changed. This change only becomes valid after the next boot. Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. F03505 (N, A) TM: Analog input wire breakage Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The wire-break monitoring for an analog input has responded. The input current of the analog input has exceeded the threshold value parameterized in p4061[x]. Index x = 0: Analog input 0 (X522.1 to .3) Index x = 1: Analog input 1 (X522.4 to .5) Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): yxxx dec y = analog input (0 = analog input 0 (AI 0), 1 = analog input 1 (AI 1)) xxx = component number (p0151) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1319 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active: p4056[x] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 ... +20 mA) Remedy: - check the wiring for interruptions. - Check the magnitude of the injected current - it is possible that the infed signal is too low. - Check the load resistor (250 Ohm). Note: The input current measured by the Terminal Module can be read out from r4052[x]. For p4056[x] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 ... +20 mA)) the following applies: A current less than 4 mA is not displayed in r4052[x] - but instead r4052[x] = 4 mA is output. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A03506 (F, N) 24 V power supply missing Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The 24 V power supply for the digital outputs (X124) is missing. Remedy: Check the terminals for the power supply voltage (X124, L1+, M). Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A03510 (F, N) TM: Calibration data not plausible Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, CU_G130_DP, CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_DP, CU_G150_PN, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: During ramp-up, the Terminal Module 31 (TM31) calibration data is read in and checked for plausibility. At least one calibration data point was determined to be invalid. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 1: 10 V value, analog input 0 invalid. Bit 3: 10 V value, analog input 1 invalid. Bit 4: Offset, analog output 0 invalid. Bit 5: 10 V value, analog output 0 invalid. Bit 6: Offset, analog output 1 invalid. Bit 7: 10 V value, analog input 1 invalid. Remedy: - power down/power up the power supply for the Control Unit. - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. Note: If it reoccurs, then replace the module. In principle, operation could continue. The analog channel involved possibly does not achieve the specified accuracy. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1320 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A03510 (F, N) CU: Calibration data not plausible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: During booting, the calibration data for the analog inputs is read and checked with respect to plausibility. At least one calibration data point was determined to be invalid. Remedy: - power down/power up the power supply for the Control Unit. - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. Note: If it reoccurs, then replace the module. In principle, operation could continue. The analog channel involved possibly does not achieve the specified accuracy. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A03550 TM: Speed setpoint filter natural frequency > Shannon frequency Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The natural filter frequency of the speed setpoint filter (p1417) is greater than or equal to the Shannon frequency. The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p4099[3] Remedy: Reduce the natural frequency of the speed setpoint filter (PT2 low pass) (p1417). F03590 (N, A) TM: Module not ready Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The Terminal Module involved does not send a ready signal and no valid cyclic data. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Drive object number of the Terminal Module involved. Remedy: - check the 24 V power supply. - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - check whether the sampling time of the drive object involved is not equal to zero (p4099[0]). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A05000 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverter heat sink has been reached. The response is set using p0290. If the temperature of the heat sink increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30004 is initiated. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1321 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Check the following: - is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values? - have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned? - has the cooling failed? Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A05001 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature depletion layer chip Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Alarm threshold for overtemperature of the power semiconductor in the AC converter has been reached. Note: - The response is set using p0290. - If the depletion layer temperature increases by an additional 15 K, then fault F30025 is triggered. Remedy: Check the following: - is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values? - have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned? - has the cooling failed? - pulse frequency too high? See also: r0037, p0290 (Power unit overload response) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A05001 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature depletion layer chip Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Alarm threshold for overtemperature of the power semiconductor in the AC converter has been reached. Note: - The response is set using p0290. - If the depletion layer temperature increases by an additional 15 K, then fault F30025 is triggered. Remedy: Check the following: - is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values? - have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned? - has the cooling failed? - pulse frequency too high? Note: If the alarm occurs after reducing the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) during the motor data identification (standstill measurement), then it is recommended that this is initially performed using the standard sampling time and then the sampling time should be subsequently changed over. See also: r0037, p0290 (Power unit overload response) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A05002 (N) Power unit: Air intake overtemperature Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The alarm threshold for the air intake overtemperature has been reached. For air-cooled power units, the threshold is 42 C (hysteresis 2 K). The response is set using p0290. If the air intake temperature increases by an additional 13 K, then fault F30035 is output. Remedy: Check the following: - is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values? - has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation. 3-1322 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A05003 (N) Power unit: Internal overtemperature Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The alarm threshold for internal overtemperature has been reached. If the temperature inside the power unit increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30036 is triggered. Remedy: Check the following: - is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values? - has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A05004 (N) Power unit: Rectifier overtemperature Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The alarm threshold for the overtemperature of the rectifier has been reached. The response is set using p0290. If the temperature of the rectifier increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30037 is triggered. Remedy: Check the following: - is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values? - have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned? - has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation. - has a phase of the line supply failed? - is an arm of the supply (incoming) rectifier defective? Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A05005 Cooling unit: Cooling medium flow rate too low Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Cooling unit: Alarm - flow rate has fallen below the alarm value Remedy: Check the feedback signals and parameter assignment (p0260 ... p0267). Check the coolant feed. A05006 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature difference between the chip and heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value (blocksize power units only). Depending on p0290, an appropriate overload response is initiated. See also: r0037 Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm disappears automatically once the limit value is undershot. Note: If the alarm does not disappear automatically and the temperature continues to rise, this can result in fault F30024. See also: p0290 (Power unit overload response) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1323 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms N05007 (A) Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model (chassis PU) Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature difference between the chip and heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value (r0293) (chassis power units only). Depending on p0290, an appropriate overload response is initiated. See also: r0037, r0293 (Power unit alarm threshold model temperature) Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm disappears automatically once the limit value is undershot. See also: p0290 (Power unit overload response) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F05050 Parallel circuit: Pulse enable in spite of pulse inhibit Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A power unit signals that the pulses are enabled although the pulses are inhibited. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of the power unit involved. Remedy: The power unit is defective and must be replaced. F05051 Parallel circuit: Power unit pulse enable missing Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For one or several power units, the pulses were not able to be enabled. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of the power unit involved. Remedy: - acknowledge power unit faults that are still present. - inhibit the pulses of the power unit involved (p7001). A05052 (F) Parallel circuit: Illegal current dissymmetry Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The deviation of the individual currents of the power units exceeds the alarm threshold specified in p7010. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Phase U. 2: Phase V. 3: Phase W. Remedy: - inhibit the pulses of the faulted power unit (p7001). - check the connecting cables. Loose contacts can cause current spikes. - the motor reactors are non-symmetrical or faulty and must be replaced. - the CTs must be calibrated or replaced. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY 3-1324 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A05053 (F) Parallel circuit: Inadmissible DC link voltage dissymmetry Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The deviation of the DC link voltage measured values exceeds the alarm threshold specified in p7011. Remedy: - inhibit the pulses of the faulted power unit (p7001). - check the DC link connecting cables. - the DC link voltage measurement is incorrect and must be calibrated or renewed. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A05054 Parallel circuit: Power unit de-activated Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the drive object involved, fewer power units connected in parallel are active than exist in the target topology. Operation is only possible at reduced power (power derating). Remedy: Re-activate the de-activated power units if required. See also: p0125 (Activate/de-activate power unit components), p0895 (Activate/de-activate power unit components), p0897 (Parking axis selection) F05055 Parallel connection: Power units with illegal code numbers Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The code numbers of the power units are not permissible. For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical power unit data may be used. Possible causes: - The code numbers of the power units do not match. For booksize drive units, the following additionally applies: - a parallel connection is not possible for the power units being used. - there are too many power units being used in the parallel connection. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter in which the inadmissible power unit code number was detected. Remedy: - Use power units with the same code number. For booksize drive units, the following additionally applies: - use power units which are permitted for a parallel connection. - reduce the number of power units being used in the parallel connection. F05055 Parallel connection: Power units with illegal code numbers Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The code numbers of the power units do not match. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter in which the first different power unit code number was detected. Remedy: Use power units with the same code number. For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical power unit data may be used. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1325 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F05056 Parallel circuit: Power unit EPROM versions differ Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The EEPROM versions of the power units do not match. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter in which the first different version number was detected. Remedy: Use power units with the same EPROM version. For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical EEPROM versions may be used. F05057 Parallel circuit: Power unit firmware versions differ Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The firmware versions of the power units connected in parallel do not match. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter in which the first different version number was detected. Remedy: Use power units with the same firmware version. For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical firmware versions may be used. F05058 Parallel circuit: VSM EEPROM versions differ Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The EEPROM versions of the Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) do not match. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter in which the first different version number was detected. Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) with identical EEPROM versions may be used. F05059 Parallel circuit: VSM firmware versions differ Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The firmware versions of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) do not match. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter in which the first different version number was detected. Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) with identical firmware versions may be used. F05060 Parallel circuit: Power unit firmware version does not match Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Firmware from version V02.30.01.00 is required when connecting the power units in parallel. Remedy: Update the firmware of the power units (at least V02.30.01.00). 3-1326 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F05061 Infeed, number of VSM Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The number of active Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) for the drive object infeed with chassis power units is not correct. For A_Infeed, each active power unit must be assigned an active VSM also for a parallel circuit configuration. For S_Infeed, the active drive object, must be assigned at least one active VSM. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of VSMs that are currently assigned to the drive object. Remedy: Adapts the number of active Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM). F05064 Parallel connection: Pulse synchronization error Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY) Cause: The pulse synchronization of at least one of the power units connected in parallel is incorrect. Remedy: Restart the drive system. F06000 Infeed: Precharging monitoring time expired Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: After the line contactor closes the power unit does not signal the READY state within the monitoring time (p0857). The end of the DC link pre-charging was not able to be completed for one of the following reasons: 1) There is no line supply voltage connected. 2) The line contactor/line side switch has not been closed. 3) The line supply voltage is too low. 4) Line supply voltage incorrectly set (p0210). 5) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as there were too many pre-charging operations per time unit. 6) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as the DC link capacitance is too high. 7) The pre-charging resistors are overheated because when there is no "ready for operation" (r0863.0) of the infeed unit, power is taken from the DC link. 8) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as the line contactor was closed during the DC link fast discharge through the Braking Module. 9) The DC link has either a ground fault or a short-circuit. 10) The pre-charging circuit is possibly defective (only for chassis units). See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage), p0857 (Power unit monitoring time) Remedy: In general: - check the line supply voltage at the connecting terminals. - check the line supply voltage setting (p0210). - check the monitoring time and, if required, increase (p0857). - where relevant, observe additional power unit messages/signals (e.g. F30027). - the following applies to booksize units: Wait (approx. 8 min.) until the pre-charging resistors have cooled down. For this purpose, preferably disconnect the infeed unit from the line supply. Re 5): - carefully observe the permissible pre-charging frequency (refer to the appropriate Equipment Manual). Re 6): - check the total capacitance of the DC link and reduce in accordance with the maximum permissible DC-link capacitance if necessary (refer to the appropriate Equipment Manual) Re 7): - interconnect the ready-for-operation signal from the infeed unit (r0863.0) in the enable logic of the drives connected to this DC link Re 8): - check the connections of the external line contactor. The line contactor must be open during DC-link fast discharge. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1327 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re 9): - check the DC link for ground faults or short circuits. F06010 Infeed: Power unit EP 24 V missing in operation Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: In operation, the pulse enable via terminal EP at the Line Module (X21.3, X21.4) was withdrawn. Note: EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable) Remedy: - do not open the line side switch in operation - only when the pulses are inhibited. - check the wiring of terminal EP (X21.3, X21.4) at the Line Module to exclude any poor contacts. F06100 Infeed: Shutdown due to line supply undervoltage condition Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The filtered (steady-state) value of the line supply voltage is less than the fault threshold (p0283). Fault condition: Vrms < p0283 * p0210 Fault value (r0949, floating point): Actual steady-state line supply voltage. Remedy: - check the line supply. - check the line supply voltage (p0210). - check the threshold value (p0283). A06105 (F) Infeed: Line supply undervoltage Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The filtered (steady-state) value of line supply voltage is lower than the alarm threshold (p0282). Alarm condition: Vrms < p0282 * p0210 Alarm value (r2124, floating point): Actual steady-state line supply voltage. Remedy: - check the line supply. - check the line supply voltage (p0210). - check the alarm threshold (p0282). Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F06211 Infeed: Summation current impermissibly high Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The smoothed sum of the phase currents (i1 + i2 + i3) is impermissibly high. The summed current has exceeded the parameterized threshold for the ground fault monitoring (p0287). Possible causes: - there is a ground fault that results in a high summation current (r0069.6). The DC component in the line currents can damage/destroy the power unit, reactor, filter or motor! - the current measurement in the power unit is defective. Fault value (r0949, floating point): Smoothed total of the phase currents. Remedy: - check the line supply for ground faults and remove any that are present. - check the set threshold for the ground fault monitoring (p0287). - if required, replace the power unit. 3-1328 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A06301 (F) Infeed: Line supply overvoltage Message value: Line supply voltage: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The filtered (steady-state) value of the rms line supply voltage Vrms is higher than the alarm threshold (p0281). Alarm condition: Vrms > p0281 * p0210. Alarm value (r2124, floating point): Actual steady-state line supply voltage. Remedy: - check the line supply. - check the line supply voltage (p0210). - check the alarm threshold (p0281). See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F06310 (A) Infeed: Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized Message value: Line supply voltage: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: After pre-charging was completed, the line supply voltage Vrms was calculated using the measured DC link voltage. This voltage Vrms is not within the tolerance range of the supply voltage. The following applies for the tolerance range: 85 % * p0210 < Vrms < 110 % * p0210 Fault value (r0949, floating point): Line supply voltage Vrms present. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) Remedy: - check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210). - check the line supply voltage. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F06310 (A) Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For AC/AC drive units, the measured DC voltage lies outside the tolerance range after pre-charging has been completed. The following applies for the tolerance range: 1.16 * p0210 < r0070 < 1.6 * p0210 Note: The fault can only be acknowledged when the drive is powered down. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) Remedy: - check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210). - check the line supply voltage. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F06311 Infeed: Supply voltage (p0210) incorrect Message value: Line supply voltage: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The line voltage nominal value indicated in p0210 is outside the nominal voltage range of the power unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1329 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms After pre-charging was completed, the actual line supply voltage Vrms was calculated using the measured DC link voltage. This voltage Vrms does not lie within the extended tolerance range of the supply voltage set in p0210. The following applies for the extended tolerance range: 75 % * p0210 < Vrms < 120 % * p0210 Alarm value (r2124, floating point): Line supply voltage Vrms present. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) Remedy: - check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210). - check the line supply voltage. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) F06700 (A) Infeed: Switch line contactor for load condition Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For an ON command, the infeed line contactor should be switched under load. Remedy: - do not load the DC link if the infeed has not issued an operating signal (r0863.0 = 1). - after the infeed has been powered down, all power units connected to the DC link should be powered down. To realize this, the operating signal of the infeed (r0863.0) must be suitably interconnected. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A06810 (F) Infeed: DC link voltage alarm threshold Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In operation, the DC link voltage has dropped to below the alarm threshold. The alarm threshold is obtained from the sum of p0279 and r0296. Possible causes include: - line supply voltage dip or another line supply fault. - overload of the infeed. - for Active Line Module: Controller incorrectly parameterized. See also: p0279 (DC link voltage offset alarm threshold), r0296 (DC link voltage undervoltage threshold) Remedy: - check the line voltage and line supply quality. - reduce the power drawn, avoid step-like load changes - for Active Line Module: Adapt the controller parameterization (e.g. automatic line supply identification (p3410 = 4, 5)). Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A06900 (F) Braking Module: Fault (1 -> 0) Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Braking Module signals a fault (1 -> 0) via X21.4 ("booksize" format) or X21.5 ("chassis" format). This signal is wired to a system digital input and correspondingly interconnected using binector input p3866[0...7]. Possible causes: - Wiring of the signal or BICO interconnection of the signal source incorrect. - Overtemperature - Electronics power supply missing. - Ground fault/short-circuit. - Internal component fault. See also: p3866 (Braking Module fault) 3-1330 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - check binector input p3866[0...7] and the wiring from terminal X21.4 ("booksize" format) or X21.5 ("chassis" format). - reduce the number of braking operations. - Check the 24 V power supply of the component. - Check for a ground fault or short circuit. - Replace the component if necessary. Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A06901 Braking Module: Pre-alarm I2t shutdown Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Braking Module "Booksize" format signals "Pre-alarm I2t shutdown" via terminal X21.3. This signal is wired to a system digital input and correspondingly interconnected using binector input p3865[0...7]. Note: This function is not supported for the "chassis" format. Remedy: - reduce the number of braking operations. - check binector input p3865[0...7] and the wiring from terminal X21.3 of the particular Braking Module. A06904 (N) Braking Module internal is inhibited Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The internal Braking Module was inhibited via binector input p3680 = 1 signal. In the inhibited state, energy cannot be dissipated using the braking resistor. See also: p3680 (Braking Module internal inhibit) Remedy: Release the internal Braking Module (BI: p3680 = 0 signal). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A06905 Braking Module internal I2t shutdown alarm Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The internal Braking Module outputs an alarm due to the high I2t value. 80% of the maximum switch-on duration of the braking resistor has been reached. Note: This message is also displayed via BO: p3685. See also: r3685 (Digital Braking Module: Pre-alarm I2t shutdown) Remedy: Reduce the number of braking operations. F06906 (A) Braking Module internal fault Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The internal Braking Module outputs a fault due to overcurrent or an excessively high I2t value and is therefore inhibited. Note: This message is also displayed via BO: p3686. Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary): Bit 0 = 1: I2t exceeded Bit 1 = 1: overcurrent See also: r3686 (Digital Braking Module Fault) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1331 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Reduce the number of braking operations. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F06907 Braking Module internal overtemperature Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The temperature sensor connected to the braking resistor signals an overtemperature. The Braking Module is still active. If the overtemperature persists for more than 60 s, fault F06908 is output, and the braking module is switched off. See also: r3687 (Digital Braking Module pre-alarm overtemperature) Remedy: - reduce the temperature at the sensor. - check the temperature sensor connection. F06908 Braking Module internal overtemperature shutdown Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Braking module shut down due to overtemperature at the temperature sensor of the braking resistor. The overtemperature is detected by the sensor for longer than 60 s. See also: r3688 (Braking Module internal overtemperature shutdown) Remedy: - reduce the temperature at the sensor. - check the temperature sensor connection. F06909 Braking Module internal Vce fault Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The dip in the collector-emitter voltage (Vce) results in a Vce fault and shutdown. See also: r3689 (Digital Braking Module Uce fault) Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - replace the unit. A06921 (N) Braking resistor phase unsymmetry Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The three resistors of the braking chopper are not symmetrical. Remedy: - check the feeder cables to the braking resistors. - If required, increase the value for detecting dissymmetry (p1364). See also: p1360 (Braking chopper braking resistor cold), p1362 (Braking chopper activation threshold), r1363 (Braking chopper output voltage), p1364 (Braking chopper resistor asymmetry) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F06922 Braking resistor phase failure Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A phase failure for the brake resistor was detected. 3-1332 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 11: Phase U 12: Phase V 13: Phase W See also: p3235 (Phase failure signal motor monitoring time) Remedy: Check the feeder cables to the braking resistors. See also: p1360 (Braking chopper braking resistor cold), p1362 (Braking chopper activation threshold), r1363 (Braking chopper output voltage), p1364 (Braking chopper resistor asymmetry) F07011 Drive: Motor overtemperature Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: KTY or no sensor: The measured motor temperature or model temperature has exceeded the fault threshold (p0605) or the timer (p0606) has elapsed following the alarm threshold (p0604) being exceeded. The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active. PTC or bimetallic NC contact: The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened and the timer (p0606) has expired. The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active. Possible causes: - Motor is overloaded - motor ambient temperature too high. - PTC / bimetallic NC contact: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 200: The motor temperature model 1 (I2t) signals an overtemperature (p0612.0 = 1, p0611 > 0). Number of the temperature channel leading to the message (for SME/TM120 (p0601 = 10, 11)). See also: p0604, p0605, p0606, p0612, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628 Remedy: - Reduce the motor load. - check the ambient temperature and the motor ventilation. - check the wiring and the connection of the PTC or bimetallic NC contact. See also: p0604, p0605, p0606, p0612, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628 A07012 (N) Drive: Motor temperature model 1/3 overtemperature Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The thermal I2t motor model for synchronous motors identified that the alarm threshold was exceeded. See also: r0034 (Motor utilization), p0605 (Mot_temp_mod 1/2 threshold), p0611 (I2t motor model thermal time constant), p0612 (Mot_temp_mod activation) Remedy: - check the motor load and if required, reduce. - check the motor ambient temperature. - check the thermal time constant (p0611). - check the overtemperature fault threshold (p0605), (= alarm threshold for the I2t motor model). See also: r0034 (Motor utilization), p0605 (Mot_temp_mod 1/2 threshold), p0611 (I2t motor model thermal time constant), p0612 (Mot_temp_mod activation) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07015 Drive: Motor temperature sensor alarm Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601. With the fault, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then fault F07016 is output; however, at the earliest, 50 ms after alarm A07015. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1333 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Possible causes: - wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm). - measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): - if SME/TM120 is selected (p0601 = 10, 11), this is the number of the temperature channel leading to the message. Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - check the parameterization (p0600, p0601). See also: r0035, p0600 (Motor temperature sensor for monitoring), p0601, p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer) F07016 Drive: Motor temperature sensor fault Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601. Possible causes: - wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm). - measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm). Note: If alarm A07015 is present, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then fault F07016 is output; however, at the earliest, 50 ms after alarm A07015. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): - if SME/TM120 is selected (p0601 = 10, 11), this is the number of the temperature channel leading to the message. See also: p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer) Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - check the parameterization (p0600, p0601). - induction motors: De-activate temperature sensor fault (p0607 = 0). See also: r0035, p0600 (Motor temperature sensor for monitoring), p0601, p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer) F07080 Drive: Incorrect control parameter Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The closed-loop control parameters have been parameterized incorrectly (e.g. p0356 = L_spread = 0). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): The fault value includes the parameter number involved. The following parameter numbers only occur as fault values for vector drives: p0310, for synchronous motors: p0341, p0344, p0350, p0357 The following parameter numbers do not occur as fault values for synchronous motors: p0354, p0358, p0360 See also: p0310, p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0404, p0408, p0640, p1082, p1300 Remedy: Modify the parameter indicated in the fault value (r0949) (e.g. p0640 = current limit > 0). See also: p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0404, p0408, p0640, p1082 F07082 Macro: Execution not possible Message value: Fault cause: %1, supplementary information: %2, preliminary parameter number: %3 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The macro cannot be executed. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ccccbbaa hex: cccc = preliminary parameter number, bb = supplementary information, aa = fault cause 3-1334 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault causes for the trigger parameter itself: 19: Called file is not valid for the trigger parameter. 20: Called file is not valid for parameter 15. 21: Called file is not valid for parameter 700. 22: Called file is not valid for parameter 1000. 23: Called file is not valid for parameter 1500. 24: Data type of a TAG is incorrect (e.g. Index, number or bit is not U16). Fault causes for the parameters to be set: 25: Error level has an undefined value. 26: Mode has an undefined value. 27: A value was entered as string in the tag value that is not "DEFAULT". 31: Entered drive object type unknown. 32: A device was not able to be found for the determined drive object number. 34: A trigger parameter was recursively called. 35: It is not permissible to write to the parameter via macro. 36: Check, writing to a parameter unsuccessful, parameter can only be read, not available, incorrect data type, value range or assignment incorrect. 37: Source parameter for a BICO interconnection was not able to be determined. 38: An index was set for a non-indexed (or CDS-dependent) parameter. 39: No index was set for an indexed parameter. 41: A bit operation is only permissible for parameters with the parameter format DISPLAY_BIN. 42: A value not equal to 0 or 1 was set for a BitOperation. 43: Reading the parameter to be changed by the BitOperation was unsuccessful. 51: Factory setting for DEVICE may only be executed on the DEVICE. 61: The setting of a value was unsuccessful. Remedy: - check the parameter involved. - check the macro file and BICO interconnection. See also: p0015, p0700, p1000 (Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints), p1500 (Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints) F07083 Macro: ACX file not found Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The ACX file (macro) to be executed was not able to be found in the appropriate directory. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number with which the execution was started. See also: p0015, p0700, p1000 (Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints), p1500 (Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints) Remedy: - check whether the file is saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card. Example: If p0015 is set to 1501, then the selected ACX file must be located in the following directory: ... /PMACROS/DEVICE/P15/PM001501.ACX F07084 Macro: Condition for WaitUntil not fulfilled Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The WaitUntil condition set in the macro was not fulfilled in a certain number of attempts. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number for which the condition was set. Remedy: Check and correct the conditions for the WaitUntil loop. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1335 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07085 Drive: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters changed Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters have had to be changed for the following reasons: 1. As a result of other parameters, they have exceeded the dynamic limits. 2. They cannot be used due to the fact that the hardware detected not having certain features. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Changed parameter number. 340: The motor and control parameters were automatically calculated (p0340 = 1), because the vector control was subsequently activated as configuration (r0108.2). See also: p0640 (Current limit), p1082 (Maximum speed), p1300 (Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode), p1800 (Pulse frequency setpoint) Remedy: Not necessary. It is not necessary to change the parameters as they have already been correctly limited. F07086 Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to reference value change Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A reference parameter was changed in the system. This resulted in the fact that for the parameters involved, the selected value was not able to be written in the per unit notation. The values of the parameters were set to the corresponding violated minimum limit/maximum limit or to the factory setting. Possible causes: - the steady-state minimum limit/maximum limit or that defined in the application was violated. Fault value (r0949, parameter): Diagnostics parameter to display the parameters that were not able to be re-calculated. See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004 Remedy: Check the adapted parameter value and if required correct. See also: r9450 (Reference value change parameter with unsuccessful calculation) F07088 Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to units changeover Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A changeover of units was initiated. This resulted in a violation of a parameter limit Possible causes for the violation of a parameter limit: - When rounding off a parameter corresponding to its decimal places, the steady-state minimum limit or maximum limit was violated. - inaccuracies for the data type "FloatingPoint". In these cases, when the minimum limit is violated then the parameter value is rounded up and when the maximum limited is violated the parameter value is rounded down. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Diagnostics parameter r9451 to display all parameters whose value had to be adapted. See also: p0100 (IEC/NEMA mot stds), p0349 (System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data), p0505 (Selecting the system of units), p0595 (Technological unit selection) Remedy: Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct. See also: r9451 (Units changeover adapted parameters) 3-1336 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07089 Changing over units: Function module activation is blocked because the units have been changed over Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An attempt was made to activate a function module. This is not permissible if the units have already been changed over. See also: p0100 (IEC/NEMA mot stds), p0349 (System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data), p0505 (Selecting the system of units) Remedy: Restore units that have been changed over to the factory setting. F07100 Drive: Sampling times cannot be reset Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When resetting drive parameter (p0976) sampling times cannot be reset using p0111, p0112, p0115. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter whose setting prevents the sampling times being reset. See also: r0110 (Basic sampling times) Remedy: - continue to work with the set sampling times. - before resetting the drive parameters, set the basic clock cycle p0110[0] to the original value. See also: r0110 (Basic sampling times) F07110 Drive: Sampling times and basic clock cycle do not match Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The parameterized sampling times do not match the basic clock cycle. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): The fault value specifies the parameter involved. See also: r0110, r0111, p0115 Remedy: Enter the current controller sampling times so that they are identical to the basic clock cycle, e.g. by selecting p0112. Note which basic clock cycle is selected in p0111. The sampling times in p0115 can only be changed manually in the sampling times pre-setting "Expert" (p0112). See also: r0110, r0111, p0112, p0115 A07200 Drive: Master control ON command present Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The ON/OFF1 command is present (no 0 signal). The command is either influenced via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or control word bit 0 via the master control. Remedy: Switch the signal via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or control word bit 0 via the master control to 0. F07220 (N, A) Drive: Master control by PLC missing Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The "master control by PLC" signal was missing in operation. - interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" is incorrect (p0854). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1337 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - the higher-level control has withdrawn the "master control by PLC" signal. - data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive) was interrupted. Remedy: - check the interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" (p0854). - check the "master control by PLC" signal and, if required, switch in. - check the data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive). Note: If the drive should continue to operate after withdrawing "master control by PLC" then fault response must be parameterized to NONE or the message type should be parameterized as alarm. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07300 (A) Drive: Line contactor feedback signal missing Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: - the line contactor was not able to be closed within the time in p0861. - the line contactor was not able to be opened within the time in p0861. - the line contactor dropped out during operation - the line contactor has closed although the drive converter is powered down. Remedy: - check the setting of p0860. - check the feedback circuit from the line contactor. - increase the monitoring time in p0861. See also: p0860 (Line cont. fdbk sig), p0861 (Line contactor monitoring time) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07311 Bypass motor switch Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary): Bit 1: Switch "Closed" feedback signal missing. Bit 2: Switch "Open" feedback signal missing. Bit 3: Switch feedback signal too slow. After switching, the system waits for the positive feedback signal. If the feedback signal is received later than the specified time, then a fault trip (shutdown) is issued. Bit 6: Drive switch feedback signal not consistent with the bypass state. The drive switch is closed when switching-on or when switching-in the motor. See also: p1260 (Bypass configuration), r1261 (Bypass control/status word), p1266 (Bypass, control command), p1267 (Bypass changeover source configuration), p1269 (Bypass switch feedback signal), p1274 (Bypass switch monitoring time) Remedy: - check the transfer of the feedback signals. - check the switch. F07312 Bypass LSS: Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary): Bit 1: Switch "Closed" feedback signal missing. Bit 2: Switch "Open" feedback signal missing. 3-1338 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 3: Switch feedback signal too slow. After switching, the system waits for the positive feedback signal. If the feedback signal is received later than the specified time, then a fault trip (shutdown) is issued. Bit 6: Line Side Switch feedback signal not consistent with the bypass state. When switching-on or when switching-in the motor, the line side switch is closed without this having been requested from the bypass. See also: p1260 (Bypass configuration), r1261 (Bypass control/status word), p1266 (Bypass, control command), p1267 (Bypass changeover source configuration), p1269 (Bypass switch feedback signal), p1274 (Bypass switch monitoring time) Remedy: - check the transfer of the feedback signals. - check the switch. F07320 Drive: Automatic restart interrupted Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: - The specified number of restart attempts (p1211) has been completely used up because within the monitoring time (p1213) the faults were not able to be acknowledged. The number of restart attempts (p1211) is decremented at each new start attempt. - there is no active ON command. - the monitoring time for the power unit has expired (p0857). - when exiting commissioning or at the end of the motor identification routine or the speed controller optimization, the drive unit is not automatically powered up again. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The actual number of starting attempts is displayed in r1214. - increase the delay time in p1212 and/or the monitoring time in p1213. - issue an ON command (p0840). - either increase or disable the monitoring time of the power unit (p0857). F07320 Drive: Automatic restart interrupted Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: - The specified number of restart attempts (p1211) has been completely used up because within the monitoring time (p1213) the faults were not able to be acknowledged. The number of restart attempts (p1211) is decremented at each new start attempt. - there is no active ON command. - the monitoring time for the power unit has expired (p0857). - when exiting commissioning or at the end of the motor identification routine or the speed controller optimization, the drive unit is not automatically powered up again. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The actual number of starting attempts is displayed in r1214. - increase the delay time in p1212 and/or the monitoring time in p1213. - issue an ON command (p0840). - either increase or disable the monitoring time of the power unit (p0857). - Reduce the delay time for resetting the start counter p1213[1] so that fewer faults are registered in the time interval. A07321 Drive: Automatic restart active Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The automatic restart (AR) is active. When the line supply returns and/or the causes of the existing faults are removed the drive is automatically restarted. The pulses are enabled and the motor starts to rotate. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1339 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - the automatic restart (AR) should, if required, be inhibited (p1210 = 0). - an automatic restart can be directly interrupted by withdrawing the power-on command (BI: p0840). F07330 Flying restart: Measured search current too low Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: During a flying restart, it was identified that the search current reached is too low. It is possible that the motor is not connected. Remedy: Check the motor feeder cables. F07331 Flying restart: Function not supported Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: It is not possible to power up with the motor rotating (no flying restart). In the following cases, the "flying restart" function is not supported: Permanent-magnet and separately-excited synchronous motors (PEM, FEM): Operation with U/f characteristic. Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM): Encoderless operation without a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) being connected. Remedy: - de-activate the "flying restart" function (p1200 = 0). - change the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300). - connect a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) (voltage measurement). A07350 (F) Drive: Measuring probe parameterized to a digital output Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The measuring probe is connected to a bi-directional digital input/output and the terminal is set as output. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 8: DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X132.1) 9: DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X132.2) 10: DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X132.3) 11: DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X132.4) 12: DI/DO 12 (X132.9) 13: DI/DO 13 (X132.10) 14: DI/DO 14 (X132.12) 15: DI/DO 15 (X132.13) To the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU305. Remedy: - set the terminal as input (p0728). - de-select the measuring probe (p0488, p0489, p0580). Reaction upon F: OFF1 Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07400 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated because the upper switch-in threshold has been exceeded (r1242, r1282). The ramp-down times are automatically increased in order to maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) within the permissible limits. There is a system deviation between the setpoint and actual speeds. 3-1340 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms When the DC link voltage controller is switched out (disabled), this is the reason that the ramp-function generator output is set to the speed actual value. See also: r0056 (Status word, closed-loop control), p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration), p1280 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (U/f)) Remedy: If the controller is not to intervene: - increase the ramp-down times. - switch-off the Vdc_max controller (p1240 = 0 for vector control, p1280 = 0 for U/f control). If the ramp-down times are not to be changed: - use a chopper or regenerative feedback unit. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07401 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller de-activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Vdc_max controller can no longer maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) below the limit value (r1242, r1282) and was therefore switched out (disabled). - the line supply voltage is permanently higher than specified for the power unit. - the motor is permanently in the regenerative mode as a result of a load that is driving the motor. Remedy: - check whether the input voltage is within the permissible range. - check whether the load duty cycle and load limits are within the permissible limits. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07402 (N) Drive: DC link voltage minimum controller active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated as the lower switch-in threshold has been undershot (r1246, r1286). The kinetic energy of the motor is used to buffer the DC link. The drive is therefore braked. See also: r0056 (Status word, closed-loop control), p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration), p1280 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (U/f)) Remedy: The alarm disappears when power supply returns. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07403 (N, A) Drive: Lower DC link voltage threshold reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DC link voltage monitoring is active (p1240 , p1280 = 5, 6) and the lower DC link voltage threshold (r1246, r1286) was reached in the "Operation" state. Remedy: - check the line supply voltage. - check the infeed. - adapt the device supply voltage (p0210) or the switch-on level (p1245, p1285). - disable the DC link voltage monitoring (p1240, p1280 = 0). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1341 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07404 Drive: Upper DC link voltage threshold reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DC link voltage monitoring is active (p1240 , p1280 = 4, 6) and the upper DC link voltage threshold (r1242, r1282) was reached in the "Operation" state. Remedy: - check the line supply voltage. - check the infeed module - adapt the device supply voltage (p0210). - disable the DC link voltage monitoring (p1240, p1280 = 0). F07405 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering minimum speed not reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: During kinetic buffering the speed fell below minimum speed (p1257 or p1297 for vector drives with U/f control) and the line supply did not return. Remedy: Check the speed threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1257, p1297). See also: p1257 (Vdc_min controller speed threshold), p1297 (Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f)) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07406 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering maximum time exceeded Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The maximum buffer time (p1255 and p1295 for vector drives with U/f control) has been exceeded without the line supply having returned. Remedy: Check the time threshold for Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1255, p1295). See also: p1255 (Vdc_min controller time threshold), p1295 (Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f)) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07407 Drive: Vdc reduction not permissible Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For chassis power units, the reduction of the line voltage (see r0212.0) is only possible for closed-loop control of the DC link voltage. Remedy: - Activate DC link voltage control for the motor/generator. - de-activate line voltage reduction (p0212.0 = 0). See also: p0212 (Power unit configuration) 3-1342 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07409 Drive: U/f control, current limiting controller active Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The current limiting controller of the U/f control was activated because the current limit was exceeded. Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears after one of the following measures: - increase current limit (p0640). - reduce the load. - slow down the ramp up to the setpoint speed. F07410 Drive: Current controller output limited Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The condition "I_act = 0 and Uq_set_1 longer than 16 ms at its limit" is present and can be caused by the following: - motor not connected or motor contactor open. - motor data and motor configuration (star-delta) do not match. - no DC link voltage present. - power unit defective. - the "flying restart" function is not activated. Remedy: - connect the motor or check the motor contactor. - check the motor parameterization and the connection type (star-delta). - check the DC link voltage (r0070). - check the power unit. - activate the "flying restart" function (p1200). F07412 Drive: Commutation angle incorrect (motor model) Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (NONE, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An incorrect commutation angle was detected that can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller. Possible causes: - The phase sequence of the output phases for the motor is incorrect (e.g. the phases are interchanged). - the motor encoder is incorrectly adjusted with respect to the magnet position. - the motor encoder is damaged. - the angular commutation offset is incorrectly set (p0431). - data to calculate the motor model has been incorrectly set (p0356 (motor-stator leakage inductance) and/or p0350 (motor-stator resistance) and/or p0352 (cable resistance). - the changeover speed for the motor model is too low (p1752). The monitoring function only becomes effective above the changeover speed. - pole position identification might have calculated an incorrect value when activated (p1982 = 1). - the motor encoder speed signal is faulted. - the control loop is instable due to incorrect parameterization. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): SERVO: 0: The comparison of the pole position angle from the encoder and motor model resulted in an excessively high value (> 80 electrical). 1: VECTOR: 0: The comparison of the pole position angle from the encoder and motor model resulted in an excessively high value (> 45 electrical). 1: The change in the speed signal from the motor encoder has changed by > p0492 within a current controller clock cycle. Remedy: - Check the phase sequence for the motor, and if required, correct (wiring, p1820). - if the encoder mounting was changed - re-adjust the encoder. - replace the defective motor encoder. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1343 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - correctly set the angular commutation offset (p0431). If required, determine using p1990. - correctly set the motor stator resistance, cable resistance and motor-stator leakage inductance (p0350, p0352, p0356). Calculate the cable resistance from the cross-section and length, check the inductance and stator resistance using the motor data sheet, measure the stator resistance, e.g. using a multimeter - and if required, again identify the values using the stationary motor data identification (p1910). - increase the changeover speed for the motor model (p1752). The monitoring is completely de-activated for p1752 > p1082 (maximum speed). - with pole position identification activated (p1982 = 1) check the procedure for pole position identification (p1980) and force a new pole position identification procedure by means of de-selection followed by selection (p1982 = 0 -> 1). Note: For High Dynamic Motors (1FK7xxx-7xxx), for applications with a higher current, if necessary, the monitoring should be disabled. F07413 Drive: Commutation angle incorrect (pole position identification) Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (NONE, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An incorrect commutation angle was detected that can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller. Within the pole position identification routine (p1982 = 2): - a difference of > 45 electrical to the encoder angle was determined. For VECTOR, within the encoder adjustment (p1990 = 2): - a difference of > 6 electrical to the encoder angle was determined. Remedy: - correctly set the angular commutation offset (p0431). - re-adjust the motor encoder after the encoder has been replaced. - replace the defective motor encoder. - check the pole position identification routine. If the pole position identification routine is not suitable for this motor type, then disable the plausibility check (p1982 = 0). A07416 Drive: Flux controller configuration Message value: Parameter: %1, Index: %2, fault cause: %3 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The configuration of the flux control (p1401) is contradictory. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): ccbbaaaa hex aaaa = Parameter bb = Index cc = fault cause cc = 01 hex = 1 dec: Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for soft start (p1401.0). cc = 02 hex = 2 dec: Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for flux build-up control (p1401.2). cc = 03 hex = 3 dec: Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for Rs identification after restart (p0621 = 2). Remedy: Re fault cause = 1: - Shut down soft start (p1401.0 = 0). - Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0). Re fault cause = 2: - De-energize flux build-up control (p1401.2 = 0). - Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0). Re fault cause = 3: - Re-parameterize Rs identification (p0621 = 0, 1) - Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0). 3-1344 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07417 Drive: Pulse technique not plausible (motor model) Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The evaluation of the test pulse response indicated incorrect values. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: An impermissible pulse technique configuration was detected during ramp-up. Possible causes: - The pulse technique was initially selected when the system powered up (p1750.5 = 1) but the power unit component does not support the current oversampling required (see r0192.23). As a consequence, p1750.0 was de-selected automatically. 10: The pulse response is repeatedly implausible. Possible causes: - Incorrect configuration of the power unit component - The power unit component is faulty. 20: For the specified pulse amplitude, the measured pulse response is much higher than the expected value. Possible causes: - Strong oscillations have occurred. - The motor is short-circuited for high frequencies (output filter). - The motor is damaged. Remedy: For fault value = 0: Once the pulse technique has been de-selected automatically (p1750.5=0), there are two possible options: - acknowledge the fault and save parameter p1750.5 = 0 -> field-oriented control mode to standstill is not used and replaced by transition to open-loop control at low speeds. - upgrade the power unit firmware (at least V04.30) -> field-oriented control mode to standstill is available. For fault value = 10: With active selection of the pulse technique (p1750.5 = 1): - POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) the Control Unit and the power unit together again. or - carry out a manual warm restart (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2, 3). If this does not solve the problem: Replace the power unit component. For fault value = 20: - control parameters might have been adjusted (factory setting, commissioning). - filters must not be connected between motor and converter/inverter. - check the motor. F07422 Drive: Reference model natural frequency > Shannon frequency Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The natural filter frequency of the PT2 element for the reference model (p1433) is greater than the Shannon frequency. The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[1] Remedy: - reduce the natural frequency of PT2 element for reference model (p1433). - reduce the speed controller sampling time (p0115[1]). F07426 (A) Technology controller actual value limited Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The actual value for the technology controller, interconnected via connector input p2264, has reached a limit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1345 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: upper limit reached. 2: lower limit reached. Remedy: - adapt the limits to the signal level (p2267, p2268). - Check the actual value normalization (p0595, p0596). - Deactivate evaluation of the limits (p2252 bit 3) See also: p0595 (Technological unit selection), p0596 (Technological unit reference quantity), p2264 (Technology controller actual value), p2267 (Technology controller upper limit actual value), p2268 (Technology controller lower limit actual value) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A07428 (N) Technology controller parameterizing error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The technology controller has a parameterizing error. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: The parameter value for the upper output limit of the technology controller p2291 is less than the parameter value of the lower output limit p2292. Remedy: 1: Set p2291 to a higher value than p2292. See also: p2291 (Technology controller maximum limiting), p2292 (Technology controller minimum limiting) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07434 Drive: It is not possible to change the direction of rotation with the pulses enabled Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A drive data set was selected - with the pulses enabled - which has a different parameterized direction of rotation (p1821). It is only possible to change the motor direction of rotation using p1821 when the pulses are inhibited. Remedy: - change over the drive data set with the pulses inhibited. - ensure that the changeover to a drive data set does not result in the motor direction of rotation being changed (i.e. for these drive data sets, the same value must be in p1821). See also: p1821 (Dir of rot) F07435 (N) Drive: Setting the ramp-function generator for sensorless vector control Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: During operation with sensorless vector control (r1407.1) the ramp-function generator was stopped (p1141) or bypassed (p1122). An internal setting command of the ramp-function generator output caused the set setpoint speed to be frozen or was not able to be realized. Remedy: - de-activate the holding command for the ramp-function generator (p1141). - do not bypass the ramp-function generator (p1122). - suppress the fault (p2101, p2119). This is necessary if the ramp-function generator is held using jogging and the speed setpoint is simultaneously inhibited (r0898.6). Note: For sensorless vector control it is not practical to read in the main setpoint of the speed control via p1155 or p1160 (p0922). In this case, the main setpoint should be injected before the ramp-function generator (p1070). The reason for this is that the ramp-function generator output is automatically set when transitioning from closed-loop speed controlled into open-loop speed controlled operation. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1346 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07439 Drive: Higher current controller dynamic performance not possible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The function "Current controller dynamics higher" (p1810.11 = 1) is selected, however is not supported by the power unit (r0192.27 = 0) or by the safety technology without encoder (9506 = 1, 3). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: - firmware of the booksize power unit is not up-to-date. - blocksize or S120 combi power unit was used. 2: - Encoderless safety technology is used. Remedy: In general: - Deselect the function "Current controller dynamics higher" (p1810.11 = 0) and if required, set the current, speed and position controller again or calculate (p0340 = 4). For fault value = 1: - If necessary, upgrade the firmware of the booksize power unit to a later version (version >= 4.4). Note: If the firmware has already been automatically upgraded, then only a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) is required. - Use a booksize power unit (version >= 4.4). For fault value = 2: - If an encoder with Safety position actual values sensing is available (r0458[0...2].19 = 1), reparameterize the encoderless safety technology (p9506 = 1, 3) to safety technology with encoder (p9506 = 0). See also: r0192 (Power unit firmware properties), p1810 (Modulator configuration), p9506 (SI Motion function specification (Control Unit)) A07440 EPOS: Jerk time is limited Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The calculation of the jerk time Tr = max(p2572, p2573) / p2574 resulted in an excessively high value so that the jerk time is internally limited to 1000 ms. Note: The alarm is also output if jerk limiting is not active. Remedy: - increase the jerk limiting (p2574). - reduce maximum acceleration or maximum deceleration (p2572, p2573). A07441 LR: Save the position offset of the absolute encoder adjustment Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The status of the absolute encoder adjustment has changed. In order to permanently save the determined position offset (p2525) it must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977). Remedy: Not necessary. This alarm automatically disappears after the offset has been saved. F07442 (A) LR: Multiturn does not match the modulo range Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The ratio between the multiturn resolution and the modulo range (p2576) is not an integer number. This results in the adjustment being set back, as the position actual value cannot be reproduced after poweroff/power-on. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1347 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Make the ration between the multiturn resolution and the modulo range an integer number. The ratio v is calculated as follows: 1. Motor encoder without position tracking: v = (p0421 * p2506 * p0433 * p2505) / (p0432 * p2504 * p2576) 2. Motor encoder with position tracking for the measuring gear: v = (p0412 * p2506 * p2505) / (p2504 * p2576) 3. Motor encoder with position tracking for the load gear: v = (p2721 * p2506 * p0433) / (p0432 * p2576) 4. Motor encoder with position tracking for the load and measuring gear: v = (p2721 * p2506) / p2576 5. Direct encoder without position tracking: v = (p0421 * p2506 * p0433) / (p0432 * p2576) 6. Direct encoder with position tracking for the measuring gear: v = (p0412 * p2506) / p2576 Note: With position tracking, it is recommended that p0412 and p2721 are changed See also: p0412 (Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual), p0432 (Gearbox factor, encoder revolutions), p0433 (Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions), p2721 (Load gear, rotary absolute encoder, revolutions, virtual) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07443 (A) LR: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input p2599 lies outside the half of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Maximum permissible value for the reference point coordinate. Remedy: Set the reference point coordinate to a lower value than specified in the fault value. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07446 (A) Load gear: Position tracking cannot be reset Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The position tracking cannot be reset. Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset position tracking, position (p2720.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07447 Load gear: Position tracking, maximum actual value exceeded Message value: Component number: %1, encoder data set: %2, drive data set: %3 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When the position tracking of the load gear is configured, the drive/encoder (motor encoder) identifies a maximum possible absolute position actual value (r2723) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits. Maximum value: p0408 * p2721 * 2^p0419 3-1348 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ccbbaa hex aa = encoder data set bb = component number cc = drive data set See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.), p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits)), p2721 (Load gear, rotary absolute encoder, revolutions, virtual) Remedy: - reduce the fine resolution (p0419). - reduce the multiturn resolution (p2721). See also: p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits)), p2721 (Load gear, rotary absolute encoder, revolutions, virtual) F07448 (A) Load gear: Position tracking, linear axis has exceeded the maximum range Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For a configured linear axis/no modulo axis, the currently effective motor encoder (encoder 1) has exceeded the maximum possible traversing range. For the configured linear axis, the maximum traversing range is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421. It should be read in p2721 and interpreted as the number of load revolutions. Note: Only the motor encoder in the currently effective drive data set is monitored here. The actual effective drive data set is displayed in x = r0051 and the corresponding motor encoder is specified in in p0187[x]. Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset position tracking, position (p2720.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07449 (A) Load gear: Position tracking, actual position outside tolerance window Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When powered down, the currently effective motor encoder was moved through a distance greater than was parameterized in the tolerance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system and encoder. Note: Only the motor encoder in the currently effective drive data set is monitored here. The actual effective drive data set is displayed in x = r0051 and the corresponding motor encoder is specified in in p0187[x]. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value after the measuring gear - if one is being used. The sign designates the traversing direction. Note: The deviation (difference) found is also displayed in r2724. See also: p2722 (Load gear, position tracking tolerance window), r2724 (Load gear position difference) Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset position tracking, position (p2720.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507). See also: p0010 Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1349 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07450 (A) LR: Standstill monitoring has responded Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: After the standstill monitoring time (p2543) expired, the drive left the standstill window (p2542). - position actual value inversion incorrectly set (p0410). - standstill window set too small (p2542). - standstill monitoring time set too low (p2543). - position loop gain too low (p2538). - position loop gain too high (instability/oscillation, p2538). - mechanical overload. - Connecting cable, motor/drive converter incorrect (phase missing, interchanged). - when selecting motor identification, select tracking mode (BI: p2655[0] = 1 signal). - when selecting function generator, select tracking mode (BI: p2655[0] = 1 signal) and de-activate position control (BI:p2550 = 0 signal). Remedy: Check the causes and resolve. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07451 (A) LR: Position monitoring has responded Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When the position monitoring time (p2545) expired, the drive had still not reached the positioning window (p2544). - positioning window parameterized too small (p2544). - position monitoring time parameterized too short (p2545). - position loop gain too low (p2538). - position loop gain too high (instability/oscillation, p2538). - drive mechanically locked. Remedy: Check the causes and resolve. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07452 (A) LR: Following error too high Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The difference between the position setpoint position actual value (following error dynamic model, r2563) is greater than the tolerance (p2546). - the drive torque or accelerating capacity exceeded. - position measuring system fault. - position control sense incorrect. - mechanical system locked. - excessively high traversing velocity or excessively high position reference value (setpoint) differences Remedy: Check the causes and resolve. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07453 LR: Position actual value preprocessing error Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing. 3-1350 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing. A07454 LR: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: One of the following problems has occurred with the position actual value preprocessing: - an encoder is not assigned for the position actual value preprocessing (p2502 = 0). - an encoder is assigned, but no encoder data set (p0187 = 99 or p0188 = 99 or p0189 = 99). - an encoder an an encoder data set have been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any encoder data (p0400 = 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0). Remedy: Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets and encoder assignment. See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189 (Encoder 3 encoder data set number), p0400 (Encoder type selection) A07455 EPOS: Maximum velocity limited Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The maximum velocity (p2571) is too high to correctly calculate the modulo correction. Within the sampling time for positioning (p0115[5]), with the maximum velocity, a maximum of the half modulo length must be moved through. p2571 was limited to this value. Remedy: - reduce the maximum velocity (p2571). - increase the sampling time for positioning (p0115[5]). A07456 EPOS: Setpoint velocity limited Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The actual setpoint velocity is greater than the parameterized maximum velocity (p2571) and is therefore limited. Remedy: - check the entered setpoint velocity. - reduce the velocity override (CI: p2646). - increase the maximum velocity (p2571). - check the signal source for the externally limited velocity (CI: p2594). A07457 EPOS: Combination of input signals illegal Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An illegal combination of input signals that are simultaneously set was identified. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 0: Jog 1 and jog 2 (p2589, p2590). 1: Jog 1 or jog 2 and direct setpoint input/MDI (p2589, p2590, p2647). 2: Jog 1 or jog 2 and start referencing (p2589, p2590, p2595). 3: Jog 1 or jog 2 and activate traversing task (p2589, p2590, p2631). 4: Direct setpoint input/MDI and starting referencing (p2647, p2595). 5: Direct setpoint input/MDI and activate traversing task (p2647, p2631). 6: Start referencing and activate traversing task (p2595, p2631). Remedy: Check the appropriate input signals and correct. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1351 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07458 EPOS: Reference cam not found Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: After starting the search for reference, the axis moved through the maximum permissible distance to search for the reference cam without actually finding the reference cam. Remedy: - check the "reference cam" binector input (BI: p2612). - check the maximum permissible distance to the reference cam (p2606). - if axis does not have any reference cam, then set p2607 to 0. F07459 EPOS: No zero mark Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: After leaving the reference cam, the axis has traversed the maximum permissible distance between the reference cam and zero mark without finding the zero mark. Remedy: - check the encoder regarding the zero mark - check the maximum permissible distance between the reference cam and zero mark (p2609). - use an external encoder zero mark (equivalent zero mark) (p0495). See also: p0495 (Equivalent zero mark, input terminal) F07460 EPOS: End of reference cam not found Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: During the search for reference, when the axis reached the zero mark it also reached the end of the traversing range without detecting an edge at the binector input "reference cam" (BI: p2612). Maximum traversing range: -2147483648 [LU] ... -2147483647 [LU] Remedy: - check the "reference cam" binector input (BI: p2612). - repeat the search for reference. A07461 EPOS: Reference point not set Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When starting a traversing block/direct setpoint input, a reference point is not set (r2684.11 = 0). Remedy: Reference the system (search for reference, flying referencing, set reference point). A07462 EPOS: Selected traversing block number does not exist Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A traversing block selected via BI: p2625 to BI: p2630 was started via BI: p2631 = 0/1 edge "Activate traversing task". - the number of the started traversing block is not contained in p2616[0...n]. - the started traversing block is suppressed. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the selected traversing block that is also not available. Remedy: - correct the traversing program. - select an available traversing block number. 3-1352 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07463 (F) EPOS: External block change not requested in the traversing block Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For a traversing block with the block change enable CONTINUE_EXTERNAL_ALARM, the external block change was not requested. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block. Remedy: Resolve the reason as to why the edge is missing at binector input (BI: p2632). Reaction upon F: OFF1 Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F07464 EPOS: Traversing block is inconsistent Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The traversing block does not contain valid information. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block with invalid information. Remedy: Check the traversing block and where relevant, take into consideration alarms that are present. A07465 EPOS: Traversing block does not have a subsequent block Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: There is no subsequent block in the traversing block. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block with the missing subsequent block. Remedy: - parameterize this traversing block with the block change enable END. - parameterize additional traversing blocks with a higher block number and for the last block, using the block change enable END. A07466 EPOS: Traversing block number assigned a multiple number of times Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The same traversing block number was assigned a multiple number of times. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block that was assigned a multiple number of times. Remedy: Correct the traversing blocks. A07467 EPOS: Traversing block has illegal task parameters Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The task parameter in the traversing block contains an illegal value. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block with an illegal task parameter. Remedy: Correct the task parameter in the traversing block. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1353 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07468 EPOS: Traversing block jump destination does not exist Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In a traversing block, a jump was programmed to a non-existent block. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block with a jump destination that does not exist. Remedy: - correct the traversing block. - add the missing traversing block. A07469 EPOS: Traversing block < target position < software limit switch minus Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the traversing block the specified absolute target position lies outside the range limited by the software limit switch minus. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block with illegal target position. Remedy: - correct the traversing block. - change software limit switch minus (CI: p2578, p2580). A07470 EPOS: Traversing block> target position > software limit switch plus Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the traversing block the specified absolute target position lies outside the range limited by the software limit switch plus. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block with illegal target position. Remedy: - correct the traversing block. - change software limit switch plus (CI: p2579, p2581). A07471 EPOS: Traversing block target position outside the modulo range Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the traversing block the target position lies outside the modulo range. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block with illegal target position. Remedy: - in the traversing block, correct the target position. - change the modulo range (p2576). A07472 EPOS: Traversing block ABS_POS/ABS_NEG not possible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the traversing block the positioning mode ABS_POS or ABS_NEG were parameterized with the modulo correction not activated. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block with the illegal positioning mode. Remedy: Correct the traversing block. 3-1354 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07473 (F) EPOS: Beginning of traversing range reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When traversing, the axis has moved to the traversing range limit. Remedy: Move away in the positive direction. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07474 (F) EPOS: End of traversing range reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When traversing, the axis has moved to the traversing range limit. Remedy: Move away in the negative direction. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F07475 (A) EPOS: Target position < start of traversing range Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The target position for relative traversing lies outside the traversing range. Remedy: Correct the target position. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07476 (A) EPOS: Target position > end of the traversing range Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The target position for relative traversing lies outside the traversing range. Remedy: Correct the target position. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A07477 (F) EPOS: Target position < software limit switch minus Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the actual traversing operation, the target position is less than the software limit switch minus. Remedy: - correct the target position. - change software limit switch minus (CI: p2578, p2580). Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1355 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07478 (F) EPOS: Target position > software limit switch plus Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the actual traversing operation, the target position is greater than the software limit switch plus. Remedy: - correct the target position. - change software limit switch plus (CI: p2579, p2581). Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07479 EPOS: Software limit switch minus reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The axis is at the position of the software limit switch minus. An active traversing block was interrupted. Remedy: - correct the target position. - change software limit switch minus (CI: p2578, p2580). A07480 EPOS: Software limit switch plus reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The axis is at the position of the software limit switch plus. An active traversing block was interrupted. Remedy: - correct the target position. - change software limit switch plus (CI: p2579, p2581). F07481 (A) EPOS: Axis position < software limit switch minus Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The actual position of the axis is less than the position of the software limit switch minus. Remedy: - correct the target position. - change software limit switch minus (CI: p2578, p2580). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07482 (A) EPOS: Axis position > software limit switch plus Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The actual position of the axis is greater than the position of the software limit switch plus. Remedy: - correct the target position. - change software limit switch plus (CI: p2579, p2581). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1356 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07483 EPOS: Travel to fixed stop clamping torque not reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The fixed stop in the traversing block was reached without the clamping torque/clamping force having been achieved. Remedy: - Check the maximum torque-generating current (r1533). - check the torque limits (p1520, p1521). - check the power limits (p1530, p1531). - check the BICO interconnections of the torque limits (p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529). F07484 EPOS: Fixed stop outside the monitoring window Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF3 (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: In the "fixed stop reached" state, the axis has moved outside the defined monitoring window (p2635). Remedy: - check the monitoring window (p2635). - check the mechanical system. F07485 (A) EPOS: Fixed stop not reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: In a traversing block with the task FIXED STOP, the end position was reached without detecting a fixed stop. Remedy: - check the traversing block and locate the target position further into the workpiece. - check the "fixed stop reached" control signal (p2637). - if required, reduce the maximum following error window to detect the fixed stop (p2634). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A07486 EPOS: Intermediate stop missing Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the modes "traversing blocks" or "direct setpoint input/MDI" at the start of motion, the binector input "no intermediate stop/intermediate stop" (BI: p2640) did not have a 1 signal. Remedy: Connect a 1 signal to the binector input "no intermediate stop/intermediate stop" (BI: p2640) and re-start motion. A07487 EPOS: Reject traversing task missing Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the modes "traversing blocks" or "direct setpoint input/MDI" at the start of motion, the binector input "do not reject traversing task/reject traversing task" (BI: p2641) does not have a 1 signal. Remedy: Connect a 1 signal to the binector input "do not reject traversing task/reject traversing task" (BI: p2641) and restart motion. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1357 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07488 EPOS: Relative positioning not possible Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: In the mode "direct setpoint input/MDI", for continuous transfer (p2649 = 1) relative positioning was selected (BI: p2648 = 0 signal). Remedy: Check the control. A07489 EPOS: Reference point correction outside the window Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the function "flying referencing" the difference between the measured position at the measuring probe and the reference point coordinate lies outside the parameterized window. Remedy: - check the mechanical system. - check the parameterization of the window (p2602). F07490 EPOS: Enable signal withdrawn while traversing Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: - for a standard assignment, another fault may have occurred as a result of withdrawing the enable signals. - the drive is in the "switching on inhibited" state (for a standard assignment). Remedy: - set the enable signals or check the cause of the fault that first occurred and then result (for a standard assignment). - check the assignment to enable the basic positioning function. F07491 (A) EPOS: STOP cam minus reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF3 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A 0 signal was detected at binector input BI: p2569, i.e. the STOP cam minus was reached. For a positive traversing direction, the STOP cam minus was reached - i.e. the wiring of the STOP cam is incorrect. Remedy: - leave the STOP cam minus in the positive traversing direction and return the axis to the valid traversing range. - check the wiring of the STOP cam. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07492 (A) EPOS: STOP cam plus reached Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF3 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A 0 signal was detected at binector input BI: p2570, i.e. the STOP cam plus was reached. For a negative traversing direction, the STOP cam plus was reached - i.e. the wiring of the STOP cam is incorrect. Remedy: - leave the STOP cam plus in the negative traversing direction and return the axis to the valid traversing range. - check the wiring of the STOP cam. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1358 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07493 LR: Overflow of the value range for position actual value Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for the position actual value representation was exceeded. When the overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "adjustment absolute measuring system" status is reset. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The position actual value (r2521) has exceeded the value range. 2: The encoder position actual value Gn_XIST2 (r0483) or the absolute value after the load gear (r2723) has exceeded the value range. 3: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range for displaying the position actual value. Note: For a linear encoder, the following must be maintained: - p0407 * p2503 / (2^p0418*10^7) < 1 - p0407 * p2503 / (2^p0419*10^7) < 1 Remedy: If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution (p2506). Increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual value (p0419). Note for fault value = 3: If the value for the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is greater than 4294967296, then it is not possible to make an adjustment due to an overflow. For rotary encoders, the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows: 1. Motor encoder without position tracking p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504) p2506 * p0433 * p2505 * p0421 / (p0432 * p2504) for multiturn encoders 2. Motor encoder with position tracking for measuring gear: p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504 3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432 4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear p2506 * p2721 5. Direct encoder without position tracking p2506 * p0433 / p0432 p2506 * p0433 * p0421 / p0432 for multiturn encoders 6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear p2506 * p0412 F07494 LR: Drive Data Set changeover in operation Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A Drive Data Set changeover (DDS) with a change of the mechanical relationships (p2503 ... 2506), direction of rotation (p1821) or the encoder assignment (p2502) was requested in operation. Note: DDS: Drive Data Set Remedy: To changeover the drive data set, initially, exit the "operation" mode. A07495 (F) LR: Reference function interrupted Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was interrupted. - an encoder fault has occurred (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1). - position actual value was set during an activated reference function. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1359 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - simultaneously activate reference mark search and measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 1 signal). - activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was de-activated (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal). Remedy: - check the causes and resolve. - reset the control (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal) and activate the requested function. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07496 EPOS: Enable not possible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: It is not possible to enable the basic positioner because at least one signal is missing. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: EPOS enable missing (BI: p2656). 2: Position actual value, valid feedback signal missing (BI: p2658). Remedy: Check the appropriate binector inputs and signals. A07497 LR: Position setting value activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The position actual value is set to the value received via CI: p2515while BI: p2514 = 1 signal. A possible system deviation cannot be corrected. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm automatically disappears with BI: p2514 = 0 signal. A07498 (F) LR: Measuring probe evaluation not possible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set. 4098: Error when initializing the measuring probe. 4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high. > 50000: The measuring clock cycle is not a multiple integer of the position controller clock cycle. Remedy: De-activate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal). Re alarm value = 6: Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489 or p2517, p2518). Re alarm value = 4098: Check the Control Unit hardware. Re alarm value = 4100: Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe. Re alarm value > 50000: Set the clock cycle ratio of the measuring clock cycle to the position controller clock cycle to an integer multiple. To do this, the currently effective measuring clock cycle can be determined from the alarm value as follows: Tmeas [125 s] = alarm value - 50000 With PROFIBUS, the measuring clock cycle corresponds to the PROFIBUS clock cycle (r2064[1]). Without PROFIBUS, the measuring clock cycle is an internal cycle time that cannot be influenced. Reaction upon F: OFF1 Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY 3-1360 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07499 (A) EPOS: Reversing cam approached with the incorrect traversing direction Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF3 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The reversing cam MINUS was approached in the positive traversing direction or the reversing cam PLUS was approached in the negative traversing direction. Remedy: - check the wiring of the reversing cam (BI: p2613, BI: p2614). - check the traversing direction to approach the reversing cam. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07500 Drive: Power unit data set PDS not configured Message value: Drive data set: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Only for controlled line supply infeed/regenerative feedback units: The power unit data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the drive data set. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Drive data set number of p0185. Remedy: The index of the power unit data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0185. F07501 Drive: Motor Data Set MDS not configured Message value: Drive data set: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Only for power units: The motor data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the associated drive data set. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): The fault value includes the drive data set number of p0186. Remedy: The index of the motor data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0186. See also: p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number) F07502 Drive: Encoder Data Set EDS not configured Message value: Drive data set: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Only for power units: The encoder data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the associated drive data set. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): The fault value includes the drive data set number of p0187, p0188 and p0189. The fault value is increased by 100 * encoder number (e.g. for p0189: Fault value 3xx with xx = data set number). Remedy: The index of the encoder data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0187 (1st encoder), p0188 (2nd encoder) and p0189 (3rd encoder). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1361 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07503 EPOS: STOP cam approached with the incorrect traversing direction Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The STOP cam MINUS was approached in the positive traversing direction or the STOP cam PLUS was approached in the negative traversing direction. Remedy: - check the wiring of the STOP cam (BI: p2569, BI: p2570). - check the traversing direction to approach the STOP cam. A07504 Drive: Motor data set is not assigned to a drive data set Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A motor data set is not assigned to a drive object. All of the existing motor data sets in the drive data sets must be assigned using the MDS number (p0186[0...n]). There must be at least as many drive data sets as motor data sets. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the motor data set that has not been assigned. Remedy: In the drive data sets, assign the non-assigned motor data set using the MDS number (p0186[0...n]). - check whether all of the motor data sets are assigned to drive data sets. - if required, delete superfluous motor data sets. - if required, set up new drive data sets and assign to the corresponding motor data sets. See also: p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number) A07505 EPOS: Task fixed stop not possible in the U/f/SLVC mode Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the U/f/SLVC mode, an attempt was made to execute a traversing block with the "fixed stop" task. This is not possible. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of the traversing block with an illegal task parameter. Remedy: - Check the traversing block and change the task. - change the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300). See also: p1300 (Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode) F07509 Drive: Component number missing Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A Drive Data Set (DDS) is assigned to a Motor Data Set (MDS) or Encoder Data Set (EDS) that does not have a component number. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): nnmmmxxyyy nn: Number of the MDS/EDS. mmm: Parameter number of the missing component number. xx: Number of the DDS that is assigned to the MDS/EDS. yyy: Parameter number that references the MDS/EDS. Example: p0186[7] = 5: DDS 7 is assigned MDS 5. p0131[5] = 0: There is no component number set in MDS 5. Alarm value = 0513107186 3-1362 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: In the drive data sets, no longer assign MDS/EDS using p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189 or set a valid component number. See also: p0131, p0141, p0142, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189 F07510 Drive: Identical encoder in the drive data set Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: More than one encoder with identical component number is assigned to a single drive data set. In one drive data set, it is not permissible that identical encoders are operated together. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1000 * first identical encoder + 100 * second identical encoder + drive data set. Example: Fault value = 1203 means: In drive data set 3, the first (p0187[3]) and second encoder (p0188[3]) are identical. Remedy: Assign the drive data set to different encoders. See also: p0141 (Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number), p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189 (Encoder 3 encoder data set number) F07511 Drive: Encoder used a multiple number of times Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Each encoder may only be assigned to one drive and within a drive must - in each drive data set - either always be encoder 1, always encoder 2 or always encoder 3. This unique assignment has been violated. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): The two parameters in coded form, that refer to the same component number. First parameter: Index: First and second decimal place (99 for EDS, not assigned DDS) Parameter number: Third decimal place (1 for p0187, 2 for p0188, 3 for p0189, 4 for EDS not assigned DDS) Drive number: Fourth and fifth decimal place Second parameter: Index: Sixth and seventh decimal place (99 for EDS, not assigned DDS) Parameter number: Eighth decimal place (1 for p0187, 2 for p0188, 3 for p0189, 4 for EDS, not assigned DDS) Drive number: Ninth and tenth decimal place See also: p0141 (Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number) Remedy: Correct the double use of a component number using the two parameters coded in the fault value. F07512 Drive: Encoder data set changeover cannot be parameterized Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Using p0141, a changeover of the encoder data set is prepared that is illegal. In this firmware release, an encoder data set changeover is only permitted for the components in the actual topology. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Incorrect EDS data set number. See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189 (Encoder 3 encoder data set number) Remedy: Every encoder data set must be assigned its own dedicated DRIVE-CLiQ socket. The component numbers of the encoder interfaces (p0141) must have different values within a drive object. The following must apply: p0141[0] not equal to p0141[1] not equal to ... not equal to p0141[n] (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1363 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07514 (N) Drive: Data structure does not correspond to the interface module Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The interface mode "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" was set (p2038 = 1) and the data structure does not correspond to this mode. The following settings are possible, depending on the number of data sets: Number of DDS/MDS (p0180/p0130): p0186 1/1: p0186[0] = 0 2/2: p0186[0] = 0, p0186[1] = 1 4/4: p0186[0] = 0, p0186[1] = 1, p0186[2] = 2, p0186[3] = 3 8/8: p0186[0] = 0, p0186[1] = 1, p0186[2] = 2 ... p0186[7] = 7 16/16: p0186[0] = 0, p0186[1] = 1, p0186[2] = 2 ... p0186[15] = 15 32/32: p0186[0] = 0, p0186[1] = 1, p0186[2] = 2 ... p0186[31] = 31 2/1: p0186[0, 1] = 0 4/2: p0186[0, 1] = 0, p0186[1, 2] = 1 8/4: p0186[0, 1] = 0, p0186[1, 2] = 1, p0186[3, 4] = 2, p0186[5, 6] = 3 16/8: p0186[0, 1] = 0, p0186[1, 2] = 1, p0186[3, 4] = 2 ... p0186[14, 15] = 7 32/16: p0186[0, 1] = 0, p0186[1, 2] = 1, p0186[3, 4] = 2 ... p0186[30, 31] = 15 4/1: p0186[0, 1, 2, 3] = 0 8/2: p0186[0, 1, 2, 3] = 0, p0186[4, 5, 6, 7] = 1 16/4: p0186[0, 1, 2, 3] = 0, p0186[4, 5, 6, 7] = 1, p0186[8, 9, 10, 11] = 2, p0186[12, 13, 14, 15] = 3 32/8: p0186[0, 1, 2, 3] = 0, p0186[4, 5, 6, 7] = 1, p0186[8, 9, 10, 11] = 2 ... p0186[28, 29, 30, 31] = 7 8/1: p0186[0...7] = 0 16/2: p0186[0...7] = 0, p0186[8...15] = 1 32/4: p0186[0...7] = 0, p0186[8...15] = 1, p0186[16...23] = 2, p0186[24...31] = 3 16/1: p0186[0...15] = 0 32/2: p0186[0...15] = 0, p0186[16...31] = 1 32/1: p0186[0...31] = 0 9/2: p0186[0...7] = 0, p0186[8] = 1 10/2: p0186[0...7] = 0, p0186[8, 9] = 1 12/2: p0186[0...7] = 0, p0186[8...11] = 1 See also: p0180 (Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS)), p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number), p2038 (IF1 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode) Remedy: - Check the data structure according to the possible settings mentioned in the cause. - check the interface mode (p2038). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07515 Drive: Power unit and motor incorrectly connected Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A power unit (via PDS) was assigned to a motor (via MDS) in a drive data set that is not connected in the target topology. It is possible that a motor has not been assigned to the power unit (p0131). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of the incorrectly parameterized drive data set. Remedy: - assign the drive data set to a combination of motor and power unit permitted by the target topology. - adapt the target topology. - If required, for a missing motor, recreate the component (drive Wizard). See also: p0121 (Power unit component number), p0131 (Motor component number), p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number) 3-1364 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07516 Drive: Re-commission the data set Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The assignment between the drive data set and motor data set (p0186) or between the drive data set and the encoder data set was modified (p0187). This is the reason that the drive data set must re-commissioned. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Drive data set to be re-commissioned. Remedy: Commission the drive data set specified in the fault value (r0949). F07517 Drive: Encoder data set changeover incorrectly parameterized Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An MDS cannot have different motor encoders in two different DDS. The following parameterization therefore results results in an error: p0186[0] = 0, p0187[0] = 0 p0186[0] = 0, p0187[0] = 1 Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): The lower 16 bits indicate the first DDS and the upper 16 bits indicate the second DDS. Remedy: If you wish to operate a motor once with one motor encoder and then another time with the other motor encoder, then you must set up two different MDSs, in which the motor data are the same. Example: p0186[0] = 0, p0187[0] = 0 p0186[0] = 1, p0187[0] = 1 F07518 Drive: Motor data set changeover incorrectly parameterized Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The system has identified that two motor data sets were incorrectly parameterized. Parameter r0313 (calculated from p0314, p0310, p0311), r0315 and p1982 may only have different values if the motor data sets are assigned different motors. p0827 is used to assign the motors and/contactors. It is not possible to toggle between motor data sets. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): xxxxyyyy: xxxx: First DDS with assigned MDS, yyyy: Second DDS with assigned MDS Remedy: Correct the parameterization of the motor data sets. A07519 Drive: Motor changeover incorrectly parameterized Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: With the setting p0833.0 = 1, a motor changeover via the application is selected. This is the reason that p0827 must have different values in the appropriate motor data set. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): xxxxyyyy: xxxx: First MDS, yyyy: Second MDS Remedy: - parameterize the appropriate motor data sets differently (p0827). - select the setting p0833.0 = 0 (motor changeover via the drive). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1365 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07520 Drive: Motor cannot be changed over Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The motor cannot be changed over. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: The contactor for the motor that is presently active cannot be opened, because for a synchronous motor, the speed (r0063) is greater than the speed at the start of field weakening (p3048). As long as r0063 > p0348, the current in the motor does not decay in spite of the pulses being suppressed. 2: The "contactor opened" feedback signal was not detected within 1 s. 3: The "contactor closed" feedback signal was not detected within 1 s. Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: Set the speed lower than the speed at the start of field weakening (r0063 < p0348). Re alarm value = 2, 3: Check the feedback signals of the contactor involved. A07530 Drive: Drive Data Set DDS not present Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The selected drive data set is not available (p0837 > p0180). The drive data set was not changed over. See also: p0180, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837 Remedy: - select the existing drive data set. - set up additional drive data sets. A07531 Drive: Command Data Set CDS not present Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The selected command data set is not available (p0836 > p0170). The command data set was not changed over. See also: p0810 (Command data set selection CDS bit 0), p0811 (Command data set selection CDS bit 1), r0836 (Command Data Set CDS selected) Remedy: - select the existing command data set. - set up additional command data sets. A07541 Drive: Data set changeover not possible Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The selected drive data set changeover and the assigned motor changeover are not possible and are not carried out. For synchronous motors, the motor contactor may only be switched for actual speeds less than the speed at the start of field weakening (r0063 < p0348). See also: r0063 (Speed actual value) Remedy: Reduce the speed below the speed at the start of field weakening. 3-1366 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07550 (F, N) Drive: Not possible to reset encoder parameters Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When carrying out a factory setting (e.g. using p0970 = 1), it was not possible to reset the encoder parameters. The encoder parameters are directly read out of the encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Component number of the encoder involved. Remedy: - repeat the operation. - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07551 Drive encoder: No commutation angle information Message value: Fault cause: %1, drive data set: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The commutation angle information is missing. This means that synchronous motors cannot be controlled (closedloop control) Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = fault cause, xxxx = drive data set yyyy = 1 dec: The motor encoder used does not supply an absolute commutation angle. yyyy = 2 dec: The selected ratio of the measuring gear does not match the motor pole pair number. Remedy: Re fault cause = 1: - check the encoder parameterization (p0404). - use an encoder with track C/D, EnDat interface of Hall sensors. - use an encoder with sinusoidal A/B track for which the motor pole pair number (r0313) is an integer multiple of the encoder pulse number (p0408). - activate the pole position identification routine (p1982 = 1). Re fault cause = 2: - the quotient of the pole pair number divided by the ratio of the measuring gear must be an integer number: (p0314 * p0433) / p0432. Note: For operation with track C/D, this quotient must be less than 8. See also: p0402 (Gearbox type selection), p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0432 (Gearbox factor, encoder revolutions), p0433 (Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions) F07552 (A) Drive encoder: Encoder configuration not supported Message value: Fault cause: %1, component number: %2, encoder data set: %3 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The requested encoder configuration is not supported. Only bits may be requested in p0404 that are signaled as being supported by the encoder evaluation in r0456. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): ccccbbaa hex: cccc = fault cause, bb = component number, aa = encoder data set cccc = 1: encoder sin/cos with absolute track (is supported by SME25). cccc = 3: Squarewave encoder (this is supported by SMC30). cccc = 4: sin/cos encoder (this is supported by SMC20, SMI20, SME20, SME25). cccc = 10: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder (is supported by DQI). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1367 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms cccc = 12: sin/cos encoder with reference mark (this is supported by SME20). cccc = 15: Commutation with zero mark for separately-excited synchronous motors with VECTORMV. cccc = 23: Resolver (this is supported by SMC10, SMI10). cccc = 65535: Other function (compare r0456 and p0404). See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), r0456 (Encoder configuration supported) Remedy: - check the encoder parameterization (p0400, p0404). - use the matching encoder evaluation (r0456). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07553 (A) Drive encoder: Sensor Module configuration not supported Message value: Encoder data set: %1, first incorrect bit: %2, incorrect parameter: %3 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The Sensor Module does not support the requested configuration. For incorrect p0430 (cc = 0), the following applies: - In p0430 (requested functions), at least 1 bit was set that is not set in r0458 (supported functions) (exception: Bit 19, 28, 29, 30, 31). - p1982 > 0 (pole position identification requested), but r0458.16 = 0 (pole position identification not supported). For incorrect p0437 (cc = 1), the following applies: - In p0437 (requested functions), at least 1 bit was set that is not set in r0459 (supported functions). Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex aa: encoder data set number bb: first incorrect bit cc: incorrect parameter cc = 0: incorrect parameter is p0430 cc = 1: incorrect parameter is p0437 cc = 2: incorrect parameter is r0459 dd: reserved (always 0) Remedy: - check the encoder parameterization (p0430, p0437). - check the pole position identification routine (p1982). - use the matching encoder evaluation (r0458, r0459). See also: p0430, p0437, r0458, r0459, p1982 Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07555 (A) Drive encoder: Configuration position tracking Message value: Component number: %1, encoder data set: %2, drive data set: %3, fault cause: %4 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For position tracking, the configuration is not supported. Position tracking can only be activated for absolute encoders. For linear axes, it is not possible to simultaneously activate the position tracking for load and measuring gears. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ddccbbaa hex aa = encoder data set bb = component number cc = drive data set dd = fault cause dd = 00 hex = 0 dec An absolute encoder is not being used. dd = 01 hex = 1 dec Position tracking cannot be activated because the memory of the internal NVRAM is not sufficient or a Control Unit does not have an NVRAM. 3-1368 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms dd = 02 hex = 2 dec For a linear axis, the position tracking was activated for the load and measuring gear. dd = 03 hex = 3 dec Position tracking cannot be activated because position tracking with another gear ratio, axis type or tolerance window has already been detected for this encoder data set. dd = 04 hex = 4 dec A linear encoder is being used. See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0411 (Measuring gear, configuration) Remedy: - use an absolute encoder. - if necessary, de-select the position tracking (p0411 for the measuring gear, p2720 for the load gear). - use a Control Unit with sufficient NVRAM. - Only activate position tracking of the load gear in the same encoder data set if the gear ratio (p2504, p2505), axis type (p2720.1) and tolerance window (p2722) are also the same. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07556 Measuring gear: Position tracking, maximum actual value exceeded Message value: Component number: %1, encoder data set: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When the position tracking of the measuring gear is configured, the drive/encoder identifies a maximum possible absolute position actual value (r0483) that cannot be represented within 32 bits. Maximum value: p0408 * p0412 * 2^p0419 Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): aaaayyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = encoder data set See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.), p0412 (Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual), p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits)) Remedy: - reduce the fine resolution (p0419). - reduce the multiturn resolution (p0412). See also: p0412 (Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual), p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits)) A07557 (F) Encoder 1: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input CI:p2599 lies outside the half of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position. The maximum permissible value is displayed in the supplementary information. Remedy: Set the reference point coordinate less than the value from the supplementary information. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07558 (F) Encoder 2: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input CI:p2599 lies outside the half of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position. The maximum permissible value is displayed in the supplementary information. Remedy: Set the reference point coordinate less than the value from the supplementary information. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1369 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07559 (F) Encoder 3: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input CI:p2599 lies outside the half of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position. The maximum permissible value is displayed in the supplementary information. Remedy: Set the reference point coordinate less than the value from the supplementary information. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F07560 Drive encoder: Number of pulses is not to the power of two Message value: Encoder data set: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For rotary absolute encoders, the pulse number in p0408 must be to the power of two. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): The fault value includes the encoder data set number involved. Remedy: - check the parameterization (p0408, p0404.1, r0458.5). - upgrade the Sensor Module firmware if necessary F07561 Drive encoder: Number of multiturn pulses is not to the power of two Message value: Encoder data set: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The multiturn resolution in p0421 must be to the power of two. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): The fault value includes the encoder data set number involved. Remedy: - check the parameterization (p0421, p0404.1, r0458.5). - upgrade the Sensor Module firmware if necessary F07562 (A) Drive, encoder: Position tracking, incremental encoder not possible Message value: Fault cause: %1, component number: %2, encoder data set: %3 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The requested position tracking for incremental encoders is not supported. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): ccccbbaa hex aa = encoder data set bb = component number cccc = fault cause cccc = 00 hex = 0 dec The encoder type does not support the "Position tracking incremental encoder" function. cccc = 01 hex = 1 dec Position tracking cannot be activated because the memory of the internal NVRAM is not sufficient or a Control Unit does not have an NVRAM. cccc = 04 hex = 4 dec A linear encoder is used that does not support the "position tracking" function. See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0411 (Measuring gear, configuration), r0456 (Encoder configuration supported) 3-1370 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - check the encoder parameterization (p0400, p0404). - use a Control Unit with sufficient NVRAM. - if required, de-select position tracking for the incremental encoder (p0411.3 = 0). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07563 (A) Drive encoder: XIST1_ERW configuration incorrect Message value: Fault cause: %1, encoder data set: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: An incorrect configuration was identified for the "Absolute position for incremental encoder" function. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): The "Absolute value for incremental encoder" function is not supported (r0459.13 = 0). Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): yyxx dec: yy = fault cause, xx = encoder data set See also: r0459 (Sensor Module properties extended), p4652 (XIST1_ERW reset mode) Remedy: For fault value = 1: - upgrade the Sensor Module firmware version. - check the mode (p4652 = 1, 3 requires the property r0459.13 = 1). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A07565 (F, N) Drive: Encoder error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 1 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 1 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G1_ZSW.15). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Error code from G1_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483. Note: This alarm is only output if p0480[0] is not equal to zero. Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G1_STW.15 = 1). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07566 (F, N) Drive: Encoder error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 2 Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 2 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G2_ZSW.15). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Error code from G2_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483. Note: This alarm is only output if p0480[1] is not equal to zero. Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G2_STW.15 = 1). Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1371 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07567 (F, N) Drive: Encoder error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 3 Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 3 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G3_ZSW.15). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Error code from G3_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483. Note: This alarm is only output if p0480[2] is not equal to zero. Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G3_STW.15 = 1). Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07569 (F) Encoder could not be identified Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: During encoder identification (waiting) with p0400 = 10100, the encoder could not be identified. Either the wrong encoder has been installed or no encoder has been installed, the wrong encoder cable has been connected or no encoder cable has been connected to the Sensor Module, or the DRIVE-CLiQ component has not been connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. Note: Encoder identification must be supported by the encoder and is possible in the following cases: - Encoder with EnDat interface - Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ Remedy: - check and, if necessary, connect the encoder and/or encoder cable. - check and, if necessary, establish the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - in the case of encoders that cannot be identified (e.g. encoders without EnDat interface), the correct encoder type must be entered in p0400. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F07575 Drive: Motor encoder not ready Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The motor encoder signals that it is not ready. - initialization of encoder 1 (motor encoder) was unsuccessful. - the function "parking encoder" is active (encoder control word G1_STW.14 = 1). - the encoder interface (Sensor Module) is de-activated (p0145). - the Sensor Module is defective. Remedy: Evaluate other queued faults via encoder 1. 3-1372 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07576 Drive: Encoderless operation due to a fault active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Encoderless operation is active due to a fault (r1407.13 = 1). Note: The behavior for faults has been set to ENCODER fault response in p0491. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - remove the cause of a possible encoder fault. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. A07577 (F) Encoder 1: Measuring probe evaluation not possible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set. 4098: Error when initializing the measuring probe. 4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high. 4200: The PROFIBUS clock cycle is not a multiple of integer of the position controller clock cycle. Remedy: De-activate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal). Re alarm value = 6: Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489 or p2517, p2518). Re alarm value = 4098: Check the Control Unit hardware. Re alarm value = 4100: Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe. Re alarm value = 4200: Set the clock cycle ratio between the PROFIBUS clock cycle and the position controller clock cycle to an integer multiple. Reaction upon F: OFF1 Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07578 (F) Encoder 2: Measuring probe evaluation not possible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set. 4098: Error when initializing the measuring probe. 4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high. 4200: The PROFIBUS clock cycle is not a multiple of integer of the position controller clock cycle. Remedy: De-activate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal). Re alarm value = 6: Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489 or p2517, p2518). Re alarm value = 4098: Check the Control Unit hardware. Re alarm value = 4100: Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe. Re alarm value = 4200: Set the clock cycle ratio between the PROFIBUS clock cycle and the position controller clock cycle to an integer multiple. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1373 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: OFF1 Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07579 (F) Encoder 3: Measuring probe evaluation not possible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set. 4098: Error when initializing the measuring probe. 4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high. 4200: The PROFIBUS clock cycle is not a multiple of integer of the position controller clock cycle. Remedy: De-activate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal). Re alarm value = 6: Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489 or p2517, p2518). Re alarm value = 4098: Check the Control Unit hardware. Re alarm value = 4100: Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe. Re alarm value = 4200: Set the clock cycle ratio between the PROFIBUS clock cycle and the position controller clock cycle to an integer multiple. Reaction upon F: OFF1 Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07580 (F, N) Drive: No Sensor Module with matching component number Message value: Encoder data set: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A Sensor Module with the component number specified in p0141 was not found. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Encoder data set involved (index of p0141). Remedy: Correct parameter p0141. Reaction upon F: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07581 (F) Encoder 1: Position actual value preprocessing error Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing. Remedy: Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY 3-1374 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07582 (F) Encoder 2: Position actual value preprocessing error Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing. Remedy: Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07583 (F) Encoder 3: Position actual value preprocessing error Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing. Remedy: Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07584 Encoder 1: Position setting value activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The position actual value is set to the value received via CI: p2515while BI: p2514 = 1 signal. A possible system deviation cannot be corrected. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm automatically disappears with BI: p2514 = 0 signal. A07585 Encoder 2: Position setting value activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The position actual value is set to the value received via CI: p2515while BI: p2514 = 1 signal. A possible system deviation cannot be corrected. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm automatically disappears with BI: p2514 = 0 signal. A07586 Encoder 3: Position setting value activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The position actual value is set to the value received via CI: p2515while BI: p2514 = 1 signal. A possible system deviation cannot be corrected. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm automatically disappears with BI: p2514 = 0 signal. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1375 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07587 Encoder 1: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The following problem has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing. - an encoder data set has been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any encoder data (p0400 = 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0). Remedy: Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets. See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189 (Encoder 3 encoder data set number), p0400 (Encoder type selection) A07588 Encoder 2: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The following problem has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing. - an encoder data set has been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any encoder data (p0400 = 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0). Remedy: Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets. See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189 (Encoder 3 encoder data set number), p0400 (Encoder type selection) A07589 Encoder 3: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The following problem has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing. - an encoder data set has been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any encoder data (p0400 = 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0). Remedy: Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets. See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189 (Encoder 3 encoder data set number), p0400 (Encoder type selection) A07590 (F) Encoder 1: Drive Data Set changeover in operation Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A Drive Data Set changeover (DDS) with a change of the mechanical relationships and the encoder assignment (p2502) was requested in operation. Remedy: To changeover the drive data set, initially, exit the "operation" mode. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07591 (F) Encoder 2: Drive Data Set changeover in operation Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A Drive Data Set changeover (DDS) with a change of the mechanical relationships and the encoder assignment (p2502) was requested in operation. Remedy: To changeover the drive data set, initially, exit the "operation" mode. 3-1376 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07592 (F) Encoder 3: Drive Data Set changeover in operation Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A Drive Data Set changeover (DDS) with a change of the mechanical relationships and the encoder assignment (p2502) was requested in operation. Remedy: To changeover the drive data set, initially, exit the "operation" mode. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07593 (F, N) Encoder 1: Value range for position actual value exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for the position actual value representation was exceeded. When the overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "adjustment absolute measuring system" status is reset. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The position actual value (r2521) has exceeded the value range. 2: The encoder position actual value Gn_XIST2 (r0483) or the absolute value after the load gear (r2723) has exceeded the value range. 3: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range for displaying the position actual value. Remedy: If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution. Re alarm value = 3: Reducing the position resolution and conversion factor: - reduce the length unit (LU) per load revolution for rotary encoders (p2506). - increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual values (p0419). Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07594 (F, N) Encoder 2: Value range for position actual value exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for the position actual value representation was exceeded. When the overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "adjustment absolute measuring system" status is reset. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The position actual value (r2521) has exceeded the value range. 2: The encoder position actual value Gn_XIST2 (r0483) or the absolute value after the load gear (r2723) has exceeded the value range. 3: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range for displaying the position actual value. Remedy: If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution. Re alarm value = 3: Reducing the position resolution and conversion factor: - reduce the length unit (LU) per load revolution for rotary encoders (p2506). - increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual values (p0419). Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1377 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07595 (F, N) Encoder 3: Value range for position actual value exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for the position actual value representation was exceeded. When the overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "adjustment absolute measuring system" status is reset. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The position actual value (r2521) has exceeded the value range. 2: The encoder position actual value Gn_XIST2 (r0483) or the absolute value after the load gear (r2723) has exceeded the value range. 3: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range for displaying the position actual value. Remedy: If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution. Re alarm value = 3: Reducing the position resolution and conversion factor: - reduce the length unit (LU) per load revolution for rotary encoders (p2506). - increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual values (p0419). Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07596 (F) Encoder 1: Reference function interrupted Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was interrupted. - an encoder fault has occurred (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1). - position actual value was set during an activated reference function. - simultaneously activate reference mark search and measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 1 signal). - activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was de-activated (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal). Remedy: - check the causes and resolve. - reset the control (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal) and activate the requested function. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07597 (F) Encoder 2: Reference function interrupted Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was interrupted. - an encoder fault has occurred (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1). - position actual value was set during an activated reference function. - simultaneously activate reference mark search and measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 1 signal). - activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was de-activated (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal). Remedy: - check the causes and resolve. - reset the control (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal) and activate the requested function. 3-1378 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A07598 (F) Encoder 3: Reference function interrupted Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was interrupted. - an encoder fault has occurred (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1). - position actual value was set during an activated reference function. - simultaneously activate reference mark search and measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 1 signal). - activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was de-activated (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal). Remedy: - check the causes and resolve. - reset the control (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal) and activate the requested function. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F07599 (A) Encoder 1: Adjustment not possible Message value: Drive data set: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for displaying the position actual value. Remedy: If the value for the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is greater than 4294967296, then it is not possible to make an adjustment due to an overflow. For rotary encoders, the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows: 1. Motor encoder without position tracking: p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504) p2506 * p0433 * p2505 * p0421 / (p0432 * p2504) for multiturn encoders 2. Motor encoder with position tracking for measuring gear: p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504 3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear: p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432 4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear: p2506 * p2721 5. Direct encoder without position tracking: p2506 * p0433 / p0432 p2506 * p0433 * p0421 / p0432 for multiturn encoders 6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear: p2506 * p0412 Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07600 (A) Encoder 2: Adjustment not possible Message value: Drive data set: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for displaying the position actual value. Remedy: If the value for the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is greater than 4294967296, then it is not possible to make an adjustment due to an overflow. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1379 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For rotary encoders, the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows: 1. Motor encoder without position tracking: p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504) p2506 * p0433 * p2505 * p0421 / (p0432 * p2504) for multiturn encoders 2. Motor encoder with position tracking for measuring gear: p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504 3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear: p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432 4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear: p2506 * p2721 5. Direct encoder without position tracking: p2506 * p0433 / p0432 p2506 * p0433 * p0421 / p0432 for multiturn encoders 6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear: p2506 * p0412 Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07601 (A) Encoder 3: Adjustment not possible Message value: Drive data set: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for displaying the position actual value. Remedy: If the value for the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is greater than 4294967296, then it is not possible to make an adjustment due to an overflow. For rotary encoders, the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows: 1. Motor encoder without position tracking: p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504) p2506 * p0433 * p2505 * p0421 / (p0432 * p2504) for multiturn encoders 2. Motor encoder with position tracking for measuring gear: p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504 3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear: p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432 4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear: p2506 * p2721 5. Direct encoder without position tracking: p2506 * p0433 / p0432 p2506 * p0433 * p0421 / p0432 for multiturn encoders 6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear: p2506 * p0412 Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07800 Drive: No power unit present Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit parameters cannot be read or no parameters are stored in the power unit. It is possible that the DRIVE-CLiQ cable between the Control Unit and power unit is interrupted or defective. Note: This fault also occurs if an incorrect topology was selected in the commissioning software and this parameterization is then downloaded to the Control Unit. See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual) 3-1380 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check the DRIVE-CLiQ cable between the Control Unit and power unit. - Check the power unit and replace if necessary. - check the Control Unit, and if required replace it. - after correcting the topology, the parameters must be again downloaded using the commissioning software. F07801 Drive: Motor overcurrent Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The permissible motor limit current was exceeded. - effective current limit set too low. - current controller not correctly set. - U/f operation: Up ramp was set too short or the load is too high. - U/f operation: Short-circuit in the motor cable or ground fault. - U/f operation: Motor current does not match current of power unit. - Switch to rotating motor without flying restart function (p1200). Note: Limit current = 2 x minimum (p0640, 4 x p0305 x p0306) >= 2 x p0305 x p0306 Remedy: - check the current limits (p0640). - vector control: Check the current controller (p1715, p1717). - U/f control: Check the current limiting controller (p1340 ... p1346). - increase the up ramp (p1120) or reduce the load. - check the motor and motor cables for short-circuit and ground fault. - check the motor for the star-delta configuration and rating plate parameterization. - check the power unit and motor combination. - Choose "flying restart" function (p1200) if switched to rotating motor. F07802 Drive: Infeed or power unit not ready Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: After an internal power-on command, the infeed or drive does not signal ready. - monitoring time is too short. - DC link voltage is not present. - associated infeed or drive of the signaling component is defective. - supply voltage incorrectly set. Remedy: - increase the monitoring time (p0857). - ensure that there is a DC link voltage. Check the DC link busbar. Enable the infeed. - replace the associated infeed or drive of the signaling component. - check the line supply voltage setting (p0210). See also: p0857 (Power unit monitoring time) A07805 (N) Infeed: Power unit overload I2t Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Alarm threshold for I2t overload (p0294) of the power unit exceeded. Remedy: - reduce the continuous load. - adapt the load duty cycle. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1381 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07805 (N) Drive: Power unit overload I2t Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Alarm threshold for I2t overload (p0294) of the power unit exceeded. The response parameterized in p0290 becomes active. See also: p0290 (Power unit overload response) Remedy: - reduce the continuous load. - adapt the load duty cycle. - check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and Motor Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07807 Drive: Short-circuit/ground fault detected Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A phase-phase short-circuit or ground fault was detected at the motor-side output terminals of the converter. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Short-circuit, phases U-V 2: Short-circuit, phases U-W 3: Short-circuit, phases V-W 4: Ground fault with overcurrent 1xxxx: Ground fault with current in phase U detected (xxxx = component of the current in phase V in per mille) 2xxxx: Ground fault with current in phase V detected (xxxx = component of the current in phase U in per mille) Note: Also when interchanging the line and motor cables is identified as a motor-side short circuit. Connecting to a motor that is either not de-energized or partially de-energized is possibly detected as ground fault. Remedy: - check the motor-side converter connection for a phase-phase short-circuit. - rule-out interchanged line and motor cables. - check for a ground fault. For a ground fault: - do not enable the pulses when connecting to a rotating motor without the "Flying restart" function activated (p1200). - increase the de-energization time (p0347). - If required, deactivate the monitoring (p1901). F07808 (A) HF damping module: damping not ready Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When switching on or in the switched-on state, the HF damping module does not return a ready signal. Remedy: - Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring to the HF damping module. - check the 24 V supply voltage. - if required, replace the HF damping module. Note: HF Damping Module Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1382 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07810 Drive: Power unit EEPROM without rated data Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: No rated data are stored in the power unit EEPROM. See also: p0205 (Power unit application), r0206 (Rated power unit power), r0207 (Rated power unit current), r0208 (Rated power unit line supply voltage), r0209 (Power unit, maximum current) Remedy: Replace the power unit or inform Siemens Customer Service. F07815 Drive: Power unit has been changed Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The code number of the actual power unit does not match the saved number. This only occurs if the comparator in p9906 or p9908 is not at 2 (low) or 3 (minimum). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of the incorrect parameter. See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual), p0201 (Power unit code number) Remedy: Connect the original power unit and power up the Control Unit again (POWER ON) or set p0201 to r0200 and exit commissioning with p0010 = 0. For infeeds, the following applies: Line reactors or line filters must be used that are specified for the new power unit. A line supply and DC link identification routine (p3410 = 5) must then be carried out. It is not possible to change the power unit without re-commissioning the system if the type of infeed (A_Infeed, B_Infeed, S_Infeed), the type of construction/design (booksize, chassis) or the voltage class differ between the old and new power units. For inverters, the following applies: If the new power unit is accepted, then if required, the current limit (p0640) can be reduced by a lower maximum current of the power unit (r0209) (torque limits stay the same). If not only the power unit is changed, but also the motor, then the motor must be re-commissioned (e.g. using p0010 = 1). This is also necessary if motor data is still to be downloaded via DRIVE-CLiQ. See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual) F07815 Drive: Power unit has been changed Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The code number of the actual power unit does not match the saved number. This only occurs if the comparator in p9906 or p9908 is not at 2 (low) or 3 (minimum). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of the incorrect parameter. See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual), p0201 (Power unit code number) Remedy: - Connect the original power unit and switch on the Control Unit again (POWER ON). - Set p0201 to r0200 and exit commissioning with p0010 = 0. Note: If the power unit type was changed (see r0203) or the motor replaced, then the motor must be recommissioned (e.g. using p0010 = 1, p3900 = 3, p1900 = 1, 2). This is also necessary if motor data is still to be downloaded via DRIVECLiQ. If the new power unit is accepted, then if required, the current limit p0640 can be reduced by a lower maximum current of the power unit (r0209) (torque limits stay the same). If the comparison stage in p9906 is set to 2, 3, then commissioning can be exited (p0010 = 0) and the fault acknowledged. This procedure is not recommended for different power unit types. See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1383 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07820 Drive: Temperature sensor not connected Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature sensor for monitoring the motor temperature, specified in p0600, is not available. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: p0601 = 10 (SME), but in p0600 - not evaluated via encoder is selected. 2: p0600 = 10 (BICO), but the signal source (p0603) is not interconnected. 3: p0601 = 11 (BICO), but in p0600 - not evaluated via BICO interconnection is selected (20 or 21). 4: p0601 = 11 (BICO) and p4610-p4613 > 0, but the associated signal source (p0608, p0609) is not interconnected. 5: Component with sensor evaluation not present or has been removed in the meantime. 6: Evaluation via Motor Module not possible (r0192.21). Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - In p0600 set an encoder with temperature sensor. Re alarm value = 2: - interconnect p0603 with the temperature signal. Re alarm value = 3, 4: - set the available temperature sensor (p0600, p0601). - set p4610 ... p4613 = 0 (no sensor), or interconnect p0608 or p0609 with an external temperature signal. Re alarm value = 5: - connect the component with the temperature sensor. Check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. Re alarm value = 6: - update the Motor Module firmware. Connect temperature sensor via encoder. See also: p0600 (Motor temperature sensor for monitoring), p0601 A07825 (N) Drive: Simulation mode activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The simulation mode is activated. The drive can only be powered up if the DC link voltage is less than 40 V. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm automatically disappears if simulation mode is de-activated with p1272 = 0. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07826 Drive: DC link voltage for simulation operation too high Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The simulation mode is activated and the DC link voltage is greater than the permissible value of 40 V. Remedy: - switch out (disable) simulation mode (p1272 = 0) and acknowledge the fault. - reduce the input voltage in order to reach a DC link voltage below 40 V. F07840 Drive: Infeed operation missing Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The signal "infeed operation" is not present although the enable signals for the drive have been present for longer than the parameterized monitoring time (p0857). - infeed not operational. - interconnection of the binector input for the ready signal is either incorrect or missing (p0864). - infeed is presently carrying out a line supply identification routine. 3-1384 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - bring the infeed into an operational state. - check the interconnection of the binector input for the signal "infeed operation" (p0864). - increase the monitoring time (p0857). - wait until the infeed has completed the line supply identification routine. See also: p0857 (Power unit monitoring time), p0864 (Infeed operation) F07841 (A) Drive: Infeed operation withdrawn Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The signal "infeed operation" was withdrawn in operation. - interconnection of the binector input for the signal "infeed operation" is either incorrect or missing (p0864). - the enable signals of the infeed were disabled. - due to a fault, the infeed withdraws the signal "infeed operation". Remedy: - check the interconnection of the binector input for the "infeed operation" signal (p0864). - check the enable signals of the infeed and if required, enable. - remove and acknowledge an infeed fault. Note: If this drive is intended to back up the DC link regeneratively, then the fault response must be parameterized for NONE, OFF1 or OFF3. so that the drive can continue to operate even after the infeed fails. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A07850 (F) External alarm 1 Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The BICO signal for "external alarm 1" was triggered. The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled. See also: p2112 (External alarm 1) Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A07851 (F) External alarm 2 Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The BICO signal for "external alarm 2" was triggered. The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled. See also: p2116 (External alarm 2) Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1385 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07852 (F) External alarm 3 Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The BICO signal for "external alarm 3" was triggered. The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled. See also: p2117 (External alarm 3) Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F07860 (A) External fault 1 Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The BICO signal "external fault 1" was triggered. See also: p2106 (External fault 1) Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07861 (A) External fault 2 Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The BICO signal "external fault 2" was triggered. See also: p2107 (External fault 2) Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07862 (A) External fault 3 Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The BICO signal "external fault 3" was triggered. See also: p2108, p3111, p3112 Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1386 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07890 Internal voltage protection / internal armature short-circuit with STO active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) is not possible as Safe Torque Off (STO) is enabled. The pulses cannot be enabled. Remedy: Switch out the internal armature short-circuit (p1231=0) or de-activate Safe Torque Off (p9501 = p9561 = 0). Note: STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill A07899 (N) Drive: Stall monitoring not possible Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Stall monitoring is not possible, because a change was made into the open-loop speed controlled mode before the wait time p2177 had expired. This situation can only occur, if the following conditions apply: p1300 = 20 p2177 > p1758 p1750.2 = 0 p1750.6 = 0 Remedy: - Deactivate the changeover into open-loop speed controlled operation when operating at the torque limit (p1750.6 = 0). Condition: No slow reversing through the open-loop speed controlled operating range p1755 within the time p1758 when operating at the torque limit. - shorten the stall detection wait time (p2177 < p1758). - Activate closed-loop controlled operation from standstill and higher (p1750.2 = 1). Condition: There is no active load, for example, a hoisting gear - Use an operating mode with encoder (p1300 = 21). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07900 (N, A) Drive: Motor blocked Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Motor has been operating at the torque limit longer than the time specified in p2177 and below the speed threshold in p2175. This signal can also be initiated if the speed actual value is oscillating and the speed controller output repeatedly goes to its limit. If the simulation mode is enabled (p1272 = 1) and the closed-loop control with speed encoder activated (p1300 = 21), then the inhibit signal is generated if the encoder signal is not received from a motor that is driven with the torque setpoint of the closed-loop control. See also: p2175 (Motor blocked speed threshold), p2177 (Motor blocked delay time) Remedy: - check that the motor can freely move. - check the torque limit: For a positive direction of rotation r1538, for a negative direction of rotation r1539. - check the parameter, message "Motor blocked" and if required, correct (p2175, p2177). - check the inversion of the actual value (p0410). - check the motor encoder connection. - check the encoder pulse number (p0408). - for SERVO with encoderless operation and motors with low power ratings (< 300 W), increase the pulse frequency (p1800). - after de-selecting the "Basic positioner" (EPOS) function mode, check the motoring (p1528) and regenerative (p1529) torque limit and modify again. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1387 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - in the simulation mode and operation with speed encoder, the power unit to which the motor is connected must be powered up and must be supplied with the torque setpoint of the simulated closed-loop control. Otherwise, change over to encoderless control (see p1300). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07901 Drive: Motor overspeed Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The maximum permissible speed was either positively or negatively exceeded. The maximum permissible positive speed is formed as follows: Minimum (p1082, CI: p1085) + p2162 The maximum permissible negative speed is formed as follows: Maximum (-p1082, CI: 1088) - p2162 Remedy: The following applies for a positive direction of rotation: - check r1084 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1085 and p2162. The following applies for a negative direction of rotation: - check r1087 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1088 and p2162. Activate pre-control of the speed limiting controller (p1401.7 = 1). Increase the hysteresis for the overspeed signal p2162. This upper limit is dependent upon the maximum motor speed p0322 and the maximum speed p1082 of the setpoint channel. F07902 (N, A) Drive: Motor stalled Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The system has identified that the motor has stalled for a time longer than is set in p2178. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Stall detection using r1408.11 (p1744 or p0492). 2: Stall detection using r1408.12 (p1745). 3: Stall detection using r0056.11 (only for separately excited synchronous motors). See also: p1744 (Motor model speed threshold stall detection), p2178 (Motor stalled delay time) Remedy: It should always be carefully ensured that the motor data identification (p1910) as well as the rotating measurement (p1960) were carried out (also refer to r3925). For synchronous motors with encoder, the encoder must have been adjusted (p1990). For closed-loop speed and torque control with speed encoder, the following applies: - check the speed signal (interrupted cable, polarity, pulse number, broken encoder shaft). - check the speed encoder, if another speed encoder was selected using the data set changeover. This must be connected to the same motor that is controlled for the data set changeover. If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance (p1744 or p0492) can be increased. For resolvers with a high signal ripple, for example p0492 should be increased and the speed signal smoothed (p1441, p1442). If the stalled motor should take place in the range of the monitor model and for speeds of less than 30 % of the rated motor speed, then a change can be made directly from the current model into the flux impression (p1401.5 = 1). We therefore recommend that the time-controlled model change is switched in (p1750.4 = 1) or the model changeover limits are significantly increased (p1752 > 0.35 x p0311; p1753 = 5 %). - check the speed encoder, if another speed encoder was selected using the data set changeover. This must be connected to the motor that is controlled for the data set changeover. For closed-loop speed and torque control without speed encoder, the following applies: - Check whether the drive stalls solely due to the load in controlled mode (r1750.0) or when the speed setpoint is still zero. If so, increase the current setpoint via p1610 or set p1750.2 = 1 (sensorless vector control to standstill for passive loads). - If the motor excitation time (p0346) was significantly reduced and the drive stalls when it is switched on and run immediately, p0346 should be increased again or quick magnetizing selected (p1401). - check the current limits (p0640, r0067, r0289). If the current limits are too low, then the drive cannot be magnetized. - check the current controller (p1715, p1717) and the speed adaptation controller (p1764, p1767). If the dynamic response was significantly reduced, then this should be increased again. - If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance (p1745) or the delay time (p2178) can be increased. 3-1388 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms The following generally apply for closed-loop and torque control: - Check whether the motor cables are disconnected. - If the fault occurs with fault value 2 when the motor accelerates very quickly to the field weakening range, the deviation between the flux setpoint and flux actual value can be reduced and, in turn, the message prevented, by reducing p1596. For separately-excited synchronous motors (closed-loop control with speed encoder), the following applies: - check the speed signal (interrupted cable, polarity, pulse number). - ensure the correct motor parameterization (rating plate and equivalent circuit diagram parameters). - check the excitation equipment and the interface to the closed-loop control. - encoder the highest possible dynamic response of the closed-loop excitation current control. - check the speed control for any tendency to oscillate and if resonance effects occur, use a bandstop filter. - do not exceed the maximum speed (p2162). If there is no fault, then the delay time can be increased (p2178). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A07903 Drive: Motor speed deviation Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The absolute value of the speed difference from the two setpoints (p2151, p2154) and the speed actual value (r2169) exceeds the tolerance threshold (p2163) longer than tolerated (p2164, p2166). The alarm is only enabled for p2149.0 = 1. Possible causes could be: - the load torque is greater than the torque setpoint. - when accelerating, the torque/current/power limit is reached. If the limits are not sufficient, then it is possible that the drive has been dimensioned too small. - for closed-loop torque control, the speed setpoint does not track the speed actual value. - for active Vdc controller. For U/f control, the overload condition is detected as the Imax controller is active. See also: p2149 (Monitoring configuration) Remedy: - increase p2163 and/or p2166. - increase the torque/current/power limits. - for closed-loop torque control: The speed setpoint should track the speed actual value. - de-activate alarm with p2149.0 = 0. A07904 (N) External armature short-circuit: Contactor feedback signal "Closed" missing Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When closing, the contactor feedback signal (p1235) did not issue the signal "Closed" (r1239.1 = 1) within the monitoring time (p1236). Remedy: - check that the contactor feedback signal is correctly connected (p1235). - check the logic of the contactor feedback signal (r1239.1 = 1: "Closed", r1239.1 = 0: "Open"). - increase the monitoring time (p1236). - if required, set the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 2). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1389 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07905 (N, A) External armature short-circuit: Contactor feedback signal "Open" missing Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When opening, the contactor feedback signal (p1235) did not issue the signal "Open" (r1239.1 = 0) within the monitoring time (p1236). Remedy: - check that the contactor feedback signal is correctly connected (p1235). - check the logic of the contactor feedback signal (r1239.1 = 1: "Closed", r1239.1 = 0: "Open"). - increase the monitoring time (p1236). - if required, set the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 2). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F07906 Armature short-circuit / internal voltage protection: Parameterization error Message value: Fault cause: %1, motor data set: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The armature short-circuit is incorrectly parameterized. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): zzzzyyxx: zzzz = fault cause, xx = motor data set zzzz = 0001 hex = 1 dec: A permanent-magnet synchronous motor has not been selected. zzzz = 0002 hex = 2 dec: No induction motor selected. zzzz = 0065 hex = 101 dec: External armature short-circuit: Output (r1239.0) not wired. zzzz = 0066 hex = 102 dec: External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal: No feedback signal connected (BI:p1235). zzzz = 0067 hex = 103 dec: External armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal: Wait time when opening (p1237) is 0. zzzz = 00C9 hex = 201 dec: Internal voltage protection: The maximum output current of the Motor Module (r0209) is less than 1.8 x motor shortcircuit current (r0331). zzzz = 00CA hex = 202 dec: Internal voltage protection: A Motor Module in booksize or chassis format is not being used. zzzz = 00CB hex = 203 dec: Internal voltage protection: The motor short-circuit current (p0320) is greater than the maximum motor current (p0323). zzzz = 00CC hex = 204 dec: Internal voltage protection: The activation (p1231 = 4) is not given for all motor data sets with synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx). Remedy: For fault value = 1: - an armature short-circuit / voltage protection is only permissible for permanent-magnetic synchronous motors. The highest position of the motor type in p0300 must either be 2 or 4. For fault value = 101: - the contactor for the external armature short-circuit configuration should be controlled using output signal r1239.0. The signal can, e.g. be connected to an output terminal via binector input p0738. Before this fault can be acknowledged, p1231 must be set again. For fault value = 102: - if the external armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 1) is selected, this feedback signal must be connected to an input terminal (e.g. r722.x) and then connected to BI: p1235. - alternatively, the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 2) can be selected. For fault value = 103: - if the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 2) is selected, then a delay time must be parameterized in p1237. This time must always be greater than the actual contactor opening time, as otherwise the Motor Module would be short-circuited! 3-1390 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For fault value = 201: - a Motor Module with a higher maximum current or a motor with a lower short-circuit current must be used. The maximum Motor Module current must be higher than 1.8 x short-circuit current of the motor. For fault value = 202: - for internal voltage protection, use a Motor Module in booksize or chassis format. For fault value = 203: - for internal voltage protection, only use short-circuit proof motors. For fault value = 204: - The internal voltage protection must either be activated for all motor data sets with synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx) (p1231 = 3) or it must be de-activated for all motor data sets (p1231 not equal to 3). This therefore ensures that the protection cannot be accidentally withdrawn as a result of a data set changeover. The fault can only be acknowledged if this condition is fulfilled. F07907 Internal armature short-circuit: Motor terminals are not at zero potential after pulse suppression Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The function "Internal voltage protection" (p1231 = 3) was activated. The following must be observed: - when the internal voltage protection is active, after pulse suppression, all of the motor terminals are at half of the DC link voltage (without an internal voltage protection, the motor terminals are at zero potential)! - it is only permissible to use motors that are short-circuit proof (p0320 < p0323). - the Motor Module must be able to continually conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0331) of the motor (r0289). - the internal voltage protection cannot be interrupted due to a fault response. If an overcurrent condition occurs during the active, internal voltage protection, then this can destroy the Motor Module and/or the motor. - if the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0), in order to ensure safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, an external 24 V power supply (UPS) must be used for the components. - if the Motor Module does support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), in order to ensure safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, the 24 V power supply for the components must be provided through a Control Supply Module. - if the internal voltage protection is active, it is not permissible that the motor is driven by the load for a longer period of time (e.g. as a result of loads that move the motor or another coupled motor). Remedy: Not necessary. This a note for the user. A07908 Internal armature short-circuit active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited through the power semiconductors (r1239.5 = 1). The pulses cannot be enabled. The internal armature short-circuit is selected (p1231 = 4): Remedy: For synchronous motors, the armature short-circuit braking is activated with binector input p1230 = 1 signal. See also: p1230 (Armature short-circuit / DC braking activation), p1231 (Armature short-circuit / DC braking configuration) F07909 Internal voltage protection: De-activation only effective after POWER ON Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The de-activation of the internal voltage protection (p1231 not equal to 3) only becomes effective after POWER ON. The status signal r1239.6 = 1 indicates that the internal voltage protection is ready. Remedy: Not necessary. This a note for the user. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1391 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07910 (N) Drive: Motor overtemperature Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: KTY or no sensor: The measured motor temperature or temperature of motor temperature model 2 has exceeded the alarm threshold (p0604, p0616). The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active. PTC or bimetallic NC contact: The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): - SME not selected in p0601: 11: No output current reduction. 12: Output current reduction active. - SME or TM120 selected in p0601 (p0601 = 10, 11): this is the number of the temperature channel leading to the message. See also: p0604 (Mot_temp_mod 1/KTY alarm threshold), p0610 (Motor overtemperature response) Remedy: - check the motor load. - check the motor ambient temperature and cooling. - check PTC or bimetallic NC contact. See also: p0612 (Mot_temp_mod activation), p0625 (Motor ambient temperature), p0626 (Motor overtemperature, stator core), p0627 (Motor overtemperature, stator winding), p0628 (Motor overtemperature rotor winding) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07913 Excitation current outside the tolerance range Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The difference between the excitation current actual value and setpoint has exceeded the tolerance: abs(r1641 - r1626) > p3201 + p3202 The cause of this fault is again reset for abs(r1641 - r1626) < p3201. Remedy: - check the parameterization (p1640, p3201, p3202). - check the interfaces to the excitation equipment (r1626, p1640). - check the excitation equipment. F07914 Flux out of tolerance Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The difference between the flux actual value and setpoint has exceeded the tolerance: abs(r0084 - r1598) > p3204 + p3205 The cause of this fault is again reset for abs(r0084 - r1598) < p3204. The fault is only issued after the delay time in p3206 has expired. Remedy: - check the parameterization (p3204, p3205). - check the interfaces to the excitation equipment (r1626, p1640). - check the excitation equipment. - check the flux control (p1590, p1592, p1597). - check the control for oscillation and take the appropriate counter measures (e.g. optimize the speed control loop, parameterize a bandstop filter). 3-1392 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07918 (N) Three-phase setpoint generator operation selected/active Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Only for separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5): The actual open-loop/closed-loop control mode is I/f control (open-loop) with a fixed current (p1300 = 18). The speed is entered via the setpoint channel and the current setpoint is given by the minimum current (p1620). It must be ensured that in this mode, the control dynamic performance is very limited. This is the reason that longer ramp-up times should be set for the setpoint speed than for normal operation. See also: p1620 (Stator current, minimum) Remedy: Select another open-loop/closed-loop control mode See also: p1300 (Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07920 Drive: Torque/speed too low Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low). See also: p2181 (Load monitoring response) Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load. - adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load. A07921 Drive: Torque/speed too high Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high). Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load. - adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load. A07922 Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic. Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load. - adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load. F07923 Drive: Torque/speed too low Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low). Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load. - adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1393 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07924 Drive: Torque/speed too high Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high). Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load. - adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load. F07925 Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic. Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load. - adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load. A07927 DC braking active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The motor is braked with DC current. DC braking is active. 1) A message with response DCBRK is active. The motor is braked with the braking current set in p1232 for the duration set in in p1233. If the standstill threshold p1226 is undershot, then braking is prematurely canceled. 2) DC braking has been activated at binector input p1230 with the DC braking set (p1230 = 4). Braking current p1232 is injected until this binector input becomes inactive. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm automatically disappears once DC braking has been executed. F07928 Internal voltage protection initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited through the power semiconductors (r1239.5 = 1). The pulses cannot be enabled. The internal voltage protection is selected (p1231 = 3). Remedy: If the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), then the Motor Module automatically decides - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the armature short-circuit should be activated. The armature short-circuit is activated and response OFF2 is initiated if the DC link voltage exceeds 800 V. If the DC link voltage falls below 450 V, then the armature short-circuit is withdrawn. If the motor is still in a critical speed range, the armature short-circuit is re-activated once the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold of 800 V. If the autonomous (independent) internal voltage protection is active (r1239.5 = 1) and the line supply returns (450 V < DC link voltage < 800 V), the armature short-circuit is withdrawn after 3 minutes. F07930 Drive: Brake control error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The Control Unit has detected a brake control error. 3-1394 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 10, 11: Fault in "open holding brake" operation. - No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1). - Ground fault in brake cable. 20: Fault in "brake open" state. - Short-circuit in brake winding. 30, 31: Fault in "close holding brake" operation. - No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1). - Short-circuit in brake winding. 40: Fault in "brake closed" state. 50: Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between Control Unit and Motor Module (brake control diagnostics). 80: When using the Safe Brake Adaptor (SBA), a fault has occurred in the brake control of the Control Unit. 90: Brake released for service purposes (X4). Note: The following causes may apply to fault values: - motor cable is not shielded correctly. - defect in control circuit of the Motor Module. See also: p1278 (Brake control, diagnostics evaluation) Remedy: - check the motor holding brake connection. - for a parallel connection, check the setting of the power unit data set to control the holding brake (p7015). - check the function of the motor holding brake. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. - check that the electrical cabinet design and cable routing are in compliance with EMC regulations (e.g. shield of the motor cable and brake conductors are connected with the shield connecting plate and the motor connectors are tightly screwed to the housing). - replace the Motor Module involved. Operation with Safe Brake Module: - check the Safe Brake Modules connection. - replace the Safe Brake Module. Operation with Safe Brake Module (SBA): - check the SBA connection and if required, replace the SBA. See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration), p1278 (Brake control, diagnostics evaluation) A07931 (F, N) Brake does not open Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: This alarm is output for r1229.4 = 1. See also: p1216 (Motor holding brake, opening time), r1229 (Motor holding brake status word) Remedy: - check the functionality of the motor holding brake. - check the feedback signal (p1223). Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07932 Brake does not close Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: This alarm is output for r1229.5 = 1. For r1229.5 = 1, OFF1/OFF3 are suppressed to prevent the drive accelerating by a load that drives the motor whereby OFF2 remains effective. See also: p1217 (Motor holding brake closing time), r1229 (Motor holding brake status word) Remedy: - check the functionality of the motor holding brake. - check the feedback signal (p1222). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1395 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07934 (N) Drive: S120 Combi motor holding brake configuration Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A connected motor holding brake has been detected with an S120 Combi. However, this brake has not been assigned to just one Combi feed drive and, therefore, brake control is not configured (correctly). It is also not permitted to assign the brake to the spindle. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: No motor holding brake is assigned (p1215 = 0 or 3 on all S120 Combi feed drives). 1: More than one motor holding brake has been assigned (p1215 = 1 or 2 on more than one S120 Combi feed drive) - or there is more than one DRIVE-CLiQ motor with motor holding brake. 2: Brake was accidentally assigned to the spindle (p1215 = 1); this is not permitted. 3: An attempt was made to enable the function "Safe brake control" (SBC, p9602 = p9802 = 1) for the spindle. This is not permitted. Remedy: Check whether the motor holding brake has been assigned to one S120 Combi feed drive exclusively (p1215 = 1 or 2) and not the spindle. The fault will only be withdrawn once the motor holding brake has been assigned to just one of the S120 Combi feed drives and not the spindle (p1215 = 1 or 2 for this one drive). From this point, the motor holding brake will be controlled by this drive. See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07935 (N) Drive: Incorrect motor holding brake configuration Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An incorrect motor holding brake configuration was detected. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: A motor holding brake was detected where the brake control has not been configured (p1215 = 0). The brake control configuration was set to "motor holding brake the same as sequence control" (p1215 = 1) (only when commissioning for the first time). For a chassis unit with Safe Brake Adapter (SBA), the interconnection p9621 = r9872.3 was established (only when commissioning for the first time). For a parallel connection, the power unit was set in p7015, to which the motor holding brake is connected (only when commissioning for the first time). 1: A motor holding brake was detected where the brake control has not been configured (p1215 = 0). The brake control configuration was left at "No motor holding brake available" (p1215 = 0). 11: The identification had detected more than one motor holding brake for a parallel connection. 12: For the parallel connection, in p0121 there is no valid component number for the power unit data set that is set in p7015. 13: With the "Safe brake control" (SBC) function activated, an attempt was made to change the value in p7015. 14: For a parallel connection, the power units set in p7015 cannot be addressed. Remedy: For fault value = 0: - No remedy required. For fault value = 1: - If required change the motor holding brake configuration (p1215 = 1, 2). - If this fault value unexpectedly occurs, then the motor connections should be checked in order to rule out that they have been interchanged. For fault value = 11: For a parallel connection, only connect one motor holding brake. 3-1396 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For fault value = 12: Check the setting of the power unit data set for a parallel connection (p7015). For fault value = 13: Before changing p7015, deactivate the "Safe brake control" function (SBC) (p9602). For fault value = 14: Check whether the power unit supports the brake control for a parallel connection (r9771.14). Check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the power unit involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07937 (N) Drive: Speed deviation between motor model and external speed Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The absolute value of the speed difference from the two actual values (r2169, r1443) exceeds the tolerance threshold (p3236) for longer than permitted (p3238). Possible causes: - the interconnection or scaling of the external encoder signal is incorrect (p1440, p2000). - speed encoder for external encoder signal faulty. - encoder signal's polarity or gain incorrect. - smoothing time constant for model speed for monitoring too high (p2157). - smoothing time constant or threshold values for monitoring too low (p3236, p3238). See also: p2149 (Monitoring configuration) Remedy: - check that the external speed matches the motor speed (p1440, r1443). - check the polarity of the external speed (r1443). - check the interconnection of the connector input and the scaling of the signal (p1440, p2000). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F07940 Sync-line-drive: Synchronizing error Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: After synchronization has been completed, the phase difference (r3808) is greater than the threshold value, phase synchronism (p3813). OFF1 or OFF3 response, while the closed-loop phase control is active (r3819.6 = 1) or synchronism reached (r3819.2 = 1). Enable signal withdrawn (p3802 = 0), while the closed-loop phase control was active (r3819.6 = 1). Remedy: If required increase the threshold value phase synchronism (p3813) for synchronizing the line supply to the drive. Before OFF1 or OFF3, complete synchronizing (r03819.0 = 0). Before withdrawing the enable signal (p3802 = 0), reach synchronism (r3819.2 = 1). See also: p3813 (Sync-line-drive phase synchronism threshold value) A07941 Sync-line-drive: Target frequency not permissible Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The target frequency is outside the permissible value range. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1084: Target frequency greater than the positive speed limit, f_sync > f_max (r1084). 1087: Target frequency less than the negative speed limit, f_sync < f_min (r1087). Remedy: Fulfill the conditions for the target frequency for line-drive synchronization. See also: r1084 (Speed limit positive effective), r1087 (Speed limit negative effective) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1397 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07942 Sync-line-drive: Setpoint frequency is completely different than the target frequency Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: There is a considerable difference between the setpoint frequency and the target frequency (f_set <> f_target). The deviation that can be tolerated is set in p3806. Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears after the difference that can be tolerated between the setpoint and target frequencies (p3806) is reached. See also: p3806 (Sync-line-drive frequency difference threshold value) A07943 Sync-line-drive: Synchronization not permitted Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Synchronization is not permitted. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1300: The control mode (p1300) has not been set to encoderless closed-loop speed control or U/f characteristic. 1910: Motor data identification activated. 1960: Speed controller optimization activated. 1990: Encoder adjustment activated. 3801: Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) not found. 3845: Friction characteristic record activated. Remedy: Fulfill the conditions for the line-drive synchronization. Re alarm value = 1300: Set the control mode (p1300) to encoderless closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) or U/f characteristic (p1300 = 0 ... 19). Re alarm value = 1910: Exit the motor data identification routine (p1910). Re alarm value = 1960: Exit the speed controller optimization routine (p1960). Re alarm value = 1990: Exit the encoder adjustment (p1990). Re alarm value = 3801: Connect the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), assign it to the synchronizing drive (see p9910, p0151) and enter the drive object number of the synchronizing drive in p3801. When connecting the VSM to a neighboring drive object, ensure that the same current controller clock cycle p0115[0] exists as the one in the synchronizing drive. Re alarm value = 3845: Exit the friction characteristic record (p3845). F07950 (A) Drive: Incorrect motor parameter Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: - the motor parameters were incorrectly entered while commissioning (e.g. p0300 = 0, no motor) - The braking resistor (p6811) has still not been parameterized - commissioning cannot be completed. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number involved. The following motor parameters can be incorrect for fault value 307: p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309 See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323 Remedy: Compare the motor data with the rating plate data and if required, correct. See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323 Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1398 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07955 Drive: Motor has been changed Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The code number of the actual motor with DRIVE-CLiQ does not match the saved number. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of the incorrect parameter. See also: p0301 (Motor code number selection), r0302 (Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ) Remedy: Connect the original motor, power up the Control Unit again (POWER ON) and exit quick commissioning with p0010 = 0. Or set p0300 = 10000 (load the parameters from the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ) and re-commission. Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) is automatically exited with p3900 > 0. If quick commissioning was exited with p0010 = 0, then an automatic controller calculation (p0340 = 1) is not carried out. F07956 (A) Drive: Motor code does not match the list (catalog) motor Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The motor code of the connected motor with DRIVE-CLiQ does not match the possible list motor types (see selection in p0300). The connected motor with DRIVE-CLiQ might not be supported by this firmware version. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Motor code of the connected motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. Note: The first three digits of the motor code generally correspond to the list motor type. Remedy: Use a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ and the matching motor code. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A07960 Drive: Incorrect friction characteristic Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The friction characteristic is incorrect. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1538: The friction torque is greater than the maximum from the upper effective torque limit (p1538) and zero. This is the reason that the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is limited to this value. 1539: The friction torque is less than the minimum from the lower effective torque limit (p1539) and zero. This is the reason that the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is limited to this value. 3820 ... 3829: Incorrect parameter number. The speeds entered in the parameters for the friction characteristic do not correspond to the following condition: 0.0 < p3820 < p3821 < ... < p3829 <= p0322 or p1082, if p0322 = 0 Therefore the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is set to zero. 3830 ... 3839: Incorrect parameter number. The torques entered in the parameters for the friction characteristic do not correspond to the following condition: 0 <= p3830, p3831 ... p3839 <= p0333 Therefore the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is set to zero. See also: r3840 (Friction characteristic, status word) Remedy: Fulfill the conditions for the friction characteristic. Re alarm value = 1538: Check the upper effective torque limit (e.g. in the field weakening range). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1399 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re alarm value = 1539: Check the lower effective torque limit (e.g. in the field weakening range). Re alarm value = 3820 ... 3839: Fulfill the conditions to set the parameters of the friction characteristic. If the motor data (e.g. the maximum speed p0322) are changed during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 3), then the technological limits and threshold values, dependent on this, must be re-calculated by selecting p0340= 5). A07961 Drive: Friction characteristic record activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The automatic friction characteristic record is activated. The friction characteristic is recorded at the next power-on command. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm disappears automatically after the friction characteristic record has been successfully completed or the record is de-activated (p3845 = 0). F07963 Drive: Friction characteristic record interrupted Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The conditions to record the friction characteristic are not fulfilled. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0046: Missing enable signals (r0046). 1082: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (p1082). 1084: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (r1084, p1083, p1085). 1087: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (r1087, p1086, p1088). 1110: Friction characteristic record, negative direction selected (p3845) and negative direction inhibited (p1110). 1111: Friction characteristic record, positive direction selected (p3845) and positive direction inhibited (p1111). 1198: Friction characteristic record selected (p3845 > 0) and negative (p1110) and positive directions (p1111) inhibited (r1198). 1300: The control mode (p1300) has not been set to closed-loop speed control. 1755: For encoderless closed-loop control (p1300 = 20), the lowest speed value to be approached (p3820) is less than or equal to the changeover speed, open-loop controlled operation (p1755). 1910: Motor data identification activated. 1960: Speed controller optimization activated. 3820 ... 3829: Speed (p382x) cannot be approached. 3840: Friction characteristic incorrect. 3845: Friction characteristic record de-selected. Remedy: Fulfill the conditions to record the friction characteristic. Re fault value = 0046: - establish missing enable signals. Re fault value = 1082, 1084, 1087: - Select the highest speed value to be approached (p3829) less than or equal to the maximum speed (p1082, r1084, r1087). - Re-calculate the speed points along the friction characteristic (p0340 = 5). For fault value = 1110: - Select the friction characteristic record, positive direction (p3845). For fault value = 1111: - Select the friction characteristic record, negative direction (p3845). For fault value = 1198: - Enable the permitted direction (p1110, p1111, r1198). For fault value = 1300: - Set the control mode (p1300) on the closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21). For fault value = 1755: - For encoderless closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) select the lowest speed value to be approached (p3820) greater than the changeover speed of open-loop controlled operation (p1755). - Re-calculate the speed points along the friction characteristic (p0340 = 5). 3-1400 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For fault value = 1910: - Exit the motor data identification routine (p1910). For fault value = 1960: - Exit the speed controller optimization routine (p1960). Re fault value 3820 ... 3829: - check the load at speed p382x. - check the speed signal (r0063) for oscillation at speed p382x. Check the settings of the speed controller if applicable. For fault value = 3840: - Make the friction characteristic error-free (p3820 ... p3829, p3830 ... p3839, p3840). For fault value = 3845: - Activate the friction characteristic record (p3845). F07967 Drive: Automatic encoder adjustment incorrect Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred during the automatic encoder adjustment or the pole position identification. Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. F07968 Drive: Lq-Ld measurement incorrect Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred during the Lq-Ld measurement. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low. 12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded. 15: Second harmonic too low. 16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique. 17: Abort due to pulse inhibit. Remedy: For fault value = 10: Check whether the motor is correctly connected. Replace the power unit involved. De-activate technique (p1909). For fault value = 12: Check whether motor data have been correctly entered. De-activate technique (p1909). For fault value = 16: De-activate technique (p1909). For fault value = 17: Repeat technique. F07969 Drive: Incorrect pole position identification Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred during the pole position identification routine. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Current controller limited 2: Motor shaft locked. 4: Encoder speed signal not plausible. 10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low. 11: Stage 2: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low. 12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded. 13: Stage 2: The maximum current was exceeded. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1401 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 14: Current difference to determine the +d axis too low. 15: Second harmonic too low. 16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique. 17: Abort due to pulse inhibit. 18: First harmonic too low. 20: Pole position identification requested with the motor shaft rotating and activated "flying restart" function. Remedy: For fault value = 1: Check whether the motor is correctly connected. Check whether motor data have been correctly entered. Replace the Motor Module involved. For fault value = 2: Open the motor holding brake (p1215 = 2) and bring the motor into a no-load condition. For fault value = 4: Check whether the encoder pulse number (p0408) and gearbox factor (p0432, p0433) are correct. Check whether the motor pole pair number is correct (p0314). For fault value = 10: When selecting p1980 = 4: Increase the value for p0325. When selecting p1980 = 1: Increase the value for p0329. Check whether the motor is correctly connected. Replace the Motor Module involved. For fault value = 11: Increase the value for p0329. Check whether the motor is correctly connected. Replace the Motor Module involved. For fault value = 12: When selecting p1980 = 4: Reduce the value for p0325. When selecting p1980 = 1: Reduce the value for p0329. Check whether motor data have been correctly entered. For fault value = 13: Reduce the value for p0329. Check whether motor data have been correctly entered. For fault value = 14: Increase the value for p0329. Motor not sufficiently anisotropic, change the technique (p1980 = 1 or 10). For fault value = 15: Increase the value for p0325. Motor not sufficiently anisotropic, change the technique (p1980 = 1 or 10). For fault value = 16: De-activate technique (p1982). For fault value = 17: Repeat technique. For fault value = 18: Increase the value for p0329. Saturation not sufficient, change the technique (p1980 = 10). For fault value = 20: Before carrying out a pole position identification routine ensure that the motor shaft is absolutely stationary (zero speed). F07970 Drive: Automatic encoder adjustment incorrect Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred during the automatic encoder adjustment. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Current controller limited 2: Motor shaft locked. 4: Encoder speed signal not plausible. 5: Deselect U/f (p1300) or deactivate encoder calibration (p1990). 10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low. 11: Stage 2: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low. 12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded. 3-1402 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 13: Stage 2: The maximum current was exceeded. 14: Current difference to determine the +d axis too low. 15: Second harmonic too low. 16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique. 17: Abort due to pulse inhibit. Remedy: For fault value = 1: Check whether the motor is correctly connected. Check whether motor data have been correctly entered. Replace the power unit involved. For fault value = 2: Open the motor holding brake (p1215 = 2) and bring the motor into a no-load condition. For fault value = 4: Check whether the speed actual value inversion is correct (p0410.0). Check whether the motor is correctly connected. Check whether the encoder pulse number (p0408) and gearbox factor (p0432, p0433) are correct. Check whether the motor pole pair number is correct (p0314). For fault value = 5: Deselect U/f (p1300) or deactivate encoder calibration (p1990). For fault value = 10: Increase the value for p0325. Check whether the motor is correctly connected. Replace the power unit involved. For fault value = 11: Increase the value for p0329. Check whether the motor is correctly connected. Replace the power unit involved. For fault value = 12: Reduce the value for p0325. Check whether motor data have been correctly entered. For fault value = 13: Reduce the value for p0329. Check whether motor data have been correctly entered. For fault value = 14: Increase the value for p0329. For fault value = 15: Increase the value for p0325. For fault value = 16: De-activate technique (p1982). For fault value = 17: Repeat technique. A07971 (N) Drive: Angular commutation offset determination activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The automatic determination of the angular commutation offset (encoder adjustment) is activated (p1990 = 1,3). The automatic determination is carried out at the next power-on command. See also: p1990 (Encoder adjustment, determine angular commutation offset) Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm automatically disappears after determination or for the setting p1990 = 0. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1403 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07975 (N) Drive: Travel to the zero mark - setpoint input expected Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The zero mark must be evaluated in order to adjust the encoder. It is expected that a speed or torque setpoint is entered. See also: p1990 (Encoder adjustment, determine angular commutation offset) Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm disappears once the zero mark has been detected. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A07976 Drive: Fine encoder calibration activated Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The alarm indicates the phases of the fine encoder calibration using an alarm value. Alarm value (interpret decimal): 1: Fine encoder calibration active. 2: Rotating measurement started (set the setpoint speed > 40 % rated motor speed) 3: Rotating measurement lies within the speed and torque range. 4: Rotating measurement successful: pulse inhibit can be initiated to accept the values. 5: Fine encoder calibration is calculated. 10: Speed too low, rotating measurement interrupted. 12: Torque too high, rotating measurement interrupted. See also: p1905 (Parameter tuning selection) Remedy: Re alarm value = 10: Increase the speed. Re alarm value = 12: Bring the drive into a no-load condition. A07980 Drive: Rotating measurement activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The rotating measurement (automatic speed controller optimization) is activated. The rotating measurement is carried out at the next power-on command. See also: p1960 (Rotating measurement selection) Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm disappears automatically after the speed controller optimization has been successfully completed or for the setting p1900 = 0. A07981 Drive: Enable signals for the rotating measurement missing Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The rotating measurement cannot be started due to missing enable signals. Remedy: - acknowledge faults that are present. - establish missing enable signals. See also: r0002, r0046 3-1404 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07982 Drive: Rotating measurement encoder test Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred during the encoder test. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition. 2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active. 3: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active. 4: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active. 5: The encoder does not supply a signal. 6: Incorrect polarity. 7: Incorrect pulse number. 8: Noise in the encoder signal or speed controller unstable. 9: Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) incorrectly connected. Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the motor parameters. - carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910). - if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %). For fault value = 2: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080). For fault value = 3: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101). For fault value = 4: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086). For fault value = 5: - check the encoder connection. If required, replace the encoder. For fault value = 6: - check the connection assignment of the encoder cable. Adapt the polarity (p0410). For fault value = 7: - adapt the pulse number (p0408). For fault value = 8: - check the encoder connection and encoder cable. It is possible that there is a problem associated with the ground connection. - reduce the dynamic response of the speed controller (p1460, p1462 and p1470, p1472). For fault value = 9: - check the connections of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Note: The encoder test can be switched out (disabled) using p1959.0. See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration) F07983 Drive: Rotating measurement saturation characteristic Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred while determining the saturation characteristic. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition. 2: The rotor flux did not reach a steady-state condition. 3: The adaptation circuit did not reach a steady-state condition. 4: The adaptation circuit was not enabled. 5: Field weakening active. 6: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active. 7: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active. 8: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active. 9: Several values of the determined saturation characteristic are not plausible. 10: Saturation characteristic could not be sensibly determined because load torque too high. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1405 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: For fault value = 1: - the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (p0341, p0342). De-select rotating measurement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, re-calculate the speed controller p0340 = 4 and repeat the measurement. Re fault value = 1 ... 2: - increase the measuring speed (p1961) and repeat the measurement. Re fault value = 1 ... 4: - check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3. - check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3. - carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910). - if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %). For fault value = 5: - the speed setpoint (p1961) is too high. Reduce the speed. For fault value = 6: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or minimum limiting (p1080). For fault value = 7: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101). For fault value = 8: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086). Re fault value = 9, 10: - the measurement was carried out at an operating point where the load torque is too high. Select a more suitable operating point, either by changing the speed setpoint (p1961) or by reducing the load torque. The load torque may not be varied while making measurements. Note: The saturation characteristic identification routine can be disabled using p1959.1. See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration) F07984 Drive: Speed controller optimization, moment of inertia Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred while identifying the moment of inertia. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition. 2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active. 3. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active. 4. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active. 5: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the minimum limiting is active. 6: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active. 7: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the maximum limiting is active. 8: The torque difference after the speed setpoint step is too low in order to be able to still reliably identify the moment of inertia. 9: Too few data to be able to reliably identify the moment of inertia. 10: After the setpoint step, the speed either changed too little or in the incorrect direction. 11: The identified moment of inertia is not plausible. Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3. - check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3. - carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910). - if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %). Re fault value = 2, 5: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080). Re fault value = 3, 6: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101). Re fault value = 4, 7: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086). For fault value = 8: - the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (refer to p0341, p0342). De-select rotating measurement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, re-calculate the speed controller p0340 = 4 and repeat the measurement. 3-1406 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For fault value = 9: - check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change, re-calculate (p0340 = 3 or 4). For fault value = 10: - check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3. Note: The moment of inertia identification routine can be disabled using p1959.2. See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration) F07985 Drive: Speed controller optimization (oscillation test) Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred during the vibration test. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition. 2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active. 3: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active. 4: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active. 5: Torque limits too low for a torque step. 6: No suitable speed controller setting was found. Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3. - check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3. - carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910). - if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %). For fault value = 2: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080). For fault value = 3: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101). For fault value = 4: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086). For fault value = 5: - increase the torque limits (e.g. p1520, p1521). For fault value = 6: - reduce the dynamic factor (p1967). - disable the vibration test (p1959.4 = 0) and repeat the rotating measurement. See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration) F07986 Drive: Rotating measurement ramp-function generator Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: During the rotating measurements, problems with the ramp-function generator occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The positive and negative directions are inhibited. Remedy: For fault value = 1: Enable the direction (p1110 or p1111). A07987 Drive: Rotating measurement, no encoder available Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: No encoder available. The rotating measurement was carried out without encoder. Remedy: Connect encoder or select p1960 = 1, 3. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1407 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F07988 Drive: Rotating measurement, no configuration selected Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When configuring the rotating measurement (p1959), no function was selected. Remedy: Select at least one function for automatic optimization of the speed controller (p1959). See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration) F07989 Drive: Rotating measurement leakage inductance (q-axis) Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An error has occurred while measuring the dynamic leakage inductance. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition. 2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active. 3: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active. 4: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active. 5: The 100% flux setpoint was not reached. 6: No Lq measurement possible because field weakening is active. 7: Speed actual value exceeds the maximum speed p1082 or 75% of the rated motor speed. 8: Speed actual value is below 2 % of the rated motor speed. Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the motor parameters. - carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910). - if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %). For fault value = 2: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080). For fault value = 3: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101). For fault value = 4: - adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086). For fault value = 5: - flux setpoint p1570 = 100 % and current setpoint p1610 = 0 % kept during the Lq measurement. For fault value = 6: - reduce the regenerative load so that the drive does not reach field weakening when accelerating. - reduce p1965 so that the q leakage inductance is recorded at lower speeds. For fault value = 7: - increase p1082 if this is technically permissible. - reduce p1965 so that the q leakage inductance is recorded at lower speeds. For fault value = 8: - reduce the load when motoring so that the drive is not braked. - increase p1965 so that the measurement may be taken at higher speeds. Note: The measurement of the q leakage inductance can be disabled using p1959.5. If only p1959.5 is set, then only this measurement is carried out if p1960 is set to 1, 2 and the drive is powered up. See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration) F07990 Drive: Incorrect motor data identification Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred during the identification routine. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Current limit value reached. 2: Identified stator resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn. 3-1408 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 3: Identified rotor resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn. Separately excited synchronous motors: damping resistance outside 1.0 ...15 % of Zn. 4: Identified stator reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 900 % of Zn. Separately excited synchronous motors: stator reactance outside 20 ...500 % of Zn. 5: Identified magnetizing reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 900 % of Zn. Separately excited synchronous motors: magnetizing reactance outside 20 ...500 % of Zn. 6: Identified rotor time constant lies outside the expected range 10 ms ... 5 s. Separately-excited synchronous motors: damping time constant outside of 5 ms ... 1 s. 7: Identified total leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 4 ... 100 % of Zn. 8: Identified stator leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn. Separately excited synchronous motors: stator leakage reactance outside 2 ...40 % of Zn. 9: Identified rotor leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn. Separately excited synchronous motors: damping leakage reactance outside 1.5 ...20 % of Zn. 10: Motor has been incorrectly connected. 11: Motor shaft rotates. 12: Ground fault detected. 20: Identified threshold voltage of the semiconductor devices lies outside the expected range 0 ... 10 V. 30: Current controller in voltage limiting. 40: At least one identification contains errors. The identified parameters are not saved to prevent inconsistencies. 50: The selected sampling time is too low for the motor identification (p0115[0]). Note: Percentage values are referred to the rated motor impedance: Zn = Vmot.nom / sqrt(3) / Imot,nom Remedy: Re fault value = 1 ... 40: - check whether motor data have been correctly entered in p0300, p0304 ... p0311. - is there an appropriate relationship between the motor power rating and that of the Motor Module? The ratio of the Motor Module to the rated motor current should not be less than 0.5 and not be greater than 4. - check configuration (star-delta). Re fault value = 11 in addition: - Deactivate oscillation monitoring (p1909.7 = 1). For fault value = 2: - for parallel circuits, check the motor winding system in p7003. If, for power units connected in parallel, a motor is specified with a single-winding system (p7003 = 0), although a multi-winding system is being used, then a large proportion of the stator resistance is interpreted as feeder cable resistance and entered in p0352. Re fault value = 4, 7: - check whether inductances are correctly set in p0233 and p0353. - check whether motor has been correctly connected (star-delta). - Set p1909.0 = 1. For fault value = 12: - check the power cable connections. - check the motor. - check the CT. For fault value = 50: - Perform a motor data identification with a higher sampling time, and after this, change to the required higher sampling time (p0115[0]). A07991 (N) Drive: Motor data identification activated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The motor data identification routine is activated. The motor data identification routine is carried out at the next power-on command. If rotating measurement is selected (see p1900, p1960), it will not be possible to save the parameter assignment. Once motor data identification has been completed or de-activated, the option to save the parameter assignment will be made available again. See also: p1910 (Motor data identification selection) Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm automatically disappears after the motor data identification routine has been successfully completed or for the setting p1900 = 0. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1409 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A07994 (F, N) Drive: motor data identification not performed Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The "vector control" mode has been selected and a motor data identification has still not been performed. The alarm is initiated when changing the drive data set (see r0051) in the following cases: - vector control is parameterized in the actual drive data set (p1300 >= 20). and - motor data identification has still not been performed in the actual drive data set (see r3925). Note: For SINAMICS G120, a check is made and an alarm is output also when exiting commissioning and when the system powers up. Remedy: - Perform motor data identification (see p1900). - If required, parameterize "U/f control" (p1300 < 20). - switch over to a drive data set, in which the conditions do not apply. Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F08000 (N, A) TB: +/-15 V power supply faulted Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: Terminal Board 30 detects an incorrect internal power supply voltage. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Error when testing the monitoring circuit. 1: Fault in normal operation. Remedy: - replace Terminal Board 30. - replace Control Unit. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F08010 (N, A) TB: Analog-digital converter Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The analog/digital converter on Terminal Board 30 has not supplied any converted data. Remedy: - check the power supply. - replace Terminal Board 30. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1410 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F08500 (A) COMM BOARD: Monitoring time configuration expired Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The monitoring time for the configuration has expired. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: The transfer time of the send configuration data has been exceeded. 1: The transfer time of the receive configuration data has been exceeded. Remedy: Check communications link. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F08501 (N, A) COMM BOARD: Setpoint timeout Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (OFF2) Vector: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The reception of setpoints from the COMM BOARD has been interrupted. - bus connection interrupted. - controller switched off. - controller set into the STOP state. - COMM BOARD defective. See also: p8840 (COMM BOARD monitoring time) Remedy: - Restore the bus connection and set the controller to RUN. - check the set monitoring time if the error persists. See also: p8840 (COMM BOARD monitoring time) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F08502 (A) COMM BOARD: Monitoring time sign-of-life expired Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The monitoring time for the sign-of-life counter has expired. The connection to the COMM BOARD was interrupted. Remedy: - check communications link. - check COMM BOARD. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A08504 (F) COMM BOARD: Internal cyclic data transfer error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The cyclic actual and/or setpoint values were not transferred within the specified times. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Check the parameterizing telegram (Ti, To, Tdp, etc.). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1411 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F08510 (A) COMM BOARD: Send configuration data invalid Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: COMM BOARD did not accept the send-configuration data. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Return value of the send-configuration data check. Remedy: Check the send configuration data. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A08511 (F) COMM BOARD: Receive configuration data invalid Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The drive unit did not accept the receive configuration data. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Return value of the receive configuration data check. 1: Connection established to more drive objects than configured in the device. The drive objects for process data exchange and their sequence are defined in p0978. 2: Too many PZD data words for output or input to a drive object. The number of possible PZD items in a drive object is determined by the number of indices in r2050/p2051 for PZD IF1, and in r8850/p8851 for PZD IF2. 3: Uneven number of bytes for input or output. 4: Setting data for synchronization not accepted. For more information, see A01902. 5: Cyclic operation not active. 17: CBE20 Shared Device: Configuration of the F-CPU has been changed. 223: Illegal clock synchronization for the PZD interface set in p8815[0]. 500: Illegal PROFIsafe configuration for the interface set in p8815[1]. 501: PROFIsafe parameter error (e.g. F_dest). 503: PROFIsafe connection is rejected as long as there is no isochronous connection (p8969). Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Check the receive configuration data. Re alarm value = 1, 2: - Check the list of the drive objects with process data exchange (p0978). With p0978[x] = 0, all of the following drive objects in the list are excluded from the process data exchange. Re alarm value = 2: - Check the number of data words for output and input to a drive object. Re alarm value = 17: - CBE20 Shared Device: Unplug/plug A-CPU. Re alarm value = 223, 500: - Check the setting in p8839 and p8815. - Ensure that only one PZD interface is operated in clock synchronism or with PROFIsafe. Re alarm value = 501: - Check the set PROFIsafe address (p9610). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY 3-1412 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A08520 (F) COMM BOARD: Non-cyclic channel error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The memory or the buffer status of the non-cyclic channel has an error. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 0: Error in the buffer status. 1: Error in the memory. Remedy: Check communications link. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A08526 (F) COMM BOARD: No cyclic connection Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: There is no cyclic connection to the control. Remedy: Establish the cyclic connection and activate the control with cyclic operation. For PROFINET, check the parameters "Name of Station" and "IP of Station" (r61000, r61001). If a CBE20 is inserted and PROFIBUS is to communicate via PZD Interface 1, then this must be parameterized using the STARTER commissioning tool or directly using p8839. Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A08530 (F) COMM BOARD: Message channel error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The memory or the buffer status of the message channel has an error. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 0: Error in the buffer status. 1: Error in the memory. Remedy: Check communications link. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A08550 PZD Interface Hardware assignment error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The assignment of the hardware to the PZD interface has been incorrectly parameterized. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Only one of the two indices is not equal to 99 (automatic). 2: Both PZD interfaces are assigned to the same hardware. 3: Assigned COMM BOARD missing. 4: CBC10 is assigned to interface 1. See also: p8839 (PZD interface hardware assignment) Remedy: Check the parameterization and if required, correct (p8839). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1413 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A08560 IE: Syntax error in configuration file Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A syntax error has been detected in the ASCII configuration file for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127). The saved configuration file has not been loaded. Note: IE: Industrial Ethernet Remedy: - Check the interface configuration (p8900 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8905 = 1). - Save the parameters for interface configuration (e.g. p8905 = 2) or - Reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software). See also: p8905 (IE Interface configuration) A08561 IE: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8905 = 1) for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127). The currently set configuration has not been activated. Possible causes: - IP address, subnet mask or default gateway is not correct - IP address or station name used twice in the network - station name contains invalid characters, etc. Note: IE: Industrial Ethernet See also: p8900 (IE Name of Station), p8901 (IE IP Address of Station), p8902 (IE Default Gateway of Station), p8903 (IE Subnet Mask of Station) Remedy: - Check the required interface configuration (p8900 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8905 = 1). or - Reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software). See also: p8905 (IE Interface configuration) A08562 PROFINET: Syntax error in configuration file Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A syntax error has been detected in the ASCII configuration file for the onboard PROFINET interface. The saved configuration file has not been loaded. Remedy: - Check the interface configuration (p8920 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8925 = 1). - Save the parameters for interface configuration (e.g. p8925 = 2). or - Reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software). See also: p8925 (PN interface configuration) A08563 PROFINET: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8925 = 1) for the onboard PROFINET interface. The currently set configuration has not been activated. Possible causes: - IP address, subnet mask or default gateway is not correct 3-1414 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - IP address or station name used twice in the network - station name contains invalid characters, etc. See also: p8920 (PN Name of Station), p8921 (PN IP address of station), p8922 (PN Default Gateway of Station), p8923 (PN Subnet Mask of Station) Remedy: - Check the required interface configuration (p8940 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8945 = 1). or - Reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software). See also: p8925 (PN interface configuration) A08564 CBE20: Syntax error in configuration file Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A syntax error has been detected in the ASCII configuration file for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). The saved configuration file has not been loaded. Remedy: - Check the CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8945 = 2). Note: The configuration is not applied until the next POWER ON! - reconfigure the CBE20 (e.g. using the STARTER commissioning software) See also: p8945 (CBE20 interface configuration) A08565 CBE20: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8945 = 1) for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20). The currently set configuration has not been activated. Possible causes: - IP address, subnet mask or default gateway is not correct - IP address or station name used twice in the network - station name contains invalid characters, etc. See also: p8940 (CBE20 Name of Station), p8941 (CBE20 IP Address of Station), p8942 (CBE20 Default Gateway of Station), p8943 (CBE20 Subnet Mask of Station), p8944 (CBE20 DHCP Mode) Remedy: Check the required interface configuration (p8940 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8945 = 1). See also: p8945 (CBE20 interface configuration) F08700 (A) CAN: Communications error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: OFF3 (NONE, OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A CAN communications error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: The error counter for the send telegrams has exceeded the BUS OFF value 255. The bus disables the CAN controller. - bus cable short circuit. - incorrect baud rate. - incorrect bit timing. 2: The master no longer interrogated the CAN node status longer than for its "life time". The "life time" is obtained from the "guard time" (p8604[0]) multiplied by the "life time factor" (p8604[1]). - bus cable interrupted. - bus cable not connected. - incorrect baud rate. - incorrect bit timing. - master fault. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1415 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: The fault response can be set as required using p8641. See also: p8604 (CAN node guarding), p8641 (CAN Abort Connection Option Code) Remedy: - check the bus cable - check the baud rate (p8622). - check the bit timing (p8623). - check the master. The CAN controller must be manually restarted with p8608 = 1 after the cause of the fault has been resolved! See also: p8608 (CAN Clear Bus Off Error), p8622 (CAN bit rate), p8623 (CAN Bit Timing selection) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F08701 CAN: NMT state change Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 Vector: OFF3 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "pre-operational" or after "stopped". Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "pre-operational". 2: CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "stopped". Note: In the NMT state "pre-operational", process data cannot be transferred and in the NMT state "stopped", no process data and no service data can be transferred. Remedy: Not necessary. Acknowledge the fault and continue operation. F08702 (A) CAN: RPDO Timeout Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF3 (NONE, OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The monitoring time of the CANopen RPDO telegram has expired because the bus connection was either interrupted or the CANopen Master was switched-off. See also: p8699 (CAN: RPDO monitoring time) Remedy: - check the bus cable - check the master. - If required, increase the monitoring time (p8699). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F08703 (A) CAN: Maximum number of drive objects exceeded Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF3 (NONE, OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The maximum number of 8 drive objects with the "CAN" function module was exceeded. Note: In the CANopen standard only a maximum of 8 drive objects are defined for each CANopen slave. Remedy: - New commissioning of maximum 8 drive objects with the "CAN" function module in the topology. - For the drive objects, if required, deselect the "CAN" function module (r0108.29). Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1416 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A08751 CAN: Telegram loss Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The CAN controller has lost a receive message (telegram). Remedy: Reduce the cycle times of the receive messages. A08752 CAN: Error counter for error passive exceeded Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The error counter for the send or receive telegrams has exceeded the value 127. Remedy: - check the bus cable - set a higher baud rate (p8622). - check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623). See also: p8622 (CAN bit rate), p8623 (CAN Bit Timing selection) A08753 CAN: Message buffer overflow Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A message buffer overflow. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Non-cyclic send buffer (SDO response buffer) overflow. 2: Non-cyclic receive buffer (SDO receive buffer) overflow. 3: Cyclic send buffer (PDO send buffer) overflow. Remedy: - check the bus cable. - set a higher baud rate (p8622). - check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623). Re alarm value = 2: - reduce the cycle times of the SDO receive messages. - SDO request from master only after SDO feedback for previous SDO request. See also: p8622 (CAN bit rate), p8623 (CAN Bit Timing selection) A08754 CAN: Incorrect communications mode Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the "operational" mode, an attempt was made to change parameters p8700 ... p8737. Remedy: Change to the "pre-operational" or "stopped" mode. A08755 CAN: Obj cannot be mapped Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The CANopen object is not provided for the Process Data Object (PDO) Mapping. Remedy: Use a CANopen object intended for the PDO mapping or enter 0. The following objects can be mapped in the Receive Process Data Object (RPDO) or Transmit Process Data Object (TPDO): - RPDO: 6040 hex, 6060 hex, 60FF hex, 6071 hex; 5800 hex - 580F hex; 5820 hex - 5827 hex (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1417 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - TPDO: 6041 hex, 6061 hex, 6063 hex, 6069 hex, 606B hex, 606C hex, 6074 hex; 5810 hex - 581F hex; 5830 hex - 5837 hex Only sub-index 0 of the specified objects can be mapped. Note: As long as A08755 is present, the COB-ID cannot be set to valid. A08756 CAN: Number of mapped bytes exceeded Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The number of bytes of the mapped objects exceeds the telegram size for net data. A max. of 8 bytes is permissible. Remedy: Map fewer objects or objects with a smaller data type. See also: p8710, p8711, p8712, p8713, p8714, p8715, p8716, p8717, p8730, p8731, p8732, p8733, p8734, p8735, p8736, p8737 A08757 CAN: Set COB-ID invalid Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For online operation, the appropriate COB-ID must be set invalid before mapping. Example: Mapping for RPDO 1 should be changed (p8710[0]). --> set p8700[0] = C00006E0 hex (invalid COB-ID) --> set p8710[0] as required. --> p8700[0] enter a valid COB-ID Remedy: Set the COB-ID to invalid. A08758 CAN: Number of PDO channels too low Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The number of PDO channels in p8740 has either been set to 0 or too low. See also: p8740 (CAN channel distribution) Remedy: The number of channels set in p8740 must be greater than or equal to the number of PDOs. There are 2 possibilities: Increase the number of channels in p8740 and confirm the selection using p8741. Reduce the number of PDOs by setting the COB-ID to invalid. See also: p8740 (CAN channel distribution), p8741 (CAN PDO configuration acknowledgement) A08759 CAN: PDO COB-ID already available Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An existing PDO COB-ID was allocated. Remedy: Select another PDO COB-ID. A08800 PROFIenergy energy-saving mode active Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The PROFIenergy energy-saving mode is active 3-1418 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Mode ID of the active PROFIenergy energy-saving mode. See also: r5600 (Pe energy saving mode ID) Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears when the energy-saving mode is exited. Note: After receiving the PROFIenergy command "End_Pause" via PROFINET, the energy-saving mode is exited. A08802 PROFIenergy not possible to switch off incremental encoder supply Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The incremental encoder is used for the closed-loop position control. This means that its power supply cannot be switched off during the PROFIenergy energy-saving mode, otherwise it would lose its position actual value. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Encoder number Remedy: The alarm automatically disappears when the energy-saving mode is exited. Note: After receiving the PROFIenergy command "End_Pause" via PROFINET, the energy-saving mode is exited. A13000 License not adequate Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: - for the drive unit, the options that require a license are being used but the licenses are not sufficient. - an error occurred when checking the existing licenses. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 0: The existing license is not sufficient. 1: An adequate license was not able to be determined as the memory card with the required licensing data was withdrawn in operation. 2: An adequate license was not able to be determined as there is no licensing data available on the memory card. 3: An adequate license was not able to be determined as there is a checksum error in the license key. 4: An internal error occurred when checking the license. Remedy: Re alarm value = 0: Additional licenses are required and these must be activated (p9920, p9921). Re alarm value = 1: With the system powered down, re-insert the memory card that matches the system. Re alarm value = 2: Enter and activate the license key (p9920, p9921). Re alarm value = 3: Compare the license key (p9920) entered with the license key on the certificate of license. Re-enter the license key and activate (p9920, p9921). Re alarm value = 4: - carry out a POWER ON. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. A13001 Error in license checksum Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When checking the checksum of the license key, an error was detected. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1419 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Compare the license key (p9920) entered with the license key on the certificate of license. Re-enter the license key and activate (p9920, p9921). F13009 Licensing OA application not licensed Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: At least one OA application which is under license does not have a license. Note: Refer to r4955 and p4955 for information about the installed OA applications. Remedy: - enter and activate the license key for OA applications under license (p9920, p9921). - if necessary, de-activate unlicensed OA applications (p4956). See also: p9920 (Licensing, enter license key), p9921 (Licensing, activate license key) F13010 Licensing function module not licensed Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: At least one function module which is under license does not have a license. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Bit x = 1: The corresponding function module does not have a license. Note: Refer to p0108 or r0108 for the assignment between the bit number and function module. Remedy: - enter and activate the license key for function modules under license (p9920, p9921). - if necessary, de-activate unlicensed function modules (p0108, r0108). See also: p9920 (Licensing, enter license key), p9921 (Licensing, activate license key) F13100 Know-how protection: Copy protection error Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The know-how protection with copy protection for the memory card is active. An error has occurred when checking the memory card. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: A memory card is not inserted. 2: An invalid memory card is inserted. 3: The memory card is being used in another Control Unit. 12: An invalid memory card is inserted (OEM input incorrect, p7769). 13: The memory card is being used in another Control Unit (OEM input incorrect, p7759). See also: p7765 (KHP memory card copy protection) Remedy: For fault value = 0: - Insert the correct memory card and carry out POWER ON. Re fault value = 2, 3, 12, 13: - contact the responsible OEM. - Deactivate copy protection (p7765) and acknowledge the fault (p3981). - Deactivate know-how protection (p7766-p7768) and acknowledge the fault (p3981). Note: In general, the copy protection can only be changed when know-how protection is deactivated. KHP: Know-How Protection See also: p3981 (Faults, acknowledge drive object), p7765 (KHP memory card copy protection) 3-1420 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F13101 Know-how protection: Copy protection cannot be activated Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An error occurred when attempting to activate the copy protection for the memory card. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: A memory card is not inserted. Note: KHP: Know-How Protection Remedy: - insert the memory card and carry out POWER ON. - Try to activate copy protection again (p7765). See also: p7765 (KHP memory card copy protection) F13102 Know-how protection: Consistency error of the protected data Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An error was identified when checking the consistency of the protected files. As a consequence, the project on the memory card cannot be run. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = object number, xxxx = fault cause xxxx = 1: A file has a checksum error. xxxx = 2: The files are not consistent with one another. Note: KHP: Know-How Protection Remedy: - Replace the project on the memory card. - Restore the factory setting and download again. F30001 Power unit: Overcurrent Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit has detected an overcurrent condition. - closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized. - motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame). - U/f operation: Up ramp set too low. - U/f operation: Rated motor current is significantly greater than that of the Motor Module. - infeed: High discharge and post-charging currents for voltage dip. - infeed: High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip. - infeed: Short-circuit currents at power-up due to the missing line reactor. - power cables are not correctly connected. - the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length. - power unit defective. - line phase interrupted. Additional causes for a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1): - a power unit has tripped (powered down) due to a ground fault. - the closed-loop circulating current control is either too slow or has been set too fast. Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary): Bit 0: Phase U. Bit 1: Phase V. Bit 2: Phase W. Bit 3: Overcurrent in the DC link. Note: Fault value = 0 means that the phase with overcurrent is not recognized (e.g. for blocksize device). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1421 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning. - check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta). - U/f operation: Increase up ramp. - U/f operation: Check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and Motor Module. - infeed: Check the line supply quality. - infeed: Reduce the motor load. - infeed: Check the correct connection of the line filter and the line commutating reactor. - check the power cable connections. - check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault. - check the length of the power cables. - replace power unit. - check the line supply phases. For a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies: - check the ground fault monitoring thresholds (p0287). - check the setting of the closed-loop circulating current control (p7036, p7037). F30002 Power unit: DC link voltage, overvoltage Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link. - motor regenerates too much energy. - device connection voltage too high. - when operating with a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), the phase assignment L1, L2, L3 at the VSM differs from the phase assignment at the power unit. - line phase interrupted. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): DC link voltage at the time of trip [0.1 V]. Remedy: - increase the ramp-down time - activate the DC link voltage controller - use a brake resistor or Active Line Module - increase the current limit of the infeed or use a larger module (for the Active Line Module) - check the device supply voltage - check and correct the phase assignment at the VSM and at the power unit - check the line supply phases. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage), p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration) F30002 Power unit: DC link voltage, overvoltage Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link. - motor regenerates too much energy. - device connection voltage too high. - when operating with a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), the phase assignment L1, L2, L3 at the VSM differs from the phase assignment at the power unit. - line phase interrupted. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): DC link voltage at the time of trip [0.1 V]. Remedy: - increase the ramp-down time - activate the DC link voltage controller - use a brake resistor or Active Line Module - increase the current limit of the infeed or use a larger module (for the Active Line Module) - check the device supply voltage - check and correct the phase assignment at the VSM and at the power unit - check the line supply phases. - set the rounding times (p1130, p1136). This is particularly recommended in U/f operation to relieve the DC link voltage controller with rapid ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage), p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration) 3-1422 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30003 Power unit: DC link voltage, undervoltage Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit has detected an undervoltage condition in the DC link. - line supply failure - line supply voltage below the permissible value. - line supply infeed failed or interrupted. - line phase interrupted. Note: The monitoring threshold for undervoltage in the DC link is indicated in r0296. Remedy: - check the line supply voltage - check the line supply infeed and observe the fault messages relating to it (if there are any) - check the line supply phases. - check the line supply voltage setting (p0210). - booksize units: check the setting of p0278. Note: The ready signal for the infeed (r0863) must be interconnected to the associated drive inputs (p0864). See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) F30004 Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The temperature of the power unit heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value. - insufficient cooling, fan failure. - overload. - ambient temperature too high. - pulse frequency too high. Fault value (r0949): Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 C]. Remedy: - check whether the fan is running. - check the fan elements. - check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range. - check the motor load. - reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency. Notice: This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05000 has been undershot. See also: p1800 (Pulse frequency setpoint) F30005 Power unit: Overload I2t Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit was overloaded (r0036 = 100 %). - the permissible rated power unit current was exceeded for an inadmissibly long time. - the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): I2t [100 % = 16384]. Remedy: - reduce the continuous load. - adapt the load duty cycle. - check the motor and power unit rated currents. See also: r0036 (Power unit overload I2t), r0206 (Rated power unit power), p0307 (Rated motor power) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1423 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30005 Power unit: Overload I2t Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit was overloaded (r0036 = 100 %). - the permissible rated power unit current was exceeded for an inadmissibly long time. - the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): I2t [100 % = 16384]. Remedy: - reduce the continuous load. - adapt the load duty cycle. - check the motor and power unit rated currents. - increase p0294 See also: r0036 (Power unit overload I2t), r0206 (Rated power unit power), p0307 (Rated motor power) F30006 Power unit: Thyristor Control Board Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The Thyristor Control Board (TCB) of the Basic Line Module signals a fault. - there is no line supply voltage. - the line contactor is not closed. - the line supply voltage is too low. - line supply frequency outside the permissible range (45 ... 66 Hz). - there is a DC link short-circuit. - there is a DC link short-circuit (during the pre-charging phase). - voltage supply for the Thyristor Control Board outside the nominal range (5 ... 18 V) and line voltage >30 V. - there is an internal fault in the Thyristor Control Board. Remedy: The faults must be saved in the Thyristor Control Board and must be acknowledged. To do this, the supply voltage of the Thyristor Control Board must be switched out for at least 10 s! - check the line supply voltage - check or energize the line contactor. - check the monitoring time and, if required, increase (p0857). - if required, observe additional power unit messages/signals. - check the DC link regarding short-circuit or ground fault. - evaluate diagnostic LEDs for the Thyristor Control Board. F30008 Power unit: Sign-of-life error cyclic data Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The Control Unit has not punctually updated the cyclic setpoint telegram. The number of consecutive sign-of-life errors has exceeded the fault threshold (p7789). Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - for projects with the VECTOR drive object, check whether p0117 = 6 has been set on the Control Unit. - increase the fault threshold (p7789). See also: p0117 (Current controller computing dead time mode) 3-1424 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A30010 (F) Power unit: Sign-of-life error cyclic data Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred between the Control Unit and the power unit involved. The cyclic setpoint telegrams of the Control Unit were not received on time by the power unit for at least one clock cycle. Remedy: Check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F30011 Power unit: Line phase failure in main circuit Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: At the power unit, the DC link voltage ripple has exceeded the permissible limit value. Possible causes: - A line phase has failed. - The 3 line phases are inadmissibly unsymmetrical. - the fuse of a phase of a main circuit has ruptured. - A motor phase has failed. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check the main circuit fuses. - Check whether a single-phase load is distorting the line voltages. - check the motor feeder cables. F30012 Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink wire breakage Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The connection to a heat sink temperature sensor in the power unit is interrupted. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot) Bit 1: Air intake Bit 2: Inverter 1 Bit 3: Inverter 2 Bit 4: Inverter 3 Bit 5: Inverter 4 Bit 6: Inverter 5 Bit 7: Inverter 6 Bit 8: Rectifier 1 Bit 9: Rectifier 2 Remedy: Contact the manufacturer. F30013 Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink short-circuit Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The heat sink temperature sensor in the power unit is short-circuited. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1425 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot) Bit 1: Air intake Bit 2: Inverter 1 Bit 3: Inverter 2 Bit 4: Inverter 3 Bit 5: Inverter 4 Bit 6: Inverter 5 Bit 7: Inverter 6 Bit 8: Rectifier 1 Bit 9: Rectifier 2 Remedy: Contact the manufacturer. F30015 (N, A) Power unit: Phase failure motor cable Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A phase failure in the motor feeder cable was detected. The signal can also be output in the following cases: - The motor is correctly connected, but the drive has stalled in U/f control. In this case, a current of 0 A is possibly measured in one phase due to asymmetry of the currents. - the motor is correctly connected, however the closed-speed control is instable and therefore an oscillating torque is generated. Note: Chassis power units do not feature phase failure monitoring. Remedy: - check the motor feeder cables. - increase the ramp-up or ramp-down time (p1120) if the drive has stalled in U/f control. - check the speed controller settings. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A30016 (N) Power unit: Load supply switched out Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The DC link voltage is too low. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): DC link voltage at the time of trip [0.1 V]. Remedy: - switch on load supply. - check the line supply if necessary. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F30017 Power unit: Hardware current limit has responded too often Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The hardware current limitation in the relevant phase (see A30031, A30032, A30033) has responded too often. The number of times the limit has been exceeded depends on the design and type of power unit. For infeed units, the following applies: - closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized. - load on the infeed is too high. - Voltage Sensing Module incorrectly connected. 3-1426 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - line reactor missing or the incorrect type. - power unit defective. The following applies to Motor Modules: - closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized. - fault in the motor or in the power cables. - the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length. - motor load too high - power unit defective. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Phase U Bit 1: Phase V Bit 2: Phase W Remedy: For infeed units, the following applies: - check the controller settings and reset and identify the controller if necessary (p0340 = 2, p3410 = 5) - reduce the load and increase the DC-link capacitance or use a higher-rating infeed if necessary - check the connection of the optional Voltage Sensing Module - check the connection and technical data of the line reactor - check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault. - replace power unit. The following applies to Motor Modules: - check the motor data and if required, recalculate the controller parameters (p0340 = 3). As an alternative, run a motor data identification (p1910 = 1, p1960 = 1). - check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta). - check the motor load. - check the power cable connections. - check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault. - check the length of the power cables. - replace power unit. F30020 Power unit: Configuration not supported Message value: fault cause: %1, additional information: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A configuration is requested that is not supported by the power unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: xxxx = fault cause, yyyy = additional information (siemensintern) xxxx = 0: Autonomous operation is requested but is not supported. xxxx = 1: The requested DRIVE-CLiQ timing is not permissible. xxxx = 2: A PM260 has been detected with PS-ASIC version 2. This combination is not supported. xxxx = 3: Initialization was not able to be successfully completed. It is possible that the Control Unit was withdrawn from the power module before or during power-up. xxxx = 4: The combination of power unit and Control Unit or Control Unit Adapter is not supported. xxxx = 5: The higher current controller dynamic performance is not supported. Remedy: Re fault cause = 0: If required, deactivate an active internal voltage protection (p1231). Re fault cause = 1: Update the Control Unit firmware or change the DRIVE-CLiQ topology. Re fault cause = 2: Replace the power unit with a PM260 with PS-ASIC version 3 (or higher). Re fault cause = 3, 4: Insert a Control Unit or Control Unit Adapter (CUAxx) on an appropriate Power Module and perform a POWER ON for the Control Unit or the Control Units Adapter. Re fault cause = 5: - use a booksize format power unit. - for a Double Motor Module operate the two drive controls with the same current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). Otherwise, the higher current controller dynamics can only be activated on the drive with the longer sampling time. - If required, de-select the higher current controller dynamic performance (p1810.11 = 0). After deselecting the computing dead time, recalculate the controller gains (p0340 = 4). If required, optimize the speed controller. See also: p0115, p1231, p1810 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1427 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30021 Power unit: Ground fault Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Power unit has detected a ground fault. - ground fault in the power cables. - winding fault or ground fault at the motor. - CT defective. Additional cause for CU310/CUA31: - when the brake is applied, this causes the hardware DC current monitoring to respond. Additional cause for parallel switching devices (r0108.15 = 1): - the closed-loop circulating current control is either too slow or has been set too fast. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Absolute value, total current amplitude [20479 = r0209 x 1.4142]. Note: For power units, a ground fault is also emulated in r3113.5. Remedy: - check the power cable connections. - check the motor. - check the CT. The following applies additionally for CU310/CUA31: - check the cables and contacts of the brake connection (a wire is possibly broken). For parallel switching devices (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies: - check the ground fault monitoring thresholds (p0287). - check the setting of the closed-loop circulating current control (p7036, p7037). See also: p0287 (Ground fault monitoring thresholds) F30022 Power unit: Monitoring U_ce Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: In the power unit, the monitoring of the collector-emitter voltage (U_ce) of the semiconductor has responded. Possible causes: - fiber-optic cable interrupted. - power supply of the IGBT gating module missing. - short-circuit at the power unit output. - defective semiconductor in the power unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Short-circuit in phase U Bit 1: Short circuit in phase V Bit 2: Short-circuit in phase W Bit 3: Light transmitter enable defective Bit 4: U_ce group fault signal interrupted See also: r0949 (Fault value) Remedy: - check the fiber-optic cable and if required, replace. - check the power supply of the IGBT gating module (24 V). - check the power cable connections. - select the defective semiconductor and replace. F30024 Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The temperature difference between the heat sink and chip has exceeded the permissible limit value. - the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained. - insufficient cooling, fan failure. - overload. 3-1428 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - ambient temperature too high. - pulse frequency too high. See also: r0037 Remedy: - adapt the load duty cycle. - check whether the fan is running. - check the fan elements. - check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range. - check the motor load. - reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency. F30024 Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The temperature difference between the heat sink and chip has exceeded the permissible limit value. - the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained. - insufficient cooling, fan failure. - overload. - ambient temperature too high. - pulse frequency too high. See also: r0037 Remedy: - adapt the load duty cycle. - check whether the fan is running. - check the fan elements. - check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range. - check the motor load. - reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency. - if DC braking is active: reduce braking current (p1232). F30025 Power unit: Chip overtemperature Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The chip temperature of the semiconductor has exceeded the permissible limit value. - the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained. - insufficient cooling, fan failure. - overload. - ambient temperature too high. - pulse frequency too high. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature difference between the heat sink and chip [0.01 C]. Remedy: - adapt the load duty cycle. - check whether the fan is running. - check the fan elements. - check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range. - check the motor load. - reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency. Notice: This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05001 has been undershot. See also: r0037 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1429 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30027 Power unit: Precharging DC link time monitoring Message value: Enable signals: %1, Status: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit DC link was not able to be pre-charged within the expected time. 1) There is no line supply voltage connected. 2) The line contactor/line side switch has not been closed. 3) The line supply voltage is too low. 4) Line supply voltage incorrectly set (p0210). 5) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as there were too many pre-charging operations per time unit. 6) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as the DC link capacitance is too high. 7) The pre-charging resistors are overheated because when there is no "ready for operation" (r0863.0) of the infeed unit, power is taken from the DC link. 8) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as the line contactor was closed during the DC link fast discharge through the Braking Module. 9) The DC link has either a ground fault or a short-circuit. 10) The pre-charging circuit is possibly defective (only for chassis units). 11) Infeed is defective and/or fuse has ruptured in the Motor Module (only Booksize units). Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = power unit state 0: Fault status (wait for OFF and fault acknowledgement). 1: Restart inhibit (wait for OFF). 2: Overvoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state. 3: Undervoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state. 4: Wait for bridging contactor to open -> change into the fault state. 5: Wait for bridging contactor to open -> change into restart inhibit. 6: Commissioning. 7: Ready for pre-charging. 8: Pre-charging started, DC link voltage less than the minimum switch-on voltage. 9: Pre-charging, DC link voltage end of pre-charging still not detected. 10: Wait for the end of the de-bounce time of the main contactor after pre-charging has been completed. 11: Pre-charging completed, ready for pulse enable. 12: It was detected that the STO terminal was energized at the power unit. xxxx = Missing internal enable signals, power unit (inverted bit-coded, FFFF hex -> all internal enable signals available) Bit 0: Power supply of the IGBT gating shut down. Bit 1: Ground fault detected. Bit 2: Peak current intervention. Bit 3: I2t exceeded. Bit 4. Thermal model overtemperature calculated. Bit 5: (heat sink, gating module, power unit) overtemperature measured. Bit 6: Reserved. Bit 7: Overvoltage detected. Bit 8: Power unit has completed pre-charging, ready for pulse enable. Bit 9: STO terminal missing. Bit 10: Overcurrent detected. Bit 11: Armature short-circuit active. Bit 12: DRIVE-CLiQ fault active. Bit 13: Vce fault detected, transistor de-saturated due to overcurrent/short-circuit. Bit 14: Undervoltage detected. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) Remedy: In general: - check the line supply voltage at the input terminals. - check the line supply voltage setting (p0210). For booksize drive units, the following applies: - wait (approx. 8 minutes) until the pre-charging resistors have cooled down. For this purpose, preferably disconnect the infeed unit from the line supply. Re 5): - carefully observe the permissible pre-charging frequency (refer to the appropriate Equipment Manual). 3-1430 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re 6): - check the total capacitance of the DC link and reduce in accordance with the maximum permissible DC-link capacitance if necessary (refer to the appropriate Equipment Manual) Re 7): - interconnect the ready-for-operation signal from the infeed unit (r0863.0) in the enable logic of the drives connected to this DC link Re 8): - check the connections of the external line contactor. The line contactor must be open during DC-link fast discharge. Re 9): - check the DC link for ground faults or short circuits. Re 11): - Check the DC link voltage of the infeed (r0070) and Motor Modules (r0070). If the DC link voltage generated by the infeed (or external) is not displayed for the Motor Modules (r0070), then a fuse has ruptured in the Motor Module. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) A30031 Power unit: Hardware current limiting, phase U Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Hardware current limit for phase U responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period. - closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized. - fault in the motor or in the power cables. - the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length. - motor load too high - power unit defective. Note: Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds. Remedy: - check the motor data and if required, recalculate the control parameters (p0340 = 3). As an alternative, run a motor data identification (p1910 = 1, p1960 = 1). - check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta). - check the motor load. - check the power cable connections. - check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault. - check the length of the power cables. A30032 Power unit: Hardware current limiting, phase V Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Hardware current limit for phase V responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period. - closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized. - fault in the motor or in the power cables. - the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length. - motor load too high - power unit defective. Note: Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds. Remedy: Check the motor data and if required, recalculate the control parameters (p0340 = 3). As an alternative, run a motor data identification (p1910 = 1, p1960 = 1). - check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta). - check the motor load. - check the power cable connections. - check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault. - check the length of the power cables. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1431 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A30033 Power unit: Hardware current limiting, phase W Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Hardware current limit for phase W responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period. - closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized. - fault in the motor or in the power cables. - the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length. - motor load too high - power unit defective. Note: Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds. Remedy: - check the motor data and if required, recalculate the control parameters (p0340 = 3). As an alternative, run a motor data identification (p1910 = 1, p1960 = 1). - check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta). - check the motor load. - check the power cable connections. - check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault. - check the length of the power cables. A30034 Power unit: Internal overtemperature Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The alarm threshold for internal overtemperature has been reached. If the temperature inside the unit continues to increase, fault F30036 may be triggered. - ambient temperature might be too high. - insufficient cooling, fan failure. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check the ambient temperature. - check the fan for the inside of the unit. F30035 Power unit: Air intake overtemperature Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The air intake in the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit. For air-cooled power units, the temperature limit is at 55 C. - ambient temperature too high. - insufficient cooling, fan failure. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature [0.01 C]. Remedy: - check whether the fan is running. - check the fan elements. - check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range. Notice: This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05002 has been undershot. 3-1432 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30036 Power unit: Internal overtemperature Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The temperature inside the drive converter has exceeded the permissible temperature limit. - insufficient cooling, fan failure. - overload. - ambient temperature too high. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check whether the fan is running. - check the fan elements. - check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range. Notice: This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been fallen below. F30037 Power unit: Rectifier overtemperature Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The temperature in the rectifier of the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit. - insufficient cooling, fan failure. - overload. - ambient temperature too high. - line supply phase failure. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature [0.01 C]. Remedy: - check whether the fan is running. - check the fan elements. - check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range. - check the motor load. - check the line supply phases. Notice: This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05004 has been undershot. A30038 Power unit: Capacitor fan monitoring Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The capacitor fan signals a fault. Remedy: Replace the capacitor fan in the power unit. F30039 Power unit: Failure capacitor fan Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF1 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The capacitor fan has failed. Remedy: Replace the capacitor fan in the power unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1433 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30040 Power unit: Undervolt 24 V Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: Failure of the 24 V power supply for the power unit. - The undervoltage threshold was undershot for longer than 3 ms. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 24 V voltage [0.1 V]. Remedy: - Check the power supply of the power unit. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component. A30041 (F) Power unit: Undervoltage 24 V alarm Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the power unit power supply, the lower threshold has been violated. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - Check the power supply of the power unit. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A30041 (F) Power unit: Undervoltage 24 V alarm Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the power unit power supply, the lower threshold has been violated. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 24 V voltage [0.1 V]. Remedy: - Check the power supply of the power unit. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A30042 Power unit: Fan operating time reached or exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The maximum operating time of the fan in the power unit is set in p0252. This message indicates the following: Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: The maximum fan operating time is 500 hours. 1: The maximum fan operating time has been exceeded. Remedy: Replace the fan in the power unit and reset the operating hours counter to 0 (p0251 = 0). See also: p0251 (Operating hours counter power unit fan), p0252 (Maximum operating time power unit fan) 3-1434 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30043 Power unit: Overvolt 24 V Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: For the power unit power supply, the upper threshold has been violated. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 24 V voltage [0.1 V]. Remedy: Check the power supply of the power unit. A30044 (F) Power unit: Overvoltage 24 V alarm Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the power unit power supply, the upper threshold has been violated. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Check the power supply of the power unit. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A30044 (F) Power unit: Overvoltage 24 V alarm Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the power unit power supply, the upper threshold has been violated. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 24 V voltage [0.1 V]. Remedy: Check the power supply of the power unit. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F30045 Power unit: Supply undervoltage Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: Power supply fault in the power unit. - The voltage monitor signals an undervoltage fault on the module. The following applies for CU31x: - the voltage monitoring on the DAC board signals an undervoltage fault on the module. Remedy: - Check the power supply of the power unit. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component. - replace the module if necessary. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1435 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A30046 (F) Power unit: Undervoltage, alarm Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Before the last restart, a problem occurred at the power unit power supply. - the voltage monitor in the internal FPGA of the PSA signals an undervoltage fault on the module. Alarm value only for internal diagnostics Remedy: - check the 24 V DC voltage supply to power unit. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component. - replace the module if necessary. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A30046 (F) Power unit: Undervoltage, alarm Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Before the last restart, a problem occurred at the power unit power supply. - the voltage monitor in the internal FPGA of the PSA signals an undervoltage fault on the module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Register value of the voltage fault register. Remedy: - check the 24 V DC voltage supply to power unit. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component. - replace the module if necessary. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F30047 Cooling unit: Cooling medium flow rate too low Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The flowrate of the cooling unit has fallen below the fault threshold. Remedy: - Check the feedback signals and parameter assignment (p0260 ... p0267). - Check the coolant feed. A30048 Power unit: External fan faulty Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The feedback signal from the external fan indicates a fault. - fan faulty, blocked. - feedback signal inaccurate. Remedy: - check the external fan and replace if necessary. - if you are using an external fan with feedback, check its wiring (X12.2 or X13.2). Note: If you are using an external fan without feedback, check that the feedback terminal wiring on the power unit is connected to ground and make this connection if necessary (X12.1/2 or X13.1/2). 3-1436 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A30049 Power unit: Internal fan faulty Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The internal fan has failed. Remedy: Check the internal fan and replace if necessary. F30050 Power unit: 24 V supply overvoltage Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The voltage monitor signals an overvoltage fault on the module. Remedy: - check the 24 V power supply. - replace the module if necessary. F30052 EEPROM data error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: EEPROM data error of the power unit module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0, 2, 3, 4: The EEPROM data read in from the power unit module are incorrect. 1: EEPROM data is not compatible to the firmware of the power unit application. Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Re fault value = 0, 2, 3, 4: Replace the power unit module or update the EEPROM data. For fault value = 1: The following applies for CU31x and CUA31: Update the firmware \SIEMENS\SINAMICS\CODE\SAC\cu31xi.ufw (cua31.ufw) F30053 FPGA data faulty Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The FPGA data of the power unit are faulty. Remedy: Replace the power unit or update the FPGA data. A30054 (F) Power unit: Undervoltage when opening the brake Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When the brake is being opened, it is detected that the power supply voltage is less than 24 V - 10% = 21.6V. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Supply voltage fault [0.1 V]. Example: Alarm value = 195 --> voltage = 19.5 V Remedy: Check the 24 V voltage for stability and value. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1437 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F30055 Power unit: Braking chopper overcurrent Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An overcurrent condition has occurred in the braking chopper. Remedy: - check whether the braking resistor has a short circuit. - for an external braking resistor, check whether the resistor may have been dimensioned too small. Note: The braking chopper is only enabled again at pulse enable after the fault has been acknowledged. A30057 Power unit: Line asymmetry Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Frequencies have been detected on the DC link voltage that would suggest line asymmetry or failure of a line phase. It is also possible that a motor phase has failed. Fault F30011 is output if the alarm is present and at the latest after 5 minutes. The precise duration depends on the power unit type and the particular frequencies. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check the line phase connection. - check the motor feeder cable connections. If there is no phase failure of the line or motor, then line asymmetry is involved. - reduce the power in order to avoid fault F30011. F30059 Power unit: Internal fan faulty Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The internal power unit fan has failed and is possibly defective. Remedy: Check the internal fan and replace if necessary. F30060 (A) Pre-charge contactor state monitoring Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A feedback signal for the pre-charging contactor (ALM, SLM, BLM diode) or the line contactor (BLM thyristor) interconnected and the monitoring activated. After switching-in/switching-out the contactor, a correct feedback signal was not received within the monitoring time set in p0255[0]. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: The time set in p0255[0] was exceeded when switching-in/switching-out the contactor. Bit 1: The pre-charging contactor was opened while pre-charging or in the infeed mode (BLM thyristor). Bit 2: The pre-charging contactor was switched-in in the OFF state or during infeed operation. Remedy: - check the monitoring time setting (p0255[0]). - check the contactor wiring and activation. - replace the contactor. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1438 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30061 (A) Bridging contactor monitoring Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A feedback signal for the bypass contactor is interconnected and the monitoring activated. After switching-in/switching-out the contactor, a correct feedback signal was not received within the monitoring time set in p0255[1]. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: The time set in p0255[1] was exceeded when switching-in/switching-out the contactor. Bit 1: The bypass contactor was opened in operation. Bit 2: The bypass contactor was switched-in in the OFF state or during pre-charging. Remedy: - check the monitoring time setting (p0255[1]). - check the contactor wiring and activation. - replace the contactor. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F30070 Cycle requested by the power unit module not supported Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A cycle is requested that is not supported by the power unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 0: The current control cycle is not supported. 1: The DRIVE-CLiQ cycle is not supported. 2: Internal timing problem (clearance between RX and TX instants too low). 3: Internal timing problem (TX instant too early). Remedy: The power unit only supports the following cycles: 62.5 s, 125 s, 250 s and 500 s For fault value = 0: Set a permitted current control cycle. For fault value = 1: Set a permitted DRIVE-CLiQ cycle. Re fault value = 2, 3: Contact the manufacturer (you may have an incompatible firmware version). F30071 No new actual values received from the power unit module Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The number of actual value telegrams from the power unit module that have failed has exceeded the permissible number. Remedy: Check the interface (adjustment and locking) to the power unit module. F30072 Setpoints are no longer being transferred to the power unit Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The following applies for CU31x and CUA31: More than one setpoint telegram was not able to be transferred to the power unit module. Remedy: The following applies for CU31x and CUA31: Check the interface (adjustment and locking) to the power unit module. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1439 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A30073 (N) Actual value/setpoint preprocessing no longer synchronous Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Communication with the power unit module is no longer in synchronism with the current control cycle. Remedy: Wait until synchronization is re-established. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F30074 (A) Communication error between the Control Unit and Power Module Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Communications between the Control Unit (CU) and Power Module (PM) via the interface no longer possible. The CU may have been withdrawn or is incorrectly inserted. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 0 hex: The Control Unit was withdrawn from the Power Module during operation. 1 hex: The Control Unit was withdrawn from the Power Module during operation, although the encoderless safe motion monitoring functions are enabled. This is not supported. After re-inserting the Control Unit in operation, communications to the Power Module no longer possible. 20A hex: The Control Unit was inserted on a Power Module, which has another code number. 20B hex: The Control Unit was inserted on a Power Module, which although it has the same code number, has a different serial number. 601 hex: The Control Unit was inserted on a Power Module, whose power/performance class (chassis unit) is not supported. Remedy: Reinsert the Control Unit (CU) or the Control Unit adapter (CUAxx) onto the original Power Module and continue operation. If required, carry out a POWER ON for the CU and/or the CUA. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F30080 Power unit: Current increasing too quickly Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit has detected an excessive rate of rise in the overvoltage range. - closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized. - motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame). - U/f operation: Up ramp set too low. - U/f operation: rated current of motor much greater than that of power unit. - infeed: High discharge and post-charging currents for voltage dip. - infeed: High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip. - infeed: Short-circuit currents at power-up due to the missing line reactor. - power cables are not correctly connected. - power cables exceed the maximum permissible length. - power unit defective. Additional causes for a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1): - a power unit has tripped (powered down) due to a ground fault. - the closed-loop circulating current control is either too slow or has been set too fast. 3-1440 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary): Bit 0: Phase U. Bit 1: Phase V. Bit 2: Phase W. Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning. - check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta) - U/f operation: Increase up ramp. - U/f operation: Check assignment of rated currents of motor and power unit. - infeed: Check the line supply quality. - infeed: Reduce the motor load. - infeed: Correct connection of the line reactor. - check the power cable connections. - check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault. - check the length of the power cables. - replace power unit. For a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies: - check the ground fault monitoring thresholds (p0287). - check the setting of the closed-loop circulating current control (p7036, p7037). F30081 Power unit: Switching operations too frequent Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The power unit has executed too many switching operations for current limitation. - closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized. - motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame). - U/f operation: Up ramp set too low. - U/f operation: rated current of motor much greater than that of power unit. - infeed: High discharge and post-charging currents for voltage dip. - infeed: High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip. - infeed: Short-circuit currents at power-up due to the missing line reactor. - power cables are not correctly connected. - power cables exceed the maximum permissible length. - power unit defective. Additional causes for a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1): - a power unit has tripped (powered down) due to a ground fault. - the closed-loop circulating current control is either too slow or has been set too fast. Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary): Bit 0: Phase U. Bit 1: Phase V. Bit 2: Phase W. Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning. - check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta) - U/f operation: Increase up ramp. - U/f operation: Check assignment of rated currents of motor and power unit. - infeed: Check the line supply quality. - infeed: Reduce the motor load. - infeed: Correct connection of the line reactor. - check the power cable connections. - check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault. - check the length of the power cables. - replace power unit. For a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies: - check the ground fault monitoring thresholds (p0287). - check the setting of the closed-loop circulating current control (p7036, p7037). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1441 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30105 PU: Actual value sensing fault Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: At least one incorrect actual value channel was detected on the Power Stack Adapter (PSA). The incorrect actual value channels are displayed in the following diagnostic parameters. Remedy: Evaluate the diagnostic parameters. If the actual value channel is incorrect, check the components and if required, replace. F30314 Power unit: 24 V power supply overloaded by PM Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The 24 V power supply through the Power Module (PM) is overloaded. An external 24 V power supply via X124 on the Control Unit is not connected. Remedy: Connect an external 24 V power supply via X124 at the Control Unit. A30315 (F) Power unit: 24 V power supply overloaded by PM Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The 24 V power supply through the Power Module (PM) is overloaded. An external 24 V power supply via X124 on the Control Unit is not connected. Remedy: Connect an external 24 V power supply via X124 at the Control Unit. Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A30502 Power unit: DC link overvoltage Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link on a pulse inhibit. - device connection voltage too high. - line reactor incorrectly dimensioned. Alarm value (r0949, interpret decimal): DC link voltage [1 bit = 100 mV]. See also: r0070 (Actual DC link voltage) Remedy: - check the device supply voltage (p0210). - check the dimensioning of the line reactor. See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage) F30600 SI MM: STOP A initiated Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function integrated in the drive in the Motor Module (MM) has detected a fault and initiated STOP A (pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path of the Motor Module). - forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown path of the Motor Module unsuccessful. - subsequent response to fault F30611 (defect in a monitoring channel). 3-1442 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Stop request from the Control Unit. 1005: Pulses suppressed although STO not selected and there is no internal STOP A present. 1010: Pulses enabled although STO is selected or an internal STOP A is present. 1020: Internal software error in the "Internal voltage protection" function. The "internal voltage protection" function is withdrawn. A STOP A that cannot be acknowledged is initiated. 9999: Subsequent response to fault F30611. Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and de-select again. - replace the Motor Module involved. For fault value = 1020: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - replace the Motor Module. For fault value = 9999: - carry out diagnostics for fault F30611. Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill F30611 SI MM: Defect in a monitoring channel Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function integrated in the drive in the Motor Module (MM) has detected a fault in the crosswise data comparison between the Control Unit (CU) and MM and initiated a STOP F. As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9858), fault F30600 is output (SI MM: STOP A initiated). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Stop request from the Control Unit. 1 ... 999: Number of the cross-compared data that resulted in this fault. This number is also displayed in r9895. 1: SI monitoring clock cycle (r9780, r9880). 2: SI enable safety functions (p9601, p9801). Crosswise data comparison is only carried out for the supported bits. 3: SI SGE changeover tolerance time (p9650, p9850). 4: SI transition period STOP F to STOP A (p9658, p9858). 5: SI enable Safe Brake Control (p9602, p9802). 6: SI Motion enable, safety-relevant functions (p9501, internal value). 7: SI pulse suppression delay time for Safe Stop 1 (p9652, p9852). 8: SI PROFIsafe address (p9610, p9810). 9: SI debounce time for STO/SBC/SS1 (MM) (p9651, p9851). 10: SI delay time for pulse suppression for ESR (p9697, p9897). 11: SI Safe Brake Adapter mode, BICO interconnection (p9621, p9821). 12: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay ON time (p9622[0], p9822[0]). 13: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay OFF time (p9622[1], p9822[1]). 14: SI PROFIsafe telegram selection (p9611, p9811). 1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Within the time of approx. 5 x p9650, alternatively, the following was defined: - Too many switching operations have occurred at the EP terminal of the Motor Module. - Via PROFIsafe/TM54F, STO was too frequently initiated (also as subsequent response). - Safe pulse cancellation (r9723.9) was too frequently initiated (also as subsequent response). 1001, 1002: Initialization error, change timer / check timer. 1950: Module temperature outside the permissible temperature range. 1951: Module temperature not plausible. 2000: Status of the STO selection on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different. 2001: Feedback signal for safe pulse suppression on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different. 2002: Status of the delay timer SS1 on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different (status of the timer in p9650/p9850). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1443 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 6000 ... 6999: Error in the PROFIsafe control. For these fault values, the failsafe control signals (failsafe values) are transferred to the safety functions. The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711. Remedy: Re fault value = 1 ... 5 and 7 ... 999: - check the cross data comparison that resulted in a STOP F. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. For fault value = 6: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. For fault value = 1000: - check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) on the Control Unit (contact problems). - PROFIsafe: Remove contact problems/faults at the PROFIBUS master/PROFINET controller. - check the wiring of the failsafe inputs at the TM54F (contact problems). Re fault value = 1001, 1002: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. Re fault value = 2000, 2001, 2002: - check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650/p9850, p9652/p9852). - check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) (contact problems). - check the cause of the STO selection in r9772. When the SMM functions are active (p9501 = 1), STO can also be selected using these functions. - replace the Motor Module involved. Re fault value = 6000 ... 6999: Refer to the description of the message values in safety message C01711. Note: CU: Control Unit EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable) ESR: Extended Stop and Retract MM: Motor Module SGE: Safety-relevant input SI: Safety Integrated SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill N30620 (F, A) SI MM: Safe Torque Off active Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The function "Safe Torque Off" (STO) of the basic functions was selected on the Motor Module (MM) via the input terminal and is active. Note: - This message does not result in a safety stop response. - This message is not output when STO is selected using the Extended Functions. Remedy: Not necessary. Note: MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill Reaction upon F: OFF2 Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1444 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms N30621 (F, A) SI MM: Safe Stop 1 active Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The "Safe Stop 1" function (SS1) was selected on the Motor Module (MM) and is active. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. Remedy: Not necessary. Note: MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) Reaction upon F: Infeed: OFF2 Vector: NONE (OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F30625 SI MM: Sign-of-life error in safety data Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function integrated in the drive on the Motor Module (MM) has detected an error in the signof-life of the safety data between the Control Unit (CU) and MM and initiated a STOP A. - there is either a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error or communication has failed. - a time slice overflow of the safety software has occurred. - The enable of the safety functions in both monitoring channels is inconsistent (p9601 = 0, p9801 <> 0). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - select Safe Torque Off and de-select again. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. - de-select all drive functions that are not absolutely necessary. - reduce the number of drives. - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - Check the enable of the safety functions for both of the monitoring channels and if required, correct (p9601, p9801). Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F30630 SI MM: Brake control error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function integrated in the drive on the Motor Module (MM) has detected a brake control error and initiated a STOP A. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 10: Fault in "open holding brake" operation. - Parameter p1278 incorrectly set. - No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1 and p9602/p9802 = 0 (SBC deactivated)). - Ground fault in brake cable. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1445 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 30: Fault in "close holding brake" operation. - No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1 and p9602/p9802 = 0 (SBC deactivated)). - Short-circuit in brake winding. 40: Fault in "brake closed" state. 60, 70: Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between the Control Unit and Motor Module (brake control). 81: Safe Brake Adapter: Fault in "brake closed" state. 82: Safe Brake Adapter: Fault in "open brake" state. 83: Safe Brake Adapter: Fault in "close brake" state. 84,85: Safe Brake Adapter: Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between Control Unit and Motor Module (brake control). Note: The following causes may apply to fault values: - motor cable is not shielded correctly. - defect in control circuit of the Motor Module. Remedy: - check parameter p1278 (for SBC, only p1278 = 0 is permissible). - select Safe Torque Off and de-select again. - check the motor holding brake connection. - check the function of the motor holding brake. - check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified. - check that the electrical cabinet design and cable routing are in compliance with EMC regulations (e.g. shield of the motor cable and brake conductors are connected with the shield connecting plate and the motor connectors are tightly screwed to the housing). - replace the Motor Module involved. Operation with Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter: - check the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter connection. - Replace the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter. Note: MM: Motor Module SBC: Safe Brake Control SI: Safety Integrated F30631 Brake control: external release active Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For service purposes, the brake is supplied with voltage at terminal X4.1. Remedy: Remove the power supply at terminal X4.1. A30640 (F) SI MM: Fault in the shutdown path of the second channel Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Motor Module has detected a communication error with the higher-level control or the TM54F to transfer the safety-relevant information or there is a communication error between Motor Modules connected in parallel. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: For the higher-level control, the following applies: - check the PROFIsafe address in the higher-level control and Motor Modules and if required, align. - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. 3-1446 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For TM54F, carry out the following steps: - start the copy function for the node identifier (p9700 = 1D hex). - acknowledge hardware CRC (p9701 = EC hex). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. For a parallel connection, the following applies: - check the PROFIsafe address in the Control Unit and Motor Module and if required, align. - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. The following generally applies: - upgrade the Motor Module software. Note: MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9810 (SI PROFIsafe address (Motor Module)) Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) F30649 SI MM: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: An internal error in the Safety Integrated software on the Motor Module has occurred. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - re-commission the Safety Integrated function and carry out a POWER ON. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - contact the Hotline. - replace the Motor Module. Note: MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F30650 SI MM: Acceptance test required Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function on the Motor Module requires an acceptance test. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 130: Safety parameters for the Motor Module not available. Note: This fault value is always output when Safety Integrated is commissioned for the first time. 1000: Reference and actual checksum in the Motor Module are not identical (booting). - as a result of the changed current controller sampling time (p0115[0]), the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions (r9880) was adapted. - at least one checksum-checked piece of data is defective. - Safety parameters set offline and loaded into the Control Unit. 2000: Reference and actual checksum on the Motor Module are not identical (commissioning mode). - reference checksum incorrectly entered into the Motor Module (p9899 not equal to r9898). 2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed. 2005: The safety logbook has identified that the safety checksums have changed. An acceptance test is required. 3003: Acceptance test is required as a hardware-related safety parameter has been changed. 9999: Subsequent response of another safety-related fault that occurred when booting that requires an acceptance test. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1447 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: For fault value = 130: - carry out safety commissioning routine. For fault value = 1000: - check the Safety Integrated Basic Functions (r9880) and adapt the reference checksum (p9899). - again carry out safety commissioning routine. - replace the memory card or Control Unit. - Using STARTER, activate the safety parameters for the drive involved (change settings, copy parameters, activate settings). For fault value = 2000: - check the safety parameters in the Motor Module and adapt the reference checksum (p9899). Re fault value = 2003, 2005: - Carry out an acceptance test and generate an acceptance report. The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided in the following literature: SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Safety Integrated For fault value = 3003: - carry out the function checks for the modified hardware and generate an acceptance report. The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided in the following literature: SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Safety Integrated For fault value = 9999: - carry out diagnostics for the other safety-related fault that is present. Note: MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9799 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Control Unit)), p9899 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module)) F30651 SI MM: Synchronization with Control Unit unsuccessful Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function integrated in the drive is requesting synchronization of the safety time slices on the Control Unit and Motor Module. This synchronization routine was unsuccessful. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. Note: MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F30652 SI MM: Illegal monitoring clock cycle Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycle cannot be maintained due to the communication conditions requested in the system. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - if fault F01652 simultaneously occurs, apply the remedy/countermeasure described there. - Upgrade the firmware of the Motor Module to a later version. 3-1448 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F30655 SI MM: Align monitoring functions Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: An error has occurred when aligning the Safety Integrated monitoring functions on the Control Unit (CU) and Motor Module (MM). Control Unit and Motor Module were not able to determine a common set of supported SI monitoring functions. - there is either a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error or communication has failed. - Safety Integrated software releases on the Control Unit and Motor Module are not compatible with one another. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance Note: CU: Control Unit MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated F30656 SI MM: Motor Module parameter error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: When accessing the Safety Integrated parameters for the Motor Module (MM) in the non-volatile memory, an error has occurred. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 129: - safety parameters for the Motor Module corrupted. - drive with enabled safety functions was possibly copied offline using the commissioning software and the project downloaded. 131: Internal software error on the Control Unit. 255: Internal Motor Module software error. Remedy: - re-commission the safety functions. - upgrade the Control Unit software. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - replace the memory card or Control Unit. For fault value = 129: - activate the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 95). - adapt the PROFIsafe address (p9610). - start the copy function for SI parameters (p9700 = D0 hex). - acknowledge data change (p9701 = DC hex). - exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 0). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM"). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. Note: MM: Motor Module SI: Safety Integrated (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1449 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30657 SI CU: PROFIsafe telegram number invalid Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The PROFIsafe telegram number set in p9811 is not valid. When PROFIsafe is enabled (p9801.3 = 1), then a telegram number greater than zero must be entered in p9811. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. See also: p9611 (SI PROFIsafe telegram selection (Control Unit)), p60022 (PROFIsafe telegram selection) Remedy: Check the telegram number setting (p9811). F30659 SI MM: Write request for parameter rejected Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The write request for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on the Motor Module (MM) was rejected. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 10: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported. 11: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported. 13: An attempt was made to enable the SS1 function although this cannot be supported. 14: An attempt was made to enable the safe motion monitoring function with the higher-level control, although this cannot be supported. 15: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive although these cannot be supported. 16: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe communication - although this cannot be supported or the version of the PROFIsafe driver used on the CU and MM is different. 18: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function for Basic Functions although this cannot be supported. 19: For ESR, an attempt was made to enable the delay for pulse suppression, although this cannot be supported. 33: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions without selection integrated in the drive (p9601.5, p9801.5), although this cannot be supported. See also: r9771 (SI common functions (Control Unit)), r9871 (SI common functions (Motor Module) Remedy: Re fault value = 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19: - check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out diagnostics for the faults involved. - use a Motor Module that supports the required function. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. For fault value = 33: - Deselect motion monitoring functions without selection integrated in drive (p9601.5, p9801.5) and select safety functions that are supported (see p9771/p9871), or: - use a Motor Module that supports the required function. - upgrade the Motor Module software. - upgrade the Control Unit software. Note: CU: Control Unit ESR: Extended Stop and Retract MM: Motor Module SBC: Safe Brake Control SI: Safety Integrated SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill 3-1450 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30662 Error in internal communications Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: A module-internal communication error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. F30664 Error while booting Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, HUB, TB30, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An error has occurred during booting. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. F30665 SI MM: System is defective Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A system defect was detected before the last boot or in the actual one. The system might have been rebooted (reset). Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 200000 hex, 400000 hex: - Fault in the actual booting/operation. 2 hex: - parameters p9500 and p9300 are not the same (if Safety message C30711 is displayed at the same time). Additional values: - defect before the last time that the system booted. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. For fault value = 2: - check parameters p9500 and p9300 to see if they are the same (if Safety message C30711 is displayed at the same time). Re fault value = 400000 hex: - ensure that the Control Unit is connected to the Power Module. A30666 (F) SI Motion MM: Steady-state (static) 1 signal at the F-DI for safety-relevant acknowledgement Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A logical 1 signal is present at the F-DI configured in p10106 for more than 10 seconds. If, at the F-DI no acknowledgment was performed for safe acknowledgment, then a steady-state logical and 0 signal must be present. This avoids unintentional safety-relevant acknowledgement (or the "Internal Event Acknowledge" signal) if a wire breaks or one of the two digital inputs bounces. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1451 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Set the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) to a logical 0 signal (p10106). Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F30672 SI CU: Control Unit software incompatible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The existing Control Unit software does not support the safe drive-based motion monitoring function. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out diagnostics for the faults involved. - use a Control Unit that supports the safe motion monitoring function. - upgrade the Control Unit software. Note: SI: Safety Integrated F30674 SI Motion MM: Safety function not supported by PROFIsafe telegram Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The monitoring function enabled in p9301 and p9801 is not supported by the currently set PROFIsafe telegram (p9811). Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary): Bit 24 = 1: Transfer SLS (SG) limit value via PROFIsafe not supported (p9301.24). Bit 25 = 1: Transfer safe position via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9301.25). Remedy: - deselect the monitoring function involved (p9301, p9801). - set the matching PROFIsafe telegram (p9811). Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed SP: Safe Position F30680 SI Motion MM: Checksum error safety monitoring functions Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The actual checksum calculated by the Motor Module and entered in r9398 over the safety-relevant parameters does not match the reference checksum saved in p9399 at the last machine acceptance. Safety-relevant parameters have been changed or a fault is present. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Checksum error for SI parameters for motion monitoring. 1: Checksum error for SI parameters for component assignment. 3-1452 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - check the safety-relevant parameters and if required, correct. - set the reference checksum to the actual checksum. - execute the function "Copy RAM to ROM". - perform a POWER ON if safety parameters requiring a POWER ON have been modified. - carry out an acceptance test. F30681 SI Motion MM: Incorrect parameter value Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The parameter cannot be parameterized with this value. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter yyyy = 0: no additional information available. xxxx = 9301: It is not permissible to enable the function "n<nx hysteresis and filtering" (p9301.16) in conjunction with the function "extended functions without selection" (p9801.5). xxxx = 9385: For Safety encoderless and synchronous motor, p9385 must be set to 4. xxxx = 9801: yyyy = 1: If motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9801.2 = 1) and extended functions without selection (p9801.5 = 1) are activated, then PROFIsafe (p9801.3 = 1) is not possible. yyyy = 2: Extended functions without selection (p9801.5 =1) are enabled, without enabling motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9801.2). yyyy = 3: Onboard F-DI are enabled, without enabling motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9801.2). yyyy = 5: Transfer of the SLS limit value via PROFIsafe (p9301.24) has been enabled, without enabling PROFIsafe. yyyy = 6: Transfer of the safe position via PROFIsafe (p9301.25) has been enabled, without enabling PROFIsafe. Remedy: - correct the parameter (if required, also on the CU side, p9601). xxxx: parameter, yyyy: additional information. If the encoder parameters (p9526/p9326) have different values, start the copy function for SI parameters on the drive (p9700 = 57 hex). xxxx = 9301: - Correct parameters p9501.16 and p9301.16, or deselect the extended functions without selection (p9801.5). xxxx = 9317: Further, p9316.0 should be checked. xxxx = 9801: yyyy = 1: Only enable motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9801.2 = 1) and extended functions without selection (p9801.5 = 1) - or only PROFIsafe (p9801.3 = 1). yyyy = 2, 3: Enable motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9801.2 = 1). yyyy = 5: To transfer the SLS limit values via PROFIsafe (p9301.24 = 1), also enable PROFIsafe (p9801.3 =1) and motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9801.2 = 1). yyyy = 6: For the safe position via PROFIsafe (p9301.25 = 1), also enable PROFIsafe (p9801.3 =1) and motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9801.2 = 1). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1453 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30682 SI Motion MM: Monitoring function not supported Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The monitoring function enabled in p9301, p9501, p9601, p9801, p9307 or p9507 is not supported in this firmware version. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Monitoring function SLP not supported (p9301.1). 2: Monitoring function SCA not supported (p9301.7 and p9301.8 ... 15). 3: Monitoring function SLS override not supported (p9301.5). 4: Monitoring function external ESR activation not supported (p9301.4). 5: Monitoring function F-DI in PROFIsafe not supported (p9301.30). 6: Enable actual value synchronization not supported (p9301.3). 9: Monitoring function not supported by the firmware or enable bit not used. 12: This Control Unit does not support operation of safety functions with a higher-level control (e.g. SINUMERIK). 24: Monitoring function SDI not supported. 26: Hysteresis and filtering for SSM monitoring function without an encoder not supported (p9301.16). 27: This hardware does not support onboard F-DI and F-DO. 30: The firmware version of the Motor Module is older than the version of the Control Unit. 33: Safety functions without selection not supported (p9601.5, p9801.5). 34: This module does not support safe position via PROFIsafe. 36: Function "SS1 without OFF3" not supported. Remedy: - de-select the monitoring function involved (p9301, p9501, p9601, p9801, p9307, p9507). - Upgrade the Motor Module firmware. Note: ESR: Extended Stop and Retract SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SI: Safety Integrated SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed SP: Safe Position SS1: Safe Stop 1 See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module)), p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9503 (SI Motion SCA (SN) enable (Control Unit)), p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit)), p9801 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module)), r9871 (SI common functions (Motor Module) F30683 SI Motion MM: SOS/SLS enable missing Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The safety-relevant basic function "SOS/SLS" is not enabled in p9301 although other safety-relevant monitoring functions are enabled. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. Remedy: Enable the function "SOS/SLS" (p9301.0) and carry out a POWER ON. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module)) 3-1454 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30684 SI Motion MM: Safely limited position limit values interchanged Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SE), a lower value is in p9534 than in p9535. Note: This fault does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Limit values SLP1 interchanged. 2: Limit values SLP2 interchanged. Remedy: Correct the limit values in p9534 and p9535 and carry out a POWER ON. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches F30685 SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed limit value too high Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The limit value for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS) is greater than the speed that corresponds to an encoder limit frequency of 500 kHz. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Maximum permissible speed. Remedy: Correct the limit values for SLS and carry out a POWER ON. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed See also: p9331 (SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module)) F30688 SI Motion MM: Actual value synchronization not permissible Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: - It is not permissible to enable actual value synchronization for a 1-encoder system. - It is not permissible to simultaneously enable actual value synchronization and a monitoring function with absolute reference (SCA/SLP). - It is not permissible to simultaneously enable actual value synchronization and safe position via PROFIsafe. Note: This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged. Remedy: - Either select the "actual value synchronization" function or parameterize a 2-encoder system. - Either de-select the function "actual value synchronization" or the monitoring functions with absolute reference (SCA/SLP) and carry out a POWER ON. - Either deselect the "actual value synchronization" function or do not enable "Safe position via PROFIsafe". Note: SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam SI: Safety Integrated SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches SP: Safe Position See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9526 (SI Motion encoder assignment second channel) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1455 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30692 SI Motion MM: Parameter value not permitted for encoderless Message value: Parameter: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The parameter cannot be parameterized with this value if encoderless motion monitoring functions have been parameterized in p9306. Note: This message does not result in a safety stop response. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number with the incorrect value. See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module)) Remedy: Correct the parameter value or de-select encoderless motion monitoring functions. See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module)), p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)) A30693 (F) SI MM: Safety parameter settings changed, warm restart/POWER ON required Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Safety parameters have been changed; these will only take effect following a warm restart or POWER ON. Notice: All changed parameters of the safety motion monitoring functions will only take effect following a warm restart or POWER ON. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Parameter number of the safety parameter which has changed, necessitating a warm restart or POWER ON. Remedy: - carry out a warm restart (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2, 3). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. Note: Before performing an acceptance test, a POWER ON must be carried out for all components. Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: POWER ON C30700 SI Motion MM: STOP A initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP A (pulses are suppressed via the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit). Possible causes: - stop request from the Control Unit. - pulses not suppressed after a parameterized time (p9357) after test stop selection. - subsequent response to the message C30706 "SI Motion MM: SAM/SBR limit exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C30701 "SI Motion MM: STOP B initiated". - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C30716 "SI Motion MM: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". Remedy: - remove the cause to the fault on the Control Unit. - check the value in p9357, if required, increase the value. - check the shutdown path of the Control Unit (check DRIVE-CLiQ communication). - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30706. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30714. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30701. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30715. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30716. - replace the Motor Module/Power Module - replace Control Unit. This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe. 3-1456 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring) SI: Safety Integrated C30701 SI Motion MM: STOP B initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP B (braking along the OFF3 ramp). As a result of this fault, after the time parameterized in p9356 has expired or after the speed threshold parameterized in p9360 has been fallen below, message C30700 "SI Motion MM: STOP A initiated" is output. Possible causes: - stop request from the Control Unit. - subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C30711 "SI Motion MM: Defect in a monitoring channel". - subsequent response to the message C30707 "SI Motion MM: tolerance for safe operating stop exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C30716 "SI Motion MM: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". Remedy: - remove the cause to the fault on the Control Unit. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30714. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30711. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30707. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30715. - carry out a diagnostics routine for message C30716. This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe. Note: SI: Safety Integrated C30706 SI Motion MM: SAM/SBR limit exceeded Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: Motion monitoring functions with encoder (p9306 = 0) or encoderless with set acceleration monitoring (p9306 = 3): SAM - safe acceleration monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or STOP C (SS2), the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance. Motion monitoring functions encoderless with set brake ramp monitoring (p9306 = 1): SBR - Safe brake ramp monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or SLS changeover to the lower speed stage, the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance. - via F-DI or PROFIsafe. The drive is shut down by the message C30700 "SI Motion MM: STOP A initiated". Remedy: Check the braking behavior and, if necessary, adapt the tolerance for the "SAM" function or modify the parameter settings for the "SBR" function. This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows: - motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe ramp monitoring) SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9348, p9381, p9382, p9383, p9548 C30707 SI Motion MM: Tolerance for safe operating stop exceeded Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The actual position has distanced itself further from the target position than the standstill tolerance. The drive is shut down by the message C30701 "SI Motion MM: STOP B initiated". (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1457 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - check whether safety faults are present and if required carry out the appropriate diagnostic routines for the particular faults. - check whether the standstill tolerance matches the accuracy and control dynamic performance of the axis. This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop See also: p9530 (SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit)) C30708 SI Motion MM: STOP C initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: STOP2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP C (braking along the OFF3 ramp). "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized time has expired. Possible causes: - stop request from the higher-level control. - subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C30716 "SI Motion MM: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". See also: p9552 (SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit)) Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control. - carry out a diagnostics routine for messages C30714, C30715, C30716. This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop C30709 SI Motion MM: STOP D initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP D (braking along the path). "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized time has expired. Possible causes: - stop request from the Control Unit. - subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C30716 "SI Motion MM: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". See also: p9353 (SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (Motor Module)), p9553 (SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit)) Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control. - carry out a diagnostics routine for messages C30714, C30715, C30716. This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop C30710 SI Motion MM: STOP E initiated Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive is stopped via a STOP E (retraction motion). "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized time has expired. Possible causes: - stop request from the higher-level control. - subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded". 3-1458 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion CU: Safely-limited position exceeded". - subsequent response to the message C30716 "SI Motion MM: tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded". See also: p9354 (SI Motion transition time STOP E to SOS (Motor Module)), p9554 (SI Motion transition time STOP E to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit)) Remedy: - remove the cause of the fault at the control. - carry out a diagnostics routine for messages C30714, C30715, C30716. This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop C30711 SI Motion MM: Defect in a monitoring channel Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: When cross-comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between the input data or results of the monitoring functions and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible. If at least one monitoring function is active, then after the parameterized timer has expired, the message C30701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output. The message is output with message value 1031 when the Sensor Module hardware is replaced. The following message values may also occur in the following cases if the cause that is explicitly mentioned does not apply: - differently parameterized cycle times (p9500/p9300, p9511/p9311). - differently parameterized axis types (p9502/p9302). - excessively fast cycle times (p9500/p9300, p9511/p9311). - incorrect synchronization. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): Note: The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711 of the Control Unit. 0 ... 999: Number of the cross-compared data that resulted in this message. 1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Too many signal changes have occurred at safety-relevant inputs. 1001: Initialization error of watchdog timer. 1003: Reference tolerance exceeded. When the user agreement is set, the difference between the new reference point that has been determined after power up (absolute encoder) or reference point approach (distance-coded or incremental measuring system) and the safe actual position (saved value + traversing distance) is greater than the reference tolerance (p9344). In this case, the user agreement is withdrawn. 1011: Acceptance test status between the monitoring channels differ. 1012: Plausibility violation of the actual value from the encoder. 1020: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. cycles. 1021: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. channel and Sensor Module. 1023: Error in the effectiveness test in the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder 1030: Encoder fault detected from another monitoring channel. 1031: Data transfer error between the monitoring channel and the Sensor Module (p9526/p9326). 1040: Pulses suppressed with active encoderless monitoring functions. 1041: Current absolute value too low (encoderless) 1042: Current/voltage plausibility error 1043: Too many acceleration phases 1044: Actual current values plausibility error. 1045: CRC of the standstill position incorrect. 5000 ... 5140: PROFIsafe message values. For these fault values, the failsafe control signals (failsafe values) are transferred to the safety functions. 6000 ... 6166: PROFIsafe message values (PROFIsafe driver for PROFIBUS DP V1/V2 and PROFINET). For these fault values, the failsafe control signals (failsafe values) are transferred to the safety functions. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1459 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 7000 ... 7002: Message values of the "Safe position via PROFIsafe" function. See also: p9555 (SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Control Unit)), r9725 (SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F) Remedy: Re message value = 1002: - Perform safe acknowledgment, set the user agreement in both monitoring channels simultaneously (within 2 s). Re message value = 1003: - check the mechanical system of the axis. It is possible that the axis was shifted when switched-off, and the last saved actual position no longer corresponds with the new actual position after the system has been powered up again. - Increase the tolerance for the actual value comparison when referencing (p9344). Then check the actual values, perform a POWER ON and set the user agreement again. Re message value = 1004: For 1., the following applies: Perform safe acknowledgment. Set the user agreement again. For 2., the following applies: Perform safe acknowledgment. Only set the user agreement again if the axis has been referenced. Re message value = 1030: - check the encoder connection. - if required, replace the encoder. Re message value = 1031: When replacing a Sensor Module, carry out the following steps: - start the copy function for the node identifier on the drive (p9700 = 1D hex). - acknowledge the hardware CRC on the drive (p9701 = EC hex). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. The following always applies: - check the encoder connection. - if required, replace the encoder. Re message value = 1040: - de-select encoderless monitoring functions, select and de-select STO. - if monitoring function is active, issue "SLS" pulse enable within 5 s of de-selecting STO. Re other message values: - the significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711. Note: This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe. See also: p9300 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module)), p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit)) C30712 SI Motion MM: Defect in F-IO processing Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: When cross checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between parameters or results of the F-IO processing and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible. The safety message C30711 with message value 0 is also displayed due to initiation of STOP F. If at least one monitoring function is active, the safety message C30701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output after the parameterized timer has expired. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): Number of the cross-compared data that resulted in this message. Refer to the description of the message values in safety message C01712. Remedy: - check parameterization in the parameters involved and correct if required. - ensure equality by copying the SI data to the second channel and then carry out an acceptance test. - check monitoring clock cycle for equality (p9500, p9300). Note: This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe. See also: p9300 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module)), p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit)) 3-1460 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms C30714 SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The drive had moved faster than that specified by the velocity limit value (p9331). The drive is stopped as a result of the configured stop response (p9363). Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): 100: SLS1 exceeded. 200: SLS2 exceeded. 300: SLS3 exceeded. 400: SLS4 exceeded. 1000: Encoder limit frequency exceeded. Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control. - check the limits for "SLS" function and if required, adapt (p9331). Note: This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe. SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed See also: p9331 (SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module)), p9363 (SI Motion SLS stop response (Motor Module)) C30715 SI Motion MM: Safely-limited position exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The axis has moved past a parameterized position that is monitored by the "SLP" function. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): 10: SLP1 violated. 20: SLP2 violated. Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control. - check the limits for "SLP" function and if required, adapt (p9534, p9535). This message can be acknowledged as follows: - motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches See also: p9334 (SI Motion SLP upper limit values (Motor Module)), p9335 (SI Motion SLP lower limit values (Motor Module)) C30716 SI Motion MM: Tolerance for safe motion direction exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The tolerance for the "safe motion direction" function was exceeded. The drive is stopped as a result of the configured stop response (p9366). Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): 0: Tolerance for the "safe motion direction positive" function exceeded. 1: Tolerance for the "safe motion direction negative" function exceeded. Remedy: - check the traversing/motion program in the control. - check the tolerance for "SDI" function and if required, adapt (p9364). This message can be acknowledged as follows: - Deselect the "SDI" function and select again. - Perform a safe acknowledgment via F-DI or PROFIsafe. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1461 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SI: Safety Integrated See also: p9364 (SI Motion SDI tolerance (Motor Module)), p9365 (SI Motion SDI delay time (Motor Module)), p9366 (SI Motion SDI stop response (Motor Module)) C30730 SI Motion MM: Reference block for dynamic safely limited speed invalid Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The reference block transferred via PROFIsafe is negative. A reference block is used to generate a referred velocity limit value based on the reference quantity "Velocity limit value SLS1" (p9331[0]). The drive is stopped as a result of the configured stop response (p9363[0]). Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): requested, invalid reference block. Remedy: In the PROFIsafe telegram, input data S_SLS_LIMIT_IST must be corrected. This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe. Note: SI: Safety Integrated SLS: Safely-Limited Speed C30770 SI Motion MM: Discrepancy error affecting the fail-safe inputs/outputs Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The fail-safe digital inputs/digital outputs (F-DI/F-DO) show a different state longer than that parameterized in p10002 / p10102. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex xxxx: Discrepancy error for fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI). Bit 0: Discrepancy error for F-DI 0 Bit 1: Discrepancy error for F-DI 1 ... yyyy: Discrepancy error for fail-safe digital outputs (F-DO). Bit 0: Discrepancy error for F-DO 0 ... Note: If several discrepancy errors occur consecutively, then this fault is only signaled for the first error that occurs. Remedy: - check the wiring of the F-DI (contact problems). Note: This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe. Discrepancy errors of an F-DI can only be completely acknowledged if safe acknowledgement was carried out once the cause of the error was resolved (p10006 or acknowledgment via PROFIsafe). As long as safety acknowledgement was not carried out, the corresponding F-DI stays in the safe state internally. For cyclic switching operations at the F-DI, it may be necessary to adapt the discrepancy time to the switching frequency. If the period of a cyclic switching pulse has the order of magnitude of double the value of p10002, then the following formulas must be checked. p10002 < (tp / 2) - td (discrepancy time must be less than half the period minus the actual discrepancy time) p10002 >= p9500 (discrepancy time must be no less than P9500) p10002 > td (discrepancy time must be greater than the switch discrepancy time which may actually apply) td = possible actual discrepancy time (in ms) that can occur with a switching operation. This must correspond to at least 1 SI sampling cycle (see p9500). tp = period for a switching operation in ms. When debounce p10017 is active, the discrepancy time is directly specified by the debounce time. 3-1462 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms If the period of a cyclic switching pulse has the order of magnitude of twice the debounce time, then the following formulas should be checked. p10002 < p10017 + 1 ms - td p10002 > td p10002 >= p9500 Example: For a 12 ms SI sampling cycle and a switching frequency of 110 ms (p10017 = 0), the maximum discrepancy time which can be set is as follows: p10002 <= (110/2 ms) - 12 ms = 43 ms Rounded-off, p10002 <= 36 ms is obtained (since the discrepancy time can only be accepted as a whole SI sampling cycle, the value will need to be rounded up or down to a whole SI sampling time value if the result is not an exact multiple of an SI sampling cycle). Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output A30772 SI Motion MM: Test stop failsafe inputs/outputs active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The test stop for the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI) and/or fail-safe digital outputs (F-DO) is presently being performed. Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output Remedy: The alarm disappears automatically after successfully ending or canceling (when a fault condition occurs) the test stop. F30773 SI Motion MM: Test stop fault Motor Module Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A fault has occurred on the MM side during the test stop for the fail-safe outputs. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): RRRVWXYZ hex: R: Reserved. V: Actual state of the DO channel concerned (see X) on the CU (corresponds to the states read back from the hardware, bit 0 = DO 0, bit 1 = DO 1, etc.). W: Required state of the DO channel concerned (see X, bit 0 = DO 0, bit 1 = DO 1, etc.). X: DO channels involved, which indicate an error (bit 0 = DO 0, bit 1 = DO 1, etc.). Y: Reason for the test stop fault. Z: State of the test stop in which the fault has occurred. Y: Reason for the test stop fault Y = 1: MM side in incorrect test stop state (internal fault). Y = 2: Expected states of the DOs were not fulfilled (CU305: readback via DI 22 / CU240 readback DI 2). Y = 3: Incorrect timer state on CU side (internal fault) Y = 4: Expected states of the diag DOs were not fulfilled (CU305: internal readback on MM channel). Y = 5: Expected states of the second diag DOs were not fulfilled (CU305: internal readback on CU channel). X and V indicate the DI or Diag-DO state dependent upon the reason for the fault (2, 4 or 5). In the event of multiple test stop faults, the first one that occurred is shown. Z: Test stop state and associated test actions Z = 0 ... 3: Synchronization phase of test stop between CU and Motor Module no switching operations Z = 4: DO + OFF and DO - OFF Z = 5: Check to see if states are as expected Z = 6: DO + ON and DO - ON Z = 7: Check to see if states are as expected Z = 8: DO + OFF and DO - ON Z = 9: Check to see if states are as expected Z = 10: DO + ON and DO - OFF Z = 11: Check to see if states are as expected (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1463 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Z = 12: DO + OFF and DO - OFF Z = 13: Check to see if states are as expected Z = 14: End of test stop Diag expected states in table format: Test stop state: Expectation Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Mode 3 / Mode 4 5: 0/-/-/1 7: 0/-/-/0 9: 0/-/-/0 11: 1/-/-/1 13: 0/-/-/1 Second diag expected states in table format: Test stop state: Expectation Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Mode 3 / Mode 4 5: -/-/-/1 7: -/-/-/0 9: -/-/-/1 11: -/-/-/0 13: -/-/-/1 DI expected states in table format: Test stop state: Expectation Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Mode 3 / Mode 4 5: -/1/1/7: -/0/0/9: -/0/1/11: -/0/1/13: -/1/1/Example: Fault F01773 (CU) is signaled with fault value = 0001_0127 and fault F30773 (MM) is signaled with fault value 0000_0127. This means that in state 7 (Z = 7) the state of the external readback signal was not set correctly (Y = 2) after DO-0 (X = 1) was switched to ON/ON. Fault value 0001_0127 indicates that 0 was expected (W = 0) and 1 (V = 1) was read back from the hardware. Fault value 0000_0127 on the MM indicates that the states were as expected. In the case of fault F30773, W and V are always identical; a value of 0 always means that 0 was expected at the readback input but was not present on the other channel (CU). Remedy: Check the wiring of the F-DOs and restart the test stop. Note: The fault is withdrawn if the test stop is successfully completed. In the event of multiple test stop faults, the first one that occurred is shown. Once the test stop has been restarted the next queued test stop fault will be signaled (if there is one). C30797 SI Motion MM: Axis not safely referenced Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The standstill position saved before powering down does not match the actual position determined at power-up. Message value (r9749, interpret decimal): 1: Axis not referenced. 2: User agreement missing. Remedy: If safe automatic referencing is not possible the user must issue a user agreement for the new position using the softkey. This mean that this position is then designated as safety-relevant. Note: SI: Safety Integrated C30798 SI Motion MM: Test stop running Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The test stop is active. Remedy: Not necessary. The message is withdrawn when the test stop is finished. 3-1464 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: SI: Safety Integrated C30799 SI Motion MM: Acceptance test mode active Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The acceptance test mode is active. The POWER ON signals of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions can be acknowledged during the acceptance test using the acknowledgement functions of the higher-level control. Remedy: Not necessary. The message is withdrawn when exiting the acceptance test mode. Note: SI: Safety Integrated N30800 (F) Power unit: Group signal Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The power unit has detected at least one fault. Remedy: Evaluate the other messages that are presently available. Reaction upon F: OFF2 Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F30801 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned. The computing time load might be too high. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - remove DRIVE-CLiQ components that are not required. - de-select functions that are not required. - if required, increase the sampling times (p0112, p0115). - replace the component involved. F30802 Power unit: Time slice overflow Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1465 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30804 (N, A) Power unit: CRC Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A CRC error has occurred for the power unit. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F30805 Power unit: EPROM checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 01: EEPROM access error. 02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM. Remedy: Replace the module. F30809 Power unit: Switching information not valid Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For 3P gating unit, the following applies: The last switching status word in the setpoint telegram is identified by the end ID. Such an end ID was not found. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. A30810 (F) Power unit: Watchdog timer Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When booting it was detected that the cause of the previous reset was an SAC watchdog timer overflow. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F30820 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned. 3-1466 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 7 (= 07 hex): A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram. 8 (= 08 hex): No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F30835 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F30836 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1467 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. F30837 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F30845 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F30850 Power unit: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the power unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - replace power unit. - if required, upgrade the firmware in the power unit. - contact the Hotline. 3-1468 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30851 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved. The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved. A30853 Power unit: Sign-of-life error cyclic data Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The power unit has detected that the cyclic setpoint telegrams of the Control Unit have not been updated on time. At least two sign-of-life errors have occurred within the window set in p7788. Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - reduce the size of the window (p7788) for monitoring. F30860 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. 17 (= 11 hex): CRC error and the receive telegram is too early. 18 (= 12 hex): The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 19 (= 13 hex): The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 20 (= 14 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 21 (= 15 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1469 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 22 (= 16 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early. 25 (= 19 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F30875 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Supply voltage failed Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage has failed. Fault cause: 9 (= 09 hex): The power supply voltage for the components has failed. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the power supply voltage wiring for the DRIVE-CLiQ component (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the dimensioning of the power supply for the DRIVE-CLiQ component. F30885 CU DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 26 (= 1A hex): Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early. 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. 98 (= 62 hex): Error at the transition to cyclic operation. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved. - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) 3-1470 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30886 PU DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. F30887 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (power unit) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 96 (= 60 hex): Response received too late during runtime measurement. 97 (= 61 hex): Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F30895 PU DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1471 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30896 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (power unit), specified by the fault value, have changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Component number. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be used. - when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the original cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length). F30899 (N, A) Power unit: Unknown fault Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A fault occurred on the power unit that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Fault number. Note: If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version (r0128). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F30903 Power unit: I2C bus error occurred Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Communications error with an EEPROM or A/D converter. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 80000000 hex: - internal software error. 00000001 hex ... 0000FFFF hex: - module fault. Remedy: Re fault value = 80000000 hex: - upgrade firmware to later version. Re fault value = 00000001 hex ... 0000FFFF hex: - replace the module. 3-1472 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F30907 Power unit: FPGA configuration unsuccessful Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: During initialization within the power unit, an internal software error has occurred. Remedy: - if required, upgrade the firmware in the power unit. - replace power unit. - contact the Hotline. A30920 (F) Power unit: Temperature sensor fault Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm, PT100: R > 375 Ohm). 2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm, PT100: R < 30 Ohm). Note: A temperature sensor is connected to the following terminals: - "Booksize" format: X21.1/.2 or X22.1/.2 - "Chassis" format: X41.4/.3 Information on temperature sensors is provided in the following literature for example: SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F30950 Power unit: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Information about the fault source. Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - If necessary, upgrade the firmware in the power unit to a later version. - contact the Hotline. A30999 (F, N) Power unit: Unknown alarm Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An alarm occurred on the power unit that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Alarm number. Note: If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version (r0128). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1473 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F31100 (N, A) Encoder 1: Zero mark distance error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance. For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the system. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). - if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31101 (N, A) Encoder 1: Zero mark failed Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425). - if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438). - when p0437.1 is active, check p4686. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1474 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31103 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude error, track R Message value: R track: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude of the reference track signal (track R) does not lie within the tolerance bandwidth for encoder 1. The fault can be initiated when the unipolar voltage level is exceeded (RP/RN) or if the differential amplitude is undershot. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = 0, xxxx = Signal level, track R (16 bits with sign) The response thresholds of the unipolar signal levels of the encoder are between < 1400 mV and > 3500 mV. The response threshold for the differential signal level of the encoder is < -1600 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note: The analog value of the amplitude error is not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. The fault value can only be represented between -32767 ... 32767 dec (-770 ... 770 mV). The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied: - Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1). - Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check the speed range; frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment might not be sufficient for the speed range - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable. - check whether the zero mark is connected and the signal cables RP and RN have been connected correctly - replace the encoder cable. - if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31110 (N, A) Encoder 1: Serial communications error Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol. Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line. Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms). Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data. Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it. Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested. Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading. Bit 7: Timeout for the register communication. Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits). Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow. Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice. Bit 11: Parity error. Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time. Bit 13: Data line incorrect. Bit 14: Fault for the register communication. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1475 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1: - Enc defect F31111 may provide additional details. Re fault value, bit 1 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 2 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 3 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 4 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module. Re fault value, bit 5 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module. Re fault value, bit 6 = 1: - Update Sensor Module firmware. Re fault value, bit 7 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 8 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0429.2). Re fault value, bit 9 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module. Re fault value, bit 10 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0429.2, p0449). Re fault value, bit 11 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0436). Re fault value, bit 12 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0429.6). Re fault value, bit 13 = 1: - Check data line. Re fault value, bit 14 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31111 (N, A) Encoder 1: Absolute encoder internal fault Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin, additional information: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The absolute encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = fault cause yyyy = 0: Bit 0: Lighting system failed. Bit 1: Signal amplitude too low. Bit 2: Position value incorrect. Bit 3: Encoder power supply overvoltage condition. Bit 4: Encoder power supply undervoltage condition. Bit 5: Encoder power supply overcurrent condition. Bit 6: The battery must be changed. yyyy = 1: Bit 0: Signal amplitude outside the control range. Bit 1: Error multiturn interface Bit 2: Internal data error (singleturn/multiturn not with single steps). Bit 3: Error EEPROM interface. Bit 4: SAR converter error. Bit 5: Fault for the register data transfer. Bit 6: Internal error identified at the error pin (nErr). Bit 7: Temperature threshold exceeded or fallen below. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) 3-1476 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: For yyyy = 0: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 1 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 2 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 3 = 1: 5 V power supply voltage fault. When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC. When a motor encoder with a direct DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 4 = 1: 5 V power supply voltage fault. When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC. When using a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 5 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 6 = 1: The battery must be changed (only for encoders with battery back-up). For yyyy = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace encoder. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31112 (N, A) Encoder 1: Error bit set in the serial protocol Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol. Remedy: For fault value, bit 0 = 1: In the case of an EnDat encoder, F31111 may provide further details. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31115 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude error track A or B (A^2 + B^2) Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 1 exceeds the permissible tolerance. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response thresholds are < 170 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1477 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10): The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response thresholds are < 1070 mV and > 3582 mV. A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). The following applies to measuring systems without their own bearing system: - adjust the scanning head and check the bearing system of the measuring wheel. The following applies for measuring systems with their own bearing system: - ensure that the encoder housing is not subject to any axial force. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31116 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude error monitoring track A + B Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The amplitude of the rectified encoder signals A and B and the amplitude from the roots of A^2 + B^2 for encoder 1 are not within the tolerance bandwidth. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response thresholds are < 130 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 955 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31117 (N, A) Encoder 1: Inversion error signals A/B/R Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For a square-wave encoder (bipolar, double ended) signals A*, B* and R* are not inverted with respect to signals A, B and R. 3-1478 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bits 0 ... 15: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Bit 16: Error track A. Bit 17: Error track B. Bit 18: Error track R. Note: For SMC30 (order no.. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), CUA32, and CU310, the following applies: A square-wave encoder without track R is used and track monitoring (p0405.2 = 1) is activated. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - Check the encoder/cable. - Does the encoder supply signals and the associated inverted signals? Note: For SMC30 (order no. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), the following applies: - check the setting of p0405 (p0405.2 = 1 is only possible if the encoder is connected at X520). For a square-wave encoder without track R, the following jumpers must be set for the connection at X520 (SMC30) or X23 (CUA32, CU310): - pin 10 (reference signal R) <--> pin 7 (encoder power supply, ground) - pin 11 (reference signal R inverted) <--> pin 4 (encoder power supply) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31118 (N, A) Encoder 1: Speed difference outside the tolerance range Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference has exceeded the value in p0492 over several sampling cycles. The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time. Encoder 1 is used as motor encoder and can be effective has fault response to change over to encoderless operation. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER), p0492 Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions. - check the grounding of the tachometer shielding. - if required, increase the maximum speed difference per sampling cycle (p0492). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31120 (N, A) Encoder 1: Power supply voltage fault Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: A power supply fault was detected for encoder 1. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Undervoltage condition on the sense line. Bit 1: Overcurrent condition for the encoder power supply. Bit 2: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation negative. Bit 3: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation positive. Bit 4: The 24 V power supply through the Power Module (PM) is overloaded. Bit 5: Overcurrent at the EnDat connection of the converter. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1479 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 6: Overvoltage at the EnDat connection of the converter. Bit 7: Hardware fault at the EnDat connection of the converter. Note: If the encoder cables 6FX2002-2EQ00-.... and 6FX2002-2CH00-.... are interchanged, this can result in the encoder being destroyed because the pins of the operating voltage are reversed. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - check the plug connections of the encoder cable. - SMC30: Check the parameterization (p0404.22). Re fault value, bit 1 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - replace the encoder or encoder cable Re fault value, bit 2 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - replace the encoder or encoder cable Re fault value, bit 3 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - replace the encoder or encoder cable Re fault value, bit 5 = 1: - Measuring unit correctly connected at the converter? - Replace the measuring unit or the cable to the measuring unit. Re fault value, bit 6, 7 = 1: - Replace the defective EnDat 2.2 converter. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31121 (N, A) Encoder 1: Coarse position error Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected on the module. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31122 Encoder 1: Internal power supply voltage faulty Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault in internal reference voltage of ASICs for encoder 1. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Reference voltage error. 2: Internal undervoltage. 3: Internal overvoltage. Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module. 3-1480 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31123 (N, A) Encoder 1: Signal level A/B unipolar outside tolerance Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The unipolar level (AP/AN or BP/BN) for encoder 1 is outside the permissible tolerance. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Either AP or AN outside the tolerance. Bit 16 = 1: Either BP or BN outside the tolerance. The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV. The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV. Note: The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied: - Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1). - Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - make sure that the encoder cables and shielding are installed in an EMC-compliant manner. - check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable. - check the short-circuit of a signal cable with mass or the operating voltage. - replace the encoder cable. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31125 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude error track A or B overcontrolled Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude of track A or B for encoder 1 exceeds the permissible tolerance band. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response threshold is > 750 mV. This fault also occurs if the A/D converter is overcontrolled. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10): The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is > 3582 mV. A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1481 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31126 (N, A) Encoder 1: Amplitude AB too high Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2 or |A| + |B|) for encoder 1 exceeds the permissible tolerance. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Angle xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign) The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response threshold for (|A| + |B|) is > 1120 mV or the root of (A^2 + B^2) > 955 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value of 299A hex = 10650 dec. The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is present at the negative zero crossover of track B. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31129 (N, A) Encoder 1: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 mechanical or +/-60 electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater than +/-60 electrical. One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 mechanical. One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 electrical. The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incorrect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough. After the fine synchronization using one reference mark or 2 reference marks for distance-coded encoders, this fault is no longer initiated, but instead, Alarm A31429. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): For track C/D, the following applies: Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). For Hall signals, the following applies: Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - track C or D not connected. - correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D. - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the adjustment of the Hall sensor. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1482 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31130 (N, A) Encoder 1: Zero mark and position error from the coarse synchronization Message value: Angular deviation, electrical: %1, angle, mechanical: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: After initializing the pole position using track C/D, Hall signals or pole position identification routine, the zero mark was detected outside the permissible range. For distance-coded encoders, the test is carried out after passing 2 zero marks. Fine synchronization was not carried out. When initializing via track C/D (p0404) then it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-18 mechanical. When initializing via Hall sensors (p0404) or pole position identification (p1982) it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-60 electrical. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex yyyy: Determined mechanical zero mark position (can only be used for track C/D). xxxx: Deviation of the zero mark from the expected position as electrical angle. Scaling: 32768 dec = 180 See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - Check p0431 and, if necessary, correct (trigger via p1990 = 1 if necessary). - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - if the Hall sensor is used as an equivalent for track C/D, check the connection. - Check the connection of track C or D. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31131 (N, A) Encoder 1: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: Absolute encoder: When cyclically reading the absolute position, an excessively high difference to the incremental position was detected. The absolute position that was read is rejected. Limit value for the deviation: - EnDat encoder: Is supplied from the encoder and is a minimum of 2 quadrants (e.g. EQI 1325 > 2 quadrants, EQN 1325 > 50 quadrants). - other encoders: 15 pulses = 60 quadrants. Incremental encoder: When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected. For equidistant zero marks, the following applies: - The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have n times the distance referred to the first zero mark. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies: - the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have the expected distance to the first zero mark pair. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check whether the coding disk is dirty or there are strong ambient magnetic fields. - adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425). - if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1483 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31135 Encoder 1: Fault when determining the position Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word. Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed in the fault value. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: F1 (safety status display) Bit 1: F2 (safety status display) Bit 2: Lighting (reserved) Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved) Bit 4: Position value (reserved) Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved) Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved) Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved) Bit 8: Battery (reserved) Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display) Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 25: Singleturn power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved) Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. F31136 Encoder 1: Error when determining multiturn information Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word. Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed in the fault value. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: F1 (safety status display) Bit 1: F2 (safety status display) Bit 2: Lighting (reserved) Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved) Bit 4: Position value (reserved) Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved) Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved) Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved) 3-1484 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 8: Battery (reserved) Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display) Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 25: Singleturn power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved) Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. F31137 Encoder 1: Internal fault when determining the position Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Replace encoder. F31138 Encoder 1: Internal error when determining multiturn information Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Only for internal SIEMENS troubleshooting. Remedy: Replace encoder. F31150 (N, A) Encoder 1: Initialization error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: Encoder functionality selected in p0404 is not operating correctly. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Encoder malfunction. The bit assignment corresponds to that of p0404 (e.g. bit 5 set: Error track C/D). See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - Check that p0404 is correctly set. - check the encoder type used (incremental/absolute) and for SMCxx, the encoder cable. - if relevant, note additional fault messages that describe the fault in detail. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1485 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31151 (N, A) Encoder 1: Encoder speed for initialization AB too high Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The encoder speed is too high during while initializing the sensor. Remedy: Reduce the speed of the encoder accordingly during initialization. If necessary, de-activate monitoring (p0437.29). See also: p0437 (Sensor Module configuration extended) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31152 (N, A) Encoder 1: Maximum input frequency exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: ENCODER (NONE, OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The maximum input frequency of the encoder evaluation has been exceeded. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Actual input frequency in Hz. See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.) Remedy: - Reduce the speed. - Use an encoder with a lower pulse number (p0408). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31160 (N, A) Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel A failed Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: ENCODER (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside the measuring range set in (p4673). 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. For fault value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673). For fault value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1486 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31161 (N, A) Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel B failed Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: ENCODER (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside the measuring range set in (p4675). 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. For fault value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675). For fault value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31163 (N, A) Encoder 1: Analog sensor position value exceeds limit value Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: ENCODER (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The position value has exceeded the permissible range of -0.5 ... +0.5. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Position value from the LVDT sensor. 2: Position value from the encoder characteristic. Remedy: For fault value = 1: - Check the LVDT ratio (p4678). - check the reference signal connection at track B. For fault value = 2: - check the coefficients of the characteristic (p4663 ... p4666). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A31400 (F, N) Encoder 1: Alarm threshold zero mark distance error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance. For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the system. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1487 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31401 (F, N) Encoder 1: Alarm threshold zero mark failed Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F31405 (N, A) Encoder 1: Temperature in the encoder evaluation inadmissible Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The encoder evaluation for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ has detected an inadmissible temperature. The fault threshold is 125 C. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Measured board/module temperature in 0.1 C. Remedy: Reduce the ambient temperature for the DRIVE-CLiQ connection of the motor. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A31407 (F, N) Encoder 1: Function limit reached Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The encoder has reached one of its function limits. A service is recommended. 3-1488 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1 : Incremental signals 3 : Absolute track 4 : Code connection Remedy: Perform service. Replace the encoder if necessary. Note: The actual functional reserve of an encoder can be displayed via r4651. See also: p4650 (Encoder functional reserve component number), r4651 (Encoder functional reserve) Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31410 (F, N) Encoder 1: Serial communications Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol. Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line. Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms). Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data. Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it. Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested. Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading. Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits). Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow. Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice. Bit 11: Parity error. Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace encoder. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31411 (F, N) Encoder 1: Absolute encoder signals internal alarms Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin, additional information: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The absolute encoder fault word includes alarm bits that have been set. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = fault cause yyyy = 0: Bit 0: Frequency exceeded (speed too high). Bit 1: Temperature exceeded. Bit 2: Control reserve, lighting system exceeded. Bit 3: Battery discharged. Bit 4: Reference point passed. yyyy = 1: Bit 0: Signal amplitude outside the control range. Bit 1: Error multiturn interface (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1489 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 2: Internal data error (singleturn/multiturn not with single steps). Bit 3: Error EEPROM interface. Bit 4: SAR_converter error. Bit 5: Fault for the register data transfer. Bit 6: Internal error identified at the error pin (nErr). Bit 7: Temperature threshold exceeded or fallen below. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: Replace encoder. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31412 (F, N) Encoder 1: Error bit set in the serial protocol Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol. Bit 1: Alarm bit in the position protocol. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace encoder. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31414 (F, N) Encoder 1: Amplitude error track C or D (C^2 + D^2) Message value: C track: %1, D track: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The amplitude (C^2 + D^2) of track C or D of the encoder or from the Hall signals, is not within the tolerance bandwidth. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track D (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track C (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note: If the amplitude is not within the tolerance bandwidth, then it cannot be used to initialize the start position. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). - check the Hall sensor box Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY 3-1490 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31415 (F, N) Encoder 1: Amplitude alarm track A or B (A^2 + B^2) Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 1 exceeds the permissible tolerance. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Angle xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign) The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response threshold is < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder). A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 299A hex = 10650 dec. The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is present at the negative zero crossover of track B. Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10): The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is < 1414 mV (1.0 Vrms). A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 3333 hex = 13107 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check the speed range, frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment is not sufficient for the speed range. - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). - if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31418 (F, N) Encoder 1: Speed difference per sampling rate exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference between two sampling cycles has exceeded the value in p0492. The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: p0492 Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions. - check the grounding of the tachometer shielding. - if required, increase the setting of p0492. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1491 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A31419 (F, N) Encoder 1: Track A or B outside tolerance Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The amplitude/phase/offset correction for track A or B is at the limit. Amplitude error correction: Amplitude B / Amplitude A = 0.78 ... 1.27 Phase: <84 degrees or >96 degrees SMC20: Offset correction: +/-140 mV SMC10: Offset correction: +/-650 mV Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): xxxx1: Minimum of the offset correction, track B xxxx2: Maximum of the offset correction, track B xxx1x: Minimum of the offset correction, track A xxx2x: Maximum of the offset correction, track A xx1xx: Minimum of the amplitude correction, track B/A xx2xx: Maximum of the amplitude correction, track B/A x1xxx: Minimum of the phase error correction x2xxx: Maximum of the phase error correction 1xxxx: Minimum of the cubic correction 2xxxx: Maximum of the cubic correction See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check mechanical mounting tolerances for encoders without their own bearings (e.g. toothed-wheel encoders). - check the plug connections (also the transition resistance). - check the encoder signals. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31421 (F, N) Encoder 1: Coarse position error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 3: The absolute position of the serial protocol and track A/B differ by half an encoder pulse. The absolute position must have its zero position in the quadrants in which both tracks are negative. In the case of a fault, the position can be incorrect by one encoder pulse. Remedy: Re alarm value = 3: - For a standard encoder with cable, contact the manufacturer where relevant. - correct the assignment of the tracks to the position value that is serially transferred. To do this, the two tracks must be connected, inverted, at the Sensor Module (interchange A with A* and B with B*) or, for a programmable encoder, check the zero offset of the position. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1492 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A31422 (F, N) Encoder 1: Pulses per revolution square-wave encoder outside tolerance bandwidth Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance. This alarm is triggered with active square-wave encoder PPR correction and re-parameterized fault 31131 if the accumulator contains larger values than p4683 or p4684. The zero mark distance for zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): accumulated differential pulses in encoder pulses. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31429 (F, N) Encoder 1: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 mechanical or +/-60 electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater than +/-60 electrical. One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 mechanical. One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 electrical. The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incorrect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): For track C/D, the following applies: Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). For Hall signals, the following applies: Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - track C or D not connected. - correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D. - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the adjustment of the Hall sensor. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31431 (F, N) Encoder 1: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1493 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For equidistant zero marks, the following applies: - The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have n times the distance referred to the first zero mark. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies: - the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have the expected distance to the first zero mark pair. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - Clean coding disk or remove strong magnetic fields. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31432 (F, N) Encoder 1: Rotor position adaptation corrects deviation Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For track A/B, pulses have been lost or too many have been counted. These pulses are presently being corrected. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured deviation of zero mark in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check encoder limit frequency. - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31442 (F, N) Encoder 1: Battery voltage pre-alarm Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When switched-off, the encoder uses a battery to back up the multiturn information. The battery voltage is no longer sufficient to check the multiturn information. Remedy: Replace battery. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1494 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A31443 (F, N) Encoder 1: Unipolar CD signal level outside specification Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The unipolar level (CP/CN or DP/DN) for encoder 1 is outside the permissible tolerance. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Either CP or CN outside the tolerance. Bit 16 = 1: Either DP or DN outside the tolerance. The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV. The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV. Note: The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied: - Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1). - Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable. - are the C/D tracks connected correctly (have the signal lines CP and CN or DP and DN been interchanged)? - replace the encoder cable. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31460 (N) Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel A failed Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673. 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. Re alarm value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673). Re alarm value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31461 (N) Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel B failed Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside the measuring range set in (p4675). 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1495 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. Re alarm value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675). Re alarm value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31462 (N) Encoder 1: Analog sensor, no channel active Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Channel A and B are not activated for the analog sensor. Remedy: - activate channel A and/or channel B (p4670). - check the encoder configuration (p0404.17). See also: p4670 (Analog sensor configuration) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31463 (N) Encoder 1: Analog sensor position value exceeds limit value Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The position value has exceeded the permissible range of -0.5 ... +0.5. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Position value from the LVDT sensor. 2: Position value from the encoder characteristic. Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - Check the LVDT ratio (p4678). - check the reference signal connection at track B. Re alarm value = 2: - check the coefficients of the characteristic (p4663 ... p4666). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31470 (F, N) Encoder 1: Soiling detected Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the case of the alternative encoder system interface on the Sensor Module Cabinet 30 (SMC30), encoder soiling is signaled via a 0 signal at terminal X521.7. Remedy: - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1496 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31500 (N, A) Encoder 1: Position tracking traversing range exceeded Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For a configured linear axis without modulo correction, the drive/encoder has exceeded the maximum possible traversing range. The value should be read in p0412 and interpreted as the number of motor revolutions. For p0411.0 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421. For p0411.3 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is pre-set (default value) to the highest possible value and is +/-p0412/2 (rounded off to complete revolutions). The highest possible value depends on the pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419). Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31501 (N, A) Encoder 1: Position tracking encoder position outside tolerance window Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When powered down, the drive/encoder was moved through a distance greater than was parameterized in the tolerance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system and encoder. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value. The sign designates the traversing direction. Note: The deviation (difference) found is also displayed in r0477. See also: p0413 (Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window), r0477 (Measuring gear, position difference) Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507). See also: p0010 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31502 (N, A) Encoder 1: Encoder with measuring gear, without valid signals Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The encoder with measuring gear no longer provides any valid signals. Remedy: It must be ensured that all of the encoders, with mounted measuring gear, provide valid actual values in operation. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1497 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31503 (N, A) Encoder 1: Position tracking cannot be reset Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The position tracking for the measuring gear cannot be reset. Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A31700 Encoder 1: Effectivity test does not supply the expected value Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit x = 1: Effectivity test x unsuccessful. Remedy: Replace encoder. N31800 (F) Encoder 1: Group signal Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The motor encoder has detected at least one fault. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: Evaluate the other messages that are presently available. Reaction upon F: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F31801 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) 3-1498 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31802 (N, A) Encoder 1: Time slice overflow Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred in encoder 1. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yx hex: y = function involved (Siemens-internal fault diagnostics), x = time slice involved x = 9: Time slice overflow of the fast (current controller clock cycle) time slice. x = A: Time slice overflow of the average time slice. x = C: Time slice overflow of the slow time slice. yx = 3E7: Timeout when waiting for SYNO (e.g. unexpected return to non-cyclic operation). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: Increase the current controller sampling time Note: For a current controller sampling time = 31.25 s, use an SMx20 with order number 6SL3055-0AA00-5xA3. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31804 (N, A) Encoder 1: Checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY) Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Sensor Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex yyyy: Memory area involved. xxxx: Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - upgrade firmware to later version (>= V2.6 HF3, >= V4.3 SP2, >= V4.4). - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained. - replace the Sensor Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1499 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31805 (N, A) Encoder 1: EPROM checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 01: EEPROM access error. 02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: Replace the module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31806 (N, A) Encoder 1: Initialization error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The encoder was not successfully initialized. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Bit 0, 1: Encoder initialization with the motor rotating has failed (deviation involving coarse and fine position in encoder pulses/4). Bit 2: Mid-voltage matching for track A unsuccessful. Bit 3: Mid-voltage matching for track B unsuccessful. Bit 4: Mid-voltage matching for acceleration input unsuccessful. Bit 5: Mid-voltage matching for track safety A unsuccessful. Bit 6: Mid-voltage matching for track safety B unsuccessful. Bit 7: Mid-voltage matching for track C unsuccessful. Bit 8: Mid-voltage matching for track D unsuccessful. Bit 9: Mid-voltage matching for track R unsuccessful. Bit 10: The difference in mid-voltages between A and B is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 11: The difference in mid-voltages between C and D is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 12: The difference in mid-voltages between safety A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 13: The difference in mid-voltages between A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 14: The difference in mid-voltages between B and safety A is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 15: The standard deviation of the calculated mid-voltages is too great (> 0.3 V) Bit 16: Internal fault - fault when reading a register (CAFE) Bit 17: Internal fault - fault when writing a register (CAFE) Bit 18: Internal fault: No mid-voltage matching available Bit 19: Internal error - ADC access error. Bit 20: Internal error - no zero crossover found. Bit 28: Error while initializing the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit. Bit 29: Error when reading out the data from the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit. Bit 30: EEPROM checksum of the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit incorrect. Bit 31: Data of the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit inconsistent. Note: Bit 0, 1: Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0 Bits 2 ... 20: 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A1 and higher See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) 3-1500 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Acknowledge fault. If the fault cannot be acknowledged: Bits 2 ... 9: Check encoder power supply. Bits 2 ... 14: Check the corresponding cable. Bit 15 with no other bits: Check track R, check settings in p0404. Bit 28: Check the cable between the EnDat 2.2 converter and the measuring unit. Bit 29 ... 31: Replace the defective measuring unit. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A31811 (F, N) Encoder 1: Encoder serial number changed Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The serial number of the motor encoder of a synchronous motor has changed. The change was only checked for encoders with serial number (e.g. EnDat encoders) and build-in motors (e.g. p0300 = 401) or third-party motors (p0300 = 2). Cause 1: - The encoder was replaced. Cause 2: - A third-party, built-in or linear motor was re-commissioned. Cause 3: - The motor with integrated and adjusted encoder was replaced. Cause 4: - The firmware was updated to a version that checks the encoder serial number. Note: With closed-loop position control, the serial number is accepted when starting the adjustment (p2507 = 2). When the encoder is adjusted (p2507 = 3), the serial number is checked for changes and if required, the adjustment is reset (p2507 = 1). Proceed as follows to hide serial number monitoring: - set the following serial numbers for the corresponding Encoder Data Set: p0441= FF, p0442 = 0, p0443 = 0, p0444 = 0, p0445 = 0. - parameterize F07414 as message type N (p2118, p2119). See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: Re causes 1, 2: Carry out an automatic adjustment using the pole position identification routine. Acknowledge fault. Initiate the pole position identification routine with p1990 = 1. Then check that the pole position identification routine is correctly executed. SERVO: If a pole position identification technique is selected in p1980, and if p0301 does not contain a motor type with an encoder adjusted in the factory, then p1990 is automatically activated. or Set the adjustment via p0431. In this case, the new serial number is automatically accepted. or Mechanically adjust the encoder. Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1. Re causes 3, 4: Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1. Reaction upon F: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, OFF2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1501 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31812 (N, A) Encoder 1: Requested cycle or RX-/TX timing not supported Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A cycle requested from the Control Unit or RX/TX timing is not supported. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Application cycle is not supported. 1: DRIVE-CLiQ cycle is not supported. 2: Distance between RX and TX instants in time too low. 3: TX instant in time too early. Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31813 Encoder 1: Hardware logic unit failed Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: ALU watchdog has responded. Bit 1: ALU has detected a sign-of-life error. Remedy: Replace encoder. F31820 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder concerned. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 7 (= 07 hex): A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram. 8 (= 08 hex): No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. 3-1502 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31835 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder concerned. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31836 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1503 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31837 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31845 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1504 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31850 (N, A) Encoder 1: Encoder evaluation, internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the Sensor Module of encoder 1. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Background time slice is blocked. 2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK. 10000: OEM memory of the EnDat encoder contains data that cannot be interpreted. 11000 ... 11499: Descriptive data from EEPROM incorrect. 11500 ... 11899: Calibration data from EEPROM incorrect. 11900 ... 11999: Configuration data from EEPROM incorrect. 12000 ... 12008: Communication with AD converter faulted. 16000: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization application error. 16001: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization ALU error. 16002: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder HISI / SISI initialization error. 16003: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder safety initialization error. 16004: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder internal system error. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module. - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31851 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit. The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31860 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1505 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. 17 (= 11 hex): CRC error and the receive telegram is too early. 18 (= 12 hex): The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 19 (= 13 hex): The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 20 (= 14 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 21 (= 15 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 22 (= 16 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early. 25 (= 19 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31875 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Supply voltage failed Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage has failed. Fault cause: 9 (= 09 hex): The power supply voltage for the components has failed. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the power supply voltage wiring for the DRIVE-CLiQ component (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the dimensioning of the power supply for the DRIVE-CLiQ component. 3-1506 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31885 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 26 (= 1A hex): Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early. 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. 98 (= 62 hex): Error at the transition to cyclic operation. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved. - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31886 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - check whether the firmware version of the encoder (r0148) matches the firmware version of Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1507 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31887 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved (Sensor Module for encoder 1). Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 96 (= 60 hex): Response received too late during runtime measurement. 97 (= 61 hex): Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31895 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1508 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31896 (N, A) Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Sensor Module for encoder 1), specified by the fault value, have changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Component number. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be used. - when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the original cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31899 (N, A) Encoder 1: Unknown fault Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A fault occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 1 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Fault number. Note: If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A31902 (F, N) Encoder 1: SPI-BUS error occurred Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Error when operating the internal SPI bus. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module. - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1509 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A31903 (F, N) Encoder 1: I2C-BUS error occurred Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Error when operating the internal I2C bus. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module. - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F31905 (N, A) Encoder 1: Parameterization error Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A parameter of encoder 1 was detected as being incorrect. It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder. The parameter involved can be determined as follows: - determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949). - determine the parameter index (p0187). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter xxxx = 421: For an EnDat/SSI encoder, the absolute position in the protocol must be less than or equal to 30 bits. yyyy = 0: No information available. yyyy = 1: The component does not support HTL level (p0405.1 = 0) combined with track monitoring A/B <> -A/B (p0405.2 = 1). yyyy = 2: A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out. Please start a new encoder identification. yyyy = 3: A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out. Please select a listed encoder in p0400 with a code number < 10000. yyyy = 4: This component does not support SSI encoders (p0404.9 = 1) without track A/B. yyyy = 5: For SQW encoder, value in p4686 greater than in p0425. yyyy = 6: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder cannot be used with this firmware version. yyyy = 7: For an SQW encoder, the Xact1 correction (p0437.2) is only permitted with equidistant zero marks. yyyy = 8: The motor pole pair width is not supported by the linear scale being used. yyyy = 9: The length of the position in the EnDat protocol may be a maximum of 32 bits. yyyy = 10: The connected encoder is not supported. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) 3-1510 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized. - correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187. - re parameter number = 314: - check the pole pair number and measuring gear ratio. The quotient of the "pole pair number" divided by the "measuring gear ratio" must be less than or equal to 1000 ((r0313 * p0433) / p0432 <= 1000). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31912 Encoder 1: Device combination is not permissible Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: ENCODER (NONE) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The selected device combination is not supported. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1003: The connected measuring unit cannot be operated with the EnDat 2.2 converter. For instance, the measuring unit has a pulse number/resolution of 2^n. 1005: The type of measuring unit (incremental) is not supported by the EnDat 2.2 converter. 1006: The maximum duration (31.25 s) of the EnDat transfer was exceeded. 2001: The set combination of current controller cycle, DP cycle and Safety cycle is not supported by the EnDat 2.2 converter. 2002: The resolution of the linear measuring unit does not match the pole pair width of the linear motor Remedy: Re fault value = 1003, 1005, 1006: - Use a measuring unit that is permissible. For fault value = 2001: - Set a permissible cycle combination (if required, use standard settings). For fault value = 2002: - Use a measuring unit with a lower resolution (p0422). A31915 (F, N) Encoder 1: Configuration error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The configuration for encoder 1 is incorrect. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Re-parameterization between fault/alarm is not permissible. 419: When the fine resolution Gx_XIST2 is configured, the encoder identifies a maximum possible absolute position actual value (r0483) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits. Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: No re-parameterization between fault/alarm. Re alarm value = 419: Reduce the fine resolution (p0419) or deactivate the monitoring (p0437.25), if the complete multiturn range is not required. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1511 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F31916 (N, A) Encoder 1: Parameterization fault Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A parameter of encoder 1 was detected as being incorrect. It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder. The parameter involved can be determined as follows: - determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949). - determine the parameter index (p0187). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number. Note: This fault is only output for encoders where r0404.10 = 1 or r0404.11 = 1. It corresponds to A31905 with encoders where r0404.10 = 0 and r0404.11 = 0. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized. - correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F31916 (N, A) Encoder 1: Parameterization fault Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2 Drive object: ENC Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A parameter of encoder 1 was detected as being incorrect. In the case of the ENCODER drive object, the selected encoder type (rotary/linear) might not match the function module setting (r0108.12). The parameter involved can be determined as follows: - determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949). - determine the parameter index (p0187). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized. - correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187. - if a linear encoder has been selected in parameter p0400/p0404, the "linear encoder" function module has to be activated (r0108.12 = 1) - if a rotary encoder has been selected in parameter p0400/p0404, the "linear encoder" function module should not be activated (r0108.12 = 0) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A31920 (F, N) Encoder 1: Temperature sensor fault Message value: Fault cause: %1, channel number: %2 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. 3-1512 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm). 2 (= 02 hex): Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm). Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = channel number, xx = error cause See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - check that the encoder cable is the correct type and is correctly connected. - check the temperature sensor selection in p0600 to p0603. - replace the Sensor Module (hardware defect or incorrect calibration data). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31930 (N) Encoder 1: Data logger has saved data Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the activated function "Data logger" (p0437.0 = 1) a fault has occurred with the Sensor Module. This alarm indicates that the diagnostics data corresponding to the fault was saved on the memory card. The diagnostics data is saved in the following folder: /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/SMTRC00.BIN ... /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/SMTRC07.BIN /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/SMTRCIDX.TXT The following information is contained in the TXT file: - Display of the last written BIN file. - Number of write operations that are still possible (from 10000 downwards). Note: Only Siemens can evaluate the BIN files. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm disappears automatically. The data logger is ready to record the next fault case. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A31940 (F, N) Encoder 1: Spindle sensor S1 voltage incorrect Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The voltage of analog sensor S1 is outside the permissible range. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Signal level from sensor S1. Note: A signal level of 500 mV corresponds to the numerical value 500 dec. Remedy: - Check the clamped tool. - Check the tolerance and if required, adapt (p5040). - Check the thresholds and if required, adapt (p5041). - Check analog sensor S1 and connections. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1513 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F31950 Encoder 1: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (OFF2) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): The fault value contains information regarding the fault source. Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - If necessary, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module to a later version. - contact the Hotline. A31999 (F, N) Encoder 1: Unknown alarm Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, ENC, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A alarm has occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 1 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Alarm number. Note: If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER) Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F32100 (N, A) Encoder 2: Zero mark distance error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance. For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the system. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). - if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438). - replace the encoder or encoder cable 3-1514 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32101 (N, A) Encoder 2: Zero mark failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425). - if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438). - when p0437.1 is active, check p4686. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32103 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude error, track R Message value: R track: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The amplitude of the reference track signal (track R) does not lie within the tolerance bandwidth for encoder 2. The fault can be initiated when the unipolar voltage level is exceeded (RP/RN) or if the differential amplitude is undershot. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = 0, xxxx = Signal level, track R (16 bits with sign) The response thresholds of the unipolar signal levels of the encoder are between < 1400 mV and > 3500 mV. The response threshold for the differential signal level of the encoder is < -1600 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note: The analog value of the amplitude error is not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. The fault value can only be represented between -32767 ... 32767 dec (-770 ... 770 mV). The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied: - Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1). - Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1). Remedy: - check the speed range; frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment might not be sufficient for the speed range - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable. - check whether the zero mark is connected and the signal cables RP and RN have been connected correctly - replace the encoder cable. - if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1515 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32110 (N, A) Encoder 2: Serial communications error Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol. Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line. Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms). Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data. Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it. Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested. Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading. Bit 7: Timeout for the register communication. Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits). Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow. Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice. Bit 11: Parity error. Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time. Bit 13: Data line incorrect. Bit 14: Fault for the register communication. Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1: - Enc defect F31111 may provide additional details. Re fault value, bit 1 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 2 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 3 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 4 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module. Re fault value, bit 5 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module. Re fault value, bit 6 = 1: - Update Sensor Module firmware. Re fault value, bit 7 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 8 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0429.2). Re fault value, bit 9 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module. Re fault value, bit 10 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0429.2, p0449). Re fault value, bit 11 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0436). Re fault value, bit 12 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0429.6). Re fault value, bit 13 = 1: - Check data line. Re fault value, bit 14 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1516 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32111 (N, A) Encoder 2: Absolute encoder internal fault Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin, additional information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The absolute encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = fault cause yyyy = 0: Bit 0: Lighting system failed. Bit 1: Signal amplitude too low. Bit 2: Position value incorrect. Bit 3: Encoder power supply overvoltage condition. Bit 4: Encoder power supply undervoltage condition. Bit 5: Encoder power supply overcurrent condition. Bit 6: The battery must be changed. yyyy = 1: Bit 0: Signal amplitude outside the control range. Bit 1: Error multiturn interface Bit 2: Internal data error (singleturn/multiturn not with single steps). Bit 3: Error EEPROM interface. Bit 4: SAR converter error. Bit 5: Fault for the register data transfer. Bit 6: Internal error identified at the error pin (nErr). Bit 7: Temperature threshold exceeded or fallen below. Remedy: For yyyy = 0: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 1 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 2 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 3 = 1: 5 V power supply voltage fault. When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC. When a motor encoder with a direct DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 4 = 1: 5 V power supply voltage fault. When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC. When using a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 5 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 6 = 1: The battery must be changed (only for encoders with battery back-up). For yyyy = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace encoder. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1517 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32115 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude error track A or B (A^2 + B^2) Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 2 exceeds the permissible tolerance. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response thresholds are < 170 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10): The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response thresholds are < 1070 mV and > 3582 mV. A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). The following applies to measuring systems without their own bearing system: - adjust the scanning head and check the bearing system of the measuring wheel. The following applies for measuring systems with their own bearing system: - ensure that the encoder housing is not subject to any axial force. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32116 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude error monitoring track A + B Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The amplitude of the rectified encoder signals A and B and the amplitude from the roots of A^2 + B^2 for encoder 2 are not within the tolerance bandwidth. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response thresholds are < 130 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 955 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1518 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32117 (N, A) Encoder 2: Inversion error signals A/B/R Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For a square-wave encoder (bipolar, double ended) signals A*, B* and R* are not inverted with respect to signals A, B and R. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bits 0 ... 15: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Bit 16: Error track A. Bit 17: Error track B. Bit 18: Error track R. Note: For SMC30 (order no.. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), CUA32, and CU310, the following applies: A square-wave encoder without track R is used and track monitoring (p0405.2 = 1) is activated. Remedy: - Check the encoder/cable. - Does the encoder supply signals and the associated inverted signals? Note: For SMC30 (order no. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), the following applies: - check the setting of p0405 (p0405.2 = 1 is only possible if the encoder is connected at X520). For a square-wave encoder without track R, the following jumpers must be set for the connection at X520 (SMC30) or X23 (CUA32, CU310): - pin 10 (reference signal R) <--> pin 7 (encoder power supply, ground) - pin 11 (reference signal R inverted) <--> pin 4 (encoder power supply) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32118 (N, A) Encoder 2: Speed difference outside the tolerance range Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference has exceeded the value in p0492 over several sampling cycles. The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: p0492 Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions. - check the grounding of the tachometer shielding. - if required, increase the maximum speed difference per sampling cycle (p0492). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32120 (N, A) Encoder 2: Power supply voltage fault Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: A power supply fault was detected for encoder 2. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Undervoltage condition on the sense line. Bit 1: Overcurrent condition for the encoder power supply. Bit 2: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation negative. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1519 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 3: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation positive. Bit 4: The 24 V power supply through the Power Module (PM) is overloaded. Bit 5: Overcurrent at the EnDat connection of the converter. Bit 6: Overvoltage at the EnDat connection of the converter. Bit 7: Hardware fault at the EnDat connection of the converter. Note: If the encoder cables 6FX2002-2EQ00-.... and 6FX2002-2CH00-.... are interchanged, this can result in the encoder being destroyed because the pins of the operating voltage are reversed. Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - check the plug connections of the encoder cable. - SMC30: Check the parameterization (p0404.22). Re fault value, bit 1 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - replace the encoder or encoder cable Re fault value, bit 2 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - replace the encoder or encoder cable Re fault value, bit 3 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - replace the encoder or encoder cable Re fault value, bit 5 = 1: - Measuring unit correctly connected at the converter? - Replace the measuring unit or the cable to the measuring unit. Re fault value, bit 6, 7 = 1: - Replace the defective EnDat 2.2 converter. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32121 (N, A) Encoder 2: Coarse position error Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected on the module. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position. Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32122 Encoder 2: Internal power supply voltage faulty Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault in internal reference voltage of ASICs for encoder 2. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Reference voltage error. 2: Internal undervoltage. 3: Internal overvoltage. Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module. 3-1520 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32123 (N, A) Encoder 2: Signal level A/B unipolar outside tolerance Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The unipolar level (AP/AN or BP/BN) for encoder 2 is outside the permissible tolerance. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Either AP or AN outside the tolerance. Bit 16 = 1: Either BP or BN outside the tolerance. The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV. The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV. Note: The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied: - Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1). - Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1). Remedy: - make sure that the encoder cables and shielding are installed in an EMC-compliant manner. - check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable. - check the short-circuit of a signal cable with mass or the operating voltage. - replace the encoder cable. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32125 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude error track A or B overcontrolled Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude of track A or B for encoder 2 exceeds the permissible tolerance band. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response threshold is > 750 mV. This fault also occurs if the A/D converter is overcontrolled. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10): The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is > 3582 mV. A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32126 (N, A) Encoder 2: Amplitude AB too high Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2 or |A| + |B|) for encoder 2 exceeds the permissible tolerance. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1521 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Angle xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign) The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response threshold for (|A| + |B|) is > 1120 mV or the root of (A^2 + B^2) > 955 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value of 299A hex = 10650 dec. The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is present at the negative zero crossover of track B. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32129 (N, A) Encoder 2: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 mechanical or +/-60 electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater than +/-60 electrical. One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 mechanical. One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 electrical. The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incorrect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough. After the fine synchronization using one reference mark or 2 reference marks for distance-coded encoders, this fault is no longer initiated, but instead, Alarm A32429. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): For track C/D, the following applies: Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). For Hall signals, the following applies: Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). Remedy: - track C or D not connected. - correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D. - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the adjustment of the Hall sensor. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32130 (N, A) Encoder 2: Zero mark and position error from the coarse synchronization Message value: Angular deviation, electrical: %1, angle, mechanical: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: After initializing the pole position using track C/D, Hall signals or pole position identification routine, the zero mark was detected outside the permissible range. For distance-coded encoders, the test is carried out after passing 2 zero marks. Fine synchronization was not carried out. When initializing via track C/D (p0404) then it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-18 mechanical. When initializing via Hall sensors (p0404) or pole position identification (p1982) it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-60 electrical. 3-1522 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex yyyy: Determined mechanical zero mark position (can only be used for track C/D). xxxx: Deviation of the zero mark from the expected position as electrical angle. Scaling: 32768 dec = 180 Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - if the Hall sensor is used as an equivalent for track C/D, check the connection. - Check the connection of track C or D. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32131 (N, A) Encoder 2: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: Absolute encoder: When cyclically reading the absolute position, an excessively high difference to the incremental position was detected. The absolute position that was read is rejected. Limit value for the deviation: - EnDat encoder: Is supplied from the encoder and is a minimum of 2 quadrants (e.g. EQI 1325 > 2 quadrants, EQN 1325 > 50 quadrants). - other encoders: 15 pulses = 60 quadrants. Incremental encoder: When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected. For equidistant zero marks, the following applies: - The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have n times the distance referred to the first zero mark. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies: - the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have the expected distance to the first zero mark pair. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check whether the coding disk is dirty or there are strong ambient magnetic fields. - adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425). - if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32135 Encoder 2: Fault when determining the position Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word. Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed in the fault value. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: F1 (safety status display) Bit 1: F2 (safety status display) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1523 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 2: Lighting (reserved) Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved) Bit 4: Position value (reserved) Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved) Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved) Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved) Bit 8: Battery (reserved) Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display) Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 25: Singleturn power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved) Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. F32136 Encoder 2: Error when determining multiturn information Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word. Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed in the fault value. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: F1 (safety status display) Bit 1: F2 (safety status display) Bit 2: Lighting (reserved) Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved) Bit 4: Position value (reserved) Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved) Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved) Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved) Bit 8: Battery (reserved) Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display) Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 25: Singleturn power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved) Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. 3-1524 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32137 Encoder 2: Internal fault when determining the position Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Replace encoder. F32138 Encoder 2: Internal error when determining multiturn information Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Only for internal SIEMENS troubleshooting. Remedy: Replace encoder. F32150 (N, A) Encoder 2: Initialization error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: Encoder functionality selected in p0404 is not operating correctly. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Encoder malfunction. The bit assignment corresponds to that of p0404 (e.g. bit 5 set: Error track C/D). Remedy: - Check that p0404 is correctly set. - check the encoder type used (incremental/absolute) and for SMCxx, the encoder cable. - if relevant, note additional fault messages that describe the fault in detail. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32151 (N, A) Encoder 2: Encoder speed for initialization AB too high Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The encoder speed is too high during while initializing the sensor. Remedy: Reduce the speed of the encoder accordingly during initialization. If necessary, de-activate monitoring (p0437.29). See also: p0437 (Sensor Module configuration extended) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1525 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32152 (N, A) Encoder 2: Maximum input frequency exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The maximum input frequency of the encoder evaluation has been exceeded. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Actual input frequency in Hz. See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.) Remedy: - Reduce the speed. - Use an encoder with a lower pulse number (p0408). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32160 (N, A) Encoder 2: Analog sensor channel A failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside the measuring range set in (p4673). 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. For fault value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673). For fault value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32161 (N, A) Encoder 2: Analog sensor channel B failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside the measuring range set in (p4675). 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. For fault value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675). For fault value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1526 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32163 (N, A) Encoder 2: Analog sensor position value exceeds limit value Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The position value has exceeded the permissible range of -0.5 ... +0.5. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Position value from the LVDT sensor. 2: Position value from the encoder characteristic. Remedy: For fault value = 1: - Check the LVDT ratio (p4678). - check the reference signal connection at track B. For fault value = 2: - check the coefficients of the characteristic (p4663 ... p4666). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A32400 (F, N) Encoder 2: Alarm threshold zero mark distance error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance. For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the system. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32401 (F, N) Encoder 2: Alarm threshold zero mark failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425). - replace the encoder or encoder cable (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1527 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F32405 (N, A) Encoder 2: Temperature in the encoder evaluation inadmissible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The encoder evaluation for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ has detected an inadmissible temperature. The fault threshold is 125 C. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Measured board/module temperature in 0.1 C. Remedy: Reduce the ambient temperature for the DRIVE-CLiQ connection of the motor. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A32407 (F, N) Encoder 2: Function limit reached Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The encoder has reached one of its function limits. A service is recommended. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1 : Incremental signals 3 : Absolute track 4 : Code connection Remedy: Perform service. Replace the encoder if necessary. Note: The actual functional reserve of an encoder can be displayed via r4651. See also: p4650 (Encoder functional reserve component number), r4651 (Encoder functional reserve) Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32410 (F, N) Encoder 2: Serial communications Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol. Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line. Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms). Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data. Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it. Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested. Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading. Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits). Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow. Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice. 3-1528 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 11: Parity error. Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace encoder. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32411 (F, N) Encoder 2: Absolute encoder signals internal alarms Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin, additional information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The absolute encoder fault word includes alarm bits that have been set. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = fault cause yyyy = 0: Bit 0: Frequency exceeded (speed too high). Bit 1: Temperature exceeded. Bit 2: Control reserve, lighting system exceeded. Bit 3: Battery discharged. Bit 4: Reference point passed. yyyy = 1: Bit 0: Signal amplitude outside the control range. Bit 1: Error multiturn interface Bit 2: Internal data error (singleturn/multiturn not with single steps). Bit 3: Error EEPROM interface. Bit 4: SAR converter error. Bit 5: Fault for the register data transfer. Bit 6: Internal error identified at the error pin (nErr). Bit 7: Temperature threshold exceeded or fallen below. Remedy: Replace encoder. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32412 (F, N) Encoder 2: Error bit set in the serial protocol Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol. Bit 1: Alarm bit in the position protocol. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace encoder. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1529 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A32414 (F, N) Encoder 2: Amplitude error track C or D (C^2 + D^2) Message value: C track: %1, D track: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The amplitude (C^2 + D^2) of track C or D of the encoder or from the Hall signals, is not within the tolerance bandwidth. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track D (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track C (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note: If the amplitude is not within the tolerance bandwidth, then it cannot be used to initialize the start position. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). - check the Hall sensor box Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32415 (F, N) Encoder 2: Amplitude alarm track A or B (A^2 + B^2) Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 2 exceeds the permissible tolerance. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Angle xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign) The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response threshold is < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder). A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 299A hex = 10650 dec. The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is present at the negative zero crossover of track B. Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10): The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is < 1414 mV (1.0 Vrms). A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 3333 hex = 13107 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check the speed range, frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment is not sufficient for the speed range. - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). - if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1530 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A32418 (F, N) Encoder 2: Speed difference per sampling rate exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference between two sampling cycles has exceeded the value in p0492. The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: p0492 Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions. - check the grounding of the tachometer shielding. - if required, increase the setting of p0492. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32419 (F, N) Encoder 2: Track A or B outside tolerance Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The amplitude/phase/offset correction for track A or B is at the limit. Amplitude error correction: Amplitude B / Amplitude A = 0.78 ... 1.27 Phase: <84 degrees or >96 degrees SMC20: Offset correction: +/-140 mV SMC10: Offset correction: +/-650 mV Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): xxxx1: Minimum of the offset correction, track B xxxx2: Maximum of the offset correction, track B xxx1x: Minimum of the offset correction, track A xxx2x: Maximum of the offset correction, track A xx1xx: Minimum of the amplitude correction, track B/A xx2xx: Maximum of the amplitude correction, track B/A x1xxx: Minimum of the phase error correction x2xxx: Maximum of the phase error correction 1xxxx: Minimum of the cubic correction 2xxxx: Maximum of the cubic correction Remedy: - check mechanical mounting tolerances for encoders without their own bearings (e.g. toothed-wheel encoders). - check the plug connections (also the transition resistance). - check the encoder signals. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32421 (F, N) Encoder 2: Coarse position error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1531 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 3: The absolute position of the serial protocol and track A/B differ by half an encoder pulse. The absolute position must have its zero position in the quadrants in which both tracks are negative. In the case of a fault, the position can be incorrect by one encoder pulse. Remedy: Re alarm value = 3: - For a standard encoder with cable, contact the manufacturer where relevant. - correct the assignment of the tracks to the position value that is serially transferred. To do this, the two tracks must be connected, inverted, at the Sensor Module (interchange A with A* and B with B*) or, for a programmable encoder, check the zero offset of the position. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32422 (F, N) Encoder 2: Pulses per revolution square-wave encoder outside tolerance bandwidth Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance. This alarm is triggered with active square-wave encoder PPR correction and re-parameterized fault 31131 if the accumulator contains larger values than p4683 or p4684. The zero mark distance for zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): accumulated differential pulses in encoder pulses. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32429 (F, N) Encoder 2: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 mechanical or +/-60 electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater than +/-60 electrical. One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 mechanical. One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 electrical. The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incorrect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): For track C/D, the following applies: Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). For Hall signals, the following applies: Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). Remedy: - track C or D not connected. - correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D. - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the adjustment of the Hall sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY 3-1532 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32431 (F, N) Encoder 2: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected. For equidistant zero marks, the following applies: - The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have n times the distance referred to the first zero mark. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies: - the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have the expected distance to the first zero mark pair. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - Clean coding disk or remove strong magnetic fields. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32432 (F, N) Encoder 2: Rotor position adaptation corrects deviation Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For track A/B, pulses have been lost or too many have been counted. These pulses are presently being corrected. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured deviation of zero mark in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check encoder limit frequency. - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32442 (F, N) Encoder 2: Battery voltage pre-alarm Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When switched-off, the encoder uses a battery to back up the multiturn information. The battery voltage is no longer sufficient to check the multiturn information. Remedy: Replace battery. Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1533 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A32443 (F, N) Encoder 2: Unipolar CD signal level outside specification Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The unipolar level (CP/CN or DP/DN) for encoder 2 is outside the permissible tolerance. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Either CP or CN outside the tolerance. Bit 16 = 1: Either DP or DN outside the tolerance. The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV. The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV. Note: The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied: - Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1). - Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable. - are the C/D tracks connected correctly (have the signal lines CP and CN or DP and DN been interchanged)? - replace the encoder cable. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32460 (N) Encoder 2: Analog sensor channel A failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673. 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. Re alarm value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673). Re alarm value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32461 (N) Encoder 2: Analog sensor channel B failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside the measuring range set in (p4675). 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. Re alarm value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675). 3-1534 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re alarm value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32462 (N) Encoder 2: Analog sensor, no channel active Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Channel A and B are not activated for the analog sensor. Remedy: - activate channel A and/or channel B (p4670). - check the encoder configuration (p0404.17). See also: p4670 (Analog sensor configuration) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32463 (N) Encoder 2: Analog sensor position value exceeds limit value Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The position value has exceeded the permissible range of -0.5 ... +0.5. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Position value from the LVDT sensor. 2: Position value from the encoder characteristic. Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - Check the LVDT ratio (p4678). - check the reference signal connection at track B. Re alarm value = 2: - check the coefficients of the characteristic (p4663 ... p4666). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32470 (F, N) Encoder 2: Soiling detected Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the case of the alternative encoder system interface on the Sensor Module Cabinet 30 (SMC30), encoder soiling is signaled via a 0 signal at terminal X521.7. Remedy: - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F32500 (N, A) Encoder 2: Position tracking traversing range exceeded Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For a configured linear axis without modulo correction, the drive/encoder has exceeded the maximum possible traversing range. The value should be read in p0412 and interpreted as the number of motor revolutions. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1535 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For p0411.0 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421. For p0411.3 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is pre-set (default value) to the highest possible value and is +/-p0412/2 (rounded off to complete revolutions). The highest possible value depends on the pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419). Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32501 (N, A) Encoder 2: Position tracking encoder position outside tolerance window Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When powered down, the drive/encoder was moved through a distance greater than was parameterized in the tolerance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system and encoder. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value. The sign designates the traversing direction. Note: The deviation (difference) found is also displayed in r0477. See also: p0413 (Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window), r0477 (Measuring gear, position difference) Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507). See also: p0010 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32502 (N, A) Encoder 2: Encoder with measuring gear, without valid signals Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The encoder with measuring gear no longer provides any valid signals. Remedy: It must be ensured that all of the encoders, with mounted measuring gear, provide valid actual values in operation. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32503 (N, A) Encoder 2: Position tracking cannot be reset Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The position tracking for the measuring gear cannot be reset. 3-1536 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A32700 Encoder 2: Effectivity test does not supply the expected value Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit x = 1: Effectivity test x unsuccessful. Remedy: Replace encoder. N32800 (F) Encoder 2: Group signal Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The motor encoder has detected at least one fault. Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F32801 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32802 (N, A) Encoder 2: Time slice overflow Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred in encoder 2. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1537 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yx hex: y = function involved (Siemens-internal fault diagnostics), x = time slice involved x = 9: Time slice overflow of the fast (current controller clock cycle) time slice. x = A: Time slice overflow of the average time slice. x = C: Time slice overflow of the slow time slice. yx = 3E7: Timeout when waiting for SYNO (e.g. unexpected return to non-cyclic operation). Remedy: Increase the current controller sampling time Note: For a current controller sampling time = 31.25 s, use an SMx20 with order number 6SL3055-0AA00-5xA3. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32804 (N, A) Encoder 2: Checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY) Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Sensor Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex yyyy: Memory area involved. xxxx: Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - upgrade firmware to later version (>= V2.6 HF3, >= V4.3 SP2, >= V4.4). - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained. - replace the Sensor Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32805 (N, A) Encoder 2: EPROM checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 01: EEPROM access error. 02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM. Remedy: Replace the module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1538 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32806 (N, A) Encoder 2: Initialization error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The encoder was not successfully initialized. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Bit 0, 1: Encoder initialization with the motor rotating has failed (deviation involving coarse and fine position in encoder pulses/4). Bit 2: Mid-voltage matching for track A unsuccessful. Bit 3: Mid-voltage matching for track B unsuccessful. Bit 4: Mid-voltage matching for acceleration input unsuccessful. Bit 5: Mid-voltage matching for track safety A unsuccessful. Bit 6: Mid-voltage matching for track safety B unsuccessful. Bit 7: Mid-voltage matching for track C unsuccessful. Bit 8: Mid-voltage matching for track D unsuccessful. Bit 9: Mid-voltage matching for track R unsuccessful. Bit 10: The difference in mid-voltages between A and B is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 11: The difference in mid-voltages between C and D is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 12: The difference in mid-voltages between safety A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 13: The difference in mid-voltages between A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 14: The difference in mid-voltages between B and safety A is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 15: The standard deviation of the calculated mid-voltages is too great (> 0.3 V) Bit 16: Internal fault - fault when reading a register (CAFE) Bit 17: Internal fault - fault when writing a register (CAFE) Bit 18: Internal fault: No mid-voltage matching available Bit 19: Internal error - ADC access error. Bit 20: Internal error - no zero crossover found. Bit 28: Error while initializing the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit. Bit 29: Error when reading out the data from the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit. Bit 30: EEPROM checksum of the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit incorrect. Bit 31: Data of the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit inconsistent. Note: Bit 0, 1: Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0 Bits 2 ... 20: 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A1 and higher Remedy: Acknowledge fault. If the fault cannot be acknowledged: Bits 2 ... 9: Check encoder power supply. Bits 2 ... 14: Check the corresponding cable. Bit 15 with no other bits: Check track R, check settings in p0404. Bit 28: Check the cable between the EnDat 2.2 converter and the measuring unit. Bit 29 ... 31: Replace the defective measuring unit. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32811 (N, A) Encoder 2: Encoder serial number changed Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The encoder serial number has changed. The change is only checked for encoders with serial number (e.g. EnDat encoders). - The encoder was replaced. Note: With closed-loop position control, the serial number is accepted when starting the adjustment (p2507 = 2). When the encoder is adjusted (p2507 = 3), the serial number is checked for changes and if required, the adjustment is reset (p2507 = 1). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1539 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Proceed as follows to hide serial number monitoring: - set the following serial numbers for the corresponding Encoder Data Set: p0441= FF, p0442 = 0, p0443 = 0, p0444 = 0, p0445 = 0. Remedy: Mechanically adjust the encoder. Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32812 (N, A) Encoder 2: Requested cycle or RX-/TX timing not supported Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A cycle requested from the Control Unit or RX/TX timing is not supported. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Application cycle is not supported. 1: DRIVE-CLiQ cycle is not supported. 2: Distance between RX and TX instants in time too low. 3: TX instant in time too early. Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32813 Encoder 2: Hardware logic unit failed Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: ALU watchdog has responded. Bit 1: ALU has detected a sign-of-life error. Remedy: Replace encoder. F32820 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder concerned. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 7 (= 07 hex): A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram. 3-1540 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 8 (= 08 hex): No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32835 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder concerned. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32836 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1541 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32837 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32845 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32850 (N, A) Encoder 2: Encoder evaluation, internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the Sensor Module of encoder 2. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Background time slice is blocked. 2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK. 3-1542 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 10000: OEM memory of the EnDat encoder contains data that cannot be interpreted. 11000 ... 11499: Descriptive data from EEPROM incorrect. 11500 ... 11899: Calibration data from EEPROM incorrect. 11900 ... 11999: Configuration data from EEPROM incorrect. 12000 ... 12008: Communication with AD converter faulted. 16000: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization application error. 16001: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization ALU error. 16002: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder HISI / SISI initialization error. 16003: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder safety initialization error. 16004: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder internal system error. Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module. - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32851 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit. The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32860 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1543 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. 17 (= 11 hex): CRC error and the receive telegram is too early. 18 (= 12 hex): The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 19 (= 13 hex): The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 20 (= 14 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 21 (= 15 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 22 (= 16 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early. 25 (= 19 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32875 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Supply voltage failed Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage has failed. Fault cause: 9 (= 09 hex): The power supply voltage for the components has failed. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the power supply voltage wiring for the DRIVE-CLiQ component (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the dimensioning of the power supply for the DRIVE-CLiQ component. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32885 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. 3-1544 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 26 (= 1A hex): Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early. 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. 98 (= 62 hex): Error at the transition to cyclic operation. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved. - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32886 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32887 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved (Sensor Module for encoder 2). Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1545 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 96 (= 60 hex): Response received too late during runtime measurement. 97 (= 61 hex): Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32895 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 2) involved to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32896 (N, A) Encoder 2 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Sensor Module for encoder 2), specified by the fault value, have changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Component number. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be used. - when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the original cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1546 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F32899 (N, A) Encoder 2: Unknown fault Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A fault occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 2 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Fault number. Note: If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A32902 (F, N) Encoder 2: SPI-BUS error occurred Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Error when operating the internal SPI bus. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module. - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F32905 (N, A) Encoder 2: Parameterization error Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A parameter of encoder 2 was detected as being incorrect. It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder. The parameter involved can be determined as follows: - determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949). - determine the parameter index (p0187). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter xxxx = 421: For an EnDat/SSI encoder, the absolute position in the protocol must be less than or equal to 30 bits. yyyy = 0: No information available. yyyy = 1: The component does not support HTL level (p0405.1 = 0) combined with track monitoring A/B <> -A/B (p0405.2 = 1). yyyy = 2: A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out. Please start a new encoder identification. yyyy = 3: A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out. Please select a listed encoder in p0400 with a code number < 10000. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1547 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms yyyy = 4: This component does not support SSI encoders (p0404.9 = 1) without track A/B. yyyy = 5: For SQW encoder, value in p4686 greater than in p0425. yyyy = 6: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder cannot be used with this firmware version. yyyy = 7: For an SQW encoder, the Xact1 correction (p0437.2) is only permitted with equidistant zero marks. yyyy = 8: The motor pole pair width is not supported by the linear scale being used. yyyy = 9: The length of the position in the EnDat protocol may be a maximum of 32 bits. yyyy = 10: The connected encoder is not supported. Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized. - correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187. - re parameter number = 314: - check the pole pair number and measuring gear ratio. The quotient of the "pole pair number" divided by the "measuring gear ratio" must be less than or equal to 1000 ((r0313 * p0433) / p0432 <= 1000). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F32912 Encoder 2: Device combination is not permissible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The selected device combination is not supported. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1003: The connected measuring unit cannot be operated with the EnDat 2.2 converter. For instance, the measuring unit has a pulse number/resolution of 2^n. 1005: The type of measuring unit (incremental) is not supported by the EnDat 2.2 converter. 1006: The maximum duration (31.25 s) of the EnDat transfer was exceeded. 2001: The set combination of current controller cycle, DP cycle and Safety cycle is not supported by the EnDat 2.2 converter. 2002: The resolution of the linear measuring unit does not match the pole pair width of the linear motor Remedy: Re fault value = 1003, 1005, 1006: - Use a measuring unit that is permissible. For fault value = 2001: - Set a permissible cycle combination (if required, use standard settings). For fault value = 2002: - Use a measuring unit with a lower resolution (p0422). A32915 (F, N) Encoder 2: Configuration error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The configuration for encoder 2 is incorrect. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Re-parameterization between fault/alarm is not permissible. 3-1548 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 419: When the fine resolution Gx_XIST2 is configured, the encoder identifies a maximum possible absolute position actual value (r0483) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits. Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: No re-parameterization between fault/alarm. Re alarm value = 419: Reduce the fine resolution (p0419) or deactivate the monitoring (p0437.25), if the complete multiturn range is not required. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F32916 (N, A) Encoder 2: Parameterization fault Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A parameter of encoder 2 was detected as being incorrect. It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder. The parameter involved can be determined as follows: - determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949). - determine the parameter index (p0187). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number. Note: This fault is only output for encoders where r0404.10 = 1 or r0404.11 = 1. It corresponds to A32905 with encoders where r0404.10 = 0 and r0404.11 = 0. Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized. - correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A32920 (F, N) Encoder 2: Temperature sensor fault Message value: Fault cause: %1, channel number: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm). 2 (= 02 hex): Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm). Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = channel number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check that the encoder cable is the correct type and is correctly connected. - check the temperature sensor selection in p0600 to p0603. - replace the Sensor Module (hardware defect or incorrect calibration data). Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1549 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A32930 (N) Encoder 2: Data logger has saved data Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the activated function "Data logger" (p0437.0 = 1) a fault has occurred with the Sensor Module. This alarm indicates that the diagnostics data corresponding to the fault was saved on the memory card. The diagnostics data is saved in the following folder: /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/SMTRC00.BIN ... /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/SMTRC07.BIN /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/SMTRCIDX.TXT The following information is contained in the TXT file: - Display of the last written BIN file. - Number of write operations that are still possible (from 10000 downwards). Note: Only Siemens can evaluate the BIN files. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm disappears automatically. The data logger is ready to record the next fault case. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A32940 (F, N) Encoder 2: Spindle sensor S1 voltage incorrect Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The voltage of analog sensor S1 is outside the permissible range. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Signal level from sensor S1. Note: A signal level of 500 mV corresponds to the numerical value 500 dec. Remedy: - Check the clamped tool. - Check the tolerance and if required, adapt (p5040). - Check the thresholds and if required, adapt (p5041). - Check analog sensor S1 and connections. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F32950 Encoder 2: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (OFF2) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Information about the fault source. Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - If necessary, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module to a later version. - contact the Hotline. 3-1550 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A32999 (F, N) Encoder 2: Unknown alarm Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A alarm has occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 2 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Alarm number. Note: If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F33100 (N, A) Encoder 3: Zero mark distance error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance. For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the system. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). - if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33101 (N, A) Encoder 3: Zero mark failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425). - if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1551 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - when p0437.1 is active, check p4686. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33103 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude error, track R Message value: R track: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The amplitude of the reference track signal (track R) does not lie within the tolerance bandwidth for encoder 3. The fault can be initiated when the unipolar voltage level is exceeded (RP/RN) or if the differential amplitude is undershot. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = 0, xxxx = Signal level, track R (16 bits with sign) The response thresholds of the unipolar signal levels of the encoder are between < 1400 mV and > 3500 mV. The response threshold for the differential signal level of the encoder is < -1600 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note: The analog value of the amplitude error is not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. The fault value can only be represented between -32767 ... 32767 dec (-770 ... 770 mV). The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied: - Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1). - Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1). Remedy: - check the speed range; frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment might not be sufficient for the speed range - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable. - check whether the zero mark is connected and the signal cables RP and RN have been connected correctly - replace the encoder cable. - if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33110 (N, A) Encoder 3: Serial communications error Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol. Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line. Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms). Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data. Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it. Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested. Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading. Bit 7: Timeout for the register communication. Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits). Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow. Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice. Bit 11: Parity error. Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time. 3-1552 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 13: Data line incorrect. Bit 14: Fault for the register communication. Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1: - Enc defect F31111 may provide additional details. Re fault value, bit 1 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 2 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 3 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 4 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module. Re fault value, bit 5 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module. Re fault value, bit 6 = 1: - Update Sensor Module firmware. Re fault value, bit 7 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Re fault value, bit 8 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0429.2). Re fault value, bit 9 = 1: - EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module. Re fault value, bit 10 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0429.2, p0449). Re fault value, bit 11 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0436). Re fault value, bit 12 = 1: - Check parameterization (p0429.6). Re fault value, bit 13 = 1: - Check data line. Re fault value, bit 14 = 1: - Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33111 (N, A) Encoder 3: Absolute encoder internal fault Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin, additional information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The absolute encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = fault cause yyyy = 0: Bit 0: Lighting system failed. Bit 1: Signal amplitude too low. Bit 2: Position value incorrect. Bit 3: Encoder power supply overvoltage condition. Bit 4: Encoder power supply undervoltage condition. Bit 5: Encoder power supply overcurrent condition. Bit 6: The battery must be changed. yyyy = 1: Bit 0: Signal amplitude outside the control range. Bit 1: Error multiturn interface Bit 2: Internal data error (singleturn/multiturn not with single steps). Bit 3: Error EEPROM interface. Bit 4: SAR converter error. Bit 5: Fault for the register data transfer. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1553 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 6: Internal error identified at the error pin (nErr). Bit 7: Temperature threshold exceeded or fallen below. Remedy: For yyyy = 0: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 1 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 2 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 3 = 1: 5 V power supply voltage fault. When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC. When a motor encoder with a direct DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 4 = 1: 5 V power supply voltage fault. When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC. When using a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 5 = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the motor. Re fault value, bit 6 = 1: The battery must be changed (only for encoders with battery back-up). For yyyy = 1: Encoder is defective. Replace encoder. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33112 (N, A) Encoder 3: Error bit set in the serial protocol Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol. Remedy: For fault value, bit 0 = 1: In the case of an EnDat encoder, F31111 may provide further details. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33115 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude error track A or B (A^2 + B^2) Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 3 exceeds the permissible tolerance. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response thresholds are < 170 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV. 3-1554 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10): The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response thresholds are < 1070 mV and > 3582 mV. A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). The following applies to measuring systems without their own bearing system: - adjust the scanning head and check the bearing system of the measuring wheel. The following applies for measuring systems with their own bearing system: - ensure that the encoder housing is not subject to any axial force. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33116 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude error monitoring track A + B Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The amplitude of the rectified encoder signals A and B and the amplitude from the roots of A^2 + B^2 for encoder 3 are not within the tolerance bandwidth. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response thresholds are < 130 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 955 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33117 (N, A) Encoder 3: Inversion error signals A/B/R Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For a square-wave encoder (bipolar, double ended) signals A*, B* and R* are not inverted with respect to signals A, B and R. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bits 0 ... 15: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Bit 16: Error track A. Bit 17: Error track B. Bit 18: Error track R. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1555 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: For SMC30 (order no.. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), CUA32, and CU310, the following applies: A square-wave encoder without track R is used and track monitoring (p0405.2 = 1) is activated. Remedy: - Check the encoder/cable. - Does the encoder supply signals and the associated inverted signals? Note: For SMC30 (order no. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), the following applies: - check the setting of p0405 (p0405.2 = 1 is only possible if the encoder is connected at X520). For a square-wave encoder without track R, the following jumpers must be set for the connection at X520 (SMC30) or X23 (CUA32, CU310): - pin 10 (reference signal R) <--> pin 7 (encoder power supply, ground) - pin 11 (reference signal R inverted) <--> pin 4 (encoder power supply) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33118 (N, A) Encoder 3: Speed difference outside the tolerance range Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference has exceeded the value in p0492 over several sampling cycles. The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: p0492 Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions. - check the grounding of the tachometer shielding. - if required, increase the maximum speed difference per sampling cycle (p0492). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33120 (N, A) Encoder 3: Power supply voltage fault Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: A power supply fault was detected for encoder 3. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: Undervoltage condition on the sense line. Bit 1: Overcurrent condition for the encoder power supply. Bit 2: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation negative. Bit 3: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation positive. Bit 4: The 24 V power supply of the Power Module (PM) is overloaded. Bit 5: Overcurrent at the EnDat connection of the converter. Bit 6: Overvoltage at the EnDat connection of the converter. Bit 7: Hardware fault at the EnDat connection of the converter. Note: If the encoder cables 6FX2002-2EQ00-.... and 6FX2002-2CH00-.... are interchanged, this can result in the encoder being destroyed because the pins of the operating voltage are reversed. Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - check the plug connections of the encoder cable. - SMC30: Check the parameterization (p0404.22). 3-1556 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re fault value, bit 1 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - replace the encoder or encoder cable Re fault value, bit 2 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - replace the encoder or encoder cable Re fault value, bit 3 = 1: - correct encoder cable connected? - replace the encoder or encoder cable Re fault value, bit 5 = 1: - Measuring unit correctly connected at the converter? - Replace the measuring unit or the cable to the measuring unit. Re fault value, bit 6, 7 = 1: - Replace the defective EnDat 2.2 converter. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33121 (N, A) Encoder 3: Coarse position error Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected on the module. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position. Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33122 Encoder 3: Internal power supply voltage faulty Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault in internal reference voltage of ASICs for encoder 3. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Reference voltage error. 2: Internal undervoltage. 3: Internal overvoltage. Remedy: Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module. F33123 (N, A) Encoder 3: Signal level A/B unipolar outside tolerance Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The unipolar level (AP/AN or BP/BN) for encoder 3 is outside the permissible tolerance. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Either AP or AN outside the tolerance. Bit 16 = 1: Either BP or BN outside the tolerance. The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV. The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1557 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied: - Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1). - Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1). Remedy: - make sure that the encoder cables and shielding are installed in an EMC-compliant manner. - check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable. - check the short-circuit of a signal cable with mass or the operating voltage. - replace the encoder cable. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33125 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude error track A or B overcontrolled Message value: A track: %1, B-track: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude of track A or B for encoder 3 exceeds the permissible tolerance band. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response threshold is > 750 mV. This fault also occurs if the A/D converter is overcontrolled. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10): The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is > 3582 mV. A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33126 (N, A) Encoder 3: Amplitude AB too high Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2 or |A| + |B|) for encoder 3 exceeds the permissible tolerance. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Angle xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign) The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response threshold for (|A| + |B|) is > 1120 mV or the root of (A^2 + B^2) > 955 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value of 299A hex = 10650 dec. The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is present at the negative zero crossover of track B. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - replace the encoder or encoder cable 3-1558 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33129 (N, A) Encoder 3: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 mechanical or +/-60 electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater than +/-60 electrical. One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 mechanical. One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 electrical. The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incorrect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough. After the fine synchronization using one reference mark or 2 reference marks for distance-coded encoders, this fault is no longer initiated, but instead, Alarm A33429. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): For track C/D, the following applies: Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). For Hall signals, the following applies: Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). Remedy: - track C or D not connected. - correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D. - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the adjustment of the Hall sensor. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33130 (N, A) Encoder 3: Zero mark and position error from the coarse synchronization Message value: Angular deviation, electrical: %1, angle, mechanical: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: After initializing the pole position using track C/D, Hall signals or pole position identification routine, the zero mark was detected outside the permissible range. For distance-coded encoders, the test is carried out after passing 2 zero marks. Fine synchronization was not carried out. When initializing via track C/D (p0404) then it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-18 mechanical. When initializing via Hall sensors (p0404) or pole position identification (p1982) it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-60 electrical. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex yyyy: Determined mechanical zero mark position (can only be used for track C/D). xxxx: Deviation of the zero mark from the expected position as electrical angle. Scaling: 32768 dec = 180 Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - if the Hall sensor is used as an equivalent for track C/D, check the connection. - Check the connection of track C or D. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1559 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F33131 (N, A) Encoder 3: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: Absolute encoder: When cyclically reading the absolute position, an excessively high difference to the incremental position was detected. The absolute position that was read is rejected. Limit value for the deviation: - EnDat encoder: Is supplied from the encoder and is a minimum of 2 quadrants (e.g. EQI 1325 > 2 quadrants, EQN 1325 > 50 quadrants). - other encoders: 15 pulses = 60 quadrants. Incremental encoder: When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected. For equidistant zero marks, the following applies: - The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have n times the distance referred to the first zero mark. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies: - the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have the expected distance to the first zero mark pair. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check whether the coding disk is dirty or there are strong ambient magnetic fields. - adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425). - if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33135 Encoder 3: Fault when determining the position Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word. Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed in the fault value. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: F1 (safety status display) Bit 1: F2 (safety status display) Bit 2: Lighting (reserved) Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved) Bit 4: Position value (reserved) Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved) Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved) Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved) Bit 8: Battery (reserved) Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display) Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) 3-1560 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Bit 25: Singleturn power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved) Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. F33136 Encoder 3: Error when determining multiturn information Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word. Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed in the fault value. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: F1 (safety status display) Bit 1: F2 (safety status display) Bit 2: Lighting (reserved) Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved) Bit 4: Position value (reserved) Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved) Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved) Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved) Bit 8: Battery (reserved) Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display) Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 25: Singleturn power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 27: Multiturn position 2 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3) Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved) Remedy: Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. F33137 Encoder 3: Internal fault when determining the position Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: Replace encoder. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1561 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F33138 Encoder 3: Internal error when determining multiturn information Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Only for internal SIEMENS troubleshooting. Remedy: Replace encoder. F33150 (N, A) Encoder 3: Initialization error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: Encoder functionality selected in p0404 is not operating correctly. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Encoder malfunction. The bit assignment corresponds to that of p0404 (e.g. bit 5 set: Error track C/D). Remedy: - Check that p0404 is correctly set. - check the encoder type used (incremental/absolute) and for SMCxx, the encoder cable. - if relevant, note additional fault messages that describe the fault in detail. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33151 (N, A) Encoder 3: Encoder speed for initialization AB too high Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The encoder speed is too high during while initializing the sensor. Remedy: Reduce the speed of the encoder accordingly during initialization. If necessary, de-activate monitoring (p0437.29). See also: p0437 (Sensor Module configuration extended) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33152 (N, A) Encoder 3: Maximum input frequency exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The maximum input frequency of the encoder evaluation has been exceeded. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Actual input frequency in Hz. See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.) Remedy: - Reduce the speed. - Use an encoder with a lower pulse number (p0408). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1562 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33160 (N, A) Encoder 3: Analog sensor channel A failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside the measuring range set in (p4673). 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. For fault value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673). For fault value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33161 (N, A) Encoder 3: Analog sensor channel B failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside the measuring range set in (p4675). 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: For fault value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. For fault value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675). For fault value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33163 (N, A) Encoder 3: Analog sensor position value exceeds limit value Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The position value has exceeded the permissible range of -0.5 ... +0.5. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Position value from the LVDT sensor. 2: Position value from the encoder characteristic. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1563 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: For fault value = 1: - Check the LVDT ratio (p4678). - check the reference signal connection at track B. For fault value = 2: - check the coefficients of the characteristic (p4663 ... p4666). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A33400 (F, N) Encoder 3: Alarm threshold zero mark distance error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance. For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the system. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33401 (F, N) Encoder 3: Alarm threshold zero mark failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded. The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1564 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F33405 (N, A) Encoder 3: Temperature in the encoder evaluation inadmissible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The encoder evaluation for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ has detected an inadmissible temperature. The fault threshold is 125 C. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Measured board/module temperature in 0.1 C. Remedy: Reduce the ambient temperature for the DRIVE-CLiQ connection of the motor. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A33407 (F, N) Encoder 3: Function limit reached Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The encoder has reached one of its function limits. A service is recommended. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1 : Incremental signals 3 : Absolute track 4 : Code connection Remedy: Perform service. Replace the encoder if necessary. Note: The actual functional reserve of an encoder can be displayed via r4651. See also: p4650 (Encoder functional reserve component number), r4651 (Encoder functional reserve) Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33410 (F, N) Encoder 3: Serial communications Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol. Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line. Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms). Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data. Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it. Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested. Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading. Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits). Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow. Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice. Bit 11: Parity error. Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace encoder. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1565 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33411 (F, N) Encoder 3: Absolute encoder signals internal alarms Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin, additional information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The absolute encoder fault word includes alarm bits that have been set. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = fault cause yyyy = 0: Bit 0: Frequency exceeded (speed too high). Bit 1: Temperature exceeded. Bit 2: Control reserve, lighting system exceeded. Bit 3: Battery discharged. Bit 4: Reference point passed. yyyy = 1: Bit 0: Signal amplitude outside the control range. Bit 1: Error multiturn interface Bit 2: Internal data error (singleturn/multiturn not with single steps). Bit 3: Error EEPROM interface. Bit 4: SAR converter error. Bit 5: Fault for the register data transfer. Bit 6: Internal error identified at the error pin (nErr). Bit 7: Temperature threshold exceeded or fallen below. Remedy: Replace encoder. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33412 (F, N) Encoder 3: Error bit set in the serial protocol Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol. Bit 1: Alarm bit in the position protocol. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace encoder. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1566 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A33414 (F, N) Encoder 3: Amplitude error track C or D (C^2 + D^2) Message value: C track: %1, D track: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The amplitude (C^2 + D^2) of track C or D of the encoder or from the Hall signals, is not within the tolerance bandwidth. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Signal level, track D (16 bits with sign). xxxx = Signal level, track C (16 bits with sign). The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV. A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec. Note: If the amplitude is not within the tolerance bandwidth, then it cannot be used to initialize the start position. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). - check the Hall sensor box Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33415 (F, N) Encoder 3: Amplitude alarm track A or B (A^2 + B^2) Message value: Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 3 exceeds the permissible tolerance. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = Angle xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign) The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %). The response threshold is < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder). A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 299A hex = 10650 dec. The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is present at the negative zero crossover of track B. Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10): The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is < 1414 mV (1.0 Vrms). A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 3333 hex = 13107 dec. Note: The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module. Remedy: - check the speed range, frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment is not sufficient for the speed range. - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts). - if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1567 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A33418 (F, N) Encoder 3: Speed difference per sampling rate exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference between two sampling cycles has exceeded the value in p0492. The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. See also: p0492 Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions. - check the grounding of the tachometer shielding. - if required, increase the setting of p0492. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33419 (F, N) Encoder 3: Track A or B outside tolerance Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The amplitude/phase/offset correction for track A or B is at the limit. Amplitude error correction: Amplitude B / Amplitude A = 0.78 ... 1.27 Phase: <84 degrees or >96 degrees SMC20: Offset correction: +/-140 mV SMC10: Offset correction: +/-650 mV Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): xxxx1: Minimum of the offset correction, track B xxxx2: Maximum of the offset correction, track B xxx1x: Minimum of the offset correction, track A xxx2x: Maximum of the offset correction, track A xx1xx: Minimum of the amplitude correction, track B/A xx2xx: Maximum of the amplitude correction, track B/A x1xxx: Minimum of the phase error correction x2xxx: Maximum of the phase error correction 1xxxx: Minimum of the cubic correction 2xxxx: Maximum of the cubic correction Remedy: - check mechanical mounting tolerances for encoders without their own bearings (e.g. toothed-wheel encoders). - check the plug connections (also the transition resistance). - check the encoder signals. - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33421 (F, N) Encoder 3: Coarse position error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the actual value sensing, an error was detected. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position. 3-1568 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 3: The absolute position of the serial protocol and track A/B differ by half an encoder pulse. The absolute position must have its zero position in the quadrants in which both tracks are negative. In the case of a fault, the position can be incorrect by one encoder pulse. Remedy: Re alarm value = 3: - For a standard encoder with cable, contact the manufacturer where relevant. - correct the assignment of the tracks to the position value that is serially transferred. To do this, the two tracks must be connected, inverted, at the Sensor Module (interchange A with A* and B with B*) or, for a programmable encoder, check the zero offset of the position. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33422 (F, N) Encoder 3: Pulses per revolution square-wave encoder outside tolerance bandwidth Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance. This alarm is triggered with active square-wave encoder PPR correction and re-parameterized fault 31131 if the accumulator contains larger values than p4683 or p4684. The zero mark distance for zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): accumulated differential pulses in encoder pulses. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections . check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks). - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33429 (F, N) Encoder 3: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 mechanical or +/-60 electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater than +/-60 electrical. One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 mechanical. One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 electrical. The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incorrect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): For track C/D, the following applies: Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). For Hall signals, the following applies: Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ). Remedy: - track C or D not connected. - correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D. - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the adjustment of the Hall sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1569 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33431 (F, N) Encoder 3: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected. For equidistant zero marks, the following applies: - The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have n times the distance referred to the first zero mark. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies: - the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have the expected distance to the first zero mark pair. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - Clean coding disk or remove strong magnetic fields. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33432 (F, N) Encoder 3: Rotor position adaptation corrects deviation Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For track A/B, pulses have been lost or too many have been counted. These pulses are presently being corrected. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured deviation of zero mark in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance. Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable - check encoder limit frequency. - adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425). Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33442 (F, N) Encoder 3: Battery voltage pre-alarm Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When switched-off, the encoder uses a battery to back up the multiturn information. The battery voltage is no longer sufficient to check the multiturn information. Remedy: Replace battery. Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1570 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A33443 (F, N) Encoder 3: Unipolar CD signal level outside specification Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The unipolar level (CP/CN or DP/DN) for encoder 3 is outside the permissible tolerance. Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Either CP or CN outside the tolerance. Bit 16 = 1: Either DP or DN outside the tolerance. The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV. The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV. Note: The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied: - Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1). - Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1). Remedy: - check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC. - check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable. - are the C/D tracks connected correctly (have the signal lines CP and CN or DP and DN been interchanged)? - replace the encoder cable. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33460 (N) Encoder 3: Analog sensor channel A failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673. 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. Re alarm value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673). Re alarm value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33461 (N) Encoder 3: Analog sensor channel B failed Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range. 2: Input voltage outside the measuring range set in (p4675). 3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676). Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - check the output voltage of the analog sensor. Re alarm value = 2: - check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4675). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1571 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Re alarm value = 3: - check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33462 (N) Encoder 3: Analog sensor, no channel active Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Channel A and B are not activated for the analog sensor. Remedy: - activate channel A and/or channel B (p4670). - check the encoder configuration (p0404.17). See also: p4670 (Analog sensor configuration) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33463 (N) Encoder 3: Analog sensor position value exceeds limit value Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The position value has exceeded the permissible range of -0.5 ... +0.5. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Position value from the LVDT sensor. 2: Position value from the encoder characteristic. Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: - Check the LVDT ratio (p4678). - check the reference signal connection at track B. Re alarm value = 2: - check the coefficients of the characteristic (p4663 ... p4666). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33470 (F, N) Encoder 3: Soiling detected Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the case of the alternative encoder system interface on the Sensor Module Cabinet 30 (SMC30), encoder soiling is signaled via a 0 signal at terminal X521.7. Remedy: - check the plug connections - replace the encoder or encoder cable Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F33500 (N, A) Encoder 3: Position tracking traversing range exceeded Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For a configured linear axis without modulo correction, the drive/encoder has exceeded the maximum possible traversing range. The value should be read in p0412 and interpreted as the number of motor revolutions. 3-1572 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms For p0411.0 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421. For p0411.3 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is pre-set (default value) to the highest possible value and is +/-p0412/2 (rounded off to complete revolutions). The highest possible value depends on the pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419). Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33501 (N, A) Encoder 3: Position tracking encoder position outside tolerance window Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: When powered down, the drive/encoder was moved through a distance greater than was parameterized in the tolerance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system and encoder. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value. The sign designates the traversing direction. Note: The deviation (difference) found is also displayed in r0477. See also: p0413 (Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window), r0477 (Measuring gear, position difference) Remedy: Reset the position tracking as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507). See also: p0010 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33502 (N, A) Encoder 3: Encoder with measuring gear, without valid signals Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The encoder with measuring gear no longer provides any valid signals. Remedy: It must be ensured that all of the encoders, with mounted measuring gear, provide valid actual values in operation. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33503 (N, A) Encoder 3: Position tracking cannot be reset Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The position tracking for the measuring gear cannot be reset. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1573 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: The fault should be resolved as follows: - select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4). - reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1). - de-select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0). The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A33700 Encoder 3: Effectivity test does not supply the expected value Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit x = 1: Effectivity test x unsuccessful. Remedy: Replace encoder. N33800 (F) Encoder 3: Group signal Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The motor encoder has detected at least one fault. Remedy: Evaluate the other messages that are presently available. Reaction upon F: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F33801 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33802 (N, A) Encoder 3: Time slice overflow Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred in encoder 3. 3-1574 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yx hex: y = function involved (Siemens-internal fault diagnostics), x = time slice involved x = 9: Time slice overflow of the fast (current controller clock cycle) time slice. x = A: Time slice overflow of the average time slice. x = C: Time slice overflow of the slow time slice. yx = 3E7: Timeout when waiting for SYNO (e.g. unexpected return to non-cyclic operation). Remedy: Increase the current controller sampling time Note: For a current controller sampling time = 31.25 s, use an SMx20 with order number 6SL3055-0AA00-5xA3. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33804 (N, A) Encoder 3: Checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY) Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Sensor Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex yyyy: Memory area involved. xxxx: Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - upgrade firmware to later version (>= V2.6 HF3, >= V4.3 SP2, >= V4.4). - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained. - replace the Sensor Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33805 (N, A) Encoder 3: EPROM checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 01: EEPROM access error. 02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM. Remedy: Replace the module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1575 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F33806 (N, A) Encoder 3: Initialization error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The encoder was not successfully initialized. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Bit 0, 1: Encoder initialization with the motor rotating has failed (deviation involving coarse and fine position in encoder pulses/4). Bit 2: Mid-voltage matching for track A unsuccessful. Bit 3: Mid-voltage matching for track B unsuccessful. Bit 4: Mid-voltage matching for acceleration input unsuccessful. Bit 5: Mid-voltage matching for track safety A unsuccessful. Bit 6: Mid-voltage matching for track safety B unsuccessful. Bit 7: Mid-voltage matching for track C unsuccessful. Bit 8: Mid-voltage matching for track D unsuccessful. Bit 9: Mid-voltage matching for track R unsuccessful. Bit 10: The difference in mid-voltages between A and B is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 11: The difference in mid-voltages between C and D is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 12: The difference in mid-voltages between safety A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 13: The difference in mid-voltages between A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 14: The difference in mid-voltages between B and safety A is too great (> 0.5 V) Bit 15: The standard deviation of the calculated mid-voltages is too great (> 0.3 V) Bit 16: Internal fault - fault when reading a register (CAFE) Bit 17: Internal fault - fault when writing a register (CAFE) Bit 18: Internal fault: No mid-voltage matching available Bit 19: Internal error - ADC access error. Bit 20: Internal error - no zero crossover found. Bit 28: Error while initializing the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit. Bit 29: Error when reading out the data from the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit. Bit 30: EEPROM checksum of the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit incorrect. Bit 31: Data of the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit inconsistent. Note: Bit 0, 1: Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0 Bits 2 ... 20: 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A1 and higher Remedy: Acknowledge fault. If the fault cannot be acknowledged: Bits 2 ... 9: Check encoder power supply. Bits 2 ... 14: Check the corresponding cable. Bit 15 with no other bits: Check track R, check settings in p0404. Bit 28: Check the cable between the EnDat 2.2 converter and the measuring unit. Bit 29 ... 31: Replace the defective measuring unit. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33811 (N, A) Encoder 3: Encoder serial number changed Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The encoder serial number has changed. The change is only checked for encoders with serial number (e.g. EnDat encoders). - The encoder was replaced. Note: With closed-loop position control, the serial number is accepted when starting the adjustment (p2507 = 2). When the encoder is adjusted (p2507 = 3), the serial number is checked for changes and if required, the adjustment is reset (p2507 = 1). 3-1576 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Proceed as follows to hide serial number monitoring: - set the following serial numbers for the corresponding Encoder Data Set: p0441= FF, p0442 = 0, p0443 = 0, p0444 = 0, p0445 = 0. Remedy: Mechanically adjust the encoder. Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33812 (N, A) Encoder 3: Requested cycle or RX-/TX timing not supported Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A cycle requested from the Control Unit or RX/TX timing is not supported. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 0: Application cycle is not supported. 1: DRIVE-CLiQ cycle is not supported. 2: Distance between RX and TX instants in time too low. 3: TX instant in time too early. Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33813 Encoder 3: Hardware logic unit failed Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0: ALU watchdog has responded. Bit 1: ALU has detected a sign-of-life error. Remedy: Replace encoder. F33820 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder concerned. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 7 (= 07 hex): A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1577 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 8 (= 08 hex): No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33835 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder concerned. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33836 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1578 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33837 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33845 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33850 (N, A) Encoder 3: Encoder evaluation, internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the Sensor Module of encoder 3. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Background time slice is blocked. 2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1579 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 10000: OEM memory of the EnDat encoder contains data that cannot be interpreted. 11000 ... 11499: Descriptive data from EEPROM incorrect. 11500 ... 11899: Calibration data from EEPROM incorrect. 11900 ... 11999: Configuration data from EEPROM incorrect. 12000 ... 12008: Communication with AD converter faulted. 16000: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization application error. 16001: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization ALU error. 16002: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder HISI / SISI initialization error. 16003: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder safety initialization error. 16004: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder internal system error. Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module. - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33851 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit. The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33860 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 3-1580 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. 17 (= 11 hex): CRC error and the receive telegram is too early. 18 (= 12 hex): The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 19 (= 13 hex): The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 20 (= 14 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 21 (= 15 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 22 (= 16 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early. 25 (= 19 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33875 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Supply voltage failed Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage has failed. Fault cause: 9 (= 09 hex): The power supply voltage for the components has failed. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the power supply voltage wiring for the DRIVE-CLiQ component (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the dimensioning of the power supply for the DRIVE-CLiQ component. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33885 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1581 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 26 (= 1A hex): Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early. 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. 98 (= 62 hex): Error at the transition to cyclic operation. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved. - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33886 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33887 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved (Sensor Module for encoder 3). Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 3-1582 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 96 (= 60 hex): Response received too late during runtime measurement. 97 (= 61 hex): Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33895 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 3) involved to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33896 (N, A) Encoder 3 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Sensor Module for encoder 3), specified by the fault value, have changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Component number. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be used. - when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the original cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1583 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F33899 (N, A) Encoder 3: Unknown fault Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A fault occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 3 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Fault number. Note: If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A33902 (F, N) Encoder 3: SPI-BUS error occurred Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Error when operating the internal SPI bus. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module. - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33903 (F, N) Encoder 3: I2C-BUS error occurred Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Error when operating the internal I2C bus. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - replace the Sensor Module. - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon F: NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1584 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F33905 (N, A) Encoder 3: Parameterization error Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A parameter of encoder 3 was detected as being incorrect. It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder. The parameter involved can be determined as follows: - determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949). - determine the parameter index (p0187). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter xxxx = 421: For an EnDat/SSI encoder, the absolute position in the protocol must be less than or equal to 30 bits. yyyy = 0: No information available. yyyy = 1: The component does not support HTL level (p0405.1 = 0) combined with track monitoring A/B <> -A/B (p0405.2 = 1). yyyy = 2: A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out. Please start a new encoder identification. yyyy = 3: A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out. Please select a listed encoder in p0400 with a code number < 10000. yyyy = 4: This component does not support SSI encoders (p0404.9 = 1) without track A/B. yyyy = 5: For SQW encoder, value in p4686 greater than in p0425. yyyy = 6: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder cannot be used with this firmware version. yyyy = 7: For an SQW encoder, the Xact1 correction (p0437.2) is only permitted with equidistant zero marks. yyyy = 8: The motor pole pair width is not supported by the linear scale being used. yyyy = 9: The length of the position in the EnDat protocol may be a maximum of 32 bits. yyyy = 10: The connected encoder is not supported. Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized. - correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187. - re parameter number = 314: - check the pole pair number and measuring gear ratio. The quotient of the "pole pair number" divided by the "measuring gear ratio" must be less than or equal to 1000 ((r0313 * p0433) / p0432 <= 1000). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F33912 Encoder 3: Device combination is not permissible Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE) Acknowledge: PULSE INHIBIT Cause: The selected device combination is not supported. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1003: The connected measuring unit cannot be operated with the EnDat 2.2 converter. For instance, the measuring unit has a pulse number/resolution of 2^n. 1005: The type of measuring unit (incremental) is not supported by the EnDat 2.2 converter. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1585 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 1006: The maximum duration (31.25 s) of the EnDat transfer was exceeded. 2001: The set combination of current controller cycle, DP cycle and Safety cycle is not supported by the EnDat 2.2 converter. 2002: The resolution of the linear measuring unit does not match the pole pair width of the linear motor Remedy: Re fault value = 1003, 1005, 1006: - Use a measuring unit that is permissible. For fault value = 2001: - Set a permissible cycle combination (if required, use standard settings). For fault value = 2002: - Use a measuring unit with a lower resolution (p0422). A33915 (F, N) Encoder 3: Configuration error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The configuration for encoder 3 is incorrect. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Re-parameterization between fault/alarm is not permissible. 419: When the fine resolution Gx_XIST2 is configured, the encoder identifies a maximum possible absolute position actual value (r0483) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits. Remedy: Re alarm value = 1: No re-parameterization between fault/alarm. Re alarm value = 419: Reduce the fine resolution (p0419) or deactivate the monitoring (p0437.25), if the complete multiturn range is not required. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F33916 (N, A) Encoder 3: Parameterization fault Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A parameter of encoder 3 was detected as being incorrect. It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder. The parameter involved can be determined as follows: - determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949). - determine the parameter index (p0187). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number. Note: This fault is only output for encoders where r0404.10 = 1 or r0404.11 = 1. It corresponds to A33905 with encoders where r0404.10 = 0 and r0404.11 = 0. Remedy: - check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized. - correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1586 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A33920 (F, N) Encoder 3: Temperature sensor fault Message value: Fault cause: %1, channel number: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm). 2 (= 02 hex): Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm). Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = channel number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check that the encoder cable is the correct type and is correctly connected. - check the temperature sensor selection in p0600 to p0603. - replace the Sensor Module (hardware defect or incorrect calibration data). Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33930 (N) Encoder 3: Data logger has saved data Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: For the activated function "Data logger" (p0437.0 = 1) a fault has occurred with the Sensor Module. This alarm indicates that the diagnostics data corresponding to the fault was saved on the memory card. The diagnostics data is saved in the following folder: /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/SMTRC00.BIN ... /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/SMTRC07.BIN /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/SMTRCIDX.TXT The following information is contained in the TXT file: - Display of the last written BIN file. - Number of write operations that are still possible (from 10000 downwards). Note: Only Siemens can evaluate the BIN files. Remedy: Not necessary. The alarm disappears automatically. The data logger is ready to record the next fault case. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A33940 (F, N) Encoder 3: Spindle sensor S1 voltage incorrect Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The voltage of analog sensor S1 is outside the permissible range. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Signal level from sensor S1. Note: A signal level of 500 mV corresponds to the numerical value 500 dec. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1587 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - Check the clamped tool. - Check the tolerance and if required, adapt (p5040). - Check the thresholds and if required, adapt (p5041). - Check analog sensor S1 and connections. Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F33950 Encoder 3: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: ENCODER (OFF2) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Information about the fault source. Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - If necessary, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module to a later version. - contact the Hotline. A33999 (F, N) Encoder 3: Unknown alarm Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A alarm has occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 3 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Alarm number. Note: If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon F: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F34207 (N, A) VSM: Temperature fault threshold exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The temperature (r3666) measured using the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has exceeded the threshold value (p3668). Note: This fault can only be initiated if the temperature evaluation was activated (p3665 = 2 for a KTY sensor or p3665 = 1 for a PTC sensor). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): yyxxxx dec: yy: Component number of the component which detected the fault. Remedy: - check the fan. - reduce the power. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1588 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A34211 (F, N) VSM: Temperature alarm threshold exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r3666) measured using the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has exceeded the threshold value (p3667). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): The hundred-thousands and ten-thousands position specifies the component number of the VSM which detected the fault. Remedy: - check the fan. - reduce the power. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE N34800 (F) VSM: Group signal Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has detected at least one fault. Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages. Reaction upon F: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F34801 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - replace the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). F34801 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1589 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - replace the component involved. F34802 VSM: Time slice overflow Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred on the Voltage Sensing Module. Remedy: Replace the Voltage Sensing Module. F34803 VSM: Memory test Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An error has occurred during the memory test on the Voltage Sensing Module. Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the Voltage Sensing Module is being maintained. - replace the Voltage Sensing Module. F34804 (N, A) VSM: CRC Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained. - replace the Voltage Sensing Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F34805 VSM: EPROM checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): 01: EEPROM access error. 02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM. Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained. - replace the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). 3-1590 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F34806 VSM: Initialization Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), a fault has occurred while initializing. Remedy: Replace the Voltage Sensing Module. A34807 (F, N) VSM: Sequence control time monitoring Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Error, timeout in the sequence control on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Remedy: Replace the Voltage Sensing Module. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F34820 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module involved. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 7 (= 07 hex): A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram. 8 (= 08 hex): No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1591 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F34835 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module involved. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. F34836 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. F34837 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance 3-1592 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F34845 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F34850 VSM: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error in the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Background time slice is blocked. 2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK. Remedy: - replace the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Voltage Sensing Module. - contact the Hotline. F34851 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module involved (VSM) to the Control Unit. The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved. F34860 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module involved (VSM) to the Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1593 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. 17 (= 11 hex): CRC error and the receive telegram is too early. 18 (= 12 hex): The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 19 (= 13 hex): The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 20 (= 14 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 21 (= 15 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 22 (= 16 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early. 25 (= 19 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F34875 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Supply voltage failed Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage has failed. Fault cause: 9 (= 09 hex): The power supply voltage for the components has failed. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the power supply voltage wiring for the DRIVE-CLiQ component (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the dimensioning of the power supply for the DRIVE-CLiQ component. 3-1594 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F34885 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module involved (VSM) to the Control Unit. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 26 (= 1A hex): Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early. 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. 98 (= 62 hex): Error at the transition to cyclic operation. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved. - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F34886 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module involved (VSM) to the Control Unit. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. F34887 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Voltage Sensing Module) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1595 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 96 (= 60 hex): Response received too late during runtime measurement. 97 (= 61 hex): Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F34895 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module involved (VSM) to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F34896 VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Voltage Sensing Module), specified by the fault value, have changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Component number. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be used. - when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the original cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length). F34899 (N, A) VSM: Unknown fault Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A fault occurred on the Voltage Sensing Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. 3-1596 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Fault number. Note: If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Voltage Sensing Module by an older firmware version (r0158). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A34903 (F, N) VSM: I2C bus error occurred Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error has occurred when accessing the module-internal I2C bus. Remedy: Replace the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A34903 (F, N) VSM: I2C bus error occurred Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error has occurred when accessing the module-internal I2C bus. Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A34904 (F, N) VSM: EEPROM Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error has occurred accessing the non-volatile memory on the Terminal Module. Remedy: Replace the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1597 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A34905 (F, N) VSM: Parameter access Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Control Unit attempted to write an illegal parameter value to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Remedy: - check whether the firmware version of the VSM (r0158) matches the firmware version of Control Unit (r0018). - if required, replace the Voltage Sensing Module. Note: The firmware versions that match each other are in the readme.txt file on the memory card. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A34920 (F, N) VSM: Temperature sensor fault Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm). 2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm). Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F34950 VSM: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error in the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Information about the fault source. Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - If necessary, upgrade the firmware in the Voltage Sensing Module to a later version. - contact the Hotline. A34999 (F, N) VSM: Unknown alarm Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A fault occurred on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) an alarm has occurred that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Alarm number. 3-1598 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note: If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Voltage Sensing Module by an older firmware version (r0148). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F35000 TM54F: Sampling time invalid Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The set sampling time is invalid. - not a multiple integer of the DP clock cycle. Fault value (r0949, floating point): Recommended valid sampling time. Remedy: Adapt the sampling time (e.g. set the recommended valid sampling time). See also: p10000 (SI sampling time) F35001 TM54F: Parameter value invalid Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The entered value is invalid. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Parameter number with the invalid value. Remedy: Correct the parameter value. F35002 TM54F: Commissioning not possible Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The commissioning mode activation was rejected because the pulses had not been suppressed for at least one drive belonging to the TM54F. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Drive object number of the first drive found without pulse suppression. Remedy: Set pulse suppression for the drive specified in the fault value. F35003 TM54F: Acknowledgement on the Control Unit is required Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault on the Terminal Module 54F (TM54) was acknowledged using the safe acknowledgement (P10006). An additional acknowledgement is also required at the Control Unit. Remedy: Acknowledge the fault at the Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1599 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F35011 TM54F: Drive object number assignment illegal Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A drive object number was assigned twice. Each drive object number can be assigned only once. Remedy: Correct the assignment of the drive object numbers. See also: p10010 (SI drive object assignment) A35012 TM54F: Test stop active Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The test stop for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is presently being executed. Note: Fault F35013 is output if a fault occurs during the test stop. Remedy: The alarm disappears automatically after successfully ending or canceling (when a fault condition occurs) the test stop. F35013 TM54F: Test stop error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: An error was detected when carrying out the test stop on the TM54F. Failsafe control signals (failsafe values) are transferred to the safety functions. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): aaaabbcc hex: aaaa: DO or F-DI (dependent on test step cc), where the expected state was not assumed (bit 0 = F-DI 0 or F-DO 0, bit 1 = F-DI 1 or F-DO 1, etc.). bb: Fault cause bb = 01 hex: Internal fault. bb = 02 hex: Fault when comparing the switching signals of the two channels (F-DI or DI). bb = 03 hex: Internal fault. bb = 04 hex: Fault when comparing the switching signals of the two channels (Diag-DO). cc: State of the test stop in which the fault has occurred. The display format is as follows: Slave fault state: (test actions)(test actions) | corresponding step for the master: (test actions)(test actions) | Description 00 hex: (L1+OFF)(L2+ON) | 0A hex: ( )( ) | Synchronization / switching step 0A hex: (L1+OFF)(L2+ON) | 15 hex: ( )( ) | Wait step 15 hex: (L1+OFF)(L2+OFF) | 20 hex :( )( ) | 1.) F-DI 0 ... 4 check for 0 V 2.) Switch step to new level 20 hex: (L1+OFF)(L2+OFF) | 2B hex: ( )( ) | Wait step 2B hex: (L1+ON)(L2+ON) | 36 hex: ( )( ) | 1.) F-DI 5 ... 9 check for 0 V 2.) Switch step to new level 36 hex: (DO OFF)( ) | 41 hex: (DO OFF)( ) | Wait step / switching step 41 hex: (DO OFF)( ) | 4C hex: (DO OFF)( ) | Wait step 4C hex: (DO ON)( ) | 57 hex: (DO ON)( ) | 1.) Check diag-DO or diag-DI 2.) Switch step to new level 57 hex: (DO ON)( ) | 62 hex: (DO ON)( ) | Wait step 62 hex: (DO OFF)( ) | 6D hex: (DO ON)( ) | 1.) Check diag-DO or diag-DI 2.) Switch step 6D hex: (DO OFF)( ) | 78 hex: (DO ON)( ) | Wait step 78 hex: (DO ON)( ) | 83 hex: (DO OFF)( ) | 1.) Check diag-DO or diag-DI 2.) Switch step 83 hex: (DO ON)( ) | 8E hex: (DO OFF)( ) | Wait step 8E hex: (DO OFF)( ) | 99 hex: (DO OFF)( ) | 1.) Check diag-DO or diag-DI 2.) Switch step 99 hex: (DO OFF)( ) | A4 hex: (DO OFF)( ) | Wait step A4 hex: (DO OFF)( ) | AF hex: (DO OFF)( ) | Check Diag-DO or Diag-DI AF hex: (DO original state)() | C5 hex: (DO original state)() | Switching step 3-1600 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms C5 hex: End of test The expected states to be checked depend on the parameterized test mode (p10047). The following expected states are tested in the test steps when testing the F-DOs: The display format is as follows: Test step (SL MA): Expected Diag-DO mode 1 | Expected DI 20 ... 23 mode 2 | Expected DI 20 ... 23 mode 3 (4C hex 57 hex): Diag-DO = 0 V | DI = 24 V | DI = 24 V (62 hex 6D hex): Diag-DO = 0 V | DI = 0 V | DI = 0 V (78 hex 83 hex): Diag-DO = 0 V | DI = 0 V | DI = 24 V (8E hex 99 hex): Diag-DO = 24 V | DI = 0 V | DI = 24 V (A4 hex AF hex): Diag-DO = 0 V | DI = 24 V | DI = 24 V Example: If an error with fault causes bb = 02 hex or 04 hex occurs in a test stop step, the test action for the fault took place in the previous test stop step. The expected states are tested in the next step. Master signals fault value 0001_04AF and slave signals fault value 0001_04A4. aaaa = 1 --> F-DO 0 is involved. bb = 04 hex --> the test of the Diag-DO was unsuccessful. cc = The expected states were tested in test stop step AF on the master and A4 on the slave. The expected state Diag-DO = 0 V was checked in the table, i.e. Diag-DO was at 0 V instead of the expected 24 V. The associated test action took place in the previous step (99 hex DO OFF, A4 hex DO OFF). Both DOs were switched to OFF. Remedy: Check the wiring of the F-DIs and F-DOs and restart the test stop. Note: The fault is withdrawn if the test stop is successfully completed. For fault value = CCCCCCCC hex, DDDDDDDD hex, EEEEEEEE hex the following applies: These fault values occur together with fault F35152. In this case, all parameters for the test stop should be checked. You should also check whether the firmware version of the TM54F matches that of the Control Unit. You also need to check p10001, p10017, p10046 and p10047. A POWER ON must be carried out after correcting the parameters. A35014 TM54F: Test stop required Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: - after powering up the drive, a test stop has still not been carried out. - a new test stop is required after commissioning. - the time to carry out the forced checking procedure (test stop) has expired (p10003). Remedy: Initiate test stop (BI: p10007). A35015 TM54F: Motor Module replaced or configuration inconsistent Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Cyclic communication of at least one drive with the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is not active. Possible causes: - at least one Motor Module was replaced (e.g. hardware was replaced). - The parameterization of theTM54F (p10010) is inconsistent with the number of axes, which have drive-based motion monitoring functions activated with TM54F. - For the signaled axis, it is not permissible that the "Safe motion monitoring without selection" (p9601.5 = 1) is parameterized. - And activated drive has no communication via DRIVE-CLiQ. - p10010 of the TM54F master module is not the same as p10010 of the TM54F slave module (in this case, F35051 is also output). - In p10010 of the TM54F master or slave module, the number of a drive object was entered twice or several times. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): yyyy yyyy xxxx xxxx bin xxxx xxxx bin: inconsistent configuration Bit 0 = 1: No communication with drive 1. ... Bit 5 = 1: No communication with drive 6. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1601 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms yyyy yyyy bin: Motor Module replaced or a DRIVE-CLiQ cable of a Motor Module not inserted. Bit 8 = 1: Motor Module from drive 1 was replaced or does not communicate. ... Bit 13 = 1: Motor Module from drive 6 was replaced or does not communicate. Note: When this fault is present, none of the drives listed in the fault value, which have drive-based motion monitoring functions operating with TM54F, are enabled. For fault value = 0: The number of drive objects specified in p10010 is not equal to the number of drives that have drive-based motion monitoring functions that have been enabled. See also: p10010 (SI drive object assignment) Remedy: For all drive objects specified in p10010, check whether the drive-based motion monitoring functions with TM54F are enabled (p9601). Check as to whether F35051 is also output and remove the cause. Check whether each drive object number is listed only once in the indices of p10010. Note: If a drive was deactivated and activated without first having established the DRIVE-CLiQ connection, then this alarm is also output. When replacing a Motor Module, carry out the following steps: - start the copy function for the node identifier on the TM54F (p9700 = 1D hex). - acknowledge the hardware CRC on the TM54F (p9701 = EC hex). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. For SINUMERIK, the following applies: HMI supports the replacement of components with Safety functions (operating area "Diagnostics" --> Softkey "Alarm list" --> Softkey "Confirm SI HW" etc.). The precise procedure is given in the following document: SINUMERIK Function Manual Safety Integrated A35016 TM54F: Net data communication with drive not established Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The cyclic net data communication within the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is still not active. This message is output after the TM54F master and TM54F slave have booted and is automatically withdrawn as soon as communications have been established. If a drive does not communicate with the TM54F, then none of the drives parameterized in p10010 are enabled. Remedy: When replacing a Motor Module, carry out the following steps: - start the copy function for the node identifier on the TM54F (p9700 = 1D hex). - acknowledge the hardware CRC on the TM54F (p9701 = EC hex). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. The following always applies: - for all drive objects specified in p10010, check whether the drive-based motion monitoring functions with TM54F are enabled (p9601). - check whether fault F35150 is present and if required, remove the cause of the fault. See also: r10055 (SI TM54F communication status drive-specific) F35040 TM54F: 24 V undervoltage Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For the 24 V power supply for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) an undervoltage condition was detected. As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals are transferred to the motion monitoring functions. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Power supply undervoltage at connection X524. Bit 1 = 1: Power supply undervoltage at connection X514. Remedy: - check the 24 V DC power supply for the TM54F. - carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006). 3-1602 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F35043 TM54F: 24 V overvoltage Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: For the 24 V power supply for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) an overvoltage condition was detected. As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals are transferred to the motion monitoring functions. Remedy: - check the 24 V DC power supply for the TM54F. - carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006). F35051 TM54F: Defect in a monitoring channel Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) has identified an error in the crosswise data comparison between the two control channels. As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals are transferred to the motion monitoring functions. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): aaaabbcc hex aaaa: A value greater than zero indicates an internal software error. bb: Data to be cross-compared that resulted in the error. bb = 00 hex: p10000 bb = 01 hex: p10001 bb = 02 hex: p10002 bb = 03 hex: p10006 bb = 04 hex: p10008 bb = 05 hex: p10010 bb = 06 hex: p10011 bb = 07 hex: p10020 bb = 08 hex: p10021 bb = 09 hex: p10022 bb = 0A hex: p10023 bb = 0B hex: p10024 bb = 0C hex: p10025 bb = 0D hex: p10026 bb = 0E hex: p10027 bb = 0F hex: p10028 bb = 10 hex: p10036 bb = 11 hex: p10037 bb = 12 hex: p10038 bb = 13 hex: p10039 bb = 14 hex: p10040 bb = 15 hex: p10041 bb = 16 hex: p10042 bb = 17 hex: p10043 bb = 18 hex: p10044 bb = 19 hex: p10045 bb = 1A hex: p10046 bb = 1B hex: Test stop internal p10041 bb = 1C hex: Test stop internal p10046 bb = 1D ... 1F hex: internal test stop p10017, p10002, p10000 bb = 20 ... 2A hex: internal test stop p10040, p10046, p10047 bb = 2B hex: Test stop initialization bb = 2C hex: Input/output calculation initialization bb = 2D ... 45 hex: internal data for the output calculation p10042 ... p10045 bb = 46 ... 63 hex: data for the calculation of drive group 1 bb = 64 ... 81 hex: data for the calculation of drive group 2 bb = 82 ... 9F hex: data for the calculation of drive group 3 bb = A0 ... BD hex: data for the calculation of the drive group 4 bb = BE hex: debounce time of the fail-safe inputs (F-DI) p10017 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1603 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms bb = BF hex: debounce time of the single-channel inputs (DI) p10017 bb = C0 hex: debounce time of the Diag inputs p10017 bb = C1 hex: Internal data to p10030 SDI positive bb = C2 hex: Internal data to p10031 SDI negative bb = C3 ... CA hex: new data to calculate the drive groups p10030 ... p10031 bb = CB hex: p10032 bb = CC hex: p10033 bb = CD hex: p10009 bb = CE ... CF drive group 1 SLP parameter p10032 ... p10033 bb = D0 ... D1 drive group 2 SLP parameter p10032 ... p10033 bb = D2 ... D3 drive group 3 SLP parameter p10032 ... p10033 bb = D4 ... D5 drive group 4 SLP parameter p10032 ... p10033 bb = D6 initialize retraction bb = D7 retraction, SLP cc: Index of the data to be cross-compared that resulted in the error. Remedy: Carry out the following steps on the TM54F: - activate the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 95). - start the copy function for SI parameters (p9700 = 57 hex). - acknowledge complete data change (p9701 = AC hex). - exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 0). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006). For an internal software error (aaaa > 0): - For TM54F, upgrade the firmware to a later version. - contact the Hotline. - replace the TM54F. F35052 (A) TM54F: Internal hardware error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: An internal software/hardware error has been detected on the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - upgrade TM54F firmware to more recent version. - contact the Hotline. - replace the TM54F. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35053 TM54F: Temperature fault threshold exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The temperature measured using the temperature sensing on the TM54F has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this fault. As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals are transferred to the motion monitoring functions. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - allow the TM54F to cool down. - carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006). 3-1604 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A35054 TM54F: Temperature alarm threshold exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature measured using the temperature sensing on the TM54F has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm. Remedy: - allow the TM54F to cool down. - carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006). A35075 (F) TM54F: Error during internal communication Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An internal communications error has occurred in the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). This alarm is also output: - If TM54F exists and no safety function of the TM54F has yet been parameterized. - If p10000 of the TM54F master is not set the same as p10000 of the TM54F slave. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens diagnostics. Remedy: If TM54F exists and no safety function has yet been parameterized: - Not necessary. The alarm disappears automatically after a safety function of the TM54F has been parameterized. For p10010 from the TM54F master not equal to the TM54F slave: - start the copy function for the node identifier on the TM54F (p9700 = 1D hex). - acknowledge the hardware CRC on the TM54F (p9701 = EC hex). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. For internal communication errors: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - upgrade the software on the TM54F. - contact the Hotline. - replace the TM54F. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) A35080 (F) TM54F: Checksum error safety parameters Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The calculated checksum entered in r10004 over the safety-relevant parameters does not match the reference checksum saved in p10005 at the last machine acceptance. Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): Bit 0 = 1: Checksum error for functional SI parameters. Bit 1 = 1: Checksum error for SI parameters for component assignment. Remedy: - check the safety-relevant parameters and if required, correct. - set the reference checksum to the actual checksum. - acknowledge the hardware replacement. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - carry out an acceptance test. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1605 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A35081 (F) TM54F: Static (steady state) 1 signal at the F-DI for safety-relevant acknowledgement Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A logical 1 signal is present at the F-DI configured in p10006 for more than 10 seconds. If, at the F-DI no acknowledgment was performed for safe acknowledgment, then a steady-state logical and 0 signal must be present. This avoids unintentional safety-relevant acknowledgement (or the "Internal Event Acknowledge" signal) if a wire breaks or one of the two digital inputs bounces. Remedy: Set the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) to a logical 0 signal (p10006). Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY F35150 TM54F: Communication error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A communication error between the TM54F master and Control Unit or between the TM54F slave and the Motor Module was detected. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: When replacing a Motor Module, carry out the following steps: - start the copy function for the node identifier on the TM54F (p9700 = 1D hex). - acknowledge the hardware CRC on the TM54F (p9701 = EC hex). - save all parameters (p0977 = 1). - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. The following always applies: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - upgrade the software on the TM54F. - contact the Hotline. - replace the TM54F. F35151 TM54F: Discrepancy error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The safety input terminals or output terminals show a different state longer than that parameterized in p10002. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex xxxx: The safety-relevant input terminals F-DI indicate a discrepancy. Bit 0: Discrepancy for F-DI 0 ... Bit 9: Discrepancy for F-DI 9 yyyy: The safety-relevant output terminals F-DO indicate a discrepancy. Bit 0: Discrepancy for F-DO 0 ... Bit 3: Discrepancy for F-DO 3 Note: If several discrepancy errors occur consecutively, then this fault is only signaled for the first error that occurs. The following options are available to analyze all of the discrepancy errors: - Using the commissioning software, evaluate the input states and output states of the TM54F. All discrepancy errors are displayed here. - Compare parameters p10051 and p10052 from the TM54F master and TM54F slave for discrepancy. 3-1606 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Check the wiring of the corresponding F-DI (contact problems). Discrepancy errors in the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI) can only be completely acknowledged if, after the cause of the error was resolved, safe acknowledgement was carried out (see p10006). As long as safety acknowledgement was not carried out, the corresponding F-DI stays in the safe state internally. For cyclic switching operations at the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI), it may be necessary to adapt the discrepancy time to the switching frequency: If the period of a cyclic switching pulse has the order of magnitude of double the value of p10002, then the following formulas must be checked. p10002 < (tp / 2) - td (discrepancy time must be less than half the period minus the actual discrepancy time) p10002 >= p10000 (discrepancy time must be no less than p10000) p10002 > td (discrepancy time must be greater than the switch discrepancy time which may actually apply) td: possible actual discrepancy time (in ms) that can occur with a switching operation. This must correspond to at least 1 SI sampling cycle (see p10000). tp: period for a switching operation in ms. For cyclic switching operations and when debounce (p10017) is active, the discrepancy time is directly specified by the debounce time. If the period of a cyclic switching pulse has the order of magnitude of twice the debounce time, then the following formulas should be checked. p10002 < p10017 + 1ms - td p10002 > td p10002 >= p10000 Example: If the SI sampling cycle is 12 ms and the switching frequency is 110 ms (p10017 = 0), the maximum discrepancy time which can be set is as follows: p10002 <= 110/2 ms - 12 ms = 43 ms --> rounded-off, the following is obtained p10002 <= 36 ms Since the discrepancy time can only be accepted as a whole SI sampling time, the value will need to be rounded up or down to a whole SI sampling time value if it is not an exact integer multiple of an SI sampling time. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output F35152 TM54F: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F). The fail-safe digital inputs and digital outputs (F-DI, F-DO) on the TM54F have been set to the safe state. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output Remedy: Check that the firmware version of the TM54F matches the Control Unit's firmware version. The automatic firmware update must be activated in the project. Note: This signal will also appear, for example, in conjunction with fault F35013. In this case you should check all the parameters for the test stop on the TM54F (p10001, p10003, p10007, p10041, p10046, p10047). In this case, a POWER ON is required after the parameters have been corrected. A35200 (F, N) TM: Calibration data Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error was detected in the calibration data of the Terminal Module. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): ddcbaa dec: dd = component number, c = AI/AO, b = fault type, aa = number c = 0: analog input (AI, Analog Input) c = 1: analog output (AO, Analog Output) b = 0: No calibration data available. b = 1: Offset too high (> 100 mV). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1607 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - Replace the component if necessary. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F35207 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 0 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module (TM), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[0], p4103[0]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[1]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[0] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[0] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[0] = 250 C - if r4101[0] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[0] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[0] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[1] - hysteresis (5 K, for TM150, can be set using p4118[0]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35208 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 1 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module (TM), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[2], p4103[1]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[3]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[1] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[1] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[1] = 250 C - if r4101[1] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[1] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[1] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. 3-1608 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[3] - hysteresis (5 K, for TM150, can be set using p4118[1]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35209 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 2 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module (TM), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[4], p4103[2]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[5]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[2] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[2] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[2] = 250 C - if r4101[2] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[2] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[2] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[5] - hysteresis (5 K, for TM150, can be set using p4118[2]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35210 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 3 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module (TM), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[6], p4103[3]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[7]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[3] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[3] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[3] = 250 C - if r4101[3] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[3] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[3] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1609 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[7] - hysteresis (5 K, for TM150, can be set using p4118[3]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A35211 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 0 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module (TM) (r4105[0]) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[0]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[0] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[0] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[0] = 250 C - if r4101[0] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[0] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[0] - hysteresis (5 K); for TM150, can be set using p4118[0]. See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35212 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 1 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module (TM) (r4105[1]) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[2]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[1] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[1] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[1] = 250 C - if r4101[1] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[1] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[4] - hysteresis (5 K); for TM150, can be set using p4118[1]. See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1610 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A35213 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 2 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module (TM) (r4105[2]) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[4]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[2] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[2] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[2] = 250 C - if r4101[2] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[2] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[4] - hysteresis (5 K); for TM150, can be set using p4118[2]. See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35214 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 3 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module (TM) (r4105[3]) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[6]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[3] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[3] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[3] = 250 C - if r4101[3] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[3] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[6] - hysteresis (5 K); for TM150, can be set using p4118[3]. See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F35220 (N, A) TM: Frequency limit reached for signal output Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The signals output from the Terminal Module 41 (TM41) for tracks A/B have reached the limit frequency. The output signals are no longer in synchronism with the specified setpoint. Note: If with SIMOTION the TM41 has been configured as the technology project, this fault is also output in response to short-circuited A/B signals in X520. Remedy: SIMOTION (p4400 = 0) operating mode: - enter a lower speed setpoint (p1155). - reduce the encoder pulse number (p0408). - check track A/B for short-circuits. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1611 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms SINAMICS (p4400 = 1) operating mode: - the fine resolution of TM41 in p0418 does not match that of the connector input that was interconnected at P4420 - the encoder position actual value r0479 interconnected at connector input p4420 has an excessively high actual speed Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35221 (N, A) TM: Setpoint - actual value deviation, outside the tolerance range Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The deviation between the setpoint and the output signals (track A/B) exceeds the tolerance of +/-3 %. The deviation between the internal and external measured value is too high. Remedy: - reduce the basic clock cycle (p0110, p0111). - replace the module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A35222 (F, N) TM: Encoder pulse number not permissible Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The encoder pulse number entered does not match the permissible pulse number from a hardware perspective. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Encoder pulse number is too high. 2: Encoder pulse number is too low. 4: Encoder pulse number is less than the zero mark offset (p4426). Remedy: - enter the encoder pulse number in the permissible range (p0408). - if necessary, replace TM41 SAC with TM41 DAC. Note: TM41 SAC: order no. = 6SL3055-0AA00-3PA0 TM41 DAC: order no. = 6SL3055-0AA00-3PA1 The following applies for TM41 SAC: - minimum/maximum value for p0408: 1000/8192 The following applies for TM41 DAC: - minimum/maximum value for p0408: 1000/16384 See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.) Reaction upon F: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35223 (F, N) TM: Zero mark offset not permissible Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The entered zero mark offset is not permissible. 3-1612 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Zero mark offset is too high. Remedy: Enter the zero mark offset in the permissible range (p4426). Reaction upon F: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F35230 TM: Hardware fault Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: NONE Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The Terminal Module (TM) used has signaled internal errors. Signals from this module may not be evaluated because they are very likely to be incorrect. Remedy: If required, replace the Terminal Module. F35233 DRIVE-CLiQ component does not support function Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A function requested by the Control Unit is not supported by a DRIVE-CLiQ component. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Terminal Module 31 does not support the function "Timer for temperature evaluation" (X522.7/8, p4103 > 0.000). 4: The improved actual value resolution is not supported (p4401.4). 5: The improved setpoint resolution is not supported (p4401.5). 6: The residual value handling in the setpoint channel cannot be deactivated (p4401.6). 7: Output frequencies greater than 750 kHz cannot be activated (p4401.7). Remedy: For fault value = 1: - De-activate timer for temperature evaluation (X522.7/8) (p4103 = 0.000). - Use Terminal Module 31 and the relevant firmware version to enable the "Timer for temperature evaluation" function (Order No. 6SL3055-0AA00-3AA1, firmware version 2.6 and higher). See also: p4103 F35400 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 4 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module 150 (TM150), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[8], p4103[4]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[9]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[4] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[4] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[4] = 250 C - if r4101[4] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[4] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[4] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1613 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[9] - hysteresis (p4118[4]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35401 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 5 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module 150 (TM150), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[10], p4103[5]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[11]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[5] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[5] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[5] = 250 C - if r4101[5] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[5] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[5] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[11] - hysteresis (p4118[5]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35402 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 6 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module 150 (TM150), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[12], p4103[6]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[13]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[6] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[6] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[6] = 250 C - if r4101[6] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[6] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[6] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. 3-1614 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[13] - hysteresis (p4118[6]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35403 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 7 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module 150 (TM150), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[14], p4103[7]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[15]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[7] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[7] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[7] = 250 C - if r4101[7] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[7] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[7] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[15] - hysteresis (p4118[7]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35404 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 8 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module 150 (TM150), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[16], p4103[8]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[17]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[8] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[8] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[8] = 250 C - if r4101[8] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[8] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[8] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1615 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[17] - hysteresis (p4118[8]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35405 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 9 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module 150 (TM150), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[18], p4103[9]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[19]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[9] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[9] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[9] = 250 C - if r4101[9] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[9] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[9] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[19] - hysteresis (p4118[9]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35406 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 10 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module 150 (TM150), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[20], p4103[10]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[21]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[10] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[10] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[10] = 250 C - if r4101[10] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[10] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[10] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. 3-1616 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[21] - hysteresis (p4118[10]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F35407 (N, A) TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 11 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module 150 (TM150), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this fault is fulfilled: - alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer (p4102[22], p4103[11]). or - fault threshold exceeded (p4102[23]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[11] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[11] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[11] = 250 C - if r4101[11] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[11] = -50 C The temperature actual value is displayed via connector output r4105[11] and can be interconnected. Notice: This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: - allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[23] - hysteresis (p4118[11]). - if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101). See also: p4102 Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A35410 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 4 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r4105[4]) measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[8]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[4] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[4] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[4] = 250 C - if r4101[4] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[4] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: Allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[8] - hysteresis (p4118[4]). See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1617 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A35411 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 5 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r4105[5]) measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[10]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[5] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[5] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[5] = 250 C - if r4101[5] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[5] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: Allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[10] - hysteresis (p4118[5]). See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35412 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 6 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r4105[6]) measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[12]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[6] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[6] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[6] = 250 C - if r4101[6] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[6] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: Allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[12] - hysteresis (p4118[6]). See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35413 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 7 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r4105[7]) measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[14]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[7] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[7] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[7] = 250 C - if r4101[7] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[7] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: Allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[14] - hysteresis (p4118[7]). See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) 3-1618 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35414 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 8 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r4105[8]) measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[16]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[8] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[8] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[8] = 250 C - if r4101[8] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[8] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: Allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[16] - hysteresis (p4118[8]). See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35415 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 9 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r4105[9]) measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[18]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[9] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[9] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[9] = 250 C - if r4101[9] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[9] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: Allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[18] - hysteresis (p4118[9]). See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35416 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 10 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r4105[10]) measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[20]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[10] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[10] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[10] = 250 C - if r4101[10] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[10] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: Allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[20] - hysteresis (p4118[10]). See also: p4102 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1619 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35417 (F, N) TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 11 exceeded Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature (r4105[11]) measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[22]). Note: For sensor type "PTC thermistor" and "Bimetallic NC contact" (p4100[11] = 1, 4), the following applies: - if r4101[11] > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[11] = 250 C - if r4101[11] <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105[11] = -50 C Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Temperature actual value at the time of initiation [0.1 C]. Remedy: Allow the temperature sensor to cool down to below p4102[22] - hysteresis (p4118[11]). See also: p4102 Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE N35800 (F) TM: Group signal Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Terminal Module has detected at least one fault. Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages. Reaction upon F: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A35801 (F, N) TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1620 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A35802 (F, N) TM: Time slice overflow Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred on the Terminal Module. Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35803 (F, N) TM: Memory test Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error has occurred during the memory test on the Terminal Module. Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the Terminal Module is being maintained. - replace the Terminal Module. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F35804 (N, A) TM: CRC Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Terminal Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum. Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained. - replace the Terminal Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A35805 (F, N) TM: EPROM checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): 01: EEPROM access error. 02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM. Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained. - replace the Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1621 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35807 (F, N) TM: Sequence control time monitoring Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Error, timeout, sequence control on the Terminal Module. Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F35820 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Terminal Module involved. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 7 (= 07 hex): A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram. 8 (= 08 hex): No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F35835 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Terminal Module involved. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. 3-1622 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F35836 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. F35837 PTM DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F35845 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module (TM) to the encoder involved. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1623 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F35850 TM: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2) Vector: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error in the Terminal Module (TM) has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): 1: Background time slice is blocked. 2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK. Remedy: - replace the Terminal Module (TM). - if required, upgrade the firmware in the Terminal Module. - contact the Hotline. F35851 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module involved (TM) to the Control Unit. The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved. F35860 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module involved (TM) to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 3-1624 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. 17 (= 11 hex): CRC error and the receive telegram is too early. 18 (= 12 hex): The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 19 (= 13 hex): The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 20 (= 14 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 21 (= 15 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 22 (= 16 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early. 25 (= 19 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F35875 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Supply voltage failed Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage has failed. Fault cause: 9 (= 09 hex): The power supply voltage for the components has failed. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the power supply voltage wiring for the DRIVE-CLiQ component (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the dimensioning of the power supply for the DRIVE-CLiQ component. F35885 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module involved (TM) to the Control Unit. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 26 (= 1A hex): Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early. 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. 98 (= 62 hex): Error at the transition to cyclic operation. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1625 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved. - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F35886 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module involved (TM) to the Control Unit. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. F35887 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Terminal Module) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 96 (= 60 hex): Response received too late during runtime measurement. 97 (= 61 hex): Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F35895 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module involved (TM) to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. 3-1626 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F35896 TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1) Vector: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Terminal Module), specified by the fault value, have changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Component number. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be used. - when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the original cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length). F35899 (N, A) TM: Unknown fault Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A fault has occurred on the Terminal Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Fault number. Note: If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Terminal Module by an older firmware version (r0158). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A35903 (F, N) TM: I2C bus error occurred Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error has occurred while accessing the internal I2C bus of the Terminal Module. Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1627 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A35904 (F, N) TM: EEPROM Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An error has occurred accessing the non-volatile memory on the Terminal Module. Remedy: Replace the Terminal Module. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35905 (F, N) TM: Parameter access Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Control Unit attempted to write an illegal parameter value to the Terminal Module. Remedy: - check whether the firmware version of the Terminal Module (r0158) matches the firmware version of Control Unit (r0018). - if required, replace the Terminal Module. Note: The firmware versions that match each other are in the readme.txt file on the memory card. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35906 (F, N) TM: 24 V power supply missing Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The 24 V power supply for the digital outputs is missing. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): 01: TM17 24 V power supply for DI/DO 0 ... 7 missing. 02: TM17 24 V power supply for DI/DO 8 ... 15 missing. 04: TM15 24 V power supply for DI/DO 0 ... 7 (X520) missing. 08: TM15 24 V power supply for DI/DO 8 ... 15 (X521) missing. 10: TM15 24 V power supply for DI/DO 16 ... 23 (X522) missing. 20: TM41 24 V power supply for DI/DO 0 ... 3 missing. Remedy: Check the terminals for the power supply voltage (L1+, L2+, L3+, M or +24 V_1 for TM41). Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35907 (F, N) TM: Hardware initialization error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The Terminal Module was not successfully initialized. 3-1628 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): 01: TM17 or TM41 - incorrect configuration request. 02: TM17 or TM41 - programming not successful. 04: TM17 or TM41 - invalid time stamp Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35910 (F, N) TM: Module overtemperature Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature in the module has exceeded the highest permissible limit. Remedy: - reduce the ambient temperature. - replace the Terminal Module. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35911 (F, N) TM: Clock synchronous operation sign-of-life missing Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The maximum permissible number of errors in the master sign-of-life (clock synchronous operation) has been exceeded in cyclic operation. When the alarm is output, the module outputs are reset up to the next synchronization. Remedy: - check the physical bus configuration (terminating resistor, shielding, etc.). - check the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (r4201 via p0915). - check whether the master correctly sends the sign-of-life (e.g. set up a trace with r4201.12 ... r4201.15 and trigger signal r4301.9). - check the bus and master for utilization level (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short). Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35920 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 0 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 1630 Ohm (TM150: R > 2170 Ohm), PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 50 Ohm (TM150: R < 180 Ohm), PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1629 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35921 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 1 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 1630 Ohm (TM150: R > 2170 Ohm), PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 50 Ohm (TM150: R < 180 Ohm), PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35922 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 2 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 1630 Ohm (TM150: R > 2170 Ohm), PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 50 Ohm (TM150: R < 180 Ohm), PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35923 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 3 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 1630 Ohm (TM150: R > 2170 Ohm), PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 50 Ohm (TM150: R < 180 Ohm), PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. 3-1630 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35924 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 4 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 2170 Ohm, PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 180 Ohm, PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35925 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 5 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 2170 Ohm, PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 180 Ohm, PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35926 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 6 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 2170 Ohm, PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 180 Ohm, PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1631 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35927 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 7 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 2170 Ohm, PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 180 Ohm, PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35928 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 8 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 2170 Ohm, PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 180 Ohm, PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35929 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 9 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 2170 Ohm, PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 180 Ohm, PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1632 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A35930 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 10 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 2170 Ohm, PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 180 Ohm, PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE A35931 (F, N) TM: Error temperature sensor channel 11 Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected. KTY84: R > 2170 Ohm, PT100: R > 194 Ohm, PT1000: R > 1944 Ohm 2: Measured resistance too low. PTC thermistor: R < 20 Ohm, KTY84: R < 180 Ohm, PT100: R < 60 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly. - replace the sensor. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F35950 TM: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Information about the fault source. Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - If necessary, upgrade the firmware in the Terminal Module to a later version. - contact the Hotline. A35999 (F, N) TM: Unknown alarm Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, TM150, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An alarm has occurred on the Terminal Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1633 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Alarm number. Note: If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the Terminal Module by an older firmware version (r0158). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F36207 (N, A) Hub: Overtemperature component Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The temperature on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the fault threshold. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Actual temperature in 0.1 C resolution. Remedy: - Check ambient temperature at component installation location. - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A36211 (F, N) Hub: Overtemperature alarm component Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The temperature on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the alarm threshold. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Actual temperature in 0.1 C resolution. Remedy: - Check ambient temperature at component installation location. - replace the component involved. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F36214 (N, A) Hub: overvoltage fault 24 V supply Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the fault threshold. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Actual operating voltage in 0.1 C resolution Remedy: - check the supply voltage of the component involved. - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE 3-1634 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F36216 (N, A) Hub: undervoltage fault 24 V supply Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has undershot the fault threshold. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Actual operating voltage in 0.1 C resolution Remedy: - check the supply voltage of the component involved. - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A36217 (N) Hub: undervoltage alarm 24 V supply Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has undershot the alarm threshold. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Actual operating voltage in 0.1 C resolution Remedy: - check the supply voltage of the component involved. - replace the component involved. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE N36800 (F) Hub: Group signal Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has detected at least one fault. Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A36801 (F, N) Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1635 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F36802 (N, A) Hub: Time slice overflow Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE) Vector: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): xx: Time slice number xx Remedy: - reduce the current controller frequency. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - upgrade firmware to later version. - contact the Hotline. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F36804 (N, A) Hub: Checksum error Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading out the program memory on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum. Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained. - replace the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE A36805 (F, N) Hub: EEPROM checksum incorrect Message value: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The internal parameter data on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module is incorrect. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): 01: EEPROM access error. 02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM. Remedy: - check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained. - replace the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE 3-1636 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F36820 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 7 (= 07 hex): A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram. 8 (= 08 hex): No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F36835 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1637 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F36836 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. F36837 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F36845 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) 3-1638 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F36851 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit. The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved. F36860 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. 17 (= 11 hex): CRC error and the receive telegram is too early. 18 (= 12 hex): The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 19 (= 13 hex): The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 20 (= 14 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 21 (= 15 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 22 (= 16 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early. 25 (= 19 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1639 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F36875 HUB DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Supply voltage failed Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage has failed. Fault cause: 9 (= 09 hex): The power supply voltage for the components has failed. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the power supply voltage wiring for the DRIVE-CLiQ component (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the dimensioning of the power supply for the DRIVE-CLiQ component. F36885 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to the Control Unit. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 26 (= 1A hex): Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early. 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. 98 (= 62 hex): Error at the transition to cyclic operation. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the supply voltage of the component involved. - carry out a POWER ON. - replace the component involved. F36886 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. 3-1640 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F36887 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 96 (= 60 hex): Response received too late during runtime measurement. 97 (= 61 hex): Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F36895 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F36896 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties Message value: Component number: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, TM150, TM31, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module), specified by the fault value, have changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Component number. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON. - when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be used. - when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the original cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length). (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1641 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F36899 (N, A) Hub: Unknown fault Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Cause: A fault occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Fault number. Note: If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module with older firmware (r0158). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F36950 Hub: Internal software error Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 (NONE) Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: An internal software error has occurred. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): Information about the fault source. Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Remedy: - if required, upgrade the firmware in the DRIVE-CLiQ hub module to a more recent version. - contact the Hotline. A36999 (F, N) Hub: Unknown alarm Message value: New message: %1 Drive object: B_INF, HUB, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An alarm occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware. This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Alarm number. Note: If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit. Remedy: - replace the firmware on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module with older firmware (r0158). - upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018). Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) Reaction upon N: NONE Acknowl. upon N: NONE F40000 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100. 3-1642 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): First fault that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object. F40001 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): First fault that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object. F40002 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): First fault that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object. F40003 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): First fault that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object. F40004 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): First fault that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object. F40005 Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105. Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): First fault that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1643 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A40100 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): First alarm that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object. A40101 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): First alarm that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object. A40102 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): First alarm that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object. A40103 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): First alarm that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object. A40104 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): First alarm that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object. 3-1644 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A40105 Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): First alarm that has occurred for this drive object. Remedy: Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object. F40799 CX32: Configured transfer end time exceeded Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The configured transfer end time when transferring the cyclic actual values was exceeded. Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components. - contact the Hotline. F40801 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F40820 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 7 (= 07 hex): A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram. 8 (= 08 hex): No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1645 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F40825 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Supply voltage failed Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage has failed. Fault cause: 9 (= 09 hex): The power supply voltage for the components has failed. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the supply voltage wiring of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the dimensioning of the DRIVE-CLiQ component power supply. F40835 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - replace the component involved. See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F40836 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved. Data were not able to be sent. 3-1646 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). F40837 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F40845 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave) F40851 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit. The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 10 (= 0A hex): The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1647 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component involved. F40860 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 1 (= 01 hex): Checksum error (CRC error). 2 (= 02 hex): Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 3 (= 03 hex): Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list. 4 (= 04 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 5 (= 05 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list. 6 (= 06 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match. 9 (= 09 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set. 16 (= 10 hex): The receive telegram is too early. 17 (= 11 hex): CRC error and the receive telegram is too early. 18 (= 12 hex): The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 19 (= 13 hex): The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 20 (= 14 hex): The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 21 (= 15 hex): The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early. 22 (= 16 hex): The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early. 25 (= 19 hex): The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F40875 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Supply voltage failed Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2) Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage has failed. Fault cause: 9 (= 09 hex): The power supply voltage for the components has failed. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause 3-1648 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - check the supply voltage wiring of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the dimensioning of the DRIVE-CLiQ component power supply. F40885 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit. The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism. Fault cause: 26 (= 1A hex): Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early. 33 (= 21 hex): The cyclic telegram has not been received. 34 (= 22 hex): Timeout in the telegram receive list. 64 (= 40 hex): Timeout in the telegram send list. 98 (= 62 hex): Error at the transition to cyclic operation. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved. - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). - replace the component involved. See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F40886 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit. Data were not able to be sent. Fault cause: 65 (= 41 hex): Telegram type does not match send list. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). F40887 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded. Fault cause: 32 (= 20 hex): Error in the telegram header. 35 (= 23 hex): Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 66 (= 42 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. 67 (= 43 hex): Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1649 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 96 (= 60 hex): Response received too late during runtime measurement. 97 (= 61 hex): Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...). - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance - if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904). - replace the component involved. F40895 CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit. Fault cause: 11 (= 0B hex): Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer. Note regarding the message value: The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124): 0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master) F49150 Cooling unit: Fault occurred Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The cooling unit signals a general fault. Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling unit and the input terminal (Terminal Module). - check the external control device for the cooling unit. See also: p0266 (Cooling unit, feedback signals, signal source) F49151 Cooling unit: Conductivity has exceeded the fault threshold Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The conductivity of the cooling liquid has exceeded the selected fault threshold (p0269[2]). See also: p0261 (Cooling unit, starting time 2), p0262 (Cooling unit, fault conductivity delay time), p0266 (Cooling unit, feedback signals, signal source) Remedy: Check the device to de-ionize the cooling liquid. F49152 Cooling unit: ON command feedback signal missing Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The feedback signal of the ON command of the cooling unit is missing. - after the ON command, the feedback signal has not been received within the selected starting time (p0260). - the feedback signal has failed in operation. See also: p0260 (Cooling unit, starting time 1), r0267 (Cooling unit status word) Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling unit and the input terminal (Terminal Module). - check the external control device for the cooling unit. 3-1650 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms F49153 Cooling unit: Liquid flow too low Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The drive converter cooling unit signals that the cooling liquid flow is too low. - after the ON command, the feedback signal has not been received within the selected starting time (p0260). - in operation, the feedback signal has failed for longer than the permitted failure time (p0263). See also: p0260 (Cooling unit, starting time 1), p0263 (Cooling unit fault liquid flow, delay time), r0267 (Cooling unit status word) Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling unit and the input terminal (Terminal Module). - check the external control device for the cooling unit. F49154 (A) Cooling unit: Liquid leak is present Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The liquid leakage monitoring function has responded. Caution: If this fault is re-parameterized as an alarm then using other monitoring functions it must be ensured that when cooling water is lost, the drive is powered down! See also: r0267 (Cooling unit status word) Remedy: - check the cooling system for leaks in the cooling circuit. - check the wiring of the input terminal (Terminal Module) used to monitor leaking fluid. Reaction upon A: NONE Acknowl. upon A: NONE F49155 Cooling unit: Power Stack Adapter, firmware version too old Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: POWER ON Cause: The firmware version in the Power Stack Adapter (PSA) is too old and does not support the liquid cooling. Remedy: Upgrade the firmware. Check EEPROM data. F49156 Cooling unit: Cooling liquid temperature has exceeded the fault threshold Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The cooling liquid intake temperature has exceeded the permanently set fault threshold. Remedy: Check the cooling system and the ambient conditions. A49170 Cooling unit: Alarm has occurred Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The cooling unit signals a general alarm. Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling unit and the input terminal (Terminal Module). - check the external control device for the cooling unit. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1651 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A49171 Cooling unit: Conductivity has exceeded the alarm threshold Message value: - Drive object: B_INF Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The conductivity of the cooling liquid has exceeded the selected alarm threshold (p0269[1]). The threshold cannot be set higher than the fault threshold specified in the equipment description. Remedy: Check the device to de-ionize the cooling liquid. A49171 Cooling unit: Conductivity has exceeded the alarm threshold Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: Conductivity monitoring is set for the cooling liquid (r0267.7, from p0266[7]). See also: p0261 (Cooling unit, starting time 2), p0262 (Cooling unit, fault conductivity delay time), p0266 (Cooling unit, feedback signals, signal source), r0267 (Cooling unit status word) Remedy: Check the device to de-ionize the cooling liquid. A49172 Cooling unit: Conductivity actual value is not valid Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: When monitoring the conductivity of the cooling liquid, there is a fault in the wiring or in the sensor. Remedy: - check the wiring between the cooling unit and the Power Stack Adapter (PSA). - check the function of the sensor to measure the conductivity. A49173 Cooling unit: Cooling liquid temperature has exceeded the alarm threshold Message value: - Drive object: B_INF, VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The cooling liquid intake temperature has exceeded the specified alarm threshold. Remedy: Check the cooling system and the ambient conditions. F49200 Excitation group signal fault Message value: %1 Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY Cause: The excitation sequence control signals a fault. Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal): Bit 0: When powered down or when powering down the excitation, the signal "excitation ready feedback signal" was not received within the monitoring time. Bit 1: After an ON command, the signal "excitation ready feedback signal" was not received within the monitoring time. Bit 2: After the pulses were enabled, the signal "excitation operational feedback signal" was not received within the monitoring time. Bit 3: The "excitation group signal fault" signal is present. Remedy: - check the excitation. - check commands, feedback signals and BICO interconnections. 3-1652 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms A49201 (F) Excitation group signal alarm Message value: - Drive object: VECTOR_G Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: The "excitation group signal alarm" signal is present. Remedy: Check the excitation equipment. Reaction upon F: NONE Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A50001 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 1 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: CBE20: A PROFINET controller attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram. The "Shared Device" function has been activated (p8829 = 2). Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): 10: A CPU sends a PROFIsafe telegram. 11: F CPU sends a PZD telegram. 12: F CPU without an A CPU. 13: F CPU with more PROFIsafe subslots than activated with p9601.3. 14: F CPU with fewer PROFIsafe subslots than activated with p9601.3. 15: PROFIsafe telegram of the F-CPU does not match the setting in p60022. See also: p8829 (CBE20 remote controller number), p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit)) Remedy: CBE20: Check the configuration of the PROFINET controllers as well as the p8829 and p9601.3 setting. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A50002 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 2 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: A specific telegram word (send) is being used twice. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Telegram word used twice See also: p8871 (SINAMICS Link send telegram word PZD) Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: Correct the parameter assignment. See also: p8871 (SINAMICS Link send telegram word PZD) Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A50003 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 3 Message value: Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: A specific telegram word (receive) is being used twice. (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1653 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = info. 1, xxxx = info. 2 Info. 1 (decimal) = Address of sender Info. 2 (decimal) = Receive telegram word See also: p8870 (SINAMICS Link receive telegram word PZD), p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD) Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: Correct the parameter assignment. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A50004 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 4 Message value: Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: Telegram word (receive) and address of sender inconsistent. Both values have to be either equal to zero or not equal to zero. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = info. 1, xxxx = info. 2 Info. 1 (decimal) = Drive object number from p8870, p8872 Info. 2 (decimal) = Index from p8870, p8872 See also: p8870 (SINAMICS Link receive telegram word PZD), p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD) Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: Correct the parameter assignment. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A50005 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 5 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: Sender not found on SINAMICS Link. Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Address of sender that cannot be located See also: p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD) Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: Check the connection to the sender. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A50006 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 6 Message value: Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: The parameter assignment indicates that the sender and the receiver are one and the same. This is not permitted. Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal): yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = info. 1, xxxx = info. 2 Info. 1 (decimal) = Drive object number from p8872 Info. 2 (decimal) = Index from p8872 See also: p8836 (SINAMICS Link address), p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD) 3-1654 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms Remedy: In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link: Correct the parameter assignment. All p8872[index] must be set to a value not equal to p8836. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A50010 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 10 Message value: %1 Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: CBE20: PROFINET Name of Station is invalid. Remedy: CBE20: Correct the name of the station (p8940) and activate (p8945 = 2). See also: p8940 (CBE20 Name of Station) Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY A50020 (F) COMM BOARD: Alarm 20 Message value: - Drive object: All objects Reaction: NONE Acknowledge: NONE Cause: CBE20: The PROFINET "Shared Device" function has been activated (p8829 = 2). However, only the connection to a PROFINET controller is present. See also: p8829 (CBE20 remote controller number) Remedy: CBE20: Check the configuration of the PROFINET controllers, as well as the p8829 setting. Reaction upon F: Infeed: NONE (OFF1, OFF2) Vector: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) Acknowl. upon F: IMMEDIATELY (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A 3-1655 Faults and alarms List of faults and alarms 3-1656 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A A Appendix Contents A.1 ASCII table (excerpt) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A A-1658 A-1657 Appendix ASCII table (excerpt) A.1 ASCII table (excerpt) The following table includes the decimal and hexadecimal notation of selected ASCII characters. Table A-1 ASCII table (excerpt) Character Decimal Hexadecimal Character Decimal Hexadecimal Blank 32 20 G 71 47 * 42 2A H 72 48 + 43 2B I 73 49 - 45 2D J 74 4A 0 48 30 K 75 4B 1 49 31 L 76 4C 2 50 32 M 77 4D 3 51 33 N 78 4E 4 52 34 O 79 4F 5 53 35 P 80 50 6 54 36 Q 81 51 7 55 37 R 82 52 8 56 38 S 83 53 9 57 39 T 84 54 A 65 41 U 85 55 B 66 42 V 86 56 C 67 43 W 87 57 D 68 44 X 88 58 E 69 45 Y 89 59 F 70 46 Z 90 5A A-1658 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A B List of abbreviations Note: The following list of abbreviations includes all abbreviations and their meanings used in the entire SINAMICS family of drives. Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning A... Alarm Alarm AC Alternating Current Alternating current ADC Analog Digital Converter Analog-digital converter AI Analog Input Analog input AIM Active Interface Module Active Interface Module A ALM Active Line Module Active Line Module AO Analog Output Analog output AOP Advanced Operator Panel Advanced Operator Panel APC Advanced Positioning Control Advanced Positioning Control AR Automatic Restart Automatic restart ASC Armature Short-Circuit Armature short-circuit ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASM Asynchronmotor Induction motor BB Betriebsbedingung Operating condition BERO - Contact-free proximity switch Binector input B BI Binector Input BIA Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut fur Arbe- Germany's Institute for Occupational Safety itssicherheit and Health BICO Binector Connector Technology BLM Basic Line Module Basic Line Module BO Binector Output Binector output BOP Basic Operator Panel Basic Operator Panel C Capacitance Capacitance C... - Safety message CAN Controller Area Network Serial bus system Binector connector technology C (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A B-1659 List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning CBC Communication Board CAN Communication Board CAN CD Compact Disk Compact disk CDS Command Data Set Command data set CF Card CompactFlash Card CompactFlash memory card CI Connector Input Connector input CLC Clearance Control Clearance control CNC Computer Numerical Control Computerized numerical control CO Connector Output Connector output CO/BO Connector Output/Binector Output Connector output/binector output COB ID CAN Object Identification CAN object identification COM Common contact of a changeover relay Center contact on a changeover contact COMM Commissioning Commissioning CP Communications Processor Communication processor CPU Central Processing Unit Central processing unit CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Cyclic redundancy check CSM Control Supply Module Control Supply Module CU Control Unit Control Unit CUA Control Unit Adapter Control Unit Adapter CUD Control Unit DC MASTER Control Unit DC MASTER DAC Digital Analog Converter D-A converter DC Direct Current Direct current DCB Drive Control Block Drive Control Block DCBRK DC Brake DC braking DCC Drive Control Chart Drive Control Chart DCN Direct Current Negative Direct current negative DCP Direct Current Positive Direct current positive D DDS Drive Data Set Drive data set DI Digital Input Digital input DI/DO Digital Input/Digital Output Digital input/digital output, bidirectional DMC DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Cabinet DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Cabinet DME DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DO Digital Output Digital output DO Drive Object Drive object DP Decentralized Peripherals Distributed I/Os DPRAM Dual-Port Random Access Memory Memory with dual access DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory Dynamic memory DRIVE-CLiQ DRIVE Component Link with IQ DRIVE Component Link with IQ DSC Dynamic Servo Control Dynamic Servo Control DTC Digital Time Clock Time switch B-1660 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning External Armature Short-Circuit External armature short-circuit EDS Encoder Data Set Encoder data set EGB Elektrostatisch gefahrdete Baugruppen Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Residual current operated circuit breaker ELP Earth Leakage Protection Ground-fault monitoring EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic compatibility EMF Electromagnetic Force Electromagnetic force EMK Elektromagnetische Kraft Electromagnetic force EMV Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EN Europaische Norm European standard EnDat Encoder Data Interface Encoder interface EP Enable Pulses Pulse enable EPOS Einfachpositionierer Basic positioner ES Engineering System Engineering system ESB Ersatzschaltbild Equivalent circuit diagram ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Devices Electrostatic sensitive devices ESR Extended Stop and Retract Extended stop and retract F... Fault Fault FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Frequently asked questions FBL Free Blocks Free function blocks FCC Function Control Chart Function Control Chart FCC Flux Current Control Flux current control FD Function Diagram Function diagram F-DI Fail-safe Digital Input Fail-safe digital input F-DO Fail-safe Digital Output Fail-safe digital output FEM Fremderregter Synchronmotor Separately excited synchronous motor FEPROM Flash EPROM Non-volatile read/write memory FG Function Generator Function generator FI - Fault current E EASC F FOC Fiber-Optic Cable Fiber-optic cable FP Funktionsplan Function diagram FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array Field Programmable Gate Array FW Firmware Firmware GB Gigabyte Gigabyte GC Global Control Global Control Telegram (broadcast telegram) GND Ground Reference potential for all signal and operating voltages, usually defined as 0 V (also referred to as G) G (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A B-1661 List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning GSD Geratestammdatei Generic Station Description: Describes the characteristics of a PROFIBUS slave GSV Gate Supply Voltage Gate supply voltage GUID Globally Unique Identifier Globally unique identifier HF High Frequency High frequency HFD Hochfrequenzdrossel High-frequency reactor H HLG Hochlaufgeber Ramp-function generator HMI Human Machine Interface Human Machine Interface HTL High-Threshold Logic Logic with a high fault threshold HW Hardware Hardware i. V. In Vorbereitung Under development: This feature is not currently available I/O Input/Output Input/output I2C Inter-Integrated Circuit Internal serial data bus IASC Internal Armature Short-Circuit Internal armature short-circuit IBN Inbetriebnahme Commissioning ID Identifier Identification I IE Industrial Ethernet Industrial Ethernet IEC International Electrotechnical Commission International Electrotechnical Commission IF Interface Interface IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Insulated gate bipolar transistor IGCT Integrated Gate-Controlled Thyristor Semiconductor circuit breaker with integrated control electrode IL Impulsloschung Pulse suppression IP Internet Protocol Internet Protocol IPO Interpolator Interpolator IT Isole Terre Non-grounded three-phase power supply IVP Internal Voltage Protection Internal voltage protection Jogging Jogging KDV Kreuzweiser Datenvergleich Crosswise data comparison KHP Know-how protection Know-how protection KIP Kinetische Pufferung Kinetic buffering Kp - Proportional gain KTY - Special temperature sensor J JOG K L L - Formula symbol for inductance LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode LIN Linearmotor Linear motor B-1662 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning LR Lageregler Position controller LSB Least Significant Bit Least significant bit LSC Line-Side Converter Line-side converter LSS Line-Side Switch Line-side switch LU Length Unit Length unit LWL Lichtwellenleiter Fiber-optic cable M - Formula symbol for torque M Masse Reference potential for all signal and operating voltages, usually defined as 0 V (also referred to as GND) M MB Megabyte Megabyte MCC Motion Control Chart Motion Control Chart MDI Manual Data Input Manual data input MDS Motor Data Set Motor data set MLFB Maschinenlesbare Fabrikatebezeichnung Machine-readable product code MMC Man-Machine Communication Man-machine communication MMC Micro Memory Card Micro memory card MSB Most Significant Bit Most significant bit MSC Motor-Side Converter Motor-side converter MSCY_C1 Master Slave Cycle Class 1 Cyclic communication between master (Class 1) and slave MSR Motorstromrichter Motor-side converter MT Messtaster Probe N. C. Not Connected Not connected N... No Report No message or internal message NAMUR Normenarbeitsgemeinschaft fur Mess- und Standardization association for measureRegeltechnik in der chemischen Industrie ment and control in chemical industries NC Normally Closed (contact) NC contact NC Numerical Control Numerical control NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standardization body in the USA (United States of America) NM Nullmarke Zero mark NO Normally Open (contact) NO contact NSR Netzstromrichter Line-side converter NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory Non-volatile read/write memory Open Architecture Open Architecture N O OA OC Operating Condition Operating condition OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer Original equipment manufacturer OLP Optical Link Plug Fiber-optic bus connector (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A B-1663 List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning OMI Option Module Interface Option module interface p... - Adjustable parameter P1 Processor 1 Processor 1 P2 Processor 2 Processor 2 PB PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PcCtrl PC Control Control for master PD PROFIdrive PROFIdrive PDS Power Unit Data Set Power unit data set PE Protective Earth Protective earth (ground) P PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage Protective extra low voltage PEM Permanenterregter Synchronmotor Permanent-magnet synchronous motor PG Programmiergerat Programming device PI Proportional Integral Proportional integral PID Proportional Integral Differential Proportional integral differential PLC Programmable Logic Controller Programmable logic controller PLL Phase-Locked Loop Phase-locked loop PN PROFINET PROFINET PNO PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation PROFIBUS user organization PPI Point-to-Point Interface Point-to-point interface PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Signal White noise PROFIBUS Process Field Bus Serial data bus PS Power Supply Power supply PSA Power Stack Adapter Power Stack Adapter PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient Positive temperature coefficient PTP Point-To-Point Point-to-point PWM Pulse Width Modulation Pulse width modulation PZD Prozessdaten Process data - Display parameter (read-only) Q R r... RAM Random Access Memory Read/write memory RCCB Residual Current Circuit Breaker Residual current operated circuit breaker RCD Residual Current Device Residual current operated circuit breaker RCM Residual Current Monitor Residual current monitor RFG Ramp-Function Generator Ramp-function generator RJ45 Registered Jack 45 Term for an 8-pin socket system for data transmission with shielded or non-shielded multi-wire copper cables RKA Ruckkuhlanlage Cooling unit RO Read Only Read only RPDO Receive Process Data Object Receive process data object B-1664 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning RS232 Recommended Standard 232 Interface standard for cable-connected serial data transmission between a sender and receiver (also known as EIA232) RS485 Recommended Standard 485 Interface standard for a cable-connected differential, parallel, and/or serial bus system (data transmission between a number of senders and receivers, also known as EIA485) RTC Real Time Clock Real-time clock RZA Raumzeigerapproximation Space vector approximation S1 - Continuous operation S3 - Intermittent operation SAM Safe Acceleration Monitor Safe acceleration monitoring SBC Safe Brake Control Safe brake control SBH Sicherer Betriebshalt Safe operating stop SBR Safe Brake Ramp Safe brake ramp monitoring SCA Safe Cam Safe cam S SD Card Secure Digital Card Secure digital memory card SDI Safe Direction Safe motion direction SE Sicherer Software-Endschalter Safe software limit switch SG Sicher reduzierte Geschwindigkeit Safely reduced speed SGA Sicherheitsgerichteter Ausgang Safety-related output SGE Sicherheitsgerichteter Eingang Safety-related input SH Sicherer Halt Safe standstill SI Safety Integrated Safety Integrated SIL Safety Integrity Level Safety Integrity Level SLM Smart Line Module Smart Line Module SLP Safely-Limited Position Safely-limited position SLS Safely-Limited Speed Safely-limited speed SLVC Sensorless Vector Control Vector control without encoder (sensorless) SM Sensor Module Sensor Module SMC Sensor Module Cabinet Sensor Module Cabinet SME Sensor Module External Sensor Module External SMI SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated SN Sicherer Software-Nocken Safe software cam SOS Safe Operating Stop Safe operating stop SP Service Pack Service pack SPC Setpoint Channel Setpoint channel SPI Serial Peripheral Interface Serial interface for connecting peripherals SPS Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung Programmable logic controller (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A B-1665 List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning SS1 Safe Stop 1 Safe stop 1 (monitored for time and ramping up) SS2 Safe Stop 2 Safe stop 2 SSI Synchronous Serial Interface Synchronous serial interface SSM Safe Speed Monitor Safe feedback from speed monitor SSP SINAMICS Support Package SINAMICS support package STO Safe Torque Off Safe torque off STW Steuerwort Control word TB Terminal Board Terminal Board TIA Totally Integrated Automation Totally Integrated Automation T TM Terminal Module Terminal Module TN Terre Neutre Grounded three-phase power supply Tn - Integral time TPDO Transmit Process Data Object Transmit process data object TT Terre Terre Grounded three-phase power supply TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic Transistor-transistor logic Tv - Rate time U UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Uninterruptible power supply USV Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung Uninterruptible power supply UTC Universal Time Coordinated Universal time coordinated VC Vector Control Vector control Vdc - DC link voltage VdcN - Partial DC link voltage, negative V VdcP - Partial DC link voltage, positive VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker Association of German Electrical Engineers VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure Association of German Engineers VPM Voltage Protection Module Voltage Protection Module Vpp Volt peak to peak Volt peak to peak VSM Voltage Sensing Module Voltage Sensing Module WEA Wiedereinschaltautomatik Automatic restart WZM Werkzeugmaschine Machine tool Extensible Markup Language Standard language for Web publishing and document management W X XML B-1666 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning ZK Zwischenkreis DC link ZM Zero Mark Zero mark ZSW Zustandswort Status word Y Z (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A B-1667 List of abbreviations B-1668 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A C List of references Documentation for SINAMICS Catalogs /D 31/ SINAMICS and Motors for Single-axis Drives Order number: /D 11/ E86060-K5511-A101-A5 Edition: 2011 SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Production Machines Order number: /D 21.3/ Edition: 2012 SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units Order number: /PM 21/ E86060-K5531-A101-A1 E86060-K4921-A101-A2 Edition: 2011 SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units Order number: E86060-K5521-A131-A3 Edition: 2011 Related catalogs /ST 70/ SIMATIC Products for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro Automation Ordering information Order number: /NC 61/ E86060-K4670-A101-B3 Edition: 2011 SINUMERIK & SINAMICS, Equipment for Machine Tools Ordering information Order number: E86060-K4461-A101-A3 Edition: 2010 Interactive catalogs /CA 01/ Products for Automation and Drives DVD Order number: E86060-D4001-A500-D1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Edition: 10/2011 C-1669 List of references /Mall/ Industry Mall, Catalog and Ordering System for Automation and Drives www.siemens.com/industrymall Electronic documentation /CD2/ SINAMICS Manual Collection (DOCONCD) The SINAMICS System Order number: 6SL3097-4CA00-0YG1 Edition: 03/2012 On request Edition: 01/2012 On request Edition: 01/2012 On request Edition: 01/2012 User documentation /BA1/ SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Order number: /BA2/ SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions Order number: /BA3/ SINAMICS S150 Operating Instructions Order number: /GH1/ SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Control Units and Additional System Components Order number: /GH2/ 6SL3097-4AE00-0?P2 Edition: 01/2012 On request Edition: 01/2012 SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual AC Drive Order number: C-1670 Edition: 01/2012 SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Cabinet Modules Order number: /GH6/ 6SL3097-4AC00-0?P4 SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Chassis Power Units Order number: /GH5/ Edition: 01/2012 SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Booksize Power Units Order number: /GH3/ 6SL3097-4AH00-0?P2 6SL3097-4AL00-0?P1 Edition: 01/2012 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A List of references /GH7/ SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Chassis Liquid Cooled Power Units Order number: /GS1/ Edition: 01/2012 6SL3097-4AR00-0?P3 Edition: 01/2012 6SL3097-4AQ00-0?P2 Edition: 02/2012 6SL3097-4AN00-0?P1 Edition: 02/2012 6SL3097-4AP00-0?P3 Edition: 01/2012 SINAMICS/SINUMERIK Guidelines for Machine Configuration Order number: /SH1/ 6SL3097-4AB00-0?P2 SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual Order number: /MA1/ Edition: 11/2009 SINAMICS/SIMOTION Programming and Operating Manual for DCC Editor Description Order number: /LH1/ 6SL3097-4AA00-0?P0 SINAMICS/SIMOTION Function Manual for DCC Standard Blocks Order number: /PB1/ Edition: 01/2012 SINAMICS S120 Function Manual for Safety Integrated Order number: /FH4/ 6SL3097-4AF00-0?P2 SINAMICS S120 Function Manual for Drive Functions Order number: /FHS/ Edition: 01/2012 SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual for CANopen Order number: /FH1/ 6SL3097-4AG00-0?P1 SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual Order number: /IH2/ Edition: 01/2012 SINAMICS S120 Getting Started Order number: /IH1/ 6SL3097-4AM00-0?P2 6FC5397-6CP10-0?A1 Edition: 10/2009 SINAMICS S120 and SIMODRIVE 611 Guidelines for Control Cabinet Integration Order number: 6SL3097-0AT00-0?P1 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Edition: 10/2009 C-1671 List of references /PFK7S/ SINAMICS 1FK7 Synchronous Motors Configuration Manual Order number: /PFT6S/ 6SN1197-0AD72-0?P0 Edition: 04/2009 6SN1197-0AD23-0?P0 Edition: 04/2008 6SN1197-0AD70-0?P5 Edition: 07/2011 6SN1197-0AB31-0?P8 Edition: 01/2011 6SN1197-0AD74-0?P1 Edition: 04/2010 EMC Installation Guidelines Configuration Manual Order number: C-1672 Edition: 05/2007 SINAMICS 1PH8 Synchronous/Induction Motors Configuration Manual Order number: /PH1/ 6SN1197-0AC71-0?P0 SINAMICS SIMAG H2 Hollow-Shaft Measuring System Configuration Manual Order number: /PH8S/ Edition: 08/2008 SINAMICS 1FW3 Complete Torque Motors Configuration Manual Order number: /PMH2/ 6SN1197-0AD64-0?P1 SINAMICS 1PM4/1PM6 Hollow-Shaft Motors Configuration Manual Order number: /PKTS/ Edition: 07/2011 SINAMICS 1PH7 Induction Motors (MT) Configuration Manual for Machine Tools Order number: /PPMS/ 6SN1197-0AD13-0?P4 SINAMICS 1PH7 Induction Motors (PM) Configuration Manual for Production Machines Order number: /APH7W/ Edition: 12/2004 SINAMICS 1PH4 Induction Motors Configuration Manual Order number: /APH7P/ 6SN1197-0AD12-0?P0 SINAMICS 1FT7 Synchronous Motors Configuration Manual Order number: /APH4S/ Edition: 10/2011 SINAMICS 1FT6 Synchronous Motors Configuration Manual Order number: /PFT7S/ 6SN1197-0AD16-0?P4 6FC5297-0AD30-0?P3 Edition: 01/2012 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A List of references Documentation for PROFIBUS /P1/ PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1 IEC 61158 Basics, Tips and Tricks for Users Huthig; Manfred Popp, 2nd Edition ISBN 3-7785-2781-9 /P2/ PROFIBUS-DP, Getting Started PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.; Manfred Popp Order number: /P3/ Distributed Layouts using PROFIBUS-DP Architecture and Fundamentals, Configuration and Use of PROFIBUS-DP with SIMATIC S7 SIEMENS; Publicis MCD Verlag; Josef Weigmann, Gerhard Kilian Order number: /P4/ 3.172 Version 4.0 August 2005 Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives Catalog Order number: /PDP/ 6GK1970-5CA20-0BA0 PROFIBUS and PROFINET, PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e. V. Haid-und-Neu-Strae 7, D-76131 Karlsruhe, Germany http://www.profibus.com Order number: /IKPI/ A19100-L531-B714 ISBN 3-89578-074-X Manual for PROFIBUS Networks, SIEMENS Order number: /P5/ 4.071 E86060-K6710-A101-B4 Edition: 2005 PROFIBUS Installation Guidelines Installation Guideline for PROFIBUS FMS/DP Installation and Wiring Recommendation for RS 485 Transmission Order number 2.111 (German) 2.112 (English) (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Version 1.0 C-1673 List of references Documentation for Safety Equipment Note For more information on technical documentation in and around the topic of "Safety Integrated", please follow the link below: http://www.siemens.de/safety The following list contains some of the safety-related documentation available. /LV1/ SIRIUS-SENTRON-SIVACON Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution Catalog Order number: /MRL/ E86060-K1002-A101-A5 Directive 2006/42/EU of the European Parliament and Council Machinery Directive Bundesanzeiger-Verlags GmbH /SISH/ Edition: 2006 Edition: 2006 Safety Integrated System Manual Order number: 6ZB5000-0AA01-0BA1 5th Edition System Manual Appendix to 5th Edition Order number: /SICD/ Safety Integrated CD-ROM Order number: C-1674 6ZB5000-0AB01-0BA0 E20001-F500-P210 Edition: 04/2008 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A D Index Numbers 1020 Explanation of the symbols (Part 1), 2-981 1021 Explanation of the symbols (Part 2), 2-982 1022 Explanation of the symbols (Part 3), 2-983 1030 Handling BICO technology, 2-984 1510 CU320-2 input/output terminals, 2-986 1520 PROFIdrive, 2-987 1530 Internal control/status words, data sets, 2-988 1550 Setpoint channel, 2-989 1680 Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature), 2-990 1690 Vector control, V/f control, 2-991 1700 Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits, 2-992 1710 Vector control, current control, 2-993 1750 Monitoring functions, faults, alarms, 2-994 1773 Basic Infeed, 2-995 1790 Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-996 1840 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-997 1850 Terminal Module 54F (TM54F), 2-998 2120 CU320-2 digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3, DI 16, DI 17), 2-1000 2121 CU320-2 digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7, DI 20, DI 21), 2-1001 2130 CU320-2 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9), 2-1002 2131 CU320-2 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11), 2-1003 2132 CU320-2 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13), 2-1004 2133 CU320-2 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15), 2-1005 2211 CU_LINK data transfer, 2-1007 2410 PROFIBUS (PB) / PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics, 2-1010 2415 Standard telegrams and process data 1, 2-1011 2416 Standard telegrams and process data 2, 2-1012 2419 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 1, 2-1013 2420 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 2, 2-1014 2421 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 3, 2-1015 2422 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 4, 2-1016 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A D-1675 Index 2423 Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data, 2-1017 2425 STW1_BM control word metal industry interconnection, 2-1018 2426 STW2_BM control word metal industry interconnection, 2-1019 2427 E_STW1_BM control word infeed metal industry interconnection, 2-1020 2428 ZSW1_BM status word metal industry interconnection, 2-1021 2429 ZSW2_BM status word metal industry interconnection, 2-1022 2430 E_ZSW1_BM status word infeed metal industry interconnection, 2-1023 2439 PZD receive signals, interconnection, profile-specific, 2-1024 2440 PZD receive signals, interconnection, manufacturer-specific, 2-1025 2441 STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2), 2-1026 2442 STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-1027 2444 STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-1028 2447 E_STW1 control word infeed interconnection, 2-1029 2449 PZD send signals, interconnection, profile-specific, 2-1030 2450 PZD send signals, interconnection, manufacturer-specific, 2-1031 2451 ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2), 2-1032 2452 ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-1033 D-1676 2454 ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-1034 2457 E_ZSW1 status word infeed interconnection, 2-1035 2468 IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-1036 2470 IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-1037 2472 IF1 status words, free interconnection, 2-1038 2481 IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-1039 2483 IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-1040 2485 IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO, 2-1041 2487 IF2 send telegram, free interconnection, 2-1042 2489 IF2 status words, free interconnection, 2-1043 2491 IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection, 2-1044 2493 IF2 send telegram, free interconnection, 2-1045 2495 CU_STW1 control word 1, Control Unit interconnection, 2-1046 2496 CU_ZSW1 status word 1, Control Unit interconnection, 2-1047 2497 A_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-1048 2498 E_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-1049 2499 A_DIGITAL_1 interconnection, 2-1050 2500 E_DIGITAL_1 interconnection, 2-1051 2501 Control word, sequence control, 2-1053 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Index 2503 Status word, sequence control, 2-1054 2505 Control word, setpoint channel, 2-1055 2520 Control word, speed controller, 2-1056 2522 Status word, speed controller, 2-1057 2526 Status word, closed-loop control, 2-1058 2530 Status word, current control, 2-1059 2534 Status word, monitoring functions 1, 2-1060 2536 Status word, monitoring functions 2, 2-1061 2537 Status word, monitoring functions 3, 2-1062 2546 Control word, faults/alarms, 2-1063 2548 Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2, 2-1064 2610 Sequencer, 2-1066 2634 Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation, 2-1067 2701 Basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0), 2-1069 2704 Extended brake control, zero-speed detection (r0108.14 = 1), 2-1070 2707 Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1), 2-1071 2711 Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1), 2-1072 2800 Basic functions, parameter manager, 2-1074 2802 Monitoring and faults/alarms, 2-1075 2804 Status words, 2-1076 2810 STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1), 2-1077 2811 STO (Safe Torque Off), safe pulse suppression, 2-1078 2814 SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), 2-1079 2820 SLS (Safely-Limited Speed), 2-1081 2822 SLP (Safely-Limited Position), 2-1082 2825 SS1, SS2, SOS, internal STOP B, C, D, F, 2-1083 2840 Control word and status word, 2-1084 2846 SI Extended Functions, parameter manager, 2-1085 2847 TM54F parameter manager, 2-1086 2848 TM54F configuration, F-DI/F-DO test, 2-1087 2850 TM54F (F-DI 0 ... F-DI 4), 2-1088 2851 TM54F (F-DI 5 ... F-DI 9), 2-1089 2853 TM54F (F-DO 0 ... FDO 3, DI 20 ... DI 23), 2-1090 2855 TM54F control interface (p9601.2 = 1 & p9601.3 = 0), 2-1091 2856 TM54F Safe State selection, 2-1092 2857 TM54F assignment (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3), 2-1093 2860 SSM (Safe Speed Monitor), 2-1094 2861 SDI (Safe Direction), 2-1095 3010 Fixed speed setpoints, 2-1097 3020 Motorized potentiometer, 2-1098 3030 Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging, 2-1099 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A D-1677 Index 3040 Direction limitation and direction reversal, 2-1100 3050 Skip frequency bands and speed limitations, 2-1101 3060 Basic ramp-function generator, 2-1102 3070 Extended ramp-function generator, 2-1103 3080 Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking, 2-1104 4704 Raw signal sensing, 2-1106 4715 Speed actual value and pole position sensing, motor encoder ASM/SM (encoder 1), 2-1107 6030 Speed setpoint, droop, 2-1109 6031 Pre-control balancing, reference/ acceleration model, 2-1110 6040 Speed controller with/without encoder, 2-1111 6050 Speed controller adaptation (Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation), 2-1112 6060 Torque setpoint, 2-1113 6220 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller, 2-1114 6300 V/f characteristic and voltage boost, 2-1115 6310 Resonance damping and slip compensation, 2-1116 6320 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f), 2-1117 6490 Speed control configuration, 2-1118 6491 Flux control configuration, 2-1119 6630 Upper/lower torque limit, 2-1120 6640 Current/power/torque limits, 2-1121 D-1678 6710 Current setpoint filter, 2-1122 6714 Iq and Id controller, 2-1123 6721 Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-1124 6722 Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-1125 6723 Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-1126 6724 Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-1127 6730 Interface to the Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-1128 6731 Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-1129 6799 Display signals, 2-1130 7010 Friction characteristic, 2-1132 7014 External Armature Short-Circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx), 2-1133 7016 Internal Armature Short-Circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx), 2-1134 7017 DC braking (p0300 = 1xx), 2-1135 7020 Synchronization, 2-1136 7950 Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 2), 2-1138 7951 Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 1), 2-1139 7954 Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1), 2-1140 7958 Closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1), 2-1141 7960 DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1), 2-1142 8010 Speed signals 1, 2-1144 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Index 8011 Speed signals 2, 2-1145 8012 Torque signals, motor locked/stalled, 2-1146 8013 Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1), 2-1147 8014 Thermal monitoring, power unit, 2-1148 8016 Thermal monitoring, motor, 2-1149 8017 Thermal motor models (p0300 = xxx), 2-1150 8060 Fault buffer, 2-1152 8065 Alarm buffer, 2-1153 8070 Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129), 2-1154 8075 Fault/alarm configuration, 2-1155 8134 Measuring sockets, 2-1156 8560 Command Data Sets (CDS), 2-1158 8565 Drive Data Sets (DDS), 2-1159 8570 Encoder Data Sets (EDS), 2-1160 8575 Motor Data Sets (MDS), 2-1161 8580 Power unit Data Sets, PDS, 2-1162 8720 Control word sequence control infeed, 2-1164 8726 Status word sequence control infeed, 2-1165 8732 Sequencer, 2-1166 8734 Missing enable signals, line contactor control, 2-1167 8750 Interface to the Basic Infeed power unit (control signals, actual values), 2-1168 8760 Signals and monitoring functions (p3400 = 0), 2-1169 9100 TB30 digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3), 2-1171 9102 TB30 digital outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 3), 2-1172 9104 TB30 analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1), 2-1173 9106 TB30 analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1), 2-1174 9204 Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2), 2-1176 9206 Receive telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1), 2-1177 9208 Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2), 2-1178 9210 Send telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1), 2-1179 9220 Control word, CANopen, 2-1180 9226 Status word, CANopen, 2-1181 9550 TM31 digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3), 2-1183 9552 TM31 digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7), 2-1184 9556 TM31 digital relay outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 1), 2-1185 9560 TM31 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9), 2-1186 9562 TM31 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11), 2-1187 9566 TM31 analog input 0 (AI 0), 2-1188 9568 TM31 analog input 1 (AI 1), 2-1189 9572 TM31 analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1), 2-1190 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A D-1679 Index 9576 TM31 temperature evaluation (KTY/PTC), 2-1191 9625 TM150 Temperature evaluation structure (channel 0 ... 11), 2-1193 9626 TM150 Temperature evaluation 1x2, 3, 4wire (channel 0 ... 5), 2-1194 9627 TM150 Temperature evaluation 2x2-wire (channel 0 ... 11), 2-1195 9880 VSM analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3), 2-1197 9886 VSM temperature evaluation, 2-1198 9912 BOP20 control word interconnection, 2-1200 A Access level (parameter), 1-19 Acknowledgement Adjustable, 3-1208 Default, 3-1208 IMMEDIATELY, 3-1205 POWER ON, 3-1205 PULSE DISABLE, 3-1205 Active (parameter, C1(x), C2(x), U, T), 1-18 Address PROFIBUS, 2-1010 PROFINET, 2-1010 Technical Support, Preface-7 Adjustable parameter, 1-13 Alarm Cause, 3-1209 Display, 3-1202 Drive object, 3-1208 Explanation of list, 3-1207 Fault location, 3-1208 How to distinguish an alarm from a fault, 3-1202 List of all alarms, 3-1212 Message value, 3-1208 Name, 3-1208 Number, 3-1207 Number range, 3-1212 Remedy, 3-1209 Alarm buffer, 2-1151 Alarm value, 3-1209 Analog inputs Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1170 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 D-1680 Analog outputs Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1170 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 ASCII table, A-1658 Axxxx, 3-1207 B Basic Infeed, 2-1163 Control word, sequence control, 2-1164 Interface (control signals, actual values), 2-1168 Missing enable signals, line contactor control, 2-1167 Sequencer, 2-1166 Signals and monitoring functions, 2-1163, 2-1169 Status word, sequence control, 2-1165 Table of contents, 2-1163 Basic Operator Panel (BOP), 2-1199 Basic/extended brake control, 2-1068 BI, Binector Input, 1-14 BICO technology, 2-984 Binector Input (BI), 1-14 Output (BO), 1-14 Bit array (parameter), 1-27 BO, Binector Output, 1-14 Brake control Basic, 2-1068 Extended, 2-1068 C C1(x) - Device commissioning state, 1-18 C2(x) - Drive commissioning state, 1-18 Calculated (parameter), 1-19 Can be changed (parameter, C1(x), C2(x), U, T), 1-18 Catalogs, C-1669 CDS, Command Data Set, 1-21, 2-1157, 2-1158 CI, Connector Input, 1-14 CO, Connector Output, 1-14 CO/BO, Connector/Binector Output, 1-14 Command data sets, 2-1157 Communication CANopen, 2-1175 Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10), 2-1175 Configuring messages, 2-1151 Connector Input (CI), 1-14 Output (CO), 1-14 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Index Control Basic Infeed, 2-1163 Technology controller, 2-1141 Vector, 2-1108 Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2) Digital inputs, 2-999 Digital inputs/outputs, 2-999 Control words, 2-1008 Internal, 2-1052 Standard telegrams, 2-1008 Converter Binector/connector, 2-1038, 2-1043 Connector-binector, 2-1036, 2-1039, 2-1041, 2-1044 CU_LINK, 2-1006 Cxxxxx, 3-1207 D Data set, 1-21 Command data set, CDS, 1-21 Drive data set, DDS, 1-21 Encoder data set, EDS, 1-21 Motor data set, MDS, 1-21 Power unit data set, PDS, 1-21 Data sets, 2-1157 Command data set, 1-21 Drive data set, 1-21 Encoder data set, 1-21 Motor data set, 1-21 Power unit data set, 1-21 Data type (parameter, signal source), 1-20 DCBRAKE, 3-1204 DDS, Drive Data Set, 1-21, 2-1157, 2-1159 Dependency (parameter), 1-27 Description (parameter), 1-26 Digital inputs Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-999 Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1170 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 Digital inputs/outputs Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-999 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 Digital outputs Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-999 Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1170 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 Direction limitation, 2-1096 Direction reversal, 2-1096 Display Alarms, 3-1202 Faults, 3-1202 Display parameter, 1-13 DO, Drive Object, 1-15 Drive data sets, 2-1157 Drive object, 1-15 DSC (Dynamic Servo Control), 2-1096 E EDS, Encoder Data Set, 1-21, 2-1157, 2-1160 ENCODER, 3-1204 Encoder data sets, 2-1157 Encoder evaluation, 2-1105 Expert list, 1-26 Explanations on function diagrams, 2-980 F Factory setting, 1-25 Fault Acknowledgement, 3-1205, 3-1208 Cause, 3-1209 Display, 3-1202 Drive object, 3-1208 Explanation of list, 3-1207 Fault location, 3-1208 Fault reaction, 3-1203, 3-1208 General information, 3-1202 How to distinguish a fault from an alarm, 3-1202 List of all faults, 3-1212 Message value, 3-1208 Name, 3-1208 Number, 3-1207 Number range, 3-1212 Remedy, 3-1209 Saving when switching off, 3-1206 Fault buffer, 2-1151 Saving when switching off, 3-1206 Structure, 2-1152 Fault value, 3-1209 Fixed speed setpoints, 2-1096 Fixed values, 2-982, 2-1138, 2-1139 Free interconnection via BICO, 2-1008 Free interconnection, status words, 2-1038, 2-1043 Friction characteristic, 2-1132 Function (parameter), 1-26 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A D-1681 Index Function diagrams, Basic Infeed Control word sequence control infeed, 2-1164 Interface to the Basic Infeed power unit (control signals, actual values), 2-1168 Missing enable signals, line contactor control, 2-1167 Sequencer, 2-1166 Signals and monitoring functions (p3400 = 0), 2-1169 Status word sequence control infeed, 2-1165 Function diagrams, Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) Control word BOP20 interconnection, 2-1200 Function diagrams, brake control Basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0), 2-1069 Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1), 2-1071 Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1), 2-1072 Extended brake control, zero-speed detection (r0108.14 = 1), 2-1070 Function diagrams, Communication Board CAN Control word, CANopen, 2-1180 Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2), 2-1176 Receive telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1), 2-1177 Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2), 2-1178 Send telegram, Predefined Connection Set (p8744 = 1), 2-1179 Status word, CANopen, 2-1181 Function diagrams, CU_LINK CU_LINK data transfer, 2-1007 Function diagrams, CU320-2 input/output terminals Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3, DI 16, DI 17), 2-1000 Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7, DI 20, DI21), 2-1001 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11), 2-1003 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13), 2-1004 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15), 2-1005 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9), 2-1002 D-1682 Function diagrams, data sets Command Data Sets (CDS), 2-1158 Drive Data Sets (DDS), 2-1159 Encoder Data Sets (EDS), 2-1160 Motor Data Sets (MDS), 2-1161 Power unit Data Sets, PDS, 2-1162 Function diagrams, diagnostics Alarm buffer, 2-1153 Fault buffer, 2-1152 Fault/alarm configuration, 2-1155 Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129), 2-1154 Measuring sockets, 2-1156 Function diagrams, encoder evaluation Raw signal sensing, 2-1106 Speed actual value and pole position sensing, motor encoder ASM/SM (encoder 1), 2-1107 Function diagrams, explanations Explanation of the symbols (Part 1), 2-981 Explanation of the symbols (Part 2), 2-982 Explanation of the symbols (Part 3), 2-983 Handling BICO technology, 2-984 Function diagrams, internal control/status words Control word, faults/alarms, 2-1063 Control word, sequence control, 2-1053 Control word, setpoint channel, 2-1055 Control word, speed controller, 2-1056 Status word, closed-loop control, 2-1058 Status word, current control, 2-1059 Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2, 2-1064 Status word, monitoring functions 1, 2-1060 Status word, monitoring functions 2, 2-1061 Status word, monitoring functions 3, 2-1062 Status word, sequence control, 2-1054 Status word, speed controller, 2-1057 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Index Function diagrams, overviews Basic Infeed, 2-995 CU320-2 input/output terminals, 2-986 Internal control/status words, data sets, 2-988 Monitoring functions, faults, alarms, 2-994 PROFIdrive, 2-987 Setpoint channel, 2-989 Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-996 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-997 Terminal Module 54F (TM54F), 2-998 Vector control, current control, 2-993 Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature), 2-990 Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits, 2-992 Vector control, V/f control, 2-991 Function diagrams, PROFIdrive A_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-1048 A_DIGITAL_1 interconnection, 2-1050 CU_STW1 control word 1, Control Unit interconnection, 2-1046 CU_ZSW1 status word 1, Control Unit interconnection, 2-1047 E_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-1049 E_DIGITAL_1 interconnection, 2-1051 E_STW1 control word infeed interconnection, 2-1029 E_STW1_BM control word infeed metal industry interconnection, 2-1020 E_ZSW1 status word infeed interconnection, 2-1035 E_ZSW1_BM status word infeed metal industry interconnection, 2-1023 IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-1036, 2-1039 IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-1037, 2-1040 IF1 status words, free interconnection, 2-1038 IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection, 2-1044 IF2 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO, 2-1041 IF2 send telegram, free interconnection, 2-1042, 2-1045 IF2 status words, free interconnection, 2-1043 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 1, 2-1013 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 2, 2-1014 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 3, 2-1015 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data 4, 2-1016 Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data, 2-1017 PROFIBUS (PB) / PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics, 2-1010 PZD receive signals, interconnection, manufacturer-specific, 2-1025 PZD receive signals, interconnection, profile-specific, 2-1024 PZD send signals, interconnection, manufacturer-specific, 2-1031 PZD send signals, interconnection, profile-specific, 2-1030 Standard telegrams and process data 1, 2-1011 Standard telegrams and process data 2, 2-1012 STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-1027 STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2), 2-1026 STW1_BM control word metal industry interconnection, 2-1018 STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-1028 STW2_BM control word metal industry interconnection, 2-1019 ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-1033 ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2), 2-1032 ZSW1_BM status word metal industry interconnection, 2-1021 ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-1034 ZSW2_BM status word metal industry interconnection, 2-1022 Function diagrams, sequence control Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation, 2-1067 Sequencer, 2-1066 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A D-1683 Index Function diagrams, setpoint channel Direction limitation and direction reversal, 2-1100 Fixed speed setpoints, 2-1097 Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging, 2-1099 Motorized potentiometer, 2-1098 Ramp-function generator (basic), 2-1102 Ramp-function generator (extended), 2-1103 Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking, 2-1104 Skip frequency bands and speed limitations, 2-1101 Function diagrams, SI Basic Functions Monitoring and faults/alarms, 2-1075 Parameter manager, 2-1074 SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), 2-1079 Status words, 2-1076 STO (Safe Torque Off), safe pulse suppression, 2-1078 STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1), 2-1077 Function diagrams, SI Extended Functions Control word and status word, 2-1084 Parameter manager, 2-1085 SDI (Safe Direction), 2-1095 SLP (Safely-Limited Position), 2-1082 SLS (Safely-Limited Speed), 2-1081 SS1, SS2, SOS, internal STOP B, C, D, F, 2-1083 SSM (Safe Speed Monitor), 2-1094 TM54F (F-DI 0 ... F-DI 4), 2-1088 TM54F (F-DI 5 ... F-DI 9), 2-1089 TM54F (F-DO 0 ... FDO 3, DI 20 ... DI 23), 2-1090 TM54F assignment (F-DO 0 ... F-DO 3), 2-1093 TM54F configuration, F-DI/F-DO test, 2-1087 TM54F control interface (p9601.2 = 1 & p9601.3 = 0), 2-1091 TM54F parameter manager, 2-1086 TM54F Safe State selection, 2-1092 D-1684 Function diagrams, signals and monitoring functions Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1), 2-1147 Speed signals 1, 2-1144 Speed signals 2, 2-1145 Thermal monitoring, motor, 2-1149 Thermal monitoring, power unit, 2-1148 Thermal motor models (p0300 = xxx), 2-1150 Torque signals, motor locked/stalled, 2-1146 Function diagrams, TB30 Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1), 2-1173 Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1), 2-1174 Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3), 2-1171 Digital outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 3), 2-1172 Function diagrams, technology controller Closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1), 2-1141 DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1), 2-1142 Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 2), 2-1138 Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216 = 1), 2-1139 Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1), 2-1140 Function diagrams, technology functions DC braking (p0300 = 1xx), 2-1135 External Armature Short-Circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx), 2-1133 Friction characteristic, 2-1132 Internal Armature Short-Circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx), 2-1134 Synchronization, 2-1136 Function diagrams, TM150 Temperature evaluation 1x2, 3, 4-wire (channel 0 ... 5), 2-1194 Temperature evaluation 2x2-wire (channel 0 ... 11), 2-1195 Temperature evaluation structure (channel 0 ... 11), 2-1193 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Index Function diagrams, TM31 Analog input 0 (AI 0), 2-1188 Analog input 1 (AI 1), 2-1189 Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1), 2-1190 Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3), 2-1183 Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7), 2-1184 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11), 2-1187 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9), 2-1186 Digital relay outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 1), 2-1185 Temperature evaluation (KTY/PTC), 2-1191 Function diagrams, vector control Current setpoint filter, 2-1122 Current/power/torque limits, 2-1121 Display signals, 2-1130 Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-1125 Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-1127 Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-1126 Flux control configuration, 2-1119 Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-1124 Interface to the Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-1128 Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-1129 Iq and Id controller, 2-1123 Pre-control balancing, reference/ acceleration model, 2-1110 Resonance damping and slip compensation, 2-1116 Speed control configuration, 2-1118 Speed controller adaptation (Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation), 2-1112 Speed controller with/without encoder, 2-1111 Speed setpoint, droop, 2-1109 Torque setpoint, 2-1113 Upper/lower torque limit, 2-1120 V/f characteristic and voltage boost, 2-1115 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller, 2-1114 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (U/f), 2-1117 Function diagrams, VSM Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3), 2-1197 Temperature evaluation, 2-1198 Function module, 1-15 Fxxxx, 3-1207 G General information About parameters, 1-12 on faults and alarms, 3-1202 on function diagrams, 2-980 H Holding brake, 2-1068 Hotline, Preface-7 I IASC, 3-1204 Index Factory setting, 1-26 Parameter, 1-13, 1-26 Input terminals Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-999 Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1170 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 Internal control/status words, 2-1052 J Jogging, 2-1096, 2-1099 L Line contactor control, 2-1067, 2-1163 Linked parameter, 1-13 List Abbreviations, B-1659 ASCII table, A-1658 Complete table of contents, Contents-9 Faults and alarms, 3-1212 List of abbreviations, B-1659 List of references, C-1669 Message ranges, 3-1212 Parameter ranges, 1-28 Parameters for command data sets, 1-951 Parameters for drive data sets, 1-953 Parameters for encoder data sets, 1-961 Parameters for motor data sets, 1-962 Parameters for power unit data sets, 1-965 Parameters for write protection and knowhow protection, 1-967 Parameters, all, 1-31 References, C-1669 Table of contents, function diagrams, 2-973 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A D-1685 Index List of abbreviations, B-1659 List of references, C-1669 Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1), 2-1143 M Main/supplementary setpoint, 2-1096 Manufacturer-specific telegrams, 2-1008 MDS, Motor Data Set, 1-21, 2-1157, 2-1161 Measuring sockets, 2-1151 Message buffer, 2-1151 Message value, 3-1208 Messages, 2-1143 Missing enable signals Basic Infeed, 2-1167 Drive, 2-1067 Monitoring functions, 2-1143 Motor data sets, 2-1157 Motor holding brake, 2-1068 Motorized potentiometer, 2-1096, 2-1140 N Name Alarm, 3-1208 Fault, 3-1208 Parameter, 1-14 Not for motor type, 1-25 Notes Hotline, Preface-7 Product information, Preface-5 Technical Support, Preface-7 Number Alarm, 3-1207 Fault, 3-1207 Parameter, 1-13 Number range Alarms, 3-1212 Faults, 3-1212 Parameter, 1-28 O Object, 1-15 OFF1, 3-1203 OFF1_DELAYED, 3-1203 OFF2, 3-1203 OFF3, 3-1204 Output terminals Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-999 Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1170 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 P P group (parameter), 1-22 D-1686 Parameter Access level, 1-19 Calculated, 1-19 Can be changed, 1-18 Data type, 1-20 Description, 1-26 Dynamic index, 1-21 Expert list, 1-26 Full name, 1-14 Function, 1-26 Index, 1-13, 1-26 Linked parameter, 1-13 List of all parameters, 1-31 List of parameters for command data sets, 1-951 List of parameters for drive data sets, 1-953 List of parameters for encoder data sets, 1-961 List of parameters for motor data sets, 1-962 List of parameters for power unit data sets, 1-965 Name, 1-14 Not for motor type, 1-25 Number, 1-13 Number range, 1-28 P group, 1-22 Safety notices, 1-27 Scaling, 1-25 Short name, 1-14 Unit, 1-22 Unit group, 1-22 Unit selection, 1-22 Values, 1-26 Password for access level 4, 1-19 PDS, Power unit Data Set, 1-21, 2-1157, 2-1162 PID controller (p0108.16 = 1), 2-1137 Power unit data sets, 2-1157 Process data, 2-1008 Product information, Preface-5 PROFIdrive, 2-1008 pxxxx, 1-13 R Ramp-function generator, 2-1096 Reaction to faults, 3-1203 Relay outputs, 2-1182 Resetting faults, 3-1208 rxxxx, 1-13 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Index S U Safety Integrated Basic Functions, 2-1073 Extended functions, 2-1080 Safety notices (parameter), 1-27 Scaling, 1-25 Search tools for manual, Preface-7 Sequence control, 2-1065 Servo control Encoder evaluation, 2-1105 Setpoint channel, 2-1096 Signal path in function diagrams, 2-981 Signals, 2-1143 Skip frequency bands, 2-1096 Speed control Vector, 2-1108 Speed signals, 2-1143 Status words Internal, 2-1052 Standard telegrams, 2-1008 STOP1, 3-1204 STOP2, 3-1204 Support, Preface-7 Support Request, Preface-7 Synchronization, 2-1136 U - Operation state, 1-18 Unit (parameter), 1-22 Usage phases, Preface-6 V T T - Ready for operation state, 1-18 Target group, Preface-6 Technical Support, Preface-7 Technology controller (p0108.16 = 1), 2-1137 Technology functions, 2-1131 Telegrams, 2-1008 Temperature evaluation Terminal Module 150 (TM150), 2-1192 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1170 Terminal Module 150 (TM150), 2-1192 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 Terminals Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-999 Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-1170 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-1182 Thermal monitoring, 2-1143 Torque signals, 2-1143 Triggering when messages are issued (r2129), 2-1151 D-1687 V/f control Vector, 2-1115 Values (parameter), 1-26 Vector control Current setpoint filter, 2-1122 Droop, 2-1109 Encoder evaluation, 2-1105 Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint, 2-1125 Flux control, 2-1119 Iq and Id controller, 2-1123 Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation, 2-1112 Resonance damping and slip compensation, 2-1116 Speed control configuration, 2-1118 Speed controller with/without encoder, 2-1111 Table of contents, 2-1108 Torque setpoint, 2-1113 V/f characteristic, 2-1115 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller, 2-1114, 2-1117 Version List of all parameters, 1-31 List of faults and alarms, 3-1212 List of parameters for command data sets, 1-951 List of parameters for drive data sets, 1-953 List of parameters for encoder data sets, 1-961 List of parameters for motor data sets, 1-962 List of parameters for power unit data sets, 1-965 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) Analog inputs, 2-1196 Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC, 2-1196 Temperature evaluation, 2-1196 W Warning General information, 3-1202 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Index D-1688 (c) Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 01/2012, A5E03263479A Siemens AG Industry Sector Drive Technologies Large Drives Postfach 4743 90025 NUREMBERG GERMANY www.siemens.com/automation Subject to change without prior notice (c) Siemens AG 2012